ANSYS Commands Reference
Uploaded by
Eddie DavisANSYS Commands Reference
Uploaded by
Eddie DavisANSYS Commands
Reference
ANSYS Release 9.0
002114
November 2004
ANSYS, Inc. is a
UL registered
ISO 9001: 2000
Company.
ANSYS Commands Reference
ANSYS Release 9.0
ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
[email protected]
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Copyright and Trademark Information
Copyright 2004 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, DesignSpace, CFX, DesignModeler, DesignXplorer, ANSYS Workbench environment, AI*Environment, CADOE and any and all ANSYS, Inc. product
names referenced on any media, manual or the like, are registered trademarks or trademarks of subsidiaries of ANSYS, Inc. located in the United States or
other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark licensed by ANSYS, Inc. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are property of their respective owners.
ANSYS, Inc. is a UL registered ISO 9001: 2000 Company.
ANSYS Inc. products may contain U.S. Patent No. 6,055,541.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000 and Windows XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Inventor and Mechanical Desktop are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation.
Pro/ENGINEER is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation.
Unigraphics, Solid Edge and Parasolid are registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation (EDS).
ACIS and ACIS Geometric Modeler are registered trademarks of Spatial Technology, Inc.
FLEXlm License Manager is a trademark of Macrovision Corporation.
This ANSYS, Inc. software product and program documentation is ANSYS Confidential Information and are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an ANSYS
software license agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies,
and other provisions. The Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license agreement.
See the ANSYS, Inc. online documentation or the ANSYS, Inc. documentation CD for the complete Legal Notice.
If this is a copy of a document published by and reproduced with the permission of ANSYS, Inc., it might not reflect the organization or physical appearance
of the original. ANSYS, Inc. is not liable for any errors or omissions introduced by the copying process. Such errors are the responsibility of the party
providing the copy.
Table of Contents
1. About This Manual .............................................................................................................................. 11
1.1. The ANSYS Commands Reference ................................................................................................. 11
1.1.1. Conventions Used in this Manual .......................................................................................... 11
1.1.1.1. Product Codes ............................................................................................................. 12
1.1.2. Applicable ANSYS Products .................................................................................................. 12
1.1.3. ANSYS Product Capabilities .................................................................................................. 13
1.1.4. Terminology ........................................................................................................................ 16
1.2. ANSYS Command Characteristics .................................................................................................. 18
1.2.1. Data Input ........................................................................................................................... 18
1.2.2. Free-Format Input ................................................................................................................ 18
1.2.3. Nonrestrictive Data Input ..................................................................................................... 18
1.2.4. Condensed Data Input ......................................................................................................... 19
1.2.5. Units .................................................................................................................................... 19
1.2.6. Defaults ............................................................................................................................... 19
1.2.7. File Names ......................................................................................................................... 110
1.2.8. Star and Slash Commands .................................................................................................. 111
2. Command Groupings .......................................................................................................................... 21
2.1. SESSION Commands ..................................................................................................................... 23
2.2. DATABASE Commands ................................................................................................................. 25
2.3. GRAPHICS Commands .................................................................................................................. 29
2.4. APDL Commands ........................................................................................................................ 213
2.5. PREP7 Commands ...................................................................................................................... 217
2.6. SOLUTION Commands ................................................................................................................ 235
2.7. POST1 Commands ...................................................................................................................... 247
2.8. POST26 Commands .................................................................................................................... 255
2.9. AUX2 Commands ....................................................................................................................... 259
2.10. AUX3 Commands ...................................................................................................................... 259
2.11. AUX12 Commands .................................................................................................................... 259
2.12. AUX15 Commands .................................................................................................................... 260
2.13. RUNSTATS Commands .............................................................................................................. 260
2.14. OPTIMIZATION Commands ....................................................................................................... 261
2.15. VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY Commands ................................................................................... 262
2.16. PROBABILISTIC Design Commands ............................................................................................ 263
2.17. DISPLAY Program Commands ................................................................................................... 264
2.18. REDUCED Order Modeling Commands ...................................................................................... 265
3. Command Dictionary .......................................................................................................................... 31
3.1. Components of a Command Description ....................................................................................... 31
3.1.1. Features Documented in ANSYS Commands ......................................................................... 32
I. Connection Commands .......................................................................................................................... 35
II. A Commands ....................................................................................................................................... 313
III. B Commands ...................................................................................................................................... 391
IV. C Commands .................................................................................................................................... 3137
V. D Commands .................................................................................................................................... 3227
VI. E Commands .................................................................................................................................... 3289
VII. F Commands ................................................................................................................................... 3439
VIII. G Commands .................................................................................................................................. 3565
IX. H Commands ................................................................................................................................... 3597
X. I Commands ...................................................................................................................................... 3625
XI. J Commands .................................................................................................................................... 3649
XII. K Commands ................................................................................................................................... 3651
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Commands Reference
XIII. L Commands .................................................................................................................................. 3679
XIV. M Commands ................................................................................................................................. 3751
XV. N Commands .................................................................................................................................. 3829
XVI. O Commands ................................................................................................................................. 3893
XVII. P Commands ................................................................................................................................. 3923
XVIII. Q Commands .............................................................................................................................. 31099
XIX. R Commands ................................................................................................................................ 31103
XX. S Commands ................................................................................................................................. 31167
XXI. T Commands ................................................................................................................................ 31335
XXII. U Commands ............................................................................................................................... 31421
XXIII. V Commands .............................................................................................................................. 31439
XXIV. W Commands ............................................................................................................................. 31479
XXV. X Commands .............................................................................................................................. 31493
XXVI. Y Commands .............................................................................................................................. 31497
XXVII. Z Commands ............................................................................................................................. 31499
Index ................................................................................................................................................. Index1
List of Tables
2.1. Run Controls ....................................................................................................................................... 23
2.2. Processor Entry ................................................................................................................................... 23
2.3. Files .................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.4. List Controls ....................................................................................................................................... 24
2.5. Set Up ................................................................................................................................................ 25
2.6. Selecting ............................................................................................................................................ 25
2.7. Components ...................................................................................................................................... 26
2.8. Working Plane .................................................................................................................................... 26
2.9. Coordinate System ............................................................................................................................. 26
2.10. Picking ............................................................................................................................................. 27
2.11. Set Up .............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.12. Views .............................................................................................................................................. 210
2.13. Scaling ............................................................................................................................................ 210
2.14. Style ............................................................................................................................................... 210
2.15. Labeling ......................................................................................................................................... 211
2.16. Graphs ............................................................................................................................................ 211
2.17. Annotation ..................................................................................................................................... 211
2.18. Parameter Definition ....................................................................................................................... 213
2.19. Macro Files ..................................................................................................................................... 213
2.20. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................. 214
2.21. Array Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 214
2.22. Process Controls ............................................................................................................................. 214
2.23. Database ........................................................................................................................................ 217
2.24. Element Type .................................................................................................................................. 217
2.25. Real Constants ................................................................................................................................ 217
2.26. Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 218
2.27. Data Tables ..................................................................................................................................... 218
2.28. Primitives ....................................................................................................................................... 219
2.29. Keypoints ....................................................................................................................................... 219
2.30. Hard Points ..................................................................................................................................... 220
2.31. Lines ............................................................................................................................................... 220
2.32. Areas .............................................................................................................................................. 221
vi
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Commands Reference
2.33. Volumes ......................................................................................................................................... 221
2.34. Booleans ......................................................................................................................................... 222
2.35. Meshing ......................................................................................................................................... 223
2.36. Nodes ............................................................................................................................................. 224
2.37. Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 225
2.38. Superelements ............................................................................................................................... 226
2.39. Piping ............................................................................................................................................. 226
2.40. Digitizing ........................................................................................................................................ 227
2.41. Coupled DOF .................................................................................................................................. 227
2.42. Constraint Equations ....................................................................................................................... 227
2.43. Element Reordering ........................................................................................................................ 227
2.44. FLOTRAN Options ........................................................................................................................... 228
2.45. FLOTRAN Property .......................................................................................................................... 228
2.46. FLOTRAN Operating ........................................................................................................................ 228
2.47. FLOTRAN Solver .............................................................................................................................. 228
2.48. FLOTRAN Turbulence ...................................................................................................................... 229
2.49. FLOTRAN Stability ........................................................................................................................... 229
2.50. FLOTRAN Miscellaneous .................................................................................................................. 229
2.51. FLOTRAN Multiple Species .............................................................................................................. 230
2.52. Special Purpose .............................................................................................................................. 230
2.53. Status ............................................................................................................................................. 230
2.54. Explicit Dynamics ............................................................................................................................ 231
2.55. CAD Repair ..................................................................................................................................... 232
2.56. Sections .......................................................................................................................................... 233
2.57. Morphing ....................................................................................................................................... 233
2.58. Trefftz Domain ................................................................................................................................ 234
2.59. Perfectly Matched Layers ................................................................................................................ 234
2.60. Fluid-Solid Interaction ..................................................................................................................... 234
2.61. Analysis Options ............................................................................................................................. 235
2.62. p-Method Options .......................................................................................................................... 236
2.63. Nonlinear Options ........................................................................................................................... 236
2.64. Dynamic Options ............................................................................................................................ 237
2.65. Spectrum Options ........................................................................................................................... 237
2.66. Load Step Options .......................................................................................................................... 238
2.67. Solid Constraints ............................................................................................................................. 239
2.68. Solid Forces .................................................................................................................................... 239
2.69. Solid Surface Loads ......................................................................................................................... 239
2.70. Solid Body Loads ............................................................................................................................. 239
2.71. Inertia ............................................................................................................................................. 240
2.72. Miscellaneous Loads ....................................................................................................................... 240
2.73. Load Step Operations ..................................................................................................................... 241
2.74. Master DOF ..................................................................................................................................... 241
2.75. Gap Conditions ............................................................................................................................... 241
2.76. Rezoning ........................................................................................................................................ 241
2.77. Birth and Death ............................................................................................................................... 242
2.78. FE Constraints ................................................................................................................................. 242
2.79. FE Forces ........................................................................................................................................ 242
2.80. FE Surface Loads ............................................................................................................................. 242
2.81. FE Body Loads ................................................................................................................................. 243
2.82. Status ............................................................................................................................................. 243
2.83. Explicit Dynamics ............................................................................................................................ 244
2.84. FLOTRAN Checkout ......................................................................................................................... 245
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
vii
ANSYS Commands Reference
2.85. Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 245
2.86. Radiosity ......................................................................................................................................... 245
2.87. Fluid-Structure Interaction .............................................................................................................. 245
2.88. ANSYS Multi-field solver Analysis ..................................................................................................... 246
2.89. Setup .............................................................................................................................................. 247
2.90. Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 247
2.91. Results ............................................................................................................................................ 247
2.92. Element Table ................................................................................................................................. 248
2.93. Listing ............................................................................................................................................ 248
2.94. Animation ...................................................................................................................................... 249
2.95. Path Operations .............................................................................................................................. 249
2.96. Surface Operations ......................................................................................................................... 250
2.97. Load Case Calculations .................................................................................................................... 250
2.98. Magnetics Calculations ................................................................................................................... 251
2.99. Fatigue ........................................................................................................................................... 251
2.100. Trace Points .................................................................................................................................. 252
2.101. FLOTRAN Processing ..................................................................................................................... 252
2.102. Special Purpose ............................................................................................................................ 252
2.103. Status ........................................................................................................................................... 253
2.104. Failure Criteria .............................................................................................................................. 253
2.105. Set Up ........................................................................................................................................... 255
2.106. Controls ........................................................................................................................................ 255
2.107. Operations .................................................................................................................................... 255
2.108. Display ......................................................................................................................................... 256
2.109. Listing .......................................................................................................................................... 256
2.110. Special Purpose ............................................................................................................................ 256
2.111. Status ........................................................................................................................................... 257
2.112. Binary Files .................................................................................................................................... 259
2.113. Results Files .................................................................................................................................. 259
2.114. Radiation Substructures ................................................................................................................ 259
2.115. IGES .............................................................................................................................................. 260
2.116. Run Statistics Estimator ................................................................................................................. 260
2.117. Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 261
2.118. Operations .................................................................................................................................... 261
2.119. Files .............................................................................................................................................. 261
2.120. Run ............................................................................................................................................... 262
2.121. Display ......................................................................................................................................... 262
2.122. DesignXplorer VT .......................................................................................................................... 262
2.123. FS Module ..................................................................................................................................... 263
2.124. Deterministic Model ...................................................................................................................... 263
2.125. Probabilistic Preprocessing ........................................................................................................... 263
2.126. Probabilistic Methods ................................................................................................................... 263
2.127. Run Probabilistic Analysis .............................................................................................................. 263
2.128. Probabilistic Postprocessing .......................................................................................................... 264
2.129. Probabilistic Database ................................................................................................................... 264
2.130. Response Surface .......................................................................................................................... 264
2.131. Auxiliary Commands and Information ............................................................................................ 264
2.132. Set Up ........................................................................................................................................... 264
2.133. Driver Options .............................................................................................................................. 265
2.134. Action ........................................................................................................................................... 265
2.135. Set Up ........................................................................................................................................... 265
2.136. Preparation ................................................................................................................................... 265
viii
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Commands Reference
2.137. Generation Pass ............................................................................................................................ 265
2.138. Use Pass ........................................................................................................................................ 266
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ix
Chapter 1: About This Manual
Welcome to the ANSYS Commands Reference. This manual contains a complete dictionary of detailed ANSYS
command descriptions, arranged in alphabetical order for ease of access. It is the definitive reference for correct
command usage, providing comprehensive specifications for every argument of every ANSYS command.
1.1. The ANSYS Commands Reference
The ANSYS Commands Reference is intended to give you information on individual ANSYS commands. Although
this manual also contains lists of commands arranged by functional grouping, this manual is not intended to be
your primary source of procedural information -- look in the appropriate analysis guides for introductory and
procedural guidelines concerning when and where to use commands.
Command references given in the various analysis guides refer to the command descriptions given in Chapter 3,
Command Dictionary of this manual. These descriptions are organized in dictionary form to allow you to look
up the commands conveniently. The alphabetical ordering of commands that begin with a star (*) or a slash (/)
ignores those symbols for ordering purposes.
Once you have reviewed a command in the ANSYS Commands Reference, you should also read the theoretical
description of the command as given in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference, if indicated.
1.1.1. Conventions Used in this Manual
ANSYS manuals use the following conventions to help you identify various types of information:
Type style or text Indicates
BOLD
Uppercase, bold text indicates command names (such as K,DDELE)
or elements (LINK1).
Bold>Bold
Bold text in mixed case indicates a GUI menu path, which is a series
of menu picks used to access a command from the GUI. One or more
angle brackets (>) separate menu items in a menu path. Frequently
in text, an ANSYS command is followed by its GUI equivalent in
parentheses: the *GET command (Utility Menu> Parameters> Get
Scalar Data)
ITALICS
Uppercase italic letters indicate command arguments for numeric
values (such as VALUE, INC, TIME). On some commands, non-numeric
convenience labels (for example, ALL and P) can also be entered for
these arguments.
Italics
Mixed case italic letters indicate command arguments for alphanumeric values (for example, Lab or Fname). The manual also uses italic
text for emphasis.
TYPEWRITER
Typewriter font indicates command input listings and ANSYS output
listings.
Note--
This text introduces note paragraphs. A note contains information
that supplements the main topic being discussed.
Note Any mention of a command or element name in this volume implies a reference to the appropriate
command or element description (in the ANSYS Commands Reference or ANSYS Elements Reference
manuals, respectively) for more detailed information.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Chapter 1: About This Manual
Often it is necessary to refer to another command within a text description. Interpret the string [CMD] as "see
the CMD command." For example, " ... the element coordinate system [ESYS] should be used to ...," means you
can refer to the ESYS command for information related to the element coordinate system. Where several commands are referenced, the form [CMD1, CMD2, etc.] is used. In some cases only the primary command of a related
group may be referenced.
1.1.1.1. Product Codes
Below and to the right of the short description of each command, you will see a list of product codes. These
codes represent the products in the ANSYS Family of Products. The command is valid only for those products
whose symbols are listed. A command that is valid in the entire set of products would have the following list of
products:
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
The codes represent each of the products in the ANSYS suite of products:
Code
Product
Code
Product
MP
ANSYS Multiphysics
EM
ANSYS Emag - Low Frequency
ME
ANSYS Mechanical
EH
ANSYS Emag - High Frequency
ST
ANSYS Structural
FL
ANSYS FLOTRAN
DY
ANSYS LS-DYNA
PP
ANSYS PrepPost
VT
ANSYS DesignXplorer VT
ED
ANSYS ED
PR
ANSYS Professional
DP
ANSYS LS-DYNA PrepPost
Note While DP (ANSYS/LS-DYNA PrepPost) does not appear as a unique product code in the product
listings for commands and elements, it does appear as a separate product in other places in the manuals.
For a list of the features included in each product, see Section 1.1.3: ANSYS Product Capabilities.
If the symbol for a product does not appear, then that command is either not valid or not applicable in the corresponding product, and should not be issued when using that product. For example, if the PR and FL symbols
are not listed, the pertinent command is not valid in the ANSYS Professional or ANSYS FLOTRAN products, but
is valid in each of the remaining ANSYS products.
1.1.2. Applicable ANSYS Products
This manual applies to the following ANSYS products:
ANSYS Multiphysics (includes all structural, thermal, electromagnetics, and computational fluid dynamics
(CFD) capabilities, excludes explicit dynamics)
ANSYS Mechanical (includes all structural and thermal capabilities; excludes electromagnetics, CFD, and explicit dynamics capabilities)
ANSYS Structural (includes all structural linear and nonlinear capabilities)
ANSYS Professional
ANSYS Emag (Low Frequency and High Frequency)
ANSYS FLOTRAN
ANSYS LS-DYNA
ANSYS LS-DYNA PrepPost
ANSYS PrepPost
ANSYS ED
12
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 1.1: The ANSYS Commands Reference
Some command arguments and element KEYOPT settings have defaults in the derived products that are different
from those in ANSYS Multiphysics. These cases are clearly documented under the "Product Restrictions" section
of the affected commands and elements. If you plan to use your derived product input file in ANSYS Multiphysics,
you should explicitly input these settings in the derived product, rather than letting them default; otherwise,
behavior in ANSYS Multiphysics will be different.
Note While ANSYS Connection, Parallel Performance for ANSYS, and ANSYS LSF/Batch are included
as part of the ANSYS release distribution, they are separately-licensed products. Consult your ASD if you
want to install and run any of the separately-licensed products at your site.
1.1.3. ANSYS Product Capabilities
Here is a complete list of engineering capabilities and the various ANSYS products in which these capabilities
can be found.
Capability
Product Availability
Structural Linear
Static
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Transient
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Substructuring
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Structural Nonlinear
Static
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Transient
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Geometric
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Material
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Element
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Structural Contact/Common Boundaries
Surface to Surface
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Node to Surface
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Node to Node
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Pretension (bolts, etc.)
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Spot Weld
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Interface (gaskets)
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Structural Dynamic
Modal
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Spectrum
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Harmonic
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Random Vibration
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Structural Buckling
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
13
Chapter 1: About This Manual
Capability
Product Availability
Linear
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Nonlinear
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Thermal Analysis
Steady State
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> FL <> ED
Transient
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> FL <> ED
Conduction
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> FL <> ED
Convection
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> FL <> ED
Radiation
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> FL <> ED
Phase Change
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
CFD Analysis
Steady State
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Transient
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Incompressible
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Compressible
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Laminar
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Turbulent
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Forced Convection
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Natural Convection
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Conjugate Heat Transfer
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Radiation Heat Transfer
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Multiple Species Transport
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Newtonian Viscosity Model
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Non-Newtonian Viscosity Model
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Rotating Frames of Reference
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Distributed Resistances & Sources
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
2-D Free Surface by VOF Method
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Deformable Meshes (ALE Formulation)
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Electromagnetic - Low Frequency
Electrostatics
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
Magnetostatics
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
LF-Electromagnetics
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
14
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 1.1: The ANSYS Commands Reference
Capability
Product Availability
Current Conduction
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
Circuit Analysis &Coupling
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
Harmonic
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
Transient
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
Electromagnetics - High Frequency
Modal 2D-Waveguide/Cavity
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Modal 3D-Waveguide/Cavity
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Scattering
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Harmonic
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Perfect Electric & Magnetic Conductors
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Impedance Boundaries
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Perfectly Matched Absorber Boundaries
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Near & Far Electromagnetic Field Extension
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Antenna Radiation Patterns
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Radar Cross Section
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
High Frequency Modal
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
High Frequency AC Harmonic
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> <> ED
Field and Coupled-Field Analysis
Acoustics
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Acoustics-Structural
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Electric-Magnetic
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> <> ED
Fluid-Structural
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Fluid-Thermal
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> ED
Electromagnetic-Fluid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Magnetic-Structural
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Electromagnetic-Thermal
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Piezoelectric
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Piezoresistive
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Thermal-Electric
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Thermal-Structural
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Electric-Electromagnetic-Thermal-Structural
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
15
Chapter 1: About This Manual
Capability
Product Availability
Solvers
Iterative
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM EH FL <> ED
Sparse
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
Frontal
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
Explicit
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Preprocessing
Solid Modeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Defeaturing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IGES Geometry Transfer
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Loads and Boundary Conditions (Solid Model,
Tabular, & Function)
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Postprocessing
Contour Displays
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Vector Displays
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Isosurface Displays
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Slicing planes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Particle Tracing
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM EH FL PP ED
Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Results Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Output (VRML, Postscript, TIFF)
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
General Features
HTML Report Generation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Probabilistic Design System (PDS)
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL <> ED
Submodeling
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Optimization
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL <> ED
ANSDPS Parametric Design Language (APDL)
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Parametric Simulation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Variational Technology
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
1.1.4. Terminology
Various terms are used in the command descriptions throughout this manual. These terms are defined as follows:
16
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 1.1: The ANSYS Commands Reference
Analysis - The set of input lines relating to a single problem. An analysis basically consists of three phases: the
Preprocessing Phase, the Solution Phase, and the Postprocessing Phase.
Command - An instruction to supply data, or control, to the program. Commands usually begin with a prescribed
name, followed by alphanumeric data. For example, the command ET, ITYPE, Ename, ... may be input as ET,1,
BEAM3 stating that element type 1 is defined as the BEAM3 element. The uppercase argument name indicates
that a numerical value is typically entered in that field, whereas an upper-lower case data label indicates that an
alphanumeric value is typically entered in that field. Another command, for example, /PREP7, instructs the program
to enter the PREP7 portion of the ANSYS program. All valid ANSYS commands are alphabetically listed in the
Chapter 3, Command Dictionary of this manual. A command not recognized by the ANSYS program is defined
as an "unknown command." Unknown commands are further processed in a macro search [*USE] before being
ignored. Commands may be indented on a line for clarity.
Data - Data may be numeric (real or integer), alphabetic, or alphanumeric (containing letters and numbers).
Nonnumeric data should not contain special characters such as
!
$
{
%
}
^
[
&
"
(
'
)
/
_
<
>
+
~
Numeric data may be input in a variety of ways as described in Section 1.2.1: Data Input. Some commands are
switches of the form Commandname,Key where Key can be 0, NO or OFF to toggle the switch off; or 1, YES or
ON to toggle the switch on.
Degree of Freedom - The degrees of freedom are the primary nodal unknowns determined by the analysis.
They may be displacements, rotations, temperatures, pressures, voltages, etc. A degree of freedom is defined
by a node number and a label, for example, 1 UX, 87 ROTZ, 4 TEMP, etc. Derived results, such as stresses, heat
flows, etc. are computed from the degree of freedom results and are considered secondary unknowns.
Element types with unequal sets of degrees of freedom can be combined in a single structure. For example, a
2-D structure composed of 2-D solid elements (PLANE42) having two degrees of freedom (UX, UY) at each node
and a 2-D beam element (BEAM3) having three degrees of freedom (UX, UY, ROTZ) at each node will have the
latter three degrees of freedom at the common nodes. Nodes which do not have a beam element attached will
have only two degrees of freedom with ROTZ eliminated from the solution printout.
Field - The command name and data items entered on a command are separated into consecutive fields. A field
is assumed to be as "wide" as the number of characters specified. A comma is used to end one field and begin
the next.
Line - A line of input is a physical record read by the computer. Input lines are limited to 640 characters (including
preceding blanks, commas, and any special characters). For file input, a line is represented by one 640 column
data record. For interactive input, a line is the string of characters (640 maximum) entered before the RETURN
key is pressed. Several commands may be put on one line as described in Section 1.2.1: Data Input. Blank lines
are permitted for clarity.
Command name - Only the first four characters of any alphabetic (or alphanumeric) command name are interpreted by the program (except as noted for certain commands, such as /POSTN, /AUXN. *ENDDO, etc.). The remaining characters of the field are ignored. Names shown with fewer than four characters are assumed to have
blanks up through the fourth character as part of the name. For example, this sample ET command may be input
as ,ET1,42 or ET,1,42 or ET,1,42, but not as ETABCD,1,42. Names may not contain special characters (as described
above in Section 1.2.1: Data Input). If the command name is omitted, the name defaults to the name of the previous command, unless it was a slash (/) or star (*) command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
17
Chapter 1: About This Manual
Postprocessing Phase - The set of ANSYS commands causing further processing of the solution output. These
commands consist of commands from the POST1 and POST26 processors. The postprocessing phase may consist
of input for several postprocessing sessions (in series).
Preprocessing Phase - The set of ANSYS commands related to defining the model. The preprocessing phase
consists of input from the PREP7 processor.
Program - The collection of all processors (preprocessing, postprocessing, auxiliary, etc.) is called the ANSYS
program.
Processor - A group of related functions, such as model definition (PREP7) or results examination (POST1).
Run - The collection of all ANSYS commands between the system level commands is called an ANSYS run (or
session). A session may also consist of several analyses in series (separated by a /CLEAR command).
Solution Phase - The set of ANSYS commands which apply boundary conditions to the model created in preprocessing, then performs a solution for that set of boundary conditions. The solution phase may consist of several
solutions in series, such as a static solution, followed by a modal solution, etc.
1.2. ANSYS Command Characteristics
1.2.1. Data Input
The data input for each command is described in this manual. Data should not be input in any undocumented
field, nor should other than documented values be input in any field. Also, the data input described in this
manual should not be used with any earlier version of the ANSYS program. Some features that allow easy input
of data are free-format, nonrestrictive, and condensed input.
1.2.2. Free-Format Input
Free-format capability allows the user to input data in consecutive fields without having to space to each field.
The comma (,) character effectively ends the field so that the next character will be input in the beginning of the
next field. A blank field is skipped by having no data item between the commas. Fields are assumed to be as
wide as the number of characters specified. Input is converted to formatted fields when coded files are written
(of width large enough (16 characters maximum) to minimize loss of accuracy).
Significant figures of output should not be expected to match that of input. Machine precision, rounding of
numbers when writing internal scratch files, etc., tend to lower the precision during the analysis.
1.2.3. Nonrestrictive Data Input
Nonrestrictive data input allows the user to enter any form of data in a field and the ANSYS program will interpret
it as required (integer, real, or alphabetic) or ignore it. Double precision is used throughout the program for all
real numbers. Alphabetic data may be entered in upper or lower case. Lower case is internally converted to upper
case within the program (except for case-sensitive applications, such as in comments, (text preceded by a !) titles,
and file names.)
The following features are available with the nonrestrictive data input.
No distinction is necessary between real and integer data.
Data may be placed anywhere within the field.
Real data input without a decimal point has the decimal point assumed after the right-most digit.
18
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 1.2: ANSYS Command Characteristics
Real number values input to integer data fields will be rounded to the nearest integer. The absolute value
of integer data must fall between zero and 99,999,999.
Exponents may be input in the field after the number. The E (or D) character must be used (upper or lower
case). The sign after the E character is assumed to be the sign associated with the exponent (the absence
of a sign is assumed to be +). The absolute value of real data must either be zero, or between 1.0E-32 and
1.0E+32.
A nonnumeric character in the numeric field (other than a valid convenience label, a parameter name, or
an E or D exponent character) will be ignored and will cause the remainder of the field to be ignored.
When the program can accept an alphanumeric label in a field, it will interpret any alphanumeric input
that matches a valid label as the appropriate label. In other words, the program will not interpret a valid
label as an identically named parameter. If you truly want to use a parameter in place of a valid label, you
can use forced parametric substitution (using % signs). A non-alphanumeric character in a label field is
taken as part of the label. Non-alphanumeric characters (such as CONTROL-characters, TAB-characters,
and other terminal editing characters) should be avoided since they may be used directly instead of being
interpreted by the terminal.
1.2.4. Condensed Data Input
An option for condensing the data input is available with the $ character. This character effectively ends a command and allows the next command to begin on the same line (at the next column). The line must not extend
beyond 640 characters (including all commas and $ signs). If a command cannot be completed on the line, it
should begin on the next line. Blank commands are ignored. The $ character should not be used following any
command that causes a file switch to read additional commands (such as the /INPUT, *USE, OPEXE, CDREAD,
etc. commands, any "unknown command" macro, or any do-loops or if-then-else constructs). The $ character
should not be used between a command and its required following format line (such as *VREAD, *VWRITE,
*MSG, etc.). The $ character should not be used after the ALLSEL command. Using the $ character in interactive
mode may result in unexpected output behavior.
1.2.5. Units
The ANSYS program permits the use of any consistent set of units for length, force, time, temperature, etc. Care
must be taken to ensure that all input data are in the same set of units. The /UNITS command may be used to
note the system of units being used. Temperatures may be absolute or relative in most cases. For problems requiring absolute temperatures, such as those involving creep, swelling, or radiation, temperatures may be input
as Centigrade or Fahrenheit, for convenience, with a zero temperature shift [TOFFST].
1.2.6. Defaults
ANSYS commands are of two types:
specification commands
action commands
Specifications define how an action is to be performed. If a specification is not defined before the action, the
default specification is used. If some specifications are changed after the action, these changed specifications
(and the remaining previous specifications, if any) will be used for the next action. If the same specification is
defined more than once before the action, the last specification is used. Note, since specification settings are
easily forgotten, reset the specification to the desired value before the action command.
To minimize the data input requirements, ANSYS commands operate on a "default" principle. That is, unless
otherwise stated, default specifications are used whenever needed. Two types of default are used:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
19
Chapter 1: About This Manual
the command default
the argument default
The command default is defined as the action taken, or the argument values used, if the entire command is
omitted. For action commands, the command default is "no action" unless otherwise stated. A description of
the command default, when applicable, appears at the end of the Argument section of the command description.
The argument default is the value the argument takes on if the command is included, but the argument on the
command is left blank. The latter case is often used when only some arguments on a command are to be specified
or to restore a default specification after it has been changed. The argument default is documented as part of
each argument's description.
A default specification is invoked whenever no value (or a blank field) is input for the argument. If the argument
accepts a numeric value and no default is specified, a blank field defaults to a zero value. Where a default is
specified, a blank or a zero value will produce the default value (unless otherwise specified). If a zero value is desired
where a zero input produces a nonzero default, input a small number (such as 1E-10) instead of zero. Specifications
are initialized to their default values. Defaults which are not obvious are described, for the most part, with each
command. For cases where defaults are not obvious and are not described, enter the desired value. Such cases
may occur where no default is favored or where a default is purposely not documented (so that it may change
in the future).
1.2.7. File Names
Various files are used during an ANSYS session for reading, writing, and storing data. ANSYS-generated files are
identified by a name, a system-dependent separator, and an extension (as in the form fname.ext).
The name is obtained from the Jobname (250 characters maximum, including the directory name) as defined
with the ANSYS execution command.
Note Windows cannot create directory names longer than 245 characters.
Unless otherwise specified (see the ANSYS Operations Guide), the Jobname defaults to a system dependent name
(usually FILE). The extension is a 2 to 4-character identifier (see Files that ANSYS Writes in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). For example, the ANSYS error message file (which has the identifier ERR) with a Jobname of FILE
and separator (.) would be generated as FILE.ERR. If the Jobname is JOB1, the file would be named JOB1.ERR.
ANSYS documentation generically refers to ANSYS files as Jobname.identifier, such as Jobname.ERR for the
error message file. Note, the extension may be shown upper case in the documentation but may actually be
lower case on some operating systems (such as UNIX). Unless otherwise indicated, ANSYS files are written in the
current working directory.
Some commands (such as /INPUT and /OUTPUT) allow you to specify a file name other than Jobname, an extension other than the default extension. Such user-written files use a naming convention similar to the ANSYSgenerated files except that the name (248 characters maximum, including the directory name) is user defined,
and the extension (8 characters maximum) is optional. The file name can include the directory path, but it is not
necessary if you want to use the default directory. File names containing directory paths must reference existing
directories--the program cannot create a directory. File and directory names may contain blank spaces, but
strings containing blank spaces must be enclosed in single quotes.
A system dependent separator is automatically written between file name and extension (if the extension exists)
input on commands.
File name fields are usually restricted to 248 characters on ANSYS commands, including the directory name. If
you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters
for the file name.
110
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 1.2: ANSYS Command Characteristics
To help ensure portability of input files across systems, the ANSYS program has certain requirements for file
names. File names specified by the user should be valid both per ANSYS criteria (ASCII alpha-numeric), and per
the operating system. Avoid using special characters (+,-,*,/,$,!, etc.) in file names unless meaningful, and begin
file names with a letter. Some system-dependent special characters (such as ~) are not interpreted the same as
they are at the operating system level when used in pathnames. Parameter substitution may be forced within
the name, extension, or directory fields by enclosing the parameter within percent (%) signs. For example, if I=5,
the name TEST%I% becomes TEST5. Only one forced substitution may be made per field.
1.2.8. Star and Slash Commands
The slash (/) and star ( *) commands are usually used for supplying general control instructions to the ANSYS
program. The slash commands are used, for example, for entering a processor (/PREP7, /POST1, etc.). Printout
controls, display controls, and file controls are available within the slash command set. Repeat, looping and
macro controls are available within the star command set. Many star and slash commands are global and apply
to all processors. For example, the /TITLE command may be used to change the title in any processor (PREP7,
POST1, etc.). The star commands can be input anywhere. Most slash commands can be input anywhere, however,
some can only be input at a Begin level. The latter commands are specifically noted in the command explanation
section. Graphics displays are controlled with the graphics display slash commands. The graphics display slash
commands can be input anywhere.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
111
112
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
This chapter contains tables of related commands. Each command in Chapter 3, Command Dictionary references
one or more of these tables, which can then be consulted to see what other related commands are available. A
brief description of each command is given.
The tables in this chapter provide helpful groupings of related commands. For example, if you want to define
material types in the PREP7 general preprocessor, you can turn to Section 2.5: PREP7 Commands and see what
commands are available under the heading "Table 2.26: Materials."
If you are viewing this manual in the ANSYS Help System, you can just click on the command name to display
its description in Chapter 3, Command Dictionary.
You should not rely on this chapter as a source of procedural information but first look to the appropriate analysis guide to learn which commands are available for a particular type of analysis or operation. These guides
contain guidelines on which commands to use for each step of the analysis.
The command summary tables are as follows:
Command Grouping Table Title
Section 2.1: SESSION Commands
Section 2.2: DATABASE Commands
Section 2.3: GRAPHICS Commands
Section 2.4: APDL Commands
Section 2.5: PREP7 Commands
Section 2.6: SOLUTION Commands
Section 2.7: POST1 Commands
Section 2.8: POST26 Commands
Section 2.9: AUX2 Commands
Section 2.10: AUX3 Commands
Section 2.11: AUX12 Commands
Section 2.12: AUX15 Commands
Section 2.13: RUNSTATS Commands
Section 2.14: OPTIMIZATION Commands
Section 2.15: VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY Commands
Section 2.16: PROBABILISTIC Design Commands
Section 2.17: DISPLAY Program Commands
Section 2.18: REDUCED Order Modeling Commands
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
22
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.1. SESSION Commands
These commands provide general control to the ANSYS session. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.1 Run Controls
These SESSION commands control the overall characteristics of the ANSYS session, including the jobname, Graphical User Interface behavior, and file switching.
/BATCH
Sets the program mode to "batch."
/CONFIG
Assigns values to ANSYS configuration parameters.
/CWD
Changes the current working directory.
/EOF
Exits the file being read.
/EXIT
Stops the run and returns control to the system.
/FILNAME
Changes the jobname for the analysis.
HELP
Displays help information on ANSYS commands and element types.
/INPUT
Switches the input file for the commands that follow.
KEYW
Sets a keyword used by the GUI for context filtering (GUI).
MEMM
Allows the current session to keep allocated memory
/MENU
Activates the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
/MSTART
Controls the initial GUI components.
/NERR
Limits the number of warning and error messages displayed.
/OUTPUT
Redirects text output to a file or to the screen.
/STATUS
Lists the status of items for the run.
/SYP
Passes a command string and arguments to the operating system.
/SYS
Passes a command string to the operating system.
/UI
Activates specified GUI dialog boxes.
/UIS
Controls the GUI behavior.
Table 2.2 Processor Entry
These SESSION commands are used to enter and exit the various processors in the program.
/AUX2
Enters the binary file dumping processor.
/AUX3
Enters the results file editing processor.
/AUX12
Enters the radiation matrix generation processor.
/AUX15
Enters the IGES file transfer processor.
FINISH
Exits normally from a processor.
/OPT
Enters the design optimizer.
/POST1
Enters the database results postprocessor.
/POST26
Enters the time-history results postprocessor.
/PREP7
Enters the model creation preprocessor.
/QUIT
Exits a processor.
/RUNST
Enters the run statistics processor.
/SOLU
Enters the solution processor.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
23
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.3 Files
These SESSION commands are for file operations, such as deleting, copying, and listing.
/ASSIGN
Reassigns a file name to an ANSYS file identifier.
/CLOG
Copies the session log file to a named file.
/COPY
Copies a file.
/DELETE
Deletes a file.
/FDELE
Deletes a binary file after it is used.
/FTYPE
Assigns an external or internal type to a binary file.
LGWRITE
Writes the database command log to a file.
*LIST
Displays the contents of an external, coded file.
/RENAME
Renames a file.
Table 2.4 List Controls
These SESSION commands are used to control listings and printed program output.
C***
Places a comment in the output.
/COM
Places a comment in the output.
/GO
Reactivates suppressed printout.
/GOLIST
Reactivates the suppressed data input listing.
/GOPR
Reactivates suppressed printout.
/NOLIST
Suppresses the data input listing.
/NOPR
Suppresses the expanded interpreted input data listing.
24
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.2. DATABASE Commands
These commands are used to operate on the database in a global sense. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.5 Set Up
These DATABASE commands can be used to initialize the database, save it to a file, or annotate it with
titles and systems of units.
/CLEAR
Clears the database.
RESUME
Resumes the database from the database file.
SAVE
Saves all current database information.
/SMBC
Controls the display of solid model boundary condition symbols and labels.
STAT
Displays the status of database settings.
/STITLE
Defines subtitles.
/TITLE
Defines a main title.
UNDO
Allows the user to modify or save commands issued since the last RESUME or
SAVE command.
/UNITS
Annotates the database with the system of units used.
Table 2.6 Selecting
These DATABASE commands are used to select subsets of database entities for further operations.
ALLSEL
Selects all entities with a single command.
ASLL
Selects those areas containing the selected lines.
ASEL
Selects a subset of areas.
ASLV
Selects those areas contained in the selected volumes.
DOFSEL
Selects a DOF label set for reference by other commands.
ESEL
Selects a subset of elements.
ESLA
Selects those elements associated with the selected areas.
ESLL
Selects those elements associated with the selected lines.
ESLN
Selects those elements attached to the selected nodes.
ESLV
Selects elements associated with the selected volumes.
KSEL
Selects a subset of keypoints or hard points.
KSLL
Selects those keypoints contained in the selected lines.
KSLN
Selects those keypoints associated with the selected nodes.
LSEL
Selects a subset of lines.
LSLA
Selects those lines contained in the selected areas.
LSLK
Selects those lines containing the selected keypoints.
NSEL
Selects a subset of nodes.
NSLA
Selects those nodes associated with the selected areas.
NSLE
Selects those nodes attached to the selected elements.
NSLK
Selects those nodes associated with the selected keypoints.
NSLL
Selects those nodes associated with the selected lines.
NSLV
Selects those nodes associated with the selected volumes.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
25
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These DATABASE commands are used to select subsets of database entities for further operations.
PARTSEL
Selects a subset of parts in an explicit dynamic analysis.
VSEL
Selects a subset of volumes.
VSLA
Selects those volumes containing the selected areas.
Table 2.7 Components
These DATABASE commands allow selected subsets of entities to be named as components for easy
selection later on.
CM
Groups geometry items into a component.
CMDELE
Deletes a component or assembly definition.
CMEDIT
Edits an existing component or assembly.
CMGRP
Groups components and assemblies into an assembly.
CMLIST
Lists the entities contained in a component or assembly.
CMMOD
CMPLOT
Plots the entities contained in a component or assembly.
CMSEL
Selects a subset of components and assemblies.
Table 2.8 Working Plane
These DATABASE commands turn on, move, rotate, and modify the working plane, which is used for
picking operations.
KWPAVE
Moves the working plane origin to the average location of keypoints.
KWPLAN
Defines the working plane using three keypoints.
LWPLAN
Defines the working plane normal to a location on a line.
NWPAVE
Moves the working plane origin to the average location of nodes.
NWPLAN
Defines the working plane using three nodes.
WPAVE
Moves the working plane origin to the average of specified points.
WPCSYS
Defines the working plane location based on a coordinate system.
WPLANE
Defines a working plane to assist in picking operations.
WPOFFS
Offsets the working plane.
WPROTA
Rotates the working plane.
WPSTYL
Controls the display and style of the working plane.
Table 2.9 Coordinate System
These DATABASE commands define and manipulate coordinate systems.
CLOCAL
Defines a local coordinate system relative to the active coordinate system.
CS
Defines a local coordinate system by three node locations.
CSCIR
Locates the singularity for non-Cartesian local coordinate systems.
CSDELE
Deletes local coordinate systems.
CSKP
Defines a local coordinate system by three keypoint locations.
CSLIST
Lists coordinate systems.
CSWPLA
Defines a local coordinate system at the origin of the working plane.
CSYS
Activates a previously defined coordinate system.
26
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These DATABASE commands define and manipulate coordinate systems.
LOCAL
Defines a local coordinate system by a location and orientation.
Table 2.10 Picking
These DATABASE commands are generated by the GUI when picking operations are performed.
FITEM
Identifies items chosen by a picking operation (GUI).
FLST
Specifies data required for a picking operation (GUI).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
27
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
28
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.3. GRAPHICS Commands
These commands are used to control the graphics of the ANSYS program. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.11 Set Up
These GRAPHICS commands are used for general graphics control, such as window set up, color settings,
specifications saving, etc.
/CMAP
Changes an existing or creates a new color mapping table.
/COLOR
Specifies the color mapping for various items.
/DEVICE
Controls graphics device options.
DSYS
Activates a display coordinate system for geometry listings and plots.
/DV3D
Sets 3-D device option modes.
/ERASE
Specifies that the screen is to be erased before each display.
ERASE
Explicitly erases the current display.
/GCMD
Controls the type of element or graph display used for the GPLOT command.
/GCOLUMN
Allows the user to apply a label to a specified curve.
/GFILE
Specifies the pixel resolution on Z-buffered graphics files.
GPLOT
Controls general plotting.
/GRAPHICS
Defines type of graphics display to be used for element plots.
/GRESUME
Sets graphics settings to the settings on a file.
/GSAVE
Saves graphics settings to a file for later use.
/GTYPE
Controls the entities that the GPLOT command displays.
HPGL
Specifies various HP options.
/IMAGE
Allows graphics data to be captured and saved.
IMMED
Allows immediate display of a model as it is generated.
JPEG
Provides JPEG File Export for ANSYS Displays.
/MREP
Enables you to reissue the graphics command macro "name" during a replot
or zoom operation.
/NOERASE
Prevents the screen erase between displays.
/PCOPY
Generates hard copies automatically (device dependent).
PNGR
Sets file options for PNGR graphics export for ANSYS displays.
PSCR
Specifies various PostScript options.
/PSTATUS
Displays the global or window display specifications.
/REPLOT
Automatically reissues the last display command for convenience.
/RESET
Resets display specifications to their initial defaults.
/SEG
Allows graphics data to be stored in the local terminal memory.
/SHOW
Specifies the device and other parameters for graphics displays.
TIFF
Provides TIFF file Export for ANSYS Displays.
/WINDOW
Defines the window size on the screen.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
29
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.12 Views
These GRAPHICS commands are used to control the view of the model.
/ANGLE
Rotates the display about an axis.
/AUTO
Resets the focus and distance specifications to "automatically calculated."
/DIST
Specifies the viewing distance for magnifications and perspective.
/FOCUS
Specifies the focus point (center of the window).
/USER
Conveniently resets /FOCUS and /DIST to USER.
/VCONE
Defines the view cone angle for perspective displays.
/VIEW
Defines the viewing direction for the display.
/VUP
Specifies the global Cartesian coordinate system reference orientation.
/XFRM
Controls the centroid or the axis of dynamic rotation.
/ZOOM
Zooms a region of a display window.
Table 2.13 Scaling
These GRAPHICS commands are used to scale various parts of the display.
/DSCALE
Sets the displacement multiplier for displacement displays.
/ICLWID
Scales the line width of circuit builder icons.
/ICSCALE
Scales the icon size for elements supported in the circuit builder.
/RATIO
Distorts the object geometry.
/SHRINK
Shrinks elements, lines, areas, and volumes for display clarity.
/SSCALE
Sets the contour multiplier for topographic displays.
/TXTRE
Applies textured appearance to selected items.
/VSCALE
Scales the length of displayed vectors.
Table 2.14 Style
These GRAPHICS commands are used to change the way a model is displayed.
/CPLANE
Specifies the cutting plane for section and capped displays.
/CTYPE
Specifies the type of contour display.
/EDGE
Displays only the "edges" of an object.
/ESHAPE
Displays elements with shapes determined from the real constants.
/FACET
Specifies the facet representation used to form solid model displays.
/GLINE
Specifies the element outline style.
/GMARKER
Specifies the curve marking style.
GMFACE
Specifies the facet representation used to form solid models.
/LIGHT
Specifies the light direction for the display window.
/NORMAL
Allows displaying area elements by top or bottom faces.
/SHADE
Defines the type of surface shading used with Z-buffering.
/TRLCY
Specifies the level of translucency.
/TYPE
Defines the type of display.
210
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Table 2.15 Labeling
These GRAPHICS commands are used to add helpful labels and symbols to displays.
/CFORMAT
Controls the graphical display of alpha character strings for parameters, components, assemblies, and tables.
/CLABEL
Specifies contour labeling.
/CONTOUR
Specifies the uniform contour values on stress displays.
/CVAL
Specifies nonuniform contour values on stress displays.
/GFORMAT
Specifies the format for the graphical display of numbers.
/HBC
Determines how boundary conditions are displayed in a display window.
/NUMBER
Specifies whether numbers, colors, or both are used for displays.
/PBC
Shows boundary condition symbols and values on displays.
/PBF
Shows body force loads as contours on displays.
PGSELE
Select a subset of elements for display with the PGR viewer.
/PICE
Shows initial conditions on elements as contours on displays.
/PLOPTS
Controls graphics options on subsequent displays.
/PNUM
Controls entity numbering/coloring on plots.
/PSF
Shows surface load symbols on model displays.
/PSYMB
Shows various symbols on displays.
/TRIAD
Shows the global XYZ coordinate triad on displays.
/UDOC
Determines position and content for the multi-legend options.
Table 2.16 Graphs
These GRAPHICS commands are used to control the way line graphs are displayed.
/AXLAB
Labels the X and Y axes on graph displays.
/GRID
Selects the type of grid on graph displays.
/GROPT
Sets various line graph display options.
/GRTYP
Selects single or multiple Y-axes graph displays.
/GTHK
Sets line thicknesses for graph lines.
/XRANGE
Specifies a linear abscissa (X) scale range.
/YRANGE
Specifies a linear ordinate (Y) scale range.
Table 2.17 Annotation
These GRAPHICS commands are used to annotate a display with notes and symbols.
/AN3D
Specifies 3-D annotation functions
/ANNOT
Activates graphics for annotating displays (GUI).
/ANUM
Specifies the annotation number, type, and hot spot (GUI).
/LARC
Creates annotation arcs (GUI).
/LINE
Creates annotation lines (GUI).
/LSPEC
Specifies annotation line attributes (GUI).
/LSYMBOL
Creates annotation symbols (GUI).
/PCIRCLE
Creates an annotation circle (GUI).
/PMORE
Creates an annotation polygon (GUI).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
211
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These GRAPHICS commands are used to annotate a display with notes and symbols.
/POLYGON
Creates annotation polygons (GUI).
/PSPEC
Creates annotation polygon attributes (GUI).
/PWEDGE
Creates an annotation wedge (GUI).
/TLABEL
Creates annotation text (GUI).
/TSPEC
Creates annotation text attributes (GUI).
212
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.4. APDL Commands
These commands make up the ANSYS Parametric Design Language (APDL). The commands are grouped by
functionality.
Table 2.18 Parameter Definition
These APDL commands are used to define parameters and their values.
*AFUN
Specifies units for angular functions in parameter expressions.
*ASK
Prompts the user to input a parameter value.
*DEL
Deletes a parameter (GUI).
*DIM
Defines an array parameter and its dimensions.
*GET
Retrieves a value and stores it as a user-named parameter.
/INQUIRE
Returns system information to a parameter.
PARRES
Reads parameters from a file.
PARSAV
Writes parameters to a file.
*SET
Assigns values to user-named parameters.
*STATUS
Lists the current parameters and abbreviations.
*TAXIS
Defines table index numbers.
*TREAD
Reads data from an external file into a table array parameter.
*VFILL
Fills an array parameter.
*VGET
Retrieves values into an array parameter.
*VREAD
Reads data and produces an array parameter vector or matrix.
Table 2.19 Macro Files
These APDL commands are used to build and execute command macros.
*CFCLOS
Closes the "command" file.
*CFOPEN
Opens a "command" file.
*CFWRITE
Writes an ANSYS command (or similar string) to a "command" file.
*CREATE
Opens (creates) a macro file.
/DFLAB
Changes DOF labels for user custom elements.
*END
Closes a macro file.
Mails file to specifed address.
*MSG
Writes an output message via the ANSYS message subroutine.
/PMACRO
Specifies that macro contents be written to the session log file.
/PSEARCH
Specifies a directory to be searched for "unknown command" macro files.
/TEE
Writes a list of commands to a specified file at the same time that the commands
are being executed.
*ULIB
Identifies a macro library file.
*USE
Executes a macro file.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
213
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.20 Abbreviations
These APDL commands can be used to define abbreviations for longer commands, and to create userdefined commands.
*ABBR
Defines an abbreviation.
ABBRES
Reads abbreviations from a coded file.
ABBSAV
Writes the current abbreviation set to a coded file.
/UCMD
Assigns a user-defined command name.
Table 2.21 Array Parameters
These APDL commands are used to operate on parameter arrays (i.e., vectors and matrices).
/DIRECTORY
Put the file names in the current directory into a string parameter array.
*MFOURI
Calculates the coefficients for, or evaluates, a Fourier series.
*MFUN
Copies or transposes an array parameter matrix.
*MOPER
Performs matrix operations on array parameter matrices.
*MWRITE
Writes a matrix to a file in a formatted sequence.
*SREAD
Reads a file into a string array parameter.
*TOPER
Operates on table parameters.
*VABS
Applies the absolute value function to array parameters.
*VCOL
Specifies the number of columns in matrix operations.
*VCUM
Allows array parameter results to add to existing results.
*VEDIT
Allows numerical array parameters to be graphically edited.
*VFACT
Applies a scale factor to array parameters.
*VFUN
Performs a function on a single array parameter.
*VITRP
Forms an array parameter by interpolation of a table.
*VLEN
Specifies the number of rows to be used in array parameter operations.
*VMASK
Specifies an array parameter as a masking vector.
*VOPER
Operates on two array parameters.
*VPLOT
Graphs columns (vectors) of array parameters.
*VPUT
Restores array parameter values into the ANSYS database.
*VSCFUN
Determines properties of an array parameter.
*VSTAT
Lists the current specifications for the array parameters.
*VWRITE
Writes data to a file in a formatted sequence.
Table 2.22 Process Controls
These APDL commands can be used to control the order in which other commands are processed.
*CYCLE
Bypasses commands within a do-loop.
*DO
Defines the beginning of a do-loop.
*ELSE
Separates the final if-then-else block.
*ELSEIF
Separates an intermediate if-then-else block.
*ENDDO
Ends a do-loop and starts the looping action.
*ENDIF
Ends an if-then-else.
*EXIT
Exits a do-loop.
214
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These APDL commands can be used to control the order in which other commands are processed.
*GO
Causes a specified line on the input file to be read next.
*IF
Conditionally causes commands to be read.
*REPEAT
Repeats the previous command.
*RETURN
Returns input stream to a higher level.
/WAIT
Causes a delay before the reading of the next command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
215
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
216
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
These commands are used to create and set up the model. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.23 Database
These PREP7 commands are used to read model data into the database, list out the database, and
control the numbering of entities in the database.
AFLIST
Lists the current data in the database.
CDREAD
Reads a file of solid model and database information into the database.
CDWRITE
Writes geometry and load database items to a file.
CDOPT
Specifies format to be used for archiving geometry.
CECHECK
Check constraint equations and couplings for rigid body motions.
CHECK
Checks current database items for completeness.
CNCHECK
Provides and/or adjusts the initial status of contact pairs.
FC
Provides failure criteria information and activates a data table to input temperature-dependent stress and strain limits.
FCCHECK
Checks both the strain and stress input criteria for all materials.
FCDELE
Deletes previously defined failure criterion data for the given material.
FCLIST
To list what the failure criteria is that you have input.
IGESOUT
Writes solid model data to a file in IGES Version 5.1 format.
NOOFFSET
Prevents the CDREAD command from offsetting specified data items.
NUMCMP
Compresses the numbering of defined items.
NUMMRG
Merges coincident or equivalently defined items.
NUMOFF
Adds a number offset to defined items.
NUMSTR
Establishes starting numbers for automatically numbered items.
/PREP7
Enters the model creation preprocessor.
Table 2.24 Element Type
These PREP7 commands define the type of elements to be used in the model.
DOF
Adds degrees of freedom to the current DOF set.
ET
Defines a local element type from the element library.
ETCHG
Changes element types to their corresponding types.
ETCONTROL
Controls the element technologies used in element formulation (for applicable
elements).
ETDELE
Deletes element types.
ETLIST
Lists currently defined element types.
KEYOPT
Sets element key options.
NSVR
Defines the number of variables for user-programmable element options.
Table 2.25 Real Constants
These PREP7 commands define the model real constants.
R
Defines the element real constants.
RDELE
Deletes real constant sets.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
217
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands define the model real constants.
RLIST
Lists the real constant sets.
RMODIF
Modifies real constant sets.
RMORE
Adds real constants to a set.
SETFGAP
Updates real constant table for squeeze film elements.
Table 2.26 Materials
These PREP7 commands are used to define the linear material properties.
EMUNIT
Specifies the system of units for magnetic field problems.
*EVAL
Evaluates hyperelastic constants.
*MOONEY
Calculates Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic constants from test data.
MP
Defines a linear material property.
MPAMOD
Modifies temperature-dependent coefficients of thermal expansion.
MPCHG
Changes the material number attribute of an element.
MPCOPY
Copies material model data from one material reference number to another.
MPDATA
Defines property data to be associated with the temperature table.
MPDELE
Deletes linear material properties.
MPDRES
Reassembles existing material data with the temperature table.
/MPLIB
Sets the default material library read and write paths.
MPLIST
Lists linear material properties.
MPPLOT
Plots linear material properties as a function of temperature.
MPREAD
Reads a file containing material properties.
MPTEMP
Defines a temperature table for material properties.>
MPTGEN
Adds temperatures to the temperature table by generation.
MPTRES
Restores a temperature table previously defined.
MPWRITE
Writes linear material properties in the database to a file (if the Lib option is
not specified) or writes both linear and nonlinear material properties (if Lib is
specified) from the database to a file.
TBFT
Performs curve-fitting operations on materials.
UIMP
Defines constant material properties (GUI).
Table 2.27 Data Tables
These PREP7 commands create and modify the data tables, used to define nonlinear materials, for example.
TB
Activates a data table.
TBCOPY
Copies a data table from one material to another.
TBDATA
Defines data for the data table.
TBDELE
Deletes previously defined data tables.
TBFIELD
Defines values of field variables for the material data tables.
TBLIST
Lists the data tables.
TBMODIF
Modifies data for the data table (GUI).
TBPLOT
Displays the data table.
TBPT
Defines a point on a stress-strain or B-H curve.
218
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These PREP7 commands create and modify the data tables, used to define nonlinear materials, for example.
TBTEMP
Defines a temperature for the data table.
Table 2.28 Primitives
These PREP7 commands are used to create primitive shapes for modeling.
BLC4
Creates a rectangular area or block volume by corner points.
BLC5
Creates a rectangular area or block volume by center and corner points.
BLOCK
Creates a block volume based on working plane coordinates.
CON4
Creates a conical volume anywhere on the working plane.
CONE
Creates a conical volume centered about the working plane origin.
CYL4
Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume anywhere on the working plane.
CYL5
Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume by end points.
CYLIND
Creates a cylindrical volume centered about the working plane origin.
PCIRC
Creates a circular area centered about the working plane origin.
POLY
Creates a polygonal area based on working plane coordinate pairs.
PRI2
Creates a polygonal area or a prism volume by vertices (GUI).
PRISM
Creates a prism volume based on working plane coordinate pairs.
PTXY
Defines coordinate pairs for use in polygons and prisms.
RECTNG
Creates a rectangular area anywhere on the working plane.
RPOLY
Creates a regular polygonal area centered about the working plane origin.
RPR4
Creates a regular polygonal area or prism volume anywhere on the working
plane.
RPRISM
Creates a regular prism volume centered about the working plane origin.
SPH4
Creates a spherical volume anywhere on the working plane.
SPH5
Creates a spherical volume by diameter end points.
SPHERE
Creates a spherical volume centered about the working plane origin.
TORUS
Creates a toroidal volume.
Table 2.29 Keypoints
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., keypoints.
GSUM
Calculates and prints geometry items.
Defines a keypoint.
KBETW
Creates a keypoint between two existing keypoints.
KCENTER
Creates a keypoint at the center of a circular arc defined by three locations.
KDELE
Deletes unmeshed keypoints.
KDIST
Calculates and lists the distance between two keypoints.
KFILL
Generates keypoints between two keypoints.
KGEN
Generates additional keypoints from a pattern of keypoints.
KL
Generates a keypoint at a specified location on an existing line.
KLIST
Lists the defined keypoints or hard points.
KMODIF
Modifies an existing keypoint.
KMOVE
Calculates and moves a keypoint to an intersection.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
219
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., keypoints.
KNODE
Defines a keypoint at an existing node location.
KPLOT
Displays the selected keypoints.
KPSCALE
Generates a scaled set of (meshed) keypoints from a pattern of keypoints.
KSCALE
Generates a scaled pattern of keypoints from a given keypoint pattern.
KSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected keypoints.
KSYMM
Generates a reflected set of keypoints.
KTRAN
Transfers a pattern of keypoints to another coordinate system.
SOURCE
Defines a default location for undefined nodes or keypoints.
Table 2.30 Hard Points
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., hard points.
HPTCREATE
Defines a hard point.
HPTDELETE
Deletes selected hard points.
Table 2.31 Lines
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., lines.
BSPLIN
Generates a single line from a spline fit to a series of keypoints.
CIRCLE
Generates circular arc lines.
GSUM
Calculates and prints geometry items.
Defines a line between two keypoints.
L2ANG
Generates a line at an angle with two existing lines.
L2TAN
Generates a line tangent to two lines.
LANG
Generates a straight line at an angle with a line.
LARC
Defines a circular arc.
LAREA
Generates the shortest line between two keypoints on an area.
LCOMB
Combines adjacent lines into one line.
LDELE
Deletes unmeshed lines.
LDIV
Divides a single line into two or more lines.
LDRAG
Generates lines by sweeping a keypoint pattern along path.
LEXTND
Extends a line at one end by using its slope.
LFILLT
Generates a fillet line between two intersecting lines.
LGEN
Generates additional lines from a pattern of lines.
LLIST
Lists the defined lines.
LPLOT
Displays the selected lines.
LREVERSE
Reverses the normal of a line, regardless of its connectivity or mesh status.
LROTAT
Generates circular lines by rotating a keypoint pattern about an axis.
LSSCALE
Generates a scaled set of lines from a pattern of lines.
LSTR
Defines a straight line irrespective of the active coordinate system.
LSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected lines.
LSYMM
Generates lines from a line pattern by symmetry reflection.
LTAN
Generates a line at the end of, and tangent to, an existing line.
220
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., lines.
LTRAN
Transfers a pattern of lines to another coordinate system.
SPLINE
Generates a segmented spline through a series of keypoints.
SSLN
Selects and displays small lines in the model.
Table 2.32 Areas
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., areas.
A
Defines an area by connecting keypoints.
AATT
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed areas.
ADELE
Deletes unmeshed areas.
ADGL
Lists keypoints of an area that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
ADRAG
Generates areas by dragging a line pattern along a path.
AFILLT
Generates a fillet at the intersection of two areas.
AGEN
Generates additional areas from a pattern of areas.
AL
Generates an area bounded by previously defined lines.
ALIST
Lists the defined areas.
ANORM
Reorients area normals.
AOFFST
Generates an area, offset from a given area.
APLOT
Displays the selected areas.
AREVERSE
Reverses the normal of an area, regardless of its connectivity or mesh status.
AROTAT
Generates cylindrical areas by rotating a line pattern about an axis.
ARSCALE
Generates a scaled set of areas from a pattern of areas.
ARSYM
Generates areas from an area pattern by symmetry reflection.
ASKIN
Generates an area by "skinning" a surface through guiding lines.
ASUB
Generates an area using the shape of an existing area.
ASUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected areas.
ATRAN
Transfers a pattern of areas to another coordinate system.
GSUM
Calculates and prints geometry items.
SPLOT
Displays the selected areas and a faceted view of their underlying surfaces
Table 2.33 Volumes
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., volumes.
EXTOPT
Controls options relating to the generation of volume elements from area elements.
GSUM
Calculates and prints geometry items.
Defines a volume through keypoints.
VA
Generates a volume bounded by existing areas.
VDELE
Deletes unmeshed volumes.
VDGL
Lists keypoints of a volume that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
VDRAG
Generates volumes by dragging an area pattern along a path.
VEXT
Generates additional volumes by extruding areas.
VGEN
Generates additional volumes from a pattern of volumes.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
221
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., volumes.
VLIST
Lists the defined volumes.
VLSCALE
Generates a scaled set of volumes from a pattern of volumes.
VOFFST
Generates a volume, offset from a given area.
VPLOT
Displays the selected volumes.
VROTAT
Generates cylindrical volumes by rotating an area pattern about an axis.
VSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected volumes.
VSYMM
Generates volumes from a volume pattern by symmetry reflection.
VTRAN
Transfers a pattern of volumes to another coordinate system.
Table 2.34 Booleans
These PREP7 commands are used to perform Boolean operations on solid model entities.
AADD
Adds separate areas to create a single area.
AGLUE
Generates new areas by "gluing" areas.
AINA
Finds the intersection of areas.
AINP
Finds the pairwise intersection of areas.
AINV
Finds the intersection of an area with a volume.
AOVLAP
Overlaps areas.
APTN
Partitions areas.
ASBA
Subtracts areas from areas.
ASBL
Subtracts lines from areas.
ASBV
Subtracts volumes from areas.
ASBW
Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from areas (divides areas).
BOPTN
Specifies Boolean operation options.
BTOL
Specifies the Boolean operation tolerances.
LCSL
Divides intersecting lines at their point(s) of intersection.
LGLUE
Generates new lines by "gluing" lines.
LINA
Finds the intersection of a line with an area.
LINL
Finds the common intersection of lines.
LINP
Finds the pairwise intersection of lines.
LINV
Finds the intersection of a line with a volume.
LOVLAP
Overlaps lines.
LPTN
Partitions lines.
LSBA
Subtracts areas from lines.
LSBL
Subtracts lines from lines.
LSBV
Subtracts volumes from lines.
LSBW
Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from lines (divides lines).
VADD
Adds separate volumes to create a single volume.
VGLUE
Generates new volumes by "gluing" volumes.
VINP
Finds the pairwise intersection of volumes.
VINV
Finds the intersection of volumes.
VOVLAP
Overlaps volumes.
222
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These PREP7 commands are used to perform Boolean operations on solid model entities.
VPTN
Partitions volumes.
VSBA
Subtracts areas from volumes.
VSBV
Subtracts volumes from volumes.
VSBW
Subtracts intersection of the working plane from volumes (divides volumes).
Table 2.35 Meshing
These PREP7 commands are used to mesh solid models with nodes and elements.
ACCAT
Concatenates multiple areas in preparation for mapped meshing.
ACLEAR
Deletes nodes and area elements associated with selected areas.
AESIZE
Specifies the element size to be meshed onto areas.
AMAP
Generates a 2-D mapped mesh based on specified area corners.
AMESH
Generates nodes and area elements within areas.
AREFINE
Refines the mesh around specified areas.
CHKMSH
Checks area and volume entities for previous meshes.
CLRMSHLN
Clears meshed entities.
CPCYC
Couples the two side faces of a cyclically symmetric model for loadings that
are the same on every segment.
DESIZE
Controls default element sizes.
EORIENT
Reorients solid element normals.
EREFINE
Refines the mesh around specified elements.
ESIZE
Specifies the default number of line divisions.
ESYS
Sets the element coordinate system attribute pointer.
FVMESH
Generates nodes and tetrahedral volume elements from detached exterior
area elements (facets).
GSGDATA
Specifies the reference point and defines the geometry in the fiber direction
for the generalized plane strain element option.
IMESH
Generates nodes and interface elements along lines or areas.
KATT
Associates attributes with the selected, unmeshed keypoints.
KCLEAR
Deletes nodes and point elements associated with selected keypoints.
KESIZE
Specifies the edge lengths of the elements nearest a keypoint.
KMESH
Generates nodes and point elements at keypoints.
KREFINE
Refines the mesh around specified keypoints.
KSCON
Specifies a keypoint about which an area mesh will be skewed.
LATT
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed lines.
LCCAT
Concatenates multiple lines into one line for mapped meshing.
LCLEAR
Deletes nodes and line elements associated with selected lines.
LESIZE
Specifies the divisions and spacing ratio on unmeshed lines.
LMESH
Generates nodes and line elements along lines.
LREFINE
Refines the mesh around specified lines.
MAT
Sets the element material attribute pointer.
MCHECK
Checks mesh connectivity.
MODMSH
Controls the relationship of the solid model and the FE model.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
223
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands are used to mesh solid models with nodes and elements.
MOPT
Specifies meshing options.
MSHAPE
For elements that support multiple shapes, specifies the element shape to be
used for meshing.
MSHCOPY
Simplifies the generation of meshes that have matching node element patterns
on two different line groups (in 2-D) or area groups (3-D).
MSHKEY
Specifies whether free meshing or mapped meshing should be used to mesh
a model.
MSHMID
Specifies placement of midside nodes.
MSHPATTERN
Specifies pattern to be used for mapped triangle meshing.
NREFINE
Refines the mesh around specified nodes.
PSMESH
Splits an initially continuous group of beam, shell, plane, or solid elements into
two unconnected groups, tied together with PRETS179 pretension elements.
REAL
Sets the element real constant set attribute pointer.
RTHICK
Defines variable thickness at nodes for shell elements.
SHPP
Controls element shape checking.
SMRTSIZE
Specifies meshing parameters for automatic (smart) element sizing.
TCHG
Converts 20-node degenerate tetrahedral elements to their 10-node non-degenerate counterparts.
TIMP
Improves the quality of tetrahedral elements that are not associated with a
volume.
TYPE
Sets the element type attribute pointer.
VATT
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed volumes.
VCLEAR
Deletes nodes and volume elements associated with selected volumes.
VIMP
Improves the quality of the tetrahedral elements in the selected volume(s).
VMESH
Generates nodes and volume elements within volumes.
VEORIENT
Specifies brick element orientation for volume mapped (hexahedron) meshing.
VSWEEP
Fills an existing unmeshed volume with elements by sweeping the mesh from
an adjacent area throughout the volume.
Table 2.36 Nodes
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., nodes.
CENTER
Defines a node at the center of curvature of 2 or 3 nodes.
FILL
Generates a line of nodes between two existing nodes.
MOVE
Calculates and moves a node to an intersection.
Defines a node.
NANG
Rotates a nodal coordinate system by direction cosines.
NDELE
Deletes nodes.
NDIST
Calculates and lists the distance between two nodes.
NGEN
Generates additional nodes from a pattern of nodes.
NKPT
Defines a node at an existing keypoint location.
NLIST
Lists nodes.
NMODIF
Modifies an existing node.
NPLOT
Displays nodes.
224
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., nodes.
NREAD
Reads nodes from a file.
NROTAT
Rotates nodal coordinate systems into the active system.
NRRANG
Specifies the range of nodes to be read from the node file.
NSCALE
Generates a scaled set of nodes from a pattern of nodes.
NSMOOTH
Smooths selected nodes among selected elements.
NSYM
Generates a reflected set of nodes.
NWRITE
Writes nodes to a file.
QUAD
Generates a quadratic line of nodes from three nodes.
SOURCE
Defines a default location for undefined nodes or keypoints.
TRANSFER
Transfers a pattern of nodes to another coordinate system.
Table 2.37 Elements
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., elements.
AFSURF
Generates surface elements overlaid on the surface of existing solid elements
and assigns the extra node as the closes fluid element node.
Defines an element by node connectivity.
EDELE
Deletes selected elements from the model.
EGEN
Generates elements from an existing pattern.
EINTF
Defines two-node elements between coincident nodes.
ELIST
Lists the elements.
EMID
Adds or removes midside nodes.
EMODIF
Modifies a previously defined element.
EMORE
Adds more nodes to the just-defined element.
EMTGEN
Generates a set of TRANS126 elements
EN
Defines an element by its number and node connectivity.
ENDRELEASE
Specifies degrees of freedom to be decoupled for end release.
ENGEN
Generates elements from an existing pattern.
ENORM
Reorients shell element normals.
ENSYM
Generates elements by symmetry reflection.
EORIENT
Reorients solid element normals.
EPLOT
Produces an element display.
EREAD
Reads elements from a file.
ERRANG
Specifies the element range to be read from a file.
ESURF
Generates elements overlaid on the free faces of existing elements.
ESYM
Generates elements from a pattern by a symmetry reflection.
ESYS
Sets the element coordinate system attribute pointer.
EWRITE
Writes elements to a file.
LAYLIST
Lists real constants material properties for layered elements.
LAYPLOT
Displays the layer stacking sequence for layered elements.
LFSURF
Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing solid elements
and assigns the extra node as the closest fluid element node.
MAT
Sets the element material attribute pointer.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
225
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., elements.
NDSURF
Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing elements and assigns the extra node as the closest fluid element node.
REAL
Sets the element real constant set attribute pointer.
SHSD
Creates or deletes shell-solid interface to be used in shell-to-solid assemblies.
SWADD
Adds more surfaces to an existing spot weld set.
SWDEL
Deletes spot weld sets.
SWGEN
Creates a new spot weld set.
SWLIST
Lists spot weld sets.
TSHAP
Defines simple 2-D and 3-D geometric surfaces for target segment elements.
TYPE
Sets the element type attribute pointer.
UPGEOM
Adds displacements from a previous analysis and updates the geometry to the
deformed configuration.
Table 2.38 Superelements
These PREP7 commands are used to create and modify superelements.
SE
Defines a superelement.
SEDLIST
Lists the DOF solution of a superelement after the use pass.
SELIST
Lists the contents of a superelement matrix file.
SESYMM
Performs a symmetry operation on a superelement within the use pass.
SETRAN
Creates a superelement from an existing superelement.
Table 2.39 Piping
These PREP7 commands are used to conveniently create models of piping systems.
BELLOW
Defines a bellows in a piping run.
BEND
Defines a bend in a piping run.
BRANCH
Defines the starting point for a piping branch.
FLANGE
Defines a flange in a piping run.
MITER
Defines a mitered bend in a piping run.
PCORRO
Specifies the allowable exterior corrosion thickness for a piping run.
PDRAG
Defines the external fluid drag loading for a piping run.
PFLUID
Defines the contained fluid density for a piping run.
PGAP
Defines a spring-gap constraint in a piping run.
PINSUL
Defines the external insulation constants in a piping run.
POPT
Selects the piping analysis standard for a piping run.
PPRES
Defines the internal pressure for a piping run.
PSPEC
Defines pipe material and dimensions.
PSPRNG
Defines a spring constraint in a piping run.
PTEMP
Defines the pipe wall temperatures in a piping run.
PUNIT
Selects the system of length units to be used in a piping run.
REDUCE
Defines a reducer in a piping run.
RUN
Defines a pipe run.
TEE
Defines a tee in a piping run.
226
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These PREP7 commands are used to conveniently create models of piping systems.
VALVE
Defines a valve in a piping run.
Table 2.40 Digitizing
These PREP7 commands are used to define nodes by tablet digitizing.
DIG
Digitizes nodes to a surface.
DMOVE
Digitizes nodes on surfaces and along intersections.
DSET
Sets the scale and drawing plane orientation for a digitizing tablet.
DSURF
Defines the surface upon which digitized nodes lie.
Table 2.41 Coupled DOF
These PREP7 commands are used to define, modify, list, etc., coupled degrees of freedom.
CP
Defines (or modifies) a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
CPDELE
Deletes coupled degree of freedom sets.
CPINTF
Defines coupled degrees of freedom at an interface.
CPLGEN
Generates sets of coupled nodes from an existing set.
CPLIST
Lists the coupled degree of freedom sets.
CPNGEN
Defines, modifies, or adds to a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
CPSGEN
Generates sets of coupled nodes from existing sets.
Table 2.42 Constraint Equations
These PREP7 commands are used to define, modify, list, etc., constraint equations.
CE
Defines a constraint equation relating degrees of freedom.
CECYC
Generates the constraint equations for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
CEDELE
Deletes constraint equations.
CEINTF
Generates constraint equations at an interface.
CELIST
Lists the constraint equations.
CERIG
Defines a rigid region.
CESGEN
Generates a set of constraint equations from existing sets.
RBE3
Distributes the force/moment applied at the master node to a set of slave
nodes, taking into account the geometry of the slave nodes as well as weighting
factors.
Table 2.43 Element Reordering
These PREP7 commands are used to reorder the model wavefront.
NOORDER
Re-establishes the original element ordering.
WAVES
Initiates reordering.
WERASE
Erases all reordering wave lists.
WFRONT
Estimates wavefront statistics.
WMID
Specifies reordering options for the WAVES command.
WMORE
Adds more nodes to the starting wave list.
WSORT
Initiates element reordering based upon a geometric sort.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
227
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands are used to reorder the model wavefront.
WSTART
Defines a starting wave list.
Table 2.44 FLOTRAN Options
These PREP7 commands are used to specify the options and output controls for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA
Sets up a FLOTRAN analysis.
FLDATA1
Controls which features of the solution algorithm are activated.
FLDATA2
Sets iteration and output controls for steady state analyses.
FLDATA3
Sets the convergence monitors for the degree of freedom set.
FLDATA4
Sets controls for transient analyses based on transient time and convergence
monitors or sets time integration method.
FLDATA4A
Sets controls for transient analyses based on the number of time steps.
FLDATA5
Sets output and storage controls.
FLDATA6
Controls the output of the convergence monitor.
Table 2.45 FLOTRAN Property
These PREP7 commands are used to specify the fluid properties for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA7
Specifies the type of fluid property.
FLDATA8
Specifies the NOMI coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA9
Specifies the COF1 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA10
Specifies the COF2 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA11
Specifies the COF3 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA12
Sets the property update frequency flag.
FLDATA13
Sets the property variation flag.
Table 2.46 FLOTRAN Operating
These PREP7 commands are used to specify the operating conditions for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA14
Specifies the reference temperature.
FLDATA15
Specifies the reference pressure.
FLDATA16
Specifies the bulk modulus parameter.
FLDATA17
Specifies the specific heat ratio.
Table 2.47 FLOTRAN Solver
These PREP7 commands are used to control the solver for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA18
Selects the algebraic solver.
FLDATA19
Specifies the number of TDMA sweeps.
FLDATA20
Specifies the number of conjugate direction search vectors.
FLDATA20A
Specifies the amount of fill-in when preconditioning the coefficient matrix.
FLDATA20B
Specifies the number of fill-ins for the ILU preconditioner.
FLDATA21
Specifies the convergence monitor.
FLDATA22
Specifies the maximum number of semi-direct iterations.
228
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These PREP7 commands are used to control the solver for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA23
Specifies the solver minimum normalized rate of change.
Table 2.48 FLOTRAN Turbulence
These PREP7 commands are used to control the turbulence setting for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA24
Sets the turbulence model and the constants used in the Standard k- Model
and the Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
FLDATA24A
Sets constants for the Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG).
FLDATA24B
Sets constants for the New k- Model due to Shih (NKE).
FLDATA24C
Sets constants for the Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR).
FLDATA24D
Sets constants for the Shih, Zhu, Lumley Model (SZL).
FLDATA24E
Sets constants for the k- Model.
FLDATA24F
Sets the turbulent production clip factor for the Shear Stress Transport (SST)
model.
FLDATA24G
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) model.
FLDATA24H
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) model.
FLDATA40
Controls activation of thermal stabilization near walls.
Table 2.49 FLOTRAN Stability
These PREP7 commands are used to control the stability settings for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA25
Sets solution and property relaxation factors.
FLDATA26
Sets stability controls.
FLDATA34
Sets modified inertial relaxation factors.
Table 2.50 FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
These PREP7 commands are used to control miscellaneous settings for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA27
Controls dependent variable printing.
FLDATA28
Specifies that variable results are to be replaced.
FLDATA29
Re-initializes a results variable.
FLDATA30
Controls the quadrature orders.
FLDATA31
Specifies dependent variable caps.
FLDATA32
Controls restart options.
FLDATA33
Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term.
FLDATA35
Specifies tolerances for the lower and upper bound of the volume fraction.
FLDATA36
Specifies ambient reference values outside of the fluid for the volume of fluid
(VOF) method.
FLDATA37
Specifies the segregated solution algorithm.
FLDATA38
Specifies the mass type for a fluid transient analysis.
FLDATA39
Specifies remeshing parameters for transient fluid flow and fluid-solid interaction analyses.
ICVFRC
Sets the initial volume fraction field for a geometry.
PLVFRC
Displays volume fractions in a volume of fluid (VOF) analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
229
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.51 FLOTRAN Multiple Species
These PREP7 commands are used for multiple species transport in a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
MSADV
Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term in a species transport
equation.
MSCAP
Activates and controls mass fraction capping for a species.
MSDATA
Defines multiple species data applicable to all species.
MSMASS
Specifies the mass type for a transient species analysis.
MSMETH
Specifies the method of solution of the species transport equations.
MSMIR
Sets modified inertial relaxation factors for multiple species.
MSNOMF
Specifies the initial value of nominal mass fraction for a species.
MSPROP
Defines the fluid properties of a species.
MSQUAD
Specifies the quadrature order for multiple species elements.
MSRELAX
Specifies relaxation factors for a multiple species transport analysis.
MSSOLU
Specifies solution options for multiple species transport.
MSSPEC
Specifies the name, molecular weight, and Schmidt number of a species.
MSTERM
Sets the convergence monitors for species.
MSVARY
Allows species properties to vary between global iterations.
Table 2.52 Special Purpose
These PREP7 commands are used for certain special purpose operations.
/CYCEXPAND
Verifies a cyclically symmetric model by graphically expanding it partially or
into the full 360 degrees.
CYCLIC
Specifies a cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYCOPT
Specifies solution options for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
EMSYM
Specifies circular symmetry for electromagnetic sources.
HFEREFINE
Automatically refines high-frequency tetrahedral elements (HF119) or lists
high-frequency brick elements (HF120) with the largest error.
PERBC2D
Generates periodic constraints for 2-D planar magnetic field analyses.
PHYSICS
Writes, reads, or lists all element information.
RACE
Defines a "racetrack" current source.
Table 2.53 Status
These PREP7 commands are for use with the STAT command.
AREAS
Specifies "Areas" as the subsequent status topic.
BOOL
Specifies "Booleans" as the subsequent status topic.
CEQN
Specifies "Constraint equations" as the subsequent status topic.
COUPLE
Specifies "Node coupling" as the subsequent status topic.
DIGIT
Specifies "Node digitizing" as the subsequent status topic.
ELEM
Specifies "Elements" as the subsequent status topic.
ETYPE
Specifies "Element types" as the subsequent status topic.
FATIGUE
Specifies "Fatigue data status" as the subsequent status topic.
FEBODY
Specifies "Body loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
230
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These PREP7 commands are for use with the STAT command.
FECONS
Specifies "Constraints on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
FEFOR
Specifies "Forces on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
FESURF
Specifies "Surface loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
FLOTRAN
Specifies "FLOTRAN data settings" as the subsequent status topic.
GEOMETRY
Specifies "Geometry" as the subsequent status topic.
KEYPTS
Specifies "Keypoints" as the subsequent status topic.
LINE
Specifies "Lines" as the subsequent status topic.
MATER
Specifies "Material properties" as the subsequent status topic.
MESHING
Specifies "Meshing" as the subsequent status topic.
NODES
Specifies "Nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
PIPE
Specifies "Pipe modeling" as the subsequent status topic.
PMETH
Specifies "p-Method" as the subsequent status topic.
PRIM
Specifies "Solid model primitives" as the subsequent status topic.
RCON
Specifies "Real constants" as the subsequent status topic.
REORDER
Specifies "Model reordering" as the subsequent status topic.
SELM
Specifies "Superelements" as the subsequent status topic.
TBLE
Specifies "Data table properties" as the subsequent status topic.
VOLUMES
Specifies "Volumes" as the subsequent status topic.
Table 2.54 Explicit Dynamics
These PREP7 commands are used for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDASMP
Creates a part assembly to be used in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDBOUND
Defines a boundary plane for sliding or cyclic symmetry.
EDBX
Creates a box shaped volume to be used in a contact definition.
EDCGEN
Specifies contact parameters for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCLIST
Lists all contact entity specifications in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCMORE
Specifies additional contact parameters for a given contact definition in an
explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCNSTR
Defines various types of constraints for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCONTACT
Specifies contact surface controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCRB
Constrains two rigid bodies to act as one in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCURVE
Specifies data curves for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDDBL
Sets the single or double precision version of LS-DYNA into effect.
EDDC
Deletes or deactivates/reactivates contact entity specifications in an explicit
dynamic analysis.
EDIPART
Defines inertia for rigid parts in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDLCS
Defines a local coordinate system for use in explicit dynamic analysis.
EDMP
Defines material properties for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDNB
Defines a nonreflecting boundary in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDNDTSD
Allows smoothing of noisy data for explicit dynamic analyses and provides a
graphical representation of the data.
EDNROT
Applies a rotated coordinate nodal constraint in an explicit dynamic analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
231
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands are used for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDPART
Configures parts for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDPC
Selects and plots explicit dynamic contact entities.
EDSP
Specifies small penetration checking for contact entities in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
EDWELD
Defines a massless spotweld or generalized weld for use in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
Table 2.55 CAD Repair
These PREP7 commands are for IGES and Connection import.
ALPFILL
Fills in an area loop within an existing 2-D area (for models imported from CAD
files).
ARCOLLAPSE
Collapses specified area to a specified line segment (for models imported from
CAD files).
ARDETACH
Detaches areas from neighboring geometrical entities (for models imported
from CAD files).
ARFILL
Creates an area based on a set of singly-connected lines (for models imported
from CAD files).
ARMERGE
Merges two or more singly-connected adjacent areas (for models imported
from CAD files).
ARSPLIT
Splits an area between two keypoints (for models imported from CAD files).
GAPFINISH
Exits from the CAD import topology repair stage.
GAPLIST
Lists all joined or disjoined lines in a model (for models imported from CAD
files).
GAPMERGE
Merges adjacent disjoined lines (for models imported from CAD files).
GAPOPT
Sets preferences for the CAD import repair commands.
GAPPLOT
Plots all joined or disjoined lines (for models imported from CAD files).
LNCOLLAPSE
Collapse a line segment to a keypoint (for models imported from CAD files).
LNDETACH
Detaches lines from neighboring geometric entity (for models imported from
CAD files).
LNFILL
Creates a straight line between two keypoints (for models imported from CAD
files).
LNMERGE
Merges two or more connected line segments (for models imported from CAD
files).
LNSPLIT
Splits a line segment into two line segments (for models imported from CAD
files).
SARPLOT
Displays areas smaller than a specified size (for models imported from CAD
files).
SLPPLOT
Displays line loops smaller than a specified size (for models imported from CAD
files).
SLSPLOT
Displays line segments smaller than a specified size (for models imported from
CAD files).
VCVFILL
Fills cavities and bosses in volumes (for models imported from CAD files).
232
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Table 2.56 Sections
These PREP7 commands manage sections.
BSAX
Specifies axial force and strain for a nonlinear general beam section.
BSM1
Specifies bending moment and curvature in plane XZ for a nonlinear general
beam section.
BSM2
Specifies bending moment and curvature in plane XY for a nonlinear general
beam section.
BSMD
Specifies mass density for a nonlinear general beam section.
BSS1
Specifies transverse shear force and strain in plane XZ for a nonlinear general
beam section.
BSS2
Specifies transverse shear force and strain in plane XY for a nonlinear general
beam section.
BSTE
Specifies a thermal expansion coefficientfor a nonlinear general beam section.
BSTQ
Specifies cross section torque and twist for a nonlinear general beam section.
PRSSOL
Prints BEAM188 and BEAM189 section results.
SDELETE
Deletes cross sections from the ANSYS database.
SECDATA
Describes the geometry of a beam section.
SECJOINT
Defines local coordinate systems at the nodes that form the element.
/SECLIB
Sets the default section library path for the SECREAD command.
SECLOCK
Specifies locks on the element degrees of freedom.
SECNUM
Sets the element section attribute pointer.
SECOFFSET
Defines the section offset for beam cross sections.
SECPLOT
Plots the geometry of a beam section to scale.
SECREAD
Reads a customized beam section library or a user-defined beam section mesh
into ANSYS.
SECSTOP
Specifies stops on the element degrees of freedom.
SECTYPE
Associates section type information with a section ID number.
SECWRITE
Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh section information.
SLIST
Summarizes the section properties for all defined sections in the current session
of ANSYS.
SSBT
Specifies the bending thermal effects quantity for a preintegrated shell section.
SSMT
Specifies the membrane thermal effects quantity for a preintegrated shell
section.
SSPA
Specifies the membrane stiffness quantity for a preintegrated shell section.
SSPB
Specifies the coupling stiffness quantity for a preintegrated shell section.
SSPD
Specifies the bending stiffness quantity for a preintegrated shell section.
SSPE
Specifies the transverse shear stiffness quantity for a preintegrated shell section.
SSPM
Specifies the mass density and stress-free initial temperature for a preintegrated
shell section.
Table 2.57 Morphing
These PREP7 commands are used to adjust the finite element mesh in the non-structural regions to
coincide with the deflections of the structural regions.
MORPH
Turns morphing on or off.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
233
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These PREP7 commands are used to adjust the finite element mesh in the non-structural regions to
coincide with the deflections of the structural regions.
DAMORPH
Move nodes in selected areas to conform to structural displacements.
DEMORPH
Move nodes in selected elements to conform to structural displacements.
DVMORPH
Move nodes in selected volumes to conform to structural displacements.
Table 2.58 Trefftz Domain
These PREP7 commands are used in the Trefftz method for modeling the open domain.
TZAMESH
Meshes the areas of a volume to create Trefftz nodes.
TZDELE
Deletes the Trefftz superelement, associated constraint equations and all supporting Trefftz files.
TZEGEN
Generates a Trefftz domain substructure and defines a Trefftz superelement
for use in electrostatic analysis.
Table 2.59 Perfectly Matched Layers
This PREP7 command is used to create perfectly matched layers (PMLs) designed to absorb high frequency waves.
PMLOPT
Defines perfectly matched layers (PMLs) for a high-frequency analysis.
PMLSIZE
Determines number of PML layers.
Table 2.60 Fluid-Solid Interaction
These PREP7 commands are used to setup a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSAN
Turns a fluid-solid interaction analysis on or off.
FSCO
Sets convergence values for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSDT
Sets time step increment for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSIN
Specifies the interface load transfer option for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSIT
Sets the maximum number of stagger iterations for a fluid-solid interaction
analysis.
FSOR
Specifies analysis order for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSOU
Sets output frequency for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSRE
Sets relaxation values for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSSTAT
Lists the settings for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSTI
Sets end time for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSTR
Specifies static or transient analyses for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
234
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.6. SOLUTION Commands
These commands are used to load and solve the model. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.61 Analysis Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to set general analysis options.
ABEXTRACT
Extracts the alpha-beta damping multipliers for Rayleigh damping.
ADAMS
Performs solutions and writes flexible body information to a modal neutral file.
ADAPT
Adaptively meshes and solves a model.
ANTYPE
Specifies the analysis type and restart status.
BCSOPTION
Sets memory option for the sparse solver.
CECHECK
Check constraint equations and couplings for rigid body motions.
CHECK
Checks current database items for completeness.
CMATRIX
Performs electrostatic field solutions and calculates the self and mutual capacitances between multiple conductors.
CMSOPT
Specifies component mode synthesis (CMS) analysis options.
CNCHECK
Provides and/or adjusts the initial status of contact pairs.
CUTCONTROL
Controls time-step cutback during a nonlinear solution.
CYCOPT
Specifies the harmonic index solution for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
DMPEXT
Extracts modal damping coefficients in a specified frequency range.
DSPROC
Specifies number of processors for a distributed solution.
DSOPT
Sets options for the Distributed Domain Server; this command is only valid for
sites with a license for the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on.
EMATWRITE
Forces the writing of all the element matrices to File.EMAT.
EQSLV
Specifies the type of equation solver.
ERESX
Specifies extrapolation of integration point results.
ESCHECK
Perform element shape checking for a selected element set.
ESSOLV
Performs a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis.
EXPASS
Specifies an expansion pass of an analysis.
FSRS
Specifies time or load step number for restart of a fluid-structure interaction
analysis.
FSSOLV
Performs a coupled steady-state fluid-structural analysis.
GAUGE
Gauges the problem domain for an edge-element formulation.
GMATRIX
Performs electric field solutions and calculates the self and mutual conductances
between multiple conductors.
HFEIGOPT
Specifies high frequency electromagnetic modal analysis options.
HFPA
Specifies a radiation scan angle for a phased array antenna analysis.
HFPCSWP
Calculates the propagating constants of a transmission line or waveguide over
a frequency range.
HFSCAT
Specifies a high-frequency scattering analysis.
HFSWEEP
Performs a harmonic response for a high-frequency electromagnetic wave
guide analysis.
LMATRIX
Calculates the differential inductance matrix and the total flux linkage in each
coil for an N-winding system.
LUMPM
Specifies a lumped mass matrix formulation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
235
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These SOLUTION commands are used to set general analysis options.
MONITOR
Controls contents of three variable fields in nonlinear solution monitor file.
MSAVE
Sets the memory saving feature for the PCG and DPCG solvers.
OPNCONTROL
Sets decision parameter for automatically increasing the time step interval.
PRECISION
Specifies machine precision for solvers (currently valid only for PCG solvers).
PSCONTROL
Turns off shared-memory parallel operations during solution.
PSOLVE
Directs the program to perform a partial solution.
RATE
Specifies whether the effect of creep strain rate will be used in the solution of
a load step.
RSTOFF
Offsets node or element IDs in the FE geometry record.
SEEXP
Specifies options for the substructure expansion pass.
SEGEN
Automatically generate superelements.
SEOPT
Specifies substructure analysis options.
SOLCONTROL
Specifies whether to use optimized nonlinear solution defaults and some enhanced internal solution algorithms.
/SOLU
Enters the solution processor.
SOLVE
Starts a solution.
SPSCAN
Performs a harmonic analysis of a unit cell over a range of angles and extracts
the S-parameter.
SPSWP
Computes S-parameters over a frequency range and writes them to a file.
STAOPT
Specifies static analysis options.
TOFFST
Specifies the temperature offset from absolute zero to zero.
Table 2.62 p-Method Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for p-Method analyses.
PCONV
Sets convergence values for p-method solutions.
PEXCLUDE
Specifies elements to be excluded from p-level escalations.
PINCLUDE
Specifies elements to be included in p-level escalations.
/PMETH
Activates the p-method solution options in the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
PMOPTS
Defines percentage tolerance for a p-Method solution.
PPRANGE
Specifies a range of p-level values for use in a p-method solution.
Table 2.63 Nonlinear Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for nonlinear analyses.
ARCLEN
Activates the arc-length method.
ARCTRM
Controls termination of the arc-length solution.
BUCOPT
Specifies buckling analysis options.
CNVTOL
Sets convergence values for nonlinear analyses.
CRPLIM
Specifies the creep criterion for automatic time stepping.
/GST
Turns Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) on or off.
LNSRCH
Activates a line search to be used with Newton-Raphson.
MXPAND
Specifies the number of modes to expand and write for a modal or buckling
analysis.
236
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for nonlinear analyses.
NCNV
Sets the key to terminate an analysis.
NEQIT
Specifies the maximum number of equilibrium iterations for nonlinear analyses.
NLDIAG
Sets nonlinear diagnostics functionality.
NLDPOST
Gets element component information from diagnostic files.
NLGEOM
Includes large deformation effects in a static or full transient analysis.
NLHIST
Specify result items to track during solution.
NROPT
Specifies the Newton-Raphson options in a static or full transient analysis.
PRED
Activates a predictor in a nonlinear analysis.
PSTRES
Specifies whether prestress effects are calculated or included.
SSTIF
Activates stress stiffness effects in a nonlinear analysis.
SUBOPT
Specifies options for subspace iteration eigenvalue extraction.
Table 2.64 Dynamic Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for dynamic analyses.
ALPHAD
Defines the mass matrix multiplier for damping.
BETAD
Defines the stiffness matrix multiplier for damping.
DMPRAT
Sets a constant damping ratio.
HARFRQ
Defines the frequency range in the harmonic response analysis.
HREXP
Specifies the phase angle for the harmonic analysis expansion pass.
HROPT
Specifies harmonic analysis options.
HROUT
Specifies the harmonic analysis output options.
LVSCALE
Scales the load vector for mode superposition analyses.
MDAMP
Defines the damping ratios as a function of mode.
MDPLOT
Plots frequency-dependent modal damping coefficients.
MODOPT
Specifies modal analysis options.
MXPAND
Specifies the number of modes to expand and write for a modal or buckling
analysis.
RIGID
Specifies known rigid body modes (if any) of the model.
SUBOPT
Specifies options for subspace iteration eigenvalue extraction.
TIMINT
Turns on transient effects.
TINTP
Defines transient integration parameters.
TRNOPT
Specifies transient analysis options.
Table 2.65 Spectrum Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for spectrum analyses.
ADDAM
Specifies the acceleration spectrum computation constants for the analysis of
shock resistance of shipboard structures.
COVAL
Defines PSD cospectral values.
CQC
Specifies the complete quadratic mode combination method.
DSUM
Specifies the double sum mode combination method.
FREQ
Defines the frequency points for the SV vs. FREQ tables.
GRP
Specifies the grouping mode combination method.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
237
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for spectrum analyses.
NRLSUM
Specifies the Naval Research Laboratory (NRL) sum mode combination method.
PFACT
Calculates participation factors for the PSD or multi-point response spectrum
table.
PSDCOM
Specifies the power spectral density mode combination method.
PSDFRQ
Defines the frequency points for the input spectrum vs. FREQ tables of PSD
and multi-point spectrum analyses.
PSDGRAPH
Displays input PSD curves
PSDRES
Controls solution output written to the results file from a PSD analysis.
PSDSPL
Defines a partially correlated excitation in a PSD analysis.
PSDUNIT
Defines the type of PSD or multi-point response spectrum.
PSDVAL
Defines PSD or multi-point response spectrum values.
PSDWAV
Defines a wave propagation excitation in a PSD analysis.
QDVAL
Defines PSD quadspectral values.
ROCK
Specifies a rocking response spectrum.
SED
Defines the excitation direction for a single-point response spectrum.
SPOPT
Selects the spectrum type and other spectrum options.
SRSS
Specifies the square root of sum of squares mode combination method.
SV
Defines spectrum values to be associated with frequency points.
SVTYP
Defines the type of single-point response spectrum.
VDDAM
Specifies the velocity spectrum computation constants for the analysis of shock
resistance of shipboard structures.
Table 2.66 Load Step Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for individual load steps.
AUTOTS
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping or load stepping.
CECMOD
Modifies the constant term of a constraint equation during solution.
DELTIM
Specifies the time step sizes to be used for this load step.
EXPSOL
Specifies the solution to be expanded for reduced analyses.
HMAGSOLV
Specifies 2-D or axisymmetric harmonic magnetic solution options and initiates
the solution.
KBC
Specifies stepped or ramped loading within a load step.
KUSE
Specifies whether or not to reuse the triangularized matrix.
MAGOPT
Specifies options for a 3-D magnetostatic field analysis.
MAGSOLV
Specifies magnetic solution options and initiates the solution.
MODE
Specifies the harmonic loading term for this load step.
NSUBST
Specifies the number of substeps to be taken this load step.
NUMEXP
Specifies solutions to be expanded from reduced analyses.
TIME
Sets the time for a load step.
TREF
Defines the reference temperature for the thermal strain calculations.
TSRES
Defines an array of keytimes at which the time-stepping strategy changes.
UPCOORD
Modifies the coordinates of the active set of nodes, based on the current displacements.
USRCAL
Allows user-solution subroutines to be activated or deactivated.
238
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for individual load steps.
WRFULL
Stops solution after assembling global matrices.
Table 2.67 Solid Constraints
These SOLUTION commands are used to define constraints on the solid model.
DA
Defines symmetry or antisymmetry DOF constraints on areas.
DADELE
Deletes DOF constraints on an area.
DALIST
Lists the DOF constraints on an area.
DK
Defines DOF constraints at keypoints.
DKDELE
Deletes DOF constraints at a keypoint.
DKLIST
Lists the DOF constraints at keypoints.
DL
Defines symmetry or antisymmetry DOF constraints on lines.
DLDELE
Deletes DOF constraints on a line.
DLLIST
Lists DOF constraints on a line.
DTRAN
Transfers solid model DOF constraints to the finite element model.
Table 2.68 Solid Forces
These SOLUTION commands are used to define forces on the solid model.
FK
Defines force loads at keypoints.
FKDELE
Deletes force loads at a keypoint.
FKLIST
Lists the forces at keypoints.
FTRAN
Transfers solid model forces to the finite element model.
Table 2.69 Solid Surface Loads
These SOLUTION commands are used to define surface loads on the solid model.
SFA
Specifies surface loads on the selected areas.
SFADELE
Deletes surface loads from areas.
SFALIST
Lists the surface loads for the specified area.
SFL
Specifies surface loads on lines of an area.
SFLDELE
Deletes surface loads from lines.
SFLLIST
Lists the surface loads for lines.
SFTRAN
Transfer the solid model surface loads to the finite element model.
Table 2.70 Solid Body Loads
These SOLUTION commands are used to define body loads on the solid model.
BFA
Defines a body force load on an area.
BFADELE
Deletes body force loads on an area.
BFALIST
Lists the body force loads on an area.
BFK
Defines a body force load at a keypoint.
BFKDELE
Deletes body force loads at a keypoint.
BFKLIST
Lists the body force loads at keypoints.
BFL
Defines a body force load on a line.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
239
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These SOLUTION commands are used to define body loads on the solid model.
BFLDELE
Deletes body force loads on a line.
BFLLIST
Lists the body force loads on a line.
BFTRAN
Transfers solid model body force loads to the finite element model.
BFV
Defines a body force load on a volume.
BFVDELE
Deletes body force loads on a volume.
BFVLIST
Lists the body force loads on a volume.
Table 2.71 Inertia
These SOLUTION commands are used to define inertial loads on the model.
ACEL
Specifies the linear acceleration of the structure.
CGLOC
Specifies the origin location of the acceleration coordinate system.
CGOMGA
Specifies the rotational velocity of the global origin.
CMACEL
Specifies the translational acceleration of an element component.
CMDOMEGA
Specifies the rotational acceleration of an element component about a userdefined rotational axis.
CMOMEGA
Specifies the rotational velocity of an element component about a user-defined
rotational axis.
DCGOMG
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the global origin.
DOMEGA
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the structure.
IRLF
Specifies that inertia relief calculations are to be performed.
OMEGA
Specifies the rotational velocity of the structure.
Table 2.72 Miscellaneous Loads
These SOLUTION commands are for miscellaneous load definition and control.
BIOT
Calculates the Biot-Savart source magnetic field intensity.
FMAGBC
Applies force and torque boundary conditions to an element component.
HFPORT
Specifies input data for waveguide or transmission line ports or an incident
plane wave.
IC
Specifies initial conditions at nodes.
ICDELE
Deletes initial conditions at nodes.
ICE
Specifies initial conditions on elements.
ICEDELE
Deletes initial conditions on elements.
ICELIST
Lists initial conditions on elements.
ICLIST
Lists the initial conditions.
ISFILE
Reads an initial stress state from a file into ANSYS.
MPCHG
Changes the material number attribute of an element.
OUTPR
Controls the solution printout.
OUTRES
Controls the solution data written to the database.
PGRAPH
Specifies the location from which graphics data will be retrieved for viewing.
PGSAVE
Creates a PowerGraphics (PGR) file from results data.
PGWRITE
Writes selected solution data to the PGR file for faster post processing access.
240
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These SOLUTION commands are for miscellaneous load definition and control.
PLWAVE
Specifies a free-space time-harmonic incident plane electromagnetic wave in
the global Cartesian coordinate system.
RESCONTROL
Controls file writing for multiframe restarts.
SBCLIST
Lists solid model boundary conditions.
SBCTRAN
Transfers solid model loads and boundary conditions to the FE model.
WSPRINGS
Creates weak springs on corner nodes of a bounding box of the currently selected elements.
Table 2.73 Load Step Operations
These SOLUTION commands are used to write and solve multiple load steps.
LSCLEAR
Clears loads and load step options from the database.
LSDELE
Deletes load step files.
LSREAD
Reads load and load step option data into the database.
LSSOLVE
Reads and solves multiple load steps.
LSWRITE
Writes load and load step option data to a file.
Table 2.74 Master DOF
These SOLUTION commands are used to define master degrees of freedom.
M
Defines master degrees of freedom for reduced and superelement generation
analyses.
MDELE
Deletes master degrees of freedom.
MGEN
Generates additional MDOF from a previously defined set.
MLIST
Lists the MDOF of freedom.
TOTAL
Specifies automatic MDOF generation.
Table 2.75 Gap Conditions
These SOLUTION commands are used to define gaps for transient dynamic analyses.
GP
Defines a gap condition for transient analyses.
GPDELE
Deletes gap conditions.
GPLIST
Lists the gap conditions.
Table 2.76 Rezoning
These SOLUTION commands are used in analyses that employ rezoning.
REZONE
Initiates a rezoning operation, sets rezoning options, and rebuilds the database.
MAPSOLVE
Maps the solved node and element solutions from an original mesh to a new
mesh.
REMESH
Specifies the starting and ending remeshing points.
AREMESH
Generates an area for creating a new mesh for rezoning.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
241
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.77 Birth and Death
These SOLUTION commands are used for the birth and death option for elements.
EALIVE
Reactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
EKILL
Deactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
ESTIF
Specifies the matrix multiplier for deactivated elements.
Table 2.78 FE Constraints
These SOLUTION commands are used to define constraints on the finite element model.
D
Defines DOF constraints at nodes.
DCUM
Specifies that DOF constraint values are to be accumulated.
DDELE
Deletes degree of freedom constraints.
DJ
Specify displacement (or rotation) boundary conditions on the components
of relative motion of a joint element.
DJDELE
Deletes displacement (or rotation) boundary conditions on the components
of relative motion of a joint element.
DJLIST
Lists boundary conditions applied to joint elements.
DLIST
Lists DOF constraints.
DSCALE
Scales DOF constraint values.
DSYM
Specifies symmetry or antisymmetry DOF constraints on nodes.
GSBDATA
Specifies the constraints or applies the load at the ending point for the generalized plane strain element option.
GSLIST
When using generalized plane strain, lists the input data or solutions.
LDREAD
Reads results from the results file and applies them as loads.
Table 2.79 FE Forces
These SOLUTION commands are used to define nodal loads on the finite element model.
F
Specifies force loads at nodes.
FCUM
Specifies that force loads are to be accumulated.
FDELE
Deletes force loads on nodes.
FJ
Specify forces or moments on the components of the relative motion of a joint
element.
FJDELE
Deletes forces (or moments) on the components of the relative motion of a
joint element.
FJLIST
Lists forces and moments applied on joint elements.
FLIST
Lists force loads on the nodes.
FSCALE
Scales force load values in the database.
Table 2.80 FE Surface Loads
These SOLUTION commands are used to define surface loads on the finite element model.
SF
Specifies surface loads on nodes.
SFBEAM
Specifies surface loads on beam elements.
SFCUM
Specifies that surface loads are to be accumulated.
SFDELE
Deletes surface loads.
242
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These SOLUTION commands are used to define surface loads on the finite element model.
SFE
Specifies surface loads on elements.
SFEDELE
Deletes surface loads from elements.
SFELIST
Lists the surface loads for elements.
SFFUN
Specifies a varying surface load.
SFGRAD
Specifies a gradient (slope) for surface loads.
SFLIST
Lists surface loads.
SFSCALE
Scales surface loads on elements.
Table 2.81 FE Body Loads
These SOLUTION commands are used to define body loads on the finite element model.
BF
Defines a nodal body force load.
BFCUM
Specifies that nodal body force loads are to be accumulated.
BFDELE
Deletes nodal body force loads.
BFE
Defines an element body force load.
BFECUM
Specifies whether to ignore subsequent element body force loads.
BFEDELE
Deletes element body force loads.
BFELIST
Lists the element body force loads.
BFESCAL
Scales element body force loads.
BFLIST
Lists the body force loads on nodes.
BFSCALE
Scales body force loads at nodes.
BFUNIF
Assigns a uniform body force load to all nodes.
LDREAD
Reads results from the results file and applies them as loads.
RIMPORT
Imports initial stresses from an explicit run into ANSYS.
TUNIF
Assigns a uniform temperature to all nodes.
Table 2.82 Status
These SOLUTION commands are for use with the STAT command.
ATYPE
Specifies "Analysis types" as the subsequent status topic.
BIOOPT
Specifies "Biot-Savart options" as the subsequent status topic.
DEACT
Specifies "Element birth and death" as the subsequent status topic.
DYNOPT
Specifies "Dynamic analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
GAP
Specifies "Reduced transient gap conditions" as the subsequent status topic.
GENOPT
Specifies "General options" as the subsequent status topic.
INRTIA
Specifies "Inertial loads" as the subsequent status topic.
LSOPER
Specifies "Load step operations" as the subsequent status topic.
MASTER
Specifies "Master DOF" as the subsequent status topic.
NLOPT
Specifies "Nonlinear analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
OUTOPT
Specifies "Output options" as the subsequent status topic.
SMBODY
Specifies "Body loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SMCONS
Specifies "Constraints on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SMFOR
Specifies "Forces on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
243
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These SOLUTION commands are for use with the STAT command.
SMSURF
Specifies "Surface loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUOPT
Specifies "Solution options" as the subsequent status topic.
SPTOPT
Specifies "Spectrum analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
Table 2.83 Explicit Dynamics
These SOLUTION commands are used for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDADAPT
Activates adaptive meshing in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDALE
Assigns mesh smoothing to explicit dynamic elements that use the ALE formulation.
EDBVIS
Specifies global bulk viscosity coefficients for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCADAPT
Specifies adaptive meshing controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCPU
Specifies CPU time limit for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCSC
Specifies whether to use subcycling in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCTS
Specifies mass scaling and scale factor of computed time step for an explicit
dynamic analysis.
EDDAMP
Defines mass weighted (Alpha) or stiffness weighted (Beta) damping for an
explicit dynamics model.
EDDRELAX
Activates initialization to a prescribed geometry or dynamic relaxation for the
explicit analysis.
EDDUMP
Specifies output frequency for the explicit dynamic restart file (d3dump).
EDENERGY
Specifies energy dissipation controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDFPLOT
Allows plotting of explicit dynamics forces.
EDGCALE
Defines global ALE controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDHGLS
Specifies the hourglass coefficient for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDHIST
Specifies time-history output for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDHTIME
Specifies the time-history output interval for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDINT
Specifies number of integration points for explicit shell and beam output.
EDIS
Specifies stress initialization in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis.
EDLOAD
Specifies loads for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDOPT
Specifies the type of output for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDOUT
Specifies time-history output (ASCII format) for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDPL
Plots a time dependent load curve in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDPVEL
Applies initial velocities to parts or part assemblies in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRC
Specifies rigid/deformable switch controls in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRD
Switches a part from deformable to rigid or from rigid to deformable in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRI
Defines inertia properties for a new rigid body that is created when a deformable
part is switched to rigid in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRST
Specifies the output interval for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRUN
Specifies serial or parallel processing for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDSHELL
Specifies shell computation controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDSOLV
Specifies "explicit dynamics solution" as the subsequent status topic.
244
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These SOLUTION commands are used for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDSTART
Specifies status (new or restart) of an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDTERM
Specifies termination criteria for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDTP
Plots explicit elements based on their time step size.
EDVEL
Applies initial velocities to nodes or node components in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
EDWRITE
Writes explicit dynamics input to an LS-DYNA input file.
REXPORT
Exports displacements from an implicit run to ANSYS LS-DYNA.
Table 2.84 FLOTRAN Checkout
These SOLUTION commands are used for a FLOTRAN analysis.
FLOCHECK
Sets up and runs a zero-iteration FLOTRAN analysis.
Table 2.85 Controls
This SOLUTION command is used to specify controls for electrostatic p-Method analyses.
PEMOPTS
Defines percentage tolerance and error estimation method for electrostatic pMethod solution.
Table 2.86 Radiosity
These SOLUTION commands are used to calculate the radiation view factors and to specify the solution
parameters for the Radiosity solver method.
HEMIOPT
Specifies options for Hemicube view factor calculation.
RADOPT
Specifies Gauss-Seidel Radiosity Solver options.
RDEC
Defines the decimation parameters.
RSURF
Generates the radiosity surface elements and stores them in the database.
RSYMM
Defines the plane of symmetry or center of rotation for the radiosity method.
SPCNOD
Defines a space node for radiation using the Radiosity method.
SPCTEMP
Defines a free-space ambient temperature for radiation using the Radiosity
method.
STEF
Specifies Stefan-Boltzmann radiation constant.
V2DOPT
Specifies 2-D/axisymmetric view factor calculation options.
VFCALC
Computes and stores Hemicube view factors.
VFOPT
Specifies options for view factor file.
QSOPT
Specifies quasi static radiation options.
Table 2.87 Fluid-Structure Interaction
These SOLUTION commands are used for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSAN
Turns a fluid-solid interaction analysis on or off.
FSCO
Sets convergence values for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSDT
Sets time step increment for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSIN
Specifies the interface load transfer option for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSIT
Sets maximum number of iterations for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSOR
Specifies analysis order for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
245
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These SOLUTION commands are used for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSOU
Sets output frequency for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSRE
Sets relaxation values for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSRS
Specifies time or load step number for restart of a fluid-structure interaction
analysis.
FSSTAT
Lists the settings for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSTI
Sets end time and load time for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
FSTR
Specifies static or transient analyses for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
Table 2.88 ANSYS Multi-field solver Analysis
These SOLUTION commands are used forANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFANALYSIS
Turns an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis on or off.
MFBUCKET
Turns a bucket search on or off.
MFCALC
Specifies a calculation frequency for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFCLEAR
Deletes ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis settings.
MFCMMAND
Captures field solution options in a command file.
MFCONV
Sets convergence values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFDTIME
Sets time step increment for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFELEM
Defines a field by grouping element types.
MFEM
Adds more element types to a previously defined field number.
MFEXTER
Defines external fields for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFFNAME
Specifies a file name for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFIMPORT
Imports a new field into a current ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFINTER
Specifies the interface load transfer interpolation option for an ANSYS Multifield solver analysis.
MFITER
Sets the maximum number of stagger iterations for an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
MFLIST
Lists the settings for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFMAP
Calculates, saves, resumes, or deletes mapping data in an ANSYS Multi-field
solver analysis.
MFORDER
Specifies field solution order for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFOUTPUT
Specifies results file output frequency for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFRELAX
Sets relaxation values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFRSTART
Specifies a restart time for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFSURFACE
Defines a surface load transfer for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFTIME
Sets end time for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFTOL
Turns normal distance checking on for surface mapping in an ANSYS Multi-field
solver analysis.
MFVOLUME
Defines volume load transfer across interface for an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
246
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.7. POST1 Commands
These commands are used to postprocess the results with the database processor. The commands are grouped
by functionality.
Table 2.89 Setup
These POST1 commands are used to put data into the database for postprocessing.
APPEND
Reads data from the results file and appends it to the database.
DETAB
Modifies element table results in the database.
DNSOL
Defines or modifies solution results at a node.
FILE
Specifies the data file where results are to be found.
HRCPLX
Computes and stores in the database the time-harmonic solution at a prescribed
phase angle.
PGRSET
Defines the data set to be read from the PGR file.
/POST1
Enters the database results postprocessor.
RESET
Resets all POST1 or POST26 specifications to initial defaults.
SET
Defines the data set to be read from the results file.
SUBSET
Reads results for the selected portions of the model.
Table 2.90 Controls
These POST1 commands are used to control the calculations done for other commands.
AVPRIN
Specifies how principal and vector sums are to be calculated.
AVRES
Specifies how results data will be averaged when PowerGraphics is enabled.
/EFACET
Specifies the number of facets per element edge for PowerGraphics displays.
ERNORM
Controls error estimation calculations.
FORCE
Selects the element nodal force type for output.
INRES
Identifies the data to be retrieved from the results file.
LAYER
Specifies the element layer for which data are to be processed.
RSYS
Activates a coordinate system for printout or display of results.
SHELL
Selects a shell element or shell layer location for results output.
Table 2.91 Results
These POST1 commands are used to process results, such as DOF results, nodal stresses, and element
summable and nonsummable miscellaneous data.
NSORT
Sorts nodal data.
NUSORT
Restores original order for nodal data.
PLCONV
Plots the convergence curve for specified items from a p-method solution.
PLDISP
Displays the displaced structure.
PLESOL
Displays the solution results as discontinuous element contours.
PLNSOL
Displays results as continuous contours.
PLVECT
Displays results as vectors.
PPLOT
Displays an element plot indicating each element's final p-level.
PRCONV
Lists convergence values versus characteristic p-level.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
247
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These POST1 commands are used to process results, such as DOF results, nodal stresses, and element
summable and nonsummable miscellaneous data.
PRESOL
Prints the solution results for elements.
PRJSOL
Print joint element output.
PRNLD
Prints the summed element nodal loads.
PRNSOL
Prints the nodal solution results.
PRRFOR
Used with the FORCE command. Prints the constrained node reaction solution.
PRRSOL
Prints the constrained node reaction solution.
PRSSOL
Prints BEAM188 and BEAM189 section results
PRVECT
Prints results as vector magnitude and direction cosines.
SUMTYPE
Sets the type of summation to be used in the following load case operations.
Table 2.92 Element Table
These POST1 commands are used to operate with the element table, which in turn is used to process
results stored for each element, such as average stresses, heat fluxes, etc.
DESOL
Defines or modifies solution results at a node of an element.
ESORT
Sorts the element table.
ETABLE
Fills a table of element values for further processing.
EUSORT
Restores original order of the element table.
PLETAB
Displays element table items.
PLLS
Displays element table items as contoured areas along elements.
PLVECT
Displays results as vectors.
PRETAB
Prints the element table items.
PRVECT
Prints results as vector magnitude and direction cosines.
SABS
Specifies absolute values for element table operations.
SADD
Forms an element table item by adding two existing items.
SALLOW
Defines the allowable stress table for safety factor calculations.
SEXP
Forms an element table item by exponentiating and multiplying.
SFACT
Allows safety factor or margin of safety calculations to be made.
SFCALC
Calculates the safety factor or margin of safety.
SMAX
Forms an element table item from the maximum of two other items.
SMIN
Forms an element table item from the minimum of two other items.
SMULT
Forms an element table item by multiplying two other items.
SSUM
Calculates and prints the sum of element table items.
TALLOW
Defines the temperature table for safety factor calculations.
VCROSS
Forms element table items from the cross product of two vectors.
VDOT
Forms an element table item from the dot product of two vectors.
Table 2.93 Listing
These POST1 commands are used to control printed listings of results.
/FORMAT
Specifies format controls for tables.
/HEADER
Sets page and table heading print controls.
IRLIST
Prints inertia relief summary table.
248
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These POST1 commands are used to control printed listings of results.
/PAGE
Defines the printout and screen page size.
PRERR
Prints SEPC and TEPC.
PRITER
Prints solution summary data.
Table 2.94 Animation
These POST1 commands are used to animate results.
ANCNTR
Produces an animated sequence of a contoured deformed shape.
ANCUT
Produces an animated sequence of Q-slices.
ANDATA
Produces a sequential contour animation over a range of results data.
ANDSCL
Produces an animated sequence of a deformed shape.
ANCYC
Applies a traveling wave animation to graphics data in a modal cyclic symmetry
analysis.
ANDYNA
Produces an animated sequence of contour values through substeps.
/ANFILE
Saves or resumes an animation sequence to or from a file.
ANFLOW
Produces an animated sequence of particle flow in a flowing fluid or a charged
particle traveling in an electric or magnetic field.
ANHARM
Produces a time-transient animated sequence of time-harmonic results (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
ANIM
Displays graphics data in animated form.
ANISOS
Produces an animated sequence of an isosurface.
ANMODE
Produces an animated sequence of a mode shape.
ANMRES
Performs animation of results over multiple results files in an explicit dynamic
structural analysis or fluid flow analysis with remeshing.
ANTIME
Produces a sequential contour animation over a range of time.
TRTIME
Defines the options used for the PLTRAC (particle flow or charged particle
trace) command.
Table 2.95 Path Operations
These POST1 commands are used for path operations.
PADELE
Deletes a defined path.
PAGET
Writes current path information into an array variable.
PAPUT
Retrieves path information from an array variable.
PARESU
Restores previously saved paths from a file.
PASAVE
Saves selected paths to an external file.
PATH
Defines a path name and establishes parameters for the path.
PCALC
Forms additional labeled path items by operating on existing path items.
PCROSS
Calculates the cross product of two path vectors along the current path.
PDEF
Interpolates an item onto a path.
PDOT
Calculates the dot product of two path vectors along the current path.
PLPAGM
Displays path items along the path geometry.
PLPATH
Displays path items on a graph.
PLSECT
Displays membrane and membrane-plus-bending linearized stresses.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
249
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These POST1 commands are used for path operations.
PMAP
Creates mapping of the path geometry by defining path interpolation division
points.
PPATH
Defines a path by picking or defining nodes, or locations on the currently active
working plane, or by entering specific coordinate locations.
PRANGE
Determines the path range.
PRPATH
Prints path items along a geometry path.
PRSECT
Calculates and prints linearized stresses along a section path.
PSEL
Selects a path or paths.
PVECT
Interpolates a set of items onto a path.
Table 2.96 Surface Operations
These POST1 commands are used to define an arbitrary surface and to develop results information for
that surface.
SUCALC
Create new result data by operating on two existing result datasets on a given
surface.
SUCR
Create a surface.
SUDEL
Delete geometry information as well as any mapped results for specified surface
or for all selected surfaces.
SUEVAL
Perform operations on a mapped item and store result in a scalar parameter.
SUGET
Create and dimension an NPT row array parameter named PARM, where NPT
is the number of geometry points in SurfName.
SUMAP
Map results onto selected surface(s).
SUPL
Plot specified SetName result data on all selected surfaces or on the specified
surface.
SUPR
Print surface information.
SURESU
Resume surface definitions from a specified file.
SUSAVE
Save surface definitions and result items to a file.
SUSEL
Selects a subset of surfaces
SUVECT
Operate between two mapped result vectors.
Table 2.97 Load Case Calculations
These POST1 commands are used for combining results from different load steps.
LCABS
Specifies absolute values for load case operations.
LCASE
Reads a load case into the database.
LCDEF
Creates a load case from a set of results on a results file.
LCFACT
Defines scale factors for load case operations.
LCFILE
Creates a load case from an existing load case file.
LCOPER
Performs load case operations.
LCSEL
Selects a subset of load cases.
LCSUM
Specifies whether to process nonsummable items in load case operations.
LCWRITE
Creates a load case by writing results to a load case file.
LCZERO
Zeroes the results portion of the database.
RAPPND
Appends results data from the database to the results file.
250
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Table 2.98 Magnetics Calculations
These POST1 commands are used for special purpose magnetics postprocessing.
CURR2D
Calculates current flow in a 2-D conductor.
EMAGERR
Calculates the relative error in an electrostatic or electromagnetic field analysis.
EMF
Calculates the electromotive force (emf), or voltage drop along a predefined
path.
EMFT
Summarizes electromagnetic forces and torques on a selected set of nodes.
FLUXV
Calculates the flux passing through a closed contour.
FMAGSUM
Summarizes electromagnetic force calculations on element components.
FOR2D
Calculates magnetic forces on a body.
IMPD
Calculates the impedance of a conductor at a reference plane.
MMF
Calculates the magnetomotive force along a path.
PLF2D
Generates a contour line plot of equipotentials.
POWERH
Calculates the rms power loss in a conductor or lossy dielectric.
QFACT
Calculates the quality factor for high-frequency electromagnetic resonators.
REFLCOEF
Calculates the voltage reflection coefficient (REFLC), standing wave ratio (VSWR),
and return loss (RL) in a COAX fed device; at postprocessing of an HF electromagnetic analysis.
SENERGY
Determines the stored magnetic energy or co-energy.
SPARM
Calculates scattering (S) parameters between ports of a waveguide.
TORQ2D
Calculates torque on a body in a magnetic field.
TORQC2D
Calculates torque on a body in a magnetic field based on a circular path.
TORQSUM
Summarizes electromagnetic torque calculations on element components.
Table 2.99 Fatigue
These POST1 commands are used for fatigue analyses.
FE
Defines a set of fatigue event parameters.
FELIST
Lists the fatigue event parameters.
FL
Defines a set of fatigue location parameters.
FLLIST
Lists the fatigue location parameters.
FP
Defines the fatigue S vs. N and Sm vs. T tables.
FPLIST
Lists the property table stored for fatigue evaluation.
FS
Stores fatigue stress components at a node.
FSDELE
Deletes a stress condition for a fatigue location, event, and loading.
FSLIST
Lists the stresses stored for fatigue evaluation.
FSNODE
Calculates and stores the stress components at a node for fatigue.
FSPLOT
Displays a fatigue stress item for a fatigue location and event.
FSSECT
Calculates and stores total linearized stress components.
FTCALC
Performs fatigue calculations for a particular node location.
FTSIZE
Defines the fatigue data storage array.
FTWRITE
Writes all currently stored fatigue data on a file.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
251
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.100 Trace Points
These POST1 commands are used to trace particle motions in a flow stream.
PLTRAC
Displays a particle flow or charged particle trace on an element display.
TRPDEL
Deletes particle flow or charged particle trace points.
TRPLIS
Lists the particle flow or charged particle trace points.
TRPOIN
Defines a point through which a particle flow or charged particle trace will
travel.
Table 2.101 FLOTRAN Processing
These POST1 commands are used to postprocess the FLOTRAN CFD results.
FLREAD
Reads the residual file written by the FLOTRAN CFD option.
Table 2.102 Special Purpose
These POST1 commands are used for various special purposes.
BFINT
Activates the body force interpolation operation.
CBDOF
Activates cut boundary interpolation (for submodeling).
CMSFILE
Specifies the component mode synthesis (CMS) results files to include when
plotting the mode shape of an assembly.
/CYCEXPAND
Graphically expands displacements, stresses and strains of a cyclically symmetric
model partially or though the full 360 degrees by combining the real (original
nodes and elements) and imaginary (duplicate nodes and elements) parts of
the solution.
CYCPHASE
Provides tools for determining minimum and maximum possible result values
from frequency couplets produced in a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
/EXPAND
Allows the creation of a larger graphic display than that which is represented
by the actual finite element analysis model.
EXPAND
Displays the results of a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
FSSPARM
Calculates reflection and transmission properties of a frequency selective surface.
FSUM
Sums the nodal force and moment contributions of elements.
HFANG
Defines or displays spatial angles of a spherical radiation surface for antenna
parameter calculations.
HFARRAY
Defines phased array antenna characteristics.
HFNEAR
Calculates the electromagnetic field at points exterior to the visual equivalent
source surface (Maxwell surface flag).
HFPOWER
Calculates power terms of a multi-port network.
HFSYM
Sets symmetry planes for the computation of high-frequency electromagnetic
fields in the near and far field domains (beyond the finite element region).
INTSRF
Integrates nodal results on an exterior surface.
KCALC
Calculates stress intensity factors in fracture mechanics analyses.
NFORCE
Sums the nodal forces and moments of elements attached to nodes.
PLCRACK
Displays cracking and crushing locations in SOLID65 elements.
PLHFFAR
Displays electromagnetic far fields and far field parameters.
PLSCH
Converts and plots scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters on a Smith
chart.
252
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These POST1 commands are used for various special purposes.
PLSYZ
Converts and plots scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters as a
function of frequency.
PRHFFAR
Prints electromagnetic far fields and far field parameters.
PRSYZ
Converts and lists scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters.
RMFLVEC
Writes eigenvectors of fluid nodes to a file for use in damping parameter extraction.
RSPLIT
Creates one or more results file(s) from the current results file based on subsets
of elements.
SPOINT
Defines a point for moment summations.
Table 2.103 Status
These POST1 commands are for use with the STAT command.
CALC
Specifies "Calculation settings" as the subsequent status topic.
DATADEF
Specifies "Directly defined data status" as the subsequent status topic.
DEFINE
Specifies "Data definition settings" as the subsequent status topic.
DISPLAY
Specifies "Display settings" as the subsequent status topic.
LCCALC
Specifies "Load case settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POINT
Specifies "Point flow tracing settings" as the subsequent status topic.
Specifies "Print settings" as the subsequent status topic.
SORT
Specifies "Sort settings" as the subsequent status topic.
SPEC
Specifies "Miscellaneous specifications" as the subsequent status topic.
Table 2.104 Failure Criteria
These POST1 commands are for use with the failure criteria.
FC
Provides failure criteria information and activates a data table to input temperature-dependent stress and strain limits.
FCCHECK
Checks both the strain and stress input criteria for all materials.
FCDELE
Deletes previously defined failure criterion data for the given material.
FCLIST
To list what the failure criteria is that you have input.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
253
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
254
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.8. POST26 Commands
These commands are used to postprocess the results with the time-history processor. The commands are grouped
by functionality.
Table 2.105 Set Up
These POST26 commands are used to store data for processing.
ANSOL
Specifies averaged nodal data to be stored from the results file in the solution
coordinate system.
DATA
Reads data records from a file into a variable.
EDREAD
Reads explicit dynamics output into variables for time-history postprocessing.
ESOL
Specifies element data to be stored from the results file.
FILE
Specifies the data file where results are to be found.
GAPF
Defines the gap force data to be stored in a variable.
GSSOL
Specifies which results to store from the results file when using generalized
plane strain.
JSOL
Stores the displacement, rotation, reaction forces, and moments for the joint
element.
NSOL
Specifies nodal data to be stored from the results file.
NSTORE
Defines which time points are to be stored.
NUMVAR
Specifies the number of variables allowed in POST26.
/POST26
Enters the time-history results postprocessor.
RESET
Resets all POST1 or POST26 specifications to initial defaults.
RFORCE
Specifies the total reaction force data to be stored.
/RGB
Specifies the RGB color values for indices and contours.
SOLU
Specifies solution summary data per substep to be stored.
STORE
Stores data in the database for the defined variables.
TIMERANGE
Specifies the time range for which data are to be stored.
VARDEL
Deletes a variable (GUI).
VARNAM
Names (or renames) a variable.
Table 2.106 Controls
These POST26 commands are used to control the calculations of other commands.
CFACT
Defines complex scaling factors to be used with operations.
FORCE
Selects the element nodal force type for output.
LAYERP26
Specifies the element layer for which data are to be stored.
SHELL
Selects a shell element or shell layer location for results output.
TVAR
Changes time to the cumulative iteration number.
Table 2.107 Operations
These POST26 commands are used to perform operations on the stored variables.
ABS
Forms the absolute value of a variable.
ADD
Adds variables.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
255
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These POST26 commands are used to perform operations on the stored variables.
ATAN
Forms the arctangent of a complex variable.
CLOG
Forms the common log of a variable
CONJUG
Forms the complex conjugate of a variable.
DERIV
Differentiates a variable.
EXP
Forms the exponential of a variable.
FILLDATA
Fills a variable by a ramp function.
IMAGIN
Forms an imaginary variable from a complex variable.
INT1
Integrates a variable.
LARGE
Finds the largest (the envelope) of three variables.
NLOG
Forms the natural log of a variable.
PROD
Multiplies variables.
QUOT
Divides two variables.
REALVAR
Forms a variable using only the real part of a complex variable.
SMALL
Finds the smallest of three variables.
SQRT
Forms the square root of a variable.
Table 2.108 Display
These POST26 commands are used to display the results.
PLCPLX
Specifies the part of a complex variable to display.
PLTIME
Defines the time range for which data are to be displayed.
PLVAR
Displays up to ten variables in the form of a graph.
SPREAD
Turns on a dashed tolerance curve for the subsequent curve plots.
XVAR
Specifies the X variable to be displayed.
Table 2.109 Listing
These POST26 commands are used to produce tabular listings of the results.
EXTREM
Lists the extreme values for variables.
LINES
Specifies the length of a printed page.
NPRINT
Defines which time points stored are to be listed.
PRCPLX
Defines the output form for complex variables.
PRTIME
Defines the time range for which data are to be listed.
PRVAR
Lists variables vs. time (or frequency).
Table 2.110 Special Purpose
These POST26 commands are used for various special purposes.
CVAR
Computes covariance between two quantities.
PMGTRAN
Summarizes electromagnetic results from a transient analysis.
RESP
Generates a response spectrum.
RPSD
Computes response power spectral density (PSD).
SMOOTH
Allows smoothing of noisy data and provides a graphical representation of the
data.
256
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
These POST26 commands are used for various special purposes.
VGET
Moves a variable into an array parameter vector.
VPUT
Moves an array parameter vector into a variable.
Table 2.111 Status
These POST26 commands are for use with the STAT command.
DEFINE
Specifies "Data definition settings" as the subsequent status topic.
OPERATE
Specifies "Operation data" as the subsequent status topic.
PLOTTING
Specifies "Plotting settings" as the subsequent status topic.
Specifies "Print settings" as the subsequent status topic.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
257
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
258
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.11: AUX12 Commands
2.9. AUX2 Commands
These commands are used to examine the contents of binary files produced by the program. The commands
are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.112 Binary Files
These AUX2 commands are used to dump the contents of binary files.
/AUX2
Enters the binary file dumping processor.
DUMP
Dumps the contents of a binary file.
FILEAUX2
Specifies the binary file to be dumped.
FORM
Specifies the format of the file dump.
HBMAT
Writes an assembled global matrix in Harwell-Boeing format.
2.10. AUX3 Commands
The auxiliary processor /AUX3 allows you to operate on results files by deleting sets or by changing values.
Table 2.113 Results Files
These commands are related to the /AUX3 command.
/AUX3
Enters the results file editing processor.
COMPRESS
Deletes all specified sets.
DELETE
Specifies sets in the results file to be deleted before postprocessing.
FILEAUX3
Specifies the results file to be edited.
LIST
Lists out the sets in the results file.
MODIFY
Changes the listed values of the data in a set.
UNDELETE
Removes results sets from the group of sets selected for editing.
2.11. AUX12 Commands
These commands are used to create a radiation substructure for use in thermal analyses. The commands are
grouped by functionality.
Table 2.114 Radiation Substructures
These AUX12 commands are used to add radiation effects to a thermal analysis.
/AUX12
Enters the radiation matrix generation processor.
EMIS
Specifies the emissivity as a material property.
GEOM
Defines the geometry specifications for the radiation matrix calculation.
MPRINT
Specifies that radiation matrices are to be printed.
SPACE
Defines a space node for radiation.
STEF
Specifies Stefan-Boltzmann radiation constant.
VFQUERY
Queries and prints element Hemicube view factors and average view factor.
VTYPE
Specifies the viewing procedure used to determine the form factors.
WRITE
Writes the radiation matrix file.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
259
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
2.12. AUX15 Commands
These commands are used to read in an IGES file for analysis in ANSYS. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.115 IGES
These AUX15 commands read an IGES format file into PREP7 data.
/AUX15
Enters the IGES file transfer processor.
IGESIN
Transfers IGES data from a file into ANSYS.
IOPTN
Controls options relating to importing a model.
2.13. RUNSTATS Commands
These commands are used to estimate run times and file sizes. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.116 Run Statistics Estimator
These RUNSTATS commands are used to calculate estimates of ANSYS program run times and file sizes.
RALL
Calculates solver statistics and run time estimates.
RFILSZ
Estimates file sizes.
RITER
Supplies an estimate of the number of iterations for time estimates.
RMEMRY
Prints memory statistics for the current model.
RSPEED
Supplies system performance information for use in time estimates.
RSTAT
Prints the FE model statistics of the model.
RTIMST
Prints runtime estimates.
/RUNST
Enters the run statistics processor.
RWFRNT
Generates wavefront statistics and memory requirements.
260
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.13: RUNSTATS Commands
2.14. OPTIMIZATION Commands
These commands are used for design optimization analyses. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.117 Specifications
These OPTIMIZATION commands set up the design optimization variables.
OPEQN
Controls curve fitting for the subproblem approximation method.
OPFACT
Defines the type of factorial evaluation to be performed.
OPFRST
Defines specifications for the first order optimization method.
OPGRAD
Specifies which design set will be used for gradient evaluation.
OPKEEP
Specifies whether to save the best-set results and database file.
OPLOOP
Specifies controls for optimization looping.
OPPRNT
Activates detailed optimization summary printout.
OPRAND
Defines the number of iterations for a random optimization.
OPSUBP
Defines number of iterations for subproblem approximation method.
OPSWEEP
Specifies the reference point and number of evaluation points for a sweep
generation.
/OPT
Enters the design optimizer.
OPTYPE
Specifies the optimization method to be used.
OPUSER
Defines specifications for user-supplied external optimization.
OPVAR
Specifies the parameters to be treated as optimization variables.
TOCOMP
Defines single or multiple compliance as the topological optimization function.
TODEF
Defines parameters for and initializes topological optimization.
TOFREQ
Defines single or mean frequency formulation as the topological optimization
function.
TOTYPE
Specifies solution method for topological optimization.
TOVAR
Specifies the objective and constraints for the topological optimization problem.
Table 2.118 Operations
These OPTIMIZATION commands operate on the design optimization variables.
OPADD
Forms a set of optimization parameters by adding two sets.
OPCLR
Clears the optimization database.
OPDEL
Deletes optimization design sets.
OPMAKE
Creates a design set using active scalar parameter values.
OPSEL
Selects design sets for subsequent optimization looping.
Table 2.119 Files
These OPTIMIZATION commands operate on the design optimization files.
OPANL
Defines the analysis file to be used for optimization looping.
OPDATA
Identifies the file where optimization data is to be saved.
OPRESU
Reads optimization data into the optimization database.
OPSAVE
Writes all optimization data to a file.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
261
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.120 Run
These OPTIMIZATION commands perform the design optimization analysis.
OPEXE
Initiates optimization looping.
TOEXE
Executes one topological optimization iteration.
TOLOOP
Execute several topological optimizations iterations.
Table 2.121 Display
These OPTIMIZATION commands are used to display the optimization results as plots.
OPLFA
Displays the results of a factorial evaluation.
OPLGR
Graphs the results of a gradient evaluation.
OPLIST
Displays the parameters for design sets.
OPLSW
Graphs the results of a global sweep generation.
OPRFA
Prints the results of a factorial evaluation.
OPRGR
Prints the results of a gradient evaluation.
OPRSW
Prints the results of a global sweep generation.
PLVAROPT
Displays up to ten parameters in the form of a graph.
PRVAROPT
Lists up to ten optimization parameters.
TOGRAPH
Plots iteration solution of topological optimization.
TOLIST
Lists all topological optimization functions currently defined.
TOPLOT
Plot current topological density distribution.
TOPRINT
Print iteration solution history of topological optimization.
TOSTAT
Displays topological optimization status and results information.
XVAROPT
Specifies the parameter to be used as the X-axis variable.
2.15. VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY Commands
These commands are used for the Variational Technology products.
Table 2.122 DesignXplorer VT
These Variational Technology commands are part of the ANSYS DesignXplorer VT.
SXCLR
Specifies the part of the Variational Technology database to be cleared.
SXDISC
Defines an element component as a discrete input variable for the
DesignXplorer VT.
SXFREQ
Defines the frequency as input variable for the FS Module or the DesignXplorer
VT.
SXGEOM
Defines a geometry parameter created with ANSYS ParaMesh as a DesignXplorer
VT input variable.
SXIN
Defines an inertial load as an input variable for DesignXplorer VT.
SXMETH
Defines the solution methods options for the DesignXplorer VT.
SXMP
Defines a material property as an input variable for the DesignXplorer VT.
SXPOST
Launches the DesignXplorer VT postprocessing application.
SXREAL
Defines a real constant property as an input variable for the DesignXplorer VT.
SXRFIL
Specifies the file to which DesignXplorer VT results are written.
262
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.16: PROBABILISTIC Design Commands
These Variational Technology commands are part of the ANSYS DesignXplorer VT.
SXRSLT
Defines a result quantity for the DesignXplorer VT.
SXSEC
Defines a section property as an input variable for the FS Module or the
DesignXplorer VT.
SXSTAT
Print the status of the DesignXplorer VT definitions and settings into a separate
window.
SXVMOD
Modifies the status or current value of an input variable for the DesignXplorer
VT.
Table 2.123 FS Module
These Variational Technology commands are part of the ANSYS Frequency Sweep VT.
SXFREQ
Defines the frequency as input variable for the FS Module or the DesignXplorer
VT.
2.16. PROBABILISTIC Design Commands
These commands are used for probabilistic design analyses. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.124 Deterministic Model
The following PDS commands allow the specification of the deterministic model.
PDANL
Defines the analysis file to be used for probabilistic looping.
Table 2.125 Probabilistic Preprocessing
The following PDS commands allow the specification and visualization of the probabilistic model.
PDCORR
Specifies the correlation between two random input variables.
PDINQR
Retrieves a value and stores it as a user-parameter.
PDPLOT
Plots the distribution curves of a defined random input variable.
PDVAR
Specifies the parameters to be treated as probabilistic design variables.
Table 2.126 Probabilistic Methods
The following PDS commands allow the specification of the probabilistic methods and their options
used in a probabilistic analysis.
PDDOEL
Defines design of experiment levels for an individual random input variable.
PDDMCS
Specifies options for Monte Carlo Simulations.
PDMETH
Specifies the probabilistic analysis method.
PDUSER
Specifies options for user-specified sampling methods.
Table 2.127 Run Probabilistic Analysis
The following PDS commands allow the execution of a probabilistic analysis.
PDEXE
Executes the probabilistic analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
263
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
Table 2.128 Probabilistic Postprocessing
The following PDS commands allow the probabilistic postprocessing and the visualization of the
probabilistic results
PDCDF
Plots the cumulative distribution function.
PDCMAT
Prints the correlation coefficient matrix.
PDHIST
Plots the frequency histogram.
PDPINV
Prints the result of the inversion of a probability.
PDPROB
Prints a probability result.
PDROPT
Specifies the options for an HTML report.
PDSCAT
Plots a scatter graph.
PDSENS
Plots the probabilistic sensitivities.
PDSHIS
Plots sample history values.
PDWRITE
Generates an HTML report for the probabilistic analysis.
Table 2.129 Probabilistic Database
The following PDS commands provide access to the probabilistic database.
PDCLR
Clears the probabilistic design database.
PDRESU
Reads the probabilistic model data and stores it in the database.
PDSAVE
Writes the probabilistic model data to a file.
Table 2.130 Response Surface
The following PDS commands allow the evaluation, visualization, and use of the response surfaces.
RSFIT
Fit a response surface for an output parameter in a solution set.
RSPLOT
Plot a response surface.
RSPRNT
Print a response surface.
RSSIMS
Performs Monte Carlo simulations on response surface(s).
Table 2.131 Auxiliary Commands and Information
The following commands are helpful for using the PDS.
/PDS
Enters the probabilistic design system.
2.17. DISPLAY Program Commands
These commands are used for the DISPLAY program. The DISPLAY program is a companion program to ANSYS,
used for recovering graphics displays produced within ANSYS. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.132 Set Up
These DISPLAY commands are used to set up the DISPLAY program.
/CMAP
Changes an existing or creates a new color mapping table.
/DEVDISP
Controls graphics device options.
FILEDISP
Specifies the file containing the graphics data.
HELPDISP
Displays help information on DISPLAY program commands.
264
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.18: REDUCED Order Modeling Commands
These DISPLAY commands are used to set up the DISPLAY program.
NOCOLOR
Removes color from graphics displays.
/SEG
Allows graphics data to be stored in the local terminal memory.
/SHOWDISP
Defines the display driver name.
TRANS
Reformats File.GRPH for improved performance with plotters.
Table 2.133 Driver Options
These DISPLAY commands are used to specify the graphics driver and options for subsequent plots.
TERM
Specifies various terminal driver options.
Table 2.134 Action
These DISPLAY commands are used to produce the plots and exit the program.
FINISH
Exits normally from a processor.
PLOT
Forms a display.
STAT
Displays the status of database settings.
2.18. REDUCED Order Modeling Commands
These commands are used for reduced order modeling analyses. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table 2.135 Set Up
These commands are used to save or resume the ROM database.
RMRESUME
Resumes ROM data from a file.
RMSAVE
Saves ROM data to file.
Table 2.136 Preparation
These commands are used to create the input files for the ROM Generation Pass.
RMNDISP
Extracts neutral plane displacements from a test load or element load solution
for the ROM method.
RMNEVEC
Extracts neutral plane eigenvectors from a modal analysis for the ROM method.
Table 2.137 Generation Pass
These commands are used to create a reduced order model.
RMALIST
Lists all defined master nodes for a ROM method.
RMANL
Assigns model database, dimensionality, and operating direction for the ROM
method.
RMASTER
Defines master nodes for the ROM method.
RMCAP
Defines lumped capacitance pairs between conductors C1 and C2 for a ROM
method.
RMCLIST
Lists all lumped capacitances defined.
RMMLIST
Lists all mode specifications for the ROM method.
RMMRANGE
Defines and edits various modal parameters for the ROM method.
RMMSELECT
Selects modes for the ROM method.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
265
Chapter 2: Command Groupings
These commands are used to create a reduced order model.
RMPORDER
Defines polynomial orders for ROM functions.
RMRGENERATE
Performs fitting procedure for all ROM functions to generate response surfaces.
RMROPTIONS
Defines options for ROM response surface fitting.
RMRPLOT
Plots response surface of ROM function or its derivatives with respect to the
dominant mode(s).
RMRSTATUS
Prints status of response surface for ROM function.
RMSMPLE
Runs finite element solutions and obtains sample points for the ROM method.
RMXPORT
Exports ROM model to external VHDL-AMS simulator.
Table 2.138 Use Pass
These commands use the reduced order model in an analysis.
DCVSWP
Performs a DC voltage sweep on a ROM element.
RMLVSCALE
Defines element load vector scaling for a ROM use pass.
RMUSE
Activates ROM use pass for ROM elements.
266
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Chapter 3: Command Dictionary
This chapter contains a dictionary of the ANSYS commands, listed in alphabetical order. The star (*) and slash (/)
of the star and slash commands are ignored for alphabetization (for example, the /SHOW command appears
between the SHELL and SHPP commands). As in a dictionary, keywords are located at the top of each page (in
the printed version only) indicating the first and last commands contained on that page.
The following section documents the components of a command description.
3.1. Components of a Command Description
SAMPLECMD, Key
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping or load stepping.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Argument Descriptions
Key
Automatic time stepping key:
OFF -Do not use automatic time stepping
ON -Use automatic time stepping.
Default: No automatic time stepping.
Notes
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping (or load stepping) over this load step. If Key = ON, both time
step prediction and time step bisection will be used. Used only if DTIME (specified on the DELTIM command) is
less than the time span or conversely, if NSBSTP (on the NSUBST command) is greater than one.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Product Restrictions
In ANSYS Professional, Key is automatically set to ON and cannot be changed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu> Preprocessor >Loads> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substps
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substps
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Chapter 3: Command Dictionary
3.1.1. Features Documented in ANSYS Commands
The first line of the command description shows the command name followed by the argument names (if any).
The second line summarizes the command function. The summary is not intended to be all inclusive:
SAMPLECMD, Key
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping or load stepping.
Listed on the next line are codes that will help you find other commands in the program with related functionality.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
"SOLUTION: Load Step Options" is the code in the example above. There is at least one group code for each
command. The first portion of the code before the colon (:) tells which of the tables in Chapter 2, Command
Groupings the command can be found in. These are major groupings, such as PREP7 or APDL commands. In
the example above, SOLUTION commands are found in Section 2.6: SOLUTION Commands. Most of these major
groupings are processors, and in those cases it is implied that the command can be entered only when in that
processor. Any exceptions are noted under "Notes" later in the description.
The second portion of the code, after the colon, is the subtable in Chapter 2, Command Groupings containing
the command. The subtables list commands that relate to each other in function. In the example, the code "Load
Step Options" means that other commands related to load step options can be found in that subtable of Section 2.6: SOLUTION Commands (Table 2.66: Load Step Options).
If you are viewing this manual in the ANSYS Help System, just click on the code to follow the link to the corresponding table. Then click on any of the commands in the table, to follow the link to its description.
If you are reading the printed version, simply turn to the appropriate table in Chapter 2, Command Groupings.
The table lists the page number where the command is documented.
The next line displays a series of product codes, which may contain all of the ANSYS product codes:
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
or a subset of them:
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
For more information on product codes, see Section 1.1.1.1: Product Codes.
Following this "product code" line is the description of all arguments, if any, of the command:
Key
Automatic time stepping key:
OFF -Do not use automatic time stepping (default).
ON -Use automatic time stepping.
32
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 3.1: Components of a Command Description
The argument is described and, where necessary, valid choices for the argument are described. Many arguments
list defaults, which are the values assumed for that argument if you enter the command but leave the argument
blank. On the other hand, shown after the argument descriptions is often another default:
Command Default
No automatic time stepping.
This is the command default. This is the specification assumed by the program if you do not enter the command
at all. Only commands that set specifications (specification commands) have defaults listed. Commands that
cause some action, such as performing some calculation, are called action commands and simply do not perform
the action if the command is not entered. Defaults are not listed for action commands.
Following the default listing are any notes about the command. These notes expand on the summary description
given up near the command format, and describe any other behavior, restrictions, suggestions, etc. of that
command:
Notes
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping (or load stepping) over this load step. If Key = ON, both time
step prediction and time step bisection will be used. Used only if DTIME (specified on the DELTIM command) is
less than the time span or conversely, if NSBSTP (on the NSUBST command) is greater than one.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
If the command behaves differently, or has restrictions, in any of the various ANSYS products, those differences
are described in the Product Restrictions section:
In ANSYS Professional, Key is automatically set to ON and cannot be changed.
Product Restrictions
In ANSYS Professional, Key is automatically set to ON and cannot be changed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu >Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substps
Main Menu >Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc >Freq and Substps
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step
These menu paths are intended as guides to help you find the commands in the GUI. Be aware, however, that
often the paths are valid only if some other command has been previously issued. For example, you won't be
able to follow a path to transient analysis options if you have not selected a transient analysis in the first place.
Not all commands are directly accessible through the menu (although some of them may be generated indirectly
by some menu function). Such cases are indicated by the following statement in the menu path listing:
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed directly in the menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
33
34
Connection Commands
~CAT5IN, Name, Extension, Path, Entity, FMT, NOCL, NOAN
Transfers a .CATPart file into the ANSYS program.
CAD Import
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
The name of a valid .CATPart file, created with CATIA Version 5.0. The first character of the file name must
be an alphanumeric.
Extension
The extension for the file. The default extension is .CATPart.
Path
The path name of the directory in which the file resides enclosed in single quotes. The default path name is
the current working directory.
Entity
Entity to be imported.
SOLIDS
Solids only, imported as ANSYS volumes (default).
SURFACES
Surfaces only, imported as ANSYS areas.
WIREFRAME
Wireframe only, imported as ANSYS lines.
ALL
All entities. Use this option when the file contains different types of entities.
FMT
The format in which ANSYS will store the model.
0
Neutral format (default). Defeaturing after import is restricted.
1
Solid format; this allows defeaturing after import.
NOCL
Remove tiny objects.
0
Remove tiny objects without checking model validity (default).
1
Do not remove tiny objects.
NOAN
Perform an analysis of the model.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
~CATIAIN
0
Analyze the model (default).
1
Do not analyze the model.
Notes
More information on importing CATIA Version 5 parts is available in Section 2.2: ANSYS Connection for CATIA
V5 in the ANSYS Connection User's Guide.
Menu Paths
File> Import> CATIA5
~CATIAIN, Name, Extension, Path, - -, - -, BLANK, - Transfers a CATIA model into the ANSYS program.
CAD Import
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
The name of a valid CATIA model, created with CATIA 4.x or lower. The first character of the file name must
be an alphanumeric.
Extension
The extension for the file. The default extension is .model.
Path
The path name of the directory in which the file resides, enclosed in single quotes. The default path name
is the current working directory.
--
Unused field.
--
Unused field.
BLANK
Sets whether to import blanked entities.
0
Does not import blanked (suppressed) CATIA entities (default).
1
Imports blanked entities. The portions of CATIA data that were suppressed will be included in the import.
--
Unused field.
Notes
More information on importing CATIA parts is available in Section 2.1: ANSYS Connection for CATIA V4 in the
ANSYS Connection User's Guide.
36
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
~PARAIN
Menu Paths
File> Import> CATIA
~CIFIN, Filename, Ext, Dir, Scale, Offset
Transfers an electronic layer geometry file in CIF format into the ANSYS program.
CAD Import
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Filename
The name of valid CIF file.
Ext
Extension for the CIF file.
Dir
Directory.
Scale
Scale input factor, defaults to 1.
Offset
Layer offset, defaults to 1000.
Notes
Each layer has area, line, and keypoint components named A_Layer, L_Layer, and K_Layer where Layer is the
layer name on the CIF file. An assembly named Layer is created from all layer components. The material attribute
number MAT (MAT command) is set to the layer number in the CIF file.
More information on importing CIF parts is available in Section 2.3: ANSYS Connection for CIF in the ANSYS
Connection User's Guide.
Menu Paths
File> Import> CIF
~PARAIN, Name, Extension, Path, Entity, FMT, Scale
Transfers a Parasolid file into the ANSYS program.
CAD Import
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
The name of a valid Parasolid file. The first character of the file name must be an alphanumeric.
Extension
The extension for the file. The default extension is .x_t on a PC or .xmt_txt on a Unix system. Parasolid files
are compatible across systems, and do not need to be renamed to be used on another platform.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
37
~PARAIN
Path
The path name of the directory in which the file resides, enclosed in single quotes. The default path name
is the current working directory.
Entity
Entity to be imported:
SOLIDS
Solids only, imported as ANSYS volumes (default)
SURFACES
Surfaces only, imported as ANSYS areas.
WIREFRAME
Wireframe only, imported as ANSYS lines.
ALL
All entities. Use this option when the file contains more than one type of entity.
FMT
Sets the format in which ANSYS will store the model
0
Neutral format (default). Defeaturing after import is restricted. Use this option if you need to scale a
model to a specific unit of measure (other than meters).
1
Solid format; this allows defeaturing after import.
Scale
Allows scaling for the model
0
Do not rescale the model; retain the default Parasolid setting of meters (default).
1
Scale the model if warranted by the model size.
Very small models will be scaled by the factor of 10 or 100 to increase the chance of successful import; the
scaling factor used is displayed in the output window and in the .para_log file. Because scaling changes the
dimensions of the model, you must apply loads and material properties appropriately. If the model cannot
be properly scaled, the analysis may fail.
If you need to scale your model to a specific set of measurements, set FMT = 0, then use either the VLSCALE,
ARSCALE or LSSCALE command to select a different unit of measure.
Notes
More information on importing Parasolid parts is available in Section 2.4: ANSYS Connection for Parasolid in the
ANSYS Connection User's Guide.
Menu Paths
File> Import> PARA
38
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
~SATIN
~PROEIN, Name, Extension, Path, Proecomm, FMT
Transfers a Pro/ENGINEER part into the ANSYS program.
CAD Import
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
The name of the Pro/ENGINEER part to be imported, which cannot exceed 64 characters in length and must
begin with an alphanumeric character. Special characters such as & - and * and spaces are not permitted in
the part name.
Extension
The general Pro/ENGINEER extension format is prt. The assembly extension format is asm
Path
Full path name to the directory containing the part. The default is the current working directory. Neither the
path name nor the file name should contain a space.
Proecomm
The name of the version of Pro/ENGINEER you are using. pro22 is the default version number; earlier releases
are also supported. Note that the full path name to the pro command should not be used here since the
path name should have been defined in the PATH variable. The Pro/ENGINEER command name is set by the
ANSYS_PROE_CMD environment variable.
FMT
The format in which ANSYS will store the model.
0
Neutral format (default). Defeaturing after import is restricted.
1
Solid format; this allows defeaturing after import.
Notes
More information on importing Pro/ENGINEER parts is available in Section 2.5: ANSYS Connection for Pro/ENGINEER
in the ANSYS Connection User's Guide.
Menu Paths
File> Import> Pro/E
~SATIN, Name, Extension, Path, Entity, FMT, NOCL, NOAN
Transfers a .SAT file into the ANSYS program.
CAD Import
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
The name of a valid .SAT file, created with a supported version of ACIS. The first character of the file name
must be an alphanumeric. See File Names in the ANSYS Commands Reference for more information about
ANSYS file naming conventions.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
39
~SATIN
Extension
The extension for the file. The default extension is .sat.
Path
The path name of the directory in which the file resides enclosed in single quotes. The default path name is
the current working directory.
Entity
Entity to be imported.
SOLIDS
Solids only, imported as ANSYS volumes (default).
SURFACES
Surfaces only, imported as ANSYS areas.
WIREFRAME
Wireframe only, imported as ANSYS lines.
ALL
All entities. Use this option when the file contains different types of entities.
FMT
The format in which ANSYS will store the model.
0
Neutral format (default). Defeaturing after import is restricted.
1
Solid format; this allows defeaturing after import.
NOCL
Remove tiny objects.
0
Remove tiny objects without checking model validity (default).
1
Do not remove tiny objects.
NOAN
Perform an ACIS analysis of the model.
0
Analyze the model (default).
1
Do not analyze the model.
Note NOCL and NOAN are not supported in the ANSYS GUI.
Notes
More information on importing SAT parts is available in Section 2.6: ANSYS Connection for SAT in the ANSYS
Connection User's Guide.
310
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
~UGIN
Menu Paths
File> Import> SAT
~UGIN, Name, Extension, Path, Entity, LAYER, FMT
Transfers a Unigraphics part into the ANSYS program.
CAD Import
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
The file name of the Unigraphics part to be imported, which cannot exceed 64 characters in length. The path
name must begin with an alphanumeric character. Special characters such as &, -, and * are not permitted
in the part name.
Extension
The Unigraphics part file extension. The default is .prt.
Path
The full path name to the directory containing the part, enclosed in single quotes; for example, '/ug_parts'.
The default is the current working directory.
Entity
Entity to be imported.
0 or Solid
Solids only, imported as ANSYS volumes (the default).
1 or Surface
Surfaces only, imported as ANSYS areas.
2 or Wireframe
Wireframe only, imported as ANSYS lines.
3 or All
All entities. Use this option when the part contains entities that may not be attached to each other, such
as a solid in one location and a surface in another.
LAYER
The number(s) assigned to the layer(s) to be imported. You can import one layer or a range of layers (designated by hyphens). Defaults to 1-256 (all layers).
FMT
The format in which ANSYS will store the model.
0
Neutral format (default). Defeaturing after import is restricted.
1
Solid format; this allows defeaturing after import.
Notes
More information on importing Unigraphics parts is available in Section 2.7: ANSYS Connection for Unigraphics
in the ANSYS Connection User's Guide.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
311
~UGIN
Menu Paths
File> Import> UG
312
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
A Commands
A, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10, P11, P12, P13, P14, P15, P16, P17, P18
Defines an area by connecting keypoints.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10, P11, P12, P13, P14, P15, P16, P17, P18
List of keypoints defining the area (18 maximum if using keyboard entry). At least 3 keypoints must be
entered. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the
GUI).
Notes
Keypoints (P1 through P18) must be input in a clockwise or counterclockwise order around the area. This order
also determines the positive normal direction of the area according to the right-hand rule. Existing lines between
adjacent keypoints will be used; missing lines are generated "straight" in the active coordinate system and assigned
the lowest available numbers [NUMSTR]. If more than one line exists between two keypoints, the shorter one
will be chosen. If the area is to be defined with more than four keypoints, the required keypoints and lines must
lie on a constant coordinate value in the active coordinate system (such as a plane or a cylinder). Areas may be
redefined only if not yet attached to a volume. Solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Arbitrary>Through KPs
AADD, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Adds separate areas to create a single area.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Numbers of areas to be added. If NA1 = ALL, add all selected areas and ignore NA2 to NA9. If NA1 = P, graph-
ical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for NA1.
Notes
The areas must be coplanar. The original areas (and their corresponding lines and keypoints) will be deleted by
default. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid
model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Concatenated entities are not valid with this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Add>Areas
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AATT
AATT, MAT, REAL, TYPE, ESYS, SECN
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed areas.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT
The material number to be associated with selected, unmeshed areas.
REAL
The real constant set number to be associated with selected, unmeshed areas.
TYPE
The type number to be associated with selected, unmeshed areas.
ESYS
The coordinate system number to be associated with selected, unmeshed areas.
SECN
The section number to be associated with selected unmeshed areas.
Notes
Areas subsequently generated from the areas will also have these attributes. These element attributes will be
used when the areas are meshed. If an area does not have attributes associated with it (by this command) at the
time it is meshed, the attributes are obtained from the then current MAT, REAL, TYPE, ESYS, and SECNUM
command settings. Reissue the AATT command (before areas are meshed) to change the attributes. A zero (or
blank) argument removes the corresponding association. If any of the arguments MAT, REAL, TYPE, ESYS, or SECN
are defined as -1, then that value will be left unchanged in the selected set.
In some cases, ANSYS can proceed with an area meshing operation even when no logical element type has been
assigned via AATT,,,TYPE or TYPE. For more information, see the discussion on setting element attributes in
Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>All Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Picked Areas
ABEXTRACT, MODE1, MODE2
Extracts the alpha-beta damping multipliers for Rayleigh damping.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
MODE1
First mode number.
MODE2
Second mode number.
314
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ABS
Notes
ABEXTRACT calls the command macro DMPEXT to extract the damping ratio of MODE1 and MODE2 and then
computes the Alpha and Beta damping multipliers for use in a subsequent structural harmonic or transient
analysis. Both numbers are stored in parameters ALPHADMP and BETADMP and can be applied using the ALPHAD
and BETAD commands. Before calling ABEXTRACT, you must issue RMFLVEC to extract the modal displacements.
In addition, a node component FLUN must exist from all FLUID136 nodes. See Chapter 16, Thin Film Analysis
for more information on thin film analyses.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>ThinFilm>RayleighDamp
ABS, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA
Forms the absolute value of a variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed upon output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
The new variable is calculated as:
IR = | FACTA x IA |
For a complex number (a + ib), the absolute value is the magnitude, where the IA values are obtained from:
a2 + b2
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
315
ACCAT
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Absolute Value
ACCAT, NA1, NA2
Concatenates multiple areas in preparation for mapped meshing.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2
Areas to be concatenated. If NA1 = ALL, NA2 will be ignored and all selected areas [ASEL] will be concatenated.
If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for NA1 (NA2 is ignored).
Notes
Concatenates multiple, adjacent areas (the input areas) into one area (the output area) in preparation for mapped
meshing. A volume that contains too many areas for mapped meshing can still be mapped meshed if some of
the areas in that volume are first concatenated (see Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for details on mapped meshing restrictions).
Because of modeling restrictions that result from its use, ACCAT is meant to be used solely for meshing. Specifically,
(a) the output area and any volumes that have the output area on their area list [VLIST] cannot be used as input
to any other solid modeling operation (not even another ACCAT command); and (b) the output area cannot
accept solid model boundary conditions [DA, SFA].
The output area (or volumes which contain it) will be meshed [AMESH, VMESH] by meshing the input areas,
which themselves must be meshable. The output area from the ACCAT operation will be coincident with the
input areas and the input areas will be retained. Consider the AADD command instead of ACCAT if you wish to
delete the input areas. When an ACCAT command is issued, volume area lists [VLIST] that contain all of the input
areas will be updated so that the volume area lists refer to the output area instead of the input area. Deletion of
the output area [ADELE] effectively reverses the ACCAT operation and restores volume area lists to their original
condition. ACCAT operations on pairs of adjacent four-sided areas automatically concatenate appropriate lines
[LCCAT]; in all other situations, line concatenations must be addressed by the user.
You can use the ASEL command to select areas that were created by concatenation, and then follow it with an
ADELE,ALL command to delete them. See Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide
for a discussion on how to easily select and delete concatenated areas in one step.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volumes>Mapped>Concatenate>Areas
316
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ACEL
ACEL, ACELX, ACELY, ACELZ
Specifies the linear acceleration of the structure.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> FL PP ED
ACELX, ACELY, ACELZ
Linear acceleration of the structure in the global Cartesian X, Y, and Z axis directions.
Notes
The ACEL command defines the linear acceleration of the structure in each of the global Cartesian axis directions.
To simulate gravity (by using inertial effects), accelerate the structure in the direction opposite to gravity. For
example, apply a positive ACELY to simulate gravity acting in the negative Y direction. Units are length/time2.
You can define the acceleration for the following analyses types:
Static (ANTYPE,STATIC)
Harmonic (ANTYPE,HARMIC), full or mode superposition method
Transient (ANTYPE,TRANS)
Substructure (ANTYPE,SUBSTR).
For all but the reduced transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis, accelerations are combined with the element
mass matrices to form a body force load vector term. The element mass matrix may be formed from a mass input
constant or from a nonzero density (DENS) property, depending upon the element type. For ANTYPE,TRANS
(reduced), the acceleration is applied to the reduced mass matrix.
For analysis type ANTYPE,HARMIC, the acceleration is assumed to be the real component with a zero imaginary
component.
Units of acceleration and mass must be consistent to give a product of force units.
Related commands for rotational effects are CGLOC, CGOMGA, DCGOMG, DOMEGA, and OMEGA.
This command is also valid in /PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Gravity
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Gravity>Global
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Gravity
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Gravity>Global
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Gravity
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Gravity
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
317
ACLEAR
ACLEAR, NA1, NA2, NINC
Deletes nodes and area elements associated with selected areas.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
Delete mesh for areas NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1 = ALL, NA2 and NINC
are ignored and the mesh for all selected areas [ASEL] is deleted. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and
all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for
NA1 (NA2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Deletes all nodes and area elements associated with selected areas (regardless of whether the nodes or elements
are selected). Nodes shared by adjacent meshed areas and nodes associated with non-area elements will not be
deleted. Attributes assigned as a result of AATT are maintained. In the program's response to the command, if
an area, line, or keypoint is tallied as "cleared," it means either its node or element reference was deleted.
This command is also valid for rezoning. When issued during rezoning (after the REMESH,START command and
before the REMESH,FINISH command), ACLEAR clears only the area generated by the AREMESH command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Clear>Areas
ADAMS, NMODES, KSTRESS, KSHELL
Performs solutions and writes flexible body information to a modal neutral file (Jobname.MNF) for use
in an ADAMS analysis.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NMODES
Number of normal modes to be written to Jobname.MNF file (no default).
KSTRESS
Specifies whether to write stress or strain results:
0
Do not write stress or strain results (default).
1
Write stress results.
2
Write strain results.
3
Write both stress and strain results.
KSHELL
Shell element output location. This option is valid only for shell elements.
318
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ADAPT
0, 1
Shell top surface (default).
2
Shell middle surface.
3
Shell bottom surface.
Notes
ADAMS invokes a predefined ANSYS macro that solves a series of analyses and then writes the modal neutral
file, Jobname.MNF. This file can be imported into the ADAMS program in order to perform a rigid body dynamics
simulation. For detailed information on how to use the ADAMS command macro to create a modal neutral file,
see Rigid Body Dynamics and the ANSYS-ADAMS Interface in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
Before running the ADAMS command macro, you must specify the units with the /UNITS command. The interface
points should be the only selected nodes when the command macro is initiated. (Interface points are nodes
where constraints may be applied in ADAMS.) Only selected elements will be considered in the calculations.
By default, stress and strain data is transferred to the ADAMS program for all nodes, as specified by the KSTRESS
value. If you want to transfer stress/strain data for only a subset of nodes, select the desired subset and create a
node component named STRESS before running the ADAMS command macro. For example, you may want
to select exterior nodes for the purpose of visualization in the ADAMS program.
The default filename for the modal neutral file is Jobname.MNF. In interactive (GUI) mode, you can specify a filename other than Jobname.MNF. In batch mode, there is no option to change the filename, and the modal
neutral file is always written to Jobname.MNF.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>ADAMS Connection>Export to ADAMS
ADAPT, NSOLN, STARGT, TTARGT, FACMN, FACMX, KYKPS, KYMAC
Adaptively meshes and solves a model.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
NSOLN
Number of solutions allowed (1 or more) (defaults to 5).
STARGT
Target percentage for structural percent error in energy norm (SEPC) (defaults to 5). If -1, no target value is
used.
TTARGT
Target percentage for thermal percent error in energy norm (TEPC) (defaults to 1). If -1, no target value is
used.
FACMN
Minimum factor for the keypoint element size changes (defaults to 0.25).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
319
ADD
FACMX
Maximum factor for the keypoint element size changes (defaults to 2.0).
KYKPS
Specifies whether element size is to be modified at selected keypoints:
0
Modify element size regardless of selected keypoint set (default).
1
Modify element size only at selected keypoints.
KYMAC
Specifies which user-written auxiliary macro files are to be used:
0
Ignore user-written auxiliary macro files, if any (default).
1
Use user-written auxiliary macro files (if they exist) as follows: Use ADAPTMSH.MAC instead of the default
meshing command sequence. Use ADAPTSOL.MAC instead of the default solution command sequence
(/SOLU ... SOLVE ... FINISH).
Notes
ADAPT invokes a predefined ANSYS macro for adaptive meshing and solution. The macro causes repeated runs
of the PREP7, SOLUTION, and POST1 phases of the ANSYS program with mesh density refinements based upon
the percentage error in energy norm. See the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for additional details.
After the adaptive meshing process is complete, the ADAPT macro automatically turns element shape checking
on (SHPP,ON).
A copy of the macro, called UADAPT.MAC, is available on the ANSYS distribution medium (system dependent),
and may be copied and modified by the user to suit a particular need. The modified file should be given a suitable
name (cmd.MAC) and run as described above with the ADAPT command name replaced by your "cmd" name.
This command is also valid at the Begin level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Adaptive Mesh
ADD, IR, IA, IB, IC, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Adds variables.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
320
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ADDAM
IA, IB, IC
Reference numbers of the three variables to be operated on. If only two variables, leave IC blank. If only one,
leave IB and IC blank.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed upon output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Scaling factors (positive or negative) applied to the corresponding variables (default to 1.0).
Notes
Adds variables (up to three at once) according to the operation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Drop Test>Time History>Graph Variables
Main Menu>Drop Test>Time History>List Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Add
ADDAM, AF, AA, AB, AC, AD, AMIN
Specifies the acceleration spectrum computation constants for the analysis of shock resistance of shipboard
structures.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
AF
Direction-dependent acceleration coefficient for elastic or elastic-plastic analysis option (default = 0).
AA, AB, AC, AD
Coefficients for the DDAM acceleration spectrum equations. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. Default for
these coefficients is zero.
AMIN
The minimum acceleration value in inch/sec2. It defaults to 2316 inch/sec2 which equals 6g, where g is acceleration due to gravity (g = 386 inch/sec2).
Notes
This command specifies acceleration coefficients to analyze shock resistance of shipboard equipment. These
coefficients are used to compute mode coefficients according to the equations given in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory
Reference. The form of these equations is based on the Naval NRL Dynamic Design Analysis Method. This command,
along with the VDDAM and SED commands, is used with the spectrum (ANTYPE,SPECTR) analysis as a special
purpose alternative to the SV, FREQ, and SVTYP commands. The mass and length units of the model must be
in pounds and inches, respectively.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
321
ADELE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>DDAM Options
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>DDAM Options
ADELE, NA1, NA2, NINC, KSWP
Deletes unmeshed areas.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
Delete areas from NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1 = ALL, NA2 and NINC
are ignored and all selected areas [ASEL] are deleted. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NA1 (NA2 and
NINC are ignored).
KSWP
Specifies whether keypoints and lines are also to be deleted:
0
Delete areas only (default).
1
Delete areas, as well as keypoints and lines attached to specified areas but not shared by other areas.
Notes
An area attached to a volume cannot be deleted unless the volume is first deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Area and Below
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Areas Only
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Delete>Area and Below
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Delete>Areas Only
ADGL, NA1, NA2, NINC
Lists keypoints of an area that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
List keypoints that lie on a parametric degeneracy on areas from NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of
NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1 = ALL (default), NA2 and NINC will be ignored and keypoints on all selected areas
[ASEL] will be listed. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid
only in the GUI). A component name may be substituted in NA1 (NA2 and NINC will be ignored).
322
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ADRAG
Notes
See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for details on parametric degeneracies.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Check Geom>Show Degeneracy>List Degen Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Show Degeneracy>List Degen Areas
ADRAG, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NLP1, NLP2, NLP3, NLP4, NLP5, NLP6
Generates areas by dragging a line pattern along a path.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6
List of lines in the pattern to be dragged (6 maximum if using keyboard entry). Lines should form a continuous
pattern (no more than two lines connected to any one keypoint. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and
all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If NL1 = ALL, all selected lines (except those that
define the drag path) will be swept along the path. A component name may also be substituted for NL1.
NLP1, NLP2, NLP3, NLP4, NLP5, NLP6
List of lines defining the path along which the pattern is to be dragged (6 maximum if using keyboard entry).
Must be a continuous set of lines.
Notes
Generates areas (and their corresponding keypoints and lines) by sweeping a given line pattern along a characteristic drag path. If the drag path consists of multiple lines, the drag direction is determined by the sequence
in which the path lines are input (NLP1, NLP2, etc.). If the drag path is a single line (NLP1), the drag direction is
from the keypoint on the drag line that is closest to the first keypoint of the given line pattern to the other end
of the drag line.
The magnitude of the vector between the keypoints of the given pattern and the first path keypoint remains
constant for all generated keypoint patterns and the path keypoints. The direction of the vector relative to the
path slope also remains constant so that patterns may be swept around curves.
Keypoint, line, and area numbers are automatically assigned (beginning with the lowest available values
[NUMSTR]). Adjacent lines use a common keypoint. Adjacent areas use a common line. For best results, the entities to be dragged should be orthogonal to the start of the drag path. Drag operations that produce an error
message may create some of the desired entities prior to terminating.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Lines>Along Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
323
AESIZE
AESIZE, ANUM, SIZE,
Specifies the element size to be meshed onto areas.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ANUM
Area number of the area to which this element size specification applies. If ANUM = ALL, size applies to all
selected areas. If ANUM = P, graphical picking is enabled. A component name may also be substituted for
ANUM.
SIZE
Desired element size.
Notes
AESIZE allows control over the element sizing inside any area or on the face(s) of a volume.
SIZE controls element size on the interior of the area. For any line on the area not having its own size assignment
and not controlled by keypoint size assignments, it specifies the element size along the line as well, so long as
no adjacent area has a smaller size, which would take precedence. If the AESIZE governs the boundary and
SmartSizing is on, the boundary size can be refined for curvature or proximity.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Areas>All Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Areas>Clr Size
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Areas>Picked Areas
AFILLT, NA1, NA2, RAD
Generates a fillet at the intersection of two areas.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1
Number of the first intersecting area. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NA2
Number of the second intersecting area.
RAD
Radius of fillet to be generated.
Notes
Generates an area of constant fillet radius at the intersection of two areas using a series of Boolean operations.
Corresponding lines and keypoints are also generated. See BOPTN command for an explanation of the options
available to Boolean operations. If areas do not initially intersect at a common line, use the AINA command.
324
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AFSURF
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Area Fillet
AFLIST
Lists the current data in the database.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Lists the current data and specifications in the database. If batch, lists all appropriate data. If interactive, lists only
summaries.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Other>Database Summary
AFSURF, SAREA, TLINE
Generates surface elements overlaid on the surface of existing solid elements and assigns the extra node
as the closest fluid element node.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
SAREA
Component name for the surface areas of the meshed solid volumes.
TLINE
Component name for the target lines meshed with fluid elements.
Notes
This command macro is used to generate surface effect elements overlaid on the surface of existing solid elements
and, based on proximity, to determine and assign the extra node for each surface element. The underlying
volumes of the solid region and the fluid lines must be meshed prior to calling this command macro. The active
element type must be SURF152 with appropriate settings for KEYOPT(4), KEYOPT(5), KEYOPT(6), and KEYOPT(8).
The surface areas of the solid and the target lines of the fluid are grouped into components and named using
the CM command. The names must be enclosed in single quotes (e.g., 'SAREA') when the AFSURF command is
manually typed in.
When using the GUI method, node and element components are created through the picking dialog boxes associated with this command.
The macro is applicable for the SURF152 and FLUID116 element types.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
325
AGEN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Area
to Fluid
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Line
to Fluid
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Node
to Fluid
AGEN, ITIME, NA1, NA2, NINC, DX, DY, DZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates additional areas from a pattern of areas.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITIME
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all keypoints in the given pattern automatically
(or by KINC) each time after the first. ITIME must be more than 1 for generation to occur.
NA1, NA2, NINC
Generate areas from the pattern of areas NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1
= ALL, NA2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected areas [ASEL]. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be
substituted for NA1 (NA2 and NINC are ignored).
DX, DY, DZ
Keypoint location increments in the active coordinate system (--, D , DZ for cylindrical; --, D , -- for spherical).
KINC
Keypoint number increment between generated sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies if elements and nodes are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original areas, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether to redefine the existing areas:
0
Generate new areas as requested with the ITIME argument.
1
Move original areas to new position, retaining the same keypoint numbers (ITIME, KINC, and NOELEM
are ignored). If the original areas are needed in the original position (e.g., they may be attached to a
volume), they are not moved, and new areas are generated instead. Meshed items corresponding to
moved areas are also moved if not needed at their original position.
326
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AGLUE
Notes
Generates additional areas (and their corresponding keypoints, lines and mesh) from a given area pattern. The
MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, and SECNUM attributes of the new areas are based upon the areas in the pattern and
not upon the current settings of the pointers. End slopes of the generated lines remain the same (in the active
coordinate system) as those of the given pattern. For example, radial slopes remain radial. Generations which
produce areas of a size or shape different from the pattern (i.e., radial generations in cylindrical systems, radial
and phi generations in spherical systems, and theta generations in elliptical systems) are not allowed. Solid
modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Area and line numbers are automatically assigned,
beginning with the lowest available values [NUMSTR].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Areas>Areas
AGLUE, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Generates new areas by "gluing" areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Numbers of the areas to be glued. If NA1 = ALL, all selected areas will be glued (NA2 to NA9 will be ignored).
If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for NA1.
Notes
Use of the AGLUE command generates new areas by "gluing" input areas. The glue operation redefines the input
areas so that they share lines along their common boundaries. The new areas encompass the same geometry
as the original areas. This operation is only valid if the intersection of the input areas are lines along the boundaries of those areas. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for
an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary
conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to new entities generated.
The AGLUE command results in the merging of lines and keypoints at the common area boundaries. The lines
and keypoints of the lower numbered area will be kept. This means one must be aware of area numbering when
multiple AGLUE commands are applied to avoid any ungluing of geometry.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Glue>Areas
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
327
AINA
AINA, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Finds the intersection of areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Numbers of areas to be intersected. If NA1 = ALL, NA2 to NA9 are ignored and the intersection of all selected
areas is found. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only
in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NA1.
Notes
Finds the common (not pairwise) intersection of areas. The common intersection is defined as the regions shared
(in common) by all areas listed on this command. New areas will be generated where the original areas intersect.
If the regions of intersection are only lines, new lines will be generated instead. See the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Common>Areas
AINP, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Finds the pairwise intersection of areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Numbers of areas to be intersected pairwise. If NA1 = ALL, NA2 to NA9 are ignored and the pairwise intersection
of all selected areas is found. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may be substituted for NA1.
Notes
Finds the pairwise intersection of areas. The pairwise intersection is defined as all regions shared by any two or
more areas listed on this command. New areas will be generated where the original areas intersect pairwise. If
the regions of pairwise intersection are only lines, new lines will be generated. See the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Pairwise>Areas
328
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AL
AINV, NA, NV
Finds the intersection of an area with a volume.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA
Number of area to be intersected. If P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored
(valid only in the GUI).
NV
Number of volume to be intersected.
Notes
New areas will be generated where the areas intersect the volumes. If the regions of intersection are only lines,
new lines will be generated instead. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN
command for the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions
assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Area with Volume
AL, L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8, L9, L10
Generates an area bounded by previously defined lines.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8, L9, L10
List of lines defining area. The minimum number of lines is 3. The positive normal of the area is controlled
by the direction of L1 using the right-hand rule. A negative value of L1 reverses the normal direction. If L1
= ALL, use all selected lines with L2 defining the normal (L3 to L10 are ignored and L2 defaults to the lowest
numbered selected line). If L1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for L1.
Notes
Lines may be input (once each) in any order and must form a simply connected closed curve. If the area is defined
with more than four lines, the lines must also lie in the same plane or on a constant coordinate value in the active
coordinate system (such as a plane or a cylinder).
Note Solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Areas may be redefined
only if not yet attached to a volume.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Arbitrary>By Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
329
ALIST
ALIST, NA1, NA2, NINC, Lab
Lists the defined areas.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
List areas from NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1 = ALL (default), NA2 and
NINC are ignored and all selected areas [ASEL] are listed. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NA1
(NA2 and NINC are ignored).
Lab
Determines what type of listing is used (one of the following):
(blank)
Prints information about all areas in the specified range.
HPT
Prints information about only those areas that contain hard points.
Notes
An attribute (TYPE, MAT, REAL, or ESYS) listed as a zero is unassigned; one listed as a positive value indicates that
the attribute was assigned with the AATT command (and will not be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared); one
listed as a negative value indicates that the attribute was assigned using the attribute pointer [TYPE, MAT, REAL,
or ESYS] that was active during meshing (and will be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared). A "-1" in the "nodes"
column indicates that the area has been meshed but there are no interior nodes. The area size is listed only if an
ASUM command has been performed on the area.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Areas
ALLSEL, LabT, Entity
Selects all entities with a single command.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabT
Type of selection to be made:
ALL
Selects all items of the specified entity type and all items of lower entity types (default).
BELOW
Selects all items directly associated with and below the selected items of the specified entity type.
Entity
Entity type on which selection is based:
330
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ALLSEL
ALL
All entity types (default).
VOLU
Volumes.
AREA
Areas.
LINE
Lines.
KP
Keypoints.
ELEM
Elements.
NODE
Nodes.
Notes
ALLSEL is a convenience command that allows the user to select all items of a specified entity type or to select
items associated with the selected items of a higher entity.
An entity hierarchy is used to decide what entities will be available in the selection process. This hierarchy from
top to bottom is as follows: volumes, areas, lines, keypoints, elements, and nodes. The hierarchy may also be divided into two branches: the solid model and the finite element model. The label ALL selects items based on
one branch only, while BELOW uses the entire entity hierarchy. For example, ALLSEL,ALL,VOLU selects all volumes,
areas, lines, and keypoints in the data base. ALLSEL,BELOW,AREA selects all lines belonging to the selected areas;
all keypoints belonging to those lines; all elements belonging to those areas, lines, and keypoints; and all nodes
belonging to those elements.
The $ character should not be used after the ALLSEL command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>CMS>CMS Superelements>By Picking
Utility Menu>Select>Everything
Utility Menu>Select>Everything Below>Selected Areas
Utility Menu>Select>Everything Below>Selected Elements
Utility Menu>Select>Everything Below>Selected Keypoints
Utility Menu>Select>Everything Below>Selected Lines
Utility Menu>Select>Everything Below>Selected Volumes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
331
ALPFILL
ALPFILL, LN1, LN2, LN3, LN4, LN5, LN6, LN7, LN8, LN9, LN10
Fills in an area loop within an existing 2-D area (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LN1, LN2, LN3, LN4, LN5, LN6, LN7, LN8, LN9, LN10
List of lines that define the loop. If LN1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are
ignored (valid only in the GUI). If LN1 = ALL, all selected lines will be checked for possible closure.
Notes
If all of the lines in the list are not continuous or closed, ANSYS will automatically find the subset of continuous
lines within the list.
Use this command to fill in small area loops in models imported from CAD files (this is a geometry cleanup
tool). This tool is available only for models imported from CAD files (Default IGES option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Fill Loops
ALPHAD, VALUE
Defines the mass matrix multiplier for damping.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
VALUE
Mass matrix multiplier for damping.
Notes
Defines the mass matrix multiplier, , for damping. One form of the viscous damping matrix [C] is given by [M]
+ [K], where [M] is the mass matrix and [K] is the stiffness matrix. Damping is not used in the static (ANTYPE,STATIC) or buckling (ANTYPE,BUCKLE) analyses.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
332
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AMESH
AMAP, AREA, KP1, KP2, KP3, KP4
Generates a 2-D mapped mesh based on specified area corners.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
AREA
Area number of area to be meshed. If AREA = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
KP1, KP2, KP3, KP4
Keypoints defining corners of the mapped mesh. Three or four corners may be specified, and may be input
in any order.
Notes
Only one area at a time can be meshed with this command. The program internally concatenates all lines between
the specified keypoints, then meshes the area with all quadrilateral elements. If line divisions are set, the mesh
will follow the rules for mapped meshing (see Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing
Guide).
If the area being meshed has concatenated lines, the program will ask if those concatenations should be removed
(in batch, the concatenations will automatically be removed). Nodes required for the generated elements are
created and assigned the lowest available node numbers. If a mapped mesh is not possible due to mismatched
line divisions or poor element shapes, the meshing operation is aborted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Mapped>By Corners
AMESH, NA1, NA2, NINC
Generates nodes and area elements within areas.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
Mesh areas from NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1 = ALL, NA2 and NINC are
ignored and all selected areas [ASEL] are meshed. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NA1 (NA2 and
NINC are ignored).
Notes
Any undefined nodes required for the generated elements are created and assigned the lowest available numbers.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Free
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
333
/AN3D
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Mapped>3 or 4 sided
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Target Surf
/AN3D, Kywrd, KEY
Specifies 3-D annotation functions
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
If Kywrd = ANUM, the type of annotation is defined, along with its location. The command format is /AN3D,ANUM,NUM,TYPE,XHOT,YHOT,ZHOT.
NUM
Unique number assigned as each annotation is applied to a model. These numbers are applied sequentially,
although when an annotation entity is deleted, its number is reassigned.
TYPE
Annotation internal type number (101 = text, 102 = line, 103 = point, 104 = area, 105 = arrow, 106 = symbol,
108 = bitmap).
XHOT, YHOT, ZHOT
X, Y, Z coordinates for hot spot location.
If Kywrd = BITM, the annotation is a bitmap. The command format is /AN3D,BITM,TYPE,X,Y,Z.
TYPE
An integer value between 1 and 99, indicating a texture or bitmap. Numbers 1 through 40 correspond to
existing ANSYS textures (see /TXTRE). Numbers 51 through 99 correspond to textures defined using the File
option of the /TXTRE command. You can use this capability to override the predefined logo, clamp and arrow
files available from the GUI dialog box (numbers 51 through 57). Numbers 41 through 50 are reserved.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, Z coordinates for the lower left corner of the bitmap.
If Kywrd = TEXT, an annotation text string is created. The command format is /AN3D,TEXT,X,Y,Z,Text_String.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, Z coordinate location for text string.
Text_String
Text string to be applied as annotation.
If Kywrd = LINE, an annotation line is created. The command format is /AN3D,LINE,X1,Y1,Z1,X2,Y2,Z2.
X1, Y1, Z1
X, Y, Z coordinates for beginning of line.
X2, Y2, Z2
X, Y, Z coordinates for end of line.
If Kywrd = POINT, a dot will be drawn in space (this option is not available from the GUI). The command format
is /AN3D,POINT,X,Y,Z.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, Z coordinates for point.
334
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/AN3D
If Kywrd = AREA, a polygonal area with n vertices will be drawn. The command format is
/AN3D,AREA,NVERT,Xn,Yn,Zn.
NVERT
The number of vertices (n) for the polygon. Your Polygon can have between 3 and 9 vertices.
Xn, Yn, Zn
X, Y, Z coordinate location for vertex n.
If Kywrd = ARROW, an annotation arrow is created. The command format is /AN3D,ARROW,SIZEX1,Y1,Z1,X2,Y2,Z2.
SIZE
Symbol size multiplier (0.1 to 20.0, default = 1.0) for the head of the arrow.
X1, Y1, Z1
X, Y, Z coordinates for the location of the tail.
X2, Y2, Z2
X, Y, Z coordinate for the location of the tip.
If Kywrd = SYMBOL, an annotation symbol is created. The command format is /AN3D,SYMBOL,TYPE,X,Y,Z,SIZE.
TYPE
The symbol type (1 = CAP, 2 = TEE, 3 = CIRCLE, 4 = TRIANGLE, 5 = STAR).
X, Y, Z
X, Y, Z coordinate location for the symbol.
SIZE
Size multiplier for the symbol (0.1 to 20.0, default = 1.0)
Notes
Because 3-D annotation is applied in relation to the XYZ coordinates of the anchor, you can transform your
model, and the annotation will maintain the spatial relationship with the model. This works within reason, and
there are instances where changing the perspective or the size of the model will change the apparent relationship
between the annotation and the model.
The overall 3-D dimensions of your model are defined by a bounding box. If portions of your model's bounding
box lie outside of the visible area of your graphics window (if you are zoomed in on a specific area of your model),
it can affect the placement of your 3-D annotations. Zooming out will usually overcome this problem.
3-D annotation is valid for the Cartesian (CSYS,0) coordinate system only. If you want to annotate a model you
created in another coordinate system, use 2-D annotation (note that 2-D annotations do not remain anchored
for dynamic rotations or transformations).
When you apply user defined bitmaps, the size of the annotation can vary. Use the options menu of the 3-D annotation widget to adjust the size and placement of your bitmaps.
You cannot use the ! and $ characters in ANSYS text annotation.
The GUI generates this command during 3-D annotation operations and inserts the command into the log file
(Jobname.LOG). You should NOT type this command directly during an ANSYS session (although the command
can be included in an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
335
ANCNTR
Menu Paths
Utilty Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotate>Create 3D Annotation
ANCNTR, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL
Produces an animated sequence of a contoured deformed shape.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frames captures (defaults to 5).
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
Notes
ANCNTR involves an ANSYS macro which produces an animation of a contoured deformed shape of the last
plot action command. This command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG command.
After executing ANCNTR, you can replay the animated sequence by issuing the ANIM command.
The command functions only in the postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Deformed Results
ANCUT, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL, QOFF, KTOP, TOPOFF, NODE1, NODE2, NODE3
Produces an animated sequence of Q-slices.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frames captures (defaults to 5).
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
QOFF
Q-slice working plane increment (defaults to .1 half screens).
KTOP
Topological effect on or off (YES or NO; default is NO).
336
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANCYC
TOPOFF
Topological offset (default is .1 half screens).
NODE1
Node 1 for start of the Q-slice.
NODE2
Node 2 for direction of the Q-slice.
NODE3
Node 3 for plane of the Q-slice.
Notes
ANCUT involves an ANSYS macro which produces an animation of Q-slices of the last plot action command. This
command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG command. After executing ANCUT,
you can replay the animated sequence by issuing the ANIM command.
The command functions only in the postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Q-Slice Contours
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Q-Slice Vectors
ANCYC, NUMFRAMES, KCYCL, DELAY
Applies a traveling wave animation to graphics data in a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NUMFRAMES
The number of plot frames for the animation. Valid values range from 5 through 36. The default is 18. A low
value (because it specifies fewer graphical frames) produces a rougher animation but loads faster. A high
value produces a smoother animation but requires more time to load.
KCYCL
The animation mode:
0
Discontinuous animation cycle (forward-reset-forward). This option is the default.
1
Continuous animation cycle (forward-reverse-forward).
DELAY
The time delay (in seconds) between animation frames. Valid values range from 0.1 through 1.0. The default
is 0.1 seconds, which produces a seemingly real-time animation. A higher value produces a slower animation.
Command Default
The default ANCYC command (issuing the command with no arguments) specifies these implicit argument
values: ANCYC, 18, 0, 0.1
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
337
ANDATA
Notes
The ANCYC command is valid in a modal cyclic symmetry analysis only.
The command animates the cyclic symmetry mode shape plot in the General Post Processor (/POST1). When
you issue a nodal- or element-results plot command (for example, PLNSOL, PLESOL, or PLDISP) and then issue
the ANCYC command, ANSYS applies a traveling wave animation to the mode shape plot.
Each frame of the animation is created by expanding the cyclic symmetry mode shape at increasing phase angles
(via the /CYCEXPAND command) starting at zero in equal increments over 360. The phase-angle increment is
360 / NUMFRAMES.
The animation display shows the traveling wave of the result quantity being plotted. The traveling wave animation
is applicable only to nodal diameters (harmonic indices) greater than 0 and less than N / 2 (where N is the
number of cyclic sectors in the model).
For more information, see Applying a Traveling Wave Animation to the Cyclic Model in the ANSYS Advanced
Analysis Techniques Guide.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Cyc Traveling Wave
ANDATA, DELAY, NCYCL, RSLTDAT, MIN, MAX, INCR, FRCLST, AUTOCONT, --, AUTOCNTR
Produces a sequential contour animation over a range of results data.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.5 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
RSLTDAT
The type of results data to be used for the animation sequence. This can be:
0
Current load step data (default).
1
Range of load step data.
2
Range of results data.
MIN
The range minimum value. If left blank or 0, defaults to the first data point.
MAX
The range maximum value. If left blank or 0, defaults to the last data point.
338
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANDSCL
INCR
The increment between result data (defaults to 1).
FRCLST
Key to force the last sub step in a selected load step to be included in the animation (defaults to 0).
AUTOCONT
A value of 1 enables automatic scaling of contour values based on the overall subset range of values. The
default value is 0 (no automatic scaling).
--
Unused field.
AUTOCNTR
A value of 1 disables automatic centering of displaced plots. The default value is 0 (allow automatic centering).
Notes
The ANDATA command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG command. It uses an
ANSYS macro to produce an animation based on the last plot action command (for example, PLDISP).
The ANDATA command implicitly issues /DSCALE, 1 for default displacement scaling. Large displacements may
not give good results.
This command functions only in the postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Drop Test>Animate Results
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Results
ANDSCL, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL
Produces an animated sequence of a deformed shape.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frames captured (defaults to 5).
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
Notes
ANDSCL involves an ANSYS macro which produces an animation of displacement of the last plot action command
(for example, PLDISP). This command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG command.
After executing ANDSCL, you can replay the animated sequence by issuing the ANIM command.
The command functions only in the postprocessor.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
339
ANDYNA
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Deformed Shape
ANDYNA, DELAY, NCYCL, START, END, INC, AUTOCONTOURKEY
Produces an animated sequence of contour values through substeps.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
START
Number of the starting substep (defaults to 1).
END
Number of the ending substep (defaults to the maximum substep).
INC
Increment between substeps (defaults to 1).
AUTOCONTOURKEY
Auto-scales contour values, based on the overall subset range of values (defaults to 0, no auto-scaling).
Notes
ANDYNA involves an ANSYS macro which produces an animation of contour values through all the substeps of
the last plot action command. This command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG
command. After executing ANDYNA, you can replay the animated sequence by issuing the ANIM command.
The command functions only in the postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Dynamic Results
/ANFILE, LAB, Fname, Ext, -Saves or resumes an animation sequence to or from a file.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LAB
Label type.
SAVE
Save the current animation to a file.
340
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANFLOW
RESUME
Resume an animation from a file.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to ANIM if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
This command saves an animation to a file from local terminal segments or resumes an animation from a file to
local terminal segments. See the /SEG command for details on segment storage. See the ANCNTR macro for a
convenient method of storing graphics frames in terminal memory segments. This command is device dependent
and is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Restore Animation
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Save Animation
ANFLOW, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL, TIME, SPACING, SIZE, LENGTH
Produces an animated sequence of particle flow in a flowing fluid or a charged particle traveling in an
electric or magnetic field.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frames captured (defaults to 5).
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Non-UI mode only.
TIME
Total Trace Time (seconds) (defaults to 0, which is the full flow trace).
SPACING
Particle spacing in seconds (defaults to 0).
SIZE
Particle size (defaults to 0, which is a line).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
341
/ANGLE
LENGTH
Particle length fraction (defaults to .1).
Notes
ANFLOW invokes an ANSYS macro which produces an animation of particle flow in a flowing fluid or charged
particle motion in an electric or magnetic field by the last plot action command (i.e., PLTRAC). This command is
only operational on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG command. After executing ANFLOW, you
can replay the animated sequence by issuing the ANIM command. This command is functional only in the
Postprocessor.
The TIME option lets you set the time interval of forward travel for the trace. The SPACING option is used to
define the particle spacing in seconds from adjacent particles in the stream line. The SIZE variable sets the radius
of the particle. The LENGTH variable is used to define the particle length fraction. By default, the LENGTH is set
to .1, which means the particle occupies 10% of the flow region and the other 90% is a color-code line. The
SPACING and LENGTH variables only make sense when the SIZE variable is nonzero (i.e., the particle is bigger
than the line).
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Particle Flow
/ANGLE, WN, THETA, Axis, KINCR
Rotates the display about an axis.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
THETA
Angle (degrees) for changing display orientation (positive, counterclockwise about specified axis).
Axis
Rotation axis: XS, YS, or ZS (default) for the screen axes; XM, YM, or ZM for the global Cartesian model axes.
ZS is normal to the screen; all axes pass through the focus point.
KINCR
Cumulative rotation key:
0
Do not use cumulative successive rotations.
1
Use cumulative rotations. Rotations are relative to the previous rotation. View settings (/VIEW) are recalculated.
Notes
Default orientation is YS vertical. When the /XFRM command is set for rotation about two points, or for entities,
the /ANGLE command is functional only for Axis = ZS or ZM and KINCR = 1.
342
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANIM
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Pan, Zoom, Rotate
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Angle of Rotation
ANHARM, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL
Produces a time-transient animated sequence of time-harmonic results (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frame captures per cycle. Defaults to 12.
DELAY
Time delay during animation. Defaults to 0.1 seconds.
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles. Defaults to 5. Not available in the GUI.
Notes
ANHARM invokes an ANSYS macro which produces a time-transient animation of time-harmonic results of the
last plot action command (e.g. PLNSOL,B,SUM). The animation converts the complex solution variables (real and
imaginary sets) into time varying results over one period. For example, if NFRAM = 12, then the frame captures
are in increments of 30 degree phase angles.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Time
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Time-harmonic
ANIM, NCYCL, KCYCL, DELAY
Displays graphics data in animated form.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NCYCL
Number of cycles associated with the animation (defaults to 5 in non-GUI mode only)
KCYCL
Animation mode:
0
Continuous animation cycle (forward-reverse-forward-etc.) (default).
1
Discontinuous animation cycle (forward-reset-forward-etc.).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
343
ANISOS
DELAY
Time delay (seconds) between animation frames (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
Notes
Displays graphics data stored in local terminal segments in animated form. See the /SEG command for details
on segment storage. See the ANCNTR macro for a convenient method of storing graphics frames in terminal
memory segments. This command is device-dependent. You should not resize the graphic while animation is
in progress; doing so can result in distorted plots.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Replay Animation
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Restore Animation
ANISOS, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL
Produces an animated sequence of an isosurface.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frames captures (defaults to 9).
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
Notes
ANISOS involves an ANSYS macro which produces an animation of an isosurface of the last plot action command
(for example, PLNSOL,S,EQV). The ANISOS command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting
the /SEG command. After executing ANISOS, you can replay the animated sequence by issuing the ANIM
command.
This command functions only in the postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Isosurfaces
344
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANMRES
ANMODE, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL, KACCEL
Produces an animated sequence of a mode shape.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frames captures (defaults to 5).
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
KACCEL
Acceleration type:
0
Linear acceleration.
1
Sinusoidal acceleration.
Notes
ANMODE involves an ANSYS macro which produces an animation of mode shape of the last plot action command
(for example, PLDISP). The ANMODE command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG
command. After executing ANMODE, you can replay the animated sequence by issuing the ANIM command.
This command functions only in the postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Mode Shape
ANMRES, DELAY, MIN, MAX, INC, AUTOCNTRKY, FREQ, EXT
Performs animation of results over multiple results files in an explicit dynamic structural analysis or fluid
flow analysis with remeshing.
POST1: Animation
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
DELAY
Time delay during animation (default = 0.5 seconds).
MIN
Minimum results file number to animate. Default = 1 (for Jobname.RS01).
MAX
Maximum results file number to animate. Defaults to the highest numbered results file, Jobname.RSnn.
INC
Increment between results file numbers. Default = 1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
345
ANMRES
AUTOCNTRKY
Automatic contour scaling option.
0
No auto-scaling (default).
1
Auto-scaling on.
If you activate automatic contour scaling, ANSYS considers only the minimum and maximum value of the
result item from the first results file.
FREQ
Results frequency key.
0 or 1
Animate every results set in each Jobname.EXT file (default).
2
Animate every other results set in each Jobname.EXT file.
n
Animate every nth results set in each Jobname.EXT file.
EXT
Extension of result files
'rfl'
Animate Jobname.rflnn
'rs'
Animate Jobname.rsnn. Default = 'rs'.
Notes
ANMRES invokes an ANSYS macro that performs animation across multiple results files (Jobname.EXT, Jobname.EXT, etc.) produced by an explicit dynamic structural analysis or fluid flow analysis with remeshing. Multiple
results files typically occur when adaptive meshing is used in an explicit dynamic structural analysis or fluid flow
analysis with remeshing. ANMRES cannot be used for multiple results files that are caused by file splitting.
ANMRES animates results from files having the currently specified jobname (Jobname.EXT - Jobname.EXT).
To change the current jobname, use the /FILNAME command. The animation is based on the last plot command
(e.g., PLDISP).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Drop Test>Animate Results
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Results
346
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/ANNOT
/ANNOT, Lab, VAL1, VAL2
Activates graphics for annotating displays (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Annotation control key:
OFF
Turns off annotation for each subsequent display (default).
ON
Turns on annotation for each subsequent display.
DELE
Deletes all annotation.
SAVE
Saves annotation on a file. Use VAL1 for file name (defaults to Jobname) and VAL2 for the extension
(defaults to ANO).
SCALE
Sets annotation scale factor (direct input only). Use VAL1 for value (0.1 to 10.0) (defaults to 1.0).
XORIG
Sets the annotation x origin (direct input only). Use VAL1 for value (-3.0 to 3.0).
YORIG
Sets annotation y origin (direct input only). Use VAL1 for value (-3.0 to 3.0).
SNAP
Sets annotation snap (menu button input only). Use VAL1 for value (0.002 to 0.2) (defaults to 0.002).
STAT
Displays current annotation status.
DEFA
Sets annotation specifications to the default values.
REFR
Redisplays annotation graphics.
TMOD
Sets the annotation text mode. If VAL1 = 1, annotation text will be drawn in scalable bitmap fonts (default).
If VAL1 = 0, annotation text will be drawn with stroke text.
VAL1
Value (or file name) as noted with label above.
VAL2
Value (or file name extension) as noted with label above.
Notes
This is a command generated by the GUI and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used.
This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
347
ANORM
You cannot use the ! and $ characters in ANSYS text annotation.
/ANNOT activates annotation graphics for adding annotation to displays. Commands representing the annotation
instructions are automatically created by the annotation functions in the GUI and written to Jobname.LOG. The
annotation commands are /ANNOT, /ANUM, /TLABEL, /LINE, /LARC, /LSYMBOL, /POLYGON, /PMORE, /PCIRCLE,
/PWEDGE, /TSPEC, /LSPEC, and /PSPEC. Annotation graphics are relative to the full Graphics Window and are
not affected by ANSYS window-specific commands (/WINDOW, /VIEW, etc.).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
ANORM, ANUM, NOEFLIP
Reorients area normals.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ANUM
Area number having the normal direction that the reoriented areas are to match.
NOEFLIP
Indicates whether you want to change the normal direction of the existing elements on the reoriented area(s)
so that they are consistent with each area's new normal direction.
0
Make the normal direction of existing elements on the reoriented area(s) consistent with each area's
new normal direction (default).
1
Do not change the normal direction of existing elements on the reoriented area(s).
Notes
Reorients areas so that their normals are consistent with that of a specified area.
If any of the areas have inner loops, the ANORM command will consider the inner loops when it reorients the
area normals.
You cannot use the ANORM command to change the normal direction of any element that has a body or surface
load. We recommend that you apply all of your loads only after ensuring that the element normal directions are
acceptable.
Real constants (such as nonuniform shell thickness and tapered beam constants) may be invalidated by an element
reversal.
See Revising Your Model of the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.
348
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSOL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Areas>Area Normals
ANSOL, NVAR, NODE, Item, Comp, Name, Mat, Real, Ename
Specifies averaged nodal data to be stored from the results file in the solution coordinate system.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). Overwrites any existing results for
this variable.
NODE
Node number for which data are to be stored.
Item
Label identifying the item. General item labels are shown in ANSOL - General Item and Component Labels
below. Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). General component labels are shown in ANSOL - General Item and
Component Labels below.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the item on the printout and displays. Defaults to an eight character
label formed by concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels.
Mat
The material number. Average will be computed based on the subset of elements with the specified material number. DEFAULT: Use all elements in the active set unless Real and/or Ename is specified.
Real
The real number. Average will be computed based on the subset of elements with the specified real number.
DEFAULT: Use all elements in the active set unless Mat and/or Ename is specified.
Ename
The element type name. Average will be computed based on the subset of elements with the specified element
type name. DEFAULT: Use all elements in the active set unless Mat and/or Real is specified.
Notes
Valid item and component labels for averaged nodal results are listed in ANSOL - General Item and Component
Labels, below.
All element nodal quantities are obtained in RSYS, Solu and then averaged.
The ANSOL command defines averaged nodal results data to be stored from a results file [FILE]. Not all items
are valid for all nodes. See the input and output summary tables of the ANSYS Elements Reference of each element
that is attached to the node for the available items.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
349
ANSOL
COORDINATE SYSTEMS: All element nodal results used by ANSOL for averaging are in the element coordinate
system, except for layered elements. Layered element results are in the layer coordinate system. You can further
specify the element nodal results, for some elements, with the SHELL, LAYERP26, and FORCE commands.
ANSOL does not transform results from RSYS, SOLU to other coordinate systems. Verify that all elements attached
to the subject node have the same coordinate system before using ANSOL.
SHELL ELEMENTS: The default shell element coordinate system is based on node ordering. For shell elements
the adjacent elements could have a different RSYS,SOLU, making the resultant averaged data inconsistent. A
note to this effect is issued when ANSOL is used in models containing shell elements. Ensure that consistent
coordinate systems are active for all associated elements used by the ANSOL command.
DERIVED QUANTITIES: Some of the result items supported by ANSOL (see ANSOL - General Item and Component
Labels) are derived from the component quantities. Use AVPRIN to specify the principal and vector sum quantity
averaging methods.
DEFAULT: If Mat, Real , and Ename are not specified, all of the elements attached to the node will be considered.
When a material ID, real constant ID, or element type discontinuity is detected at a node, a note is issued. For
example, in a FSI analysis, a FLUID30 element at the structure interface would be considered. But since it contains
no SX result, it will not be used during STORE operations.
ANSOL - General Item and Component Labels
General Item and Component Labels ANSOL, NVAR,ELEM,NODE,Item,Comp,Name,Mat,Real,Ename
Item
S
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT
Stress intensity.
"
EQV
Equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT
Plastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1,2,3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT
Creep strain intensity.
"
EQV
Creep equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT
Thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Thermal equivalent strain.
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
EPEL
EPPL
EPCR
EPTH
NL
"
350
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANTIME
General Item and Component Labels ANSOL, NVAR,ELEM,NODE,Item,Comp,Name,Mat,Real,Ename
Item
Comp
Description
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
CREQ
Accumulated equivalent creep strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
STAT1
Contact status:
CONT
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
"
PENE
Contact penetration.
"
PRES
Contact pressure.
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction)
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance
"
GAP
Contact gap distance
"
FLUX
Total heat flux at contact surface
CNOS
Total number of contact status changes during substep.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
JC
X, Y, Z, SUM
Conduction current density for elements that support conduction current
calculation. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM).
1.
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Variable Viewer
ANTIME, NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL, AUTOCNTRKY, RSLTDAT, MIN, MAX
Produces a sequential contour animation over a range of time.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFRAM
Number of frame captures (defaults to 5).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
351
ANTYPE
DELAY
Time delay during animation (defaults to 0.1 seconds).
NCYCL
Number of animation cycles (defaults to 5). Available in non-UI mode only.
AUTOCNTRKY
Auto-scales contour values, based on the overall subset range of values. The auto-scaling option defaults to
0, no auto-scaling.
RSLTDAT
The results data to be used for the animation sequence. This can be:
0
Current load step data (default).
1
Range of load step data.
2
Range of time data.
MIN
The range minimum value. If left blank defaults to the first data point.
MAX
The range maximum value. If left blank defaults to the last data point.
Notes
The ANTIME command operates only on graphic display platforms supporting the /SEG command. It uses an
ANSYS macro to produce an animation of contour values for the last plot action command (for example, PLDISP).
After executing ANTIME, the ANIM command will replay the animated sequence.
This command functions only in the postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Time
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Time-harmonic
ANTYPE, Antype, Status, LDSTEP, SUBSTEP, Action
Specifies the analysis type and restart status.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
Antype
Analysis type (defaults to the previously specified analysis type, or to STATIC if none specified):
STATIC or 0
Perform a static analysis. Valid for all degrees of freedom.
352
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANTYPE
BUCKLE or 1
Perform a buckling analysis. Implies that a previous static solution was performed with prestress effects
calculated [PSTRES,ON]. Valid for structural degrees of freedom only.
MODAL or 2
Perform a modal analysis. Valid for structural and fluid degrees of freedom.
HARMIC or 3
Perform a harmonic analysis. Valid for structural, fluid, magnetic, and electrical degrees of freedom.
TRANS or 4
Perform a transient analysis. Valid for all degrees of freedom.
SUBSTR or 7
Perform a substructure analysis. Valid for all degrees of freedom.
SPECTR or 8
Perform a spectrum analysis. Implies that a previous modal analysis was performed. Valid for structural
degrees of freedom only.
Status
Specifies the status of the analysis (new or restart):
NEW
Specifies a new analysis (default). If NEW, the remaining fields on this command are ignored.
REST
Specifies a restart of a previous analysis. Valid only for static, harmonic (2-D magnetic only), full transient,
and substructure analyses (backsubstitution method only). For full transient and nonlinear static structural analyses, a multiframe restart will be done by default. Use the RESCONTROL command to set up
or disable the multiframe restart.
This option resumes the .rdb file created at the start of solution. If boundary conditions are deleted in
solution (for example, after being used to create an initial velocity or to establish initial contact), they
will need to be deleted again after issuing this command.
LDSTEP
Specifies the load step at which a multiframe restart will begin. The default is the highest load step number
found in the Jobname.Rnnn files for the current jobname in the current directory. Not used for single frame
restarts.
SUBSTEP
Specifies the substep at which a multiframe restart will begin. The default is the highest substep number
found for the specified LDSTEP in the Jobname.Rnnn files in the current directory. Not used for single frame
restarts.
Action
Specifies the manner of a multiframe restart. Not used for traditional restarts.
CONTINUE
ANSYS will continue the analysis based on the specified LDSTEP and SUBSTEP (default). The current load
step will be continued unless the end of the load step is encountered in the .Rnnn file, in which case a
new load step will be started. ANSYS will delete all .Rnnn files beyond the point of restart and will update
the .LDHI file if a new load step is encountered.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
353
ANTYPE
ENDSTEP
At restart, force the specified load step (LDSTEP) to end at the specified substep (SUBSTEP), even though
the end of the current load step has not been reached. At the end of the specified substep, all loadings
will be scaled to the level of the current ending and stored in the .LDHI file. A run following this ENDSTEP
will start a new load step. This feature allows you to change the load level in the middle of a load step.
ANSYS will update the .LDHI file and delete all .Rnnn files beyond the point of ENDSTEP. The .Rnnn file
at the point of ENDSTEP will be rewritten to record the rescaled load level.
RSTCREATE
At restart, retrieve information to be written to the results file for the specified load step (LDSTEP) and
substep (SUBSTEP). Be sure to use OUTRES to write the results to the .RST file. This action does not affect
the .LDHI or .Rnnn files. Previous items stored in the .RST file at and beyond the point of RSTCREATE will
be deleted.
Command Default
New static analysis.
Notes
The analysis type Antype cannot be changed if it is a restart run. Always save parameters before doing a restart.
You can do a multiframe restart only for nonlinear static and full transient structural analyses. (For linear static
analyses, you can use a single frame restart.)
The following notes apply to multiframe restart:
LDSTEP, SUBSTEP, and Action are only valid for multiframe restart.
To switch from multiframe restart to the single frame restart, delete any .RDB, .LDHI, and .Rnnn files in
the directory. Issue the ANTYPE,,REST command and use the files .DB, .ESAV or .OSAV, and .EMAT.
A new specification of the TIME command within a load step when beginning a multiframe restart is invalid because the load step has been specified previously before restart.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Product Restrictions
Only the Antype values STATIC, BUCKLE, MODAL, HARMIC, TRANS, or SPECTR are valid in ANSYS Professional.
Only the Antype values STATIC, HARMIC, or TRANS are valid in ANSYS Emag.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Restart
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Restart
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
354
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/ANUM
/ANUM, NUM, TYPE, XHOT, YHOT
Specifies the annotation number, type, and hot spot (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NUM
Annotation number. ANSYS automatically assigns the lowest available number. You cannot assign a higher
number if a lower number is available; ANSYS will substitute the lowest available number in place of any
user-specified higher number.
TYPE
Annotation internal type number. If TYPE = DELE, delete annotation NUM.
1
Text
2
Block text (not available in GUI)
3
Dimensions
4
Lines
5
Rectangles
6
Circles
7
Polygons
8
Arcs
9
Wedges, pies
11
Symbols
12
Arrows
13
Bitmap
XHOT
X hot spot (-1.0 < X < 2.0). Used for menu button item delete.
YHOT
Y hot spot (-1.0 < Y < 1.0). Used for menu button item delete.
Command Default
Number, type, and hot spot are automatically determined.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
355
AOFFST
Notes
This is a command generated by the GUI and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used.
This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
Type 13 (bitmap) annotation applies user defined bitmaps defined using the FILE option of the /TXTRE command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
AOFFST, NAREA, DIST, KINC
Generates an area, offset from a given area.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NAREA
Area from which generated area is to be offset. If NAREA = ALL, offset from all selected areas [ASEL]. If NAREA
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
DIST
Distance normal to given area at which keypoints for generated area are to be located. Positive normal is
determined from the right-hand-rule keypoint order.
KINC
Keypoint increment between areas. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
Notes
Generates an area (and its corresponding keypoints and lines) offset from a given area. The direction of the offset
varies with the given area normal. End slopes of the generated lines remain the same as those of the given pattern.
Area and line numbers are automatically assigned, beginning with the lowest available values [NUMSTR].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Arbitrary>By Offset
356
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
APLOT
AOVLAP, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Overlaps areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Numbers of areas to be operated on. If NA1 = ALL, use all selected areas and ignore NA2 to NA9. If NA1 = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NA1.
Notes
Generates new areas which encompass the geometry of all the input areas. The new areas are defined by the
regions of intersection of the input areas, and by the complementary (non-intersecting) regions. See Solid
Modeling in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. This operation is only valid when the region
of intersection is an area. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be
transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Overlap>Areas
APLOT, NA1, NA2, NINC, DEGEN, SCALE
Displays the selected areas.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
Displays areas from NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1 = ALL (default), NA2
and NINC are ignored and all selected areas [ASEL] are displayed.
DEGEN
Degeneracy marker:
(blank)
No degeneracy marker is used (default).
DEGE
A red star is placed on keypoints at degeneracies (see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide ). Not
available if /FACET,WIRE is set.
SCALE
Scale factor for the size of the degeneracy-marker star. The scale is the size in window space (-1 to 1 in both
directions) (defaults to .075).
Notes
This command is valid in any processor. The degree of tessellation used to plot the selected areas is set through
the /FACET command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
357
APPEND
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Check Geom>Show Degeneracy>Plot Degen Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Show Degeneracy>Plot Degen Areas
Utility Menu>Plot>Areas
Utility Menu>Plot>Specified Entities>Areas
APPEND, LSTEP, SBSTEP, FACT, KIMG, TIME, ANGLE, NSET
Reads data from the results file and appends it to the database.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LSTEP
Load step number of the data set to be read. Defaults to 1. If FIRST, ignore SBSTEP and TIME and read the
first data set. If LAST, ignore SBSTEP and TIME and read the last data set. If NEXT, ignore SBSTEP and TIME
and read the next data set. If already at the last data set, the next set is the first data set. If NEAR, ignore SBSTEP
and read the data set nearest to TIME. If TIME is blank, read the first data set. If LIST, scan the results file to
produce a summary of each load step (FACT, KIMG, TIME and ANGLE are ignored).
SBSTEP
Substep number (within LSTEP) (defaults to last substep of load step). For the Buckling (ANTYPE,BUCKLE)
or Modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) analysis, the substep corresponds to the mode number (defaults to first mode).
If LSTEP = LIST, SBSTEP = 0 or 1 will list the basic load step information; SBSTEP = 2 will also list the load
step title, and label the imaginary data sets if they exist.
FACT
Scale factor applied to data read from the file. If zero (or blank), a value of 1.0 is used. Harmonic velocities or
accelerations may be calculated from the displacement results from a Modal or Harmonic Response (ANTYPE,HARMIC) analyses. If FACT = VELO, the harmonic velocities (v) are calculated from the displacements
(d) at a particular frequency (f) according to the relationship v = 2 fd. Similarly, if FACT = ACEL, the harmonic
accelerations (a) are calculated as a = (2 f)2d.
KIMG
Used only with results from complex analyses:
0
Store real part of complex solution.
1
Store imaginary part.
TIME
Time-point identifying the data set to be read. For the harmonic response analyses, time corresponds to the
frequency. For the buckling analysis, time corresponds to the load factor. Used only in the following cases:
If LSTEP is NEAR, read the data set nearest to TIME. If both LSTEP and SBSTEP are zero (or blank), read data
set at time = TIME. If TIME is between two solution time points on the results file, a linear interpolation is
done between the two data sets. Solution items not written to the results file [OUTRES] for either data set
will result in a null item after data set interpolation. If TIME is beyond the last time point on the file, the last
time point is used.
358
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
APTN
ANGLE
Circumferential location (0 to 360). Defines the circumferential location for the harmonic calculations used
when reading from the results file. The harmonic factor (based on the circumferential angle) is applied to
the harmonic elements (PLANE25, PLANE75, PLANE78, FLUID81, PLANE83, and SHELL61) of the load case.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Note that factored values of applied constraints and loads
will overwrite any values existing in the database.
NSET
Data set number of the data set to be read. If a positive value for NSET is entered, LSTEP, SBSTEP, KIMG, and
TIME are ignored. Available set numbers can be determined by APPEND,LIST. To determine if data sets are
real or imaginary, issue APPEND,LIST,2 which labels imaginary data sets.
Notes
Reads a data set from the results file and appends it to the existing data in the database for the selected model
only. The existing database is not cleared (or overwritten in total), allowing the requested results data to be
merged into the database. Various operations may also be performed during the read operation. The database
must have the model geometry available (or used the RESUME command before the APPEND command to restore
the geometry from File.DB).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Load Step
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Set Number
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Time/Freq
APTN, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Partitions areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NA7, NA8, NA9
Numbers of areas to be operated on. If NA1 = ALL, NA2 to NA9 are ignored and all selected areas are used. If
NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may be substituted for NA1.
Notes
Partitions areas that intersect. This command is similar to the combined functionality of the ASBA and AOVLAP
commands. If the intersection of two or more areas is an area (i.e., planar), new areas will be created with
boundaries that conform to the area of intersection and to the boundaries of the non-intersecting portions of
the input areas [AOVLAP]. If the intersection is a line (i.e., not planar), the areas will be subtracted, or divided,
along the line(s) of intersection [ASBA]. Both types of intersection can occur during a single APTN operation.
Areas that do not intersect will not be modified. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration.
See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes
and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities
generated.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
359
ARCLEN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Partition>Areas
ARCLEN, Key, MAXARC, MINARC
Activates the arc-length method.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Arc-length key:
OFF
Do not use the arc-length method (default).
ON
Use the arc-length method.
MAXARC
Maximum multiplier of the reference arc-length radius (default = 25).
MINARC
Minimum multiplier of the reference arc-length radius (default = 1/1000).
Notes
Activates the arc-length method and sets the minimum and maximum multipliers for the arc-length radius. The
reference arc-length radius is calculated from the load or displacement increment of the first iteration of the first
substep. This increment is determined by the following formula:
Reference Arc-Length Radius = Total Load (or Displacement) / NSBSTP
where NSBSTP is the number of substeps specified on the NSUBST command.
The factors MAXARC and MINARC are used to define the limits of the arc-length radius by using the following
formulas:
lower limit = MINARC * (Reference Arc-Length Radius)
upper limit = MAXARC * (Reference Arc-Length Radius)
In each subsequent substep, a new arc-length radius is first calculated based on the arc-length radius of the
previous substep and the solution behavior. Next, the newly calculated arc-length radius is further modified so
that it falls between the range of the upper limit and lower limit. If the solution does not converge even when
using the lower limit of the arc-length radius, the solution will terminate.
These values, together with the reference arc-length radius, define the limit for the new arc-length radius.
ARCLEN must be turned OFF for any load step without an applied load or displacement.
You cannot use the arc-length method with the following controls: automatic time stepping [AUTOTS], line
search [LNSRCH], and the DOF solution predictor [PRED]. If you activate the arc-length method after you set
360
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ARCTRM
any of these controls, a warning message appears. If you choose to proceed with the arc-length method activation,
ANSYS disables your automatic time stepping, line search, and DOF predictor settings.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Advanced NL
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Arc-Length Opts
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Advanced NL
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Arc-Length Opts
ARCOLLAPSE, AREA, LINE
Collapses specified area to a specified line segment (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
AREA
The ID of the area to collapse.
LINE
The ID of a line belonging to AREA; only the specified line will remain after the area is collapsed.
Notes
Use this command to simplify the geometry of a model imported from a CAD file (this is a geometry cleanup
tool). This tool is available only for models imported from CAD files.
If AREA has any attached loads or boundary conditions, these must be reattached after the collapse operation
(Default IGES option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Collapse Areas
ARCTRM, Lab, VAL, NODE, DOF
Controls termination of the arc-length solution.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
Specifies the basis of solution termination:
OFF
Does not use ARCTRM to terminate analysis (default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
361
ARDETACH
L
Terminates the analysis if the first limit point has been reached. The first limit point is that point in the
response history when the tangent stiffness matrix becomes singular (i.e., the point at which the structure
becomes unstable). If Lab = L, arguments VAL, NODE, DOF are ignored.
U
Terminates the analysis when the displacement first equals or exceeds the maximum desired value.
VAL
Maximum desired displacement (absolute value). Valid only if Lab = U. The analysis terminates whenever
the calculated displacement first equals or exceeds this value. For rotational degrees of freedom, VAL must
be in radians (not degrees).
NODE
Node number corresponding to displacement used to compare with displacement specified by VAL. If blank,
the maximum displacement will be used. Valid only if Lab = U.
DOF
Valid degree of freedom label for nodal displacement specified by NODE. Valid labels are UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
ROTY, ROTZ. Valid only if NODE>0 and Lab = U.
Notes
It can be convenient to use this command to terminate the analysis when the first limit point is reached. In addition,
the NCNV command should be used to limit the maximum number of iterations. If the ARCTRM command is
not used, and the applied load is so large that the solution path can never reach that load, the arc-length solution
will continue to run until a CPU time limit or a "maximum number of iterations" is reached.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Advanced NL
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Arc-Length Opts
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Advanced NL
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Arc-Length Opts
ARDETACH, AREA1, AREA2, AINC
Detaches areas from neighboring geometrical entities (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
AREA1, AREA2, AINC
Detach areas from AREA1 to AREA2 (defaults to AREA1) in steps of AINC (defaults to 1).
Notes
Use this command to detach non-manifold areas from their neighboring geometric entities. This command is
available only for repairing the geometry of models imported from CAD systems (Default IGES option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Detach Areas
362
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AREFINE
AREAS
Specifies "Areas" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
AREFINE, NA1, NA2, NINC, LEVEL, DEPTH, POST, RETAIN
Refines the mesh around specified areas.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
Areas (NA1 to NA2 in increments of NINC) around which the mesh is to be refined. NA2 defaults to NA1, and
NINC defaults to 1. If NA1 = ALL, NA2 and NINC are ignored and all selected areas are used for refinement. If
NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NA1 (NA2 and NINC are ignored).
LEVEL
Amount of refinement to be done. Specify the value of LEVEL as an integer from 1 to 5, where a value of 1
provides minimal refinement, and a value of 5 provides maximum refinement (defaults to 1).
DEPTH
Depth of mesh refinement in terms of the number of elements outward from the indicated areas (defaults
to 1).
POST
Type of postprocessing to be done after element splitting, in order to improve element quality:
OFF
No postprocessing will be done.
SMOOTH
Smoothing will be done. Node locations may change.
CLEAN
Smoothing and cleanup will be done. Existing elements may be deleted, and node locations may change
(default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
363
AREMESH
RETAIN
Flag indicating whether quadrilateral elements must be retained in the refinement of an all-quadrilateral
mesh. (The ANSYS program ignores the RETAIN argument when you are refining anything other than a
quadrilateral mesh.)
ON
The final mesh will be composed entirely of quadrilateral elements, regardless of the element quality
(default).
OFF
The final mesh may include some triangular elements in order to maintain element quality and provide
transitioning.
Notes
AREFINE performs local mesh refinement around the specified areas. By default, the indicated elements are split
to create new elements with 1/2 the edge length of the original elements (LEVEL = 1).
AREFINE refines all area elements and tetrahedral volume elements that are adjacent to the specified areas. Any
volume elements that are adjacent to the specified areas, but are not tetrahedra (for example, hexahedra, wedges,
and pyramids), are not refined.
You cannot use mesh refinement on a solid model that contains initial conditions at nodes [IC], coupled nodes
[CP family of commands], constraint equations [CE family of commands], or boundary conditions or loads applied
directly to any of its nodes or elements. This applies to nodes and elements anywhere in the model, not just in
the region where you want to request mesh refinement. See Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for additional restrictions on mesh refinement.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Areas
AREMESH, LCOMB, ANGLE
Generates an area in which to create a new mesh for rezoning.
SOLUTION: Rezoning
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
LCOMB
Specifies how to combine adjacent line segments:
0
Line segments combined by connecting ends to ends. This value is the default.
-1
No line segments combined.
ANGLE
The maximum angle (in degrees) allowed for connecting two line segments together. The default value is
30. This value is valid only when LCOMB = 0.
364
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AREVERSE
Notes
Issue the AREMESH command after issuing a REMESH,START command and before issuing a REMESH,FINISH
command.
The AREMESH command cannot account an open area (or hole) inside a completely enclosed region. Instead,
try meshing around an open area by selecting two adjoining regions; for more information, see Section 6.5.1.2:
Remeshing Multiple Regions at the Same Substep.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Create Rezone Area
AREVERSE, ANUM, NOEFLIP
Reverses the normal of an area, regardless of its connectivity or mesh status.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ANUM
Area number of the area whose normal is to be reversed. If ANUM = ALL, the normals of all selected areas will
be reversed. If ANUM = P, graphical picking is enabled. A component name may also be substituted for ANUM.
NOEFLIP
Indicates whether you want to change the normal direction of the existing elements on the reversed area(s)
so that they are consistent with each area's new normal direction.
0
Make the normal direction of existing elements on the reversed area(s) consistent with each area's new
normal direction (default).
1
Do not change the normal direction of existing elements on the reversed area(s).
Notes
You cannot use the AREVERSE command to change the normal direction of any element that has a body or
surface load. We recommend that you apply all of your loads only after ensuring that the element normal directions
are acceptable. Also, you cannot use this command to change the normal direction for areas attached to volumes
because IGES data is unchanged by reversal. Reversed areas that are attached to volumes need to be reversed
again when imported.
Real constants (such as nonuniform shell thickness and tapered beam constants) may be invalidated by an element
reversal.
See Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Reverse Normals>of Areas
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
365
ARFILL
ARFILL, LN1, LN2, LN3, LN4, LN5, LN6, LN7, LN8, LN9, LN10
Creates an area based on a set of singly-connected lines (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LN1, LN2, LN3, LN4, LN5, LN6, LN7, LN8, LN9, LN10
List of lines that define the new area. If LN1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments
are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If LN1 = ALL, all selected lines will be checked for possible closure and all
open areas will be filled with lines (lines will be added) that form closed loops.
Notes
The ARFILL command creates an area based on the boundary defined by a set of singly-connected lines. No
lines in the selected set can be connected to two areas. The area created is the minimum surface defined by the
boundary line set.
This tool is available only for models imported from CAD files (Default IGES option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Fill Areas
ARMERGE, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, A10
Merges two or more singly-connected adjacent areas (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, A10
List of areas that define the set of areas to merge. If A1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If A1 = ALL, all selected areas will be merged and all remaining
arguments are ignored.
Notes
The ARMERGE command can concatenate more than two adjacent areas; however, for best results you should
limit each merge to two areas. Also, you should restrict merge operations to areas that are clearly simple extensions
of each other.
If the areas specified in the list have any attached loads or boundary conditions, these will be removed and must
be reattached after the merge operation. If the merge operation would result in abnormal parameterization, the
command will fail.
Use this command to simplify the geometry of a model imported from a CAD file (this is a geometry cleanup
tool). This tool is available only for models imported from CAD files (Default IGES option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Merge Areas
366
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ARSCALE
AROTAT, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, PAX1, PAX2, ARC, NSEG
Generates cylindrical areas by rotating a line pattern about an axis.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6
List of lines in the pattern to be rotated (6 maximum if using keyboard entry of NL1 to NL6). The lines must
lie in the plane of the axis of rotation. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments
are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If NL1 = ALL, all selected lines will define the pattern to be rotated. A
component name may also be substituted for NL1.
PAX1, PAX2
Keypoints defining the axis about which the line pattern is to be rotated.
ARC
Arc length (in degrees). Positive follows right-hand rule about PAX1-PAX2 vector. Defaults to 360.
NSEG
Number of areas (8 maximum) around circumference. Defaults to minimum number required for 90 -maximum arcs, i.e., 4 for 360, 3 for 270, etc.
Notes
Generates cylindrical areas (and their corresponding keypoints and lines) by rotating a line pattern (and its associated keypoint pattern) about an axis. Keypoint patterns are generated at regular angular locations, based on
a maximum spacing of 90. Line patterns are generated at the keypoint patterns. Arc lines are also generated to
connect the keypoints circumferentially. Keypoint, line, and area numbers are automatically assigned, beginning
with the lowest available values [NUMSTR]. Adjacent lines use a common keypoint. Adjacent areas use a common
line.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Lines>About Axis
ARSCALE, NA1, NA2, NINC, RX, RY, RZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates a scaled set of areas from a pattern of areas.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
Set of areas, NA1 to NA2 in steps of NINC, that defines the pattern to be scaled. NA2 defaults to NA1, NINC
defaults to 1. If NA1 = ALL, NA2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is defined by all selected areas. If NA1
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NA1 (NA2 and NINC are ignored).
RX, RY, RZ
Scale factors to be applied to the X, Y, and Z keypoint coordinates in the active coordinate system. (RR, R ,
RZ for cylindrical; RR, R , R for spherical). Note that the R and R scale factors are interpreted as angular
offsets. For example, if CSYS = 1, RX, RY, RZ input of (1.5,10,3) would scale the specified keypoints 1.5 times
in the radial and 3 times in the Z direction, while adding an offset of 10 degrees to the keypoints. Zero, blank,
or negative scale factor values are assumed to be 1.0. Zero or blank angular offsets have no effect.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
367
ARSPLIT
KINC
Increment to be applied to keypoint numbers for generated set. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers
will be assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Nodes and elements associated with the original areas will be generated (scaled) if they exist.
1
Nodes and elements will not be generated.
IMOVE
Specifies whether areas will be moved or newly defined:
0
Additional areas will be generated.
1
Original areas will be moved to new position (KINC and NOELEM are ignored). Use only if the old areas
are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items are also moved if not
needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates a scaled set of areas (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, and mesh) from a pattern of areas. The
MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based on the areas in the pattern and not the current settings. Scaling
is done in the active coordinate system. Areas in the pattern could have been generated in any coordinate system.
However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Scale>Areas
ARSPLIT, AREA, KP1, KP2, TOL, Factor
Splits an area between two keypoints (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
AREA
The ID for the area to be split.
KP1
The ID of an existing keypoint within the area. This will be the starting keypoint for the boundary line. You
cannot specify a keypoint for KP1 that is already connected to KP2.
KP2
The ID of an existing keypoint within the area that will become the end point for the boundary line.
TOL
Label to activate user-definable area tolerance. If TOL = TIGHT user-definable tolerances are used and the
tolerance factor is specified by Factor.
368
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ARSYM
Factor
The user-definable tolerance factor. Valid entries are integer values from 1 (the tightest setting) to 10 (the
loosest and default setting). This is only used when TOL = TIGHT.
Notes
The ARSPLIT command creates a new boundary line between the specified keypoints, splitting the specified
area into two areas sharing that boundary. The command will allow you to specify a keypoint pair such that the
resultant boundary line will fall outside of the confines of the specified area; make sure that the keypoints you
select do not create such a line.
Use this command to simplify the geometry of a model imported from a CAD file (this is a geometry cleanup
tool). This tool is available only for models imported from CAD files (Default IGES option).
Normally, the default area tolerance is adequate for the ARSPLIT command. However, occasionally when attempting to split an extremely narrow area the ARSPLIT command can fail due to what the error message calls
"numerical inadequacies" and you'll be prompted to try another location for the split. You may be able to split
the area at the selected keypoints by tightening the area tolerance. To do this, issue the ARSPLIT command with
TOL = TIGHT and Factor as an integer between 1 (the default, and loosest tolerance) and 10. You should remove
any areas that are split through these arguments. If such areas remain, they may cause Boolean operations involving those areas to fail.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Split Areas
ARSYM, Ncomp, NA1, NA2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates areas from an area pattern by symmetry reflection.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Ncomp
Symmetry key:
X
X symmetry (default).
Y
Y symmetry.
Z
Z symmetry.
NA1, NA2, NINC
Reflect areas from pattern beginning with NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1
= ALL, NA2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected areas [ASEL]. If Ncomp = P, use graphical
picking to specify areas and ignore NL2 and NINC. A component name may also be substituted for NA1 (NA2
and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
369
ASBA
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original areas, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether areas will be moved or newly defined:
0
Generate additional areas.
1
Move original areas to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELEM are ignored).
Valid only if the old areas are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items
are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates a reflected set of areas (and their corresponding keypoints, lines and mesh) from a given area pattern
by a symmetry reflection (see analogous node symmetry command, NSYM). The MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, and
SECNUM attributes are based upon the areas in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Reflection is done
in the active coordinate system by changing a particular coordinate sign. The active coordinate system must be
a Cartesian system. Areas in the pattern may have been generated in any coordinate system. However, solid
modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Areas are generated as described in the AGEN
command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Reflect>Areas
ASBA, NA1, NA2, SEPO, KEEP1, KEEP2
Subtracts areas from areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1
Area (or areas, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected areas. Areas specified in this
argument are not available for use in the NA2 argument. If P, graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the
GUI) and remaining fields are ignored. A component name may also be substituted for NA1.
NA2
Area (or areas, if picking is used) to subtract. If ALL, use all selected areas (except those included in the NA1
argument). A component name may also be substituted for NA2.
SEPO
Behavior if the intersection of the NA1 areas and the NA2 areas is a line or lines:
370
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ASBA
(blank)
The resulting areas will share line(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting areas will have separate, but coincident line(s) where they touch.
KEEP1
Specifies whether NA1 areas are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NA1 areas after ASBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NA1 areas after ASBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP2
Specifies whether NA2 areas are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NA2 areas after ASBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NA2 areas after ASBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new areas by subtracting the regions common to both NA1 and NA2 areas (the intersection) from the
NA1 areas. The intersection can be an area(s) or line(s). If the intersection is a line and SEPO is blank, the NA1 area
is divided at the line and the resulting areas will be connected, sharing a common line where they touch. If SEPO
is set to SEPO, NA1 is divided into two unconnected areas with separate lines where they touch. See Solid Modeling in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation
of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned
to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated. ASBA,ALL,ALL will have no effect
since all the areas (in NA1) will be unavailable as NA2 areas.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Area by Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Area by Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Subtract>Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Subtract>With Options>Areas
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
371
ASBL
ASBL, NA, NL, --, KEEPA, KEEPL
Subtracts lines from areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA
Area (or areas, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected areas. If P, graphical picking
is enabled (valid only in the GUI) and remaining fields are ignored. A component name may also be substituted
for NA.
NL
Line (or lines, if picking is used) to subtract. If ALL, use all selected lines. A component name may also be
substituted for NL.
--
Unused field.
KEEPA
Specifies whether NA areas are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NA areas after ASBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NA areas after ASBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEPL
Specifies whether NL lines are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NL lines after ASBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NL lines after ASBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new areas by subtracting the regions common to both the areas and lines (the intersection) from the
NA areas. The intersection will be a line(s). See Solid Modeling in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an
illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element
attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the
new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Area by Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Area by Line
372
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ASBV
ASBV, NA, NV, SEPO, KEEPA, KEEPV
Subtracts volumes from areas.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA
Area (or areas, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected areas. If P, graphical picking
is enabled (valid only in the GUI) and remaining fields are ignored. A component name may also be substituted
for NA.
NV
Volume (or volumes, if picking is used) to subtract. If ALL, use all selected volumes. A component name may
also be substituted for NV.
SEPO
Behavior if the intersection of the areas and the volumes is a line or lines:
(blank)
The resulting areas will share line(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting areas will have separate, but coincident line(s) where they touch.
KEEPA
Specifies whether NA areas are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NA areas after ASBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NA areas after ASBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEPV
Specifies whether NV volumes are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete volumes after ASBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep volumes after ASBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new areas by subtracting the regions common to both NA areas and NV volumes (the intersection)
from the NA areas. The intersection can be an area(s) or line(s). If the intersection is a line and SEPO is blank, the
NA area is divided at the line and the resulting areas will be connected, sharing a common line where they touch.
If SEPO is set to SEPO, NA is divided into two unconnected areas with separate lines where they touch. See Solid
Modeling in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explan-
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
373
ASBW
ation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions
assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Area by Volume
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Area by Volume
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Divide>Area by Volu
ASBW, NA, SEPO, KEEP
Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from areas (divides areas).
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA
Area (or areas, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If NA = ALL, use all selected areas. If NA = P, graphical
picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be input for NA.
SEPO
Behavior of the created boundary.
(blank)
The resulting areas will share line(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting areas will have separate, but coincident line(s).
KEEP
Specifies whether NA areas are to be deleted.
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NA areas after ASBW operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NA areas after ASBW operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new areas by subtracting the intersection of the working plane from the NA areas. The intersection
will be a line(s). The working plane must not be in the same plane as the NA areas(s). If SEPO is blank, the NA area
is divided at the line and the resulting areas will be connected, sharing a common line where they touch. If SEPO
is set to SEPO, NA is divided into two unconnected areas with separate lines. The SEPO option may cause unintended consequences if any keypoints exist along the cut plane. See Solid Modeling in the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to Boolean
operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be
transferred to the new entities generated.
Issuing the ASBW command under certain conditions may generate a topological degeneracy error. Do not issue
the command if:
374
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ASEL
A sphere or cylinder has been scaled. (A cylinder must be scaled unevenly in the XY plane.)
A sphere or cylinder has not been scaled but the work plane has been rotated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Area by WrkPlane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Area by WrkPlane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Divide>Area by WrkPlane
ASEL, Type, Item, Comp, VMIN, VMAX, VINC, KSWP
Selects a subset of areas.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set (default)
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Restore the full set.
NONE
Unselect the full set.
INVE
Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT
Display the current select status.
The following fields are used only with Type = S, R, A, or U:
Item
Label identifying data. Valid item labels are shown in ASEL - Valid Item and Component Labels. Some items
also require a component label. If Item = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI). Defaults to AREA.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in ASEL - Valid Item and Component
Labels.
VMIN
Minimum value of item range. Ranges are area numbers, coordinate values, attribute numbers, etc., as appropriate for the item. A component name (as specified on the CM command) may also be substituted for
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
375
ASEL
VMIN (VMAX and VINC are ignored). If Item = MAT, TYPE, REAL, or ESYS and if VMIN is positive, the absolute
value of Item is compared against the range for selection; if VMIN is negative, the signed value of Item is
compared. See the ALIST command for a discussion of signed attributes.
VMAX
Maximum value of item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN. If VMAX = VMIN, a tolerance of 0.005 x VMIN is used,
or 1.0E-6 if VMIN = 0.0. If VMAX VMIN, a tolerance of 1.0E-8 x (VMAX-VMIN) is used.
VINC
Value increment within range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for area numbers). Defaults to 1. VINC
cannot be negative.
KSWP
Specifies whether only areas are to be selected:
0
Select areas only.
1
Select areas, as well as keypoints, lines, nodes, and elements associated with selected areas. Valid only
with Type = S.
Command Default
All areas are selected.
Notes
Selects a subset of areas. For example, to select those areas with area numbers 1 through 7, use ASEL,S,AREA,,1,7.
The selected subset is then used when the ALL label is entered (or implied) on other commands, such as ALIST,ALL.
Only data identified by area number are selected. Data are flagged as selected and unselected; no data are actually
deleted from the database.
If Item = ACCA, the command selects only those areas that were created by concatenation. The KSWP field is
processed, but the Comp, VMIN, VMAX, and VINC fields are ignored.
This command is valid in any processor.
ASEL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels ASEL, Type Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KSWP
Item
Comp
Description
AREA
Area number.
EXT
Area numbers on exterior of selected volumes (ignore remaining fields).
LOC
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z center (picking "hot spot" location in the active coordinate system).
HPT
Area number (selects only areas with associated hard points).
MAT
Material number associated with the area.
TYPE
Element type number associated with the area.
REAL
Real constant set number associated with the area.
ESYS
Element coordinate system associated with the area.
SECN
Section number associated with the area.
376
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ASKIN
Valid Item and Component Labels ASEL, Type Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KSWP
Item
ACCA
Comp
Description
Concatenated areas (selects only areas that were created by area concatenation [ACCAT]).
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
ASKIN, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Generates an area by "skinning" a surface through guiding lines.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
The first guiding line forming the skinned area. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NL1. If NL1 is
negative, the line beginnings and ends will be used to direct the skinning of the remaining lines (see Changing
the ASKIN Algorithm below).
NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
The additional guiding lines for the skinned area (up to 9 total lines, including NL1, if using keyboard entry).
If negative (and NL1 is negative), the line beginning and end will be temporarily interchanged for the skinning
operation (see Changing the ASKIN Algorithm below).
Notes
Generates an area by "skinning" a surface through specified guiding lines. The lines act as a set of "ribs" over
which a surface is "stretched." Two opposite edges of the area are framed by the first (NL1) and last (NLn) guiding
lines specified. The other two edges of the area are framed by splines-fit lines which the program automatically
generates through the ends of all guiding lines. The interior of the area is shaped by the interior guiding lines.
Once the area has been created, only the four edge lines will be attached to it. In rare cases, it may be necessary
to change the default algorithm used by the ASKIN command (see Changing the ASKIN Algorithm below).
Changing the ASKIN Algorithm
When skinning from one guiding line to the next, the program can create the transition area in one of two ways:
one more spiraled and one less spiraled ("flatter"). By default, the program attempts to produce the flatter
transition, instead of the more spiraled transition. This algorithm can be changed by inputting NL1 as a negative
number, in which case the program connects all the keypoints at the line "beginnings" (/PSYMB,LDIR command)
as one edge of the area, and all the line "ends" as the opposite edge, irrespective of the amount of spiraling
produced in each transition area.
To further control the geometry of the area (if NL1 is negative), the beginning and end of any specified line
(other than NL1) can be temporarily interchanged (for the skinning operation only) by inputting that line number
as negative. See Solid Modeling in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
377
ASLL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Arbitrary>By Skinning
ASLL, Type, ARKEY
Selects those areas containing the selected lines.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of area select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ARKEY
Specifies whether all contained area lines must be selected [LSEL]:
0
Select area if any of its lines are in the selected line set.
1
Select area only if all of its lines are in the selected line set.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
ASLV, Type
Selects those areas contained in the selected volumes.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of area select:
378
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/ASSIGN
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
/ASSIGN, Ident, Fname, Ext, -Reassigns a file name to an ANSYS file identifier.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Ident
ANSYS file name identifier. Valid identifiers are: EMAT, ESAV, FULL, REDM, MODE, RDSP, RFRQ, TRI, RST, RTH,
RMG, EROT, OSAV, RFL, SELD, and CMS. See Chapter 18, File Management and Files for file descriptions. If
blank, list currently reassigned files.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Notes
The reassignment of file names is valid only if it is done before the file is used. All file reassignments are retained
(not cleared) even if the database is cleared [/CLEAR] or the Jobname is changed [/FILNAME]. Assigned files
may be overwritten. If file name arguments (Fname, Ext, --) are blank, the default ANSYS assignment is restored.
Use SEOPT for SUB files and SEEXP for DSUB files.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
379
ASUB
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>ANSYS File Options
ASUB, NA1, P1, P2, P3, P4
Generates an area using the shape of an existing area.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1
Existing area number whose shape is to be used. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
P1
Keypoint defining starting corner of area.
P2
Keypoint defining second corner of area.
P3
Keypoint defining third corner of area.
P4
Keypoint defining fourth corner of area (defaults to P3).
Notes
The new area will overlay the old area. Often used when the area to be subdivided consists of a complex shape
that was not generated in a single coordinate system. Keypoints and any corresponding lines must lie on the
existing area. Missing lines are generated to lie on the given area. The active coordinate system is ignored.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Arbitrary>Overlaid on Area
ASUM, LAB
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected areas.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LAB
Controls the degree of tessellation used in the calculation of area properties. If LAB = DEFAULT, area calculations will use the degree of tessellation set through the /FACET command. If LAB = FINE, area calculations
are based on a finer tessellation.
Notes
Calculates and prints geometry statistics (area, centroid location, moments of inertia, volume, etc.) associated
with the selected areas. ASUM should only be used on perfectly flat areas.
380
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ATAN
Geometry items are reported in the global Cartesian coordinate system. A unit density (and thickness) is assumed
unless the areas have a material (and real constant) association via the AATT command. The command always
uses a unit density and a unit thickness for layered shell elements (such as SHELL91, SHELL99, SHELL131, SHELL163,
and SHELL181).
Items calculated by ASUM and later retrieved via a *GET or *VGET command are valid only if the model is not
modified after issuing the ASUM command.
Setting a finer degree of tessellation will provide area calculations with greater accuracy, especially for thin,
hollow models. However, using a finer degree of tessellation requires longer processing.
For very narrow (sliver) areas, such that the ratio of the minimum to the maximum dimension is less than 0.01,
the ASUM command can provide erroneous area information. To ensure that such calculations are accurate,
make certain that you subdivide such areas so that the ratio of the minimum to the maximum is at least 0.05.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Calc Geom Items>Of Areas
ATAN, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA
Forms the arctangent of a complex variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the complex variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed upon output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0). Usually FACTA should be set to
1. FACTA may affect the position of the angle by a multiple of , resulting in a quadrant change.
Notes
Forms the arctangent of a complex variable according to the operation:
IR = ATAN(FACTA X b/a)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
381
ATRAN
where a and b are the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex variable IA (which is of the form a
+ ib). The arctangent represents the phase angle (in radians), and is valid only for a harmonic analysis (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
Since the scaling factor is applied uniformly to b/a, applying any positive or negative scaling factor will not affect
the size of the phase angle, with the exception that a negative scaling factor will change the results quadrant
by . The magnitude of a complex number is still obtained through the ABS command. See the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference for details.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Arctangent
ATRAN, KCNTO, NA1, NA2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Transfers a pattern of areas to another coordinate system.
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCNTO
Reference number of coordinate system where the pattern is to be transferred. Transfer occurs from the
active coordinate system. The coordinate system type and parameters of KCNTO must be the same as the
active system.
NA1, NA2, NINC
Transfer area pattern beginning with NA1 to NA2 (defaults to NA1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NA1 =
ALL, NA2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected areas [ASEL]. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be
substituted for NA1 (NA2 and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether elements and nodes are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original areas, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether to redefine the existing areas:
0
Generate additional areas.
1
Move original areas to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELEM are ignored).
Valid only if the old areas are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items
are also moved if not needed at their original position.
382
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/AUTO
Notes
Transfers a pattern of areas (and their corresponding lines, keypoints and mesh) from one coordinate system to
another (see analogous node TRANSFER command). The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based upon
the areas in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Coordinate systems may be translated and rotated
relative to each other. Initial pattern may be generated in any coordinate system. However, solid modeling in a
toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Coordinate and slope values are interpreted in the active coordinate system and are transferred directly. Areas are generated as described in the AGEN command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Transfer Coord>Areas
ATYPE
Specifies "Analysis types" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Analysis Type
/AUTO, WN
Resets the focus and distance specifications to "automatically calculated."
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
Notes
Focus point and distance will be automatically calculated during next display. Settings may still be changed with
the /FOCUS and /DIST commands after this command has been issued. See also the /USER command.
This command is valid in any processor.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
383
AUTOTS
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Pan, Zoom, Rotate
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Automatic Fit Mode
AUTOTS, Key
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping or load stepping.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Key
Automatic time stepping key:
OFF
Do not use automatic time stepping.
ON
Use automatic time stepping.
Command Default
ANSYS determined time stepping when SOLCONTROL,ON. No automatic time stepping when SOLCONTROL,OFF.
Notes
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping (or load stepping) over this load step. If Key = ON, both time
step prediction and time step bisection will be used. Used only if DTIME (specified on the DELTIM command) is
less than the time span or conversely, if NSBSTP (on the NSUBST command) is greater than one.
If you run an analysis with SOLCONTROL,ON, but do not issue the AUTOTS command, ANSYS will choose
whether or not to use automatic time stepping. The program-chosen option will be recorded on the log file as
AUTOTS,-1.
You cannot use automatic time stepping [AUTOTS], line search [LNSRCH], or the DOF solution predictor [PRED]
with the arc-length method [ARCLEN, ARCTRM]. If you activate the arc-length method after you set AUTOTS,
LNSRCH, or PRED, a warning message appears. If you choose to proceed with the arc-length method activation,
ANSYS disables your automatic time stepping, line search, and DOF predictor settings.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
384
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/AUX12
/AUX2
Enters the binary file dumping processor.
AUX2: Binary Files
SESSION: Processor Entry
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the binary file dumping processor (ANSYS auxiliary processor AUX2). This processor is used to dump the
contents of certain ANSYS binary files for visual examination.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>List>Binary Files
Utility Menu>List>Files>Binary Files
/AUX3
Enters the results file editing processor.
AUX3: Results Files
SESSION: Processor Entry
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the results file editing processor (ANSYS auxiliary processor AUX3). This processor is used to edit ANSYS
results files.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
/AUX12
Enters the radiation processor.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
SESSION: Processor Entry
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
Enters the radiation processor (ANSYS auxiliary processor AUX12). This processor supports the Radiation Matrix
and the Radiosity Solver methods.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
385
/AUX15
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Matrix
/AUX15
Enters the IGES file transfer processor.
AUX15: IGES
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the IGES file transfer processor (ANSYS auxiliary processor AUX15), used to read an IGES data file into the
ANSYS program.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Import
AVPRIN, KEY, EFFNU
Specifies how principal and vector sums are to be calculated.
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KEY
Averaging key:
0
Average the component values from the elements at a common node, then calculate the principal or
vector sum from the averaged components (default).
1
Calculate the principal or vector sum values on a per element basis, then average these values from the
elements at a common node.
EFFNU
Effective Poisson's ratio used for computing the von Mises equivalent strain (EQV). This command option is
intended for use with line elements or in load case operations (LCOPER) only; ANSYS automatically selects
the most appropriate effective Poisson's ratio, as discussed below.
Command Default
Average components at common node before principal or vector sum calculation.
386
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
AVRES
Notes
Selects the method of combining components for certain derived nodal results when two or more elements
connect to a common node. The methods apply to the calculations of derived nodal principal stresses, principal
strains, and vector sums for selects, sorts, and output [NSEL, NSORT, PRNSOL, PLNSOL, etc.].
This command also defines the effective Poisson's ratio (EFFNU) used for equivalent strain calculations. If you
use EFFNU, the default effective Poisson's ratios shown below will be overridden for all elements by the EFFNU
value. To return to the default settings, issue the RESET command.
From user input for EPEL and EPTH
Set to 0.5 for EPPL and EPCR
Set to 0.5 if the referenced material is hyperelastic
Set to 0.0 for line elements (includes beam, link, and pipe elements, as well as discrete elements), cyclic
symmetry analysis, and load case operations (LCOPER).
This command is also valid in POST26, where applicable.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Define Table
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Nodal Solution
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Map onto Path
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Map onto Path>FE Results
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Element Solu
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Nodal Solu
Utility Menu>List>Results>Nodal Solution
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Contour Plot>Elem Solution
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Contour Plot>Nodal Solution
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Multi-Plot Contrls
AVRES, KEY, Opt
Specifies how results data will be averaged when PowerGraphics is enabled.
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Averaging key.
1
Average results at all common subgrid locations.
2
Average results at all common subgrid locations except where material type [MAT] discontinuities exist.
This option is the default.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
387
/AXLAB
3
Average results at all common subgrid locations except where real constant [REAL] discontinuities exist.
4
Average results at all common subgrid locations except where material type [MAT] or real constant
[REAL] discontinuities exist.
Opt
Option to determine how results data are averaged.
(blank)
Average surface results data using only the exterior element faces (default).
FULL
Average surface results data using the exterior face and interior element data.
Notes
The AVRES command specifies how results data will be averaged at subgrid locations that are common to 2 or
more elements. The command is valid only when PowerGraphics is enabled (via the /GRAPHICS,POWER command).
With PowerGraphics active (/GRAPHICS,POWER), the averaging scheme for surface data with interior element
data included (AVRES,,FULL) and multiple facets per edge (/EFACET,2 or /EFACET,4) will yield differing minimum
and maximum contour values depending on the Z-Buffering options (/TYPE,,6 or /TYPE,,7). When the Section
data is not included in the averaging schemes (/TYPE,,7), the resulting absolute value for the midside node is
significantly smaller.
PowerGraphics does not average your stresses across discontinuous surfaces. The normals for various planes
and facets are compared to a tolerance to determine continuity. The ANGLE value you specify in the /EDGE
command is the tolerance for classifying surfaces as continuous or coplanar.
The command affects nodal solution contour plots (PLNSOL), nodal solution printout (PRNSOL), and subgrid
solution results accessed through the Query Results function (under General Postprocessing) in the GUI.
The command has no effect on the nodal degree of freedom solution values (UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, etc.).
The command is also available in /SOLU.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
/AXLAB, Axis, Lab
Labels the X and Y axes on graph displays.
GRAPHICS: Graphs
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Axis
Axis specifier:
388
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/AXLAB
X
Apply label to X axis.
Y
Apply label to Y axis.
Lab
Axis label (user defined text up to 30 characters long). Leave blank to reestablish the default for Axis axis.
Command Default
Labels are determined by the program.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Drop Test>Time History>Graph Variables
Main Menu>Drop Test>Time History>List Variables
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Axes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
389
390
B Commands
/BATCH, Lab
Sets the program mode to "batch."
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Specifies listing mode during a batch run:
LIST
The batch output will include a listing of the input file.
(blank)
Suppress input data listing.
Command Default
Interactive mode.
Notes
Sets the program mode to "batch" when included as the first line on an input file of ANSYS commands. For convenience, this command is automatically recorded on the log file (Jobname.LOG) at the beginning of an interactive ANSYS session so that the log file can be reused later for batch input.
Caution: This command should not be entered directly in an interactive ANSYS session since all subsequent keyboard input is simply copied to a file, without further processing or prompts from the program
(use the "system break" to exit the ANSYS program if this occurs).
The recommended method for choosing batch mode, rather than using the /BATCH command, is to select the
Batch simulation environment from the ANSYS Product Launcher task in the ANSYS launcher, or the batch
mode entry option on the ANSYS execution command when entering the program.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
BCSOPTION, --, Memory_Option, Memory_Size, --, --, Solve_Info
Sets memory option for the sparse solver.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
--
Unused field
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BCSOPTION
Memory_Option
DEFAULT
Use the default memory usage strategy for the sparse solver. For smaller jobs, the default strategy attempts
to run in memory (incore) with no I/O. For larger jobs, the default strategy attempts to obtain enough
memory for large jobs to run with optimal I/O performance. Optimal I/O for the sparse solver is obtained
when sufficient workspace is allocated to keep the largest matrix front in memory during factorization.
The amount of memory required for the sparse solver is unknown until the matrix structure is preprocessed, including equation reordering. The amount allocated for the sparse solver is then dynamically
adjusted using the ANSYS memory manager.
INCORE
Use a memory allocation strategy in the sparse solver that will attempt to obtain enough memory to run
with the entire factorized matrix in memory. If the sparse solver memory requirement exceeds 8 Gigabytes
for real number matrices or 16 Gigabytes for complex number matrices, this option will revert to optimal
I/O memory. This option is also subject to the memory size specified in Memory_Size.
Memory_Size
Sparse solver maximum memory size in Megabytes. If Memory_Size is not specified and Memory_Option
= DEFAULT, the incore memory strategy is used for small problems. The optimal I/O mode is used for large
problems. If Memory_Size is not specified and Memory_Option = INCORE, the program will attempt to use
all available system memory to keep the factorized matrix in memory subject to an upper limit of one Gigabyte.
To run a large analysis where sparse solver memory exceeds 1 Gigabyte, set Memory_Size to a larger value.
The maximum value for Memory_Size for the sparse solver is 16 Gigabytes. Memory_Size is still subject to
some adjustment if the size specified is too small or if the attempted memory allocation fails.
--, --
Unused field
Solve_Info
OFF
Turns off additional output printing from the sparse solver (default).
PERFORMANCE
Turns on printing additional output from the sparse solver, including a performance summary (with a
summary of file I/o for the sparse solver) and additional information on memory usage (for symbolic assembly).
Command Default
Automatic memory allocation is used.
Notes
This command provides the option to use either minimum memory (default) or maximum memory when the
sparse solver is selected. Using maximum memory, if available, reduces I/O and shortens total solver elapsed
time.
Running incore is best for jobs which comfortably fit within the limits of the physical memory on a given system.
If the sparse solver workspace exceeds physical memory size, the system will be forced into paging. In this case,
optimal I/O (BCSOPTION,DEFAULT) memory would be more efficient.
392
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BELLOW
Incore memory is best for jobs under 100,000 DOFs, especially analyses where repeated solves are performed
for a single matrix factorization.
Users with very large memory systems may want to try incore runs for larger job to improve performance. Users
with very small memory systems may need to run in DEFAULT memory mode, in which the program will most
likely run with optimal I/O performance.
For repeated runs with the sparse solver, users may set the initial sparse solver memory allocation to the amount
required for factorization. This strategy reduces the frequency of allocation and reallocation in the run to make
the INCORE option fully effective. Users with very large memory systems may use the Memory_Size argument
to increase the maximum size attempted for incore runs. The maximum workspace allowed for the sparse solver
is eight Gigabytes for real matrix systems and 16 Gigabytes for complex systems.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
BELLOW, NLOC, LENG, STIFF, FLEX, ELEM
Defines a bellows in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Node where bellows is to be placed. Defaults to current run starting point [RUN].
LENG
Length of bellows (defaults to average pipe OD).
STIFF
Axial stiffness value (defaults to that of equivalent straight pipe).
FLEX
Bending flexibility factor (defaults to 1.0).
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to bellows (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL) +
1).
Notes
Defines a bellows (straight pipe element (PIPE16) with adjusted specifications and loadings) at a given location
in a piping run.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Bellows
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
393
BEND
BEND, NEL1, NEL2, RAD, NDIV, ESTRT, EINC
Defines a bend in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NEL1, NEL2
Element numbers of the two intersecting straight pipes. Defaults to the last two straight pipe elements
nearest the intersection of the last two runs.
RAD
Bend radius. If LR, use long radius standard (1.5 x nominal diameter) (default). If SR, use short radius standard
(1.0 x nominal diameter).
NDIV
Number of divisions (elements) along bend (defaults to 2). A node is generated at the end of each division.
ESTRT
Number to be assigned to first element of bend (defaults to MAXEL + 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).
Notes
Defines a bend of curved (elbow) pipe elements (PIPE18) in place of the intersection of two previously defined
straight pipe elements [RUN]. Two new nodes are generated at the ends of the bend (at the tangency points).
A node is also generated at the center of curvature point. The two straight pipes are automatically "shortened"
to meet the ends of the bend. The bend specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding two
straight pipes. The flexibility factors are calculated from the internal pressure and EX (evaluated at TAVE) based
on the current PPRES and PTEMP command specifications when the element is generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Elbow
BETAD, VALUE
Defines the stiffness matrix multiplier for damping.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
VALUE
Stiffness matrix multiplier for damping.
Notes
This command defines the stiffness matrix multiplier, , in the damping expression given in the ALPHAD command. Values of may also be input as a material property (use the DAMP label on the MP command). If DAMP
is included, the DAMP value is added to the BETAD value as appropriate (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference).
Damping is not used in the static (ANTYPE,STATIC) or buckling (ANTYPE,BUCKLE) analyses.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
394
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BF
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
BF, NODE, Lab, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Defines a nodal body force load.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node to which body load applies. If NODE = ALL, apply to all selected nodes [NSEL]. A component name may
also be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid body load label. Load labels are listed under Body Loads in the input table for each element type in
the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence). Thermal labels: HGEN
(heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), MVDI (magnetic virtua displacements flag).
Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD (charge density). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: JS
(current density), H (magnetic field), EF (electric field), PORT (number 150 for interior waveguide or transmission line port), LUMP (lumped circuit). FLOTRAN labels: HGEN (heat generation rate), FORC (nodal body
force densities in momentum equation).
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Value associated with the Lab item or table name reference for tabular boundary conditions. To specify a
table, enclose the table name in percent signs (%) (e.g., BF,NODE,TEMP,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command
to define a table. Use only VAL1 for TEMP, FLUE, HGEN, MVDI, CHRGD, and PORT. If Lab = PORT, VAL1 is a
port number representing an interior waveguide or transmission line port.
If Lab = JS:
VAL1
X-Component.
VAL2
Y-Component.
VAL3
Z-Component.
VAL4
Phase angle in degrees or a negative port number for a driven port.
If Lab = H or EF:
VAL1
X-Component.
VAL2
Y-Component.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
395
BF
VAL3
Z-Component.
VAL4
Phase angle in degrees.
If Lab = FORC:
VAL1
X-Component.
VAL2
Y-Component.
VAL3
Z-Component.
VAL4
Not used.
If Lab = LUMP:
VAL1
Circuit type as shown in the following figure.
VAL2
If VAL1 = 0, real part of a complex impedance (ohm). If VAL1 > 0, resistance (ohm).
VAL3
If VAL1 = 0, imaginary part of a complex impedance (ohm). If VAL1 > 0, capacitance (F).
VAL4
Not used if VAL1 = 0. If VAL1 > 0, inductance (H).
396
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BF
Lumped Circuits
R Q B CA 1IPH1FED
R Q G#
2BA@ 2( 5 3 0( '% #!
C49894)7'642 1)& $"
QI G Y W G#S
RCA 1PI R `X 12 V 2 HUT
92 V 2 H#$T D
W G a
HA 1IPdI R Y 12 f 2 H#$TED
R Q G
W G e
CA 1PdI R Y 12 V 2 Hc)
R QIG
W G#b
Notes
Defines a nodal body force load (such as temperature in a structural analysis, heat generation rate in a thermal
analysis, etc.). Nodal body loads default to the BFUNIF values, if they were previously specified.
You can specify a table name (VAL = %tabname%) only for temperature (TEMP), heat generation rate (HGEN),
and nodal body force density (FORC) body load labels. When using TEMP, you can define a one-dimensional
table that varies with respect to time (TIME) only. When defining this table, enter TIME as the primary variable.
No other primary variables are valid.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppElecField>On Nodes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
397
BFA
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppMagField>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppElecField>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppMagField>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Nodes
BFA, AREA, Lab, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Defines a body force load on an area.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area to which body load applies. If ALL, apply to all selected areas [ASEL]. A component name may also be
substituted for AREA.
Lab
Valid body load label. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input table for each element type in
the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence). Thermal labels: HGEN
(heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), VLTG (voltage drop).
Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD (charge density). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: JS
(current density), H (magnetic field), EF (electric field), PORT (number 150 for interior waveguide or transmission line port). FLOTRAN label: HGEN (heat generation rate).
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Value associated with the Lab item or a table name for specifying tabular boundary conditions. Use only
VAL1 for TEMP, FLUE, HGEN, CHRGD, and PORT. If Lab = PORT, VAL1 is a port number representing an interior
waveguide or transmission line port. Use VAL1, VAL2, and VAL3 for the X, Y, and Z components of JS, H, and
EF. For Lab = VLTG, VAL1 is the voltage drop and VAL2 is the phase angle. When specifying a table name,
you must enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., BFA,AREA,Lab,%tabname%. Use the *DIM command to define a table.
VAL4
If Lab = H or EF, VAL4 is the phase angle in degrees. If Lab = JS, VAL4 is the phase angle in degrees or a
negative port number for a driven port.
398
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFA
Notes
Defines a body force load (such as temperature in a structural analysis, heat generation rate in a thermal analysis,
etc.) on an area. Body loads may be transferred from areas to area elements (or to nodes if area elements do not
exist) with the BFTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. Body loads default to the value specified on the BFUNIF
command, if it was previously specified.
You can specify a table name only when using temperature (TEMP) and heat generation rate (HGEN) body load
labels. When using TEMP, you can define a one-dimensional table that varies with respect to time (TIME) only.
When defining this table, enter TIME as the primary variable. No other primary variables are valid.
Body loads specified by the BFA command can conflict with other specified body loads. See Resolution of Conflicting Body Load Specifications in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppElecField>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppMagField>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppElecField>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppMagField>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Areas
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
399
BFADELE
BFADELE, AREA, Lab
Deletes body force loads on an area.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area at which body load is to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected areas [ASEL]. A component name may
also be substituted for AREA.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFA command for labels.
Notes
Deletes body force loads (and all corresponding finite element loads) for a specified area and label. Body loads
may be defined on an area with the BFA command.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelElecField>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelIntPort>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelMagField>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelElecField>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelIntPort>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelMagField>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Areas
3100
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFCUM
BFALIST, AREA, Lab
Lists the body force loads on an area.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area at which body load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected areas [ASEL]. If AREA = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for AREA.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFA command for labels.
Notes
Lists the body force loads for the specified area and label. Body loads may be defined on an area with the BFA
command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On All Areas
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On Picked Areas
BFCUM, Lab, Oper, FACT, TBASE
Specifies that nodal body force loads are to be accumulated.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence).
Thermal label: HGEN (heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), MVDI
(magnetic virtual displacements flag). Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD (charge density).
Oper
Accumulation key:
REPL
Subsequent values replace the previous values (default).
ADD
Subsequent values are added to the previous values.
IGNO
Subsequent values are ignored.
FACT
Scale factor for the nodal body load values. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero
scale factor. The scale factor is not applied to body load phase angles.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3101
BFDELE
TBASE
Used (only with Lab = TEMP) to calculate the temperature used in the add or replace operation (see Oper)
as:
Temperature = TBASE + FACT* (T - TBASE)
where T is the temperature specified on subsequent BF commands. TBASE defaults to zero.
Command Default
Replace previous values.
Notes
Allows repeated nodal body force loads to be replaced, added, or ignored. Nodal body loads are applied with
the BF command. Issue the BFLIST command to list the nodal body loads. The operations occur when the next
body loads are defined. For example, issuing the BF command with a temperature of 250 after a previous BF
command with a temperature of 200 causes the new value of the temperature to be 450 with the add operation,
250 with the replace operation, or 200 with the ignore operation. A scale factor is also available to multiply the
next value before the add or replace operation. A scale factor of 2.0 with the previous "add" example results in
a temperature of 700. The scale factor is applied even if no previous values exist. Issue BFCUM,STAT to show the
current label, operation, and scale factors. Solid model boundary conditions are not affected by this command,
but boundary conditions on the FE model are affected.
Note FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by existing solid model boundary conditions if
a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
BFCUM does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Nodal Body Ld
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Nodal Body Ld
BFDELE, NODE, Lab
Deletes nodal body force loads.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node at which body load is to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. See the BF command for labels. In an explicit dynamic
analysis, the only valid body load label is TEMP.
3102
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFDELE
Notes
Deletes nodal body force loads for a specified node and label. Nodal body loads may be defined with the BF
command (except in an explicit dynamic analysis).
The command BFDELE,TEMP can be used in an explicit dynamic analysis to delete temperature loads that are
read in by the LDREAD command. BFDELE cannot be used to delete temperature loads defined by the EDLOAD
command (use EDLOAD,DELE to delete this type of load).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelElecField>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelIntPort>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Body Forces
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelMagField>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Node Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Delete Temps
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelElecField>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelIntPort>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Body Forces
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelMagField>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Node Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Delete Temps
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3103
BFE
BFE, ELEM, Lab, STLOC, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Defines an element body force load.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element to which body load applies. If ALL, apply to all selected elements [ESEL]. A component name may
also be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Valid body load label. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence). Thermal labels: HGEN (heat
generation rate). Magnetic labels: EF (electric field), TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), VLTG (voltage
drop), MVDI (magnetic virtual displacements flag). Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD (charge
density). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: JS (current density). Field volume interface label: FVIN (field
volume interface flag). Valid labels are also listed for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference under
"Body Loads" in the input table.
STLOC
Starting location for entering VAL data, below. For example, if STLOC = 1, data input in the VAL1 field applies
to the first element body load item available for the element type, VAL2 applies to the second element item,
etc. If STLOC = 5, data input in the VAL1 field applies to the fifth element item, etc. Defaults to 1.
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
For Lab = TEMP, FLUE, HGEN, and CHRGD, VAL1--VAL4 represent body load values at the starting location
and subsequent locations (usually nodes) in the element. VAL1 can also represent a table name for use with
tabular boundary conditions. Enter only VAL1 for a uniform body load across the element. For nonuniform
loads, the values must be input in the same order as shown in the input table for the element type. Values
initially default to the BFUNIF value (except for CHRGD which defaults to zero). For subsequent specifications,
a blank leaves a previously specified value unchanged; if the value was not previously specified, the default
value as described in the ANSYS Elements Reference is used.
For Lab = JS and STLOC = 1, VAL1, VAL2 and VAL3 are the X, Y, and Z components of current density (in the
element coordinate system), and VAL4 is the phase angle.
For Lab = EF and STLOC = 1, VAL1, VAL2, and VAL3 are the X, Y, and Z components of electric field (in the
global Cartesian coordinate system).
For Lab = VLTG and STLOC = 1, VAL1 is the voltage drop and VAL2 is the phase angle.
For Lab = FVIN, VAL1 represents volume interface number for load transfer. VAL2 -- VAL4 are not valid.
When specifying a table, enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., (BFE,ELEM,Lab,
Lab,STLOC,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define a table.
Notes
Defines an element body force load (such as temperature in a structural analysis, heat generation rate in a thermal
analysis, etc.). Body loads and element specific defaults are described for each element type in the ANSYS Elements
Reference. If both the BF and BFE commands are used to apply a body load to an element, the BFE command
takes precedence.
3104
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFECUM
You can specify a table name only when using temperature (TEMP) and heat generation rate (HGEN) body load
labels. When using TEMP, you can define a one-dimensional table that varies with respect to time (TIME) only.
When defining this table, enter TIME as the primary variable. No other primary variables are valid.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
When a tabular function load is applied to an element, the load will not vary according to the positioning of the
element in space.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Field Volume Intr>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>Electric Field>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Field Volume Intr>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>Electric Field>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Elements
BFECUM, Lab, Oper, FACT, TBASE
Specifies whether to ignore subsequent element body force loads.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence).
Thermal label: HGEN (heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), VLTG
(voltage drop), MVDI (magnetic virtual displacements flag). Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD
(charge density).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3105
BFECUM
Oper
Replace or ignore key:
REPL
Subsequent values replace the previous values (default).
IGNO
Subsequent values are ignored.
FACT
Scale factor for the element body load values. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero
scale factor. The scale factor is not applied to body load phase angles.
TBASE
Used (only with Lab = TEMP) to calculate the temperature used in the add or replace operation (see Oper)
as:
Temperature = TBASE + FACT* (T - TBASE)
where T is the temperature specified on subsequent BFE commands. TBASE defaults to zero.
Command Default
Replace previous values.
Notes
Allows repeated element body force loads to be replaced or ignored. Element body loads are applied with the
BFE command. Issue the BFELIST command to list the element body loads. The operations occur when the next
body loads are defined. For example, issuing the BFE command with a temperature value of 25 after a previous
BFE command with a temperature value of 20 causes the new value of that temperature to be 25 with the replace
operation, or 20 with the ignore operation. A scale factor is also available to multiply the next value before the
replace operation. A scale factor of 2.0 with the previous "replace" example results in a temperature of 50. The
scale factor is applied even if no previous values exist. Issue BFECUM,STAT to show the current label, operation,
and scale factors.
BFECUM does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Elem Body Lds
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Elem Body Lds
3106
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFEDELE
BFEDELE, ELEM, Lab
Deletes element body force loads.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element at which body load is to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected elements [ A component name
may also be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. See BFE command for labels.
Notes
Deletes element body force loads for a specified element and label. Element body loads may be defined with
the BFE commands.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On
Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Element Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Normal Velo>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Element Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Elements
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3107
BFELIST
BFELIST, ELEM, Lab
Lists the element body force loads.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element at which body load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected elements [ESEL]. If ELEM = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL (or blank), use all appropriate labels. See BFE command for labels.
Notes
Lists the element body force loads for the specified element and label. Element body loads may be defined with
the BFE command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On All Elements
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On Picked Elems
BFESCAL, Lab, FACT, TBASE
Scales element body force loads.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence).
Thermal label: HGEN (heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), VLTG
(voltage drop), MVDI (magnetic virtual displacements flag). Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD
(charge density).
FACT
Scale factor for the element body load values. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a "zero"
scale factor. The scale factor is not applied to body load phase angles.
TBASE
Base temperature for temperature difference. Used only with Lab = TEMP. Scale factor is applied to the
temperature difference (T - TBASE) and then added to TBASE. T is the current temperature.
Notes
Scales element body force loads on the selected elements in the database. Issue the BFELIST command to list
the element body loads. Solid model boundary conditions are not scaled by this command, but boundary conditions on the FE model are scaled. (Note that such scaled FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by
unscaled solid model boundary conditions if a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.)
3108
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFINT
BFESCAL does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Elem Body Lds
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Elem Body Lds
BFINT, Fname1, Ext1, --, Fname2, Ext2, --, KPOS, Clab, KSHS, TOLOUT, TOLHGT
Activates the body force interpolation operation.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname1
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory) from which to read data for interpolation. If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use
all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext1
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to NODE if Fname1 is blank.
--
Unused field.
Fname2
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory) to which BF commands are
written. If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all
248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext2
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to BFIN if Fname2 is blank.
--
Unused field.
KPOS
Position on Fname2 to write block of BF commands:
0
Beginning of file (overwrite existing file).
1
End of file (append to existing file).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3109
BFK
Clab
Label (8 characters maximum, including the colon) for this block of BF commands in Fname2. This label is
appended to the colon (:). Defaults to BFn, where n is the cumulative iteration number for the data set currently
in the database.
KSHS
Shell-to-solid submodeling key:
0
Solid-to-solid or shell-to-shell submodel.
1
Shell-to-solid submodel.
TOLOUT
Extrapolation tolerance about elements, based on a fraction of the element dimension. Submodel nodes
outside the element by more than TOLOUT are not accepted as candidates for DOF extrapolation. Defaults
to 0.5 (50%).
TOLHGT
Height tolerance above or below shell elements, in units of length. Used only for shell-to-shell submodeling
(KSHS = 0). Submodel nodes off of the element surface by more than TOLHGT are not accepted as candidates
for DOF interpolation or extrapolation. Defaults to 0.0001 times the maximum element dimension.
Caution: Relaxing this tolerance to allow submodel nodes to be found could produce poor submodel results.
Notes
File Fname1 should contain a node list for which body forces are to be interpolated [NWRITE]. File Fname2 is
created which contains interpolated body forces written as a block of nodal BF commands. Body forces are interpolated from elements having TEMP as a valid body force or degree of freedom, and only the label TEMP is
written on the nodal BF commands. Interpolation is performed for all nodes on file Fname1 using the results
data currently in the database. The block of BF commands begins with an identifying colon label command and
ends with a /EOF command. The colon label command is of the form :Clab, where Clab is described above. Interpolation from multiple results sets can be performed by looping through the results file in a user-defined
macro. Additional blocks can be appended to Fname2 by using KPOS and unique colon labels. A /INPUT command,
with the appropriate colon label, may be used to read the block of commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Submodeling>Interp Body Forc
BFK, KPOI, Lab, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, PHASE
Defines a body force load at a keypoint.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
Keypoint to which body load applies. If ALL, apply to all selected keypoints [KSEL]. A component name may
also be substituted for KPOI.
3110
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFK
Lab
Valid body load label. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input table for each element type in
the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence). Thermal labels: HGEN
(heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), MVDI (magnetic virtual
displacements flag). Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD (charge density). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: JS (current density). All keypoints on a given area (or volume) must have the same BFK table
name for the tables to be transferred to interior nodes.
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Value associated with the Lab item or a table name for specifying tabular boundary conditions. Use only
VAL1 for TEMP, FLUE, HGEN, MVDI and CHRGD. Use VAL1, VAL2, and VAL3 for the X, Y, and Z components
of JS. When specifying a table name, you must enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g.,
BFK,KPOI,Lab,%tabname%. Use the *DIM command to define a table.
PHASE
Phase angle in degrees associated with the JS label.
Notes
Defines a body force load (such as temperature in a structural analysis, heat generation rate in a thermal analysis,
etc.) at a keypoint. Body loads may be transferred from keypoints to nodes with the BFTRAN or SBCTRAN
commands. Interpolation will be used to apply loads to the nodes on the lines between keypoints. All keypoints
on a given area (or volume) must have the same BFK specification, with the same values, for the loads to be
transferred to interior nodes in the area (or volume). If only one keypoint on a line has a BFK specification, the
other keypoint defaults to the value specified on the BFUNIF command.
You can specify a table name only when using temperature (TEMP) and heat generation rate (HGEN) body load
labels. When using TEMP, you can define a one-dimensional table that varies with respect to time (TIME) only.
When defining this table, enter TIME as the primary variable. No other primary variables are valid.
Body loads specified by the BFK command can conflict with other specified body loads. See Resolution of Conflicting Body Load Specifications in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On
Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3111
BFKDELE
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
BFKDELE, KPOI, Lab
Deletes body force loads at a keypoint.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
Keypoint at which body load is to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected keypoints [KSEL]. A component
name may also be substituted for KPOI.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFK command for labels.
Notes
Deletes body force loads (and all corresponding finite element loads) for a specified keypoint and label. Body
loads may be defined at a keypoint with the BFK command.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All KPs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On
Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On
Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All KPs
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppVirtDisp>On Keypoints
3112
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFL
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Keypoints
BFKLIST, KPOI, Lab
Lists the body force loads at keypoints.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
Keypoint at which body load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If KPOI =
P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for KPOI
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFK command for labels.
Notes
Lists the body force loads for the specified keypoint and label. Keypoint body loads may be defined with the
BFK command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On All Keypoints
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On Picked KPs
BFL, LINE, Lab, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Defines a body force load on a line.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line to which body load applies. If ALL, apply to all selected lines [LSEL]. A component name may also be
substituted for LINE.
Lab
Valid body load label. Load labels are listed under "Body loads" in the input table for each element type in
the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence). Thermal label: HGEN
(heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature). Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD
(charge density). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: JS (current density), EF (electric field). FLOTRAN
labels: HGEN (heat generation rate), FORC (body force density).
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Value associated with the Lab item or a table name for specifying tabular boundary conditions. Use only
VAL1 for TEMP, FLUE, HGEN, and CHRGD. Use VAL1, VAL2, and VAL3 for the X, Y, and Z components of JS,
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3113
BFLDELE
EF, and FORC. When specifying a table name, you must enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g.,
BFL,LINE,Lab,%tabname%. Use the *DIM command to define a table.
VAL4
If Lab = EF, VAL4 is the phase angle in degrees. If Lab = JS, VAL4 is the phase angle in degrees or a negative
port number for a driven port.
Notes
Defines a body force load (such as temperature in a structural analysis, heat generation rate in a thermal analysis,
etc.) on a line. Body loads may be transferred from lines to line elements (or to nodes if line elements do not exist)
with the BFTRAN or SBCTRAN commands.
You can specify a table name only when using temperature (TEMP) and heat generation rate (HGEN) body load
labels. When using TEMP, you can define a one-dimensional table that varies with respect to time (TIME) only.
When defining this table, enter TIME as the primary variable. No other primary variables are valid.
Body loads specified by the BFL command can conflict with other specified body loads. See Resolution of Conflicting Body Load Specifications in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppElecField>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppElecField>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Lines
BFLDELE, LINE, Lab
Deletes body force loads on a line.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line at which body load is to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected lines [LSEL]. A component name may
also be substituted for LINE.
3114
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFLIST
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFL command for labels.
Notes
Deletes body force loads (and all corresponding finite element loads) for a specified line and label. Body loads
may be defined on a line with the BFL command.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelElecField>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelElecField>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Lines
BFLIST, NODE, Lab
Lists the body force loads on nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node at which body load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL (or blank), use all appropriate labels. See the BF command for labels. In an explicit
dynamic analysis, the only valid body load label is TEMP.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3115
BFLLIST
Notes
Lists the body force loads for the specified node and label. Nodal body loads may be defined with the BF command
(except in an explicit dynamic analysis).
The command BFLIST,TEMP can be used in an explicit dynamic analysis to list temperature loads that are read
in by the LDREAD command. BFLIST cannot be used to list temperature loads defined by the EDLOAD command
(use EDLOAD,LIST to list this type of load).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>List Temps
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>List Temps
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On All Nodes
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On Picked Nodes
BFLLIST, LINE, Lab
Lists the body force loads on a line.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line at which body load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected lines [LSEL]. If LINE = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for LINE.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFL command for labels.
Notes
Lists the body force loads for the specified line and label. Body loads may be defined on a line with the BFL
command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On All Lines
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On Picked Lines
3116
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFTRAN
BFSCALE, Lab, FACT, TBASE
Scales body force loads at nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence).
Thermal label: HGEN (heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), MVDI
(magnetic virtual displacements flag). Electric label: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD (charge density).
FACT
Scale factor for the nodal body load values. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero
scale factor. The scale factor is not applied to body load phase angles.
TBASE
Base temperature for temperature difference. Used only with Lab = TEMP. Scale factor is applied to the
temperature difference (T - TBASE) and then added to TBASE. T is the current temperature.
Notes
Scales body force loads in the database on the selected nodes. Issue the BFLIST command to list the nodal body
loads. Solid model boundary conditions are not scaled by this command, but boundary conditions on the FE
model are scaled.
Note Such scaled FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by unscaled solid model boundary
conditions if a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
BFSCALE does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Nodal Body Ld
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Nodal Body Ld
BFTRAN
Transfers solid model body force loads to the finite element model.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Body loads are transferred from selected keypoints and lines to selected nodes and from selected areas and
volumes to selected elements. The BFTRAN operation is also done if the SBCTRAN command is either explicitly
issued or automatically issued upon initiation of the solution calculations [SOLVE].
This command is also valid in PREP7.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3117
BFUNIF
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Body Loads
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Body Loads
BFUNIF, Lab, VALUE
Assigns a uniform body force load to all nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence).
Explicit dynamics label: TEMP (temperature). Thermal labels: HGEN (heat generation rate), TEMP (initial
temperatures).
VALUE
Uniform value associated with Lab item, or table name when specifying tabular boundary conditions. To
specify a table, enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., BFUNIF,Lab,%tabname%.
Command Default
Set TEMP to the reference temperature ([TREF] but not MP,REFT), and FLUE and HGEN to zero.
Notes
In a transient or nonlinear thermal analysis, the uniform temperature is used during the first iteration of a solution
as follows: (a) as the starting nodal temperature (except where temperatures are explicitly specified [D, DK]),
and (b) to evaluate temperature-dependent material properties. In a structural analysis or explicit dynamic analysis, the uniform temperature is used as the default temperature for thermal strain calculations and material
property evaluation (except where body load temperatures are specified [BF, BFE, BFK, LDREAD]). In other
scalar field analyses, the uniform temperature is used for material property evaluation.
When the command BFUNIF,TEMP is used in an explicit dynamic analysis, you cannot use the EDLOAD,TEMP
command to apply temperature loading. Furthermore, any temperature loading defined by BFUNIF cannot be
listed or deleted by the EDLOAD command.
An alternate command, TUNIF, may be used to set the uniform temperature instead of BFUNIF,TEMP.
You can specify a table name only when using temperature (TEMP) and heat generation rate (HGEN) body load
labels. When using TEMP, you can define a one-dimensional table that varies with respect to time (TIME) only.
When defining this table, enter TIME as the primary variable. No other primary variables are valid. Tabular
boundary conditions cannot be used in an explicit dynamic analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>Uniform Heat
Gen
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>Uniform Fluen
3118
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFV
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>Uniform Heat Gen
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>Uniform Heat Gen
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>Uniform Fluen
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>Uniform Heat Gen
BFV, VOLU, Lab, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, PHASE
Defines a body force load on a volume.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
VOLU
Volume to which body load applies. If ALL, apply to all selected volumes [VSEL]. A component name may
also be substituted for VOLU.
Lab
Valid body load label. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input table for each element type in
the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: TEMP (temperature), FLUE (fluence). Thermal labels: HGEN
(heat generation rate). Magnetic labels: TEMP (temperature), JS (current densities), VLTG (voltage drop).
Electric labels: TEMP (temperature), CHRGD (charge density). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: JS
(current density). FLOTRAN label: HGEN (heat generation rate).
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Value associated with the Lab item or a table name for specifying tabular boundary conditions. Use only
VAL1 for TEMP, FLUE, HGEN, and CHRGD. Use VAL1, VAL2, and VAL3 for the X, Y, and Z components of JS.
For Lab = VLTG, VAL1 is the voltage drop and VAL2 is the phase angle. When specifying a table name, you
must enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., BFV,VOLU,Lab,%tabname%. Use the *DIM command
to define a table.
PHASE
Phase angle in degrees associated with the JS label.
Notes
Defines a body force load (such as temperature in a structural analysis, heat generation rate in a thermal analysis,
etc.) on a volume. Body loads may be transferred from volumes to volume elements (or to nodes if volume elements do not exist) with the BFTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. Body loads default to the value specified on the
BFUNIF command, if it was previously specified.
You can specify a table name only when using temperature (TEMP) and heat generation rate (HGEN) body load
labels. When using TEMP, you can define a one-dimensional table that varies with respect to time (TIME) only.
When defining this table, enter TIME as the primary variable. No other primary variables are valid.
Body loads specified by the BFV command can conflict with other specified body loads. See Resolution of Conflicting Body Load Specifications in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3119
BFVDELE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On
Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On
Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On
Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Volumes
BFVDELE, VOLU, Lab
Deletes body force loads on a volume.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
VOLU
Volume at which body load is to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected volumes [VSEL]. A component
name may also be substituted for VOLU.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFV command for labels.
Notes
Deletes body force loads (and all corresponding finite element loads) for a specified volume and label. Body
loads may be defined on a volume with the BFV command.
Graphical picking is available only via the listed menu paths.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Volms
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On
Volumes
3120
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BFVLIST
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On
Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On
Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On
Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Body Loads>On All Volms
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharDens>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>AppVoltDrop>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Excitation>DelCurrDens>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Other>Fluence>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Temperature>On Volumes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Generat>On Volumes
BFVLIST, VOLU, Lab
Lists the body force loads on a volume.
SOLUTION: Solid Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
VOLU
Volume at which body load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected volumes [VSEL]. If VOLU = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for VOLU.
Lab
Valid body load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Load labels are listed under "Body Loads" in the input
table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See the BFV command for labels.
Notes
Lists the body force loads for the specified volume and label. Body loads may be defined on a volume with the
BFV command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On All Volumes
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Body Loads>On Picked Volumes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3121
BIOOPT
BIOOPT
Specifies "Biot-Savart options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Biot Savart Options
BIOT, Label
Calculates the Biot-Savart source magnetic field intensity.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Label
Controls the Biot-Savart calculation:
NEW
Calculate the magnetic source field intensity (Hs) from the selected set of source elements to the selected
set of nodes. Overwrite any existing Hs field values.
SUM
Calculate the Hs field from the selected set of source elements to the selected set of nodes. Accumulate
with any existing Hs field values.
Command Default
Calculate the Hs field upon encountering the first SOLVE command to produce a source field.
Notes
Calculates the Biot-Savart source magnetic field intensity (Hs) at the selected nodes from the selected source
elements. The calculation is done at the time the BIOT command is issued.
Source elements include primitives described by element SOURC36, and coupled-field elements SOLID5, LINK68,
SOLID69, and SOLID98. Current conduction elements do not have a solved-for current distribution from which
to calculate a source field until after the first substep. Inclusion of a current conduction element Hs field will require
a subsequent BIOT,SUM command (with SOURC36 elements unselected) and a SOLVE command.
The units of Hs are as specified by the current EMUNIT command setting.
3122
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BLC4
This command is also valid in PREP7.
The Biot-Savart source loading is handled automatically in the edge formulation; therefore, the BIOT command
is ignored when using SOURC36 current loading with SOLID117 elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>Biot-Savart
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>Biot-Savart
BLC4, XCORNER, YCORNER, WIDTH, HEIGHT, DEPTH
Creates a rectangular area or block volume by corner points.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
XCORNER, YCORNER
Working plane X and Y coordinates of one corner of the rectangle or block face.
WIDTH
The distance from XCORNER on or parallel to the working plane X-axis that, together with YCORNER, defines
a second corner of the rectangle or block face.
HEIGHT
The distance from YCORNER on or parallel to the working plane Y-axis that, together with XCORNER, defines
a third corner of the rectangle or block face.
DEPTH
The perpendicular distance (either positive or negative based on the working plane Z direction) from the
working plane representing the depth of the block. If DEPTH = 0 (default), a rectangular area is created on
the working plane.
Notes
Defines a rectangular area anywhere on the working plane or a hexahedral volume with one face anywhere on
the working plane. A rectangle will be defined with four keypoints and four lines. A volume will be defined with
eight keypoints, twelve lines, and six areas, with the top and bottom faces parallel to the working plane. See the
BLC5, RECTNG, and BLOCK commands for alternate ways to create rectangles and blocks.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Rectangle>By 2 Corners
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Block>By 2 Corners & Z
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Block>By 2 Corners & Z
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3123
BLC5
BLC5, XCENTER, YCENTER, WIDTH, HEIGHT, DEPTH
Creates a rectangular area or block volume by center and corner points.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
XCENTER, YCENTER
Working plane X and Y coordinates of the center of the rectangle or block face.
WIDTH
The total distance on or parallel to the working plane X-axis defining the width of the rectangle or block face.
HEIGHT
The total distance on or parallel to the working plane Y-axis defining the height of the rectangle or block
face.
DEPTH
The perpendicular distance (either positive or negative based on the working plane Z direction) from the
working plane representing the depth of the block. If DEPTH = 0 (default), a rectangular area is created on
the working plane.
Note If you are working with a model imported from an IGES file (import option set to DEFAULT),
you must supply a value for DEPTH or the command is ignored.
Notes
Defines a rectangular area anywhere on the working plane or a hexahedral volume with one face anywhere on
the working plane by specifying the center and corner points. A rectangle will be defined with four keypoints
and four lines. A volume will be defined with eight keypoints, twelve lines, and six areas, with the top and bottom
faces parallel to the working plane. See the BLC4, RECTNG, and BLOCK commands for alternate ways to create
rectangles and blocks.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Rectangle>By Centr & Cornr
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Primitives>Block
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Block>By Centr,Cornr,Z
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Block>By Centr,Cornr,Z
BLOCK, X1, X2, Y1, Y2, Z1, Z2
Creates a block volume based on working plane coordinates.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
X1, X2
Working plane X coordinates of the block.
Y1, Y2
Working plane Y coordinates of the block.
Z1, Z2
Working plane Z coordinates of the block.
3124
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BOPTN
Notes
Defines a hexahedral volume based on the working plane. The block must have a spatial volume greater than
zero (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a degenerate volume as a means of creating
an area.) The volume will be defined with eight keypoints, twelve lines, and six areas, with the top and bottom
faces parallel to the working plane. See the BLC4 and BLC5 commands for alternate ways to create blocks.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Block>By Dimensions
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Block>By Dimensions
BOOL
Specifies "Booleans" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Solid Model
BOPTN, Lab, Value
Specifies Boolean operation options.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Default/status key:
DEFA
Resets settings to default values.
STAT
Lists status of present settings.
Option to be controlled:
KEEP
Delete or keep input entity option.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3125
BOPTN
NUMB
Output numbering warning message option.
NWARN
No effect warning message option.
VERSION
Boolean compatibility option.
Value
Option settings if Lab = KEEP:
NO
Delete entities used as input with a Boolean operation (default). Entities will not be deleted if meshed
or if attached to a higher entity.
YES
Keep input solid modeling entities.
Option settings if Lab = NUMB:
0
No warning message will be produced if the output entities of a Boolean operation are numbered based
on geometry (default).
1
A warning message will be produced if the output entities of a Boolean operation are numbered based
on geometry. (With geometric numbering, re-use of the input with altered dimensions (as in design optimization) may not produce the same numbering, and later operations in the input may fail or produce
unexpected results.)
Option settings if Lab = NWARN:
0
A warning message will be produced if a Boolean operation has no effect (default).
1
No warning or error messages will be generated if a Boolean operation has no effect.
1
An error message will be produced if a Boolean operation has no effect.
Option settings if Lab = VERSION:
RV52
Activate the Revision 5.2 compatibility option (default). The 5.2 option can produce different numbering
of the entities produced by Boolean operations than the 5.1 option. See Notes below.
RV51
Activate the Revision 5.1 compatibility option. The 5.1 option can produce different numbering of the
entities produced by Boolean operations than the 5.2 option. See Notes below.
Command Default
Input entities will be deleted, and operations with no effect (i.e., operations which are valid but which do not
cause a change in the input entities, such as adding two non-touching areas) will produce a warning message.
The Revision 5.2 Boolean compatibility option will be used.
3126
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BSAX
Notes
Boolean operations at Revision 5.2 may produce a different number of entities than previous revisions of ANSYS.
When running input files created at earlier revisions of ANSYS, match the Boolean compatibility option (VERSION)
to the revision originally used. For instance, if you are running Revision 5.2 and are reading an input file (/INPUT)
created at Revision 5.1, it is recommended that you set VERSION to RV51 before reading the input.
See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for further details on the functions of the RV51 and RV52 labels.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Settings
BRANCH, NODE, X, Y, Z
Defines the starting point for a piping branch.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE
Start branch at this node.
X, Y, Z
Start branch at this location (in the active coordinate system). Used only if NODE is not input or input but the
node itself is not previously defined. In either case a node is generated at this location and assigned the
number NODE (or 1 + previous maximum node number if NODE is not input).
Notes
See the RUN command for information relating to piping models.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Start Branch>At Node
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Start Branch>At XYZ Loc
BSAX, VAL1, VAL2, T
Specifies the axial force and axial strain relationship for beam sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1
Axial force component (N).
VAL2
Axial strain component ().
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3127
BSMD
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the
form:
A (,T )
E
N
E
I1 ( 1,T )
0
1
M1
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=
JG (,T )
S1
1
G
0
A1 ( 1,T )
S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
The BSAX command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies the relationship of
axial force and axial strain for a beam section. The section data defined is associated with the section most recently
defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, BSS2, BSMD, and BSTE.
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
BSMD, DENS, T
Specifies mass density for a nonlinear general beam section.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DENS
Mass density.
T
Temperature.
Notes
The BSMD command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies the mass density
(assuming a unit thickness) for a beam section. The value specified is associated with the section most recently
defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Related commands are BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, BSS2, and BSTE.
3128
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BSM1
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
BSM1, VAL1, VAL2, T
Specifies the bending moment and curvature relationship in plane XZ for beam sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1
Bending moment component (M1).
VAL2
Curvature component (1).
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the
form:
A (,T )
E
N
E
0
I1 ( 1,T )
1
M1
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=
JG (,T )
S
1
1
G
0
A1 ( 1,T )
S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
The BSM1 command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies the bending moment
and curvature for plane XZ of a beam section. The section data defined is associated with the section most recently
defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are BSAX, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, BSS2, BSMD, and BSTE.
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3129
BSM2
BSM2, VAL1, VAL2, T
Specifies the bending moment and curvature relationship in plane XY for beam sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1
Bending moment component (M2).
VAL2
Curvature component (2).
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the
form:
A (,T )
E
N
E
I1 ( 1,T )
0
1
M1
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=
JG (,T )
S1
1
G
A1 ( 1,T )
0
S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
The BSM2 command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies the bending moment
and curvature relationship for plane XY of a beam section. The section data defined is associated with the section
most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are BSAX, BSM1, BSTQ, BSS1, BSS2, BSMD, and BSTE.
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
3130
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BSS1
BSPLIN, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, XV1, YV1, ZV1, XV6, YV6, ZV6
Generates a single line from a spline fit to a series of keypoints.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
Keypoints through which a spline is fit. At least two keypoints must be defined. If P1 = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
The following fields are used only if specified end slopes are desired; otherwise, zero curvature end slopes
will be automatically calculated. The slope vector is parallel to a vector pointing from the origin of the active
coordinate system [CSYS] to the position in space that XV, YV, ZV represents in that system.
XV1, YV1, ZV1
Orientation point of an outward vector tangent to line at P1. Vector coordinate system has its origin at the
keypoint. Coordinate interpretation corresponds to the active coordinate system type, i.e., X is R for cylindrical,
etc. Defaults to zero curvature slope.
XV6, YV6, ZV6
Orientation point of an outward vector tangent to a line at P6 (or the last keypoint specified if fewer than six
specified). Defaults to zero curvature slope.
Notes
One line is generated between keypoint P1 and the last keypoint entered. The line will pass through each entered
keypoint. Solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Splines>Spline thru KPs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Splines>Spline thru Locs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Splines>With Options>Spline thru KPs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Splines>With Options>Spline thru Locs
BSS1, VAL1, VAL2, T
Specifies the transverse shear force and strain relationship in plane XZ for beam sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1
Transverse shear force component (S1).
VAL2
Strain component (1).
T
Temperature.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3131
BSS2
Notes
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the
form:
A (,T )
E
N
E
I1 ( 1,T )
0
1
M1
E
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=
JG (,T )
S1
1
G
0
A1 ( 1,T )
S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
The BSS1 command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies the transverse shear
force and transverse shear strain relationship for plane XZ of a beam section. The section data defined is associated
with the section most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS2, BSMD, and BSTE.
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
BSS2, VAL1, VAL2, T
Specifies the transverse shear force and strain relationship in plane XY for beam sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1
Transverse shear force component (S2).
VAL2
Transverse shear strain component (2).
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the
form:
3132
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BSTE
A (,T )
E
N
E
I1 ( 1,T )
0
1
M1
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=
JG (,T )
S1
1
G
0
A1 ( 1,T )
S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
The BSS1 command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies the transverse shear
force and transverse shear strain relationship for plane XY of a beam section. The section data defined is associated
with the section most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, BSMD, and BSTE.
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
BSTE, ALPHA, T
Specifies a thermal expansion coefficient for a nonlinear general beam section.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ALPHA
Coefficient of thermal expansion for the cross section.
T
Temperature.
Notes
The BSTE command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies a thermal expansion
coefficient for a beam section. The value specified is associated with the section most recently defined (via the
SECTYPE command).
Related commands are BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, BSS2, and BSMD.
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3133
BSTQ
BSTQ, VAL1, VAL2, T
Specifies the cross section torque and twist relationship for beam sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1
Torque component ().
VAL2
Twist component ().
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the
form:
A (,T )
E
N
E
I1 ( 1,T )
0
1
M1
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=
JG (,T )
S1
1
G
A1 ( 1,T )
0
S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
The BSTQ command, one of several nonlinear general beam section commands, specifies the cross section
torque and twist relationship for a beam section. The section data defined is associated with the section most
recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSS1, BSS2, BSMD, and BSTE.
For complete information, see Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
3134
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
BUCOPT
BTOL, PTOL
Specifies the Boolean operation tolerances.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
PTOL
Point coincidence tolerance. Points within this distance to each other will be assumed to be coincident
during Boolean operations. Loosening the tolerance will increase the run time and storage requirements,
but will allow more Boolean intersections to succeed. Defaults to 0.10E-4.
Command Default
PTOL = 0.10E-4.
Notes
Use BTOL,DEFA to reset the setting to its default value. Use BTOL,STAT to list the status of the present setting.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Settings
BUCOPT, Method, NMODE, SHIFT, LDMULTE
Specifies buckling analysis options.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Method
Mode extraction method to be used (no default; you must specify a method):
SUBSP
Subspace iteration.
LANB
Block Lanczos.
NMODE
Number of modes to extract. (defaults to 1).
SHIFT
Shift point about which the eigenvalues are calculated (defaults to 0.0).
LDMULTE
Upper end of the load multiplier range of interest (defaults to 0).
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3135
BUCOPT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
3136
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
C Commands
C***, Comment
Places a comment in the output.
SESSION: List Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Comment
Comment string, up to 75 characters.
Notes
The output from this command consists of two lines -- a blank line followed by a line containing C*** and the
comment. This command is similar to /COM except that the comment produced by C*** is more easily identified
in the output.
Another way to include a comment is to precede it with a ! character (on the same line). The ! may be placed
anywhere on the line, and any input following it is ignored as a comment. No output is produced by such a
comment, but the comment line is included on the log file. This is a convenient way to annotate the log file.
This command is valid anywhere.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CALC
Specifies "Calculation settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Calculations
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CBDOF
CBDOF, Fname1, Ext1, --, Fname2, Ext2, --, KPOS, Clab, KSHS, TOLOUT, TOLHGT
Activates cut boundary interpolation (for submodeling).
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname1
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory) from which to read boundary
node data. If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all
248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext1
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to NODE if Fname1 is blank.
--
Unused field.
Fname2
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory) to which cut boundary D commands are written. If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you
can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext2
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to CBDO if Fname2 is blank.
--
Unused field.
KPOS
Position on Fname2 to write block of D commands:
0
Beginning of file (overwrite existing file).
1
End of file (append to existing file).
Clab
Label (8 characters maximum, including the colon) for this block of D commands on Fname2. This label is
appended to the colon (:). Defaults to CBn, where n is the cumulative iteration number for the data set currently
in the database. For imaginary data (see KIMG on the *SET command), Clab defaults to CIn.
KSHS
Shell-to-solid submodeling key:
0
Solid-to-solid or shell-to-shell submodel.
1
Shell-to-solid submodel.
3138
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CDOPT
TOLOUT
Extrapolation tolerance about elements, based on a fraction of the element dimension. Submodel nodes
outside the element by more than TOLOUT are not accepted as candidates for DOF extrapolation. Defaults
to 0.5 (50%).
TOLHGT
Height tolerance above or below shell elements, in units of length. Used only for shell-to-shell submodeling
(KSHS = 0). Submodel nodes off of the element surface by more than TOLHGT are not accepted as candidates
for DOF interpolation or extrapolation. Defaults to 0.0001 times the maximum element dimension.
Caution: Relaxing this tolerance to allow submodel nodes to be found could produce poor submodel results.
Notes
File Fname1 should contain a node list for which boundary conditions are to be interpolated [NWRITE]. File
Fname2 is created which contains interpolated boundary conditions written as a block of D commands. Boundary
conditions are written for the active degree of freedom set for the element from which interpolation is performed.
Interpolation is performed on the selected set of elements. The block of D commands begins with an identifying
colon label and ends with a /EOF command. The colon label is of the form :Clab, where Clab is described above.
Interpolation from multiple results sets can be performed by looping through the results file in a user-defined
macro. Additional blocks can be appended to Fname2 by using KPOS and unique colon labels. A /INPUT command,
with the appropriate colon label, may be used to read the block of commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Submodeling>Interpolate DOF
CDOPT, Option
Specifies format to be used for archiving geometry.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Option
IGES
Write solid model geometry information using IGES format (default).
ANF
Write solid model geometry information using ANSYS Neutral File format.
STAT
Print out the current format setting.
Notes
This command controls your solid model geometry format for CDWRITE operations. The ANF option affects only
the COMB and SOLID options of the CDWRITE command. All other options remain unaffected.
This option setting is saved in the database.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3139
CDREAD
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Archive Model>Read
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Archive Model>Write
CDREAD, Option, Fname, Ext, --, Fnamei, Exti
Reads a file of solid model and database information into the database.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Option
Selects which data to read:
ALL
Read all geometry, material property, load, and component data (default). Solid model geometry and
loads will be read from the file Fnamei.Exti. All other data will be read from the file Fname.Ext.
DB
Read all database information contained in file Fname.Ext. This file should contain all information
mentioned above except the solid model loads. For geometry data, the element types must be defined,
and they must use the same number of nodes.
SOLID
Read the solid model geometry and solid model loads from the file Fnamei.Exti. This file could have
been written by the CDWRITE or IGESOUT command.
COMB
Read the combined solid model and database information from the file Fname.Ext.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to CDB if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Fnamei
Name of the IGES file and its directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do not
specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters for the
file name.
The file name defaults to Fname. Used only if Option = ALL or SOLID.
Exti
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
3140
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CDWRITE
Defaults to IGES if Fnamei is blank.
Notes
This command causes coded files of solid model (in IGES format) and database (in command format) information
to be read. These files are normally written by the CDWRITE or IGESOUT command. Note that the active coordinate
system in these files has been reset to Cartesian (CSYS,0).
If a set of data exists prior to the CDREAD operation, that data set is offset upward to allow the new data to fit
without overlap. The NOOFFSET command allows this offset to be ignored on a set-by-set basis, causing the
existing data set to be overwritten with the new data set.
When you write the geometry data using the CDWRITE,GEOM option, you use the CDREAD,DB option to read
the geometry information.
Using the CDREAD,COMB option will not write NUMOFF commands to offset entity ID numbers if there is no
solid model in the database.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Archive Model>Read
CDWRITE, Option, Fname, Ext, --, Fnamei, Exti, Fmat
Writes geometry and load database items to a file.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Option
Selects which data to write:
ALL
Write all appropriate geometry, material property, load, and component data (default). Two files will be
produced. Fname.Ext will contain all data items mentioned in Notes, except the solid model data.
Fnamei.Exti will contain the solid model geometry and solid model loads data in the form of IGES
commands. This option is not valid when CDOPT, ANF is active.
COMB
Write all data mentioned, but to a single file, Fname.Ext. Solid model geometry data will be written in
either IGES or ANF format as specified in the CDOPTcommand, followed by the remainder of the data
in the form of ANSYS commands. More information on these (IGES/ANF) file formats is provided below.
DB
Write all database information except the solid model and solid model loads to Fname.Ext in the form
of ANSYS commands. This option is not valid when CDOPT, ANF is active.
SOLID
Write only the solid model geometry and solid model load data. This output will be in IGES or ANF format,
as specified in the CDOPTcommand. More information on these (IGES/ANF) file formats is provided below.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3141
CDWRITE
GEOM
Write only element and nodal geometry data. No solid model geometry data will be written. One file,
Fname.Ext, will be produced. You use CDREAD,DB to read in a file written in this fashion.
CM
Write only node and element component and geometry data to Fname.Ext.
MAT
Write only material property data (both linear and nonlinear) to Fname.Ext.
LOAD
Write only loads for current load step to Fname.Ext.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to CDB if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Fnamei
Name of the IGES file and its directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do not
specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters for the
file name.
The file name defaults to Fname. Used only if Option = ALL or SOLID. Previous data on this file, if any, is
overwritten.
Exti
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to IGES in all cases, except when CDOPT, ANF is active and your CDWRITE, Option
= SOLID. In this case Exti = ANF.
Fmat
Format of the output file (defaults to BLOCKED).
BLOCKED
Blocked format. This format allows faster reading of the output file. The time savings is most significant
when BLOCKED is used to read .cdb files associated with very large models.
UNBLOCKED
Unblocked format. Note that the CDWRITE output of components and assemblies will always be written
in the BLOCKED style even if the UNBLOCKED option is specified.
Command Default
When SOLCONTROL,ON, does not write default values for most of the relevant solution control commands or
options. When SOLCONTROL,OFF, writes all default values for solution control commands.
Default output format is determined by your CDOPT settings.
3142
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CDWRITE
Notes
IGES option to write solid model information:
CDOPT, IGS (default)
Before you write your solid model entities, you must select all corresponding lower level entities (use
ALLSEL, BELOW, ALL). You cannot access CDWRITE for models imported from IGES files using the FACETED
translator (see the IOPTN command). If you issue CDWRITE after generating a beam mesh with orientation
nodes, the database file will contain all of the nodes for every beam element, including the orientation
nodes. However, the orientation keypoints that were specified for the line (LATT) are no longer associated
with the line and won't be written out to the geometry file. All associativity between the line and the orientation keypoints is lost. The CDWRITE command with IGES format does not support (for beam meshing)
any line operation that relies on solid model associativity. For example, meshing the areas adjacent to the
meshed line, plotting the line that contains the orientation nodes, or clearing the mesh from the line that
contains orientation nodes may not work as expected. Concatenated lines are not written. In IGES option,
the line segments that make up the concatenated lines are written. However, if you encounter an area
that contains a concatenated line, the write operation halts (that area can't be recreated during the read
operation). If your model has areas that contain concatenated lines, you must first list these and then
unconcatenate them before issuing the CDWRITE command. Similarly, hardpoint information cannot be
written.
ANF option to write solid model information:
CDOPT, ANF
All model information in the database (regardless of select status) is written to the archive file. However,
when you restore the database using this archived file, the select status of entities will also be restored.
This option restores all line attributes, including orientation keypoints. It also writes out any components
(not assemblies) comprised of solid model entities. The ANF option halts CDWRITE when a concatenated
line or an area that contains a concatenated line is detected. You must delete the concatenated lines before
issuing CDWRITE. Similarly, hardpoint information cannot be written.
Load data includes the current load step only. Loads applied to the solid model (if any) are automatically transferred
to the finite element model when this command is issued. CDWRITE writes out solid model loads for meshed
models only. If the model is not meshed, ANSYS cannot save the solid model loads. Component data include
component definitions, but not assembly definitions. Appropriate NUMOFF commands are included at the beginning of the file; this is to avoid overlap of an existing database when the file is read in.
Element order information (i.e., resulting from a WAVES command) is not written. The data in the database remain
untouched.
The data may be reread (on a different machine, for example) with the CDREAD command. Caution: When the
file is read in, the NUMOFF,MAT command may cause a mismatch between material definitions and material
numbers referenced by certain loads and element real constants. See NUMOFF for details. Also, be aware that
the files created by the CDWRITE command explicitly set the active coordinate system to Cartesian (CSYS,0).
You should generally use the blocked format (Fmat = BLOCKED) when writing out model data with CDWRITE.
This is a compressed data format that greatly reduces the time required to read large models through the CDREAD
command. The blocked and unblocked formats are described in Chapter 3 of the Guide to Interfacing with ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3143
CE
If you use CDWRITE in any of the derived products (ANSYS Emag, ANSYS Professional), then before reading the
file, you must edit the Jobname.cdb file to remove commands that are not available in the respective component
product.
The CDWRITE command writes the PART information for any ANSYS LS-DYNA input file to the Jobname.cdb
file using the EDPREAD command. Note that EDPREAD is not an ANSYS documented command, it is written
only when the CDWRITE command is issued. The PART information can be automatically read into ANSYS with
the CDREAD command. However, if more than one Jobname.cdb file is read, the PART list from the last Jobname.cdb file overwrites the existing PART list of the total model. This will affect all PART-related commands
contained in the Jobname.cdb file. That means the user can join models, but not PART-related inputs, which
the user must modify using the newly-created PART numbers. In limited cases, an update of the PART list (EDWRITE,PUPDATE) is possible. This requires that no used combination of MAT/TYPE/REAL appears more than
once in the list. However, partial changes to the PART-related commands may be necessary.
Caution: The CDWRITE command does not support (for beam meshing) any line operation that relies
on solid model associativity. For example, meshing the areas adjacent to the meshed line, plotting the
line that contains the orientation nodes, or clearing the mesh from the line that contains orientation
nodes may not work as expected. For more information about beam meshing, see Meshing Your Solid
Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Product Restrictions
In ANSYS ED, Option = ALL, COMB, or SOLID is not allowed, and the default is Option = DB.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Archive Model>Write
CE, NEQN, CONST, NODE1, Lab1, C1, NODE2, Lab2, C2, NODE3, Lab3, C3
Defines a constraint equation relating degrees of freedom.
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NEQN
Set equation reference number:
n
Arbitrary set number.
HIGH
The highest defined constraint equation number. This option is especially useful when adding nodes to
an existing set.
NEXT
The highest defined constraint equation number plus one. This option automatically numbers coupled
sets so that existing sets are not modified.
The default value is HIGH.
3144
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CE
CONST
Constant term of equation.
NODE1
Node for first term of equation. If -NODE1, this term is deleted from the equation.
Lab1
Degree of freedom label for first term of equation. Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements); ROTX,
ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations, in radians). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). Electric
labels: VOLT (voltage). Magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY, or AZ (vector magnetic potentials).
C1
Coefficient for first node term of equation. If zero, this term is ignored.
NODE2, Lab2, C2
Node, label, and coefficient for second term.
NODE3, Lab3, C3
Node, label, and coefficient for third term.
Notes
Repeat the CE command to add additional terms to the same equation. To change only the constant term, repeat
the command with no node terms specified. Only the constant term can be changed during solution, and only
with the CECMOD command.
Linear constraint equations may be used to relate the degrees of freedom of selected nodes in a more general
manner than described for nodal coupling [CP]. The constraint equation is of the form:
N
Constant = (Coefficient(l) * U(l))
l =1
where U(I) is the degree of freedom (displacement, temperature, etc.) of term (I). The following example is a set
of two constraint equations, each containing three terms:
0.0 = 3.0* (1 UX) + 3.0* (4 UX) + (-2.0)* (4 ROTY)
2.0 = 6.0* (2 UX) + 10.0* (4 UY) + 1.0* (3 UZ)
The first unique degree of freedom in the equation is eliminated in terms of all other degrees of freedom in the
equation. A unique degree of freedom is one which is not specified in any other constraint equation, coupled
node set, specified displacement set, or master degree of freedom set. It is recommended that the first term of
the equation be the degree of freedom to be eliminated. The first term of the equation cannot contain a master
degree of freedom, and no term can contain coupled degrees of freedom. The same degree of freedom may be
specified in more than one equation but care must be taken to avoid over-specification (over-constraint).
The degrees of freedom specified in the equation (i.e., UX, UY, ROTZ, etc.) must also be included in the model
(as determined from the element types [ET]). Also, each node in the equation must be defined on an element
(any element type containing that degree of freedom will do).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Constraint Eqn
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3145
CECHECK
CECHECK, ItemLab, Tolerance, DOF
Check constraint equations and couplings for rigid body motions.
PREP7: Database
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
ItemLab
Item indicating what is to be checked:
CE
Check constraint equations only
CP
Check couplings only
ALL
Check both CE and CP
Tolerance
Allowed amount of out-of-balance for any constraint equation or coupled set. The default value of 1.0e-6 is
usually good.
DOF
Specifies which DOF is to be checked. Default is RIGID, the usual option. Other choices are individual DOF
such as UX, ROTZ, etc. or THERM. The THERM option will check the constraint equations or coupled sets for
free thermal expansions, whereas the individual DOFs check under rigid body motions. ALL is RIGID and
THERM.
Notes
This command imposes a rigid body motion on the nodes attached to the constraint equation or coupled set
and makes sure that no internal forces are generated for such rigid body motions. Generation of internal forces
by rigid body motions usually indicates an error in the equation specification (possibly due to nodal coordinate
rotations). The THERM option does a similar check to see that no internal forces are created by the equations if
the body does a free thermal expansion (this check assumes a single isotropic coefficient of expansion).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CECMOD, NEQN, CONST
Modifies the constant term of a constraint equation during solution.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NEQN
Reference number of constraint equation.
3146
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CECYC
CONST
New value of the constant term of equation.
Notes
Other terms of the constraint equation cannot be changed during the solution phase, but must be defined or
changed within PREP7 prior to the solution. See the CE command for details.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Modify ConstrEqn
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Modify ConstrEqn
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Modify ConstrEqn
CECYC, Lowname, Highname, Nsector, HIndex, Tolerance, Kmove, Kpairs
Generates the constraint equations for a cyclic symmetry analysis
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lowname
Name of a component for the nodes on the low angle edge of the sector. Enclosed in single quotes.
Highname
Name of a component for the nodes on the high angle edge of the sector. Enclosed in single quotes.
Nsector
Number of sectors in the complete 360 degrees.
HIndex
Harmonic index to be represented by this set of constraint equations. If Hindex is -1, generate constraint
equations for static cyclic symmetry. If HIndex is -2, generate constraint equations for static cyclic asymmetry.
Tolerance
A positive tolerance is an absolute tolerance (length units), and a negative tolerance is a tolerance relative
to the local element size.
Kmove
0
Nodes are not moved.
1
HIGHNAME component nodes are moved to match LOWNAME component nodes exactly.
Kpairs
0
Do not print paired nodes
1
Print table of paired nodes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3147
CEDELE
Notes
The analysis can be either modal cyclic symmetry or static cyclic symmetry.
The pair of nodes for which constraint equations are written are rotated into CSYS,1.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CEDELE, NEQN1, NEQN2, NINC, Nsel
Deletes constraint equations.
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NEQN1, NEQN2, NINC
Delete constraint equations from NEQN1 to NEQN2 (defaults to NEQN1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NEQN1
= ALL, NEQN2 and NINC will be ignored all constraint equations will be deleted.
Nsel
Additional node selection control:
ANY
Delete equation set if any of the selected nodes are in the set (default).
ALL
Delete equation set only if all of the selected nodes are in the set.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Del Constr Eqn
CEINTF, TOLER, DOF1, DOF2, DOF3, DOF4, DOF5, DOF6, MoveTol
Generates constraint equations at an interface.
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
TOLER
Tolerance about selected elements, based on a fraction of the element dimension (defaults to 0.25 (25%)).
Nodes outside the element by more than the tolerance are not accepted as being on the interface.
DOF1, DOF2, DOF3, DOF4, DOF5, DOF6
Degrees of freedom for which constraint equations are written. Defaults to all applicable DOFs. DOF1 accepts
ALL as a valid label, in which case the rest are ignored (all DOFs are applied).
MoveTol
The allowed "motion" of a node (see Note below). This distance is in terms of the element coordinates (-1.0
to 1.0). A typical value is 0.05. Defaults to 0 (do not move). MoveTol must be less than or equal to TOLER.
3148
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CELIST
Notes
This command can be used to "tie" together two regions with dissimilar mesh patterns by generating constraint
equations that connect the selected nodes of one region to the selected elements of the other region. At the
interface between regions, nodes should be selected from the more dense mesh region, A, and the elements
selected from the less dense mesh region, B. The degrees of freedom of region A nodes are interpolated with
the corresponding degrees of freedom of the nodes on the region B elements, using the shape functions of the
region B elements. Constraint equations are then written that relate region A and B nodes at the interface.
The MoveTol field lets the nodes in the previously mentioned region A change coordinates when slightly inside
or outside the elements of region B. The change in coordinates causes the nodes of region A to assume the same
surface as the nodes associated with the elements of region B. The constraint equations that relate the nodes at
both regions of the interface are then written.
Solid elements with six degrees of freedom should only be interfaced with other six degree-of-freedom elements.
The region A nodes should be near the region B elements. A location tolerance based on the smallest region B
element length may be input. Stresses across the interface are not necessarily continuous. Nodes in the interface
region should not have specified constraints.
Use the CPINTF command to connect nodes by coupling instead of constraint equations. Use the EINTF command
to connect nodes by line elements. See also the NSEL and ESEL commands for selecting nodes and elements.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for a description of 3-D space used to determine if a node will be considered
by this command.
As an alternative to the CEINTF command, you can use contact elements and the internal multipoint constraint
(MPC) algorithm to tie together two regions having disimilar meshes. See Solid-Solid and Shell-Shell Assemblies
for more information.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Adjacent Regions
CELIST, NEQN1, NEQN2, NINC, Nsel
Lists the constraint equations.
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NEQN1, NEQN2, NINC
List constraint equations from NEQN1 to NEQN2 (defaults to NEQN1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NEQN1
= ALL (default), NEQN2 and NINC are ignored and all constraint equations are listed.
Nsel
Node selection control:
ANY
List equation set if any of the selected nodes are in the set (default).
ALL
List equation set only if all of the selected nodes are in the set.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3149
CENTER
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Other>Constraint Eqns>All CE nodes selected
Utility Menu>List>Other>Constraint Eqns>Any CE node selected
CENTER, NODE, NODE1, NODE2, NODE3, RADIUS
Defines a node at the center of curvature of 2 or 3 nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Number to be assigned to the node generated at the center of curvature.
NODE1, NODE2, NODE3
Three nodes used to calculated the center of curvature, as described under RADIUS.
RADIUS
Used to control the interpretation of NODE1, NODE2 and NODE3:
0
NODE1, NODE2 and NODE3 lie on a circular arc. The program will calculate the center of curvature (and
radius) (default).
0
NODE1 and NODE2 are the endpoints of an arc, and RADIUS is the radius of curvature. The program will
locate the center of curvature on the NODE3 side of the NODE1-NODE2 line if RADIUS > 0, and opposite
to NODE3 if RADIUS < 0.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>At Curvature Ctr
CEQN
Specifies "Constraint equations" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
3150
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CERIG
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Constraint Eqns
CERIG, MASTE, SLAVE, Ldof, Ldof2, Ldof3, Ldof4, Ldof5
Defines a rigid region.
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
MASTE
Retained (or master) node for this rigid region. If MASTE = P, then graphical picking of the master and slave
nodes is enabled (first node picked will be the master node, and subsequent nodes picked will be slave
nodes), and subsequent fields are ignored (valid only in GUI).
SLAVE
Removed (or slave) node for this rigid region. If ALL, slave nodes are all selected nodes.
Ldof
Degrees of freedom associated with equations:
ALL
All applicable degrees of freedom (default). If 3-D, generate 6 equations based on UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
ROTY, ROTZ; if 2-D, generate 3 equations based on UX, UY, ROTZ.
UXYZ
Translational degrees of freedom. If 3-D, generate 3 equations based on the slave nodes' UX, UY, and UZ
DOFs and the master node's UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ DOFs; if 2-D, generate 2 equations based
on the slave nodes UX and UY DOFs and the master nodes UX, UY, and ROTZ DOFs. No equations are
generated for the rotational coupling.
RXYZ
Rotational degrees of freedom. If 3-D, generate 3 equations based on ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ; if 2-D, generate
1 equation based on ROTZ. No equations are generated for the translational coupling.
UX
Slave translational UX degree of freedom only.
UY
Slave translational UY degree of freedom only.
UZ
Slave translational UZ degree of freedom only.
ROTX
Slave rotational ROTX degree of freedom only.
ROTY
Slave rotational ROTY degree of freedom only.
ROTZ
Slave rotational ROTZ degree of freedom only.
Ldof2, Ldof3, Ldof4, Ldof5
Additional degrees of freedom. Used only if more than one degree of freedom required and Ldof is not ALL,
UXYZ, or RXYZ.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3151
CESGEN
Notes
Defines a rigid region (link, area or volume) by automatically generating constraint equations to relate nodes in
the region. Nodes in the rigid region must be assigned a geometric location before this command is used. Also,
nodes must be connected to elements having the required degree of freedom set (see Ldof above). Generated
constraint equations are based on small deflection theory. Generated constraint equations are numbered beginning from the highest previously defined equation number (NEQN) plus 1. Equations, once generated, may be
listed [CELIST] or modified [CE] as desired. Repeat CERIG command for additional rigid region equations.
This command will generate the constraint equations needed for defining rigid lines in 2-D or 3-D space. Multiple
rigid lines relative to a common point are used to define a rigid area or a rigid volume. In 2-D space, with Ldof
= ALL, three equations are generated for each pair of constrained nodes. These equations define the three rigid
body motions in global Cartesian space, i.e., two in-plane translations and one in-plane rotation. These equations
assume the X-Y plane to be the active plane with UX, UY, and ROTZ degrees of freedom available at each node.
Other types of equations can be generated with the appropriate Ldof labels.
Six equations are generated for each pair of constrained nodes in 3-D space (with Ldof = ALL). These equations
define the six rigid body motions in global Cartesian space. These equations assume that UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY,
and ROTZ degrees of freedom are available at each node.
The UXYZ label allows generating a partial set of rigid region equations. This option is useful for transmitting the
bending moment between elements having different degrees of freedom at a node. With this option only two
of the three equations are generated for each pair of constrained nodes in 2-D space. In 3-D space, only three of
the six equations are generated. In each case the rotational coupling equations are not generated. Similarly, the
RXYZ label allows generating a partial set of equations with the translational coupling equations omitted.
Applying this command to a large number of slave nodes may result in constraint equations with a large number
of coefficients. This may significantly increase the peak memory required during the process of element assembly.
If real memory or virtual memory is not available, consider reducing the number of slave nodes.
As an alternative to the CERIG command, you can define a similar type of rigid region using contact elements
and the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) algorithm. See Surface-Based Constraints for more information.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Rigid Region
CESGEN, ITIME, INC, NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Generates a set of constraint equations from existing sets.
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITIME, INC
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all nodes in the existing sets by INC each time
after the first. ITIME must be >1 for generation to occur.
NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Generate sets from sets beginning with NSET1 to NSET2 (defaults to NSET1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
If NSET1 is negative, NSET2 and NINC are ignored and the last |NSET1| sets (in sequence from maximum set
number) are used as the sets to be repeated.
3152
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CFACT
Notes
Generates additional sets of constraint equations (with same labels) from existing sets. Node numbers between
sets may be uniformly incremented.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Gen w/Same DOF
CFACT, RFACTA, IFACTA, RFACTB, IFACTB, RFACTC, IFACTC
Defines complex scaling factors to be used with operations.
POST26: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
RFACTA
Real portion of the complex scale factor used in place of FACTA.
IFACTA
Imaginary portion of the complex scale factor used in place of FACTA.
RFACTB
Real portion of the complex scale factor used in place of FACTB.
IFACTB
Imaginary portion of the complex scale factor used in place of FACTB.
RFACTC
Real portion of the complex scale factor used in place of FACTC.
IFACTC
Imaginary portion of the complex scale factor used in place of FACTC.
Command Default
Use the real factors as described with the operation command.
Notes
Defines complex scale factors to be used with the operations [ADD, PROD, etc.]. If this command is supplied,
these complex factors override any real factors (FACTA, FACTB, FACTC) supplied on the operation commands.
Factors are typically involved in scaling a specified variable, such as in the term FACTA x IA of the ADD command
to scale variable IA before the ADD operation.
When the CFACT command is active, defaults are as follows: 1) if the complex factor is not specified, but the
variable upon which it acts (such as IA) is specified, the factor defaults to 1.0+i0.0; 2) if the variable upon which
the factor operates is not specified, but the factor is specified, the variable defaults to 1.0 so that the term in the
operation becomes the complex factor itself; 3) if neither the factor nor the variable number is supplied, the term
is omitted from the operation. Once the operation (such as the ADD command) has been processed, the CFACT
command becomes inactive and must be specified again if it is to be used.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3153
/CFORMAT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Complx ScaleFact
/CFORMAT, NFIRST, NLAST
Controls the graphical display of alphanumeric character strings for parameters, components, assemblies,
and tables.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFIRST
Display the first n characters of the parameter, component, assembly, or table name, up to 32. Defaults to
32.
NLAST
Display the last n characters of the parameter, component, assembly, or table name, up to 32. Defaults to 0.
Notes
Use this command to control the length of the character string that is shown in the graphics window for a
parameter, component, assembly, or table name.
The total number of characters (NFIRST + NLAST +3) cannot exceed 32.
If NFIRST is greater than zero and NLAST = 0, only the NFIRST characters are displayed, followed by an ellipsis.
If NFIRST= 0 and NLAST is greater than zero, only the NLAST characters are displayed, preceded by an ellipsis
(...).
If both NFIRST and NLAST are greater than zero , the name will be shown as NFIRST, followed by an ellipsis (...),
followed by NLAST, up to a maximum of 32 characters.
For example, if NFIRST = 6 and NLAST = 3, and the character string is LENGTHOFSIDEONE, then it will appear in
the graphics window as LENGTH...ONE.
If the actual length of the character string is less than the specified combination of NFIRST + NLAST +3, then
the actual string will be used.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Size and Shape
3154
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CGOMGA
CGLOC, XLOC, YLOC, ZLOC
Specifies the origin location of the acceleration coordinate system.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> FL PP ED
XLOC, YLOC, ZLOC
Global Cartesian X, Y, and Z coordinates of the acceleration coordinate system origin.
Notes
Specifies the origin location of the acceleration coordinate system with respect to the global Cartesian system.
The axes of this acceleration coordinate system are parallel to the global Cartesian axes.
A structure may be rotating about the global Cartesian origin [OMEGA, DOMEGA], which may in turn be rotating
about another point (the origin of the acceleration coordinate system), introducing Coriolis effects. The location
of this point (relative to the global Cartesian origin) is specified with this CGLOC command. For example, if Y is
vertical and the global system origin is at the surface of the earth while the acceleration system origin is at the
center of the earth, YLOC should be -4000 miles (or equivalent) if the rotational effects of the earth are to be included. The rotational velocity of the global Cartesian system about this point is specified with the CGOMGA
command, and the rotational acceleration is specified with the DCGOMG command.
The rotational velocities and accelerations are mainly intended to include mass effects in a static (ANTYPE,STATIC)
analysis. If used in dynamic analyses, no coupling exists between the user input terms and the time history response
of the structure. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Related commands are ACEL, CGOMGA, DCGOMG,
DOMEGA, and OMEGA.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Rotating Coords
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Acceleration CS>Delete Accel CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Acceleration CS>Set Accel CS
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Rotating Coords
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Acceleration CS>Delete Accel CS
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Acceleration CS>Set Accel CS
CGOMGA, CGOMX, CGOMY, CGOMZ
Specifies the rotational velocity of the global origin.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> FL PP ED
CGOMX, CGOMY, CGOMZ
Rotational velocity of the global origin about the acceleration system X, Y, and Z axes.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3155
CHECK
Notes
Specifies the rotational velocity of the global origin about each of the acceleration coordinate system axes. The
location of the acceleration coordinate system is defined with the CGLOC command. Rotational velocities may
be defined in analysis types ANTYPE,STATIC, HARMIC (full or mode superposition), TRANS (full or mode superposition), and SUBSTR. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Units are radians/time. Related commands
are ACEL, CGLOC, DCGOMG, DOMEGA, and OMEGA.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Rotating Coords
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Rotating Coords
CHECK, Sele, Levl
Checks current database items for completeness.
PREP7: Database
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Sele
Specifies which elements are to be checked:
(blank)
Check all data.
ESEL
Check only elements in the selected set and unselect any elements not producing geometry check
messages. The remaining elements (those producing check messages) can then be displayed and corrected. A null set results if no elements produce a message. Issue ESEL,ALL to select all elements before
proceeding.
Levl
Used only with Sele = ESEL:
WARN
Select elements producing warning and error messages.
ERR
Select only elements producing error messages (default).
Notes
This command will not work if SHPP,OFF has been set. A similar, automatic check of all data is done before the
solution begins.
3156
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CIRCLE
If the Check Elements option is invoked through the GUI (menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing>
Check Elems), the CHECK,ESEL logic is used to highlight elements in the following way: good elements are blue,
elements having warnings are yellow, and bad (error) elements are red.
Note The currently selected set of elements is not changed by this GUI function.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Check Mesh>Individual Elm>Select Warning/Error Elements
CHKMSH, Comp
Checks area and volume entities for previous meshes.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Comp
Name of component containing areas or volumes.
Notes
CHKMSH invokes a predefined ANSYS macro that checks areas and volumes to find out if they were previously
meshed. This macro name will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) prior to area and volume meshing operations
initiated through the GUI. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although
it can be included in an input file for use with the /INPUT command).
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CIRCLE, PCENT, RAD, PAXIS, PZERO, ARC, NSEG
Generates circular arc lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
PCENT
Keypoint defining the center of the circle (in the plane of the circle). If PCENT = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
RAD
Radius of the circle. If RAD is blank and PCENT = P, the radius is the distance from PCENT to PZERO.
PAXIS
Keypoint defining axis of circle (along with PCENT). If PCENT = P and PAXIS is omitted, the axis is normal to
the working plane.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3157
/CLABEL
PZERO
Keypoint defining the plane normal to circle (along with PCENT and PAXIS) and the zero degree location.
Need not be in the plane of the circle. This value is not required if PAXIS is defined along the Y axis (that is,
a circle in the XZ plane).
ARC
Arc length (in degrees). Positive follows right-hand rule about PCENT-PAXIS vector. Defaults to 360.
NSEG
Number of lines around circumference (defaults to minimum required for 90-maximum arcs, i.e., 4 for 360).
Number of keypoints generated is NSEG for 360 or NSEG+1 for less than 360.
Notes
Generates circular arc lines (and their corresponding keypoints). Keypoints are generated at regular angular
locations (based on a maximum spacing of 90). Arc lines are generated connecting the keypoints. Keypoint and
line numbers are automatically assigned, beginning with the lowest available values [NUMSTR]. Adjacent lines
use a common keypoint. Line shapes are generated as arcs, regardless of the active coordinate system. Line
shapes are invariant with coordinate system after they are generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Arcs>By Cent & Radius
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Arcs>Full Circle
/CLABEL, WN, KEY
Specifies contour labeling.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
KEY
Labeling key:
0 or 1
Label contours with legend or color (default).
1
No contour labeling.
N
Same as 1 except show alphabetic legend only on every Nth element.
Command Default
Show contour line labels.
3158
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CLEAR
Notes
Labels contours for identification with alphabetic legend for vector displays and color for raster displays. Number
of contours is automatically reduced to 9 (or fewer) for clarity. Use /CONTOUR command to increase (24 maximum
for alphabetic labeling; no limit for color labeling).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Contours>Contour Labeling
/CLEAR, Read
Clears the database.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Read
File read option:
START
Reread start90.ans file (default).
NOSTART
Do not reread start90.ans file.
Notes
Resets the ANSYS database to the conditions at the beginning of the problem. Sets the import and Boolean options
back to the ANSYS default. All items are deleted from the database and memory values are set to zero for items
derived from database information. All files are left intact. This command is useful between multiple analyses in
the same run, or between passes of a multipass analysis (such as between the substructure generation, use, and
expansion passes). Should not be used in a do-loop since loop counters will be reset. The start90.ans file will
be reread (by default) after the database is cleared, unless Read is set to NOSTART. Additional commands cannot
be stacked (using the $ separator) on the same line as the /CLEAR command.
Use care when placing the /CLEAR command within branching constructs (for example, those employing *DO
or *IF commands). The command deletes all parameters including the looping parameter for do-loops. (You can
preserve your iteration parameter by issuing a PARSAV command prior to the /CLEAR command, then following
the /CLEAR command with a PARRES command.)
/CLEAR resets the jobname to match the currently open session .LOG and .ERR files. This will return the jobname
to its original value, or to the most recent value specified on /FILNAME with KEY = 1.
This command is valid only at the Begin level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Clear & Start New
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3159
CLOCAL
CLOCAL, KCN, KCS, XL, YL, ZL, THXY, THYZ, THZX, PAR1, PAR2
Defines a local coordinate system relative to the active coordinate system.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this coordinate system. Must be greater than 10. A coordinate system
previously defined with this number will be redefined.
KCS
Coordinate system type:
0 or CART
Cartesian
1 or CYLIN
Cylindrical (circular or elliptical)
2 or SPHE
Spherical (or spheroidal)
3 or TORO
Toroidal
XL, YL, ZL
Location (in the active coordinate system) of the origin of the new coordinate system (R, , Z for cylindrical,
R, , for spherical or toroidal).
THXY
First rotation about local Z (positive X toward Y).
THYZ
Second rotation about local X (positive Y toward Z).
THZX
Third rotation about local Y (positive Z toward X).
PAR1
Used for elliptical, spheroidal, or toroidal systems. If KCS = 1 or 2, PAR1 is the ratio of the ellipse Y-axis radius
to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0 (circle)). If KCS = 3, PAR1 is the major radius of the torus.
PAR2
Used for spheroidal systems. If KCS = 2, PAR2 = ratio of ellipse Z-axis radius to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0
(circle)).
Notes
Defines and activates a local coordinate system by origin location and orientation angles relative to the active
coordinate system. This local system becomes the active coordinate system, and is automatically aligned with
the active system (i.e., x is radial if a cylindrical system is active, etc.). Nonzero rotation angles (degrees) are relative
to this automatic rotation. See the CS, CSKP, CSWPLA, and LOCAL commands for alternate definitions. Local
coordinate systems may be displayed with the /PSYMB command.
This command is valid in any processor.
3160
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CLOG
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CLOG, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB
Forms the common log of a variable
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0).
FACTB
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to the operation (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
Forms the common log of a variable according to the operation:
IR = FACTB*LOG(FACTA x IA)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Common Log
/CLOG, Fname, Ext, -Copies the session log file to a named file.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path to which the log file is to be copied (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248
characters for the file name.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3161
CLRMSHLN
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor, but only during an interactive run.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CLRMSHLN
Clears meshed entities.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
When you use the GUI method to set the number of elements on specified lines, and any of those lines is connected
to one or more meshed lines, areas, or volumes, ANSYS gives you the option to clear the meshed entities. (This
occurs only when you perform this operation via the GUI; ANSYS does not provide such an option when you use
the command method [LESIZE].)
If you activate the mesh clearing option, the program invokes an ANSYS macro, CLRMSHLN, that clears the
meshed entities. This macro name will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG). This macro is for the ANSYS program's
internal use only. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session, although it can be
included in an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CM, Cname, Entity
Groups geometry items into a component.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Cname
An alphanumeric name used to identify this component. Cname may be up to 32 characters, beginning with
a letter and containing only letters, numbers, and underscores. Component names beginning with an underscore (e.g., _LOOP) are reserved for use by ANSYS and should be avoided. Components named ALL, STAT,
and DEFA are not permitted. Overwrites a previously defined name.
Entity
Label identifying the type of geometry items to be grouped:
3162
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CM
VOLU
Volumes.
AREA
Areas.
LINE
Lines.
KP
Keypoints.
ELEM
Elements.
NODE
Nodes.
Notes
Components may be further grouped into assemblies [CMGRP]. The selected items of the specified entity type
will be stored as the component. Use of this component in the select command [CMSEL] causes all these items
to be selected at once, for convenience.
A component is a grouping of some geometric entity that can then be conveniently selected or unselected. A
component may be redefined by reusing a previous component name. The following entity types may belong
to a component: nodes, elements, keypoints, lines, areas, and volumes. A component may contain only 1 entity
type, but an individual item of any entity may belong to any number of components. Once defined, the items
contained in a component may then be easily selected or unselected [CMSEL]. Components may be listed
[CMLIST], modified [CMMOD] and deleted [CMDELE]. Components may also be further grouped into assemblies
[CMGRP]. Other entities associated with the entities in a component (e.g., the lines and keypoints associated
with areas) may be selected by the ALLSEL command.
An item will be deleted from a component if it has been deleted by another operation (see the KMODIF command
for an example). Components are automatically updated to reflect deletions of one or more of their items.
Components are automatically deleted and a warning message is issued if all their items are deleted. Assemblies
are also automatically updated to reflect deletions of one or more of their components or subassemblies, but
are not deleted if all their components and subassemblies are deleted.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Manual Rezoning>Create Rezone Component
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Element Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Element Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Utility Menu>Select>Comp/Assembly>Create Component
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3163
CMACEL
CMACEL, CM_NAME, CMACELX, CMACELY, CMACELZ
Specifies the translational acceleration of an element component
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
CM_NAME
The name of the element component (8-character maximum).
CMACELX, CMACELY, CMACELZ
Acceleration of the element component CM_NAME in the global Cartesian X, Y, and Z axis directions, respectively.
Notes
The CMACEL command specifies the translational acceleration of the element component in each of the global
Cartesian (X, Y, and Z) axis directions.
You can use the CMACEL command to specify translational, acceleration-based loading on up to 100 element
components.
Components for which you want to specify acceleration loading must consist of elements only. The elements
you use cannot be part of more than one component, and elements that share nodes cannot exist in different
element components. You cannot apply the loading to an assembly of element components.
To simulate gravity (by using inertial effects), accelerate the structure in the direction opposite to gravity. For
example, apply a positive CMACELY to simulate gravity acting in the negative Y direction. Units are length/time2.
You can define the acceleration for the following analyses types:
Static (ANTYPE,STATIC)
Harmonic (ANTYPE,HARMIC), full or mode superposition method
Transient (ANTYPE,TRANS), full or mode superposition method
Substructure (ANTYPE,SUBSTR)
Accelerations are combined with the element mass matrices to form a body force load vector term. Units of acceleration and mass must be consistent to give a product of force units.
In a modal harmonic or transient analysis, you must apply the load in the modal portion of the analysis. ANSYS
calculates a load vector and writes it to the mode shape file, which you can apply via the LVSCALE command.
The CMACEL command does not support these elements: FLUID79, FLUID80, FLUID81, and PIPE59.
Related commands for inertia loads are ACEL, CGLOC, CGOMGA, DCGOMG, DOMEGA, OMEGA, CMOMEGA,
and CMDOMEGA.
This command is also valid in /PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Gravity>On Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Gravity>On Components
3164
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CMAP
/CMAP, Fname, Ext, Dir, Kywrd, NCNTR
Changes an existing or creates a new color mapping table.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
If blank, restore color map.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
Dir
Directory or path specification. You can use any portion of the 248 character limit (above).
Kywrd
Keyword indicating the disposition of the color map file.
(blank)
Loads existing color map file.
CREATE
Starts CMAP utility and modifies or creates the specified file.
SAVE
Writes the active color map to the specified file, which can be imported into future ANSYS sessions.
NCNTR
Number of contours to be defined by the /CMAP command (max = 128). If no value is specified, CMAP defaults
to 9, even if an existing file is being modified.
Command Default
Use predefined ANSYS color map table.
Notes
Reads the color map file (RGB index specifications) to change from current specifications. Only one color map
may be active at a time.
For 2-D drivers (especially Win32c), modifying the color map can produce anomalies, including legend/contour
disagreement.
Changing the color map in ANSYS with the /CMAP command will change the meaning of the color labels on the
/COLOR command. See /COLOR for other color controls.
This command is valid anywhere.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3165
CMATRIX
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To GRPH File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL2 File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To PSCR File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Colors>Default Color Map
CMATRIX, SYMFAC, Condname, NUMCOND, GRNDKEY, Capname
Performs electrostatic field solutions and calculates the self and mutual capacitances between multiple
conductors.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
SYMFAC
Geometric symmetry factor. Capacitance values are scaled by this factor which represents the fraction of the
total device modeled. Defaults to 1.
Condname
Alpha-numeric prefix identifier used in defining named conductor components.
NUMCOND
Total Number of Components. If a ground is modeled, it is to be included as a component. If a ground is not
modeled, but infinite elements are used to model the far-field ground, a named component for the far-field
ground is not required.
GRNDKEY
Ground key:
0
Ground is one of the components, which is not at infinity.
1
Ground is at infinity (modeled by infinite elements or a Trefftz domain).
Capname
Array name for computed capacitance matrix. Defaults to CMATRIX.
Notes
To invoke the CMATRIX macro, the exterior nodes of each conductor must be grouped into individual components
using the CM command. Each set of independent components is assigned a component name with a common
prefix followed by the conductor number. A conductor system with a ground must also include the ground
nodes as a component. The ground component is numbered last in the component name sequence.
A Ground Capacitance matrix is a matrix relating charge to a voltage vector. A ground matrix can not be applied
to a circuit modeler such as SPICE. The Lumped Capacitance matrix is a matrix formed by a combination of
lumped "arrangements" of voltage differences between conductors. You can use the lumped capacitance terms
in a circuit modeler to represent capacitances between conductors.
You must enclose all name-strings in single quotes in the CMATRIX command line.
3166
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CMDOMEGA
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference and HMAGSOLV in the ANSYS Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide
for details.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Electromagnet>Static Analysis>Capac Matrix
CMDELE, Name
Deletes a component or assembly definition.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Name of the component or assembly whose definition is to be removed.
Notes
Entities contained in the component, or the components within the assembly, are unaffected. Only the grouping
relationships are deleted. Assemblies are automatically updated to reflect deletion of their components or subassemblies, but they are not automatically deleted when all their components or subassemblies are deleted.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Layers>Picked Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Create Rezone Area
Utility Menu>Select>Comp/Assembly>Delete Comp/Assembly
CMDOMEGA, CM_NAME, DOMEGAX, DOMEGAY, DOMEGAZ, X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies the rotational acceleration of an element component about a user-defined rotational axis.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
CM_NAME,
The name of the element component (8 character maximum).
DOMEGAX, DOMEGAY, DOMEGAZ
If the X2, Y2, Z2 fields are not defined, DOMEGAX, DOMEGAY, and DOMEGAZ specify the components of the ro-
tational acceleration vector in the global Cartesian X, Y, Z directions.
If the X2, Y2, Z2 fields are defined, only DOMEGAX is required. DOMEGAX specifies the scalar rotational acceleration about the rotational axis. The rotational direction of DOMEGAXis designated either positive or negative,
and is determined by the right hand rule.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3167
CMDOMEGA
X1, Y1, Z1
If the X2, Y2, Z2 fields are defined, X1, Y1, and Z1 define the coordinates of the beginning point of the rotational axis vector. Otherwise, X1, Y1, and Z1 are the coordinates of a point through which the rotational axis
passes.
X2, Y2, Z2
The coordinates of the end point of the rotational axis vector.
Notes
Specifies the rotational acceleration components DOMEGAX, DOMEGAY, and DOMEGAZ of an element component
CM_NAME about a user-defined rotational axis. The rotational axis can be defined either as a vector passing through
a single point, or a vector connecting two points.
You can use the CMDOMEGA command to specify acceleration based loading on up to 100 rotational element
components.
You can define rotational acceleration and rotational axis with the CMDOMEGA command for STATIC, HARMIC
(full), TRANS (full), and SUBSTR analyses. Rotational velocities are combined with the element mass matrices to
form a body force load vector term. Units are radians/time2. Related commands are ACEL, CGLOC, CGLOC,
OMEGA, CMOMEGA, DCGOMG, DOMEGA.
You can use the CMDOMEGA command in conjunction with any one of the following two groups of commands,
but not with both groups simultaneously:
GROUP ONE: OMEGA, DOMEGA.
GROUP TWO: CGOMGA, DCGOMG, CGLOC.
Components for which you want to specify rotational loading must consist of elements only. The elements you
use cannot be part of more than one component, and elements that share nodes cannot exist in different element
components. You cannot apply the loading to an assembly of element components.
In a modal harmonic or transient analysis, you must apply the load in the modal portion of the analysis. ANSYS
calculates a load vector and writes it to the mode shape file, which you can apply via the LVSCALE command.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>By Axis
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>By origin
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick Kpt
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick Kpts
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick Node
3168
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CMEDIT
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Component
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>By
Axis
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>By
origin
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick
Kpt
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick
Kpts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick
Node
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Components>Pick
Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>On Component
CMEDIT, Aname, Oper, Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7
Edits an existing assembly.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Aname
Name of the assembly to be edited.
Oper
Operation label:
ADD
To add more components. The level of any assembly to be added must be lower than that of the assembly
Aname (see CMGRP command).
DELE
To remove components.
Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7
Names of components and assemblies to be added to or deleted from the assembly.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Comp/Assembly>Edit Assembly
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3169
CMGRP
CMGRP, Aname, Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8
Groups components and assemblies into an assembly.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Aname
An alphanumeric name used to identify this assembly. Aname may be up to 32 characters, beginning with a
letter and containing only letters, numbers, and underscores. Overwrites a previously defined Aname (and
removes it from higher level assemblies, if any).
Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8
Names of existing components or other assemblies to be included in this assembly.
Notes
Groups components and other assemblies into an assembly identified by a name. CMGRP is used for the initial
definition of an assembly. An assembly is used in the same manner as a component. Up to 5 levels of assemblies
within assemblies may be used.
An assembly is a convenient grouping of previously defined components and other assemblies. Assemblies may
contain components only, other assemblies, or any combination. A component may belong to any number of
assemblies. Up to 5 levels of nested assemblies may be defined. Components and assemblies may be added to
or deleted from an existing assembly by the CMEDIT command. Once defined, an assembly may be listed, deleted,
selected, or unselected using the same commands as for a component. Assemblies are automatically updated
to reflect deletions of one or more of their components or lower-level assemblies. Assemblies are not automatically deleted when all their components or subassemblies are deleted.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Comp/Assembly>Create Assembly
CMLIST, Name, Key, Entity
Lists the contents of a component or assembly.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Name of the component or assembly to be listed (if blank, list all selected components and assemblies). If
Name is specified, then Entity is ignored.
Key
Expansion key:
0 - Do not list individual entities in the component.
1 (or EXPA) - List individual entities in the component.
Entity
If Name is blank, then the following entity types can be specified:
3170
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CMMOD
VOLU - List the volume components only.
AREA - List the area components only.
LINE - List the line components only.
KP - List the keypoint components only.
ELEM - List the element components only.
NODE - List the node components only.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor. For components, it lists the type of geometric entity. For assemblies, it
lists the components and/or assemblies that make up the assembly.
Examples of possible usage:
CMLIST - List all selected components.
CMLIST, , EXPA - List all selected components and for each component list the underlying entity ID's.
CMLIST, Name - List the specified component.
CMLIST, Name, EXPA - List specified component along with all underlying entity ID's.
CMLIST, , EXPA, Entity - List all selected components of specified entity type. For each component also
list the underlying entity ID's.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Components
Utility Menu>List>Other>Components
Utility Menu>Select>Comp/Assembly>List Comp/Assembly
CMMOD, Cname, Keyword, Value
Modifies the specification of a component.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Cname
Name of the existing component or assembly to be modified.
Keyword
The label identifying the type of value to be modified.
NAME - Modify the NAME of the component
Value
If Keyword is NAME, then the value is the alphanumeric label to be applied. See the CM command for naming
convention details. If a component named Value already exists, the command will be ignored and an error
message will be generated.
Notes
The naming conventions for components, as specified in the CM command, apply for CMMOD (32 characters,
ALL, STAT and DEFA are not allowed, etc.). However, if you choose a component name that is already designated for another component, an error message will be issued and the command will be ignored.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3171
CMOMEGA
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CMOMEGA, CM_NAME, OMEGAX, OMEGAY, OMEGAZ, X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, KSPIN
Specifies the rotational velocity of an element component about a user-defined rotational axis.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
CM_NAME,
The name of the element component (8 character maximum).
OMEGAX, OMEGAY, OMEGAZ
If the X2, Y2, Z2 fields are not defined, OMEGAX, OMEGAY, and OMEGAZ specify the components of the rotational
velocity vector in the global Cartesian X, Y, Z directions.
If the X2, Y2, Z2 fields are defined, only OMEGAX is required. OMEGAX specifies the scalar rotational velocity
about the rotational axis. The rotational direction of OMEGAX is designated either positive or negative, and
is determined by the right hand rule.
X1, Y1, Z1
If the X2, Y2, Z2 fields are defined,X1, Y1, and Z1 define the coordinates of the beginning point of the rotational axis vector. Otherwise, X1, Y1, and Z1 are the coordinates of a point through which the rotational axis
passes.
X2, Y2, Z2
The coordinates of the end point of the rotational axis vector.
KSPIN
The spin softening key:
0 No modification of the stiffness matrix of the element component due to rotation.
1 Decrease radial stiffness of the element component due to rotation (i.e., include spin softening effects).
Notes
Specifies the rotational velocity components OMEGAX, OMEGAY, and OMEGAZ of an element component CM_NAME
about a user-defined rotational axis. The rotational axis can be defined either as a vector passing through a single
point or a vector connecting two points.
You can use the CMOMEGA command to specify velocity based loading on up to 100 rotational element components.
You define rotational velocity and rotational axis with the CMOMEGA command for STATIC, HARMIC (full), TRANS
(full), and SUBSTR analyses. Rotational velocities are combined with the element mass matrices to form a body
force load vector term. Units are radians/time. Related commands are ACEL, CGLOC, CGLOC, CGOMGA, CMDOMEGA, DCGOMG, DOMEGA.
You can use the CMOMEGA command in conjunction with any one of the following two groups of commands,
but not with both groups simultaneously:
3172
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CMOMEGA
GROUP ONE: OMEGA, DOMEGA.
GROUP TWO: CGOMGA, DCGOMG, CGLOC.
Components for which you want to specify rotational loading must consist of elements only. The elements you
use cannot be part of more than one component, and elements that share nodes cannot exist in different element
components. You cannot apply the loading to an assembly of element components.
The KSPIN option allows adjusting the stiffness of a rotating body to account for dynamic mass effects. The adjustment is called spin-softening and applies to a modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) or harmonic (ANTYPE,HARM) analysis
only. The adjustment approximates the effects of geometry changes caused by large-deflection circumferential
motion in a small-deflection analysis. The KSPIN option is not intended for a large-deflection static analysis; in
such a case, use the NLGEOM,ON command to account for this effect. The command is usually used in conjunction
with prestressing (PSTRES).
If your CMOMEGA parameters change, you should not reuse the overall stiffness matrix. See the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference for more information on the stiffness matrix.
In a modal harmonic or transient analysis, you must apply the load in the modal portion of the analysis. ANSYS
calculates a load vector and writes it to the mode shape file, which you can apply via the LVSCALE command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>By Axis
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>By origin
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick Kpt
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick Kpts
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick Node
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Component
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>By
Axis
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>By
origin
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick
Kpt
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick
Kpts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick
Node
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Components>Pick
Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>On Component
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3173
CMPLOT
CMPLOT, Label, Entity, Keyword
Plots the entities contained in a component or assembly.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Name of the component or assembly to be plotted.
(blank)
All selected components and assemblies are plotted (default). If fewer than 11 components are selected,
then all are plotted. If more than 11 components are selected, then only the first 11 are plotted.
ALL
All selected components are plotted. If number of selected components is greater than 11, then the legend
showing component names will not be shown.
N
Next set of defined components and assemblies is plotted.
P
Previous set of defined components and assemblies is plotted.
Cname
The specified component or assembly is plotted.
Set No.
The specified set number is plotted.
Entity
If Label is BLANK or ALL, then the following entity types can be specified:
VOLU - Plot the volume components only.
AREA - Plot the area components only.
LINE - Plot the line components only.
KP - Plot the keypoint components only.
ELEM - Plot the element components only.
NODE - Plot the node components only.
Keyword
For Keyword = ALL, plot the specified component name in the Label field in the context of all entities of
the same type. Not valid if Label field is BLANK or ALL.
Notes
Components are plotted with their native entities. For assemblies, all native entities for the underlying component
types are plotted simultaneously. Although more components can be plotted, the legend displays only 11 at a
time. When more than eleven are plotted, the legend is not displayed.
Possible usage:
CMPLOT, Cname - Plots the specified component (if selected).
CMPLOT, Cname, ALL - Plot component in the context of all other selected entity components of the same
type as the component.
CMPLOT - Plot the first eleven selected components.
CMPLOT, ALL - Plot all selected components.
3174
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CMSEL
CMPLOT, N or CMPLOT, P - next or previous set of eleven components.
CMPLOT, ALL, Entity - Plot all selected components of type specified in Entity.
CMPLOT, , Entity - Plot components of type specified in Entity, from the first eleven components.
CMPLOT, N, Entity - Plot components of type specified in Entity, if any, from the next set of eleven components
(substitute P for N to plot from previous set).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Components>By Name / Set Number
Utility Menu>Plot>Components>Next Set
Utility Menu>Plot>Components>Previous Set
Utility Menu>Plot>Components>Selected Components
CMSEL, Type, Name, Entity
Selects a subset of components and assemblies.
DATABASE: Components
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Also select all components.
NONE
Unselect all components.
Name
Name of component or assembly whose items are to be selected (valid only if Type = S, R, A, or U).
Graphical picking is enabled if Type is blank and Name = P.
Entity
If Name is blank, then the following entity types can be specified:
VOLU - Select the volume components only.
AREA - Select the area components only.
LINE - Select the line components only.
KP - Select the keypoint components only.
ELEM - Select the element components only.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3175
CMSFILE
NODE - Select the node components only.
Notes
Selecting by component is a convenient adjunct to individual item selection (e.g., VSEL, ESEL, etc.). CMSEL, ALL
allows you to select components in addition to other items you have already selected.
If Type = R for an assembly selection [CMSEL,R,<assembly-name>], the reselect operation is performed on each
component in the assembly in the order in which the components make up the assembly. Thus, if one reselect
operation results in an empty set, subsequent operations will also result in empty sets. For example, if the first
reselect operation tries to reselect node 1 from the selected set of nodes 3, 4, and 5, the operation results in an
empty set (that is, no nodes are selected). Since the current set is now an empty set, if the second reselect operation tries to reselect any nodes, the second operation also results in an empty set, and so on. This is equivalent
to repeating the command CMSEL,R,<component-name> once for each component making up the assembly.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Manual Rezoning>Create Rezone Component
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Select Rezone Component
Utility Menu>Select>Comp/Assembly>Select Comp/Assembly
CMSFILE, Option, Fname, Ext, CmsKey
Specifies a list of component mode synthesis (CMS) results files for plotting results on the assembly.
POST1: Special Purpose
<> ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Specifies the command operation:
ADD
Add the specified component results file (Fname) to the list of files to plot. This option is the default.
DELETE
Remove the specified component results file (Fname) from the list of files to plot.
3176
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CMSFILE
LIST
List all specified component results files.
CLEAR
Clear all previous files added.
ALL
Add all component results (.rst) files from the working directory to the list of files to plot.
Fname
The file name (with full directory path) of the component results file. The default file name is the Jobname
(specified via the /FILNAME command).
Ext
The file name (Fname) extension. The default extension is .rst.
CmsKey
Valid only when adding a results file (Option = ADD or ALL), this key specifies whether or not to check the
specified .rst file to determine if it was created via a CMS expansion pass:
ON
Check (default).
OFF
Do not check.
Command Default
If issued with no arguments, the CMSFILE command uses these defaults:
CMSFILE,ADD,Jobname,rst,ON
The command adds the component results file Jobname.rst.
Notes
The CMSFILE command specifies the list of component mode synthesis (CMS) results files to include when
plotting the mode shape of an assembly.
During postprocessing (/POST1) of a CMS analysis, issue the CMSFILE command to point to component results
files of interest. (You can issue the command as often as needed to include all or some of the component results
files.) Issue the SET command to acquire the frequencies and mode shapes from substeps for all specified results
files. Execute a plot (PLNSOL) or print (PRNSOL) operation to display the mode shape of the entire assembly.
When you specify a results file to add to the plot list, the default behavior of the command (CmsKey = ON) is to
first verify that the file is from a CMS analysis and that the frequencies of the result sets on the file match the
frequencies on the first file in the list. If CmsKey = OFF, you can add any .rst file to the list of files to plot, even if
the file was not expanded via a CMS expansion pass.
If CmsKey = ON (default), output from the command appears as: ADD CMS FILE = filename.rst. If CmsKey
= OFF, output from the command appears as: ADD FILE = filename.rst.
If OPTION = DELETE or CLEAR, you must clear the database (/CLEAR), then re-enter the postprocessor (/POST1)
and issue a SET command for the change to take effect on subsequent plots.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3177
CMSOPT
Clearing the database does not clear the list of files specified via the CMSFILE command. Specify OPTION = CLEAR
to clear the list of files.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Data & File Opts
CMSOPT, CMSMETH, NMODE, FREQB, FREQE, FBDDEF, FBDVAL
Specifies component mode synthesis (CMS) analysis options.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
<> ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
CMSMETH
The component mode synthesis method to use. This value is required.
FIX
Fixed-interface method.
FREE
Free-interface method.
NMODE
The number of normal modes extracted and used in superelement generation. This value is required and
the minimum is 1.
FREQB
Beginning, or lower end, of frequency range of interest. This value is optional.
FREQE
Ending, or upper end, of frequency range of interest. This value is optional.
FBDDEF
In a free-interface CMS analysis (CMSMETH = FREE), the method to use for defining free body modes:
FNUM
The number (FDBVAL) of rigid body modes in the calculation.
FTOL
Employ a specified tolerance (FDBVAL) to determine rigid body modes in the calculation.
FAUTO
Automatically determine rigid body modes in the calculation. This method is the default.
RIGID
If no rigid body modes exist, define your own via the RIGID command.
FBDVAL
In a free-interface CMS analysis (CMSMETH = FREE), the number of rigid body modes if FBDDEF = FNUM (where
the value is an integer from 0 through 6), or the tolerance to employ if FBDDEF = FTOL (where the value is a
positive real number representing rad/sec). This value is required only when FBDDEF = FNUM or FBDDEF =
FTOL; otherwise, any specified value is ignored.
3178
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CNCHECK
Command Default
Issuing the CMSOPT command with no arguments is invalid. You must specify at least the CMS method (CMSMETH)
and the number of modes (NMODE). In a free-interface CMS analysis (CMSMETH = FREE), the default method for
determining rigid body modes is FAUTO (automatic).
Notes
CMS employs the Block Lanczos eigensolution method in the generation pass.
CMS does not yet support damping matrix reduction. ANSYS sets the matrix generation key to 2 automatically
(SEOPT,SEMATR).
CMS does not support the SEOPT,,,,,RESOLVE command. Instead, ANSYS sets the expansion method for the expansion pass (EXPMTH) to BACKSUB.
This command is also valid in /PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
CNCHECK, Option, RID1, RID2, RINC
Provides and/or adjusts the initial status of contact pairs.
PREP7: Database
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Option
Option to be performed:
DETAIL
List all contact pair properties (default).
SUMMARY
List only the open/closed status for each contact pair.
POST
Execute a partial solution to write the initial contact configuration to a results file, Jobname.RCN.
ADJUST
Physically move contact nodes to target to close gap or reduce penetration.
RESET
Reset target element and contact element key options and real constants to their default values.
RID1, RID2, RINC
The range of real constant pair ID's for which Option will be performed. If RID2 is not specified, it defaults
to RID1. If no value is specified, all contact pairs in the selected set of elements are considered.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3179
CNCHECK
Notes
CNCHECK provides information for surface-to-surface and node-to-surface contact pairs (element types TARGE169,
TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175). All contact and target elements of interest,
along with the solid elements and nodes attached to them, must be selected for the command to function
properly.
CNCHECK is available both in PREP7 and in SOLUTION, but only before the first SOLVE, that is, only before the
first load step or the first substep.
The command CNCHECK,POST solves the initial contact configuration in one substep. After issuing this command,
you can postprocess the contact result items as you would for any other converged load step. However, only
the contact status, contact penetration or gap, and contact pressure will have meaningful values. Other contact
quantities (friction stress, sliding distance, chattering) will be available, but not useful.
If CNCHECK,POST is issued within the SOLUTION processor, the SOLVE command that solves the first load step
of your analysis should appear in a different step, as shown in the following example:
/SOLU
CNCHECK,POST
FINISH
. . .
/SOLU
SOLVE
FINISH
. . .
CNCHECK,POST writes initial contact results to a results file named Jobname.RCN. When postprocessing the
initial contact state, you need to explicitly read results from this file using the FILE and SET,FIRST commands in
POST1 to properly read the corresponding contact data. Otherwise, the results file may be read improperly. The
following example shows a valid command sequence for plotting the initial contact gap:
/SOLU
CNCHECK,POST
FINISH
/POST1
FILE,Jobname,RCN
SET,FIRST
PLNSOL,CONT,GAP,0,1
FINISH
. . .
You can issue CNCHECK,ADJUST to physically move contact nodes to the target surface. See Section 3.8.8:
Physically Moving Contact Nodes Towards the Target Surface in the ANSYS Contact Technology Guide for more
information. Similar to the POST option described above, if CNCHECK,ADJUST is issued within the SOLUTION
processor, the SOLVE command that solves the first load step of your analysis should appear in a different step:
/SOLU
CNCHECK,ADJUST
FINISH
. . .
/SOLU
SOLVE
FINISH
. . .
For performance reasons, ANSYS internally uses a subset of nodes and elements based on the specified contact
regions (RID1, RID2, RINC) when executing CNCHECK,POST or CNCHECK,ADJUST.
3180
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CNVTOL
The command CNCHECK,RESET allows you to reset all but a few key options and real constants associated with
the specified contact pairs (RID1, RID2, RINC) to their default values. The RESET option is only valid in the PREP7
preprocessor. The following key options and real constants remain unchanged when this command is issued:
Element type
Key options not affected by RESET
Real constants not affected by RESET
TARGE169, TARGE170
KEYOPT(3)
R1, R2
CONTA171, CONTA172
KEYOPT(1), KEYOPT(3)
R1, R2
CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175
KEYOPT(1)
R1, R2
Menu Paths
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Contact Pair
CNVTOL, Lab, VALUE, TOLER, NORM, MINREF
Sets convergence values for nonlinear analyses.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Valid convergence labels are as follows: If STAT, list the status of the currently specified criteria. Structural
labels: U (displacements); ROT (rotations); F (forces); M (moments). Thermal labels: TEMP (temperature); HEAT
(heat flow). Fluid labels: PRES (pressures); V (velocities); FLOW (fluid flow); VF (fluid force). Electric labels: VOLT
(voltage); EMF (electromotive force); CURR (current flow); AMPS (current flow); CURT (current flow). Magnetic
labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); A (vector magnetic potentials); CURR (current flow); FLUX (scalar
magnetic flux); CSG (magnetic current segments); VLTG (voltage drop).
VALUE
Typical value for the above label for this analysis. If negative, and if this convergence label was previously
specified explicitly, then convergence based on this label is removed. (A negative VALUE will not remove a
default convergence label.) Defaults to the maximum of a program calculated reference or MINREF. For degrees
of freedom, the reference is based upon the selected NORM and the current total DOF value. For forcing
quantities, the reference is based upon the selected NORM and the applied loads.
TOLER
When SOLCONTROL,ON, tolerance about VALUE. Defaults to 0.005 (0.5%) for force and moment, and 0.05
(5%) for displacement when rotational DOFs are not present. When SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to 0.001
(0.1%) for force and moment.
NORM
Specifies norm selection:
2
L2 norm (check SRSS value) (default).
1
L1 norm (check absolute value sum).
0
Infinite norm (check each DOF separately).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3181
CNVTOL
MINREF
The minimum value allowed for the program calculated reference value. If negative, no minimum is enforced.
Used only if VALUE is blank. Defaults to 0.01 for force and moment convergence, 1.0E-6 for heat flow, 1.0E12 for VOLT and AMPS, and 0.0 otherwise. When SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to 1.0 for force and moment
convergence. The default for heat flow (1.0E-6), VOLT and AMPS (1.0E-12), and others are independent of
the SOLCONTROL setting.
Command Default
For static or transient analysis, check the out-of-balance load for any active DOF using the default VALUE, TOLER,
NORM, and MINREF. Also check the displacement convergence for some problems. For harmonic magnetic analysis, check the out-of-balance of the degrees of freedom.
Notes
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
Values may be set for the degrees of freedom (DOF) and/or the out-of-balance load for the corresponding forcing
quantities. When the GUI is on, if a "Delete" operation in a Nonlinear Convergence Criteria dialog box writes
this command to a log file (Jobname.LOG or Jobname.LGW), you will observe that Lab is blank, VALUE = -1,
and TOLER is an integer number. In this case, the GUI has assigned a value of TOLER that corresponds to the
location of a chosen convergence label in the dialog box's list. It is not intended that you type in such a location
value for TOLER in an ANSYS session. However, a file that contains a GUI-generated CNVTOL command of this
form can be used for batch input or with the /INPUT command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Convergence norms specified with CNVTOL may be graphically tracked while the solution is in process using
the ANSYS program's Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) feature. Use the /GST command to turn GST on or off.
By default, GST is ON for interactive sessions and OFF for batch runs.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Convergence Crit
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Harmonic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Static
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Transient
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Convergence Crit
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Harmonic
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Static
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Transient
3182
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/COLOR
/COLOR, Lab, Clab, N1, N2, NINC
Specifies the color mapping for various items.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Apply color to the items specified by the following labels:
AXES
Determines the color (specified in next argument, Clab) that the axes of a graph will be plotted in.
AXNUM
Determines the color (specified in next argument, Clab) that the numbering on the axes of a graph will
be plotted in.
NUM
Discretely numbered items (such as element types, element materials, etc., as shown on the /PNUM
command). Also specify number (1 to 11) in the N1 field. For example, /COLOR,NUM,RED,3 will assign
the color red to all items having the discrete number 3 (material displays would show elements having
material 3 as red).
OUTL
Outline of elements, areas, and volumes. Ex: /COLOR,OUTL,BLUE.
ELEM
Elements. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for element numbers.
LINE
Solid model lines. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for line numbers.
AREA
Solid model areas. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for area numbers.
VOLU
Solid model volumes. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for volume numbers.
ISURF
Isosurfaces (surfaces of constant stress, etc.). This option is particularly useful when capturing frames for
animating a single isosurface value.
WBAK
Window background. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for window numbers. The options that you select using
Lab = PBAK will supersede those applied using Lab = WBAK.
b.c.label --
Boundary condition label. Enter U, ROT, TEMP, PRES, V, ENKE, ENDS, SP01 through SP06 or their userdefined names, VOLT, MAG, A, EMF, CURR, F, M, HEAT, FLOW, VF, AMPS, FLUX, CSG, CURT, VLTG, MAST,
CP, CE, NFOR, NMOM, RFOR, RMOM, PATH. See the /PBC command for boundary condition label definitions.
GRBAK
Graph background.
GRID
Graph grid lines.
AXLAB
Graph X and Y axis labels.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3183
/COLOR
CURVE
Graph curves (identify curve numbers (1-6) in N1, N2, NINC fields).
CM
Component group. Use N1 field for component name, ignore N2 and NINC.
CNTR
ANSYS contour stress colors. The maximum number of contours available is 128. The number of colors
that can be specified interactively (GUI) is 9. (/CONTOUR, , 9). Any other setting will yield inconsistent
results.
SMAX
Specifies that all stress values above the maximum value entered in /CONTOUR will be displayed in the
color designated in the Clab field. Defaults to dark grey.
SMIN
Specifies that all stress values below the minimum value entered in /CONTOUR will be displayed in the
color designated in the Clab field. Defaults to dark grey.
PBAK
Activates background shading options (see command syntax at end of argument descriptions below).
The options that you select using Lab = PBAK will supersede those applied using Lab = WBAK.
Clab
Valid color labels are:
BLAC (0)
Black
MRED (1)
Magenta-Red
MAGE (2)
Magenta
BMAG (3)
Blue-Magenta
BLUE (4)
Blue
CBLU (5)
Cyan-Blue
CYAN (6)
Cyan
GCYA ((7)
Green-Cyan
GREE (8)
Green
YGRE (9)
Yellow-Green
YELL (10)
Yellow
ORAN (11)
Orange
3184
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/COLOR
RED (12)
Red
DGRA (13)
Dark Gray
LGRA (14)
Light Gray
WHIT (15)
White
N1, N2, NINC
Apply color to Lab items numbered N1 to N2 (defaults to N1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If N1 is blank,
apply color to entire selected range. If Lab is CM, use component name for N1 and ignore N2 and NINC. If N1
= P, graphical picking of elements, lines, areas and volumes is enabled; your can assign colors to the entities
via the picker. When picking is enabled, the Lab and Clab fields are ignored.
If Lab = PBAK, the command format is /COLOR, PBAK,Key_On_Off, KEY_TYPE, KEY_INDEX.
The options that you select using Lab = PBAK will supersede those applied using Lab = WBAK.
Key_On_Off
Turns the background colors on and off. Acceptable values are ON (1) and OFF (0).
KEY_TYPE
Determines the type of background. Acceptable values are 0 (smooth shading left to right), 1 (smooth
shading top to bottom), 2 (smooth shading right to left), 3 (smooth shading bottom to top), and -1 (textured
image background)
KEY_INDEX
An integer value that corresponds to a background color or texture. If Key_Type is -1, the background will
correspond to values specified in the /TXTRE command. If Key_Type is any other acceptable value, the
background will correspond to the color values listed above under Clab.
Command Default
Use the default color mapping.
Notes
Issue /COLOR,STAT to display the current color mapping. Issue /COLOR,DEFA to reset the default color mapping.
Note Color labels may also be reassigned any "color" with the /CMAP command.
This command is valid anywhere.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Colors>BC Colors
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Colors>Component Colors
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Colors>Entity Colors
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Colors>Graph Colors
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Colors>Numbered Item Colors
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Colors>Window Colors
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3185
/COM
/COM, Comment
Places a comment in the output.
SESSION: List Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Comment
Comment string, up to 75 characters.
Notes
The output from this command consists of the comment string. This command is similar to C*** except that the
comment produced by C*** is more easily identified in the output. Parameter substitution within the comment
occurs for every valid expression delimited by percent (%) signs. Enclosing such an expression in single quotes
prevents parameter substitution.
Another way to include a comment is to precede it with a ! character (on the same line). The ! may be placed
anywhere on the line, and any input following it is ignored as a comment. No output is produced by such a
comment, but the comment line is included on the log file. This is a convenient way to annotate the log file.
This command is valid anywhere.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
COMPRESS
Deletes all specified sets.
AUX3: Results Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Issue this command to delete all sets specified with the DELETE command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CON4, XCENTER, YCENTER, RAD1, RAD2, DEPTH
Creates a conical volume anywhere on the working plane.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
XCENTER, YCENTER
Working plane X and Y coordinates of the center axis of the cone.
3186
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CONE
RAD1, RAD2
Radii of the faces of the cone. RAD1 defines the bottom face and will be located on the working plane. RAD2
defines the top face and is parallel to the working plane. A value of zero or blank for either RAD1 or RAD2
defines a degenerate face at the center axis (i.e., the vertex of the cone). The same value for both RAD1 and
RAD2 defines a cylinder instead of a cone.
DEPTH
The perpendicular distance (either positive or negative based on the working plane Z direction) from the
working plane representing the depth of the cone. DEPTH cannot be zero (see Notes below).
Notes
Defines a solid conical volume with either the vertex or a face anywhere on the working plane. The cone must
have a spatial volume greater than zero. (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a degenerate volume as a means of creating an area.) The face or faces will be circular (each area defined with four lines),
and they will be connected with two areas (each spanning 180). See the CONE command for an alternate way
to create cones.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Primitives>Cone
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Cone>By Picking
CONE, RBOT, RTOP, Z1, Z2, THETA1, THETA2
Creates a conical volume centered about the working plane origin.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
RBOT, RTOP
Radii of the bottom and top faces of the cone. A value of zero or blank for either RBOT or RTOP defines a degenerate face at the center axis (i.e., the vertex of the cone). The same value for both RBOT and RTOP defines
a cylinder instead of a cone.
Z1, Z2
Working plane Z coordinates of the cone. The smaller value is always associated with the bottom face.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (either order) of the cone. Used for creating a conical sector. The sector begins
at the algebraically smaller angle, extends in a positive angular direction, and ends at the larger angle. The
starting angle defaults to 0 and the ending angle defaults to 360. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing
Guide for an illustration.
Notes
Defines a solid conical volume centered about the working plane origin. The non-degenerate face (top or bottom)
is parallel to the working plane but not necessarily coplanar with (i.e., "on") the working plane. The cone must
have a spatial volume greater than zero. (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a degenerate volume as a means of creating an area.) For a cone of 360, top and bottom faces will be circular (each area
defined with four lines), and they will be connected with two areas (each spanning 180). See the CON4 command
for an alternate way to create cones.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3187
/CONFIG
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Cone>By Dimensions
/CONFIG, Lab, VALUE
Assigns values to ANSYS configuration parameters.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP <>
Lab
Configuration parameter to be changed:
NRES
VALUE is maximum number of results sets (substeps) allowed on the result file. Defaults to 1000. Minimum
is 10.
NORSTGM
Option to write or not write geometry data to the results file. VALUE is either 0 (write geometry data) or
1 (do not write geometry data). Useful when complex analyses will create abnormally large files. Default
is 0.
NBUF
VALUE is the number of buffers (1 to 32) per file in the solver. Defaults to 4.
NPROC
VALUE is the number of processors (system dependent) to use. Defaults to 1. If VALUE exceeds the
number of available processors, ANSYS uses all available processors. ANSYS recommends setting VALUE
no higher than the number of available processors minus one; for example, on a four-processor system,
set VALUE to 3.
LOCFL
File open and close actions. For VALUE use: 0 for global (default); 1 for local. Applicable to File.EROT,
File.ESAV, File.EMAT, and File.TRI. Typically used for large problems where locally closed files may be
deleted earlier in the run with the /FDELE command.
SZBIO
VALUE is the record size (1024 to 4194304) of binary files (in integer words). Defaults to 16384 (system
dependent).
ORDER
Automatic reordering scheme. For VALUE use: 0 for WSORT,ALL; 1 for WAVES; 2 for both WSORT,ALL
and WAVES (default).
FSPLIT
Defines split points for binary files. VALUE is the file split point in megawords and defaults to the maximum
file size for the system.
MXND
Maximum number of nodes. If not specified, defaults to 100 at first encounter. Dynamically expanded
by doubling, even at first encounter, when maximum is exceeded.
MXEL
Maximum number of elements. Default and expansion as for MXND.
3188
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CONFIG
MXKP
Maximum number of keypoints. Default and expansion as for MXND.
MXLS
Maximum number of lines. Default and expansion as for MXND.
MXAR
Maximum number of areas. Default and expansion as for MXND.
MXVL
Maximum number of volumes. Default and expansion as for MXND.
MXRL
Maximum number of sets of real constants (element attributes). Default and expansion as for MXND.
MXCP
Maximum number of sets of coupled degrees of freedom. Default and expansion as for MXND.
MXCE
Maximum number of constraint equations. Default and expansion as for MXND.
NOELDB
Option to write or not write results into the database after a solution. When VALUE = 0 (default), write
results into the database. When VALUE = 1, do not write results into the database.
DYNA_DBL
Option to invoke the double precision version of the explicit dynamics solver LS-DYNA. When VALUE =
0 (default), the single precision version is used. When VALUE = 1, the double precision version is used.
STAT
Displays current values set by the /CONFIG command.
VALUE
Value (an integer number) assigned to the configuration parameter.
Notes
All configuration parameters have initial defaults, which in most cases do not need to be changed. Where a
specially configured version of the ANSYS program is desired, the parameters may be changed with this command.
Issue /CONFIG,STAT to display current values. Changes must be defined before the parameter is required. These
changes (and others) may also be incorporated into the config90.ans file which is read upon execution of the
program (see The Configuration File in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). If the same configuration parameter appears
in both the configuration file and this command, this command overrides.
The /CONFIG command is not valid for the Multiphysics 1, 2, or 3 products.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Configuration
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3189
CONJUG
CONJUG, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA
Forms the complex conjugate of a variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to variable (default to 1.0).
Notes
Used only with harmonic analyses (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Complex Conjugat
/CONTOUR, WN, NCONT, VMIN, VINC, VMAX
Specifies the uniform contour values on stress displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
NCONT
Number of contour values. NCONT defaults to 9 for X11 or WIN32 and to 128 for X11c or WIN32C. The default
graphics window display for 3-D devices is a smooth continuous shading effect that spans the maximum of
128 contours available. The legend, however, will display only nine color boxes, which span the full range
of colors displayed in the graphics window.
VMIN
Minimum contour value. If VMIN = AUTO, automatically calculate contour values based upon NCONT uniformly
spaced values over the min-max extreme range. Or, if VMIN = USER, set contour values to those of the last
display (useful when last display automatically calculated contours).
3190
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/COPY
VINC
Value increment (positive) between contour values. Defaults to (VMAX-VMIN)/NCONT.
VMAX
Maximum contour value. Ignored if both VMIN and VINC are specified.
Command Default
Nine contour values uniformly spaced between the extreme values, or no contours if the ratio of range to minimum value (or range to maximum if minimum = 0) is less than 0.001.
Notes
See the /CVAL command for alternate specifications. Values represent contour lines in vector mode, and the algebraic maximum of contour bands in raster mode.
Note No matter how many contours (NCONT) are specified by /CONTOUR, the actual number of contours
that appear on your display depends also on the device name, whether the display is directed to the
screen or to a file, the display mode (vector or raster), and the number of color planes. (All these items
are controlled by /SHOW settings.) In any case, regardless of whether they are smoothed or banded,
only 128 contours can be displayed. See Creating Geometric Results Displays in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide for more information on changing the number of contours.
If the current ANSYS graphics are not displayed as Multi-Plots, then the following is true: If the current device is
a 3-D device [/SHOW,3D], the model contours in all active windows will be the same, even if separate /CONTOUR
commands are issued for each active window. For efficiency, ANSYS 3-D graphics logic maintains a single data
structure (segment), which contains precisely one set of contours. The program displays the same segment in
all windows. The view settings of each window constitute the only differences in the contour plots in the active
windows.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Contours>Uniform Contours
/COPY, Fname1, Ext1, --, Fname2, Ext2, -Copies a file.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname1
File name to be copied and its directory path (248 characters maximum for both file name and directory). If
you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters
for the file name.
The file name defaults to the current Jobname.
Ext1
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3191
COUPLE
--
Unused field.
Fname2
File name to be created and its directory path (248 characters maximum for both file name and directory).
If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters
for the file name.
Fname2 defaults to Fname1.
Ext2
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
Ext2 defaults to Ext1.
--
Unused field.
Notes
The original file is untouched. Ex: /COPY,A,,,B copies file A to B in the same directory. /COPY,A,DAT,,,INP copies
the file A.DAT to A.INP. See the ANSYS Operations Guide for details. ANSYS binary and ASCII files can be copied.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>File Operations>Copy
COUPLE
Specifies "Node coupling" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Coupled Sets
3192
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CP
COVAL, TBLNO1, TBLNO2, SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7
Defines PSD cospectral values.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO1
First input PSD table number associated with this spectrum.
TBLNO2
Second input PSD table number associated with this spectrum.
SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7
PSD cospectral values corresponding to the frequency points [PSDFRQ].
Notes
Defines PSD cospectral values to be associated with the previously defined frequency points. Two table references
are required since values are off-diagonal terms. Unlike autospectra [PSDVAL], the cospectra can be positive or
negative. The cospectral curve segment where there is a sign change is interpolated linearly (the rest of the curve
segments use log-log interpolation). For better accuracy, choose as small a curve segment as possible wherever
a sign change occurs.
Repeat COVAL command using the same table numbers for additional points (50 maximum per curve). This
command is valid for SPOPT,PSD only.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Cospectral
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Cospectral
CP, NSET, Lab, NODE1, NODE2, NODE3, NODE4, NODE5, NODE6, NODE7, NODE8, NODE9, NODE10, NODE11, NODE12,
NODE13, NODE14, NODE15, NODE16, NODE17
Defines (or modifies) a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET
Set reference number:
n
Arbitrary set number.
HIGH
The highest defined coupled set number will be used (default, unless Lab = ALL). This option is useful
when adding nodes to an existing set.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3193
CP
NEXT
The highest defined coupled set number plus one will be used (default if Lab = ALL). This option automatically numbers coupled sets so that existing sets are not modified.
Lab
Degree of freedom label for coupled nodes (in the nodal coordinate system). Defaults to label previously
defined with NSET if set NSET already exists. A different label redefines the previous label associated with
NSET. Valid labels are: Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements); ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations) (in
radians). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). Fluid labels: PRES (pressure); VX, VY,
or VZ (velocities). Electric labels: VOLT (voltage); EMF (electromotive force drop); CURR (current). Magnetic
labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY, or AZ (vector magnetic potentials); CURR (current). Explicit
analysis labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements). If Lab = ALL, sets will be generated for each active degree of
freedom (i.e., one set for the UX degree of freedom, another set for UY etc.), and NSET will be automatically
incremented to prevent overwriting existing sets. The ALL option cannot be used to modify existing sets-NSET must be a new set number n or NEXT. The degree of freedom set is determined from all element types
defined and the DOF command, if used. ALL is the only label applicable to FLOTRAN.
NODE1, NODE2, NODE3, NODE4, NODE5, NODE6, NODE7, NODE8, NODE9, NODE10, NODE11, NODE12, NODE13, NODE14,
NODE15, NODE16, NODE17
List of nodes to be included in set. Duplicate nodes are ignored. If a node number is input as negative, the
node is deleted from the coupled set. The first node in the list is the primary (retained) node. If NODE1 = ALL,
NODE2 through NODE17 are ignored and all selected nodes [NSEL] are included in the set. If NODE1 = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NODE1.
Notes
Do not include the same degree of freedom in more than one coupled set. Repeat CP command for additional
nodes.
Coupling degrees of freedom into a set causes the results calculated for one member of the set to be the same
for all members of the set. Coupling can be used to model various joint and hinge effects. A more general form
of coupling can be done with constraint equations [CE]. For structural analyses, a list of nodes is defined along
with the nodal directions in which these nodes are to be coupled. As a result of this coupling, these nodes are
forced to take the same displacement in the specified nodal coordinate direction. The amount of the displacement
is unknown until the analysis is completed. A set of coupled nodes which are not coincident, or which are not
along the line of the coupled displacement direction, may produce an applied moment which will not appear
in the reaction forces. The actual degrees of freedom available for a particular node depends upon the degrees
of freedom associated with element types [ET] at that node. For example, degrees of freedom available with
BEAM3 elements are UX, UY, and ROTZ only. For scalar field analysis, this command is used to couple nodal
temperatures, pressures, voltages, etc.
For an explicit dynamic analysis, the only valid DOF labels for coupling are UX, UY, and UZ. Since the rotational
DOF (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) are not allowed, The CP family of commands should not be used in an explicit analysis
to model rigid body behavior that involves rotations. If CP is used in this manner, it could lead to nonphysical
responses.
A set of coupled nodes which are not coincident, or which are not along the line of the coupled displacement
direction, produce an artificial moment constraint. If the structure rotates, a moment may be produced in the
coupled set in the form of a force couple. This moment is in addition to the real reaction forces and may make
it appear that moment equilibrium is not satisfied by just the applied forces and the reaction forces. Note, however,
that in an explicit dynamic analysis, this artificial moment will not be produced. Rather, just the applied forces
3194
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CPCYC
and the reaction forces will satisfy the moment equilibrium in the model. Thus, in an explicit analysis, the magnitude of nodal displacements for this set of nodes will depend on the distance from each node to the center of
the coupled set, and the direction of displacement will depend on the resulting moment. This may lead to a
nonphysical response in some cases.
Additional sets of coupled nodes may be generated from a specified set. Degrees of freedom are coupled within
a set but are not coupled between sets. No degree of freedom should appear in more than one coupled set.
Such an appearance would indicate that at least two sets were in fact part of a single larger set. The first degree
of freedom of the coupled set is the "prime" degree of freedom. All other degrees of freedom in the coupled sets
are eliminated from the solution matrices by their relationship to the prime degree of freedom. Forces applied
to coupled nodes (in the coupled degree of freedom direction) will be summed and applied to the prime degree
of freedom. Output forces are also summed at the prime degree of freedom. Degrees of freedom with specified
constraints [D] should not be included in a coupled set (unless the degree of freedom is prime).
If master degrees of freedom are defined for coupled nodes, only the prime degree of freedom should be so
defined. The use of coupled nodes reduces the set of coupled degrees of freedom to only one degree of freedom.
The wavefront is correspondingly decreased; however, the overall stiffness (or conductivity) matrix formulation
time is increased.
In FLOTRAN, you can apply periodic boundary conditions using the CP command along with the PERI macro.
Attempts to use the CP command outside the context of the PERI macro may lead to unexpected results.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Couple DOFs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Cupl DOFs w/Mstr
CPCYC, Lab, TOLER, KCN, DX, DY, DZ, KNONROT
Couples the two side faces of a cyclically symmetric model for loadings that are the same on every segment.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Degree of freedom label for coupled nodes (in the nodal coordinate system). If ALL, use all appropriate labels.
Valid labels are: Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements); ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations, in radians).
TOLER
Tolerance for coincidence (based on maximum coordinate difference in each global Cartesian direction for
node locations and on angle differences for node orientations). Defaults to 0.0001. Only nodes within the
tolerance are considered to be coincident for coupling.
KCN
In coordinate system KCN, node 1 of CP + dx dy dz = node 2 of CP.
DX, DY, DZ
Node location increments in the active coordinate system (DR, D, DZ for cylindrical, DR, D , D for spherical
or toroidal).
KNONROT
When KNONROT = 0, the nodes on coupled sets are rotated into coordinate system KCN (see NROTAT command
description). When KNONROT = 1, the nodes are not rotated, and you should make sure that coupled nodal
DOF directions are correct.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3195
CPDELE
Notes
Cyclic coupling requires identical node and element patterns on the low and high sector boundaries. The MSHCOPY
operation allows convenient generation of identical node and element patterns. See Using CPCYC and MSHCOPY
Commands in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.
Although developed primarily for use with cyclically symmetric models, your use of the CPCYC command is not
limited to cyclic symmetry analyses.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Offset Nodes
CPDELE, NSET1, NSET2, NINC, Nsel
Deletes coupled degree of freedom sets.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Delete coupled sets from NSET1 to NSET2 (defaults to NSET1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NSET1 = ALL,
NSET2 and NINC are ignored and all coupled sets are deleted.
Nsel
Additional node selection control:
ANY
Delete coupled set if any of the selected nodes are in the set (default).
ALL
Delete coupled set only if all of the selected nodes are in the set.
Notes
See the CP command for a method to delete individual nodes from a set.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Del Coupled Sets
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
CPINTF, Lab, TOLER
Defines coupled degrees of freedom at an interface.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Degree of freedom label for coupled nodes (in the nodal coordinate system). If ALL, use all appropriate labels.
Valid labels are: Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements); ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations, in radians).
3196
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CPLANE
Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). Fluid labels: PRES (pressure); VX, VY, or VZ
(velocities). Electric labels: VOLT (voltage); EMF (electromotive force drop); CURR (current). Magnetic labels:
MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY, or AZ (vector magnetic potentials); CURR (current).
TOLER
Tolerance for coincidence (based on maximum coordinate difference in each global Cartesian direction for
node locations and on angle differences for node orientations). Defaults to 0.0001. Only nodes within the
tolerance are considered to be coincident for coupling.
Notes
Defines coupled degrees of freedom between coincident nodes (within a tolerance). May be used, for example,
to "button" together elements interfacing at a seam, where the seam consists of a series of node pairs. One
coupled set is generated for each selected degree of freedom for each pair of coincident nodes. For more than
two coincident nodes in a cluster, a coupled set is generated from the lowest numbered node to each of the
other nodes in the cluster. Coupled sets are generated only within (and not between) clusters. If fewer than all
nodes are to be checked for coincidence, use the NSEL command to select nodes. Coupled set reference numbers
are incremented by one from the highest previous set number. Use CPLIST to display the generated sets. Only
nodes having the same nodal coordinate system orientations ("coincident" within a tolerance) are included. Use
the CEINTF command to connect nodes by constraint equations instead of by coupling. Use the EINTF command
to connect nodes by line elements instead of by coupling.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Coincident Nodes
/CPLANE, KEY
Specifies the cutting plane for section and capped displays.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Specifies the cutting plane:
0
Cutting plane is normal to the viewing vector [/VIEW] and passes through the focus point [/FOCUS]
(default).
1
The working plane [WPLANE] is the cutting plane.
Command Default
The cutting plane is normal to the viewing vector at the focus point.
Notes
Defines the cutting plane to be used for section and capped displays [/TYPE,,(1, 5, or 7)].
This command is valid in any processor.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3197
CPLGEN
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Hidden-Line Options
CPLGEN, NSETF, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5
Generates sets of coupled nodes from an existing set.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSETF
Generate sets from existing set NSETF.
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5
Generate sets with these labels (see CP command for valid labels). Sets are numbered as the highest existing
set number + 1.
Notes
Generates additional sets of coupled nodes (with different labels) from an existing set [CP, CPNGEN]. The same
node numbers are included in the generated sets. If all labels of nodes are to be coupled and the nodes are coincident, the NUMMRG command should be used to automatically redefine the node number (for efficiency).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Gen w/Same Nodes
CPLIST, NSET1, NSET2, NINC, Nsel
Lists the coupled degree of freedom sets.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET1, NSET2, NINC
List coupled sets from NSET1 to NSET2 (defaults to NSET1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NSET1 = ALL
(default), NSET2 and NINC are ignored and all coupled sets are listed.
Nsel
Node selection control:
ANY
List coupled set if any of the selected nodes are in the set (default).
ALL
List coupled set only if all of the selected nodes are in the set.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
3198
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CPMERGE
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Other>Coupled Sets>All CP nodes selected
Utility Menu>List>Other>Coupled Sets>Any CP node selected
CPMERGE, Lab
Merges different couple sets with duplicate degrees of freedom into one couple set.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Degree of freedom label for coupled nodes (in the nodal coordinate system). Valid labels are: Structural labels:
UX, UY, or UZ (displacements); ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations) (in radians). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2,
TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). Fluid labels: PRES (pressure); VX, VY, or VZ (velocities). Electric labels: VOLT
(voltage); EMF (electromotive force drop); CURR (current). Magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential);
AX, AY, or AZ (vector magnetic potentials); CURR (current). Explicit analysis labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements). The degree of freedom set is determined from all element types defined and the DOF command, if
used.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Capacitor
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Curr Cntl CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Curr Cntl VS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Diode
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Curr Src>Constant
Amplitude
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Curr Src>Exponential
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Curr Src>Piecewise
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Curr Src>Pulse
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Curr Src>Sinusoidal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Vltg Src>Constant Amplitude
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Vltg Src>Exponential
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Vltg Src>Piecewise
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Vltg Src>Pulse
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Indp Vltg Src>Sinusoidal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Inductor
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Mass Cond 2D
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Mass Cond 3D
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Mutual Ind
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Resistor
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Strnd Coil
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Vltg Cntl CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Vltg Cntl VS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Wire
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Electric>Zener Diode
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Damper>Linear Rotary
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3199
CPNGEN
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Damper>Linear Trans
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Damper>Nonlin Rotary
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Damper>Nonlin Trans
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Damper>Slide Film
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Mass
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Linear Rotary
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Linear Trans
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Nonlin Rotary
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Nonlin Trans
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Capacitor
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Curr Src>Constant
Amplitude
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Curr Src>Exponential
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Curr Src>Piecewise
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Curr Src>Pulse
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Curr Src>Sinusoidal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Vltg Src>Constant
Amplitude
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Vltg Src>Exponential
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Vltg Src>Piecewise
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Vltg Src>Pulse
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Indp Vltg Src>Sinusoidal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Inductor
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Resistor
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Piezoelectric>Wire
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Transducer>ElecMech
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
CPNGEN, NSET, Lab, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Defines, modifies, or adds to a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET
Set reference number [CP].
Lab
Degree of freedom label [CP].
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Include in coupled set nodes NODE1 to NODE2 in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1 = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If -NODE1, delete range of
nodes from set instead of including. A component name may also be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC
are ignored).
Notes
Defines, modifies, or adds to a set of coupled degrees of freedom. May be used in combination with (or in place
of) the CP command. Repeat CPNGEN command for additional nodes.
3200
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CQC
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
CPSGEN, ITIME, INC, NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Generates sets of coupled nodes from existing sets.
PREP7: Coupled DOF
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITIME, INC
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all nodes in the existing sets by INC each time
after the first. ITIME must be > 1 for generation to occur.
NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Generate sets from sets beginning with NSET1 to NSET2 (defaults to NSET1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
If NSET1 is negative, NSET2 and NINC are ignored and the last |NSET1| sets (in sequence from the maximum
set number) are used as the sets to be repeated.
Notes
Generates additional sets of coupled nodes (with the same labels) from existing sets. Node numbers between
sets may be uniformly incremented.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Gen w/Same DOF
CQC, SIGNIF, Label
Specifies the complete quadratic mode combination method.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SIGNIF
Combine only those modes whose significance level exceeds the SIGNIF threshold. For single point, multipoint, or DDAM response (SPOPT,SPRS, MPRS or DDAM), the significance level of a mode is defined as the
mode coefficient of the mode, divided by the maximum mode coefficient of all modes. Any mode whose
significance level is less than SIGNIF is considered insignificant and is not contributed to the mode combinations. The higher the SIGNIF threshold, the fewer the number of modes combined. SIGNIF defaults to
0.001. If SIGNIF is specified as 0.0, it is taken as 0.0. (This mode combination method is not valid for SPOPT,PSD.)
Label
Label identifying the combined mode solution output.
DISP
Displacement solution (default). Displacements, stresses, forces, etc., are available.
VELO
Velocity solution. Velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc., are available.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3201
CRPLIM
ACEL
Acceleration solution. Accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc., are available.
Notes
Damping is required for this mode combination method. The CQC command is also valid for PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
CRPLIM, CRCR, Option
Specifies the creep criterion for automatic time stepping.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
CRCR
Value of creep criteria for the creep limit ratio control.
Option
Type of creep analysis:
1 or ON
Implicit creep analysis.
0 or OFF
Explicit creep analysis.
Notes
The creep ratio control can be used at the same time for implicit creep and explicit creep analyses. For implicit
creep (Option = 1), the default value of CRCR is zero (i.e., no creep limit control), and you are allowed to specify
any value. For explicit creep (Option = 0), the default value of CRCR is 0.1. The maximum value allowed is 0.25.
This command is also valid in PREP7. The CUTCONTROL command can be used for the same purpose and is the
preferred command, when SOLCONTROL is ON.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Creep Criterion
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Creep Criterion
3202
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CS
CS, KCN, KCS, NORIG, NXAX, NXYPL, PAR1, PAR2
Defines a local coordinate system by three node locations.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this coordinate system. Must be greater than 10. A coordinate system
previously defined with this number will be redefined.
KCS
Coordinate system type:
0 or CART
Cartesian
1 or CYLIN
Cylindrical (circular or elliptical)
2 or SPHE
Spherical (or spheroidal)
3 or TORO
Toroidal
NORIG
Node defining the origin of this coordinate system. If NORIG = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NXAX
Node defining the positive x-axis orientation of this coordinate system.
NXYPL
Node defining the x-y plane (with NORIG and NXAX) in the first or second quadrant of this coordinate system.
PAR1
Used for elliptical, spheroidal, or toroidal systems. If KCS = 1 or 2, PAR1 is the ratio of the ellipse Y-axis radius
to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0 (circle)). If KCS = 3, PAR1 is the major radius of the torus.
PAR2
Used for spheroidal systems. If KCS = 2, PAR2 = ratio of ellipse Z-axis radius to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0
(circle)).
Notes
Defines and activates a local right-handed coordinate system by specifying three existing nodes: to locate the
origin, to locate the positive x-axis, and to define the positive x-y plane. This local system becomes the active
coordinate system. See the CLOCAL, CSKP, CSWPLA, and LOCAL commands for alternate definitions. Local
coordinate systems may be displayed with the /PSYMB command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Local Coordinate Systems>Create Local CS>By 3 Nodes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3203
CSCIR
CSCIR, KCN, KTHET, KPHI
Locates the singularity for non-Cartesian local coordinate systems.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Number of the local coordinate system in which singularity location is to be changed. Must be greater than
10.
KTHET
Theta singularity location for cylindrical, spherical, and toroidal systems:
0
Singularity at 180.
1
Singularity at 0 (360).
KPHI
Phi singularity location for toroidal systems:
0
Singularity in phi direction at 180.
1
Singularity in phi direction at 0 (360).
Command Default
Singularities at 180.
Notes
Continuous closed surfaces (circles, cylinders, spheres, etc.) have a singularity (discontinuity) at = 180. For
local cylindrical, spherical, and toroidal coordinate systems, this singularity location may be changed to 0 (360
).
An additional, similar singularity occurs in the toroidal coordinate system at = 180 and can be moved with
KPHI. Additional singularities occur in the spherical coordinate system at = 90, but cannot be moved.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Local Coordinate Systems>Move Singularity
3204
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CSKP
CSDELE, KCN1, KCN2, KCINC
Deletes local coordinate systems.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN1, KCN2, KCINC
Delete coordinate systems from KCN1 (must be greater than 10) to KCN2 (defaults to KCN1) in steps of KCINC
(defaults to 1). If KCN1 = ALL, KCN2 and KCINC are ignored and all coordinate systems are deleted.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>Sphere>At Node
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Local Coordinate Systems>Delete Local CS
CSKP, KCN, KCS, PORIG, PXAXS, PXYPL, PAR1, PAR2
Defines a local coordinate system by three keypoint locations.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this coordinate system. Must be greater than 10. A coordinate system
previously defined with this number will be redefined.
KCS
Coordinate system type:
0 or CART
Cartesian
1 or CYLIN
Cylindrical (circular or elliptical)
2 or SPHE
Spherical (or spheroidal)
3 or TORO
Toroidal
PORIG
Keypoint defining the origin of this coordinate system. If PORIG = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
PXAXS
Keypoint defining the positive x-axis orientation of this coordinate system.
PXYPL
Keypoint defining the x-y plane (with PORIG and PXAXS) in the first or second quadrant of this coordinate
system.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3205
CSLIST
PAR1
Used for elliptical, spheroidal, or toroidal systems. If KCS = 1 or 2, PAR1 is the ratio of the ellipse Y-axis radius
to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0 (circle)). If KCS = 3, PAR1 is the major radius of the torus.
PAR2
Used for spheroidal systems. If KCS = 2, PAR2 = ratio of ellipse Z-axis radius to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0
(circle)).
Notes
Defines and activates a local right-handed coordinate system by specifying three existing keypoints: to locate
the origin, to locate the positive x-axis, and to define the positive x-y plane. This local system becomes the active
coordinate system. See the CLOCAL, CS, CSWPLA, and LOCAL commands for alternate definitions. Local coordinate systems may be displayed with the /PSYMB command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Local Coordinate Systems>Create Local CS>By 3 Keypoints
CSLIST, KCN1, KCN2, KCINC
Lists coordinate systems.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN1, KCN2, KCINC
List coordinate systems from KCN1 to KCN2 (defaults to KCN1) in steps of KCINC (defaults to 1). If KCN1 = ALL
(default), KCN2 and KCINC are ignored and all coordinate systems are listed.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Other>Local Coord Sys
CSWPLA, KCN, KCS, PAR1, PAR2
Defines a local coordinate system at the origin of the working plane.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this coordinate system. Must be greater than 10. A coordinate system
previously defined with this number will be redefined.
3206
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CSYS
KCS
Coordinate system type:
0 or CART
Cartesian
1 or CYLIN
Cylindrical (circular or elliptical)
2 or SPHE
Spherical (or spheroidal)
3 or TORO
Toroidal
PAR1
Used for elliptical, spheroidal, or toroidal systems. If KCS = 1 or 2, PAR1 is the ratio of the ellipse Y-axis radius
to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0 (circle)). If KCS = 3, PAR1 is the major radius of the torus.
PAR2
Used for spheroidal systems. If KCS = 2, PAR2 = ratio of ellipse Z-axis radius to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0
(circle)).
Notes
Defines and activates a local right-handed coordinate system centered at the origin of the working plane. The
coordinate system's local x-y plane (for a Cartesian system) or R- plane (for a cylindrical or spherical system)
corresponds to the working plane. This local system becomes the active coordinate system. See the CS, LOCAL,
CLOCAL, and CSKP commands for alternate ways to define a local coordinate system. Local coordinate systems
may be displayed with the /PSYMB command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Local Coordinate Systems>Create Local CS>At WP Origin
CSYS, KCN
Activates a previously defined coordinate system.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Specifies the active coordinate system, as follows:
0 (default)
Cartesian
1
Cylindrical with Z as the axis of rotation
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3207
/CTYPE
2
Spherical
4 or WP
Working Plane
5
Cylindrical with Y as the axis of rotation
11 or greater
Any previously defined local coordinate system
Notes
The CSYS command activates a previously defined coordinate system for geometry input and generation. The
LOCAL, CLOCAL, CS, CSKP, and CSWPLA commands also activate coordinate systems as they are defined.
The active coordinate system for files created via the CDWRITE command is Cartesian (CSYS,0).
This command is valid in any processor.
CSYS,4 (or CSYS,WP) activates working plane tracking, which updates the coordinate system to follow working
plane changes. To deactivate working plane tracking, activate any other coordinate system (for example, CSYS,0
or CSYS,11).
CSYS,5 is a cylindrical coordinate system with Y as the axis. The X, Y and Z axes are radial, theta, and axial (respectively). However, CSYS,5 has a specific orientation: the local X is in the global +X direction, local Y is in the global
-Z direction, and local Z (the cylindrical axis) is in the global +Y direction. The R-Theta plane is then the global XZ plane, as it is for an axisymmetric model.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>Sphere>At Node
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Active CS to>Global Cartesian
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Active CS to>Global Cylindrical
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Active CS to>Global Spherical
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Active CS to>Specified Coord Sys
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Active CS to>Working Plane
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP to>Global Origin
/CTYPE, KEY, DOTD, DOTS, DSHP, TLEN
Specifies the type of contour display.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Type of display:
0
Standard contour display.
3208
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CTYPE
1
Isosurface display.
2
Particle gradient display.
3
Gradient triad display.
DOTD
Maximum dot density for particle gradient display (KEY = 2). Density is expressed as dots per screen width
(defaults to 30).
DOTS
Dot size for particle gradient display (KEY = 2). Size is expressed as a fraction of the screen width (defaults to
0.0 (single dot width)).
DSHP
Spherical dot shape precision for particle gradient display (KEY = 2). (3-D options are supported only on 3D devices):
0
Flat 2-D circular dot.
1
Flat-sided 3-D polyhedron.
n
3-D sphere with n (>1) polygon divisions per 90 of radius.
TLEN
Maximum length of triads for gradient triad display (KEY = 3). Value is expressed as a fraction of the screen
width (defaults to 0.067).
Command Default
Standard contour display.
Notes
Use /CTYPE,STAT to display the current settings. Only the standard contour display [/CTYPE,0) and the isosurface
contour display [/CTYPE,1] are supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Contours>Contour Style
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3209
CURR2D
CURR2D
Calculates current flow in a 2-D conductor.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
CURR2D invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates the total current flowing in a conducting body for a 2-D
planar or axisymmetric magnetic field analysis. The currents may be applied source currents or induced currents
(eddy currents). The elements of the conducting region must be selected before this command is issued. The
total current calculated by the macro is stored in the parameter TCURR. Also, the total current and total current
density are stored on a per-element basis in the element table [ETABLE] with the labels TCURR and JT, respectively.
Use the PLETAB and PRETAB commands to plot and list the element table items.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Element Based>Current
CUTCONTROL, Lab, VALUE, Option
Controls time-step cutback during a nonlinear solution.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Specifies the criteria for causing a cutback. Possible arguments are
PLSLIMIT
Maximum equivalent plastic strain allowed within a time-step (substep). If the calculated value exceeds
the VALUE, ANSYS performs a cutback (bisection). VALUE defaults to 0.15 (15%).
CRPLIMIT
Maximum equivalent creep ratio allowed within a time step (substep). If the calculated value exceeds
VALUE, ANSYS performs a cutback (bisection). The default depends on whether you are performing an
implicit or explicit creep analysis (see Option argument below). The creep ratio control can be used at
the same time for implicit creep and explicit creep analyses. For an implicit creep analysis, VALUE defaults
to zero (i.e., no creep limit control), and you are allowed to enter any value. For an explicit creep analysis,
VALUE defaults to 0.1 (10%) and the maximum value allowed is 0.25.
DSPLIMIT
Maximum incremental displacement within the solution field in a time step (substep). If the maximum
calculated value exceeds VALUE, ANSYS performs a cutback (bisection). VALUE defaults to 1.0 x 107.
NPOINT
Number of points in a cycle for a second order dynamic equation, used to control automatic time stepping.
If the number of solution points per cycle exceeds VALUE, ANSYS performs a cutback in time step size.
VALUE defaults to 13.
3210
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CVAL
NOITERPREDICT
If VALUE is 0 (default), an internal auto time step scheme will predict the number of iterations for nonlinear
convergence and perform a cutback earlier than the number of iterations specified by the NEQIT command. This is the recommended option. If VALUE is 1, the solution will iterate (if nonconvergent) to NEQIT
number of iterations before a cutback is invoked. It is sometimes useful for poorly-convergent problems,
but rarely needed in general.
Bisection is also controlled by contact status change, plasticity or creep strain limit, and other factors. If
any of these factors occur, bisection will still take place, regardless of the NOITERPREDICT setting.
VALUE
Numeric value for the specified cutback criterion. For Lab = CRPLIMIT, VALUE is the creep criteria for the
creep limit ratio control.
Option
Type of creep analysis. Option is valid for Lab = CRPLIMIT only.
1 or ON
Implicit creep analysis.
0 or OFF
Explicit creep analysis.
Notes
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
A cutback is a method for automatically reducing the step size when either the solution error is too large or the
solution encounters convergence difficulties during a nonlinear analysis. Should a convergence failure occur,
ANSYS will reduce the time step interval to a fraction of its previous size and automatically continue the solution
from the last successfully converged time step. If the reduced time step again fails to converge, ANSYS will again
reduce the time step size and proceed with the solution. This process continues until convergence is achieved
or the minimum specified time step value is reached.
The CRPLIM command is functionally equivalent to Lab = CRPLIMIT.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Cutback Control
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Cutback Control
/CVAL, WN, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, V7, V8
Specifies nonuniform contour values on stress displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3211
CVAR
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, V7, V8
Up to 8 contour values may be specified (in ascending order). The 0.0 value (if any) must not be the last value
specified. If no values are specified, all contour specifications are erased and contours are automatically calculated.
Command Default
Nine contour values uniformly spaced between the extreme values.
Notes
This command is similar to the /CONTOUR command. With /CVAL, however, you define the upper level of each
contour band instead of having the contours uniformly distributed over the range. The minimum value (including
a zero value for the first band) for a contour band cannot be specified. If you use both /CONTOUR and /CVAL,
the last command issued takes precedence.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Contours>Non-uniform Contours
CVAR, IR, IA, IB, ITYPE, DATUM, Name
Computes covariance between two quantities.
POST26: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previous variable, the previous variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA, IB
Reference numbers of the two variables to be operated on. If only one, leave IB blank.
ITYPE
Defines the type of response PSD to be calculated:
0,1
Displacement (default).
2
Velocity.
3
Acceleration.
DATUM
Defines the reference with respect to which covariance is to be calculated:
1
Absolute value.
3212
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CWD
2
Relative to base (default).
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on listings and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed upon output.
Notes
This command computes the covariance value for the variables referenced by the reference numbers IA and
IB. If DATUM = 2, the variable referenced by IR will contain the individual modal contributions (i.e., the dynamic
or relative values). If DATUM = 1, the variable referenced by IR will contain the modal contributions followed by
the contributions of pseudo-static and covariance between dynamic and pseudo-static responses. File.PSD
must be available for the calculations to occur.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Calc Covariance
/CWD, DIRPATH
Changes the current working directory.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
DIRPATH
The full path name of the new working directory.
Notes
After issuing the /CWD command, all new files opened with no default directory specified (via the FILE, /COPY,
or RESUME commands, for example) default to the new DIRPATH directory.
If issuing the command interactively and the specified directory does not exist, no change of directory occurs
and the command generates an error message. If the command executes via a batch run and the specified directory does not exist, the batch program terminates with an error.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Change Directory
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3213
/CYCEXPAND
/CYCEXPAND, WN, OPTION, Value1, Value2
Graphically expands displacements, stresses and strains of a cyclically symmetric model.
PREP7: Special Purpose
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
WN
The window number to which the expansion applies. Valid values are 1 through 5. The default value is 1. The
window number applies only to the AMOUNT argument.
OPTION
One of the following options:
ON
Activates cyclic expansion using the previous settings (if any). If no previous settings exist, this option
activates the default settings.
DEFAULT
Resets cyclic expansion to the default settings.
OFF
Deactivates cyclic expansion. This option is the default.
STATUS
Lists the current cyclic expansion settings.
AMOUNT
The number of repetitions or the total angle.
Value1
NREPEAT
Value2
The number of repetitions. The default is the total number of sectors in 360 degrees.
or
Value1
ANGLE
Value2
The total angle in degrees. The default is 360.
WHAT
A specified portion or subset of the model to expand:
Value1
The component name of the elements to expand. The default is all selected components.
EDGE
Sector edge display key.
1
Suppresses display of edges between sectors even if the cyclic count varies between active windows.
3214
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/CYCEXPAND
Caution: Plots with fewer than the maximum number of repetitions may have missing element faces at the sector boundaries.
0 or OFF
Averages stresses or strains across sector boundaries. This value is the default (although the default
reverts to 1 or ON if the cyclic count varies between active windows).
1 or ON
No averaging of stresses or strains occurs and sector boundaries are shown on the plot.
PHASEANG
The phase angle shift:
Value1
The phase angle shift in degrees. The valid range is 0 through 360. The default is 0. Typically, this
value is the phase angle obtained via the CYCPHASE command.
Command Default
The default /CYCEXPAND command (issuing the command with no arguments) deactivates cyclic expansion
(OPTION = OFF). The default window number (WN) is 1.
Notes
In preprocessing, the /CYCEXPAND command verifies a cyclically symmetric model by graphically expanding
it partially or through the full 360 degrees.
For the postprocessing plot nodal solution (PLNSOL) operation, the command graphically expands displacements,
stresses and strains of a cyclically symmetric model partially or though the full 360 degrees by combining the
real (original nodes and elements) and imaginary (duplicate nodes and elements) parts of the solution.
For the print nodal solution (PRNSOL) operation, the command expands the printed output of displacements
or stresses on a sector-by-sector basis.
Use of the /CYCEXPAND command does not change the database. The command does not modify the geometry,
nodal displacements or element stresses.
The command affects element and result plots only. It has no effect on operations other than plot element
solution (PLESOL), plot nodal solution (PLNSOL) and print nodal solution (PRNSOL). Operations other than
PLESOL, PLNSOL, or PRNSOL work on the unprocessed real and imaginary parts of a cyclic symmetry solution
If you issue a /CYCEXPAND,,OFF command, you cannot then expand the model by simply issuing another
/CYCEXPAND command (for example, to specify an NREPEAT value for the number of repetitions). In such a
case, you must specify /CYCEXPAND,,ON, which activates expansion using the previous settings (if any) or the
default settings.
The command requires PowerGraphics. Turn PowerGraphics on (/GRAPHICS,POWER) if not already active. (By
default, PowerGraphics is active during an interactive session, but not during a batch run.) Any setting which
bypasses PowerGraphics (for example, RSYS,SOLU) also bypasses cyclic expansion; in such cases, the /CYCEXPAND
command displays unprocessed real and imaginary results.
The /CYCEXPAND command does not work with PGR files.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3215
CYCLIC
The /CYCEXPAND command is incompatible with the /ESHAPE,1 or /ESHAPE,FAC command.
The /PBC (plot boundary conditions) command is deactivated when cyclic expansion is active (/CYCEXPAND,,ON).
To view BCs on the basic sector, deactivate cyclic expansion (/CYCEXPAND,,OFF) and issue this command: /PBC,ALL,,1
In cases involving non-cyclically symmetric loading, all boundary conditions (BCs) will plot when /CYCEXPAND
is active. When examining the plot, however, it is not possible to distinguish between BCs that exist on every
sector and those that exist (via a table referencing SECTOR) only on some sectors or which vary in value. (Only
the basic sector is plotted.)
For magnetic cyclic symmetry analyses, the /CYCEXPAND command produces contour plots but not vector
plots.
To learn more about analyzing a cyclically symmetric structure, see Cyclic Symmetry Analysis in the ANSYS Advanced
Analysis Techniques Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyclic Analysis>Cyc Expansion
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Cyclic Sector>Cyc Expansion
CYCLIC, NSECTOR, ANGLE, KCN, Name, USRCOMP
Specifies a cyclic symmetry analysis.
PREP7: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NSECTOR
The number of sectors in the full 360 degrees, or one of the following options:
STATUS
Indicates the current cyclic status.
OFF
Resets model to normal (non-cyclic) status and removes the duplicate sector if it exists. This option also
deletes automatically detected edge components (generated when USRCOMP = 0).
UNDOUBLE
Removes the duplicate sector if it exists. The duplicate sector is created during the solution (SOLVE)
stage of a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
Note The duplicate sector is necessary for displaying cyclic symmetry analysis results during
postprocessing (/POST1).
If you specify a value of STATUS, OFF or UNDOUBLE, the command ignores all remaining arguments.
ANGLE
The sector angle in degrees.
3216
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CYCLIC
KCN
An arbitrary reference number assigned to the cyclic coordinate system. The default value of 0 specifies
automatic detection.
Name
The root name of sector low- and high-edge components (line, area, or node components). The default root
name (when USRCOMP = 0) is CYCLIC. A root name that you specify can contain up to 11 characters.
The naming convention for each low- and high-edge component pair is either of the following:
Name_mxxl, Name_mxxh (potentially matched node patterns)
Name_uxxl, Name_uxxh (potentially unmatched node patterns)
The Name value is the default (CYCLIC) or specified root name and xx is the component pair ID number
(sequential, starting at 01).
USRCOMP
The number of pairs of user-defined low- and high-edge components on the cyclic sector (if any). The default
value of 0 specifies automatic detection of sector edges; however, the automatic setting is not valid in all
cases. (For more information, see the Notes section below.) If the value is greater than 0, no verification of
user-defined components occurs.
Command Default
The default CYCLIC command (issuing the command with no arguments) detects the number of sectors
(NSECTOR), the sector angle (ANGLE), and the coordinate system (KCN) based upon the existing solid or finiteelement model. The command also detects sector low- and high-edge components in most cases and assigns
the default root name CYCLIC to the components.
Notes
You can input your own value for NSECTOR, ANGLE or KCN; if you do so, the command verifies argument values
before executing.
When USRCOMP = 0 (default), the CYCLIC command automatically detects low- and high-edge components for
models comprised of any combination of line, area, or volume elements. If a solid model exists, however, the
command uses only the lines, areas, and/or volumes to determine the low- and high-edge components; the
elements, if any, are ignored.
If you issue a CYCOPT,TOLER command to set a tolerance for edge-component pairing before issuing the CYCLIC
command, the CYCLIC command uses the specified tolerance when performing automatic edge-component
detection.
For 2-D models, autodetection does not consider the CSYS,5 or CSYS,6 coordinate system specification. Autodetection for 180 degree (two-sector) models is not possible unless a central hole exists.
The CYCLIC command sets values and keys so that, if possible, the area-mesh (AMESH) or volume-mesh (VMESH)
command meshes the sector with matching node and element face patterns on the low and high edges. (The
command has no effect on any other element-creation command.)
Issue the CYCLIC command prior to the meshing command to, if possible, produce a mesh with identical node
and element patterns on the low and high sector edges. Only the AMESH or VMESH commands can perform
automated matching. (Other meshing operation commands such as VSWEEP cannot.) If you employ a meshing
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3217
CYCOPT
operation other than AMESH or VMESH, you should ensure that node and element face patterns match, if desired.
The CYCLIC command output indicates whether each edge-component pair has or can produce a matching
node pair.
A cyclic solution (via the SOLVE command) allows dissimilar mesh patterns on the extreme boundaries of a
cyclically symmetric model. The allowance for dissimilar patterns is useful when you have only finite-element
meshes for your model but not the geometry data necessary to remesh it to obtain identical node patterns. In
such cases, it is possible to obtain solution results, although perhaps at the expense of accuracy. A warning
message appears because results may be degraded near the sector edges.
The constraint equations (CEs) that tie together the low and high edges of your model are generated at the
solution stage of the analysis from the low- and high-edge components (and nowhere else). You should verify
that automatically detected components are in the correct locations and that you can account for all components;
to do so, you can list (CMLIST) or plot (CMPLOT) the components.
If you issue the CYCLIC command after meshing and have defined element types with rotational degrees of
freedom (DOFs), ANSYS generates cyclic CEs for rotational DOFs that may not exist on the sector boundaries.
Issue the CYCOPT,DOF command to prevent unused rotational terms from being generated.
To learn more about analyzing a cyclically symmetric structure, see Cyclic Symmetry Analysis in the ANSYS Advanced
Analysis Techniques Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Cyclic Sector>Cyclic Model>Auto Defined
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Cyclic Sector>Cyclic Model>Status
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Cyclic Sector>Cyclic Model>User Defined
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Cyclic Sector>Del Dupl Sector
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Cyclic Sector>Reset (OFF)
CYCOPT, OPTION, Value1, Value2, Value3, Value4, Value5, Value6, Value7
Specifies solution options for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
PREP7: Special Purpose
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
OPTION
One of the following options:
STATUS
Lists the solution option settings active for the cyclic model.
DEFAULT
Sets the default cyclic solution settings.
HINDEX
The harmonic index solution ranges for modal or buckling cyclic symmetry analyses. The SOLVE command
initiates a cyclic symmetry solution sequence at the harmonic indices specified. (By default, the SOLVE
3218
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CYCOPT
command solves for all available harmonic indices.) Static cyclic symmetry solutions always use all harmonic indices required for the applied loads.
EVEN / ODD
For low-frequency electromagnetic analysis only, EVEN specifies a symmetric solution and ODD
specifies an antisymmetric solution.
The value you specify is based on the harmonic index: EVEN (default) indicates harmonic index = 0,
and ODD indicates harmonic index = N / 2 (where N is an integer representing the number of sectors
in 360). A value of ODD applies only when N is an even number.
The CYCOPT command with this HINDEX option is cumulative. To remove an option (for example,
EVEN), issue this command: CYCOPT,HINDEX,EVEN,,,-1
Value1, Value2, Value3
Solve harmonic indices in range Value1 through Value2 in steps of Value3. Repeat the command
to add other ranges. The default solves all applicable harmonic indices.
Value4
The only valid value is -1. If specified, it removes Value1 through Value2 in steps of Value3 from
the set to solve.
LDSECT
Restricts subsequently defined DOF constraint values, force loads, and surface loads to a specified sector.
The restriction remains in effect until you change or reset it.
Value1
The sector number. A value other than 0 (default) is valid for a cyclic symmetry analysis with noncyclically symmetric loading only. A value of 0 (or ALL) resets the default behavior for cyclic loading
(where the loads are identical on all sectors).
COMBINE
For linear static cyclic symmetry analysis with non-cyclically symmetric loading only, expands and combines all harmonic index solutions and writes them to the results file during the solution phase of the
analysis.
Value1
To enable combining of harmonic index solutions, specify YES, ON, or 1.
To disable combining (the default behavior), specify NO, OFF, or 0.
DOF
The degrees of freedom to couple from the nodes on the low sector boundary to nodes on the high
boundary:
Value1
The component pair ID number.
Value2-Value7
The constraint-equation/-coupling degree of freedom (DOF) for this pair. Repeat the command to
add other DOFs. The default is constraint-equation/-coupling all applicable DOFs.
TOLER
The tolerance used to determine whether a node on the low edge is paired with a node on the high
edge.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3219
CYCOPT
Value1
The tolerance value, as follows:
> 0 -- The absolute distance tolerance for automatic sector-boundary detection and low-/high-edge
component node pairing.
< 0 -- The relative tolerance for automatic sector-boundary detection and low-/high-edge component
node pairing. In this case, the tolerance is Value1 * Length, where Length is the length of the diagonal of an imaginary box enclosing the model.
The default tolerance is -1.0E-4 (also represented by Value1 = 0).
MOVE
Flag specifying whether ANSYS should move high- or low-edge component nodes paired within the
specified tolerance (TOLER) to create precisely matching pairs.
Value1
The flag value, as follows:
0 -- Do not move edge component nodes. This value is the default.
1 or HIGH -- Move the high-edge component nodes to precisely match the low-edge component
nodes.
-1 or LOW -- Move the low-edge component nodes to precisely match the high-edge component
nodes.
USRROT
Flag specifying whether ANSYS should override automatic nodal rotations to edge components and allow
you to apply nodal rotations manually.
Value1
The flag value, as follows:
0 (OFF or NO) -- Allow automatic node rotation. This behavior is the default.
1 (ON or YES) -- Suppress automatic node rotation. If you select this option, you must apply appropriate
nodal rotations to all edge component nodes; otherwise, your analysis will yield incorrect solution
results.
LOW -- Suppresses automatic rotation of low-edge component nodes only, allowing you to apply
them manually. (Automatic rotation of high-edge component nodes occurs to produce the matching
edge nodes required for a valid cyclic solution.)
HIGH -- Suppresses automatic rotation of high-edge component nodes only, allowing you to apply
them manually. (Automatic rotation of low-edge component nodes occurs to produce the matching
edge nodes required for a valid cyclic solution.)
Command Default
No defaults are available for the CYCOPT command. You must specify an argument (OPTION) when issuing the
command. Other values which may be necessary depend upon which argument you specify.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3220
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CYCPHASE
Notes
ANSYS solves a cyclically symmetric model (set up via the CYCLIC command during preprocessing) at the harmonic indices specified via the CYCOPT command.
The CYCOPT,COMBINE option is an alternative to the /CYCEXPAND command and is especially useful for testing
purposes. However, ANSYS recommends specifying COMBINE only when the number of sectors is relatively
small. (The option expands nodes and elements into the full 360 and can slow postprocessing significantly.
If you issue a CYCOPT,TOLER command to set a tolerance for edge-component pairing before issuing the CYCLIC
command, the CYCLIC command uses the specified tolerance when performing automatic edge-component
detection.
In cases involving non-cyclically symmetric loading (that is, when LDSECT > 0), the underlying command operations
create or modify the required SECTOR tabular boundary condition (BC) data to apply on the appropriate sector.
Therefore, it is not necessary to manipulate tables for situations where the applied BC is not a function of other
tabular BC variables such as TIME, X, Y, Z, and so on.
To delete a previously applied load on a specified sector, issue an FDELE command.
Because edge nodes are rotated into the cyclic coordinate system during solution, any applied displacements
or forces on sector edges will be in the cyclic coordinate system.
The CYCOPT command is valid in the preprocessing and solution stages of an analysis.
To learn more about analyzing a cyclically symmetric structure, see Cyclic Symmetry Analysis in the ANSYS Advanced
Analysis Techniques Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Cyclic Sector>Cyclic Options
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Cyclic Options
CYCPHASE, TYPE, OPTION
Provides tools for determining minimum and maximum possible result values from frequency couplets
produced in a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP <>
TYPE
The type of operation requested:
DISP
Calculate the maximum and minimum possible displacement at each node in the original sector model.
Store the values and the phase angle at which they occurred.
STRESS
Calculate the maximum and minimum possible stresses at each node in the original sector model. Store
the values and the phase angle at which they occurred.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3221
CYCPHASE
STRAIN
Calculate the maximum and minimum possible strains at each node in the original sector model. Store
the values and the phase angle at which they occurred.
ALL
Calculate the maximum and minimum possible displacement, stress and strain at each node in the original sector model. Store the values and the phase angle at which they occurred.
GET
Places the value of a MAX or MIN item into the _CYCVALUE parameter, the node for that value in the
_CYCNODE parameter, and the phase angle for the value in the _CYCPHASE parameter.
PUT
Put resulting sweep values for printing (via the PRNSOL command ) or plotting (via the PLNSOL command).
LIST
List the current minimum/maximum displacement, stress and strain nodal values.
STAT
Summarize the results of the last phase sweep.
CLEAR
Clear phase-sweep information from the database.
OPTION
If TYPE = DISP, STRAIN, STRESS or ALL, controls the sweep angle increment to use in the search:
Angle
The sweep angle increment in degrees, greater than 0.1 and less than 10. The default is 1.
If TYPE = PUT, controls which values are placed onto the model:
MAX
Put all existing nodal maximum values onto the model. This option is the default.
MIN
Put all existing nodal minimum values onto the model.
If TYPE = GET, controls the values placed into cyclic parameters:
Item
Specifies the type of values on which to operate:
U -- Displacement
S -- Stress
EPEL -- Strain
Comp
Specifies the specific component of displacement, stress or strain for which to get information:
X,Y,Z -- Basic components
XY,YZ,XZ -- Shear components
1,2,3 -- Principal values
EQV -- Equivalent value
SUM -- USUM
3222
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CYCPHASE
MxMn
Specifies whether the requested value information is for the maximum or minimum value:
MAX -- Maximum value.
MIN -- Minimum value.
Command Default
No defaults are available for the CYCPHASE command. You must specify an argument (TYPE) when issuing the
command. Other values which may be necessary (OPTION) depend upon which TYPE argument you specify.
Notes
When you expand the results of a modal cyclic symmetry analysis (via the /CYCEXPAND or EXPAND command),
ANSYS combines the real and imaginary results for a given nodal diameter, assuming no phase shift between
them; however, the modal response can occur at any phase shift.
CYCPHASE response results are valid only for the first cyclic sector. To obtain the response at any part of the
expanded model, ANSYS recommends using cyclic symmetry results expansion at the phase angle obtained via
CYCPHASE.
The phase angles returned by CYCPHASE contain the minimum and maximum values for USUM, SEQV and
other scalar principal stress and strain quantities; however, they do not always return the true minimum and
maximum values for directional quantities like UX or SX unless the values fall in the first sector.
CYCPHASE does not consider midside node values when evaluating maximum and minimum values, which
may affect DISPLAY quantities but no others. (Typically, ANSYS ignores midside node stresses and strains during
postprocessing.)
Issuing CYCPHASE,PUT clears the result values for midside nodes on high order elements; therefore, this option
sets element faceting (/EFACET) to 1. The command reports that midside nodal values are set to zero and indicates
that element faceting is set to 1.
If the sweep values are available after issuing a CYCPHASE,PUT command, the PRNSOL or PLNSOL command
will print or plot (respectively) the sweep values of structure displacement Ux, Uy, Uz, component stress/strain
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, ZX, principal stress/strain 1, 2, 3 and equivalent stress/strain EQV. The vector sum of displacement
(USUM) and stress/strain intensity (SINT) are not valid phase-sweep results.
The RSYS command has no effect on the CYCPHASE command. Component values reported by CYCPHASE are
in the global Cartesian coordinate system.
The CYCPHASE command is valid in /POST1 and for cyclically symmetric models only.
To learn more about analyzing a cyclically symmetric structure, see Cyclic Symmetry Analysis in the ANSYS Advanced
Analysis Techniques Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyclic Analysis>Cyclic Phase>Clear
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyclic Analysis>Cyclic Phase>Get
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3223
CYL4
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyclic Analysis>Cyclic Phase>List
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyclic Analysis>Cyclic Phase>Phase Sweep
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyclic Analysis>Cyclic Phase>Put Phase Results
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyclic Analysis>Cyclic Phase>Status
CYL4, XCENTER, YCENTER, RAD1, THETA1, RAD2, THETA2, DEPTH
Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume anywhere on the working plane.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
XCENTER, YCENTER
Working plane X and Y coordinates of the center of the circle or cylinder.
RAD1, RAD2
Inner and outer radii (either order) of the circle or cylinder. A value of zero or blank for either RAD1 or RAD2,
or the same value for both RAD1 and RAD2, defines a solid circle or cylinder.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (either order) of the circle or faces of the cylinder. Used for creating a partial annulus or partial cylinder. The sector begins at the algebraically smaller angle, extends in a positive angular
direction, and ends at the larger angle. The starting angle defaults to 0 and the ending angle defaults to
360. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration.
DEPTH
The perpendicular distance (either positive or negative based on the working plane Z direction) from the
working plane representing the depth of the cylinder. If DEPTH = 0 (default), a circular area is created on the
working plane.
Notes
Defines a circular area anywhere on the working plane or a cylindrical volume with one face anywhere on the
working plane. For a solid cylinder of 360, the top and bottom faces will be circular (each area defined with four
lines) and they will be connected with two surface areas (each spanning 180). See the CYL5, PCIRC, and CYLIND
commands for alternate ways to create circles and cylinders.
When working with a model imported from an IGES file (DEFAULT import option), you must provide a value for
DEPTH or the command will be ignored.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Circle>Annulus
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Circle>Partial Annulus
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Circle>Solid Circle
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Primitives>Solid Cylindr
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Cylinder>Hollow Cylinder
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Cylinder>Partial Cylinder
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Cylinder>Solid Cylinder
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Cylinder>Solid Cylinder
3224
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
CYLIND
CYL5, XEDGE1, YEDGE1, XEDGE2, YEDGE2, DEPTH
Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume by end points.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
XEDGE1, YEDGE1
Working plane X and Y coordinates of one end of the circle or cylinder face.
XEDGE2, YEDGE2
Working plane X and Y coordinates of the other end of the circle or cylinder face.
DEPTH
The perpendicular distance (either positive or negative based on the working plane Z direction) from the
working plane representing the depth of the cylinder. If DEPTH = 0 (default), a circular area is created on the
working plane.
Notes
Defines a circular area anywhere on the working plane or a cylindrical volume with one face anywhere on the
working plane by specifying diameter end points. For a solid cylinder of 360, the top and bottom faces will be
circular (each area defined with four lines) and they will be connected with two surface areas (each spanning
180). See the CYL4, PCIRC, and CYLIND commands for alternate ways to create circles and cylinders.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Circle>By End Points
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Cylinder>By End Pts & Z
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Cylinder>By End Pts & Z
CYLIND, RAD1, RAD2, Z1, Z2, THETA1, THETA2
Creates a cylindrical volume centered about the working plane origin.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
RAD1, RAD2
Inner and outer radii (either order) of the cylinder. A value of zero or blank for either RAD1 or RAD2, or the
same value for both RAD1 and RAD2, defines a solid cylinder.
Z1, Z2
Working plane Z coordinates of the cylinder. If either Z1 or Z2 is zero, one of the faces of the cylinder will be
coplanar with the working plane.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (either order) of the cylinder. Used for creating a cylindrical sector. The sector
begins at the algebraically smaller angle, extends in a positive angular direction, and ends at the larger angle.
The starting angle defaults to 0.0 and the ending angle defaults to 360.0. See the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for an illustration.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3225
CYLIND
Notes
Defines a cylindrical volume centered about the working plane origin. The top and bottom faces are parallel to
the working plane but neither face need be coplanar with (i.e., "on") the working plane. The cylinder must have
a spatial volume greater than zero. (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a degenerate
volume as a means of creating an area.) For a solid cylinder of 360, the top and bottom faces will be circular
(each area defined with four lines), and they will be connected with two areas (each spanning 180.) See the
CYL4 and CYL5 commands for alternate ways to create cylinders.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Cylinder>By Dimensions
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Cylinder>By Dimensions
3226
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
D Commands
D, NODE, Lab, VALUE, VALUE2, NEND, NINC, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Defines DOF constraints at nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node at which constraint is to be specified. If ALL, NEND and NINC are ignored and constraints are applied
to all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are
ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid degree of freedom label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements);
ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations); WARP (warping). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). FLOTRAN fluid labels: PRES (pressure); VX, VY, or VZ (velocities); ENKE or ENDS (turbulent kinetic energy
or turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate); SP01 through SP06 (multiple species mass fractions) or their
user-defined names [MSSPEC]; UX, UY, or UZ (Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian formulation mesh displacements).
Electric labels: VOLT (voltage). Magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY, or AZ (vector magnetic potentials).
VALUE
Degree of freedom value or table name reference for tabular boundary conditions. To specify a table, enclose
the table name in percent signs (%) (e.g., D,NODE,TEMP,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define a
table.
If Lab = ENKE and VALUE = -1, a FLOTRAN flag is set to indicate a moving wall.
If Lab = ENDS and VALUE = -1, FLOTRAN generalized symmetry conditions are applied. Velocity components
are set tangential to the symmetry surface if the ALE formulation is not activated. They are set equal to the
mesh velocity if the ALE formulation is activated.
VALUE2
Second degree of freedom value (if any). If the analysis type and the degree of freedom allow a complex input,
VALUE (above) is the real component and VALUE2 is the imaginary component.
NEND, NINC
Specifies the same values of constraint at the range of nodes from NODE to NEND (defaults to NODE), in steps
of NINC (defaults to 1).
Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Additional degree of freedom labels. The same values are applied to the nodes for these labels.
Notes
The available degrees of freedom per node are listed under "Degrees of Freedom" in the input table for each
element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Degrees of freedom are defined in the nodal coordinate system.
The positive directions of structural translations and rotations are along and about the positive nodal axes directions. Structural rotations should be input in radians. The node and the degree of freedom label must be selected
[NSEL, DOFSEL].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
D
For elements HF119 and HF120, used in high-frequency electromagnetic analysis, the AX DOF is not an x-component of a vector potential, but rather a tangential component of E (the electric field) on the element edges
and faces. To specify an Electric Wall condition, set AX to zero. For more information, see the ANSYS High-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
For element SOLID117 used in static and low frequency electromagnetic analysis, the AZ DOF is not a z-component
of a vector potential, but rather the flux contribution on the element edge. To specify a flux-parallel condition,
set AZ = 0. For more information, see 3-D Magnetostatics and Fundamentals of Edge-based Analysis in the ANSYS
Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
In an explicit dynamic analysis, the D command can only be used to fix nodes in the model. The degree of freedom
value must be zero; no other values are valid. Use the EDLOAD command to apply a non zero displacement in
an explicit dynamic analysis.
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname%) are available only for the following degree of freedom labels:
Electric (VOLT), FLOTRAN (UX, UY, UZ, PRES, VX, VY, VZ, ENKE, ENDS, TEMP, SP01, SP02, SP03, SP04, SP05, and
SP06); structural (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ), and temperature (TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP). All labels
are valid only in static (ANTYPE,STATIC) and full transient (ANTYPE,TRANS) analyses.
%_FIX% is an ANSYS reserved table name. When VALUE is set to %_FIX%, ANSYS will prescribe the DOF to the
current displacement value. Alternatively, functions UX(), UY(), etc. may be used (see *GET for a complete list
of available functions). However, note that these functions are not available when multiframe restart features
are invoked. In most cases, %_FIX% usage is efficient and recommended for all structural degrees of freedom.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>J-Normal>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>J-Normal>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>Flux Par'l>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>Flux Normal>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Node Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>On Nodes
3228
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DA
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>J-Normal>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>J-Normal>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>Flux Par'l>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>Flux Normal>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Node Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Nodes
DA, AREA, Lab, Value1, Value2
Defines DOF constraints on areas.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area on which constraints are to be specified. If ALL, apply to all selected areas [ASEL]. If AREA = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for AREA.
Lab
Symmetry label (see 2 below):
SYMM
Generate symmetry constraints for non-FLOTRAN models. Requires no Value1 or Value2.
ASYM
Generate antisymmetry constraints for non-FLOTRAN models. Requires no Value1 or Value2.
ANSYS DOF labels (see 1, 2, and 3 below):
UX
Displacement in X direction.
UY
Displacement in Y direction.
UZ
Displacement in Z direction.
ROTX
Rotation about X axis.
ROTY
Rotation about Y axis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3229
DA
ROTZ
Rotation about Z axis.
TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP
Temperature.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
VOLT
Electric scalar potential.
AX
Magnetic vector potential in X direction (see 4).
AY
Magnetic vector potential in Y direction.
AZ
Magnetic vector potential in Z direction (see 1).
ALL
Applies all appropriate DOF labels.
FLOTRAN Standard DOF Labels (see 7): VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
FLOTRAN Species Labels (See 8): SP01, SP02, SP03, SP04, SP05, SP06
FLOTRAN Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian formulation Mesh Displacement Labels (See 9): UX, UY, UZ
Value1
Value of DOF or table name reference on the area. Valid for all DOF labels. To specify a table, enclose the
table name in % signs (e.g., DA,AREA,TEMP,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define a table.
If Lab = ENKE and Value1 = -1, a FLOTRAN flag is set to indicate a moving wall.
If Lab = ENDS and Value1 = -1, FLOTRAN generalized symmetry conditions are applied. Velocity components
are set tangential to the symmetry surface if the ALE formulation is not activated. They are set equal to the
mesh velocity if the ALE formulation is activated.
Value2
For FLOTRAN DOFs:
0
Values are applied only to nodes within the area.
1
Values are applied to the edges of the area as well as to the internal nodes. (See 7.)
For MAG and VOLT DOFs:
Value of the imaginary component of the degree of freedom.
Notes
1.
3230
For element SOLID117, if Lab = AZ and Value1 = 0, this sets the flux-parallel condition for the edge
formulation. (A flux-normal condition is the natural boundary condition.) Do not use the DA command
to set the edge-flux DOF, AZ to a nonzero value.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DA
2.
If Lab = MAG and Value1 = 0, this sets the flux-normal condition for the magnetic scalar potential formulations (MSP) (A flux-parallel condition is the natural boundary condition for MSP.)
3.
If Lab = VOLT and Value1 = 0, the J-normal condition is set (current density (J) flow normal to the area).
(A J-parallel condition is the natural boundary condition.)
4.
For elements HF119 and HF120, used in high-frequency electromagnetic analysis, the AX DOF is not an
x-component of a vector potential, but rather a tangential component of E (the electric field) on the
element edges and faces. To specify an Electric Wall condition, set AX to zero. For more information, see
the ANSYS High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
5.
You can transfer constraints from areas to nodes with the DTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. See the DK
command for information about generating other constraints on areas for non-FLOTRAN models.
6.
Symmetry and antisymmetry constraints are generated as described for the DSYM command.
7.
For the velocity DOF (VX, VY, VZ), a zero value will override a nonzero value at the intersection of two
areas.
8.
You can use the MSSPEC command to change FLOTRAN species labels to user-defined labels. You must
define these labels with the MSSPEC command before using them on the DA command.
9.
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname%) are available only for the following degree of
freedom labels: Electric (VOLT), FLOTRAN (UX, UY, UZ, PRES, VX, VY, VZ, ENKE, ENDS, TEMP, SP01, SP02,
SP03, SP04, SP05, and SP06); Structural (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ), and temperature (TEMP, TBOT,
TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP).
10. Constraints specified by the DA command can conflict with other specified constraints. See Resolution
of Conflicting Constraint Specifications in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
11. The DA command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>J-Normal>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>J-Normal>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>Flux Par'l>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>Flux Normal>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Normal>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry B.C.>On
Areas
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3231
DADELE
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>J-Normal>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>J-Normal>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>Flux Par'l>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>Flux Normal>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Normal>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry B.C.>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Areas
DADELE, AREA, Lab
Deletes DOF constraints on an area.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area for which constraints are to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected areas [ASEL]. If AREA = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). You can substitute
a component name for AREA.
Lab
Valid constraint labels are:
ALL
All constraints.
SYMM
Symmetry constraints.
ASYM
Antisymmetry constraints.
UX
Displacement in X direction.
UY
Displacement in Y direction.
UZ
Displacement in Z direction.
ROTX
Rotation about X axis.
3232
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DADELE
ROTY
Rotation about Y axis.
ROTZ
Rotation about Z axis.
VX
Velocity component in X direction.
VY
Velocity component in Y direction.
VZ
Velocity component in Z direction.
PRES
Pressure.
TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP
Temperature.
ENKE
Turbulent Kinetic Energy.
ENDS
Energy Dissipation Rate.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
VOLT
Electric scalar potential.
SP01SP06
Multiple Species Mass Fraction.
AX
Magnetic vector potential in X direction (see notes).
AY
Magnetic vector potential in Y direction.
AZ
Magnetic vector potential in Z direction (see notes).
Notes
Deletes the degree of freedom constraints at an area (and all corresponding finite element constraints) previously
specified with the DA command. See the DDELE command for delete details.
If the multiple species labels have been changed to user-defined labels via the MSSPEC command, use the userdefined labels.
For element SOLID117, AZ is the electromagnetic edge-flux DOF. See the DA command for details.
For elements HF119 and HF120, used in high-frequency electromagnetic analysis, the AX DOF is not an x-component of a vector potential, but rather a tangential component of E (the electric field) on the element edges
and faces. To specify an Electric Wall condition, set AX to zero. For more information, see the ANSYS High-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3233
DALIST
Warning: On previously meshed areas, all constraints on affected nodes will be deleted,
whether or not they were specified by the DA command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Species>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Species>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Areas
DALIST, AREA
Lists the DOF constraints on an area.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
List constraints for this area. If ALL (default), list for all selected areas [ASEL]. If P1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for AREA.
3234
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DAMORPH
Notes
Lists the degree of freedom constraints on an area previously specified with the DA command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On All Areas
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On Picked Areas
DAMORPH, AREA, XLINE, RMSHKY
Move nodes in selected areas to conform to structural displacements.
PREP7: Morphing
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
AREA
Non-structural area to which mesh movement (morph) applies. If ALL, apply morphing to all selected areas
[ASEL]. If AREA = P, graphical picking is enabled. A component may be substituted for AREA.
XLINE
Lines to be excluded from morphing. If ALL, exclude all selected lines [LSEL] from morphing. If XLINE = P,
graphical picking is enabled. A component may be substituted for XLINE. If XLINE is blank (default), allow
morphing of nodes attached to lines of the selected areas (AREA) which are not shared by unselected areas.
See Notes for clarification.
RMSHKY
Remesh flag option:
0
Remesh the selected non-structural areas only if mesh morphing fails.
1
Remesh the selected non-structural areas and bypass mesh morphing.
2
Perform mesh morphing only and do not remesh.
Notes
The selected areas should include only non-structural regions adjacent to structural regions. DAMORPH will
morph the non-structural areas to coincide with the deflections of the structural regions.
Nodes in the structural regions move in accordance with computed displacements. Displacements from a
structural analysis must be in the database prior to issuing DAMORPH.
By default, nodes attached to lines can move along the lines, or off the lines (if a line is interior to the selected
areas). You can use XLINE to restrain nodes on certain lines.
By default (RMSHKEY = 0), DAMORPH will remesh the selected non-structural areas entirely if a satisfactory
morphed mesh cannot be provided.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3235
DATA
If boundary conditions and loads are applied directly to nodes and elements, the DAMORPH command requires
that these be removed before remeshing can take place.
Exercise care with initial conditions defined by the IC command. Before a structural analysis is performed for a
sequentially coupled analysis, the DAMORPH command requires that initial conditions be removed from all null
element type nodes in the non-structural regions. Use ICDELE to delete the initial conditions.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Phys Morphing>Areas
DATA, IR, LSTRT, LSTOP, LINC, Name, KCPLX
Reads data records from a file into a variable.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
LSTRT
Start at location LSTRT (defaults to 1).
LSTOP
Stop at location LSTOP (defaults to LSTRT). Maximum location available is determined from data previously
stored.
LINC
Fill every LINC location between LSTRT and LSTOP (defaults to 1).
Name
Eight character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed upon output.
KCPLX
Complex number key:
0
Data stored as the real part of the complex number.
1
Data stored as the imaginary part of the complex number.
Notes
This command must be followed by a format statement (on the next line) and the subsequent data records, and
all must be on the same file (that may then be read with the /INPUT command). The format specifies the number
of fields to be read per record, the field width, and the placement of the decimal point (if one is not included in
the data value). The read operation follows the available FORTRAN FORMAT conventions of the system. See the
system FORTRAN manual for details. Any standard FORTRAN real format (such as (4F6.0), (F2.0,2X,F12.0), etc.)
may be used. Integer (I), character (A), and list-directed (*) descriptors may not be used. The parentheses must be
3236
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DCGOMG
included in the format. Up to 80 columns per record may be read. Locations may be filled within a range. Previous
data in the range will be overwritten.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
DATADEF
Specifies "Directly defined data status" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Modify Results
DCGOMG, DCGOX, DCGOY, DCGOZ
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the global origin.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DCGOX, DCGOY, DCGOZ
Rotational acceleration of the global origin about the acceleration system X, Y, and Z axes.
Notes
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the global origin about each of the acceleration coordinate system axes
[CGLOC]. Rotational accelerations may be defined in analysis types ANTYPE,STATIC, HARMIC (full or mode superposition), TRANS (full or mode superposition), and SUBSTR. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details.
Units are radians/time2. Related commands are ACEL, CGLOC, CGOMGA, DOMEGA, and OMEGA.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Coriolis Effects
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3237
DCUM
DCUM, Oper, RFACT, IFACT, TBASE
Specifies that DOF constraint values are to be accumulated.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Oper
Accumulation key:
REPL
Subsequent values replace the previous values (default).
ADD
Subsequent values are added to the previous values.
IGNO
Subsequent values are ignored.
RFACT
Scale factor for the real component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale factor.
IFACT
Scale factor for the imaginary component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale
factor.
TBASE
Base temperature for temperature difference. Used only with temperature degree of freedom. Scale factor
is applied to the temperature difference (T-TBASE) and then added to TBASE. T is the current temperature.
Command Default
Replace previous values.
Notes
Allows repeated degree of freedom constraint values (displacement, temperature, etc.) to be replaced, added,
or ignored. Operations apply to the selected nodes [NSEL] and the selected degree of freedom labels [DOFSEL].
The operations occur when the next degree of freedom constraints are defined. For example, issuing the command
D,1,UX,.025 after a previous D,1,UX,.020 causes the new value of the displacement on node 1 in the x-direction
to be 0.045 with the add operation, 0.025 with the replace operation, or 0.020 with the ignore operation. Scale
factors are also available to multiply the next value before the add or replace operation. A scale factor of 2.0 with
the previous "add" example results in a displacement of 0.070. Scale factors are applied even if no previous values
exist. Issue DCUM,STAT to show the current label, operation, and scale factors. Solid model boundary conditions
are not affected by this command, but boundary conditions on the FE model are affected.
Note FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by existing solid model boundary conditions if
a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
DCUM does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
3238
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DCVSWP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Constraints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Constraints
DCVSWP, Option, Elem, Cnum, Vmax, Vinc1, Vinc2, Gap
Performs a DC voltage sweep on a ROM element.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Use Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Sweep option:
GV
Perform voltage sweep up to given voltage Vmax.
PI
Perform a voltage sweep simulation up to the pull-in voltage.
Elem
Element number of the ROM element for the ROM use pass analysis.
Cnum
Number of sweep conductor.
Vmax
Maximum voltage. For the PI option, this voltage should be below the pull-in voltage value.
Vinc1
Voltage increment for Vmax (default = Vmax/20).
Vinc2
Voltage increment for pull-in voltage (default = 1).
Gap
Gap elements option:
0
Create gap elements (COMBIN40) (default).
1
Do not create gap elements
Notes
Vinc1 is used to ramp the sweep conductor voltage from 0 to Vmax. Vinc2 is used to increase the sweep conductor voltage from Vmax to the pull-in value if the PI sweep option is used.
Because ramping the voltage may lead to the unstable region of an electromechanical system, DCVSWP might
not converge when the sweep conductor voltage approaches the pull-in value. To avoid non-converged solutions,
you should use the gap option to create a set of spring-gap elements (COMBIN40). By default, DCVSWP creates
two spring-gap elements with opposite orientations for each active modal displacement DOF of the ROM element.
The gap size is set to the maximum absolute values of the deflection range for the corresponding mode, as cal-
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3239
DDELE
culated by RMMSELECT or modified using the RMMRANGE command. The spring constants are set to 1.E5 for
all the COMBIN40 elements. Along with the spring-gap elements, DCVSWP creates a set of constraint equations
relating the ROM element modal displacements DOF (EMF) and the displacement DOF (UX) of the gap elements.
Constraining the modal displacements using the spring-gap elements allows DCVSWP to converge in the pullin range. The DCVSWP macro has a limit of 900 equilibrium iterations. If this limit is not sufficient to reach convergence, try the advanced techniques given in Overcoming Convergence Problems in the ANSYS Structural
Analysis Guide. For more information on gap elements, see Using Gap Elements with ROM144 in the ANSYS
Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>ROM Tools>Voltage Sweep
Main Menu>Solution>ROM Tools>Voltage Sweep
DDELE, NODE, Lab, NEND, NINC
Deletes degree of freedom constraints.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node for which constraint is to be deleted. If ALL, NEND and NINC are ignored and constraints for all selected
nodes [NSEL] are deleted. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are
ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid degree of freedom label. If ALL, use all selected labels [DOFSEL]. Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements); ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations); WARP (warping). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . .,
TTOP (temperature). FLOTRAN fluid labels: PRES (pressure); VX, VY, or VZ (velocities); ENKE or ENDS (turbulent
kinetic energy or turbulent energy dissipation); SP01 through SP06 (multiple species mass fractions) or their
user-defined names. Electric label: VOLT (voltage). Magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY,
or AZ (vector magnetic potentials). High-frequency electromagnetic label: AX (Electric Wall or Magnetic Wall
boundary condition).
NEND, NINC
Delete constraints from NODE to NEND (defaults to NODE) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
Notes
Deleting a constraint is not the same as setting it to zero (which "fixes" the degree of freedom to a zero value).
Deleting a constraint has the same effect as deactivating, releasing, or setting the constraint "free." The node
and the degree of freedom label must be selected [NSEL, DOFSEL].
For elements HF119 and HF120, used in high-frequency electromagnetic analysis, the AX DOF is not an x-component of a vector potential, but rather a tangential component of E (the electric field) on the element edges
and faces. To specify an Electric Wall condition, set AX to zero. For more information, see the ANSYS High-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
3240
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DEACT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Species>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Node Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Species>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>EdgeMVP>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Node Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Nodes
DEACT
Specifies "Element birth and death" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3241
DECOMP
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Elem Birth/Death
DECOMP, --, Ndomains
Decomposes the model into domains used by distributed solvers (DPCG, DJCG, DDS)
PREP7: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
--
Unused field
Ndomains
Sets the number of preconditioner domains for model decomposition.
AUTO
Automatically set the number of domains (default).
N
Set the number of domains to be used by the preconditioner of the solver to N>1.
Command Default
DECOMP,,AUTO
Notes
This command breaks (decomposes) the model into domains for previewing purposes through the /PNUM and
EPLOT commands. See Improving ANSYS Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the ANSYS Advanced
Analysis Techniques Guide
If you specify DECOMP (no arguments), the command defaults to DECOMP,,AUTO. The domains decomposed
here are the domains that are used by a solver's preconditioners only. The larger domains built based on these
preconditioner domains are called CPU domains. The number of CPU is set to be equal to the number of processors specified by DSPROC.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Domain Decomp
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Domain Decomp
3242
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DELETE
DEFINE
Specifies "Data definition settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
POST26: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Read Options
Utility Menu>List>Status>TimeHist Postproc>Variables
DELETE, SET, Nstart, Nend
Specifies sets in the results file to be deleted before postprocessing.
AUX3: Results Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SET
Specifies that sets in the results file are to be deleted.
Nstart
The first set in a results file to be deleted.
Nend
The final set in a results file to be deleted. This field is used only if deleting more than one sequential sets.
Notes
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3243
/DELETE
/DELETE, Fname, Ext, -Deletes a file.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to the current Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>File Operations>Delete
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To GRPH File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL2 File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To PSCR File
DELTIM, DTIME, DTMIN, DTMAX, Carry
Specifies the time step sizes to be used for this load step.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
DTIME
Time step size for this step. If automatic time stepping is being used [AUTOTS], DTIME is the starting time
substep. If SOLCONTROL,ON and contact elements TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173,
or CONTA174 are used, defaults to 1 or 1/20 the total time span of the load step, depending on the physics
of the problem. If SOLCONTROL,ON and none of these contact elements are used, defaults to 1 time span
of the load step. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to the previously specified value.
DTMIN
Minimum time step (if automatic time stepping is used). If SOLCONTROL,ON, default determined by ANSYS
depending on the physics of the problem. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to the previously specified value
(or DTIME, if there is no previously specified value).
DTMAX
Maximum time step (if automatic time stepping is used). If SOLCONTROL,ON, default determined by ANSYS
depending on the physics of the problem. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to the previously specified value
(or the time span of the load step, if there is no previously specified value).
Carry
Time step carry over key:
3244
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DEMORPH
OFF
Use DTIME as time step at start of each load step.
ON
Use final time step from previous load step as the starting time step (if automatic time stepping is used).
If SOLCONTROL,ON, default determined by ANSYS depending on the physics of the problem. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to OFF.
Notes
See NSUBST for an alternative input. Use values for DTIME and TIME [TIME] that are consistent. For example,
using 0.9 for DTIME and 1.0 for TIME will result in one time step because 1.0 (TIME) is divisible by .9 (DTIME) at
most once. If your intent is to load in 10 increments over a time span of 1.0, then use 0.1 for DTIME and 1.0 for
TIME. It is recommended that all fields of this command be specified for solution efficiency and robustness.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
DEMORPH, ELEM, DIMN, RMSHKY
Move nodes in selected elements to conform to structural displacements.
PREP7: Morphing
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
ELEM
Non-structural elements to which mesh movement (morph) applies. If ALL, apply morphing to all selected
elements [ESEL]. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled. A component may be substituted for ELEM.
DIMN
Problem dimensionality. Use "2" for a 2-D problem and "3" for a 3-D problem (no default).
RMSHKY
Remesh flag option:
0
Remesh the selected non-structural regions only if mesh morphing fails.
1
Remesh the selected non-structural regions and bypass mesh morphing.
2
Perform mesh morphing only and do not remesh.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3245
DERIV
Notes
The selected elements should include only non-structural regions adjacent to structural regions. The exterior
nodes of the selected elements will usually be on the boundary of the region which will have node positions
displaced. For DIMN = 2, elements must lie on a flat plane. The DEMORPH command requires a single domain
grouping of elements be provided (multiple domains of elements are not permitted). Exterior nodes will be assumed fixed (no nodes will be morphed) unless they coincide with structural nodes having nonzero displacements.
Nodes in the structural regions move in accordance with computed displacements. Displacements from a
structural analysis must be in the database prior to issuing DEMORPH.
By default (RMSHKY = 0), DEMORPH will remesh the selected non-structural regions entirely if a satisfactory
morphed mesh cannot be provided.
If boundary conditions and loads are applied directly to nodes and elements, the DEMORPH command requires
that these be removed before remeshing can take place.
Exercise care with initial conditions defined by the IC command. Before a structural analysis is performed for a
sequentially coupled analysis, the DEMORPH command requires that initial conditions be removed from all null
element type nodes in the non-structural regions. Use ICDELE to delete the initial conditions.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Phys Morphing>Elements
DERIV, IR, IY, IX, --, Name, --, --, FACTA
Differentiates a variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IY, IX
Reference numbers of variables to be operated on. IY is differentiated with respect to IX.
--
Unused field.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied as shown below (defaults to 1.0).
3246
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DESIZE
Notes
Differentiates variables according to the operation:
IR = FACTA x d(IY)/d(IX)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Derivative
DESIZE, MINL, MINH, MXEL, ANGL, ANGH, EDGMN, EDGMX, ADJF, ADJM
Controls default element sizes.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MINL
Minimum number of elements that will be attached to a line when using lower-order elements (defaults to
3 elements per line). If MINL = DEFA, all arguments will be set back to default values. If MINL = STAT, list status
of command (Including on/off status). If MINL = OFF, deactivate default element sizing. If MINL = ON, reactivate default element sizing.
MINH
Minimum number of elements that will be attached to a line when using higher-order elements. Defaults to
2 elements per line.
MXEL
Maximum number of elements that will be attached to a single line (lower or higher-order elements). Defaults
to 15 elements per line for h-elements and 6 divisions per line for p-elements. To deactivate this limit, specify
a large number (such as 9999).
ANGL
Maximum spanned angle per lower-order element for curved lines. Defaults to 15 degrees per element.
ANGH
Maximum spanned angle per higher-order element for curved lines. Defaults to 28 degrees per element.
EDGMN
Minimum element edge length. Defaults to no minimum edge length. The MINL or MINH argument can
override this value.
EDGMX
Maximum element edge length. Defaults to no maximum edge length. The MXEL argument can override
this value.
ADJF
Target aspect ratio for adjacent line. Used only when free meshing. Defaults to 1.0, which attempts to create
equal sided h-elements; defaults to 4 for p-elements.
ADJM
Target aspect ratio for adjacent line. Used only when map meshing. Defaults to 4.0, which attempts to create
rectangular h-elements; defaults to 6 for p-elements.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3247
DESOL
Command Default
Default settings as described for each argument are used.
Notes
DESIZE settings are usually used for mapped meshing. They are also used for free meshing if SmartSizing is
turned off [SMRTSIZE,OFF], which is the default. Even when SmartSizing is on, some DESIZE settings (such as
maximum and minimum element edge length) can affect free mesh density. The default settings of the DESIZE
command are used only when no other element size specifications [KESIZE, LESIZE, ESIZE] exist for a certain
line.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Global>Other
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Default Element
Sizing Options
DESOL, ELEM, NODE, Item, Comp, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Defines or modifies solution results at a node of an element.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
ELEM
Element number for which results are defined or modified. If ALL, apply to all selected elements [ESEL].
NODE
Node of element (actual node number, not the position) to which results are specified. If ALL, specify results
for all selected nodes [NSEL] of element. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE.
Item
Label identifying results. Valid item labels are shown in DESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
Some items also require a component label (Comp).
Comp
Component of the item (if required); see DESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels.
V1
Value (in the element coordinate system) assigned to the database item (and component, if any). If zero, a
zero value will be assigned. If blank, value remains unchanged.
V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Additional values (if any) assigned to the remaining components (in the order corresponding to the Comp
list shown below) for the specified Item (starting from the specified Comp label and proceeding to the right).
Notes
Defines or modifies solution results in the database at a node of an area or volume element. For example,
DESOL,35,50,S,X,1000,2000,1000 assigns values 1000, 2000, and 1000 to SX, SY, and SZ (respectively) of node
3248
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DESOL
50 of element 35. The settings of the POST1 FORCE, SHELL, and LAYER commands, if applicable, further specify
which database items are affected. All data is stored in the solution coordinate system but will be displayed in
the results coordinate system [RSYS]. Use the PRESOL command to list the current results. Modified solution
results are not automatically saved. To save separate records of modified results, use either the RAPPND or
LCWRITE command.
Result items are available depending on element type; check the individual element for availability. Valid item
and component labels for element results are:
DESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
ELEM
Description
Element number.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
EPEL
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
EPTH
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
EPPL
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
EPCR
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
EPSW
Swelling strain.
NL
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
ELASTIC
Elastic strain energy density.
"
PLASTIC
Plastic strain energy density.
"
CREEP
Creep strain energy density.
TG
X, Y, Z
Component thermal gradient.
TF
X, Y, Z
Component thermal flux.
PG
X, Y, Z
Component pressure gradient.
EF
X, Y, Z
Component electric field.
X, Y, Z
Component electric flux density.
X, Y, Z
Component magnetic field intensity.
X, Y, Z
Component magnetic flux density.
FMAG
X, Y, Z
Component magnetic force.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural force.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural moment.
SEND
HEAT
Heat flow.
FLOW
Fluid flow.
AMPS
Current flow.
FLUX
Magnetic flux.
VF
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z fluid force component.
CSG
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z magnetic current segment component.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3249
DETAB
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Define/Modify>Elem Results
DETAB, ELEM, Lab, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Modifies element table results in the database.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element for which results are to be modified. If ALL, modify all selected elements [ESEL] results. If ELEM = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Label identifying results. Valid labels are as defined with the ETABLE command. Issue ETABLE,STAT to display
labels and values.
V1
Value assigned to this element table result in the database. If zero, a zero value will be assigned. If blank,
value remains unchanged.
V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Additional values (if any) assigned to consecutive element table columns.
Notes
Modifies element table [ETABLE] results in the database. For example, DETAB,35,ABC,1000,2000,1000 assigns
1000, 2000, and 1000 to the first three table columns starting with label ABC for element 35. Use the PRETAB
command to list the current results. After deleting a column of data using ETABLE,Lab,ERASE, the remaining
columns of data are not shifted to compress the empty slot. Therefore, the user must allocate null (blank) values
for V1, V2...V6 for any ETABLE entries which have been deleted by issuing ETABLE,Lab,ERASE. All data are stored
in the solution coordinate system but will be displayed in the results coordinate system [RSYS].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Define/Modify>ElemTabl Data
/DEVDISP, Label, KEY
Controls graphics device options.
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Device function label:
BBOX
Disables display information sorting for PowerGraphics displays. When activated (KEY = 1 or ON), model
rotations and replots are performed without recalculating edge and surface data. This will speed up the
3250
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/DEVDISP
rotation (especially for 2-D displays) of large models, although the display information will not be resolved
as quickly (you will see a bounding box instead of the model during dynamic rotations). The default is
OFF (KEY = 0).
DITHER
Dithering. When turned on (default), dithering smooths transitions in color intensity. Applies only to Zbuffered displays.
FONT
Font selection for the ANSYS graphics window. When Label = FONT, the command format is:
/DEVDISP,FONT,KEY,Val1,Val2,Val3,VAL4,Val5,Val6, where KEY determines the type of font being
controlled, and values 1 through 6 control various font parameters. Note that these values are device
specific; using the same command input file [/INPUT] on different machines may yield different results.The
following KEY values determine the font information that will be supplied to the appropriate driver (e.g.,
Postscript, X11, Win32, JPEG, ...):
KEY = 1
The command controls the LEGEND (documentation column) font.
KEY = 2
The command controls the ENTITY (node and keypoint number) font.
KEY = 3
The command controls the ANNOTATION/GRAPH font.
UNIX: Values 1 through 4 are used to find a match in the X11 database of font strings. Values 1, 2, and
3 are character strings; value 4 is a nonzero integer:
Val1
Family name (e.g., Courier*New). Substitute an asterisk (*) for any blank character that appears in a
family name. If Val1 = MENU, all other values are ignored, and a font selection menu appears (GUI
must be active).
Val2
Weight (e.g., medium)
Val3
Slant (e.g., r)
Val4
Pixel size (e.g., 14). Note that this value does not affect the annotation fonts (KEY = 3). Use the /TSPEC
command to control the pixel size of your annotation fonts.
Val5
unused
Val6
unused
PC: The values are encoded in a PC logical font structure. Value 1 is a character string, and the remaining
values are integers:
Val1
Family name (e.g., Courier*New) Substitute an asterisk (*) for any blank character that appears in a
family name. If Val1 = MENU, all other values are ignored and a font selection menu appears (GUI
must be active). A value containing all blank characters causes ANSYS to use the first available resource
it finds.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3251
/DEVICE
Val2
Weight (0 - 1000)
Val3
Orientation (in tenths of a degree)
Val4
Height (in logical units) Note that this value does not affect the annotation fonts (KEY =3). Use the
/TSPEC command to control the height of your annotation fonts.
Val5
Width (in logical units)
Val6
Italics (0 = OFF, 1 = ON)
TEXT
Text size specification for the ANSYS Graphics window. When Label = TEXT, the command format is:
/DEVDISP,TEXT,KEY,PERCENT, where KEY determines the type of text being controlled (1 for LEGEND,
and 2 for ENTITY), and PERCENT specifies the new text size as a percent of the default text size. If PERCENT
= 100, the new text size is precisely the default size. If PERCENT = 200, the new text size is twice the default
text size.
KEY
Control key:
OFF or 0
Turns specified function off.
ON or 1
Turns specified function on.
Command Default
Dithering on.
Menu Paths
It is part of the DISPLAY program.
/DEVICE, Label, KEY
Controls graphics device options.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Device function label:
BBOX
Bounding box mode. For PowerGraphics plots involving elements with /SHOW,x11 and /SHOW,win32,
ANSYS generally displays dynamic rotations faster. If KEY = 1 (ON), then a bounding box (not the elements)
encompassing the model is displayed and rotated, rather than the element outlines (ON is default in
preprocessing). When KEY = 0 (OFF), then dynamic rotations may be slower (ANSYS redraws the element
3252
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/DEVICE
outlines) for plots involving elements with /SHOW,x11 and /SHOW,win32. OFF is default in postprocessing.
This command is ignored if /EDGE,WN,1 is set for any WN. This is ignored in POST1 and SOLUTION plots.
For any PowerGraphics plots involving elements, regardless of /SHOW settings, plots will generally be
displayed faster.
VECTOR
Vector mode. In vector mode, areas, volumes, elements, and postprocessing display geometries are
shown as outlines (wireframes). When vector mode is off (default), these entities are shown filled with
color.
DITHER
When dithering is turned on (default), color intensity transitions are smoothed. This selection a
applies only to smooth-shaded images, i.e., Z-buffered [/TYPE], or raster plots with Gouraud or Phong
shading [/SHADE].
ANIM
Select the animation type used on 2-D devices on the PC platform. A KEY value of BMP (or 0) sets animation
mode to ANSYS Animation Controller (default). A KEY value of AVI (or 2) sets animation mode to AVI
movie player file.
FONT
Font selection for the ANSYS graphics window. When Label = FONT, the command format is:
/DEVICE,FONT,KEY,Val1,Val2,Val3,Val4,Val5,Val6 where KEY determines the type of font being
controlled, and values 1 through 6 control various font parameters. Note that these values are device
specific; using the same command input file [/INPUT] on different machines may yield different results.. The
following KEY values determine the font information that will be supplied to the appropriate driver (e.g.,
Postscript, X11, Win32, JPEG, ...):
KEY = 1
The command controls the LEGEND (documentation column) font.
KEY = 2
The command controls the ENTITY (node and keypoint number) font.
KEY = 3
The command controls the ANNOTATION/GRAPH font.
UNIX: Values 1 through 4 are used to find a match in the X11 database of font strings. Values 1, 2, and
3 are character strings; value 4 is a nonzero integer:
Val1
Family name (e.g., Courier). If Val1 = MENU, all other values are ignored and a font selection menu
appears (GUI must be active).
Val2
Weight (e.g., medium)
Val3
Slant (e.g., r)
Val4
Pixel size (e.g., 14). Note that this value does no affect the annotation fonts (KEY = 3). Use the /TSPEC
command for annotation font size.
Val5
unused
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3253
/DEVICE
Val6
unused
PC: The values are encoded in a PC logical font structure. Value 1 is a character string, and the remaining
values are integers:
Val1
Family name (e.g., Courier*New) Substitute an asterisk (*) for any blank character that appears in a
family name. If Val1 = MENU, all other values are ignored and a font selection menu appears (GUI
must be active). When this value is blank ANSYS uses the first available resource it finds.
Val2
Weight (0 - 1000)
Val3
Orientation (in tenths of a degree)
Val4
Height (in logical units)
Val5
Width (in logical units)
Val6
Italics (0 = OFF, 1 = ON)
TEXT
Text size specification for the ANSYS Graphics window. Using this label with the /DEVICE command requires the following form: /DEVICE,TEXT,KEY,PERCENT. KEY = 1 for LEGEND fonts; KEY = 2 for ENTITY
fonts. PERCENT specifies the new text size as a percent of the default text size. If PERCENT = 100, the new
text size is precisely the default size. If PERCENT = 200, the new text size is twice the default text size.
KEY
Control key:
OFF or 0
Turns specified function off.
ON or 1
Turns specified function on or designates the LEGEND font.
2
Designates the ENTITY font.
3
Designates the ANNOTATION/GRAPH font.
Command Default
Vector mode off (i.e., raster mode); dithering on.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
The /DEVICE,BBOX command is ignored in POST1 and SOLUTION plots. Also, the elements are displayed and
rotated if you use /DEVICE,BBOX,ON and /EDGE,WN,1,ANGLE (effectively ignoring the BBOX option).
3254
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DIGIT
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Device Options
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Font Controls>Entity Font
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Font Controls>Legend Font
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To PSCR File
DIG, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Digitizes nodes to a surface.
PREP7: Digitizing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Digitize nodes NODE1 through NODE2 in steps of NINC. NODE2 defaults to NODE1 and NINC defaults to 1.
Command Default
No surface digitizing.
Notes
Digitizes nodes to the surface defined by the DSURF command. The nodes indicated must be digitized from the
tablet after this command is given. The program must be in the interactive mode and the graphics terminal show
option [/SHOW] must be active. The global Cartesian coordinates of the nodes are stored.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Create>Nodes>Digitize Nodes>Digitize Nodes
DIGIT
Specifies "Node digitizing" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utilty Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Digitize Module
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3255
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Specifies "Display settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Plot Results
/DIST, WN, DVAL, KFACT
Specifies the viewing distance for magnifications and perspective.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
DVAL
Distance along the view line from the observer to the focus point (defaults to value producing full-window
display). Distances "too close" to the object will produce excessive magnifications. If DVAL = AUTO, zero, or
blank, the program will calculate the distance automatically. If DVAL = USER, the distance of last display will
be used (useful when last display automatically calculated distance).
KFACT
DVAL interpretation key:
0
Interpret numerical DVAL values as described above.
1
Interpret DVAL as a multiplier on the current distance (DVAL of 2 gives twice the current distance; 0.5
gives half the current distance, etc.).
Command Default
Distance is automatically calculated to produce full window magnification.
Notes
The scale factor is relative to the window shape. For example, for objects centered in a square window and with
parallel projection (no perspective), a distance of /2 (+10%) produces a full window magnification, where
is the largest in-plane vertical or horizontal dimension. See also /AUTO and /USER commands.
3256
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DJ
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Pan, Zoom, Rotate
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Magnification
DJ, ELEM, LABEL, VALUE
Specify displacement (or rotation) boundary conditions on the components of relative motion of a joint
element.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element number or ALL to be specified.
LABEL
All valid labels:
UX
Displacement in local x direction.
UY
Displacement in local y direction.
UZ
Displacement in local zdirection.
ROTX
Rotation about local x axis.
ROTY
Rotation about local y axis.
ROTZ
Rotation about local y axis.
VALUE
Value of the label.
Notes
See DJDELE for information on deleting displacement boundary conditions.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3257
DJDELE
DJDELE, ELEM, LAB
Deletes displacement (or rotation) boundary conditions on the components of relative motion of a joint
element.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element number or ALL. ALL (or leaving this blank) will delete all joint element displacement or rotational
DOFs specified in LAB.
LAB
Valid labels are:
UX
Displacement in local x direction.
UY
Displacement in local y direction.
UZ
Displacement in local z direction.
ROTX
Rotation about local x axis.
ROTY
Rotation about local y axis.
ROTZ
Rotation about local z axis.
ALL, or (blank)
Delete all valid DOFs
Notes
See DJ for information on specifying displacment or rotational boundary conditions.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Joint Elems
DJLIST, Elem
Lists boundary conditions applied to joint elements.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Elem
Element number or ALL (or blank). Lists joint element boundary conditions on the specified element(s).
3258
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DK
Notes
Valid for MPC184. See DJ for information on specifying displacement or rotational boundary conditions.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Joint Element DOF Constraints>On Picked Element
DK, KPOI, Lab, VALUE, VALUE2, KEXPND, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Defines DOF constraints at keypoints.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
Keypoint at which constraint is to be specified. If ALL, apply to all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If KPOI = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for KPOI.
Lab
Valid degree of freedom label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements);
ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations); WARP (warping). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). Electric labels: VOLT (voltage). Magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY, or AZ (vector
magnetic potentials).
VALUE
Degree of freedom value or table name reference for tabular boundary conditions. To specify a table, enclose
the table name in percent signs (%) (e.g., DK,NODE,TEMP,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define
a table.
VALUE2
Second degree of freedom value (if any). If the analysis type and the degree of freedom allow a complex input,
VALUE (above) is the real component and VALUE2 is the imaginary component.
KEXPND
Expansion key:
0
Constraint applies only to the node at this keypoint.
1
Flags this keypoint for constraint expansion.
Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Additional degree of freedom labels. The same values are applied to the keypoints for these labels.
Notes
A keypoint may be flagged using KEXPND to allow its constraints to be expanded to nodes on the attached solid
model entities having similarly flagged keypoint constraints. Constraints are transferred from keypoints to nodes
with the DTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. The expansion uses interpolation to apply constraints to the nodes
on the lines between flagged keypoints. If all keypoints of an area or volume region are flagged and the constraints
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3259
DKDELE
(label and values) are equal, the constraints are applied to the interior nodes of the region. See the D command
for a description of nodal constraints.
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname%) are available only for the following degree of freedom labels:
Electric (VOLT), structural (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ), and temperature (TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP).
Constraints specified by the DK command can conflict with other specified constraints. See Resolution of Conflicting Constraint Specifications in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>BasePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtBas>On Keypoints
DKDELE, KPOI, Lab
Deletes DOF constraints at a keypoint.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
Keypoint for which constraint is to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If KPOI = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for KPOI.
Lab
Valid degree of freedom label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements);
ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations); WARP (warping). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temper-
3260
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DKLIST
ature). FLOTRAN fluid labels: PRES (pressure); VX, VY, or VZ (velocities); ENKE or ENDS (turbulent kinetic energy
or turbulent energy dissipation); SP01 through SP06 (multiple species mass fractions) or their user-defined
names. Electric label: VOLT (voltage). Magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY, or AZ (vector
magnetic potentials). High-frequency electromagnetic label: AX (Electric Wall or Magnetic Wall boundary
condition).
Notes
Deletes the degree of freedom constraints (and all corresponding finite element constraints) at a keypoint. See
the DDELE command for details.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All KPs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All KPs
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>TimeInt>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>ScalarPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Keypoints
DKLIST, KPOI
Lists the DOF constraints at keypoints.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
List constraints for this keypoint. If ALL (default), list for all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If KPOI = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for KPOI.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3261
DL
Notes
Listing applies to the selected keypoints [KSEL] and the selected degree of freedom labels [DOFSEL].
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On All Keypoints
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On Picked KPs
DL, LINE, AREA, Lab, Value1, Value2
Defines DOF constraints on lines.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line at which constraints are to be specified. If ALL, apply to all selected lines [LSEL]. If LINE = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for LINE
AREA
Area containing line. The normal to the symmetry or antisymmetry surface is assumed to lie on this area.
Defaults to the lowest numbered selected area containing the line number.
Lab
Symmetry label (see 2):
SYMM
Generate symmetry constraints for non-FLOTRAN models.
ASYM
Generate antisymmetry constraints for non-FLOTRAN models.
ANSYS DOF labels (see 3, 4, and 5):
UX
Displacement in X direction.
UY
Displacement in Y direction.
UZ
Displacement in Z direction.
ROTX
Rotation about X axis.
ROTY
Rotation about Y axis.
ROTZ
Rotation about Z axis.
3262
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DL
WARP
Warping magnitude.
TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP
Temperature
VOLT
Electric scalar potential.
AX
Magnetic vector potential in X direction.
AY
Magnetic vector potential in Y direction.
AZ
Magnetic vector potential in Z direction.
ALL
Applies all appropriate DOF labels.
FLOTRAN standard DOF labels (see 3): VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
FLOTRAN Species Labels (see 4): SP01, SP02, SP03, SP04, SP05, SP06
FLOTRAN Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian formulation Mesh Displacement Labels (see 6): UX, UY, UZ
Value1
Value of DOF (real part) or table name reference on the line. Valid for all DOF labels. To specify a table, enclose
the table name in % signs (e.g., DL,LINE,AREA,TEMP,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define a table.
If Lab = ENKE and Value1 = -1, a FLOTRAN flag is set to indicate a moving wall.
If Lab = ENDS and Value1 = -1, FLOTRAN generalized symmetry conditions are applied. Velocity components
are set tangential to the symmetry surface if the ALE formulation is not activated. They are set equal to the
mesh velocity if the ALE formulation is activated.
Value2
For FLOTRAN DOFs:
0
Values are applied only to nodes within the line.
1
Values are applied to the endpoints of the line as well as to the internal nodes (see 3).
For VOLT DOFs:
Actual value of the imaginary component of the degree of freedom.
Notes
1.
You can transfer constraints from lines to nodes with the DTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. See the DK
command for information about generating other constraints at lines.
2.
Symmetry and antisymmetry constraints are generated as described on the DSYM command.
3.
For the velocity DOF (VX, VY, VZ), a zero value will override a nonzero value at the intersection of two
lines.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3263
DL
4.
You can use the MSSPEC command to change FLOTRAN species labels to user-defined labels. You must
define these labels with the MSSPEC command before using them on the DL command.
5.
Setting Lab = VOLT and Value1 = 0 applies the J-normal boundary condition (current density vector (J)
flows normal to the line). No input is required for the J-parallel condition because it is the natural
boundary condition.
6.
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname%) are available only for the following degree of
freedom labels: Electric (VOLT), FLOTRAN (UX, UY, UZ, PRES, VX, VY, VZ, ENKE, ENDS, TEMP, SP01, SP02,
SP03, SP04, SP05, and SP06); Structural (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ), and temperature (TEMP, TBOT,
TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP).
7.
Constraints specified by the DL command can conflict with other specified constraints. See Resolution
of Conflicting Constraint Specifications in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
8.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>J-Normal>On
Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On
Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>...with
Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>On
Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry
B.C.>...with Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry B.C.>On
Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>...with Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>...with Area
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>J-Normal>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>...with Area
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry B.C.>...with Area
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry B.C.>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>On Lines
3264
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DLDELE
DLDELE, LINE, Lab
Deletes DOF constraints on a line.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line for which constraints are to be deleted. If ALL, delete for all selected lines [LSEL]. If LINE = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for LINE
Lab
Constraint label:
ALL
All constraints.
SYMM
Symmetry constraints.
ASYM
Antisymmetry constraints.
UX
Displacement in X direction.
UY
Displacement in Y direction.
UZ
Displacement in Z direction.
ROTX
Rotation about X axis.
ROTY
Rotation about Y axis.
ROTZ
Rotation about Z axis.
WARP
Warping magnitude.
VX
Velocity component in X direction.
VY
Velocity component in Y direction.
VZ
Velocity component in Z direction.
PRES
Pressure.
TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP
Temperature.
ENKE
Turbulent Kinetic Energy.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3265
DLDELE
ENDS
Energy Dissipation Rate.
VOLT
Electric scalar potential.
SP01SP06
Multiple Species Mass Fraction.
AX
Magnetic vector potential in X direction.
AY
Magnetic vector potential in Y direction.
AZ
Magnetic vector potential in Z direction.
Notes
Deletes the degree of freedom constraints (and all corresponding finite element constraints) on a line previously
specified with the DL command. See the DDELE command for delete details.
Warning: On previously meshed lines, all constraints on affected nodes will also be deleted,
whether or not they were specified by the DL command.
If the multiple species labels have been changed to user-defined labels via the MSSPEC command, use the userdefined labels.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Species>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Constraint>On All Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PerfEC>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>Voltage>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Pressure DOF>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Pressure DOF>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Species>On Lines
3266
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DLLIST
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Temperature>On Lines
DLIST, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Lists DOF constraints.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
List constraints for nodes NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If ALL (default),
NODE2 and NINC are ignored and constraints for all selected nodes [NSEL] are listed. If NODE1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for NODE1(NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Listing applies to the selected nodes [NSEL] and the selected degree of freedom labels [DOFSEL].
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On All Nodes
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On Picked Nodes
DLLIST, LINE
Lists DOF constraints on a line.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
List constraints for this line. If ALL (default), list for all selected lines [LSEL]. If LINE = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for LINE.
Notes
Lists the degree of freedom constraints on a line previously specified with the DL command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On All Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3267
DMOVE
Utility Menu>List>Loads>DOF Constraints>On Picked Lines
DMOVE, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Digitizes nodes on surfaces and along intersections.
PREP7: Digitizing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Digitize nodes NODE1through NODE2 in steps of NINC. NODE2 defaults to NODE1 and NINC defaults to 1.
Notes
Digitizes nodes on undefined surfaces, warped surfaces, and along intersection lines. Two orthogonal views
showing the nodes on a plane in each view are required. No surfaces need be specified. Two coordinates are
determined from the second view and the other coordinate is retained from the first view. Use the DIG command
to first define nodes in one view (as determined from the DSET command). Then reset the view and use this
command to move the nodes to the proper location.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Create>Nodes>Digitize Nodes>2-View Digitize
DMPEXT, SMODE, TMODE, Dmpname, Freqb, Freqe, NSTEPS
Extracts modal damping coefficients in a specified frequency range.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SMODE
Source mode number. There is no default for this field; you must enter an integer greater than zero.
TMODE
Target mode. Defaults to SMODE.
Dmpname
Array parameter name containing the damping results. Defaults to d_damp.
Freqb
Beginning frequency range (real number greater than zero) or EIG at eigenfrequency of source mode. EIG is
valid only if SMODE = TMODE. There is no default for this field; you must enter a value.
Freqe
End of frequency range. Must be blank for Freqb = EIG. Default is Freqb.
NSTEPS
Number of substeps. Defaults to 1.
3268
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DMPRAT
Notes
DMPEXT invokes an ANSYS macro that uses modal projection techniques to compute the damping force by the
modal velocity of the source mode onto the target mode. From the damping force, damping parameters are
extracted. DMPEXT creates an array parameter Dmpname, with the following entries in each row:
response frequency
modal damping coefficient
modal squeeze stiffness coefficient
damping ratio
squeeze-to-structural stiffness ratio
The macro requires the modal displacements from the file Jobname.EFL obtained from the RMFLVEC command.
In addition, a node component FLUN must exist from all FLUID136 nodes. The computed damping ratio may be
used to specify constant or modal damping by means of the DMPRAT or MDAMP commands. For Rayleigh
damping, use the ABEXTRACT command to compute ALPHAD and BETAD damping parameters. See Chapter 16,
Thin Film Analysis for more information on thin film analyses.
The macro uses the LSSOLVE command to perform two load steps for each frequency. The first load case contains
the solution of the source mode excitation and can be used for further postprocessing. Solid model boundary
conditions are deleted from the model. In addition, prescribed nodal boundary conditions are applied to the
model. You should carefully check the boundary conditions of your model prior to executing a subsequent
analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>ThinFilm>DampExtract>Eigenfrequency
Main Menu>Solution>ThinFilm>DampExtract>Frequency Range
DMPRAT, RATIO
Sets a constant damping ratio.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
RATIO
Damping ratio (for example, 2% is input as 0.02).
Command Default
Use damping as defined in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3269
DNSOL
Notes
Sets a constant damping ratio for use in the harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARMIC) analysis (full, reduced, and
modal superposition), the mode superposition transient (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis, and the spectrum (ANTYPE,SPECTR) analysis.
Note that for structures with multiple materials, MP,DMPR can be used to specify constant material damping
coefficients for full and modal harmonic analyses. MP,DMPR is not applicable for transient or spectrum analyses.
In a full and reduced harmonic analysis, beta damping (BETAD) for this command is calculated via Equation 1523.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
DNSOL, NODE, Item, Comp, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Defines or modifies solution results at a node.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node for which results are specified. If ALL, apply to all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may
also be substituted for NODE.
Item
Label identifying results, see DNSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels. Items also require a component
label.
Comp
Component of the item. Valid component labels are shown DNSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Value assigned to result. If zero, a zero value will be assigned. If blank, the value remains unchanged. Additional values (if any) assigned to the remaining components (in the order corresponding to the Comp list
shown below for the specified Item (starting from the specified Comp label and proceeding to the right).
Notes
DNSOL can be used only with FULL graphics activated (/GRAPHICS,FULL); it will not work correctly with
PowerGraphics activated.
DNSOL defines or modifies solution results in the database at a node. For example, DNSOL,35,U,X,.001,.002,.001
assigns values 0.001, 0.002, and 0.001 to UX, UY, and UZ (respectively) for node 35. All results that are changed
in the database, including the nodal degree of freedom results, are available for all subsequent operations. All
data is stored in the solution coordinate system, but will be displayed in the results coordinate system [RSYS].
Use the PRNSOL command to list the current results.
3270
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DNSOL
Data input by DNSOL is stored in temporary space and does not replace information in the database. Therefore,
data input by this command may be overwritten if a change is made to the selected set of nodes.
Issuing the DNSOL command or its GUI equivalent requires you to place the data type (stress/strain) in the element
nodal records. To get around this requirement, use the DESOL command or equivalent path to add a "dummy"
element stress/strain record.
Result items are available depending on element type; check the individual element for availability. Valid item
and component labels for element results are:
DNSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels for Nodal DOF Results
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural displacement.
ROT
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural rotation.
TEMP[1]
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
VOLT
Electric potential.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation.
Valid Item and Component Labels for Area and Volume Element Results
Item
S
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT
Stress intensity.
"
EQV
Equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT
Thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Thermal equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT
Plastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
1, 2, 3
Principal creep strain.
EPEL
EPTH
EPPL
EPCR
"
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3271
DNSOL
Valid Item and Component Labels for Area and Volume Element Results
Item
Comp
Description
"
INT
Creep strain intensity.
"
EQV
Creep equivalent strain.
EPSW
Swelling strain.
NL
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
ELASTIC
Elastic strain energy density.
"
PLASTIC
Plastic strain energy density.
"
CREEP
Creep strain energy density.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic force or vector sum.
SEND
Valid Item Labels for FLOTRAN Nodal Results
Item
Description
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
CMUV
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
1.
3272
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use the labels TBOT, TE2, TE3, ..., TTOP
instead of TEMP.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DOFSEL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Define/Modify>Nodal Results
DOF, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10
Adds degrees of freedom to the current DOF set.
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10
Valid labels are: UX, UY, UZ (structural displacements); ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ (structural rotations); TEMP, TBOT,
TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperatures); PRES (pressure); VOLT (voltage); MAG (magnetic scalar potential); AX, AY,
AZ (magnetic vector potentials); CURR (current); EMF (electromotive force drop); DELETE.
Command Default
Use degree of freedom set determined from element types.
Notes
The degree of freedom (DOF) set for the model is determined from all element types defined. For example, if
only LINK1 is defined, the set is UX,UY. If LINK1 and BEAM3 are defined, the set is UX,UY,ROTZ. This command
may be used to add to the current set. The ALL label may be used on some commands to represent all labels of
the current degree of freedom set for the model. Issue the DOF command with no arguments to list the current
set. Use the DELETE label to delete any previously added DOFs and return to the default DOF set.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Element Type>Add DOF
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Element Type>Remove DOFs
DOFSEL, Type, Dof1, Dof2, Dof3, Dof4, Dof5, Dof6
Selects a DOF label set for reference by other commands.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set of labels.
A
Add labels to the current set.
U
Unselect (remove) labels from the current set.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3273
DOFSEL
ALL
Restore the full set of labels.
STAT
Display the current select status.
Dof1, Dof2, Dof3, Dof4, Dof5, Dof6
Used only with Type = S, A, or U. Valid structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements); U (UX, UY, and UZ);
ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations); ROT (ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ); DISP (U and ROT). Valid thermal labels: TEMP,
TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). Valid fluid flow labels: PRES (pressure); VX, VY, or VZ (fluid velocities);
V (VX, VY, and VZ); ENKE, ENDS (turbulent kinetic energy, turbulent energy dissipation); EN (ENKE and ENDS
turbulent energies) (FLOTRAN). Valid electric labels: VOLT (voltage); EMF (electromotive force drop); CURR
(current). Valid magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY or AZ (vector magnetic potentials);
A (AX, AY and AZ); CURR (current). Valid structural force labels: FX, FY, or FZ (forces); F (FX, FY, and FZ); MX,
MY, or MZ (moments); M (MX, MY, and MZ); FORC (F and M). Valid thermal force labels: HEAT, HBOT, HE2,
HE3, . . ., HTOP (heat flow). Valid fluid flow force labels: FLOW (fluid flow). Valid electric force labels: AMPS
(current flow), CHRG (electric charge). Valid magnetic force labels: FLUX (scalar magnetic flux); CSGX, CSGY,
or CSGZ (magnetic current segments); CSG (CSGX, CSGY, and CSGZ).
Command Default
Degree of freedom (and the corresponding force) labels are determined from the model.
Notes
Selects a degree of freedom label set for reference by other commands. The label set is used on certain commands
where ALL is either input in the degree of freedom label field or implied. The active label set has no effect on the
solution degrees of freedom. Specified labels which are not active in the model (from the ET or DOF command)
are ignored. As a convenience, a set of force labels corresponding to the degree of freedom labels is also selected.
For example, selecting UX also causes FX to be selected (and vice versa). The force label set is used on certain
commands where ALL is input in the force label field.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Constraints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Forces
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Constraints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Forces
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Constraints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Forces
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Constraints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Forces
3274
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DSCALE
DOMEGA, DOMGX, DOMGY, DOMGZ
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the structure.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DOMGX, DOMGY, DOMGZ
Rotational acceleration of the structure about the global Cartesian X , Y, and Z axes.
Notes
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the structure about each of the global Cartesian axes. Rotational accelerations may be defined in analysis types ANTYPE,STATIC, HARMIC (full or mode superposition), TRANS (full or
mode superposition), and SUBSTR. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Units are radians/time2. Related
commands are ACEL, CGLOC, CGOMGA, DCGOMG, and OMEGA.
In a modal harmonic or transient analysis, you must apply the load in the modal portion of the analysis. ANSYS
calculates a load vector and writes it to the mode shape file, which you can apply via the LVSCALE command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>Global
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>Global
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>Global
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Accel>Global
DSCALE, RFACT, IFACT, TBASE
Scales DOF constraint values.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RFACT
Scale factor for the real component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale factor.
IFACT
Scale factor for the imaginary component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale
factor.
TBASE
Base temperature for temperature difference. For temperatures, the scale factor is applied to the temperature
difference (T-TBASE) and then added to TBASE. T is the current temperature.
Notes
Scales degree of freedom constraint values (displacement, temperature, etc.) in the database. Scaling applies to
the previously defined values for the selected nodes [NSEL] and the selected degree of freedom labels [DOFSEL].
Issue DLIST command to review results. Solid model boundary conditions are not scaled by this command, but
boundary conditions on the FE model are scaled.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3275
/DSCALE
Note Such scaled FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by unscaled solid model boundary
conditions if a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
DSCALE does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Constraints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Constraints
/DSCALE, WN, DMULT
Sets the displacement multiplier for displacement displays.
GRAPHICS: Scaling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
DMULT
AUTO or 0
Scale displacements automatically so that maximum displacement (vector amplitude) displays as 5
percent of the maximum model length, as measured in the global Cartesian X, Y, or Z directions. This is
the default setting when NLGEOM is OFF.
1
Do not scale displacements (i.e., scale displacements by 1.0, true to geometry). Often used with large
deflection results. This is the default setting when NLGEOM is ON.
FACTOR
Scale displacements by numerical value input for FACTOR.
OFF
Remove displacement scaling (i.e., scale displacements by 0.0, no distortion).
USER
Set DMULT to that used for last display (useful when last DMULT value was automatically calculated).
Command Default
The default value is 1.0 when NLGEOM is ON, and AUTO when NLGEOM is OFF.
Notes
If Multi-Plots are not being displayed, and the current device is a 3-D device [/SHOW,3D], then the displacement
scale in all active windows will be the same, even if separate /DSCALE commands are issued for each active
window. For efficiency, ANSYS 3-D graphics logic maintains a single data structure (segment), which contains
only one displacement scale. The program displays the same segment (displacement scale) in all windows. Only
the view settings will be different in each of the active windows.
3276
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DSOPT
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Displacement Scaling
DSET, NODE1, NODE2, NODE3, DDEV
Sets the scale and drawing plane orientation for a digitizing tablet.
PREP7: Digitizing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NODE3
Any three (noncolinear) nodes defining a plane parallel to the drawing. Nodes and actual locations (in any
coordinate system) must have been previously defined.
DDEV
Digitizing device type number (device dependent).
Notes
Sets drawing scale size and defines the drawing plane orientation for use with a digitizing tablet. Drawings must
be to scale. Views must represent standard orthogonal parallel projections. The three nodes indicated must be
digitized [DIG] from the tablet after this command is issued.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Create>Nodes>Digitize Nodes>Set Plane/Device
DSOPT, Configopt, Ndomains, Max_Iter, Lev_Diff
Specify the distributed solver settings.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Configopt
Selects the distributed mode for solvers.
Local
Sends domains to the local system processors only. The number of processors is set by the DSPROC
command. This option works for shared memory machines where one machine contains more than one
CPU. EQSLV,DPCG (or DJCG or DDS) controls the selection of the appropriate executable implicitly.
File
Uses the config90.dds file to specify multiprocessor options. This option works for both shared memory
and distributed memory machines across a network. The specified executable in the config90.dds file
should be consistent with the EQSLV command setting.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3277
DSOPT
Script
Uses the ansdds90 script (ansdds.bat on Windows platforms) to specify multiprocessor commands and
options. This option works for both shared memory and distributed memory machines across a network.
The specified executable in the ansdds90 script should be consistent with the EQSLV command.
Ndomains
AUTO
Automatically sets the number of preconditioner domains (default; recommended).
N
Sets the number of preconditioner domains to N>1. Typically, the DDS solver uses about 3000 DOFs per
preconditioner domain. The DPCG solver uses about 80 elements per domain. For the DPCG solver, the
more domains used, the more robust the preconditioner will be, but the more expensive (more memory
and CPU time) as well.
Max_Iter
Maximum number of iterations allowed for the distributed solver (default = 300). Most solutions should
converge in less than 300 iterations. If the matrix system is ill-conditioned, more than 300 iterations may
help achieve convergence. This field applies only to the DDS solver. For DPCG or DJCG, use EQSLV to specify
the maximum number of iterations.
Lev_Diff
Level of difficulty of the analysis (1 - 4; default = 1). The higher the level of difficulty, the more difficult the
analysis the solver can handle and the more memory and CPU time the solver will take. Lev_Diff = 1 or 2
is recommended for less difficult problems (such as well-shaped 3-D solid elements). Lev_Diff = 3 or 4 is
recommended for more ill-conditioned (difficult) problems (more than 30% of elements are beams or shells).
For models using nonuniform materials, use a higher level of difficulty. Analyses with Lev_Diff = 3 or 4 will
converge faster, but with high memory consumption and increased CPU time per iteration.
Notes
DSOPT lets you define machine and network information for running large models on multiple processors using
the distributed solvers. The processors may be on different systems, but must be on the same type of platform
(all SGI/IRIX systems, for example).
The DSOPT command is valid for the DPCG, DJCG, and DDS solvers.
The distributed solvers are part of Parallel Performance for ANSYS, which is a separately-licensed product. See
Improving ANSYS Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques
Guide for more information.
Issue DSOPT,STAT to display the current settings.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
Note This menu path is only available if ANSYS is invoked with the -pp command line option.
3278
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DSUM
DSPROC, NPROC
Specifies number of processors for a distributed solution.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP <>
NPROC
The number of processors (system dependent) to use. Defaults to 1. For shared memory machines where
one machine contains more than one CPU, ANSYS recommends setting NPROC no higher than the number
of available processors minus one; for example, on a four-processor system, set NPROC to 3.
For the DDS solver, NPROC is used in conjunction with DSOPT,local option only. However, for the DPCG or
DJCG solvers, you must use this option explicitly. For these cases, NPROC is the total number of processors
to be used for solving, summed from the entire network. This requirement applies to DSOPT,local, file, or
script options with the DPCG or DJCG solvers.
Notes
Setting NPROC to greater than the number of actual physical processors available may negatively impact performance and is not recommended.
Issue DSPROC,STAT to display the current settings.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
Note This menu path is only available if ANSYS is invoked with the -pp command line option.
DSUM, SIGNIF, Label, TD
Specifies the double sum mode combination method.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SIGNIF
Combine only those modes whose significance level exceeds the SIGNIF threshold. For single point, multipoint, or DDAM response (SPOPT, SPRS, MPRS, or DDAM), the significance level of a mode is defined as the
mode coefficient of the mode, divided by the maximum mode coefficient of all modes. Any mode whose
significance level is less than SIGNIF is considered insignificant and is not contributed to the mode combinations. The higher the SIGNIF threshold, the fewer the number of modes combined. SIGNIF defaults to
0.001. If SIGNIF is specified as 0.0, it is taken as 0.0. (This mode combination method is not valid for SPOPT,
PSD.)
Label
Label identifying the combined mode solution output.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3279
DSURF
DISP
Displacement solution (default). Displacements, stresses, forces, etc., are available.
VELO
Velocity solution. Velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc., are available.
ACEL
Acceleration solution. Accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc., are available.
TD
Time duration for earthquake or shock spectrum. TD defaults to 10.
Notes
This command is also valid for PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
DSURF, KCN, XSURF, YSURF, ZSURF
Defines the surface upon which digitized nodes lie.
PREP7: Digitizing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Surface is located in coordinate system KCN. KCN may be 0,1,2 or any previously defined local coordinate
system number.
XSURF, YSURF, ZSURF
Input one value to define the surface constant. Input 999 in the other two fields. Interpret fields as R, , Z for
cylindrical or R, , for spherical or toroidal coordinate systems. XSURF and YSURF default to 999 if KCN = 0.
Command Default
Surface associated with DIG command is the global Cartesian X-Y plane with Z = 0.
Notes
Defines the surface upon which the nodes to be digitized (with the DIG command) actually lie. Surfaces are
defined by a coordinate system number and a coordinate constant [MOVE]. Two coordinates are determined
from the drawing and converted to surface coordinates. The third coordinate is defined from the input surface
constant. If nodes lie on warped or undefined surfaces, use the DMOVE command.
3280
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DSYM
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Create>Nodes>Digitize Nodes>Define Surface
DSYM, Lab, Normal, KCN
Specifies symmetry or antisymmetry DOF constraints on nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Symmetry label:
SYMM
Generate symmetry constraints as described below (default).
ASYM
Generate antisymmetry constraints as described below.
Normal
Surface orientation label to determine the constraint set (surface is assumed to be perpendicular to this coordinate direction in coordinate system KCN):
X
Surface is normal to coordinate X direction (default). Interpreted as R direction for non-Cartesian coordinate
systems.
Y
Z
Surface is normal to coordinate Y direction. direction for non-Cartesian coordinate systems.
Surface is normal to coordinate Z direction. direction for spherical or toroidal coordinate systems.
KCN
Reference number of global or local coordinate system used to define surface orientation.
Notes
Specifies symmetry or antisymmetry degree of freedom constraints on the selected nodes. The nodes are first
automatically rotated (any previously defined rotations on these nodes are redefined) into coordinate system
KCN, then zero-valued constraints are generated, as described below, on the selected degree of freedom set
(limited to displacement, velocity, and magnetic degrees of freedom) [DOFSEL]. Constraints are defined in the
(rotated) nodal coordinate system, as usual. See the D and NROTAT commands for additional details about
constraints and nodal rotations.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Symmetry and Antisymmetry Constraints:
Symmetry or antisymmetry constraint generations are based upon the valid degrees of freedom in the model,
i.e., the degrees of freedom associated with the elements attached to the nodes. The degree of freedom labels
used in the generation depend on the Normal label.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3281
DSYM
For displacement degrees of freedom, the constraints generated are:
SYMM
ASYM
Normal
2-D
3-D
2-D
3-D
UX, ROTZ
UX, ROTZ, ROTY
UY
UY, UZ, ROTX
UY, ROTZ
UY, ROTZ, ROTX
UX
UX, UZ, ROTY
--
UZ, ROTX, ROTY
--
UX, UY, ROTZ
For velocity degrees of freedom, the constraints generated are:
SYMM
ASYM
Normal
2-D
3-D
2-D
3-D
VX
VX
VY
VY, VZ
VY
VY
VX
VX, VZ
--
VZ
--
VX, VY
For magnetic degrees of freedom, the SYMM label generates flux normal conditions (flux flows normal to the
surface). Where no constraints are generated, the flux normal condition is "naturally" satisfied. The ASYM label
generates flux parallel conditions (flux flows parallel to the surface).
SYMM
ASYM
Normal
2-D
3-D
2-D
3-D
--
AX
AZ
AY, AZ
--
AY
AZ
AX, AZ
--
AZ
--
AX, AY
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Normal>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry B.C.>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Normal>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Flux Par'l>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Antisymm B.C.>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Displacement>Symmetry B.C.>On Nodes
3282
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DTRAN
DSYS, KCN
Activates a display coordinate system for geometry listings and plots.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Coordinate system reference number. KCN may be 0,1,2 or any previously defined local coordinate system
number.
Note If a cylinder is displayed in its cylindrical coordinate system (with a 1,0,0 view), it will be unrolled (developed) into a flat plane (with theta along the Y direction).
Command Default
Global Cartesian (KCN = 0) display coordinate system.
Notes
Boundary condition symbols, vector arrows, and element coordinate system triads are not transformed to the
display coordinate system. The display system orientation (for the default view) is X horizontal to the right, Y
vertical upward, and Z out of the screen (normal).
Line directions and area directions (/PSYMB,LDIR and /PSYMB,ADIR) are not plotted for DSYS >0.
When you create ANSYS 3-D annotation, the coordinates are stored to the database in the DSYS that was active
at the time of creation. Changing the DSYS does not change the annotation coordinate data in the database.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Display CS to>Global Cartesian
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Display CS to>Global Cylindrical
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Display CS to>Global Spherical
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Change Display CS to>Specified Coord Sys
DTRAN
Transfers solid model DOF constraints to the finite element model.
SOLUTION: Solid Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Constraints are transferred only from selected solid model entities to selected nodes. The DTRAN operation is
also done if the SBCTRAN command is issued, and is automatically done upon initiation of the solution calculations
[SOLVE].
This command is also valid in PREP7.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3283
DUMP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Constraints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Constraints
DUMP, NSTRT, NSTOP
Dumps the contents of a binary file.
AUX2: Binary Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSTRT, NSTOP
Dump file from record NSTRT (defaults to 1) to NSTOP (defaults to NSTRT). If NSTRT = HEAD, dump only record
1 of the file (NSTOP and the format specification are ignored). If NSTRT = ALL, dump the entire file.
Notes
Dumps the file named on the AUX2 FILEAUX2 command according the format specified on the FORM command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>List>Binary Files
Utility Menu>List>Files>Binary Files
/DV3D, Lab, Key
Sets 3-D device option modes.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Mode label:
ACCU
Allows ANSYS to use the accumulation buffer for OpenGL graphics. Activating this feature will provide
faster model rotation when shaded backgrounds are in use. This feature is off by default.
ACTR
Label term to designate the cursor position as the center for automatic dynamic rotational center capability . The subsequent Key value (see below) turns this capability on and off. This feature is on by default.
(Available for OpenGL displays only)
ANIM
Animation mode. The ANIM option allows you to create animation frames in pixmap mode instead of
display list mode. This may improve large model performance, but it eliminates local manipulation while
animation is in progress. This feature is on by default.
ANTI
Label term to control Anti-aliasing, a smoothing technique for your graph plots. (see below) The subsequent Key value turns this capability on and off. The default for this feature is off. (Available for OpenGL
displays only).
3284
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/DV3D
DGEN
Local manipulation degenerate mode. You access the DGEN option to set wire-frame local manipulation
mode for 3-D devices (device dependent). This feature is off by default.
DLIST
With DLIST, you can specify whether screen updates and redraws will be performed using the ANSYS
Display List, or the 3-D device's Display List. DLIST is off by default. When using ANSYS on a network,
DLIST should be set "ON."
DELS
You use DELS to suppress contour display screen overwrites when /NOERASE is active. This prevents
the bleed-through that occurs when you overlay contour plots.
TRIS
Triangle strip mode. Tri-stripping provides faster 3-D display capabilities and is on by default. Some display
enhancements, such as texturing, are adversely affected by tri-stripping. You can turn off tri-stripping
in order to improve these display functions. Be sure to turn tri-stripping on after the desired output is
obtained.
Key
The following key options apply to Lab = ACCU:
0
(OFF) The accumulation buffer is not accessed. (default)
1
(ON) Access to the buffer is enabled.
The following key options apply to Lab = ACTR:
0
(OFF) The cursor position has no effect on the existing rotational center for dynamic operations.
1
(ON) The rotational center for dynamic rotations in OpenGL is determined by the position of the mouse
cursor on (or within 15 pixels of) the model. Any rotations that are initiated with the cursor more than
15 pixels from the model will occur about the midpoint of the Z-axis at that point in space. If the Z-buffer
has not been refreshed the Z-axis will have an infinite value, and rotations will appear to occur about an
extremely long Z-axis. This behavior stops when the graphics window is refreshed or replotted. (default)
Note that when using the GUI in 3-D mode, when ACTR = 1, the Rotational Center option is grayed out
under Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Setting because the rotational center is determined strictly by
the position of the mouse cursor.
The following key options apply to Lab = ANIM:
0
Display list animation. The object can be dynamically manipulated while animating.
1
On UNIX, device-dependent pixmap animation is used. On the PC, bitmap animation is provided (default).
2
On the PC only, this option provides AVI animation which uses the AVI movie player .
Although you can create animations of multiple ANSYS window schemes, animations created with
OpenGL display lists (/DV3D, ANIM, 0) do not retain the windowing scheme information. You CAN save
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3285
DVMORPH
multiple windows via the X11/WIN32 drivers, or via the OpenGL driver with /DV3D, ANIM, KEY in effect
(where KEY is not zero).
The following key options apply to Lab = ANTI
0
(OFF) Anti-aliasing is not active (default).
1
(ON) The anti-aliasing technique will be applied to smooth the lines in your displays (valid for OpenGL
only).
The following key options apply to Lab = DGEN:
0
Normal manipulation.
1
Wireframe Manipulation.
The following key options apply to Lab = DLIST:
0
(OFF) The ANSYS Display List is used for plotting and dynamic graphics manipulation (default).
1
(ON) The local (3-D Device) Display List is used for plotting and dynamic rotation.
The following key options apply to Lab = TRIS:
0
(OFF) Tri-stripping is off.
1
(ON) Tri-stripping is on (default).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Device Options
DVMORPH, VOLU, XAREA, RMSHKY
Move nodes in selected volumes to conform to structural displacements.
PREP7: Morphing
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
VOLU
Non-structural volume to which mesh movement (morph) applies. If ALL, apply morphing to all selected
volumes [VSEL]. If VOLU = P, graphical picking is enabled. A component may be substituted for VOLU.
XAREA
Areas to be excluded from morphing. If ALL, exclude all selected areas [ASEL]. If XAREA = P, graphical picking
is enabled. A component may be substituted for XAREA. If XAREA is blank (default), allow morphing of nodes
3286
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
DYNOPT
attached to areas of the selected volumes (VOLU) which are not shared by unselected volumes. (See Notes
for clarification).
RMSHKY
Remesh flag option:
0
Remesh the selected non-structural volumes only if mesh morphing fails.
1
Remesh the selected non-structural volumes and bypass mesh morphing.
2
Perform mesh morphing only and do not remesh.
Notes
The selected volumes should include only non-structural regions adjacent to structural regions. DVMORPH will
morph the non-structural volumes to coincide with the deflections of the structural regions.
Nodes in the structural regions move in accordance with computed displacements. Displacements from a
structural analysis must be in the database prior to issuing DVMORPH.
By default, nodes attached to areas can move along the areas. You can use XAREA to restrain nodes on certain
areas.
By default (RMSHKY = 0), DVMORPH will remesh the selected non-structural volumes entirely if a satisfactory
morphed mesh cannot be provided.
If boundary conditions and loads are applied directly to nodes and elements, the DVMORPH command requires
that these be removed before remeshing can take place.
Exercise care with initial conditions defined by the IC command. Before a structural analysis is performed for a
sequentially coupled analysis, the DVMORPH command requires that initial conditions be removed from all null
element type nodes in the non-structural regions. Use ICDELE to delete the initial conditions.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Phys Morphing>Volumes
DYNOPT
Specifies "Dynamic analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3287
DYNOPT
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Dynamics Options
3288
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
E Commands
E, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Defines an element by node connectivity.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
I
Number of node assigned to first nodal position (node I). If I = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Number assigned to second (node J) through eighth (node P) nodal position, if any.
Notes
Defines an element by its nodes and attribute values. Up to 8 nodes may be specified with the E command. If
more nodes are needed for the element, use the EMORE command. The number of nodes required and the order
in which they should be specified are described in Chapter 4 of the ANSYS Elements Reference for each element
type. Elements are automatically assigned a number [NUMSTR] as generated. The current (or default) MAT, TYPE,
REAL, SECNUM and ESYS attribute values are also assigned to the element.
When creating elements with more than 8 nodes using this command and the EMORE command, it may be
necessary to turn off shape checking using the SHPP command before issuing this command. If a valid element
type can be created without using the additional nodes on the EMORE command, this command will create that
element. The EMORE command will then modify the element to include the additional nodes. If shape checking
is active, it will be performed before the EMORE command is issued. Therefore, if the shape checking limits are
exceeded, element creation may fail before the EMORE command modifies the element into an acceptable
shape.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Auto Numbered>Thru Nodes
EALIVE, ELEM
Reactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
SOLUTION: Birth and Death
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
ELEM
Element to be reactivated. If ALL, reactivate all selected elements [ESEL]. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for ELEM.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDADAPT
Notes
Reactivates the specified element when the birth and death capability is being used. An element can be reactivated
only after it has been deactivated with the EKILL command. Reactivated elements have a zero strain (or thermal
heat storage, etc.) state.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Birth & Death>Activate Elem
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Birth & Death>Activate Elem
EDADAPT, PART, Key
Activates adaptive meshing in an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
PART
Part ID (number) for which adaptive meshing is to be turned on (or off). Use PART = STAT to list the current
adaptive meshing definitions.
Key
Adaptivity key:
OFF
Do not use adaptive meshing for the specified part ID (default).
ON
Use adaptive meshing for the specified part ID.
Command Default
Adaptive meshing is off for all parts in the model.
Notes
When adaptive meshing (adaptivity) is turned on, the mesh will automatically be regenerated to ensure adequate
element aspect ratios. Adaptive meshing is most commonly used in the analysis of large deformation processes
such as metal forming, in which the blank would need to be adaptively meshed.
Adaptive meshing is only valid for parts consisting of SHELL163 elements. By default, adaptive meshing is OFF
for all parts in the model. To specify adaptive meshing for more than one part in the model, you must issue the
EDADAPT command for each part ID. Use the EDPART command to create and list valid part IDs. Use the EDCADAPT command to define additional adaptive meshing parameters.
The EDADAPT command is not supported in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis (EDSTART,3). In addition,
a full restart cannot be performed successfully if adaptive meshing was used in the previous analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
3290
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDALE
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Adaptive Meshing>Apply to Part
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Adaptive Meshing>Status
EDALE, Option, --, AFAC, BFAC, --, DFAC, EFAC, START, END
Assigns mesh smoothing to explicit dynamic elements that use the ALE formulation.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed:
ADD
Add smoothing controls (default).
DELETE
Delete smoothing controls.
LIST
List smoothing controls.
--
Unused field.
AFAC
Simple average smoothing weight factor (default = 0).
BFAC
Volume weighted smoothing weight factor (default = 0).
--
Unused field.
DFAC
Equipotential smoothing weight factor (default = 0).
EFAC
Equilibrium smoothing weight factor (default = 0). EFAC is only applicable to PLANE162 elements.
START
Start time for ALE smoothing (default = 0).
END
End time for ALE smoothing (default = 1e20).
Command Default
The Lagrangian formulation is used for all elements by default.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3291
EDASMP
Notes
Mesh smoothing specified by the EDALE command is only applicable to PLANE162 and SOLID164 elements that
are flagged to use the ALE formulation (KEYPOPT(5) = 1). To activate the ALE formulation, you must specify at
least one smoothing weight factor on this command and the number of cycles between advection (NADV) on
the EDGCALE command. See Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian Formulation in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for
more information.
The EDALE command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>ALE Options>Define
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>ALE Options>Delete All
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>ALE Options>List All
EDASMP, Option, ASMID, PART1, PART2, PART3, PART4, PART5, PART6, PART7, PART8, PART9, PART10, PART11,
PART12, PART13, PART14, PART15, PART16
Creates a part assembly to be used in an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the part assembly option to be performed.
ADD
Adds a part assembly (default).
DELETE
Deletes a part assembly.
LIST
Lists each part assembly number, and the part numbers that make up each part assembly.
ASMID
User defined part assembly ID number. The part assembly number cannot be the same as any currently
defined part ID number.
PART1, . . ., PART16
Part numbers to be included in the assembly (up to 16 different parts).
Command Default
Default for Option is ADD. You must specify ASMID to avoid an error message.
3292
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDBOUND
Notes
Several ANSYS LS-DYNA commands (such as EDCGEN, EDPVEL, and EDIS) refer to assembly ID numbers. If you
intend to use assembly ID numbers with these commands, you must first define the assembly ID numbers using
EDASMP.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Assembly Options
EDBOUND, Option, Lab, Cname, XC, YC, ZC, Cname2, COPT
Defines a boundary plane for sliding or cyclic symmetry.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the symmetry plane option to be performed.
ADD
Define a sliding or cyclic symmetry plane.
DELE
Delete a specified sliding or cyclic symmetry plane.
LIST
List defined sliding or cyclic symmetry planes.
Lab
Valid boundary options for defining a symmetry plane. A valid label must always be specified for adding,
deleting, or listing boundary planes.
SLIDE
Sliding symmetry plane.
CYCL
Cyclic symmetry plane.
Cname
Name of existing component [CM] to which boundary symmetry is to be applied or deleted. Component
must consist of nodes. For Option = LIST, a component is not required because all defined symmetry planes
are listed for the specified Lab. For Option = DELE, use Cname = ALL to delete all symmetry planes currently
defined for the specified Lab.
XC, YC, ZC
X, Y, and Z coordinates of the head of the vector defining normal (Lab = SLIDE) or axis of rotation (Lab =
CYCL). The tail of the vector is at the global origin.
Cname2
Name of existing nodal component [CM] for which second cyclic boundary plane is to be applied. Each node
in Cname2 component is constrained to a corresponding node in the first component set. Therefore, com-
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3293
EDBOUND
ponent Cname2 must have the same number of nodes as the Cname component. Cname2 is valid only for
Lab = CYCL.
COPT
Specified constraint option for sliding plane symmetry. COPT is valid only for Lab = SLIDE. Valid COPT options
are:
0
Nodes move on normal plane (default).
1
Nodes move only in vector direction.
Notes
For cyclic symmetry, the node numbers in component Cname2 must differ from the node numbers in Cname by
a constant offset value. In addition, the nodes in Cname2 must have locations which, if given in cylindrical coordinates, all differ by the same angle from the nodes in Cname. The following figure shows how you would
define components for a cyclic symmetry plane.
V % F P I % F C 0
51UTCSRQ 4HG0EDB#
8( 1650 A3111@9'6&$#
2 4 % 20 8 %
71 650 431&)(&$#
2 % 2 0 ' %
!
"
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>Symm Bndry Plane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>Symm Bndry Plane>Delete All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>Symm Bndry Plane>Delete Individ
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>Symm Bndry Plane
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>Symm Bndry Plane>Delete All
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>Symm Bndry Plane>Delete Individ
3294
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDBX
EDBX, Option, BOXID, XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, ZMIN, ZMAX
Creates a box shaped volume to be used in a contact definition for explicit dynamics.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the contact box definition option to be performed.
ADD
Adds a contact box definition (default).
DELETE
Deletes a contact box definition.
LIST
Lists each box ID number, and the coordinates that make up each box shaped volume.
BOXID
User defined list ID number.
XMIN
Minimum x-coordinate.
XMAX
Maximum x-coordinate.
YMIN
Minimum y-coordinate.
YMAX
Maximum y-coordinate.
ZMIN
Minimum z-coordinate.
ZMAX
Maximum z-coordinate.
Command Default
Default for Option is ADD. You must specify BOXID to avoid an error message.
Notes
The ANSYS LS-DYNA command EDCGEN allows you to define contact and target volumes using box ID numbers
BOXID1 and BOXID2, respectively. If you use these arguments to define contact volumes, you must first define
their coordinates using the EDBX command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Define Box
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3295
EDBVIS
EDBVIS, QVCO, LVCO
Specifies global bulk viscosity coefficients for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
QVCO
Quadratic viscosity coefficient (defaults to 1.5).
LVCO
Linear viscosity coefficient (defaults to 0.06).
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Bulk Viscosity
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Bulk Viscosity
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Bulk Viscosity
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Bulk Viscosity
EDCADAPT, FREQ, TOL, OPT, MAXLVL, BTIME, DTIME, LCID, ADPSIZE, ADPASS, IREFLG, ADPENE, ADPTH, MAXEL
Specifies adaptive meshing controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
FREQ
Time interval between adaptive mesh refinements (default = 0.0). Use FREQ = STAT to list the current adaptive
meshing control settings.
TOL
Adaptive angle tolerance (in degrees) for which adaptive meshing will occur (default = 1e31). If the relative
angle change between elements exceeds the specified tolerance value, the elements will be refined.
OPT
Adaptivity option:
1
Angle change (in degrees) of elements is based on original mesh configuration (default).
2
Angle change (in degrees) of elements is incrementally based on previously refined mesh.
MAXLVL
Maximum number of mesh refinement levels (default = 3). This parameter controls the number of times an
element can be remeshed. Values of 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. allow a maximum of 1, 4, 16, 64, etc. elements, respectively,
to be created for each original element.
3296
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCADAPT
BTIME
Birth time to begin adaptive meshing (default = 0.0).
DTIME
Death time to end adaptive meshing (default = 1e31).
LCID
Data curve number (previously defined on the EDCURVE command) identifying the interval of remeshing
(no default). The abscissa of the data curve is time, and the ordinate is the varied adaptive time interval. If
LCID is nonzero, the adaptive frequency (FREQ) is replaced by this load curve. Note that a nonzero FREQ value
is still required to initiate the first adaptive loop.
ADPSIZE
Minimum element size to be adapted based on element edge length (default = 0.0).
ADPASS
One or two pass adaptivity option.
0
Two pass adaptivity (default).
1
One pass adaptivity.
IREFLG
Uniform refinement level flag (no default). Values of 1, 2, 3, etc. allow 4, 16, 64, etc. elements, respectively,
to be created uniformly for each original element.
ADPENE
Adaptive mesh flag for starting adaptivity when approaching (positive ADPENE value) or penetrating (negative
ADPENE value) the tooling surface (default = 0.0).
ADPTH
Absolute shell thickness level below which adaptivity should begin. This option works only if the adaptive
angle tolerance (TOL) is nonzero. If thickness based adaptive remeshing is desired without angle change,
set TOL to a large angle. The default is ADPTH = 0.0, which means this option is not used.
MAXEL
Maximum number of elements at which adaptivity will be terminated (no default). Adaptivity is stopped if
this number of elements is exceeded.
Command Default
No adaptive meshing.
Notes
The EDCADAPT command globally sets the control options for all part IDs that are to be adaptively meshed (see
the EDADAPT command). Because FREQ defaults to zero, you must input a nonzero value in this field in order
to activate adaptive meshing. You must also specify a reasonable value for TOL since the default adaptive angle
tolerance (1e31) will not allow adaptive meshing to occur.
The EDCADAPT command is not supported in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis (EDSTART,3).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3297
EDCGEN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Adaptive Meshing>Global Settings
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Adaptive Meshing>Status
EDCGEN, Option, Cont, Targ, FS, FD, DC, VC, VDC, V1, V2, V3, V4, BTIME, DTIME, BOXID1, BOXID2
Specifies contact parameters for an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the contact behavior (dictates the meaning of V1 through V4).
AG
Automatic general contact.
ANTS
Automatic nodes-to-surface contact.
ASSC
Automatic single surface contact.
ASS2D
Automatic 2-D single surface contact (applicable only with the Cont and FS arguments).
ASTS
Automatic surface-to-surface contact.
DRAWBEAD
Drawbead contact
ENTS
Eroding nodes-to-surface contact.
ESS
Eroding single surface contact.
ESTS
Eroding surface-to-surface contact.
FNTS
Forming nodes-to-surface contact.
FOSS
Forming one way surface-to-surface contact.
FSTS
Forming surface-to-surface contact.
NTS
Nodes-to-surface contact.
OSTS
One way surface-to-surface contact.
RNTR
Rigid nodes to rigid body contact.
3298
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCGEN
ROTR
Rigid body to rigid body (one way) contact.
SE
Single edge contact.
SS
Single surface contact.
STS
Surface-to-surface contact.
TDNS
Tied nodes-to-surface contact.
TSES
Tied shell edge-to-surface contact.
TDSS
Tied surface-to-surface contact.
TNTS
Tiebreak nodes-to-surface contact
TSTS
Tiebreak surface-to-surface contact.
Cont
Contact surface identified by a component name [CM] , a part ID number [EDPART], or an assembly ID
number [EDASMP]. If a component name is input, the component must contain nodes that represent the
contact surface (assemblies are not valid for a component name). Alternatively, a part number may be input
that identifies a group of elements as the contact surface, or an assembly number may be input containing
a maximum of 16 parts. The assembly ID number must be greater than the highest number used for the part
ID. Cont is not required for automatic general contact, single edge contact, and single surface contact options
(Option = AG, SE, ASSC, ESS, and SS). If Option = ASS2D, only part assemblies are valid.
Targ
Target surface identified by a component name [CM] , a part ID number [EDPART], or an assembly ID number
[EDASMP]. If a component name is input, the component must contain nodes that represent the target
surface (assemblies are not valid for a component name). Alternatively, a part number may be input that
identifies a group of elements as the target surface, or an assembly number may be input containing a
maximum of 16 parts. The assembly ID number must be greater than the highest number used for the part
ID. Targ is not defined for automatic general contact, single edge contact, automatic single surface contact,
eroding single surface contact, single surface contact, and automatic 2-D single surface contact options
(Option = AG, SE, ASSC, ESS, SS, and ASS2D).
FS
Static friction coefficient (defaults to 0).
FD
Dynamic friction coefficient (defaults to 0).
DC
Exponential decay coefficient (defaults to 0).
VC
Coefficient for viscous friction (defaults to 0).
VDC
Viscous damping coefficient in percent of critical damping (defaults to 0).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3299
EDCGEN
V1, V2, V3, V4
Additional input for drawbead, eroding, rigid, and tiebreak contact. The meanings of V1-V4 will vary, depending
on Option. See the table below for V1-V4 definitions.
Additional input for drawbead contact (Option = DRAWBEAD):
V1
Load curve ID giving the bending component of the restraining force per unit draw bead length as a
function of draw bead displacement. V1 must be specified.
V2
Load curve ID giving the normal force per unit draw bead length as a function of draw bead displacement.
V2 is optional.
V3
Draw bead depth.
V4
Number of equally spaced integration points along the draw bead (default = 0, in which case ANSYS LSDYNA calculates this value based on the size of the elements that interact with the draw bead).
Additional input for eroding contact (Option = ENTS, ESS, or ESTS):
V1
Symmetry plane option. The purpose of this option is to retain the correct boundary conditions in a
model with symmetry.
0
Off (default).
1
Do not include faces with normal boundary constraints (e.g., segments of brick elements on a symmetry plane).
V2
Erosion/interior node option.
0
Erosion occurs only at exterior boundaries.
1
Interior eroding contact can occur (default).
V3
Adjacent material treatment for solid elements.
0
Solid element faces are included only for free boundaries (default).
1
Solid element faces are included if they are on the boundary of the material subset. This option also
allows erosion within a body and the consequent treatment of contact.
Additional input for rigid contact (Option = RNTR or ROTR):
V1
Data curve id for force versus deflection behavior [EDCURVE]. Also specify V2. (No default.)
3300
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCGEN
V2
Force calculation method for rigid contact. (No default.)
1
Data curve gives total normal force on surface versus maximum penetration of any node (only applicable for Option = ROTR).
2
Data curve gives normal force on each node versus penetration of node through the surface (Option
= RNTR or ROTR).
3
Data curve gives normal pressure versus penetration of node through the surface (only applicable
for Option = RNTR).
V3
Unloading stiffness for rigid contact. This should not be larger than the maximum value used in the data
curve. The default is to unload along the data curve (specified on V1).
Additional input for tiebreak surface-to-surface contact (Option = TSTS). V1 and V2 are used to calculate the
failure criterion:
V1
Normal failure stress. (No default.)
V2
Shear failure stress. (No default.)
Additional input for tiebreak nodes-to-surface contact (Option = TNTS). V1 through V4 are used to calculate
the failure criterion:
V1
Normal failure force. Only tensile failure (i.e., tensile normal forces) will be considered in the failure criterion.
(No default.)
V2
Shear failure force. (No default.)
V3
Exponent for normal force. (Defaults to 2.)
V4
Exponent for shear force. (Defaults to 2.)
BTIME
Birth time for which contact definition will become active (defaults to 0.0).
DTIME
Death time for which contact definition will become inactive (defaults to 1e21).
BOXID1
Contact volume as defined using the EDBX command (valid only when defining contact with parts or assemblies).
BOXID2
Target volume as defined using the EDBX command (valid only when defining contact with parts or assemblies).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3301
EDCGEN
Command Default
No contact defined.
Notes
The frictional coefficient used for contact is determined from FS, FD, and DC, and is assumed to be dependent
on the relative velocity of the surfaces in contact:
c = FD+(FS-FD) e-DC(vrel)
The coefficient for viscous friction, VC, is necessary to limit the friction force to a maximum. A limiting force is
computed:
Flim = VC(Acont)
where Acont is the area of the segment contacted by the node in contact. The suggested value for VC is to use
the yield stress in shear:
VC = o
3
where o is the yield stress of the contacted material.
If a part number is input for Cont or Targ, it must represent a valid explicit dynamics part definition. For example,
an elastic material for explicit dynamics requires EX, NUXY, and DENS. If any part of the material definition is
missing for the PART, the EDCGEN command will be ignored.
In addition to the contact parameters on this command, you can specify penalty scale factors for the contact
(slave) and target (master) surfaces by using the EDCMORE command.
Duplicate definitions of the same contact type on the same components or parts will cause only one contact to
be defined (previous definitions will be ignored). Duplicate definitions of different contact types on the same
components or parts will cause multiple contact types to be defined.
Use the EDCLIST and EDDC commands to list and delete contact surface specifications. Use the EDPC command
to select and plot contact entities.
The EDCGEN command is not supported in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis (EDSTART,3). Thus, you cannot
add new contact specifications in a full restart. You can use the EDCLIST command to list any contact specifications
that were defined in the previous analysis.
EDCGEN is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Define Contact
3302
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCMORE
EDCLIST, NUM
Lists contact entity specifications in an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NUM
Number identifying contact entity to be listed. Use NUM = ALL to list all contact entities (ALL is the default).
Notes
Lists contact entity specifications previously defined with the EDCGEN command. The listing will include any
contact parameters defined using the EDCMORE command.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>List Entities
EDCMORE, Option, NUM, --, VAL1,VAL2
Specifies additional contact parameters for a given contact definition in an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
ADD
Define contact parameters for the contact entity specified by NUM (default).
DELE
Delete contact parameters (VAL1 and VAL2) for the contact entity specified by NUM. If NUM = ALL, all
contact parameters previously defined by EDCMORE are deleted.
NUM
Contact entity number. This contact entity must have been previously defined with the EDCGEN command.
Use EDCLIST to obtain a list of contact entity numbers.
--
Unused field.
VAL1
Penalty scale factor for slave (contact) surface (SFS); default = 1.
VAL2
Penalty scale factor for master (target) surface (SFM); default = 1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3303
EDCNSTR
Command Default
For all contract definitions, SFS = 1 and SFM = 1.
Notes
You can use the EDCMORE command to specify two additional contact parameters (SFS and SFM) for a specific
contact definition. These parameters will apply only to the contact entity number entered on the NUM field. Use
the EDCLIST command to obtain a list of contact definitions and their corresponding contact entity numbers.
The listing produced by EDCLIST will include any contact parameters specified with the EDCMORE command.
When you use the EDDC command to delete a contact definition, any parameters you specified with EDCMORE
for that contact definition will also be deleted. To delete only the parameters specified by EDCMORE for a given
contact definition, use the command EDCMORE,DELE,NUM.
Note When you delete a contact definition with the EDDC command, the contact entity numbers will
be renumbered for the remaining contact definitions. Therefore, you should always issue EDCLIST to
obtain a current list of contact entity numbers before adding or deleting contact parameters with the
EDCMORE command.
The EDCMORE command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Additional Parms
EDCNSTR, Option, Ctype, Comp1, Comp2, VAL1
Defines various types of constraints for an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
ADD
Define a constraint (default).
DELE
Delete the constraint specified by Ctype, Comp1, and Comp2. If Ctype = ALL, all constraints are deleted.
LIST
List all of the constraints previously defined by the EDCNSTR command.
Ctype
Constraint type. The command format will vary, depending on the Ctype value.
ENS
Extra node set added to an existing rigid body.
3304
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCNSTR
NRB
Nodal rigid body.
STS
Tie between a shell edge and solid elements.
RIVET
Massless rivet between two noncoincident nodes.
If Ctype = ENS, the command format is EDCNSTR,Option,ENS,Comp1,Comp2
Comp1
Part number of the existing rigid body to which nodes will be added. The rigid body must be previously
defined with the EDMP command. EDMP defines a rigid body based on material reference number (MAT).
You must determine the corresponding part number (EDPART) for input in this field.
Comp2
Component name identifying extra nodes to be added to the rigid body specified by Comp1. Comp2 must
be a nodal component and must not be attached to any other rigid body.
If Ctype = NRB, the command format is EDCNSTR,Option,NRB,Comp1, --,VAL1
Comp1
Component name identifying a set of nodes that are to be defined as a rigid body. The component may
consist of nodes from several different deformable parts.
--
This field is not used for Ctype = NRB.
VAL1
Coordinate system ID number (CID) to be used for output of data. The coordinate system must have been
previously defined with the EDLCS command.
If Ctype = STS, the command format is EDCNSTR,Option,STS,Comp1,Comp2
Comp1
Node number of the shell element node that will be tied to solid element nodes that are specified by Comp2.
The Comp1 node must lie along the edge of a shell element and be coincident to at least one node included
in Comp2.
Comp2
Component name consisting of solid element nodes (up to nine nodes) to which the shell element node will
be tied. Comp2 must consist of nodes that are on solid elements, and the nodes must define a line that will
remain linear throughout the analysis. At least one of the nodes in Comp2 must be coincident with the shell
node specified in Comp1.
If Ctype = RIVET, the command format is EDCNSTR,Option,RIVET,Comp1,Comp2
Comp1
Node number of the first node on the rivet.
Comp2
Node number of the second node on the rivet. This node cannot have the same coordinates as the first node
specified by Comp1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3305
EDCNSTR
Notes
The EDCNSTR command allows you to define several types of constraints in an explicit dynamic analysis. A brief
description of each constraint type is given below. See Constraints and Initial Conditions in the ANSYS LS-DYNA
User's Guide for more information.
Extra Node Set Added to a Rigid Body (Ctype = ENS)
The ability to add extra nodes to an existing rigid body has many potential applications, including placing nodes
where joints will be attached between rigid bodies, defining nodes where point loads will be applied, and defining
a lumped mass at a specific location. The extra nodes specified by Comp2 may be located anywhere in the model
and may have coordinates outside those of the original rigid body specified by Comp1.
Nodal Rigid Body (Ctype = NRB)
Unlike typical rigid bodies that are defined with the EDMP command, nodal rigid bodies defined with the EDCNSTR
command are not associated with a part number. This can be advantageous for modeling rigid (welded) joints
in a model. For a rigid joint, portions of different flexible components (having different MAT IDs) act together as
a rigid body. It is difficult to define this type of rigid body with a unique MAT ID (and corresponding part number).
However, the rigid joint can be easily defined using a nodal rigid body.
Shell Edge to Solid Tie (Ctype = STS)
The STS option ties regions of solid elements to regions of shell elements. A single shell node may be tied to up
to nine brick element nodes that define a fiber vector. Solid element nodes constrained in this way remain
linear throughout the analysis but can move relative to each other in the fiber direction.
Rivet between Two Nodes (Ctype = RIVET)
The RIVET option defines a massless rigid constraint between two nodes, similar to spotwelds defined with the
EDWELD command. Unlike a spotweld, however, rivets contain nodes that are noncoincident, and failure cannot
be specified. When a rivet is defined, the distance between the nodes is kept constant throughout any motion
that occurs during a simulation. Nodes connected by a rivet cannot be part of any other constraints specified in
the model.
The EDCNSTR command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>Additional Nodal
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>Additional Nodal
3306
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCONTACT
EDCONTACT, SFSI, RWPN, IPCK, SHTK, PENO, STCC, ORIE, CSPC, PENCHK
Specifies contact surface controls for an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
SFSI
Scale factor for sliding interface penalties. Defaults to 0.1.
RWPN
Scale factor for rigid wall penalties (defaults to 0). If RWPN = 0, rigid bodies interacting with rigid walls are not
considered. If RWPN>0, rigid bodies interact with fixed rigid walls. A value of 1.0 should be optimal; however,
this may be problem dependent.
IPCK
Initial contact surface penetration checking option:
1
No checking.
2
Full check of initial penetration is performed (default).
SHTK
Shell thickness contact option for surface-to-surface and nodes-to-surface contact (see Notes below):
0
Thickness is not considered (default).
1
Thickness is considered, except in rigid bodies.
2
Thickness is considered, including rigid bodies.
PENO
Penalty stiffness option (options 4 and 5 are useful for metal forming calculations):
1
Minimum of master segment and slave node (default).
2
Use master segment stiffness.
3
Use slave node value.
4
Use area or mass weighted slave node value.
5
Use slave node value inversely proportional to shell thickness. (This may require special scaling and is
not generally recommended.)
STCC
Shell thickness change option for single surface contact:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3307
EDCONTACT
1
Shell thickness changes are not considered (default).
2
Shell thickness changes are included.
ORIE
Option for automatic reorientation of contact surface segments during initialization:
1
Activate for automated (part ID) input only (default).
2
Activate for manual (nodal component) and automated (part ID) input.
3
Do not activate.
CSPC
Contact surface penetration check multiplier, used if small penetration checking is on (PENCHK = 1 or 2).
Defaults to 4.
PENCHK
Small penetration check, used only for contact types STS, NTS, OSTS, TNTS, and TSTS. If the contact surface
node penetrates more than the target thickness times CSPC, the penetration is ignored and the contacting
node is set free. The target thickness is the element thickness for shell elements, or 1/20 of the shortest diagonal for solid elements.
0
Penetration checking is off (default).
1
Penetration checking is on.
2
Penetration checking is on, but shortest diagonal is used.
Notes
The thickness offsets are always included in single surface, automatic surface-to-surface, and automatic nodesto-surface contact. The shell thickness change option must be used [EDSHELL,,,1] and a nonzero value must be
specified for SHTK before the shell thickness changes can be included in the surface-to-surface contact type.
Additionally, STCC must be set to 2 if thickness changes are to be included in the single surface contact algorithms.
To reset the contact options to default values, issue the EDCONTACT command with no fields specified.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Advanced Controls
3308
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCRB
EDCPU, CPUTIME
Specifies CPU time limit for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
CPUTIME
CPU time limit (in seconds) for the current phase of the analysis (defaults to 0). If CPUTIME = 0, no CPU time
limit is set. CPUTIME values below 0 are not allowed.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>CPU Limit
EDCRB, Option, NEQN, PARTM, PARTS
Constrains two rigid bodies to act as one in an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed:
ADD
Define an equation to constrain two rigid bodies (default).
DELE
Delete the equation (specified by NEQN) that constrains two rigid bodies. If NEQN is blank, all equations
constraining rigid bodies are deleted.
LIST
List constrained rigid bodies specified by NEQN. If NEQN is blank, all constrained rigid bodies are listed.
NEQN
Equation reference number. Defaults to PARTS. NEQN should be a unique number for each pair of PARTM and
PARTS. If it is not unique, the equation reference number defined last will overwrite any previously defined
NEQN with the same number.
PARTM
PART number [EDPART] identifying the master rigid body. This value is ignored if the DELE or LIST labels are
specified. No default; you must enter a value.
PARTS
PART number [EDPART] identifying the slave rigid body. This value is ignored if the DELE or LIST labels are
specified. No default; you must enter a value.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3309
EDCSC
Notes
EDCRB is valid only for materials defined as rigid bodies with the EDMP,RIGID command. EDCRB automatically
generates a constraint equation to force the specified rigid bodies to behave as a single rigid body. The slave rigid
body takes on the material properties and loading of the master rigid body. Any loads [EDLOAD] existing on
the slave rigid body are ignored.
To create a single large rigid body from several smaller bodies, use a series of EDCRB commands. With the first
command, specify a master and slave to create the first combined rigid body. Then, using that body as the
master, specify another slave to create a larger rigid body. Continue the process, using the expanding rigid body
as the master and adding slave bodies until you have defined the desired large rigid body. All slave rigid bodies
will take on the material properties and loading of the original master rigid body. Note that you will need to use
different NEQN values for each pair of PARTM and PARTS. This command will be ignored if you specify the previouslydefined master rigid body as a slave rigid body in the same analysis. To change the master and slave definitions,
first use the DELE option to delete all master and slave definitions, and then use the ADD option to redefine
them.
The equation number, NEQN, is a reference number by which the constrained bodies can be identified for listing
and deleting purposes on the EDCRB command. For any other reference to the constrained bodies (loading,
contact definitions, etc.), use the master body part number (PARTM).
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Rigid Body CE
EDCSC, Key
Specifies whether to use subcycling in an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Key
Subcycling key:
OFF
Do not use subcycling (default).
ON
Use subcycling.
Command Default
No subcycling.
3310
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCTS
Notes
Subcycling can be used to speed up an analysis when element sizes within a model vary significantly. Relatively
small elements will result in a small time step size. When subcycling is on, the minimum time step size is increased
for the smallest elements.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Time Controls>Subcycling
EDCTS, DTMS, TSSFAC
Specifies mass scaling and scale factor of computed time step for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
DTMS
Time step size for mass scaled solutions (defaults to 0).
TSSFAC
Scale factor for computed time step. Defaults to 0.9; if high explosives are used, the default is lowered to
0.67.
Command Default
No mass scaling; scale factor for computed time step = 0.9.
Notes
If DTMS is positive, the same time step size will be used for all elements and mass scaling will be done for all elements. Therefore, positive values should only be used if inertial effects are insignificant.
If DTMS is negative, mass scaling is applied only to elements whose calculated time step size is smaller than DTMS.
Negative values should only be used in transient analyses if the mass increases are insignificant.
In order to use mass scaling in an explicit dynamic small restart analysis (EDSTART,2) or full restart analysis
(EDSTART,3), mass scaling must have been active in the original analysis. The time step and scale factor used in
the original analysis will be used by default in the restart. You can issue EDCTS in the restart analysis to change
these settings.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Time Controls>Time Step Ctrls
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3311
EDCURVE
EDCURVE, Option, LCID, Par1, Par2
Specifies data curves for an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
ADD
Define a data curve (default). If Option = ADD, Par1 and Par2 must be previously defined array parameters.
DELE
Delete the specified data curve (LCID). If LCID is blank, all data curves are deleted. Par1 and Par2 are
ignored for this option.
LIST
List defined data curve (LCID). If LCID is blank, all data curves are listed. Par1 and Par2 are ignored for
this option.
PLOT
Plot defined data curve (LCID). If Option = PLOT, LCID must be previously defined with an EDCURVE
command. Otherwise a warning message will report that LCID has not been defined. Par1 and Par2
are ignored for this option.
LCID
Data curve ID number (no default). Must be a positive integer.
Par1
Name of user-defined array parameter that contains the abscissa values of the curve data (e.g., time, effective
plastic strain, effective strain rate, displacement, etc.).
Par2
Name of user-defined array parameter that contains the ordinate values of the curve data (e.g., damping
coefficients, initial yield stress, elastic modulus, force, etc.) corresponding to the abscissa values in Par1.
Note If the length of Par1 and Par2 are different, the shortest length will be used.
Notes
EDCURVE can be used to define material data curves (e.g., stress-strain) and load data curves (force-deflection)
associated with material models in an explicit dynamics analysis. Material data specified by this command is
typically required to define a particular material behavior (e.g., TB,HONEY), and the LCID number is used as input
on the TBDATA command.
EDCURVE can also be used to define load curves that represent time dependent loads (force, displacement,
velocity, etc.). Par1 must contain the time values, and Par2 must contain the corresponding load values. The
LCID number assigned to the load curve can be used as input on the EDLOAD command.
Note You cannot update a previously defined data curve by changing the array parameters that were
input as Par1 and Par2. The data curve definition is written to the database at the time EDCURVE is issued.
Therefore, subsequent changes to the array parameters that were used as input on EDCURVE will not
affect the load curve definition. If you need to change the load curve definition, you must delete the load
curve (EDCURVE,DELE,LCID) and define it again.
3312
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDCURVE
LCID identifies the data curve. If the value input for LCID is the same as the ID number for a data curve previously
defined by EDCURVE, the previous data will be overwritten. Use EDCURVE,LIST and EDCURVE,PLOT to check
existing data curves.
A starting array element number must be specified for Par1 and Par2. The input for these fields must be a single
column array parameter, or a specific column from a multi-column array parameter. When using the GUI with
multi-column parameters, you must specify the parameter name and starting position for Par1 and Par2 by
typing the EDCURVE command in the Input Window. This is because only the parameter name is available
through the dialog box, which pulls in the first position of a single-column array parameter.
If you need to change a curve definition in an explicit dynamic small restart analysis, issue EDSTART,2 first (to
specify the restart), then issue the EDCURVE command. The revised curve must contain the same number of
points as the curve it replaces. This limitation does not apply to a full restart analysis (EDSTART,3).
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>Add
Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>Delete
Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>List
Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>Plot
Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Curve Options>Add Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Curve Options>Delete Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Curve Options>List Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Curve Options>Plot Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Curve Options>Add Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Curve Options>Delete Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Curve Options>List Curve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Curve Options>Plot Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>Add Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>Delete Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>List Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Curve Options>Plot Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Curve Options>Add Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Curve Options>Delete Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Curve Options>List Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Curve Options>Plot Curve
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3313
EDDAMP
EDDAMP, PART, LCID, VALDMP
Defines mass weighted (Alpha) or stiffness weighted (Beta) damping for an explicit dynamics model.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
PART
PART number [EDPART] identifying the group of elements to which damping should be applied. If PART =
ALL (default), damping is applied to the entire model.
LCID
Load curve ID (previously defined with the EDCURVE command) identifying the damping coefficient versus
time curve. If time-dependent damping is defined, an LCID is required.
VALDMP
Constant system damping coefficient or a scale factor applied to the curve defining damping coefficient
versus time.
Notes
Mass-weighted (Alpha) or stiffness-weighted (Beta) damping can be defined with the EDDAMP command.
Generally, stiffness proportional or beta damping is effective for oscillatory motion at high frequencies. This type
of damping is orthogonal to rigid body motion and so will not damp out rigid body motion. On the other hand,
mass proportional or alpha damping is more effective for low frequencies and will damp out rigid body motion.
The different possibilities are described below:
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Global Damping
Mass-weighted or Alpha damping
When PART = (blank) or ALL (default), mass-weighted global damping can be defined in the following two ways.
In this case, the same damping is applied for the entire structure.
When the damping coefficient versus time curve (LCID) is specified using the EDCURVE command,
VALDMP is ignored by LS-DYNA (although it is written in the LS-DYNA input file Jobname.K). The damping
force applied to each node in the model is given by fd = d(t)mv, where d(t) is the damping coefficient as
a function of time defined by the EDCURVE command, m is the mass, and v is the velocity.
When the LCID is 0 or blank (default), a constant mass-weighted system damping coefficient can be
specified using VALDMP.
The constant and time-dependent damping, described above, cannot be defined simultaneously. The last defined
global damping will overwrite any previously defined global damping.
Damping defined for a PART
Mass-weighted or Alpha damping
When both a valid PART number is specified and the damping coefficient versus time curve (LCID) is specified
using the EDCURVE command, mass-weighted time-dependent damping will be defined for the particular PART.
In this case, VALDMP will act as a scaling factor for the damping versus time curve (if VALDMP is not specified, it
will default to 1). A valid PART number must be specified to define this type of damping. For example, use PART
3314
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDDAMP
=1 (and not blank) when the entire model consists of only one PART. Issue the command repeatedly with different
PART numbers in order to specify alpha damping for different PARTS.
Stiffness-weighted or Beta damping
When a valid PART number is specified with LCID = 0 or (blank) (default), a stiffness-weighted (Beta) constant
damping coefficient for this particular PART can be defined by VALDMP. The stiffness-weighted value corresponds
to the percentage of damping in the high frequency domain. For example, 0.1 roughly corresponds to 10%
damping in the high frequency domain. Recommended values range from 0.01 to 0.25. Values lower than 0.01
may have little effect. If a value larger than 0.25 is used, it may be necessary to lower the time step size significantly
(see the EDCTS command). Issue the command repeatedly with different PART numbers in order to specify beta
damping for different PARTS. Time-dependent stiffness-weighted damping is not available in ANSYS LS-DYNA.
The mass-weighted and stiffness-weighted damping, described above, cannot be defined simultaneously for a
particular PART number. The last defined damping for the particular PART number will overwrite any previously
defined mass-weighted or stiffness-weighted damping for this PART.
In order to define the mass-weighted and stiffness-weighted damping simultaneously, you can use the MP,DAMP
command (instead of the EDDAMP,PART, ,VALDMP command) to define stiffness-weighted (Beta) constant
damping coefficient. However, do not use both of these commands together to define stiffness-weighted (Beta)
constant damping coefficient for a particular PART. If you do, duplicate stiffness-weighted (Beta) constant
damping coefficients for this PART will be written to the LS-DYNA input file Jobname.K. The last defined value
will be used by LS-DYNA. Also, note that the MP,DAMP command is applied on the MAT number, and not on
the PART number. Since a group of elements having the same MAT ID may belong to more than one PART (the
opposite is not true), you need to issue the MP,DAMP command only once for this MAT ID and the stiffnessweighted (Beta) damping coefficients will be automatically defined for all the PARTs with that MAT ID.
Mass-weighted and stiffness-weighted damping can be defined simultaneously using the EDDAMP command
only when mass-weighted damping (constant or time-dependent) is defined as global damping (EDDAMP, ALL,
LCID, VALDMP) and stiffness-weighted damping is defined for all necessary PARTs (EDDAMP,PART, ,VALDMP).
To remove defined global damping, reissue the EDDAMP, ALL command with LCID and VALDMP set to 0. To remove
damping defined for a particular PART, reissue EDDAMP, PART, where PART is the PART number, with LCID and
VALDMP set to 0. There is no default for the EDDAMP command, i.e., issuing the EDDAMP command with PART
= LCID = VALDMP = 0 will result in an error. Stiffness-weighted damping defined by the MP,DAMP command
can be deleted using MPDELE, DAMP, MAT.
In an explicit dynamic small restart (EDSTART,2) or full restart analysis (EDSTART,3), you can only specify global
alpha damping. This damping will overwrite any alpha damping input in the original analysis. If you do not input
global alpha damping in the restart, the damping properties input in the original analysis will carry over to the
restart.
Damping specified by the EDDAMP command can be listed, along with other explicit dynamics specifications,
by typing the command string EDSOLV$STAT into the ANSYS input window. Beta damping specified by the
MP,DAMP command can be listed by MPLIST, MAT command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Damping
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Damping
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3315
EDDBL
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Damping
EDDBL, KEY
Selects a numerical precision type of the explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
KEY
Number or name identifying numerical precision to be used.
0 or SINGLE
Select single precision version of LS-DYNA (default).
1 or DOUBLE
Select double precision version of LS-DYNA.
STAT
Check the status of the numerical precision in effect.
Notes
Sets the single or double precision version of LS-DYNA into effect. The double precision of LS-DYNA is not
available for the HP-UX 10.2, SGI 32-bit, IBM 32-bit, and Linux 32-bit platforms. Please check the availability of
the double precision version of LS-DYNA on your system before using the command. If it is not available, use
the command default.
The double precision version may be up to 20% slower than the single precision version. The results may also
vary based on problem specifications.
In addition to EDDBL,STAT, you can use the GUI dialog box to verify which precision version is currently chosen.
The GUI is based on the database and is updated to reflect changes.
See Double Precision LS-DYNA for more information.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Double Precision
EDDC, Option, Ctype, Cont, Targ
Deletes or deactivates/reactivates contact surface specifications in an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Option to be performed for contact definition specified by Ctype, Cont, and Targ.
3316
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDDRELAX
DELE
Delete the specified contact definition (default); valid only in a new analysis.
DACT
Deactivate the specified contact definition; valid only in a small restart.
RACT
Reactivate the specified contact definition (which was previously deactivated); valid only in a small restart.
Ctype
Contact behavior label (see EDCGEN command for valid labels).
Cont
Component name or part number [EDPART] identifying the contact surface.
Targ
Component name or part number [EDPART] identifying the target surface.
Notes
This command allows you to delete or deactivate/reactivate a particular contact specification that was defined
by EDCGEN. The contact definition is identified by Ctype, Cont, and Targ (Note that Cont and Targ may not
be required for Ctype = AG, SE, ASSC, ESS, and SS). The delete option (Option = DELE) permanently deletes the
contact from the database. Any additional contact parameters defined with the EDCMORE command for the
contact definition identified on this command will also be deleted or deactivated/reactivated.
You cannot delete contact specifications in an explicit dynamic small restart (EDSTART,2). However, you can
use Option = DACT to deactivate a contact definition that is not needed in the small restart. That contact
definition may then be reactivated in a subsequent small restart by using Option = RACT.
To delete or deactivate/reactivate all contact specifications for the entire model, use EDDC,Option,ALL.
The EDDC command is not supported in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis (EDSTART,3). Thus, you cannot
delete, deactivate, or reactivate contact specifications in a full restart that were defined in the previous analysis.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Activate Entity
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Deactvate Entity
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Delete Entity
EDDRELAX, Option, NRCYCK, DRTOL, DFFCTR, DRTERM, TSSFDR, IRELAL, EDTTL
Activates initialization to a prescribed geometry or dynamic relaxation for the explicit analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Specifies when dynamic relaxation is activated.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3317
EDDRELAX
ANSYS
Stresses are initialized in ANSYS LS-DYNA to a prescribed geometry for small strains, according to the
solution of an ANSYS (implicit) run. The explicit solution is based on the implicit X,Y,Z displacements and
rotations contained in the drelax file (created with the REXPORT command).
DYNA
Dynamic relaxation is on. When you use this option, you can specify some or all of the parameters NRCYCK,
DRTOL, DFFCTR, DRTERM, TSSFDR, IRELAL, and EDTTL. Any parameters that you do not specify are set
to their default values.
OFF
Turn off initialization to a prescribed geometry (Option = ANSYS) or dynamic relaxation (Option =
DYNA).
NRCYCK
Number of iterations between convergence checks for dynamic relaxation option. Default = 250.
DRTOL
Convergence tolerance for dynamic relaxation option. Default = 0.001.
DFFCTR
Dynamic relaxation factor. Default = 0.995.
DRTERM
Optional termination time for dynamic relaxation. Termination occurs at this time, or when convergence is
attained, whichever comes first. Default = infinity.
TSSFDR
Scale factor for computed time step during dynamic relaxation. If zero, the value is set to TSSFAC (defined
on the EDCTS command). After converging, the scale factor is reset to TSSFAC.
IRELAL
Automatic control for dynamic relaxation option based on algorithm of Papadrakakis.
0
Not active (default).
1
Active.
EDTTL
Convergence tolerance on automatic control of dynamic relaxation (default = 0.04).
Notes
Use Option = ANSYS when running an implicit-to-explicit sequential solution to initialize the structure to a
static solution performed earlier by the ANSYS implicit solver. Use Option = DYNA to perform dynamic relaxation
within the LS-DYNA program. Use Option = OFF to turn off previously specified stress initialization or dynamic
relaxation. You must specify the Option you want; there is no default.
In LS-DYNA, the dynamic relaxation is performed before the regular transient analysis. The convergence process
of the dynamic relaxation is not written to the ANSYS history file. The ANSYS results files only include the converged
result of the dynamic relaxation, which is the result at time zero in the Jobname.HIS and Jobname.RST files.
You can restart a dynamic relaxation analysis (EDSTART,2 or EDSTART,3) from a previous transient analysis or
a previous dynamic relaxation analysis. In the restart, you can change or set the convergence criteria with the
EDDRELAX command. Only the load curves that are flagged for dynamic relaxation (PHASE = 1 or 2 on EDLOAD)
3318
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDDUMP
are applied after restarting. If you restart the explicit portion of an implicit-to-explicit sequential solution, you
do not need to reissue the REXPORT command because displacement information contained in the drelax file
is already included in the LS-DYNA restart file. If the dynamic relaxation is activated from a regular transient
analysis, LS-DYNA continues the output of data to ANSYS results files. This is unlike the dynamic relaxation phase
at the beginning of the calculation for which only the converged solution is written.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Dynamic Relax
EDDUMP, NUM, DT
Specifies output frequency for the explicit dynamic restart file (d3dump).
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NUM
Number of d3dump (restart) files written during the analysis (defaults to 1). When you specify NUM, the time
interval between restart files is TIME / NUM, where TIME is the analysis end-time specified on the TIME command.
DT
Time interval at which the d3dump (restart) files are written. If NUM is input, DT is ignored.
Command Default
One restart file is written at the end of the analysis.
Notes
You can use NUM or DT to specify the time interval at which d3dump restart files will be written. You should not
specify both quantities; if both are input, NUM will be used. The restart files are written sequentially as d3dump01,
d3dump02, etc.
In LS-DYNA, the restart file output is specified in terms of number of time steps. Because the total number of
time steps is not known until the LS-DYNA solution finishes, ANSYS calculates an approximate number of time
steps for the solution, and then uses NUM or DT to calculate the required LS-DYNA input. This approximated
number of time steps may be different from the total number reached in LS-DYNA after the solution finishes.
Therefore, the number of restart dump files or the output interval may differ slightly from what you requested
using NUM or DT.
In an explicit dynamic small restart (EDSTART,2) or full restart analysis (EDSTART,3), the EDDUMP setting will
default to the NUM or DT value used in the original analysis. You can issue EDDUMP in the restart to change this
setting.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3319
EDELE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>File Output Freq>Number of Steps
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>File Output Freq>Time Step Size
EDELE, IEL1, IEL2, INC
Deletes selected elements from the model.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IEL1, IEL2, INC
Delete elements from IEL1 to IEL2 (defaults to IEL1) in steps of INC (defaults to 1). If IEL1 = ALL, IEL2 and
INC are ignored and all selected elements [ESEL] are deleted. If IEL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and
all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted
for IEL1 (IEL2 and INC are ignored).
Notes
Deleted elements are replaced by null or "blank" elements. Null elements are used only for retaining the element
numbers so that the element numbering sequence for the rest of the model is not changed by deleting elements.
Null elements may be removed (although this is not necessary) with the NUMCMP command. If related element
data (pressures, etc.) are also to be deleted, delete that data before deleting the elements. EDELE is for unattached
elements only. You can use the xCLEAR family of commands to remove any attached elements from the database.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
EDENERGY, HGEN, SWEN, SIEN, RLEN
Specifies energy dissipation controls for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
HGEN
Hourglass energy control key:
OFF or 0
Hourglass energy is not computed.
ON or 1
Hourglass energy is computed and included in the energy balance (default).
SWEN
Stonewall energy dissipation control key:
3320
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDFPLOT
OFF or 0
Stonewall energy dissipation is not computed.
ON or 1
Stonewall energy dissipation is computed and included in the energy balance (default).
SIEN
Sliding interface energy dissipation control key:
OFF or 0
Sliding interface energy dissipation is not computed.
ON or 1
Sliding interface energy dissipation is computed and included in the energy balance (default).
RLEN
Rayleigh (damping) energy dissipation control key:
OFF or 0
Rayleigh energy dissipation is not computed.
ON or 1
Rayleigh energy dissipation is computed and included in the energy balance (default).
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Energy Options
EDFPLOT, Key
Allows plotting of explicit dynamics forces and other load symbols.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Key
Load symbol plotting key.
ON or 1
Turn display of load symbols on (default).
OFF or 0
Turn display of load symbols off.
Command Default
Display of load symbols on.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3321
EDGCALE
Notes
You must issue EDFPLOT,ON to display explicit dynamics load symbols. The explicit load symbols are erased
automatically upon a subsequent plot command.
An explicit load symbol always indicates a positive load direction (e.g., positive X direction for FX load), even if
the load value is negative. The load symbol does not reflect the load magnitude. You can use standard ANSYS
symbol controls to control the appearance of the load symbol. No load symbol is displayed for temperature
loads.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Show Forces
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Show Forces
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Symbols
EDGCALE, NADV, METH
Defines global ALE controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NADV
Number of cycles between advection (default = 0).
METH
Advection method.
0
Donor cell + Half Index Shift (first order accurate) (default).
1
Van Leer + Half Index Shift (second order accurate).
Command Default
The Lagrangian formulation is used for all elements by default.
Notes
This command sets global ALE controls in an explicit dynamic analysis. These ALE controls apply to all PLANE162
or SOLID164 elements in the model that are flagged to use the ALE formulation (KEYPOPT(5) = 1). To activate
the ALE formulation, you must specify the number of cycles between advection on this command and at least
one smoothing weight factor on the EDALE command. See Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian Formulation in the
ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for more information.
To see the current EDGCALE settings, issue the command EDALE,LIST.
3322
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/EDGE
The EDGCALE command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>ALE Options>Define
/EDGE, WN, KEY, ANGLE
Displays only the "edges" of an object.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
KEY
Edge key:
Elements Plots
0
Display common lines between all adjacent element faces.
1
Display only the common lines between non-coplanar faces (that is, show only the edges).
Contour Plots
0
Display only the common lines between non-coplanar faces.
1
Display common lines between all element faces.
ANGLE
Largest angle between two faces for which the faces are considered to be coplanar (0 to 180). Defaults to
45. A smaller angle produces more edges, a larger angle produces fewer edges.
Command Default
For element plots, display common lines between all adjacent element faces. For contour plots, display only the
common lines between non-coplanar faces.
Notes
The ANGLE field is used in PowerGraphics to determine geometric discontinuities. It is a tolerance measure for
the differences between the normals of the surfaces being considered. Values within the tolerance are accepted
as coplanar (geometrically continuous).
A surface can be displayed as an edge outline without interior detail. This is useful for both geometry and postprocessing displays. Element outlines are normally shown as solid lines for geometry and displacement displays.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3323
EDHGLS
Lines common to adjacent "coplanar" element faces are removed from the display. Midside nodes of elements
are ignored. The /SHRINK option is ignored with the edge option. /EDGE is not supported for PLESOL and
/ESHAPE displays when in PowerGraphics mode [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
The /EDGE command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Edge Options
EDHGLS, HGCO
Specifies the hourglass coefficient for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
HGCO
Hourglass coefficient value (defaults to 0.1). Values greater than 0.15 may cause instabilities.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Hourglass Ctrls>Global
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Hourglass Ctrls>Global
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Hourglass Ctrls>Global
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Hourglass Ctrls>Global
EDHIST, Comp
Specifies time-history output for an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Comp
Name of the component containing nodes or elements for which output is desired. Comp is required.
Command Default
No time-history output is written.
Notes
The time-history output is written to the file Jobname.HIS. Output is written only for the nodes or elements
contained in Comp. The data is written at time intervals specified on the EDHTIME command. If no time interval
3324
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDHTIME
is specified, output is written at 1000 steps over the analysis. (See also the EDOUT command which controls
time-history output in ascii form for an explicit dynamics analysis.)
Use EDHIST,LIST to list the time-history output specification. (The listing will include output requested with the
EDOUT command.) Use EDHIST,DELE to delete the time-history output specification.
Jobname.HIS is a binary file that is read by the ANSYS time-history postprocessor (POST26). If LS-DYNA output
has been requested on the EDWRITE command [EDWRITE,LSDYNA or EDWRITE,BOTH], the file D3THDT will
also be written. D3THDT is a binary file that is read by the LS-POST postprocessor.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>Select Component
EDHTIME, NSTEP, DT
Specifies the time-history output interval for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NSTEP
Number of steps at which output is written to the time-history file, Jobname.HIS, and the ASCII output files.
Defaults to 1000. The time increment between output is TIME / NSTEP, where TIME is the analysis end-time
specified on the TIME command.
DT
Time interval at which output is written to the time-history file, Jobname.HIS, and the ASCII output files. If
NSTEP is input, DT is ignored.
Command Default
Time-history output is written at 1000 steps over the analysis.
Notes
EDHTIME controls the number of steps at which output will be written to the time-history file, Jobname.HIS
(see the EDHIST command), and any ASCII files requested on the EDOUT command. You can use NSTEP or DT
to specify the output interval. You should not specify both quantities; if both are input, NSTEP will be used.
In an explicit dynamic small restart (EDSTART,2) or full restart analysis (EDSTART,3), the EDHTIME setting will
default to the NSTEP or DT value used in the original analysis. You can issue EDHTIME in the restart to change
this setting.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3325
EDINT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>File Output Freq>Number of Steps
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>File Output Freq>Time Step Size
EDINT, SHELLIP, BEAMIP
Specifies number of integration points for explicit shell and beam output.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
SHELLIP
Number of shell integration points used for output (defaults to 3). For element SHELL163, each integration
point is associated with a layer. SHELLIP must be 3. If SHELLIP = 3, results are written for the shell top,
middle, and bottom. If SHELLIP >3, then the results for the first SHELLIP layers are written.
BEAMIP
Number of beam integration points used for stress output for BEAM161 (defaults to 4).
Command Default
For SHELL163, output is available for the top, middle and bottom layers. For BEAM161, stress is available at 4 integration points (top-front, top-back, bottom-front, bottom-back). For the resultant beam formulation (KEYOPT(1)
= 2), there is no stress output.
Notes
The number of integration points is defined by the element real constant NIP for both the beam elements (in
the cross section) and the shell elements (through the thickness).
For shell elements that have only 1 or 2 integration points (NIP = 1 or 2), use the default of SHELLIP = 3. If NIP
= 1, the same results are reported at the top, middle, and bottom layers. If the NIP = 2, the results at the bottom
correspond to integration point 1, the results at the top correspond to integration point 2, and the results at the
middle are an average of the top and bottom results.
For shell elements with 2 x 2 integration points in the plane, the data from the four points are averaged, and
there is a single output value for each layer.
If you set BEAMIP = 0, no stress output is written for BEAM161 elements. In this case, the beams will not appear
in any POST1 plots because the program assumes they are failed elements.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>Integ Pt Storage
3326
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDIPART
EDIPART, PART, Option, Cvect, TM, IRCS, Ivect, Vvect, CID
Defines inertia for rigid parts in an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
PART
Part number for which the inertia is defined (the part number must have been previously generated using
the EDPART command). The part should be composed of a rigid material (EDMP,RIGID). For Option = ADD,
you must input a value; there is no default. For Option = DELE or LIST, PART defaults to all parts.
Option
ADD
Define inertia for the specified PART (default).
DELE
Delete the inertia properties for the specified PART. The remaining fields are ignored. If PART is blank,
inertia properties previously specified using EDIPART are deleted for all rigid parts.
LIST
List the inertia properties for the specified PART. The remaining fields are ignored. If PART is blank, inertia
properties are listed for all rigid parts.
Cvect
The vector containing the global Cartesian coordinates of the center of mass for the part. This vector must
have been previously defined with a dimension of three (*DIM command) and filled in as shown below. If
Cvect is blank, the global Cartesian origin (0,0,0) is used as the center of mass.
Cvect(1) -- X-coordinate of the center of mass
Cvect(2) -- Y-coordinate of the center of mass
Cvect(3) -- Z-coordinate of the center of mass
TM
Translation mass (no default, must be defined).
IRCS
Flag for inertia tensor reference coordinate system.
0 (or blank)
Global inertia tensor (default). You must supply all six inertia tensor components (see Ivect).
1
Principal moments of inertia with orientation vectors. You must supply IXX, IYY, IZZ (see Ivect) and CID.
Ivect
The name of a vector containing the components of the inertia tensor. This vector must have been previously
defined (*DIM command) with a dimension of six and filled in as shown below. Vector entries 2, 3, and 5 are
ignored if IRCS = 1. There is no default for this vector; it must be specified.
Ivect(1) -- IXX component of the inertia tensor
Ivect(2) -- IXY (set this entry to zero if IRCS = 1)
Ivect(3) -- IXZ (set this entry to zero if IRCS = 1)
Ivect(4) -- IYY component of the inertia tensor
Ivect(5) -- IYZ (set this entry to zero if IRCS = 1)
Ivect(6) -- IZZ component of the inertia tensor
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3327
EDIS
Vvect
The name of a vector containing the initial velocity (relative to the global Cartesian coordinate system) of
the rigid part. This vector must have been previously defined (*DIM command) with a dimension of six and
filled in as shown below. If Vvect is blank, the initial velocity defaults to zero.
Vvect(1) -- Initial translational velocity of rigid body in X-direction
Vvect(2) -- Initial translational velocity of rigid body in Y-direction
Vvect(3) -- Initial translational velocity of rigid body in Z-direction
Vvect(4) -- Initial rotational velocity of rigid body about the X-axis
Vvect(5) -- Initial rotational velocity of rigid body about the Y-axis
Vvect(6) -- Initial rotational velocity of rigid body about the Z-axis
CID
Local coordinate system ID. This coordinate system must have been previously defined with the EDLCS
command. You must input CID if IRCS = 1 (no default).
Command Default
Inertia properties are calculated by the program for all rigid parts.
Notes
The EDIPART command applies only to rigid parts (EDMP,RIGID). It allows you to input the inertia properties for
the rigid part rather than having the program calculate the properties from the finite element mesh.
This command is also valid in Solution.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Inertia Options>Define Inertia
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Inertia Options>Delete Inertia
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Inertia Options>List Inertia
EDIS, Option, PIDN, PIDO
Specifies stress initialization in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
ADD
Define stress initialization between parts (default).
DELE
Delete stress initialization between parts.
LIST
List stress initialization between parts.
3328
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDLCS
PIDN
New part ID or part assembly ID in the full restart analysis (defaults to all parts in the model).
PIDO
Old part ID or part assembly ID in the previous analysis, (default to PIDN).
Command Default
No stress initialization is performed.
Notes
The EDIS command is only valid in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis (EDSTART,3). (EDIS is ignored if it is
not preceded by the EDSTART,3 command.) Use EDIS to specify which parts and/or part assemblies should
undergo stress initialization in the restart based on the stresses from the previous analysis. You can specify stress
initialization for multiple parts (or part assemblies) by issuing EDIS multiple times. If you issue EDIS with no arguments, stress initialization is performed for all parts in the restart analysis that have a corresponding part
(having the same part ID) in the previous analysis.
In a full restart analysis, the complete database is written as an LS-DYNA input file, Jobname_nn.K. When the
LS-DYNA solution begins, LS-DYNA performs the stress initialization using file Jobname_nn.K and the restart
dump file (d3dumpnn specified on the EDSTART command) from the previous analysis. At the end of initialization,
all the parts that were specified by the EDIS commands are initialized from the data saved in the restart dump
file. In order for the stress initialization to be performed successfully, the new parts in the full restart analysis and
the old parts in the previous analysis must have the same number of elements, same element order, and same
element topology. (The parts may have different identifying numbers.) If this is not the case, the stresses cannot
be initialized. If part assemblies are used, the part assemblies must contain the same number of parts. (See A Full
Restart in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for more details).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Initial Stress
EDLCS, Option, CID, X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, X3, Y3, Z3
Defines a local coordinate system for use in explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed:
ADD
Define a coordinate system (default).
DELE
Delete a coordinate system. If CID is blank, all coordinate systems are deleted.
LIST
List defined coordinate systems. If CID is blank, all coordinate systems are listed.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3329
EDLCS
CID
Coordinate system ID.
X1, Y1, Z1
X, Y, and Z coordinates of a point on the local x-axis.
X2, Y2, Z2
X, Y, and Z coordinates of a point on the local x-y plane.
X3, Y3, Z3
X, Y, and Z coordinates of the origin. X3, Y3, and Z3 all default to zero.
Notes
Local coordinate systems defined by this command are used in an explicit dynamic analysis. For example, a local
coordinate system may be used when defining orthotropic material properties (see EDMP).
The coordinate system is defined by 2 vectors, one from the origin (X3, Y3, Z3) to a point on the x-axis (X1, Y1,
Z1), and one from the origin to a point on the x-y plane (X2, Y2, Z2). The cross product of these two vectors determines the z-axis, and the cross product of the z-axis vector and x-axis vector determines the y-axis. If X3, Y3,
and Z3 are not specified, the global origin (0,0,0) is used by default (as shown in the figure below).
The x-axis vector and the xy vector should be separated by a reasonable angle to avoid numerical inaccuracies.
When you use the local coordinate system (defined by the EDLCS command) to define a load (EDLOAD command),
the direction of the load will depend on the load type. For force and moment loads (Lab = FX, MX, etc. on EDLOAD),
the load will be applied in the direction of the local coordinate system defined by EDLCS. For prescribed motion
degrees of freedom (Lab = UX, ROTX, VX, AX, etc. on EDLOAD), the motion will act in the direction of a vector
from point (X1, Y1, Z1) to point (X2, Y2, Z2) as input on EDLCS. See the EDLOAD command for more information.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Local CS>Create Local
CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Local CS>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Local CS>List
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>Local CS>Create Local CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>Local CS>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>Local CS>List
3330
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDLOAD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Local CS>Create Local CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Local CS>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Local CS>List
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>Local CS>Create Local CS
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>Local CS>Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>Local CS>List
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Local CS>Create Local CS
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Local CS>Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Local CS>List
EDLOAD, Option, Lab, KEY, Cname, Par1, Par2, PHASE, LCID, SCALE, BTIME, DTIME
Specifies loads for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the load option to be performed.
ADD
Define a load (default). If Option = ADD, Cname must be a valid node or element component name (or
PART number). You must also specify a load curve using Par1 and Par2 (previously defined array parameters) or LCID (a previously defined load curve).
DELE
Delete specified load. If Lab and Cname are blank, all loads are deleted. Par1, Par2, PHASE, and LCID
are ignored for this option.
LIST
List specified load. If Lab and Cname are blank, all loads are listed. Par1, Par2, PHASE, and LCID are ignored
for this option.
Lab
Valid load labels for loads applied to nodes:
FX, FY, FZ
Forces.
MX, MY, MZ
Moments.
UX, UY, UZ
Displacements.
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Rotations.
VX, VY, VZ
Velocities.
OMGX, OMGY, OMGZ
Angular velocities.
AX, AY, AZ
Accelerations (on nodes).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3331
EDLOAD
ACLX, ACLY, ACLZ
Base accelerations.
TEMP
Temperature.
Valid load labels for loads applied to elements:
PRESS
Pressure (applied to an element).
Valid load labels for loads applied to rigid bodies:
RBFX, RBFY, RBFZ
Forces on rigid bodies.
RBMX, RBMY, RBMZ
Moments on rigid bodies.
RBUX, RBUY, RBUZ
Displacements on rigid bodies.
RBRX, RBRY, RBRZ
Rotations on rigid bodies.
RBVX, RBVY, RBVZ
Velocities on rigid bodies.
RBOX, RBOY, RBOZ
Angular velocities on rigid bodies.
KEY
When Lab = PRESS, KEY = Load key (face number) associated with a surface pressure load. Load keys (1,2,3,
etc.) are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input data tables for each element type in the ANSYS Elements
Reference.
For most other values of Lab, KEY is a coordinate system identification number, CID from the EDLCS command.
The CID will represent either a local coordinate system (used for loads labels FX, MX, etc.) or a direction vector
(used for prescribed motion labels UX, ROTX, VX, AX, etc.). See the Notes section for more information on
how the CID is used. If the load is in the global coordinate system, set KEY equal to zero, or leave it blank.
Some load types do not support the CID key; see Birth Time, Death Time, and CID Support in the Notes section
for more information.
For Lab = PRESS, KEY defaults to 1 when KEY is blank or when KEY = zero. For all other values of Lab, KEY
defaults to zero.
Cname
Name of existing component [CM] or PART number [EDPART] to which this load is to be applied. For all load
labels except the pressure load (Lab = PRESS) and the rigid body loads (Lab = RBxx), the component must
consist of nodes. For pressure loads, the component must consist of elements. For rigid body loads, a part
number must be input instead of a component name. The part number must correspond to a set of elements
that has been identified as a rigid body [EDMP,RIGID,MAT].
Par1
Name of user-defined array parameter that contains the time values of the load.
3332
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDLOAD
Par2
Name of user-defined array parameter that contains the "data" values of the load corresponding to the time
values in Par1.
Note If the length of Par1 and Par2 are different, the shortest length will be used.
PHASE
Phase of the analysis in which the load curve is to be used.
0
Curve is used in transient analysis only (default).
1
Curve is used in stress initialization or dynamic relaxation only.
2
Curve is used in both stress initialization (or dynamic relaxation) and transient analysis.
LCID
Data curve ID number representing the load curve to be applied. The load curve must have been previously
defined using the EDCURVE command. If LCID is specified, Par1 and Par2 must be left blank (in the GUI,
select None for Par1 and Par2).
SCALE
Load curve scale factor applied to the specified load curve. The scale value is applied to the data in Par2 or
to the ordinate data in the load curve specified by LCID.
BTIME
Birth time, or time when imposed motion is activated. The default is 0.0. Some load types do not support
birth and death time; see Birth Time, Death Time, and CID Support in the Notes section for more information.
DTIME
Death time, or time when imposed motion is removed. The default is 1 x 1038. Some load types do not support
birth and death time; see Birth Time, Death Time, and CID Support in the Notes section for more information.
Notes
If a component name is input (Cname) and the specified component definition is changed before the SOLVE
command, the last definition will be used.
You can specify the load data by inputting LCID (the ID number of a previously defined load curve) or by inputting
the two array parameters Par1 and Par2 (which contain time and load values, respectively). The input for Par1
and Par2 may be a single column array parameter, or a specific column from a multi-column array parameter.
A starting array element number can be specified for Par1 and Par2; if none is specified, array element 1 is used
by default.
Note You cannot update a previously defined load by changing the array parameters that were input
as Par1 and Par2. The load definition is written to the database at the time EDLOAD is issued. Therefore,
subsequent changes to the array parameters that were used as input on EDLOAD will not affect the load
curve definition. If you need to change the load definition, you must delete the load (EDLOAD,DELE)
and define it again.
EDLOAD automatically assigns a load number to each defined load. Use EDLOAD,LIST to obtain a list of loads
and their corresponding load numbers. You can plot a load curve by inputting the load number on the EDPL
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3333
EDLOAD
command. The load numbers may change when loads are deleted (EDLOAD,DELE). Therefore, you should obtain
a current list of load numbers (EDLOAD,LIST) before plotting a load curve.
For prescribed motion, we recommend that you specify velocity time histories instead of displacement time
histories. Also, you should not specify nonzero initial displacements. A piecewise linear displacement time history
may lead to discontinuous velocities and infinite accelerations.
By default, the load will be applied in the global Cartesian direction. You can define the load in a different direction
by inputting a CID (coordinate system ID) value in the KEY field. The CID must be previously defined using the
EDLCS command. For load labels (Lab = FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ, RBFX, RBFY, RBFZ, RBMX, RBMY, RBMZ), the load
will be applied in the direction of the local coordinate system defined by EDLCS. For prescribed motion degrees
of freedom labels (Lab = UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ, RBUX, RBUY, RBUZ, RBRX, RBRY,
RBRZ, RBVX, RBVY, RBVZ, RBOX, RBOY, RBOZ), the motion will act in the direction of a vector defined by two
points input on the EDLCS command. The origin and terminus ends of the vector are defined by the X1, Y1, Z1
and X2, Y2, Z2 fields, respectively, of EDLCS.
For Lab = OMGX, OMGY, and OMGZ, you may need to specify the origin location of the acceleration coordinate
system [CGLOC].
When applying a temperature load (Lab = TEMP), you may also need to define a reference temperature via the
TREF command. The thermal loading is defined as the difference between the applied temperature and the
reference temperature. Note that EDLOAD,LIST will list only the temperature values specified on EDLOAD, not
the temperature difference.
When applying loads to axisymmetric PLANE162 elements, the load may be interpreted differently depending
on whether you use the area weighted or volume weighted option (KEYOPT(2)). See the PLANE162 element
description in the ANSYS Elements Reference for details.
Use PHASE = 0 when you are using the LS-DYNA solver to conduct a transient explicit analysis only or when you
are conducting a sequential implicit/explicit analysis, in which the ANSYS (implicit) resulting displacements
(stored in the `drelax' file from the REXPORT command) are used to preload the explicit model [EDDRELAX,ANSYS]
Use PHASE = 1 or 2 when you need to use LS-DYNA to preload the model (as opposed to ANSYS) before running
the transient portion of the analysis. PHASE = 1 applies the load initially and then immediately removes the load.
As a result, the load is removed, and the structure vibrates freely. PHASE = 2 applies the load and then continues
to apply the load over the course of the transient analysis, so that the transient analysis includes the effect of
the initial loading and continues to account for the initial loading.
Birth and Death times, as well as the CID key are supported only for the EDLOAD labels specified with a Yes in
the following table.
Birth Time, Death Time, and CID Support
EDLOAD Label
Birth Time
Death Time
KEY = CID
FX, FY, FZ
No
No
Yes
MX, MY, MZ
No
No
Yes
UX, UY, UZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
VX, VY, VZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
OMGX, OMGY, OMGZ
No
No
No
AX, AY, AZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
3334
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDMP
EDLOAD Label
Birth Time
Death Time
KEY = CID
ACLX, ACLY, ACLZ
No
No
No
TEMP
No
No
No
PRESS
Yes
No
No
RBFX, RBFY, RBFZ
No
No
Yes
RBMX, RBMY, RBMZ
No
No
Yes
RBUX, RBUY, RBUZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
RBRX, RBRY, RBRZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
RBVX, RBVY, RBVZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
RBOX, RBOY, RBOZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Delete Loads>Delete All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Delete Loads>Delete Individ
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Specify Loads
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Delete Loads>Delete All
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Delete Loads>Delete Individ
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Specify Loads
EDMP, Lab, MAT, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6
Defines material properties for an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Lab
Valid material property label. Applicable labels are listed under "Material Properties" in the input table for
each explicit dynamics element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
HGLS
Hourglass and bulk viscosity properties (valid for PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164 using reduced integration, and SOLID168). VAL1 through VAL6 are also used. For those elements using full integration, HGLS
is not applicable and the input has no effect.
RIGID
Rigid body constraint (valid for LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168).
VAL1 and VAL2 are also used.
CABLE
Cable properties (valid for LINK167). VAL1 is optional input (see Notes).
ORTHO
Defines a material coordinate system for the orthotropic material model (valid for PLANE162, SHELL163,
SOLID164, and SOLID168) or the anisotropic material model (valid for SOLID164 and SOLID168). VAL1 is
also used.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3335
EDMP
FLUID
Fluid properties (valid for PLANE162, SOLID164, and SOLID168). VAL1 is optional input (see Notes).
MAT
Material reference number (defaults to the current MAT setting on MAT command).
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6
Additional input for specified Lab material property. The meaning of VAL1 through VAL6 will vary, depending
on Lab. See the table below for VAL1 through VAL6 definitions.
VAL1-VAL6 Definitions
Additional input for hourglass and bulk viscosity properties (Lab = HGLS).
VAL1
Hourglass control type. For solid elements (PLANE162, SOLID164, and SOLID168), 5 options are available.
For quadrilateral shell and membrane elements (SHELL163) with reduced integration, the hourglass
control is based on the formulation of Belytschko and Tsay; i.e., options 1-3 are identical and options 45 are identical.
0, 1
Standard LS-DYNA viscous form (default).
2
Flanagan-Belytschko viscous form.
3
Flanagan-Belytschko viscous form with exact volume integration for solid elements.
4
Flanagan-Belytschko stiffness form.
5
Flanagan-Belytschko stiffness form with exact volume integration for solid elements.
VAL2
Hourglass coefficient. (Defaults to 0.1.) Values greater than 0.15 may cause instabilities. The recommended
default applies to all options. The stiffness forms can stiffen the response (especially if deformations are
large) and, therefore, should be used with care. For the shell and membrane elements, the value input
for VAL1 is the membrane hourglass coefficient. VAL5 and VAL6 can also be input, but generally VAL2
= VAL5 = VAL6 is adequate.
VAL3
Quadratic bulk viscosity coefficient. (Defaults to 1.5.)
VAL4
Linear bulk viscosity coefficient. (Defaults to 0.06.)
VAL5
Hourglass coefficient for shell bending. (Defaults to VAL2.)
VAL6
Hourglass coefficient for shell warping. (Defaults to VAL2.)
Additional input for rigid body constraint (Lab = RIGID).
VAL1
Translational constraint parameter (relative to global Cartesian coordinates).
3336
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDMP
0
No constraints (default).
1
Constrained X displacement.
2
Constrained Y displacement.
3
Constrained Z displacement.
4
Constrained X and Y displacements.
5
Constrained Y and Z displacements.
6
Constrained Z and X displacements.
7
Constrained X, Y, and Z displacements.
VAL2
Rotational constraint parameter (relative to global Cartesian coordinates).
0
No constraints (default).
1
Constrained X rotation.
2
Constrained Y rotation.
3
Constrained Z rotation.
4
Constrained X and Y rotations.
5
Constrained Y and Z rotations.
6
Constrained Z and X rotations.
7
Constrained X, Y, and Z rotations.
Additional input for cable properties (Lab = CABLE).
VAL1
Load curve ID defining engineering stress versus engineering strain (i.e., change in length over the initial
length). If VAL1 and Young's modulus [MP,EX] are input, the load curve corresponding to VAL1 will be
used and Young's modulus will be ignored.
Additional input for material coordinate system (Lab = ORTHO).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3337
EDNB
VAL1
Coordinate system ID number from the EDLCS command. This coordinate system will be used to orient
the orthotropic or anisotropic materials associated with the material number, MAT.
Additional input for fluid material properties (Lab = FLUID).
VAL1
Bulk modulus of fluid. If VAL1 is not input, the bulk modulus will be calculated from the elastic modulus
(EX) and Poisson's ratio (NUXY).
Notes
For Lab = RIGID, you must specify elastic modulus (EX), density (DENS), and Poisson's ratio (NUXY) [MP command].
For Lab = CABLE, you must specify density (DENS) and one of the following: Young's modulus (EX) or an engineering stress-strain curve (VAL1). For Lab = FLUID, you must specify either the bulk modulus (VAL1) or both
Young's modulus (EX) and Poisson's ratio (NUXY) (if all three are specified, only VAL1 will be used).
After you define a rigid body using EDMP,RIGID, you may assign inertia properties to that rigid body using the
EDIPART command.
EDMP,ORTHO is required for orthotropic or anisotropic material properties that are not aligned with the global
Cartesian coordinate system.
Via the GUI, Lab = RIGID, CABLE, ORTHO, and FLUID are available through the material model interface. See Defining Explicit Dynamics Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for more information.
Use the MPLIST and MPDELE commands to list and delete materials defined by the EDMP command.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Hourglass Ctrls>Local
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Hourglass Ctrls>Local
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Hourglass Ctrls>Local
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Hourglass Ctrls>Local
EDNB, Option, Cname, AD, AS
Defines a nonreflecting boundary in an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the nonreflecting boundary option to be performed.
ADD
Define a nonreflecting boundary (default).
3338
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDNB
DELE
Delete a nonreflecting boundary.
LIST
List all defined nonreflecting boundaries (remaining fields are ignored).
Cname
Name of existing nodal component to which the nonreflecting boundary is to be added or deleted. For Option
= DELE, use Cname = ALL to delete all defined nonreflecting boundaries.
AD
Activation flag for dilatational waves (dampers normal to waves).
0
Dilatational activation flag is off (default).
1
Dilatational activation flag is on.
AS
Activation flag for shear waves (dampers tangent to waves).
0
Shear activation flag is off (default).
1
Shear activation flag is on.
Notes
Nonreflecting boundaries can be defined on the external surfaces of SOLID164 and SOLID168 elements that are
being used to model an infinite domain. They are typically used in geomechanical applications to limit the size
of the model. For example, when a half space is being modeled with a finite geometry, the nonreflecting
boundary option can be used to prevent artificial stress wave reflections generated at the boundary from reentering the model and contaminating the results.
When using nonreflecting boundaries, you should not constrain the nodes at the boundary; doing so would
negate the presence of the dampers. Usually, the large mass of the finite domain is sufficient to resist motion.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>Non-Refl Bndry
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>Non-Refl Bndry>Delete All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>Non-Refl Bndry>Delete Individ
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>Non-Refl Bndry
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>Non-Refl Bndry>Delete All
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>Non-Refl Bndry>Delete Individ
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3339
EDNDTSD
EDNDTSD, Vect1, Vect2, DATAP, FITPT, Vect3, Vect4, DISP
Allows smoothing of noisy data for explicit dynamics analyses and provides a graphical representation
of the data.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Vect1
Name of the first vector that contains the noisy data set (i.e., independent variable). You must create and fill
this vector before issuing EDNDTSD.
Vect2
Name of the second vector that contains the dependent set of data. Must be the same length as the first
vector. You must create and fill this vector before issuing EDNDTSD.
DATAP
Number of data points to be fitted, starting from the beginning of the vector. If left blank, the entire vector
will be fitted. The maximum number of data points is 100,000 (or greater, depending on the memory of the
computer).
FITPT
Curve fitting order to be used as a smooth representation of the data. This number should be less than or
equal to the number of data points. However, because high order polynomial curve fitting can cause numerical difficulties, a polynomial order less than 7 is suggested. The default (blank) is one-half the number of
data points or 7, which ever is less. The following values are available:
1
Curve is the absolute average of all of the data points.
2
Curve is the least square average of all of the data points.
3 or more
Curve is a polynomial of the order (n-1), where n is the number of data fitting order points.
Vect3
Name of the vector that contains the smoothed data of the independent variable. This vector should have
a length equal to or greater than the number of smoothed data points. In batch (command) mode, you must
create this vector before issuing the EDNDTSD command. In interactive mode, the GUI automatically creates
this vector (if it does not exist). If you do not specify a vector name, the GUI will name the vector smth_ind.
Vect4
Name of the vector that contains the smoothed data of the dependent variable. This vector must be the
same length as Vect3. In batch (command) mode, you must create this vector before issuing the EDNDTSD
command. In interactive mode, the GUI automatically creates this vector (if it does not exist). If you do not
specify a vector name, the GUI will name the vector smth_dep.
DISP
Specifies how you want to display data. No default; you must specify an option.
1
Unsmoothed data only
2
Smoothed data only
3340
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDNROT
3
Both smoothed and unsmoothed data
Notes
You can control the attributes of the graph using standard ANSYS controls (/GRID, /GTHK, /COLOR, etc.). If
working interactively, these controls appear in this dialog box for convenience, as well as in their standard dialog
boxes. You must always create Vect1 and Vect2 (using *DIM) and fill these vectors before smoothing the data.
If you're working interactively, ANSYS automatically creates Vect3 and Vect4, but if you're working in batch
(command) mode, you must create Vect3 and Vect4 (using *DIM) before issuing EDNDTSD. Vect3 and Vect4
are then filled automatically by ANSYS. In addition, ANSYS creates an additional TABLE type array that contains
the smoothed array and the unsmoothed data to allow for plotting later with *VPLOT. Column 1 in this table
corresponds to Vect1, column 2 to Vect2, and column 3 to Vect4. This array is named Vect3_SMOOTH, up to
a limit of 32 characters. For example, if the array name is X1, the table name is X1_SMOOTH.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Smooth Data
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Smooth Data
EDNROT, Option, CID, Cname, DOF1, DOF2, DOF3, DOF4, DOF5, DOF6
Applies a rotated coordinate nodal constraint in an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed:
ADD
Add a rotated nodal coordinate constraint (default).
DELE
Delete specified rotated nodal coordinate constraints.
LIST
List all rotated nodal coordinate constraints.
CID
Coordinate system ID for which rotated nodal constraints will be added or deleted. The CID must have been
previously defined with the EDLCS command. If Option = DELE, use CID = ALL to delete all previously specified
nodal constraints.
Cname
Nodal component set to which the rotated coordinate constraint will be applied. Cname must be previously
specified using the CM command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3341
EDOPT
DOF1, DOF2, DOF3, DOF4, DOF5, DOF6
Degrees of freedom for which the rotated nodal constraint will be applied. Valid degree of freedom labels
include UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ. If DOF1 = ALL, rotated nodal constraints will be applied to all
degrees of freedom.
Notes
Constraints applied with EDNROT are zero displacement constraints.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Apply>Rotated Nodal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>Rotated Nodal>Delete All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Delete>Rotated Nodal>Delete Individ
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Apply>Rotated Nodal
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>Rotated Nodal>Delete All
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Delete>Rotated Nodal>Delete Individ
EDOPT, Option, --, Value
Specifies the type of output for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed:
ADD
Define an output type specification (default).
DELE
Delete an output type specification.
LIST
List the current output type specification.
-This field is reserved for future use.
Value
Label identifying the type of output that the LS-DYNA solver should produce:
ANSYS
Write results files for the ANSYS postprocessors (default). The files that will be written are Jobname.RST
and Jobname.HIS (see Notes below).
LSDYNA
Write results files for the LS-DYNA postprocessor (LS-POST). The files that will be written are D3PLOT,
and files specified by EDOUT and EDHIST (see Notes below).
3342
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDOUT
BOTH
Write results files for both ANSYS and LS-DYNA postprocessors.
Command Default
Output is written for the ANSYS postprocessors only.
Notes
By default, LS-DYNA will write the ANSYS results file Jobname.RST (see the EDRST command.) If Jobname.HIS
is desired, you must also issue EDHIST.
Value = LSDYNA or BOTH will cause LS-DYNA to write results files for the LS-POST postprocessor. The D3PLOT
file is always written for these two options. If other LS-POST files are desired, you must issue the appropriate
EDHIST and EDOUT commands.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>Output File Types
EDOUT, Option
Specifies time-history output (ASCII format) for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Output data option. Each option corresponds to a separate file that is written by the LS-DYNA solver. If Option
= ALL, all files except NODOUT and ELOUT are written. Valid options are:
GLSTAT
Global data (default).
BNDOUT
Boundary condition forces and energy.
RWFORC
Wall force.
DEFORC
Discrete element data.
MATSUM
Material energies data.
NCFORC
Nodal interface forces.
RCFORC
Resultant interface force data.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3343
EDOUT
DEFGEO
Deformed geometry data.
SPCFORC
SPC reaction force data.
SWFORC
Nodal constraint reaction force data (spotwelds and rivets).
RBDOUT
Rigid body data.
GCEOUT
Geometry contact entities.
SLEOUT
Sliding interface energy.
JNTFORC
Joint force data.
NODOUT
Nodal data.
ELOUT
Element data.
Command Default
None of the above output is written.
Notes
This command specifies output to be written during an explicit dynamics solution. The data corresponding to
each Option is written to a separate ASCII file having the same name as the Option label. The data is written
for the entire model at time intervals specified by the EDHTIME command. If no time interval is specified, output
is written at 1000 steps over the analysis. (See also the EDHIST command which specifies time-history output
for a portion of the model.) The data written to the MATSUM file is actually for each PART number (EDPART) at
time intervals specified by the EDHTIME command, but the data is listed following the Mat no. in the file.
For Option = NODOUT and ELOUT, you must specify a component; you must issue EDHIST before issuing
EDOUT,NODOUT or EDOUT,ELOUT.
Use EDOUT,LIST to list the current time-history output specifications. (The listing will include output requested
with the EDHIST command.) Use EDOUT,DELE to delete all output specifications that have been defined with
the EDOUT command.
In order for the specified output files to be written, you must also request that explicit dynamics results be written
to an LS-DYNA output file [EDWRITE,LSDYNA or EDWRITE,BOTH].
In an explicit dynamic small restart analysis (EDSTART,2) or full restart analysis (EDSTART,3), the same ASCII files
that were requested for the original analysis are written by default for the restart. You can request different files
by issuing the appropriate EDOUT commands in the restart analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3344
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDPART
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>ASCII Output
EDPART, Option, PARTID, Cname
Configures parts for an explicit dynamics analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Option used to organize parts. (No default; Option must be specified.)
CREATE
Creates new PART IDs assigned to groups of elements with unique combinations of MAT, TYPE, and REAL
set numbers. If this option is issued repeatedly, the part list is overwritten, except for PART IDs created
with the ADD option. Remaining fields are ignored for this option.
UPDATE
Updates the PART IDs for the element groups without changing the order of the existing part list. If elements are redefined (or new elements are created) with different MAT, TYPE, or REAL set numbers, then
use this option to create an updated list of PART IDs. Remaining fields are ignored for this option.
ADD
Assigns a user-specified PART ID (PARTID) to the elements contained in the element component Cname,
or to the currently selected set of elements if Cname = ALL. Use this option to assign a specific PART ID
to an element group that has the same combination of MAT, TYPE, and REAL set numbers. An UPDATE
operation is automatically performed on the currently selected set of elements immediately following
the ADD operation.
DELE
Deletes a PART ID assigned by the ADD option. PARTID is also required. An UPDATE operation is automatically performed on the currently selected set of elements immediately following the DELE operation.
LIST
Lists the PART IDs for the element groups. The part list consists of five columns of numbers, one each for
PART, MAT, TYPE, and REAL numbers, and one to indicate if the PART ID is used (including how many
elements use it). The part list is based on the last CREATE or UPDATE operation. Remaining fields are ignored for this option.
PARTID
A positive integer to be used as PART ID for the elements specified by Cname (no default). The number input
must not be currently used for an existing part (except when Option = DELE). Any previously defined PART
IDs for the elements, whether assigned by the user or created by ANSYS LS-DYNA, will be overwritten. The
user-specified PART ID will not be changed by subsequent EDPART,CREATE or EDPART,UPDATE commands.
Cname
Element component name for user-specified PART ID definition (Option = ADD). If Cname = ALL (default),
all currently selected elements are considered for the part. The elements in the element component (or the
currently selected set of elements if Cname = ALL or blank) must have the same combination of MAT, TYPE,
and REAL set numbers, or the ADD option will be ignored.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3345
EDPC
Notes
Certain ANSYS LS-DYNA commands (such as EDCGEN, EDLOAD, EDREAD, etc.) refer to PART IDs. You must
define PART IDs (EDPART,CREATE or EDPART,ADD) before using these commands.
If parts are repeatedly created using Option = CREATE, the part list is continuously overwritten. This may cause
problems for previously defined commands that reference a part number that has changed. To avoid this problem,
the part list should be updated (Option = UPDATE) rather than recreated to obtain the current part list.
EDPART,ADD allows you to assign a specific part number to a group of elements instead of a number generated
by the ANSYS LS-DYNA program. The user-specified PART IDs will not be changed by subsequent EDPART,CREATE
or EDPART,UPDATE commands. Thus, you can use EDPART,ADD to specify PART IDs for some element groups,
and use EDPART,CREATE or EDPART,UPDATE to assign PART IDs for the remaining element groups. Use EDPART,DELE to delete a PART ID generated by the ADD option. In this case, ANSYS LS-DYNA will generate a new
PART ID for those elements associated with the deleted PART ID.
After creating or updating the part list, use EDPART,LIST to list the PART IDs and choose the correct one for use
with other ANSYS LS-DYNA commands. For a detailed discussion on PART IDs, see The Definition of Part in the
ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Parts Options
EDPC, MIN, MAX, INC
Selects and plots explicit dynamic contact entities.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
MIN
Minimum contact entity number to be selected and plotted (default = 1).
MAX
Maximum contact entity number to be selected and plotted (default = MIN).
INC
Contact entity number increment (default = 1).
Notes
EDPC invokes an ANSYS macro which selects and plots explicit dynamic contact entities. The plot will consist of
nodes or elements, depending on the method (node components or parts) that was used to define the contact
surfaces (see the EDCGEN command). For single surface contact definitions, all external surfaces within the
model are plotted.
Note EDPC changes the selected set of nodes and elements. After plotting contact entities, you must
reselect all nodes and elements (NSEL and ESEL) required for subsequent operations, such as SOLVE
3346
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDPVEL
Use the EDCLIST command to list the contact entity numbers for all defined contact.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Select and Plot
EDPL, LDNUM
Plots a time dependent load curve in an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
LDNUM
Load number.
Notes
EDPL invokes an ANSYS macro which produces a load vs. time graph for a load defined with the EDLOAD command. Only one load curve can be plotted at a time. Use EDLOAD,LIST to obtain a list of loads and corresponding
load numbers.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Plot Load Curve
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Plot Load Curve
EDPVEL, Option, PID, VX, VY, VZ, OMEGAX, OMEGAY, OMEGAZ, XC, YC, ZC, ANGX, ANGY, ANGZ
Applies initial velocities to parts or part assemblies in an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
VGEN
Define initial velocities for the part or part assembly based on translational velocities (relative to global
Cartesian) and the rotational velocity about an arbitrary axis. For this option, use the fields VX, VY, VZ to
specify the translational velocities, and use OMEGAX, XC, YC, ZC, ANGX, ANGY, ANGZ to specify the rotational
velocity and the axis of rotation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3347
EDPVEL
VELO
Define initial velocity for the part or part assembly based on translational velocities and nodal rotational
velocities input relative to the global Cartesian axes. For this option, use the following fields to define
the initial velocity: VX, VY, VZ, OMEGAX, OMEGAY, OMEGAZ.
LIST
List initial velocity for the part or part assembly specified by PID. If PID is blank, all initial velocities defined
on parts and part assemblies are listed. Remaining fields are ignored for this option.
DELE
Delete initial velocity defined for the part or part assembly specified by PID. If PID is blank, all initial velocities defined on parts and part assemblies are deleted. Remaining fields are ignored for this option.
PID
Part ID or part assembly ID to which the initial velocity is to be applied. The part or assembly ID must be
defined (EDPART or EDASMP) before issuing this command.
VX
Initial velocity in X direction. Defaults to 0.
VY
Initial velocity in Y direction. Defaults to 0.
VZ
Initial velocity in Z direction. Defaults to 0.
OMEGAX
For Option = VGEN, OMEGAX is the initial rotational velocity of the part or part assembly about the specified
rotational axis. For Option = VELO, OMEGAX is the initial nodal rotational velocity about the X-axis. OMEGAX
defaults to 0.
OMEGAY
Initial nodal rotational velocity about the Y-axis (used only if Option = VELO). Defaults to 0.
OMEGAZ
Initial nodal rotational velocity about the Z-axis (used only if Option = VELO). Defaults to 0.
The remaining fields are used only if Option = VGEN.
XC
X coordinate on rotational axis. Defaults to 0.
YC
Y coordinate on rotational axis. Defaults to 0.
ZC
Z coordinate on rotational axis. Defaults to 0.
ANGX
Angle relative to global X-axis. Defaults to 0.
ANGY
Angle relative to global Y-axis. Defaults to 0.
ANGZ
Angle relative to global Z-axis. Defaults to 0.
3348
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDPVEL
Notes
You cannot mix the two methods of initial velocity input (Option = VELO and Option = VGEN) in the same
analysis. You must use only one method for all initial velocity definitions.
The VGEN and VELO methods differ in how the rotational velocity is defined. Use Option = VGEN to input the
initial velocities of a rotating part or part assembly. Use Option = VELO to apply the rotations directly to the
nodes' rotation degrees of freedom. Since only shell and beam elements have rotation degrees of freedom, the
rotations input with Option = VELO are only applicable to SHELL163 and BEAM161 elements. The rotational
velocities input with Option = VELO are ignored for nodes not having rotational degrees of freedom (such as
nodes attached to a SOLID164 or SOLID168 element).
It is normally acceptable to mix nodes belonging to deformable bodies and rigid bodies in the part assembly
used in an initial velocity definition. However, when defining initial velocities in an implicit-to-explicit sequential
solution, this is not an acceptable practice. In order for the initial velocities to be defined correctly in this type of
analysis, you must define the initial velocities on the deformable body nodes separately from the initial velocities
on the rigid body nodes.
Issuing the EDPVEL command again for the same part or part assembly (PID) will overwrite previous initial velocities defined for that part or part assembly.
To set the initial velocities to zero, issue the EDPVEL command with only the Option (use VELO or VGEN) and
PID fields specified.
In a small restart analysis (EDSTART,2), you can only use the Option = VELO method to change initial velocities.
When used in a small restart, the command EDPVEL,VELO changes the velocity of the specified part or part assembly. If you don't change the velocity of the parts and assemblies, their velocity at the beginning of the restart
will be the same as the velocity at the end of the previous analysis.
Except for the LIST option, the EDPVEL command is not supported in a full restart analysis (EDSTART,3). You
can list initial velocities defined in the previous analysis with the command EDPVEL,LIST. However, you cannot
change initial velocities for parts that existed in the previous analysis; their velocity at the beginning of the analysis will be the same as the velocity at the end of the previous analysis. In addition, you cannot define initial
velocities for any parts that are added in the full restart; the velocity of new parts will be zero.
To apply initial velocities to node components or nodes, use the EDVEL command.
You can use EDPVEL and EDVEL in the same analysis. If a node or node component input on the EDVEL command
shares common nodes with a part or part assembly input on the EDPVEL command, the initial velocities defined
on the common nodes will be determined by the last command input.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Parts>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Parts>List
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Parts>w/Axial Rotate
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Parts>w/Nodal Rotate
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Parts>Delete
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3349
EDRC
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Parts>List
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Parts>w/Axial Rotate
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Parts>w/Nodal Rotate
EDRC, Option, NRBF, NCSF, --, DTMAX
Specifies rigid/deformable switch controls in an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying option to be performed.
ADD
Define rigid/deformable controls (default).
DELE
Delete rigid/deformable controls.
LIST
List rigid/deformable controls.
NRBF
Flag to delete/activate nodal rigid bodies. If nodal rigid bodies or generalized weld definitions are active in
the deformable bodies that are switched to rigid, then the definitions should be deleted to avoid instabilities.
0
No change from previous status (default).
1
Delete.
2
Activate.
NCSF
Flag to delete/activate nodal constraint set. If nodal constraint/spotweld definitions are active in the deformable bodies that are switched to rigid, then the definitions should be deleted to avoid instabilities.
0
No change from previous status (default).
1
Delete.
2
Activate.
--
Unused field.
TDMAX
Maximum allowed time step after restart (no default).
3350
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDRD
Command Default
No rigid/deformable controls are defined.
Notes
This command is only valid in an explicit dynamic small restart analysis (EDSTART,2). Use this command when
you do a rigid/deformable switch (EDRD command) and you want to control constraints defined by other means
for the deformable body (such as nodal constraints or a weld). For example, if a deformable body has nodal
constraints defined and it is switched to a rigid body, the nodal constraints should be deleted since they are invalid for the rigid body. Later on, if you want to switch the rigid body to deformable again and retain the nodal
constraints, you can use EDRC to activate the constraints previously defined for the deformable body. Otherwise,
the nodal constraints remain deactivated.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Rigid-Deformable>Controls
EDRD, Option, PART, MRB
Switches a part from deformable to rigid or from rigid to deformable in an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
D2R
Change specified part from deformable to rigid (default).
R2D
Change specified part from rigid to deformable. Use this option to switch a part back to a deformable
state after it has been changed to rigid using EDRD,D2R.
LIST
List parts that are flagged to change from deformable to rigid or rigid to deformable.
PART
Part number for part to be changed (no default).
MRB
Part number of the master rigid body to which the part is merged. MRB is used only if Option = D2R. If MRB
= 0 (which is the default), the part becomes an independent rigid body.
Command Default
No parts are switched.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3351
EDREAD
Notes
This command is valid in a new explicit dynamic analysis or in a restart. It is only possible to switch parts (D2R or
R2D) in a restart if part switching is first activated in the original analysis. If part switching is not required in the
original analysis but will be used in the restart, you must issue EDRD,D2R with no further arguments in the original analysis. You can use the EDRI command to define inertia properties for newly created rigid bodies (D2R).
Parts that are defined as rigid using EDMP,RIGID are permanently rigid and cannot be changed to deformable.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Rigid-Deformable>Switch
EDREAD, NSTART, Label, NUM, STEP1, STEP2
Reads explicit dynamics output into variables for time-history postprocessing.
POST26: Set Up
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NSTART
Starting reference number assigned to the first variable. Allowed range is 2 (the default) to NV [NUMVAR].
(NV defaults to 30 for an explicit dynamics analysis.)
Label
Label identifying the output file to be read. No default.
GLSTAT
Read data from the GLSTAT file.
MATSUM
Read data from the MATSUM file.
SPCFORC
Read data from the SPCFORC file.
RCFORC
Read data from the RCFORC file.
SLEOUT
Read data from the SLEOUT file.
NODOUT
Read data from the NODOUT file.
RBDOUT
Read data from the RBDOUT file.
NUM
Number identifying the data set to be read in (defaults to 1). If Label = GLSTAT, NUM is ignored. If Label =
MATSUM or RBDOUT, NUM is the PART number [EDPART] for which output is desired. If Label = SPCFORC
3352
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDREAD
or NODOUT, NUM is the node number for which output is desired. If Label = SLEOUT or RCFORC, NUM is the
number of the contact entity for which output is desired.
STEP1, STEP2
Load step range of data to be read in. If STEP1 and STEP2 are blank, all load steps are read in.
Notes
EDREAD reads data from the specified ascii output file so that it may be used during postprocessing. After
EDREAD, you must issue the STORE command to store the data in time history variables. Once stored, the variables
can be viewed as plots of output item versus time.
The number of variables stored depends on the file specified. The following table shows the items in each file
and the order in which they are stored. If data items were previously stored in variables NSTART to NSTART+15,
they will be overwritten. If more variables are needed, change NV on the NUMVAR command. (Note that hourglass
energy will not be available if it was not specified for the model [EDENERGY,1].)
The following items under MATSUM are listed in the MATSUM ASCII file (in the Mat no. field) for each part
number at time intervals specified by the EDHTIME command. Use EDREAD,,MATSUM,NUM to specify the part
number that corresponds to the mat number in the MATSUM file.
Resultant contact forces and sliding interface energies are available from the RCFORC and SLEOUT files, respectively. The RCFORC file is written for surface based contact types that include target and contact (master and
slave) definitions. You should ensure that this file contains valid force results before issuing EDREAD,,RCFORC.
Only the resultant contact forces on the master surface are available for time-history postprocessing.
Variable
Number
GLSTAT
MATSUM
SPCFORC
RCFORC
SLEOUT
NSTART
Time step
Internal energy
X force
X force
Slave energy
NSTART+1
Kinetic energy
Kinetic energy
Y force
Y force
Master energy
NSTART+2
Internal energy
X-momentum
Z force
Z force
Total slave energy
NSTART+3
Spring and damper energy Y-momentum
X moment
--
Total master energy
NSTART+4
System damping energy Z-momentum
Y moment
--
Total energy
NSTART+5
Sliding interface energy
X-rigid-body- velocity Z moment
--
--
NSTART+6
External work
Y-rigid-body- velocity
--
--
--
NSTART+7
Eroded kinetic energy
Z-rigid-body- velocity
--
--
--
NSTART+8
Eroded internal energy
Hourglass energy
--
--
--
NSTART+9
Total energy
--
--
--
--
NSTART+10
Total energy/initial energy
--
--
--
--
NSTART+11
Energy ratio w/o eroded
energy
--
--
--
--
NSTART+12
Global X velocity
--
--
--
--
NSTART+13
Global Y velocity
--
--
--
--
NSTART+14
Global Z velocity
--
--
--
--
NSTART+15
Hourglass energy
--
--
--
--
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3353
EDRI
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Read LSDYNA Data>GLSTAT file
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Read LSDYNA Data>MATSUM file
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Read LSDYNA Data>NODOUT file
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Read LSDYNA Data>RBDOUT file
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Read LSDYNA Data>RCFORC file
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Read LSDYNA Data>SLEOUT file
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Read LSDYNA Data>SPCFORC file
EDRI, Option, PART, XC, YC, ZC, TM, IXX, IYY, IZZ, IXY, IYZ, IXZ
Defines inertia properties for a new rigid body that is created when a deformable part is switched to rigid
in an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
ADD
Define inertia for specified part (default).
DELE
Delete inertia definition for specified part.
LIST
List inertia definitions.
PART
Part number for which inertia is defined (no default).
XC, YC, ZC
X, Y, and Z-coordinates of the center of mass (no defaults).
TM
Translational mass (no default).
IXX, IYY, IZZ, IXY, IYZ, IXZ
Components (xx, yy, etc.) of inertia tensor. IXX, IYY, and IZZ must be input (no defaults). IXY, IYZ, and IXZ
default to zero.
Command Default
Inertia properties are calculated by the program for all parts switched from deformable to rigid.
Notes
Use this command to define inertia properties for a rigid body that is created when a deformable part is switched
to rigid (using the EDRD,D2R command) in an explicit dynamic analysis. If these properties are not defined, LSDYNA will compute the new rigid body properties from the finite element mesh (which requires an accurate
mesh representation of the body). When rigid bodies are merged to a master rigid body, the inertia properties
defined for the master rigid body apply to all members of the merged set.
3354
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDRST
EDRI can only be issued in a new analysis. Therefore, if you are going to use inertia properties in a subsequent
restart analysis, you must issue EDRI in the original analysis for the part that will later be switched to rigid in the
restart.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Rigid-Deformable>Inertia Property
EDRST, NSTEP, DT
Specifies the output interval for an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
NSTEP
Number of steps at which output is written to the results file (Jobname.RST). Defaults to 100. When you
specify NSTEP, NSTEP+2 results are written to the Jobname.RST file. The time interval between output is
TIME / NSTEP, where TIME is the analysis end-time specified on the TIME command. Do not specify a value
of NSTEP = 0.
DT
Time interval at which output is written to the results file (Jobname.RST). If NSTEP is input, DT is ignored.
Command Default
Output will be written to Jobname.RST at 100 steps over the analysis.
Notes
You can use NSTEP or DT to specify the output interval to be used for Jobname.RST. You should not specify
both quantities; if both are input, NSTEP will be used.
In an explicit dynamic small restart (EDSTART,2) or full restart analysis (EDSTART,3), the EDRST setting will default
to the NSTEP or DT value used in the original analysis. You can issue EDRST in the restart to change this setting.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>File Output Freq>Number of Steps
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>File Output Freq>Time Step Size
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3355
EDRUN
EDRUN, Option, Cons
Specify LS-DYNA serial or parallel processing.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> <>
Option
LS-DYNA processing option
SERIAL
Use serial processing (default)
SMP
Use Shared Memory Parallel processing
Cons
Consistency setting (only applicable when Option = SMP)
0
Result consistency is not required (default)
1
Result consistency is required
Command Default
The command default is serial processing.
Notes
You use this command to specify either serial (one CPU) processing or shared (multiple CPU) memory parallel
processing (SMP). When you are using shared memory parallel processing, the calculations may be executed in
different order, depending on CPU availability and the workload on each CPU. Because of this, you may see slight
differences in the results when you run the same job multiple times, either with the same number or a different
number of processors. Comparing nodal accelerations often shows wider discrepancies. To avoid these differences,
you can specify that consistency be maintained by setting Cons = 1. Maintaining consistency can result in an
increase of up to 15% in CPU time.
The parallel processing setting is only effective when you have multiple CPUs AND licenses for the appropriate
number of ANSYS LS-DYNA SMP tasks. If you do not meet both of these requirements, this command will execute
serial processing, regardless of command settings.
For more information on using SMP, see Solution Features in the ANSYS/LS-DYNA User's Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Parallel Option
3356
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDSHELL
EDSHELL, WPAN, SHNU, SHTC, WPBT, SHPL, ITRST
Specifies shell computation controls for an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
WPAN
Maximum shell element warpage angle in degrees. Defaults to 20.
SHNU
Hughes-Liu shell normal update option:
2
Unique nodal fibers. This option is required for SHELL163 (KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, or 7) if the real constant
NLOC = 1 or -1.
1
Compute normals each cycle (default). This option is recommended.
1
Compute on restarts.
n
Compute every nth substep.
SHTC
Shell thickness change option:
0
No change.
1
Membrane straining causes thickness change. Important in sheet metal forming (default).
WPBT
Warping stiffness option for Belytschko-Tsay shells:
1
Belytschko-Wong-Chiang warping stiffness added. This option is recommended.
2
Belytschko-Tsay warping stiffness (default).
SHPL
Shell plasticity option. This option is only valid for these material models: strain rate independent plastic
kinematic, strain rate dependent plasticity, power law plasticity, and piecewise linear plasticity.
1
Iterative plasticity with 3 secant iterations (default).
2
Full iterative plasticity.
3
Radial return noniterative plasticity. (Use this option with caution; it may lead to inaccurate results.)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3357
EDSOLV
ITRST
Triangular shell sorting option. If sorting is on, degenerate quadrilateral shell elements are treated as triangular shells.
1
Full sorting (default).
2
No sorting.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Shell Elem Ctrls
EDSOLV
Specifies "explicit dynamics solution" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>LS-DYNA
EDSP, Option, MIN, MAX, INC
Specifies small penetration checking for contact entities in an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed (no default).
3358
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDSTART
ON
Turn small penetration checking on for specified contact entities.
OFF
Turn small penetration checking off for specified contact entities.
LIST
List current setting for penetration checking.
MIN
Minimum contact entity number for which to turn on/off small penetration check (default = 1).
MAX
Maximum contact entity number for which to turn on/off small penetration check (defaults to MIN).
INC
Contact entity number increment (default = 1).
Command Default
Penetration checking is determined by PENCHK on the EDCONTACT command.
Notes
This command controls small penetration checking in an explicit dynamic analysis. EDSP is applicable only to
the following contact types: STS, NTS, OSTS, TNTS, and TSTS. The penetration checking specified by EDSP is
similar to PENCHK on the EDCONTACT command. However, EDSP controls penetration checking for individual
contact entities whereas PENCHK is a global control that applies to all defined contact (of the types mentioned
above). EDSP can be used in a new analysis, or in a small restart (EDSTART,2).
Use the EDCLIST command to list the contact entity numbers for all defined contact.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Contact>Advanced Controls
EDSTART, RESTART, MEMORY, FSIZE, Dumpfile
Specifies status (new or restart) of an explicit dynamics analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
RESTART
Status of the analysis (new or restart).
0
New analysis (default).
1
Simple restart.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3359
EDSTART
2
Small restart.
3
Full restart.
MEMORY
Memory to be used (in words). If blank, LS-DYNA assigns a value (default). If more or less memory is needed,
specify the number of words (a word is usually 32 bits on a workstation).
FSIZE
Scale factor for binary file sizes. Defaults to 7, which is (7x262144) = 1835008 words.
Dumpfile
Name of dump file to use during a restart (for example, d3dumpnn, where nn = 01, 02, 03,...,99 and defaults
to 01). Leave this field blank when running a new analysis (RESTART = 0) so that the default dump file
d3dump01 will be created.
Command Default
A new analysis is assumed.
Notes
EDSTART can be issued before the SOLVE command to specify a new analysis, a simple restart, a small restart,
or a full restart as described below.
New analysis: For a new analysis, you do not need to issue EDSTART unless you want to change the MEMORY or
FSIZE option. If you do not specify the dump file name, d3dump01 will be created by default.
Simple restart: This option assumes that the database has not been altered. Upon restarting, results will be appended to the existing results files. Issue EDSTART,1,,,d3dumpnn to indicate which restart file to use as a starting
point. The dump file to be used must have been created in an earlier run and must be available at the time this
command is issued. You would typically use a simple restart when you interrupt the LS-DYNA run via CTRL-C
and terminate the run prematurely by issuing the "sense switch control" key SW1 (see Solution Control and
Monitoring in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide). At this point you should be able to view the partial solution using
ANSYS postprocessors. After you are done viewing the partial solution, you can reenter the solution processor
and issue EDSTART,1,,,d3dumpnn, followed by SOLVE to continue with the analysis. The results will be appended
to the results files Jobname.RST and Jobname.HIS. You can perform multiple simple restarts by issuing EDSTART,1,,,d3dumpnn multiple times, as needed. The solutions in the Jobname.RST file will all be in load step
number 1.
Small restart: This option can be used when minor changes in the database are necessary. For example, you can
reset the termination time, reset the output interval, add displacement constraints, change initial velocities,
switch parts from a deformable to rigid state, etc. (See A Small Restart in theANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for a
complete description of database items that can be changed.) Issue EDSTART,2,,,d3dumpnn followed by the
commands required to change the database, then issue SOLVE. The results will be appended to the results files
Jobname.RST and Jobname.HIS. You can perform multiple restarts by issuing EDSTART,2,,,d3dumpnn multiple
times, as needed. The additional restart solutions will be stored in Jobname.RST as load step numbers 2, 3, etc.
Full restart: A full restart is appropriate when many modifications to the database are required. For example, you
can change the model geometry, apply different loading conditions, etc. Issue EDSTART,3,,,d3dumpnn to denote
a full restart analysis. The Jobname will automatically be changed to Jobname_nn, (nn = 01 initially, and will be
3360
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDTERM
incremented each time EDSTART,3 is issued for subsequent full restarts). After the EDSTART command, you
can input any commands needed to change the database. (Most commands which are applicable to an ANSYS
LS-DYNA new analysis are also applicable to full restart analysis. A few commands related to contact specifications,
initial velocity definitions, and adaptive meshing are not supported.) Then issue the EDIS command to specify
which portions of the model should be initialized in the full restart using results data from the d3dumpnn file.
Finally, issue the SOLVE command. At this point, new results files, Jobname_nn.RST and Jobname_nn.HIS, will
be created. Time and output intervals in the new results files are continuous from the previous results files; the
time is not reset to zero. (See A Full Restart in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for a complete description of a full
restart analysis.)
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Restart Option
EDTERM, Option, Lab, NUM, STOP, MAXC, MINC
Specifies termination criteria for an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
ADD
Define termination criteria (default).
DELE
Delete termination criteria.
LIST
List termination criteria.
Lab
Label identifying the type of termination (no default).
NODE
Terminate solution based on nodal point coordinates. The analysis terminates when the current position
of the specified node reaches either the maximum or minimum coordinate value (STOP = 1, 2, or 3), or
when the node picks up force from any contact surface (STOP = 4).
PART
Terminate solution based on rigid body (part) displacements. The analysis terminates when the displacement of the center of mass of the specified rigid body reaches either the maximum or minimum value
(STOP = 1, 2, or 3), or when the displacement magnitude of the center of mass is exceeded (STOP = 4).
NUM
Node number (if Lab = NODE) or rigid body Part ID (if Lab = PART). (No default.)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3361
EDTERM
STOP
Criterion for stopping the solution (no default).
1
Global X-direction.
2
Global Y-direction.
3
Global Z-direction.
4
For Lab = NODE, stop the solution if contact occurs. For Lab = PART, stop the solution if the displacement
magnitude is exceeded for the specified rigid body (use MAXC to define the displacement magnitude).
MAXC
Maximum (most positive) coordinate value (Lab = NODE) or displacement (Lab = PART). MAXC defaults to
1.0e21
MINC
Minimum (most negative) coordinate value (Lab = NODE) or displacement (Lab = PART). MINC defaults to 1.0e21.
Command Default
No termination criteria are defined other than the termination time set on the TIME command.
Notes
You may specify multiple termination criteria using EDTERM; the solution will terminate when any one of the
criteria is satisfied, or when the solution end time (specified on the TIME command) is reached.
In an explicit dynamic small restart analysis (EDSTART,2) or full restart analysis (EDSTART,3), the termination
criteria set in the previous analysis (the original analysis or the previous restart) are carried over to the restart. If
the previous analysis terminated due to one of these criteria, that specific criterion must be modified so that it
will not cause the restart to terminate prematurely. In particular, if a termination condition based on nodal contact
(Lab = NODE, STOP = 4) is satisfied, this condition must be deleted and replaced with a condition based on
nodal coordinates for that same node. (If a condition based on nodal coordinates already exists for that node,
the replacement is not necessary.) In the restart, the number of termination criteria specified using EDTERM
cannot exceed a maximum of 10 or the number specified in the original analysis.
Note that the termination criteria set by EDTERM are not active during dynamic relaxation (EDDRELAX).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Criteria to Stop>List
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Criteria to Stop>On a Node
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Options>Criteria to Stop>On a Part
3362
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDTP
EDTP, OPTION, VALUE1, VALUE2
Plots explicit elements based on their time step size.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
OPTION
Plotting option (default = 1).
1
Plots the elements with the smallest time step sizes. The number of elements plotted and listed is equal
to VALUE1 (which defaults to 100). Each element is shaded red or yellow based on its time step value
(see Notes for details).
2
Produces the same plot as for OPTION = 1, and also produces a list of the plotted elements and their
corresponding time step values.
3
Produces a plot similar to OPTION = 1, except that all selected elements are plotted. Elements beyond
the first VALUE1 elements are blue and translucent. The amount of translucency is specified by VALUE2.
This option also produces a list of the first VALUE1 elements with their corresponding time step values.
VALUE1
Number of elements to be plotted and listed (default = 100). For example, if VALUE1 = 10, only the elements
with the 10 smallest time step sizes are plotted and listed.
VALUE2
Translucency level ranging from 0 to 1 (default = 0.9). VALUE2 is only used when OPTION = 3, and only for
the elements plotted in blue. To plot these elements as non-translucent, set VALUE2 = 0.
Notes
EDTP invokes an ANSYS macro that plots and lists explicit elements based on their time step size. For OPTION =
1 or 2, the number of elements plotted is equal to VALUE1 (default = 100). For OPTION = 3, all selected elements
are plotted.
The elements are shaded red, yellow, or blue based on their time step size. Red represents the smallest time step
sizes, yellow represents the intermediate time step sizes, and blue represents the largest time step sizes. For example, if you specify VALUE1 = 30, and if T1 is the smallest critical time step of all elements and T30 is the time
step of the 30th smallest element, then the elements are shaded as follows:
Red - time step range is T1 to T1 + [0.05*(T30--T1)]
Yellow - time step range is T1 + [0.05*(T30--T1)] to T30
Blue (translucent) - time step range is > T30
Translucent blue elements only appear when OPTION = 3.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3363
EDVEL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Time Controls>Time Step Prediction
EDVEL, Option, Cname, VX, VY, VZ, OMEGAX, OMEGAY, OMEGAZ, XC, YC, ZC, ANGX, ANGY, ANGZ
Applies initial velocities to nodes or node components in an explicit dynamic analysis.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
VGEN
Define initial velocities based on translational velocities (relative to global Cartesian) and the rotational
velocity about an arbitrary axis. For this option, use the fields VX, VY, VZ to specify the translational velocities, and use OMEGAX, XC, YC, ZC, ANGX, ANGY, ANGZ to specify the rotational velocity and the axis of rotation.
VELO
Define initial velocity based on translational velocities and nodal rotational velocities input relative to
the global Cartesian axes. For this option, use the following fields to define the initial velocity: VX, VY, VZ,
OMEGAX, OMEGAY, OMEGAZ.
LIST
List initial velocity for the component or node specified by Cname. If Cname is blank, all initial velocities
defined on nodes and node components are listed. Remaining fields are ignored for this option.
DELE
Delete initial velocity defined for the component or node specified by Cname. If Cname is blank, all initial
velocities defined on nodes and node components are deleted. Remaining fields are ignored for this
option.
Cname
Name of existing component [CM] or node number to which the initial velocity is to be applied. If a component
is used, it must consist of nodes.
VX
Initial velocity in X direction. Defaults to 0.
VY
Initial velocity in Y direction. Defaults to 0.
VZ
Initial velocity in Z direction. Defaults to 0.
OMEGAX
For Option = VGEN, OMEGAX is the initial rotational velocity of the component (or node) about the specified
rotational axis. For Option = VELO, OMEGAX is the initial nodal rotational velocity about the X-axis. OMEGAX
defaults to 0.
OMEGAY
Initial nodal rotational velocity about the Y-axis (used only if Option = VELO). Defaults to 0.
OMEGAZ
Initial nodal rotational velocity about the Z-axis (used only if Option = VELO). Defaults to 0.
3364
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDVEL
The remaining fields are used only if Option = VGEN.
XC
X coordinate on rotational axis. Defaults to 0.
YC
Y coordinate on rotational axis. Defaults to 0.
ZC
Z coordinate on rotational axis. Defaults to 0.
ANGX
Angle relative to global X-axis. Defaults to 0.
ANGY
Angle relative to global Y-axis. Defaults to 0.
ANGZ
Angle relative to global Z-axis. Defaults to 0.
Notes
You cannot mix the two methods of initial velocity input (Option = VELO and Option = VGEN) in the same
analysis. You must use only one method for all initial velocity definitions.
The VGEN and VELO methods differ in how the rotational velocity is defined. Use Option = VGEN to input the
initial velocities of a rotating component. Use Option = VELO to apply the rotations directly to the nodes' rotation
degrees of freedom. Since only shell and beam elements have rotation degrees of freedom, the rotations input
with Option = VELO are only applicable to SHELL163 and BEAM161 elements. The rotational velocities input
with Option = VELO are ignored for nodes not having rotational degrees of freedom (such as nodes attached
to a SOLID164 or SOLID168 element).
It is normally acceptable to mix nodes belonging to deformable bodies and rigid bodies in the nodal component
used in an initial velocity definition. However, when defining initial velocities in an implicit-to-explicit sequential
solution, this is not an acceptable practice. In order for the initial velocities to be defined correctly in this type of
analysis, you must define the initial velocities on the deformable body nodes separately from the initial velocities
on the rigid body nodes.
Issuing the EDVEL command again for the same component or node (Cname) will overwrite previous initial velocities defined for that component or node.
To set the initial velocities to zero, issue the EDVEL command with only the Option (use VELO or VGEN) and
Cname fields specified.
In a small restart analysis (EDSTART,2), you can only use the Option = VELO method to change initial velocities.
When used in a small restart, the command EDVEL,VELO changes the velocity of the specified nodes. If you don't
change the velocity of the nodes, their velocity at the beginning of the restart will be the same as the velocity
at the end of the previous analysis.
Except for the LIST option, the EDVEL command is not supported in a full restart analysis (EDSTART,3). You can
list initial velocities defined in the previous analysis with the command EDVEL,LIST. However, you cannot change
initial velocities for nodes or node components that existed in the previous analysis; their velocity at the beginning
of the analysis will be the same as the velocity at the end of the previous analysis. In addition, you cannot define
initial velocities for any nodes that are added in the full restart; the velocity of new nodes will be zero.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3365
EDWELD
To apply initial velocities to parts or part assemblies, use the EDPVEL command.
You can use EDPVEL and EDVEL in the same analysis. If a node or node component input on the EDVEL command
shares common nodes with a part or part assembly input on the EDPVEL command, the initial velocities defined
on the common nodes will be determined by the last command input.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>List
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>w/Axial Rotate
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>w/Nodal Rotate
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>List
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>w/Axial Rotate
Main Menu>Solution>Initial Velocity>On Nodes>w/Nodal Rotate
EDWELD, Option, NWELD, N1, N2, SN, SS, EXPN, EXPS, EPSF, TFAIL, NSW, CID
Defines a massless spotweld or generalized weld for use in an explicit dynamic analysis.
PREP7: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed:
ADD
Define a weld (default). This weld may be a spotweld between two nodes or a generalized weld. A
massless spotweld will be defined if valid node numbers are specified in fields N1 and N2. A generalized
weld will be defined if a node component is specified in field N1.
DELE
Delete specified weld. If NWELD is blank, all welds are deleted.
LIST
List specified weld. If NWELD is blank, all welds are listed.
NWELD
Reference number identifying the spotweld or generalized weld.
N1, N2
For a spotweld, N1 and N2 are the nodes which are connected by the spotweld. For a generalized weld, input
a nodal component name in N1 and leave N2 blank. The nodal component should contain all nodes that are
to be included in the generalized weld.
SN
Normal force at spotweld failure.
SS
Shear force at spotweld failure.
3366
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EDWELD
EXPN
Exponent for normal spotweld force.
EXPS
Exponent for shear spotweld force.
EPSF
Effective plastic strain at ductile failure (used only for a generalized weld).
TFAIL
Failure time for constraint set (used only for a generalized weld); default = 1.0e20.
NSW
Number of spot welds for the generalized weld.
CID
Coordinate system ID number (CID) to be used for output data (used only for a generalized weld). The coordinate system must be previously defined with the EDLCS command.
Notes
This command can be used to define a massless spotweld between two nodes or a generalized weld for a group
of nodes. For a spotweld, the nodes specified by N1 and N2 must not be coincident. For a generalized weld, coincident nodes are permitted, but CID must be specified when using coincident nodes. EDWELD is not updated
after a node merge operation; therefore, node merging [NUMMRG,NODE] should be done before any EDWELD
definitions. Nodes connected by a spotweld or generalized weld cannot be constrained in any other way.
Failure of the weld occurs when:
fn
S
n
exp n
fs
+
S
s
exp s
where fn and fs are normal and shear interface forces. Normal interface force fn is nonzero for tensile values only.
You can graphically display spotwelds by issuing the command /PBC,WELD,,1.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Spotweld>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Spotweld>Genrlizd Spotwld
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Spotweld>List
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Spotweld>Massless Spotwld
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3367
EDWRITE
EDWRITE, Option, Fname, Ext, -Writes explicit dynamics input to an LS-DYNA input file.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
Sets a flag in the LS-DYNA input file (Fname.Ext) to produce desired output.
ANSYS
Set a flag to write results files for the ANSYS postprocessors (default). The files that will be written are
Jobname.RST and Jobname.HIS (see Notes below).
LSDYNA
Set a flag to write results files for the LS-DYNA postprocessor (LS-POST). The files that will be written are
D3PLOT, and files specified by EDOUT and EDHIST (see Notes below).
BOTH
Set a flag to write results files for both ANSYS and LS-DYNA postprocessors.
Fname
File name and directory path (80 characters maximum, including directory; this limit is due to an LS-DYNA
program limitation). If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory. The file
name defaults to Jobname. Previous data on this file, if any, are overwritten.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to K in a new analysis and in a full restart analysis, and to R in a small restart analysis.
--
Unused field.
Notes
This command writes an LS-DYNA input file for the LS-DYNA solver. EDWRITE is only valid if explicit dynamic
elements have been specified. This command is not necessary if the LS-DYNA solver is invoked from within ANSYS,
in which case Jobname.K (or Jobname.R) is written automatically when the solution is initiated. (If LS-DYNA is
invoked from within ANSYS, use EDOPT to specify desired output.)
If the analysis is a small restart (EDSTART,2), the file that is written will have the name Jobname.R (by default)
and will only contain changes from the original analysis.
If the analysis is a full restart (EDSTART,3), the file that is written will have the name Jobname_nn.K (by default)
and will contain all the information from the database. In a full restart, the jobname is changed to Jobname_nn
(nn = 01 initially, and is incremented for each subsequent full restart.)
A command is included in the LS-DYNA input file to instruct the LS-DYNA solver to write the results files indicated
by Option. By default, LS-DYNA will write the ANSYS results file Jobname.RST (see the EDRST command). If
Jobname.HIS is desired, you must also issue EDHIST.
Option = LSDYNA or BOTH will cause LS-DYNA to write results files for the LS-POST postprocessor. The D3PLOT
file is always written for these two options. If other LS-POST files are desired, you must issue the appropriate
EDHIST and EDOUT commands.
3368
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/EFACET
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Write Jobname.k
/EFACET, NUM
Specifies the number of facets per element edge for PowerGraphics displays.
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NUM
Number of facets per element edge for element plots.
1
Use 1 facet per edge (default for h-elements).
2
Use 2 facets per edge (default for p-elements).
4
Use 4 facets per edge.
Command Default
As stated above.
Notes
/EFACET is valid only when PowerGraphics is enabled [/GRAPHICS,POWER], except that it can be used in FULL
graphics mode for element CONTA174. (See the /GRAPHICS command and element CONTA174 in the ANSYS
Elements Reference for more information.) The /EFACET command is only applicable to element type displays.
/EFACET controls the fineness of the subgrid that is used for element plots. The element is subdivided into
smaller portions called facets. Facets are piecewise linear surface approximations of the actual element face. In
their most general form, facets are warped planes in 3-D space. A greater number of facets will result in a
smoother representation of the element surface for element plots. /EFACET may affect results averaging. See
Contour Displays in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information.
For midside node elements, use NUM = 2; if NUM = 1, no midside node information is output. For non-midside
node elements, NUM should be set to 1. See the PLNSOL and PRNSOL commands for more information.
With PowerGraphics active (/GRAPHICS,POWER), the averaging scheme for surface data with interior element
data included (AVRES,,FULL) and multiple facets per edge (/EFACET,2 or /EFACET,4) will yield differing minimum
and maximum contour values depending on the Z-Buffering options (/TYPE,,6 or /TYPE,,7). When the Section
data is not included in the averaging schemes (/TYPE,,7), the resulting absolute value for the midside node is
significantly smaller.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3369
EGEN
Caution: If you specify /EFACET,1, PowerGraphics does not plot midside nodes. You must use /EFACET,2
to make the nodes visible.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Nodal Solu
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Contour Plot>Nodal Solution
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Multi-Plot Contrls
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Size and Shape
EGEN, ITIME, NINC, IEL1, IEL2, IEINC, MINC, TINC, RINC, CINC, SINC, DX, DY, DZ
Generates elements from an existing pattern.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITIME, NINC
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all nodes in the given pattern by NINC each
time after the first. ITIME must be >1 if generation is to occur. NINC may be positive, zero, or negative. If DX,
DY, and/or DZ is specified, NINC should be set so any existing nodes (as on NGEN) are not overwritten.
IEL1, IEL2, IEINC
Generate elements from selected pattern beginning with IEL1 to IEL2 (defaults to IEL1) in steps of IEINC
(defaults to 1). If IEL1 is negative, IEL2 and IEINC are ignored and the last |IEL1| elements (in sequence
backward from the maximum element number) are used as the pattern to be repeated. If IEL1 = ALL, IEL2
and IEINC are ignored and use all selected elements [ESEL] as pattern to be repeated. If P1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for IEL1 (IEL2 and INC are ignored).
MINC
Increment material number of all elements in the given pattern by MINC each time after the first.
TINC
Increment type number by TINC.
RINC
Increment real constant table number by RINC.
CINC
Increment element coordinate system number by CINC.
SINC
Increment section ID number by SINC.
DX, DY, DZ
Define nodes that do not already exist but are needed by generated elements (as though the
NGEN,ITIME,INC,NODE1,,,DX,DY,DZ were issued before EGEN). Zero is a valid value. If blank, DX, DY, and
DZ are ignored.
3370
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EINTF
Notes
A pattern may consist of any number of previously defined elements. The MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, and SECNUM
numbers of the new elements are based upon the elements in the pattern and not upon the current specification
settings.
You can use the EGEN command to generate interface elements (INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, and INTER195)
directly. However, because interface elements require that the element connectivity be started from the bottom
surface, you must make sure that you use the correct element node connectivity. See the element descriptions
for INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, and INTER195 for the correct element node definition.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Elements>Auto Numbered
EINTF, TOLER, K, TLAB, KCN, DX, DY, DZ, KNONROT
Defines two-node elements between coincident or offset nodes.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TOLER
Tolerance for coincidence (based on maximum Cartesian coordinate difference for node locations and on
angle differences for node orientations). Defaults to 0.0001. Only nodes within the tolerance are considered
to be coincident.
K
Only used when the type of the elements to be generated is PRETS179. K is the pretension node that is
common to the pretension section that is being created. If K is not specified, it will be created by ANSYS
automatically and will have an ANSYS-assigned node number. If K is specified but does not already exist, it
will be created automatically but will have the user-specified node number. K cannot be connected to any
existing element.
TLAB
Nodal number ordering. Allowable values are:
LOW
The 2-node elements are generated from the lowest numbered node to the highest numbered node.
HIGH
The 2-node elements are generated from the highest numbered node to the lowest numbered node.
REVE
Reverses the orientation of the selected 2-node element.
KCN
In coordinate system KCN, elements are created between node 1 and node 2 (= node 1 + dx dy dz)..
DX, DY, DZ
Node location increments that define the node offset in the active coordinate system (DR, D, DZ for cylindrical
and DR, D, D for spherical or toroidal).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3371
EKILL
KNONROT
When KNONROT = 0, the nodes coordinate system is not rotated. When KNONROT = 1, the nodes belonging
to the elements created are rotated into coordinate system KCN (see NROTATE command description).
Notes
Defines 2-node elements (such as gap elements) between coincident or offset nodes (within a tolerance). May
be used, for example, to "hook" together elements interfacing at a seam, where the seam consists of a series of
node pairs. One element is generated for each set of two coincident nodes. For more than two coincident or
offset nodes in a cluster, an element is generated from the lowest numbered node to each of the other nodes
in the cluster. If fewer than all nodes are to be checked for coincidence, use the NSEL command to select the
nodes. Element numbers are incremented by one from the highest previous element number. The element type
must be set [ET] to a 2-node element before issuing this command. Use the CPINTF command to connect nodes
by coupling instead of by elements. Use the CEINTF command to connect the nodes by constraint equations
instead of by elements.
For contact element CONTA178, the tolerance is based on the maximum Cartesian coordinate difference for
node locations only. The angle differences for node orientations are not checked.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Auto Numbered>At Coincid Nd
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Auto Numbered>Offset Nodes
EKILL, ELEM
Deactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
SOLUTION: Birth and Death
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
ELEM
Element to be deactivated. If ALL, deactivate all selected elements [ESEL]. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for ELEM.
Notes
Deactivates the specified element when the birth and death capability is being used. A deactivated element remains in the model but contributes a near-zero stiffness (or conductivity etc.) value (see the ESTIF command)
to the overall matrix. Deactivated elements contribute nothing to the overall mass (or capacitance, etc.) matrix.
The element may be reactivated with the EALIVE command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Birth & Death>Kill Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Birth & Death>Kill Elements
3372
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ELIST
ELEM
Specifies "Elements" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Elements
ELIST, IEL1, IEL2, INC, NNKEY, RKEY, PTKEY
Lists the elements and their attributes.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IEL1, IEL2, INC
Lists elements from IEL1 to IEL2 (defaults to IEL1) in steps of INC (defaults to 1). If IEL1 = ALL (default),
IEL2 and INC are ignored and all selected elements [ESEL] are listed. If IEL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for IEL1 (IEL2 and INC are ignored).
NNKEY
Node listing key:
0
List attribute references and nodes.
1
List attribute references but not nodes.
RKEY
Real constant listing key:
0
Do not show real constants for each element.
1
Show real constants for each element. This includes default values chosen for the element.
PTKEY
LS-DYNA part number listing key (applicable to ANSYS LS-DYNA only):
0
Do not show part ID number for each element.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3373
EMAGERR
1
Show part ID number for each element.
Notes
Lists the elements with their nodes and attributes (MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, SECNUM, PART). See also the LAYLIST
command for listing layered elements.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Elements>Attributes + RealConst
Utility Menu>List>Elements>Attributes Only
Utility Menu>List>Elements>Nodes + Attributes
Utility Menu>List>Elements>Nodes + Attributes + RealConst
EMAGERR
Calculates the relative error in an electrostatic or electromagnetic field analysis.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
The relative error is an approximation of the mesh discretization error associated with a solution. It is based on
the discrepancy between the unaveraged, element-nodal field values and the averaged, nodal field values. The
calculation is valid within a material boundary and does not consider the error in continuity of fields across dissimilar materials.
For electrostatics, the field values evaluated are the electric field strength (EFSUM) and the electric flux density
(DSUM). A relative error norm of each is calculated on a per-element basis and stored in the element table
[ETABLE] with the labels EF_ERR and D_ERR. Normalized error values EFN_ERR and DN_ERR are also calculated
and stored in the element table. Corresponding quantities for electromagnetics are H_ERR, B_ERR, HN_ERR, and
BN_ERR, which are calculated from the magnetic field intensity (HSUM) and the magnetic flux density (BSUM).
The normalized error value is the relative error norm value divided by the peak element-nodal field value for the
currently selected elements.
Use the PLETAB and PRETAB commands to plot and list the error norms and normalized error values.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Element Based>Error Eval
3374
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EMF
EMATWRITE, Key
Forces the writing of all the element matrices to File.EMAT.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Write key:
YES
Forces the writing of the element matrices to File.EMAT even if not normally done.
NO
Element matrices are written only if required (default).
Notes
Forces the program to write the File.EMAT and is used if you intend to issue a subsequent PSOLVE that requires
File.EMAT as a prerequisite or if you plan to follow the initial load step with a subsequent inertia relief calculation
using the IRLF command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
EMF
Calculates the electromotive force (emf), or voltage drop along a predefined path.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
EMF invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates the electromotive force (emf), or voltage drop along a predefined
path (specified with the PATH command). It is valid for both 2-D and 3-D electric field analysis or high-frequency
electromagnetic field analysis. The calculated emf value is stored in the parameter EMF.
You must define a line path (via the PATH command) before issuing the EMF command macro. The macro uses
calculated values of the electric field (EF), and uses path operations for the calculations. All path items are cleared
when the macro finishes executing.
The EMF macro sets the "ACCURATE" mapping method and "MAT" discontinuity option on the PMAP command.
The ANSYS program retains these settings after executing the macro.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Path Based>EMF
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3375
EMFT
EMFT
Summarizes electromagnetic forces and torques.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Use this command to summarize electromagnetic force and torque in both static electric and magnetic problems.
To use this command, select the nodes in the region of interest and make sure that all elements are selected. If
RSYS = 0, the force is reported in the global Cartesian coordinate system. If RSYS 0, force is reported in the
specified coordinate system. However, for torque, if RSYS 0, this command will account for the shift and rotation
as specified by RSYS, but will report only the Cartesian components.
Forces are stored as items _FXSUM, _FYSUM, _FZSUM, and _FSSUM. Torque is stored as items _TXSUM, _TYSUM,
_TZSUM, and _TSSUM.
This command is valid only with SOLID117, PLANE121, SOLID122, and SOLID123 elements. For any other elements,
you must use FMAGSUM.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu> General Postprocessor> Elec&Mag Calc> Summarize Force/Torque
EMID, Key, Edges
Adds or removes midside nodes.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Key
Add or remove key:
ADD
Add midside node to elements (default).
REMOVE
Remove midside nodes from elements.
Edges
ALL
Add (or remove) midside nodes to (from) all edges of all selected elements, independent of which nodes
are selected (default).
EITHER
Add (or remove) midside nodes only to (from) element edges which have either corner node selected.
BOTH
Add (or remove) midside nodes only to (from) element edges which have both corner nodes selected.
3376
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EMIS
Notes
This command adds midside nodes to (or removes midside nodes from) the selected elements. For this to occur,
the selected elements must be midside node capable, the active element type [TYPE] must allow midside node
capability, and the relationship between the finite element model and the solid model (if any) must first be disassociated [MODMSH].
By default, EMID generates a midside node wherever a zero (or missing) midside node occurs for that element.
You can control this and add (or remove) midside nodes selectively by using the Edges argument. Nodes are
located midway between the two appropriate corner nodes based on a linear Cartesian interpolation. Nodal
coordinate system rotation angles are also linearly interpolated. Connected elements share the same midside
node. Node numbers are generated sequentially from the maximum node number.
The EMID command is useful for transforming linear element types to quadratic element types having the same
corner node connectivity (for example, by changing the element type from PLANE42 to PLANE82 [ET] and then
issuing the EMID command). EMID is also useful for transforming elements created outside of the ANSYS program.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Elements>Add Mid Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Elements>Remove Mid Nd
EMIS, MAT, EVALU
Specifies emissivity as a material property for the Radiation Matrix method.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
MAT
Material number associated with this emissivity (500 maximum). Defaults to 1.
EVALU
Emissivity for this material (0.0 < EVALU 1.0). Enter a very small number for zero.
Command Default
Emissivity value of 1.0 is associated with all materials.
Notes
Specifies emissivity as a material property for the Radiation Matrix method. This material property can then be
associated with each element.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Matrix Method>Emissivities
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3377
EMODIF
EMODIF, IEL, STLOC, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5, I6, I7, I8
Modifies a previously defined element.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IEL
Modify nodes and/or attributes for element number IEL. If ALL, modify all selected elements [ESEL]. If IEL
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for IEL.
STLOC
Starting location (n) of first node to be modified or the attribute label. If n, modify element node positions
n, n+1, etc. (n = 1 to 20). For example, if STLOC = 1, I1 refers to the first node, I2, the second, etc. If STLOC
= 9, I1 refers to the ninth node, I2, the tenth, etc. Attributes are also modified to the currently specified
values (use -n to modify only nodes and not attributes). If zero, modify only the attributes to the currently
specified values. If MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, or SECNUM, modify only that attribute to the I1 value.
I1, I2, I3, I4, I5, I6, I7, I8
Replace the previous node numbers assigned to this element with these corresponding values. A (blank)
retains the previous value (except in the I1 field, which resets the STLOC node number to zero). For attributes,
replace the existing value with the I1 value (or the default if I1 is zero or blank).
Notes
The nodes and/or attributes (MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, and SECNUM values) of an existing element may be changed
with this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Elements>Modify Attrib
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Elements>Modify Nodes
EMORE, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X
Adds more nodes to the just-defined element.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X
Numbers of nodes typically assigned to ninth (node Q) through sixteenth (node X) nodal positions, if any. If
Q = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Notes
Repeat EMORE command for up to 4 additional nodes (20 maximum). Nodes are added after the last nonzero
node of the element. Node numbers defined with this command may be zeroes.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
3378
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EMTGEN
EMSYM, NSECT
Specifies circular symmetry for electromagnetic sources.
PREP7: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
NSECT
The number of circular symmetry sections (defaults to 1).
Notes
Specifies the number of times to repeat electromagnetic sources for circular symmetry. Applies to SOURC36
elements and to coupled-field elements with electric current conduction results in the database. Sources are
assumed to be equally spaced over 360 about the global Cartesian Z axis.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>Copy Sources
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>Copy Sources
EMTGEN, Ncomp, Ecomp, PNcomp, DOF, GAP, GAPMIN, FKN, PER0
Generates a set of TRANS126 elements.
PREP7: Elements
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Ncomp
Component name of the surface nodes of a structure which attach to the TRANS126 elements. You must
enclose name-strings in single quotes in the EMTGEN command line.
Ecomp
Component name of the TRANS126 elements generated. You must enclose name-strings in single quotes
in the EMTGEN command line. Defaults to EMTELM.
PNcomp
Component name of the plane nodes generated by the command at an offset (GAP) from the surface nodes.
You must enclose name-strings in single quotes in the EMTGEN command line. Defaults to EMTPNO.
DOF
Active structural degree of freedom (DOF) for TRANS126 elements (UX, UY, or UZ) in the Cartesian coordinate
system. You must enclose the DOF in single quotes.
GAP
Initial gap distance from the surface nodes to the plane. Be sure to use the correct sign with respect to Ncomp
node location.
GAPMIN
Minimum gap distance allowed (GAPMIN real constant) for TRANS126 elements. Defaults to the absolute
value of (GAP)*0.05.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3379
EMUNIT
FKN
Contact stiffness factor used as a multiplier for a contact stiffness appropriate for bulk deformation. Defaults
to 0.1.
PER0
Free-space permittivity. Defaults to 8.854e-6 (MKS units).
Notes
The EMTGEN command generates a set of TRANS126 elements between the surface nodes of a moveable
structure and a plane of nodes, typically representing a ground plane. The plane of nodes are created by the
command at a specified offset (GAP). Each element attaches to a surface node and to a corresponding node
representing the plane. The created elements are set to the augmented stiffness method (KEYOPT(6) = 1), which
can help convergence. The generated plane nodes should be constrained appropriately for the analysis.
You can use TRANS126 elements for simulating fully coupled electrostatic structural coupling between a MEMS
device and a plane, if the gap distance between the device and the plane is small compared to the overall surface
area dimensions of the device. This assumption allows for a point-wise closed-form solution of capacitance
between the surface nodes and the plane; i.e. CAP = PER0*AREA/GAP, where PER0 if the free-space permittivity,
AREA is the area associated with the node, and GAP is the gap between the node and the plane. The area for
each node is computed using the ARNODE function in ANSYS. See the *GET command description for more information on the ARNODE function.
With a distributed set of TRANS126 elements attached directly to the structure and a plane (such as a ground
plane), you can perform a full range of coupled electrostatic-structural simulations, including:
Static analysis (due to a DC voltage or a mechanical load)
Prestressed modal analysis (eigenfrequencies, including frequency-shift effects of a DC bias voltage)
Prestressed harmonic analysis (system response to a small-signal AC excitation with a DC bias voltage or
mechanical load)
Large signal transient analysis (time-transient solution due to an arbitrary time-varying voltage or mechanical excitation)
The TRANS126 element also employs a node-to-node gap feature so you can perform contact-type simulations
where the structure contacts a plane (such as a ground plane). The contact stiffness factor, FKN, is used to control
contact penetration once contact is initiated. A smaller value provides for easier convergence, but with more
penetration.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Transducers>Electromechanic>Node to Plane
EMUNIT, Lab, VALUE
Specifies the system of units for magnetic field problems.
PREP7: Materials
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Label specifying the type of units:
3380
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EN
MKS
Rationalized MKS system of units (meters, amperes, henries, webers, etc.). Free-space permeability is set
to 4 e-7 henries/meter. Free-space permittivity is set to 8.85 e-12 F/m.
MUZRO
User defined system of units. Free-space permeability is set to the value input for VALUE. Other units
must correspond to the permeability units. Relative permeability may be altered to absolute values.
EPZRO
User defined system of units. Free-space permittivity is set to the value input for VALUE. Other units must
correspond to the permittivity units.
VALUE
User value of free-space permeability (defaults to 1) if Lab = MUZRO, or free-space permittivity (defaults to
1) if Lab = EPZRO.
Command Default
Rationalized MKS system of units (meters, amperes, henries, webers, etc.). Free-space permeability is set to 4 e7 Henries/meter, free-space permittivity is set to 8.85e-12 Farads/meter.
Notes
Specifies the system of units to be used for electric and magnetic field problems. The free-space permeability
and permittivity values may be set as desired. These values are used with the relative property values [MP] to
establish absolute property values.
Note If the magnetic source field strength (Hs) has already been calculated [BIOT], switching EMUNIT
will not change the values.
For micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS), where dimensions are on the order of microns, see the conversion
factors in System of Units in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Electromag Units
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Electromag Units
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Electromag Units
EN, IEL, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Defines an element by its number and node connectivity.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IEL
Number assigned to element being defined. If I = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3381
ENDRELEASE
I
Number of node assigned to first nodal position (node I).
J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Number assigned to second (node J) through eighth (node P) nodal position, if any.
Notes
Defines an element by its nodes and attribute values. Similar to the E command except it allows the element
number (IEL) to be defined explicitly. Element numbers need not be consecutive. Any existing element already
having this number will be redefined.
Up to 8 nodes may be specified with the EN command. If more nodes are needed for the element, use the EMORE
command. The number of nodes required and the order in which they should be specified are described in the
ANSYS Elements Reference for each element type. The current (or default) MAT, TYPE, REAL, SECNUM, and ESYS
attribute values are also assigned to the element.
When creating elements with more than 8 nodes using this command and the EMORE command, it may be
necessary to turn off shape checking using the SHPP command before issuing this command. If a valid element
type can be created without using the additional nodes on the EMORE command, this command will create that
element. The EMORE command will then modify the element to include the additional nodes. If shape checking
is active, it will be performed before the EMORE command is issued. Therefore, if the shape checking limits are
exceeded, element creation may fail before the EMORE command modifies the element into an acceptable
shape.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>User Numbered>Thru Nodes
ENDRELEASE, --, TOLERANCE, Dof1, Dof2, Dof3, Dof4
Specifies degrees of freedom to be decoupled for end release.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
--
Unused field.
TOLERANCE
Angle tolerance (in degrees) between adjacent elements. Defaults to 20. Set TOLERANCE to -1 to indicate
all selected elements.
Dof1, Dof2, Dof3, Dof4
Degrees of freedom to release. If Dof1 is blank, WARP is assumed and Dof2, Dof3, and Dof4 are ignored.
WARP
Release the warping degree of freedom (default).
ROTX
Release rotations in the X direction.
ROTY
Release rotations in the Y direction.
3382
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ENGEN
ROTZ
Release rotations in the Z direction.
UX
Release displacements in the X direction.
UY
Release displacements in the Y direction.
UZ
Release displacements in the Z direction.
BALL
Create ball joints (equivalent to releasing WARP, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ).
Notes
This command specifies end releases for BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements. The command works on currently
selected nodes and elements. It creates end releases on any two connected beam elements whose angle at
connection exceeds the specified tolerance. From within the GUI, the Picked node option generates an end release
at the selected node regardless of the angle of connection (angle tolerance is set to -1).
Use the CPLIST command to list the coupled sets generated by the ENDRELEASE command.
Note You should exercise due engineering judgement when using this command, as improper use
may result in mechanics that render a solution impossible.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>End Releases>On Selected set
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>End Releases>On Selected set
ENGEN, IINC, ITIME, NINC, IEL1, IEL2, IEINC, MINC, TINC, RINC, CINC, SINC, DX, DY, DZ
Generates elements from an existing pattern.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IINC
Increment to be added to element numbers in pattern.
ITIME, NINC
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all nodes in the given pattern by NINC each
time after the first. ITIME must be > 1 if generation is to occur. NINC may be positive, zero, or negative.
IEL1, IEL2, IEINC
Generate elements from the pattern that begins with IEL1 to IEL2 (defaults to IEL1) in steps of IEINC
(defaults to 1). If IEL1 is negative, IEL2 and IEINC are ignored and use the last |IEL1| elements (in sequence
backward from the maximum element number) as the pattern to be repeated. If IEL1 = ALL, IEL2 and IEINC
are ignored and all selected elements [ESEL] are used as the pattern to be repeated. If IEL1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for IEL1 (IEL2 and IEINC are ignored).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3383
ENORM
MINC
Increment material number of all elements in the given pattern by MINC each time after the first.
TINC
Increment type number by TINC.
RINC
Increment real constant table number by RINC.
CINC
Increment element coordinate system number by CINC.
SINC
Increment section ID number by SINC.
DX, DY, DZ
Define nodes that do not already exist but are needed by generated elements
(NGEN,ITIME,INC,NODE1,,,DX,DY,DZ). Zero is a valid value. If blank, DX, DY, and DZ are ignored.
Notes
Same as the EGEN command except it allows element numbers to be explicitly incremented (IINC) from the
generated set. Any existing elements already having these numbers will be redefined.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Elements>User Numbered
ENORM, ENUM
Reorients shell element normals.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ENUM
Element number having the normal direction that the reoriented elements are to match. If ENUM = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Notes
Reorients shell elements so that their outward normals are consistent with that of a specified element. The operation reorients the element by reversing and shifting the node connectivity pattern. For example, for a 4-node
shell element, the nodes in positions I, J, K and L of the original element are placed in positions J, I, L and K of the
reoriented element. All 3-D shell elements in the selected set are considered for reorientation, and no element
is reoriented more than once during the operation. Only shell elements adjacent to the lateral (side) faces are
considered.
The command reorients the shell element normals on the same panel as the specified shell element. A panel is
the geometry defined by a subset of shell elements bounded by free edges or T-junctions (anywhere three or
more shell edges share common nodes).
Reorientation progresses within the selected set until either of the following conditions is true:
3384
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ENSYM
The edge of the model is reached.
More than two elements (whether selected or unselected) are adjacent to a lateral face.
In situations where unselected elements might undesirably cause case b to control, consider using ENSYM,0,,0,ALL
instead of ENORM. It is recommended that reoriented elements be displayed and graphically reviewed.
You cannot use the ENORM command to change the normal direction of any element that has a body or surface
load. We recommend that you apply all of your loads only after ensuring that the element normal directions are
acceptable.
Real constant values are not reoriented and may be invalidated by an element reversal.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Elements>Shell Normals
ENSYM, IINC, --, NINC, IEL1, IEL2, IEINC
Generates elements by symmetry reflection.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IINC
Increment to be added to element numbers in existing set.
-Unused field.
NINC
Increment nodes in the given pattern by NINC.
IEL1, IEL2, IEINC
Reflect elements from pattern beginning with IEL1 to IEL2 (defaults to IEL1) in steps of IEINC (defaults
to 1). If IEL1 = ALL, IEL2 and IEINC are ignored and pattern is all selected elements [ESEL]. If IEL1 = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for IEL1 (IEL2 and IEINC are ignored).
Notes
This command is the same as the ESYM command except it allows explicitly assigning element numbers to the
generated set (in terms of an increment IINC). Any existing elements already having these numbers will be redefined.
The operation generates a new element by incrementing the nodes on the original element, and reversing and
shifting the node connectivity pattern. For example, for a 4-node 2-D element, the nodes in positions I, J, K and
L of the original element are placed in positions J, I, L and K of the reflected element.
Similar permutations occur for all other element types. For line elements, the nodes in positions I and J of the
original element are placed in positions J and I of the reflected element. In releases prior to ANSYS 5.5, no node
pattern reversing and shifting occurred for line elements generated by ENSYM. To achieve the same results as you
did in releases prior to ANSYS 5.5, use the ENGEN command instead.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3385
/EOF
See the ESYM command for additional information about symmetry elements.
The ENSYM command also provides a convenient way to reverse shell element normals. If the IINC and NINC
argument fields are left blank, the effect of the reflection is to reverse the direction of the outward normal of the
specified elements. You cannot use the ENSYM command to change the normal direction of any element that
has a body or surface load. We recommend that you apply all of your loads only after ensuring that the element
normal directions are acceptable. Also note that real constants (such as nonuniform shell thickness and tapered
beam constants) may be invalidated by an element reversal. See Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for more information about controlling element normals.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Reverse Normals>of Shell Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Reflect>Elements>User Numbered
/EOF
Exits the file being read.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Causes an end-of-file exit when encountered on a switched file (see /INPUT, *USE, etc.). Commands are then
read continuing from the file that contained the file switching command (or from the terminal if the switch was
made from the terminal). Use the /EXIT command to terminate an ANSYS run. This command cannot be used
in a do-loop or if-then-else construct.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
EORIENT, Etype, Dir, TOLER
Reorients solid element normals.
PREP7: Meshing
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Etype
Specifies which elements to orient.
LYSL
Specifies that certain solid elements will be oriented (SOLID46, SOLID95 with KEYOPT(1) = 1, SOLSH190,
and SOLID191). This value is the default.
3386
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EORIENT
Dir
The axis and direction for orientation, or an element number. If Dir is set to a positive number (n), then all
eligible elements are oriented as similarly as possible to element n.
NEGX
The outward normal of face 1 is made as parallel as possible to the negative x-axis of the currently active
element coordinate system.
POSX
Same as NEGX, except using the positive x-axis.
NEGY
The outward normal of face 1 is made as parallel as possible to the negative y-axis of the currently active
element coordinate system.
POSY
Same as NEGY, except using the positive y-axis.
NEGZ
(Default) The outward normal of face 1 is made as parallel as possible to the negative z-axis of the currently
active element coordinate system.
POSZ
Same as NEGZ, except using the positive z-axis.
TOLER
The maximum angle (in degrees) between the outward normal face and the target axis. Default is 90.0. Lower
TOLER values will reduce the number of faces that are considered as the basis of element reorientation.
Notes
EORIENT renumbers the elements to make the face 1 (nodes I-J-K-L, parallel to the layers in layered elements)
as parallel as possible to the XY plane of the element coordinate system (set with ESYS). It calculates the outward
normal of each face and renumbers the nodes of the elements so the face whose normal is most parallel with
and in the same general direction as the target axis becomes face 1.
The target axis, defined by Dir, is either the negative or positive indicated axis or the outward normal of face 1
of that element.
All SOLID46 and SOLID191 3-D layered solid elements, SOLID95 elements with KEYOPT(1) = 1, and SOLSH190
solid shell elements in the selected set are considered for reorientation.
After reorienting elements, you should always display and graphically review results using the /ESHAPE command.
When plotting models with many or symmetric layers, it may be useful to temporarily reduce the number of
layers to two, with one layer being much thicker than the other.
You cannot use EORIENT to change the normal direction of any element that has a body or surface load. We
recommend that you apply all of your loads only after ensuring that the element normal directions are acceptable.
Prisms and tetrahedrals are also supported, within the current limitations of the SOLID46, SOLID95, SOLSH190,
and SOLID191 elements (layers parallel to the 4-node face of the prism are not supported).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Elements>Orient Normal
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3387
EPLOT
EPLOT
Produces an element display.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Produces an element display of the selected elements. Only elements (or portions of elements) having nodes
within the selected node set (and PowerGraphics off) [NSEL] are displayed. Adjacent or otherwise duplicated
faces of 3-D solid elements will not be displayed. Duplicated faces normally occur in the interior of solid 3-D
shapes. See the DSYS command for display coordinate system.
This command will display curvature in midside node elements when PowerGraphics is activated [/GRAPHICS,POWER] and /EFACET,2 or /EFACET,4 are enabled. (To display curvature, two facets per edge is recommended
[/EFACET,2]). When you specify /EFACET,1, PowerGraphics does not display midside nodes. /EFACET has no
effect on EPLOT for non-midside node elements.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>CMS>CMS Superelements>By Picking
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Select Rezone Component
Main Menu>Solution>Time Controls>Time Step Prediction
Utility Menu>Plot>Elements
EQSLV, Lab, TOLER, MULT
Specifies the type of equation solver.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Equation solver type:
FRONT
Frontal direct equation solver. In-memory only.
SPARSE
Sparse direct equation solver. Applicable to real symmetric and unsymmetric matrices. Available only
for STATIC, HARMIC (full method only), TRANS (full method only), SUBSTR, and PSD spectrum analysis
types [ANTYPE]. Can be used for nonlinear and linear analyses, especially nonlinear analysis where indefinite matrices are frequently encountered. Well suited for contact analysis where contact status alters
the mesh topology. Other typical well-suited applications are: (a) models consisting of shell/beam or
shell/beam and solid elements (b) models with a multi-branch structure, such as an automobile exhaust
or a turbine fan. This is an alternative to iterative solvers since it combines both speed and robustness.
Generally, it requires more memory than the frontal solver, but it is comparable in memory requirement
to the PCG solver. When memory is limited, the solver works partly in and out-of-core memory without
much increase in CPU time.
3388
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EQSLV
JCG
Jacobi Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver, in-memory option. Available only for STATIC,
MODAL (subspace option only), HARMIC (full method only), and TRANS (full method only) analysis types
[ANTYPE]. Can be used for structural and multiphysics applications. Applicable for symmetric, unsymmetric, complex, definite, and indefinite matrices. Recommended for 3-D harmonic analyses in structural
and multiphysics applications. Efficient for heat transfer, electromagnetics, piezoelectrics, and acoustic
field problems.
ICCG
Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver. Available for STATIC, HARMIC (full
method only), and TRANS (full method only) analysis types [ANTYPE]. Can be used for structural and
multiphysics applications, and for symmetric, unsymmetric, complex, definite, and indefinite matrices.
The ICCG solver requires more memory than the JCG solver, but is more robust than the JCG solver for
ill-conditioned matrices.
PCG
Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver (licensed from Computational Applications
and Systems Integration, Inc.). Requires less disk file space than FRONT and is faster for large models
(wavefront > about 1000). Much faster than the JCG solver. Useful for plates, shells, 3-D models, large 2D models, p-method analyses, and other problems having symmetric, sparse, definite or indefinite
matrices for nonlinear analysis. Requires twice as much memory as JCG (/RUNST can be used to determine
the space needed). Available only for analysis types [ANTYPE] STATIC, TRANS (full method only), or
MODAL (with subspace option only). The PCG solver can robustly solve equations with constraint equations
(CE, CEINTF, CPINTF, and CERIG). This solver gives you the option of using either:
the MSAVE command (used to obtain a considerable memory savings when applicable (see Notes
below)), and/or
the PRECISION command to specify single precision, thereby reducing the memory required by
between 30% and 70%
AMG
Algebraic Multigrid iterative equation solver. Available for STATIC analyses and TRANS (full method only)
analyses. The AMG solver is applicable to symmetric matrices. This solver is not available for substructure
analyses, either generation or use pass, or for models containing p-elements (which switch to the frontal
solver). It is very efficient for single-field structural analyses (where the solution DOFs are combinations
of UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ). For applications such as single-field thermal analyses (where the
solution DOF is TEMP), the AMG solver is less efficient. Recommended for ill-conditioned problems in
which the PCG and ICCG solvers would have difficulty converging; applicable in both single- and multiprocessor environments. In terms of CPU time when used in a single-processor environment, the AMG
solver performs better than the PCG and ICCG solvers for ill-conditioned problems, and it delivers about
the same level of performance for ordinary problems. In a multiprocessor environment, the AMG solver
scales better than the PCG and ICCG solvers on shared memory parallel machines. Also handles indefinite
matrix problems for nonlinear analyses. The AMG solver is part of Parallel Performance for ANSYS, which
is a separately-licensed product. For detailed information on multiprocessor solvers, see Improving ANSYS
Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide. See
Starting an ANSYS Session from Command Level in the ANSYS Operations Guide for information on how
to specify the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on at ANSYS start-up.
ITER
Automatically chooses an iterative solver that is appropriate for the physics of the problem. The tolerance
for the iterative solver is automatically selected based on the accuracy level you choose (see TOLER, below).
This solver option is available only for electrostatic analyses, steady-state/transient thermal analyses and
linear static/full transient structural analyses without superelements. If you issue the automatic iterative
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3389
EQSLV
solver selection command, but the appropriate conditions for the selection are not met, then the program
defaults to the Frontal solver. See Using the Automatic Iterative (Fast) Solver Option in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide, as well as Structural Static Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide or Steady-State
Thermal Analysis in the ANSYS Thermal Analysis Guide, for correct usage of this option.
DDS
Distributed Domain Solver (DDS). Available for symmetric STATIC analyses and TRANS (full method only)
analyses. Constraint equations (CE, CEINTF, and CERIG) and coupling (CP, CPINTF) are allowed. Not
available for piezoelectric analyses.
The DDS solver works for deformable-to-deformable, surface-to-surface contact elements from 169 to
170, and other node-to-node contact elements. It does not work for rigid-to-deformable or node-tosurface contact elements in general. It also does not support elements with u-P formulation or Lagrangian
multiplier as their theoretical bases.
The DDS solver works well with CE/CP and the CE/CP derived capabilities. However, if the CE/CP are
specified at contact nodes, it may not work properly.
Note When the solver does not work, the program will issue a FATAL error.
The solver decomposes a large problem into domains (internal substructures) and uses different processors
or systems to solve each domain to reduce total solution time.
Use of DDS requires a license for the Parallel Performance for ANSYS advanced task (add-on). See Starting
an ANSYS Session from Command Level in the ANSYS Operations Guide for information on how to specify
the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on at ANSYS start-up. For more information on Parallel Performance for ANSYS, see Improving ANSYS Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the ANSYS
Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
DPCG
Distributed Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver. Based on an enhanced theory
for the classic PCG solver, the DPCG solver targets distributed parallel processing. The DPCG solver preserves all of the merits of the classic PCG solver and can be run on either shared memory or distributed
memory machines with superior scalability to the PCG solver. Compared to the DDS solver, the DPCG
solver is more robust and uses less memory with similar scalability at low (less than 16) numbers of processors. The total sum of memory used by the DPCG (summed total over the network or all processors)
is about 30% more than the classic PCG solver. In addition to the limitations of the classic PCG solver,
the DPCG solver does not support subspace eigensolver (Powerdynamics), the PRECISION command,
or p-elements.
Use of DPCG requires a license for the Parallel Performance for ANSYS advanced task (add-on). For more
information on Parallel Performance for ANSYS in general, as well as more information on DPCG usage,
see Improving ANSYS Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis
Techniques Guide.
DJCG
Distributed Jacobi Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver. Based on an enhanced theory for the
classic JCG solver, the DJCG solver targets distributed parallel processing. Scalability of this solver is superior to the JCG solver with little additional memory required. DJCG solver is available only for STATIC
and TRANS (full method) analyses where the stiffness is symmetric. This solver does not support the fast
thermal option (THOPT).
Use of DJCG requires a license for the Parallel Performance for ANSYS advanced task (add-on). For more
information on Parallel Performance for ANSYS in general, as well as more information on DJCG usage,
3390
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EQSLV
see Improving ANSYS Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis
Techniques Guide.
DSPARSE
Distributed sparse direct equation solver. It is mathematically similar to the sparse solver, except it is
parallelized for distributed memory architecture. As a result, it can achieve up to a 6X speedup on a 12processor system. The disadvantage of using this solver is that it uses more total memory than the sparse
solver because each core front is distributed to each processor in-core (for parallel). Like the sparse
solver, this solver is well-suited to ill-conditioned nonlinear problems, as well as to beam/shell structures.
The dsparse solver is valid only for real symmetric matrices.
This solver is available only with Distributed ANSYS and requires a Parallel Performance for ANSYS license.
TOLER
Solver tolerance value (defaults to 1.0E-8) for static analyses with symmetric matrices. For unsymmetric
static analyses or harmonic analyses (JCG and ICCG), as well as for the Domain solver (DDS), the default is
1.0E-6. The value 1.0E-5 may be acceptable in many situations.
Note Using a tolerance less than 1.0E-6 with the Domain solver may lead to unconvergence. A
tolerance of 1.0E-6 gives an accurate solution.
Used only with the Jacobi Conjugate Gradient, Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient, Pre-conditioned
Conjugate Gradient, Algebraic Multigrid and Distributed Domain equation solvers. For all iterative solvers
(except the PCG solver in the case of linear static analysis), iterations continue until the SRSS norm of the
residual is less than TOLER times the norm of the applied load vector. (For the PCG solver in the static linear
analysis case, 3 error norms are used. If one of the error norms is smaller than TOLER, and the SRSS norm of
the residual is smaller than 1.0E-2, convergence is assumed to have been reached.) See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory
Reference for details.
Note When used with the Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient equation solver, TOLER can be
modified between load steps (this is typically useful for nonlinear analysis).
If used with the ITER label, you can specify an integer value from 1 to 5, which indicates the accuracy level
for convergence for the automatically-selected iterative solver. A value of 1 is the fastest level, and 5 is the
most accurate level. ANSYS chooses the tolerance value for the automatic iterative solver based on the input
accuracy level.
MULT
Multiplier (defaults to 2.0 when solution control is on; 1.0 when solution control is off) used to control the
maximum number of iterations performed during convergence calculations. Used only with the Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient equation solver (PCG). The maximum number of iterations is equal to the multiplier (MULT) times the number of degrees of freedom (DOF). Iterations continue until either the maximum
number of iterations or solution convergence has been reached. In general, the default value for MULT is
adequate for reaching convergence. However, for ill-conditioned matrices (that is, models containing elements
with high aspect ratios or material type discontinuities) the multiplier may be used to increase the maximum
number of iterations used to achieve convergence. The recommended range for the multiplier is
1.0 MULT 3.0. Normally, a value greater than 3.0 adds no further benefit toward convergence, and merely
increases time requirements. If the solution does not converge with 1.0 MULT 3.0, then convergence is
highly unlikely, and further examination of the model is recommended.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3391
EQSLV
Command Default
The sparse direct solver is the default solver for all analyses, except for electromagnetic analyses with CIRCU124
elements present, analyses that include both p-elements and constraint equations, spectrum analyses, and
substructuring analyses (which each use the frontal direct solver by default).
Notes
The selection of a solver can affect the speed and accuracy of a solution. For a more detailed discussion of the
merits of each solver, see Solution in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
If you are using the PCG solver to do a static analysis or modal analysis using the PowerDynamics method of a
model containing SOLID45, SOLID92, SOLID95, SOLID185, SOLID186, and/or SOLID187 elements with linear
material properties, you can save significant amounts of memory with the MSAVE command. MSAVE,ON will
trigger an element-by-element approach for the parts of the model containing these element types with linear
material properties. When using SOLID186 and/or SOLID187, only small strain (NLGEOM,OFF) analyses are allowed.
(Other parts of the model will use global assembly for the stiffness matrix.) Using the element-by-element approach
results in memory savings of up to 70% over the global assembly approach for the affected part of the model,
although the solution time may be increased depending on the processor speed and computer hardware, as
well as the chosen element options (for example, reduced 2 x 2 x 2 integration for SOLID95 is faster than default
14 point integration).
In a modal analysis, choosing the subspace mode extraction method along with the PCG solver is the same as
choosing the PowerDynamics mode extraction method. The element-by element approach is also valid for the
PowerDynamics method.
When doing a modal analysis with a large number of constraint equations, use the subspace iteration method
with the frontal solver instead of the JCG solver, or use the Block Lanczos mode extraction method. (Block Lanczos
is the default.)
If you use MODOPT,LANB or BUCOPT,LANB, the internal solver used is EQSLV,SPARSE.
Do not use the DDS solver for elements with high aspect ratios; doing so could result in convergence difficulties.
The DDS solver is suitable for models with a combination of solids, trusses, beams, and shells.
If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Fast Sol'n Optn
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
Main Menu>Solution>Fast Sol'n Optn
3392
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/ERASE
ERASE
Explicitly erases the current display.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Similar to a hardware screen erase key. Useful during an "immediate" display to erase the screen without a replot
so that the display continues on a clean screen. This action is automatically included in commands such as NPLOT
and EPLOT.
If the /NOERASE command is active, issuing the erase command will simply clear the display area. Subsequent
replots will provide the display previously generated by the /NOERASE command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Erase Options>Erase Screen
/ERASE
Specifies that the screen is to be erased before each display.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Command Default
Previous /ERASE or /NOERASE setting will be used. Initially defaults to /ERASE setting.
Notes
Erase occurs with the next display request, but before the display is actually started. /NOERASE can be used to
suppress the automatic screen erase.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Erase Options>Erase Between Plots
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3393
EREAD
EREAD, Fname, Ext, -Reads elements from a file.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to ELEM if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
This read operation is not necessary in a standard ANSYS run but is provided as a convenience to users wanting
to read a coded element file, such as from another mesh generator or from a CAD/CAM program. Data should
be formatted as produced with the EWRITE command. If issuing EREAD to acquire element information generated
from ANSYS EWRITE, you must also issue NREAD before the EREAD command. The element types [ET] must be
defined before the file is read so that the file may be read properly. Only elements that are specified with the
ERRANG command are read from the file. Also, only elements that are fully attached to the nodes specified on
the NRRANG command are read from the file. Elements are assigned numbers consecutively as read from the
file, beginning with the current highest database element number plus one. The file is rewound before and after
reading. Reading continues until the end of the file.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Read Elem File
EREFINE, NE1, NE2, NINC, LEVEL, DEPTH, POST, RETAIN
Refines the mesh around specified elements.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NE1, NE2, NINC
Elements (NE1 to NE2 in increments of NINC) around which the mesh is to be refined. NE2 defaults to NE1,
and NINC defaults to 1. If NE1 = ALL, NE2 and NINC are ignored and all selected elements are used for refinement. If NE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NE1 (NE2 and NINC are ignored).
LEVEL
Amount of refinement to be done. Specify the value of LEVEL as an integer from 1 to 5, where a value of 1
provides minimal refinement, and a value of 5 provides maximum refinement (defaults to 1).
3394
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EREFINE
DEPTH
Depth of mesh refinement in terms of number of elements outward from the indicated elements, NE1 to
NE2 (defaults to 0).
POST
Type of postprocessing to be done after element splitting, in order to improve element quality:
OFF
No postprocessing will be done.
SMOOTH
Smoothing will be done. Node locations may change.
CLEAN
Smoothing and cleanup will be done. Existing elements may be deleted, and node locations may change
(default).
RETAIN
Flag indicating whether quadrilateral elements must be retained in the refinement of an all-quadrilateral
mesh. (The ANSYS program ignores the RETAIN argument when you are refining anything other than a
quadrilateral mesh.)
ON
The final mesh will be composed entirely of quadrilateral elements, regardless of the element quality
(default).
OFF
The final mesh may include some triangular elements in order to maintain element quality and provide
transitioning.
Notes
EREFINE performs local mesh refinement around the specified elements. By default, the surrounding elements
are split to create new elements with 1/2 the edge length of the original elements (LEVEL = 1).
EREFINE refines all area elements and tetrahedral volume elements that are adjacent to the specified elements.
Any volume elements that are adjacent to the specified elements, but are not tetrahedra (for example, hexahedra,
wedges, and pyramids), are not refined.
You cannot use mesh refinement on a solid model that contains initial conditions at nodes [IC], coupled nodes
[CP family of commands], constraint equations [CE family of commands], or boundary conditions or loads applied
directly to any of its nodes or elements. This applies to nodes and elements anywhere in the model, not just in
the region where you want to request mesh refinement. For additional restrictions on mesh refinement, see
Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Elements
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3395
ERESX
ERESX, Key
Specifies extrapolation of integration point results.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Key
Extrapolation key:
DEFA
Extrapolate integration point results to the nodes for all elements except those with active plasticity,
creep, or swelling nonlinearities (default).
YES
Extrapolate integration point results to the nodes for all elements. Only linear solution data will be extrapolated for those elements with active plasticity, creep, or swelling nonlinearities.
NO
Copy (do not extrapolate) integration point results to the nodes for all elements.
Command Default
Extrapolate integration point results to the nodes for all elements except those with active plasticity, creep, or
swelling nonlinearities (default).
Notes
Specifies whether the solution results at the element integration points are extrapolated or copied to the nodes
for element and nodal postprocessing. The structural stresses, elastic and thermal strains, field gradients, and
fluxes are affected. Nonlinear data (plastic, creep, and swelling strains) are always copied to the nodes, never
extrapolated. For shell elements, ERESX applies only to integration point results in the in-plane directions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Integration Pt
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Integration Pt
ERNORM, Key
Controls error estimation calculations.
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Control key:
ON
Perform error estimation (default). This option is not valid for PowerGraphics.
OFF
Do not perform error estimation.
3396
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESCHECK
Command Default
Error estimation calculations are performed by default unless PowerGraphics is enabled [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
Notes
Especially for thermal analyses, program speed increases if error estimation is suppressed. Therefore, it might
be desirable to use error estimation only when needed. The value of the ERNORM key is not saved on file.db.
Consequently, you need to reissue the ERNORM key after a RESUME if you wish to deactivate error estimation
again.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
ERRANG, EMIN, EMAX, EINC
Specifies the element range to be read from a file.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
EMIN, EMAX, EINC
Elements with numbers from EMIN (defaults to 1) to EMAX (defaults to 99999999) in steps of EINC (defaults
to 1) will be read.
Notes
Defines the element number range to be read [EREAD] from the element file. If a range is also implied from the
NRRANG command, only those elements satisfying both ranges will be read.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Read Elem File
ESCHECK, Sele, Levl, Defkey
Perform element shape checking for a selected element set.
PREP7: Database
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Sele
Specifies whether to select elements for checking:
(blank)
List all warnings/errors from element shape checking.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3397
ESEL
ESEL
Select the elements based on the .Levl criteria specified below.
Levl
WARN
Select elements producing warning and error messages.
ERR
Select only elements producing error messages (default).
Defkey
Specifies whether check should be performed on deformed element shapes. .
0 - Do not update node coordinates before performing shape checks (default).
1 - Update node coordinates using the current set of deformations in the database.
Notes
Shape checking will occur according to the current SHPP settings. Although ESCHECK is valid in all processors,
Defkey uses the current results in the database. If no results are available a warning will be issued.
This command is also valid in PREP7, SOLUTION and POST1.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Check Elem Shape>Sel Warning/Error Elements
ESEL, Type, Item, Comp, VMIN, VMAX, VINC, KABS
Selects a subset of elements.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Restore the full set.
NONE
Unselect the full set.
3398
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESEL
INVE
Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT
Display the current select status.
The following fields are used only with Type = S, R, A, or U:
Item
Label identifying data, see ESEL - Valid Item and Component Labels. Some items also require a component
label. If Item = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). Defaults to ELEM. If Item = STRA (straightened), elements are selected whose midside nodes do
not conform to the curved line or non-flat area on which they should lie. (Such elements are sometimes
formed during volume meshing [VMESH] in an attempt to avoid excessive element distortion.) You should
graphically examine any such elements to evaluate their possible effect on solution accuracy.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in ESEL - Valid Item and Component
Labels below.
VMIN
Minimum value of item range. Ranges are element numbers, attribute numbers, load values, or result values
as appropriate for the item. A component name (as specified on the CM command) may also be substituted
for VMIN (VMAX and VINC are ignored).
VMAX
Maximum value of item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN for input values.
For result values, VMAX defaults to infinity if VMIN is positive, or to zero if VMIN is negative. If VMIN = VMAX, a
tolerance of 0.005 x VMIN is used, or 1.0E-6 if VMIN = 0.0. If VMAX VMIN, a tolerance of 1.0E-8x (VMAX-VMIN)
is used.
VINC
Value increment within range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for element and attribute numbers).
Defaults to 1. VINC cannot be negative.
KABS
Absolute value key:
0
Check sign of value during selection.
1
Use absolute value during selection (sign ignored).
Command Default
All elements are selected.
Notes
Selects elements based on values of a labeled item and component. For example, to select a new set of elements
based on element numbers 1 through 7, use ESEL,S,ELEM,,1,7. The subset is used when the ALL label is entered
(or implied) on other commands, such as ELIST,ALL. Only data identified by element number are selected. Selected
data are internally flagged; no actual removal of data from the database occurs. Different element subsets cannot
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3399
ESEL
be used for different load steps [SOLVE] in a /SOLU sequence. The subset used in the first load step will be used
for all subsequent load steps regardless of subsequent ESEL specifications.
This command is valid in any processor.
Elements crossing the named path (see PATH command) will be selected. This option is only available in PREP7
and POST1. If no geometry data has been mapped to the path (i.e., via PMAP and PDEF commands), the path
will assume the default mapping option (PMAP,UNIFORM) to map the geometry prior to selecting the elements.
If an invalid path name is given, the ESEL command is ignored (status of selected elements is unchanged). If
there are no elements crossing the path, the ESEL command will return zero elements selected.
ESEL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels ESEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KABS
Item
Comp
Description
ELEM
Element number.
ADJ
Elements adjacent to element VMIN (VMAX and VINC fields are ignored). Only
elements (of the same dimensionality) adjacent to lateral faces are considered.
Progression continues until edge of model or until more than two elements
are adjacent at a face.
TYPE
Element type number.
ENAME
Element name (or identifying number).
MAT
Material number.
REAL
Real constant number.
ESYS
Element coordinate system number.
PART
LS-DYNA part number (applicable only to ANSYS LS-DYNA)
LIVE
Active elements [EALIVE]. VMIN and VMAX fields are ignored, etc.
LAYER
Layer number (only composite elements with a nonzero thickness for the
requested layer number are included). [LAYER]
SEC
Cross section ID number [SECNUM]
PINC
p-elements that are included in convergence checking.
PEXC
p-elements that are excluded from convergence checking.
STRA
Straightened. See description under Argument Descriptions' Item field above.
SFE
Element convection bulk temperature.
HFLUX
Element heat flux.
FSI
Element (acoustic) fluid-structure interaction flag.
IMPD
Element (acoustic) impedance.
SHLD
Surface shielding properties on high-frequency elements. (Select logic works
only on the value of conductivity, not relative permeability.)
MXWF
Element Maxwell force flag.
CHRGS
Electric surface charge density.
INF
Element infinite surface flag.
TEMP
Element temperature.
FLUE
Element fluence.
HGEN
3400
Element pressure.
CONV
BFE
PRES
Element heat generation rate.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/ESHAPE
Valid Item and Component Labels ESEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KABS
Item
Comp
Description
JS
MVDI
Element magnetic virtual displacements flag.
CHRGD
PATH
Element current density, magnitude only.
Electric charge density.
Lab
Selects all elements being crossed by the path with name Lab (see PATH
command). If Lab = ALL then all elements related to all defined paths will be
selected.
Valid item and component labels for element result values are:
ETAB
Any user-defined element table label (see ETABLE command).
Lab
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>CMS>CMS Superelements>By Picking
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
/ESHAPE, SCALE, KEY
Displays elements with shapes determined from the real constants or section definition.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SCALE
Scaling factor:
0
Use simple display of line and area elements (default).
1
Use real constants or section definition to form a solid shape display of elements.
FAC
Multiply certain real constants, such as thickness, by FAC and use them to form a solid shape display of
elements (FAC must be greater than 0.01).
KEY
Current shell thickness key:
0
Use current thickness in the displaced solid shape display of shell elements (valid for SHELL181, SHELL208,
and SHELL209). Default.
1
Use initial thickness in the displaced solid shape display of shell elements.
Command Default
Use simple display of line and area elements (0).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3401
/ESHAPE
Notes
Allows beams, shells, current sources, and certain special purpose elements to be displayed as solids with the
shape determined from the real constants or section types. Elements are displayed with the EPLOT command.
No checks for valid or complete input are made for the display.
SOLID65 elements are displayed with internal lines that represent rebar sizes and orientations (requires vector
mode (/DEVICE) with a basic type of display (/TYPE,,BASIC)). The rebar with the largest volume ratio in each
element plots as a red line, the next largest as green, and the smallest as blue.
COMBIN14, COMBIN39, and MASS21 are displayed with a graphics icon with the offset determined by the real
constants and KEYOPT settings.
BEAM188 and BEAM189 are displayed as solids with the shape determined from the section definition commands,
SECTYPE and SECDATA. The elements are displayed with internal lines representing the cross-section mesh.
Contour plots are available for these elements in postprocessing for PowerGraphics only (/GRAPHICS,POWER).
To view 3-D deformed shapes for BEAM188 and BEAM189, issue OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL for static or
transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, you must expand the
modes with element results calculation ON (Elcalc = YES for MXPAND).
When plotting stresses (PLNSOL,s,x) of BEAM4 and BEAM44, the thermal warping stresses are not included in
the stress display. An example of element temperatures causing warping thermal stresses is -1, 1, -1, 1, -1, 1, -1,
1.
ANSYS will graphically rotate the model to yield a more realistic displacement display. When /ESHAPE is active,
displacement plots (via PLNSOL,U,X and PLDISP, for example) may disagree with your PRNSOL listings. This
discrepancy will become acute when the SCALE value is not equal to one.
Also, when PowerGraphics is active, /ESHAPE may degrade the image if adjacent elements have overlapping
material, such as shell elements, which are not coplanar.
/ESHAPE may also degrade the image if adjacent elements have different real constants when PowerGraphics
is active. All polygons depicting the connectivity between the thicker and thinner elements along the shared
element edges may not always be displayed.
In most cases, /ESHAPE renders a thickness representation of your shell, plane and layered elements more
readily in PowerGraphics. This type of representation employs PowerGraphics to generate the enhanced representation, and will often provide no enhancement in Full Graphics. This is especially true for /POST1 results displays,
where /ESHAPE is not supported for most element types.
If you are using /ESHAPE and want to view solution results (PLNSOL, etc.) on layered elements (such as SHELL91,
SHELL99, SOLID46, SHELL181, SOLID191, SHELL208, and SHELL209), set KEYOPT(8) = 1 for the layer elements so
that the data for all layers is stored in the results file.
If PowerGraphics is active, you can plot the through-thickness temperatures of elements SHELL131 and SHELL132
regardless of the thermal DOFs in use by issuing the PLNSOL,TEMP command following the /ESHAPE command.
By default, /ESHAPE displays SOURC36, CIRCU124, and TRANS126 elements when PowerGraphics is activated
(/GRAPHICS,POWER).
The /ESHAPE,1 and /ESHAPE,FAC commands are incompatible with the /CYCEXPAND command used in cyclic
symmetry analyses.
3402
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESIZE
The /ESHAPE,1 command should not be used with coincident beams because a graphical displacement plot
may incorrectly average the displacements of the two beams.
The beam cross section subtypes listed in SECTYPE are generated by ANSYS from user-supplied data. The arbitrary
section (Subtype = ASEC cannot be displayed using /ESHAPE, and will be shown as a straight line.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Size and Shape
ESIZE, SIZE, NDIV
Specifies the default number of line divisions.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SIZE
Default element edge length on surface boundaries (i.e., lines). Divisions are automatically calculated
(rounded upward to next integer) from line lengths. If SIZE is zero (or blank), use NDIV.
NDIV
Default number of element divisions along region boundary lines. Not used if SIZE is input.
Notes
Specifies the default number of line divisions (elements) to be generated along the region boundary lines. The
number of divisions may be defined directly or automatically calculated. Divisions defined directly for any line
[LESIZE, KESIZE, etc.] are retained. For adjacent regions, the divisions assigned to the common line for one region
are also used for the adjacent region. See the MOPT command for additional meshing options.
For free meshing operations, if smart element sizing is being used [SMRTSIZE] and ESIZE,SIZE has been specified,
SIZE will be used as a starting element size, but will be overridden (i.e., a smaller size may be used) to accommodate curvature and small features.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Global>Size
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>SmartSize>Adv Opts
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3403
ESLA
ESLA, Type
Selects those elements associated with the selected areas.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of element select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Notes
Selects area elements belonging to meshed [AMESH], selected [ASEL] areas.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
ESLL, Type
Selects those elements associated with the selected lines.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of element select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
3404
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESLN
Notes
Selects line elements belonging to meshed [LMESH], selected [LSEL] lines.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
ESLN, Type, EKEY, NodeType
Selects those elements attached to the selected nodes.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of element selected:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
EKEY
Node set key:
0
Select element if any of its nodes are in the selected nodal set (default).
1
Select element only if all of its nodes are in the selected nodal set.
NodeType
Label identifying type of nodes to consider when selecting:
ALL
Select elements considering all of their nodes (default).
ACTIVE
Select elements considering only their active nodes. An active node is a node that contributes DOFs to
the model.
INACTIVE
Select elements considering only their inactive nodes (such as orientation or radiation nodes).
CORNER
Select elements considering only their corner nodes.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3405
ESLV
MID
Select elements considering only their midside nodes.
Notes
ESLN selects elements which have any (or all [EKEY]) NodeType nodes in the currently-selected set of nodes.
Only elements having nodes in the currently-selected set can be selected.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
ESLV, Type
Selects elements associated with the selected volumes.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of element selected:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Notes
Selects volume elements belonging to meshed [VMESH], selected [VSEL] volumes.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
3406
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESOL
ESOL, NVAR, ELEM, NODE, Item, Comp, Name
Specifies element data to be stored from the results file.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). Overwrites any existing results for
this variable.
ELEM
Element for which data are to be stored. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI).
NODE
Node number on this element for which data are to be stored. If blank, store the average element value
(except for FMAG values, which are summed instead of averaged). If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled
(valid only in the GUI).
Item
Label identifying the item. General item labels are shown in ESOL - General Item and Component Labels
below. Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). General component labels are shown in ESOL - General Item and
Component Labels below. If Comp is a sequence number (n), the NODE field will be ignored.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the item on the printout and displays. Defaults to a label formed
by concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels.
Notes
Valid item and component labels for element (except line element) results are listed in ESOL - General Item and
Component Labels
Defines element results data to be stored from a results file [FILE]. Not all items are valid for all elements. See
the input and output summary tables of the ANSYS Elements Reference of each element for the available items.
There are two methods of data access that may be used with the ESOL command. You can access some simply
by using a generic label (Component Name method), while others require a label and number (Sequence Number
method).
The Component Name method is used to access the General element data (that is, element data which is generally
available to most element types or groups of element types). The General Item and Comp labels for the Component
Name method are shown in ESOL - General Item and Component Labels below.
The Sequence Number method is required for data that is not averaged (such as pressures at nodes, temperatures
at integration points, etc.), or data that is not easily described in a generic fashion (such as all derived data for
structural line elements and contact elements, all derived data for thermal line elements, layer data for layered
elements, etc.). A table illustrating the Items (such as LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, SMISC, NMISC, etc.) and corresponding
sequence numbers for each element is shown in Chapter 4, Element Library in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Element results are in the element coordinate system, except for layered elements where results are in the layer
coordinate system. Results are obtainable for an element at a specified node. Further location specifications can
be made for some elements with the SHELL, LAYERP26, and FORCE commands.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3407
ESOL
ESOL - General Item and Component Labels
General Item and Component Labels ESOL, NVAR,ELEM,NODE,Item,Comp,Name
Item
S
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT
Stress intensity.
"
EQV
Equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT
Thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Thermal equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT
Plastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1,2,3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT
Creep strain intensity.
"
EQV
Creep equivalent strain.
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
CREQ
Accumulated equivalent creep strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
ELASTIC
Elastic strain energy density.
"
PLASTIC
Plastic strain energy density.
"
CREEP
Creep strain energy density.
GKS
Gasket component stress (also gasket pressure).
GKD
Gasket component total closure.
GKDI
Gasket component total inelastic closure.
GKTH
Gasket component thermal closure.
CONT
STAT1
Contact status:
EPEL
EPTH
EPPL
EPCR
NL
SEND
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
3408
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESOL
General Item and Component Labels ESOL, NVAR,ELEM,NODE,Item,Comp,Name
Item
Comp
Description
"
PENE
Contact penetration.
"
PRES
Contact pressure.
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction)
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance
"
GAP
Contact gap distance
"
FLUX
Total heat flux at contact surface
CNOS
Total number of contact status changes during substep.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic forces or vector sum.
X, Y, Z
Component structural force.
X, Y, Z
Component structural moment.
HEAT[2]
Heat flow.
FLOW
Fluid flow.
AMPS
Current flow.
FLUX
Magnetic flux.
VF
X, Y, Z
Component fluid force.
CSG
X, Y, Z
Component magnetic current segment.
SENE
"Stiffness" energy.
KENE
Kinetic energy.
JHEAT
Element Joule heat generation.
JC
X, Y, Z, SUM
Conduction current density for elements that support conduction
current calculation. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM).
JS
X, Y, Z
Source current density for low-frequency magnetic analyses. Total
current density (sum of conduction and displacement current densities)
in low frequency electric analyses. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector
sum (SUM).
JT
X, Y, Z, SUM
Total measureable current density in low-frequency electromagnetic
analyses. (Conduction current density in a low-frequency electric
analysis.) Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM).
MRE
Magnetics Reynolds number
VOLU
Volume of volume element.
BFE
1.
TEMP
Body temperatures (calculated from applied temperatures) as used
in solution (area and volume elements only).
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3409
ESORT
2.
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use the labels HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP
instead of HEAT.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
ESORT, Item, Lab, ORDER, KABS, NUMB
Sorts the element table.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item:
ETAB
(currently the only Item available)
Lab
element table label:
Lab
Any user-defined label from the ETABLE command (input in the Lab field of the ETABLE command).
ORDER
Order of sort operation:
0
Sort into descending order.
1
Sort into ascending order.
KABS
Absolute value key:
0
Sort according to real value.
1
Sort according to absolute value.
NUMB
Number of elements (element table rows) to be sorted in ascending or descending order (ORDER) before
sort is stopped (remainder will be in unsorted sequence) (defaults to all elements).
Command Default
Use ascending element number order.
3410
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESSOLV
Notes
The element table rows are sorted based on the column containing the Lab values. Use EUSORT to restore the
original order. If ESORT is specified with PowerGraphics on [/GRAPHICS,POWER], then the nodal solution results
listing [PRNSOL] will be the same as with the full graphics mode [/GRAPHICS,FULL].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Sorted Listing>Sort Elems
ESSOLV, Electit, Strutit, DIMN, MORPHOPT, Mcomp, Xcomp, ELECTOL, STRUTOL, MXLOOP, --, RUSEKY, RESTKY,
EISCOMP
Performs a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Electit
Title of the electrostatics physics file as assigned by the PHYSICS command.
Strutit
Title of the structural physics file as assigned by the PHYSICS command.
DIMN
Model dimensionality (a default is not allowed):
2
2-D model.
3
3-D model.
MORPHOPT
Morphing option:
<0
Do not perform any mesh morphing or remeshing.
0
Remesh the non-structural regions for each recursive loop only if mesh morphing fails (default).
1
Remesh the non-structural regions each recursive loop and bypass mesh morphing.
2
Perform mesh morphing only, do not remesh any non-structural regions.
Mcomp
Component name of the region to be morphed. For 2-D models, the component may be elements or areas.
For 3-D models, the component may be elements or volumes. A component must be specified. You must
enclose name-strings in single quotes in the ESSOLV command line.
Xcomp
Component name of entities excluded from morphing. In the 2-D case, it is the component name for the
lines excluded from morphing. In the 3-D case, it is component name for the areas excluded from morphing.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3411
ESSOLV
Defaults to exterior non-shared entities (see the DAMORPH, DVMORPH, and DEMORPH commands). You
must enclose name-strings in single quotes in the ESSOLV command line.
ELECTOL
Electrostatic energy convergence tolerance. Defaults to .005 (.5%) of the value computed from the previous
iteration. If less than zero, the convergence criteria based on electrostatics results is turned off.
STRUTOL
Structural maximum displacement convergence tolerance. Defaults to .005 (.5%) of the value computed
from the previous iteration. If less than zero, the convergence criteria base on structural results is turned off.
MXLOOP
Maximum number of allowable solution recursive loops. A single pass through both an electrostatics and
structural analysis constitutes one loop. Defaults to 100.
-Unused field.
RUSEKY
Reuse flag option:
1
Assumes initial run of ESSOLV using base geometry for the first electrostatics solution.
>1
Assumes ESSOLV run is a continuation of a previous ESSOLV run, whereby the morphed geometry is
used for the initial electrostatic simulation.
RESTKY
Structural restart key.
0
Use static solution option for structural solution.
1
Use static restart solution option for structural solution.
EISCOMP
Element component name for elements containing initial stress data residing in file jobname.ist. The initial
stress data must be defined prior to issuing ESSOLV (see ISFILE command).
Notes
ESSOLV invokes an ANSYS macro which automatically performs a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis.
The macro displays periodic updates of the convergence.
If non-structural regions are remeshed during the analysis, boundary conditions and loads applied to nodes and
elements will be lost. Accordingly, it is better to assign boundary conditions and loads to the solid model.
Use RUSEKY > 1 for solving multiple ESSOLV simulations for different excitation levels (i.e., for running a voltage
sweep). Do not issue the SAVE command to save the database between ESSOLV calls.
For nonlinear structural solutions, the structural restart option (RESTKY = 1) may improve solution time by
starting from the previous converged structural solution.
3412
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESTIF
For solid elements, ESSOLV automatically detects the air-structure interface and applies a Maxwell surface flag
on the electrostatic elements. This flag is used to initiate the transfer for forces from the electrostatic region to
the structure. When using the ESSOLV command with structural shell elements (e.g., SHELL63, SHELL93), you
must manually apply the Maxwell surface flag on all air elements surrounding the shells before writing the final
electrostatic physics file. Use the SFA command to apply the Maxwell surface flag to the areas representing the
shell elements. This will ensure that the air elements next to both sides of the shells receive the Maxwell surface
flag.
Note If lower-order structural solids or shells are used, set KEYOPT(7) = 1 for the electrostatic element
types to ensure the correct transfer of forces.
Information on creating the initial stress file is documented in the Initial Stress Loading section in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Coupled Solvers>Elec/struc
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Coupled Solvers>Elec/struc
ESTIF, KMULT
Specifies the matrix multiplier for deactivated elements.
SOLUTION: Birth and Death
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
KMULT
Stiffness matrix multiplier for deactivated elements (defaults to 1.0E-6).
Command Default
Use 1.0E-6 as the multiplier.
Notes
Specifies the stiffness matrix multiplier for elements deactivated with the EKILL command (birth and death).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Birth & Death>StiffnessMult
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Birth & Death>StiffnessMult
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3413
ESURF
ESURF, XNODE, Tlab, Shape
Generates elements overlaid on the free faces of existing selected elements.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
XNODE
Used only when generating SURF151 or SURF152 elements with KEYOPT(5) = 1. XNODE is the single extra
node number (ID) used with these surface elements. There is no default. XNODE must be specified if KEYOPT(5)
= 1. If XNODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). A parameter or parametric expression can be substituted for XNODE.
Tlab
Used to generate target and contact elements with correct direction of normals. This label is used only with
TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, and CONTA174 elements.
TOP
Generates target and contact elements over beam and shell elements with the normals the same as the
underlying beam and shell elements (default).
BOTTOM
Generates target and contact elements over beam and shell elements with the normals opposite to the
underlying beam and shell elements.
REVERSE
Reverses the direction of the normals on existing selected target and contact elements.
Shape
Used to specify the element shape for target element TARGE170.
(blank)
The target element takes the same shape as the external surface of the underlying element (default).
TRI
Generates several triangular facet target elements.
Notes
Generates elements of the currently active element type overlaid on the free faces of existing elements. For example, surface elements (SURF151, SURF152, SURF153, or SURF154) can be generated over solid elements
(PLANE55, SOLID70, PLANE42, SOLID45, respectively). Element faces are determined from the selected node set
[NSEL] and the load faces for that element type. The operation is similar to that used for generating element
loads from selected nodes with the SF,ALL command, except that elements, instead of loads, are generated. All
nodes on the face must be selected for the face to be used. For shell elements, only face one of the element is
available. If nodes are shared by adjacent selected element faces, the faces are not free and no element will be
generated. Elements created by ESURF will be oriented such that their surface load directions are consistent
with those of the underlying elements. Generated elements, as well as their orientation, should be checked
carefully. Generated elements use the existing nodes and the active MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes, except
when Tlab = REVERSE. The reversed target and contact elements will have the same attributes as the original
elements. If the underlying elements are solid elements, Tlab = TOP or BOTTOM has no effect.
By default, when the command generates a target element the shape will be the same as that of the underlying
element. While not recommended, you can issue ESURF,,,TRI to generate several facet triangle elements.
3414
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ESYM
ESURF is also used to generate 2-D or 3-D node-to-surface element CONTA175, based on the selected node
components of the underlying solid elements. When used to generate CONTA175 elements, all ESURF arguments
are ignored.
Regarding the GUI, if CONTA175 is the active element type, the path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling>
Create> Elements> Node-to-Surf will automatically use ESURF to generate elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Inf Acoustic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Node to Surf
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Generl Surface>Extra
Node
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Generl Surface>No
extra Node
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf to Surf
ESYM, --, NINC, IEL1, IEL2, IEINC
Generates elements from a pattern by a symmetry reflection.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
-Unused field.
NINC
Increment nodes in the given pattern by NINC.
IEL1, IEL2, IEINC
Reflect elements from pattern beginning with IEL1 to IEL2 (defaults to IEL1) in steps of IEINC (defaults
to 1). If IEL1 = ALL, IEL2 and IEINC are ignored and pattern is all selected elements [ESEL]. If IEL1 = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for IEL1 (IEL2 and IEINC are ignored).
Notes
Generates additional elements from a given pattern (similar to EGEN) except with a "symmetry" reflection. The
operation generates a new element by incrementing the nodes on the original element, and reversing and
shifting the node connectivity pattern. For example, for a 4-node 2-D element, the nodes in positions I, J, K, and
L of the original element are placed in positions J, I, L, and K of the reflected element.
Similar permutations occur for all other element types. For line elements, the nodes in positions I and J of the
original element are placed in positions J and I of the reflected element. In releases prior to ANSYS 5.5, no node
pattern reversing and shifting occurred for line elements generated by ESYM. To achieve the same results with ANSYS
5.5 as you did in prior releases, use the EGEN command instead.
It is recommended that symmetry elements be displayed and graphically reviewed.
If the nodes are also reflected (as with the NSYM command) this pattern is such that the orientation of the
symmetry element remains similar to the original element (i.e., clockwise elements are generated from clockwise
elements).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3415
ESYS
For a non-reflected node pattern, the reversed orientation has the effect of reversing the outward normal direction
(clockwise elements are generated from counterclockwise elements).
Note Since nodes may be defined anywhere in the model independently of this command, any orientation of the "symmetry" elements is possible. See also the ENSYM command for modifying existing elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Reflect>Elements>Auto Numbered
ESYS, KCN
Sets the element coordinate system attribute pointer.
PREP7: Meshing
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Coordinate system number:
0
Use element coordinate system orientation as defined (either by default or by KEYOPT setting) for the
element (default).
N
Use element coordinate system orientation parallel to local coordinate system N (where N must be
greater than 10). For global system 0, 1, or 2, define a local system N parallel to appropriate system with
the LOCAL or CS command (for example: LOCAL,11,1).
Command Default
Use element coordinate system orientation as defined (either by default or by KEYOPT setting) for the element
(default).
Notes
Identifies an element coordinate system to be assigned to subsequently defined elements. Used only with area
and volume elements. This number refers to the coordinate system reference number (KCN) defined using the
LOCAL (or similar) command. Element coordinate system numbers may be displayed [/PNUM].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Default Attribs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Elem Attributes
3416
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ET
ET, ITYPE, Ename, KOP1, KOP2, KOP3, KOP4, KOP5, KOP6, INOPR
Defines a local element type from the element library.
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
ITYPE
Arbitrary local element type number. Defaults to 1 + current maximum.
Ename
Element name (or number) as given in the element library in Chapter 4 of the ANSYS Elements Reference. The
name consists of a category prefix and a unique number, such as BEAM3. The category prefix of the name
(BEAM for the example) may be omitted but is displayed upon output for clarity. If Ename = 0, the element
is defined as a null element.
KOP1, KOP2, KOP3, KOP4, KOP5, KOP6
KEYOPT values (1 through 6) for this element, as described in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
INOPR
If 1, suppress all element solution printout for this element type.
Notes
Elements types are selected from the element library (and are therefore established as local element types for
the current model) by this command. Information derived from the element type is used for succeeding commands,
so the ET command(s) should be entered early. The ANSYS Elements Reference describes the various elements
which are available in the ANSYS library. For example, if a 2-D plane quadrilateral structural element type is desired,
Ename should be PLANE42 or 42. A special option, Ename = 0, permits this element type to be ignored during
solution without actually removing the element from the model. Ename may be set to zero only after the element
type has been previously defined with a nonzero Ename. The preferred method of ignoring elements is to use
the select commands (such as ESEL).
KOPn are element option keys. These keys (referred to as KEYOPT(n)) are used to turn on certain element options
for this element. These options are listed under "KEYOPT" in the input table for each element type in the ANSYS
Elements Reference. KEYOPT values include stiffness formulation options, printout controls, and various other
element options. If KEYOPT(7) or greater is needed, input their values with the KEYOPT command.
The ET command only defines an element type local to your model (from the types in the element library). The
TYPE or similar [KATT, LATT, AATT, or VATT] command must be used to point to the desired local element type
before meshing.
To activate the ANSYS program's LS-DYNA explicit dynamic analysis capability, use the ET command or its GUI
equivalent to choose an element that works only with LS-DYNA (such as SHELL163). Choosing LS-DYNA in the
Preferences dialog box does not activate LS-DYNA; it simply makes items and options related to LS-DYNA accessible in the GUI.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Element Type>Add/Edit/Delete
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3417
ETABLE
ETABLE, Lab, Item, Comp
Fills a table of element values for further processing.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Any unique user defined label for use in subsequent commands and output headings (maximum of eight
characters and not a General predefined Item label). Defaults to an eight character label formed by concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels. If the same as a previous user label, this result
item will be included under the same label. Up to 200 different labels may be defined. The following labels
are predefined by ANSYS and cannot be used as user-defined labels: REFL, STAT, and ERAS. Lab = REFL refills
all tables previously defined with the ETABLE commands (not the CALC module commands) according to
the latest ETABLE specifications and is convenient for refilling tables after the load step [SET] has been
changed. Remaining fields will be ignored if Lab is REFL. Lab = STAT displays stored table values. Lab = ERAS
erases the entire table.
Item
Label identifying the item. General item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a
component label. Character parameters may be used. Item = ERAS erases a Lab column.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). General component labels are shown in the table below. Character
parameters may be used.
Notes
Defines a table of values per element (the element table) for use in further processing (see POST1 Element Table
commands). The element table is organized as a "worksheet," with the rows representing all selected elements,
and the columns consisting of result items which have been moved into the table (Item,Comp) with ETABLE.
Each column of data is identified by a user-defined label (Lab) for listings and displays.
After entering the data into the element table, you are not limited to merely listing or displaying your data
[PLESOL, PRESOL, etc.]. You may also perform many types of operations on your data, such as adding or multiplying columns [SADD, SMULT], defining allowable stresses for safety calculations [SALLOW], or multiplying
one column by another [SMULT]. See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for further details.
There are different types of results data that may be stored in the element table. For example, many items for
an element are inherently single-valued (i.e., there is only one value per element). The single-valued items include:
SERR, SDSG, TERR, TDSG, SENE, TENE, KENE, JHEAT, JS, VOLU, and CENT. All other items are multivalued (i.e., they
vary over the element, such that there is a different value at each node). Since only one value is stored in the
element table per element, an average value (based on the number of contributing nodes) is calculated for
multivalued items. Exceptions to this averaging procedure are FMAG and all element force items, which represent
the sum only of the contributing nodal values.
There are two methods of data access that may be used with the ETABLE command. The method you choose
will depend upon the type of data that you wish to store. Some results can be accessed just with the use of a
generic label (Component Name method), while others require a label and number (Sequence Number method).
The Component Name method is used to access the General element data (that is, element data which is generally
available to most element types or groups of element types). All of the single-valued items and some of the more
general multivalued items are accessible with the Component Name method. Various element results depend
on the calculation method and the selected results location (AVPRIN, RSYS, LAYER, SHELL, and ESEL).
3418
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ETABLE
Although nodal data is readily available for listings and displays [PRNSOL, PLNSOL] without using the element
table, you may also use the Component Name method to enter these results into the element table for further
"worksheet" manipulation (see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more details). A listing of the General Item and
Comp labels for the Component Name method is shown below.
The Sequence Number method allows you to view results for data that is not averaged (such as pressures at
nodes, temperatures at integration points, etc.), or data that is not easily described in a generic fashion (such as
all derived data for structural line elements and contact elements, all derived data for thermal line elements,
layer data for layered elements, etc.). A table illustrating the Items (such as LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, SMISC, NMISC,
SURF, etc.) and corresponding sequence numbers for each element is shown in the Output Data section of each
element description found in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Some element table data are reported in the results coordinate system. These include all component results (for
example, UX, UY, etc.; SX, SY, etc.). The solution writes component results in the database and on the results file
in the solution coordinate system. When you issue the ETABLE command, these results are then transformed
into the results coordinate system [RSYS] before being stored in the element table. The default results coordinate
system is global Cartesian [RSYS,0]. All other data are retrieved from the database and stored in the element
table with no coordinate transformation.
Use the PRETAB, PLETAB, or ETABLE,STAT commands to display the stored table values. Issue ETABLE,ERAS to
erase the entire table. Issue ETABLE,Lab,ERAS to erase a Lab column.
When the GUI is on, if a Delete operation in a Define Element Table Data dialog box writes this command to
a log file (Jobname.LOG or Jobname.LGW), you will observe that Lab is blank, Item = ERASE, and Comp is an
integer number. In this case, the GUI has assigned a value of Comp that corresponds to the location of a chosen
variable name in the dialog box's list. It is not intended that you type in such a location value for Comp in an ANSYS
session. However, a file that contains a GUI-generated ETABLE command of this form can be used for batch input
or for use with the /INPUT command.
ETABLE - General Item and Component Labels
General Item and Component Labels ETABLE, Lab, Item, Comp
Item
Comp
Description
Valid Item Labels for Degree of Freedom Results
U
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural displacement.
ROT
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural rotation.
TEMP[1]
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
VOLT
Electric potential.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential.
CURR
Current.
EMF
Electromotive force drop.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation.
SP0n
Mass fraction of species n, where n = 1 to 6. If a species is given a user-defined
name [MSSPEC], use that name instead of SP0n.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3419
ETABLE
General Item and Component Labels ETABLE, Lab, Item, Comp
Item
Comp
Description
Valid Item Labels for FLOTRAN Nodal Results
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
LMDn
Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
EMDn
Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
Valid Item and Component Labels for Element Results
S
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT
Stress intensity.
"
EQV
Equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT
Thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Thermal equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT
Plastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT
Creep strain intensity.
"
EQV
Creep equivalent strain.
EPEL
EPTH
EPPL
EPCR
EPSW
EPTO
3420
Swelling strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total mechanical strain (excluding thermal) (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ETABLE
General Item and Component Labels ETABLE, Lab, Item, Comp
Item
Comp
Description
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total mechanical strain.
"
INT
Total mechanical strain intensity.
"
EQV
Total equivalent mechanical strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total strain including thermal (EPEL + EPTH + EPPL + EPCR).
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total strain.
"
INT
Total strain intensity.
"
EQV
Total equivalent strain.
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable. VISCO106, VISCO107, and VISCO108 only.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume. VISCO106, VISCO107, and VISCO108 only.
ELASTIC
Elastic strain energy density.
"
PLASTIC
Plastic strain energy density.
"
CREEP
Creep strain energy density.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic forces or vector sum.
EPTT
NL
SEND
SERR
Structural error energy.
SDSG
Absolute value of maximum variation of any nodal stress component.
TERR
Thermal error energy.
TDSG
Absolute value of the maximum variation of any nodal thermal gradient
component.
X, Y, Z
Component structural force. Sum of element nodal values.
X, Y, Z
Component structural moment. Sum of element nodal values.
HEAT
Heat flow. Sum of element nodal values.
FLOW
Fluid flow. Sum of element nodal values.
AMPS
Current flow. Sum of element nodal values.
FLUX
Magnetic flux. Sum of element nodal values.
VF
X, Y, Z
Component fluid force.
CSG
X, Y, Z
Component magnetic current segment.
SENE
"Stiffness" energy or thermal heat dissipation (applies to all elements where
meaningful). Same as TENE.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3421
ETABLE
General Item and Component Labels ETABLE, Lab, Item, Comp
Item
Comp
Description
AENE
Artificial energy of the element. This includes the sum of hourglass control
energy and energy generated by in-plane drilling stiffness from shell elements
(applies to all elements where meaningful). The energy is used for comparisons
to SENE energy to predict the solution error due to artificial stiffness. See the
ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
TENE
Thermal heat dissipation or "stiffness" energy (applies to all elements where
meaningful). Same as SENE.
KENE
Kinetic energy (applies to all elements where meaningful).
JHEAT
Element Joule heat generation.
JS
X, Y, Z, SUM
Source current density for low-frequency magnetic analyses. Total current
density (sum of conduction and displacement current densities) in low frequency electric analyses. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM).
JT
X, Y, Z, SUM
Total measureable current density in low-frequency electromagnetic analyses.
(Conduction current density in a low-frequency electric analysis.) Components
(X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM).
JC
X, Y, Z, SUM
Conduction current density for elements that support conduction current
calculation. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM).
MRE
Magnetics Reynolds number
VOLU
Element volume. Based on unit thickness for 2-D plane elements (unless the
thickness option is used) and on the full 360 degrees for 2-D axisymmetric
elements.
CENT
X, Y, Z
Undeformed X, Y, or Z location (based on shape function) of the element
centroid in the active coordinate system.
BFE
TEMP
Body temperatures (calculated from applied temperatures) as used in solution
(area and volume elements only).
SMISC
snum
Element summable miscellaneous data value at sequence number snum
(shown in the Output Data section of each applicable element description
in the ANSYS Elements Reference).
NMISC
snum
Element non-summable miscellaneous data value at sequence number snum
(shown in the Output Data section of each applicable element description
found in the ANSYS Elements Reference).
SURF
snum
Element surface data value at sequence number snum (shown in Section 2.2.2.5: Surface Solution of the ANSYS Elements Reference).
CONT[2]
STAT3
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
"
PENE
Contact penetration (zero or positive).
"
PRES
Contact pressure.
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress.
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction).
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance.
"
GAP
Contact gap distance (0 or negative).
"
FLUX
Total heat flux at contact surface.
CNOS
Total number of contact status changes during substep.
3422
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ETCHG
General Item and Component Labels ETABLE, Lab, Item, Comp
Item
Comp
TOPO
Description
Densities used for topological optimization. This applies to the following
types of elements: PLANE2, PLANE82, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95.
1.
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use labels TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP instead
of TEMP.
2.
For the CONT items for elements CONTA171 through CONTA175, the reported data is averaged across
the element.
3.
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Define Table
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Erase Table
ETCHG, Cnv
Changes element types to their corresponding types.
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Cnv
Converts the element types to the corresponding type. Valid labels are:
ETI
Explicit to Implicit
ITE
Implicit to Explicit
TTE
Thermal to Explicit
TTS
Thermal to Structural
STT
Structural to Thermal
MTT
Magnetic to Thermal
FTS
Fluid to Structural
ETS
Electrical to Structural
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3423
ETCHG
Notes
Changes the currently defined element types to their corresponding types. Elements without a companion element
(listed above) are not switched and should be switched with the ET command to an appropriate element type
or to a null element. The KEYOPT values for the switched element types are reset to zero or to their default values.
You must check these values to see if they are still meaningful. Additionally, if Cnv = ETI, ITE, or TTE, all real constants are set to zero.
If Cnv = ITE, you will need to choose a material model that corresponds to your previously-defined material
properties. If working interactively, you will be prompted to do so.
Element types LINK8 and LINK10 lack a third node; however, their corresponding companion explicit element
types, LINK160 and LINK167, require a third (orientation) node. If you are using element types LINK8 or LINK10,
you must first convert the element type using this command and then manually define the third node of LINK160
or LINK167 elements using EMODIF.
Also, if you are converting BEAM4 to BEAM161, you may need to manually define the third node of BEAM161
elements as well. However, BEAM4 allows you to define a third, optional node. If you have defined this third
node on BEAM4, then the conversion to BEAM161 will be completed automatically when you issue this command.
If you did not define the third node on BEAM4, then you must manually define it on BEAM161 using EMODIF.
Element Pairs
ETI -- Explicit to Implicit
160 > 8
161 > 4
163 > 181
164 > 185
165 > 14
166 > 21
167 > 10
10 > 167
14 > 165
21 > 166
181 > 163
185 > 164
57 > 163
70 > 164
ITE -- Implicit to Explicit
4 > 161
8 > 160
TTE --Thermal to Explicit
55 > 162
TTS -- Thermal to Structural
32 > 1
33 > 8
35 > 2
55 > 42
57 > 41
67 > 42
68 > 8
69 > 45
70 > 45
71 > 21
75 > 25
77 > 82
78 > 83
87 > 92
90 > 95
131 > 181
132 > 91/93
151 > 153
152 > 154
157 > 63
88 > 77
89 > 90
91 > 132
92 > 87
93 > 132
95 > 90
106 > 55
107 > 70
108 > 77
153 >151
154 > 152
158 > 87
180 > 33
181 > 131
182 > 55
183 > 77
185 > 70
186 > 90
187 > 87
STT -- Structural to Thermal
1 > 32
2 > 35
8 > 33
21 > 71
25 > 75
41 > 57
42 > 55
45 > 70
56 > 55
58 > 70
62 > 70
63 > 131
64 > 70
65 > 70
73 > 70
74 > 77
82 > 77
83 > 78
84 > 55/77
86 > 70
MTT -- Magnetic to Thermal
3424
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ETCONTROL
53 > 77
62 > 70
96 > 70
97 > 70
117 > 90
119 > 87
120 > 90
123 > 92
127 > 92
128 > 45/95
157 > 63
FTS -- Fluid to Structural
141 > 42
142 > 45
ETS -- Electrical to Structural
67 > 42
68 > 8
69 > 45
121 > 42/82
122 > 45/95
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Element Type>Switch Elem Type
ETCONTROL, Eltech, Eldegene
Control the element technologies used in element formulation (for applicable elements).
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Eltech
Element technology control (SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SHELL208, SHELL209).
SUGGESTION
ANSYS makes a suggestion for the best element technology before solving. If necessary, mixed u-P
(KEYOPT(6)) will also be included and reset (default).
SET
ANSYS informs you of the best settings and automatically resets any applicable KEYOPT settings; this
will override any manual settings you provided previously.
OFF
Turns automatic selection of element technology off. No suggestions will be issued, and no automatic
resetting is done
Eldegene
Element degenerated shape control (PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186).
ON
If element shapes are degenerated, the degenerated shape function is employed and enhanced strain,
simplified enhanced strain, and B-bar formulations are turned off (default).
OFF
If element shapes are degenerated, regular shape functions are still used, and the specified element
technologies (e.g., enhanced strain, B-bar, uniform reduced integration) are still used.
Notes
The command default is: ETCONTROL,Suggestion,ON. This command is valid for: SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. See Section 2.17: Automatic
Selection of Element Technologies in the ANSYS Elements Reference for more details.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3425
ETDELE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Element Type>Elem Tech Control
ETDELE, ITYP1, ITYP2, INC
Deletes element types.
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITYP1, ITYP2, INC
Deletes element types from ITYP1 to ITYP2 (defaults to ITYP1) in steps of INC (defaults to 1). If ITYP1 =
ALL, ITYP2 and INC are ignored and all element types are deleted. Element types are defined with the ET
command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Element Type>Add/Edit/Delete
ETLIST, ITYP1, ITYP2, INC
Lists currently defined element types.
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITYP1, ITYP2, INC
Lists element types from ITYP1 to ITYP2 (defaults to ITYP1) in steps of INC (defaults to 1). If ITYP1 = ALL
(default), ITYP2 and INC are ignored and all element types are listed.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Properties>Element Types
3426
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
*EVAL
ETYPE
Specifies "Element types" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Element Types
EUSORT
Restores original order of the element table.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Changing the selected element set [ESEL] also restores the original element order.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Sorted Listing>Unsort Elems
*EVAL, ETYPE, EVPARM, CONST, XMIN, XMAX, XVAL, ECALC
Evaluates hyperelastic constants.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
ETYPE
The type of hyperelastic constant to evaluate (only one is currently available):
1
Mooney-Rivlin
EVPARM
The type of hyperelastic equations (mode of deformation) to be used in the evaluation:
1
Uniaxial (tension or compression) equations.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3427
EWRITE
2
Equibiaxial (tension or compression) equations.
3
Shear (Planar Tension or Compression) equations.
CONST
Name of the array parameter containing the determined constants that are to be evaluated. This array must
have been previously filled with hyperelastic constant values using the *MOONEY command.
XMIN
Minimum engineering strain value for which determined hyperelastic constants will be evaluated. XMIN
must have a value greater than -1.
XMAX
Maximum engineering strain value for which determined hyperelastic constants will be evaluated.
XVAL
Name of the array parameter containing the engineering strain values at which the hyperelastic constants
will be evaluated. This array must have been previously defined [*DIM] to have dimensions Px1, where P is
the number of calculated data points (equally spaced over the range XMIN to XMAX) that will be used to
define the curve. P should typically be given a fairly large value in order to generate a smooth curve that
accurately reflects the true curve shape.
ECALC
Name of the array parameter in which evaluated engineering stress values are placed. This array must have
been previously defined [*DIM] to have dimensions Px1, where P is defined above.
Notes
Evaluates the hyperelastic constants over a specified range of strain values after the *MOONEY command is
used. Constants can be used to evaluate engineering stress data outside the range of the input (experimental)
stress-strain data. The evaluated stress-strain curves can be displayed by using the *VPLOT command to graph
ECALC (evaluated stress array parameter) versus XVAL (strain array parameter).
You can also plot evaluated stress-strain curves if you have only Mooney-Rivlin constants (and no laboratory test
data). To do an *EVAL in this case, you need to dimension [*DIM] and fill the CONST array with the Mooney-Rivlin
constants. You can fill this array fairly easily, given that the CONST array is either 1 x 2, 1 x 5, or 1 x 9 at most.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
EWRITE, Fname, Ext, --, KAPPND, Format
Writes elements to a file.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
3428
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/EXIT
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to ELEM if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
KAPPND
Append key:
0
Rewind file before the write operation.
1
Append data to the end of the existing file.
Format
Format key:
SHORT
I6 format (the default).
LONG
I8 format.
Notes
Writes the selected elements to a file. The write operation is not necessary in a standard ANSYS run but is provided
as convenience to users wanting a coded element file. If issuing EWRITE from ANSYS to be used in ANSYS, you
must also issue NWRITE to store nodal information for later use. Only elements having all of their nodes defined
(and selected) are written. Data are written in a coded format. The data description of each record is: I, J, K, L, M,
N, O, P, MAT, TYPE, REAL, SECNUM, ESYS, IEL, where MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS are attribute numbers, SECNUM
is the beam section number, and IEL is the element number.
The format is (14I6) if Format is set to SHORT and (14I8) if the Format is set to LONG, with one element description
per record for elements having eight nodes of less. For elements having more than eight nodes, nodes nine and
above are written on a second record with the same format.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Write Elem File
/EXIT, Slab, Fname, Ext, -Stops the run and returns control to the system.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Slab
Mode for saving the database:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3429
EXP
MODEL
Save the model data (solid model, finite element model, loadings, etc.) only (default).
SOLU
Save the model data and the solution data (nodal and element results).
ALL
Save the model data, solution data and post data (element tables, path results, etc.)
NOSAVE
Do not save any data on File.DB (an existing DB file will not be overwritten).
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name, defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to DB if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
The current database information may be written on File.DB or a named file. If File.DB already exists, a backup
file (File.DBB) will also be written whenever a new File.DB is written.
This command is valid in any processor. Issuing this command at any point will exit the program.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Exit
EXP, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB
Forms the exponential of a variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
3430
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EXPAND
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed upon output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0).
FACTB
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to the operation (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
Forms the exponential of a variable according to the operation:
IR = FACTB*EXP(FACTA x IA)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Exponentiate
EXPAND, Nrepeat, MODAL, HIndex, Icsys, SctAng, --, Phase
Displays the results of a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Nrepeat
Number of sector repetitions for expansion. The default is 0 (no expansion).
MODAL
Specifies that the expansion is for a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
HIndex
The harmonic index ID for the results to expand.
Icsys
The coordinate system number used in the modal cyclic symmetry solution. The default is the global cylindrical
coordinate system (specified via the CSYS command where KCN = 1).
SctAng
The sector angle in degrees, equal to 360 divided by the number of cyclic sectors.
--
This field is reserved for future use.
Phase
The phase angle in degrees to use for the expansion. The default is 0. Typically, the value is the peak displacement (or stress/strain) phase angle obtained via the CYCPHASE command.
Notes
Issue this command to display the results of a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3431
/EXPAND
When you issue the EXPAND,Nrepeat command, subsequent SET commands read data from the results file
and expand them to Nrepeat sectors. As long as no entities have been modified, this expansion can be negated
(that is, reverted to single sector) by issuing EXPAND with no arguments. If you modify entities and wish to return
to the partial model, use the Session Editor (see Restoring Database Contents in the ANSYS Operations Guide).
EXPAND displays the results and allows you to print them, as if for a full model. The harmonic index (automatically
retrieved from the results file) appears in the legend column.
When plotting kinetic energy (KENE) or strain energy (SENE), the EXPAND command works with brick or tet
models only.
EXPAND is a specification command valid only in POST1. It is significantly different from the /EXPAND command
in several respects, (although you can use either command to display the results of a modal cyclic symmetry
analysis):
EXPAND has none of the limitations of the /EXPAND command.
EXPAND changes the database by modifying the geometry, the nodal displacements, and element stresses
as they are read from the results file, whereas the /EXPAND command does not change the database.
You can print results displayed via EXPAND.
Caution: The EXPAND command creates new nodes and elements; therefore, saving (or issuing the
/EXIT, ALL command) after issuing the EXPAND command can result in large databases.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Cyc Expansion
/EXPAND, Nrepeat1, Type1, Method1, DX1, DY1, DZ1, Nrepeat2, Type2, Method2, DX2, DY2, DZ2, Nrepeat3, Type3,
Method3, DX3, DY3, DZ3
Allows the creation of a larger graphic display than represented by the actual finite element analysis
model.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Nrepeat1, Nrepeat2, Nrepeat3
The number of repetitions required for the element pattern. The default is 0 (no expansion).
Type1, Type2, Type3
The type of expansion requested.
RECT
Causes a Cartesian transformation of DX, DY, and DZ for each pattern (default).
POLAR
Causes a polar transformation of DR, D-Theta and DZ for each pattern.
AXIS
Causes 2-D axisymmetric expansion (that is, rotates a 2-D model created in the X-Y plane about the Y
axis to create a 3-D model).
3432
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/EXPAND
LRECT
Causes a Cartesian transformation of DX, DY, and DZ for each pattern about the current local coordinate
system (specified via the CSYS command).
LPOLAR
Causes a polar transformation of DR, D-Theta, and DZ for each pattern about the local coordinate system
(specified via the CSYS command).
Method1, Method2, Method3
The method by which the pattern is repeated.
FULL
Causes a normal repeat of the pattern (default).
HALF
Uses a symmetry transformation for alternate repeats (to produce an image of a complete circular gear
from the image of half a tooth, for example).
DX1, DY1, DZ1, DX2, DY2, DZ2, DX3, DY3, DZ3
The Cartesian or polar increments between the repeated patterns. Also determines the reflection plane. Reflection is about the plane defined by the normal vector (DX, DY, DZ). If you want no translation, specify a
small nonzero value. For a half-image expansion, the increment DX, DY, or DZ is doubled so that POLAR,HALF,
,45 produces full images on 90 centers, and RECT,HALF, ,1 produces full images on 2-meter centers.
Notes
You can use the /EXPAND command to perform up to three symmetry expansions at once (that is, X, Y, and Z
which is equal to going from a 1/8 model to a full model). Polar expansions allow you to expand a wheel section
into a half wheel, then into the half section, and then into the whole.
The command displays elements/results when you issue the EPLOT command or postprocessing commands.
The command works on all element and result displays, except as noted below. As the graphic display is created,
the elements (and results) are repeated as many times as necessary, expanding the geometry and, if necessary,
the displacements and stresses.
Derived results are not supported.
The /EXPAND command has the following limitations:
It does not support solid model entities.
POLAR, FULL or HALF operations are meaningful only in global cylindrical systems and are unaffected by
the RSYS or DSYS commands. Cartesian symmetry or unsymmetric operations also occur about the
global Cartesian system.
It does not average nodal results across sector boundaries, even for averaged plots (such as those obtained
via the PLNSOL command).
The /EXPAND command differs significantly from the EXPAND command in several respects:
The uses of /EXPAND are of a more general nature, whereas the EXPAND command is intended primarily
to expand modal cyclic symmetry results.
/EXPAND does not change the database as does the EXPAND command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3433
EXPASS
You cannot print results displayed via /EXPAND.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Symmetry Expansion>
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Symmetry Expansion>Expansion by values
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Symmetry Expansion>Modal Cyclic Symmetry
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Symmetry Expansion>Periodic/Cyclic Symmetry Expansion
EXPASS, Key
Specifies an expansion pass of an analysis.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Expansion pass key:
OFF
No expansion pass will be performed (default).
ON
An expansion pass will be performed.
Notes
Specifies that an expansion pass of a modal, substructure, buckling, transient, or harmonic analysis is to be performed.
Note This separate solution pass requires an explicit FINISH to preceding analysis and reentry into
SOLUTION.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>ExpansionPass
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>ExpansionPass
EXPSOL, LSTEP, SBSTEP, TIMFRQ, Elcalc
Specifies the solution to be expanded for reduced analyses.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
LSTEP, SBSTEP
Expand the solution identified as load step LSTEP and substep SBSTEP.
3434
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EXTOPT
TIMFRQ
As an alternative to LSTEP and SBSTEP, expand the solution at, or nearest to, the time value TIMFRQ (for
ANTYPE,TRANS or ANTYPE,SUBSTR) or frequency value TIMFRQ (for ANTYPE,HARMIC). LSTEP and SBSTEP
should be blank.
Elcalc
Element calculation key:
YES
Calculate element results, nodal loads, and reaction loads.
NO
Do not calculate these items.
Notes
Specifies the solution to be expanded from analyses that use reduced or mode superposition methods (ANTYPE,HARMIC, TRANS, or SUBSTR). Use the NUMEXP command to expand a group of solutions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Load Step
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Time/Freq
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Load Step
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Time/Freq
EXTOPT, Lab, Val1, Val2, Val3
Controls options relating to the generation of volume elements from area elements.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label identifying the control option. The meanings of Val1, Val2, and Val3 will vary depending on Lab.
ON
Sets carryover of the material attributes, real constant attributes, and element coordinate system attributes
of the pattern area elements to the generated volume elements. Sets the pattern area mesh to clear
when volume generations are done. Val1, Val2, and Val3 are ignored.
OFF
Removes all settings associated with this command. Val1, Val2, and Val3 are ignored.
STAT
Shows all settings associated with this command. Val1, Val2, and Val3 are ignored.
ATTR
Sets carryover of particular pattern area attributes (materials, real constants, and element coordinate
systems) of the pattern area elements to the generated volume elements. (See 2.) Val1 can be:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3435
EXTOPT
0
Sets volume elements to use current MAT command settings.
1
Sets volume elements to use material attributes of the pattern area elements.
Val2 can be:
0
Sets volume elements to use current REAL command settings.
1
Sets volume elements to use real constant attributes of the pattern area elements.
Val3 can be:
0
Sets volume elements to use current ESYS command settings.
1
Sets volume elements to use element coordinate system attributes of the pattern area elements.
ESIZE
Val1 sets the number of element divisions in the direction of volume generation or volume sweep. For
VDRAG and VSWEEP, Val1 is overridden by the LESIZE command NDIV setting. Val2 sets the spacing
ratio (bias) in the direction of volume generation or volume sweep. If positive, Val2 is the nominal ratio
of last division size to first division size (if > 1.0, sizes increase, if < 1.0, sizes decrease). If negative, Val2
is the nominal ratio of center division(s) size to end divisions size. Ratio defaults to 1.0 (uniform spacing).
Val3 is ignored.
ACLEAR
Sets clearing of pattern area mesh. (See 3.) Val1 can be:
0
Sets pattern area to remain meshed when volume generation is done.
1
Sets pattern area mesh to clear when volume generation is done. Val2 and Val3 are ignored.
VSWE
Indicates that volume sweeping options will be set using Val1 and Val2. Settings specified with EXTOPT,VSWE will be used the next time the VSWEEP command is invoked. If Lab = VSWE, Val1 becomes
a label. Val1 can be:
AUTO
Indicates whether you will be prompted for the source and target used by VSWEEP or if VSWE should
automatically determine the source and target. If Val1 = AUTO, Val2 is ON by default. VSWE will
automatically determine the source and target for VSWEEP. You will be allowed to pick more than
one volume for sweeping. When Val2 = OFF, the user will be prompted for the source and target
for VSWEEP. You will only be allowed to pick one volume for sweeping.
TETS
Indicates whether VSWEEP will tet mesh non-sweepable volumes or leave them unmeshed. If Val1
= TETS, Val2 is OFF by default. Non-sweepable volumes will be left unmeshed. When Val2 = ON,
the non-sweepable volumes will be tet meshed if the assigned element type supports tet shaped
elements.
3436
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
EXTREM
Val3 is ignored for Lab = VSWE.
Val1, Val2, Val3
Additional input values as described under each option for Lab.
Notes
1.
EXTOPT controls options relating to the generation of volume elements from pattern area elements
using the VEXT, VROTAT, VOFFST, VDRAG, and VSWEEP commands. (When using VSWEEP, the pattern
area is referred to as the source area.)
2.
Enables carryover of the attributes of the pattern area elements to the generated volume elements when
you are using VEXT, VROTAT, VOFFST, or VDRAG. (When using VSWEEP, since the volume already exists,
use the VATT command to assign attributes before sweeping.)
3.
When you are using VEXT, VROTAT, VOFFST, or VDRAG, enables clearing of the pattern area mesh
when volume generations are done. (When you are using VSWEEP, if selected, the area meshes on the
pattern (source), target, and/or side areas clear when volume sweeping is done.)
4.
Neither EXTOPT,VSWE,AUTO nor EXTOPT,VSWE,TETS will be affected by EXTOPT,ON or EXTOPT, OFF.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volume Sweep>Sweep Opts
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Elem Ext Opts
EXTREM, NVAR1, NVAR2, NINC
Lists the extreme values for variables.
POST26: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR1, NVAR2, NINC
List extremes for variables NVAR1 through NVAR2 in steps of NINC. Variable range defaults to its maximum.
NINC defaults to 1.
Notes
Lists the extreme values (and the corresponding times) for stored and calculated variables. Extremes for stored
variables are automatically listed as they are stored. Only the real part of a complex number is used. Extreme
values may also be assigned to parameters [*GET].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>List Extremes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3437
3438
F Commands
F, NODE, Lab, VALUE, VALUE2, NEND, NINC
Specifies force loads at nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NODE
Node at which force is to be specified. If ALL, NEND and NINC are ignored and forces are applied to all selected
nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid
only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid force label. Structural labels: FX, FY, or FZ (forces); MX, MY, or MZ (moments). Thermal labels: HEAT,
HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP (heat flow). Fluid labels: FLOW (fluid flow). Electric labels: AMPS (current flow),
CHRG (electric charge). Magnetic labels: FLUX (magnetic flux); CSGX, CSGY, or CSGZ (magnetic current segments). FLOTRAN labels: FX, FY, or FZ (forces).
VALUE
Force value or table name reference for specifying tabular boundary conditions. To specify a table, enclose
the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., F, NODE,HEAT,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define a
table.
VALUE2
Second force value (if any). If the analysis type and the force allow a complex input, VALUE (above) is the real
component and VALUE2 is the imaginary component.
NEND, NINC
Specifies the same values of force at the nodes ranging from NODE to NEND (defaults to NODE), in steps of
NINC (defaults to 1).
Notes
The available force loads per node correspond to the degrees of freedom listed under "Degrees of Freedom" in
the input table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. If both a force and a constrained degree
of freedom [D] are specified at the same node, the constraint takes precedence. Forces are defined in the nodal
coordinate system. The positive directions of structural forces and moments are along and about the positive
nodal axis directions. The node and the degree of freedom label corresponding to the force must be selected
[NSEL, DOFSEL].
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname%) are available only for the following labels: Fluid (FLOW),
Electric (AMPS), Structural force (FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ), FLOTRAN (FX, FY, FZ), and Thermal (HEAT, HBOT, HE2,
HE3, . . ., HTOP). All labels are valid only in static (ANTYPE,STATIC) and full transient (ANTYPE,TRANS) analyses.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Nodes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/FACET
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Node Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Node Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Nodes
/FACET, Lab
Specifies the facet representation used to form solid model displays.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid labels:
FINE
Use finer tessellation to increase the number of facets for the display. Provides the best representation
(but decreases speed of operation).
NORML
Use the basic number of facets for the display (default).
COAR
Use a limited number of facets for the display. This option will increase the speed of the operations, but
may produce poor representations for some imported models.
WIRE
Display model with a wireframe representation (fast, but surfaces will not be shown).
Command Default
Basic number of facets.
Notes
Specifies the facet (or polygon) representation used to form solid model displays. Used only with the APLOT,
ASUM, VPLOT, and VSUM commands.
3440
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FC
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Solid Model Facets
FATIGUE
Specifies "Fatigue data status" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Fatigue Calcs
FC, MAT, Lab1, Lab2, DATA1, DATA2, DATA3, DATA4, DATA5, DATA6
Provides failure criteria information and activates a data table to input temperature-dependent stress
and strain limits.
PREP7: Materials
POST1: Failure Criteria
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
MAT
Material reference number. You can define failure criteria for up to ten different materials.
Lab1
Type of data.
TEMP
Temperatures. Each of the materials you define can have a different set of temperatures to define the
failure criteria.
EPEL
Strains.
S
Stresses.
Lab2
Specific criteria. Not used if Lab1 = TEMP.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3441
FC
XTEN
Allowable tensile stress or strain in the x-direction. (Must be positive.)
XCMP
Allowable compressive stress or strain in the x-direction. (Defaults to negative of XTEN.)
YTEN
Allowable tensile stress or strain in the y-direction. (Must be positive.)
YCMP
Allowable compressive stress or strain in the y-direction. (Defaults to negative of YTEN.)
ZTEN
Allowable tensile stress or strain in the z-direction. (Must be positive.)
ZCMP
Allowable compressive stress or strain in the z-direction. (Defaults to negative of ZTEN.)
XY
Allowable XY stress or shear strain. (Must be positive.)
YZ
Allowable YZ stress or shear strain. (Must be positive.)
XZ
Allowable XZ stress or shear strain. (Must be positive.)
XYCP
XY coupling coefficient (Used only if Lab1 = S). Defaults to -1.0.
YZCP
YZ coupling coefficient (Used only if Lab1 = S). Defaults to -1.0.
XZCP
XZ coupling coefficient (Used only if Lab1 = S). Defaults to -1.0.
DATA1, . . ., DATA6
Description of DATA1 through DATA6.
T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6
Temperature at which limit data is input. Used only when Lab1 = TEMP.
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Value of limit stress or strain at temperature T1 through T6. Used only when Lab1 = S or EPEL.
Notes
The data table can be input in either PREP7 or POST1. This table is used only in POST1. When you postprocess
failure criteria results defined using the FC command (PLESOL, PRNSOL, PRRSOL, etc.), the active coordinate
system must be the coordinate system of the material being analyzed. You do this using RSYS, SOLU. For layered
applications, you also use the LAYER command. See the specific element documentation in the ANSYS Elements
Reference for information on defining your coordinate system for layers.
Some plotting and printing functions will not support Failure Criteria for your PowerGraphics displays. This could
result in minor changes to other data when Failure Criteria are applied. See the appropriate plot or print command
documentation for more information .
3442
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FCDELE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Failure Criteria>Add/Edit
Main Menu>General Postproc>Failure Criteria>Temp Variation
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Failure Criteria>Add/Edit
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Failure Criteria>Temp Variation
FCCHECK
Checks both the strain and stress input criteria for all materials.
PREP7: Materials
POST1: Failure Criteria
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Issue the FCCHECK command to check the completeness of the input during the input phase.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Failure Criteria>Criteria Check
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Failure Criteria>Criteria Check
FCDELE, MAT
Deletes previously defined failure criterion data for the given material.
PREP7: Materials
POST1: Failure Criteria
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
MAT
Material number. Deletes all FC command input for this material.
Notes
This command is also valid in POST1.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Failure Criteria>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Failure Criteria>Delete
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3443
FCLIST
FCLIST, MAT, --,TEMP
To list what the failure criteria is that you have input.
PREP7: Materials
POST1: Failure Criteria
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
MAT
Material number (defaults to ALL for all materials).
--
Unused field.
TEMP
Temperature to be evaluated at (defaults to TUNIF).
Notes
This command allows you to see what you have already input for failure criteria using the FC commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Failure Criteria>List
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Failure Criteria>List
FCUM, Oper, RFACT, IFACT
Specifies that force loads are to be accumulated.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Oper
Accumulation key:
REPL
Subsequent values replace the previous values (default).
ADD
Subsequent values are added to the previous values.
IGNO
Subsequent values are ignored.
RFACT
Scale factor for the real component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale factor.
IFACT
Scale factor for the imaginary component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale
factor.
Command Default
Replace previous values.
3444
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FDELE
Notes
Allows repeated force load (force, heat flow, etc.) values to be replaced, added, or ignored. Operations apply to
the selected nodes [NSEL]. and the force labels corresponding to the selected force labels [DOFSEL]. The operations
occur when the next force specifications are defined. For example, issuing the command F,1,FX,250 after a previous F,1,FX,200 causes the current value of the force on node 1 in the x-direction to be 450 with the add operation,
250 with the replace operation, or 200 with the ignore operation. Scale factors are also available to multiply the
next value before the add or replace operation. A scale factor of 2.0 with the previous "add" example results in
a force of 700. Scale factors are applied even if no previous values exist. Issue FCUM,STAT to show the current
label, operation, and scale factors. Solid model boundary conditions are not affected by this command, but
boundary conditions on the FE model are affected.
Note FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by existing solid model boundary conditions if
a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
FCUM does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Forces
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Forces
FDELE, NODE, Lab, NEND, NINC
Deletes force loads on nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NODE
Node for which force is to be deleted. If ALL, NEND and NINC are ignored and forces are deleted on all selected
nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid
only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid force label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: FX, FY, or FZ (forces); MX, MY, or MZ
(moments). Thermal labels: HEAT, HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP (heat flow). Fluid labels: FLOW (fluid flow).
Electric labels: AMPS (current flow), CHRG (electric charge). Magnetic labels: FLUX (magnetic flux); CSGX,
CSGY, or CSGZ (magnetic current segments). FLOTRAN labels: FX, FY, or FZ (forces).
NEND, NINC
Delete forces from NODE to NEND (defaults to NODE) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
Notes
The node and the degree of freedom label corresponding to the force must be selected [NSEL, DOFSEL].
This command is also valid in PREP7.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3445
/FDELE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Forces>On All Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Flow>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Node Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Forces>On All Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Flow>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Node Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Nodes
/FDELE, Ident, Stat
Deletes a binary file after it is used.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Ident
ANSYS file name identifier. Valid identifiers are: EMAT, ESAV, FULL, SUB, MODE, TRI, DSUB, USUB, OSAV, and
SELD. See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for file descriptions.
Stat
Keep or delete key:
KEEP
Keep this file.
DELE
Delete (or do not write, if not necessary) this file.
3446
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FE
Command Default
Keep all files.
Notes
Deletes as soon as possible (or prevents writing) a binary file created by the ANSYS program to save space.
Warning: Deleting files that are necessary for the next substep, load step, or analysis will
prevent continuation of the run.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>ANSYS File Options
FE, NEV, CYCLE, FACT, Title
Defines a set of fatigue event parameters.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NEV
Reference number for this event (within MXEV).
CYCLE
Number of required cycles (defaults to 1). If -1, erase all parameters and fatigue stresses for this event.
FACT
Scale factor to be applied to all loadings in this event (defaults to 1.0).
Title
User defined identification title for this event (up to 20 characters).
Command Default
Event assigned one cycle, unity scale factor, and no title.
Notes
Repeat FE command to define additional sets of event parameters (MXEV limit), to redefine event parameters,
or to delete event stress conditions.
The set of fatigue event parameters is associated with all loadings and all locations. See the FTSIZE command
for the maximum set of events (MXEV) allowed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Assign Events
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Erase Event Data
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3447
FEBODY
FEBODY
Specifies "Body loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Body Loads
FECONS
Specifies "Constraints on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>DOF Constraints
FEFOR
Specifies "Forces on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
3448
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FILE
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Forces
FELIST, NEV1, NEV2, NINC
Lists the fatigue event parameters.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NEV1, NEV2, NINC
List event parameters from NEV1 (defaults to 1) to NEV2 (defaults to NEV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If
NEV1 = ALL, NEV2 and NINC are ignored and all events are listed. Fatigue event parameters are defined with
the FE command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>List Event Data
FESURF
Specifies "Surface loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Surface Loads
FILE, Fname, Ext, -Specifies the data file where results are to be found.
POST1: Set Up
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3449
FILEAUX2
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
If Fname is blank, the extension defaults to RST (for structural, fluid, or coupled-field analyses), to RTH (for
thermal or electrical analyses), to RMG (for magnetic analyses), or to RFL (for FLOTRAN analyses). For postprocessing reduced structural analyses in POST26, use the RDSP extension for displacements from transient
dynamic analyses or the RFRQ extension from harmonic response analyses. For postprocessing contact results
corresponding to the initial contact state in POST1, use the RCN extension.
--
Unused field.
Command Default
Use the result file with the Jobname as Fname and with the extension corresponding to the analysis type.
Notes
Specifies the ANSYS data file where the results are to be found for postprocessing.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Data & File Opts
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>File
Utility Menu>File>List>Binary Files
Utility Menu>List>Files>Binary Files
FILEAUX2, Fname, Ident, -Specifies the binary file to be dumped.
AUX2: Binary Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to the current Jobname if Ident is specified.
Ident
ANSYS filename identifier. See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for file descriptions and identifiers. If not an
ANSYS identifier, Ident will be used as the filename extension.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Specifies the binary file to be dumped with the DUMP command.
3450
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FILEDISP
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>List>Binary Files
Utility Menu>List>Files>Binary Files
FILEAUX3, Fname, Ext, -Specifies the results file to be edited.
AUX3: Results Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to the current Jobname if Ext is specified.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Notes
Specifies the results file to be edited.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
FILEDISP, Fname, Ext, -Specifies the file containing the graphics data.
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3451
FILL
Notes
Specifies the input file containing the graphics data (defaults to File.GRPH).
Menu Paths
It is part of the DISPLAY program.
FILL, NODE1, NODE2, NFILL, NSTRT, NINC, ITIME, INC, SPACE
Generates a line of nodes between two existing nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2
Beginning and ending nodes for fill-in. NODE1 defaults to next to last node specified, NODE2 defaults to last
node specified. If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI).
NFILL
Fill NFILL nodes between NODE1 and NODE2 (defaults to |NODE2-NODE1|-1). NFILL must be positive.
NSTRT
Node number assigned to first filled-in node (defaults to NODE1 + NINC).
NINC
Add this increment to each of the remaining filled-in node numbers (may be positive or negative). Defaults
to the integer result of (NODE2-NODE1)/(NFILL + 1), i.e., linear interpolation. If the default evaluates to zero,
or if zero is input, NINC is set to 1.
ITIME, INC
Do fill-in operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing NODE1, NODE2 and NSTRT by INC each time after the
first. ITIME and INC both default to 1.
SPACE
Spacing ratio. Ratio of last division size to first division size. If > 1.0, divisions increase. If < 1.0, divisions decrease. Ratio defaults to 1.0 (uniform spacing).
Notes
Generates a line of nodes (in the active coordinate system) between two existing nodes. The two nodes may
have been defined in any coordinate system. Nodal locations and rotation angles are determined by interpolation.
Any number of nodes may be filled-in and any node number sequence may be assigned. See the CSCIR command
when filling across the 180 singularity line in a non-Cartesian system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>Fill between Nds
3452
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/FILNAME
FILLDATA, IR, LSTRT, LSTOP, LINC, VALUE, DVAL
Fills a variable by a ramp function.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Define data table as variable IR (2 to NV [NUMVAR]).
LSTRT
Start at location LSTRT (defaults to 1).
LSTOP
Stop at location LSTOP (defaults to maximum location as determined from data previously stored.
LINC
Fill every LINC location between LSTRT and LSTOP (defaults to 1).
VALUE
Value assigned to location LSTRT.
DVAL
Increment value of previous filled location by DVAL and assign sum to next location to be filled (may be
positive or negative.)
Notes
Locations may be filled continuously or at regular intervals (LINC). Previously defined data at a location will be
overwritten.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Table Operations>Fill Data
/FILNAME, Fname, Key
Changes the Jobname for the analysis.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
Name (32 characters maximum) to be used as the Jobname. Defaults to the initial Jobname as specified on
the ANSYS execution command, or to file if none specified.
Key
Specify whether to use the existing log, error, lock, and page files or start new files.
0, OFF
Continue using current log, error, lock, and page files.
1, ON
Start new log, error, lock, and page files (old log and error files are closed and saved, but old lock and
page files are deleted). Existing log and error files are appended.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3453
FINISH
Notes
All subsequently created files will be named with this Jobname if Key = 0. Use Key = 1 to start new log, error,
lock, and page files. The previous Jobname is typically defined on the ANSYS program execution line (see the
ANSYS Operations Guide). This command is useful when different groups of files created throughout the run are
to have different names. For example, the command may be used before each substructure pass to avoid overwriting files or having to rename each file individually.
This command is valid only at the Begin level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Change Jobname
FINISH
Exits normally from a processor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
DISPLAY: Action
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Exits any of the ANSYS processors or the DISPLAY program. For the ANSYS processors, data will remain intact in
the database but the database is not automatically written to a file (use the SAVE command to write the database
to a file). See also the /QUIT command for an alternate processor exit command. If exiting POST1, POST26, or
OPT, see additional notes below.
POST1: Data in the database will remain intact, including the POST1 element table data, the path table data, the
fatigue table data, and the load case pointers.
POST26: Data in the database will remain intact, except that POST26 variables are erased and specification
commands (such as FILE, PRTIME, NPRINT, etc.) are reset. Use the /QUIT command to exit the processor and
bypass these exceptions.
OPT: Current optimization data are written to File.OPT for possible resume later [OPRESU]. See also the OPSAVE
command to write optimization data.
This command is valid in any processor. This command is not valid at the Begin level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Solve
Main Menu>Finish
3454
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FJ
FITEM, NFIELD, ITEM, ITEMY, ITEMZ
Identifies items chosen by a picking operation (GUI).
DATABASE: Picking
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFIELD
Field number on the command which uses the picking data. (Count the command name as a field, so that
a 2 indicates the first command argument, 3 the second command argument, etc.) The corresponding field
on the command will have a P51X label.
ITEM
Entity number of the entity picked. Negative entity numbers are used to indicate a range of entities. If the
item picked is a coordinate location, then this field represents the X-coordinate. See also the FLST command.
ITEMY, ITEMZ
Y and Z coordinates of a picked coordinate location. ITEM represents the X coordinate. See also the FLST
command.
Notes
This is a command generated by the GUI and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if graphical picking is
used. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in
an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
On the log file, a set of FITEM commands is preceded by one FLST command which defines the picking specifications for that pick operation. The data listed in the FITEM commands are used by the first subsequent command
containing a P51X label in one of its fields.
Caution: For a given entity type, a list containing an ITEM that is larger than the maximum defined entity,
could deplete the system memory and produce unpredictable results.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
FJ, ELEM, LABEL, VALUE
Specify forces or moments on the components of the relative motion of a joint element.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
ELEM
Element number or ALL to specify all joint elements.
LABEL
Valid labels:
FX
Force in local x direction.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3455
FJDELE
FY
Force in local y direction.
FZ
Force in local z direction.
MX
Moment about local x axis.
MY
Moment about local y axis.
MZ
Moment about local z axis.
VALUE
Value of the label.
Notes
Valid for MPC184 (joint options in KEYOPT(1)).
See FJDELE for information on deleting forces and moments.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
FJDELE, ELEM, LAB
Deletes forces (or moments) on the components of the relative motion of a joint element.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
ELEM
Element number, or ALL. (leaving this blank defaults to ALL)
LAB
Valid labels are:
FX
Force in local x direction.
FY
Force in local y direction.
FZ
Force in local z direction.
MX
Moment about local x axis.
MY
Moment about local y axis.
3456
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FK
MZ
Moment about local z axis.
ALL, or (blank)
Delete all valid forces or moments.
Notes
Valid for MPC184 (joint options in KEYOPT(1)).
See FJ for information on specifying forces (or moments).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Forces>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Forces>On Joint Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Joint Elems
FJLIST, Elem
Lists forces and moments applied on joint elements.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Elem
Element number or ALL (or blank). Lists joint element forces and moments on the specified element(s).
Notes
Valid for MPC184. See FJ for information on specifying forces and moments.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Joint Element Forces>On Picked Element
FK, KPOI, Lab, VALUE, VALUE2
Defines force loads at keypoints.
SOLUTION: Solid Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
Keypoint at which force is to be specified. If ALL, apply to all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If KPOI = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for KPOI.
Lab
Valid force label. Structural labels: FX, FY, or FZ (forces); MX, MY, or MZ (moments). Thermal labels: HEAT,
HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP (heat flow). Fluid labels: FLOW (fluid flow). Electric labels: AMPS (current flow),
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3457
FK
CHRG (electric charge). Magnetic labels: FLUX (magnetic flux); CSGX, CSGY, or CSGZ (magnetic current segments).
VALUE
Force value or table name reference for specifying tabular boundary conditions. To specify a table, enclose
the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., FK, KPOI, HEAT,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define a
table.
VALUE2
Second force value (if any). If the analysis type and the force allow a complex input, VALUE (above) is the real
component and VALUE2 is the imaginary component.
Notes
Forces may be transferred from keypoints to nodes with the FTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. See the F command
for a description of force loads.
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname%) are available only for the following labels: Fluid (FLOW),
Electric (AMPS), Structural force (FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ), and Thermal (HEAT, HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Keypoints
3458
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FKDELE
FKDELE, KPOI, Lab
Deletes force loads at a keypoint.
SOLUTION: Solid Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
Keypoint at which force is to be deleted. If ALL, delete forces at all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If KPOI = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for KPOI.
Lab
Valid force label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. See the FDELE command for labels.
Notes
Deletes force loads (and all corresponding finite element loads) at a keypoint. See the FDELE command for details.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Forces>On All KPs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Flow>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Forces>On All KPs
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCharge>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppCurrent>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>ImprCurr>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Flow>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppCurrSeg>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMagFlux>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Force/Moment>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>MultiPtNod>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>NodePSD>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Spectrum>SinglPtFor>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flow>On Keypoints
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3459
FKLIST
FKLIST, KPOI, Lab
Lists the forces at keypoints.
SOLUTION: Solid Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPOI
List forces at this keypoint. If ALL (default), list for all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If KPOI = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may
also be substituted for KPOI.
Lab
Force label to be listed (defaults to ALL). See the DOFSEL command for labels.
Notes
Listing applies to the selected keypoints [KSEL] and the selected force labels [DOFSEL].
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Forces>On All Keypoints
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Forces>On Picked KPs
FL, NLOC, NODE, SCFX, SCFY, SCFZ, Title
Defines a set of fatigue location parameters.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Reference number for this location (within MXLOC). When defining a new location, defaults to lowest unused
location. If the specified NODE is already associated with a location, NLOC defaults to that existing location.
NODE
Node number corresponding to this location (must be unique). Used only to associate a node with a new
location or to find an existing location (if NLOC is not input). If NODE = -1 (or redefined), erase all parameters
and fatigue stresses for this location.
SCFX, SCFY, SCFZ
Stress concentration factors applied to the total stresses. Factors are applied in the global X, Y, and Z directions
unless the axisymmetric option of the FSSECT is used (i.e., RHO is nonzero), in which case the factors are applied
in the section x, y, and z (radial, axial, and hoop) directions.
Title
User-defined title for this location (up to 20 characters).
Notes
Repeat FL command to define additional sets of location parameters (MXLOC limit), to redefine location parameters,
or to delete location stress conditions.
3460
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLANGE
One location must be defined for each node of interest and only one node can be associated with each location.
See the FTSIZE command for the maximum locations (MXLOC) allowed. A location will be automatically defined
for a node not having a location when the FSSECT, FSNODE, or FS command is issued. Automatically defined
locations are assigned the lowest available location number, unity stress concentration factors, and no title.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Stress Locations
FLANGE, NLOC, LENG, MASS, SIF, FLEX, ARINS, ELEM
Defines a flange in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Node where flange is to be placed (as described below). Defaults to current piping run starting point.
LENG
Length of flange (defaults to larger pipe OD).
MASS
Dry mass (weight/gravity) of flange without insulation (defaults to equivalent straight pipe mass). Note that
acceleration [ACEL] must be nonzero for weight to be calculated.
SIF
Stress intensification factor (defaults to 1.0).
FLEX
Bending flexibility factor (defaults to 1.0).
ARINS
Insulation surface area (defaults to equivalent straight pipe insulation area). Units (length2) must be consistent
with the smallest unit of the system used (not mixed) regardless of the PUNIT option.
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to flange (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL) +
1).
Notes
Defines a flange (straight pipe element (PIPE16) with adjusted specifications and loadings) at a given location
in a piping run. See the PREP7 RUN command. This command is similar to the VALVE command except for a
different flexibility factor default. The location may be 1) between two adjacent colinear straight pipes, 2) between
an adjacent straight pipe and a different piping component, or 3) at the end of a straight pipe.
For Case 1, two new nodes are generated at the ends of the flange. The two straight pipes are automatically
"shortened" to meet the ends of the flange. The flange specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding two straight pipes.
For Case 2, one new node is generated at one end of the flange. The straight pipe is automatically "shortened"
to meet this end of the flange. The other end of the flange meets the other piping component. The flange specifications and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3461
FLDATA
For Case 3, one new node is generated at the free end of the flange. The other end of the flange meets the straight
pipe. The flange specifications and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Flange
FLDATA, Name, Label, Value
Sets up a FLOTRAN analysis.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
Name
The name identifying the group of FLOTRAN parameters being defined or controlled on this command.
Label
The label of the specific FLOTRAN parameter being input or controlled. Label determines the meaning of
the Value argument.
Value
The numeric value of an input item, the logical value of a switch (T or F, for example), or an alphanumeric
label, depending on the Label argument.
Notes
The FLDATA command is used to define FLOTRAN-specific input data, solution controls, and output controls. It
is valid only with the FLOTRAN CFD option.
The FLDATA command controls groups of FLOTRAN parameters, and the group name is input as the first argument,
Name.
To give you the ability to link directly to the documentation on any of these groups, we have documented each
group under its own name--from FLDATA1 through FLDATA36. For example, documentation on FLDATA with
the first argument set to SOLU is documented as the FLDATA1 command. You may enter the command with
either name--FLDATA or FLDATA1, and you must remember to input the appropriate first argument, as shown
in the list below.
Option and Output Control Commands
FLDATA1,SOLU
Controls which features of the solution algorithm are activated.
FLDATA2,ITER
Sets iteration and output controls for steady state analyses.
FLDATA3,TERM
Sets the convergence monitors for the pressure and temperature equations.
FLDATA4,TIME
Sets controls for transient analyses based on transient time and convergence
monitors or sets time integration method.
FLDATA4A,STEP
Sets output controls for transient analyses based on number of time steps.
FLDATA5,OUTP
Sets output and storage controls.
FLDATA6,CONV
Controls the output of the convergence monitor.
Property Definition Commands
FLDATA7,PROT
3462
Specifies the type of fluid property.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA
FLDATA8,NOMI
Specifies the NOMI coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA9,COF1
Specifies the COF1 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA10,COF2
Specifies the COF2 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA11,COF3
Specifies the COF3 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA12,PROP
Sets the property update frequency flag.
FLDATA13,VARY
Sets the property variation flag.
Operating Condition Commands
FLDATA14,TEMP
Specifies the reference temperature.
FLDATA15,PRES
Specifies the reference pressure.
FLDATA16,BULK
Specifies the bulk modulus parameter.
FLDATA17, GAMM
Specifies the specific heat ratio.
Algebraic Solver Commands
FLDATA18, METH
Selects the algebraic solver.
FLDATA19, TDMA
Specifies the number of TDMA sweeps.
FLDATA20,SRCH
Specifies the number of conjugate direction search vectors.
FLDATA20A,PGMR
Specifies the amount of fill-in when preconditioning the coefficient matrix.
FLDATA20B,PBCGM
Specifies the number of fill-ins for the ILU preconditioner.
FLDATA21,CONV
Specifies the solver convergence criterion.
FLDATA22,MAXI
Maximum number of semi-direct iterations.
FLDATA23,DELT
Specifies the solver minimum normalized rate of change.
Turbulence Commands
FLDATA24,TURB
Sets the turbulence model and the constants used in the Standard k- Model
and the Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
FLDATA24A,RNGT
Sets constants for the Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG).
FLDATA24B,NKET
Sets constants for the k- Turbulence Model due to Shih (NKE).
FLDATA24C, GIRT
Sets constants for the Nonlinear Turbulence Model of Girimaji (GIR).
FLDATA24D, SZLT
Sets constants for the Shih, Zhu, Lumley Turbulence Model (SZL).
FLDATA24E, SKWT
Sets constants for the k- turbulence model.
FLDATA24F, SST1
Sets the turbulent production clip factor for the Shear Stress Transport (SST)
turbulence model.
FLDATA24G, SST1
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence
model.
FLDATA24H, SST2
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence
model.
Stability Control Commands
FLDATA25, RELX
Sets solution and property relaxation factors.
FLDATA26,STAB
Sets stability controls.
Miscellaneous Commands
FLDATA27,PRIN
Controls printing flags.
FLDATA28,MODR
Specifies that variable results are to be replaced.
FLDATA29,MODV
Re-initializes a results variable.
FLDATA30,QUAD
Controls the quadrature orders.
FLDATA31,CAPP
Specifies dependent variable caps.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3463
FLDATA1
FLDATA32,REST
Controls restart options.
FLDATA33,ADVM
Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term.
FLDATA34,MIR
Sets modified inertial relaxation factors.
FLDATA35,VFTOL
Specifies tolerances for the lower and upper bound of the volume fraction.
FLDATA36,AMBV
Specifies ambient reference values outside of the fluid for the volume of fluid
(VOF) method.
FLDATA37,ALGR
Specifies segregated solution or film coefficient algorithms.
FLDATA38,MASS
Specifies the mass type for a fluid transient analysis.
FLDATA39,REMESH
Specifies remeshing parameters for transient fluid flow and fluid-solid interaction analyses.
FLDATA40,WADV
Controls activation of thermal stabilization near walls.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Advection
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Algorithm Ctrl
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Advection
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Algorithm Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
FLDATA1, SOLU, Label, Value
Controls which features of the solution algorithm are activated.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SOLU
Enter the word SOLU in this field.
FLDATA1,SOLU is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to SOLU. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA1,SOLU,Label,Value or FLDATA,SOLU,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Solution algorithm choices:
FLOW
Solves the momentum and pressure equations. Defaults to TRUE (on).
TURB
Activates the turbulence model. Defaults to FALSE (off).
TEMP
Solves the temperature equation. Defaults to FALSE (off).
COMP
Uses the compressible algorithm. Defaults to FALSE (off).
3464
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA1
SWRL
Activates the swirl option. Defaults to FALSE (off).
TRAN
Activates the transient solution algorithm. Defaults to FALSE (off).
SPEC
Activates multiple species transport. Defaults to FALSE (off).
IVSH
Activates viscous heating for incompressible flow. Defaults to FALSE (off).
VOF
Activates volume of fluid method. Defaults to FALSE (off).
SFTS
Activates surface tension. Defaults to FALSE (off).
ALE
Activates Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian formulation. Defaults to FALSE (off).
RDSF
Activates the surface-to-surface radiation solution. Defaults to TRUE (on).
Value
Value controlling Label:
TRUE or T
Turn this feature on.
FALSE or F
Turn this feature off.
Notes
Repeat command to set each Label as required.
The analyst must choose the appropriate features, as FLOTRAN will not determine, for example, whether or not
the case is turbulent or whether or not the compressible algorithm is appropriate.
SWRL should only be activated for axisymmetric cases when there is a velocity component normal to the
axisymmetric plane.
Generally, the use of the compressible algorithm (COMP) is not warranted for Mach numbers less than 0.3.
Density may be assumed to vary via the ideal gas law without activating the compressible option.
If fluid properties are not a function of temperature in non-adiabatic flow problems, it is not necessary to activate
the flow (FLOW) and temperature (TEMP) solutions together. First solve the flow problem and then restart to
solve the temperature equation.
For compressible flow, FLOTRAN automatically includes viscous heating.
When the Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) formulation is on , FLOTRAN allows the fluid nodes to move in a
manner that satisfies the displacement boundary conditions.
See also the FLDATA2,ITER, FLDATA3,TERM, FLDATA4,TIME, FLDATA4A,STEP, FLDATA5,OUTP, and
FLDATA6,CONV commands for other Solution and Output Controls.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3465
FLDATA2
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Solution Options
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Solution Options
FLDATA2, ITER, Label, Value
Sets iteration and output controls for steady state analyses.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
ITER
Enter the word ITER in this field.
FLDATA2,ITER is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to ITER. It can be entered into the program
as either FLDATA2,ITER,Label,Value or FLDATA,ITER,Label,Value where Label and Value are as described
below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Type of iteration control (dictates the meaning of Value):
EXEC
Value is the number of global iterations, defined as the sequential solution of the governing equations
of all the features activated, to be performed during this execution of FLOTRAN if the case is steady state.
Defaults to Value = 10.
APPE
Value is the number of steady state global iterations between appends to the results file (Jobname.RFL).
This feature is used to ensure that restarts can be made from earlier points if unforeseen difficulties occur
before the end of the analysis. The default value implies that results will be saved only for the initial (0th)
iteration and the final global iteration. Saving many intermediate results can produce a large results file.
Defaults to Value = 0 (implies FLDATA2,ITER,EXEC).
If you are creating domain files (jobname.pv_0000n) for use by ICEM CFD's PV3 postprocessing visualization tool, this sets the frequency with which domain files are written. See FLDATA5 for more details.
OVER
Value is the number of steady state global iterations between overwrites of a temporary set of results
in the results file (Jobname.RFL). (This temporary set of results will itself be overwritten by the set stored
for Label = APPE or at the end of the run.) OVER enables the user to retain the most up-to-date set of
results without having the results file continue to grow in size. Defaults to Value = 0 (no overwrites will
be made).
Value
Number of iterations for Label above.
Notes
Repeat command to set each Label as required.
3466
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA3
Sets the number of global iterations to control the length of execution for steady state analyses, the frequency
with which results are added to the results file (Jobname.RFL), and the frequency with which results are overwritten in the results file. Also sets the frequency with which the domain files, used by the ICEM PV3 postprocessing
visualization tool, are written. For more information about domain files, see the FLDATA5,OUTP,DOMA command.
See also the FLDATA1,SOLU, FLDATA3,TERM, FLDATA4,TIME, FLDATA4A,STEP, FLDATA5,OUTP, and
FLDATA6,CONV commands for other Solution and Output Controls.
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA1,SOLU,TRAN,FALSE has been issued (default).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
FLDATA3, TERM, Label, Value
Sets the convergence monitors for the degree of freedom set.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
TERM
Enter the word TERM in this field.
FLDATA3,TERM is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to TERM. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA3,TERM,Label,Value or FLDATA,TERM,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Type of convergence monitor:
PRES
Steady-state run will not terminate until the convergence monitor for pressure falls below Value, unless
the specified number of global iterations has been executed. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x 10-8.
TEMP
Steady-state run (with the temperature equation solution activated) will not terminate until the convergence monitor for temperature falls below Value, unless the specified number of global iterations has
been executed. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x 10-8.
VX
Steady-state run will not terminate until the convergence monitor for X velocity component falls below
Value, unless the specified number of global iterations has been executed. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x
10-2.
VY
Steady-state run will not terminate until the convergence monitor for Y velocity component falls below
Value, unless the specified number of global iterations has been executed. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x
10-2.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3467
FLDATA4
VZ
Steady-state run will not terminate until the convergence monitor for Z velocity component falls below
Value, unless the specified number of global iterations has been executed. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x
10-2.
ENKE
Steady-state run will not terminate until the convergence monitor for turbulent kinetic energy falls below
Value, unless the specified number of global iterations has been executed. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x
10-2.
ENDS
Steady-state run will not terminate until the convergence monitor for turbulence dissipation falls below
Value, unless the specified number of global iterations has been executed. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x
10-2.
Value
Value of convergence monitor criterion, above.
Notes
Repeat command to set each Label as required.
The convergence monitors appear as output for each degree of freedom for each global iteration. The value is
calculated for each degree of freedom individually by summing the absolute value of the change in solution
between global iterations for all the nodes and dividing it by the sum of the absolute values of the solution for
all the nodes. It is an approximation of the normalized rate of change of the solution between global iterations.
All specified criteria must be met before the case is terminated.
If a termination criterion for a specific label is set negative, the termination check is ignored for that particular
DOF.
See also the FLDATA1,SOLU, FLDATA2,ITER,FLDATA4,TIME, FLDATA4A,STEP, FLDATA5,OUTP, and
FLDATA6,CONV commands for other Solution and Output Controls.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
FLDATA4, TIME, Label, Value
Sets controls for transient analyses based on transient time and convergence monitors or sets time integration method.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
TIME
Enter the word TIME in this field.
3468
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA4
FLDATA4,TIME is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to TIME. It can be entered into the program
as either FLDATA4,TIME,Label,Value or FLDATA,TIME,Label,Value where Label and Value are as described
below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Type of transient analysis control or time integration method (dictates the meaning of Value):
STEP
Value controls the time step size. If Value is greater than zero, Value is the time step size. If Value is
less than zero, the program chooses the time step, according to the following (Value defaults to -1):
1
The resulting time step will be small enough to prevent the passage of an arbitrarily small fluid parcel
through more than one element length in a single time step.
2
This choice is only applicable for compressible analyses, and is equivalent to the Courant limit. The
time step is small enough to prevent a pressure signal from propagating through more than one
element during a single time step.
3
This choice is only applicable for compressible analyses. The smaller of the two time steps computed
for options -1 and -2 is used.
4
This choice is applicable to "conduction only" cases (FLDATA1,SOLU,FLOW,F). The resulting time
step prevents an arbitrarily small "parcel of heat" from diffusing or conducting through more than
one element within a time step.
ISTEP
Value is the time step size for the first time step in an analysis using a FLOTRAN-calculated time step
size (STEP = -1 through -4).
BC
Value is a flag indicating whether a transient boundary condition should be applied as a step change
(when Value = 0) or as a linear ramp (Value = 1). This label is analogous to the ANSYS command KBC,
except that the default for FLOTRAN is a step change. Tabular boundary conditions do not support
ramping and instead apply their full value regardless of the KBC setting.
NUMB
Value is the number of time steps which will be executed unless the transient end time has been encountered first.
GLOB
Value is the number of global iterations per time step. The user may elect to set this to a high value
(typically between 30 and 50), and expect the time step to converge to the convergence criterion set by
the FLDATA3,TERM command before completing Value iterations. Default to Value = 10.
TEND
Value is the transient end time. This time is used for the calculation of ramped transient boundary conditions. The case will execute until this end time if the number of time steps specified is large enough.
Defaults to Value = 1.0 x 10+6.
APPE
Value is the results output frequency based on transient time. Every Value seconds in the transient,
results are written to the Jobname.RFL file. If you are creating domain files (jobname.pv_0000n) for
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3469
FLDATA4
use by ICEM CFD's PV3 postprocessing visualization tool, this sets the frequency with which domain files
are written. See FLDATA5 for more details. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x 10+6.
SUMF
Value is the output summary frequency based on transient time. Every Value seconds in the transient,
a results summary is written to the Jobname.PFL file.
Note A summary will always be written when a set of results is written to the Jobname.RFL
file. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x 10+6.
OVER
Value is the time interval between overwrites of the temporary set of results in the results file (Job-
name.RFL). This feature enables the user to retain the most up-to-date set of results without having the
results file continue to grow in size. Defaults to Value = 0 (no overwrites will be made).
PRES
If the maximum number of global iterations per time step has not been reached, the time step will terminate if the convergence monitor for pressure falls below Value. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x 10-6.
TEMP
If the maximum number of global iterations per time step has not been reached, the time step will terminate if the convergence monitor for temperature falls below Value. Defaults to Value = 1.0 x 10-6.
VX
If the maximum number of global iterations per time step has not been reached, the time step will terminate if the convergence monitor for X velocity component falls below Value. Defaults to Value = 1.0
x 10-2.
VY
If the maximum number of global iterations per time step has not been reached, the time step will terminate if the convergence monitor for Y velocity component falls below Value. Defaults to Value = 1.0
x 10-2.
VZ
If the maximum number of global iterations per time step has not been reached, the time step will terminate if the convergence monitor for Z velocity component falls below Value. Defaults to Value = 1.0
x 10-2.
ENKE
If the maximum number of global iterations per time step has not been reached, the time step will terminate if the convergence monitor for turbulent kinetic energy falls below Value. Defaults to Value =
1.0 x 10-2.
ENDS
If the maximum number of global iterations per time step has not been reached, the time step will terminate if the convergence monitor for turbulence dissipation falls below Value. Defaults to Value = 1.0
x 10-2.
NTVF
Value controls the time stepping strategy for Volume of Fluid (VOF) Advection. The value gives the
number of time steps used in the VOF Advection for each time step in the FLOTRAN solution. Defaults
to 1.
METH
Value specifies the time integration method. Allowable choices for Value are:
3470
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA4
BACK
Backward method (default).
NEWM
Newmark time integration method.
DELT
Newmark parameter to control integration accuracy and stability. It must be 0.5. Defaults to 0.5 (2nd
order accuracy). If it is larger than 0.5, numerical damping is introduced and the calculation is more stable.
The recommended maximum value is 0.6.
Value
Value as described for Label above.
Notes
Repeat command to set each Label as required.
All specified criteria must be met before the time step is terminated.
If a termination criterion for a specific label is set negative, the termination check is ignored for that particular
DOF.
See the FLDATA4A,STEP command to specify output controls based on the number of time steps.
See also the FLDATA1,SOLU, FLDATA2,ITER, FLDATA3,TERM, FLDATA5,OUTP, and FLDATA6,CONV commands
for other Solution and Output Controls.
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA1,SOLU,TRAN,TRUE has been issued.
For ramped loading (FLDATA4,TIME,BC,1), when a load is applied for the first time, it is interpolated from zero
to the value of the current load step, and not from the initial condition or value of the DOF from the previous
load step.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Transient Ctrl>Time Integration Meth
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>VOF Environment>Time Stepping
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Transient Ctrl>Time Integration Meth
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>VOF Environment>Time Stepping
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3471
FLDATA4A
FLDATA4A, STEP, Label, Value
Sets controls for transient analyses based on the number of time steps.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
STEP
Enter the word STEP in this field.
FLDATA4A,STEP is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to STEP. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA4A,STEP,Label,Value or FLDATA,STEP,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Type of transient analysis control (dictates the meaning of Value):
APPE
Value is the results output frequency based on the number of time steps. Every Value time steps (substeps), results are written to the Jobname.RFL file. If you are creating domain files (jobname.pv_0000n)
for use by ICEM CFD's PV3 postprocessing visualization tool, this sets the frequency with which domain
files are written. See FLDATA5 for more details. Defaults to Value = 10.
SUMF
Value is the output summary frequency based on the number of time steps. Every Value time steps
(substeps), a results summary is written to the Jobname.PFL file.
Note A results summary will be produced automatically when the results of a time step are
written to the Jobname.RFL file. Defaults to Value = 10.
OVER
Value is the number of time steps between overwrites of the temporary set of results in the results file
(Jobname.RFL). This feature enables the user to retain the most up-to-date set of results without having
the results file continue to grow in size. Defaults to Value = 0 (no overwrites will be made).
Notes
Repeat command to set each Label as required.
See the FLDATA4,TIME command to specify output controls based on transient time.
See also the FLDATA1,SOLU, FLDATA2,ITER, FLDATA3,TERM, FLDATA5,OUTP, and FLDATA6,CONV commands
for other solution and output controls.
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA1,SOLU,TRAN,TRUE has been issued.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
3472
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA5
FLDATA5, OUTP, Label, Value
Sets output and storage controls.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
OUTP
Enter the word OUTP in this field.
FLDATA5,OUTP is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to OUTP. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA5,OUTP,Label,Value or FLDATA,OUTP,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Output and storage controls (dictates the meaning of Value):
SUMF
Value is the number of global iterations between output of results summaries. The results summary,
output to the file Jobname.PFL, contains a tabulation of the maximum, minimum and average values
of each degree of freedom. It also contains the flow rates, pressures, and temperatures at all the inlets
and outlets. Defaults to Value = 10.
DEBG
Value sets the debug file printout level. The debug file Jobname.DBG contains information on the behavior of the semi-direct solvers used in the solution of the equations. Allowable choices for Value are
(defaults to 1):
0
No information.
1
Initial and final information for each global iteration.
2
Complete information for each global iteration.
3
Produces printout of global coefficient matrices (not recommended, since the files will become very
large).
4
Produces printout of matrices and additional values at every global iteration (not recommended,
because files are usually very large).
RESI
Value is a flag controlling whether or not the nodal residual file Jobname.RDF is written. The nodal residual file contains the nodal residuals corresponding to the current solution (n-1st global iteration), and
the new coefficient matrices and forcing function (nth global iteration). It indicates whether or not the
solution is oscillating between global iterations on a nodal basis. The file produced is a text file (Jobname.RDF) that is read with the FLREAD command and that contains the residuals for the degrees of
freedom (VX, VY, VZ, PRES, ENKE, ENDS and TEMP) for each node. Allowable values for Value are T (writes
the file) or F (does not write the file). Defaults to Value = F.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3473
FLDATA5
DENS
Value controls the storage of the laminar density. This and the following labels are provided to control
the size of the Jobname.RFL file (see notes below). The choices are Value = T (stores this component)
or Value = F (does not store this component). Defaults to Value = T.
VISC
Value controls the storage of the laminar viscosity. Defaults to Value = T.
COND
Value controls the storage of the laminar conductivity. Defaults to Value = T.
EVIS
Value controls the storage of the effective viscosity. Defaults to Value = T.
ECON
Value controls the storage of the effective conductivity. Defaults to Value = T.
TTOT
Value controls the storage of the total temperature. Defaults to Value = T.
HFLU
Value controls the storage of the heat flux. Defaults to Value = T.
HFLM
Value controls the storage of the heat transfer (film) coefficient. Defaults to Value = T.
SPHT
Value controls the storage of the specific heat. Defaults to Value = F.
STRM
Value controls the storage of the stream function (2-D). Defaults to Value = T.
MACH
Value controls the storage of the Mach number. Defaults to Value = T.
PTOT
Value controls the storage of the total (stagnation) pressure. Defaults to Value = T.
PCOE
Value controls the storage of the pressure coefficient. Defaults to Value = T.
YPLU
Value controls the storage of the Y+ turbulence quantity. Defaults to Value = F.
TAUW
Value controls the storage of the shear stress at the wall. Defaults to Value = F.
SFTS
Value controls the storage of the surface tension coefficient. Defaults to Value = F.
RDFL
Value controls the storage of the radiation heat flux. Defaults to Value = F.
LMDn
Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
EMDn
Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
DOMA
Value controls whether domain files are written. For transient analysis, if Value= T, domain files are
written at the time frequency specified by the FLDATA4 command or the step frequency set by the
3474
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA5
FLDATA4A command. For steady state analysis, the files are written as specified by the FLDATA2 command. Files are named jobname.pv_00001, jobname.pv_00002, etc., corresponding to the first time
increment, second time increment, and so forth. Result set numbers (First, Last, Next, Max, etc.) are preserved to ensure that any domain files created during a previous analysis are either deleted or preserved
appropriately.
Setting Value= F turns domain file writing off (the default state).
DRAD
VALUE controls debug level of convergence monitor for surface-to-surface radiation method. Allowable
choices for value are (defaults to 0):
0
No information (default).
1
Final convergence information.
2
Complete information for each global iteration.
Value
Value as described above.
Notes
Repeat command to set each Label as required.
SUMF, DEBG, and RESI control output to files other than the nodal results file (Jobname.RFL). DOMA controls
output to domain files (Jobname.pv0000n), which are for use with the ICEM CFD PV3 postprocessing visualization
tool.
The remaining Label labels are provided in the event the user needs to control the size of the Jobname.RFL
file. This may be the case when the results of many load steps or time steps are being stored for large models.
The choices are T (stores this component) or F (does not store this component). Since the controls should only
be set to F if the file size is a problem, most default values are T, and values of listed parameters are stored for
every node.
FLOTRAN only allows non-storage of variables which it can calculate from some other means. If the value is not
stored, it is replaced by calculations identical to those of the normal solution algorithm. The difference is that
the new properties calculated in the absence of storage have not been relaxed as those in storage would have
been. See FLDATA25,RELX for a description of relaxation.
Laminar properties such as density, viscosity, and thermal conductivity are either constant or a function of temperature. In the former case, the constant value can be obtained from the input. In the case of temperature dependent properties, the correct values are obtained from the temperature field (always stored if the temperature
equation solution was activated [FLDATA1,SOLU,TEMP,TRUE]). The newly calculated value is stored as calculated
at the initialization of the load step, whereas the value obtained from storage would have undergone relaxation.
If the effective viscosity and effective thermal conductivity are not stored, upon restart they will be calculated
from the existing field of turbulent kinetic energy, turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate, and the density.
Again, this is similar to the usual calculation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3475
FLDATA6
See also the FLDATA1,SOLU, FLDATA2,ITER, FLDATA3,TERM, FLDATA4,TIME, FLDATA4A,STEP, and
FLDATA6,CONV commands for other Solution and Output Controls.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>Print Controls
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>Residual File
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>RFL Out Derived
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>RFL Prop Based
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>Print Controls
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>Residual File
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>RFL Out Derived
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>RFL Prop Based
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Execution Ctrl
FLDATA6, CONV, Label, Value
Controls the output of the convergence monitor.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
CONV
Enter the word CONV in this field.
FLDATA6,CONV is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to CONV. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA6,CONV,Label,Value or FLDATA,CONV,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Format and frequency controls (dictates the meaning of Value):
OUTP
Value controls which display format is used. Value can be LAND, BLOC, or BNOW, as described below
(defaults to BNOW).
ITER
If OUTP Value is LAND or BLOC, Value is the number of iterations for which the convergence monitor
information is stored in memory before being printed. Defaults to Value = 1.
Value
Value as described for Label above:
LAND
All DOF are output in landscape mode (valid only if Label = OUTP).
BLOC
All DOF are output in block mode (valid only if Label = OUTP).
3476
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA6
BNOW
All DOF are presented in block format immediately as iterations are completed (valid only if Label =
OUTP).
n
Number of iterations (valid only if Label = ITER).
Notes
The convergence monitor output will appear on the screen during an interactive FLOTRAN analysis as well as in
the printed output. OUTP controls what display format is used, and ITER controls how many iterations are stored
and displayed.
See also the FLDATA1,SOLU, FLDATA2,ITER, FLDATA3,TERM, FLDATA4,TIME, FLDATA4A,STEP, and
FLDATA5,OUTP commands for other Solution and Output Controls.
The choices for OUTP are LANDscape mode, BLOCk mode, or the "block now" mode, BNOW. If OUTP is set to
BNOW, convergence monitor information is not stored in the memory, but is presented immediately as it is calculated. If OUTP is set to either LAND or BLOC, information is first stored for n (ITER) iterations before being
printed.
In the following illustrations, "x" denotes convergence monitor numbers greater than zero:
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Landscape Mode
Iter<
VX
VY
VZ
PRES
ENKE
ENDS
TEMP
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
5
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
VX
VY
VZ
PRES
ENKE
ENDS
TEMP
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
Block Mode
Iter
^
1
2
3
4
5
6
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>Print Controls
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Additional Out>Print Controls
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3477
FLDATA7
FLDATA7, PROT, Label, Value
Specifies the type of fluid property.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Property
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
PROT
Enter the word PROT in this field.
FLDATA7,PROT is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to PROT. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA7,PROT,Label,Value or FLDATA,PROT,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Fluid property being typed:
DENS
Density (Value defaults to CONSTANT).
VISC
Viscosity (Value defaults to CONSTANT).
COND
Thermal conductivity (Value defaults to CONSTANT).
SPHT
Specific heat (Value defaults to CONSTANT).
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient (Value defaults to CONSTANT).
WSCA
Wall static contact angle. (Value defaults to CONSTANT).
Value
Fluid property type.
You can enter one of the values shown below, or if your fluid properties can be expressed as a table, you can
enter a table name. To enter a table name, you must first define a TABLE type array parameter using the
*DIM command. Note that you must enclose the table name in % symbols in the FLDATA7 command line
(e.g., FLDATA7,PROT,DENS,%tabname%). For more information on defining tables, see TABLE Type Array
Parameters in the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide.
CONSTANT
Constant properties. The FLDATA8,NOMI command must be used to specify nominal properties.
GAS
Gas properties. The FLDATA8,NOMI command must be used to specify nominal properties.
FLDATA9,COF1, FLDATA10,COF2, and possibly FLDATA11,COF3, must also be used.
LIQUID
Liquid properties. The FLDATA8,NOMI command must be used to specify nominal properties.
FLDATA9,COF1, FLDATA10,COF2, and possibly FLDATA11,COF3 must be used.
3478
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA7
TABLE
Indicates that a table of property values and corresponding temperature values are input using the
MPDATA and MPTEMP commands. You cannot use this option with the %table% method described
above.
POWL
This choice for viscosity type activates the Power Law viscosity model, which is non-Newtonian. (For a
description of the model see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. The ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide explains
how to use the model.) The Power Law model requires you to specify four coefficients via the
FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC command, the FLDATA9,COF1,VISC command, the FLDATA10,COF2,VISC command,
and the FLDATA11,COF3,VISC command.
CARR
This choice for viscosity type activates the Carreau viscosity model, which in non-Newtonian. (For a description of this model, see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. The ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide explains how
to use the non-Newtonian viscosity models.) The Carreau model requires you to specify four coefficients
via the FLDATA8, NOMI,VISC command, the FLDATA9,COF1,VISC command, the FLDATA10,COF2,VISC
command and the FLDATA11,COF3,VISC command.
BING
This choice for viscosity type activates the Bingham viscosity model, which is non-Newtonian. (For a
description of this model, see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. The ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide explains
how to use the non-Newtonian viscosity models.) The Bingham model requires you to specify three
coefficients, using the FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC command, the FLDATA9,COF1,VISC command, and the
FLDATA10,COF2,VISC command.
USRV
This choice for viscosity activates the user-programmable subroutine, USERVISLAW. In this routine, you
can define your own constitutive relationship between viscosity and other variables such as position,
time, temperature, pressure, velocity, velocity gradients, etc. For details, see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference, the ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide, and the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features
The USERVISLAW subroutine uses the four coefficients you specify via the FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC command,
the FLDATA9,COF1,VISC command, the FLDATA10,COF2,VISC command, and the FLDATA11,COF3,VISC
command.
AIR
Air properties in units of meter-kg-sec.
AIR_B
Air properties in units of meter-kg-sec, and the pressure is set to the reference pressure for the evaluation
of density.
AIRSI
Air properties in units of meter-kg-sec.
AIRSI_B
Air properties in units of meter-kg-sec, and the pressure is set to the reference pressure for the evaluation
of density.
AIRCM
Air properties in units of cm-g-sec.
AIRCM_B
Air properties in units of cm-g-sec, and the pressure is set to the reference pressure for the evaluation
of density.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3479
FLDATA7
AIRMM
Air properties in units of mm-g-sec.
AIRMM_B
Air properties in units of mm-g-sec, and the pressure is set to the reference pressure for the evaluation
of density.
AIRFT
Air properties in units of fl-slug-sec.
AIRFT_B
Air properties in units of fl-slug-sec, and the pressure is set to the reference pressure for the evaluation
of density.
AIRIN
Air properties in units of in-(lbf-s**2/in)-sec (results in units of psi for pressure).
AIRIN_B
Air properties in units of in-(lbf-s**2/in)-sec (results in units of psi for pressure), and the pressure is set
to the reference pressure for the evaluation of density.
CMIX
The property is the mass fraction average of the individual species property. You can use this option only
if the species are defined.
USER
Use one of the following user-programmable subroutines to define the property: UserDens to define
density, UserVisLaw to define viscosity, UserSpht to define specific heat, UserCond to define conductivity,
or UserSfts to define surface tension.
CGAS
Available only for density. The density is calculated using the ideal gas law, with the molecular weight
calculated from the mass fraction average of the individual species molecular weights. You can only use
this option if species are defined.
Notes
This command is used to specify the fluid property type (constant, gas, liquid, air) for the density, viscosity, and
(if required) thermal conductivity and specific heat properties. Repeat the FLDATA7 command for each property
as required.
The choice of fluid property type implies the use of one of the following equations. In all cases the program assumes that consistent units are being used. The value of unity for the gravitational constant gc implies a consistent
set of units.
If the property type is CONSTANT, then the equations used are as follows:
DENS = NOMI
VISC = NOMI
COND = NOMI
SPHT = NOMI
If the property type is LIQUID, then Sutherland's liquid law is used for the viscosity and conductivity and a second
order polynomial as a function of temperature is used for density:
DENS = NOMI + COF2*(T-COF1) + COF3*(T-COF1)2
3480
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA7
VISC = NOMI*EXP[(COF2*(1/T-1/COF1) + COF3*(1/T-1/COF1)2]
COND = NOMI*EXP[(COF2*(1/T-1/COF1) + COF3*(1/T-1/COF1)2]
If the type is GAS, Sutherland's law for gases is used for conductivity and viscosity and the ideal gas law is used
for the density:
DENS = NOMI * (P/COF2) / (T/COF1)
VISC = NOMI * (T/COF1)1.5 * (COF1 + COF2)/(T + COF2)
COND = NOMI * (T/COF1)1.5 * (COF1 + COF2)/(T + COF2)
For Label = SFTS, CONSTANT, LIQUID, and USER are the only valid property types. If the property type is CONSTANT, the equation is:
SFTS = NOMI
If the property type is LIQUID, the equation is:
SFTS = NOMI + COF2*(T-COF1) + COF3*(T-COF1)2
For Label = WSCA, CONSTANT is the only valid property type and the equation is:
WSCA = NOMI
In each case, the value of NOMI is input with the FLDATA8,NOMI command, COF1 with FLDATA9,COF1, COF2
with FLDATA10,COF2, and COF3 with FLDATA11,COF3. No defaults are assumed.
For types other than GAS, LIQUID, CONSTANT, AIR or AIR_B, the values of constants in the evaluation of properties
will be obtained from the file FLOPRP.ANS, where the data for AIR resides. See the ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide
for information on how to put data into the FLOPRP.ANS file.
See also the FLDATA8,NOMI, FLDATA9,COF1, FLDATA10,COF2, FLDATA11,COF3, FLDATA12,PROP, and
FLDATA13,VARY commands for other Fluid Property Definition commands.
This command is accessed in the menu as FLDATA12,PROP.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Table Props
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Table Props
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3481
FLDATA8
FLDATA8, NOMI, Label, Value
Specifies the NOMI coefficient of the fluid property equation.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Property
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
NOMI
Enter the word NOMI in this field.
FLDATA8,NOMI is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to NOMI. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA8,NOMI,Label,Value or FLDATA,NOMI,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Fluid property NOMI is being defined for:
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Thermal conductivity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
WSCA
Wall static contact angle (Value defaults to 90).
Value
Enter the value for NOMI.
Notes
Specifies the value NOMI as described on the FLDATA7,PROT command. NOMI is the constant fluid property
value, or is the value of the property at the specified temperature COF1 (or simply the value of a coefficient).
NOMI is only valid for property types GAS, LIQUID, and CONSTANT [FLDATA7,PROT]. If the property is a gas or
liquid, FLDATA9,COF1, FLDATA10,COF2, and possibly FLDATA11,COF3, must also be used.
If the label is VISC, the FLDATA7,PROT command you enter determines what NOMI is. For example, if you issue
the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,POWL command, NOMI is the nominal viscosity for the Power Law model. If you issue
the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,BING command, the NOMI is the plastic viscosity for the Bingham model. If you issue
the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,CARR command, the NOMI is the zero shear rate viscosity for the Carreau model. If you
issue the FLDATA7,PROT,USRV command, the NOMI is a coefficient available in USERVISLAW, the user-programmable subroutine for viscosity models.
See also the FLDATA12,PROP and FLDATA13,VARY commands for other Fluid Property Definition commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3482
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA9
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
FLDATA9, COF1, Label, Value
Specifies the COF1 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Property
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
COF1
Enter the word COF1 in this field.
FLDATA9,COF1 is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to COF1. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA9,COF1,Label,Value or FLDATA,COF1,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Fluid property being described:
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Thermal conductivity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
Value
Absolute temperature at which the Label property has the value NOMI (defaults to 0.0) or simply a coefficient.
Notes
Specifies the value of absolute temperature associated with the property value set be FLDATA8,NOMI, as described
on the FLDATA7,PROT command, or simply a coefficient. Setting the value of COF1 to zero results in a constant
property for liquids or gas. If the property is a gas or liquid, FLDATA8,NOMI, FLDATA10,COF2, and possibly
FLDATA11,COF3, must also be used.
If the label is VISC and you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,POWL command, the COF1 value is the cutoff shear
rate for the Power Law Model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,BING command, COF1 is the plastic stress
value for the Bingham model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,CARR command, the COF1 value is the infinite
shear rate viscosity for the Carreau model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,USRV command, COF1 is a
coefficient available in the USERVISLAW subroutine.
If the label is SPHT, the COF1 value is available in the user-programmable subroutine UserSpht.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3483
FLDATA10
See also the FLDATA12,PROP, and FLDATA13,VARY commands for other Fluid Property Definition commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
FLDATA10, COF2, Label, Value
Specifies the COF2 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Property
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
COF2
Enter the word COF2 in this field.
FLDATA10,COF2 is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to COF2. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA10,COF2,Label,Value or FLDATA,COF2,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Fluid property being described:
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Thermal conductivity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
Value
Coefficient COF2 (defaults to 0.0).
Notes
Specifies the value COF2 as described on the FLDATA7,PROT command.
If the label is VISC and you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,POWL command, the COF2 value is the consistency
coefficient for the Power Law Model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,BING command, COF2 is the Newtonian
viscosity for the Bingham model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,CARR command, the COF2 value is the
time constant for the Carreau model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,USRV command, COF2 is a coefficient
available in the USERVISLAW subroutine.
3484
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA11
For viscosity, liquid, gas, or thermal conductivity, COF2 is a Sutherland's law constant. For liquid density, it is a
polynomial coefficient. For gas density, it is the pressure in the nominal ideal gas law constant evaluation. If the
property is a gas or liquid, FLDATA8,NOMI, FLDATA9,COF1, and possibly FLDATA11,COF3, must also be used.
See also the FLDATA12,PROP, and FLDATA13,VARY commands for other Fluid Property Definition commands.
If the label is SPHT, the COF2 value is available in the user-programmable subroutine UserSpht.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
FLDATA11, COF3, Label, Value
Specifies the COF3 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Property
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
COF3
Enter the word COF3 in this field.
FLDATA11,COF3 is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to COF3. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA11,COF3,Label,Value or FLDATA,COF3,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Fluid property being described:
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Thermal conductivity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
Value
Coefficient COF3 (defaults to 0.0).
Notes
Specifies the value COF3 as described on the FLDATA7,PROT command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3485
FLDATA12
If the label is VISC and you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,POWL command, the COF3 value is the power for the
Power Law Model. COF3 is not used in the Bingham model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,CARR command,
the COF3 value is the power for the Carreau model. If you issue the FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,USRV command, COF3
is a coefficient available in the USERVISLAW subroutine.
For the viscosity or thermal conductivity of a liquid, COF3 is a Sutherland's law constant. For the density of a liquid,
it is a polynomial coefficient. It is not used for gases. FLDATA8,NOMI, FLDATA9,COF1, and FLDATA10,COF2,
must also be used.
If the label is SPHT, the COF3 value is available in the user-programmable subroutine UserSpht.
See also the FLDATA12,PROP, and FLDATA13,VARY commands for other Fluid Property Definition commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
FLDATA12, PROP, Label, Value
Sets the property update frequency flag.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Property
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
PROP
Enter the word PROP in this field.
FLDATA12,PROP is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to PROP. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA12,PROP,Label,Value or FLDATA,PROP,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Updating label (dictates the meaning of Value):
IVIS
Value is the initial guess for viscosity. If you do not specify any value, the nominal viscosity issued via the
FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC command is the initial viscosity. For information on using this label, see the ANSYS
Fluids Analysis Guide.
UFRQ
Value is the number of global iterations (frequency of updating) between the update of the properties.
Value
Number of iterations as described above (defaults to 1).
Notes
Properties will not be updated if the all the property types are set to CONSTANT with the FLDATA7 command.
3486
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA13
See also the FLDATA7,PROT, FLDATA8,NOMI, FLDATA9,COF1, FLDATA10,COF2, FLDATA11,COF3, and
FLDATA13,VARY commands for other Fluid Property Definition commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
FLDATA13, VARY, Label, Value
Sets the property variation flag.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Property
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
VARY
Enter the word VARY in this field.
FLDATA13,VARY is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to VARY. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA13,VARY,Label,Value or FLDATA,VARY,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Fluid property being described:
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Thermal conductivity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
Value
Flag value for property variation:
T
To turn property variation on.
F
To turn property variation off (default).
Notes
For nonconstant fluid properties [FLDATA7,PROT], the appropriate flags must be set to T to allow property
variation between global iterations.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3487
FLDATA14
See also the FLDATA7,PROT, FLDATA8,NOMI, FLDATA9,COF1, FLDATA10,COF2, FLDATA11,COF3, and
FLDATA12,PROP commands for other Fluid Property Definition commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Fluid Properties
FLDATA14, TEMP, Label, Value
Specifies the reference temperature.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Operating
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
TEMP
Enter the word TEMP in this field.
FLDATA14,TEMP is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to TEMP. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA14,TEMP,Label,Value or FLDATA,TEMP,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Type of temperature specification (dictates the meaning of Value):
NOMI
Value is the initial temperature if a boundary condition or transient initial condition has not been set.
Value defaults to 293.0.
BULK
Value is the temperature used to evaluate heat transfer coefficients given a heat flux or temperature at
a boundary. Value defaults to 293.0.
TTOT
Value is the total (stagnation) temperature used in compressible adiabatic flow. The static temperature
is calculated from the kinetic energy evaluated in terms of the velocity magnitude, specific heat, and
gravitational constant:
Tstatic = Ttotal
V2
2gc Cp
Value
Temperature as described above.
Notes
See also the FLDATA15,PRES, FLDATA16,BULK, and FLDATA17,GAMM commands for other Operating Condition
commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3488
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA16
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
FLDATA15, PRES, Label, Value
Specifies the reference pressure.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Operating
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
PRES
Enter the word PRES in this field.
FLDATA15,PRES is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to PRES. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA15,PRES,Label,Value or FLDATA,PRES,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Reference label (dictates the meaning of Value):
REFE
Value is the reference pressure. The absolute pressure results from adding the pressure components
from rotating terms, the static pressure head, the FLOTRAN pressure, and the reference pressure. Value
defaults to 1.0135 x 10+5.
Value
Reference pressure as described above.
Notes
See also the FLDATA14,TEMP, FLDATA16,BULK, and FLDATA17,GAMM commands for other Operating Condition
commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
FLDATA16, BULK, Label, Value
Specifies the bulk modulus parameter.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Operating
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
BULK
Enter the word BULK in this field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3489
FLDATA17
FLDATA16,BULK is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to BULK. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA16,BULK,Label,Value or FLDATA,BULK,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Label (dictates the meaning of Value):
BETA
Value is the bulk modulus parameter.
Value
Value of bulk modulus parameter (defaults to 1015).
Notes
The bulk modulus parameter, p, is used in the transient algorithm for incompressible flows:
p =
p
p
The default value corresponds to that of a constant density fluid.
See also the FLDATA14,TEMP, FLDATA15,PRES, and FLDATA17,GAMM commands for other Operating Condition
commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
FLDATA17, GAMM, Label, Value
Specifies the specific heat ratio.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Operating
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
GAMM
Enter the word GAMM in this field.
FLDATA17,GAMM is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to GAMM. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA17,GAMM,Label,Value or FLDATA,GAMM,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Label (dictates the meaning of Value):
COMP
Value is the ratio of specific heats.
3490
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA18
Value
Value of the ratio (defaults to 1.4).
Notes
Specifies the ratio of specific heat at constant pressure to the specific heat at constant volume, Cp/Cv. It is used
in compressible analyses.
See also the FLDATA14,TEMP, FLDATA15,PRES, and FLDATA16,BULK commands for other Operating Condition
commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>Ref Conditions
FLDATA18, METH, Label, Value
Selects the algebraic solver.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
METH
Enter the word METH in this field.
FLDATA18,METH is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to METH. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA18,METH,Label,Value or FLDATA,METH,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Degree of freedom set for which solver is being specified:
PRES
Pressure equation.
TEMP
Energy equation.
VX
U velocity.
VY
V velocity.
VZ
W velocity.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3491
FLDATA18
Value
Solver to be used for the degree of freedom set:
0
Do not solve the equation set.
1
Use the Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA) (default for all DOF sets except PRES and TEMP). Also see
the FLDATA19,TDMA command.
2
Use the Conjugate Residual method. See also the FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA21,CONV, FLDATA22,MAXI,
and FLDATA23,DELT commands.
3
Use the Preconditioned Conjugate Residual method (default for PRES DOF set). See also the
FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA21,CONV, FLDATA22,MAXI, and FLDATA23,DELT commands.
4
Use the Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) solution method (default for TEMP DOF
set). See FLOTRAN Thermal Analyses in the ANSYS CFD Flotran Analysis Guide for more information on
conjugate heat transfer.
5
Use the Sparse Direct method.
6
Use the Preconditioned BiCGStab method (PBCGM).
Notes
A solver can be specified for each degree of freedom set. Repeat the FLDATA18 command as needed.
The Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA) is a special case of the standard Gauss-Seidel iterative method for the
solution of sets of algebraic equations. It is the preferred method for providing approximate solutions for the
momentum and turbulence equations since exact solutions are not required. A convergence criterion is not
specified for the TDMA method, merely the number of iterations (sweeps) to be performed [FLDATA19,TDMA].
Three methods are semi-direct solution methods based on search directions. The Conjugate Residual method
requires the least memory, but stalls when solving ill-conditioned problems. (In an ill-conditioned problem, the
thermal properties of fluid and non-fluid materials are different by several orders of magnitude). The Preconditioned Conjugate Residual method requires much more memory but performs better for ill-conditioned matrix
problems which can arise when you are solving conjugate heat transfer problems. The Preconditioned Generalized
Minimum Residual (PGMR) method is memory-intensive; by necessity, it incorporates a tight convergence criterion.
The PGMR method is recommended for solving the energy equation for ill-conditioned conjugate transfer
problems. In general, the Preconditioned BiCGStab method (PBCGM) requires less memory than the PGMR
method. It is also recommended for extremely ill-conditioned conjugate heat transfer problems.
The Sparse Direct method is based on Gaussian elimination to factorize the matrix. This method is memory intensive and creates temporary files on the hard disk. It is robust and can be used for symmetric as well as nonsymmetric equation systems.
For incompressible flow problems that involve the solution for the pressure degree of freedom, if you set Value
equal to 2 or 3, the Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient method solver is used instead of the Conjugate Residual
or Preconditioned Conjugate Residual method solvers.
3492
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA19
The ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference contains more detail on these methods.
See also the FLDATA19,TDMA, FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA21,CONV, FLDATA22,MAXI, and FLDATA23,DELT
commands for other Algebraic Solver controls.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
FLDATA19, TDMA, Label, Value
Specifies the number of TDMA sweeps.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
TDMA
Enter the word TDMA in this field.
FLDATA19,TDMA is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to TDMA. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA19,TDMA,Label,Value or FLDATA,TDMA,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Degree of freedom set for which the TDMA solver is being used:
PRES
Pressure equation (Value defaults to 100).
TEMP
Energy equation (Value defaults to 100).
VX
U velocity (Value defaults to 1).
VY
V velocity (Value defaults to 1).
VZ
W velocity (Value defaults to 1).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3493
FLDATA20
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (Value defaults to 10).
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate (Value defaults to 10).
Value
Number of iterations (sweeps) for this degree of freedom set.
Notes
Specifies the number of iterations (sweeps) the Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm [FLDATA18,METH] will perform
during the solution. A different number of sweeps may be specified for each degree of freedom set the TDMA
solver is used for. Increasing the number for the velocity DOF may cause instability.
See also the FLDATA18,METH command for other Algebraic Solver controls.
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA18,METH,Label,1 has been issued for the PRES, TEMP, ENKE,
or ENDS labels.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
FLDATA20, SRCH, Label, Value
Specifies the number of conjugate direction search vectors.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SRCH
Enter the word SRCH in this field.
FLDATA20,SRCH is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to SRCH. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA20,SRCH,Label,Value or FLDATA,SRCH,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Degree of freedom set for which the solver is being used:
PRES
Pressure equation.
3494
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA20
TEMP
Energy equation.
VX
U velocity.
VY
V velocity.
VZ
W velocity.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate.
Value
Number of search directions (defaults to 2). If you are using the PGMR solver, the default is to use 12 search
vectors. You cannot use fewer than 12 for the PGMR solver. If you are using the PBCGM solver, the number
of search directions is 1 to 8, with 2 as the default.
Notes
The conjugate direction iterative techniques (methods 2 and 3 on the FLDATA18,METH command) develop a
solution as a linear combination of search directions. In the solution with methods 2 and 3, new search vectors
are made orthogonal toValue previous vectors in the solution of the non-symmetric matrix systems. See the
ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide for details on when to change these values.
Note The parameter is not applicable to the incompressible pressure equation since the new search
vector is automatically orthogonal to all the previous ones.
See also the FLDATA18,METH,TDMA, FLDATA21,CONV, FLDATA22,MAXI, and FLDATA23,DELT commands for
other Algebraic Solver controls.
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA18,METH,Label,(2 or 3) has been issued for the relevant labels.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3495
FLDATA20A
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
FLDATA20A, PGMR, Label, Value
Specifies the amount of fill-in when preconditioning the coefficient matrix.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
PGMR
Enter the word PGMR in this field.
FLDATA20A,PGMR is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to PGMR. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA20A,PGMR,Label,Value or FLDATA,PGMR,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Label (dictates the meaning of Value):
FILL
Value represents the number of extra elements allowed in each row of the L and U decomposition
matrices. An extra element is defined as being in addition to the number of nonzero elements in the row
of the original matrix. The allowable range for the fill parameter is 1 to 10 (defaults to 6).
MODP
Value represents the number of global iterations performed using the TDMA method between global
iterations performed using the PGMR method for the temperature DOF. The first global iteration always
uses the PGMR method. The global iteration count is based on the total number, not the number for a
restart. Value defaults to 0 (PGMR always used).
Value
Value as described above.
Notes
The fill parameter specifies the amount of fill-in when constructing the L and U decomposition of the coefficient
matrix.
Use of FILL requires selection of the PGMR solver for the PRES or TEMP degree of freedom. Use of MODP requires
selection of the PGMR solver for the temperature DOF.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
3496
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA20B
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
FLDATA20B, PBCGM, Label, Value
Specifies the number of fill-ins for the ILU preconditioner.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
PBCGM
Enter the word PBCGM in this field.
FLDATA20B,PBCGM is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to PBCGM. It can be entered into
the program as either FLDATA20B,PBCGM,Label,Value or FLDATA,PBCGM,Label,Value where Label
and Value are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Label (dictates the meaning of Value):
FILL
Value represents the number of extra elements allowed in each row of the L and U decomposition
matrices. An extra element is defined as being in addition to the number of nonzero elements in the row
of the original matrix. The allowable range for the fill parameter is 0 to 10 (defaults to 6).
Value
Value as described above.
Notes
The fill parameter specifies the amount of fill-in when constructing the L and U decomposition of the coefficient
matrix.
A single constant for FILL is used for the PBCGM solver, and it will be applied to all degrees of freedom that use
this solver.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3497
FLDATA21
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
FLDATA21, CONV, Label, Value
Specifies the convergence criterion for FLOTRAN algebraic solvers.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
CONV
Enter the word CONV in this field.
FLDATA21,CONV is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to CONV. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA21,CONV,Label,Value or FLDATA,CONV,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Degree of freedom set for which the solver is being used:
PRES
Pressure equation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-12).
TEMP
Energy equation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-12).
VX
U velocity (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-5).
VY
V velocity (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-5).
VZ
W velocity (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-5).
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-5).
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-5).
Value
Convergence criterion factor.
Notes
The convergence monitor (for methods 2 or 3 on the FLDATA18,METH command) represents the factor by which
the inner product of the residual vector is to be reduced during the solution of the equations at any global iteration.
3498
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA22
If you are using the Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) solver, the least restrictive convergence
criterion allowed is 1.E-10. If you try to use a less restrictive convergence criterion, FLOTRAN will change it to 1.E10. A convergence criterion as low as 1.E-20 may be necessary for some problems.
Less restrictive values are specified for the velocities and turbulence parameters because the iterative nature of
the segregated solution algorithm in FLOTRAN does not require exact solutions to these equations at any global
iteration. The default solution method for these degrees of freedom is the Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA)
method.
See also the FLDATA18,METH, FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA22,MAXI, and FLDATA23,DELT commands for other
Algebraic Solver controls.
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA18,METH,Label,(2 or 3) has been issued for the relevant labels.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
FLDATA22, MAXI, Label, Value
Specifies the maximum number of semi-direct iterations.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
MAXI
Enter the word MAXI in this field.
FLDATA22,MAXI is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to MAXI. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA22,MAXI,Label,Value or FLDATA,MAXI,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Degree of freedom set for which the solver is being used:
PRES
Pressure equation (Value defaults to 1000).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3499
FLDATA22
TEMP
Energy equation (Value defaults to 1000).
VX
U velocity (Value defaults to 100).
VY
V velocity (Value defaults to 100).
VZ
W velocity (Value defaults to 100).
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (Value defaults to 100).
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation (Value defaults to 100).
Value
Limit on the number of iterations.
Notes
These limits apply to the semi-direct solution methods (method 2 or 3 on the FLDATA18,METH command). If
this number of iterations is reached before the convergence criterion is met, the solution is accepted, a warning
message is printed, and the program continues normally. However if the pressure equation is not solved to the
precision desired three times during a load step, execution will terminate.
See also the FLDATA18,METH, FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA21,CONV, and FLDATA23,DELT commands for other
Algebraic Solver controls.
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA18,METH,Label,(2 or 3) has been issued for the relevant labels.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
3500
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA23
FLDATA23, DELT, Label, Value
Specifies the solver minimum normalized rate of change.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Solver
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
DELT
Enter the word DELT in this field.
FLDATA23,DELT is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to DELT. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA23,DELT,Label,Value or FLDATA,DELT,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Degree of freedom set for which the solver is being used:
PRES
Pressure equation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-10).
TEMP
Energy equation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-10).
VX
U velocity (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-10).
VY
V velocity (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-10).
VZ
W velocity (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-10).
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-10).
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 10-10).
Value
Minimum normalized rate of change (delta).
Notes
Delta is the minimum normalized rate of change which will permit the semi-direct solution methods (method
2 or 3 on the FLDATA18,METH command) to continue.
Delta is used to terminate the semi-direct solvers in the event that stall occurs. If the methods stall, the solver
increments the solution only a very small amount despite the fact that the correct solution has not been achieved.
The maximum nodal difference between the solutions, normalized to the value of the variable, is compared to
delta.
Termination of the algebraic solver due to the small rate of change is considered a normal function and no
warning message is printed. Execution of FLOTRAN continues normally.
See also the FLDATA18,METH, FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA21,CONV, and FLDATA22,MAXI commands for other
Algebraic Solver controls.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3501
FLDATA24
This command is accessible in the menu if FLDATA18,METH,Label,(2 or 3) has been issued for the relevant labels.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENDS Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>ENKE Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>TEMP Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VX Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VY Solver CFD
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>CFD Solver Controls>VZ Solver CFD
FLDATA24, TURB, Label, Value
Sets the turbulence model and the constants used in the Standard k- Model and the Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
TURB
Enter the word TURB in this field.
FLDATA24,TURB is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to TURB. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24,TURB,Label,Value or FLDATA,TURB,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
MODL
Value sets the turbulence model used. Valid values are the integers 0 through 8 as follows:
0,1
Standard k- Model (default).
2
Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
3
Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG).
4
New k- Model due to Shih (NKE).
3502
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA24
5
Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR).
6
Shih, Zhu, Lumley Model (SZL).
7
k- Turbulence Model
8
Shear-Stress Transport Turbulence Model (SST)
RATI
Value is the turbulence ratio. The initial turbulent viscosity is equal to the laminar value times the turbulence ratio. Value defaults to 1000.
ININ
Value is the inlet intensity. The fluctuating velocity component at the inlet is assumed to be the magnitude
of the inlet velocity times the inlet intensity. Value defaults to 0.01.
INSF
Value is the inlet scale factor. This factor is used to provide a length scale inlet region of the problem.
The hydraulic diameter of the inlet is multiplied by the inlet scale factor. If a negative value is input, the
absolute value is used as direct input of the hydraulic diameter. Value defaults to 0.01.
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.0.
SCTD
Value is the Schmidt number for the kinetic energy dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation
rate equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.3.
SCTM
Value is the Schmidt number for the momentum equation. The turbulent contribution to the diffusion
term of the momentum equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.
SCTT
Value is the Schmidt number for the energy (temperature) equation. The turbulent contribution to the
diffusion term of the energy equation is divided by this factor. The Prandtl number is equal to the Schmidt
number. Value defaults to 0.85.
CMU
Value is the k- turbulence model constant
2
t = C
which is used in the update of the turbulent viscosity. Value defaults to 0.09.
C1
Value is the k- turbulence model C1 constant. It is the multiplier of the shear rate generation term of
the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate equation. Value defaults to 1.44.
C2
Value is the k- turbulence model C2 constant. It is the multiplier of the dissipation source term in the
turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate equation. Value defaults to 1.92.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3503
FLDATA24
BUC3
Value is the k- buoyancy model constant. A value of zero means that there is no contribution to the
turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate equation. The default value of one is appropriate for stable
thermally stratified flows. A value of zero is appropriate for unstable thermally stratified flows
BUC4
Value is the k- multiplier applied to the buoyancy term of the turbulent kinetic energy equation. A
value of 1.0 is appropriate for the calculation of stable thermally stratified flows. Value defaults to 0.0.
BETA
Value is , the coefficient of thermal expansion
1
T
This term is used in the buoyancy terms of the k- model.
KAPP
Value is the slope parameter of the law of the wall constant. It is the slope of the plot of normalized
shear velocity (u+) versus the nondimensionalized distance from the wall (y+). See ANSYS, Inc. Theory
Reference for details. Value defaults to 0.4.
EWLL
Value is the law of the wall constant. It is related to the y intercept value for a plot of normalized shear
velocity (u+) versus the nondimensionalized distance from the wall (y+). See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for more details. Value defaults to 9.0.
WALL
Value is the choice of wall conductivity model. The default model is the Van Driest model (Value =
VAND), used most often for high Prandtl number fluids. The second choice is the Spalding model (Value
= SPAL), applicable to low Prandtl number fluids. The third choice is the Equilibrium model (Value =
EQLB). The equilibrium model is also automatically invoked for the wall viscosity by this command.
VAND
Value is the constant in the Van Driest wall conductivity model. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for
details. Value defaults to 26.0.
TRAN
+
Value is the magnitude of y marking the outer boundary of the laminar sublayer. Used only for the
Equilibrium Wall model. Value defaults to 11.5.
ZELS
Value is the Zero Equation Model length scale (defaults to -1). A negative value means that FLOTRAN
will calculate the value internally.
KS
Value is the local uniform wall roughness in length units. The default value of 0.0 implies a smooth wall.
CKS
Value is an empirical dimensionless factor between 0.5 and 1.0 that specifies the degree of nonuniformity
of the surface. The default value of 0.5 means that the roughness signified by KS is uniformly distributed.
Higher values increase the roughness losses without changing the flow regime implied by the value of
KS.
Value
Turbulence model parameters values as explained above.
3504
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA24A
Notes
Sets the turbulence model and constants used in the Standard k- Model and the Zero Equation Turbulence
Model. The other turbulence models are an extension of the Standard k- Model and different values are applied
to some of the Standard k- Model constants and some additional constants are added.
Applicable only if the turbulence model is activated [FLDATA1,SOLU,TURB, TRUE]. The default values are used
most often. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
See also the FLDATA24A,RNGT, FLDATA24B,NKET, FLDATA24C,GIRT, and FLDATA24D,SZLT commands for
other turbulence model constants.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Buoyancy Terms
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Parameters
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Wall Parameters
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Buoyancy Terms
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Parameters
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Wall Parameters
FLDATA24A, RNGT, Label, Value
Sets constants for the Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG).
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
RNGT
Enter the word RNGT in this field.
FLDATA24A,RNGT is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to RNGT. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24A, RNGT, Label,Value or FLDATA,RNGT,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 0.72.
SCTD
Value is the Schmidt number for the kinetic energy dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation
rate equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 0.72.
CMU
Value is the turbulence model constant
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3505
FLDATA24A
t = C
k 2
which is used in the update of the turbulent viscosity. Value defaults to 0.085.
C1
Value is the multiplier of the shear rate generation term of the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate
equation. Value defaults to 1.42.
C2
Value is the multiplier of the dissipation source term in the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate
equation. Value defaults to 1.68.
BETA
Value is the RNG model constant,
Value defaults to 0.012, which corresponds to a value of 0.4 for the von Karman constant.
ETAI
Value is the asymptotic value of the strain rate parameter eta. Value defaults to 4.38.
Value
Turbulence model parameters values as explained above.
Notes
The Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG) is an extension of the Standard k- Model. Different values
are applied to five of the Standard k- Model constants and two additional constants are added. The values for
the RNG Model are applied with the FLDATA24A,RNGT command and are separate from the Standard k-
Model constants.
Applicable only if the Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG) is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,3].
The default values are used most often. See the ANSYS Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence
models.
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
3506
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA24B
FLDATA24B, NKET, Label, Value
Sets constants for the k- Turbulence Model due to Shih (NKE).
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
NKET
Enter the word NKET in this field.
FLDATA24B,NKET is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to NKET. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24B,NKET, Label,Value or FLDATA,NKET,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. It is the k constant. Value defaults to 1.0.
SCTD
Value is the Schmidt number for the kinetic energy dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation
rate equation is divided by this factor. It is the constant. Value defaults to 1.2.
C2
Value is the multiplier of the dissipation source term in the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate
equation. Value defaults to 1.90.
C1MX
Value is the maximum allowed value of the C1 constant in the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate
equation. Value defaults to 0.43.
Value
Turbulence model parameters values as explained above.
Notes
The k- Turbulence Model due to Shih (NKE) is an extension of the Standard k- Model. Different values are applied
to three of the Standard k- Model constants and an additional constant is added. The values for the NKE Model
are applied with the FLDATA24B,NKET command and are separate from the Standard k- Model constants.
Applicable only if the k- Model due to Shih (NKE) is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,4]. The default values are
used most often. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3507
FLDATA24C
FLDATA24C, GIRT, Label, Value
Sets constants for the Nonlinear Turbulence Model of Girimaji (GIR).
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
GIRT
Enter the word GIRT in this field.
FLDATA24C,GIRT is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to GIRT. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24C,GIRT,Label,Value or FLDATA,GIRT,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.0.
SCTD
Value is the Schmidt number for the kinetic energy dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation
rate equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.3.
G0
Value is the
0
C1 constant. Value defaults to 3.6.
Value is the
C1 constant. Value defaults to 0.0.
1
G1
G2
Value is the C2 constant. Value defaults to 0.8.
G3
Value is the C3 constant. Value defaults to 1.94.
G4
Value is the C4 constant. Value defaults to 1.16.
Value
Turbulence model parameters values as explained above.
Notes
Sets constants for the Nonlinear Turbulence Model of Girimaji (GIR), which is an extension of the Standard k-
Model. Different values are applied to two of the Standard k- Model constants and five additional constants are
added. The values for the GIR Model are applied with the FLDATA24C,GIRT command and are separate from
the Standard k- Model constants.
Applicable only if the Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR) is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,5]. The default values
are used most often. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3508
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA24D
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
FLDATA24D, SZLT, Label, Value
Sets constants for the Shih, Zhu, Lumley Turbulence Model (SZL).
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SZLT
Enter the word SZLT in this field.
FLDATA24D,SZLT is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to SZLT. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24D,SZLT,Label,Value or FLDATA,SZLT,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.0.
SCTD
Value is the Schmidt number for the kinetic energy dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation
rate equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.3.
SZL1
Value is the numerator constant used in the calculation of C. It is the Aszl1 constant. Value defaults to
0.666.
SZL2
Value is the denominator constant used in the calculation of C. It is the Aszl2 constant. Value defaults
to 1.25.
SZL3
Value is the strain rate multiplier. It is the Aszl3 constant. Value defaults to 0.90.
Value
Turbulence model parameters values as explained above.
Notes
Sets constants for the Shih, Zhu, Lumley Turbulence Model (SZL), which is an extension of the Standard k-
Model. Different values are applied to two of the Standard k- Model constants and three additional constants
are added. The values for the SZL Model are applied with the FLDATA24D,SZLT command and are separate from
the Standard k- Model constants.
Applicable only if the Shih, Zhu, Lumley Model (SZL) is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,6]. The default values
are used most often. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3509
FLDATA24E
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
FLDATA24E, SKWT, Label, Value
Sets constants for the k- turbulence model.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SKWT
Enter the word SKWT in this field.
FLDATA24E,SKWT is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to SKWT. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24E,SKWT,Label,Value or FLDATA,SKWT,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 2.0.
SCTW
Value is the Schmidt number for the specific dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation rate
equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 2.0.
GAMA
Value is the GAMMA factor. Value defaults to 0.5555.
BETA
Value is the BETA factor. Value defaults to 0.075.
Value
Turbulence model parameters values as explained above.
Notes
Sets constants for the k- Turbulence Model. Values for the k- model are applied with the FLDATA24E,SKWT
command.
Applicable only if the k- model is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,7]. The default values are used most often.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3510
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA24G
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
FLDATA24F, SST1, Label, Value
Sets the turbulent production clip factor for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SST1
Enter the word SST1 in this field.
FLDATA24F,SST1 is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to SST1. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24F,SST1,Label,Value or FLDATA,SST1,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Enter the word CLMT in this field.
Value
Turbulent production clip factor. Defaults to 1.0e15 (no clipping).
Notes
Sets the turbulent production clip factor for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model. Values for the k regime are applied with the FLDATA24F,SST1,CLMT command.
Applicable only if the Shear Stress Transport model is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,8]. The default values
are used most often. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
FLDATA24G, SST1, Label, Value
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SST1
Enter the word SST1 in this field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3511
FLDATA24H
FLDATA24G,SST1 is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to SST1. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24G,SST1,Label,Value or FLDATA,SST1,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.176.
SCTW
Value is the Schmidt number for the specific dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation rate
equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 2.0.
GAMA
Value is the GAMMA factor.Value defaults to 0.5532.
BETA
Value is the BETA factor. Value defaults to 0.075.
Value
Turbulence model parameter values as explained above.
Notes
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model. Values for the k- regime
are applied with the FLDATA24G,SST1 command.
Applicable only if the Shear Stress Transport model is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,8]. The default values
are used most often. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
FLDATA24H, SST2, Label, Value
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SST2
Enter the word SST2 in this field.
FLDATA24H,SST2 is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to SST2. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA24H,SST2,Label,Value or FLDATA,SST2,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
3512
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA25
Label
Turbulence model parameter label (dictates the meaning of Value):
SCTK
Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent kinetic
energy equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.0.
SCTW
Value is the Schmidt number for the specific dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the dissipation rate
equation is divided by this factor. Value defaults to 1.168.
GAMA
Value is the GAMMA factor. Value defaults to 0.4403.
BETA
Value is the BETA factor. Value defaults to 0.0828.
Value
Turbulence model parameter values as explained above.
Notes
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model. Values for the k- regime
are applied with the FLDATA24H,SST2 command.
Applicable only if the Shear Stress Transport model is activated [FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,8]. The default values
are used most often. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the turbulence models.
See also the FLDATA24,TURB command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Turbulence>Turbulence Model
FLDATA25, RELX, Label, Value
Sets solution and property relaxation factors.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Stability
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
RELX
Enter the word RELX in this field.
FLDATA25,RELX is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to RELX. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA25,RELX,Label,Value or FLDATA,RELX,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Solution and property relaxation factor labels:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3513
FLDATA25
VX
Value is the U Velocity relaxation factor.
VY
Value is the V Velocity relaxation factor.
VZ
Value is the W Velocity relaxation factor.
PRES
Value is the pressure relaxation factor.
TEMP
Value is the temperature relaxation factor.
ENKE
Value is the kinetic energy relaxation factor.
ENDS
Value is the dissipation rate relaxation factor.
EVIS
Value is the effective viscosity relaxation factor.
ECON
Value is the effective conductivity relaxation factor.
DENS
Value is the density update relaxation factor.
VISC
Value is the viscosity update relaxation factor.
COND
Value is the conductivity update relaxation factor.
SPHT
Value is the specific heat relaxation factor.
Value
Value of relaxation parameter as explained above (defaults to 0.5). Defaults to 1.0 for SPHT.
Notes
For stability purposes the solution in FLOTRAN is under-relaxed between global iterations. When the solution
of the equations for a given degree of freedom is completed, the actual set of values used is related to the calculated set and the previous values as follows (where RELX is the relaxation factor):
new = (1 - RELX) previous + RELX calculated
See also the FLDATA18,METH, FLDATA19,TDMA, FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA21,CONV, FLDATA22,MAXI, and
FLDATA23,DELT commands for other Solver Stability controls.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>DOF Relaxation
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Prop Relaxation
3514
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA26
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>DOF Relaxation
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Prop Relaxation
FLDATA26, STAB, Label, Value
Sets stability controls.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Stability
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
STAB
Enter the word STAB in this field.
FLDATA26,STAB is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to STAB. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA26,STAB,Label,Value or FLDATA,STAB,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Control label (dictates the meaning of Value):
TURB
Turbulence inertial relaxation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 1015).
MOME
Momentum inertial relaxation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 1015).
PRES
Pressure inertial relaxation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 1015).
TEMP
Energy inertial relaxation (Value defaults to 1.0 x 1020).
VISC
Artificial viscosity (Value defaults to 0.0).
Value
Inertial relaxation factor.
Notes
These controls are used to make the sets of equations diagonally dominant through inertial relaxation. Making
the matrix equations more diagonally dominant makes them easier to solve. More global iterations are required
for convergence if inertial relaxation is used. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details.
Artificial viscosity can be activated to enhance stability in difficult compressible problems as well as in some incompressible problems. The artificial viscosity is added to the main diagonal and the forcing function of the
momentum equations. The equations become more diagonally dominant locally in regions with high velocity
gradients.
In compressible analyses, the artificial viscosity should be gradually removed as convergence is achieved since
a nonzero value will affect the final solution. This is not necessary for incompressible analyses as the divergence
of velocity should be zero. In practice, values of artificial viscosity should not exceed 1000 times the effective
viscosity.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3515
FLDATA27
See also the FLDATA18,METH, FLDATA19,TDMA, FLDATA20,SRCH, FLDATA21,CONV, FLDATA22,MAXI,
FLDATA23,DELT, FLDATA24,TURB, and FLDATA25,RELX commands for other Solver Stability controls.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Stability Parms
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Stability Parms
FLDATA27, PRIN, Label, Value
Controls dependent variable printing.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
PRIN
Enter the word PRIN in this field.
FLDATA27,PRIN is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to PRIN. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA27,PRIN,Label,Value or FLDATA,PRIN,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Dependent variable tabulation is being specified for:
VX
U velocity.
VY
V velocity.
VZ
W velocity.
PRES
Pressure.
TEMP
Temperature.
ENKE
Kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate.
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Conductivity.
3516
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA28
SPHT
Specific heat.
EVIS
Effective viscosity.
ECON
Effective conductivity.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
Value
Tabulation key:
T
Turn tabulation on.
F
Turn tabulation off (default).
Notes
When set to T, this control produces a tabulation of the values of the particular dependent variable at every
node. It is set at the beginning of a load step. The printout can be large and is contained in the file Jobname.PFL.
To observe the values of a dependent variable at selected nodes during postprocessing, see the PRNSOL command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
FLDATA28, MODR, Label, Value
Specifies that variable results are to be replaced.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
MODR
Enter the word MODR in this field.
FLDATA28,MODR is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to MODR. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA28,MODR,Label,Value or FLDATA,MODR,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Dependent variables to be replaced:
VX
U velocity.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3517
FLDATA28
VY
V velocity.
VZ
W velocity.
PRES
Pressure.
TEMP
Temperature.
ENKE
Kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate.
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Conductivity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
EVIS
Effective viscosity.
ECON
Effective conductivity.
TTOT
Total temperature.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
Value
Variable replace flag:
T
Allow this variable to be re-initialized.
F
Do not allow this variable to be re-initialized (default).
Notes
Results for any of the dependent variables available can be replaced with new values for the next load step. Only
a single value may be specified for the entire solution domain. This is used for re-initialization of a variable such
as temperature, which has diverged while other temperature independent calculations have been successful.
To re-initialize a variable, first use this command to set the replacement flag to T for the desired variable. Then
use the FLDATA29,MODV command to put in the new variable value. Note that the flag(s) will be automatically
reset to F after the new value has been inserted.
3518
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA29
See also the FLDATA29,MODV command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Mod Res/Quad Ord>Modify Results
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Mod Res/Quad Ord>Modify Results
FLDATA29, MODV, Label, Value
Re-initializes a results variable.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
MODV
Enter the word MODV in this field.
FLDATA29,MODV is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to MODV. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA29,MODV,Label,Value or FLDATA,MODV,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Dependent variables to be replaced:
VX
U velocity.
VY
V velocity.
VZ
W velocity.
SP0n
Mass fraction of species n, where n = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is given a user-defined name [MSSPEC],
use that name instead of SP0n.
PRES
Pressure.
TEMP
Temperature.
ENKE
Kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate.
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3519
FLDATA30
COND
Conductivity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
EVIS
Effective viscosity.
ECON
Effective conductivity.
TTOT
Total temperature.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
LMDn
Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
EMDm
Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
Value
New value of variable (defaults to 0.0). Specifying FLDATA29,MODV,Label,Value modifies the entire field
variable to a constant value.
Notes
Results for any of the dependent variables available can be replaced with new values for the next load step. Only
a single value may be specified for the entire solution domain. This is used for re-initialization of a variable such
as temperature, which has diverged while other temperature independent calculations have been successful.
Boundary conditions are reapplied upon restart.
Quantities which are not allowed to vary (e.g., CONSTANT properties) should not be modified. Also, modifying
results should not be attempted on the initial run.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Mod Res/Quad Ord>Modify Results
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Mod Res/Quad Ord>Modify Results
FLDATA30, QUAD, Label, Value
Controls the quadrature orders.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
QUAD
Enter the word QUAD in this field.
3520
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA30
FLDATA30,QUAD is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to QUAD. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA30,QUAD,Label,Value or FLDATA,QUAD,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Element integral to change quadrature for:
MOMD
Momentum diffusion term (defaults to 0 integration points).
MOMS
Momentum source term (defaults to 0 integration points).
PRSD
Pressure diffusion term (defaults to 1 integration point).
PRSS
Pressure source term (defaults to 1 integration point).
THRD
Thermal diffusion term (defaults to 0 integration points).
THRS
Thermal source term (defaults to 0 integration points).
TRBD
Turbulent diffusion terms (defaults to 0 integration points).
TRBS
Turbulent source terms (defaults to 2 integration points).
Value
Number of integration points.
Notes
Controls the number of integration points used in the evaluation of element integrals. They are set at the optimum
values by default. Values of 0 and 1 correspond to 1 point quadrature, but 0 means an average value of the diffusion coefficient has been used in the integrals. Values are automatically set to 2 for axisymmetric and polar
analyses. Using a value of 2 will improve the accuracy for analyses using distorted elements. Repeat the FLDATA30
command as required.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Mod Res/Quad Ord>CFD Quad Orders
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Mod Res/Quad Ord>CFD Quad Orders
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3521
FLDATA31
FLDATA31, CAPP, Label, Value
Specifies dependent variable caps.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
CAPP
Enter the word CAPP in this field.
FLDATA31,CAPP is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to CAPP. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA31,CAPP,Label,Value or FLDATA,CAPP,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Capping parameters. The first three are used to set the flags, and the rest are used to specify the cap values
after the flag is set to T:
VELO
Value is the velocity capping flag (Value defaults to F).
TEMP
Value is the temperature capping flag (Value defaults to F).
PRES
Value is the pressure capping flag (Value defaults to F).
UMIN
Value is the minimum value of U velocity allowed (Value defaults to -1.E20).
UMAX
Value is the maximum value of U velocity allowed (Value defaults to +1.E20).
VMIN
Value is the minimum value of V velocity allowed (Value defaults to -1.E20).
VMAX
Value is the maximum value of V velocity allowed (Value defaults to +1.E20).
WMIN
Value is the minimum value of W velocity allowed (Value defaults to -1.E20).
WMAX
Value is the maximum value of W velocity allowed (Value defaults to +1.E20).
TMIN
Value is the minimum value of temperature allowed (Value defaults to 0.0).
TMAX
Value is the maximum value of temperature allowed (Value defaults to +1.E20).
PMIN
Value is the minimum value of pressure allowed (Value defaults to -1.E20).
PMAX
Value is the maximum value of pressure allowed (Value defaults to +1.E20).
Value
Capping flag (T or F) or capping parameter value.
3522
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA32
Notes
These parameters are used to limit arbitrarily the values of the dependent variables. Capping helps prevent divergence in the early stages of analyses. Be careful when using caps to ensure that they have no impact on the
final answers. You should remove capping as convergence is approached.
To use capping, you must first set the flag to T and then set the maximum and minimum caps.
The pressure value calculated by the solution of the pressure equation is capped, not the relaxed value. Therefore,
if you introduce pressure capping upon restarting an analysis, pressure values may still be outside the caps.
Capping applies to relative values of pressure and absolute values of temperature.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Results Capping
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Results Capping
FLDATA32, REST, Label, Value, Value2, Fname, Ext, -Controls restart options.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
REST
Enter the word REST in this field.
FLDATA32,REST is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to REST. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA32,REST,Label,Value,Value2 or FLDATA,REST,Label,Value,Value2 where
Label, Value, and Value2 are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input
choices.
Label
Restart option (dictates the meaning of Value and Value2):
NSET
Identifies the restart point by results set number. Value is the results set number in the results file
(Jobname.RFL) from which the analysis will be restarted. Value = 0 or blank indicates that the restart
will be from the last results set. Value will be reset to zero if the label ITER, LSTP, or TIME is subsequently
set. Value2 is not used.
ITER
Identifies the restart point by cumulative iteration number. Value is the cumulative iteration number
in the results file (Jobname.RFL) from which the analysis will be restarted. If there are no results stored
for this cumulative iteration, the results set with the next lowest cumulative iteration number will be
used. Value = 0 or blank indicates that the restart will be from the last results set. Value will be reset to
zero if the label NSET, LSTP, or TIME is subsequently set. Value2 is not used.
LSTP
Identifies the restart point by load step and substep numbers. Value and Value2 are the load step
number and substep number in the results file (Jobname.RFL) from which the analysis will be restarted.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3523
FLDATA32
Value = 0 or blank indicates that the restart will be from the last results set. Value and Value2 will be
reset to zero if the label ITER, NSET, or TIME is subsequently set.
TIME
Identifies the restart point by transient time. Value is the time point in the results file (Jobname.RFL)
from which the analysis will be restarted. If there are no results stored for this time point, the results set
with the next lowest time point will be used. Value = 0 or blank indicates that the restart will be from
the last results set. Value will be reset to zero if the label NSET, LSTP, or ITER is subsequently set. Value2
is not used.
RFIL
Specifies whether the CFD data structure restart file (Jobname.CFD) is to be read for the restart. Useful
for large models where the creation of the data structures may take a long time. Value may be T (true)
or F (false) and defaults to F. If the Jobname.CFD file does not exist, it will be created (if RFIL is set to
true). Setting RFIL to true will toggle WFIL to false, and setting WFIL to true will toggle RFIL to false.
WFIL
Specifies whether the CFD data structure restart file (Jobname.CFD) is to be written. Useful for overwriting
an existing restart file when changes in the model or boundary conditions have occurred. Value may
be T (true) or F (false) and defaults to F. Setting WFIL to true will toggle RFIL to false, and setting RFIL to
true will toggle WFIL to false.
OVER
Specifies whether to overwrite the set of results from which the restart occurs. Value may be -1, 0, or 1
(defaults to 0). If Value is -1, the previous set of results are overwritten. If Value is 1, the previous set of
results is saved. If Value is 0 (default), the previous results are saved only if the results were written as a
saved (converged) set of results. When this flag is used to change the status of the previous set of results,
ANSYS sets it to 0 so that future sets of results are not affected.
CLEAR
Specifies whether to eliminate from the results file (Jobname.RFL) all results sets stored before and after
the set used for the restart. Value may be T (true) or F (false) and defaults to F. The restart set is the last
set or the set specified with another FLDATA32,REST command. Use a positive value of NSET, ITER, LSTP,
or TIME to create a backup of the results file and use a negative value of NSET, ITER, LSTP or TIME if you
do not desire a backup of the results file (see Notes below).
Value, Value2
Restart point or restart file flag (T or F) as described above.
Fname
File name and directory path of a results file to be used for the restart (248 characters maximum, including
directory). If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all
248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname. This field is valid only with Label = NSET, ITER, LSTP, or TIME.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to RFL, and is valid only with Label = NSET, ITER, LSTP, or TIME.
--
Unused field.
3524
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA33
Notes
If both RFIL and WFIL are set to true through the GUI, the state of WFIL will prevail and a new Jobname.CFD file
will be written.
If the value of NSET, ITER, LSTP, or TIME is positive, the original results file (Jobname.RFL) is moved to Jobname.RFO, and a new Jobname.RFL is created containing all the results sets stored prior to the restart point as
well as new results. If the value is negative, the Jobname.RFL file will contain the prior results and the new results
but the old file will be destroyed. This latter option is used if the results sets currently stored beyond the desired
restart point are not worth saving.
If restarting from an existing file other than Jobname.RFL, no backup file (Jobname.RFO) is created because
the existing file is not affected.
If a results file name (Fname) is entered for a restart, FLOTRAN interpolates those results onto the current mesh
in the database, regardless of whether or not the mesh has changed. This causes the convergence monitors to
start again from zero. This restart is different than a restart without a file name specification. However, the results
quickly converge to the original solution.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>CFD Restart File
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Clear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Iteration
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Load step
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Set
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Time
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Tag set status
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>CFD Restart File
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Clear
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Iteration
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Load step
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Set
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Restart/Time
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Restart Options>Tag set status
FLDATA33, ADVM, Label, Value
Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
ADVM
Enter the word ADVM in this field.
FLDATA33,ADVM is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to ADVM. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA33,ADVM,Label,Value or FLDATA,ADVM,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3525
FLDATA34
Label
Specifies the transport equation.
MOME
Momentum equations.
TURB
Turbulence equations.
PRES
Compressible pressure equation.
TEMP
Energy equation.
Value
Choice of approach to discretize the advection term:
MSU
Monotone Streamline Upwind approach (default for PRES).
SUPG
Streamline Upwind / Petrov-Galerkin approach (default for MOME, TURB, and TEMP).
COLG
Collocated Galerkin (COLG) approach.
Notes
See Using SUPG in the ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide for more information on the SUPG approach.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on the advection term.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Advection
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Advection
FLDATA34, MIR, Label, Value
Sets modified inertial relaxation factors.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Stability
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
MIR
Enter the word MIR in this field.
FLDATA34,MIR is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to MIR. It can be entered into the program
as either FLDATA34,MIR,Label,Value or FLDATA,MIR,Label,Value where Label and Value are as described
below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Modified relaxation factor labels:
3526
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA35
MOME
Momentum modified inertial relaxation.
TURB
Turbulence modified inertial relaxation.
TEMP
Energy modified inertial relaxation.
Value
Modified inertial relaxation factor. Value defaults to 0 (modified inertial relaxation off).
Notes
Value must be a positive real number. A Value between 0.1 and 1.0 is recommended. A larger Value provides
a more robust scheme, but it may yield a slower convergence.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>MIR Stabilization
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>MIR Stabilization
FLDATA35, VFTOL, Label, Value
Specifies tolerances for the lower and upper bound of the volume fraction.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
VFTOL
Enter the word VFTOL in this field.
FLDATA35,VFTOL is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to VFTOL. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA35,VFTOL,Label,Value or FLDATA,VFTOL,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Tolerance choices:
VOFL
Lower bound tolerance in the VOF advection algorithm (Value defaults to 1.0e-6).
VOFU
Upper bound tolerance in the VOF advection algorithm (Value defaults to 1.0e-6).
LAML
Lower bound tolerance in the solver for laminar flows (Value defaults to 1.0e-2).
LAMU
Upper bound tolerance in the solver for laminar flows (Value defaults to 1.0e-2).
TRBL
Lower bound tolerance in the solver for turbulent flows (Value defaults to 1.0e-1).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3527
FLDATA36
TRBU
Upper bound tolerance in the solver for turbulent flows (Value defaults to 1.0e-1).
Value
Tolerance value for Label above.
Notes
Volume fractions less than the lower bound tolerance are treated as 0. Volume fractions greater than 1 minus
the upper bound tolerance are treated as 1.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>VOF Environment>VFRC Tolerance
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>VOF Environment>VFRC Tolerance
FLDATA36, AMBV, Label, Value
Specifies ambient reference values outside of the fluid for the volume of fluid (VOF) method.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
AMBV
Enter the word AMBV in this field.
FLDATA36,AMBV is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to AMBV. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA36,AMBV,Label,Value or FLDATA,AMBV,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Ambient Reference for which value is being specified:
VX
U velocity.
VY
V velocity.
VZ
W velocity.
TEMP
Temperature.
ENKE
Turbulent Kinetic Energy.
ENDS
Turbulent Dissipation Rate.
Value
Value for the ambient reference as described above.
3528
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA37
Notes
PRES is used as a boundary condition at the free surface and for plotting purposes. VX, VY, VZ, TEMP, ENKE and
ENDS are only used for plotting purposes.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>VOF Environment>Ambient Condit'n
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>VOF Environment>Ambient Condit'n
FLDATA37, ALGR, Label, Value
Specifies segregated solution or film coefficient algorithms.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
ALGR
Enter the word ALGR in this field.
FLDATA37,ALGR is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to ALGR. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA37,ALGR,Label,Value or FLDATA,ALGR,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Algorithm label:
SEGR
Segregated
HFLM
Film Coefficient
Value
If Label = SEGR, Value specifies the segregated solution algorithm:
SIMPLEF
Original segregated algorithm (default)
SIMPLEN
Enhanced segregated algorithm
If Label = HFLM, Value specifies the film coefficient algorithm:
MATX
Conductivity matrix algorithm (default)
TEMP
Temperature field algorithm
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3529
FLDATA38
Notes
Settings automatically changed when SIMPLEN is chosen are not automatically reset if SIMPLEF is reselected.
See Coupling Algorithms in the ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide for the settings.
The conductivity matrix algorithm uses the thermal conductivity matrix to calculate heat fluxes and film coefficients. The temperature field algorithm calculates film coefficients directly from thermal gradients.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Algorithm Control
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Algorithm Control
FLDATA38, MASS, Label, Value
Specifies the mass type for a fluid transient analysis.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
MASS
Enter the word MASS in this field.
FLDATA38,MASS is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to MASS. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA38,MASS,Label,Value or FLDATA,MASS,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Degree of freedom set for which mass type is being specified:
MOME
Momentum equation.
PRES
Pressure equation.
TURB
Turbulent equation.
TEMP
Energy equation.
ALL
Momentum, pressure, turbulent, and energy equations.
Value
Mass type for fluid transient analysis:
LUMP
Lumped mass matrix (default).
3530
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA39
CONS
Consistent mass matrix.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Transient Ctrl>Mass Type
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Transient Ctrl>Mass Type
FLDATA39, REMESH, Label, Value
Specifies remeshing parameters for transient fluid flow and fluid-solid interaction analyses.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
REMESH
Enter the word REMESH in this field.
FLDATA39,REMESH is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to REMESH. It can be entered into
the program as either FLDATA39,REMESH,Label,Value or FLDATA,REMESH,Label,Value where Label
and Value are as described below. See the FLDATA command for other FLOTRAN CFD input choices.
Label
Remeshing fluid element label (dictates the meaning of Value):
ELEM
Value specifies the fluid elements included in remeshing. The following are valid values:
NON
Do not remesh (default).
ALL
Remesh all defined fluid elements if the quality of the worst defined element falls below any quality
requirement. Required element qualities are specified by Label = ARMAX, VOCH, or ARCH as explained
below.
PAR
Remesh defined fluid elements that have a quality below any quality requirement.
A component name may be specified for Value. All elements grouped into a component name are
remeshed if the quality of the worst element falls below any quality requirement. The component
name length is up to 8 characters.
XBNE
Value specifies the elements connected to the boundary nodes excluded from remeshing. The following
are valid values:
NONE
Do not exclude any elements connected to the boundary nodes (default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3531
FLDATA39
ALL
Exclude all elements connected to the boundary nodes.
FSI
Exclude elements connected to fluid-solid interaction interfaces.
RESIZ
Value is the element size used for remeshing. Value defaults to 0 (the element size at the nearest
boundary is used for remeshing).
REXPN
Value is the area expansion (or contraction) option for remeshing. (This option is the same as SMRT-
SIZE,,,EXPND.) This option is used to size internal elements in an area based on the size of the elements
on the area's boundaries. Value is the expansion (or contraction) factor. For example, issuing
FLDATA39,REMESH,EXPND,2 before meshing an area will allow a mesh with elements that are approximately twice as large in the interior of an area as they are on the boundary. If Value is less than 1, a
mesh with smaller elements on the interior of the area will be allowed. Value for this option should be
greater than 0.5 but less than 4. Value defaults to 1, which does not allow expansion or contraction of
internal element sizes. If Value = 0, the default value of 1 will be used. The actual size of the internal
elements will also depend on RESIZ sizing, if used.
ARMA
Value is the maximum allowable element generalized aspect ratio. Value defaults to 10.
VOCH
Value is the maximum allowable change of element size (area or volume). Value defaults to 3.
ARCH
Value is the maximum allowable element aspect ratio change.Value defaults to 3.
STEP
Value is the element quality checking frequency based on time steps. Every Value time steps, a quality
check takes place. Value defaults to 1 (a quality check at every step).
TIME
Value is the only element quality checking time. A quality check takes place at a time specified by Value.
Value defaults to -1 (a quality check at every time point).
Value
Value as described for Label above.
Notes
See Table 7.2: Element Qualities in the ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide for definitions of element qualities.
Repeat command to set each Label as required.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Element size ctrl
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Elements for remesh
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Mesh qualities
3532
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLDATA40
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Remesh frequency
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Element size ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Elements for remesh
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Mesh qualities
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Remesh Ctrl>Remesh frequency
FLDATA40, WADV, Label, Value
Controls activation of thermal stabilization near walls.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Turbulence
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
WADV
Enter the word WADV in this field.
FLDATA40,WADV is the FLDATA command with its first argument set to WADV. It can be entered into the
program as either FLDATA40,WADV,Label,Value or FLDATA,WADV,Label,Value where Label and Value
are as described below.
Label
Enter the word TEMP in this field.
Value
Value controlling Label:
TRUE or T
Turn this feature on.
FALSE or F
Turn this feature off.
Notes
Thermal oscillations may occur for turbulent heat transfers in near-wall regions when using the SUPG or the
COLG advection scheme with a coarse mesh. Use this command to minimize such spatial oscillations.
For the nodes that lie at the intersection of the wall or solid surface and the inlet, the thermal boundary conditions
for those nodes must be the same as the wall or solid surface, not the inlet.
See the FLDATA33,ADVM command to see various advection discretization schemes.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Thermal Stabilization
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Relax/Stab/Cap>Thermal Stabilization
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3533
FLIST
FLIST, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Lists force loads on the nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
List forces for nodes NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If ALL, list for all selected nodes [NSEL] and NODE2 and NINC are ignored (default). If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE1.
Notes
Listing applies to the selected nodes [NSEL] and the selected force labels [DOFSEL].
Caution: A list containing a node number that is larger than the maximum defined node (NODE2), could
deplete the system memory and produce unpredictable results.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Forces>On All Nodes
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Forces>On Picked Nodes
FLLIST, NLOC1, NLOC2, NINC
Lists the fatigue location parameters.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC1, NLOC2, NINC
List location parameters from NLOC1 (defaults to 1) to NLOC2 (defaults to NLOC1) in steps of NINC (defaults
to 1). If NLOC1 = ALL, NLOC2 and NINC are ignored and all locations are listed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>List Stress Loc
FLOCHECK, Key
Sets up and runs a zero-iteration FLOTRAN analysis.
SOLUTION: FLOTRAN Checkout
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
Key
Determines whether the FLOTRAN analysis is initialized and whether boundary condition status now becomes
old.
3534
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLOTRAN
0
(Default) Initialization is not performed.
1
Initialization is performed
2
No initialization performed, boundary condition status now becomes old.
Notes
The FLOCHECK command will provide a results summary for the Zeroth iteration (KEY = 1) or the current iteration
(KEY = 0). The results summary provides max/min/average values for each property and DOF. Also, mass flow
boundaries are identified and all thermal energy transfer information is summarized. All input information is
summarized in the Jobname.PFL file (i.e., print file). If you are running the ANSYS program from the GUI, the
FLOTRAN print file is echoed to the output window. The FLOCHECK command aids verification of boundary
condition and property specification.
Initialization [FLOCHECK,1] deletes any existing Jobname.PFL and Jobname.RFL files. Run FLOCHECK initialization only when you are sure you no longer need the existing results files.
The FLOCHECK,2 command changes boundary conditions to the old state. It has no effect on the Jobname.RFL
file. For information on changing fluid boundary conditions, see Applying Transient Boundary Conditions in
ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flocheck
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flocheck
FLOTRAN
Specifies "FLOTRAN data settings" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>FLOTRAN Module
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3535
FLREAD
FLREAD, Fname, Ext, -Reads the residual file written by the FLOTRAN CFD option.
POST1: FLOTRAN Processing
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to RDF (residual file) if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>FLOTRAN 2.1A
FLST, NFIELD, NARG, TYPE, Otype, LENG
Specifies data required for a picking operation (GUI).
DATABASE: Picking
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NFIELD
Field number on the command which uses the picking data. (Count the command name as a field, so that
a 2 indicates the first command argument, 3 for the second command argument, etc.) The corresponding
field on the command will have a P51X label.
NARG
Number of items in the picked list.
TYPE
Type of items picked:
1
Node numbers
2
Element numbers
3
Keypoint numbers
3536
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FLST
4
Line numbers
5
Area numbers
6
Volume numbers
7
Trace points
8
Coordinate locations (in Global Cartesian coordinates)
9
Screen picks (in X, Y screen coordinates (-1 to 1))
Otype
Data order:
NOOR
Data is not ordered (default).
ORDER
Data is in an ordered list (such as for the E,P51X and A,P51X commands, in which the order of the data
items is significant for the picking operation).
LENG
Length of number of items describing the list (should equal NARG if Otype = NOOR; default).
Notes
Specifies data required for the FITEM command during a picking operation. This is a command generated by
the GUI and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if graphical picking is used. This command is not intended
to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input file for batch input or for use
with the /INPUT command).
On the log file, FLST will always be followed by one or more FITEM commands which in turn are followed by
the ANSYS command that contains a P51X label in one of its fields. This set of commands should not be edited.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3537
FLUXV
FLUXV
Calculates the flux passing through a closed contour.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
FLUXV invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates the flux passing through a closed contour (path) predefined
by PATH. The calculated flux is stored in the parameter FLUX. In a 2-D analysis, at least two nodes must be defined
on the path. In 3-D, a path of nodes describing a closed contour must be specified (i.e., the first and last node in
the path specification must be the same). A counterclockwise ordering of nodes on the PPATH command will
give the correct sign on flux. Path operations are used for the calculations, and all path items are cleared upon
completion. This macro is only available for vector potential formulations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Path Based>Path Flux
FMAGBC, Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8, Cnam9
Applies force and torque boundary conditions to an element component.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8, Cnam9
Names of existing element components (CM command). Must be enclosed in single quotes (e.g., `Cnam1')
when the command is manually typed in.
Notes
FMAGBC invokes a predefined ANSYS macro to apply Maxwell and virtual work force and torque boundary
conditions to an element component. These boundary conditions are used for subsequent force and torque
calculations during solution. Magnetic virtual displacements (MVDI = 1) are applied to nodes of elements in the
components, and Maxwell surface flags (MXWF) are applied to air elements adjoining the element components.
Incorrect force and torque calculations will occur for components sharing adjacent air elements. Companion
macros FMAGSUM and TORQSUM can be used in POST1 to summarize the force and torque calculations, respectively. Torque calculations are valid for 2-D planar analysis only. For 2-D harmonic analysis, force and torque
represent time-average values.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>Comp. Force
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>Comp. Force/Torque
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>Comp. Force
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>Comp. Force/Torque
3538
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/FOCUS
FMAGSUM, Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8, Cnam9
Summarizes electromagnetic force calculations on element components.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8, Cnam9
Names of existing element components for which Maxwell or virtual work boundary conditions were applied
in the preprocessor. Must be enclosed in single quotes (e.g., `Cnam1') when the command is manually typed
in.
Notes
FMAGSUM invokes an ANSYS macro that summarizes the Maxwell and virtual work forces. The element components must have had appropriate Maxwell or virtual work boundary conditions established in the preprocessor
prior to solution in order to retrieve forces (see FMAGBC, SF, BF commands). The forces are also stored on a perelement basis for the adjacent air layer surrounding the components in the element table [ETABLE]. Maxwell
forces are stored as items FMX_X, FMX_Y, and FMX_Z, and virtual work forces are stored as items FVW_X, FVW_Y,
and FVW_Z. Use the PLETAB and PRETAB commands to plot and list the element table items.
If using elements SOLID117, PLANE121, SOLID122, and SOLID123 (static analyses only), you do not need to first
set either the Maxwell or the virtual work force flags via FMAGBC. Electromagnetic or electrostatic forces are
reported as FMAG_X, FMAG_Y, and FMAG_Z. Transient analyses using these elements will report Maxwell and
virtual work forces as noted above.
FMAGSUM can also be used to summarize time-average forces from a 2-D harmonic analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Component Based>Force
/FOCUS, WN, XF, YF, ZF, KTRANS
Specifies the focus point (center of the window).
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
XF, YF, ZF
Location of the object to be at the focus point (center of the window) in the global Cartesian coordinate
system. If XF = AUTO, allow automatic location calculation. If XF = USER, use focus location of last display
(useful when last display had auto focus).
KTRANS
Translate key:
0
Interpret numerical XF, YF, ZF values as described above.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3539
FOR2D
1
Interpret XF, YF, ZF values as multiples of half-screens to translate from the current position in the screen
coordinate system. Example: XF of 2.4 translates the display approximately 2.4 half-screens to the left in
the screen X (horizontal) direction.
2
Interpret XF, YF, ZF values as multiples of half-screens to translate from the current position in the
global Cartesian coordinate system. Example: XF of 1.5 translates the display approximately 1.5 halfscreens in the global Cartesian X direction of the model.
Command Default
Focus location is automatically calculated to be at the geometric center of the object (modified for centering
within the window, depending upon the view).
Notes
Specifies the location on (or off) the model which is to be located at the focus point (center of the window). For
section and capped displays, the cutting plane is also assumed to pass through this location (unless the working
plane is used via /CPLANE). See also /AUTO and /USER commands.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Pan, Zoom, Rotate
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Focus Point
FOR2D
Calculates magnetic forces on a body.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
FOR2D invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates magnetic forces on a body that is completely surrounded by
air (symmetry permitted). The calculated forces are stored in the parameters FX and FY. In interactive mode, a
node plot is produced with the integration path highlighted. A predefined closed path [PATH], passing through
the air elements surrounding the body, must be available for this calculation. A counterclockwise ordering of
nodes on the PPATH command will give the correct sign on the forces. Forces are calculated using a Maxwell
stress tensor approach. The macro is valid for 2-D planar or axisymmetric analysis. Path operations are used for
the calculations, and all path items are cleared upon completion.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Path Based>Mag Forces
3540
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FORCE
FORCE, Lab
Selects the element nodal force type for output.
POST1: Controls
POST26: Controls
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Type of force to be associated with the force items:
TOTAL
Total forces (static, damping, and inertia).
STATIC
Static forces.
DAMP
Damping forces.
INERT
Inertia forces.
Command Default
Use the total forces.
Notes
FORCE selects the element nodal force type for output with the POST1 PRESOL, PLESOL, PRRFOR, NFORCE,
FSUM, etc. commands, the POST26 ESOL command, and reaction force plotting [/PBC]. For example,
FORCE,STATIC causes item F of the PRESOL command to be the static forces for the elements processed. Element
member forces (such as those available for beams and shells, which are processed by Item and Sequence number)
are not affected by this command. Damping and inertia forces are only available for full transient and harmonic
analyses.
The PRRSOL command is not valid with FORCE. Use the PRRFOR command, which provides the same functionality as PRRSOL, instead.
In POST26, the ESOL data stored is based on the active FORCE specification at the time the data is stored. To
store data at various specifications (for example, static and inertia forces), issue a STORE command before each
new specification.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3541
FORM
FORM, Lab
Specifies the format of the file dump.
AUX2: Binary Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Format:
RECO
Basic record description only (minimum output) (default).
TEN
Same as RECO plus the first ten words of each record.
LONG
Same as RECO plus all words of each record.
Command Default
Basic record description (RECO).
Notes
Specifies the format of the file dump (from the DUMP command).
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>List>Binary Files
Utility Menu>List>Files>Binary Files
/FORMAT, NDIGIT, Ftype, NWIDTH, DSIGNF, LINE, CHAR
Specifies format controls for tables.
POST1: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NDIGIT
Number of digits (3 to 32) in first table column (usually the node or element number). Initially defaults to 7.
Ftype
FORTRAN format types (initially defaults to G):
G
Gxx.yy. xx and yy are described below.
F
Fxx.yy
E
Exx.yy
NWIDTH
Total width (9 to 32) of the field (the xx in Ftype). Initially defaults to 12.
3542
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FP
DSIGNF
Number of digits after the decimal point (yy in F or E format) or number of significant digits in G format.
Range is 2 to xx-7 for Ftype = G or E; and 0 to xx-4 for Ftype = F. Initially defaults to 5.
LINE
Number of lines (11 minimum) per page. Defaults to ILINE or BLINE from the /PAGE command.
CHAR
Number of characters (41 to 240, system-dependent) per line before wraparound. Defaults to ICHAR or BCHAR
from the /PAGE command.
Command Default
Program determines format for the data.
Notes
Specifies various format controls for tables printed with the POST1 PRNSOL, PRESOL, PRETAB, PRRSOL, and
PRPATH commands. A blank (or out-of-range) field on the command retains the current setting. Issue
/FORMAT,STAT to display the current settings. Issue /FORMAT,DEFA to reestablish the initial default specifications.
For the POST26 PRVAR command, the Ftype, NWIDTH, and DSIGNF fields control the time output format.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
FP, STITM, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Defines the fatigue S vs. N and Sm vs. T tables.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
STITM
Starting item number for entering properties (defaults to 1). If 1, data input in field C1 of this command is
entered as the first item in the list; if 7, data input in field C1 of this command is entered as the seventh item
in the list; etc. If the item number is negative, C1-C6 are ignored and the item is deleted. If -ALL, the table is
erased. Items are as follows (items 41-62 are required only if simplified elastic-plastic code calculations are
to be performed):
1,2,...20:
N1, N2, ... N20
21,22,...40:
S1, S2, ... S20
41,42,...50:
T1, T2, ... T10
51,52,...60:
Sm1, Sm2, ... Sm10
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3543
FPLIST
61:
M (first elastic-plastic material parameter)
62:
N (second elastic-plastic material parameter)
C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Data inserted into six locations starting with STITM. If a value is already in one of these locations, it will be
redefined. A blank retains the previous value.
Notes
Defines the fatigue alternating stress (S) vs. cycles (N) table and the design stress-intensity value (Sm) vs. temperature (T) table. May also be used to modify any previously stored property tables. Log-log interpolation is used
in the S vs. N table and linear interpolation is used in the Sm vs. T table. Cycles and temperatures must be input
in ascending order; S and Sm values in descending order. Table values must be supplied in pairs, i.e., every N
entry must have a corresponding S entry, etc. Not all property pairs per curve need be used. If no S vs. N table is
defined, the fatigue evaluation will not produce usage factor results. See the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide for
details.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Property Table>Elas-plas Par
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Property Table>Erase Tables
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Property Table>S-N Table
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Property Table>Sm_T Table
FPLIST
Lists the property table stored for fatigue evaluation.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Property Table>List Tables
FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5, FREQ6, FREQ7, FREQ8, FREQ9
Defines the frequency points for the SV vs. FREQ tables.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5, FREQ6, FREQ7, FREQ8, FREQ9
Frequency points for SV vs. FREQ tables. Values must be in ascending order. Log-log interpolation will be
used between frequency points. FREQ1 should be greater than zero. Units are cycles/time.
3544
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FS
Command Default
No frequency table.
Notes
Repeat FREQ command for additional frequency points (20 maximum). Values are added after the last nonzero
frequency. If all fields (FREQ1 -- FREQ9) are blank, erase SV vs. FREQ tables.
Frequencies must be in ascending order. Use STAT command to list current frequency points. Spectral values
are input with the SV command and interpreted according to the SVTYP command. Applies only to the SPRS
(single-point) option of the SPOPT command. See the PSDFRQ command for frequency input with the MPRS
(multi-point) option.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Erase Table
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Freq Table
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Erase Table
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Freq Table
FS, NODE, NEV, NLOD, STITM, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Stores fatigue stress components at a node.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE
Node number corresponding to this location. Used only to associate a node with a new location or to find
an existing location.
NEV
Event number to be associated with these stresses (defaults to 1).
NLOD
Loading number to be associated with these stresses (defaults to 1).
STITM
Starting item number for entering stresses (defaults to 1). If 1, data input in field C1 of this command is
entered as the first item in the list; if 7, data input in field C1 of this command is entered as the seventh item
in the list; etc. Items are as follows:
1-6:
SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, SXZ total stress components
7:
Temperature
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3545
FSAN
8-13:
SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, SXZ membrane-plus-bending stress components.
C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Stresses assigned to six locations starting with STITM. If a value is already in one of these locations, it will be
redefined. A blank retains the previous value (except in the C1 field, which resets the STITM item to zero).
Notes
Stores fatigue stress components at a node as input on this command instead of from the current data in the
database. Stresses are stored according to the event number and loading number specified. The location is associated with that previously defined for this node [FL] or else it is automatically defined. May also be used to
modify any previously stored stress components. Stresses input with this command should be consistent with
the global coordinate system for any FSNODE or FSSECT stresses used at the same location.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Store Stresses>Specified Val
FSAN, Key
Turns a fluid-solid interaction analysis on or off.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Fluid-structure analysis key:
ON
Activates a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
OFF
Deactivates a fluid-solid interaction analysis (default).
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Options
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Options
3546
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FSCO
FSCALE, RFACT, IFACT
Scales force load values in the database.
SOLUTION: FE Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
RFACT
Scale factor for the real component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale factor.
IFACT
Scale factor for the imaginary component. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale
factor.
Notes
Scales force load (force, heat flow, etc.) values in the database. Scaling applies to the previously defined values
for the selected nodes [NSEL] and the selected force labels [DOFSEL]. Issue FLIST command to review results.
Solid model boundary conditions are not scaled by this command, but boundary conditions on the FE model
are scaled.
Note Such scaled FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by unscaled solid model boundary
conditions if a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
FSCALE does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Forces
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Forces
FSCO, Lab, VALUE
Sets convergence values for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
Valid label. Force labels: FX, FY, FZ. Displacement labels: UX, UY, UZ. Temperature label: TEMP. Heat flux label:
HFLU. If Lab = ALL, FSCO applies the convergence value to all eight variables.
VALUE
Convergence value. Defaults to 0.0001.
Notes
FSCO sets convergence values for variables at the fluid-solid interface.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3547
FSDELE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Convergence
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Convergence
FSDELE, NLOC, NEV, NLOD
Deletes a stress condition for a fatigue location, event, and loading.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Delete stresses associated with location NLOC. Defaults to zero.
NEV
Delete stresses associated with event NEV. Defaults to zero.
NLOD
Delete stresses associated with loading NLOD. Defaults to zero.
Notes
Deletes a stress condition stored for a particular fatigue location, event, and loading. Use FE command to delete
all stresses for a particular event or FL command to delete all stresses for a particular location.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Store Stresses>Dele Stresses
FSDT, INC
Sets time step increment for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
INC
Time step increment. Defaults to 1.
Notes
You cannot use automatic time stepping (AUTOTS) in a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Time
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Time
3548
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FSIT
FSIN, Opt
Specifies the interface load transfer option for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Opt
Interface load transfer option:
CONS
Conservative formulation for load transfer.
NONC
Nonconservative formulation for load transfer.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Options
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Options
FSIT, Val1
Sets the maximum number of stagger iterations for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Val1
Maximum number of iterations. Defaults to 10.
Notes
The maximum number of iterations applies to each time step in the fluid-solid interaction analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Iterations
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Iterations
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3549
FSLIST
FSLIST, NLOC1, NLOC2, NINC, NEV, NLOD
Lists the stresses stored for fatigue evaluation.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC1, NLOC2, NINC
List stresses from NLOC1 (defaults to 1) to NLOC2 (defaults to NLOC1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NLOC1
= ALL, NLOC2 and NINC are ignored and stresses for all locations are listed.
NEV
Event number for stress listing (defaults to ALL).
NLOD
Loading number for stress listing (defaults to ALL).
Notes
Stresses may be listed per location, per event, per loading, or per stress condition. Use FELIST and FLLIST if only
event and location parameters (no stresses) are to be listed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Store Stresses>List Stresses
FSNODE, NODE, NEV, NLOD
Calculates and stores the stress components at a node for fatigue.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE
Node number for which stress components are stored.
NEV
Event number to be associated with these stresses (defaults to 1).
NLOD
Loading number to be associated with these stresses (defaults to 1).
Notes
Calculates and stores the total stress components at a specified node for fatigue. Stresses are stored according
to the event number and loading number specified. The location is associated with that previously defined for
this node [FL] or else it is automatically defined. Stresses are stored as six total components (SX through SYZ).
Temperature is also stored along with the total stress components. Calculations are made from the stresses
currently in the database (last *SET or LCASE command). Stresses stored are in global Cartesian coordinates,
regardless of the active results coordinate system [RSYS]. The FSLIST command may be used to list stresses. The
FS command can be used to modify stored stresses.
3550
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FSOU
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Store Stresses>From rst File
FSOR, First, Second
Specifies analysis order for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
First
First analysis:
FLUID
Fluid analysis (default).
SOLID
Solid analysis.
Second
Second analysis:
FLUID
Fluid analysis.
SOLID
Solid analysis (default).
Notes
FSOR,SOLID,FLUID can be entered as FSOR,SOLID. FSOR,FLUID,SOLID can be entered as FSOR,FLUID.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Options
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Options
FSOU, Freq
Sets output frequency for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Freq
Output frequency:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3551
FSPLOT
N
Write solution every Nth (and the last) time step.
ALL
Write solution every time step.
Notes
A FSOU setting overrides any other output frequency setting (OUTRES, FLDATA2, FLDATA4, FLDATA4A, or
FLDATA5).
To select the solution items, use the OUTRES command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Convergence
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Convergence
FSPLOT, NLOC, NEV, ITEM
Displays a fatigue stress item for a fatigue location and event.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Display stresses associated with location NLOC.
NEV
Display stresses associated with event NEV.
ITEM
Display stresses associated with item number ITEM. Items are as follows:
16
SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, SXZ total stress components
7
Temperature
813
SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, SXZ membrane-plus-bending stress components.
Notes
Displays a fatigue stress item as a function of loading number for a particular fatigue location and event.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Store Stresses>Plot Stresses
3552
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FSRS
FSRE, Lab, VALUE
Sets relaxation values for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
Valid label. Force label: FORC. Displacement label: DISP. Temperature label: TEMP. Heat flux label: HFLU. Velocity label: VELO. If Lab = ALL, FSRE applies the relaxation value to all variables.
VALUE
Relaxation value.
Notes
FSRE sets relaxation values for variables at the fluid-solid interface.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Relaxation
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Relaxation
FSRS, Opt, VALUE
Specifies time or load step number for restart of a fluid-structure interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Opt
Restart option:
TIME
Value is the time for restart.
LDSTEP
Value is the load step number for restart.
VALUE
Time or load step number.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Restart
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Restart
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3553
FSSECT
FSSECT, RHO, NEV, NLOD, KBR
Calculates and stores total linearized stress components.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
RHO
In-plane (X-Y) average radius of curvature of the inside and outside surfaces of an axisymmetric section. If
zero (or blank), a plane or 3-D structure is assumed. If nonzero, an axisymmetric structure is assumed. Use a
suitably large number (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference) or use -1 for an axisymmetric straight section.
NEV
Event number to be associated with these stresses (defaults to 1).
NLOD
Loading number to be associated with these stresses (defaults to 1).
KBR
For an axisymmetric analysis (RHOp0):
0
Include the thickness-direction bending stresses
1
Ignore the thickness-direction bending stresses
Notes
Calculates and stores the total linearized stress components at the ends of a section path [PATH] (as defined by
the first two nodes with the PPATH command). The path must be entirely within the selected elements (that is,
there must not be any element gaps along the path). Stresses are stored according to the fatigue event number
and loading number specified. Locations (one for each node) are associated with those previously defined for
these nodes [FL] or else they are automatically defined. Stresses are separated into six total components (SX
through SXZ) and six membrane-plus-bending (SX through SXZ) components. The temperature at each end
point is also stored along with the total stress components. Calculations are made from the stresses currently in
the database (last *SET or LCASE command). Stresses are stored as section coordinate components if axisymmetric or as global Cartesian coordinate components otherwise, regardless of the active results coordinate system
[RSYS]. The FSLIST command may be used to list stresses. The FS command can be used to modify stored
stresses. See also the PRSECT and PLSECT commands for similar calculations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Store Stresses>At Cross Sect
FSSOLV, Fluitit, Strutit, DIMN, Mcomp, Xcomp, FORCTOL, MOMETOL, STRUTOL, MXLOOP, FLUITER, RUSEKY, RESTKY
Performs a coupled steady-state fluid-structural analysis.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Fluitit
Title of the fluid analysis physics file as assigned by the PHYSICS command.
3554
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FSSOLV
Strutit
Title of the structural physics file as assigned by the PHYSICS command.
DIMN
Model dimensionality (a default is not allowed):
2
2-D model.
3
3-D model.
Mcomp
Component name of the region to be morphed. For 2-D models, the component may be elements or areas.
For 3-D models, the component may be elements or volumes. A component must be specified. You must
enclose name-strings in single quotes in the FSSOLV command line.
Xcomp
Component name of entities excluded from morphing. In the 2-D case, it is the component name for the
lines excluded from morphing. In the 3-D case, it is component name for the areas excluded from morphing.
Defaults to exterior non-shared entities (see the DAMORPH, DVMORPH, and DEMORPH commands). You
must enclose name-strings in single quotes in the FSSOLV command line.
FORCTOL
Fluid force convergence tolerance. Defaults to .005 (0.5%) of the value computed from the previous CFD
run. If less than zero, the convergence criteria based on fluid analysis results is turned off.
MOMETOL
Fluid moment convergence tolerance. Defaults to .005 (0.5%) of the value computed from the previous CFD
run. If less than zero, the convergence criteria based on fluid analysis results is turned off.
STRUTOL
Structural maximum displacement convergence tolerance. Defaults to .005 (.5%) of the value computed
from the previous iteration. If less than zero, the convergence criteria base on structural results is turned off.
MXLOOP
Maximum number of allowable solution recursive loops. A single pass through both a fluid analysis and
structural analysis constitutes one loop. Defaults to 100.
FLUITER
Number of global FLOTRAN iterations to be performed on the second and subsequent passes through
FLOTRAN during the fluid-structure sequential solution. This option controls the FLDATA, ITER, EXEC command. The default value for FLUITER is taken from the value set in the fluid physics file.
RUSEKY
Reuse flag option:
1
Assumes initial run of FSSOLV using base geometry for the first fluid solution.
>1
Assumes FSSOLV run is a continuation of a previous ESSOLV run, whereby the morphed geometry is
used for the initial fluid simulation.
RESTKY
Structural restart key.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3555
FSSPARM
0
Use static solution option for structural solution.
1
Use static restart solution option for structural solution.
Notes
FSSOLV invokes an ANSYS macro which automatically performs a coupled fluid-structural analysis. FORCTOL
and MOMETOL represent the tolerance of the total fluid force and moment exerted on the structure. The moment
is taken about the global origin. Force and moment are computed using the INTSRF command. The macro displays
periodic updates of the convergence.
Use RUSEKY > 1 for solving multiple FSSOLV simulations for different excitation levels. Do not issue the SAVE
command to save the database between FSSOLV calls.
For nonlinear structural solutions, the structural restart option (RESTKY>0) may improve solution time by starting
from the previous converged structural solution.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Coupled Solvers>Fluid/struc
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Coupled Solvers>Fluid/struc
FSSPARM, PORT1, PORT2
Calculates reflection and transmission properties of a frequency selective surface.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
PORT1
Port number of input port. Defaults to 1.
PORT2
Port number of output port. Defaults to 1.
Notes
FSSPARM calculates reflection and transmission coefficients, power reflection and transmission coefficients,
and return and insertion losses of a frequency selective surface.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Port>FSS Parameters
3556
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FSTR
FSSTAT
Lists the settings for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Status
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Status
FSTI, ENDTIME, LOADTIME
Sets end time and load time for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
ENDTIME
Time at end of fluid-solid interaction analysis. Defaults to 1.
LOADTIME
Time to start load transfer for fluid-solid interaction analysis. Defaults to 0.
Notes
A FSTI setting overrides any other end time setting (TIME or FLDATA4).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Time
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Time
FSTR, Field, Type
Specifies static or transient analyses for a fluid-solid interaction analysis.
SOLUTION: Fluid-Structure Interaction
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Field
Analysis field:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3557
FSUM
FLUID
Fluid analysis.
SOLID
Solid analysis.
Type
Analysis type:
TRAN
Transient analysis (default).
STAT
Static analysis.
Notes
A FSTR specification overrides any other specification of analysis type (ANTYPE or FLDATA1).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FSI Set Up>Options
Main Menu>Solution>FSI Set Up>Options
FSUM, LAB, ITEM
Sums the nodal force and moment contributions of elements.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LAB
Coordinate system in which to perform summation.
(blank)
Sum all nodal forces in global Cartesian coordinate system (default).
RSYS
Sum all nodal forces in the currently active RSYS coordinate system.
ITEM
Selected set of nodes.
(blank)
Sum all nodal forces for all selected nodes (default), excluding contact elements.
CONT
Sum all nodal forces for contact nodes only.
BOTH
Sum all nodal forces for all selected nodes, including contact elements.
3558
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FTCALC
Notes
Sums and prints, in each component direction for the total selected node set, the nodal force and moment
contributions of the selected elements attached to the node set. Selecting a subset of nodes [NSEL] and then
issuing this command will give the total force acting on that set of nodes (default), excluding surface-to-surface
contact elements (TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, and CONTA174). Setting ITEM =
CONT sums the nodal forces and moment contributions of the selected contact elements (surface-to-surface
only for CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, and CONTA174). Setting ITEM = BOTH sums the nodal forces for all
selected nodes, including contact elements. Nodal forces associated with surface loads are not included. The
effects of nodal coupling and constraint equations are ignored. Moment summations are about the global origin
unless another point is specified with the SPOINT command. This vector sum is printed in the global Cartesian
system unless it is transformed [RSYS] and a point is specified with the SPOINT command. By default, the sum
is done in global Cartesian, and the resulting vector is transformed to the requested system.
The LAB = RSYS option transforms each of the nodal forces into the active coordinate system before summing
and printing. The FORCE command can be used to specify which component (static, damping, inertia, or total)
of the nodal load is to be used. This command output is included in the NFORCE command.
This command should not be used with axisymmetric elements.
Using with the NLGEOM Command
If you have activated large deflection (via the NLGEOM,ON command), the FSUM command generates the following message:
Summations based on final geometry and
will not agree with solution reactions.
The message warns that the moment reactions are incorrect. When computing moment reactions, the command
assumes that the summation of rotations applies; however, it does not apply for large rotations, which require
pseudovector representation to sum the rotations.
In contrast, the results for force reactions will be correct because they depend upon linear displacement vectors
(which can be added).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Nodal Calcs>Total Force Sum
FTCALC, NLOC, NODE
Performs fatigue calculations for a particular node location.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Location number of stress conditions to be used for fatigue calculation.
NODE
Node number (used only for convenience if NLOC is not input).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3559
FTRAN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Calculate Fatig
FTRAN
Transfers solid model forces to the finite element model.
SOLUTION: Solid Forces
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Forces are transferred only from selected keypoints to selected nodes. The FTRAN operation is also done if the
SBCTRAN command is issued or automatically done upon initiation of the solution calculations [SOLVE].
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Forces
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Forces
FTSIZE, MXLOC, MXEV, MXLOD
Defines the fatigue data storage array.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
MXLOC
Maximum number of fatigue locations (defaults to 5).
MXEV
Maximum number of fatigue events (defaults to 10).
MXLOD
Maximum number of loadings in each event (defaults to 3).
Command Default
5 locations, 10 events, 3 loadings.
Notes
Defines the size and erases the stress conditions for the fatigue data storage array. A stress condition is a loading
(stresses) at a particular location (node) for a particular event. Size is defined in terms of the maximum number
of locations, events, and loadings. The array size cannot be changed once data storage has begun (without
erasing all previously stored data). If a size change is necessary, see the FTWRITE command.
3560
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/FTYPE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Size Settings
FTWRITE, Fname, Ext, -Writes all currently stored fatigue data on a file.
POST1: Fatigue
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to FATG if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Data are written in terms of the equivalent POST1 fatigue commands [FTSIZE, FL, FS, etc.] which you can
then edit and resubmit to POST1 (with a /INPUT command).
Once you have created a fatigue data file, each subsequent use of the FTWRITE command overwrites the
contents of that file.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Fatigue>Write Fatig Data
/FTYPE, Ident, Type
Assigns an external or internal type to a binary file.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Ident
ANSYS file name identifier. Valid identifiers are: EMAT, ESAV, FULL, REDM, SUB, MODE, TRI, DSUB, USUB, EROT,
OSAV, and SELD. See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for file descriptions. If ALL, apply type to all valid files.
Type
Type key:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3561
FVMESH
EXT
External type file.
INT
Internal type file.
Command Default
Type external.
Notes
Binary files may be of type external or internal. Internal files are unformatted and usually use the system's default
bit representation of data. External files are unformatted and use 2's complement integer representation and
IEEE double precision (64 bit) representation. Some computer systems use the external representation for their
internal files. See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. Binary files with an external representation are
transportable between different computer systems, whereas binary files with an internal representation are not.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>ANSYS File Options
FVMESH, KEEP
Generates nodes and tetrahedral volume elements from detached exterior area elements (facets).
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
KEEP
Specifies whether to keep the area elements after the tetrahedral meshing operation is complete.
0
Delete area elements (default).
1
Keep area elements.
Notes
The FVMESH command generates a tetrahedral volume mesh from a selected set of detached exterior area
elements (facets). (Detached elements have no solid model associativity.) The area elements can be triangularshaped, quadrilateral-shaped, or a mixture of the two.
The FVMESH command is in contrast to the VMESH command, which requires a volume to be input.
The main tetrahedra mesher [MOPT,VMESH,MAIN] is the only tetrahedra mesher that supports the FVMESH
command. The alternate tetrahedra mesher [MOPT,VMESH,ALTERNATE] does not support FVMESH.
Tetrahedral mesh expansion [MOPT,TETEXPND,Value] is supported for both the FVMESH and VMESH commands.
Tet-mesh expansion is the only mesh control supported by FVMESH.
3562
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
FVMESH
Triangle- or quadrilateral-shaped elements may be used as input to the FVMESH command. Where quadrilaterals
are used, the default behavior is for the pyramid-shaped elements to be formed at the boundary when the appropriate element type is specified. See the MOPT,PYRA command for details.
The FVMESH command does not support multiple "volumes." If you have multiple volumes in your model, select
the surface elements for one "volume," while making sure that the surface elements for the other volumes are
deselected. Then use FVMESH to generate a mesh for the first volume. Continue this procedure by selecting
one volume at a time and meshing it, until all of the volumes in the model have been meshed.
If an error occurs during the meshing operation, the area elements are kept even if KEEP = 0.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Tet Mesh From>Area Elements
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3563
3564
G Commands
GAP
Specifies "Reduced transient gap conditions" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Gap Conditions
GAPF, NVAR, NUM, Name
Defines the gap force data to be stored in a variable.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). Overwrites any existing results
for this variable.
NUM
Number identifying gap number for which the gap force is to be stored. Issue the GPLIST command to display
gap numbers.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the item on the printout and displays (defaults to the name GAPF).
Notes
Defines the gap force data to be stored in a variable. Applicable only to the expansion pass of the reduced or
mode superposition linear transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis. The data usually on Fname.RDSP.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GAPFINISH
GAPFINISH
Exits from the CAD import topology repair stage.
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Data will remain intact in the database, but the database is not automatically written to a file (use the SAVE
command to write the database to a file).
This command is part of the suite of commands available to find gaps and repair the topology of a model imported
from a CAD system through the Default IGES option. These commands are made available if, during a CAD import
operation, ANSYS detects topological defects (small gaps, large holes, or overlapping entities). You cannot use
the GAPMERGE command on a model after issuing the GAPFINISH command; however, you can continue to
repair the model with the geometry repair commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Finish
GAPLIST, Lab
Lists all joined or disjoined lines in a model (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label defining the type of plot:
OPEN
Lists all disjoined edges. This is the default option.
CLOSED
Lists all seam lines that are currently sewn to adjacent areas.
Notes
Disjoined lines are those lines which have only one area attached to them. Typically, these occur around gaps
in the model and should be merged with adjacent disjoined lines using the GAPMERGE command (topological
repair) or ARFILL command (geometry repair).
This command is available for both topological and geometric repair for models imported from CAD files through
the Default IGES option. If topological repair is active, you can specify what is listed through the GAPOPT,OESELE
command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Lst Model Gaps>Close Edges
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Lst Model Gaps>Open Edges
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Lst Model Gaps>Close Edges
3566
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GAPOPT
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Lst Model Gaps>Open Edges
GAPMERGE, Lab, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Merges adjacent disjoined lines (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label defining the type of merge operation.
TOLER
Disjoined lines are merged if they are within the tolerance factor specified by the GAPOPT command.
ITER
Disjoined lines are merged through an iterative merging process, where a series of merges occur starting
with the tolerance factor specified in VAL1 until the value specified in VAL2 is reached. The merges occur
at increments specified through VAL3. By default, VAL1 is set to its minimum value (1), VAL2 is set to its
maximum value (10), and VAL3 is set to 1.
Notes
While the Lab = ITER options provides a robust, automatic method for "sewing" gaps, it also requires considerable
processing.
This command is part of the suite of commands available to repair the topology of a model imported from CAD
systems through the Default IGES option (see Importing Solid Models in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide).
These commands are made available if, during a CAD import operation, ANSYS detects topological defects (small
gaps, large holes, or overlapping entities). You cannot use the topological repair commands on a model after
issuing the GAPFINISH command; however, you can continue to repair the model with the geometry commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Mrg Model Gaps>By Tolerance
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Mrg Model Gaps>Iterative
GAPOPT, Lab, Value
Sets preferences for the CAD import repair commands.
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label Identifying the preference set by the command. The meaning of Value varies depending on Lab.
TOLER
Set tolerance for the GAPMERGE (used only for manual, not iterative, merging), GAPLIST, and GAPPLOT
commands as a factor, defined by Value, times the default tolerance. By default, Value is set to its
minimum value.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3567
GAPPLOT
OESELE
Determines what will be displayed by the GAPLIST and GAPPLOT commands. Value can be:
ALL
GAPLIST and GAPPLOT will display all currently existing disjoined edges with both small gaps and
large holes. This is the default option.
MERGE
GAPLIST and GAPPLOT will display all open edges that can be merged with the current tolerance.
REMAIN
GAPLIST and GAPPLOT will display all open edges that will remain after merging is performed using
the current tolerance.
Value
Additional input value described under Lab.
Notes
This command is used for the topological repair of models imported from CAD files through the Default IGES
option. If no previous defeaturing has been done, setting the tolerance will automatically merge all gaps by the
specified value.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Preferences
GAPPLOT, Lab
Plots all joined or disjoined lines (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label defining the type of plot:
OPEN
Plots disjoined edges. This is the default option.
CLOSED
Plots all edge lines that are currently sewn to adjacent areas.
ALL
Plots all line segments (both joined and disjoined). Disjoined lines plot in a different color.
Notes
Disjoined lines are those lines which have only one area attached to them. Typically, these occur around gaps
in the model and should be merged with adjacent disjoined lines using the GAPMERGE (topological repair) or
ARFILL (geometry repair) command.
3568
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GAUGE
This command is available for both topological and geometric repair for models imported from CAD files through
the Default IGES option. If topological repair is active, you can specify what is plotted through the GAPOPT,OESELE
command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Plt Model Gaps>Closed Edges
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Plt Model Gaps>Open Edges
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Plt Model Gaps>Opn & Closed
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Plt Model Gaps>Closed Edges
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Plt Model Gaps>Open Edges
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Plt Model Gaps>Opn & Closed
GAUGE, Opt
Gauges the problem domain for an edge-element formulation.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Opt
Type of gauging performed:
TREE
Perform tree gauging of the edge values (default)
OFF
Do not gauge the edge values
Notes
The GAUGE command, required for electromagnetic analyses using an edge potential formulation, gauges the
problem domain. The ANSYS program performs gauging over all selected elements and nodes to produce a
minimal unique degree of freedom set for solution. By default, gauging is performed at the solver level for each
solution [SOLVE command or MAGSOLV command]. Gauging sets edge values to zero on the tree branches of
a graph. The ANSYS program removes these additional constraints after obtaining the solution; therefore, gauging
is transparent to users. The GAUGE,OFF option is intended for expert ANSYS users who want to create their own
gauging instead of using default tree gauging.
For more information about gauging, see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>Gauging
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>Gauging
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3569
/GCMD
/GCMD, WN, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10, Lab11, Lab12
Controls the type of element or graph display used for the GPLOT command.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which this command applies (defaults to 1)
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10, Lab11, Lab12
Command labels (for example, PLNSOL,S,X)
Notes
This command controls the type of element or graph display that appears when you issue the GPLOT command
when the /GTYPE,,(ELEM or GRPH) entity type is active. If you have multiple plotting windows enabled, you can
also use /GCMD to select one window when you wish to edit its contents.
For related information, see the descriptions of the GPLOT and /GTYPE commands in this manual.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Multi-Plot Contrls
/GCOLUMN, CURVE, STRING
Allows the user to apply a label to a specified curve.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
CURVE
Curve number on which label will be applied (integer value between 1 and 10).
STRING
Name or designation that will be applied to the curve (8 characters max).
Notes
This command is used for an array parameter plot (a plot created by the *VPLOT command). Normally the label
for curve 1 is COL 1, the label for curve 2 is COL 2 and so on; the column number is the field containing the
dependent variables for that particular curve. Issuing /GCOLUMN,CURVE, with no string value specified resets
the label to the original value.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Curve
3570
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GEOM
GENOPT
Specifies "General options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>General Options
GEOM, K2D, NDIV
Defines the geometry specifications for the radiation matrix calculation.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
K2D
Dimensionality key:
0
3-D geometry
1
2-D geometry (plane or axisymmetric)
NDIV
Number of divisions in an axisymmetric model. Used only with K2D = 1. Defaults to 0 (2-D plane). The 2-D
model is internally expanded to a 3-D model based on the number of divisions specified (6 NDIV 90).
For example, NDIV of 6 is internally represented by six 60 sections.
Command Default
3-D geometry.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Matrix Method>Other Settings
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3571
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
Specifies "Geometry" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Solid Model
/GFILE, SIZE
Specifies the pixel resolution on Z-buffered graphics files.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SIZE
Pixel resolution. Defaults to a pixel resolution of 800. Valid values are from 256 to 2400.
Command Default
800 pixels
Notes
Defines the pixel resolution on subsequently written graphics files (Jobname.GRPH) for software Z-buffered
displays [/TYPE]. Lowering the pixel resolution produces a fuzzier image; increasing the resolution produces
a sharper image but takes a little longer.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To GRPH File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To PSCR File
3572
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GLINE
/GFORMAT, Ftype, NWIDTH, DSIGNF
Specifies the format for the graphical display of numbers.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Ftype
FORTRAN format types (G is the default if this field is left blank.)
G
Gxx.yy. xx and yy are described below.
F
Fxx.yy
E
Exx.yy
NWIDTH
Total width (12 maximum) of the field (the xx in Ftype). Defaults to 12.
DSIGNF
Number of digits after the decimal point (yy in F or E format) or number of significant digits in G format.
Range is 1 to xx-6 for Ftype = G or E; and 0 to xx-3 for Ftype = F. The default is a function of Ftype and
NWIDTH.
Notes
Lets you control the format of the graphical display of floating point numbers. Issue /GFORMAT,STAT to display
the current settings; issue /GFORMAT,DEFA to let ANSYS choose the format for the graphical display of floating
numbers.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Floating Point Format
/GLINE, WN, STYLE
Specifies the element outline style.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
STYLE
Outline key:
0
Solid element outlines (default)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3573
/GMARKER
1
Dashed element outlines
-1
No element outlines
Command Default
Solid element outlines
Notes
Determines the element outline style. Often used when node numbers are displayed to prevent element lines
from overwriting node numbers.
Unless you are using an OpenGL or Starbase driver, the dashed element outline option (GLINE,WN,1) is not
available in the following situations:
Z-buffered displays (/TYPE,WN,6).
Capped Z-buffered displays (/TYPE,WN,7).
Qslice Z-buffered displays (/TYPE,WN,8).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Edge Options
/GMARKER, CURVE, KEY, INCR
Specifies the curve marking style.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
CURVE
Curve number markers will be applied on (integer value between 1 and 10).
KEY
Marker key:
0
No markers will be applied (default).
1
TRIANGLES will be applied.
2
SQUARES will be applied.
3
DIAMONDS will be applied.
3574
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GMATRIX
4
CROSSES will be applied.
INCR
Determines the curve marking frequency. (a whole number value between 1 and 255). If INCR = 1, markers
are displayed at every data point on the curve. If INCR = 2 then markers are displayed at every second data
point. If INCR = 3 then they are displayed at every third data point.
Command Default
No markers will be applied.
Notes
The user-specified markers will not be drawn when the area under the curve is color-filled (/GROPT, FILL).
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Curve
GMATRIX, SYMFAC, Condname, NUMCOND, --, Matrixname
Performs electric field solutions and calculates the self and mutual conductance between multiple conductors.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
SYMFAC
Geometric symmetry factor. Conductance values are scaled by this factor which represents the fraction of
the total device modeled. Defaults to 1.
Condname
Alphanumeric prefix identifier used in defining named conductor components.
NUMCOND
Total number of components. If a ground is modeled, it is to be included as a component.
--
Unused field.
Matrixname
Array name for computed conductance matrix. Defaults to GMATRIX.
Notes
To invoke the GMATRIX macro, the exterior nodes of each conductor must be grouped into individual components
using the CM command. Each set of independent components is assigned a component name with a common
prefix followed by the conductor number. A conductor system with a ground must also include the ground
nodes as a component. The ground component is numbered last in the component name sequence.
A ground conductance matrix is a matrix relating current to a voltage vector. A ground matrix cannot be applied
to a circuit modeler such as SPICE. The lumped conductance matrix is a matrix formed by a combination of
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3575
GMFACE
lumped "arrangements" of voltage differences between conductors. You can use the lumped conductance terms
in a circuit modeler such as SPICE to represent conductances between conductors.
You must enclose all name-strings in single quotes in the GMATRIX command line.
GMATRIX works with the following elements:
SOLID5 (KEYOPT(1) = 9)
SOLID98 (KEYOPT(1) = 9)
LINK68
PLANE230
SOLID231
SOLID232
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Component Based>Self/Mutual conductance
GMFACE, Lab, N
Specifies the facet representation used to form solid models.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid Labels:
FINE
Value that determines how coarse the facets will be.
N
An integer value between one (small) and ten (large) that determines the tolerances that will be applied to
the creation of arcs and surfaces. Ten will create many facets, which may in turn cause ANSYS to run very
slowly. One will create fewer facets, which may in turn cause larger tolerance errors.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Solid Model Facets
3576
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GOPR
/GO
Reactivates suppressed printout.
SESSION: List Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Reactivates printout suppressed with the /NOPR command without producing any output. The /GOPR command
has the same function except that it also produces a command response from the program.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Rigid Region
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
/GOLIST
Reactivates the suppressed data input listing.
SESSION: List Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Reactivates printout of the data input listing suppressed with /NOLIST.
This command is valid in any processor, but only within a batch run [/BATCH].
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
/GOPR
Reactivates suppressed printout.
SESSION: List Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Reactivates printout suppressed with the /NOPR command. The /GO command has the same function except
that it does not produce a command response from the program.
This command is valid in any processor.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3577
GP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Time Controls>Time Step Prediction
GP, NODE1, NODE2, Lab, STIF, GAP, DAMP
Defines a gap condition for transient analyses.
SOLUTION: Gap Conditions
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE1
Node I of gap. If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid
only in the GUI).
NODE2
Node J of gap (must be different from NODE1). Non-grounded gap nodes must be defined as master degrees
of freedom or be unconstrained, active DOF in a full analysis type. Grounded gap nodes (those not defined
as MDOF) need not appear elsewhere in the model.
Lab
Direction of gap action in the nodal coordinate system (implied from the following force labels): FX, FY, FZ,
MX, MY, MZ.
STIF
Stiffness (Force/Length) of closed gap (may be positive or negative).
Note High stiffness requires a small integration time step for numerical stability.
GAP
Initial size of gap. A zero (or positive) value assumes an initially open gap. A negative value defines an interference condition. For a rotational gap, GAP should be in radians.
DAMP
Damping coefficient (Force*Time/Length) of closed gap using pseudo velocity (Newmark finite difference
expansion scheme).
Notes
Defines a gap condition for the reduced or mode superposition transient (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis. If used in
SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
Repeat GP command for additional gap conditions. Gaps are numbered sequentially as input.
Note Gaps may be renumbered by the program during the solution (see output listing)
The reduced or mode superposition transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS and TRNOPT,REDUC or MSUP) does not
allow gap action with the standard ANSYS gap elements. Gap conditions, however, producing the same effect,
may be defined. The gap condition simulates the basic gap action of the COMBIN40 element. The gap condition
is treated as an explicit force (equal to the interference times contact stiffness) and affects only the load vector
calculation and not the reduced stiffness matrix. The interference is calculated from the displacement extrapolated
from the previous time points. A gap condition may be defined between a master degree of freedom and ground
or another master degree of freedom. When a non-reduced mode extraction method is used, a master degree
of freedom implies an unconstrained, active degree of freedom. Gap nodes not defined as master degrees of
3578
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GPDELE
freedom or attached to an element are assumed to be grounded. Grounded gap nodes need not be given a
spatial location nor do they need to be located on an element. Gap conditions may be defined in parallel (across
the same nodes), with varying gap and stiffness values, to simulate a nonlinear (piecewise) force-deflection curve.
The gap direction is determined from the force label input on the GP command, i.e., FX defines a translational
gap acting in the UX nodal degree of freedom direction, and MZ defines a rotational gap acting in the nodal
ROTZ degree of freedom direction. The actual degree of freedom directions available for a particular node depends
upon the degrees of freedom associated with the element types [ET] at that node. For example, degrees of
freedom available with BEAM3 elements are UX, UY, and ROTZ only (so that only gap labels FX, FY, and MZ are
valid).
If the coordinate systems of the nodes connecting the gap are rotated relative to each other, the same degree
of freedom may be in different directions. The gap, however, assumes only a one-dimensional action. Nodes I
and J may be anywhere in space (preferably coincident). No moment effects are included due to noncoincident
nodes. That is, if the nodes are offset from the line of action, moment equilibrium may not be satisfied.
The contact stiffness value represents the stiffness of the closed gap. Stiffness values are related to the integration
time step size and should be physically reasonable. High stiffness will require a small integration time step, otherwise, due to the displacement extrapolation, the solution may go unstable. Negative stiffness values may be
used with gaps in parallel to produce a decreasing force-deflection curve.
The gap conditions, if any, should be defined in the first load step. Appearances in succeeding load steps are
ignored. The order of specifying the gap nodes is important, i.e., a gap condition connecting two nodes will act
differently depending upon which node is specified first on the GP command. For example, for Node 1 at X =
0.0, Node 2 at X = 0.1, and the gap defined from Node 1 to 2, a displacement of Node 1 greater than Node 2 will
cause the gap to close. For the gap defined from Node 2 to 1, a displacement of Node 2 greater than Node 1 will
cause the gap to close (like a hook action). In general, the gap closes whenever the separation (defined as UJ UI + GAP) is negative. UJ is the displacement of node J, UI is the displacement of node I, and GAP is the input gap
value. The gap force output appears in the printout only for the time steps for which the gap is closed. A negative
spring force is always associated with a closed gap (even with the hook option).
The nonlinear gap damping provided through the DAMP field runs faster than a full transient analysis using a
gap element (COMBIN40). Only ANTYPE = TRANS and TRNOPT = MSUP allow the nonlinear gap damping action.
Damping conditions are ignored for the reduced transient analysis method.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Dynamic Gap Cond>Define
Main Menu>Solution>Dynamic Gap Cond>Define
GPDELE, GAP1, GAP2, GINC
Deletes gap conditions.
SOLUTION: Gap Conditions
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
GAP1, GAP2, GINC
Delete gap conditions from GAP1 to GAP2 (defaults to GAP1) in steps of GINC (defaults to 1).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3579
GPLIST
Notes
Deletes gap conditions defined with the GP command. Gap conditions following those deleted are automatically
compressed and renumbered. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Dynamic Gap Cond>Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Dynamic Gap Cond>Delete
GPLIST, GAP1, GAP2, GINC
Lists the gap conditions.
SOLUTION: Gap Conditions
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
GAP1, GAP2, GINC
List gap conditions from GAP1 to GAP2 (GAP2 defaults to GAP1) in steps of GINC (defaults to 1). If GAP1 = ALL
(default), GAP2 and GINC are ignored and all gap conditions are listed.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Dynamic Gap Cond>List All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Dynamic Gap Cond>List Specified
Main Menu>Solution>Dynamic Gap Cond>List All
Main Menu>Solution>Dynamic Gap Cond>List Specified
Utility Menu>List>Other>Gap Conditions
GPLOT
Controls general plotting.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This command displays all entity types as specified via the /GTYPE command. Only selected entities (NSEL, ESEL,
KSEL, LSEL, ASEL, VSEL) will be displayed. See the descriptions of the /GTYPE and /GCMD commands for methods
of setting the entity types displayed.
This command is valid in any processor.
3580
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GRAPHICS
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Multi-Plots
/GRAPHICS, Key
Defines the type of graphics display.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Key
Graphics key:
FULL
Display all model geometry and results.
POWER
Activate PowerGraphics (default when GUI is on).
Command Default
PowerGraphics ON (Key = POWER).
Notes
The /GRAPHICS command specifies the type of graphics display. Key = POWER activates the PowerGraphics
capability. PowerGraphics offers faster plotting than the Key = FULL option, and speeds up element, results,
area, line, and volume displays. PowerGraphics mode (the default) is automatically invoked when the GUI is accessed. This action supersedes all prior macros or start up routines (start.ans, config.ans, etc.). Full graphics mode
can be accessed only by issuing /GRAPHICS, FULL after the GUI is active.
Results values (both printed and plotted) may differ between the Key = FULL and Key = POWER options because
each option specifies a different set of data for averaging and display. For Key = FULL, all element and results
values (interior and surface) are included. For Key = POWER, only element and results values along the model
exterior surface are processed.
Caution: If you have specified one facet per element edge for PowerGraphics displays (via the /EFACET
command or via choices from the General Postproc or Utility Menus), PowerGraphics does not plot midside
nodes.
The /EFACET command is only applicable to element type displays. (See the descriptions of these commands
for more information.)
Maximum values shown in plots can differ from printed maximum values. This is due to different averaging
schemes used for plotted and printed maximum values.
PowerGraphics displays do not average at geometric discontinuities. The printouts in PowerGraphics will, however,
provide averaging information at geometric discontinuities if the models do not contain shell elements. Carefully
inspect the data you obtain at geometric discontinuities.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3581
/GRESUME
Note In Full Graphics mode, it is possible to deselect an individual node, select all elements (including
the element that contains that node), and then perform postprocessing calculations on those elements
and have that unselected node not be considered in those calculations. However, if PowerGraphics is
active, postprocessing always displays based on selected elements.
Commands that are not supported by PowerGraphics are listed below. These commands are executed using the
Key = FULL option, regardless of whether PowerGraphics is activated. Only certain options for /CTYPE, /EDGE,
/ESHAPE, *GET, /PNUM, /PSYMB, RSYS, SHELL, and *VGET are not supported by PowerGraphics. (See the descriptions of these commands for more information.)
/CTYPE
ESYS
/PBF
PRETAB
SHELL
DNSOL
*GET
PLCRACK
PRSECT
/SSCALE
/EDGE
LAYER
PLETAB
PRVECT
/SHRINK
ERNORM
/NORMAL
PLLS
/PSYMB
TALLOW
ESORT
NSEL
PLSECT
RSYS
*VGET
NSORT
/PNUM
SALLOW
*VPUT
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Hidden-Line Options
/GRESUME, Fname, Ext, -Sets graphics settings to the settings on a file.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to GSAV if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Causes a file to be read to reset the graphics slash (/) commands as they were at the last /GSAVE command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Restore Plot Ctrls
3582
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GROPT
/GRID, KEY
Selects the type of grid on graph displays.
GRAPHICS: Graphs
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Grid key:
0 (OFF)
No grid.
1 (ON)
Full grid (X and Y grid lines).
2 (X)
Partial grid (X grid lines only).
3 (Y)
Partial grid (Y grid lines only)
Command Default
No grid.
Notes
Selects the type of grid on graph displays. Graphs with multiple Y-axes can have multiple grids [/GRTYP]. The
grid of the first curve is also used as the background grid (above and behind the curve). Grids for other curves
are limited to be under the curves. See also /GTHK and /GROPT for other grid options.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Grid
/GROPT, Lab, KEY
Sets various line graph display options.
GRAPHICS: Graphs
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Apply display style as selected from the following labels:
AXDV
Axis division (tick) marks (defaults to KEY = ON).
AXNM
Axis scale numbers (defaults to KEY = ON, which puts numbers at the back plane of the graph). If KEY =
FRONT, numbers are on the front plane of the graph.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3583
/GROPT
AXNSC
Axis number size scale factor. Input the scale value for KEY (defaults to 1.0).
ASCAL
Automatic scaling of additional Y-axes for multi-curve [/GRTYP, 2 or 3] graphs (defaults to KEY = ON). If
KEY = OFF, use base Y-axis scaling (see the /YRANGE command).
LOGX
Log X scale (defaults to KEY = OFF (linear)).
LOGY
Log Y scale (applies only to the base Y axis) (defaults to KEY = OFF (linear)).
FILL
Color fill areas under curves (defaults to KEY = OFF).
CGRID
Superimpose background grid [/GRID] over areas under filled curves (defaults to KEY = OFF).
DIG1
Number of significant digits before decimal point for axis values. Input the value for KEY (defaults to 4).
DIG2
Number of significant digits after decimal point for axis values. Input the value for KEY (defaults to 3).
VIEW
View key for graph displays (defaults to KEY = OFF, in which case the view is (0,0,1) for 2-D graph displays
or (1,2,3) for 3-D graph displays). If KEY = ON, the view settings for graph displays are the same as the
view settings for the model.
REVX
Plots the values on the X-axis in reverse order.
REVY
Plots the values on the Y-axis in reverse order.
DIVX
Determines the number of divisions (grid markers) that will be plotted on the X axis.
DIVY
Determines the number of divisions (grid markers) that will be plotted on the Y axis.
LTYP
Determines whether ANSYS generated (KEY = 1) or system derived (KEY = 0) fonts will be used for the
axis labels.
CURL
Determines the position of the curve labels. If (KEY = 1), the curve label will be plotted in the legend
column, and the label will be displayed in the same color as the curve. If (KEY = 0) the curve labels will
be plotted near the curve. (default).
XAXO
When you use this label, the subsequent KEY value will determine an offset amount from the default
(along the bottom) location for the X axis. If KEY = 1.0, a full offset occurs (the X axis is moved to the top
of the graph). If KEY = 0.5, the axis is offset to the midpoint of the graph, and if KEY = 0 the axis remains
in the original position, along the bottom of the graph. For any offset, a grey copy of the original axis
(containing the axis numbering) remains at the original location.
YAXO
When you use this label, the subsequent KEY value will determine an offset amount from the default
(along the left side of the graph) location for the Y axis. If KEY = 1.0, a full offset occurs (the Y axis is moved
3584
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GROPT
to the right side of the graph). If KEY = 0.5, the axis is offset to the midpoint of the graph, and if KEY = 0
the axis remains in the original position, along the left side of the graph. For any offset, a gray copy of
the original axis (containing the axis numbering) remains at the original location.
KEY
Option values:
OFF (0)
Do not apply selected style.
ON (1)
Apply selected style.
nnnn
If Lab is DIG1 or DIG2, input the number of digits.
nn
If Lab is AXNSC, input the scale factor.
FRONT
If Lab is AXNM, FRONT may also be input.
Ndiv
If Lab is DIVX or DIVY, determines the number of divisions (1-99) that will be applied to the axis.
Kfont
If Lab is LTYP, Kfont is ON (1) or OFF(0). ON will use ANSYS generated fonts for the axis labels, while OFF
will use SYSTEM (Windows, X-system, etc.) fonts. The default value is ON (ANSYS fonts).
Notes
Sets various line graph display options. Issue /GROPT,STAT to display the current settings. Issue /GROPT,DEFA
to reset the default specifications. ANSYS informs you that graph view manipulation is inactive unless you have
issued the /GROPT,VIEW,ON command. See the /AXLAB, /GRTYP, /GRID, and /GTHK commands for other graph
control options.
Automatic scaling using the /XRANGE and /YRANGE commands will often yield inappropriate range values for
logarithmic scales (/GROPT, LOGX or /GROPT, LOGY).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Axes
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Curve
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Grid
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3585
GRP
GRP, SIGNIF, Label
Specifies the grouping mode combination method.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SIGNIF
Combine only those modes whose significance level exceeds the SIGNIF threshold. For single point, multipoint, or DDAM response (SPOPT,SPRS, MPRS or DDAM), the significance level of a mode is defined as the
mode coefficient of the mode, divided by the maximum mode coefficient of all modes. Any mode whose
significance level is less than SIGNIF is considered insignificant and is not contributed to the mode combinations. The higher the SIGNIF threshold, the fewer the number of modes combined. SIGNIF defaults to
0.001. If SIGNIF is specified as 0.0, it is taken as 0.0. (This mode combination method is not valid for SPOPT,PSD.)
Label
Label identifying the combined mode solution output.
DISP
Displacement solution (default). Displacements, stresses, forces, etc., are available.
VELO
Velocity solution. Velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc., are available.
ACEL
Acceleration solution. Accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc., are available.
Notes
The SIGNIF value set with this command (including the default value of 0.001) overrides the SIGNIF value set
with the MXPAND command.
This command is also valid for PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
3586
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GSAVE
/GRTYP, KAXIS
Selects single or multiple Y-axes graph displays.
GRAPHICS: Graphs
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KAXIS
Axis selection key:
0 or 1
Single Y-axis. Up to 10 curves scaled to a single Y-axis.
2
Additional Y-axes (one for each curve) (3 curves maximum). Allows better scaling of curves with widely
differing numbering ranges.
3
Same as 2 but with additional Y-axis and curves projected out of the plane (6 curves maximum). Allows
clearer display with an isometric view. The default view when KAXIS = 3 is View,1,1,2,3.
Command Default
Single Y-axis graph (except as noted for selection key 3).
Notes
The basic line graph has one or more curves plotted against the same Y and X axes. Multiple curve graphs can
also be plotted with individual Y axes and the same X axis. The Y axis of the first curve is referred to as the base
Y-axis and the Y axes of the other curves as additional Y axes. Curves are numbered sequentially from 1 (the base
curve) in the order in which they are displayed. See the /AXLAB, /GROPT, /GRID, and /GTHK commands for
other display options.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Axes
/GSAVE, Fname, Ext, -Saves graphics settings to a file for later use.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3587
GSBDATA
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to GSAV if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
This command does not save all graphics settings, but only those that may be reset by the /RESET command.
The database remains untouched. Use the /GRESUME command to read the file. Repeated use of the /GSAVE
command overwrites the previous data on the file. The following commands are saved by /GSAVE:
/ANGLE
/DSCALE
/GTHCK
/PSYMB
/VSCALE
/AXLAB
/EDGE
/GTYPE
/RATIO
/VUP
/CLABEL
/ESHAPE
/LIGHT
/SHRINK
/WINDOW
/COLOR
/FOCUS
/NORMAL
/SSCALE
/XRANGE
/CONTOUR
/GCMD
/NUMBER
/TRIAD
/YRANGE
/CPLANE
/GLINE
/PBC
/TRLCY
/CTYPE
/GRID
/PLOPTS
/TYPE
/CVAL
/GROPT
/PNUM
/VCONE
/DIST
/GRTYP
/PSF
/VIEW
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Save Plot Ctrls
GSBDATA, LabZ, VALUEZ, LabX, VALUEX, LabY, VALUEY
Specifies the constraints or applies the load at the ending point for generalized plane strain option.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
LabZ
Constraint or load at the ending point in the fiber Z direction.
F
Apply a force in the fiber direction (default).
LFIBER
Define a length change in the fiber direction.
VALUEZ
Value for LabZ. The default is zero.
LabX
Constraint or load on rotation about X.
3588
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GSGDATA
MX
Supply a moment to cause the rotation of the ending plane about X (default).
ROTX
Define a rotation angle (in radians) of the ending plane about X.
VALUEX
Value for LabX. The default is zero.
LabY
Constraint or load on rotation about Y
MY
Supply a moment to cause the rotation of the ending plane about Y (default).
ROTY
Define a rotation angle (in radians) of the ending plane about Y.
VALUEY
Value for LabY. The default is zero.
Notes
All inputs are in the global Cartesian coordinate system. For more information about the generalized plane strain
feature, see Generalized Plane Strain Option of 18x Solid Elements in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Gen Plane Strain
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Gen Plane Strain
GSGDATA, LFIBER, XREF, YREF, ROTX0, ROTY0
Specifies the reference point and defines the geometry in the fiber direction for the generalized plane
strain element option.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
LFIBER
Fiber length from the reference point. Defaults to 1.
XREF
X coordinate of the reference point. Defaults to zero.
YREF
Y coordinate of the reference point. Defaults to zero.
ROTX0
Rotation of the ending plane about X in radians Defaults to zero.
ROTY0
Rotation of the ending plane about Y in radians Defaults to zero.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3589
GSLIST
Notes
The ending point is automatically determined from the starting (reference) point and the geometry inputs. All
inputs are in the global Cartesian coordinate system. For more information about the generalized plane strain
feature, see Generalized Plane Strain Option of 18x Solid Elements in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Genl plane strn
GSLIST, Lab
When using generalized plane strain, lists the input data or solutions.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
Specify the content to be listed.
GEOMETRY
List the data input using GSGDATA
BC
List the data input using GSBDATA.
REACTIONS
When the command is issued in POST1, list the reaction force at the ending point,
and the moment about X and Y if the corresponding constraints were applied.
RESULTS
When the command is issued in POST1, list the change of fiber length at the ending point during deformation and the rotation of the ending plane about X and Y during deformation.
ALL
List all of the above (default).
Notes
This command can be used to list the initial position of the ending plane, the applied load or displacements in
the fiber direction, the resulting position of the ending plane after deformation, and the available reaction forces
and moments at the ending point.
All inputs and outputs are in the global Cartesian coordinate system. For more information about the generalized
plane strain feature, see Generalized Plane Strain Option of 18x Solid Elements in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Other>Genl Plane Strn
3590
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
GSSOL
GSSOL, NVAR, Item, Comp, Name
Specifies which results to store from the results file when using generalized plane strain.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number or name assigned to this variable. Variable numbers can be 2 to NV (NUMVAR)
while the name can be an eight byte character string. Overwrites any existing results for this variable.
Item
Label identifying item to be stored.
LENGTH
Change of fiber length at the ending point.
ROT
Rotation of the ending plane during deformation.
F
Reaction force at the ending point in the fiber direction.
M
Reaction moment applied on the ending plane.
Comp
Component of the item, if Item = ROT or M.
X
The rotation angle or reaction moment of the ending plane about X.
Y
The rotation angle or reaction moment of the ending plane about Y.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the item on the printout and display. Defaults to the label formed by
concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels.
Notes
This command stores the results (new position of the ending plane after deformation) for generalized plane
strain. All outputs are in the global Cartesian coordinate system. For more information about the generalized
plane strain feature, see Generalized Plane Strain Option of 18x Solid Elements in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Variable Viewer
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3591
/GST
/GST, Lab
Turns Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) on or off.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Determines whether the Graphical Solution Tracking feature is active. Specify ON to activate GST, or OFF to
deactivate the feature.
Notes
For interactive runs using the GUI [/MENU,ON] or graphics [/MENU,GRPH] mode, ANSYS directs GST graphics to
the screen. For interactive sessions not using GUI or graphics mode, or for batch sessions, GST graphics are saved
in the ANSYS graphics file Jobname.GST.
The GST feature is available only for nonlinear structural, thermal, electric, magnetic, fluid, or CFD simulations.
For more information about this feature and illustrations of the GST graphics for each analysis type, see the ANSYS
Analysis Guide for the appropriate discipline. See also the CNVTOL command description.
The GST feature is also available for a p-method electrostatic analysis. For interactive sessions with the p-method
electrostatic preference set, ANSYS directs the GST graphics to the screen.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Grph Solu Track
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Grph Solu Track
GSUM
Calculates and prints geometry items.
PREP7: Keypoints
PREP7: Lines
PREP7: Areas
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Calculates and prints geometry items (centroid location, moments of inertia, length, area, volume etc.) associated
with the selected keypoints, lines, areas, and volumes. Geometry items are reported in the global Cartesian coordinate system. For volumes, a unit density is assumed unless the volumes have a material association via the
VATT command. For areas, a unit density (and thickness) is assumed unless the areas have a material (and real
constant) association via the AATT command. For lines and keypoints, a unit density is assumed, irrespective of
any material associations [LATT, KATT, MAT]. Items calculated by GSUM and later retrieved by a *GET or *VGET
commands are valid only if the model is not modified after the GSUM command is issued. This command combines
the functions of the KSUM, LSUM, ASUM, and VSUM commands.
3592
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GTHK
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Calc Geom Items>Of Geometry
/GTHK, Label, THICK
Sets line thicknesses for graph lines.
GRAPHICS: Graphs
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Apply thicknesses as selected from the following labels:
AXIS
Modify thickness of ordinate and abscissa axes on graph displays.
GRID
Modify thickness of grid lines on graph displays.
CURVE
Modify thickness of curve lines (when no area fill [/GROPT]).
THICK
Thickness ratio (whole numbers only, from -1 to 10):
1
Do not draw the curve, but show only the markers specified by /GMARKER.
0 or 1
Thin lines.
2
The default thickness.
3
1.5 times the default thickness.
etc.
(up to 10)
Notes
Sets line thicknesses for graph lines (in raster mode only). Use /GTHK,STAT to show settings.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Axes
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Curve
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Grid
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3593
/GTYPE
/GTYPE, WN, LABEL, KEY
Controls the entities that the GPLOT command displays.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which this command applies (defaults to 1)
LABEL
This represents the type of entity to display:
NODE
Nodes
ELEM
Elements
KEYP
Keypoints
LINE
Lines
AREA
Areas
VOLU
Volumes
GRPH
Graph displays
KEY
Switch:
0
Turns the entity type off.
1
Turns the entity type on.
Notes
The /GTYPE command controls which entities the GPLOT command displays. NODE, ELEM, KEYP, LINE, AREA,
and VOLU are on by default. When ELEM is activated, you can control the type of element displayed via the
/GCMD command (which also controls the type of graph display). When the GRPH entity type is activated, all
other entity types are deactivated. Conversely, when any of the NODE, ELEM, KEYP, LINE, AREA, and VOLU entity
types are active, the GRPH entity type is deactivated.
The /GTYPE command gives you several options for multi-window layout:
One window
Two windows (left and right or top and bottom of the screen)
Three windows (two at the top and one at the bottom of the screen, or one top and two bottom windows
Four windows (two at the top and two at the bottom)
3594
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/GTYPE
Once you choose a window layout, you can choose one of the following: multiple plots, replotting, or no redisplay.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Multi-Plot Contrls
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3595
3596
H Commands
HARFRQ, FREQB, FREQE
Defines the frequency range in the harmonic response analysis.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
FREQB
Frequency (Hz) at the beginning of the FREQB to FREQE range (if FREQE > FREQB). If FREQE is blank, the
solution is done only at frequency FREQB.
FREQE
Frequency at end of this range. Solutions are done at an interval of (FREQE-FREQB)/NSBSTP, ending at FREQE.
No solution is done at the beginning of the frequency range. NSBSTP is input on the NSUBST command.
See EXPSOL for expansion pass solutions.
Notes
Defines the frequency range for loads in the harmonic response analysis (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Freq and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Freq and Substps
/HBC, WN, Key
Determines how boundary condition symbols are displayed in a display window.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window reference number. This number can be any window numbered 1 to 5, or ALL (for all active windows).
Defaults to 1
Key
Key to enable/disable hidden surface boundary condition symbol display for 2-D graphics devices and to
request improved pressure contour display for 2-D and 3-D devices: Key = ON, YES or 1 will show your BC
symbols on the hidden surfaces and use an improved pressure contour display. Key = OFF, NO or 0 (default)
will hide the symbols .
Command Default
/HBC,WN,Off
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HBMAT
For 2-D graphics devices (X11, win32, PNG, et al.), boundary condition symbols are NOT drawn to the hidden
surface display. For both 2-D and 3-D graphics devices, no enhanced rendering of pressure contours occurs.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Hidden-Line Options
HBMAT, Fname, Ext, --, Form, Matrx, Rhs
Writes an assembled global matrix in Harwell-Boeing format.
AUX2: Binary Files
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Defaults to the current Jobname if left blank.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
Defaults to .matrix if left blank.
--
Unused field.
Form
Specifies format of output matrix file:
ASCII
Write output matrix file in ASCII form.
BIN
Write output matrix file in binary form.
Matrx
Specify which matrix to write to the output matrix file:
STIFF
Write stiffness matrix to output matrix file. Valid for all types of analyses that write a .FULL file.
MASS
Write mass matrix to output matrix file. Valid for buckling, substructure, and modal analyses. If .FULL file
was generated in a buckling analysis, then this label will write stress stiffening matrix to output matrix
file.
DAMP
Write damping matrix to output matrix file. Only valid for damped modal analyses.
Rhs
Specifies whether to write the right-hand side vector to output matrix file:
3598
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/HEADER
YES
Write right-hand side vector to output matrix file
NO
Do not write right-hand side vector to output matrix file
Command Default
By default, assuming a proper filename and extension have been entered, writes the stiffness matrix and righthand side vector to jobname.matrix in the current working directory in ASCII format.
Notes
This command is used to copy a matrix from the assembled global matrix file (.FULL file) or from the superelement
matrix file (.SUB file) as specified on the FILE command and write it in Harwell-Boeing format to a new file, named
jobname.MATRIX. The Harwell-Boeing format is widely used by other applications that deal with matrices.
The assembled global matrix file is created during solution depending on the analysis type, equation solver, and
other solution options. By default, the assembled global matrix file is never deleted at the end of solution. For
most analysis types, the Sparse direct solver, the ICCG solver, and the AMG solver (when available) will write a
.FULL file. For buckling and modal analyses, most mode extraction methods will write a .FULL file. However,
currently only the Block Lanczos and QR-damped mode extraction methods will write a properly formatted .FULL
file to be used with the HBMAT command.
The WRFULL command, in conjunction with the SOLVE command, can be used to generate the assembled
global matrix file and eliminate the equation solution process and results output process.
The Harwell-Boeing format is column-oriented. That is, non-zero matrix values are stored with their corresponding
row indices in a sequence of columns. However, since the ANSYS matrix files are stored by row and not column,
when the HBMAT command is used with a non-symmetric matrix, the transpose of the matrix is, in fact, written.
When dumping the stiffness matrix for transient and harmonic analyses, be aware that the element mass matrix
values (and possibly element damping matrix values) are incorporated into the globally assembled stiffness
matrix. Thus, the globally assembled stiffness matrix represents more than the stiffness of the model. Please refer
to the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more details.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>List>Binary Files
Utility Menu>List>Files>Binary Files
/HEADER, Header, Stitle, Idstmp, Notes, Colhed, Minmax
Sets page and table heading print controls.
POST1: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Header
ANSYS page header (system, date, time, version, copyright, title, etc.):
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3599
HELP
ON
Turns this item on (default for batch mode; not available for interactive mode).
OFF
Turns this item off.
(blank)
Retains the previous setting.
Stitle
Subtitles (see /STITLE command): ON, OFF, or (blank) (see above).
Idstmp
Load step information (step number, substep number, time value): ON, OFF, or (blank) (see above).
Notes
Information relative to particular table listings: ON, OFF, or (blank) (see above).
Colhed
Column header labels of table listings (currently only for single column tables): ON, OFF, or (blank) (see
above).
Minmax
Minimum/maximum information or totals after table listings: ON, OFF, or (blank) (see above).
Command Default
All specifications are on (batch mode); Header = OFF, all other specifications are on (interactive mode)
Notes
Sets specifications on or off for page and table heading print controls associated with the POST1 PRNSOL,
PRESOL, PRETAB, PRRSOL, and PRPATH commands.
Note If the printout caused a top-of-form (page eject to top of next page), the top-of-form is also
suppressed with the printout. Issue /HEADER,STAT to display the current settings. Issue /HEADER,DEFA
to reset the default specifications.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
HELP, Name
Displays help information on ANSYS commands and element types.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Command name or element type. Examples are: HELP,MP or HELP,SOLID45 (or HELP,45). For a list of elements
of a particular type, enter HELP,BEAM, HELP,SOLID, HELP,HYPER, etc.
3600
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HEMIOPT
Notes
If Name uniquely matches a command or element name, the description for that command or element will be
displayed in the Help Window. For command help, you must type the complete command name (including the
* or /). The help system cannot find partial matches. If * is used at the beginning of the string, it will be interpreted
as an ANSYS * command.
For help on topics that are not ANSYS commands or element types (for example, help for the word "material"),
use the index or full text search features of the ANSYS online help system.
The HELP command is valid only in GUI mode. To obtain help when not in GUI mode, you can either activate
the GUI by typing /MENU,ON, or you can activate the help system directly by issuing /UI,HELP.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
HELPDISP, Commandname
Displays help information on DISPLAY program commands.
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Commandname
Any DISPLAY command. If blank, a list of DISPLAY commands is produced.
Menu Paths
It is part of the DISPLAY command.
HEMIOPT, HRES
Specifies options for Hemicube view factor calculation.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
HRES
Hemicube resolution. Increase value to increase the accuracy of the view factor calculation. Defaults to 10.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>View Factor
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>View Factor
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>View Factor
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3601
HFANG
HFANG, Lab, PHI1, PHI2, THETA1, THETA2
Defines or displays spatial angles of a spherical radiation surface for antenna parameter calculations.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Lab
Spatial angle label.
ANGLE
Define spatial angles (default).
STATE
Display spatial angles. PHI1, PHI2, THETA1, and THETA2 are ignored.
PHI1, PHI2
Starting and ending angles (degrees) in the spherical coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (degrees) in the spherical coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
Notes
Defines or displays spatial angles of a spherical radiation surface. See Spherical Coordinates in the ANSYS HighFrequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide. Use this command only with PLHFFAR,Opt = DGAIN or PRHFFAR,Opt
= DGAIN, PRAD, PGAIN, or EFF.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Efficiency
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Power Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Rad Power
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
HFARRAY, NUMX, NUMY, PX, PY, SKEW, PHASEX, PHASEY
Defines phased array antenna characteristics.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
NUMX
Number of array units in X-direction (defaults to 1).
NUMY
Number of array units in Y-direction (defaults to 1).
PX
Spatial periodicity in X-direction in meters.
PY
Spatial periodicity in Y-direction in meters.
3602
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HFEIGOPT
SKEW
Skew angle for triangular periodicity from X-axis to Y-axis in degrees (defaults to 90).
PHASEX
Initial phase angle difference between array units in X-direction in degrees (defaults to 0).
PHASEY
Initial phase angle difference between array units in Y-direction in degrees (defaults to 0).
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Far Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Pattern
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Far Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Pattern
HFEIGOPT, Lab, Val1
Specifies high frequency electromagnetic modal analysis options.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Lab
High frequency modal analysis type:
CAVITY
Perform a 3-D eigenvalue analysis (default for HF119 and HF120).
CUTOFF
Perform a 2-D cutoff frequency analysis (default for HF118).
GAMMA
Perform a 2-D propagating constant analysis.
Val1
Valid for the GAMMA option only. If Lab = GAMMA, Val1 is the frequency in Hz.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3603
HFEREFINE
HFEREFINE, FACTOR, NUMLIST
Automatically refines high-frequency tetrahedral elements (HF119) or lists high-frequency brick elements
(HF120) with the largest error.
PREP7: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
FACTOR
Factor applied in adaptive mesh refinement scheme. Elements with local error > (FACTOR) (average error)
will be refined. FACTOR should be in the range of 1.0 to 3.0 and it defaults to 1.0. Used only with HF119 elements.
NUMLIST
Number of brick elements to be listed. Defaults to 25. Used only with HF120 elements.
Notes
For HF119 elements, HFEREFINE automatically refines the mesh so that the measured discretization error will
decrease. Execution deletes all boundary conditions and excitation sources on the finite element model.
For HF120 elements, HFEREFINE provides a list of elements with the largest error.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>HF Refine
HFNEAR, Lab, VAL, X, Y, Z, CS
Calculates the electromagnetic field at points in the near zone exterior to the equivalent source surface
(flagged with the Maxwell surface flag in the preprocessor).
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Lab
Label describing the field:
EF
Electric field (default).
H
Magnetic field.
VAL
VAL is the coordinate system reference number or path.
VAL is the coordinate system reference number. VAL may be 0 (Cartesian), 1 (cylindrical), 2 (spherical),
4 or WP (working plane), or any previously defined local coordinate system number (>10). Defaults
to 0. HFNEAR computes the electromagnetic field for the point X, Y, Z.
3604
VAL = PATH. HFNEAR computes the electromagnetic field for the path data points for the path currently
defined by the PATH and PPATH commands.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HFPA
X, Y, Z
Location point in the VAL coordinate system. Defaults to 0, 0, 0.
CS
Coordinate system type for calculation of components and magnitude of electric or magnetic field.
0
Cartesian (default).
1
Cylindrical.
2
Spherical.
Notes
HFNEAR uses the equivalent source principle to calculate the electromagnetic field in the near zone exterior to
the equivalent source surface (flagged with the Maxwell surface flag in the preprocessor) for either of the following:
A point X, Y, Z in the VAL coordinate system
A path defined by the PATH and PPATH commands
To view the electromagnetic field results for a path, use the PLPAGM or PLPATH commands.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Near Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Map onto Path>HF Near Field
HFPA, Lab, Local, VAL1, VAL2
Specifies a radiation scan angle for a phased array antenna analysis.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Lab
Enter SCAN in this field.
Local
Local coordinate system number (defaults to 0).
VAL1
Angle from x-axis towards y-axis, , in degrees (defaults to 0).
VAL2
Angle from +z-axis towards -z-axis, , in degrees (defaults to 0).
Notes
See Figure 4.32: Spherical Coordinates in the ANSYS High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for an illustration of the coordinate system.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3605
HFPCSWP
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
HFPCSWP, FREQB, FREQE, FREQINC, Nummode
Calculates the propagating constants of a transmission line or waveguide over a frequency range.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
FREQB
Beginning frequency of the analysis (in Hertz).
FREQE
Ending frequency of the analysis (in Hertz). If blank, FREQE is set to FREQB and one solution is performed.
(This is recommended for initially verifying the model setup.)
FREQINC
Frequency increment between solutions. If FREQINC is blank, solutions are performed at FREQB and FREQE
only (default).
Nummode
Number of required modes. Defaults to 1.
Notes
HFPCSWP calculates the propagating constant for a transmission line or waveguide over a frequency range
from FREQB to FREQE, in increments of FREQINC. The output data and graphical displays are written to the files
HFPCSWP.OUT and HFPCSWP.GRPH respectively. Use the DISPLAY program to view the graphs.
HFPCSWP can only be used with HF118 elements.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Electromagnet>HF Emag>2D Freq Sweep
HFPOWER, ARG1, ARG2
Calculates power terms of a multi-port network.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
ARG1
Excitation source port number.
3606
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HFPORT
ARG2
Matched output port number.
Notes
HFPOWER calculates the input power, reflected power, return loss, and power reflection coefficient for a driven
port. If a matching output port is defined, it also calculates transmitted power, insertion loss and the power
transmission coefficient. For lossy materials and conducting surfaces, HFPOWER also calculates the time-averaged
dissipated power. The elements must be selected to calculate the dissipated power.
If ARG1 and ARG2 are both blank, no ports are specified and only the dissipated power is calculated.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Element Based>Power
HFPORT, Portnum, Porttype, Local, Opt1, Opt2, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5
Specifies input data for waveguide or transmission line ports or an incident plane wave.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Portnum
Port number. You specify the integer number for exterior and interior ports by the SF and BF family of
commands, respectively. The number must be between 1 and 50. If status, provides status of port option
settings.
Porttype
Port type:
COAX
Cylindrical coaxial waveguide.
RECT
Rectangular waveguide.
CIRC
Circular waveguide.
PARA
Parallel plate waveguide.
TLINE
Transmission line.
PLAN
Incident plane wave.
Local
A previously defined local Cartesian coordinate system number (>10) or 0 (global Cartesian) used to specify
the geometric properties of the waveguide. Defaults to 0. The local Z-direction must be the direction of
propagation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3607
HFPORT
Opt1
For Porttype = COAX, RECT, CIRC, PARA, Opt1 = Mode type:
TEM
Transverse electromagnetic wave.
TEmn
Transverse electric wave. See notes below.
TMmn
Transverse magnetic wave. See notes below.
For Porttype = TLINE, Opt1 = Path name for calculating the voltage drop across the port (no default). The
path name is limited to a maximum of 8 characters. (For information about defining paths, see the PATH
command description).
For Porttype = PLAN, Opt1 is not used.
Opt2
For Porttype = COAX, RECT, CIRC, PARA, Opt2 = Port boundary condition:
IMPD
Wave impedance matching condition of single propagating mode. Valid for exterior port.
SEXT
S-parameter extraction port. Valid for interior ports.
SOFT
Port used for launching a soft source. Valid for interior ports.
HARD
Port used for launching a hard source. Valid for exterior or interior ports.
For Porttype = TLINE, Opt2 = SEXT for a S-parameter extraction port.
For Porttype = PLAN, Opt2 = SEXT for a S-parameter extraction port or SOFT for launching a plane wave
for a scattering analysis of a periodic structure. Defaults to SEXT.
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5
If Porttype = COAX:
VAL1
Inner radius of the coaxial waveguide.
VAL2
Outer radius of the coaxial waveguide.
VAL3
Zero-to-peak amplitude of the voltage between the inner and the outer conductors. If blank, the port
will create a matching impedance.
VAL4
Phase angle of the applied voltage (in degrees). Defaults to 0 degrees.
VAL5
Input power (time-average). If power is input, it overrides the applied voltage input.
If Porttype = RECT:
3608
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HFPORT
VAL1
Width of the rectangular waveguide
VAL2
Height of the rectangular waveguide.
VAL3
Zero-to-peak amplitude of the electric field component Ez for a TM wave or the magnetic field component
Hz for a TE wave. If blank, the port will appear as a matching impedance.
VAL4
Phase angle of the applied field (in degrees). Defaults to 0 degrees.
VAL5
Input power (time-average). If power is input, it overrides the field component input.
If Porttype = CIRC
VAL1
Radius of the circular waveguide.
VAL2
Not used.
VAL3
Zero-to-peak amplitude of the electric field component Ez for a TM wave or the magnetic field component
Hz for a TE wave. If blank, the port will appear as a matching impedance.
VAL4
Phase angle of the applied field (in degrees). Defaults to 0 degrees.
VAL5
Input power (time-average). If power is input, it overrides the field component input.
If Porttype = PARA:
VAL1
Width of the parallel plate waveguide (defaults to 1).
VAL2
Separation between the two plates.
VAL3
Zero-to-peak amplitude of the electric field component Ey for a TEM wave, electric field component Ez
for a TM wave, or the magnetic field component Hz for a TE wave. If blank, the port will appear as a
matching impedance.
VAL4
Phase angle of the applied field (in degrees). Defaults to 0 degrees.
VAL5
Input power (time-average). If power is input, it overrides the field component input.
If Porttype = TLINE:
VAL1
Resistance of reference impedance (in Ohms) (defaults to 50).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3609
HFPORT
VAL2
Susceptance of reference impedance (in Ohms) (defaults to 0).
VAL3
Ratio of model cross-sectional area to real cross-sectional area. For a half-symmetry model, enter 0.5.
Defaults to 1.0.
VAL4
Not used.
VAL5
Not used.
If Porttype = PLAN:
VAL1
X Component of incident planar wave (V/m) in local coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
VAL2
Y Component of incident planar wave (V/m) in local coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
VAL3
Z Component of incident planar wave (V/m) in local coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
VAL4
Angle between incident wave vector and X-axis ().
VAL5
Angle between incident wave vector and Z-axis ().
See Spherical Coordinates in the ANSYS High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for an illustration of
the coordinate system.
Note VAL1, VAL2, and VAL3 = 0 for Porttype = PLAN and Opt2 = SEXT.
Notes
The origin of the local coordinate system must be at the center of the waveguide structure. For a rectangular
waveguide, the X and Y axes of the local coordinate system must be parallel to the width and height of the
waveguide, respectively. For a parallel plate waveguide, the X and Y axes of the local coordinate system must
be parallel to the width and separation of the waveguide, respectively.
The following apply to the TEmn and TMmn mode types:
For a rectangular waveguide, the suffix m and n mean the variation of the field along the wide side and
narrow side of the waveguide, respectively.
For a circular waveguide, the suffix m and n mean the variation of the field along the angular and radial
directions, respectively.
For a parallel plate waveguide, the suffix m is 0 and the suffix n means the variation of the field between
the plates.
For a coaxial waveguide, only the TEM mode is available.
For transmission line ports (Porttype = TLINE), the voltage path should be defined on the port plane. The excitation plane should be defined a short distance away from the transmission line port if the excitation source is
defined by EF, JS, or H excitation via the BF command.
3610
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HFSCAT
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Modify Port
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Port Status
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Interior Port>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Modify Port
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Port Status
HFSCAT, Lab
Specifies a high-frequency scattering analysis.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Lab
Label identifying scattering analysis options:
OFF
Do not perform a scattering analysis.
SCAT
Perform a scattering analysis and store the scattering field (default).
TOTAL
Perform a scattering analysis and store the total field.
Notes
Specifies a high frequency scattering analysis and the type of electromagnetic field output. HFSCAT,SCAT
provides a scattering field output, Esc, which is required for the calculation of Radar Cross Section (RCS). HFSCAT,TOTAL provides a sum of the incident and scattering fields, Etotal = Einc+Esc.
Use the PLWAVE command to specify the incident field, Einc.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3611
HFSWEEP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
HFSWEEP, FREQB, FREQE, FREQINC, Portin, Port2, Port3, Port4, Pvolt, Pang, Pdist, Vpath, Ipath, Vsymm, Isymm
Performs a harmonic response for a high-frequency electromagnetic wave guide analysis.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
FREQB
Beginning frequency of the analysis (in Hertz).
FREQE
Ending frequency of the analysis (in Hertz). If blank, FREQE is set to FREQB and one solution is performed.
(This is recommended for initially verifying the model setup.)
FREQINC
Frequency increment between solutions. The analysis performs solutions at FREQB, FREQE, and equidistant
solutions between these frequencies. If FREQINC is blank, the ANSYS program performs solutions at FREQB
and FREQE only (default).
Portin
Port number of the input (excited) port with a TE10 mode or COAX mode excitation. (See the HFPORT and
SPARM command descriptions.) If Portin is blank (default), ANSYS does no S-parameter or reflection
coefficient calculations.
Port2
Output port number of a matched port. The S parameters for Portin and Port2 are calculated. If Port1 is
blank (default), ANSYS does no S-parameter calculations and ignores input values for Port2 and Port3.
Port3
Second output port number of a matched port.
Port4
Third output port number of a matched port.
Pvolt
Port EMF (voltage drop magnitude) applied to the excited port. This is required for reflection coefficient
calculations.
Pang
Phase angle (in degrees) of the port EMF (voltage drop). Defaults to zero.
Pdist
Propagation distance between the excited port and the evaluation point. If the Pdist value is zero, the reflection coefficient, VSWR, and return loss at the location will be calculated at the excited port. (See the REFLCOEF command description.)
Vpath
Path name for a predefined path for calculating the EMF (voltage drop) between two points. (For information
about defining paths, see the PATH command description.) Use the PASAVE command to save paths after
defining them. For calculating reflection coefficients in a COAX conductor, the path must be located at the
propagation distance from the input port and must extend from the inner conductor to the outer conductor.
(See the REFLCOEF command description for more information.) For an impedance calculation, the path
3612
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HFSWEEP
may be located anywhere. If specified along with an MMF (current) path (see Ipath below), impedance will
be calculated. (See the IMPD command description.)
Ipath
Path name for a predefined path, enclosing a conductor, for calculating MMF (current). The path should
traverse a closed contour surrounding the conductor, and should be defined in a counterclockwise directions.
If you specify Ipath with Vpath, ANSYS calculates the port impedance. Use the PASAVE command to save
paths after defining them.
Vsymm
Symmetry factor applied to the calculated voltage drop. Vsymm specifies the voltage drop from the conductor
to the reference point and is used in the port impedance calculation.
Isymm
Symmetry factor applied to the calculated current. The calculated current is multiplied by Isymm, and is used
in the port impedance calculation.
Notes
HFSWEEP performs a harmonic response for a high-frequency electromagnetic waveguide analysis over a frequency range from FREQB to FREQE, in increments of FREQINC. HFSWEEP calculates S-parameters at each frequency step for each port. For a COAX mode waveguide (see the HFPORT command description), reflection
coefficients may be calculated in a similar manner at a specified distance (Pdist) from the input port. You also
can calculate impedance at a specified distance. The ANSYS program writes output data and graphical displays
to files HFSWEEP.OUT and HFSWEEP.GRPH respectively. Use the DISPLAY program to view the graphs.
The diagram below shows an example waveguide and the paths used for MMF (current) and EMF (voltage drop)
calculations:
Q
R P
I
S
T
#0( 6 A7@6@927675420)
" A ( 8 3 1 (
#0( E6 A7@F8EC 7542!
" A ( 6 D ( A B 3 1 (
G
H
$ "
#!
#0(0 A7(B089U8@6(C'& U #0ED9R
"
3 " % " ( (
'& !
" %
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Electromagnet>HF Emag>Freq Sweep
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3613
HFSYM
HFSYM, KCN, Xkey, Ykey, Zkey
Indicates the presence of symmetry planes for the computation of high-frequency electromagnetic fields
in the near and far field domains (beyond the finite element region).
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
KCN
Coordinate system reference number. KCN may be 0 (Cartesian), or any previously defined local Cartesian
coordinate system number (>10). Defaults to 0.
Xkey
Key for electromagnetic field boundary condition, as prescribed for the solution, corresponding to the x =
constant plane:
None
No electric wall or magnetic wall boundary conditions (default).
PEC
Perfect electric conductor (electric wall boundary conditions).
PMC
Perfect magnetic conductor (magnetic wall boundary conditions).
Ykey
Key for electromagnetic field boundary condition, as prescribed for the solution, corresponding to the y =
constant plane:
None
No electric wall or magnetic wall boundary conditions (default).
PEC
Perfect electric conductor (electric wall boundary conditions).
PMC
Perfect magnetic conductor (magnetic wall boundary conditions).
Zkey
Key for electromagnetic field boundary condition, as prescribed for the solution, corresponding to the z =
constant plane:
None
No electric wall or magnetic wall boundary conditions (default).
PEC
Perfect electric conductor (electric wall boundary conditions).
PMC
Perfect magnetic conductor (magnetic wall boundary conditions).
Notes
HFSYM uses the image principle to indicate symmetry planes (x, y, or z = constant plane) for high-frequency
electromagnetic field computations outside the modeled domain. A perfect magnetic conductor (PMC)
boundary condition must be indicated even though it occurs as a natural boundary condition.
3614
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HMAGSOLV
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Efficiency
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Far Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Near Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Pattern
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Power Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Rad Power
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>RCS
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>RCS Normalized
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Map onto Path>HF Near Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Far Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Pattern
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>RCS
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>RCS Normalized
HMAGSOLV, FREQ, NRAMP, CNVA, CNVV, CNVC, CNVE, NEQIT
Specifies 2-D or axisymmetric harmonic magnetic solution options and initiates the solution.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
FREQ
Analysis frequency (Hz).
NRAMP
Number of ramped substeps for the first load step of a nonlinear 2-D harmonic electromagnetic solution.
Defaults to 3. If NRAMP = -1, ignore the ramped load step entirely.
CNVA
Convergence tolerance on the program calculated reference value for the magnetic vector potential degree
of freedom. Defaults to 0.001.
CNVV
Convergence tolerance on the program calculated reference value for the time-integrated electric potential
VOLT. Defaults to 0.001.
CNVC
Convergence tolerance on the program calculated reference value for the current degree of freedom CURR.
Defaults to 0.001.
CNVE
Convergence tolerance on the program calculated reference value for the voltage drop degree of freedom
EMF. Defaults to 0.001.
NEQIT
Maximum number of equilibrium iterations per load step. Defaults to 50.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3615
HPGL
Notes
HMAGSOLV invokes an ANSYS macro which specifies harmonic electromagnetic solution options and initiates
the solution. The macro is applicable to any ANSYS 2-D or axisymmetric linear or nonlinear harmonic analysis.
Results are only stored for the final converged solution. (In POST1, issue *SET,LIST to identify the load step of
solution results.) The macro internally determines if a nonlinear analysis is required based on magnetic material
properties defined in the database.
The macro performs a two-load-step solution sequence. The first load step ramps the applied loads over a prescribed number of substeps (NRAMP), and the second load step calculates the converged solution. For linear
problems, only a single load step solution is performed. The ramped load step can be bypassed by setting NRAMP
to -1.
A 3-D harmonic electromagnetic analysis is available for linear solutions only and does not require this solution
macro.
The following analysis options and nonlinear options are controlled by this macro: KBC, NEQIT, NSUBST, CNVTOL,
OUTRES.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Electromagnet>Harmonic Analys>Opt&Solv
HPGL, Kywrd, Opt1, Opt2
Specifies various HP options.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
If Kywrd = MODEL, command format is HPGL,MODEL,Pmod.
Pmod
Valid plotter model: 7475A (default), 7550A, 7580B, 7585B, 7586B, COLORPRO, DRAFTPRO, or DRAFTMASTER.
If Kywrd = PAPER, command format is HPGL,PAPER,Size,Orien.
Size
Valid paper size: A (default), B, C, D, E, A4, A3, A2, A1, A0, CARCH, DARCH, or EARCH.
Orien
Orientation: HORIZONTAL (default) or VERTICAL.
If Kywrd = COLOR, command format is HPGL,COLOR,KEY.
KEY
Pen choice:
0
Single pen
3616
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HPTCREATE
1
Multiple pens
If Kywrd = DIRECT, command format is HPGL,DIRECT,Port.
Used to direct plotter commands to a port. Use HPGL,FILE to redirect output from a port back to a file. This option
for Kywrd is valid in the DISPLAY program only.
Port
Port name for direct connection.
Notes
This command is available in both the ANSYS and DISPLAY programs. It is valid for Hewlett Packard Graphics
Language (HPGL) format files selected in the ANSYS program with /SHOW,HPGL (or HPGL2), or with
/SHOWDISP,HPGL (or HPGL2) in the DISPLAY program.
An output file is generated for each plot. The ANSYS file is named JobnameNN.HPGL. In the DISPLAY program,
this file is named HPGLnn. This file remains open for a subsequent /NOERASE plot, and will be incomplete until
the program is closed (/EXIT), or until the next file is opened by the next /ERASE plot request.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL2 File
HPTCREATE, TYPE, ENTITY, NHP, LABEL, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Defines a hard point.
PREP7: Hard Points
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TYPE
Type of entity on which the hard point will be created.
LINE
Hard point will be created on a line.
AREA
Hard point will be created within an area (not on the boundaries).
ENTITY
Number of the line or area on which the hard point will be created.
NHP
Number assigned to the hard point. Defaults to the lowest available hard point number.
LABEL
If LABEL = COORD, VAL1, VAL2, and VAL3 are the respective global X, Y, and Z coordinates. If LABEL = RATIO,
VAL1 is the parameter value (this is available only for lines). Valid parameter values are between 0 and 1.
VAL2 and VAL3 are ignored.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3617
HPTDELETE
VAL1
If LABEL = RATIO, ratio value for line. If LABEL = COORD, global X coordinate value.
VAL2
If LABEL = COORD, global Y coordinate value.
VAL3
If LABEL = COORD, global Z coordinate value.
Notes
The ability to enter a parameter value provides a simple way of positioning hard points on lines. For example,
to place a hard point halfway along a line, one can simply specify a VAL1 value of 0.5.
For models imported through the DEFAULT IGES filter, you can place hard points on models only by specifying
coordinates (you can't place a hard point using interactive picking).
If you issue any commands that update the geometry of an entity, such as Boolean or simplification commands,
any hard points associated with that entity are deleted. Therefore, you should add any hard points after completing
the solid model. If you delete an entity that has associated hard points, those hard points are either
Deleted along with the entity (if the hard point is not associated with any other entities).
Detached from the deleted entity (if the hard point is associated with additional entities).
When archiving your model (CDWRITE), hardpoint information cannot be written to the IGES file. The Jobname.cdb file can be written with the CDWRITE,DB option.
Hard points are only applicable for area and volume meshing, not for beams.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Hard Points>Hard PT on area>Hard PT by coordinates
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Hard Points>Hard PT on line>Hard PT by coordinates
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Hard Points>Hard PT on line>Hard PT by ratio
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>Hard PT on area>Hard PT by coordinates
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>Hard PT on area>Hard PT by picking
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>Hard PT on line>Hard PT by coordinates
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>Hard PT on line>Hard PT by picking
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>Hard PT on line>Hard PT by ratio
HPTDELETE, NP1, NP2, NINC
Deletes selected hardpoints.
PREP7: Hard Points
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
Delete the pattern of hard points beginning with NP1 to NP2 in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NP1 = ALL,
NP2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected hard points [KSEL]. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored.
3618
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HRCPLX
Notes
Deletes all attributes attached to the designated hard points as well as the hard points themselves. If any entity
is attached to a designated hard point, the command detaches the hard point from that entity (the program will
alert you that this will occur).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Hard Points
HRCPLX, LOADSTEP, SUBSTEP, OMEGAT, 1STLCASE, 2NDLCASE
Computes and stores in the database the time-harmonic solution at a prescribed phase angle.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LOADSTEP
Load step number of the data set to be read (defaults to 1).
SUBSTEP
Substep number within LOADSTEP.
OMEGAT
Phase angle defined by the product of the angular frequency and time. If set to 0.0, real results are supplied.
If set to -90.0, imaginary results are supplied. If set to 90.0, imaginary results are supplied. If set >= 360,
amplitude is supplied. All others supply results at that phase angle.
1STLCASE
First load case number (defaults to 1).
2NDLCASE
Second load case number (defaults to 2).
Notes
HRCPLX combines the real and imaginary parts of results data to give the total solution at the specified phase
angle. 1STLCASE and 2NDLCASE are internally generated load cases. You may want to specify these to avoid
overwriting an existing load case number 1 or 2. Not all results computed from this command are valid. See
Summable, Non-summable, and Constant Data in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information.
Since HRCPLX performs load case combinations, it alters most of the data in the database. In particular, it alters
applied loads such as forces and imposed displacements. To restore the original loads in the database for a
subsequent analysis, reissue the SET command in POST1 to retrieve the real and imaginary set data.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on harmonic analysis equations and their relationship
to real and imaginary data sets.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3619
HREXP
HREXP, ANGLE
Specifies the phase angle for the harmonic analysis expansion pass.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ANGLE
Phase angle (degrees) for expansion pass. If ALL (default), use both 0.0 (real) and 90.0 (imaginary) phase
angles.
Notes
Specifies the phase angle where the expansion pass will be done for a harmonic reduced or harmonic mode
superposition expansion pass.
This command is ignored if the HROPT command has been issued with Method = SX or Method = SXRU.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Load Step
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Time/Freq
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Range of Solu's
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Load Step
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>By Time/Freq
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Range of Solu's
HROPT, Method, MAXMODE, MINMODE, MCout, Damp
Specifies harmonic analysis options.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> VT PR EM EH <> PP ED
Method
Solution method for the harmonic analysis:
FULL
Full method (default).
REDUC
Reduced method.
MSUP
Mode superposition method.
SX
Variational Technology method.
SXPA
Variational Technology perfect absorber method.
3620
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HROPT
SXRU
Variational Technology reuse method.
Note To use any Variational Technology method, you must have the separately licensed ANSYS
Frequency Sweep VT (FS Module).
The Variational Technology perfect absorber method (applicable to elements HF119 and HF120 only)
(Method = SXPA) is about 20% faster but somewhat less accurate than the Variational Technology
method (Method = SX).
The Variational Technology reuse method (Method = SXRU) simply does the stress pass of a previous
run using the Variational Technology method (Method = SX) using the .RSX file. It can be used to
refine the frequency range and sample density without needing to redo the entire analysis.
MAXMODE
Largest mode number to be used to calculate the response (for Method = MSUP). Defaults to the highest
mode calculated in the preceding modal analysis. This option does not apply for Method = SX, SXPA, or SXRU.
MINMODE
Smallest mode number to be used (for Method = MSUP). This option does not apply for Method = SX, SXPA,
or SXRU. Defaults to 1.
MCout
Modal coordinates output key (valid only for the mode superposition method MSUP):
NO
No output of modal coordinates (default).
YES
Output modal coordinates to the text file jobname.MCF.
Damp
Damping mode for frequency-dependent material properties (valid only for the Variational Technology
Method SX).
Hysteretic
Not proportional to the frequency.
Viscous
Proportional to the frequency (default).
Notes
Specifies the method of solution for a harmonic analysis (ANTYPE,HARMIC). If used in SOLUTION, this command
is valid only within the first load step. See "Product Restrictions" below.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Product Restrictions
For a harmonic analysis in ANSYS Professional, the default is Method = MSUP; Method = FULL or REDUC is not
allowed.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3621
HROUT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Solve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
HROUT, Reimky, Clust, Mcont
Specifies the harmonic analysis output options.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Reimky
Real/Imaginary print key:
ON
Print complex displacements as real and imaginary components (default).
OFF
Print complex displacements as amplitude and phase angle (degrees).
Clust
Cluster option (for HROPT,MSUP):
OFF
Uniform spacing of frequency solutions (default).
ON
Cluster frequency solutions about natural frequencies.
Mcont
Mode contributions key (for HROPT,MSUP):
OFF
No print of mode contributions at each frequency (default).
ON
Print mode contributions at each frequency.
Notes
Specifies the harmonic analysis (ANTYPE,HARMIC) output options. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid
only within the first load step. OUTPR,NSOL must be specified to print mode contributions at each frequency.
This command is ignored if the HROPT command has been issued with Method = SX or Method = SXRU, i.e., we
do not have a printout at the expanded frequencies.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3622
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
HROUT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3623
3624
I Commands
IC, NODE, Lab, VALUE, VALUE2, NEND, NINC
Specifies initial conditions at nodes.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node at which initial condition is to be specified. If ALL, apply to all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Degree of freedom label for which initial condition is to be specified. If ALL, use all appropriate labels.
Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements or linear velocities); ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations or angular
velocities). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). FLOTRAN fluid labels: PRES (pressure);
VX, VY, or VZ (velocities); ENKE or ENDS (turbulent kinetic energy or turbulent energy dissipation); SP01
through SP06 (multiple species mass fractions) or their user-defined names [MSSPEC]. Electric label: VOLT
(voltage). Magnetic labels: MAG (scalar magnetic potential); AX, AY, or AZ (vector magnetic potentials).
VALUE
Initial value of the degree of freedom (first-order value). Defaults to the program default for that DOF (0.0
for structural analysis, TUNIF for thermal analysis, etc.). Values are in the nodal coordinate system and in radians for rotational DOF.
VALUE2
Second-order degree of freedom value, mainly used to specify initial structural velocity. Defaults to the
program default for that DOF (0.0 for structural analysis). Values are in the nodal coordinate system and in
radians/time for rotational DOF.
NEND, NINC
Specifies the same initial condition values at the range of nodes from NODE to NEND (defaults to NODE), in
steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
Notes
The IC command specifies initial conditions, which are the initial values of the specified degrees of freedom. It
is valid only for a static analysis and full method transient analysis (TIMINT,ON and TRNOPT,FULL). For the
transient, the initial value is specified at the beginning of the first load step, that is, at time = 0.0.
Initial conditions should always be step applied [KBC,1] and not ramped. (In a transient analysis when SOLCONTROL is ON, KBC,1 is the default as long as TIMINT is also on.)
If constraints [D, DSYM, etc.] and initial conditions are applied at the same node, the constraint specification will
override.
For thermal analyses, any TUNIF specification should be specified before the IC command; otherwise, the TUNIF
specification will be ignored. If the IC command is input before any TUNIF specification, use the ICDELE command
and then reissue any TUNIF specification and then follow with the IC command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ICDELE
Caution: Be careful not to define inconsistent initial conditions. For instance, if you define an initial velocity at a single DOF, the initial velocity at every other DOF will be 0.0, potentially leading to conflicting
initial conditions. In most cases, you will want to define initial conditions at every unconstrained DOF in
your model.
Once a solution has been performed, the specified initial conditions are overwritten by the actual solution and
are no longer available. You must respecify them if you want to perform a re-analysis. You may want to keep a
database file saved prior to the first solution for subsequent reuse.
Caution: If you use the CDWRITE command to archive your model, first order values (initial displacements,
temperatures, etc.) specified by the IC command will not be written to the archive file. However, second
order (structural velocity) terms will be written out.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>Define
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>Define
ICDELE
Deletes initial conditions at nodes.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Deletes all initial conditions previously specified with the IC command at all nodes.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Initial Condit'n
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Initial Condit'n
ICE, ELEM, Lab, VALUE
Specifies initial conditions on elements.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element to which initial condition applies. If All, apply initial condition to all selected elements [ ESEL]. If
ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Valid initial conditions label. FLOTRAN fluid labels: VFRC (volume fraction).
3626
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ICEDELE
VALUE
Initial value for the volume fraction.
Notes
The ICE command specifies initial conditions on selected elements.
Once a solution has been performed, the specified initial conditions will be overwritten by the actual solution,
and are no longer available. You must respecify them if you want to perform a re-analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>On Elements
ICEDELE, ELEM, Lab
Deletes initial conditions on elements.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element at which initial conditions are to be deleted. If ALL, initial conditions at all selected elements [ESEL]
are deleted. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid
only in the GUI). A component name may be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Valid initial conditions label. FLOTRAN fluid labels: VFRC (volume fraction).
Notes
Deletes all initial conditions previously specified with the ICE command at all elements.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>On
Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>On Elements
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3627
ICELIST
ICELIST, ELEM, Lab
Lists initial conditions on elements.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
List initial condition for elements for ELEM (defaults to ALL). If ELEM = All, initial conditions for all selected
elements [ESEL} are listed. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are
ignored (valid only in GUI). A component name may be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Valid initial conditions label. FLOTRAN fluid labels: VFRC (volume fraction).
Notes
Lists the initial on elements specified by the ICE command. Listing applies to all the selected elements [ESEL].
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Elem Init Condit'n>On Picked Elemts
ICLIST, NODE1, NODE2, NINC, Lab
Lists the initial conditions.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
List initial conditions for nodes NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1
= ALL (default), NODE2 and NINC are ignored and initial conditions for all selected nodes [NSEL] are listed. If
NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
Lab
Velocity key:
DISP
Specification is for first order degree of freedom value (displacements, temperature, etc.) (default).
VELO
Specification is for second order degree of freedom value (velocities).
Notes
Lists the initial conditions specified by the IC command. Listing applies to all the selected nodes [NSEL] and DOF
labels. ICLIST is not the same as the DLIST command. All the initial conditions including the default conditions
are listed for the selected nodes.
3628
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/ICSCALE
Initial conditions for a FLOTRAN analysis are primary (first order) degrees of freedom and are thus listed with the
DISP key.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>List Picked
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>List Picked
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Initial Conditions>On Picked Nodes
/ICLWID, FACTOR
Scales the line width of circuit builder icons.
GRAPHICS: Scaling
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
FACTOR
Multiplication factor applied to the default line width (defaults to 1). The minimum is 1 and the maximum is
6.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Scale Icon
/ICSCALE, WN, FACTOR
Scales the icon size for elements supported in the circuit builder.
GRAPHICS: Scaling
MP <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
FACTOR
Factor applied to the default icon size (defaults to 1).
Notes
Scaling the icon size can provide better visualization of the circuit components when using the Circuit Builder
(an interactive builder available in the ANSYS GUI).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3629
ICVFRC
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Scale Icon
ICVFRC, Geom, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Sets the initial volume fraction field for a geometry.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
Geom
Geometry:
CIRC
Circle.
ELPT
Ellipse.
VAL1, VAL2
Location of the center. VAL1 and VAL2 are the x and y coordinates, respectively.
VAL3, VAL4
If Geom = CIRC, VAL3 is the radius of the circle and VAL4 is not used. If Geom = ELPT, VAL3 and VAL4 are the
x and y semiaxes of the ellipse, respectively.
Notes
The ICVFRC command sets the initial volume fraction field for a geometry. The initial VFRC is set to one for elements completely within the geometry. The initial VFRC is set equal to the fraction of element area within the
geometry for elements intersected by the boundary of the geometry.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>By
Geom>Circle
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>By
Geom>Elliptic
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>By Geom>Circle
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Init Loads>By Geom>Elliptic
3630
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
IGESIN
IGESIN, Fname, Ext, -Transfers IGES data from a file into ANSYS.
AUX15: IGES
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to CAD if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Reads a file containing IGES data and transfers it into the ANSYS database. The file transferred is the IGES Version
5.1, ASCII format file. IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) is a neutral format developed by the U.S. Dept.
of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology. There is no output transfer file written since the
transferred data is read directly into the ANSYS database.
You can import multiple files into a single database, but you must use the same import option (set with the
IOPTN command) for each file.
The IOPTN command sets the parameters for reading the file (refer to this command for the options and their
support for IGES entities). The two main parameters are FACETED and SMOOTH. You cannot change the IOPTN
settings once a file has been imported.
When a file is read using the FACETED option, the data is stored in an defeaturing database. Once the transferred
data is stored, a special set of geometry repair and enhancement tools, designed specifically for use with files
imported from CAD systems, are available. Files read through the SMOOTH option use the standard database.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Import
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3631
IGESOUT
IGESOUT, Fname, Ext, --, ATT
Writes solid model data to a file in IGES Version 5.1 format.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP <>
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to IGES if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
ATT
Attribute key:
0
Do not write assigned numbers and attributes of the solid model entities to the IGES file (default).
1
Write assigned numbers and attributes of solid model entities (keypoints, lines, areas, volumes) to the
IGES file. Attributes include MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS specifications as well as associated solid model
loads and meshing (keypoint element size, number of line divisions and spacing ratio) specifications.
Notes
Causes the selected solid model data to be written to a coded file in the IGES Version 5.1 format. Previous data
on this file, if any, are overwritten. Keypoints that are not attached to any line are written to the output file as
IGES entity 116 (Point). Lines that are not attached to any area are written to the output file as either IGES Entity
100 (Circular Arc), 110 (Line), or 126 (Rational B-Spline Curve) depending upon whether the ANSYS entity was
defined as an arc, straight line, or spline. Areas are written to the output file as IGES Entity 144 (Trimmed Parametric Surface). Volumes are written to the output file as IGES entity 186 (Manifold Solid B-Rep Object). Solid
model entities to be written must have all corresponding lower level entities selected (use ALLSEL,BELOW,ALL)
before issuing command. Concatenated lines and areas are not written to the IGES file; however, the entities
that make up these concatenated entities are written.
Caution: If you issue the IGESOUT command after generating a beam mesh with orientation nodes,
the orientation keypoints that were specified for the line [LATT] are no longer associated with the line
and are not written out to the IGES file. The line does not recognize that orientation keypoints were ever
assigned to it, and the orientation keypoints do not "know" that they are orientation keypoints. Thus the
IGESOUT command does not support (for beam meshing) any line operation that relies on solid model
associativity. For example, meshing the areas adjacent to the meshed line, plotting the line that contains
the orientation nodes, or clearing the mesh from the line that contains orientation nodes may not work
as expected. See Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information
about beam meshing.
3632
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/IMAGE
You cannot access this command for models that have been imported from IGES using the FACETED translator
(see the IOPTN command).
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Export
/IMAGE, Label, Fname, Ext, -Allows graphics data to be captured and saved.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Label specifying the operation to be performed:
CAPTURE
Capture the image from the graphics window to a new window.
RESTORE
Restore the image from a file to a new window.
SAVE
Save the contents of the graphic window to a file.
DELETE
Delete the window that contains the file.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
If no extension is specified, bmp will be used on Windows systems, and img will be used on UNIX systems.
--
Unused field.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3633
IMAGIN
IMAGIN, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA
Forms an imaginary variable from a complex variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed upon output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
This command forms a new variable from a complex variable by storing the imaginary part as the real part. The
imaginary part can then be used in other operations. Used only with harmonic analyses (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
Complex variables are stored in two-column arrays with the real component stored in the first column and the
imaginary component stored in the second column. This command extracts the value stored in the second
column (i.e., imaginary component). However, with harmonic analyses, all variables are stored in two-column
arrays as complex variables. If the variable is not complex, then the same value is stored in both columns. This
command will extract the variable in the second column of the array, even if this variable is not the imaginary
component of a complex variable.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Imaginary Part
IMESH, LAKY, NSLA, NTLA, KCN, DX, DY, DZ, TOL
Generates nodes and interface elements along lines or areas.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LAKY
Copies mesh according to the following:
LINE or 1
Copies line mesh (default).
3634
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
IMMED
AREA or 2
Copies area mesh.
NSLA
Number that identifies the source line or area. This is the line or area whose mesh will provide the pattern
for the interface elements. ANSYS copies the pattern of the line or area elements through the area or volume
to create the mesh of area or volume interface elements.
NTLA
Number that identifies the target line or area. This is the line or area that is opposite the source line or area
specified by NSLA. Add NTLA to obtain the copied mesh from the source line or area.
KCN
Number that identifies the particular ANSYS coordinate system.
DX, DY, DZ
Incremental translation of node coordinates in the active coordinate system (DR, D , DZ for cylindrical, and
DR, D , D for spherical or toroidal). The source line or area coordinates + DX, DY, DZ = the target line or area
coordinates. If left blank, ANSYS automatically estimates the incremental translation.
TOL
Tolerance for verifying topology and geometry. By default, ANSYS automatically calculates the tolerance
based on associated geometries.
Notes
Generates nodes and interface elements along lines or areas. The IMESH command requires that the target line
or area exactly match the source line or area. Also, both target and source lines or areas must be in the same
area or volume. The area or volume containing the source line or area must be meshed before executing IMESH,
while the area or volume containing the target line or area must be meshed after executing IMESH.
For three dimensional problems where LAKY = AREA, ANSYS fills the interface layer according to the following
table:
If source mesh consists of:
ANSYS fills the interface layer with:
Quadrilateral elements
Hexahedral elements
Triangle elements
Degenerated wedge elements
Combination quadrilateral and triangle elements Combination hexahedral and degenerated wedge elements
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Interface Mesh>2D Interface
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Interface Mesh>3D Interface
IMMED, KEY
Allows immediate display of a model as it is generated.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Immediate mode key:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3635
IMPD
0
Display only upon request, i.e., no immediate display (default with the GUI off).
1
Display immediately as model is generated (default with the GUI on).
Command Default
As described above.
Notes
Allows immediate display of a model (as it is generated) without a screen erase or a display request. Available
only during an interactive session at a graphics display terminal. A valid graphics device name must first be
specified on the /SHOW command.
The IMMED command allows you to control whether or not the model is displayed immediately as it is generated
in an interactive session. By default in the GUI, your model will immediately be displayed in the Graphics Window
as you create new entities (such as areas, keypoints, nodes, elements, local coordinate systems, boundary conditions, etc.). This is called immediate mode graphics. Also note that symbols (such as boundary conditions, local
coordinate system triads, etc.) are shown immediately and will be present on subsequent displays unless you
turn off the appropriate symbol using the GUI plot controls function or the appropriate graphics specification
command.
An immediate image will also be automatically scaled to fit nicely within the Graphics Window -- a feature called
automatic scaling. The new scaling is usually apparent on the automatic replot associated with immediate mode.
To suppress automatic replot, issue /UIS,REPLOT,0. (With automatic replot suppressed, the immediate image
may not always be automatically scaled correctly.)
Note An immediate display in progress should not be aborted with the usual system "break" feature
(or else the ANSYS session itself will be aborted). When you run the ANSYS program interactively without
using the GUI, immediate mode is off by default.
This command is valid only in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Erase Options>Immediate Display
IMPD, Vpath, Ipath, Vsymm, Isymm
Calculates the impedance of a conductor at a reference plane.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Vpath
Path name for a predefined path [PATH command] for calculating the EMF (voltage drop) from the conductor
to a reference point. The path should start at the outer conductor wall and end at a reference voltage point.
3636
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/INPUT
Ipath
Path name for a predefined path [PATH command] for calculating the MMF (current) in a conductor. The
path should traverse a closed contour surrounding the conductor, and you should define the path in a
counterclockwise direction.
Vsymm
Symmetry factor applied to the calculated EMF (voltage drop). The EMF (voltage drop) from the conductor
to the reference point is multiplied by Vsymm.
Isymm
Symmetry factor applied to the calculated current. The calculated current is multiplied by Isymm.
Notes
Used in a harmonic high-frequency electromagnetic analysis, IMPD calculates the impedance of a conductor at
a reference plane from the EMF (voltage) and MMF (current) at the reference plane. The EMF (voltage drop) is
calculated by a line integral from the input path name (specified by the Vpath argument) that extends from the
conductor to a reference point. The MMF (current) is calculated by a closed path around the conductor from the
input path name (specified with Ipath). In cases having modeled symmetry, you can multiply the voltage drop
or current by symmetry factors (Vsymm and Isymm respectively).
This command macro returns the scalar parameters Zre and Zim, representing the real and imaginary components
of the impedance.
See magnetic macros for further details.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Path Based>Impedance
/INPUT, Fname, Ext, --, LINE, LOG
Switches the input file for the commands that follow.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to the current Jobname if Ext is specified.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
LINE
A value indicating either a line number in the file or a user-defined label in the file from which to begin
reading the input file.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3637
INRES
(blank), 0, or 1
Begins reading from the top of the file (default).
LINE_NUMBER
Begins reading from the specified line number in the file.
:label
Begins reading from the first line beginning with the matching user-defined label :label (beginning
with a colon (:), 8 characters maximum).
LOG
Indicates whether secondary input from this command should be recorded in the command log (File.LOG)
and the database log:
0
Record only the /INPUT command on the log (default).
1
Record commands in the specified secondary file as they are executed.
Notes
Switches the input file for the next commands. Commands are read from this file until an end-of-file or another
file switching directive is read. An end-of-file occurs after the last record of the file or when a /EOF command is
read. An automatic switch back one level (to the previous file) occurs when an end-of-file is encountered. Twenty
levels of nested file switching are allowed. Note that files including *DO, *USE, *ULIB, and the "Unknown Command" Macro have less nesting available because each of these operations also uses a level of file switching. For
an interactive run, a /INPUT,TERM switches to the terminal for the next input. A /EOF read from the terminal
then switches back to the previous file. A /INPUT (with a blank second field) switches back to the primary input
file.
Setting LOG = 1 on /INPUT causes all commands read from the specified file to be recorded in the command log
(File.LOG) and the internal database command log [LGWRITE]. This option is recommended if the log file will
be used later (e.g., as batch input or as an analysis file for design optimization). The LOG = 1 option is only valid
when the /INPUT occurs in the primary input file. Using LOG = 1 on a nested /INPUT or on a /INPUT within a doloop will have no effect (i.e., commands in the secondary input file are not written to the command log).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Read Input from
INRES, Item1, Item2, Item3, Item4, Item5, Item6, Item7, Item8
Identifies the data to be retrieved from the results file.
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item1, Item2, Item3, Item4, Item5, Item6, Item7, Item8
Data to be read into the database from the results file. May consist of any of the following labels:
3638
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
INRES
ALL
All solution items (default).
BASIC
NSOL, RSOL, NLOAD, STRS, FGRAD, and FFLUX items.
NSOL
Nodal DOF solution.
RSOL
Nodal reaction loads.
ESOL
Element solution items (includes all of the following):
NLOAD
Element nodal loads.
STRS
Element nodal stresses.
EPEL
Element elastic strains.
EPTH
Element thermal, initial, and swelling strains.
EPPL
Element plastic strains.
EPCR
Element creep strains.
FGRAD
Element nodal gradients.
FFLUX
Element nodal fluxes.
MISC
Element miscellaneous data (SMISC and NMISC).
Notes
Identifies the type of data to be retrieved from the results file for placement into the database through commands
such as SET, SUBSET, and APPEND. INRES is a companion command to the OUTRES command controlling data
written to the database and the results file. Since the INRES command can only flag data that has already been
written to the results file, care should be taken when using the OUTRES command to include all data you wish
to retrieve for postprocessing later on.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Data & File Opts
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3639
INRTIA
INRTIA
Specifies Inertial loads as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Inertia Loads
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Inertia Loads
INT1, IR, IY, IX, --, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB, CONST
Integrates a variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result. Table
values represent integrated sum of IY to current table position of IX.
IY, IX
Integrate variable IY with respect to IX.
--
Unused field.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed upon output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA, FACTB
Scaling factors (positive or negative) applied to the corresponding variables (default to 1.0).
CONST
Initial value.
Notes
Integrates variables according to the operation:
IR = (FACTA x IY) d(FACTB x IX) + CONST
3640
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
IOPTN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Integrate
INTSRF, Lab
Integrates nodal results on an exterior surface.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label indicating degree of freedom to be integrated:
PRES
Pressure.
TAUW
Wall shear stress.
FLOW
Both pressure and wall shear stress.
Notes
Integrates nodal results on a surface. Use node selection (such as the EXT option of the NSEL command) to indicate
the surface(s) of element faces to be used in the integration. A surface can be "created" by unselecting elements
(such as unselecting non-fluid elements that are adjacent to fluid elements for the postprocessing of fluid flow
result). Element faces attached to the selected nodes will be automatically determined. All nodes on a face must
be selected for the face to be used. The integration results will cancel for nodes on common faces of adjacent
selected elements.
Integration results are in the active coordinate system (see the RSYS command). The type of results coordinate
system must match the type used in the analysis. However, you may translate and rotate forces and moments
as needed. Use the *GET command (Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data) to retrieve the results.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Nodal Calcs>Surface Integral
IOPTN, Lab, VAL1
Controls options relating to importing a model.
AUX15: IGES
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label identifying the import option. The meaning of VAL1 will vary depending on Lab.
STAT
List overall status of import facilities, including current option values. VAL1 is ignored.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3641
IOPTN
DEFA
Set default values for all import options. VAL1is ignored.
MERG
Entity merge option. VAL1 can be:
YES
Automatic merging is performed (default).
NO
No merging of entities.
SOLID
Solid option. VAL1 can be:
YES
Solid is created automatically (default).
NO
No solid created.
GTOLER
Entity merging tolerance. Valid arguments for VAL1 depend on value of IGES. If IGES = FACETED, then
GTOLER,VAL1 is a numeric value used as a multiplying factor to change the maximum model dimension.
If IGES = SMOOTH, then GTOLER,VAL1 can be:
DEFA
Use system defaults (default).
FILE
Use tolerance from the imported file.
n
A user-specified tolerance value.
IGES
IGES import option. VAL1 can be:
STAT
List status of IGES related options in the output window.
SMOOTH (or RV52)
Use more robust IGES revision 5.2 import function (default).
FACETED (or RV53)
Use defeaturing database.
SMALL
Small areas option. VAL1 can be:
YES
Small areas are deleted (default).
NO
Small areas are retained.
VAL1
Additional input value as described under each option for Lab.
3642
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
IOPTN
Command Default
Merging will be performed during the IGES transfer with no global solid model tolerance (GTOLER) used.
Notes
Controls various options during a model file transfer (e.g., IGESIN command). A global solid model tolerance
(GTOLER) can be specified.
IOPTN,SMALL,YES (default value) will delete small areas and can cause geometrical inconsistencies that could
cause the import process to abort. Retaining the small areas will increase processor time and memory usage.
The two IGES translation options, SMOOTH and FACETED, determine which graphics database will be used when
IGES files are read into ANSYS. If the SMOOTH option is chosen (default), the data is stored in the standard ANSYS
graphics database. If the FACETED option is used, the defeaturing database is used and a special set of geometry
repair and enhancement tools, designed specifically for use with files imported from CAD systems, are made
available.
The SMOOTH option is capable of reading in any rational B-spline curve entity (type 126), or rational B-spline
surface entity (type 128) with a degree less than or equal to 20. Attempts to read in B-spline curve or surface
entities of degree higher than 20 may result in error messages.
The FACETED option translates all IGES topological and geometric entities. The option ignores data such as dimensions, text, annotation entities, structure entities, and any IGES entities that the filter doesn't recognize. The
FACETED option is not recommended for large, complex geometries.
If you issue the /CLEAR command, the IOPTN settings will return to their default.
If IOPTN, MERG, YES is used, merging of coincident geometry items is performed automatically when the IGESIN
command is issued. (In other words, an internal NUMMRG,KP command is issued.) The model will be merged
with the consideration tolerance (TOLER on NUMMRG) set equal to 0.75 * the shortest distance between the endpoints of any active line. See the NUMMRG command for more information on these tolerances. In most cases,
this default merging is appropriate. The IOPTN command should be used when you want to turn off merging
operations, override the default merging and specify a global solid model tolerance value (GTOLER), or turn off
the automatic creation of solids (SOLID). If used, the IOPTN command should be issued before the IGESIN command. You cannot change these options once your model has been imported or created. If you must change
these options, clear the database using the /CLEAR command (or exit and restart ANSYS), set the correct options,
and reimport or recreate the model.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Import
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3643
IRLF
IRLF, KEY
Specifies that inertia relief calculations are to be performed.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
KEY
Calculation key:
0
No inertia relief calculations.
1
Counterbalance loads with inertia relief forces.
-1
Precalculate masses for summary printout only (no inertia relief).
Command Default
No inertia relief calculations.
Notes
Specifies that the program is to calculate accelerations to counterbalance the applied loads (inertia relief). Displacement constraints on the structure should be only those necessary to prevent rigid-body motions (3 are
needed for a 2-D structure and 6 for a 3-D structure). The sum of the reaction forces at the constraint points will
be zero. Accelerations are calculated from the element mass matrices and the applied forces. Data needed to
calculate the mass (such as density) must be input. Both translational and rotational accelerations may be calculated.
This option applies only to the static (ANTYPE,STATIC) analysis. Nonlinearities, substructures, elements that operate in the nodal coordinate system, and axisymmetric elements are not allowed. Models with both 2-D and 3D element types are not recommended. Loads may be input as usual. Displacements and stresses are calculated
as usual. Use IRLIST to print inertia relief calculation results. The mass and moment of inertia summary printed
before the solution is accurate (because of the additional pre-calculations required for inertia relief). See the
ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for calculation details. See also the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide for procedural
details.
If the inertia relief calculation is to be performed in the second or later load step, you must specify EMATWRITE,YES
in the initial load step for the element matrices needed to perform the calculations to be available.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Inertia Relief
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Incl Mass Summry
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Inertia Relief
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Incl Mass Summry
3644
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ISFILE
IRLIST
Prints inertia relief summary table.
POST1: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
Prints the inertia relief summary data, including the mass summary table, the total load summary table, and the
inertia relief summary table resulting from the inertia relief calculations. These calculations are performed in the
solution phase [SOLVE or PSOLVE] as specified by the IRLF command.
Inertia relief output is stored in the database rather than in the results file (Jobname.RST). When you issue IRLIST,
ANSYS pulls the information from the database, which contains the inertia relief output from the most recent
solution [SOLVE or PSOLVE].
This command is valid in any processor.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ISFILE, Option, Fname, Ext, --, LOC, MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT4, MAT5, MAT6, MAT7, MAT8, MAT9, MAT10
Reads an initial stress state from a file into ANSYS.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Label identifying the option to be performed.
READ
Read initial stress data from the specified file (default).
LIST
List initial stresses that have been previously read in. LIST may take an elements ID or ALL as an option
to list a particular layer of the element.
DELE
Delete initial stresses that have been previously read in. DELE may take an elements ID or ALL as an option
to list a particular layer of the element.
Fname
If Option = READ, Fname is the file name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory).
If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters
for the file name. Defaults to Jobname.
If Option = LIST or DELETE, input the element number for which initial stresses are to be listed or deleted in
this field. If this field is blank, it defaults to all currently selected elements. For the layered SHELL181, SHELL208,
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3645
ISFILE
and SHELL209 elements, the next field (Ext) can be used to list or delete the initial stress specification for a
specific layer of the element. Remaining fields are ignored.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to IST if Fname is blank.
Layer number if Option = LIST or DELETE and the element type is layered SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
--
Unused field.
LOC
Global location flag. This flag indicates where the initial stresses are to be applied within each element.
0
Element centroid (default).
1
Integration points.
2
Element specific locations. For this option, you must specify a location flag with each element stress record
in the initial stress file.
3
Constant stress state. The first stress record on the initial stress file is used to initiate a constant stress
state for all elements.
MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT4, MAT5, MAT6, MAT7, MAT8, MAT9, MAT10
Materials to which the initial stresses should apply. If not specified, the stresses apply to all materials.
Notes
This command reads initial stresses from an ASCII file (initial stress file) and applies them as loads in an ANSYS
structural analysis. The initial stress import capability is supported by the following element types: PLANE2,
PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. This command operates only on the currently
selected set of elements. The element numbers in the initial stress file must match those in the selected set. The
initial stresses must be specified in the element local coordinate system. If an element coordinate system (ESYS)
is defined for an element, the initial stresses must be specified in this coordinate system. The format of the initial
stress file is documented in Initial Stress Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
The optional list of materials can be specified as individual material numbers and/or ranges of materials. A range
is specified by using three consecutive MAT slots with the first slot being one end of the range, the second slot
being the other end of the range, and the third slot being the increment to use for the range. It is not necessary
to enter the lower end of the range first. The increment must be entered as a negative number. For example, to
specify that the stresses apply to material 1 and the even material numbers from 2 to 8, you would enter 1,2,8,2 in four consecutive MAT slots.
The option READ allows for layered SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209 elements. The element record on the
initial stress file is automatically extended to allow for initial stress specification for every layer.
The options LIST and DELE can take an element's ID or ALL to list a particular layer of the element. If the element
number is blank, it lists or deletes the initial stress definition for all elements. If the specific element number is
3646
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ISTRESS
defined, it does the listing or deleting for all layers of the element. If a layer number is provided, it does those
operations only for that layer. The initial stress command will overwrite any previous initial stress specification.
You cannot use more than one method (ISTRESS, ISFILE, or the USTRESS user subroutine) to input initial stresses
for an element. ISWRITE can be used to write out initial stress values to an ASCII file.
The ISFILE command will overwrite any previous initial stress specification applied through the ISFILE or ISTRESS
commands.
The ISFILE command is only available in SOLUTION. This command is not supported by CDWRITE.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Delete Stresses
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>List Stresses
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Read IS File
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Delete Stresses
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>List Stresses
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Read IS File
ISTRESS, Sx, Sy, Sz, Sxy, Syz, Sxz, MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT4, MAT5, MAT6, MAT7, MAT8, MAT9, MAT10
Defines a set of initial stress values.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Sx, Sy, Sz, Sxy, Syz, Sxz
Initial, constant stress values.
MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT4, MAT5, MAT6, MAT7, MAT8, MAT9, MAT10
Materials to which the initial stresses should apply. If not specified, the stresses apply to all materials.
Notes
ISTRESS is available only in the solution phase. The command provides a set of initial stress values which are
applied in an ANSYS structural analysis. It operates only on the currently selected set of elements, and is supported
by the following element types: PLANE2, PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181,
PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
The initial stresses must be specified in the element local coordinate system. If an element coordinate system
(ESYS command) is defined for an element, the initial stress values must be supplied in that coordinate system.
After setting the stress, it may be listed or deleted for any specific element or for all elements using ISFILE.
The optional list of materials can be specified as individual material numbers and/or ranges of materials. A range
is specified by using three consecutive MAT slots with the first slot being one end of the range, the second slot
being the other end of the range, and the third slot being the increment to use for the range. It is not necessary
to enter the lower end of the range first. The increment must be entered as a negative number. For example, to
specify that the stresses apply to material 1 and the even material numbers from 2 to 8, you would enter 1,2,8,2 in four consecutive MAT slots.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3647
ISWRITE
You cannot use more than one method (ISTRESS, ISFILE, or the USTRESS user subroutine) to input initial stresses
for an element. The ISTRESS command will overwrite the initial stress specified previously by the ISFILE or ISTRESS
commands. This command is not supported by the CDWRITE command.
A static analysis with initial stress cannot be used in a subsequent prestressed modal or buckling analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Apply Const Strs
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Apply Const Strs
ISWRITE, Switch
Writes an ASCII file containing the initial stress values.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Switch
Determines whether an initial stress file is written (or not).
ON
Writes an initial stress file with the name Jobname.ist.
OFF
Does not write the initial stress file.
Notes
ISWRITE is available only in the solution phase. The command writes a file containing the stresses. Should an
initial stress file of the same name already exist, the file is overwritten.
This command is not supported by the CDWRITE command.
For nonlinear analysis, the stresses are calculated at the integration points when convergence occurs. For linear
analysis, the stresses are calculated when the solution is finished.
The format of the initial stress file is documented in Initial Stress Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Write Stresses
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Initial Stress>Write Stresses
3648
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
J Commands
JPEG, Kywrd, OPT
Provides JPEG file export for ANSYS displays.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Kywrd
Specifies various JPEG file export options.
QUAL
If Kywrd = QUAL, then OPT is an integer value defining the JPEG quality index on an arbitrary scale ranging
from 1 to 100. The default value is 75.
ORIENT
If Kywrd = ORIENT, then OPT will determine the orientation of the entire plot. OPT can be either Horizontal
(default) or Vertical.
COLOR
If Kywrd = COLOR, then OPT will determine the color depth of the saved file. OPT can be 0, 1, or 2, corresponding to Black and White, Grayscale, and Color (default), respectively.
TMOD
If Kywrd = TMOD, then OPT will determine the text method. OPT can be either 1 or 0, corresponding to
bitmap text (default) or line stroke text, respectively.
DEFAULT
If Kywrd = DEFAULT, then all of the default values, for all of the Kywrd parameters listed above, are active.
OPT
OPT can have the following names or values, depending on the value for Kywrd (see above).
1 to 100
If Kywrd = QUAL, a value between 1 and 100 will determine the quality index of the JPEG file.
Horizontal, Vertical
If Kywrd = ORIENT, the terms Horizontal or Vertical determine the orientation of the plot.
0,1,2
If Kywrd = COLOR, the numbers 0, 1, and 2 correspond to Black and White, Grayscale and Color, respectively.
1,0
If Kywrd = TMOD, the values 1 and 0 determine whether bitmap (1) or stroke text (0) fonts will be used
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>HardCopy>ToFile
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
JSOL
JSOL, NVAR, ELEM, ITEM, COMP, Name
Stores the relative displacement, relative rotation, reaction forces, and moments for the joint element.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number or name assigned to this variable. Variable numbers can be 2 to NV (NUMVAR)
while the name can be an eight-byte character string. Overwrites any existing results for this variable.
ELEM
Element number for which to store results.
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in JSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
Comp
Component of the Item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in JSOL - Valid Item and Component
Labels below.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the item on printouts and displays. Defaults to a label formed by
concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels.
Notes
Valid for the MPC184 joint element using KEYOPT(1) = 6 or 7.
JSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z
x, y, or z relative displacement.
ROT
X, Y, Z
x, y, or z relative rotation.
RF
X, Y, Z
Reaction forces in the local x, y, or z direction.
RM
X, Y, Z
Reaction moments in the local x, y, or z direction.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
3650
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
K Commands
K, NPT, X, Y, Z
Defines a keypoint.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NPT
Reference number for keypoint. If zero, the lowest available number is assigned [NUMSTR].
X, Y, Z
Keypoint location in the active coordinate system (may be R, , Z or R, , ). If X = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all other fields (including NPT) are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Notes
Defines a keypoint in the active coordinate system [CSYS] for line, area, and volume descriptions. A previously
defined keypoint of the same number will be redefined. Keypoints may be redefined only if it is not yet attached
to a line or is not yet meshed. Solid modeling in a toroidal system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>In Active CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>On Working Plane
KATT, MAT, REAL, TYPE, ESYS
Associates attributes with the selected, unmeshed keypoints.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT, REAL, TYPE, ESYS
Material number, real constant set number, type number, and coordinate system number to be associated
with selected, unmeshed keypoints.
Notes
Keypoints subsequently generated from the keypoints will also have these attributes. These element attributes
will be used when the keypoints are meshed. If a keypoint does not have attributes associated with it (by this
command) at the time it is meshed, the attributes are obtained from the then current MAT, REAL,TYPE, and
ESYS command settings. Reissue the KATT command (before keypoints are meshed) to change the attributes.
A zero (or blank) argument removes the corresponding association.
If any of the arguments MAT, REAL, TYPE, or ESYS are defined as -1, then that value will be left unchanged in the
selected set.
In some cases, ANSYS can proceed with a keypoint meshing operation even when no logical element type has
been assigned via KATT,,,TYPE or TYPE. For more information, see the discussion on setting element attributes
in Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KBC
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>All Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Picked KPs
KBC, KEY
Specifies stepped or ramped loading within a load step.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KEY
Ramping key:
0
Loads are linearly interpolated (ramped) for each substep from the values of the previous load step to
the values of this load step.
1
Loads are step changed (stepped) at the first substep of this load step to the values of this load step (i.e.,
the same values are used for all substeps). Useful for rate-dependent behavior (e.g., creep, viscoplasticity,
etc.) or transient load steps only.
Command Default
When SOLCONTROL is ON, ANSYS performs ramped loading if ANTYPE,STATIC, or if ANTYPE,TRANS and
TIMINT,OFF. It performs stepped loading if ANTYPE,TRANS and TIMINT,ON. (In a transient analysis, TIMINT,ON
is the default.)
When SOLCONTROL is OFF, ramped loading for all types of transient or nonlinear analysis.
Notes
Specifies whether loads applied to intermediate substeps within the load step are to be stepped or ramped.
Used only if DTIME on the DELTIM command is less than the time span or, conversely, if NSBSTP on the NSUBST
command is greater than one. Flags (FSI, MXWF, MVDI, etc.) are always stepped.
For ramped loading (KBC,0), when a load is applied for the first time, it is interpolated from zero to the value of
the current load step, and not from the initial condition or value of the DOF from the previous load step. Tabular
boundary conditions do not support ramping and instead apply their full value regardless of the KBC setting.
Irrespective of the KBC setting, loads are usually step-removed. See Stepping or Ramping Loads in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide for more information.
It sometimes is difficult to obtain successful convergence with stepped loading in a nonlinear transient problem.
If divergence is encountered, check if stepped loading was used by default, then determine if it is appropriate
for the analysis.
If you run an analysis with SOLCONTROL,ON, but do not issue the KBC command, ANSYS will choose whether
or not to use stepped or ramped loads. The program-chosen option will be recorded on the load step files as
KBC,-1.
3652
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KBETW
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Freq and Substps
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Freq and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
KBETW, KP1, KP2, KPNEW, Type, VALUE
Creates a keypoint between two existing keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KP1
First keypoint. If KP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid
only in the GUI).
KP2
Second keypoint.
KPNEW
Number assigned to the new keypoint. Defaults to the lowest available keypoint number.
Type
Type of input for VALUE.
RATIO
Value is the ratio of the distances between keypoints as follows: (KP1-KPNEW)/(KP1-KP2).
DIST
Value is the absolute distance between KP1 and KPNEW (valid only if current coordinate system is Cartesian).
VALUE
Location of new keypoint, as defined by Type (defaults to 0.5). If VALUE is a ratio (Type = RATIO) and is less
than 0 or greater than 1, the keypoint is created on the extended line. Similarly, if VALUE is a distance (Type
= DIST) and is less than 0 or greater than the distance between KP1 and KP2, the keypoint is created on the
extended line.
Notes
Placement of the new keypoint depends on the currently active coordinate system [CSYS]. If the coordinate
system is Cartesian, the keypoint will lie on a straight line between KP1 and KP2. If the system is not Cartesian
(e.g., cylindrical, spherical, etc.), the keypoint will be located as if on a line (which may not be straight) created
in the current coordinate system between KP1 and KP2. Note that solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system
is not recommended.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3653
KCALC
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>KP between KPs
KCALC, KPLAN, MAT, KCSYM, KLOCPR
Calculates stress intensity factors in fracture mechanics analyses.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
KPLAN
Plane stress key:
0
Use plane strain or axisymmetric displacement extrapolation.
1
Use plane stress displacement extrapolation.
MAT
Material number used in the extrapolation (defaults to 1).
KCSYM
Symmetry key:
0 or 1
Half-crack model with symmetry boundary conditions [DSYM] in the crack-tip coordinate system. KII =
KIII = 0. Three nodes are required on the path.
2
Like 1 except with antisymmetric boundary conditions (KI = 0).
3
Full-crack model (both faces). Five nodes are required on the path (one at the tip and two on each face).
KLOCPR
Local displacements print key:
0
Do not print local crack-tip displacements.
1
Print local displacements used in the extrapolation technique.
Notes
Calculates the stress intensity factors (KI, KII, and KIII) associated with homogeneous isotropic linear elastic fracture
mechanics. A displacement extrapolation method is used in the calculation (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference).
ANSYS Uses minor Poisson's ratio (MP,NUXY) for the stress intensity factor calculation, therefore the material's
Poisson's ratio must be defined using MP,NUXY command. The PATH and PPATH commands must be used to
define a path with the crack face nodes (NODE1 at the crack tip, NODE2 and NODE3 on one face, NODE4 and NODE5
on the other (optional) face). A crack-tip coordinate system, having x parallel to the crack face (and perpendicular
to the crack front) and y perpendicular to the crack face, must be the active RSYS and CSYS before KCALC is issued.
3654
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KCENTER
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Nodal Calcs>Stress Int Factr
KCENTER, Type, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, KPNEW
Creates a keypoint at the center of a circular arc defined by three locations.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Type of entity used to define the circular arc. The meaning of VAL1 through VAL4 will vary depending on
Type. If Type = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI).
KP
Arc is defined by keypoints.
LINE
Arc is defined by locations on a line.
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Values used to specify three locations on the arc (see table below).
KPNEW
Number assigned to new keypoint. Defaults to the lowest available keypoint number.
Definitions:
If Type = KP, inputs VAL1 through VAL4 are defined as follows:
VAL1
First keypoint.
VAL2
Second keypoint.
VAL3
Third keypoint.
VAL4
Arc radius. If VAL4 = 0 or blank (default), the arc is defined by the three keypoints specified as VAL1, VAL2,
and VAL3 and arc radius is not used. If VAL4 is nonzero, VAL1, VAL2, and VAL4 are used to calculate the
center point, and VAL3 is used to locate the center point as follows:
VAL4 > 0
Center point and VAL3 are on the same side of the line between the first two keypoints.
VAL4 < 0
Center point and VAL3 are on opposite sides of the line between the first two keypoints.
If Type = LINE, inputs VAL1 through VAL4 are defined as follows:
VAL1
Line number.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3655
KCENTER
VAL2
Line ratio (0 to 1) indicating the first location (defaults to 0).
VAL3
Line ratio (0 to 1) indicating the second location (defaults to 0.5).
VAL4
Line ratio (0 to 1) indicating the third location (defaults to 1).
Notes
KCENTER should be used in the Cartesian coordinate system (CSYS,0) only. This command provides three
methods to define a keypoint at the center of three locations. As shown below, the center point can be calculated
based on a) three keypoints, b) three keypoints and a radius, or c) three locations on a line. Note that for method
c, if a circular line is specified by VAL1, VAL2 through VAL4 are not needed.
!
# "
(
P
I&(
efcd(`aY
b
XFR@ 3q"4piT"AX"(g##2)
V r G A A 5 h B 9
e c b `
fd(aY
P
(
# "
!
% $
I
&
I
&(
(
P
(
edaY
c b `
B4V7 3U"6TE)
95 S
Q
R(
(
7 "96(WX)
BV 3 U 5
Q
R(
!
# '&
% $
7 3U"XT9t0XFR@ "4pT"AX"(#Ds)
V 95 U @ 9 V 3 r q G A i A 5 h g B
(
P
R(
Q
B A 8 G5 95 3 D 9)
# 3@ H%6EF "E520C(
# "&
!
% $
efd(aY
c b `
I
&C(
B A 8 5 8 1 3 1)
# 3@ 9 "765 420
cd(aY
e b `
A 8 @ r V @ 3F 1 r B
3@ H&r v49R"u16)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>KP at center>3 keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>KP at center>3 KPs and radius
3656
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KDELE
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>KP at center>Location on line
KCLEAR, NP1, NP2, NINC
Deletes nodes and point elements associated with selected keypoints.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
Delete mesh for keypoints NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and
NINC are ignored and the mesh for all selected keypoints [KSEL] is deleted. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for NP1.
Notes
Deletes all nodes and point elements associated with selected keypoints (regardless of whether the nodes or
elements are selected). Nodes associated with non-point elements will not be deleted. Attributes assigned as a
result of KATT are maintained. In the program's response to the command, if a keypoint is tallied as cleared,
it means either its node or element reference was deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Clear>Keypoints
KDELE, NP1, NP2, NINC
Deletes unmeshed keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
Delete keypoints from NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and
NINC are ignored and all selected keypoints [KSEL] are deleted. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and
all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted
for NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Deletes selected keypoints. A keypoint attached to a line cannot be deleted unless the line is first deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Delete>Keypoints
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3657
KDIST
KDIST, KP1, KP2
Calculates and lists the distance between two keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KP1
First keypoint in distance calculation. If KP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
KP2
Second keypoint in distance calculation.
Notes
KDIST lists the distance between keypoints KP1 and KP2, as well as the current coordinate system offsets from
KP1 to KP2, where the X, Y, and Z locations of KP1 are subtracted from the X, Y, and Z locations of KP2 (respectively)
to determine the offsets. KDIST is valid in any coordinate system except toroidal [CSYS,3].
KDIST returns a variable, called _RETURN, which contains the distance value. You can use this value for various
purposes; for example, to set the default number of line divisions to be generated along region boundary lines
[ESIZE,_RETURN]. In interactive mode, you can access this command by using the Model Query Picker (Utility
Menu> List> Picked Entities), where you can also access automatic annotation functions, and display the value
on your model.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Check Geom>KP distances
KEEP, Key
Stores POST26 definitions and data during active session.
POST26: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Key
State or value
On or 1
Allows you to exit and reenter /POST26 without losing your current time history variable information.
Keeps a cache of the /POST26 variable information including the active file name (FILE), variable definitions (NSOL, ESOL, GAPF, RFORCE, SOLU, and EDREAD) and stored variable data in memory for the
current ANSYS session.
Off or 0
/POST26 variable information is deleted when you exit /POST26.
3658
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KESIZE
Command Default
ON - Hold time history information in memory. You can, for example, move back and forth between /POST1 and
/POST26 without redefining and storing the time history variables each time you enter /POST26.
Notes
Your variable information is saved in memory only for the current active ANSYS session. It is deleted when you
exit ANSYS. This information is also deleted when you issue /CLEAR, RESUME, SOLVE, or RESET.
When you reenter /POST26 all time history variable data is available for use. When you issue STORE,NEW, variable
definitions created by math operations such as ADD or PROD will not be restored. However, variables defined
with NSOL, ESOL, GAPF, RFORCE, SOLU, and EDREAD will be restored. Only the last active results file name is
kept in memory (FILE).
Commands such as LAYERP26, SHELL, and FORCE that specify the location or a component of data to be stored
will retain the setting at the time of exiting /POST26 .
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Data
KESIZE, NPT, SIZE, FACT1, FACT2
Specifies the edge lengths of the elements nearest a keypoint.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NPT
Number of the keypoint whose lines will be adjusted. If ALL, use all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If NPT = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
SIZE
Size of elements along lines nearest keypoint NPT (overrides any other specified size). If SIZE is zero (or
blank), use FACT1 or FACT2.
FACT1
Scale factor applied to a previously defined SIZE. Not used if SIZE is input.
FACT2
Scale factor applied to the minimum element division at keypoint NPT for any attached line. This feature is
useful with adaptive mesh refinement. Not used if SIZE or FACT1 is input.
Notes
Affects only the line divisions adjacent to the keypoint on lines not previously assigned divisions by other line
commands [LESIZE, etc.]. The remaining line divisions are determined from the division nearest the keypoint at
the other end of the line (specified by another KESIZE command or the ESIZE command). Divisions are transferred
to the lines during the mesh operation. If smart element sizing is being used [SMRTSIZE], KESIZE specifications
may be overridden (i.e., a smaller element size may be used) to accommodate curvature and small features.
This command is valid in any processor. The command is also valid for rezoning.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3659
KEYOPT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Keypoints>All KPs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Keypoints>Clr Size
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Keypoints>Picked KPs
KEYOPT, ITYPE, KNUM, VALUE
Sets element key options.
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITYPE
Element type number as defined on the ET command.
KNUM
Number of the KEYOPT to be defined (KEYOPT(KNUM)).
VALUE
Value of this KEYOPT.
Notes
Alternative to inputting KEYOPT values on ET command. Must be used if KEYOPT(7) or greater values are to be
input. ITYPE must first be defined with the ET command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>FLOTRAN Coor Sys
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Flow Environment>FLOTRAN Coor Sys
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
KEYPTS
Specifies "Keypoints" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
3660
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KFILL
KEYW, Keyword, KEY
Sets a keyword used by the GUI for context filtering (GUI).
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Keyword
A keyword which, when set to either true or false, changes the behavior of the GUI.
KEY
Keyword switch:
0
Sets the keyword to false.
1
Sets the keyword to true.
Notes
Defines a keyword used by the GUI for context filtering. This is a command generated by the GUI and may appear
in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if the GUI is used. This command is usually not typed in directly in an ANSYS session.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preferences
KFILL, NP1, NP2, NFILL, NSTRT, NINC, SPACE
Generates keypoints between two keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2
Beginning and ending keypoints for fill-in. NP1 defaults to next to last keypoint specified, NP2 defaults to
last keypoint specified. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI).
NFILL
Fill NFILL keypoints between NP1 and NP2 (defaults to |NP2-NP1|-1). NFILL must be positive.
NSTRT
Keypoint number assigned to first filled-in keypoint (defaults to NP1 + NINC).
NINC
Add this increment to each of the remaining filled-in keypoint numbers (may be positive or negative). Defaults
to (NP2-NP1)/(NFILL + 1), i.e., linear interpolation.
SPACE
Spacing ratio. Ratio of last division size to first division size. If > 1.0, divisions increase. If < 1.0, divisions decrease. Ratio defaults to 1.0 (uniform spacing).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3661
KGEN
Notes
Generates keypoints (in the active coordinate system) between two existing keypoints. The two keypoints may
have been defined in any coordinate system. However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Any number of keypoints may be filled in and any keypoint numbering sequence may be assigned.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>Fill between KPs
KGEN, ITIME, NP1, NP2, NINC, DX, DY, DZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates additional keypoints from a pattern of keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITIME
Do this generation operation a total of ITIME times, incrementing all keypoints in the given pattern automatically (or by KINC) each time after the first. ITIME must be more than 1 for generation to occur.
NP1, NP2, NINC
Generate keypoints from the pattern of keypoints beginning with NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of
NINC (defaults to 1). If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected keypoints [KSEL].
If NP1 is negative, NP2 and NINC are ignored and the last |NP1| keypoints (in sequence from the highest
keypoint number) are used as the pattern to be repeated. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for
NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
DX, DY, DZ
Keypoint location increments in the active coordinate system (DR, D, DZ for cylindrical, DR, D, D for
spherical).
KINC
Keypoint increment between generated sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned
[NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies if elements and nodes are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and point elements associated with the original keypoints, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether keypoints will be moved or newly defined:
0
Generate additional keypoints as requested with the ITIME argument.
3662
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KLIST
1
Move original keypoints to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (ITIME, KINC, and NOELEM
are ignored). Valid only if the old keypoints are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding
meshed items are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates additional keypoints (and corresponding mesh) from a given keypoint pattern. The MAT, TYPE, REAL,
and ESYS attributes are based upon the keypoints in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Generation
is done in the active coordinate system. Keypoints in the pattern may have been defined in any coordinate system.
However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Keypoints
KL, NL1, RATIO, NK1
Generates a keypoint at a specified location on an existing line.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the line. If negative, the direction of line (as interpreted for RATIO) is reversed. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
RATIO
Ratio of line length to locate keypoint. Must be between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.5 (divide the line in half).
NK1
Number to be assigned to keypoint generated at division location (defaults to lowest available keypoint
number [NUMSTR]).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>On Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>On Line w/Ratio
KLIST, NP1, NP2, NINC, Lab
Lists the defined keypoints or hard points.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
List keypoints from NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NP1 = ALL (default), NP2
and NINC are ignored and all selected keypoints [KSEL] are listed. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3663
KMESH
Lab
Coordinate listing key:
(blank)
List all keypoint information.
COORD
Suppress all but the keypoint coordinates (shown to a higher degree of accuracy than when displayed
with all information).
HPT
List only hard point information.
Notes
Lists keypoints in the active display coordinate system [DSYS]. An attribute (TYPE, MAT, REAL, or ESYS) listed as
a zero is unassigned; one listed as a positive value indicates that the attribute was assigned with the KATT
command (and will not be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared); one listed as a negative value indicates that the
attribute was assigned using the attribute pointer [TYPE, MAT, REAL, or ESYS] that was active during meshing
(and will be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Keypoints>Coordinates +Attributes
Utility Menu>List>Keypoints>Coordinates only
Utility Menu>List>Keypoints>Hard Points
KMESH, NP1, NP2, NINC
Generates nodes and point elements at keypoints.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
Mesh keypoints from NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and NINC
are ignored and all selected keypoints [KSEL] are meshed. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all
remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted
for NP1.
Notes
Missing nodes required for the generated elements are created and assigned the lowest available numbers.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Keypoints
3664
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KMOVE
KMODIF, NPT, X, Y, Z
Modifies an existing keypoint.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NPT
Modify coordinates of this keypoint. If NPT = ALL, modify coordinates of all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If NPT
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for NPT.
X, Y, Z
Replace the previous coordinate values assigned to this keypoint with these corresponding coordinate values.
Values are interpreted according to the active coordinate system (R, , Z for cylindrical, R, , for spherical).
If X = P, graphical picking is used to locate keypoint and Y and Z are ignored. A blank retains the previous
value. You cannot specify Y = P.
Notes
Lines, areas, and volumes attached to the modified keypoint (if any) must all be selected and will be redefined
using the active coordinate system. However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Caution: Redefined entities may be removed from any defined components and assemblies. Nodes and
elements will be automatically cleared from any redefined keypoints, lines, areas, or volumes.
The KMODIF command moves keypoints for geometry modification without validating underlying entities. To
merge keypoints and update higher order entities, issue the NUMMRG command instead.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Keypoints>Set of KPs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Keypoints>Single KP
KMOVE, NPT, KC1, X1, Y1, Z1, KC2, X2, Y2, Z2
Calculates and moves a keypoint to an intersection.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NPT
Move this keypoint. If NPT = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NPT.
KC1
First coordinate system number. Defaults to 0 (global Cartesian).
X1, Y1, Z1
Input one or two values defining the location of the keypoint in this coordinate system. Input "U" for unknown
value(s) to be calculated and input "E" to use an existing coordinate value. Fields are R1, 1, Z1 for cylindrical,
or R1, 1, 1 for spherical.
KC2
Second coordinate system number.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3665
KNODE
X2, Y2, Z2
Input two or one value(s) defining the location of the keypoint in this coordinate system. Input U for unknown
value(s) to be calculated and input E to use an existing coordinate value. Arguments are R2, 2, Z2 for cylindrical, or R2, 2, 2 for spherical.
Notes
Calculates and moves a keypoint to an intersection location. The keypoint must have been previously defined
(at an approximate location) or left undefined (in which case it is internally defined at the SOURCE location). The
actual location is calculated from the intersection of three surfaces (implied from three coordinate constants in
two different coordinate systems). Note that solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
See the MOVE command for surface and intersection details. The three (of six) constants easiest to define should
be used. The program will calculate the remaining three coordinate constants. All arguments, except KC1, must
be input. Use the repeat command [*REPEAT] after the KMOVE command to move a series of keypoints, if desired.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Keypoints>To Intersect
KNODE, NPT, NODE
Defines a keypoint at an existing node location.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NPT
Arbitrary reference number for keypoint. If zero, the lowest available number is assigned [NUMSTR].
NODE
Node number defining global X, Y, Z keypoint location. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for
NODE.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>On Node
KPLOT, NP1, NP2, NINC, Lab
Displays the selected keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
Display keypoints from NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NP1 = ALL (default),
NP2 and NINC are ignored and all selected keypoints [KSEL] are displayed.
Lab
Determines what keypoints are plotted (one of the following):
3666
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KPSCALE
(blank)
Plots all keypoints.
HPT
Plots only those keypoints that are hard points.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Keypoints>Hardpoints
Utility Menu>Plot>Keypoints>Keypoints
Utility Menu>Plot>Specified Entities>Keypoints
KPSCALE, NP1, NP2, NINC, RX, RY, RZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates a scaled set of (meshed) keypoints from a pattern of keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
Set of keypoints (NP1 to NP2 in steps of NINC) that defines the pattern to be scaled. NP2 defaults to NP1, NINC
defaults to 1. If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is defined by all selected keypoints. If
NP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
RX, RY, RZ
Scale factors to be applied to the X, Y, Z keypoint coordinates in the active coordinate system (RR, R, RZ for
cylindrical; RR, R, R for spherical). The R and R scale factors are interpreted as angular offsets. For example,
if CSYS = 1, an RX, RY, RZ input of (1.5,10,3) would scale the specified keypoints 1.5 times in the radial and 3
times in the Z direction, while adding an offset of 10 degrees to the keypoints.) Zero, blank, or negative scale
factor values are assumed to be 1.0. Zero or blank angular offsets have no effect.
KINC
Increment to be applied to the keypoint numbers for generated set. If zero, the lowest available keypoint
numbers will be assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Nodes and point elements associated with the original keypoints will be generated (scaled) if they exist.
1
Nodes and point elements will not be generated.
IMOVE
Specifies whether keypoints will be moved or newly defined:
0
Additional keypoints will be generated.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3667
KREFINE
1
Original keypoints will be moved to new position (KINC and NOELEM are ignored). Use only if the old
keypoints are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items are also moved
if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates a scaled set of keypoints (and corresponding mesh) from a pattern of keypoints. The MAT, TYPE, REAL,
and ESYS attributes are based on the keypoints in the pattern and not the current settings. Scaling is done in
the active coordinate system. Keypoints in the pattern could have been generated in any coordinate system.
However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Scale>Keypoints
KREFINE, NP1, NP2, NINC, LEVEL, DEPTH, POST, RETAIN
Refines the mesh around specified keypoints.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NP1, NP2, NINC
Keypoints (NP1 to NP2 in increments of NINC) around which the mesh is to be refined. NP2 defaults to NP1,
and NINC defaults to 1. If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and NINC are ignored and all selected keypoints are used for refinement. If NP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
LEVEL
Amount of refinement to be done. Specify the value of LEVEL as an integer from 1 to 5, where a value of 1
provides minimal refinement, and a value of 5 provides maximum refinement (defaults to 1).
DEPTH
Depth of mesh refinement in terms of the number of elements outward from the indicated keypoints (defaults
to 1).
POST
Type of postprocessing to be done after element splitting, in order to improve element quality:
OFF
No postprocessing will be done.
SMOOTH
Smoothing will be done. Node locations may change.
CLEAN
Smoothing and cleanup will be done. Existing elements may be deleted, and node locations may change
(default).
RETAIN
Flag indicating whether quadrilateral elements must be retained in the refinement of an all-quadrilateral
mesh. (The ANSYS program ignores the RETAIN argument when you are refining anything other than a
quadrilateral mesh.)
3668
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KSCALE
ON
The final mesh will be composed entirely of quadrilateral elements, regardless of the element quality
(default).
OFF
The final mesh may include some triangular elements in order to maintain element quality and provide
transitioning.
Notes
KREFINE performs local mesh refinement around the specified keypoints. By default, the indicated elements
are split to create new elements with 1/2 the edge length of the original elements (LEVEL = 1).
KREFINE refines all area elements and tetrahedral volume elements that are adjacent to the specified keypoints.
Any volume elements that are adjacent to the specified keypoints, but are not tetrahedra (for example, hexahedra,
wedges, and pyramids), are not refined.
You cannot use mesh refinement on a solid model that contains initial conditions at nodes [IC], coupled nodes
[CP family of commands], constraint equations [CE family of commands], or boundary conditions or loads applied
directly to any of its nodes or elements. This applies to nodes and elements anywhere in the model, not just in
the region where you want to request mesh refinement. See Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for additional restrictions on mesh refinement.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Keypoints
KSCALE, KINC, NP1, NP2, NINC, RX, RY, RZ
Generates a scaled pattern of keypoints from a given keypoint pattern.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KINC
Do this scaling operation one time, incrementing all keypoints in the given pattern by KINC. If KINC = 0,
keypoints will be redefined at the scaled locations.
NP1, NP2, NINC
Scale keypoints from pattern beginning with NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If
NP1 = ALL, NP2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If NP1 = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may
also be substituted for NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
RX, RY, RZ
Scale factor ratios. Scaling is relative to the origin of the active coordinate system (RR, R, RZ for cylindrical,
RR, R, R for spherical). If > 1.0, pattern is enlarged. If < 1.0, pattern is reduced. Ratios each default to 1.0.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3669
KSCON
Notes
Generates a scaled pattern of keypoints from a given keypoint pattern. Scaling is done in the active coordinate
system (see analogous node scaling [NSCALE]). Solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
KSCON, NPT, DELR, KCTIP, NTHET, RRAT
Specifies a keypoint about which an area mesh will be skewed.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NPT
Keypoint number at concentration. If NPT = ALL, use all selected keypoints. If remaining fields are blank, remove
concentration from this keypoint (if unmeshed). If NPT = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NPT.
DELR
Radius of first row of elements about keypoint.
KCTIP
Crack tip singularity key:
0
Do not skew midside nodes, if any, within the element.
1
Skew midside nodes of the first row of elements to the 1/4 point for crack tip singularity.
NTHET
Number of elements in circumferential direction (defaults to approximately one per 45 (or one per 30, if
KCTIP = 1)).
RRAT
Ratio of 2nd row element size to DELR (defaults to 0.75, or 0.5 if KCTIP = 1).
Notes
Defines a concentration keypoint about which an area mesh will be skewed. Useful for modeling stress concentrations and crack tips. During meshing, elements are initially generated circumferentially about, and radially
away, from the keypoint. Lines attached to the keypoint are given appropriate divisions and spacing ratios. Only
one concentration keypoint per unmeshed area is allowed. Use KSCON,STAT to list current status of concentration
keypoints. The KSCON command does not support 3-D modeling.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
3670
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KSEL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>Concentrat KPs>Create
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>Concentrat KPs>List
KSEL, Type, Item, Comp, VMIN, VMAX, VINC, KABS
Selects a subset of keypoints or hard points.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Restore the full set.
NONE
Unselect the full set.
INVE
Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT
Display the current select status.
The following fields are used only with Type = S, R, A, or U:
Item
Label identifying data. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a component
label. If Item = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). Defaults to KP.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
VMIN
Minimum value of item range. Ranges are keypoint numbers, coordinate values, attribute numbers, etc., as
appropriate for the item. A component name (as specified on the CM command) may also be substituted
for VMIN (VMAX and VINC are ignored). If Item = MAT, TYPE, REAL, or ESYS and if VMIN is positive, the absolute
value of Item is compared against the range for selection; if VMIN is negative, the signed value of Item is
compared. See the KLIST command for a discussion of signed attributes.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3671
KSEL
VMAX
Maximum value of item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN. If VMIN = VMAX, a tolerance of 0.005x VMIN is used,
or 1.0E-6 if VMIN = 0.0. If VMAX VMIN, a tolerance of 1.0E-8x (VMAX - VMIN) is used.
VINC
Value increment within range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for keypoint numbers). Defaults to 1.
VINC cannot be negative.
KABS
Absolute value key:
0
Check sign of value during selection.
1
Use absolute value during selection (sign ignored).
Command Default
All keypoints are selected.
Notes
Selects a subset of keypoints or hard points. For example, to select a new set of keypoints based on keypoint
numbers 1 through 7, use KSEL,S,KP,,1,7. The selected subset is used when the ALL label is entered (or implied)
on other commands, such as KLIST,ALL. Only data identified by keypoint number are selected. Data are flagged
as selected and unselected; no data are actually deleted from the database.
This command is valid in any processor.
KSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels KSEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KABS
Item
Comp
Description
KP
Keypoint number.
EXT
Keypoint numbers on exterior of selected lines (ignore remaining fields).
HPT
Hard point number.
LOC
X,Y,Z
X, Y, or Z location in the active coordinate system.
MAT
Material number associated with the keypoint.
TYPE
Element type number associated with the keypoint.
REAL
Real constant set number associated with the keypoint.
ESYS
Element coordinate system associated with the keypoint.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
3672
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KSLN
KSLL, Type
Selects those keypoints contained in the selected lines.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of keypoint select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
KSLN, Type
Selects those keypoints associated with the selected nodes.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of keypoint select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Notes
Valid only if the nodes were generated by a meshing operation [KMESH, LMESH, AMESH, VMESH] on a solid
model that contains the associated keypoints.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3673
KSUM
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
KSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Calculates and prints geometry statistics (centroid location, moments of inertia, etc.) associated with the selected
keypoints. Geometry items are reported in the global Cartesian coordinate system. A unit density is assumed,
irrespective of any material associations [KATT, MAT]. Items calculated by KSUM and later retrieved by a *GET
or *VGET command are valid only if the model is not modified after the KSUM command is issued.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Calc Geom Items>Of Keypoints
KSYMM, Ncomp, NP1, NP2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates a reflected set of keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Ncomp
Symmetry key:
X
X (or R) symmetry (default).
Y
Z
Y (or ) symmetry.
Z (or ) symmetry.
NP1, NP2, NINC
Reflect keypoints from pattern beginning with NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If Ncomp = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
3674
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KTRAN
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and point elements associated with the original keypoints, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether keypoints will be moved or newly defined:
0
Generate additional keypoints.
1
Move original keypoints to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELEM are
ignored). Valid only if the old keypoints are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding
meshed items are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates a reflected set of keypoints (and corresponding mesh) from a given keypoint pattern by a symmetry
reflection (see analogous node symmetry command, NSYM). The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based
upon the keypoints in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Reflection is done in the active coordinate
system by changing a particular coordinate sign. Keypoints in the pattern may have been generated in any coordinate system. However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Reflect>Keypoints
KTRAN, KCNTO, NP1, NP2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Transfers a pattern of keypoints to another coordinate system.
PREP7: Keypoints
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCNTO
Reference number of coordinate system where the pattern is to be transferred. Transfer occurs from the
active coordinate system.
NP1, NP2, NINC
Transfer keypoints from pattern beginning with NP1 to NP2 (defaults to NP1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
If NP1 = ALL, NP2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected keypoints [KSEL]. If NP1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for NP1 (NP2 and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3675
KUSE
0
Generate nodes and point elements associated with the original keypoints, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether keypoints will be moved or newly defined:
0
Generate additional keypoints.
1
Move original keypoints to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELEM are
ignored). Valid only if the old keypoints are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding
meshed items are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Transfers a pattern of keypoints (and corresponding mesh) from one coordinate system to another (see analogous
node transfer command, TRANSFER). The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based upon the keypoints
in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Coordinate systems may be translated and rotated relative to
each other. Initial pattern may be generated in any coordinate system. Coordinate values are interpreted in the
active coordinate system and are transferred directly. Solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Transfer Coord>Keypoints
KUSE, KEY
Specifies whether or not to reuse the triangularized matrix.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KEY
Reuse key:
0
Program decides whether or not to reuse the previous triangularized stiffness matrix.
1
Force the previous triangularized stiffness matrix to be reused. Used mainly in a restart. Forcing reuse of
the matrix is a nonstandard use of the program, and should be done with caution. For instance, using
this option and changing the number of elements, or the number or type of degrees of freedom, may
cause an abort.
1
All element matrices are reformed and are used to reform a new triangularized stiffness matrix.
3676
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
KWPLAN
Command Default
Program makes decision.
Notes
Overrides the program logic to determine whether or not to reuse the previous triangularized stiffness matrix
for each substep of this load step. Applies only to static or full transient analyses and to full harmonic analyses
if the frequency is not changed for continuing loadsteps. For full harmonic analyses, only KEY = 1 or KEY = 0 is
valid.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Reuse Tri Matrix
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Reuse Tri Matrix
KWPAVE, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9
Moves the working plane origin to the average location of keypoints.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9
Keypoints used in calculation of the average. At least one must be defined. If P1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Notes
Moves the origin of the working plane to the average of the specified keypoints. Averaging is based on the active
coordinate system.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP to>Keypoints
KWPLAN, WN, KORIG, KXAX, KPLAN
Defines the working plane using three keypoints.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number whose viewing direction will be modified to be normal to the working plane (defaults to
1). If WN is a negative value, the viewing direction will not be modified. If fewer than three points are used,
the viewing direction of window WN will be used instead to define the normal to the working plane.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3677
KWPLAN
KORIG
Keypoint number defining the origin of the working plane coordinate system. If KORIG = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
KXAX
Keypoint number defining the x-axis orientation (defaults to the x-axis being parallel to the global X-axis; or
if the normal to the working plane is parallel to the global X-axis, then defaults to being parallel to the
global Y-axis).
KPLAN
Keypoint number defining the working plane (the normal defaults to the present display view [/VIEW] of
window WN).
Notes
Defines a working plane to assist in picking operations using three keypoints as an alternate to the WPLANE
command. The three keypoints also define the working plane coordinate system. A minimum of one keypoint
(at the working plane origin) is required. Immediate mode may also be active. See WPSTYL command to set the
style of working plane display.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Align WP with>Keypoints
3678
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
L Commands
L, P1, P2, NDIV, SPACE, XV1, YV1, ZV1, XV2, YV2, ZV2
Defines a line between two keypoints.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1
Keypoint at the beginning of line. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
P2
Keypoint at the end of line.
NDIV
Number of element divisions within this line. Normally this field is not used; specifying divisions with LESIZE,
etc. is recommended.
SPACE
Spacing ratio. Normally this field is not used, as specifying spacing ratios with the LESIZE command is recommended. If positive, SPACE is the nominal ratio of the last division size (at P2) to the first division size (at P1).
If the ratio is greater than 1, the division sizes increase from P1 to P2, and if less than 1, they decrease. If
SPACE is negative, then |SPACE| is the nominal ratio of the center division size to those at the ends.
The following fields are used only if specified end slopes on the line are desired, otherwise zero curvature end
slopes will be automatically calculated to produce a line which is "straight" in the active coordinate system. To
specify end slopes, use the following fields to define a "slope vector" (one for each end of the line, if desired) that
has its tail at the origin and its head at the point XV, YV, ZV in the active coordinate system [CSYS]. The corresponding end slope of the line will then be parallel to this "slope vector."
XV1, YV1, ZV1
Location (in the active coordinate system) of the head of the "slope vector" corresponding to the slope at
the P1 end of the line. The tail of the vector is at the origin of the coordinate system.
XV2, YV2, ZV2
Location of the head of the "slope vector" corresponding to the slope at the P2 end of the line.
Notes
Defines a line between two keypoints from P1 to P2. The line shape may be generated as "straight" (in the active
coordinate system) or curved. The line shape is invariant with coordinate system after it is generated. Note that
solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. A curved line is limited to 180. Lines may
be redefined only if not yet attached to an area.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>In Active Coord
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
L2ANG
L2ANG, NL1, NL2, ANG1, ANG2, PHIT1, PHIT2
Generates a line at an angle with two existing lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the first line to be hit (touched by the end of the new line). If negative, assume P1 (see below) is
the second keypoint of the line instead of the first. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NL2
Number of the second line to be hit. If negative, assume P3 is the second keypoint of the line instead of the
first.
ANG1
Angle of intersection (usually zero or 180) of generated line with tangent to first line.
ANG2
Angle of intersection (usually zero or 180) of generated line with tangent to second line.
PHIT1
Number to be assigned to keypoint generated at hit location on first line (defaults to lowest available keypoint
number [NUMSTR]).
PHIT2
Number to be assigned to keypoint generated at hit location on second line (defaults to lowest available
keypoint number [NUMSTR]).
Notes
Generates a straight line (PHIT1-PHIT2) at an angle (ANG1) with an existing line NL1 (P1-P2) and which is also
at an angle (ANG2) with another existing line NL2 (P3-P4). If the angles are zero the generated line is tangent to
the two lines. The PHIT1 and PHIT2 locations on the lines are automatically calculated. Line P1-P2 becomes
P1-PHIT1, P3-P4 becomes P3-PHIT2, and new lines PHIT1-P2, PHIT2-P4, and PHIT1-PHIT2 are generated. Line
divisions are set to zero (use LESIZE, etc. to modify).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>Angle to 2 Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>Norm to 2 Lines
L2TAN, NL1, NL2
Generates a line tangent to two lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the first line generated line is tangent to. If negative, assume P1 (see below) is the second keypoint
of the line instead of the first. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are
ignored (valid only in the GUI).
3680
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LANG
NL2
Number of the second line generated line is tangent to. If negative, assume P3 is the second keypoint of the
line instead of the first.
Notes
Generates a line (P2-P3) tangent at point P2 to line NL1 (P1-P2) and tangent at point P3 to line NL2 (P3-P4).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>Tan to 2 Lines
LANG, NL1, P3, ANG, PHIT, LOCAT
Generates a straight line at an angle with a line.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the line to be hit (touched by the end of the new line). If negative, assume P1 (see below) is the
second keypoint of the line instead of the first. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
P3
Keypoint at which generated line must end.
ANG
Angle of intersection of generated line PHIT-P3 with tangent to line P1-P2 at PHIT. If 0 (default), the generated
line is tangent to NL1 toward end P1; if 90, the generated line is perpendicular to NL1. If 180, the generated
line is tangent to NL1 toward end P2. ANG can be any value, but is adjusted to the corresponding acute angle
with respect to LOCAT. See Notes for a discussion of accuracy.
PHIT
Number to be assigned to keypoint generated at hit location (defaults to lowest available keypoint number
[NUMSTR]).
LOCAT
Approximate location of PHIT in terms of the ratio of the distance along the line (NL1) to the length of the
line. LOCAT can range from 0 to 1. If LOCAT is blank, the point will be located with less speed and accuracy,
and an arbitrary location may result.
Notes
Generates a straight line (PHIT-P3) at an angle (ANG) with a line NL1 (P1-P2). The location of PHIT on the line is
automatically calculated. Line P1-P2 becomes P1-PHIT and new lines PHIT-P2 and PHIT-P3 are generated. Line
divisions are set to zero (use LESIZE, etc. to modify).
PHIT is positioned closest to LOCAT for the given angle, ANG. To ensure better performance, it is recommended
that LOCAT be input, even if it is 0.
The program uses an iterative procedure to position PHIT. The procedure is not exact, with the result that the
actual value of ANG will sometimes differ slightly from the specified value.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3681
LARC
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>At angle to line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>Normal to Line
LARC, P1, P2, PC, RAD
Defines a circular arc.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1
Keypoint at one end of circular arc line. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
P2
Keypoint at other end of circular arc line.
PC
Keypoint defining plane of arc and center of curvature side (with positive radius). Must not lie along the
straight line from P1 to P2. PC need not be at the center of curvature.
RAD
Radius of curvature of the arc. If negative, assume center of curvature side is opposite to that defined by PC.
If RAD is blank, RAD will be calculated from a curve fit through P1, PC, and P2.
Notes
Defines a circular arc line from P1 to P2. The line shape is generated as circular, regardless of the active coordinate
system. The line shape is invariant with coordinate system after it is generated.
When dealing with a large radius arc (1e3), or if the location of the arc you create is far away from the origin of
your coordinate system, anomalies may occur. You can prevent this by creating the arc at a smaller scale, and
then scaling the model back to full size (LSSCALE).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Arcs>By End KPs & Rad
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Arcs>Through 3 KPs
/LARC, XCENTR, YCENTR, XLRAD, ANGLE1, ANGLE2
Creates annotation arcs (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
XCENTR
Arc X center location (-1.0 < X < 1.0).
YCENTR
Arc Y center location (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
3682
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LAREA
XLRAD
Arc radius length.
ANGLE1
Starting angle of arc.
ANGLE2
Ending angle of arc. The arc is drawn counterclockwise from the starting angle, ANGLE1, to the ending angle,
ANGLE2.
Notes
Defines annotation arcs to be written directly onto the display at a specified location. This is a command generated
by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used. This
command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
All arcs are shown on subsequent displays unless the annotation is turned off or deleted. Use the /LSPEC command
to set the attributes of the arc.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
LAREA, P1, P2, NAREA
Generates the shortest line between two keypoints on an area.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1
First keypoint of line to be generated. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
P2
Second keypoint of line to be generated.
NAREA
Area containing P1 and P2, or area to which generated line is to be parallel.
Notes
Generates the shortest line between two keypoints, P1 and P2, both of which lie on an area. The generated line
will also lie on the area. P1 and P2 may also be equidistant (in global Cartesian space) from the area (and on the
same side of the area), in which case a line parallel to the area is generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>Overlaid on Area
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3683
LARGE
LARGE, IR, IA, IB, IC, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Finds the largest (the envelope) of three variables.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA, IB, IC
Reference numbers of the three variables to be operated on. If only two, leave IC blank. If only one, leave
IB blank also.
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying the variable on the printout and displays. Embedded blanks are
compressed upon output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Scaling factors (positive or negative) applied to the corresponding variables (default to 1.0).
Notes
Creates a new variable by finding the largest of up to three variables according to the operation:
IR = Largest of (FACTA x IA, FACTB x IB, FACTC x IC)
The comparison is done at each time location, so that the new variable is the "envelope" of the three existing
variables.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Find Maximum
LATT, MAT, REAL, TYPE, --, KB, KE, SECNUM
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed lines.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT, REAL, TYPE
Material number, real constant set number, and type number to be associated with selected, unmeshed
lines.
--
Unused field.
KB, KE
Beginning and ending orientation keypoints to be associated with selected, unmeshed lines. ANSYS uses
the location of these keypoints to determine how to orient beam cross sections during beam meshing. Beam
elements may be created along a line with a constant orientation by specifying only one orientation keypoint
3684
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LAYER
(KB), or a pre-twisted beam may be created by selecting different orientation keypoints at each end of the
line (KB and KE). (For a line bounded by two keypoints (KP1 and KP2), the orientation vector at the beginning
of the line extends from KP1 to KB, and the orientation vector at the end of the line extends from KP2 to KE.
The orientation vectors are used to compute the orientation nodes of the elements.)
SECNUM
Section identifier to be associated with selected, unmeshed lines. For details, see the description of the
SECTYPE and SECNUM commands.
Notes
The element attributes specified by the LATT command will be used when the lines are meshed.
Lines subsequently generated from the lines will also have the attributes specified by MAT, REAL, TYPE, and
SECNUM. If a line does not have these attributes associated with it (by this command) at the time it is meshed,
the attributes are obtained from the then current MAT, REAL, TYPE, and SECNUM command settings.
In contrast, the values specified by KB and KE apply only to the selected lines; that is, lines subsequently generated
from these lines will not share these attributes. Similarly, if a line does not have KB and KE attributes associated
with it via the LATT command at the time it is meshed, ANSYS cannot obtain the attributes from elsewhere. See
the discussion on beam meshing in Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for
more information.
Reissue the LATT command (before lines are meshed) to change the attributes. A zero (or blank) argument removes
the corresponding association. If any of the arguments MAT, REAL, TYPE, or ESYS are defined as -1, then that
value will be left unchanged in the selected set.
In some cases, ANSYS can proceed with a line meshing operation even when no logical element type has been
assigned via LATT,,,TYPE or TYPE. See Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for
more information about setting element attributes.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>All Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Picked Lines
LAYER, NUM
Specifies the element layer for which data are to be processed.
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP <>
NUM
Layer number for layered element types (SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, SHELL131, SHELL132, SHELL163,
SHELL181, SOLID191, SHELL208, or SHELL209). See Notes below for SHELL163 usage.
If SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, or SOLID191 was used and the TB,FAIL command was used to specify failure
criteria, NUM = FCMAX can be used to process the maximum failure criteria in the element, regardless of layer
number. This NUM = FCMAX option allows the user to process the maximum failure criteria (and the stresses
and strains that created it) as constant quantities over the entire element; thus for this case, the SHELL
command has no function.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3685
LAYERP26
Command Default
The entire element is considered to be the default Layer. Accordingly, the results data are from the bottom of
the bottom layer and the top of the top layer.
Notes
Specifies the element layer for which results data are to be listed, plotted, or otherwise processed. Applies to
stress and strain data for layered elements SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, SHELL163, SHELL181, SOLID191, SHELL208,
and SHELL209; heat flux and heat gradient for SHELL131 and SHELL132; body load temperatures for SHELL91
and SOLID191. The SHELL command may then be used (with shell elements) to specify a location (TOP, MID,
BOT) within the layer for output. (The SHELL command does not apply to thermal shell elements SHELL131 and
SHELL132.) Transverse shear stresses for MID are linearly averaged from TOP and BOT, and do not reflect a
parabolic distribution. Setting KEYOPT(8) = 2 for SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209, writes the mid-surface
values directly to the results file and yields more accurate values than linear averaging. Also note that this command cannot be used for energy output, as energy is a per-element quantity. When using the LAYER command
with SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, SHELL181, SOLID191, SHELL208, and SHELL209, KEYOPT(8) must be set to 1
(or 2 for SHELL181, SHELL208, or SHELL209) in order to store results for all layers.
Use RSYS,SOLU to display results in the layer coordinate system for a particular layer.
For the ANSYS LS-DYNA product, this command works differently than described above. For SHELL163, you must
first use EDINT during the solution phase to define the integration points for which you want output data. Be
aware that the output location for SHELL163 data is always at the integration point, so "top" and "bottom" refer
to the top or bottom integration point, not necessarily the top or bottom surface. For more information, see the
ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
LAYERP26, NUM
Specifies the element layer for which data are to be stored.
POST26: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP <>
NUM
Layer number for layered element types (SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, BEAM161, SHELL163, SHELL181,
SOLID191, SHELL208, or SHELL209). See Notes below for BEAM161 and SHELL163 usage.
If SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, or SOLID191 was used and the TB,FAIL command was used to specify failure
criteria, NUM = FCMAX can be used to process the maximum failure criteria in the element, regardless of layer
number. This NUM = FCMAX option allows the user to process the maximum failure criteria (and the stresses
and strains that created it) as constant quantities over the entire element; thus for this case, the SHELL
command has no function.
This command is also applicable to SHELL163. See notes below for details.
3686
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LAYLIST
Command Default
Results data are from the first layer. If KEYOPT(8) = 0, first layer actually means the bottom of the bottom
layer and the top of the top layer.
Notes
Defines the element layer for which results data are to be stored for postprocessing. Applies to stress and strain
data for layered elements SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, BEAM161, SHELL163, SHELL181, SOLID191, SHELL208,
and SHELL209. Also applies to body load temperatures for SHELL99. The SHELL command may then be used
(for shell elements) to specify a location (TOP, MID, BOT) within the layer for selection on the ESOL command.
Transverse shear stresses for MID are linearly averaged from TOP and BOT, and do not reflect a parabolic distribution. Setting KEYOPT(8) = 2 for SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209, writes the mid-surface values directly to
the results file and yields more accurate values than linear averaging. Also note that this command cannot be
used for energy output, as energy is a per-element quantity. When using the LAYERP26 command with SOLID46,
SHELL91, SHELL99, SHELL181, SOLID191, SHELL208, or SHELL209, KEYOPT(8) must be set to 1 (or 2 for SHELL181,
SHELL208, or SHELL209) in order to store results for all layers.
For the ANSYS LS-DYNA product, this command works differently than described above. For SHELL163 and
BEAM161, you must first use EDINT during the solution phase to define the integration points for which you
want output data. Be aware that the output location for SHELL163 data is always at the integration point, so
top and bottom refer to the top or bottom integration point, not necessarily the top or bottom surface. For
more information, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
In POST26, the ESOL data stored is based on the active LAYERP26 specification at the time the data is stored.
To store data at various specifications (for example, layers 2 and 5), issue a STORE command before each new
specification.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
LAYLIST, IEL, LAYR1, LAYR2, Mplab1, Mplab2
Lists real constants material properties for layered elements.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP <>
IEL
Element number to be listed. If ALL, list all selected elements [ESEL] of the appropriate type. If blank and the
current element type is a layered element type, list data from the current real constant table in the layered
format.
LAYR1, LAYR2
Range of layer numbers to be listed. If LAYR1 is greater than LAYR2, a reverse order list is produced. LAYR1
defaults to 1. LAYR2 defaults to LAYR1 if LAYR1 is input or to the number of layers if LAYR1 is not input.
Mplab1, Mplab2
Material property labels (e.g., EX) to be listed along with the layer real constants.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3687
LAYPLOT
Notes
Lists real constants and any two material properties for layered shell and solid elements. Only elements of type
SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, and SOLID191 are listed.
If matrix input is selected (KEYOPT(2) = 2 or 3), LAYR1, LAYR2, Mplab1, and Mplab2 are not used.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Elements>Layered Elements
Utility Menu>List>Properties>Layer Data
LAYPLOT, IEL, LAYR1, LAYR2
Displays the layer stacking sequence for layered elements.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP <>
IEL
Element number for the display. If blank and the current element type is a layered element type, display data
from the current real constant table.
LAYR1, LAYR2
Range of layer numbers to be displayed. If LAYR1 is greater than LAYR2, a reversed order display is produced.
Up to 20 layers may be displayed at a time. LAYR1 defaults to 1. LAYR2 defaults to LAYR1 if LAYR1 is input
or to the number of layers (or to 19+LAYR1, if smaller) if LAYR1 is not input.
Notes
Displays the layer stacking sequence as defined in the real constant table for layered shell and solid elements in
a form where the layers are visible (like a sheared deck of cards). The element x-axis is shown as 0.0 degrees.
Layers are cross-hatched and color coded for clarity. The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (real constant THETA)
and the color coding is for material identification (real constant MAT). Only valid for elements of type SOLID46,
SHELL91, SHELL99, and SOLID191. The actual orientation of a specific layer in three dimensional space can be
seen using /PSYMB, LAYR. Layer thickness can be displayed using the /ESHAPE and EPLOT commands.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Layered Elements
3688
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LCASE
LCABS, LCNO, KABS
Specifies absolute values for load case operations.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LCNO
Load case pointer number. If ALL, apply to all selected load cases [LCSEL].
KABS
Absolute value key:
0
Use algebraic values of load case LCNO in operations.
1
Use absolute values of load case LCNO in operations.
Command Default
Use algebraic values.
Notes
Causes absolute values to be used in the load case operations [LCASE or LCOPER]. Absolute values are taken
prior to assigning a load case factor [LCFACT] and are applied only to defined load cases [LCDEF].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Calc Options>Absolut Value
LCASE, LCNO
Reads a load case into the database.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LCNO
Load case pointer number [LCDEF,STAT]. Defaults to 1.
Command Default
Load case 1.
Notes
Reads a load case into the database. Load cases are created as described on the LCDEF or LCWRITE commands.
The results portion of the database and the applied forces and displacements are cleared before reading the
data in. Absolute values [LCABS] and scale factors [LCFACT] can be applied during the read operation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3689
LCCALC
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Read Load Case
LCCALC
Specifies "Load case settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Load Case Calcs
LCCAT, NL1, NL2
Concatenates multiple lines into one line for mapped meshing.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2
Lines to be concatenated. If NL1 = ALL, NL2 is ignored and all selected lines [LSEL] are concatenated. If NL1
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for NL1 (NL2 is ignored).
Notes
Concatenates multiple, adjacent lines (the input lines) into one line (the output line) in preparation for mapped
meshing. An area that contains too many lines for mapped meshing can still be mapped meshed if some of the
lines in that area are first concatenated (see Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide
for details on mapped meshing restrictions).
LCCAT is meant to be used solely for meshing and cannot be used for any other purposes. Specifically, (a) the
output line and any areas that have the output line on their line list [ALIST] cannot be used as input to any other
solid modeling operation (not even another LCCAT command); and (b) the output line cannot accept solid
model boundary conditions [DL, SFL].
The output line will take on the element divisions of the input lines and will not accept element divisions that
are directly assigned [LESIZE]. The output line from the LCCAT operation will be coincident with the input lines
3690
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LCDEF
and the input lines will be retained. Consider the LCOMB command instead of LCCAT if you wish to delete the
input lines and if the lines to be combined have similar slopes at the common keypoint(s). When an LCCAT
command is issued, area line lists [ALIST] that contain all of the input lines will be updated so that the area line
lists refer to the output line instead of the input lines. Deletion of the output line [LDELE] effectively reverses
the LCCAT operation and restores area line lists to their original condition.
You can use the LSEL command to select lines that were created by concatenation, and then follow it with an
LDELE,ALL command to delete them. Also see Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing
Guide for a discussion on how to easily select and delete concatenated lines in one step.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Mapped>Concatenate>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volumes>Mapped>Concatenate>Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Geometry Controls>Concatenate
Lines
LCDEF, LCNO, LSTEP, SBSTEP, KIMG
Creates a load case from a set of results on a results file.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LCNO
Arbitrary pointer number (1-99) to be assigned to the load case specified by LSTEP, SBSTEP and by the FILE
command. Defaults to 1 + previous value.
LSTEP
Load step number to be defined as the load case. Defaults to one.
SBSTEP
Substep number. Defaults to the last substep of the load step.
KIMG
Used only with results from complex analyses:
0
Use real part of complex solution
1
Use imaginary part.
Notes
Creates a load case by establishing a pointer to a set of results on a results file (written during the ANSYS solution
phase). This pointer (LCNO) can then be used on the LCASE or LCOPER commands to read the load case data
into the database.
Issue LCDEF,ERASE to delete all load case pointers (and all load case files, if any). Issue LCDEF,LCNO,ERASE to
delete only the specific load case pointer LCNO (and its file, if any). With the ERASE options, all pointers are deleted;
however only files with the default extension [LCWRITE] are deleted. Issue LCDEF,STAT for status of all selected
load cases [LCSEL], or LCDEF,STAT,ALL for status of all load cases. The STAT command may be used to list all
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3691
LCFACT
load cases. See also LCFILE to establish a pointer to a set of results on a load case file (written by LCWRITE).
Harmonic element data read from a result file load case is stored at the zero-degree position.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Create Load Case
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Erase Load Case
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>List Load Cases
LCFACT, LCNO, FACT
Defines scale factors for load case operations.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LCNO
Load case pointer number. If ALL, apply to all selected load cases [LCSEL].
FACT
Scale factor applied to load case LCNO. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a "zero" scale
factor.
Command Default
All factors are 1.0.
Notes
Defines scale factors to be used in the load case operations [LCASE or LCOPER]. Scale factors are applied after
an absolute value operation [LCABS] and are applied only to defined load cases [LCDEF].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Calc Options>Scale Factor
LCFILE, LCNO, Fname, Ext, -Creates a load case from an existing load case file.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LCNO
Arbitrary (1-99) pointer number assigned to this load case.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
3692
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LCLEAR
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to the LCNO value preceded by an L (for values 1099) or by an L0 (for values 19).
--
Unused field.
Notes
Creates a load case by establishing a pointer to an existing load case file [LCWRITE]. This pointer (LCNO) can then
be used on the LCASE or LCOPER commands to read the load case data into the database. This command is
typically used to reestablish load case pointers in a new ANSYS session (pointers are not saved on the database
file), or when more than one pointer to a single load case is desired. See the LCDEF command for status and
erase operations. See also LCDEF to establish a pointer to a set of results on a results file (written during the
ANSYS solution phase).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Create Load Case
LCLEAR, NL1, NL2, NINC
Deletes nodes and line elements associated with selected lines.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NINC
Delete mesh for lines NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NL1 = ALL, NL2 and NINC
are ignored and the mesh for all selected lines [LSEL] is deleted. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and
all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted
for NL1 (NL2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Deletes all nodes and line elements associated with selected lines (regardless of whether the nodes or elements
are selected). Nodes shared by adjacent meshed lines and nodes associated with non-line elements will not be
deleted. Attributes assigned as a result of LATT are maintained. In the program's response to the command, if
a line or keypoint is tallied as "cleared," it means either its node or element reference was deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Clear>Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3693
LCOMB
LCOMB, NL1, NL2, KEEP
Combines adjacent lines into one line.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the first line to be combined. If NL1 = ALL, NL2 is ignored and all selected lines [LSEL] are combined.
If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NL1 (NL2 is ignored).
NL2
Number of the second line to be combined.
KEEP
Specifies whether to keep the input entities:
0
Delete lines NL1 and NL2 and their common keypoint. Keypoints will not be deleted if they are meshed
or if they are attached to other lines. Lines will not be deleted if they are attached to different areas.
1
Keep NL1, NL2, and their common keypoint. (The common keypoint will not be attached to the output
line.)
Notes
Combines adjacent lines into one line (the output line). This operation will effectively "undo" the LDIV operation.
Line divisions are set to zero (use LESIZE, etc. to modify). Lines attached to the same area(s) can also be combined.
See also the LCCAT command for line concatenation capability.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Add>Lines
LCOPER, Oper, LCASE1, Oper2, LCASE2
Performs load case operations.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Oper
Valid operations are:
ZERO
Zero results portion of database (LCASE1 ignored).
SQUA
Square database values (LCASE1 ignored).
SQRT
Square root of database (absolute) values (LCASE1 ignored).
3694
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LCOPER
LPRIN
Recalculate line element principal stresses (LCASE1 ignored). Stresses are as shown for the NMISC items
of the ETABLE command for the specific line element type.
ADD
Add LCASE1 to database values.
SUB
Subtract LCASE1 from database values.
SRSS
Square root of the sum of the squares of database and LCASE1.
MIN
Compare and save in database the algebraic minimum of database and LCASE1.
MAX
Compare and save in database the algebraic maximum of database and LCASE1.
ABMN
Compare and save in database the absolute minimum of database and LCASE1 (based on magnitudes,
then apply the corresponding sign).
ABMX
Compare and save in database the absolute maximum of database and LCASE1 (based on magnitudes,
then apply the corresponding sign).
LCASE1
First load case in the operation (if any). See LCNO of the LCDEF command. If ALL, repeat operations using all
selected load cases [LCSEL].
Oper2
Valid operations are:
MULT
Multiplication: LCASE1*LCASE2
LCASE2
Second load case. Used only with Oper2 operations.
Notes
LCOPER operates on the database and one or two load cases according to:
Database = Database Oper (LCASE1 Oper2 LCASE2)
where operations Oper and Oper2 are as described above. Absolute values and scale factors may be applied to
the load cases before the operations [LCABS, LCFACT]. If LCASE1 is not specified, only operation Oper is performed
on the current database. If LCASE2 is specified, operation Oper2 will be performed before operation Oper. If
LCASE2 is not specified, operation Oper2 is ignored. Solution items not contained [OUTRES] in either the database
or the applicable load cases will result in a null item during a load case operation. Harmonic element data read
from a result file load case are processed at zero degrees. All load case combinations are performed in the solution
coordinate system, and the data resulting from load case combinations are stored in the solution coordinate
system. The resultant data are then transformed to the active results coordinate system [RSYS] when listed or
displayed.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3695
LCSEL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Add
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Line Elem Stress
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Min & Max
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Square
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Square Root
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>SRSS
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Subtract
LCSEL, Type, LCMIN, LCMAX, LCINC
Selects a subset of load cases.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set.
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Restore the full set.
NONE
Unselect the full set.
INVE
Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT
Display the current select status.
LCMIN
Minimum value of load case pointer range.
LCMAX
Maximum value of load case pointer range. LCMAX defaults to LCMIN.
LCINC
Value increment within range. Defaults to 1. LCINC cannot be negative.
Command Default
All load cases are selected.
3696
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LCSUM
Notes
Selects a subset of load cases for other operations. For example, to select a new set of load cases based on load
cases 1 through 7, use LCSEL,S,1,7. The subset is used when the ALL label is entered (or implied) on other commands, such as LCFACT, LCABS, LCOPER, etc. Load cases are flagged as selected and unselected; no load case
pointers [LCDEF, LCWRITE, LCFILE] are actually deleted from the database.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Calc Options>Sele Ld Cases
LCSL, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Divides intersecting lines at their point(s) of intersection.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Numbers of lines to be intersected. If NL1 = ALL, NL2 to NL9 are ignored and the intersection of all selected
lines is found. If NL1 = P, use graphical picking to specify lines (NL2 to NL9 are ignored).
Notes
Divides intersecting (classifies) lines at their point(s) of intersection. The original lines (and their corresponding
keypoint(s)) will be deleted by default. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
LCSUM, Lab
Specifies whether to process non-summable items in load case operations.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Combination option
(blank)
Only combine summable items [default].
ALL
Combine all items including non summable items.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3697
LCWRITE
Notes
Allows non-summable items (e.g. plastic strains) to be included in load combinations. Issue LCSUM,ALL before
the first load case operation (LCXX command). May also be used to include nonsummable items in the appending
of a results file (RAPPND command).
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
LCWRITE, LCNO, Fname, Ext, -Creates a load case by writing results to a load case file.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LCNO
Arbitrary pointer number (1-99) to be assigned to this load case.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to the LCNO value preceded by an L (for values 1099) or by an L0 (for values 19).
--
Unused field.
Notes
Creates a load case by writing the results data in the database to a load case file. The database remains unchanged
by this operation. A pointer is also established to the written set of results on the load case file. This pointer
(LCNO) can then be used on the LCASE or LCOPER commands to read the load case data into the database. By
default, only summable results data (such as displacements, stresses, elastic strains) and constant results data
(such as volume) are written to the load case file unless requested (LCSUM command). Non-summable results
data (such as plastic strains, strain energy), boundary conditions, and nodal loads are not written to the load case
file. The load case file may be named by default or by a user name. Rewriting to the same file overwrites the
previous data. See the LCDEF command for status and erase operations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Write Load Case
3698
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LDELE
LCZERO
Zeroes the results portion of the database.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Often used before the LCOPER command. Same as LCOPER,ZERO.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Zero Load Case
LDELE, NL1, NL2, NINC, KSWP
Deletes unmeshed lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NINC
Delete lines from NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NL1 = ALL, NL2 and NINC are
ignored and all selected lines [LSEL] are deleted. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NL1 (NL2
and NINC are ignored).
KSWP
Specifies whether keypoints are also to be deleted:
0
Delete lines only.
1
Delete lines, as well as keypoints attached to lines but not attached to other lines.
Notes
A line attached to an area cannot be deleted unless the area is first deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Concatenate>Del Concats>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Mapped>Del Concats>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volumes>Mapped>Del Concats>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Del Concats>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Line and Below
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Lines Only
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Delete>Line and Below
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Topo Repair>Delete>Lines Only
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3699
LDIV
LDIV, NL1, RATIO, PDIV, NDIV, KEEP
Divides a single line into two or more lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the line to be divided. If negative, assume P1 (see below) is the second keypoint of the line instead
of the first for RATIO. If ALL, divide all selected lines [LSEL]. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all
remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted
for NL1.
RATIO
Ratio of line length P1-PDIV to line length P1-P2. Must be between 0.0 and 1.0. Input ignored if NDIV > 2.
PDIV
Number to be assigned to keypoint generated at division location (defaults to lowest available keypoint
number [NUMSTR]). Input ignored if NL1 = ALL or NDIV > 2. If PDIV already exists and lies on line NL1, divide
line at PDIV (RATIO must also be 0.0). If PDIV already exists and does not lie on line NL1, PDIV is projected
and moved to the nearest point on line NL1 (if possible). PDIV cannot be attached to another line, area, or
volume.
NDIV
The number of new lines to be generated from old line (defaults to 2).
KEEP
Specifies whether to keep the input entities:
0
Modify old line to use new keypoints and slopes.
1
Do not modify old line. New lines will overlay old line and have unique keypoints.
Notes
Divides a single line NL1 (defined from keypoint P1 to keypoint P2) into two or more lines. Line NL1 becomes
the new line beginning with keypoint P1 and new lines are generated ending at keypoint P2. If the line is attached
to an area, the area will also be updated. Line divisions are set to zero (use LESIZE, etc. to modify).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Line into 2 Ln's
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Line into N Ln's
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Lines w/ Options
3700
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LDREAD
LDRAG, NK1, NK2, NK3, NK4, NK5, NK6, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6
Generates lines by sweeping a keypoint pattern along path.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NK1, NK2, NK3, NK4, NK5, NK6
List of keypoints in the pattern to be dragged (6 maximum if using keyboard entry). If NK1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If NK1 = ALL, all selected keypoints (except those that define the drag path) will be swept along the path. A component name
may also be substituted for NK1.
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6
List of lines defining the path along which the pattern is to be dragged (6 maximum if using keyboard entry).
Must be a continuous set of lines.
Notes
Generates lines (and their corresponding keypoints) by sweeping a given keypoint pattern along a characteristic
drag path. If the drag path consists of multiple lines, the drag direction is determined by the sequence in which
the path lines are input (NL1, NL2, etc.). If the drag path is a single line (NL1), the drag direction is from the keypoint on the drag line that is closest to the first keypoint of the given pattern to the other end of the drag line.
The magnitude of the vector between the keypoints of the given pattern and the first path keypoint remains
constant for all generated keypoint patterns and the path keypoints. The direction of the vector relative to the
path slope also remains constant so that patterns may be swept around curves. Keypoint and line numbers are
automatically assigned (beginning with the lowest available values [NUMSTR]). For best results, the entities to
be dragged should be orthogonal to the start of the drag path. Drag operations that produce an error message
may create some of the desired entities prior to terminating.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Keypoints>Along Lines
LDREAD, Lab, LSTEP, SBSTEP, TIME, KIMG, Fname, Ext, -Reads results from the results file and applies them as loads.
SOLUTION: FE Constraints
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid load label:
TEMP
Temperatures from a thermal analysis are applied as body force nodal loads [BF] in a structural analysis,
an explicit dynamic analysis, or other type of analysis.
If the thermal analysis uses SHELL131 and/or SHELL132, temperatures are applied as body force element
loads [BFE]. In most cases, only the top and bottom temperatures from SHELL131 and SHELL132 are
used by the structural shell elements; any interior temperatures are ignored. However, for SHELL181
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3701
LDREAD
using section input and SHELL91, all temperatures are used. Hence, for these two cases, the number of
temperature points at a node generated in the thermal model must match the number of temperature
points at a node needed by the structural model. When using SHELL131 or SHELL132 information for
the LDREAD operation, all element types should specify the same set of thermal degrees of freedom.
Can also be temperatures applied as nodal loads or initial conditions (see KIMG description).
FORC
Forces from an electromagnetic analysis are applied as force loads [F] in a structural analysis or a FLOTRAN
analysis. LDREAD,FORC reads coupling forces. See the discussion on force computation in the ANSYS
Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
For a full harmonic magnetic analysis, FORC represents the time-averaged force (use in conjunction with
KIMG = 2). Values are in the nodal coordinate system for the force loads [F].
HGEN
Heat generations from a magnetic analysis are applied as body force loads [BFE] in a thermal or a FLOTRAN
analysis. For a full harmonic analysis, HGEN represents the time-averaged heat generation load (use in
conjunction with KIMG = 2).
HFLU
Heat fluxes from a FLOTRAN analysis are applied as surface loads in a thermal analysis.
EHFLU
Surface losses from a high frequency electromagnetic analysis are applied as time-average surface heat
flux in a thermal analysis.
JS
Source current density from a current-conduction analysis are applied as body force loads [BFE]. Values
are in the global Cartesian coordinate system.
EF
Electric field element centroid values from an electrostatic analysis are applied as body force loads [BFE]
in a magnetic analysis. Values are in the global Cartesian coordinate system.
PRES
Pressures from a FLOTRAN analysis are applied as surface loads [SFE] in a structural analysis. For shell
elements, use the KIMG parameter to establish the face on which to apply the pressure.
REAC
Reaction loads from any analysis are applied as force loads [F] in any analysis. Values are in the nodal
coordinate system.
HFLM
FLOTRAN predicted film coefficient (and associated bulk temperature) are applied as surface loads (film
coefficient and bulk temperature) [SFE] in a thermal analysis. FLOTRAN film coefficients may be either
positive or negative, depending on the direction of heat transfer, but ANSYS thermal analyses require
positive film coefficients. If the FLOTRAN film coefficient is negative, LDREAD adjusts the bulk temperature
to be equal to twice the wall temperature minus the bulk temperature. The adjusted bulk temperature
and the now positive film coefficient make the amount and direction of heat transfer consistent with
the FLOTRAN analysis.
LSTEP
Load step number of the data set to be read. Defaults to 1. If LAST, ignore SBSTEP and TIME and read the
last data set.
3702
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LDREAD
SBSTEP
Substep number (within LSTEP). If zero (or blank), LSTEP represents the last substep of the load step.
TIME
Time-point identifying the data set to be read. Used only if both LSTEP and SBSTEP are zero (or blank). If
TIME is between two solution time points on the results file, a linear interpolation is done between the two
data sets. If TIME is beyond the last time point on the file, use the last time point.
KIMG
When used with results from harmonic analyses (ANTYPE,HARMIC) KIMG establishes which set of data to
read:
0
Read the real part of the solution. Valid also for Lab = EHFLU to read in time-average heat flux.
1
Read the imaginary part of the solution.
2
Calculate and read the time-average part. Meaningful for Lab = HGEN or FORC.
When used with the PRES label, KIMG represents the shell element face on which to apply the pressure:
1
Apply pressure to face 1
2
Apply pressure to face 2
When used with the TEMP label, KIMG indicates how temperatures are to be applied. In an explicit dynamic
analysis, KIMG = 0 is the only valid option for applying temperature loads.
0
Apply temperatures as body loads
1
Apply temperatures as nodal loads
2
Apply temperatures as initial conditions.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to RST if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3703
LDREAD
Notes
Reads results data from the results file and applies them as loads. You also can use LDREAD to apply results from
an analysis defined with one physics environment as loads on a second analysis using a different physics environment. The values are applied as loads for field coupling effects (such as output temperatures from a thermal
analysis as input to a structural analysis). Nodal loads are applied only to selected nodes. Element loads are applied
only to selected elements. Element surface loads are applied only to selected elements where all face nodes for
that surface are selected. Additionally, to assure proper distribution of the surface loads, select only the nodes
on the element face where the surface load is to be applied. Scaling and accumulation specifications are applied
as the loads are read (BFCUM for body force loads, SFCUM for surface loads, and FCUM for force loads). These
commands do not work for tabular boundary conditions or temperature loads applied to an explicit dynamic
analysis via LDREAD. Use the appropriate list command to list the results (BFLIST or BFELIST for body force
loads, SFELIST for surface loads, and FLIST for force loads). Values may be redefined after being read by issuing
LDREAD again with a different load step and substep, or time value.
When you use LDREAD in an explicit dynamic analysis to read in temperatures, you cannot use the EDLOAD,,TEMP
command to apply temperature loading. Furthermore, any temperature loading defined by LDREAD cannot be
listed or deleted by the EDLOAD command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>From Therm
Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Forces>Forces>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>Temp from ANSYS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>Temp from Fluid
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>From
Therm Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>From
Elec An
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>Electric Field>From Elec An
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>From Reactions
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>From Fluid Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Temperature>From Therm Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>From Fluid Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>From EMAG Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>From Fluid Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>From ANSYS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>From Flotran
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Temp From ANSYS
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>From Therm Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Heat Generat>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Forces>Forces>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>Temp from ANSYS
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Initial Condit'n>Temp from Fluid
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>From Therm Analy
3704
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LESIZE
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>AppCurrDens>From Elec An
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>Electric Field>From Elec An
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Force/Moment>From Reactions
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>From Fluid Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Temperature>From Therm Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>From Fluid Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>From EMAG Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>From Fluid Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Generat>From Mag Analy
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>From ANSYS
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>From Flotran
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Temp From ANSYS
LESIZE, NL1, SIZE, ANGSIZ, NDIV, SPACE, KFORC, LAYER1, LAYER2, KYNDIV
Specifies the divisions and spacing ratio on unmeshed lines.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the line to be modified. If ALL, modify all selected lines [LSEL]. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for NL1.
SIZE
If NDIV is blank, SIZE is the division (element edge) length. The number of divisions is automatically calculated
from the line length (rounded upward to next integer). If SIZE is zero (or blank), use ANGSIZ or NDIV.
ANGSIZ
The division arc (in degrees) spanned by the element edge (except for straight lines, which always result in
one division). The number of divisions is automatically calculated from the line length (rounded upward to
next integer).
NDIV
If positive, NDIV is the number of element divisions per line. If -1 (and KFORC = 1), NDIV is assumed to be
zero element divisions per line. TARGE169 with a rigid specification ignores NDIV and will always mesh with
one element division.
SPACE
Spacing ratio. If positive, nominal ratio of last division size to first division size (if > 1.0, sizes increase, if < 1.0,
sizes decrease). If negative, |SPACE| is nominal ratio of center division(s) size to end divisions size. Ratio defaults
to 1.0 (uniform spacing). For layer-meshing, a value of 1.0 normally is used. If SPACE = FREE, ratio is determined
by other considerations
KFORC
KFORC 0-3 are used only with NL1 = ALL. Specifies which selected lines are to be modified.
0
Modify only selected lines having undefined (zero) divisions.
1
Modify all selected lines.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3705
LESIZE
2
Modify only selected lines having fewer divisions (including zero) than specified with this command.
3
Modify only selected lines having more divisions than specified with this command.
4
Modify only nonzero settings for SIZE, ANGSIZ, NDIV, SPACE, LAYER1, and LAYER2. If KFORC = 4, blank
or 0 settings remain unchanged.
LAYER1
Layer-meshing control parameter. Distance which defines the thickness of the inner mesh layer, LAYER1.
Elements in this layer are uniformly-sized with edge lengths equal to the specified element size for the line
(either through SIZE or line-length/NDIV). A positive value for LAYER1 is interpreted as an absolute length,
while a negative value in interpreted as a multiplier on the specified element size for the line. As a general
rule, the resulting thickness of the inner mesh layer should be greater than or equal to the specified element
size for the line. If LAYER1 = OFF, layer-meshing control settings are cleared for the selected lines. The default
value is 0.0
LAYER2
Layer-meshing control parameter. Distance which defines the thickness of the outer mesh layer, LAYER2.
Elements in this layer transition in size from those in LAYER1 to the global element size. A positive value of
LAYER2 is interpreted as an absolute length, while a negative value is interpreted as a mesh transition factor.
A value of LAYER2 = -2 would indicate that elements should approximately double in size as the mesh progresses normal to LAYER1. The default value is 0.0.
KYNDIV
0, No, and Off means that SmartSizing cannot override specified divisions and spacing ratios. Mapped mesh
fails if divisions do not match. This defines the specification as hard.
1, Yes, and On means that SmartSizing can override specified divisions and spacing ratios for curvature or
proximity. Mapped meshing can override divisions to obtain required matching divisions. This defines the
specification as soft.
Notes
Defines the number of divisions and the spacing ratio on selected lines. Lines with previously specified divisions
may also be changed.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Layers>Clr Layers
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Layers>Picked Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Lines>All Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Lines>Clr Size
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Lines>Copy Divs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Lines>Flip Bias
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Lines>Picked Lines
3706
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LFILLT
LEXTND, NL1, NK1, DIST, KEEP
Extends a line at one end by using its slope.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the line to be extended. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NK1
Number of keypoint at the end of line NL1 to be extended.
DIST
Distance that the line will be extended.
KEEP
Specifies whether to keep the input entities:
0
Modify old line to use new keypoints and slopes.
1
Do not modify old line. New line will overlay old line and have unique keypoints.
Notes
Extends a line at one end by using its slope. Lines may be redefined only if not yet attached to an area. Line divisions are set to zero (use LESIZE, etc. to modify). Note that solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not
recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extend Line
LFILLT, NL1, NL2, RAD, PCENT
Generates a fillet line between two intersecting lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the first intersecting line. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NL2
Number of the second intersecting line.
RAD
Radius of fillet to be generated. Radius should be less than the lengths of the two lines specified with NL1
and NL2.
PCENT
Number to be assigned to generated keypoint at fillet arc center. If zero (or blank), no keypoint is generated.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3707
LFSURF
Notes
Generates a fillet line between two intersecting lines NL1 (P1-PINT) and NL2 (P2-PINT). Three keypoints may be
generated, two at the fillet tangent points (PTAN1 and PTAN2) and one (optional) at the fillet arc center (PCENT).
Line P1-PINT becomes P1-PTAN1, P2-PINT becomes P2-PTAN2, and new arc line PTAN1-PTAN2 is generated.
Generated keypoint and line numbers are automatically assigned (beginning with the lowest available values
[NUMSTR]). Line divisions are set to zero (use LESIZE, etc. to modify).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Line Fillet
LFSURF, SLINE, TLINE
Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing solid elements and assigns the extra node
as the closest fluid element node.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
SLINE
Component name for the surface lines of the meshed solid areas.
TLINE
Component name for the target lines meshed with fluid elements.
Notes
This command macro is used to generate surface effect elements overlaid on the surface of existing plane elements
and, based on proximity, to determine and assign the extra node for each surface element. The underlying areas
of the solid region and the fluid lines must be meshed prior to calling this command macro. The active element
type must be SURF151 with appropriate settings for KEYOPT(4), KEYOPT(5), KEYOPT(6), and KEYOPT(8).
The surface lines of the solid and the target lines of the fluid are grouped into components and named using
the CM command. The names must be enclosed in single quotes (e.g., 'SLINE') when the LFSURF command is
manually typed in.
When using the GUI method, node and element components are created through the picking dialog boxes associated with this command.
The macro is applicable for the SURF151 and FLUID116 element types.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Area
to Fluid
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Line
to Fluid
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Node
to Fluid
3708
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LGEN
LGEN, ITIME, NL1, NL2, NINC, DX, DY, DZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates additional lines from a pattern of lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITIME
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all keypoints in the given pattern automatically
(or by KINC) each time after the first. ITIME must be > 1 for generation to occur.
NL1, NL2, NINC
Generate lines from pattern beginning with NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If
NL1 = ALL, NL2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected lines [LSEL]. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for NL1 (NL2 and NINC are ignored).
DX, DY, DZ
Keypoint location increments in the active coordinate system (--, D, DZ for cylindrical, --, D, -- for spherical).
KINC
Keypoint increment between generated sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned
[NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies if elements and nodes are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original lines, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether to redefine the existing lines:
0
Generate additional lines as requested with the ITIME argument.
1
Move original lines to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (ITIME, KINC, and NOELM are
ignored). Valid only if the old lines are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed
items are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates additional lines (and their corresponding keypoints and mesh) from a given line pattern. The MAT,
TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based upon the lines in the pattern and not upon the current settings. End
slopes of the generated lines remain the same (in the active coordinate system) as those of the given pattern.
For example, radial slopes remain radial, etc. Generations which produce lines of a size or shape different from
the pattern (i.e., radial generations in cylindrical systems, radial and phi generations in spherical systems, and
theta generations in elliptical systems) are not allowed. Note that solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system
is not recommended. New line numbers are automatically assigned (beginning with the lowest available values
[NUMSTR]).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3709
LGLUE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Lines
LGLUE, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Generates new lines by "gluing" lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Numbers of the lines to be glued. If NL1 = ALL, all selected lines will be glued (NL2 to NL9 will be ignored). If
NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NL1.
Notes
Use of the LGLUE command generates new lines by "gluing" input lines. The glue operation redefines the input
lines so that they share keypoints at their common ends. The new lines encompass the same geometry as the
original lines. This operation is only valid if the intersections of the input lines are keypoints at the ends of those
lines. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation
of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned
to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
The LGLUE command results in the merging of keypoints at the common end of the lines. The keypoints of the
lower numbered line will be kept. This means one must be aware of line numbering when multiple LGLUE
commands are applied to avoid any ungluing of geometry.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Glue>Lines
LGWRITE, Fname, Ext, --, Kedit
Writes the database command log to a file.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to LGW if Fname and Ext are blank.
3710
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/LIGHT
--
Unused field.
Kedit
Flag to suppress nonessential commands:
NONE
Do not suppress any commands (default).
COMMENT
Write nonessential commands as comments (starting with !).
REMOVE
Do not write nonessential commands or comments.
Notes
Writes the database command log to a named file. The database command log contains all commands that were
used to create the current database. These commands are recorded in the database as they are issued, and saved
in the database file (File.DB) whenever the database is saved. The LGWRITE command extracts these commands
from the database and writes them to a file. Nonessential commands (for listing, graphics displays, help, etc.)
can be excluded from the file by using the Kedit field. The file resulting from LGWRITE can be used as command
input to the program. This command is most useful if the session log file (File.LOG), which is normally saved
during an interactive session, has been lost or corrupted. LGWRITE cannot be used after design optimization
looping because the database is cleared [/CLEAR] automatically at each loop; use File.LOG instead.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Write DB Log File
/LIGHT, WN, NUM, INT, XV, YV, ZV, REFL
Specifies the light direction for the display window.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
NUM
Ambient or directional light key:
0
Ambient light (default).
1
Directional light.
INT
Light intensity factor (defaults to 0.3 for ambient, 1.0 for directional). This option is valid only for 3-D devices).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3711
LINA
XV, YV, ZV
Light direction (valid only for NUM = 1). The directional light source is parallel to the line from point XV, YV,
ZV to the origin, in the global Cartesian system origin. Defaults to the viewing direction [/VIEW].
REFL
Light reflectance factor (valid only for NUM = 1 and 3-D devices).
Command Default
Use ambient light.
Notes
Defines the light direction for the window. Use this command only with 3-D graphics devices or 2-D devices
when Z-buffering is used [/TYPE,,(6 or 7)]. The ambient light has no direction, only an intensity. You can position
the directional light source by defining a point (in the global Cartesian coordinate system) representing a point
along the light directional line. This point, and the global Cartesian coordinate system origin, define the line
along which the light is positioned looking toward the origin. You can use any point along the light line; for example, both (1.,1.,1.) and (2.,2.,2.) give the same light effect. For 3-D graphics devices only, the directional light
source also has intensity and reflectance factors.
By choosing the highest intensity ambient light for 3-D graphics devices (via the command /LIGHT,WN,0,1), you
can nullify color shading and other effects of directional lighting.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Light Source
LINA, NL, NA
Finds the intersection of a line with an area.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL
Number of line to be intersected. If NL = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NA
Number of area to be intersected.
Notes
Finds the intersection of a line with an area. New lines will be generated where the lines intersect the areas. If
the regions of intersection are only points, new keypoints will be generated instead. See the ANSYS Modeling
and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
3712
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/LINE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Line with Area
LINE
Specifies "Lines" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
/LINE, X1, Y1, X2, Y2
Creates annotation lines (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
X1
Line X starting location (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y1
Line Y starting location (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
X2
Line X ending location (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y2
Line Y ending location (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
Notes
Defines annotation lines to be written directly onto the display at a specified location. This is a command generated
by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used. This
command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
All lines are shown on subsequent displays unless the annotation is turned off or deleted. Use the /LSPEC command
to set the attributes of the line.
This command is valid in any processor.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3713
LINES
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
LINES, N
Specifies the length of a printed page.
POST26: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
N
Number of lines per page (defaults to 20). (Minimum allowed = 11).
Command Default
20 lines per page.
Notes
Specifies the length of a printed page (for use in reports, etc.).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>List
LINL, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Finds the common intersection of lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Numbers of lines to be intersected. If NL1 = ALL, find the intersection of all selected lines and NL2 to NL9 are
ignored. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only
in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NL1.
Notes
Finds the common (not pairwise) intersection of lines. The common intersection is defined as the regions shared
(in common) by all lines listed on this command. New lines will be generated where the original lines intersect.
If the regions of intersection are only points, new keypoints will be generated instead. See the ANSYS Modeling
and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Common>Lines
3714
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LINV
LINP, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Finds the pairwise intersection of lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Numbers of lines to be intersected pairwise. If NL1 = ALL, find the pairwise intersection of all selected lines
and NL2 to NL9 are ignored. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are
ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may be substituted for NL1.
Notes
Finds the pairwise intersection of lines. The pairwise intersection is defined as any and all regions shared by at
least two lines listed on this command. New lines will be generated where the original lines intersect pairwise.
If the regions of pairwise intersection are only points, new keypoints will be generated. See the ANSYS Modeling
and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Pairwise>Lines
LINV, NL, NV
Finds the intersection of a line with a volume.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL
Number of line to be intersected. If NL = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NV
Number of volume to be intersected.
Notes
Finds the intersection of a line with a volume. New lines will be generated where the lines intersect the volumes.
If the regions of intersection are only points, new keypoints will be generated instead. See the ANSYS Modeling
and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Line with Volume
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3715
LIST
LIST, LEVEL
Lists out the sets in the results file.
AUX3: Results Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This command lists the results set number, the load step, substep, and time step for each set. It also shows all
sets marked for deletion.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
*LIST, Fname, Ext, -Displays the contents of an external, coded file.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Notes
Displays the contents of an external, coded file. The file to be listed cannot be in use (open) at the time (except
for the error file, File.ERR, which may be displayed with *LIST,ERR).
Use caution when you are listing active ANSYS files via the List> Files> Other and File> List> Other menu paths.
File I/O buffer and system configurations can result in incomplete listings unless the files are closed.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
3716
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LLIST
LLIST, NL1, NL2, NINC, Lab
Lists the defined lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NINC
List lines from NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NL1 = ALL (default), NL2 and
NINC are ignored and all selected lines [LSEL] are listed. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for
NL1 (NL2 and NINC are ignored).
Lab
Determines what type of listing is used (one of the following):
(blank)
Prints information about all lines in the specified range.
RADIUS
Prints the radius of certain circular arcs, along with the keypoint numbers of each line. Straight lines,
non-circular curves, and circular arcs not internally identified as arcs (which depends upon how each arc
is created) will print a radius value of zero.
LAYER
Prints layer-mesh control specifications.
HPT
Prints information about only those lines that contain hard points. HPT is not supported in the GUI.
ORIENT
Prints a list of lines, and identifies any orientation keypoints and any cross section IDs that are associated
with the lines. Used for beam meshing with defined orientation nodes and cross sections.
Notes
There are 2 listings for the number of element divisions and the spacing ratio. The first listing shows assignments
from LESIZE only, followed by the hard key (KYNDIV). See LESIZE for more information. The second listing
shows NDIV and SPACE for the existing mesh, if one exists. Whether this existing mesh and the mesh generated
by LESIZE match at any given point depends upon meshing options and the sequence of meshing operations.
A -1 in the nodes column indicates that the line has been meshed but that there are no interior nodes.
An attribute (TYPE, MAT, REAL, or ESYS) listed as a zero is unassigned; one listed as a positive value indicates that
the attribute was assigned with the LATT command (and will not be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared); one
listed as a negative value indicates that the attribute was assigned using the attribute pointer [TYPE, MAT, REAL,
or ESYS] that was active during meshing (and will be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3717
LMATRIX
LMATRIX, SYMFAC, Coilname, Curname, Indname
Calculates an inductance matrix and the total flux linkage for an N-winding coil system.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
SYMFAC
Geometric symmetry factor. Inductance terms are scaled by this factor which represents the fraction of the
total device modeled. Default is 1.
Coilname
Alphanumeric prefix identifier for coil label used in defining named element coil components. Default is
'coil.'
Curname
Name of a predefined parameter array containing the nominal coil currents of the system. The array must
be defined (see *DIM command) prior to calling the LMATRIX macro. Default is 'cur.'
Indname
Name of the array parameter to be created by LMATRIX containing the calculated inductance matrix and
the flux linkage in each coil. A text file of the same name with an extension .TXT is created containing the
matrix data. Default is 'lmatrix.'
Notes
LMATRIX calculates the differential inductance matrix for an N-winding system where N is the number of coils
in the system, and calculates the total flux linkage in each coil. LMATRIX may only be executed after the solution
of a problem with nominal currents applied to the coils at a desired operating point. The array Indname has N
rows and N+1 columns. The N x N block is the differential inductance matrix; the N+1th column contains the total
flux linkage, with the ith row corresponding to the ith coil. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more details.
To invoke the LMATRIX macro, for the classical formulations, the elements for each coil must be grouped into
a component using the CM command. Each set of independent coil elements is assigned a component name
with the prefix Coilname followed by the coil number. For the solenoidal formulations, you must make the exciting node with a F,AMPS load a node component using the CM command. The classical and solenoidal formulations cannot be mixed.
To invoke the LMATRIX macro, the vector array parameter Curname with dimension N must be defined and
named using the *DIM command. You must set each vector array entry equal to the nominal current per turn
in the corresponding coil at the operating point. Zero current values must be approximated by a negligibly small
applied current.
Do not apply (or remove) inhomogeneous loads before using the LMATRIX command. Inhomogeneous loads
are those created by:
Degree of freedom commands (D, DA, etc.) specifying nonzero degrees of freedom values on nodes or
solid model entities
Any CE command with a nonzero constant term
Do not put any loads (for example, current) on elements not contained in the element component.
Operating solutions must be obtained through static analysis before calling LMATRIX. All name-strings must
be enclosed in single quotes in the LMATRIX command line. The geometric symmetry factor, Symfac, represents
the fraction of the device modeled, disregarding any current source primitives.
3718
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LNCOLLAPSE
LMATRIX works with the SOLID97 and SOLID117/SOURC36 solenoidal formulations. For more information, see
LMATRIX in the ANSYS Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference and Electric and Magnetic Macros in the ANSYS Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for details.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Electromagnet>Static Analysis>Induct Matrix
LMESH, NL1, NL2, NINC
Generates nodes and line elements along lines.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NINC
Mesh lines from NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NL1 = ALL, NL2 and NINC are
ignored and all selected lines [LSEL] are meshed. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NL1 (NL2
and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Generates nodes and line elements along lines. Missing nodes required for the generated elements are created
and assigned the lowest available numbers.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Lines
LNCOLLAPSE, LINE, KEYPOINT
Collapse a line segment to a keypoint (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LINE
The ID of the line segment to be collapsed.
KEYPOINT
The ID of the existing keypoint (one of the keypoints connected to the line segment) that will remain after
the collapse operation.
Notes
This command is available only for repairing the geometry of models imported from CAD systems (Default IGES
option).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3719
LNDETACH
This command does not check for any entity penetration resulting from the collapse.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Collapse Lines
LNDETACH, LINE1, LINE2, LNINC
Detaches lines from neighboring geometric entity (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LINE1, LINE2, LNINC
Detach lines from LINE1 to LINE2 (defaults to LINE1) in steps of LNINC (defaults to 1).
Notes
Use this command to detach non-manifold lines from their neighboring geometric entities. This command is
available only for repairing the geometry of models imported from CAD systems.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Detach Lines
LNFILL, KP1, KP2
Creates a straight line between two keypoints (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KP1, KP2
Creates a straight line from keypoint defined by KP1 to keypoint defined by KP2. If KP1 = P; graphical picking
is enabled and the remaining command field is ignored.
Notes
This command is available only for repairing the geometry of models imported from CAD systems (Default IGES
option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Fill Lines
3720
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LNSPLIT
LNMERGE, LN1, LN2, LN3, LN4, LN4, LN6, LN7, LN8, LN9, LN10
Merges two or more connected line segments (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LN1, LN2, LN3, LN4, LN4, LN6, LN7, LN8, LN9, LN10
List of lines that define the set of line segments to merge into one or more line segments. The command
merges all the lines from the selected set that are connected to only one other line. If LN1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If LN1 = ALL, all selected
lines will be merged and all remaining arguments are ignored. The connected lines are automatically grouped
together to form a set of merged lines.
Notes
Use the LNMERGE command to merge disproportionately small line segments into a single line segment. This
command is available only for repairing the geometry of models imported from CAD systems (Default IGES option).
Only those line segments specified in the line list that are connected together will be joined by the merge operation. The command considers two lines to be connected if those two lines (and only those two lines) connect
together at a single keypoint.
While the LNMERGE command allows you to join multiple lines in one merge operation, the preferred method
is to merge pairs of line segments to successively build a single line segment. Using this technique can prevent
problems during meshing.
The LNMERGE command does not check the angle of inclination between adjacent lines during the merge operation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Merge Lines
LNSPLIT, LINE, PARAM
Splits a line segment into two line segments (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LINE
ID identifying the line to be split.
PARAM
Arc length parameter specifying the location of the keypoint which will join the two new line segments (the
"split point"). Valid arguments are values between 0 and 1, measured from the line's starting keypoint. Negative values between 0 and -1 are measured from the line's ending keypoint.
Notes
This command is available only for repairing the geometry of models imported from CAD systems (Default IGES
option).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3721
LNSRCH
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Split Lines
LNSRCH, Key
Activates a line search to be used with Newton-Raphson.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Line search key:
OFF
Do not use a line search.
ON
Use a line search. Note, adaptive descent is suppressed when LNSRCH is on unless explicitly requested
on the NROPT command. Having line search on and adaptive descent on at the same time is not recommended.
AUTO
ANSYS automatically switches line searching ON and OFF between substeps of a load step as needed.
This option is recommended.
Command Default
Line search off, unless contact elements are present.
Notes
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
Activates a line search to be used with the Newton-Raphson method [NROPT]. Line search is an alternative to
adaptive descent (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference).
LNSRCH,AUTO can be very efficient for problems in which LNSRCH is needed at only certain substeps.
You cannot use line search [LNSRCH], automatic time stepping [AUTOTS], or the DOF solution predictor [PRED]
with the arc-length method [ARCLEN, ARCTRM]. If you activate the arc-length method after you set LNSRCH,
AUTOTS, or PRED, a warning message appears. If you choose to proceed with the arc-length method activation,
ANSYS disables your line search, automatic time stepping, and DOF predictor settings.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Line Search
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
3722
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LOCAL
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Line Search
LOCAL, KCN, KCS, XC, YC, ZC, THXY, THYZ, THZX, PAR1, PAR2
Defines a local coordinate system by a location and orientation.
DATABASE: Coordinate System
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this coordinate system. Must be greater than 10. A coordinate system
previously defined with this number will be redefined.
KCS
Coordinate system type:
0 or CART
Cartesian
1 or CYLIN
Cylindrical (circular or elliptical)
2 or SPHE
Spherical (or spheroidal)
3 or TORO
Toroidal
XC, YC, ZC
Location (in the global Cartesian coordinate system) of the origin of the new coordinate system.
THXY
First rotation about local Z (positive X toward Y).
THYZ
Second rotation about local X (positive Y toward Z).
THZX
Third rotation about local Y (positive Z toward X).
PAR1
Used for elliptical, spheroidal, or toroidal systems. If KCS = 1 or 2, PAR1 is the ratio of the ellipse Y-axis radius
to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0 (circle)). If KCS = 3, PAR1 is the major radius of the torus.
PAR2
Used for spheroidal systems. If KCS = 2, PAR2 = ratio of ellipse Z-axis radius to X-axis radius (defaults to 1.0
(circle)).
Notes
Defines a local coordinate system by origin location and orientation angles. The local coordinate system is parallel to the global Cartesian system unless rotated. Rotation angles are in degrees and redefine any previous rotation angles. See the CLOCAL, CS, CSWPLA, and CSKP commands for alternate definitions. This local system
becomes the active coordinate system [CSYS]. Local coordinate systems may be displayed with the /PSYMB
command.
This command is valid in any processor.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3723
LOVLAP
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Local Coordinate Systems>Create Local CS>At Specified Loc
LOVLAP, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Overlaps lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Numbers of lines to be overlapped. If NL1 = ALL, NL2 to NL9 are ignored and all selected lines are overlapped.
If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NL1.
Notes
Overlaps lines. Generates new lines which encompass the geometry of all the input lines. The new lines are
defined by the regions of intersection of the input lines, and by the complementary (non-intersecting) regions.
See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. This operation is only valid when the region of intersection is a line. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations.
Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred
to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Overlap>Lines
LPLOT, NL1, NL2, NINC
Displays the selected lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NINC
Display lines from NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NL1 = ALL (default), NL2 and
NINC are ignored and display all selected lines [LSEL].
Notes
Mesh divisions on plotted lines are controlled by the LDIV option of the /PSYMB command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Lines
Utility Menu>Plot>Specified Entities>Lines
3724
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LREFINE
LPTN, NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Partitions lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NL3, NL4, NL5, NL6, NL7, NL8, NL9
Numbers of lines to be operated on. If NL1 = ALL, NL2 to NL9 are ignored all selected lines are used. If NL1 =
P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may be substituted for NL1.
Notes
Partitions lines. Generates new lines which encompass the geometry of all the input lines. The new lines are
defined by both the regions of intersection of the input lines and the complementary (non-intersecting) regions.
See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of
the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned
to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Partition>Lines
LREFINE, NL1, NL2, NINC, LEVEL, DEPTH, POST, RETAIN
Refines the mesh around specified lines.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NINC
Lines (NL1 to NL2 in increments of NINC) around which the mesh is to be refined. NL2 defaults to NL1, and
NINC defaults to 1. If NL1 = ALL, NL2 and NINC are ignored and all selected lines are used for refinement. If
NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NL1 (NL2 and NINC are ignored).
LEVEL
Amount of refinement to be done. Specify the value of LEVEL as an integer from 1 to 5, where a value of 1
provides minimal refinement, and a value of 5 provides maximum refinement (defaults to 1).
DEPTH
Depth of mesh refinement in terms of the number of elements outward from the indicated lines (defaults
to 1).
POST
Type of postprocessing to be done after element splitting, in order to improve element quality:
OFF
No postprocessing will be done.
SMOOTH
Smoothing will be done. Node locations may change.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3725
LREVERSE
CLEAN
Smoothing and cleanup will be done. Existing elements may be deleted, and node locations may change
(default).
RETAIN
Flag indicating whether quadrilateral elements must be retained in the refinement of an all-quadrilateral
mesh. (The ANSYS program ignores the RETAIN argument when you are refining anything other than a
quadrilateral mesh.)
ON
The final mesh will be composed entirely of quadrilateral elements, regardless of the element quality
(default).
OFF
The final mesh may include some triangular elements in order to maintain element quality and provide
transitioning.
Notes
LREFINE performs local mesh refinement around the specified lines. By default, the indicated elements are split
to create new elements with 1/2 the edge length of the original elements (LEVEL = 1).
LREFINE refines all area elements and tetrahedral volume elements that are adjacent to the specified lines. Any
volume elements that are adjacent to the specified lines, but are not tetrahedra (for example, hexahedra, wedges,
and pyramids), are not refined.
You cannot use mesh refinement on a solid model that contains initial conditions at nodes [IC], coupled nodes
[CP family of commands], constraint equations [CE family of commands], or boundary conditions or loads applied
directly to any of its nodes or elements. This applies to nodes and elements anywhere in the model, not just in
the region where you want to request mesh refinement. For additional restrictions on mesh refinement, see
Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Lines
LREVERSE, LNUM, NOEFLIP
Reverses the normal of a line, regardless of its connectivity or mesh status.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LNUM
Line number of the line whose normal direction is to be reversed. If LNUM = ALL, the normals of all selected
lines will be reversed. If LNUM = P, graphical picking is enabled. A component name may also be substituted
for LNUM.
NOEFLIP
Indicates whether you want to change the normal direction of the existing elements on the reversed line(s)
so that they are consistent with each line's new normal direction.
3726
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LROTAT
0
Make the normal direction of existing elements on the reversed line(s) consistent with each line's new
normal direction (default).
1
Do not change the normal direction of existing elements on the reversed line(s).
Notes
You cannot use the LREVERSE command to change the normal direction of any element that has a body or
surface load. We recommend that you apply all of your loads only after ensuring that the element normal directions
are acceptable.
Real constants (such as nonuniform shell thickness and tapered beam constants) may be invalidated by an element
reversal.
For more information, see Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Reverse Normals>of Lines
LROTAT, NK1, NK2, NK3, NK4, NK5, NK6, PAX1, PAX2, ARC, NSEG
Generates circular lines by rotating a keypoint pattern about an axis.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NK1, NK2, NK3, NK4, NK5, NK6
List of keypoints in the pattern to be rotated (6 maximum if using keyboard entry). If NK1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If NK1 = ALL, all selected keypoints (except PAX1 and PAX2) will define the pattern to be rotated. A component name may also
be substituted for NK1.
PAX1, PAX2
Keypoints defining the axis about which the keypoint pattern is to be rotated.
ARC
Arc length (in degrees). Positive follows right-hand rule about PAX1-PAX2 vector. Defaults to 360.
NSEG
Number of lines (8 maximum) around circumference. Defaults to minimum required for 90 (maximum) arcs,
i.e., 4 for 360, 3 for 270, etc.
Notes
Generates circular lines (and their corresponding keypoints) by rotating a keypoint pattern about an axis. Keypoint
patterns are generated at regular angular locations (based on a maximum spacing of 90). Line patterns are
generated at the keypoint patterns. Keypoint and line numbers are automatically assigned (beginning with the
lowest available values [NUMSTR]).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3727
LSBA
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Keypoints>About Axis
LSBA, NL, NA, SEPO, KEEPL, KEEPA
Subtracts areas from lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL
Line (or lines, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected lines. If NL = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may
also be substituted for NL.
NA
Area (or areas, if picking is used) to be subtracted. If ALL, use all selected areas. A component name may also
be substituted for NA.
SEPO
Behavior if the intersection of the lines and the areas is a keypoint or keypoints:
(blank)
The resulting lines will share keypoint(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting lines will have separate, but coincident keypoint(s) where they touch.
KEEPL
Specifies whether NL lines are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NL lines after LSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NL lines after LSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEPA
Specifies whether NA areas are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete areas after LSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep areas after LSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
3728
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSBL
Notes
Generates new lines by subtracting the regions common to both NL lines and NA areas (the intersection) from
the NL lines. The intersection can be a line(s) or keypoint(s). If the intersection is a keypoint and SEPO is blank,
the NL line is divided at the keypoint and the resulting lines will be connected, sharing a common keypoint where
they touch. If SEPO is set to SEPO, NL is divided into two unconnected lines with separate keypoints where they
touch. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation
of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned
to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Line by Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Line by Area
LSBL, NL1, NL2, SEPO, KEEP1, KEEP2
Subtracts lines from lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Line (or lines, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected lines. Lines specified in this argument are not available for use in the NL2 argument. If P, graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the
GUI) and all remaining fields are ignored. A component name may also be substituted for NL1.
NL2
Line (or lines, if picking is used) to subtract. If ALL, use all selected lines (except those included in the NL1
argument). A component name may also be substituted for NL2.
SEPO
Behavior if the intersection of the NL1 lines and the NL2 lines is a keypoint or keypoints:
(blank)
The resulting lines will share keypoint(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting lines will have separate, but coincident keypoint(s) where they touch.
KEEP1
Specifies whether NL1 lines are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NL1 lines after LSBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NL1 lines after LSBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP2
Specifies whether NL2 lines are to be deleted:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3729
LSBV
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NL2 lines after LSBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NL2 lines after LSBL operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new lines by subtracting the regions common to both NL1 and NL2 lines (the intersection) from the
NL1 lines. The intersection can be a line(s) or point(s). If the intersection is a point and SEPO is blank, the NL1 line
is divided at the point and the resulting lines will be connected, sharing a common keypoint where they touch.
If SEPO is set to SEPO, NL1 is divided into two unconnected lines with separate keypoints where they touch. See
the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the
options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to
the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated. LSBL,ALL,ALL will have no effect since
all the lines (in NL1) will be unavailable as NL2 lines.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Line by Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Line by Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Subtract>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Subtract>With Options>Lines
LSBV, NL, NV, SEPO, KEEPL, KEEPV
Subtracts volumes from lines.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL
Line (or lines, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected lines. If NL = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may
also be substituted for NL.
NV
Volume (or volumes, if picking is used) to be subtracted. If ALL, use all selected volumes. A component name
may also be substituted for NV.
SEPO
Behavior if the intersection of the NL lines and the NV volumes is a keypoint or keypoints:
(blank)
The resulting lines will share keypoint(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting lines will have separate, but coincident keypoint(s) where they touch.
KEEPL
Specifies whether NL lines are to be deleted:
3730
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSBW
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NL lines after LSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NL lines after LSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEPV
Specifies whether NV volumes are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NV volumes after LSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NV volumes after LSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new lines by subtracting the regions common to both NL lines and NV volumes (the intersection) from
the NL lines. The intersection can be a line(s) or point(s). If the intersection is a point and SEPO is blank, the NL1
line is divided at the point and the resulting lines will be connected, sharing a common keypoint where they
touch. If SEPO is set to SEPO, NL1 is divided into two unconnected lines with separate keypoints where they
touch. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation
of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned
to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated. LSBL,ALL,ALL will have no effect
since all the lines (in NL1) will be unavailable as NL2 lines.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Line by Volume
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Line by Volume
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Divide>Line by Volu
LSBW, NL, SEPO, KEEP
Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from lines (divides lines).
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL
Line (or lines, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If NL = ALL, use all selected lines. If NL = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be input for NL.
SEPO
Behavior of the created boundary.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3731
LSCLEAR
(blank)
The resulting lines will share keypoint(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting lines will have separate, but coincident keypoint(s).
KEEP
Specifies whether NL lines are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NL lines after LSBW operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NL lines after LSBW operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new lines by subtracting the intersection of the working plane from the NL lines. The intersection will
be a keypoint(s). The working plane must not be in the same plane as the NL line(s). If SEPO is blank, the NL line
is divided and the resulting lines will be connected, sharing a common keypoint where they touch. If SEPO is set
to SEPO, NL is divided into two unconnected lines with separate keypoints. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing
Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be
transferred to the new entities generated. Areas that completely contain the input lines will be updated if the
lines are divided by this operation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Line by WrkPlane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Line by WrkPlane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Divide>Line by WrkPlane
LSCLEAR, Lab
Clears loads and load step options from the database.
SOLUTION: Load Step Operations
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label identifying the data to be cleared:
SOLID
Delete only solid model loads.
FE
Delete only finite element loads.
INER
Delete only inertia loads (ACEL, etc.).
3732
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSDELE
LFACT
Initialize only load factors (on DCUM, FCUM, SFCUM, etc.).
LSOPT
Initialize only load step options.
ALL
Delete all loads and initialize all load step options and load factors.
Notes
Loads are deleted, and load step options are initialized to their default values.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All F.E. Loads
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Inertia Lds
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Loads & Opts
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All SolidMod Lds
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Reset Factors
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Reset Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All F.E. Loads
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Inertia Lds
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Loads & Opts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All SolidMod Lds
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Reset Factors
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Reset Options
LSDELE, LSMIN, LSMAX, LSINC
Deletes load step files.
SOLUTION: Load Step Operations
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LSMIN, LSMAX, LSINC
Range of load step files to be deleted, from LSMIN to LSMAX in steps of LSINC. LSMAX defaults to LSMIN, and
LSINC defaults to 1. If LSMIN = ALL, all load step files are deleted (and LSMAX and LSINC are ignored). The
load step files are assumed to be named Jobname.Sn, where n is a number assigned by the LSWRITE command (01--09,10,11, etc.). On systems with a 3-character limit on the extension, the S is dropped for numbers
> 99.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3733
LSEL
Notes
Deletes load step files in the current directory (written by the LSWRITE command).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Delete LS Files
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Delete LS Files
LSEL, Type, Item, Comp, VMIN, VMAX, VINC, KSWP
Selects a subset of lines.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Restore the full set.
NONE
Unselect the full set.
INVE
Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT
Display the current select status.
The following fields are used only with Type = S, R, A, or U:
Item
Label identifying data. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a component
label. If Item = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). Defaults to LINE.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
3734
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSEL
VMIN
Minimum value of item range. Ranges are line numbers, coordinate values, attribute numbers, etc., as appropriate for the item. If VMIN = 0.0, a tolerance of 1.0E-6 is used, or 0.005 x VMIN if VMIN = VMAX. A component
name (as specified on the CM command) may also be substituted for VMIN (VMAX and VINC are ignored). If
Item = MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, or NDIV and if VMIN is positive, the absolute value of Item is compared against
the range for selection; if VMIN is negative, the signed value of Item is compared. See the LLIST command
for a discussion of signed attributes.
VMAX
Maximum value of item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN. If VMAX VMIN, a tolerance of 1.0E-8 x (VMAX-VMIN)
is used.
VINC
Value increment within range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for line numbers). Defaults to 1. VINC
cannot be negative.
KSWP
Specifies whether only lines are to be selected:
0
Select lines only.
1
Select lines, as well as keypoints, nodes, and elements associated with selected lines. Valid only with
Type = S.
Command Default
All lines are selected.
Notes
Selects lines based on values of a labeled item and component. For example, to select a new set of lines based
on line numbers 1 through 7, use LSEL,S,LINE,,1,7. The subset is used when the ALL label is entered (or implied)
on other commands, such as LLIST,ALL. Only data identified by line number are selected. Data are flagged as
selected and unselected; no data are actually deleted from the database.
If Item = LCCA, the command selects only those lines that were created by concatenation. The KSWP field is
processed, but the Comp, VMIN, VMAX, and VINC fields are ignored.
If Item = HPT, the command selects only those lines that contain hard points.
Item = RADIUS is only valid for lines that are circular arcs.
LSEL is valid in any processor.
LSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels LSEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KSWP
Item
Comp
Description
LINE
Line number.
EXT
Line numbers on exterior of selected area (ignore remaining fields).
LOC
X,Y,Z
X, Y, or Z center location in the active coordinate system.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3735
LSLA
Valid Item and Component Labels LSEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KSWP
Item
Comp
Description
TAN1
X,Y,Z
Unit vector component of outward tangent at beginning of line.
TAN2
X,Y,Z
Unit vector component of outward tangent at end of line.
NDIV
Number of divisions within the line.
SPACE
Spacing ratio of line divisions.
MAT
Material number associated with the line.
TYPE
Element type number associated with the line.
REAL
Real constant set number associated with the line.
ESYS
Element coordinate system associated with the line.
SEC
Cross section ID number. [SECNUM]
LENGTH
Length of the line.
RADIUS
Radius of the line.
HPT
Line number (selects only lines with associated hard points).
LCCA
Concatenated lines (selects only lines that were created by concatenation
[LCCAT]).
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
LSLA, Type
Selects those lines contained in the selected areas.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of line select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
3736
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSLK
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
LSLK, Type, LSKEY
Selects those lines containing the selected keypoints.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of line select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
LSKEY
Specifies whether all contained line keypoints must be selected [KSEL]:
0
Select line if any of its keypoints are in the selected keypoint set.
1
Select line only if all of its keypoints are in the selected keypoint set.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3737
LSOPER
LSOPER
Specifies "Load step operations" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Load Step Operations
/LSPEC, LCOLOR, LINSTL, XLNWID
Specifies annotation line attributes (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LCOLOR
Line color:
0
Black
1
Red-Magenta
2
Magenta
3
Blue-Magenta
4
Blue
5
Cyan-Blue
6
Cyan
7
Green-Cyan
8
Green
9
Yellow-Green
3738
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSREAD
10
Yellow
11
Orange
12
Red
13
Dark Gray
14
Light Gray
15
White
LINSTL
Line style:
0
Solid line.
1
Dashed line.
XLNWID
Line width multiplier (1.0 to 20.0). Defaults to 1.0.
Notes
Specifies annotation line attributes to control certain characteristics of the lines created via the /LINE, /LARC,
/LSYMBOL, /POLYGON, /PMORE, /PCIRCLE, and /PWEDGE commands. This is a command generated by the
Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used. This command
is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input file for batch
input or for use with the /INPUT command).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
LSREAD, LSNUM
Reads load and load step option data into the database.
SOLUTION: Load Step Operations
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LSNUM
Identification number of the load step file to be read. Defaults to 1 + highest number read in the current
session. Issue LSREAD,STAT to list the current value of LSNUM. Issue LSREAD,INIT to reset LSNUM to 1. The
load step files are assumed to be named Jobname.Sn, where n is a number assigned by the LSWRITE com-
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3739
LSSCALE
mand (01--09,10,11, etc.). On systems with a 3-character limit on the extension, the S is dropped for LSNUM
> 99.
Notes
Reads load and load step option data from the load step file into the database. LSREAD will not clear the database
of all current loads. However, if a load is respecified with LSREAD, then it will overwrite the existing load. See
the LSWRITE command to write load step files, and the LSDELE command to delete load step files. LSREAD removes any existing SFGRAD specification.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Read LS File
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Read LS File
LSSCALE, NL1, NL2, NINC, RX, RY, RZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates a scaled set of lines from a pattern of lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1, NL2, NINC
Set of lines (NL1 to NL2 in steps of NINC) that defines the pattern to be scaled. NL2 defaults to NL1, NINC
defaults to 1. If NL1 = ALL, NL2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is defined by all selected lines. If NL1
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for NL1 (NL2 and NINC are ignored).
RX, RY, RZ
Scale factors to be applied to the X, Y, Z keypoint coordinates in active coordinate system (RR, R, RZ for cylindrical; RR, R, R for spherical). Note that the R and R scale factors are interpreted as angular offsets. For
example, for CSYS,1, RR, R, RZ input of (1.5,10,3) would scale the specified keypoints 1.5 times in the radial
and 3 times in the Z direction, while adding an offset of 10 degrees to the keypoints. Zero, blank, or negative
scale factor values are assumed to be 1.0. Zero or blank angular offsets have no effect.
KINC
Increment to be applied to keypoint numbers for generated set. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers
will be assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Nodes and line elements associated with the original lines will be generated (scaled) if they exist.
1
Nodes and line elements will not be generated.
IMOVE
Specifies whether lines will be moved or newly defined:
3740
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSSOLVE
0
Additional lines will be generated.
1
Original lines will be moved to new position (KINC and NOELEM are ignored). Use only if the old lines are
no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items are also moved if not needed
at their original position.
Notes
Generates a scaled set of lines (and their corresponding keypoints and mesh) from a pattern of lines. The MAT,
TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based on the lines in the pattern and not the current settings. Scaling is done
in the active coordinate system. Lines in the pattern could have been generated in any coordinate system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Scale>Lines
LSSOLVE, LSMIN, LSMAX, LSINC
Reads and solves multiple load steps.
SOLUTION: Load Step Operations
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL <> ED
LSMIN, LSMAX, LSINC
Range of load step files to be read and solved, from LSMIN to LSMAX in steps of LSINC. LSMAX defaults to
LSMIN, and LSINC defaults to 1. If LSMIN is blank, a brief command description is displayed. The load step
files are assumed to be named Jobname.Sn, where n is a number assigned by the LSWRITE command (01-09,10,11, etc.). On systems with a 3-character limit on the extension, the S is dropped for numbers > 99.
Notes
LSSOLVE invokes an ANSYS macro to read and solve multiple load steps. The macro loops through a series of
load step files written by the LSWRITE command. The macro file called by LSSOLVE is called LSSOLVE.MAC.
LSSOLVE cannot be used with the birth-death option.
LSSOLVE does not support restarts.
LSSOLVE does not apply to FLOTRAN.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>From LS Files
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3741
LSTR
LSTR, P1, P2
Defines a straight line irrespective of the active coordinate system.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1
Keypoint at the beginning of line. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI)
P2
Keypoint at the end of line.
Notes
Defines a straight line from P1 to P2 using the global Cartesian coordinate system. The active coordinate system
will be ignored. The line shape is invariant with the coordinate system after it is generated. Lines may be redefined
only if not yet attached to an area.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>Straight Line
LSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected lines.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Calculates and prints geometry statistics (length, centroid, moments of inertia, etc.) associated with the selected
lines. Geometry items are reported in the global Cartesian coordinate system. A unit density is assumed, irrespective
of any material associations [LATT, MAT]. Items calculated by LSUM and later retrieved by a *GET or *VGET
command are valid only if the model is not modified after the LSUM command is issued.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Calc Geom Items>Of Lines
LSWRITE, LSNUM
Writes load and load step option data to a file.
SOLUTION: Load Step Operations
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LSNUM
Number to be assigned to the load step file name for identification purposes. Defaults to 1 + highest LSNUM
used in the current session. Issue LSWRITE,STAT to list the current value of LSNUM. Issue LSWRITE,INIT to
reset to 1. The load step file will be named Jobname.Sn, where n is the specified LSNUM value (preceded by
3742
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/LSYMBOL
"0" for values 1-9). On systems with a 3-character limit on the file name extension, the "S" is dropped for LSNUM
> 99.
Command Default
The default behavior of LSWRITE is dependent on the SOLCONTROL command. When solution control is on
(default behavior), the LSWRITE command does NOT write the default values for commands affected by solution
control. When solution control is off (SOLCONTROL,OFF), LSWRITE does write the default values for commands
affected by solution control. See SOLCONTROL for a list of those commands.
Notes
Writes all load and load step option data for the selected model to a load step file for later use. LSWRITE does
not capture changes made to real constants (R) or material properties (MP). Solid model loads will not be saved
if the model is not meshed. Solid model loads, if any, are transferred to the finite element model. Issue LSCLEAR,FE
to delete finite element loads. One file is written for each load step. Use the LSREAD command to read a single
load step file, and the LSDELE command to delete load step files. Use the LSSOLVE command to read and solve
the load steps sequentially.
LSWRITE cannot be used with the birth-death option.
LSWRITE does not apply to FLOTRAN.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Write LS File
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Write LS File
/LSYMBOL, X, Y, SYMANG, SYMTYP, SYMSIZ, KEYBMP
Creates annotation symbols (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
X
X location for symbol (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y
Y location for symbol (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
SYMANG
Symbol orientation angle.
SYMTYP
Symbol type:
1
Arrow.
2
Tee.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3743
LSYMM
3
Circle.
4
Triangle.
5
Star.
SYMSIZ
Symbol size multiplier (0.1 to 20.0). Defaults to 1.0.
KEYBMP
If KEYBMP = 1, the annotation is a bitmap. SYMTYP will then be a number from 1-99, indicating the bitmap
type (see notes), and X and Y will define the lower left corner of the bitmap. The SYMANG, SYMSIZarguments
are ignored. If KEYBMP = 0, or blank, then the argument definitions above apply.
Notes
Defines annotation symbols to be written directly onto the display at a specified location. This is a command
generated by the GUI and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used. This command is not
intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input file for batch input
or for use with the /INPUT command).
All symbols are shown on subsequent displays unless the annotation is turned off or deleted. Use the /LSPEC
command to set the attributes of the symbol.
The KEYBMP argument reads the symtype argument to determine which bitmap to insert. This bitmap is defined
by an integer between 1 and 99. Numbers 1 through 40 correspond to the standard texture values found in the
/TXTRE command, while numbers 51 through 99 correspond to user supplied bitmaps, as defined using the Filename option of the /TXTRE command. Numbers 51 through 57 are predefined (the logos, clamps and arrows
available from the GUI) but can be overridden. Numbers 41 through 50 are reserved.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
LSYMM, Ncomp, NL1, NL2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates lines from a line pattern by symmetry reflection.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Ncomp
Symmetry key:
X
X symmetry (default).
Y
Y symmetry.
3744
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LSYMM
Z
Z symmetry.
NL1, NL2, NINC
Reflect lines from pattern beginning with NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NL1
= ALL, NL2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected lines [LSEL]. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NL1 (NL2 and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original lines, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether areas will be moved or newly defined:
0
Generate additional lines.
1
Move original lines to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELEM are ignored).
Valid only if the old lines are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items
are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates a reflected set of lines (and their corresponding keypoints and mesh) from a given line pattern by a
symmetry reflection (see analogous node symmetry command, NSYM). The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes
are based upon the lines in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Reflection is done in the active coordinate system by changing a particular coordinate sign. The active coordinate system must be Cartesian. Lines in
the pattern may have been generated in any coordinate system. However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate
system is not recommended. Lines are generated as described in the LGEN command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Reflect>Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3745
LTAN
LTAN, NL1, P3, XV3, YV3, ZV3
Generates a line at the end of, and tangent to, an existing line.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NL1
Number of the line the generated line is tangent to. If negative, assume P1 (see below), instead of P2, is the
second keypoint of line NL1. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are
ignored (valid only in the GUI).
P3
Keypoint at which generated line must end.
The following fields are used only if a specified slope on the end of the new line is desired, otherwise a zero
curvature end slope will be automatically calculated. To specify the end slope, use the following fields to define
a "slope vector" that has its tail at the origin and its head at the point XV, YV, ZV in the active coordinate system
[CSYS]. The corresponding end slope of the line will then be parallel to this "slope vector."
XV3, YV3, ZV3
Location (in the active coordinate system) of the head of the "slope vector" corresponding to the slope at
the P3 end of the line. The tail of the vector is at the coordinate system origin.
Notes
Generates a line (P2-P3) tangent at end point (P2) of line NL1 (P1-P2).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Lines>Tangent to Line
LTRAN, KCNTO, NL1, NL2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Transfers a pattern of lines to another coordinate system.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCNTO
Reference number of coordinate system where the pattern is to be transferred. Transfer occurs from the
active coordinate system. The coordinate system type and parameters of KCNTO must be the same as the
active system.
NL1, NL2, NINC
Transfer lines from pattern beginning with NL1 to NL2 (defaults to NL1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If
NL1 = ALL, NL2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected lines [LSEL]. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also
be substituted for NL1 (NL2 and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
3746
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LUMPM
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original lines, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether lines will be moved or newly defined:
0
Generate additional lines.
1
Move original lines to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELM are ignored).
Valid only if the old lines are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items
are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Transfers a pattern of lines (and their corresponding keypoints and mesh) from one coordinate system to another
(see analogous node transfer command, TRANSFER). The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based upon
the lines in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Coordinate systems may be translated and rotated
relative to each other. Initial pattern may be generated in any coordinate system. However, solid modeling in a
toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Coordinate and slope values are interpreted in the active coordinate system and are transferred directly. Lines are generated as described in the LGEN command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Transfer Coord>Lines
LUMPM, Key
Specifies a lumped mass matrix formulation.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Formulation key:
OFF
Use the element-dependent default mass matrix formulation (default).
ON
Use a lumped mass approximation.
Command Default
Use the default element mass matrix.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3747
LVSCALE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>New Analysis
LVSCALE, FACT
Scales the load vector for mode superposition analyses.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
FACT
Scale factor applied to both the real and imaginary (if they exist) components of the load vector. Defaults to
0.0.
Command Default
No load vector is applied.
Notes
Specifies the scale factor for the load vector that was created in a modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) analysis. Applies only
to the mode superposition transient (ANTYPE,TRANS), mode superposition harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARMIC),
and PSD spectrum (pressure PSD) analyses.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For Mode Super
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For PSD
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For Mode Super
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For PSD
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For Mode Super
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For PSD
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For Mode Super
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For PSD
3748
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
LWPLAN
LWPLAN, WN, NL1, RATIO
Defines the working plane normal to a location on a line.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number whose viewing direction will be modified to be normal to the working plane (defaults to
1). If WN is a negative value, the viewing direction will not be modified.
NL1
Number of line to be used. If NL1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
RATIO
Location on NL1, specified as a ratio of the line length. Must be between 0.0 and 1.0. If RATIO = P, use
graphical picking to specify location on the line.
Command Default
Working plane is parallel to the Global X-Y plane at Z = 0.0.
Notes
Defines a working plane (to assist in picking operations) normal to a location on a line. See WPSTYL command
to set the style of working plane display.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Align WP with>Plane Normal to Line
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3749
3750
M Commands
M, NODE, Lab1, NEND, NINC, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Defines master degrees of freedom for reduced and superelement generation analyses.
SOLUTION: Master DOF
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE
Node number at which master degree of freedom is defined. If ALL, define master degrees of freedom at all
selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE.
Lab1
Valid degree of freedom label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: UX, UY, or UZ (displacements);
ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ (rotations). Thermal labels: TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP (temperature). Electric labels:
VOLT (voltage).
NEND, NINC
Define all nodes from NODE to NEND (defaults to NODE) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1) as master degrees of
freedom in the specified direction.
Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Additional master degree of freedom labels. The nodes defined are associated with each label specified.
Notes
Defines master degrees of freedom (MDOF) for reduced (dynamic and superelement generation) analyses. If
defined for other analyses, MDOF are ignored. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first
load step. Scalar MDOF (VOLT) are not permitted in structural analyses if mass or damping matrices are reduced.
Reduced analyses normally apply only to the UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ labels.
Repeat M command for additional master degrees of freedom. Limit is equal to the maximum in-memory
wavefront size (see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
The reduced modal (ANTYPE,MODAL), reduced transient (ANTYPE,TRANS), reduced harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARMIC), and the substructure (ANTYPE,SUBSTR) analyses utilize the matrix condensation technique to
reduce the structure matrices to those characterized by a set of master degrees of freedom.
Master degrees of freedom are identified by a list of nodes and their nodal directions. The actual degree of
freedom directions available for a particular node depends upon the degrees of freedom associated with element
types [ET] at that node. For example, degrees of freedom available with BEAM3 elements are UX, UY, and ROTZ
only. There must be some mass (or stress stiffening in the case of the buckling analysis) associated with each
master degree of freedom (except for the VOLT label). The mass may be due either to the distributed mass of
the element or due to discrete lumped masses at the node. If a master degree of freedom is specified at a constrained point, it is ignored. If a master degree of freedom is specified at a coupled node, it should be specified
at the prime node of the coupled set. Master degrees of freedom can also be generated automatically (during
solution) by issuing the TOTAL command in PREP7 or SOLUTION.
Transient displacements and forces, used to apply motion to a structure in the reduced transient or reduced
harmonic response analysis, must be applied at a master degree of freedom. Substructure analysis connection
points must be defined as master degrees of freedom.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MAGOPT
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Master DOFs>User Selected>Define
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>CMS>CMS Interface>Define
Main Menu>Solution>Master DOFs>User Selected>Define
MAGOPT, VALUE
Specifies options for a 3-D magnetostatic field analysis.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
VALUE
Option key:
0
Calculate a complete H field solution in the entire domain using a single (reduced) potential.
Caution: When used in problems with both current sources and iron regions, errors may result
due to numerical cancellation.
1
Calculate and store a preliminary H field in "iron" regions (r 1). Requires flux-parallel boundary conditions to be specified on exterior iron boundaries. Used in conjunction with subsequent solutions with
VALUE = 2 followed by VALUE = 3. Applicable to multiply-connected iron domain problems.
2
Calculate and store a preliminary H field in "air" regions (r = 1). The air-iron interface is appropriately
treated internally by the program. Used in conjunction with a subsequent solution with VALUE = 3. Applicable to singly-connected iron domain problems (with subsequent solution with VALUE = 3) or to
multiply-connected iron domain problems (when preceded by a solution with VALUE = 1 and followed
by a solution with VALUE = 3).
3
Use the previously stored H field solution(s) and calculate the complete H field.
Notes
Specifies the solution sequence options for a 3-D magnetostatic field analysis using a scalar potential (MAG).
The solution sequence is determined by the nature of the problem.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>DSP Method
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>GSP Method
3752
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MAGSOLV
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>RSP Method
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>DSP Method
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>GSP Method
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Magnetics>Options Only>RSP Method
MAGSOLV, OPT, NRAMP, CNVCSG, CNVFLUX, NEQIT, BIOT,CNVTOL
Specifies magnetic solution options and initiates the solution.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
OPT
Static magnetic solution option:
0
Vector potential (MVP) or edge formulation (default).
1
Combined vector potential and reduced scalar potential (MVP-RSP).
2
Reduced scalar potential (RSP).
3
Difference scalar potential (DSP).
4
General scalar potential (GSP).
NRAMP
Number of ramped substeps for the first load step of a nonlinear MVP or MVP-RSP solution. Defaults to 3. If
NRAMP = -1, ignore the ramped load step entirely.NRAMP is ignored for linear magnetostatics.
CNVCSG
Tolerance value on the program-calculated reference value for the magnetic current-segment convergence.
Used for the MVP, the MVP-RSP, and the edge formulation solution options (OPT = 0 and 1). Defaults to 0.001.
CNVFLUX
Tolerance value on the program-calculated reference value for the magnetic flux convergence. Used for all
scalar potential solution options (OPT = 2, 3, 4). Defaults to 0.001.
NEQIT
Maximum number of equilibrium iterations per load step. Defaults to 25.
BIOT
Option to force execution of a Biot-Savart integral solution [BIOT,NEW] for the scalar potential options. Required if multiple load steps are being performed with different current source primitives (SOURC36 elements).
0
Do not force execution of Biot-Savart calculation (default); Biot-Savart is automatically calculated only
for the first solution.
1
Force execution of Biot-Savart calculation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3753
MAPSOLVE
CNVTOL
Sets the convergence tolerance for AMPS reaction. Defaults to 1e-3. Applicable only when KEYOPT(1) = 5 on
SOLID117.
Notes
MAGSOLV invokes an ANSYS macro which specifies magnetic solution options and initiates the solution. The
macro is applicable to any ANSYS magnetostatic analysis using the magnetic vector potential (MVP), reduced
scalar potential (RSP), difference scalar potential (DSP), general scalar potential (GSP), or combined MVP-RSP
formulation options. Results are only stored for the final converged solution. (In POST1, issue *SET,LIST to
identify the load step of solution results.) The macro internally determines if a nonlinear analysis is required
based on magnetic material properties.
If you use the BIOT option and issue SAVE after solution or postprocessing, the Biot-Savart calculations are saved
to the database, but will be overwritten upon normal exit from the program. To save this data after issuing SAVE,
use the /EXIT,NOSAVE command. You can also issue the /EXIT,SOLU command to exit ANSYS and save all solution
data, including the Biot-Savart calculations, in the database. Otherwise, when you issue RESUME, the Biot-Savart
calculation will be lost (resulting in a zero solution).
The MVP, MVP-RSP, and edge formulation options perform a two-load-step solution sequence. The first load
step ramps the applied loads over a prescribed number of substeps (NRAMP), and the second load step calculates
the converged solution. For linear problems, only a single load step solution is performed. The ramped load step
can be bypassed by setting NRAMP to -1.
The RSP option solves in a single load step using the adaptive descent procedure. The DSP option uses two load
steps, and the RSP solution uses three load steps.
The following analysis options and nonlinear options are controlled by this macro: KBC, NEQIT, NSUBST, CNVTOL,
NROPT, MAGOPT, and OUTRES.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Electromagnet>Static Analysis>Opt&Solv
MAPSOLVE, MAXSBSTEP
Maps solved node and element solutions from an original mesh to a new mesh.
SOLUTION: Rezoning
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
MAXSBSTEP
The maximum number of substeps for rebalancing the residuals. The default value is 5.
Notes
Used during the rezoning process, the MAPSOLVE command maps solved node and element solutions from
the original mesh to the new mesh and achieves equilibrium based on the new mesh.
Additional substeps are necessary to reduce the residuals to zero.
3754
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MAT
During the rebalancing stage, the external loads and time remain unchanged.
The MAPSOLVE command is valid for manual rezoning (REZONE,MANUAL) only.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Map Results
MASTER
Specifies "Master DOF" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Master DOF
MAT, MAT
Sets the element material attribute pointer.
PREP7: Meshing
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT
Assign this material number to subsequently defined elements (defaults to 1).
Notes
Identifies the material number to be assigned to subsequently defined elements. This number refers to the material number (MAT) defined with the material properties [MP]. Material numbers may be displayed [/PNUM].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Default Attribs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Elem Attributes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3755
MATER
MATER
Specifies "Material properties" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Materials
MCHECK, Lab
Checks mesh connectivity.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Operation:
ESEL
Unselects the valid elements.
Notes
Wherever two area or volume elements share a common face, MCHECK verifies that the way the elements are
connected to the face is consistent with their relative normals or integrated volumes. (This may detect folds or
otherwise overlapping elements.)
MCHECK verifies that the element exterior faces form simply-connected closed surfaces. (This may detect unintended cracks in a mesh.)
MCHECK warns if the number of element facets in a 2-D loop or 3-D shell is not greater than a computed limit.
This limit is the smaller of either three times the number of faces on one element, or one-tenth the total number
of element faces in the model. (This may detect holes in the middle of a mesh.)
The MCHECK command will perform a number of validity checks on the selected elements, including:
1.
Normal check: Wherever two area elements share a common edge, MCHECK verifies that the ordering
of the nodes on each element is consistent with their relative normals.
2.
Volume check: Wherever two volume elements share a common face, MCHECK verifies that the sign
of the integrated volume of each element is consistent.
3756
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MDAMP
3.
Closed surface check: MCHECK verifies that the element exterior faces form simply-connected closed
surfaces (this may detect unintended cracks in a mesh).
4.
Check for holes in the mesh: MCHECK warns if the number of element faces surrounding an interior
void in the mesh is small enough to suggest one or more accidentally omitted elements, rather than a
deliberately formed hole. For this test, the number of faces around the void is compared to the smaller
of a) three times the number of faces on one element, or b) one-tenth the total number of element faces
in the model.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Check Mesh>Connectivity>Ck Connectvty
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Check Mesh>Connectivity>Sel Bad Connt
MDAMP, STLOC, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Defines the damping ratios as a function of mode.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
STLOC
Starting location in table for entering data. For example, if STLOC = 1, data input in the V1 field applies to
the first constant in the table. If STLOC = 7, data input in the V1 field applies to the seventh constant in the
table, etc. Defaults to the last location filled + 1.
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Data assigned to six locations starting with STLOC. If a value is already in this location, it will be redefined.
Blank values for V2 to V6 leave the corresponding previous value unchanged.
Notes
Defines the damping ratios as a function of mode. Table position corresponds to mode number. These ratios are
added to the DMPRAT value, if defined. Use STAT command to list current values. Applies to the mode superposition harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARMIC), the mode superposition linear transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS),
and the spectrum (ANTYPE,SPECTR) analyses. Repeat MDAMP command for additional constants (300 maximum).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3757
MDELE
MDELE, NODE, Lab1, NEND, NINC, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Deletes master degrees of freedom.
SOLUTION: Master DOF
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE, Lab1, NEND, NINC
Delete master degrees of freedom in the Lab1 direction [M] from NODE to NEND (defaults to NODE) in steps
of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE = ALL, NEND and NINC are ignored and masters for all selected nodes [NSEL]
are deleted. If Lab1 = ALL, all label directions will be deleted. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and
all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted
for NODE.
Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Delete masters in these additional directions.
Notes
Deletes master degrees of freedom. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Master DOFs>User Selected>Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Master DOFs>User Selected>Delete
MDPLOT, Function, Dmpname, Scale
Plots frequency-dependent modal damping coefficients calculated by DMPEXT.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Function
Function to display.
d_coeff
Damping coefficient
s_coeff
Squeeze coefficient
d_ratio
Damping ratio
s_ratio
Squeeze stiffness ratio
Dmpname
Array parameter name where damping information is stored. Defaults to d_damp.
Scale
Indicates whether to perform a linear or a double logarithmic plot.
3758
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MEMM
LIN
Perform a linear plot. Default
LOG
Perform a double logarithmic plot.
Notes
See Chapter 16, Thin Film Analysis for more information on thin film analyses.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>ThinFilm>Plot Dmp Parm
MEMM, Lab, Kywrd
Allows the current session to keep allocated memory
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
When Lab = KEEP, the memory manager's ability to acquire and keep memory is controlled by Kywrd
Kywrd
Turns the memory keep mode on or off
ON
Keep any memory allocated during the analysis.
OFF
Use memory dynamically and free it up to other users after use (default).
Command Default
Kywrd = OFF.
Notes
You can use the MEMM command to ensure that memory intensive operations will always have the same memory
available when the operations occur intermittently. Normally, if a large amount of memory is allocated for a
specific operation, it will be returned to the system once the operation is finished. This option always maintains
the highest level used during the analysis until the analysis is finished.
The MEMM command does not affect the value you specify with the -m switch. When you allocate memory with
the -m switch, that amount will always be available. However, if dynamic memory allocation in excess of the-m
value occurs, you can use the MEMM command to ensure that amount is retained until the end of your analysis.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3759
/MENU
/MENU, Key
Activates the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Key
Activation key:
ON
Activates the menu system (device dependent).
GRPH
Enters non-GUI graphics mode. This option is intended for use on graphics devices that do not support
the full Motif-based GUI.
Command Default
GUI is on if entering the ANSYS program through the launcher. GUI is off if entering using the ANSYS execution
command.
Notes
Activates the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
Caution: if you include the /MENU,ON command in your start90.ans, it should be the last command in
the file. Any commands after /MENU,ON may be ignored. (It is not necessary to include the /SHOW and
/MENU,ON commands in start90.ans if you will be using the launcher to enter the ANSYS program.)
This command is valid in any processor.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
MESHING
Specifies "Meshing" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
3760
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFBUCKET
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Meshing
MFANALYSIS, Key
Turns an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis on or off.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Multifield analysis key:
ON
Activates an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
OFF
Deactivates an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis (default).
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
MFBUCKET, Key, Value
Turns a bucket search on or off.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Bucket search key:
ON
Activates a bucket search (default).
OFF
Deactivates a bucket search. A global search is then activated.
Value
Scaling factor (%) used to determine the number of buckets for a bucket search. Defaults to 50%.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3761
MFCALC
Notes
A bucket search will more efficiently compute the mapping of surface and volumetric interpolation data across
field interfaces (flagged by the FSIN label using SF, SFA, SFE, or SFL or the FVIN label using BFE).
The number of buckets used to partition a flagged interface is equal to the scaling factor (%) times the total
number of interface elements. For example, for the default scaling factor of 50% and a 10,000 element interface,
5,000 buckets are used.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
MFCALC, FNUMB, FREQ
Specifies a calculation frequency for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB
Field number set by the MFELEM command.
FREQ
Perform calculation every Nth ANSYS Multi-field solver time step. Defaults to 1 for every time step.
Notes
This command only applies to a harmonic analysis of the specified field. It is useful when a field contributes
negligible field interaction within a single ANSYS Multi-field solver time step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Frequency
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Frequency
3762
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFCLEAR
MFCLEAR, Option, Value
Deletes ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis settings.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
SOLU
Resets all ANSYS solution commands to their default states. This clears analysis options when setting up
different fields for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
FIELD
Deletes all ANSYS Multi-field solver specifications for the specified field number.
SINT
Deletes all ANSYS Multi-field solver specifications for the specified surface interface number.
VINT
Deletes all ANSYS Multi-field solver specifications for the volumetric interface number.
ORD
Deletes the analysis order specified by the MFORDER command.
EXT
Deletes external fields specified by the MFEXTER command
Value
Use only for Option = FIELD, SINT, or VINT.
Option = FIELD deletes all ANSYS Multi-field solver specifications for the field number Value. Value defaults
to 0 (no deletions). A Value of -1 deletes the ANSYS Multi-field solver settings for all fields.
Option = SINT deletes surface interface specifications for the surface interface number Value. Value defaults
to 0 (no deletions). A Value of -1 deletes all surface interface specifications. This command deletes the ANSYS
Multi-field solver commands, not the boundary conditions themselves.
Option = VINT deletes all volumetric interface specifications for the volume interface number Value. Value
defaults to 0 (no deletions). A Value of -1 deletes all volumetric interface specifications. This command deletes
the ANSYS Multi-field solver commands, not the boundary conditions themselves.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Clear
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Clear
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3763
MFCMMAND
MFCMMAND, FNUMB, Fname, Ext
Captures field solution options in a command file.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB
Field number specified by the MFELEM command.
Fname
Command file name specified for the field number. Defaults to field FNUMB.
Ext
Extension for Fname. Defaults to .cmd.
Notes
All relevant solution option commands for the specified field are written to a file with the extension .cmd. Refer
to the commands in the following tables in the ANSYS Commands Reference: Analysis Options, Nonlinear Options,
Dynamic Options, and Load Step Options.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Capture
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Capture
MFCONV, Lab, VALUE
Sets convergence values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
Valid labels:
Force labels: FX, FY, FZ
Displacement labels: UX, UY, UZ
Temperature label: TEMP
Heat flux label: HFLU (for surface load transfer)
Heat generation label: HGEN (for volume load transfer)
If Lab = ALL, MFCONV applies the convergence value to all nine variables.
VALUE
Convergence value. Defaults to 0.001.
Notes
MFCONV sets convergence values for variables at the ANSYS Multi-field solver interface.
3764
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFELEM
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Stagger>Convergence
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Stagger>Convergence
MFDTIME, DTIME
Sets time step increment for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
DTIME
Time step increment. Defaults to 1.
Notes
This command specifies time increments for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis. The time step size remains
constant for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis. You can use a smaller time step within each field analysis. This
is called subcycling. Use the DELTIM and AUTOTS commands to subcycle a structural, thermal, or electromagnetic analysis. Use the FLDATA4 command to subcycle a fluid analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Time Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Time Ctrl
MFELEM, FNUMB, ITYPE1, ITYPE2, ITYPE3, ITYPE4, ITYPE5, ITYPE6, ITYPE7, ITYPE8, ITYPE9, ITYPE10
Defines a field by grouping element types.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB
Field number for a group of element types.
ITYPE1, ITYPE2, ITYPE3, ITYPE4, ITYPE5, ITYPE6, ITYPE7, ITYPE8, ITYPE9, ITYPE10
Element types defined by the ET command.
Notes
You can define up to ten element types per field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3765
MFEM
Define only element types that contain elements in the field. Do not include MESH200 because it is a meshonly element that does not contribute to the solution.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Define>Define
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Define>Define
MFEM, FNUMB, ITYPE1, ITYPE2, ITYPE3, ITYPE4, ITYPE5, ITYPE6, ITYPE7, ITYPE8, ITYPE9, ITYPE10
Add more element types to a previously defined field number.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB
Existing field number defined by the MFELEM command.
ITYPE1, ITYPE2, ITYPE3, ITYPE4, ITYPE5, ITYPE6, ITYPE7, ITYPE8, ITYPE9, ITYPE10
Element types defined by the ET command.
Notes
You can add up to ten element types per MFEM command, but the total cannot exceed 50. This command should
not be used after an initial solution.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Define>Add elems
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Define>Add elems
MFEXTER, FNUMB1, FNUMB2, FNUMB3, FNUMB4, FNUMB5, FNUMB6, FNUMB7, FNUMB8, FNUMB9, FNUMB10,
FNUMB11, FNUMB12, FNUMB13, FNUMB14, FNUMB15, FNUMB16, FNUMB17, FNUMB18, FNUMB19, FNUMB20
Defines external fields for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB1, FNUMB2, FNUMB3, FNUMB4, FNUMB5, FNUMB6, FNUMB7, FNUMB8, FNUMB9, FNUMB10, FNUMB11, FNUMB12,
FNUMB13, FNUMB14, FNUMB15, FNUMB16, FNUMB17, FNUMB18, FNUMB19, FNUMB20
External field numbers defined by the MFELEM command.
3766
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFFNAME
Notes
This command specifies external field numbers to be used for load transfer in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
Use the MFIMPORT command to import the external fields.
Use the MFELEM command to specify external field numbers. Use the MFORDER command to specify the
solution order for the external fields.
You can define a maximum of 20 fields.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Setup>External
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Setup>External
MFFNAME, FNUMB, Fname
Specifies a file name for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB
Field number specified by the MFELEM command.
Fname
File name. Defaults to field FNUMB.
Notes
All files created for the field will have this file name with the appropriate extensions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Define>Define
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Define>Define
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3767
MFIMPORT
MFIMPORT, FNUMB, Option, Fname, Ext
Imports a new field into a current ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB
Field number specified by the MFELEM command.
Option
Selects data to read.
DB
Reads a CDB file. The CDB file name and extension are specified by Fname and Ext.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to CDB if Fname is blank.
Notes
The field to be imported should be written to a CDB file (CDWRITE command). This file is read into the database,
offsetting all existing element type numbers, node numbers, etc. in order to accommodate the imported field.
(See the NUMOFF command for information on offset capabilities.) It then updates all of the previously issued
MFxx commands to the new element type numbers. A new field is created using the specified field number,
which must not currently exist. If there are no ANSYS Multi-field solver command files written for the existing
fields in the database, one will be written for each field with the default name (see the MFCMMAND command).
A MFCMMAND will be issued for the imported field as well.
Repeat the MFIMPORT command to import additional fields. If you are importing a FLOTRAN fluid field along
with other fields, you must import the FLOTRAN fluid field last.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Import
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Import
3768
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFITER
MFINTER, Option
Specifies the interface load transfer interpolation option for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Interface load transfer option:
CONS
Conservative formulation for load transfer.
NONC
Nonconservative formulation for load transfer (default).
Notes
For more information on conservative and nonconservative load transfer, see Load Transfer in the ANSYS CoupledField Analysis Guide.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
MFITER, ITER
Sets the maximum number of stagger iterations for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
ITER
Maximum number of iterations. Defaults to 10.
Notes
The maximum number of stagger iterations applies to each time step in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Stagger>Max Iterations
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Stagger>Max Iterations
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3769
MFLIST
MFLIST, Option, Value
Lists the settings for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
ALL
Lists all ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis options.
SOLU
Lists all solution-related ANSYS Multi-field solver options.
FIELD
Lists all ANSYS Multi-field solver options related to the specified field number.
SINT
Lists all surface interface information for the specified surface interface number.
VINT
Lists all volumetric interface information for the specified volumetric interface number.
Value
Use only for Option = FIELD, SINT, or VINT.
Option = FIELD lists all ANSYS Multi-field solver options for the field number Value. Value defaults to 0,
which lists information for all fields.
Option = SINT lists all surface interface information for the interface number Value. Value defaults to 0,
which lists information for all surface interfaces.
Option = VINT lists all volumetric interface information for interface number Value. Value defaults to 0,
which lists information for all volumetric interfaces.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Status
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Status
MFMAP, Lab1, Lab2, Filename, Opt
Calculates, saves, resumes, or deletes mapping data in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab1
Operation label:
3770
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFMAP
CALC
Calculate mapping data and keep it in memory (default).
SAVE
Calculate mapping data, keep it in memory, and save it to a file. (If MFMAP,CALC or MFMAP,RESU have
been issued, just save it to a file.)
RESU
Resume the mapping from a file and keep it in memory.
DELE
Free the mapping memory.
Lab2
Applicable mapping label:
ALL
Surface and volumetric mapping.
SURF
Surface mapping only.
VOLU
Volumetric mapping only.
Filename
The file name for a mapping data file (filename.sur for surface mapping and filename.vol for volumetric
mapping). Defaults to Jobname. Applies to the commands MFMAP,SAVE and MFMAP,RESU only.
Opt
File format:
BINA
Binary file (default).
ASCI
ASCII file.
Notes
This command calculates, saves, resumes, or deletes mapping data. It defaults to calculating the mapping data.
If MFMAP has not been previously issued, the mapping data will be automatically calculated during the solution
process. On the other hand, the ANSYS Multi-field solver solver will use previously created mapping data. Resumed
mapping files must have load transfer specifications that are consistent with those of the current MFSURFACE
and MFVOLUME commands and the ANSYS database.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Interface>Mapping
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Interface>Mapping
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3771
MFORDER
MFORDER, FNUMB1, FNUMB2, FNUMB3, FNUMB4, FNUMB5, FNUMB6, FNUMB7, FNUMB8, FNUMB9, FNUMB10,
FNUMB11, FNUMB12, FNUMB13, FNUMB14, FNUMB15, FNUMB16, FNUMB17, FNUMB18, FNUMB19, FNUMB20
Specifies field solution order for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FNUMB1, FNUMB2, FNUMB3, FNUMB4, FNUMB5, FNUMB6, FNUMB7, FNUMB8, FNUMB9, FNUMB10, FNUMB11, FNUMB12,
FNUMB13, FNUMB14, FNUMB15, FNUMB16, FNUMB17, FNUMB18, FNUMB19, FNUMB20
Field numbers defined by the MFELEM command .
Notes
You can define up to twenty fields in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Order
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Order
MFOUTPUT, FREQ
Specifies results file output frequency for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
FREQ
N
Write solution every Nth (and the last) time step. Defaults to 1, for every time step.
Notes
A MFOUTPUT setting overrides any other output frequency setting (OUTRES). To select the solution items, use
the OUTRES command.
FLOTRAN ignores a MFOUTPUT setting. You should write out every time step in a FLOTRAN analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Frequency
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Frequency
3772
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFRSTART
MFRELAX, Lab, VALUE
Sets relaxation values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
Valid labels:
Force label: FORC
Displacement label: DISP
Temperature label: TEMP
Heat flux label: HFLU
Heat generation label: HGEN
If Lab = ALL, MFRELAX applies the relaxation value to all variables.
VALUE
Relaxation value. Defaults to 0.5 for all labels.
Notes
MFRELAX sets relaxation values for the load transfer variables at a surface or volume interface.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Stagger>Relaxation
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Stagger>Relaxation
MFRSTART, TIME
Specifies a restart time for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TIME
Restart time. Defaults to 0 (new analysis).
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Time Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Time Ctrl
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3773
MFSURFACE
MFSURFACE, INUMB, FNUMB1, Label, FNUMB2
Defines a surface load transfer for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
INUMB
Interface number for load transfer. The interface number corresponds to the interface number specified by
the surface flag FSIN (SFxxcommands).
FNUMB1
Field number of sending field.
Label
Valid surface load labels:
Force label: FORC
Displacement label: DISP
Temperature label: TEMP
Heat flux label: HFLU
FNUMB2
Field number for receiving field.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Interface>Surface
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Interface>Surface
MFTIME, TIME
Sets end time for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TIME
End time of an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis. Defaults to 1.
Notes
A MFTIME setting overrides any other end time setting (TIME or FLDATA4).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3774
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MFVOLUME
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Time Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Time Ctrl
MFTOL, Key, Value
Turns normal distance checking on for surface mapping in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Normal distance key
ON
Activates normal distance checking.
OFF
Deactivates normal distance checking (default).
Value
The normal distance tolerance for surface or volumetric mapping. Defaults to 1.0e-6.
Notes
For a dissimilar mesh interface, the nodes of one mesh are mapped to the local coordinates of an element in the
other mesh. When normal distance checking is activated, the mapping tool checks the normal distance from the
node to the nearest element. The node is considered improperly mapped if the normal distance exceeds the
tolerance value. The mapping tool creates a component to graphically display the improperly mapped nodes.
See Section 4.2.2.2: Mapping Diagnostics in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for more information.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Setup>Global
MFVOLUME, INUMB, FNUMB1, Label, FNUMB2
Defines a volume load transfer for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
SOLUTION: Multi-field
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
INUMB
Interface number for load transfer. The interface number corresponds to the interface number specified by
the volume flag FVIN (BFE command).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3775
MGEN
FNUMB1
Field number of sending field.
Label
Valid volume load labels:
Force label: FORC
Displacement label: DISP
Temperature label: TEMP
Heat generation: HGEN
FNUMB2
Field number for receiving field.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>MultiField Set Up>Interface>Volume
Main Menu>Solution>MultiField Set Up>Interface>Volume
MGEN, ITIME, INC, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Generates additional MDOF from a previously defined set.
SOLUTION: Master DOF
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ITIME, INC
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all nodes in the set by INC each time after the
first. ITIME must be > 1 for generation to occur. All previously defined master degree of freedom directions
are included in the set. A component name may also be substituted for ITIME.
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Generate master degrees of freedom from set beginning with NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps
of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1 = ALL, NODE2 and NINC are ignored and set is all selected nodes [NSEL]. If
NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Notes
Generates additional master degrees of freedom from a previously defined set. If used in SOLUTION, this command
is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Master DOFs>User Selected>Copy
Main Menu>Solution>Master DOFs>User Selected>Copy
3776
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MLIST
MITER, NEL1, NEL2, RAD, NDIV, ESTRT, EINC
Defines a mitered bend in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NEL1, NEL2
Element numbers of the two intersecting straight pipes. Defaults to the last two straight pipe elements
nearest the intersection of the last two runs.
RAD
Bend radius. If LR, use long radius standard (1.5 x OD) (default). If SR, use short radius standard (1.0 x OD).
NDIV
Number of divisions (elements) along bend (defaults to 2). A node is generated at the end of each division.
ESTRT
Number to be assigned to first element of bend (defaults to MAXEL + 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).
Notes
Defines a mitered bend of piecewise straight pipe elements (PIPE16) in place of the intersection of two previously
defined straight pipe elements [RUN]. This command is similar to the BEND command except that straight pipe
elements are used to form the bend instead of curved (elbow) elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Miter
MLIST, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Lists the MDOF of freedom.
SOLUTION: Master DOF
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
List master degrees of freedom from NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults toNODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If
NODE1 = ALL (default), NODE2 and NINC are ignored and masters for all selected nodes [NSEL] are listed. If
NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Lists the master degrees of freedom. Master degrees of freedom generated from the TOTAL command cannot
be listed until after the first load step.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Master DOFs>User Selected>List All
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3777
MMF
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Master DOFs>User Selected>List Picked
Main Menu>Solution>Master DOFs>User Selected>List All
Main Menu>Solution>Master DOFs>User Selected>List Picked
Utility Menu>List>Other>Master DOF>At All Nodes
Utility Menu>List>Other>Master DOF>At Picked Nodes
MMF
Calculates the magnetomotive force along a path.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
MMF invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates the magnetomotive force (mmf) along a predefined path [PATH].
It is valid for both 2-D and 3-D magnetic field analyses. The calculated mmf value is stored in the parameter MMF.
A closed path [PATH], passing through the magnetic circuit for which mmf is to be calculated, must be defined
before this command is issued. A counterclockwise ordering of points on the PPATH command will yield the
correct sign on the mmf. The mmf is based on Ampere's Law. The macro makes use of calculated values of field
intensity (H), and uses path operations for the calculations. All path items are cleared upon completion. The MMF
macro sets the "ACCURATE" mapping method and "MAT" discontinuity option of the PMAP command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Path Based>MMF
MODE, MODE, ISYM
Specifies the harmonic loading term for this load step.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
MODE
Number of harmonic waves around circumference for this harmonic loading term (defaults to 0).
ISYM
Symmetry condition for this harmonic loading term (not used when MODE = 0):
1
Symmetric (UX, UY, ROTZ, TEMP use cosine terms; UZ uses sine term) (default).
1
Antisymmetric (UX, UY, ROTZ, temp use sine terms; UZ uses cosine term).
Command Default
MODE = 0, ISYM = 1.
3778
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MODIFY
Notes
Used with axisymmetric elements having nonaxisymmetric loading capability (e.g., PLANE25, SHELL61, FLUID81,
etc.). For analysis types ANTYPE,MODAL, HARMIC, TRANS, and SUBSTR, the term must be defined in the first
load step and may not be changed in succeeding load steps.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>For Harmonic Ele
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>For Harmonic Ele
MODIFY, SET, LSTEP, ITER, CUMIT, TIME, Ktitle
Changes the listed values of the data in a set.
AUX3: Results Files
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SET
Set of data in results file to be modified.
LSTEP
The new load step number.
ITER
The new load substep number.
CUMIT
The new cumulative iteration.
TIME
The new time/frequency value.
Ktitle
Indicates if the set title should be modified.
0
Keep the original title.
1
Change the title to the title specified with the most current /TITLE command.
Notes
Use this command to change the listed values in a data set in a results file. Using this command does not change
any actual model data; it affects only the values listed in the results file.
For example, if you start with the following results file:
SET
TIME/FREQ
1
1.0000
first load set
LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
1
CUMULATIVE
1
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3779
MODMSH
2
2.0000
second load set
3
3.0000
third load set
4
4.0000
fourth load set
and you then issue the following commands:
/title, modified title for set number 3
modify,3,5,2,5,4.5,1
The modified results file would look like this:
SET
TIME/FREQ
1
1.0000
first load set
LOAD STEP
1
2
2.0000
second load set
SUBSTEP
1
CUMULATIVE
1
3
4.5000
5
modified title for set number 3
4
4.0000
fourth load set
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Other>For Harmonic Ele
Main Menu>Solution>Other>For Harmonic Ele
MODMSH, Lab
Controls the relationship of the solid model and the FE model.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Relationship key:
STAT
Gives status of command (default). This applies only to the CHECK option (no status is provided for the
DETACH option).
NOCHECK
Deactivates the checking of the solid model and the finite element model. Allows elements and nodes
generated with the mesh commands to be modified directly (EMODIF, NMODIF, EDELE, NDELE, etc.).
Also deactivates solid model hierarchical checking so that areas attached to volumes may be deleted
etc.
Warning: Use of this command allows the solid model data base to be corrupted
by subsequent operations.
3780
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MODOPT
CHECK
Reactivates future checking of the solid model.
DETACH
Releases all associativity between the current solid model and finite element model. ANSYS deletes any
element attributes that were assigned to the affected solid model entities through default attributes
(that is, through the TYPE, REAL, MAT, SECNUM, and ESYS command settings and a subsequent
meshing operation). However, attributes that were assigned directly to the solid model entities (via the
KATT, LATT, AATT, and VATT commands) are not deleted.
Caution: Once used it is not possible to select or define finite element model items in terms of
the detached solid model or to clear the mesh.
Notes
Affects the relationship of the solid model (keypoints, lines, areas, volumes) and the finite element model (nodes,
elements, and boundary conditions).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Checking Ctrls>Model Checking
MODOPT, Method, NMODE, FREQB, FREQE, Cpxmod/PRMODE, Nrmkey
Specifies modal analysis options.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> VT PR <> EH <> PP ED
Method
Mode extraction method to be used for the modal analysis.
LANB
Block Lanczos (default)
SUBSP
Subspace iteration
REDUC
Householder (reduced)
UNSYM
Unsymmetric matrix (cannot be followed by a subsequent spectrum analysis).
DAMP
Damped system (cannot be followed by a subsequent spectrum analysis).
QRDAMP
Damped system using QR algorithm (cannot be followed by a subsequent spectrum analysis).
SX
Solve with the Variational Technology.
NMODE
The number of modes to extract. The value can depend on the value supplied for Method. Defaults to the
number of master DOFs when Method = REDUC. For the other methods, NMODE has no default and must be
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3781
MODOPT
specified. When Method = SUBSP, only half of the total number of DOFs can be extracted (that is, if the
model contains 100 DOFs, only 50 modes are extracted even if NMODE is set to 100).
Recommendation: When Method = REDUC, NMODE should be less than half of the number of master DOFs.
When Method = SUBSP, NMODE should be less than half of the total number of DOFs.
FREQB
The beginning, or lower end, of the frequency range of interest.
For Method = LANB, SUBSP, UNSYM, DAMP, and QRDAMP, FREQB also represents the first shift point for the
eigenvalue iterations. If values for SUBSP, UNSYM, or DAMP are zero or blank, the default value is -1.0. Eigenvalue extraction is most accurate near the shift point; multiple shift points are used in the LANB, SUBSP, and
QRDAMP methods. For SUBSP method, and for LANB, UNSYM, DAMP, and QRDAMP methods with a positive
FREQB, eigenvalues are output beginning at the shift point and increase in magnitude. For UNSYM and DAMP
methods with a negative FREQB value, eigenvalues are output beginning at zero magnitude and increase.
FREQE
The ending, or upper end, of the frequency range of interest. The default is 1e8 for Method = LANB, SUBSP,
and QRDAMP. The default for the other methods is to calculate all modes, regardless of their maximum frequency.
Cpxmod/PRMODE
CPXMOD
ON
Calculate complex eigenmodes. Valid only when Method = QRDAMP.
OFF
Do not calculate complex eigenmodes.
PRMODE
The number of reduced modes to print. Valid only when Method = REDUC.
Nrmkey
Mode shape normalization key:
OFF
Normalize the mode shapes to the mass matrix (default).
ON
Normalize the mode shapes to unity instead of to the mass matrix. If a subsequent spectrum or mode
superposition analysis is planned, the mode shapes should be normalized to the mass matrix (Nrmkey
= OFF).
Notes
Specifies modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL) options. Additional options used only for subspace iteration eigenvalue
extraction are specified by SUBOPT. Specifying the subspace option along with the PCG solver [EQSLV,PCG] is
the same as choosing the Power Dynamics option on the GUI. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only
within the first load step.
The Block Lanczos method, which is the default, is strongly recommended for high-frequency magnetic eigenvalue
problems. The initial frequency guess is not critical. The ratio of FREQE to FREQB can be up to 1 x 106.
3782
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MONITOR
If you specify complex eigenmode calculation (CPXMOD = ON), mode shape unit normalization to unity (Nrmkey
= ON) becomes the default behavior .
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Product Restrictions:
The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods (DAMP, UNSYM, QRDAMP) are not available in the ANSYS
Professional program. Also, for modal analyses using Variational Technology, Method = SX and Nrmkey = OFF
are the only options.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Solve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
MONITOR, VAR, Node, Lab
Controls contents of three variable fields in nonlinear solution monitor file.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
VAR
One of three variable field numbers in the monitor file whose contents can be specified by the Lab field.
Valid arguments are integers 1, 2, or 3. See Notes section for default values.
Node
The node number for which information is monitored in the specified VAR field. In the GUI, if Node = P,
graphical picking is enabled. If blank, the monitor file lists the maximum value of the specified quantity (Lab
field) for the entire structure.
Lab
The solution quantity to be monitored in the specified VAR field. Valid labels for solution quantities are UX,
UY, and UZ (displacements); ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ (rotations); and TEMP (temperature). Valid labels for reaction force are FX, FY, and FZ (structural force) and MX, MY, and MZ (structural moment). Valid label for heat
flow rate is HEAT. For defaults see the Notes section.
Notes
This command is only active when SOLCONTROL,ON.
The monitor file is an ASCII file which is automatically created and saved when SOLCONTROL is active (ON). The
monitor file always has an extension of .mntr, and takes its file name from the specified Jobname. If no Jobname
is specified, the file name defaults to file.
You must issue this command once for each solution quantity you want to monitor at a specified node at each
load step. You cannot monitor a reaction force during a linear analysis. The variable field contents can be redefined
at each load step by reissuing the command. The monitored quantities are appended to the file for each load
step.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3783
MONITOR
The following example shows the format of a monitor file. Note that the file only records the solution substep
history when a substep is convergent.
SOLUTION HISTORY INFORMATION FOR JOB: file.mntr
ANSYS Release 9.0
10:12:43
LOAD SUB- NO.
NO. TOTL INCREMENT
STEP STEP ATTMP ITER ITER TIME/LFACT
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
2
2
6
6
3
3
4
4
5
7
5
6
3
3
3
4
6
5
7
6
4
4
3
5
7
9
15
26
29
32
36
40
45
52
57
63
72
75
78
82
88
93
100
106
116
120
0.25000
0.25000
0.37500
0.12500
0.20000E-03
0.10000E-03
0.10000E-03
0.15000E-03
0.22500E-03
0.33750E-03
0.50625E-03
0.75938E-03
0.75938E-03
0.11391E-02
0.76887E-03
0.76887E-03
0.11533E-02
0.17300E-02
0.25949E-02
0.25949E-02
0.38924E-02
0.38924E-02
0.26274E-02
0.26274E-02
TOTAL
TIME/LFACT
0.25000
0.50000
0.87500
1.0000
1.0002
1.0003
1.0004
1.0006
1.0008
1.0011
1.0016
1.0024
1.0031
1.0043
1.0050
1.0058
1.0070
1.0087
1.0113
1.0139
1.0178
1.0217
1.0243
1.0269
05/15/2000
VARIAB 1
MONITOR
UZ
1.4145
2.8283
4.9467
5.6519
4.2198
4.4849
4.7531
5.0696
5.4428
5.8928
6.4454
7.1375
7.7422
8.5588
9.0721
9.5648
10.277
11.306
12.802
14.273
16.477
18.704
20.229
21.777
VARIAB 2
MONITOR
MZ
0.19076E-06
0.92989E-06
0.33342E-05
0.16826E-05
515.23
593.03
611.45
621.83
628.42
632.78
635.62
637.22
637.66
637.42
636.96
636.35
635.25
633.37
630.21
626.81
621.42
615.77
611.83
607.80
VARIAB 3
MONITOR
MxPl
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
0.78886E-30
The following details the contents of the various fields in the monitor file:
LOAD STEP
The current load step number.
SUBSTEP
The current substep (time step) number.
NO. ATTEMPT
The number of attempts made in solving the current substep. This number is equal to the number of failed
attempts (bisections) plus one (the successful attempt).
NO. ITER
The number of iterations used by the last successful attempt.
TOTL. ITER
Total cumulative number of iterations (including each iteration used by a bisection).
INCREMENT
TIME/LFACT
Time or load factor increments for the current substep.
TOTAL TIME/LFACT
Total time (or load factor) for the last successful attempt in the current substep.
VARIAB 1
Variable field 1. In this example, the field is reporting the UZ value. By default, this field lists the CPU time
used up to (but not including) the current substep.
3784
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
*MOONEY
VARIAB 2
Variable field 2. In this example, the field is reporting the MZ value. By default, this field lists the maximum
displacement in the entire structure.
VARIAB 3
Variable field 3. By default (and in the example), this field reports the maximum equivalent plastic strain in
the entire structure.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Monitor
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Monitor
*MOONEY, STRAIN, STRESS, --, CONST, CALC, SORTSN, SORTSS, Fname, Ext
Calculates Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic constants from test data.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
STRAIN
Name of the array parameter containing the laboratory strain data. You must have previously filled this array
with engineering strain values (no other measure of strain is valid) before you execute *MOONEY. If Uniaxial
data (tension or compression) are to be used, they must be placed in the first column of this array. If Equibiaxial data (tension or compression) are to be used, they must be placed in the second column of this array.
If Shear data are to be used, they must be placed in the third column of this array. If any test type is not used,
the corresponding column of the STRAIN array should be left blank.
STRESS
Name of the array parameter containing the laboratory stress data. You must have previously filled the
STRESS array with engineering stress values (no other measure of stress is valid) before you execute *MOONEY.
The stress values must be placed in the STRESS array in locations corresponding to the locations of the
companion strain values in the STRAIN array.
--
Unused field
CONST
Name of the array parameter vector to which the hyperelastic material constants will be written. The CONST
array must have been previously defined [*DIM] to have a dimension of either 2, 5, or 9 (corresponding to
a two-term, five-term, or nine-term Mooney-Rivlin material model). Using any dimension other than 2, 5, or
9 for the CONST vector array will cause an error message to be generated.
CALC
Name of the array parameter vector in which calculated engineering stress values determined from the
Mooney-Rivlin constants will be placed. For this and the following two parameters (SORTSN, SORTSS), column
1 contains uniaxial data, column 2 contains equibiaxial data, and column 3 contains shear data.
SORTSN
Name of the array parameter vector in which the sorted experimental strain data will be placed.
SORTSS
Name of the array parameter vector in which the sorted laboratory test data will be placed.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3785
MOPT
Fname
Text file name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory) to which the determined
constants will be written (in the form of TBDATA commands). If you do not specify a directory path, it will
default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to TB if Fname is blank.
Notes
Note that the use of the *MOONEY command for fitting data to the Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic model is discouraged in favor of the general curve fitting method provided by the TBFT command. SeeChapter 9, Material Curve
Fitting in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide for details.
For *MOONEY, the array parameters STRAIN, STRESS, CALC, SORTSN, and SORTSS must have been previously
defined [*DIM] to have dimensions Nx3, whereN is the maximum number of data points in any one of the three
basic test types (uniaxial, equibiaxial, and planar or pure shear).
*MOONEY calculates the Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic material constants from laboratory stress-strain test data.
Once the program determines these constants, it writes them to three places: to the database (in memory), to
the array parameter CONST, and to a text file (in the form of TBDATA commands). You can use the *EVAL command
to check the quality of the resulting material properties. You must have previously dimensioned [*DIM] all array
parameters used by *MOONEY, and you must also have set LAB = MOONEY and TBOPT = 1 on the TB command,
before you execute *MOONEY.
Up to three different types of laboratory stress-strain tests can be used (in any combination):
Uniaxial (tension or compression)
Equibiaxial (tension or compression)
Shear (Planar Tension or Planar Compression)
The *MOONEY command cannot be used with the Mooney-Rivlin material model for explicit dynamic analysis
in ANSYS LS-DYNA. To use experimental Mooney-Rivlin data for an explicit dynamic analysis, use TBOPT = 2 on
the TB command (see Nonlinear Elastic Models in the ANSYS/LS-DYNA User's Guide for more details).
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
MOPT, Lab, Value
Specifies meshing options.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Meshing option to be specified (dictates the meaning of Value):
3786
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MOPT
AORDER
Mesh by ascending area size order. Set Value to ON to mesh smaller areas first. Using this results in finer
meshes in critical areas for volume meshes; this can be used for cases where SMRTSIZE does not mesh
as needed. Default is OFF.
EXPND
Area mesh expansion (or contraction) option. (This option is the same as SMRTSIZE,,,EXPND.) This option
is used to size internal elements in an area based on the size of the elements on the area's boundaries.
Value is the expansion (or contraction) factor. For example, issuing MOPT,EXPND,2 before meshing an
area will allow a mesh with elements that are approximately twice as large in the interior of an area as
they are on the boundary. If Value is less than 1, a mesh with smaller elements on the interior of the
area will be allowed. Value for this option should be greater than 0.5 but less than 4. Value defaults to
1, which does not allow expansion or contraction of internal element sizes (except when using AESIZE
sizing). If Value = 0, the default value of 1 will be used. The actual size of the internal elements will also
depend on the TRANS option, or upon AESIZE or ESIZE sizing, if used.
TETEXPND
Tet-mesh expansion (or contraction) option. This option is used to size internal elements in a volume
based on the size of the elements on the volume's boundaries. Value is the expansion (or contraction)
factor. For example, issuing MOPT,TETEXPND,2 before meshing a volume will allow a mesh with elements
that are approximately twice as large in the interior of the volume as they are on the boundary. If Value
is less than 1, a mesh with smaller elements on the interior of the volume will be allowed. Value for this
option should be greater than 0.1 but less than 3. Value defaults to 1, which does not allow expansion
or contraction of internal element sizes. If Value = 0, the default value of 1 will be used. If Value is
greater than 2, mesher robustness may be affected. The TETEXPND option is supported for both the
VMESH and FVMESH commands. Tet-mesh expansion is the only mesh control supported by FVMESH.
TRANS
Mesh transition option. (This option is the same as SMRTSIZE,,,,TRANS.) This option is used to control
how rapidly elements are permitted to change in size from the boundary to the interior of an area. Value
is the transitioning factor. Value defaults to 2.0, which permits elements to approximately double in
size as they approach the interior of the area. (If Value = 0, the default value of 2 will be used.) Value
must be greater than 1 and, for best results, should be less than 4. The actual size of the internal elements
will also depend on the EXPND option, or upon AESIZE or ESIZE sizing, if used.
AMESH
Triangle surface meshing option. Valid inputs for Value are:
DEFAULT
Let ANSYS choose which triangle mesher to use. In most cases, ANSYS will choose the main triangle
mesher, which is the Riemann space mesher. If the chosen mesher fails for any reason, ANSYS invokes
the alternate mesher and retries the meshing operation.
MAIN
ANSYS uses the main triangle mesher (Riemann space mesher), and it does not invoke an alternate
mesher if the main mesher fails. The Riemann space mesher is well suited for most surfaces.
ALTERNATE
ANSYS uses the first alternate triangle mesher (3-D tri-mesher), and it does not invoke another
mesher if this mesher fails. This option is not recommended due to speed considerations. However,
for surfaces with degeneracies in parametric space, this mesher often provides the best results.
ALT2
ANSYS uses the second alternate triangle mesher (2-D parametric space mesher), and it does not
invoke another mesher if this mesher fails. This option is not recommended for use on surfaces with
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3787
MOPT
degeneracies (spheres, cones, etc.) or poorly parameterized surfaces because poor meshes may
result.
QMESH
Quadrilateral surface meshing option. (Quadrilateral surface meshes will differ based on which triangle
surface mesher is selected. This is true because all free quadrilateral meshing algorithms use a triangle
mesh as a starting point.) Valid inputs for Value are:
DEFAULT
Let ANSYS choose which quadrilateral mesher to use. In most cases, ANSYS will choose the main
quadrilateral mesher, which is the Q-Morph (quad-morphing) mesher. For very coarse meshes, ANSYS
may choose the alternate quadrilateral mesher instead. In most cases, the Q-Morph mesher results
in higher quality elements. If either mesher fails for any reason, ANSYS invokes the other mesher and
retries the meshing operation. (Default.)
MAIN
ANSYS uses the main quadrilateral mesher (Q-Morph mesher), and it does not invoke the alternate
mesher if the main mesher fails.
ALTERNATE
ANSYS uses the alternate quadrilateral mesher, and it does not invoke the Q-Morph mesher if the
alternate mesher fails. To use the alternate quadrilateral mesher, you must also select
MOPT,AMESH,ALTERNATE or MOPT,AMESH,ALT2.
VMESH
Tetrahedral element meshing option. Valid inputs for Value are:
DEFAULT
Let ANSYS choose which tetrahedra mesher to use. ANSYS always uses the alternate tetrahedra
mesher when meshing with p-elements. Otherwise, it usually uses the main tetrahedra mesher.
MAIN
Use the main tetrahedra mesher (Delaunay technique mesher). (GHS3D meshing technology by P.
L. George, INRIA, France.) For most models, this mesher is significantly faster than the alternate
mesher.
ALTERNATE
Use the alternate tetrahedra mesher (advancing front mesher). This mesher is the ANSYS Revision
5.2 tetrahedra mesher. It does not support the generation of a tetrahedral volume mesh from facets
[FVMESH]. If this mesher is selected and you issue the FVMESH command, ANSYS uses the main
tetrahedra mesher to create the mesh from facets and issues a warning message to notify you.
SPLIT
Quad splitting option for non-mapped meshing. If Value = 1, ON, or ERR, quadrilateral elements in violation of shape error limits are split into triangles (default). If Value = 2 or WARN, quadrilateral elements
in violation of either shape error or warning limits are split into triangles. If Value = OFF, splitting does
not occur, regardless of element quality.
LSMO
Line smoothing option. Value can be ON or OFF. If Value = ON, smoothing of nodes on area boundaries
is performed during smoothing step of meshing. During smoothing, node locations are adjusted to
achieve a better mesh. If Value = OFF (default), no smoothing takes place at area boundaries.
CLEAR
This option affects the element and node numbering after clearing a mesh. If Value = ON (default), the
starting node and element numbers will be the lowest available number after the nodes and elements
3788
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MOPT
are cleared. If Value = OFF, the starting node and element numbers are not reset after the clear operation
(which was the default behavior for ANSYS versions prior to Release 5.3).
PYRA
Transitional pyramid elements option. Value can be ON or OFF. If Value = ON (default), ANSYS automatically creates transitional pyramid elements, when possible. Pyramids may be created at the interface of
tetrahedral and hexahedral elements, or directly from quadrilateral elements. For pyramids to be created,
you must also issue the command MSHAPE,1,3D (degenerate 3-D elements). If Value = OFF, ANSYS
does not create transitional pyramid elements.
TIMP
Identifies the level of tetrahedra improvement to be performed when the next free volume meshing
operation is initiated [VMESH, FVMESH]. (For levels 2-5, improvement occurs primarily through the use
of face swapping and node smoothing techniques.) Valid inputs for Value are:
0
Turn off tetrahedra improvement. Although this value can lead to faster tetrahedral mesh creation,
it is not recommended because it often leads to poorly shaped elements and mesh failures.
1
Do the minimal amount of tetrahedra improvement. (Default.) This option is supported by the main
tetrahedra mesher only [MOPT,VMESH,MAIN]. If the alternate tetrahedra mesher
[MOPT,VMESH,ALTERNATE] is invoked with this setting, ANSYS automatically performs tetrahedra
improvement at level 3 instead [MOPT,TIMP,3].
2
Perform the least amount of swapping/smoothing. No improvement occurs if all tetrahedral elements
are within acceptable limits.
3
Perform an intermediate amount of swapping/smoothing. Some improvement is always done.
4
Perform the greatest amount of swapping/smoothing. Meshing takes longer with this level of improvement, but usually results in a better mesh.
5
Perform the greatest amount of swapping/smoothing, plus additional improvement techniques.
This level of improvement usually produces results that are similar to those at level 4, except for very
poor meshes.
6
For linear tetrahedral meshes, this value provides the same level of improvement as MOPT,TIMP,5.
For quadratic tetrahedral meshes, this value provides an additional pass of cleanup. This value is
supported for both the main [MOPT,VMESH,MAIN] and alternate [MOPT,VMESH,ALTERNATE] tetrahedra meshers.
STAT
Display status of MOPT settings. Value is ignored.
DEFA
Set all MOPT options to default values. Value is ignored.
Value
Value, as described for each different Lab above.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3789
MORPH
Notes
See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information on the MOPT command and its options.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesher Opts
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Global>Area Cntrls
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>ManualSize>Global>Volu Cntrls
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Global Meshing
Options
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Solid Model
MORPH, Option
Turns morphing on or off.
PREP7: Morphing
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
ON
Turns on morphing for field elements.
OFF
Turns off morphing for field elements.
Notes
MORPH is applicable to any non-structural field analysis. It activates displacement degrees of freedom for nonstructural elements so that boundary conditions may be placed on the field mesh to constrain the movement
of the non-structural mesh during morphing. It morphs the non-structural mesh using displacements transferred
at the surface interface between the structural field and the non-structural field. The displacements of nonstructural elements are mesh displacements to avoid mesh distortion, but have no physical meaning except at
the interface. MORPH does not support surface, link, or shell elements, or any element shape other than triangles,
quads, tets, and bricks.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Element Morphing
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Element Morphing
3790
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MOVE
MOVE, NODE, KC1, X1, Y1, Z1, KC2, X2, Y2, Z2
Calculates and moves a node to an intersection.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Move this node. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE.
KC1
First coordinate system number. Defaults to 0 (global Cartesian).
X1, Y1, Z1
Input one or two values defining the location of the node in this coordinate system. Input "U" for unknown
value(s) to be calculated and input "E" to use an existing coordinate value. Fields are R1, 1, Z1 for cylindrical,
or R1, 1, 1 for spherical or toroidal.
KC2
Second coordinate system number.
X2, Y2, Z2
Input two or one value(s) defining the location of the node in this coordinate system. Input "U" for unknown
value(s) to be calculated and input "E" to use an existing coordinate value. Fields are R2, 2, Z2 for cylindrical,
or R2, 2, 2 for spherical or toroidal.
Notes
Calculates and moves a node to an intersection location. The node may have been previously defined (at an
approximate location) or left undefined (in which case it is internally defined at the SOURCE location). The actual
location is calculated from the intersection of three surfaces (implied from three coordinate constants in two
different coordinate systems). The three (of six) constants easiest to define should be used. The program will
calculate the remaining three coordinate constants. All arguments, except KC1, must be input. Use the repeat
command [*REPEAT] after the MOVE command to define a line of intersection by repeating the move operation
on all nodes of the line.
Surfaces of constant value are implied by some commands by specifying a single coordinate value. Implied surfaces
are used with various commands [MOVE, KMOVE, NSEL, etc.]. Three surfaces are available with each of the four
coordinate system types. Values or X, Y, or Z may be constant for the Cartesian coordinate system; values of R, ,
or Z for the cylindrical system; and values of R, , for the spherical and toroidal systems. For example, an X value
of 3 represents the Y-Z plane (or surface) at X=3. In addition, the parameters for the cylindrical and spherical
coordinate systems may be adjusted [CS, LOCAL] to form elliptical surfaces. For surfaces in elliptical coordinate
systems, a surface of "constant" radius is defined by the radius value at the X-axis. Surfaces of constant value may
be located in local coordinate systems [LOCAL, CLOCAL, CS, or CSKP] to allow for any orientation.
The intersection calculation is based on an iterative procedure (250 iterations maximum) and a tolerance of 1.0E4. The approximate location of a node should be sufficient to determine a unique intersection if more than one
intersection point is possible. Tangent "intersections" should be avoided. If an intersection is not found, the node
is placed at the last iteration location.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Nodes>To Intersect
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3791
MP
MP, Lab, MAT, C0, C1, C2, C3, C4
Defines a linear material property as a constant or a function of temperature.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Lab
Valid material property label. Applicable labels are listed under "Material Properties" in the input table for
each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See Section 2.4: Linear Material Properties of the ANSYS
Elements Reference for more complete property label definitions:
EX
Elastic moduli (also EY, EZ).
ALPX
Secant coefficients of thermal expansion (also ALPY, ALPZ).
CTEX
Instantaneous coefficients of thermal expansion (also CTEY, CTEZ).
THSX
Thermal strain (also THSY, THSZ).
REFT
Reference temperature. Must be defined as a constant; C1 through C4 are ignored.
PRXY
Major Poisson's ratios (also PRYZ, PRXZ).
NUXY
Minor Poisson's ratios (also NUYZ, NUXZ).
GXY
Shear moduli (also GYZ, GXZ).
DAMP
K matrix multiplier for damping.
Note: If used in an explicit dynamic analysis, the value corresponds to the percentage of damping in the
high frequency domain. For example, 0.1 roughly corresponds to 10% damping in the high frequency
domain.
DMPR
Constant material damping coefficient.
MU
Coefficient of friction.
DENS
Mass density.
C
Specific heat.
ENTH
Enthalpy.
KXX
Thermal conductivities (also KYY, KZZ).
3792
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MP
HF
Convection or film coefficient.
EMIS
Emissivity.
QRATE
Heat generation rate.
VISC
Viscosity.
SONC
Sonic velocity.
RSVX
Electrical resistivities (also RSVY, RSVZ).
PERX
Electric relative permittivities (also PERY, PERZ).
Note If you enter permittivity values less than 1 for SOLID5, PLANE13, or SOLID98, the program
interprets the values as absolute permittivity. Values input for PLANE223, SOLID226, or SOLID227
are always interpreted as relative permittivity.
MURX
Magnetic relative permeabilities (also MURY, MURZ).
MGXX
Magnetic coercive forces (also MGYY, MGZZ).
LSST
Dielectric loss tangent.
SBKX
Seebeck coefficients (also SBKY, SBKZ).
MAT
Material reference number to be associated with the elements (defaults to the current MAT setting [MAT]).
C0
Material property value, or if a property-versus-temperature polynomial is being defined, the constant term
in the polynomial.
C1, C2, C3, C4
Coefficients of the linear, quadratic, cubic, and quartic terms, respectively, in the property-versus-temperature
polynomial. Leave blank (or set to zero) for a constant material property.
Notes
MP defines a linear material property as a constant or in terms of a fourth order polynomial as a function of
temperature. See the TB command for nonlinear material property input. Linear material properties typically
require a single substep for solution, whereas nonlinear material properties require multiple substeps; see Section 2.4: Linear Material Properties of the ANSYS Elements Reference for details.
If the constants C1 - C4 are input, the polynomial
Property = C0 + C1(T) + C2(T)2 + C3(T)3 + C4(T)4
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3793
MPAMOD
is evaluated at discrete temperature points with linear interpolation between points (i.e., piecewise linear representation) and a constant-valued extrapolation beyond the extreme points. The MPTEMP or MPTGEN commands
must be used for second and higher order properties to define appropriate temperature steps. First-order
properties use two discrete points (9999).
A polynomial input is not valid in an explicit dynamic analysis or for Lab = DAMP. C1, C2, C3, and C4 are ignored.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Product Restrictions
In ANSYS without Emag enabled, the MUR_ and MG__ properties are not allowed. In ANSYS Professional, all
structural and thermal properties are allowed except DAMP and MU. In ANSYS Emag, only the RSV_, PER_, MUR_,
and MG__ properties are allowed. The LSST property is available only for products that include ANSYS Emag.
The SBK_ property is only available in ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS PrepPost, and ANSYS ED.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
MPAMOD, MAT, DEFTEMP
Modifies temperature-dependent secant coefficients of thermal expansion.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT
Material number for which the secant coefficients of thermal expansion (SCTE's) are to be modified. Defaults
to 1.
DEFTEMP
Definition temperature at which the existing SCTE-versus-temperature tables were defined. Defaults to zero.
Notes
This command converts temperature-dependent SCTE data (properties ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ) from the definition
temperature (DEFTEMP) to the reference temperature defined by MP,REFT or TREF. If both the MP,REFT and
TREF commands have been issued, the reference temperature defined by the MP,REFT command will be used.
This command does not apply to the instantaneous coefficients of thermal expansion (properties CTEX, CTEY,
CTEZ) or to the thermal strains (properties THSX, THSY, THSZ).
See Section 2.4: Linear Material Properties of the ANSYS Elements Reference and the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for more details.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
3794
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MPCOPY
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Convert ALPx
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Convert ALPx
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Convert ALPx
MPCHG, MAT, ELEM
Changes the material number attribute of an element.
PREP7: Materials
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT
Assign this material number to the element. Material numbers are defined with the material property commands [MP].
ELEM
Element for material change. If ALL, change materials for all selected elements [ESEL].
Notes
Changes the material number of the specified element. Between load steps in SOLUTION, material properties
cannot be changed from linear to nonlinear, or from one nonlinear option to another.
If you change from one MKIN model to another MKIN model, the different MKIN models need to have the same
number of data points. This requirement also applies if you change from one KINH model to another KINH
model, or from one CHABOCHE model to another CHABOCHE model.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Change Mat Num
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Change Mat Num
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Change Mat Num
MPCOPY, --, MATF, MATT
Copies linear material model data from one material reference number to another.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
--
Unused field
MATF
Material reference number from where material property data will be copied.
MATT
Material reference number to where material property data will be copied.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3795
MPDATA
Notes
The MPCOPY command copies linear material properties only, which are all properties defined through the MP
command. If you copy a model that includes both linear and yield behavior constants (for example, a BKIN
model), the MPCOPY and TBCOPY, ALL commands are used together to copy the entire model. All input data
associated with the model is copied, that is, all data defined through the MP and TB commands.
Also, if you copy a material model using the Material Model Interface (Edit> Copy), both the commands MPCOPY
and TBCOPY, ALL are issued, regardless of whether the model includes linear constants only, or if it includes a
combination of linear and yield behavior constants.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
MPDATA, Lab, MAT, STLOC, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Defines property data to be associated with the temperature table.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Lab
Valid property label. Applicable labels are listed under "Material Properties" in the input table for each element
type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. See Section 2.4: Linear Material Properties of the ANSYS Elements Reference
for more complete property label definitions:
EX
Elastic moduli (also EY, EZ).
ALPX
Secant coefficients of thermal expansion (also ALPY, ALPZ). (See also MPAMOD command for adjustment
to reference temperature).
CTEX
Instantaneous coefficients of thermal expansion (also CTEY, CTEZ).
THSX
Thermal strain (also THSY, THSZ).
REFT
Reference temperature (may not be temperature dependent).
PRXY
Major Poisson's ratios (also PRYZ, PRXZ).
NUXY
Minor Poisson's ratios (also NUYZ, NUXZ).
GXY
Shear moduli (also GYZ, GXZ).
3796
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MPDATA
DAMP
K matrix multiplier for damping.
DMPR
Constant material damping coefficient.
MU
Coefficient of friction.
DENS
Mass density.
C
Specific heat.
ENTH
Enthalpy.
KXX
Thermal conductivities (also KYY, KZZ).
HF
Convection or film coefficient.
EMIS
Emissivity.
QRATE
Heat generation rate.
VISC
Viscosity.
SONC
Sonic velocity.
RSVX
Electrical resistivities (also RSVY, RSVZ).
PERX
Electric relative permittivities (also PERY, PERZ).
MURX
Magnetic relative permeabilities (also MURY, MURZ).
MGXX
Magnetic coercive forces (also MGYY, MGZZ).
LSST
Dielectric loss tangent.
SBKX
Seebeck coefficients (also SBKY, SBKZ).
The MPDATA command may also be used to enter temperature dependent properties for fluids in a CFD
analysis with FLOTRAN via FLUID141 and FLUID142. Valid MPDATA labels for a CFD analysis in a non-solid
region are:
DENS
Density of fluid. This is the same as the label used to specify mass density with the FLDATA command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3797
MPDATA
C
Specific heat of fluid. This is equivalent to the SPHT label used to specify conductivity with the FLDATA
command.
KXXX
Thermal conductivity of fluid.
VISC
Viscosity of fluid. This is the same as the label used to specify kinematic velocity with the FLDATA command.
MAT
Material reference number to be associated with the elements (defaults to 1 if you specify zero or no material number).
STLOC
Starting location in table for generating data. For example, if STLOC = 1, data input in the C1 field is the first
constant in the table. If STLOC = 7, data input in the C1 field is the seventh constant in the table, etc. Defaults
to the last location filled + 1.
C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Property data values assigned to six locations starting with STLOC. If a value is already in this location, it is
redefined. A blank (or zero) value for C1 resets the previous value in STLOC to zero. A value of zero can only
be assigned by C1. Blank (or zero) values for C2 to C6 leave the corresponding previous values unchanged.
Notes
Defines a table of property data to be associated with the temperature table. Repeat MPDATA command for
additional values (100 maximum). Temperatures must be defined first [MPTEMP]. Also stores assembled property
function table (temperature and data) in virtual space.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Product Restrictions
In ANSYS without Emag enabled, the MUR_ and MG__ properties are not allowed. In ANSYS Professional, all
structural and thermal properties are allowed except DAMP and MU. In ANSYS Emag, only the RSV_, PER_, MUR_,
and MG__ properties are allowed. Only products that include ANSYS Emag can use the LSST property. The SBK_
property is only available in ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS PrepPost, and ANSYS ED.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
3798
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MPDRES
MPDELE, Lab, MAT1, MAT2, INC
Deletes linear material properties.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Material property label (see MP command for valid labels). If ALL, delete properties for all applicable labels.
MAT1, MAT2, INC
Delete materials from MAT1 to MAT2 (defaults to MAT1) in steps of INC (defaults to 1). If MAT1 = ALL, MAT2 and
INC are ignored and the properties for all materials are deleted.
Notes
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
MPDRES, LabF, MATF, LabT, MATT
Reassembles existing material data with the temperature table.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabF
Material property label associated with MATF.
MATF
Material reference number of property to restore from virtual space.
LabT
Material property label associated with MATT (defaults to label associated with MATF).
MATT
Material reference number assigned to generated property (defaults to MATF).
Notes
Restores into the database (from virtual space) a data table previously defined [MP] for a particular property,
assembles data with current database temperature table, and stores back in virtual space as a new property.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Other>Change Mat Props>Modify Temps
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Modify Temps
Main Menu>Solution>Other>Change Mat Props>Modify Temps
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3799
/MPLIB
/MPLIB, R-W_opt, PATH
Sets the default material library read and write paths.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
R-W_opt
Determines what path is being set. Possible values are:
READ
Set the read path.
WRITE
Set the write path.
STAT
Report what read and write paths are currently in use.
PATH
The directory path to be used for material library files.
Notes
The /MPLIB command sets two path strings used in conjunction with the material library feature and the MPREAD
and MPWRITE commands.
For MPREAD, when you use the LIB option and the directory portion of the specification for the material library
file is blank, the command searches for the file in these locations: the current working directory, the user's home
directory, the user-specified material library directory (as defined by the /MPLIB,READ,PATH command), and
/ansys_dir/matlib.
For MPWRITE, when you use the LIB option and the directory portion of the specification for the material library
file is blank, the command writes the material library file to the directory specified by the /MPLIB,WRITE,PATH
command (if that path has been set). If the path has not been set, the default is to write the file to the current
working directory.
The Material Library files supplied with the distribution disks are meant for demonstration purposes only. These
files are not intended for use in customer applications.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Lib
Path Status
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Library>Lib Path Status
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Lib Path Status
3800
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MPPLOT
MPLIST, MAT1, MAT2, INC, Lab, TEVL
Lists linear material properties.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT1, MAT2, INC
List materials from MAT1 to MAT2 (defaults to MAT1) in steps of INC (defaults to 1). If MAT1= ALL (default),
MAT2 and INC are ignored and properties for all material numbers are listed.
Lab
Material property label (see the MP command for labels). If ALL (or blank), list properties for all labels. If EVLT,
list properties for all labels evaluated at TEVL.
TEVL
Evaluation temperature for Lab = EVLT listing (defaults to BFUNIF).
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Properties>All Materials
Utility Menu>List>Properties>All Matls, All Temps
Utility Menu>List>Properties>All Matls, Specified Temp
Utility Menu>List>Properties>Specified Matl, All Temps
MPPLOT, Lab, MAT, TMIN, TMAX, PMIN, PMAX
Plots linear material properties as a function of temperature.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Linear material property label (EX, EY, etc.) [MP].
MAT
Material reference number. Defaults to 1.
TMIN
Minimum abscissa value to be displayed.
TMAX
Maximum abscissa value.
PMIN
Minimum property (ordinate) value to be displayed.
PMAX
Maximum property value.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3801
MPREAD
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Materials
MPREAD, Fname, Ext, --, LIB
Reads a file containing material properties.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do not specify the LIB
option, the default directory is the current working directory. If you specify the LIB option, the default is the
following search path: the current working directory, the user's home directory, MPLIB_DIR (as specified by
the /MPLIB,READ,PATH command) and /ansys_dir/matlib (as defined by installation). If you use the default
for your directory, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
If you omit the default extension is MP. extension is units_MPL, where units is the system of units currently
in use. (See the description of the /UNITS command.) For example, if /UNITS is set to SI, the extension defaults
to SI_MPL.
--
Unused field.
LIB
Reads material library files previously written with the MPWRITE command. (See the description of the LIB
option for the MPWRITE command.) The only allowed value for LIB is LIB.
The LIB field indicates that the specified file was written by MPWRITE using the LIB option, and that the file
is consistent with the material library file format. When the MPREAD command executes, the ANSYS program
reads material properties defined in the specified file into the current ANSYS working database. The currently
selected material, as defined by the MAT command (MAT,MAT), determines the material number used when
reading the material properties. The LIB option for MPREAD and MPWRITE supports storing and retrieving
both linear and nonlinear properties.
Notes
Material properties written to a file without the LIB option do not support nonlinear properties. Also, properties
written to a file without the LIB option are restored in the same material number as originally defined. To avoid
errors, use MPREAD with the LIB option only when reading files written using MPWRITE with the LIB option.
If you omit the LIB option for MPREAD, this command supports only linear properties.
3802
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MPRINT
Material numbers are hardcoded. If you write a material file without specifying the LIB option, then read that file
in using the MPREAD command with the LIB option, the ANSYS program will not write the file to a new material
number. Instead, it will write the file to the "old" material number (the number specified on the MPWRITE command that created the file.)
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Export
Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Import
Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Select
Units
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Read from File
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Library>Export Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Library>Import Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Library>Select Units
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Read from File
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Export Library
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Import Library
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Select Units
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Read from File
MPRINT, KEY
Specifies that radiation matrices are to be printed.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
KEY
Print key:
0
Do not print matrices.
1
Print matrices.
Command Default
Matrices are not printed.
Notes
Specifies that the element and node radiation matrices are to be printed when the WRITE command is issued.
If KEY = 1, form factor information for each element will also be printed.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3803
MPTEMP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Matrix Method>Write Matrix
MPTEMP, STLOC, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6
Defines a temperature table for material properties.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
STLOC
Starting location in table for entering temperatures. For example, if STLOC = 1, data input in the T1 field applies
to the first constant in the table. If STLOC = 7, data input in the T1 field applies to the seventh constant in
the table, etc. Defaults to the last location filled + 1.
T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6
Temperatures assigned to six locations starting with STLOC. If a value is already in this location, it will be redefined. A blank (or zero) value for T1 resets the previous value in STLOC to zero. A value of zero can only be
assigned by T1. Blank (or zero) values for T2 to T6 leave the corresponding previous values unchanged.
Command Default
No temperature table defined (i.e., properties must be defined as a constant or linear function of temperature
with the MP command).
Notes
Defines a temperature table to be associated with the property data table [MPDATA]. These temperatures are
also used for polynomial property evaluation, if defined [MP]. Temperatures must be defined in non-descending
order. Issue MATER $ STAT to list the current temperature table. Repeat MPTEMP command for additional
temperatures (100 maximum). If all arguments are blank, the temperature table is erased.
For clear definition, the temperature range you define with the MPTEMP command should include the entire
range you'll use in subsequently defined materials. To assist the user in this, the first (and only the first) excursion
out of the temperature range defined by the MPTEMP commands is flagged with a warning message. Similarly,
the reference temperature (TREF or MP,reft commands) should also fall in this same temperature range. If not
and MP,alpx was used, a note will be output. If not, and MP,ctex or MP,thsx was used, an error message will be
output.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
3804
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MPTRES
MPTGEN, STLOC, NUM, TSTRT, TINC
Adds temperatures to the temperature table by generation.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
STLOC
Starting location in table for generating temperatures. Defaults to last location filled + 1.
NUM
Number of temperatures to be generated (1-100).
TSTRT
Temperature assigned to STLOC location.
TINC
Increment previous temperature by TINC and assign to next location until all NUM locations are filled.
Notes
Adds temperatures to the temperature table by generation. May be used in combination (or in place of) the
MPTEMP command.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Other>Change Mat Props>Generate Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Generate Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Other>Change Mat Props>Generate Temp
MPTRES, Lab, MAT
Restores a temperature table previously defined.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Material property label [MP].
MAT
Material reference number.
Notes
Restores into the database (from virtual space) a temperature table previously defined [MP] for a particular
property. The existing temperature table in the database is erased before this operation.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Other>Change Mat Props>Restore Temps
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3805
MPWRITE
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Restore Temps
Main Menu>Solution>Other>Change Mat Props>Restore Temps
MPWRITE, Fname, Ext, --, LIB, MAT
Writes linear material properties in the database to a file (if the LIB option is not specified) or writes both
linear and nonlinear material properties (if LIB is specified) from the database to a file.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do not specify the LIB
option, the default directory is the current working directory. If you specify LIB and you have specified a
material library directory (via the /MPLIB command), that directory is the default. Otherwise, the default is
the current working directory. If you use the default for your directory, you can use all 248 characters for the
file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
If you omit the LIB option, the default extension is MP. If you specify the LIB option, the default extension is
units_MPL, where units is the system of units currently in use. (See the description of the /UNITS command.)
For example, if /UNITS is set to BIN, the extension defaults to BIN_MPL.
--
Unused field.
LIB
The only value allowed for this field is the string "LIB."
The LIB option indicates that you wish to have properties associated with the material (MAT) written to the
specified material library file using the material library file format. The material library file format is ASCIItext-based ANSYS command input. Certain commands associated with this format have been modified to
interpret the string "_MATL" to mean the currently selected material. This feature makes the material library
file independent of the material number in effect when the file was written; this enables you to restore the
properties into the ANSYS database using the material number of your choice. The LIB option also enables
you to save both linear and nonlinear properties. If you omit the LIB option, you can save linear properties
only.
MAT
Specifies the material to be written to the named material library file. There is no default; you must either specify
a material or omit the MAT argument. Even if you specify a MAT value, the ANSYS program ignores it if the LIB
argument is not specified.
Notes
Writes linear material properties currently in the database to a file. The file is rewound before and after writing.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
3806
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/MREP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Export
Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Import
Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Select
Units
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Write to File
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Library>Export Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Library>Import Library
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Library>Select Units
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Write to File
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Export Library
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Import Library
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Library>Select Units
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Write to File
/MREP, NAME, ARG1, ARG2, ARG3, ARG4, ARG5, ARG6, ARG7, ARG8, ARG9, ARG10, ARG11, ARG12, ARG13, ARG14,
ARG15, ARG16, ARG17, ARG18
Enables you to reissue the graphics command macro "name" during a replot or zoom operation.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NAME
The name identifying the macro file or macro block on a macro library file. The name can contain up to eight
characters maximum and must begin with a letter.
ARG1, ARG2, ARG3, ARG4, ARG5, ARG6, ARG7, ARG8, ARG9, ARG10, ARG11, ARG12, ARG13, ARG14, ARG15, ARG16,
ARG17, ARG18
Values to be passed into the file or block.
Notes
This command reissues the graphics command macro "name" during a replot operation [/REPLOT] or a zoom
[ZOOM] operation. The ANSYS program passes the command macro arguments to the replot and zoom feature
for use by the graphics macro. You should place the /MREP command at the end of the graphics command
macro, following the last graphics command within the macro, to enable the replot or zoom feature.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3807
MSADV
MSADV, SPNUM, MTHA
Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term in a species transport equation.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
MTHA
Choice of approach to discretize the advection term:
MSU
Monotone Streamline Upwind (MSU) approach.
SUPG
Streamline Upwind / Petrov-Galerkin (SUPG) approach (default).
COLG
Collocated Galerkin (COLG) approach.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory
Reference for more information on the advection term.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSAVE, Key
Sets the solver memory saving option. This option only applies to the PCG and DPCG solvers.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Key
Activation key:
0 or OFF
Use global assembly for the stiffness matrix of the entire model.
1 or ON
Use an element-by-element approach when possible to save memory during the solution. In this case,
the global stiffness matrix is not assembled; element stiffness is regenerated during iterations.
Command Default
MSAVE,ON for element types SOLID92, SOLID95, SOLID186, and SOLID187 when small strains are assumed
(NLGEOM,OFF) and all of the conditions noted below are met.
3808
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSAVE
MSAVE,OFF for all other element types.
Notes
The memory saving feature only applies to parts of the model using the following element types with linear
material properties:
SOLID45 (brick shapes and KEYOPT(2) = 0 only)
SOLID92
SOLID95
SOLID185 (brick shapes and KEYOPT(2) = 3 only)
SOLID186
SOLID187
The following conditions must also be true:
The PCG or the DPCG solver has been specified.
The analysis is either a static analysis or a modal analysis with the PowerDynamics method chosen. Topological optimization is not supported.
Small strains are assumed (NLGEOM,OFF) (SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187 only).
No prestress effects PSTRES included.
No stress stiffening effects (SSTIF) included when small strains are assumed (NLGEOM,OFF).
All nodes on the supported element types must be defined (i.e., the midside nodes cannot be removed
using the EMID command).
For elements with thermally dependent material properties, MSAVE,ON only applies to elements with
uniform temperatures prescribed.
The default element coordinate system must be used.
MSAVE,ON does not work for SOLID45 or SOLID185 elements when the DPCG solver is chosen.
Other parts of the model that don't meet the above criteria will be solved using global assembly. This command
will result in memory savings of up to 70% over the global assembly approach for the part of the model that
meets the criteria. Depending on the processor speed and manufacturer of the computer on which you are
running ANSYS, the solution time may increase or decrease when this feature is used.
This memory saving feature runs in parallel when multiple processors are used with the /CONFIG command.
The gain in performance with using multiple processors with this feature turned on should be similar to the default
case when this feature is turned off. Performance also improves when using the 2 x 2 x 2 integration option for
SOLID95 elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3809
MSCAP
MSCAP, SPNUM, Capkey, UPPER, LOWER
Activates and controls mass fraction capping for a species.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
Capkey
Key to activate mass fraction capping:
OFF
Capping not enforced (default).
ON
Capping will be enforced.
UPPER, LOWER
Upper and lower bounds on mass fraction if capping is activated. Default to 1.0 and 0.0 respectively.
Command Default
No mass fraction capping.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSDATA, ALGEB, UGAS
Defines multiple species data applicable to all species.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
ALGEB
The algebraic species number whose mass fraction is calculated by subtracting the sum of the mass fractions
of all other species from 1.0. This ensures that the sum of the mass fractions of all the species is 1.0. Defaults
to 2.
UGAS
The universal gas constant. Defaults to 8314.3 (SI units).
3810
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSHAPE
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSHAPE, KEY, Dimension
For elements that support multiple shapes, specifies the element shape to be used for meshing.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Key indicating the element shape to be used:
0
Mesh with quadrilateral-shaped elements when Dimension = 2-D mesh with hexahedral-shaped elements
when Dimension = 3-D.
1
Mesh with triangle-shaped elements when Dimension = 2-D mesh with tetrahedral-shaped elements
when Dimension = 3-D.
Dimension
Specifies the dimension of the model to be meshed:
2D
2-D model (area mesh).
3D
3-D model (volume mesh).
Command Default
Since specification of element shape [MSHAPE] and meshing type [MSHKEY] are so closely related, the element
shape that ANSYS meshes with depends on the combination of the values that are set for the two commands.
The table below explains what happens when you fail to specify values for these settings.
Your action...
How it affects the mesh...
You issue the MSHAPE command with no arguments.
ANSYS uses quadrilateral-shaped or hexahedralshaped elements to mesh the model, depending on
whether you are meshing an area or a volume.
You do not specify an element shape, but you do ANSYS uses the default shape of the element to mesh
specify the type of meshing to be used [MSHKEY]. the model. It uses the type of meshing that you
specified.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3811
MSHCOPY
Your action...
How it affects the mesh...
You specify neither an element shape nor the type ANSYS uses the default shape of the element to mesh
of meshing to be used.
the model. It uses whichever type of meshing is the
default for that shape.
Notes
If no value is specified for Dimension the value of KEY determines the element shape that will be used for both
2-D and 3-D meshing. In other words, if you specify MSHAPE,0, quadrilateral-shaped and hexahedral-shaped
elements will be used. If you specify MSHAPE,1, triangle-shaped and tetrahedral-shaped elements will be used.
The MSHAPE, MSHKEY, and MSHMID commands replace the functionality that was provided by the ESHAPE
command in ANSYS 5.3 and earlier releases.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volumes>Mapped>4 to 6 sided
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesher Opts
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Global Meshing
Options
MSHCOPY, KEYLA, LAPTRN, LACOPY, KCN, DX, DY, DZ, TOL, LOW, HIGH
Simplifies the generation of meshes that have matching node element patterns on two different line
groups (in 2-D) or area groups (3-D).
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEYLA
Copy line mesh (default) if LINE, 0 or 1. Copy area mesh if AREA, or 2.
LAPTRN
Meshed line/area to be copied, or a component name containing a list. If LAPTRN = P, graphical picking is
enabled (valid only in the GUI).
LACOPY
Unmeshed line/area to get copied mesh, or a component name containing a list. If LACOPY = P, graphical
picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI).
KCN
In coordinate system KCN, LAPTRN + DX DY DZ = LACOPY.
DX, DY, DZ
Node location increments in the active coordinate system (DR, D, DZ for cylindrical, DR, D, D for spherical
or toroidal).
TOL
Tolerance. Defaults to 1.e--4.
LOW
Name of low node component to be defined (optional).
3812
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSHKEY
HIGH
Name of high node component to be defined (optional).
Notes
Matching meshes are used for rotational (cyclic) symmetry, or for contact analysis using coupling or node-tonode gap elements. See Using CPCYC and MSHCOPY Commands in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for
more information.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Area Mesh
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Line Mesh
MSHKEY, KEY
Specifies whether free meshing or mapped meshing should be used to mesh a model.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Key indicating the type of meshing to be used:
0
Use free meshing (the default).
1
Use mapped meshing.
2
Use mapped meshing if possible; otherwise, use free meshing. If you specify MSHKEY,2, SmartSizing
will be inactive even while free meshing non-map-meshable areas.
Command Default
As stated above, free meshing is the default. However, since the MSHKEY and MSHAPE settings are closely related,
you should refer to the table in the MSHAPE command description for more information about defaults.
Notes
The MSHKEY, MSHAPE, and MSHMID commands replace the functionality that was provided by the ESHAPE
command in ANSYS 5.3 and earlier releases.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Mapped>3 or 4 sided
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Areas>Target Surf
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volumes>Mapped>4 to 6 sided
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesher Opts
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3813
MSHMID
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Global Meshing
Options
MSHMID, KEY
Specifies placement of midside nodes.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Key indicating placement of midside nodes:
0
Midside nodes (if any) of elements on a region boundary follow the curvature of the boundary line or
area (the default).
1
Place midside nodes of all elements so that element edges are straight. Allows coarse mesh along curves.
2
Do not create midside nodes (elements will have removed midside nodes).
Notes
The MSHMID, MSHAPE, and MSHKEY commands replace the functionality that was provided by the ESHAPE
command in ANSYS 5.3 and earlier releases.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesher Opts
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Global Meshing
Options
MSHPATTERN, KEY
Specifies pattern to be used for mapped triangle meshing.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Key indicating triangle pattern to be used (the figures below illustrate the pattern that will be used for each
value of KEY):
0
Let ANSYS choose the pattern (the default). ANSYS maximizes the minimum angle of the triangularshaped elements that are created.
1
Unidirectional split at node I.
3814
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSMASS
2
Unidirectional split at node J.
Notes
"Mapped triangle meshing" refers to the ANSYS program's ability to take a map-meshable area and mesh it with
triangular elements, based on the value of MSHPATTERN,KEY. This type of meshing is particularly useful for
analyses that involve the meshing of rigid contact elements.
The MSHPATTERN command is valid only when you have specified that ANSYS use triangle-shaped elements
[MSHAPE,1,2D] (or you are meshing with an element that supports only triangles), and you have also specified
mapped meshing [MSHKEY,1] to mesh an area.
For details about mapped meshing with triangles, see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesher Opts
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Global Meshing
Options
MSMASS, SPNUM, Value
Specifies the mass type for a transient species analysis.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified. If ALL, all numbers are used.
Value
Mass type for transient species analysis:
LUMP
Lumped mass matrix (default).
CONS
Consistent mass matrix.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3815
MSMETH
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSMETH, SPNUM, KEY
Specifies the method of solution of the species transport equations.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
KEY
Key defining the method of solution for the specified species number:
0
No solution of equations for species SPNUM
1
Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA).
2
Conjugate residual method.
3
Preconditioned Conjugate Residual method.
4
Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) solution method (default).
5
Sparse Direct method.
6
Preconditioned BiCGStab method (PBCGM).
Command Default
The Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) method is used for all species.
Notes
The Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA) method is a special version of the standard Gauss-Seidel iterative
method for the solution of sets of algebraic equations. The number of iterations (sweeps) to be performed is
specified with the MSSOLU command. No convergence criterion is required for the TDMA method.
Three methods are semi-direct solution methods based on search directions. They are conjugate direction iterative techniques which develop a solution as a linear combination of search directions. The Conjugate Residual
3816
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSMIR
method requires the least memory, but stalls when solving ill-conditioned problems. The Preconditioned Conjugate Residual method requires much more memory but performs better for ill-conditioned matrix problems.
The PGMR method is memory-intensive; by necessity, it incorporates a tight convergence criterion. The Preconditioned BiCGStab method (PBCGM) requires less memory than the PGMR method and sometimes performs
better than the PGMR method. The number of search vectors and the convergence criterion are specified with
the MSSOLU command.
The Sparse Direct method is based on Gaussian elimination to factorize the matrix. This method is memory intensive and creates temporary files on the hard disk. It is robust and can be used for symmetric as well as nonsymmetric equation systems.
See the ANSYS Fluids Analysis Guide for additional information on the FLOTRAN Solvers.
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSMIR, SPNUM, Value
Sets modified inertial relaxation factors for multiple species.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
Value
Modified inertial relaxation factor. Value defaults to 0 (modified inertial relaxation off).
Notes
Value must be a positive real number. A Value between 0.1 and 1.0 is recommended. A larger Value provides
a more robust scheme, but it may yield a slower convergence.
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3817
MSNOMF
MSNOMF, SPNUM, FRACTION
Specifies the initial value of nominal mass fraction for a species.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
FRACTION
The initial mass fraction of the entire problem domain for this species. Defaults to 0.0. The sum of the mass
fractions for all species should equal 1.0.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis and is required if the CMIX
option has been activated for a property [FLDATA7,PROT,Label,CMIX].
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSPROP, SPNUM, Label, Type, NOMINAL, COF1, COF2, COF3
Defines the fluid properties of a species.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
Label
Label identifying the property being defined:
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Thermal conductivity.
MDIF
Mass diffusion coefficient.
SPHT
Specific heat.
Type
Type of property:
3818
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSPROP
CONSTANT
Constant property (default). The property does not vary with temperature.
LIQUID
Liquid property. Density varies according to a second order polynomial relationship, and all other properties follow Sutherland's law for liquids.
GAS
Gas property. Density varies according to the ideal gas law, and all other properties follow Sutherland's
law for gases.
NOMINAL
Nominal value of the property being defined. For CONSTANT fluid types, the property remains at this value
and does not vary. For GAS and LIQUID property types, this is the value of the property corresponding to
the temperature defined by COF1.
COF1
Temperature corresponding to the NOMINAL value of the property (for GAS and LIQUID property types only;
see Notes section). Not required for Label = SPHT.
COF2, COF3
Second and third coefficients for temperature variation of the property. Not required for Label = SPHT.
Notes
If the property type is CONSTANT, the equation used is as follows:
Lab = NOMINAL
If the property type is LIQUID, a second order polynomial relationship is used for density, and Sutherland's law
for liquids is used for the other properties:
DENS = NOMINAL + COF2*(T-COF1) + COF3*(T-COF1)2
Property = NOMINAL * EXP[COF2*(1/T-1/COF1) + COF3*(1/T-1COF1)2]
where T is the temperature of the node where the property is being calculated.
If the property type is GAS, the ideal gas law is used for density, and Sutherland's law for gases is used for other
properties:
DENS = NOMINAL * (P/COF2 / (T/COF1)
Property = NOMINAL * (T/COF1)1.5 * (COF1 + COF2)/(T + COF2)]
where P and T are the pressure and temperature of the node where the property is being calculated.
Specific heat is always a CONSTANT. Also, property types (Type) such as TABLE, USER, POWL, BIN, etc. are not
available for individual species. They are valid only for the bulk fluid.
If a property type is entered incorrectly (e.g. a misspelling), a CONSTANT property type is assumed and the
property is assigned the NOMINAL value.
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3819
MSQUAD
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSQUAD, QDIF, QSRC
Specifies the quadrature order for multiple species elements.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
QDIF
Quadrature order for diffusion term integration:
0
One-point quadrature (default).
1
Same as 0, except a distributed value of temperature is used to evaluate temperature-dependent properties.
2
Two-point quadrature (default for axisymmetric models).
QSRC
Quadrature order for source term integration:
0
One-point quadrature (default).
1
Same as 0, except a distributed value of temperature is used to evaluate temperature-dependent properties.
2
Two-point quadrature (default for axisymmetric models).
Command Default
As described above.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
3820
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSSOLU
MSRELAX, SPNUM, CONC, MDIF, EMDI, STAB
Specifies relaxation factors for a multiple species transport analysis.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
CONC
Species concentration relaxation factor. Defaults to 0.5.
MDIF
Mass diffusion coefficient relaxation factor. Defaults to 0.5.
EMDI
Effective mass diffusion coefficient relaxation factor (used for turbulent flow). Defaults to 0.5.
STAB
Inertial relaxation factor for solution of the transport equation. Defaults to 1.0 x 10+20.
Command Default
As described above for each relaxation factor.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSSOLU, SPNUM, NSWEEP, MAXI, NSRCH, CONV, DELMAX
Specifies solution options for multiple species transport.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
NSWEEP
Number of Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA) sweeps. Valid only for the TDMA method [MSMETH]. Defaults
to 100.
MAXI
Maximum number of iterations allowed for the semi-direct methods (conjugate residual and preconditioned
conjugate residual methods, chosen with the MSMETH command). Defaults to 1000.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3821
MSSPEC
NSRCH
Number of search vectors used for the semi-direct methods. Defaults to 2. If you are using the Preconditioned
BiCGStab Method (PBCGM) solver, the number of search directions is 1 to 8, with 2 as the default. New search
vectors are made orthogonal to NSRCH previous vectors in the solution of the unsymmetric matrix systems.
CONV
Convergence criterion for the semi-direct methods. It represents the factor by which the inner product of
the residual vector is reduced during the solution of the equations at any global iteration. Defaults to 1.0 x
10-12. If the convergence criterion has not been achieved, the algebraic solver issues a warning message, and
the execution of FLOTRAN continues normally.
DELMAX
Minimum normalized rate of change which will permit the semi-direct solution methods to continue. Used
to terminate the semi-direct solvers in the event that stall occurs. Defaults to 1.0 x 10-9. If the methods stall,
the solver increments the solution only a very small amount despite the fact that the correct solution has
been not been achieved (or perhaps even approached). The maximum nodal difference between the solutions,
normalized to the value of the variable, is compared to DELMAX, and the solution is terminated if the value
is less than DELMAX. Termination of the algebraic solver due to the small rate of change is considered a normal
function, and no warning message is printed. Execution of FLOTRAN continues normally.
Command Default
As described above.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSSPEC, SPNUM, Name, MOLWT, SCHMIDT
Specifies the name, molecular weight, and Schmidt number of a species.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
Name
Name to be assigned to the species, up to 4 characters long. Defaults to SP01 for species 1, SP02 for species
2, ..., SP06 for species 6. This name can be used in place of the species number when specifying mass fraction
boundary conditions and in postprocessing.
Note The GUI always shows the default names, not the user-defined names.) Name should not be
the same as an existing degree of freedom label.
3822
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/MSTART
MOLWT
Molecular weight for the species. Required only for gases (determined by the property type on MSPROP
command). Defaults to 29.0.
SCHMIDT
Schmidt number (diffusion term divisor) for the species. Required only for gases (determined by the property
type on MSPROP command). Defaults to 1.0.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
/MSTART, Label, KEY
Controls the initial GUI components.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Label identifying the GUI component:
ZOOM
Pan, Zoom, Rotate dialog box, off by default.
WORK
Offset Working Plane dialog box, off by default.
WPSET
Working Plane Settings dialog box, off by default.
ABBR
Edit Toolbar/Abbreviations dialog box, off by default.
PARM
Scalar Parameters dialog box, off by default.
SELE
Select Entities dialog box, off by default.
ANNO
Annotation dialog box, off by default.
HARD
Hard Copy dialog box, off by default.
UTIL
Turns on the pre-ANSYS 6.1 (UIDL) GUI, off by default.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3823
MSTERM
KEY
Switch value:
OFF or 0
Component does not appear when GUI is initialized.
ON or 1
Component appears when GUI is initialized.
Command Default
Same as Label defaults.
Notes
Controls which components appear when the Graphical User Interface (GUI) is initially brought up. This command
is valid only before the GUI is brought up [/MENU,ON] and is intended to be used in the start90.ans file. It only
affects how the GUI is initialized; you can always bring up or close any component once you are in the GUI.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
MSTERM, SPNUM, STER, TTER
Sets the convergence monitors for species.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
STER
Termination criteria for steady-state analysis. Defaults to 1 x 10-8.
TTER
Termination criteria for transient analysis. Defaults to 1 x 10-6.
Notes
Repeat command to set each species number as required.
All specified criteria must be met before the case is terminated.
If a termination criterion for a specific species number is set negative, the termination check is ignored for that
particular species.
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
3824
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MSVARY
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
MSVARY, SPNUM, Lab, Key
Allows species properties to vary between global iterations.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
SPNUM
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.
Lab
Label identifying the species property:
DENS
Density.
VISC
Viscosity.
COND
Thermal conductivity.
MDIF
Mass diffusion coefficient.
Key
Key to allow property variation between global iterations:
OFF
Variation not allowed (default).
ON
Variation allowed.
Command Default
No property is allowed to vary between global iterations within a load step.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3825
MXPAND
MXPAND, NMODE, FREQB, FREQE, Elcalc, SIGNIF
Specifies the number of modes to expand and write for a modal or buckling analysis.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NMODE
Number of modes to expand and write. If blank, expand and write all modes within the frequency range
specified.
FREQB
Beginning, or lower end, of frequency range of interest. If FREQB and FREQE are both blank, expand and
write the number of modes specified without regard to the frequency range. Defaults to the entire range.
FREQE
Ending, or upper end, of frequency range of interest.
Elcalc
Element calculation key:
NO
Do not calculate element results and reaction forces (default).
YES
Calculate element results and reaction forces, as well as the nodal degree of freedom solution.
SIGNIF
Expand only those modes whose significance level exceeds the SIGNIF threshold. The significance level of
a mode is defined as the mode coefficient of the mode, divided by the maximum mode coefficient of all
modes. Any mode whose significance level is less than SIGNIF is considered insignificant and is not expanded.
The higher the SIGNIF threshold, the fewer the number of modes expanded. SIGNIF defaults to 0.001. If
SIGNIF is specified as 0.0, it is taken as 0.0. SIGNIF value is only used for single-point or DDAM response
(SPOPT,SPRS or DDAM) analyses.
Command Default
Mode shapes (displacements) are expanded and output to the results file (so that if you need to inspect the
mode shapes, it is not necessary to run the analysis again). Element stresses are not expanded.
Notes
Specifies the number of modes to expand and write over a frequency range for a modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) or
buckling (ANTYPE,BUCKLE) analysis. For reduced analyses, an expansion is required. If used in SOLUTION, this
command is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Expand Modes
3826
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MXPAND
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Expand Modes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3827
3828
N Commands
N, NODE, X, Y, Z, THXY, THYZ, THZX
Defines a node.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node number to be assigned. A previously defined node of the same number will be redefined. Defaults to
the maximum node number used +1.
X, Y, Z
Node location in the active coordinate system (R, , Z for cylindrical, R, , for spherical or toroidal). If X = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
THXY
First rotation about nodal Z (positive X toward Y).
THYZ
Second rotation about nodal X (positive Y toward Z).
THZX
Third rotation about nodal Y (positive Z toward X).
Notes
Defines a node in the active coordinate system [CSYS]. The nodal coordinate system is parallel to the global
Cartesian system unless rotated. Rotation angles are in degrees and redefine any previous rotation angles. See
the NMODIF, NANG, and NROTAT commands for other rotation options.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>In Active CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>On Working Plane
NANG, NODE, X1, X2, X3, Y1, Y2, Y3, Z1, Z2, Z3
Rotates a nodal coordinate system by direction cosines.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NODE
Rotate coordinate system of this node.
X1, X2, X3
Global X, Y, Z components of a unit vector in new nodal X direction.
Y1, Y2, Y3
Global X, Y, Z components of a unit vector in new nodal Y direction.
Z1, Z2, Z3
Global X, Y, Z components of a unit vector in new nodal Z direction.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NCNV
Notes
Rotates a nodal coordinate system to the orientation specified by the X, Y and Z direction cosines. Existing rotation
specifications on the node are redefined. If only two of the three unit vectors are specified, the third is defined
according to the right hand rule. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that input direction cosines are orthogonal in a right-handed system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>RotateNode>By Vectors
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>By Vectors
NCNV, KSTOP, DLIM, ITLIM, ETLIM, CPLIM
Sets the key to terminate an analysis.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KSTOP
Program behavior upon nonconvergence:
0
Do not terminate the analysis if the solution fails to converge.
1
Terminate the analysis and the program execution if the solution fails to converge (default).
2
Terminate the analysis, but not the program execution, if the solution fails to converge.
DLIM
Terminates program execution if the largest nodal DOF solution value (displacement, temperature, etc.) exceeds this limit. Defaults to 1.0E6 for all DOF except MAG and A and FLOTRAN DOF. Defaults to 1.0E10 for
MAG and A. Defaults to 1.0E20 for the FLOTRAN VX, VY, VZ, PRES, and TEMP DOF. Does not apply to the
FLOTRAN ENKE and ENDS DOF.
ITLIM
Terminates program execution if the cumulative iteration number exceeds this limit (defaults to infinity).
ETLIM
Terminates program execution if the elapsed time (seconds) exceeds this limit (defaults to infinity).
CPLIM
Terminates program execution if the CPU time (seconds) exceeds this limit (defaults to infinity).
Command Default
As described for each argument above.
Notes
Sets the key to terminate an analysis if not converged, or if any of the following limits are exceeded for nonlinear
and full transient analyses: DOF (displacement), cumulative iteration, elapsed time, or CPU time limit. Applies
3830
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NDIST
only to static and transient analyses (ANTYPE,STATIC and ANTYPE,TRANS), and FLOTRAN analyses. Time limit
checks are made at the end of each equilibrium iteration. This command is ignored during an optimization run.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Advanced NL
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Criteria to Stop
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Advanced NL
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Criteria to Stop
NDELE, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Deletes nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Delete nodes from NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1 = ALL, NODE2
and NINC are ignored and all selected nodes [NSEL] are deleted. If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE1.
Notes
Deletes selected nodes that are not connected to elements. Nodes may also be redefined instead of deleted, if
desired. Boundary conditions (displacements, forces, etc.) as well as any coupling or constraint equations containing the deleted nodes are also deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Nodes
NDIST, ND1, ND2
Calculates and lists the distance between two nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ND1
First node in distance calculation. If ND1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
ND2
Second node in distance calculation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3831
NDSURF
Notes
NDIST lists the distance between nodes ND1 and ND2, as well as the current coordinate system offsets from ND1
to ND2, where the X, Y, and Z locations of ND1 are subtracted from the X, Y, and Z locations of ND2 (respectively)
to determine the offsets. NDIST is valid in any coordinate system except toroidal [CSYS,3].
NDIST returns a variable, called "_RETURN," which contains the distance value. You can use this value for various
purposes, such as the calculation of distributed loads. In interactive mode, you can access this command by using
the Model Query Picker (Utility Menu> List> Picked Entities), where you can also access automatic annotation
functions and display the value on your model.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Check Geom>ND distances
NDSURF, Snode, Telem, DIMN
Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing elements and assigns the extra node as the
closest fluid element node.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Snode
Component name for the surface nodes of the solid elements.
Telem
Component name for the target fluid elements.
DIMN
Model dimensionality:
2
2-D model.
3
3-D model.
Notes
This command macro is used to generate surface effect elements (SURF151 or SURF152) overlaid on the surface
of existing plane or solid elements and, based on proximity, to determine and assign the extra node (FLUID116)
for each surface element. The active element type must be SURF151 or SURF152 with appropriate settings for
KEYOPT(4), KEYOPT(5), KEYOPT(6), and KEYOPT(8).
The surface nodes of the plane or solid elements must be grouped into a node component and the fluid elements
must be grouped into an element component and named using the CM command. The names must be enclosed
in single quotes (e.g., 'NOD') when the NDSURF command is manually typed in.
When using the GUI method, node and element components are created through the picking dialog boxes associated with this command.
3832
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/NERR
The macro is applicable for the SURF151, SURF152, and FLUID116 element types.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Area
to Fluid
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Line
to Fluid
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Surf / Contact>Surf Effect>Attch to Fluid>Node
to Fluid
NEQIT, NEQIT
Specifies the maximum number of equilibrium iterations for nonlinear analyses.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NEQIT
Maximum number of equilibrium iterations allowed each substep.
Command Default
When SOLCONTROL,ON, NEQIT is set between 15 and 26 depending on the physics of the problem. When
SOLCONTROL,OFF, NEQIT defaults to 25 for all cases.
Notes
See the description of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Equilibrium Iter
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Equilibrium Iter
/NERR, NMERR, NMABT, --, IFKEY, NUM
Limits the number of warning and error messages displayed.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NMERR
Maximum number of warning and error messages displayed per command. Defaults to 5 for interactive runs
with the GUI turned on, 20 for interactive runs with the GUI turned off, 200 for batch runs. If NMERR is negative,
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3833
/NERR
the absolute value of NMERR is used as the maximum number of warning and error messages written to the
error file (file.ERR) per command, as well as the maximum number of messages displayed per command.
NMABT
Maximum number of warning and error messages allowed per command before run aborts (must be greater
than zero). Maximum value is 99,999,999. Defaults to 10,000.
--
Unused field.
IFKEY
Specifies whether or not to abort if an error occurs during a /INPUT operation:
0 or OFF
Do not abort. This option is the default.
1 or ON
Abort.
NUM
The number of invalid command warnings before a stop warning will be issued:
0
Disables the stop warning/error function.
n
An integer value representing the number of warnings that will be encountered before prompting the
user to stop (default = 5). The first error encountered will ALWAYS result in a prompt.
Note Invalid command warnings and error tracking are mutually exclusive.
Command Default
As described above.
Notes
Limits the number of warning and error messages displayed for any one command in an interactive run.
Warning and error messages continue to be written to Jobname.ERR regardless of these limits (unless NMERR
is negative).
Issue this command with NUM = n to specify the number of invalid command warnings to be encountered
before the user is prompted to stop. You can then continue or abort the run. If you choose to abort the run, the
log file can be saved so that any of the processing up to that point can be appended to an input that rectifies
the condition. A batch run always aborts on the first error. Issue /NERR,STAT to list current settings.
Issue /NERR,DEFA to reset values to initial defaults.
An IFKEY value of 1 or ON causes the ANSYS program to abort immediately upon encountering an error during
a file /INPUT operation. However, use of this option may cause the following conditions to occur:
The /INPUT command may abort if issued for a log file (jobname.log).
Some macros may abort.
3834
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NFORCE
ANSYS Connection may fail after reading only a small portion of a CAD model.
The command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>MenuCtrls>Message Controls
NFORCE, ITEM
Sums the nodal forces and moments of elements attached to nodes.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
ITEM
Specifies the selected set of nodes for summing forces and moments for contact elements.
blank
Sums the nodal forces of elements for all selected nodes and excludes contact elements (elements 169174).
CONT
Sums the nodal forces of elements for contact nodes only.
BOTH
Sums the nodal forces of elements for all selected nodes, including contact elements.
Notes
Sums and prints, in each component direction for each selected node, the nodal force and moment contributions
of the selected elements attached to the node. If all elements are selected, the sums are usually zero except
where constraints or loads are applied. The nodal forces and moments may be displayed [/PBC,FORC and
/PBC,MOME]. Use PRESOL to print nodal forces and moments on an element-by-element basis. You can use the
FORCE command to specify which component (static, damping, inertia, or total) of the nodal load is to be used.
Nodal forces associated with surface loads are not included.
This vector sum is printed in the global Cartesian system. Moment summations are about the global origin unless
another point is specified with the SPOINT command. The summations for each node are printed in the global
Cartesian system unless transformed [RSYS]. This command is generally not applicable to axisymmetric models
because moment information from the NFORCE command is not correct for axisymmetric elements.
Selecting a subset of elements [ESEL] and then issuing this command will give the forces and moments required
to maintain equilibrium of that set of elements. The effects of nodal coupling and constraint equations are ignored.
The option ITEM = CONT provides the forces and moments for the contact elements (surface-to-surface only for
CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, and CONTA174). Setting ITEM = BOTH provides the forces and moments
for all selected nodes, including contact elements.
This command also includes the FSUM command function which vectorially sums and prints, in each component
direction for the total selected node set, the nodal force and moment contributions of the selected elements
attached to the selected node set.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3835
NGEN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Nodal Calcs>Sum @ Each Node
NGEN, ITIME, INC, NODE1, NODE2, NINC, DX, DY, DZ, SPACE
Generates additional nodes from a pattern of nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITIME, INC
Do this generation operation a total of ITIME times, incrementing all nodes in the given pattern by INC each
time after the first. ITIME must be > 1 for generation to occur.
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Generate nodes from the pattern of nodes beginning with NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of
NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1 = ALL, NODE2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected nodes [NSEL].
If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the
GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
DX, DY, DZ
Node location increments in the active coordinate system (DR, D, DZ for cylindrical, DR, D, D for spherical
or toroidal).
SPACE
Spacing ratio. Ratio of last division size to first division size. If > 1.0, divisions increase. If < 1.0, divisions decrease. Ratio defaults to 1.0 (uniform spacing).
Note The average spacing ratio remains 1.0, such that the location of the last generated set will
be the same regardless of SPACE. SPACE only serves to skew the position of the nodes between the
pattern set and the last set.
Notes
Generates additional nodes from a given node pattern. Generation is done in the active coordinate system.
Nodes in the pattern may have been generated in any coordinate system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Nodes>Copy
NKPT, NODE, NPT
Defines a node at an existing keypoint location.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Arbitrary reference number for node. If zero or blank, defaults to the highest node number +1 [NUMSTR].
3836
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NLDIAG
NPT
Keypoint number defining global X, Y, Z location. If NPT = All, then a node will be placed at each selected
keypoint. If NPT = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only
in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NPT.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>On Keypoint
NLDIAG, Label, Key
Sets nonlinear diagnostics functionality.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Label
Specifies a diagnostic function:
NRRE
Store the Newton-Raphson residuals information.
EFLG
Identify or display elements or nodes that violate the criteria.
MAXF
Set a maximum number of files (MaxFile) to create. Information is written to Jobname.ndxxx or Jobname.nrxxx, where xxx iterates from 001 through MaxFile. When the maximum number of files is
reached, the counter resets to 001 and earlier files are overwritten.
CONT
Write contact information to a single Jobname.cnd text file during solution.
Key
Sets the characteristics of the diagnostic function:
OFF, or 0
Suppresses writing of diagnostic information. This value is the default.
ON, or 1
Writes diagnostic information to the Jobname.ndxxx, Jobname.nrxxx, or Jobname.cnd file. (If Label
= CONT, this option is the same as the SUBS option described below.)
ITER
Writes contact diagnostic information at each iteration. Valid only when Label = CONT.
SUBS
Writes contact diagnostic information at each substep. Valid only when Label = CONT.
LSTP
Writes contact diagnostic information at each load step. Valid only when Label = CONT.
STAT
Lists information about the diagnostic files in the current working directory.
DEL
Deletes all diagnostic files in the current working directory.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3837
NLDIAG
MaxFile
Sets the maximum number of files to create (Jobname.ndxxx or Jobname.nrxxx). Valid values are 1
through 999. The default is 10. (If you change the default MaxFile value, that value is retained until you
change it again.) Valid only when Label = MAXF.
Command Default
No nonlinear diagnostic files are written.
Notes
The NLDIAG command is a nonlinear diagnostics tool valid for nonlinear structural analyses. It is a debugging
tool for use when you must restart after an unconverged solution. The command creates Jobname.ndxxx,
Jobname.nrxxx, or Jobname.cnd files in the working directory to store the information you specify.
Newton-Raphson residual Issue the NLDIAG,NRRE,ON command to create Jobname.nrxxx files which store
the relevant Newton-Raphson residual information for the last MaxFile equilibrium iterations. Issue a NLDPOST,NRRE,STAT command to list the load step, substep, time, and equilibrium iteration corresponding to each
of the Jobname.nrxxx files in the working directory, then issue a PLNSOL,NRRES,,,,FileID command to point
to the file from which you want to create a contour plot of your Newton-Raphson residuals.
For NLDIAG,NRRE,ON, any Jobname.nrxxx files in the current (working) directory are overwritten when you
issue a new SOLVE command (or restart).
Element components that violate criteria Issue a NLDIAG,EFLG,ON command to create Jobname.ndxxx
files which store IDs for elements violating the following criteria:
Too large a distortion
Elements contain nodes that have near zero pivots for nonlinear analyses
Too large a plastic/creep strain increment (CUTCONTROL)
Elements for which mixed u-P constraints are not satisfied (mixed U-P option of 18x solid elements only)
For NLDIAG,EFLG,ON, all Jobname.ndxxx diagnostic files in the current (working) directory are deleted when
you issue a new SOLVE command (or restart).
In the solution processor (/SOLU), use the STAT option to list the active status of this command. In the postprocessor (/POST1), issue a NLDPOST,EFLG,STAT command to list the load step, substep, time, and equilibrium iteration corresponding to each of the Jobname.ndxxx files in the working directory, then issue a NLDPOST,EFLG,CM,FileID command to create element components that violate the criteria.
Contact diagnostic Issue the NLDIAG,CONT,ON command to create a Jobname.cnd file which stores contact
information for all defined contact pairs at all substeps. Alternatively, you may issue one of the following commands
to store contact information at a specific frequency:
NLDIAG,CONT,ITER to write at each iteration
NLDIAG,CONT,SUBS to write at each substep (default)
NLDIAG,CONT,LSTP to write at each load step
File Jobname.cnd is written during solution and lists, on a pair-base, the following contact information:
3838
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NLDIAG
Number of contact elements in contact[1]
Number of contact elements in sticking contact status
Maximum chattering level
Maximum contact penetration/Minimum gap[2]
Maximum closed gap
Maximum normal contact stiffness
Minimum normal contact stiffness
Maximum resulting pinball
Maximum elastic slip distance
Maximum tangential contact stiffness
Minimum tangential contact stiffness
Maximum sliding distance
Maximum contact pressure
Maximum friction stress
Average contact depth
1.
If >0, this quantity indicates the number of contact elements in contact. Other values are interpreted as
follows:
0 indicates that the contact pair is in near-field contact status.
-1 indicates that the contact pair is in far-field contact status.
-2 indicates that the contact pair is inactive (symmetric to asymmetric contact)
2.
A positive value indicates penetration and a negative value indicates a gap. If the contact pair has a farfield contact status, penetration and gap are not available and the value stored is the current pinball radius.
In the solution processor (/SOLU), use the STAT option to list the active status of the NLDIAG,CONT command.
No counterpart exists for the CONT option in the NLDPOST command at this time. If you subsequently issue a
new SOLVE command (or restart), the Jobname.cnd file in the current (working) directory is not deleted; information is appended to it. You should delete the existing file (NLDIAG,CONT,DEL command) if you do not want to
retain diagnostic information from previous solutions.
For more information, see Section 8.10.2.1: Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Diagnostics>Nonlinear Diagnostics
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3839
NLDPOST
NLDPOST, Label, Key, FileID, Prefix
Gets element component information from nonlinear diagnostic files.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Label
Specifies the type of command operation:
EFLG
Element flag for nonlinear diagnostics.
NRRE
Newton-Raphson residuals.
Key
Specifies the command action:
STAT
List information about the diagnostic files (Jobname.ndxxx or Jobname.nrxxx) in the current directory.
For Label = EFLG, the listing gives a summary that associates the loadstep, substep, time, equilibrium
iteration number, cumulative iteration number, and the number of elements that fail each criteria with
a specific file ID (Jobname.ndxxx). Use the list to create element components (via the the CM option)
based on the cumulative iteration number.
For Label = NRRE, the listing provides a summary that associates the loadstep, substep, time, equilibrium
iteration number, and cumulative iteration number with a specific file ID (Jobname.nrxxx). Use the list
to identify the respective file ID for creating Newton-Raphson residual contour plots
(PLNSOL,NRRE,,FileID).
DEL
Delete Jobname.ndxxx or Jobname.nrxxx files in the working directory, if any exist.
CM
Create component files for elements that violate criteria. This value is valid only when Label = EFLG.
FileID
Valid only when Label = EFLG and Key = CM, this value specifies file IDs:
IDnum
The file ID number. Creates the element components from the diagnostic files corresponding to the
specified file ID number in the working directory.
ALL
Creates element components from all available diagnostic files residing in the working directory. This
value is the default if you do not specify an IDnum value.
Prefix
Sets the prefix name for components. Specify up to 21 alphanumeric characters.
Command Default
The NLDPOST command has no defaults.
3840
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NLGEOM
Notes
Based on the nonlinear diagnostic results (created via the NLDIAG,EFLG command), the NLDPOST command
creates element components with predefined names.
The following table lists the diagnostic criteria and filenames (with specified prefix and without). Here xxx corresponds to the file ID (FileID) of Jobname.ndxxx or Jobname.nrxxx.
Elements with:
If prefix is specified:
Without prefix specified:
Too large a plastic strain increment
prefix_xxx_eppl
ndxxx_eppl
Too large a creep strain increment
prefix_xxx_epcr
ndxxx_epcr
Unsatisfied mixed u-P constraints
prefix_xxx_mxup
ndxxx_mxup
Too much distortion
prefix_xxx_hdst
ndxxx_hdst
Negative/small pivots
prefix_xxx_pivt
ndxxx_pivt
For more information, see Section 8.10.2.1: Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Nonlinear Diagnostics
NLGEOM, Key
Includes large-deflection effects in a static or full transient analysis.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Large-deflection key:
OFF
Ignores large-deflection effects (that is, a small-deflection analysis is specified). This option is the default.
ON
Includes large-deflection (large rotation) effects or large strain effects, according to the element type.
Command Default
Large-deflection effects are ignored.
Notes
Large-deflection effects are categorized as either large deflection (or large rotation) or large strain, depending
on the element type. These are listed (if available) under Special Features in the input data table for each element
in the ANSYS Elements Reference. If used during the solution (/SOLU), this command is valid only within the first
load step.
In a large-deflection analysis, pressure loads behave differently than other load types. For more information, see
Section 8.1.2.3: Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3841
NLHIST
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Product Restrictions
In ANSYS Professional, large deflection effects should not be turned on if 2-D solid (PLANEn) or 3-D solid (SOLIDn)
elements are defined.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
NLHIST, Key, Name, Item, Comp, NODE, ELEM, SHELL, LAYER
Specify result items to track during solution.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Specifies the command operation:
NSOL
Nodal solution data.
ESOL
Element nodal data.
PAIR
Contact data (pair-based).
STAT
Displays a list of items to track.
OFF, or 0
Deactivates tracking of all variables. This value is the default.
ON, or 1
Activates tracking of all variables. Tracking also activates whenever any specification changes.
DEL
Removes the specified variable from the set of result items to track. If Name = ALL (default), all specifications
are removed.
Name
The 32-character user-specified name.
Item, Comp
Predetermined output item and component label for valid elements. See the ANSYS Elements Reference for
more information.
NODE
Valid node number (if Key = NSOL or ESOL), or valid real constant set number (if Key = PAIR) identifying a
contact pair. Required input for NSOL, ESOL, and PAIR items.
3842
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NLHIST
ELEM
Valid element number for element results. Used for ESOL items. If ELEM is specified, then a node number
that belongs to the element must also be specified in the NODE field.
SHELL
Valid labels are TOP, MID or BOT. This field can specify the location on shell elements for which to retrieve
data. Used only for element nodal data (ESOL).
LAYER
Layer number (for layered elements only). Used only for element nodal data (ESOL).
Notes
The NLHIST command is a nonlinear diagnostics tool allowing you to monitor diagnostics results of interest in
real time during solution.
You can track a maximum of 50 variables during solution. The specified result quantities are written to the file
Jobname.nlh. Nodal results and contact results are written for every converged substep (irrespective of the
OUTRES command setting) while element results are written only at time points specified via the OUTRES
command. For time points where element results data is not available, a very small number is written instead. If
the conditions for contact to be established are not satisfied, 0.0 will be written for contact results.
Results tracking is available only for a nonlinear structural analysis. All results are tracked in the Solution Coordinate
System (that is, nodal results are in the nodal coordinate system and element results are in the element coordinate
system).
The Jobname.nlh file is an ASCII file that lists each time point at which a converged solution occurs along with
the values of the relevant result quantities.
The GUI option Solution> Results tracking provides an interface to define the result items to be tracked. The
GUI also allows you to graph one or more variables against time or against other variables during solution. You
can use the interface to graph or list variables from any .nlh file generated by the ANSYS program.
You can also track results during batch runs. Either access the ANSYS Launcher and select File Tracking from
the Tools menu, or type nlhist81 at the command line. Use the supplied file browser to navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to invoke the tracking utilty. You can use this utilty to read the file at any time, even
after the solution is complete (the data in the file must be formatted correctly).
Specifications that you set via the NLHIST command are not saved in the database (.db file).
Valid labels for NSOL solution quantities are:
UX, UY, and UZ (displacements)
ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ (rotations)
FX, FY, and FZ (reaction force)
MX, MY, and MZ (reaction moment)
ETABLE items are not supported for ESOL items.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3843
NLHIST
NLHIST - Valid ESOL Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT
Stress intensity.
"
EQV
Equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT
Plastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT
Creep strain intensity.
"
EQV
Creep equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT
Thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Thermal equivalent strain.
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
CREQ
Accumulated equivalent creep strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
EPEL
EPPL
EPCR
EPTH
NL
PAIR solution quantities are output on a per contact pair basis. As a consequence, the corresponding values
listed in the Jobname.nlh file represent a minimum or a maximum over the associated contact pair, as detailed
in the table below.
NLHIST - Valid PAIR Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
CONT
ELCN
If >0, number of contact elements in contact. Other values are interpreted as follows:
0 indicates the contact pair is in near-field contact status.
-1 indicates the contact pair is in far-field contact status.
-2 indicates that the contact pair is inactive (symmetric to asymmetric
contact).
"
3844
ELST
Number of contact elements in sticking contact status.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NLIST
Item
Comp
Description
"
CNOS
Maximum chattering level.
"
PENE
Maximum penetration (or minimum gap). [1]
"
CLGP
Maximum closed gap.
"
SLID
Maximum total sliding distance.
"
ESLI
Maximum elastic slip distance.
"
KNMX
Maximum normal contact stiffness.
"
KTMX
Maximum tangential contact stiffness.
"
KNMN
Minimum normal contact stiffness.
"
KTMN
Minimum tangential contact stiffness.
"
PINB
Maximum pinball radius.
"
PRES
Maximum contact pressure.
"
SFRI
Maximum frictional stress.
1.
For PENE, a positive value indicates a penetration, and a negative value indicates a gap. If the contact
pair has a far-field contact status, penetration and gap are not available, and the value stored for PENE
is the current pinball radius.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Results Tracking
NLIST, NODE1, NODE2, NINC, Lcoord, SORT1, SORT2, SORT3
Lists nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
List nodes from NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1 = ALL (default),
NODE2 and NINC are ignored and all selected nodes [NSEL] are listed. If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
Lcoord
Coordinate listing key:
(blank)
List all nodal information
COORD
Suppress all but the XYZ coordinates (shown to a higher degree of accuracy than when displayed with
all information).
SORT1
First item on which to sort. Valid item names are NODE, X, Y, Z, THXY, THYZ, THXZ
SORT2, SORT3
Second and third items on which to sort. Valid item names are the same as for SORT1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3845
NLOG
Notes
Lists nodes in the active display coordinate system [DSYS]. Nodal coordinate rotation angles are also listed (relative to the global Cartesian coordinate system).
Node listing can be in a sorted order (ascending). SORT2, for example, will be carried out on nodes having equal
values of SORT1.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Sorted Listing>Sort Nodes
Utility Menu>List>Nodes
NLOG, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB
Forms the natural log of a variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0).
FACTB
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to the operation (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
Forms the natural log of a variable according to the operation:
IR = FACTB*LN(FACTA x IA)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Natural Log
3846
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NMODIF
NLOPT
Specifies "Nonlinear analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Nonlinear Options
NMODIF, NODE, X, Y, Z, THXY, THYZ, THZX
Modifies an existing node.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Modify coordinates of this node. If ALL, modify coordinates of all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NODE.
X, Y, Z
Replace the previous coordinate values assigned to this node with these corresponding coordinate values.
Values are interpreted in the active coordinate system (R, , Z for cylindrical; R, , for spherical or toroidal).
Leaving any of these fields blank retains the previous value(s).
THXY
First rotation of nodal coordinate system about nodal Z (positive X toward Y). Leaving this field blank retains
the previous value.
THYZ
Second rotation of nodal coordinate system about nodal X (positive Y toward Z). Leaving this field blank retains
the previous value.
THZX
Third rotation of nodal coordinate system about nodal Y (positive Z toward X). Leaving this field blank retains
the previous value.
Notes
Modifies an existing node. Nodal coordinate system rotation angles are in degrees and redefine any existing
rotation angles. Nodes can also be redefined with the N command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3847
NOCOLOR
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>RotateNode>By Angles
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Nodes>Set of Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Nodes>Single Node
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>By Angles
NOCOLOR, KEY
Removes color from graphics displays.
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Color key:
0
Color the displays.
1
Do not color the displays.
2
Do not shade the displays.
Command Default
Color graphics displays (device dependent).
Menu Paths
It is part of the DISPLAY program.
NODES
Specifies "Nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Nodes
3848
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/NOLIST
/NOERASE
Prevents the screen erase between displays.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Command Default
Issue the command with no arguments to prevent automatic screen erase before creating the next display.
Notes
Preventing the normal screen erase between requested displays allows you to overlay multiple views.
Clearing the screen with the ERASE command (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Erase Options> Erase screen) active
simply clears the display area. Subsequent replots will provide the cumulative plots previously generated by the
/NOERASE command.
For 3-D devices, you can issue /DV3D,DELS to suppress repeated screen overlays and generate clear contour
plots.
Use the /ERASE command to reactivate automatic screen erase.
For 3-D devices (/SHOW,3D), the model in all active windows will be the same, even if you issue a different display
command (NPLOT, EPLOT, etc.) for each active window. Use the Multi-Plot command (GPLOT) to display different
entities, in different windows, on 3-D devices.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Erase Options>Erase between Plots
/NOLIST
Suppresses the data input listing.
SESSION: List Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Command Default
Issue the command with no arguments to suppress the data input listing.
Notes
Printout is suppressed until a /GOLIST command is read or the end of the listing is encountered.
This command is valid in any processor, but only within a batch run [/BATCH].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3849
NOOFFSET
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
NOOFFSET, Label
Prevents the CDREAD command from offsetting specified data items
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Specifies items not to be offset.
NODE
Node numbers
ELEM
Node numbers
KP
Element numbers
LINE
Keypoint numbers
AREA
Area numbers
VOLU
Volume numbers
MAT
Material numbers
TYPE
Element type numbers
REAL
Real constant numbers
CSYS
Coordinate system numbers
SECN
Section numbers
CP
Coupled set numbers
CE
Constraint equation numbers
CLEAR
All items will be offset
STATUS
Shows which items are specified notto be offset.
3850
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/NOPR
Notes
The NOOFFSET command specifies data items not to be offset by a set of data read from a CDREAD command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
NOORDER, Lab
Re-establishes the original element ordering.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Turns element reordering on or off.
ON (or blank)
Re-establishes original element ordering (default).
OFF
Original ordering is not used and program establishes its own ordering at the beginning of the solution
phase.
Notes
If Lab = ON, the original element ordering is re-established and no automatic reordering occurs at the beginning
of the solution phase. Use Lab = OFF only to remove the effect of a previous NOORDER command. This command
affects only those elements that were defined up to the point that this command is issued. See the WSORT and
WAVES commands for reordering.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>Reset Elem Order
/NOPR
Suppresses the expanded interpreted input data listing.
SESSION: List Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Command Default
Issuing this command with no arguments suppresses the interpreted data input print out.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3851
NORA
Notes
Suppresses printout of interpreted input data, including information labeled as "Notes." When this printout is
not suppressed, the data input to the analysis is echoed to the output file in an expanded format. Printout is
suppressed until a /GOPR or /GO command is read.
Use of /NOPR is not recommended when the graphical user interface (GUI) is active. The GUI sometimes issues
"hidden" /NOPR and /GOPR command sequences, which will countermand user-issued /NOPR commands, thus
making the use of /NOPR in the GUI environment unpredictable.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Rigid Region
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Solution>Time Controls>Time Step Prediction
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Smooth Data
NORA, AREA, NDIR
Rotates nodal coordinate systems to surface normal
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
AREA
The area number containing the nodes to be rotated to their normals. If ALL, applies to all selected areas
(see the ASEL command). If AREA = P, graphical picking is enabled.
NDIR
Direction of the normal. If NDIR = -1, the nodal coordinate system is rotated in the opposite direction of the
surface normal. The default is the same direction as the surface normal.
Notes
The NORA command rotates the X-axis of the nodal coordinate system to the surface normal. The rotated nodal
coordinate systems may be displayed through the /PSYMB command. In case multiple areas are selected, there
could be conflicts at the boundaries. If a node belongs to two areas that have a different normal, its nodal coordinate system will be rotated to the area normal with the lowest number. You can use the AREVERSE and
ANORM commands to rotate the surface normals in the appropriate direction. Keep the following in mind when
using the NORA command:
3852
If the nodal coordinate system is parallel to the global Cartesian system, it is not displayed through the
/PSYMB command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/NORMAL
Previously specified rotation on the selected nodes are overridden.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>On Areas
NORL, LINE, AREA, NDIR
Rotates nodal coordinate systems perpendicular to line normal
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LINE
Line number containing the nodes to be rotated. If ALL, applies to all selected lines (see the LSEL command).
If LINE = P, graphical picking is enabled.
AREA
The area number containing the selected lines. The normal of the line(s) selected is supposed to lie on this
area. Defaults to the lowest numbered selected area containing the line number.
NDIR
Direction of the normal. If NDIR = -1, the nodal coordinate system is rotated in the opposite direction of the
line normal. The default is the same direction as the surface normal.
Notes
The NORL command rotates the X-axis of the nodal coordinate perpendicular to the line normal. The rotated
nodal coordinate systems may be displayed through the /PSYMB command. In case multiple lines are selected,
there could be conflicts at the boundaries. If a node belongs to two lines that have a different normal, its nodal
coordinate system will be rotated to the line normal with the lowest number. Keep the following in mind when
using the NORL command:
If the nodal coordinate system is parallel to the global Cartesian system, it is not displayed through the
/PSYMB command.
Previously specified rotation on the selected nodes are overridden.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>with Area
/NORMAL, WN, KEY
Allows displaying area elements by top or bottom faces.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3853
NPLOT
KEY
Display key:
0
No face distinction.
1
Show only area elements having their positive normals directed toward the viewing point.
1
Show only area elements having their positive normals directed away from the viewing point.
Command Default
Do not distinguish between top face and bottom face elements.
Notes
/NORMAL allows you to select area elements and area plots by the top or bottom faces. It is useful for checking
the normal directions on shell elements. The positive normal (element Z direction) is defined by the right-hand
rule following the node I, J, K, L input direction. This command is available only with raster or hidden-line displays,
for WIN32 or X11 2-D displays only.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Shell Normals
NPLOT, KNUM
Displays nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KNUM
Node number key:
0
No node numbers on display.
1
Include node numbers on display. See also /PNUM command.
Notes
Produces a node display. Only selected nodes [NSEL] are displayed. Elements need not be defined. See the DSYS
command for display coordinate system.
This command is valid in any processor.
3854
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NREAD
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>with Area
Utility Menu>Plot>Nodes
NPRINT, N
Defines which time points stored are to be listed.
POST26: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
N
List data associated with every N time (or frequency) point(s), beginning with the first point stored (defaults
to 1).
Command Default
List all stored points.
Notes
Defines which time (or frequency) points within the range stored are to be listed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>List
NREAD, Fname, Ext, -Reads nodes from a file.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to NODE if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3855
NREFINE
Notes
The read operation is not necessary in a standard ANSYS run but is provided as a convenience to users wanting
to read a coded node file, such as from another mesh generator or from a CAD/CAM program. Data should be
formatted as produced with the NWRITE command. The element types [ET] must be defined before the file is
read so that the file may be read properly. Only nodes that are within the node range specified with the NRRANG
command are read from the file. Duplicate nodes already in the database will be overwritten. The file is rewound
before and after reading. Reading continues until the end of the file.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>Read Node File
NREFINE, NN1, NN2, NINC, LEVEL, DEPTH, POST, RETAIN
Refines the mesh around specified nodes.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NN1, NN2, NINC
Nodes (NN1 to NN2 in increments of NINC) around which the mesh is to be refined. NN2 defaults to NN1, and
NINC defaults to 1. If NN1 = ALL, NN2 and NINC are ignored and all selected nodes are used for refinement.
If NN1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NN1 (NN2 and NINC are ignored).
LEVEL
Amount of refinement to be done. Specify the value of LEVEL as an integer from 1 to 5, where a value of 1
provides minimal refinement, and a value of 5 provides maximum refinement (defaults to 1).
DEPTH
Depth of mesh refinement in terms of number of elements outward from the indicated nodes (defaults to
1).
POST
Type of postprocessing to be done after element splitting, in order to improve element quality:
OFF
No postprocessing will be done.
SMOOTH
Smoothing will be done. Node locations may change.
CLEAN
Smoothing and cleanup will be done. Existing elements may be deleted, and node locations may change
(default).
RETAIN
Flag indicating whether quadrilateral elements must be retained in the refinement of an all-quadrilateral
mesh. (The ANSYS program ignores the RETAIN argument when you are refining anything other than a
quadrilateral mesh.)
3856
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NRLSUM
ON
The final mesh will be composed entirely of quadrilateral elements, regardless of the element quality
(default).
OFF
The final mesh may include some triangular elements in order to maintain element quality and provide
transitioning.
Notes
NREFINE performs local mesh refinement around the specified nodes. By default, the indicated elements are
split to create new elements with 1/2 the edge length of the original elements (LEVEL = 1).
NREFINE refines all area elements and tetrahedral volume elements that are adjacent to the specified nodes.
Any volume elements that are adjacent to the specified nodes, but are not tetrahedra (for example, hexahedra,
wedges, and pyramids), are not refined.
You cannot use mesh refinement on a solid model that contains initial conditions at nodes [IC], coupled nodes
[CP family of commands], constraint equations [CE family of commands], or boundary conditions or loads applied
directly to any of its nodes or elements. This applies to nodes and elements anywhere in the model, not just in
the region where you want to request mesh refinement. For additional restrictions on mesh refinement, see
Revising Your Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Refine At>Nodes
NRLSUM, SIGNIF, Label
Specifies the Naval Research Laboratory (NRL) sum mode combination method.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SIGNIF
Combine only those modes whose significance level exceeds the SIGNIF threshold. For single point, multipoint, or DDAM response (SPOPT,SPRS, MPRS or DDAM), the significance level of a mode is defined as the
mode coefficient of the mode, divided by the maximum mode coefficient of all modes. Any mode whose
significance level is less than SIGNIF is considered insignificant and is not contributed to the mode combinations. The higher the SIGNIF threshold, the fewer the number of modes combined. SIGNIF defaults to
0.001. If SIGNIF is specified as 0.0, it is taken as 0.0. (This mode combination method is not valid for SPOPT,PSD.)
Label
Label identifying the combined mode solution output.
DISP
Displacement solution (default). Displacements, stresses, forces, etc., are available.
VELO
Velocity solution. Velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc., are available.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3857
NROPT
ACEL
Acceleration solution. Accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc., are available.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7. This mode combination method is usually used for SPOPT,DDAM.
Product Restrictions:
NRLSUM is not allowed in ANSYS Professional.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
NROPT, Option, --, Adptky
Specifies the Newton-Raphson options in a static or full transient analysis.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Option
Option key:
AUTO
Let the program choose the option (default).
FULL
Use full Newton-Raphson.
MODI
Use modified Newton-Raphson.
INIT
Use the previously computed matrix (initial-stiffness).
UNSYM
Use full Newton-Raphson with unsymmetric matrices of elements where the unsymmetric option exists
(see Newton-Raphson Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide for more information).
--
Unused field.
Adptky
Adaptive descent key:
3858
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NROTAT
ON
Use adaptive descent (default if frictional contact exists; if one of the elements CONTAC12 or CONTAC52
is present; or if plasticity exists and one of the elements PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, or PIPE60 is present).
Explicit ON is valid only if Option = FULL.
OFF
Do not use adaptive descent (default in all other cases).
Notes
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
Indicates the Newton-Raphson option used to solve the nonlinear equations in a static or full transient analysis.
If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
NROTAT, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Rotates nodal coordinate systems into the active system.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Rotate nodes from NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1 = ALL, NODE2
and NINC are ignored and all selected nodes [NSEL] are rotated. If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
Command Default
No automatic nodal rotation.
Notes
Rotates nodal coordinate systems into the active coordinate system. Nodal coordinate systems may be automatically rotated into the active (global or local) coordinate system as follows: Rotations in Cartesian systems will
have nodal x directions rotated parallel to the Cartesian X direction. Rotations in cylindrical, spherical or toroidal
systems will have the nodal x directions rotated parallel to the R direction. Nodes at (or near) a zero radius location
should not be rotated. Nodal coordinate directions may be displayed [/PSYMB]. Nodal forces and constraints
will also appear rotated when displayed if the nodal coordinate system is rotated. For FLOTRAN analyses, nodal
coordinate systems should only be rotated parallel to the global Cartesian system.
ANSYS LS-DYNA (explicit dynamics) does not support the NROTAT command. If you have rotated nodes in the
implicit phase of an implicit-to-explicit sequential solution, you must rotate the nodes back to the global Cartesian
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3859
NRRANG
direction before switching from implicit to explicit elements (ETCHG,ITE). Use the EDNROT command in the
explicit run to maintain the same displacement constraints as were used on rotated nodes in the implicit run.
Note When the nodal coordinate systems are defined, they remain parallel to the global Cartesian
system unless subsequently rotated.
Previously specified rotations on the specified nodes are overridden.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>RotateNode>To Active CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Active CS
NRRANG, NMIN, NMAX, NINC
Specifies the range of nodes to be read from the node file.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NMIN, NMAX, NINC
Node range is defined from NMIN (defaults to 1) to NMAX (defaults to 99999999) in steps of NINC (defaults to
1).
Notes
Defines the range of nodes to be read [NREAD] from the node file. Also implies an element range since only
elements fully attached to these nodes will be read from the element file.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>Read Node File
NSCALE, INC, NODE1, NODE2, NINC, RX, RY, RZ
Generates a scaled set of nodes from a pattern of nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
INC
Do this scaling operation one time, incrementing all nodes in the given pattern by INC. If INC = 0, nodes will
be redefined at the scaled locations.
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Scale nodes from pattern of nodes beginning with NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC
(defaults to 1). If NODE1 = ALL, NODE2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE1
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
3860
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSEL
RX, RY, RZ
Scale factor ratios. Scaling is relative to the origin of the active coordinate system (RR, R, RZ for cylindrical,
RR, R, R for spherical or toroidal). If absolute value of ratio > 1.0, pattern is enlarged. If < 1.0, pattern is reduced. Ratios default to 1.0 (each).
Notes
Generates a scaled pattern of nodes from a given node pattern. Scaling is done in the active coordinate system.
Nodes in the pattern may have been generated in any coordinate system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Nodes>Scale & Copy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Nodes>Scale & Move
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Scale>Nodes>Scale & Copy
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Scale>Nodes>Scale & Move
NSEL, Type, Item, Comp, VMIN, VMAX, VINC, KABS
Selects a subset of nodes.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Restore the full set.
NONE
Unselect the full set.
INVE
Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT
Display the current select status.
The following fields are used only with Type = S, R, A, or U:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3861
NSEL
Item
Label identifying data. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a component
label. If Item = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). Defaults to NODE.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
VMIN
Minimum value of item range. Ranges are node numbers, set numbers, coordinate values, load values, or
result values as appropriate for the item. A component name (as specified on the CM command) may also
be substituted for VMIN (VMAX and VINC are ignored).
VMAX
Maximum value of item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN for input values. For result values, VMAX defaults to infinity if VMIN is positive, or to zero if VMIN is negative. If VMIN = VMAX, a tolerance of 0.005x VMIN is used,
or 1.0E-6 if VMIN=0.0. If VMAX VMIN, a tolerance of 1.0E-8x (VMAX-VMIN) is used.
VINC
Value increment within range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for node and set numbers). Defaults
to 1. VINC cannot be negative.
KABS
Absolute value key:
0
Check sign of value during selection.
1
Use absolute value during selection (sign ignored).
Command Default
All nodes are selected.
Notes
Selects a subset of nodes. For example, to select a new set of nodes based on node numbers 1 through 7, use
NSEL,S,NODE,,1,7. The subset is used when the ALL label is entered (or implied) on other commands, such as
NLIST,ALL. Only data identified by node number are selected. Data are flagged as selected and unselected; no
data are actually deleted from the database.
When selecting nodes by results, the full graphics value is used, regardless of whether PowerGraphics is on.
Solution result data consists of two types, 1) nodal degree of freedom--results initially calculated at the nodes
(such as displacement, temperature, pressure, etc.), and 2) element--results initially calculated elsewhere (such
as at an element integration point or thickness location) and then recalculated at the nodes (such as stresses,
strains, etc.). Various element results also depend upon the recalculation method and the selected results location
[AVPRIN, RSYS, FORCE, LAYER and SHELL].
You must have all the nodes (corner and midside nodes) on the external face of the element selected to use
Item = EXT.
This command is valid in any processor.
3862
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSEL
NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels NSEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KABS
Valid item and component labels for input values are:
Item
Comp
Description
NODE
Node number.
EXT
Nodes on exterior of selected elements (ignore remaining fields).
LOC
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z location in the active coordinate system.
ANG
XY, YZ, ZX
THXY, THYZ, or THZX rotation angle.
Master node number.
CP
Coupled set number.
CE
Constraint equation set number.
Any of X, Y, or Z structural displacements. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
UX, UY, UZ
X, Y, or Z structural displacement. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
ROT
Any of X, Y, or Z structural rotations. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
X, Y, or Z structural rotation. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, Temperature.
. . ., TTOP
"
PRES
Pressure.
"
VOLT
Electric potential.
"
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
"
Any of X, Y, or Z fluid velocities.
"
VX, VY, VZ
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity.
"
Any of X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potentials. Amplitude only, if
complex.
"
AX, AY, AZ
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
CURR
Current.
"
EMF
Electromotive force drop.
"
ENKE, ENDS
Turbulent kinetic energy or energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
Any of X, Y, or Z structural forces. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
FX, FY, FZ
X, Y, or Z structural force. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
Any of X, Y, or Z structural moments. Amplitude only, if complex
"
MX, MY, MZ
X, Y, or Z structural moment. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
HEAT, HBOT, HE2,
HE3, . . ., HTOP
Heat flow.
"
FLOW
Fluid flow.
"
AMPS
Current flow.
"
FLUX
Magnetic flux.
"
CSG
Any of X, Y, or Z magnetic current segment components. Amplitude
only, if complex.
"
CSGX, CSGY,
X, Y, or Z magnetic current segment component. Amplitude only, if
complex.
CSGZY,
if complex.
CHRG
Electric charge.
"
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3863
NSEL
Valid Item and Component Labels NSEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KABS
Valid item and component labels for input values are:
Item
"
Comp
Description
CHRGD
Electric charge density.
TEMP
Nodal temperature.
"
FLUE
Nodal fluence.
"
HGEN
Nodal heat generation rate.
"
JS
Any of X, Y, or Z current densities. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
JSX, JSY, JSZ
X, Y, or Z current density. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
MVDI
Magnetic virtual displacements flag.
BF
NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels for Nodal DOF Result Values
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural displacement or vector sum.
ROT
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural rotation or vector sum.
TEMP
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
VOLT
Electric potential.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential or vector sum.
CURR
Current.
EMF
Electromotive force drop.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (FLOTRAN).
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels for Element Result Values
Item
S
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT, EQV
Stress intensity or equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).
"
1,2,3
Principal total strain.
"
INT, EQV
Total strain intensity or total equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT, EQV
Elastic strain intensity or elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1,2,3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT, EQV
Plastic strain intensity or plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
1,2,3
Principal creep strain.
EPTO
EPEL
EPPL
EPCR
"
3864
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSEL
Item
"
Comp
Description
INT, EQV
Creep strain intensity or creep equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT, EQV
Thermal strain intensity or thermal equivalent strain.
EPTH
EPSW
Swelling strain.
NL
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
STAT1
Contact status:
CONT
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
"
PENE
Contact penetration.
"
PRES
Contact pressure.
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress.
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction).
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic forces or vector sum.
TOPO
1.
Densities used for topological optimization. This applies to nodes
attached to the following types of elements: PLANE2, PLANE82,
SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95.
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels for FLOTRAN Nodal Result Values
Item
Comp
Description
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3865
NSLA
Item
Comp
Description
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
CMUV
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Select Nodes to Maintain
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
NSLA, Type, NKEY
Selects those nodes associated with the selected areas.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of node select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
NKEY
Specifies whether only interior area nodes are to be selected:
0
Select only nodes interior to selected areas.
3866
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSLE
1
Select all nodes (interior to area, interior to lines, and at keypoints) associated with the selected areas.
Notes
Valid only if the nodes were generated by an area meshing operation [AMESH, VMESH] on a solid model that
contains the selected areas.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
NSLE, Type, NodeType, Num
Selects those nodes attached to the selected elements.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of node select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
NodeType
Label identifying type of nodes to consider when selecting:
ALL
Select all nodes of the selected elements (default).
ACTIVE
Select only the active nodes. An active node is a node that contributes DOFs to the model.
INACTIVE
Select only inactive nodes (such as orientation or radiation).
CORNER
Select only corner nodes.
MID
Select only midside nodes.
POS
Select nodes in position Num.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3867
NSLK
FACE
Select nodes on face Num.
Num
Position or face number for Nodes = POS or FACE.
Notes
NSLE selects NodeType nodes attached to the currently-selected set of elements. Only nodes on elements in
the currently-selected element set can be selected.
Note When using degenerate hexahedral elements, NSLE, U,CORNER and NSLE,S,MID will not select
the same set of nodes because some nodes appear as both corner and midside nodes.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>CMS>CMS Superelements>By Picking
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
NSLK, Type
Selects those nodes associated with the selected keypoints.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of node select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Notes
Valid only if the nodes were generated by a keypoint meshing operation [KMESH, LMESH, AMESH, VMESH] on
a solid model that contains the selected keypoints.
This command is valid in any processor.
3868
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSLL
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
NSLL, Type, NKEY
Selects those nodes associated with the selected lines.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of node select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
NKEY
Specifies whether only interior line nodes are to be selected:
0
Select only nodes interior to selected lines.
1
Select all nodes (interior to line and at keypoints) associated with the selected lines.
Notes
Valid only if the nodes were generated by a line meshing operation [LMESH, AMESH, VMESH] on a solid model
that contains the associated lines.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3869
NSLV
NSLV, Type, NKEY
Selects those nodes associated with the selected volumes.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of node select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
NKEY
Specifies whether only interior volume nodes are to be selected:
0
Select only nodes interior to selected volumes.
1
Select all nodes (interior to volume, interior to areas, interior to lines, and at keypoints) associated with
the selected volumes.
Notes
Valid only if the nodes were generated by a volume meshing operation [VMESH] on a solid model that contains
the selected volumes.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
NSMOOTH, NPASS
Smooths selected nodes among selected elements.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NPASS
Number of smoothing passes. Defaults to 3.
3870
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSOL
Notes
Repositions each selected node at the average position of its immediate neighbors on the selected elements.
The node positions converge after some number of smoothing passes. For some initial conditions, NPASS may
need to be much larger than 3. If the boundary of a mesh is to be undisturbed (usually desirable), the boundary
nodes should be unselected before issuing NSMOOTH.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
NSOL, NVAR, NODE, Item, Comp, Name
Specifies nodal data to be stored from the results file.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number or name assigned to this variable. Variable numbers can be 2 to NV (NUMVAR)
while the name can be an eight byte character string. Overwrites any existing results for this variable.
NODE
Node for which data are to be stored.
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a component
label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the item on printouts and displays. Defaults to a label formed by
concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels.
Notes
Stores nodal degree of freedom and solution results in a variable. For more information, see Data Interpreted in
the Nodal Coordinate System in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
NSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels NSOL, NVAR,NODE,Item,Comp,Name
Valid item and component labels for nodal degree of freedom results are:
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural displacement.
ROT
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural rotation.
TEMP[1]
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
VOLT
Electric potential.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3871
NSOL
Valid Item and Component Labels NSOL, NVAR,NODE,Item,Comp,Name
Valid item and component labels for nodal degree of freedom results are:
Item
Comp
MAG
Description
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity in a fluid analysis, or
X, Y, or Z nodal velocity in an ANSYS structural transient dynamic
analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS).
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential in an electromagnetic analysis,
or
X, Y, or Z acceleration in an ANSYS structural transient dynamic
analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS).
CURR
Current.
EMF
Electromotive force drop.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation.
NSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels for FLOTRAN Nodal Results
Item
Comp
Description
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
CMUV
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
RDFL
Radiation heat flux.
NSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels for ANSYS LS-DYNA Nodal Results
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z nodal displacements.
ROT
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z nodal rotations.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z nodal velocities.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z nodal accelerations.
1.
3872
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use the labels TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP
instead of TEMP.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSORT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Drop Test>Time History>Graph Variables
Main Menu>Drop Test>Time History>List Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
NSORT, Item, Comp, ORDER, KABS, NUMB, SEL
Sorts nodal data.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item to be sorted on. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also
require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
ORDER
Order of sort operation:
0
Sort into descending order.
1
Sort into ascending order.
KABS
Absolute value key:
0
Sort according to real value.
1
Sort according to absolute value.
NUMB
Number of nodal data records to be sorted in ascending or descending order (ORDER) before sort is stopped
(remainder will be in unsorted sequence) (defaults to all nodes).
SEL
Allows selection of nodes in the sorted field.
(blank)
No selection (default).
SELECT
Select the nodes in the sorted list.
Command Default
Use ascending node number order.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3873
NSORT
Notes
Values are in the active coordinate system [CSYS for input data or RSYS for results data]. Various element results
also depend upon the recalculation method and the selected results location [AVPRIN, RSYS, SHELL, ESEL, and
NSEL]. If simultaneous load cases are stored, the last sorted sequence formed from any load case applies to all
load cases. Use NUSORT to restore the original order. This command is not valid with PowerGraphics.
NSORT - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels NSORT, Item,Comp,ORDER,KABS,NUMB,SEL
Valid item and component labels for input values are:
Item
Comp
Description
LOC
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z location.
ANG
XY, YZ, ZX
THXY, THYZ, or THZX rotation angle.
NSORT - Valid Item and Component Labels for Nodal DOF Result Values
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural displacement or vector sum.
ROT
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural rotation or vector sum.
TEMP
Temperature (includes TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP values).
PRES
Pressure.
VOLT
Electric potential.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential or vector sum.
CURR
Current.
EMF
Electromotive force drop.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (FLOTRAN).
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
NSORT - Valid Item and Component Labels for Element Result Values
Item
S
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2,3
Principal stress.
"
INT, EQV
Stress intensity or equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total strain.
"
INT, EQV
Total strain intensity or total equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT, EQV
Elastic strain intensity or elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
EPTO
EPEL
EPPL
"
3874
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSORT
Item
"
Comp
Description
INT, EQV
Plastic strain intensity or plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT, EQV
Creep strain intensity or creep equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT, EQV
Thermal strain intensity or thermal equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component large strain.
1, 2, 3
Principal large strain.
EPCR
EPTH
EPLS
"
EPSW
Swelling strain.
NL
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
STAT1
Contact status:
CONT
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
"
PENE
Contact penetration.
"
PRES
Contact pressure.
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress.
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction).
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic forces or vector sum.
TOPO
1.
Densities used for topological optimization. This applies to nodes
attached to the following types of elements: PLANE2, PLANE82,
SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95.
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3875
NSTORE
NSORT - Valid Item and Component Labels for FLOTRAN Nodal Result Values
Item
Comp
Description
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Sorted Listing>Sort Nodes
Utility Menu>Parameters>Get Scalar Data
NSTORE, TINC
Defines which time points are to be stored.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TINC
Store data associated with every TINC time (or frequency) point(s), within the previously defined range of
TMIN to TMAX [TIMERANGE]. (Defaults to 1)
Command Default
Store every point.
Notes
Defines which time (or frequency) points within the range are to be stored.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Data
3876
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NSUBST
NSUBST, NSBSTP, NSBMX, NSBMN, Carry
Specifies the number of substeps to be taken this load step.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NSBSTP
Number of substeps to be used for this load step (i.e., the time step size or frequency increment). If automatic
time stepping is used [AUTOTS], NSBSTP defines the size of the first substep. If SOLCONTROL,ON and contact
elements TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, or CONTA174 are used, defaults to 1 or
20 substeps, depending on the physics of the problem. If SOLCONTROL,ON and none of these contact elements are used, defaults to 1 substep. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to the previously specified value (or 1,
if there is no previously specified value).
NSBMX
Maximum number of substeps to be taken (i.e., the minimum time step size) if automatic time stepping is
used. If SOLCONTROL,ON, ANSYS determines the default depending on the physics of the problem. If
SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to the previously specified value (or NSBSTP, if there is no previously specified
value).
NSBMN
Minimum number of substeps to be taken (i.e., the maximum time step size) if automatic time stepping is
used. If SOLCONTROL,ON, ANSYS determines the default depending on the physics of the problem. If
SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to the previously specified value (or 1, if there is no previously specified value).
Carry
Time step carryover key (ANSYS determines the default depending on the physics of the problem):
OFF
Use NSBSTP to define time step at start of each load step.
ON
Use final time step from previous load step as the starting time step (if automatic time stepping is used).
If SOLCONTROL,ON, ANSYS determines the default depending on the physics of the problem. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to OFF.
Notes
See DELTIM for an alternative input. It is recommended that all fields of this command be specified for solution
efficiency and robustness.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Freq and Substps
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Freq and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3877
NSVR
NSVR, ITYPE, NSTV
Defines the number of variables for user-programmable element options.
PREP7: Element Type
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> <> PP <>
ITYPE
Element type number as defined on the ET command.
NSTV
Number of extra state variables to save (must be no more than 840).
Command Default
No extra variables are saved.
Notes
Defines the number of extra variables that need to be saved for user-programmable (system-dependent) element
options, e.g., material laws through user subroutine USERPL. ITYPE must first be defined with the ET command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
NSYM, Ncomp, INC, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Generates a reflected set of nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Ncomp
Symmetry key:
X
X (or R) symmetry (default).
Y
Z
Y (or ) symmetry.
Z (or ) symmetry.
INC
Increment all nodes in the given pattern by INC to form the reflected node pattern.
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Reflect nodes from pattern beginning with NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults to
1). If NODE1 = ALL, NODE2 and NINC are ignored and pattern is all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE1 = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
3878
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/NUMBER
Notes
Generates nodes from a given node pattern by a symmetry reflection. Reflection is done in the active coordinate
system by changing a particular coordinate sign. Nodes in the pattern may have been generated in any coordinate
system. Nodal rotation angles are not reflected.
Symmetry reflection may be used with any node pattern, in any coordinate system, as many times as desired.
Reflection is accomplished by a coordinate sign change (in the active coordinate system). For example, an X-reflection in a Cartesian coordinate system generates additional nodes from a given pattern, with a node increment
added to each node number, and an X coordinate sign change. An R-reflection in a cylindrical coordinate system
gives a reflected "radial" location by changing the "equivalent" Cartesian (i.e., the Cartesian system with the same
origin as the active cylindrical system) X and Y coordinate signs. An R-reflection in a spherical coordinate system
gives a reflected "radial" location by changing the equivalent Cartesian X, Y, and Z coordinate location signs.
Nodal coordinate system rotation angles are not reflected.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Reflect>Nodes
/NUMBER, NKEY
Specifies whether numbers, colors, or both are used for displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NKEY
Numbering style:
0
Color (terminal dependent) the numbered items and show numbers.
1
Color the numbered items. Do not show the numbers.
2
Show the numbers. Do not color the items.
-1
Do not color the items or show the numbers. For contour plots, the resulting display will vary (see below).
Notes
Specifies whether numbers, colors, or both are used for numbering displays [/PNUM] of nodes, elements, keypoints,
lines, areas, and volumes.
Shading is also available for terminals configured with more than 4 color planes [/SHOW]. Color automatically
appears for certain items and may be manually controlled (off or on) for other items.
When you suppress color (NKEY = -1) your contour plots will produce different results, depending on your
graphics equipment. For non-3-D devices (X11, Win32, etc.) your contour plot will be white (no color). For 3-D
devices, such as OpenGL, the resulting display will be in color.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3879
NUMCMP
The following items are automatically given discrete colors: Boundary condition symbols [/PBC], curves on graph
displays, and distorted geometry on postprocessing displays. Contour lines in postprocessing displays are
automatically colored based upon a continuous, rather than a discrete, spectrum so that red is associated with
the highest contour value. On terminals with raster capability [/SHOW], the area between contour lines is filled
with the color of the higher contour.
Explicit entity colors or the discrete color mapping may be changed with the /COLOR command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Numbering
NUMCMP, Label
Compresses the numbering of defined items.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Items to be compressed:
NODE
Node numbers
ELEM
Element numbers
KP
Keypoint numbers
LINE
Line numbers
AREA
Area numbers
VOLU
Volume numbers
MAT
Material numbers
TYPE
Element type numbers
REAL
Real constant numbers
CP
Coupled set numbers
CE
Constraint equation numbers
3880
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NUMEXP
ALL
All item numbers
Notes
The NUMCMP command effectively compresses out unused item numbers by renumbering all the items, beginning with one and continuing throughout the model. The renumbering order follows the initial item numbering
order (that is, compression lowers the maximum number by "sliding" numbers down to take advantage of unused
or skipped numbers). All defined items are renumbered, regardless of whether or not they are actually used or
selected. Applicable related items are also checked for renumbering as described for the merge operation
[NUMMRG].
Compressing material numbers [NUMCMP,ALL or NUMCMP,MAT] does not update the material number referenced
by any of the following:
A temperature-dependent convection or surface-to-surface radiation load [SF, SFE, SFL, SFA]
Real constants for multi-material elements (PIPE17, SOLID46, SOLID65, SHELL91, SHELL99)
Section information for multi-material elements (SHELL131, SHELL132, SHELL181, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SHELL208, and SHELL209). See also the SECDATA and SECWRITE command descriptions.
Compression is usually not required unless memory space is limited and there are large gaps in the numbering
sequence.
You cannot access this command for models that have been imported from IGES files using the FACETED translator (see the IOPTN command).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Compress Numbers
NUMEXP, NUM, BEGRNG, ENDRNG, Elcalc
Specifies solutions to be expanded from reduced analyses.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NUM
The number of solutions to expand for the current load step. This value is required.
Num
Number of solutions to expand.
ALL
Expand all substeps between BEGRNG and ENDRNG (provided that ENDRNG > 0). If BEGRNG and ENDRNG
have no specified values, this option expands all substeps for the current load step.
BEGRNG, ENDRNG
Beginning and ending time (or frequency) range for expanded solutions. The default is 0 for both values.
Elcalc
The element-calculation key:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3881
NUMEXP
YES
Calculate element results, nodal loads, and reaction loads. This value is the default.
NO
Do not calculate these items.
Command Defaults
Issuing this command with no arguments is invalid. You must specify the number of solutions, or all solutions,
to expand (NUM). The default value for both the beginning (BEGRNG) and ending (ENDRNG) time or frequency is
0. The default behavior of the command is to calculate element results, nodal loads, and reaction loads (Elcalc
= YES).
Notes
Specifies a range of solutions to be expanded from analyses that use reduced or mode superposition methods
(ANTYPE,HARMIC, TRANS, or SUBSTR).
For ANTYPE,TRANS, NUM, evenly spaced solutions are expanded between time BEGRNG and time ENDRNG.
For ANTYPE,HARMIC, NUM, evenly spaced solutions are expanded between frequency BEGRNG and frequency
ENDRNG.
The first expansion in all cases is done at the first point beyond BEGRNG (that is, at BEGRNG + (ENDRNG - BEGRNG)
/ NUM)).
For a single expansion of a solution, or for multiple expansions when the solutions are not evenly spaced (such
as in a mode superposition harmonic analysis with the cluster option), ANSYS recommends issuing one or more
EXPSOL commands.
The NUMEXP command is invalid in these cases:
In a substructing analysis (ANTYPE,SUBST) when a triangularized matrix file (the .TRI file generated by
the frontal solver or the .LN22 file generated by the sparse solver) does not exist, causing ANSYS to employ
the full-resolve method.
If the full-resolve option is selected using the SEOPT command.
In both situations, use the EXPSOL command to perform a single expansion for each solution desired.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Range of Solu's
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Range of Solu's
3882
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NUMMRG
NUMMRG, Label, TOLER, GTOLER, Action, Switch
Merges coincident or equivalently defined items.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Items to be merged:
NODE
Nodes
ELEM
Elements
KP
Keypoints (will also merge lines, areas, and volumes)
MAT
Materials
TYPE
Element types
REAL
Real constants
CP
Coupled sets
CE
Constraint equations
ALL
All items
TOLER
Range of coincidence. For Label = NODE and KP, defaults to 1.0E-4 (based on maximum Cartesian coordinate
difference between nodes or keypoints). For Label = MAT, REAL, and CE, defaults to 1.0E-7 (based on difference of the values normalized by the values). Only items within range are merged. (For keypoints attached
to lines, further restrictions apply. See the GTOLER field and Merging Solid Model Entities below.)
GTOLER
Global solid model tolerance -- used only when merging keypoints attached to lines. If specified, GTOLER
will override the internal relative solid model tolerance. See Merging Solid Model Entities below.
Action
Specifies whether to merge or select coincident items.
SELE
Select coincident items but do not merge. Action = SELE is only valid for Label = NODE.
(Blank)
Merge the coincident items (default).
Switch
Specifies whether the lowest or highest numbered coincident item is retained after the merging operation.
This option does not apply to keypoints; i.e., for Label = KP, the lowest numbered keypoint is retained regardless of the Switch setting.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3883
NUMMRG
LOW
Retain the lowest numbered coincident item after the merging operation (default).
HIGH
Retain the highest numbered coincident item after the merging operation.
Notes
After issuing the command, the area and volume sizes (ASUM and VSUM) may give slightly different results. In
order to obtain the same results as before, use /FACET, /NORMAL, and ASUM / VSUM.
The merge operation is useful for tying separate, but coincident, parts of a model together. If not all items are
to be checked for merging, use the select commands (NSEL, ESEL, etc.) to select items. Only selected items are
included in the merge operation for nodes, keypoints, and elements.
By default, the merge operation retains the lowest numbered coincident item. Higher numbered coincident
items are deleted. Set Switch to HIGH to retain the highest numbered coincident item after the merging operation. Applicable related items are also checked for deleted item numbers and if found, are replaced with the
retained item number. For example, if nodes are merged, element connectivities (except superelements), mesh
item range associativity, coupled degrees of freedom, constraint equations, master degrees of freedom, gap
conditions, degree of freedom constraints, nodal force loads, nodal surface loads, and nodal body force loads
are checked. Merging material numbers [NUMMRG,ALL or NUMMRG,MAT] does not update the material number
referenced:
1.
by temperature-dependent film coefficients as part of convection load or a temperature-dependent
emissivity as part of a surface-to-surface radiation load [SF, SFE, SFL, SFA]
2.
by real constants for multi-material elements (PIPE17, SOLID46, SOLID65, SHELL91, SHELL99, SOLID191)
3.
by section data for multi-material elements (SHELL131, SHELL132, SHELL181, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SHELL208, and SHELL209).
If a unique load is defined among merged nodes, the value is kept and applied to the retained node. If loads are
not unique (not recommended), only the value on the lowest node (or highest if Switch = HIGH) will be kept,
except for "force" loads for which the values will be summed if they are not defined using tabular boundary
conditions.
Note The unused nodes (not recommended) in elements, couplings, constraint equations, etc. may
become active after the merge operation.
The Action field provides the option of visualizing the coincident items before the merging operation.
Caution: When merging entities in a model that has already been meshed, the order in which you issue
multiple NUMMRG commands is significant. If you want to merge two adjacent meshed regions that
have coincident nodes and keypoints, always merge nodes [NUMMRG,NODE] before merging keypoints
[NUMMRG,KP]. Merging keypoints before nodes can result in some of the nodes becoming "orphaned";
that is, the nodes lose their association with the solid model. Orphaned nodes can cause certain operations
(such as boundary condition transfers, surface load transfers, and so on) to fail.
After a NUMMRG,NODE, is issued, some nodes may be attached to more than one solid entity. As a result, subsequent attempts to transfer solid model loads to the elements may not be successful. Issue NUMMRG,KP to
correct this problem. Do NOT issue VCLEAR before issuing NUMMRG,KP.
3884
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NUMMRG
For NUMMRG,ELEM, elements must be identical in all aspects, including the direction of the element coordinate
system.
When working with solid models, you may have better success with the gluing operations (AGLUE, LGLUE,
VGLUE). Please read the following information when attempting to merge solid model entities.
Gluing Operations vs. Merging Operations
Adjacent, touching regions can be joined by gluing them (AGLUE, LGLUE, VGLUE) or by merging coincident
keypoints (NUMMRG,KP, which also causes merging of identical lines, areas, and volumes). In many situations,
either approach will work just fine. Some factors, however, may lead to a preference for one method over the
other.
Geometric Configuration
Gluing is possible regardless of the initial alignment or offset of the input entities. Keypoint merging is possible
only if each keypoint on one side of the face to be joined is matched by a coincident keypoint on the other side.
This is commonly the case after a symmetry reflection (ARSYM or VSYMM) or a copy (AGEN or VGEN), especially
for a model built entirely in ANSYS rather than imported from a CAD system. When the geometry is extremely
precise, and the configuration is correct for keypoint merging, NUMMRG is more efficient and robust than AGLUE
or VGLUE.
Model Accuracy
Gluing, like all ANSYS boolean operations, requires that the input entities meet the current boolean tolerance
(BTOL). Otherwise, AGLUE or VGLUE may fail. In such cases, relaxing the tolerance may allow the glue to complete.
An advantage of gluing is that it is unlikely to degrade the accuracy of a geometric model. Keypoint merging
can operate on almost any combination of entities (although you may have to override the default tolerances
on NUMMRG). However, it can also introduce or increase accuracy flaws, making later boolean operations less
likely to succeed. If the input tolerances are too large, NUMMRG can collapse out small lines, areas, or volumes
you intended to keep, possibly rendering the model unusable.
Mesh Status
Gluing, like all ANSYS boolean operations, requires that the input entities be unmeshed. Keypoint merging is
effective for meshed models under the right conditions. More information on keypoint merging follows.
Merging Solid Model Entities:
When merging solid model entities (Label = KP or ALL), keypoint locations are used as the basis for merging.
Once keypoints are merged, any higher order solid model entities (lines, areas, and volumes) attached to those
keypoints are considered for merging.
Keypoints that are attached to lines will be merged only if:
X, Y, and Z are each less than TOLER
where,
X is the X component of the distance between keypoints,
Y is the Y component of the distance between keypoints, and
Z is the Z component of the distance between keypoints;
and
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3885
NUMOFF
X2 + Y 2 + Z2
is less than 1E-5 times the length of the longest line attached to those keypoints
(internal relative solid model tolerance), or
tolerance) if specified.
X2 + Y 2 + Z2
is less than GTOLER (global solid model
The TOLER field is a consideration tolerance. If a keypoint is within TOLER of another keypoint, then those two
keypoints are candidates to be merged. If, when "moving" the higher numbered keypoint, the distance exceeds
the internal relative solid model tolerance, or the global solid model tolerance (GTOLER) if specified, the keypoints
will not be merged. Lines, areas, and volumes are considered for merging in a similar manner.
The internal relative solid model tolerance should be overridden by the global solid model tolerance (GTOLER)
only when absolutely necessary. GTOLER is an absolute tolerance; if specified, relative lengths of lines in the
model will no longer be considered in the merge operation. If GTOLER is too large, you can "merge-out" portions
of your model accidently, effectively defeaturing the model. If GTOLER is used, it is recommended that NUMMRG
be preceded by saving the database (since undesired merges of solid model entities could occur).
Note Use of the NUMMRG command does not cause changes to a model's geometry; only the topology
is affected.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Merge Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Merge Items
NUMOFF, Label, VALUE
Adds a number offset to defined items.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Apply offset number to one of the following sets of items:
NODE
Nodes
ELEM
Elements
KP
Keypoints
LINE
Lines
AREA
Areas
VOLU
Volumes
3886
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NUMSTR
MAT
Materials
TYPE
Element types
REAL
Real constants
CP
Coupled sets
SECN
Section numbers
CE
Constraint equations
CSYS
Coordinate systems
VALUE
Offset number value (cannot be negative).
Notes
Useful for offsetting current model data to prevent overlap if another model is read in. CDWRITE automatically
writes the appropriate NUMOFF commands followed by the model data to File.CDB. Therefore, when the file
is read, any model already existing in the database is offset before the model data on the file is read.
Offsetting material numbers with this command [NUMOFF,MAT] does not update the material number referenced
by any of the following:
A temperature-dependent convection or surface-to-surface radiation load [SF, SFE, SFL, SFA]
Real constants for multi-material elements (PIPE17, SOLID46, SOLID65, SHELL91, SHELL99, SOLID191)
Section information for multi-material elements (SHELL131, SHELL132, SHELL181, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SHELL208, and SHELL209). See also the SECDATA and SECWRITE command descriptions.
Therefore, a mismatch may exist between the material definitions and the material numbers referenced.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Add Num Offset
NUMSTR, Label, VALUE
Establishes starting numbers for automatically numbered items.
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Apply starting number to one of the following sets of items:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3887
NUMSTR
NODE
Node numbers. Value defaults (and is continually reset) to 1 + maximum node number in model. Cannot
be reset lower.
ELEM
Element numbers. Value defaults (and is continually reset) to 1 + maximum element number in model.
Cannot be reset lower.
KP
Keypoint numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing keypoints are not
overwritten.
LINE
Line numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing lines are not overwritten.
AREA
Area numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing areas are not overwritten.
VOLU
Volume numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing volumes are not
overwritten.
DEFA
Default. Returns all starting numbers to their default values.
VALUE
Starting number value.
Notes
Establishes starting numbers for various items that may have numbers automatically assigned (such as element
numbers with the EGEN command, and node and solid model entity numbers with the mesh [AMESH, VMESH,
etc.] commands). Use NUMSTR,STAT to display settings. Use NUMSTR,DEFA to reset all specifications back to
defaults. Defaults may be lowered by deleting and compressing items (i.e., NDELE and NUMCMP,NODE for
nodes, etc.).
Note A mesh clear operation (VCLEAR, ACLEAR, LCLEAR, and KCLEAR) automatically sets starting
node and element numbers to the highest unused numbers. If a specific starting node or element
number is desired, issue NUMSTR after the clear operation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Reset Start Num
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Set Start Number
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Start Num Status
3888
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NWPAVE
NUMVAR, NV
Specifies the number of variables allowed in POST26.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NV
Allow storage for NV variables. 200 maximum are allowed. Defaults to 10 (except for an explicit dynamics
analysis, which defaults to 30). TIME (variable 1) should also be included in this number.
Command Default
Allow storage for 10 variables (30 variables for an explicit dynamics analysis).
Notes
Specifies the number of variables allowed for data read from the results file and for data resulting from an operation (if any). For efficiency, NV should not be larger than necessary. NV cannot be changed after data storage
begins.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>File
NUSORT
Restores original order for nodal data.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This command restores the nodal data to its original order (sorted in ascending node number sequence) after
an NSORT command. Changing the selected nodal set [NSEL] also restores the original nodal order.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Sorted Listing>Unsort Nodes
NWPAVE, N1, N2, N3, N4, N5, N6, N7, N8, N9
Moves the working plane origin to the average location of nodes.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
N1, N2, N3, N4, N5, N6, N7, N8, N9
Nodes used in calculation of the average. At least one must be defined. If N1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3889
NWPLAN
Notes
Averaging is based on the active coordinate system.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP to>Nodes
NWPLAN, WN, NORIG, NXAX, NPLAN
Defines the working plane using three nodes.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number whose viewing direction will be modified to be normal to the working plane (defaults to
1). If WN is a negative value, the viewing direction will not be modified. If fewer than three points are used,
the viewing direction of window WN will be used instead to define the normal to the working plane.
NORIG
Node number defining the origin of the working plane coordinate system. If NORIG = P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NXAX
Node number defining the x-axis orientation (defaults to the x-axis being parallel to the global X-axis; or if
the normal to the working plane is parallel to the global X-axis, then defaults to being parallel to the global
Y-axis).
NPLAN
Node number defining the working plane (the normal defaults to the present display view [/VIEW] of window
WN).
Notes
Defines a working plane to assist in picking operations using three nodes as an alternate to the WPLANE command.
The three nodes also define the working plane coordinate system. A minimum of one node (at the working plane
origin) is required. Immediate mode may also be active. See the WPSTYL command to set the style of the
working plane display.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>Sphere>At Node
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Align WP with>Nodes
3890
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
NWRITE
NWRITE, Fname, Ext, --, KAPPND
Writes nodes to a file.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to NODE if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
KAPPND
Append key:
0
Rewind file before the write operation.
1
Append data to the end of the existing file.
Notes
Writes selected nodes [NSEL] to a file. The write operation is not necessary in a standard ANSYS run but is provided
as a convenience to users wanting a coded node file. Data are written in a coded format. The format used is (I8,
6G20.13) to write out NODE,X,Y,Z,THXY,THYZ,THZX. If the last number is zero (i.e., THZX = 0), or the last set of
numbers are zero, they are not written but are left blank. Therefore, you must use a formatted read to process
this file. Coordinate values are in the global Cartesian system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>Write Node File
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3891
3892
O Commands
OMEGA, OMEGX, OMEGY, OMEGZ, KSPIN
Specifies the rotational velocity of the structure.
SOLUTION: Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> FL PP ED
OMEGX, OMEGY, OMEGZ
Rotational velocity of the structure about the global Cartesian X, Y, and Z axes.
KSPIN
Spin softening key:
0
No modification of stiffness matrix due to rotation.
1
Decrease radial stiffness due to rotation (i.e., include spin softening effects).
Notes
This command specifies the rotational velocity of the structure about each of the global Cartesian axes (righthand rule). Rotational velocities may be defined in analysis types ANTYPE,STATIC, HARMIC (full or mode superposition), TRANS (full or mode superposition), and SUBSTR. Rotational velocities are combined with the element
mass matrices to form a body force load vector term. Units are radians/time. Related commands are ACEL, CGLOC,
CGOMGA, DCGOMG, and DOMEGA.
The KSPIN option allows adjusting the stiffness of a rotating body to account for dynamic mass effects. The adjustment is called spin-softening and applies to a modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) or harmonic (ANTYPE,HARM) analysis
only. The adjustment approximates the effects of geometry changes caused by large-deflection circumferential
motion in a small-deflection analysis. The KSPIN option is not intended for a large-deflection static analysis; in
such a case, use the NLGEOM,ON command to account for this effect. The command is usually used in conjunction
with prestressing (PSTRES).
The overall stiffness matrix should not be reused (KUSE) if OMEGA command parameters change between
substeps. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for matrix details.
In a modal harmonic or transient analysis, you must apply the load in the modal portion of the analysis. ANSYS
calculates a load vector and writes it to the mode shape file, which you can apply via the LVSCALE command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>Global
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>Global
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>Global
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>Global
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPADD
OPADD, NRES, NUM1, NUM2, C1, C2
Forms a set of optimization parameters by adding two sets.
OPTIMIZATION: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NRES
Number assigned to results set. If same as existing set, the existing values will be overwritten by these results
(defaults to next available set number).
NUM1
Number of first design set to be used in operation.
NUM2
Number of second design set to be used in operation (may be blank).
C1
Scale factor applied to NUM1 (defaults to 1.0).
C2
Scale factor applied to NUM2 (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
Forms a result set of parameters by adding two existing design sets according to the operation:
NRES = (C1 x NUM1) + (C2 x NUM2)
OPADD can also be used to scale results for a single set. If no set number is specified for the results set (NRES),
it defaults to the next available set number. Because no compression of set numbers is done, the next available
set number will be either 1 + the highest existing set number, or 1 + the highest set number used (if sets with
higher numbers previously existed but have been removed).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Combine
OPANL, Fname, Ext, -Defines the analysis file to be used for optimization looping.
OPTIMIZATION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
3894
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPDATA
Command Default
If interactive, no default; if batch, use the batch input stream (File.BAT).
Notes
The optimization looping file must be specified for an optimization which is performed interactively. The file
must exist at the time OPANL is issued. In this file, where the /PREP7 and /OPTcommands occur, they must be
the first nonblank characters on the line (i.e., do not use the $ delimiter on any /PREP7 or /OPT command lines).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Analysis File>Assign
OPCLR
Clears the optimization database.
OPTIMIZATION: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Clears the optimization database. All settings are reset to their default values, and all design sets are deleted.
This command is useful between multiple (independent) optimization analyses in the same batch run or interactive session.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Opt Database>Clear & Reset
OPDATA, Fname, Ext, -Identifies the file where optimization data is to be saved.
OPTIMIZATION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to OPT if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3895
OPDEL
Command Default
Optimization data is saved on File.OPT.
Notes
Identifies the file where optimization data is to be automatically saved during looping. Automatic saves occur
at the end of each loop or iteration, and upon finishing out of the optimizer [FINISH]. (To save the data elsewhere
in the optimizer, use OPSAVE.) Optimization data written to the file include DVs, SVs, saved design sets, analysis
file name, etc. The data can be restored via the OPRESU command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Controls
OPDEL, NSET1, NSET2
Deletes optimization design sets.
OPTIMIZATION: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET1
First design set in range to be deleted. Defaults to 0. If NSET1 is blank and NSET2 is 1, all sets from the
lowest existing set number to NSET2 will be deleted. If NSET1 = ALL, all design sets are removed.
NSET2
Last design set in range to be deleted. Defaults to NSET1.
Notes
Deletes the design sets in a specified range. All sets occurring within that range (i.e., NSET1 N NSET2, where
N is an existing set number) are permanently removed from the optimization database. The original set numbers
are retained for remaining design sets. Note that no compression of set numbers is done. Thus, if the highest set
is deleted, the next available set number will be the previously existing highest set number + 1. (A maximum of
130 design sets can be stored in the optimization database.)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Select/Delete
OPEQN, KFOBJ, KFSV, KWGHT, KOPPR, INOPT
Controls curve fitting for the subproblem approximation method.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KFOBJ
Objective function curve fit:
3896
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPEQN
0
Quadratic plus cross-term curve fit for objective function (default).
1
Linear curve fit.
2
Quadratic curve fit.
3
Quadratic plus cross-term fit (same as 0).
KFSV
State variables curve fit:
0
Quadratic curve fit for state variables (default).
1
Linear curve fit.
2
Quadratic curve fit (same as 0).
3
Quadratic plus cross-term curve fit.
KWGHT
Weighting factors:
0
Weights applied to design sets based on triple products of distance in design space, objective function
values, and feasibility/infeasibility (KWGHT = 2, 3, and 4, below) (default).
1
All weights set to unity.
2
Weights based on distance in design space.
3
Weights based on objective function values.
4
Weights based on feasibility/infeasibility.
KOPPR
Optimization printout:
0
No printout of approximation data (default).
N
Printout every nth optimization loop.
INOPT
Approximation reformulation:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3897
OPERATE
0
Approximations are updated every loop (default).
N
Approximations are completely reformulated every nth loop.
Notes
Controls the curve fitting for the optimization approximations used with the subproblem approximation method
[OPTYPE,SUBP]. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
OPERATE
Specifies "Operation data" as the subsequent status topic.
POST26: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
OPEXE
Initiates optimization looping.
OPTIMIZATION: Run
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Initiates optimization looping using commands condensed from the analysis file [OPANL]. The type of optimization to be performed is specified by the OPTYPE command. Upon issuing this command, optimization looping
begins and the design variables are updated as necessary based on the type of optimization chosen. Control
remains with the ANSYS program until convergence or termination occurs, at which time the commands occurring
after OPEXE are executed. This command is not allowed within a do-loop [*DO].
3898
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPFACT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Run
OPFACT, Type
Defines the type of factorial evaluation to be performed.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Type of factorial evaluation. Number of iterations is determined by the number of design variables (n).
FULL
Perform a full factorial analysis (default); 2**n iterations are required. n must be 7.
1/2
1/4
1/8
Perform a 1/2 fractional factorial analysis. (1/2)*2**n iterations are required. n must be 8.
Perform a 1/4 fractional factorial analysis. (1/4)*2**n iterations are required. n must be 9.
Perform a 1/8 fractional factorial analysis. (1/8)*2**n iterations are required. n must be 10.
1/16
Perform a 1/16 fractional factorial analysis. (1/16)*2**n iterations are required. n must be 10.
1/32
Perform a 1/32 fractional factorial analysis. (1/32)*2**n iterations are required. n must be 10.
1/64
Perform a 1/64 fractional factorial analysis. (1/64)*2**n iterations are required. n must be 10.
Command Default
Perform a full factorial analysis.
Notes
This command is valid for the factorial evaluation method of optimization [OPTYPE,FACT]. The factorial evaluation
is defined as either full or fractional. The number of iterations performed is dependent on the number of design
variables that have been defined (n).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3899
OPFRST
OPFRST, NITR, SIZE, DELTA
Defines specifications for the first order optimization method.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NITR
Maximum number of optimization iterations for the next execution [OPEXE]. Defaults to previously specified
value, if any, otherwise defaults to 10.
SIZE
Limit (in percent) that is applied to the size of each line search step. For example, setting SIZE = 10 will limit
design variable changes to 10 percent of the maximum range of design space (defined by feasible design
variable limits specified on OPVAR commands) at each iteration. Defaults to previously specified value, if
any; otherwise, defaults to 100 (percent).
DELTA
The forward difference (in percent) applied to the design variable range that is used to compute the gradient.
For example, the shift in a DV is DELTA*(MAX - MIN)/100, where MIN and MAX are specified on the OPVAR
command. Defaults to previously specified value, if any; otherwise, defaults to 0.2 (percent).
Command Default
NITR = 10, SIZE = 100, DELTA = 0.2.
Notes
This command is valid for the first order method of optimization [OPTYPE,FIRST].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
OPGRAD, Dset, DELTA
Specifies which design set will be used for gradient evaluation.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Dset
BEST
Use the best design set as the evaluation point (default).
LAST
Use the last design set as the evaluation point.
n
Use design set number n as the evaluation point.
3900
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPKEEP
DELTA
The forward difference applied to the design variable range that is used to compute the gradient. For example,
the shift in a design variable (DV) is defined as DELTA*(MAX-MIN)/100, with MIN and MAX as specified on
the OPVAR command. Defaults to 0.5.
Command Default
As described for each argument above.
Notes
This command is valid for the gradient evaluation method of optimization [OPTYPE,GRAD]. OPGRAD specifies
which point (design set) in design space will be used to evaluate the gradient and what the forward difference
will be.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
OPKEEP, Key
Specifies whether to save the best-set results and database file.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Key
Save key:
OFF
Do not save the results and database files for the best design set (default).
ON
Save results and database files (File.BRST and File.BDB) for the best design set during optimization
looping.
Command Default
Do not save the database and results for the best design set.
Notes
Specifies whether or not the results file and database file corresponding to the best design set (based on all existing sets) should be saved during optimization. The saved files will be named File.BRST (or File.BRTH for
thermal analysis, File.BRMG for magnetic analysis, File.BRFL for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis) and File.BDB. If Key
= ON, both files will be saved at the end of each optimization loop which results in a new best design set. File.RST
(results) and File.DB (database) will be saved as usual for the last design set, regardless of the Key setting. If
multiple analyses are done within an optimization loop, then only the last analysis is considered for the Key =
ON option. For example, if a thermal analysis is followed by a stress analysis, the files saved for the best set will
be File.BRST and File.BDB, which will both correspond to the structural analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3901
OPLFA
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Controls
OPLFA, Name, Effect, EMIN, EMAX
Displays the results of a factorial evaluation.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as the objective function or a state
variable [OPVAR].
Effect
Display effects for parameter Name.
MAIN
Display main effects (default).
2FAC
Display two-factor interactions.
3FAC
Display three-factor interactions.
EMIN
Minimum value of effect to be displayed. Default - computed minimum.
EMAX
Maximum value of effect to be displayed. Default - computed maximum.
Notes
Displays the results of a factorial analysis in bar chart form. Only the 10 largest interaction values will be displayed
in the specified range (EMIN to EMAX). This command is only valid after a factorial evaluation [OPTYPE,FACT].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Tool Results>Graph>Factorial
OPLGR, Pname, Dvnam1, Dvnam2, Dvnam3, Dvnam4, Dvnam5, Dvnam6
Graphs the results of a gradient evaluation.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Pname
Response parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as the objective function or
a state variable [OPVAR].
3902
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPLOOP
Dvnam1, Dvnam2, Dvnam3, Dvnam4, Dvnam5, Dvnam6
Design variable names.
Notes
This command is only valid after a gradient evaluation [OPTYPE,GRAD]. Pname is graphed with respect to a plus
or minus 1% change in design variable (Dvnam1, ... Dvnam6).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Tool Results>Graph>Gradient
OPLIST, SET1, SET2, LKEY
Displays the parameters for design sets.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SET1, SET2
Display values of all analysis parameters from SET1 (defaults to the highest existing set) to SET2 (defaults
to SET1). If SET1 = ALL, display for all sets.
LKEY
Listing key:
0
List only scalar parameters related to optimization.
1
List all analysis scalar parameters.
Notes
Displays the values of the parameters for specified design sets. Note that a *STATUS command may also be issued
to display various optimization data.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>List
OPLOOP, Read, Dvar, Parms
Specifies controls for optimization looping.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Read
Indicates where to begin reading the analysis file during optimization looping. Note that the /PREP7 command
(and the /OPT command) must occur as the first nonblank characters on a line in the analysis file (i.e., do not
use the $ delimiter). Defaults to previously specified label, if any; otherwise, defaults to TOP:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3903
OPLSW
TOP
Read from the first line.
PREP
Read from the first occurrence of /PREP7.
Dvar
Indicates how to treat parameters which have been designated as design variables (DVs) during optimization
looping. Defaults to previously specified label, if any; otherwise, defaults to IGNORE:
IGNORE
Do not process DV parameter assignments in the analysis file during looping.
PROCESS
Process DV parameter assignments in the analysis file during looping.
Parms
Indicates which types of parameters to save during optimization looping. Defaults to previously specified
label, if any; otherwise, defaults to SCALAR:
SCALAR
Save scalar parameters only.
ALL
Save all parameters, both scalar and array.
Command Default
Read = TOP, Dvar = IGNORE, and Parms = SCALAR.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Controls
OPLSW, Pname, Dvnam1, Dvnam2, Dvnam3, Dvnam4, Dvnam5, Dvnam6
Graphs the results of a global sweep generation.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Pname
Response parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as the objective function or
a state variable (OPVAR).
Dvnam1, Dvnam2, Dvnam3, Dvnam4, Dvnam5, Dvnam6
Design variable names.
Notes
This command is only valid after a global sweep generation [OPTYPE,SWEEP]. Pname is graphed with respect to
the specified design variables (Dvnam1, ... Dvnam6). The design variables are normalized (0 to 1) along the X-axis.
3904
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPNCONTROL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Tool Results>Graph>Sweeps
OPMAKE
Creates a design set using active scalar parameter values.
OPTIMIZATION: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
The next available design set number is assigned to the new design set. Because no compression of set numbers
is done, the next available set number will be either 1 + the highest existing set number, or 1 + the highest set
number used (if sets with higher numbers previously existed but have been removed). Multiple design sets can
be created by repeated use of PARRES (to read parameters from a file) and OPMAKE.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Create
OPNCONTROL, Lab, VALUE, NUMSTEP
Sets decision parameter for automatically increasing the time step interval.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
DOF label used to base a decision for increasing the time step (substep) interval in a nonlinear or transient
analysis. The only DOF label currently supported is TEMP.
VALUE, NUMSTEP
Two values used in algorithm for deciding if the time step interval can be increased. The time step interval
is increased if the maximum absolute value of the incremental solution at the specified DOF label is less than
VALUE for the number of contiguous time steps specified by NUMSTEP. The default for VALUE is 0.1 and the
default for NUMSTEP is 3.
Notes
This command is available only for nonlinear or transient analysis, and only when SOLCONTROL,ON.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Open Control
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Open Control
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3905
OPPRNT
OPPRNT, Key
Activates detailed optimization summary printout.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Key
Summary key:
OFF
Do not print details (default).
ON
Print the detailed summary.
FULL
Same as Key = ON, but includes a full list of all design sets.
Notes
Activates detailed optimization summary printout to the primary output during optimization analysis.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Controls
OPRAND, NITR, NFEAS
Defines the number of iterations for a random optimization.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NITR
Maximum number of optimization iterations for the next execution [OPEXE]. Defaults to previously specified
value, if any; otherwise, defaults to 1.
NFEAS
Desired total number of feasible design sets (including existing feasible sets). Once NFEAS feasible sets are
achieved, random iterations are terminated. If 0 is input, NITR random iterations will be performed independent of the number of feasible designs that are obtained. Defaults to previously specified value, if any; otherwise,
defaults to 0.
Command Default
Perform 1 iteration.
Notes
This command is valid for the random design generation method of optimization [OPTYPE,RAND].
3906
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPRFA
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
OPRESU, Fname, Ext, -Reads optimization data into the optimization database.
OPTIMIZATION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to OPT if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Reads optimization data from the specified file into the optimization database. Optimization data must have
been previously saved to this file [OPSAVE], or automatically written to this file in an earlier optimization analysis.
All existing parameters will be deleted and replaced by those stored on the resumed file. (To save existing
parameters, use PARSAV before OPRESU.)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Opt Database>Resume
OPRFA, Name
Prints the results of a factorial evaluation.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as the objective function or a state
variable [OPVAR]. If Name = ALL, print results for all optimization response variables (default).
Notes
This command is only valid after a factorial evaluation [OPTYPE,FACT].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3907
OPRGR
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Tool Results>Print
OPRGR, Name
Prints the results of a gradient evaluation.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as the objective function or a state
variable [OPVAR]. If Name = ALL, print results for all optimization response variables (default).
Notes
This command is only valid after a gradient evaluation [OPTYPE,GRAD].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Tool Results>Print
OPRSW, Name
Prints the results of a global sweep generation.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as the objective function or a state
variable (OPVAR). If Name = ALL, print results for all optimization response variables (default).
Notes
This command is only valid after a global sweep generation [OPTYPE,SWEEP].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Tool Results>Print
3908
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPSEL
OPSAVE, Fname, Ext, -Writes all optimization data to a file.
OPTIMIZATION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to OPT if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Writes all optimization data to File.OPT or a named file. Saved data includes optimization data only (DVs, SVs,
saved design sets, analysis file name, etc.). The data can be restored [OPRESU] for an optimization restart.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Opt Database>Save
OPSEL, NSEL
Selects design sets for subsequent optimization looping.
OPTIMIZATION: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSEL
Number of best design sets to be selected. If NSEL = -1, select all feasible designs. If NSEL is positive and no
objective function is defined, the following occurs: all infeasible design sets are removed; next the lowest
number (oldest) feasible design sets are removed until NSEL sets are left (i.e., the latest feasible design sets
are kept).
Notes
A number of best design sets or all feasible design sets may be specified. ("Best" design sets are determined by
the objective function value for each feasible design.) All design sets not selected are permanently removed
from the optimization database. The original set numbers are retained for remaining design sets. Note that no
compression of set numbers is done. Thus, if the highest set is removed, the next available set will still be the
previously used highest set number + 1. (A maximum of 130 design sets can be stored in the optimization
database.)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3909
OPSUBP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Select/Delete
OPSUBP, NITR, NINFS
Defines number of iterations for subproblem approximation method.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NITR
Maximum number of optimization iterations for the next execution [OPEXE]. Defaults to previously specified
value, if any; otherwise, defaults to 30.
NINFS
Maximum number of consecutive infeasible design sets that are allowed. Once NINFS consecutive infeasible
sets are encountered, iterations are terminated. Defaults to previously specified value, if any; otherwise, defaults
to 7.
Notes
This command is valid for the subproblem approximation method of optimization [OPTYPE,SUBP].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
OPSWEEP, Dset, NSPS
Specifies the reference point and number of evaluation points for a sweep generation.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Dset
BEST
Use the best design set as the reference point (default).
LAST
Use the last design set as the reference point.
N
Use design set number N as the reference point.
NSPS
Number of evaluation points used for each design variable sweep. Two to ten evaluation points are allowed.
Defaults to 2 (i.e., the minimum and maximum design variable values).
Command Default
As described by the arguments above.
3910
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPTYPE
Notes
This command is valid for the sweep evaluation method of optimization [OPTYPE,SWEEP].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
/OPT
Enters the design optimizer.
SESSION: Processor Entry
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the ANSYS optimizer for design optimization by iterative analyses. Upon issuing this command, if there
are no existing design sets, all currently defined numerical scalar parameters are established as design set
number 1.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt
OPTYPE, Mname
Specifies the optimization method to be used.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Mname
Name of the optimization method to be used:
SUBP
Subproblem approximation method. Specifications for this method are defined on the OPSUBP command.
FIRST
First order optimization method. Specifications for this method are defined on the OPFRST command.
RAND
Perform random iterations. Specifications for this method are defined on the OPRAND command.
RUN
Perform a single optimization run with current parameter values for the defined design variables.
FACT
Perform factored design iterations. Specifications for this method are defined on the OPFACT command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3911
OPUSER
GRAD
Compute a gradient (design sensitivity) at a point in design space. Specifications for this method are
defined on the OPGRAD command.
SWEEP
Perform global sweeps through global design space starting from a single design set. Specifications for
this method are defined on the OPSWEEP command.
USER
User-supplied external optimization. See the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for user optimization information (USEROP routine). Parameters used for this method are defined on the OPUSER
command.
Command Default
Perform a single optimization run (Mname = RUN) with current parameter values for the defined design variables.
Notes
Specifies the optimization method to be used upon execution [OPEXE].
Product Restrictions
Mname = USER is only allowed in ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and ANSYS PrepPost.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
OPUSER, NITR, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6, VAL7, VAL8
Defines specifications for user-supplied external optimization.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <>
NITR
Maximum number of optimization iterations for the next execution [OPEXE]. Defaults to previously specified
value, if any; otherwise, defaults to 1.
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6, VAL7, VAL8
Numerical values (double precision) for user-supplied optimizer. Values may be the results of parameter
evaluations. Values are written to File.OPT after the parameter set data. VAL1--VAL8 default to previously
specified values, if any; otherwise, default to 0.
Notes
Defines the number of iterations and the parameter values for user-supplied external optimization [OPTYPE,USER].
Values are passed to the user routine (USEROP) through the optimization common block.
3912
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OPVAR
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Method/Tool
OPVAR, Name, Type, MIN, MAX, TOLER
Specifies the parameters to be treated as optimization variables.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name (must be a scalar parameter).
Type
Optimization variable type:
DV
Design variable. MAX must also be specified.
SV
State variable, also referred to as a constrained variable. (Usually defined via a *GET command.) MIN, or
MAX, or both must be specified.
OBJ
Objective function (variable to be minimized). Only one objective function is allowed. MIN and MAX are
not used.
DEL
Deletes this optimization variable (does not delete the parameter). This option only has meaning if the
parameter Name was previously defined as an optimization variable (DV, SV, or OBJ). The parameter retains
the value assigned during the last loop. MIN and MAX are not used.
MIN
Minimum value for this parameter. For Type = DV, MIN must be greater than 0.0 and defaults to 0.001*(MAX).
For Type = SV, there will be no lower limit if MIN is left blank, but if MIN = 0.0, the lower limit is zero. MIN is
ignored for Type = OBJ. MIN is also ignored for Type = DEL (except for the special case when Name = (blank)
and Type = DEL, as described next).
When the GUI is on, if a Delete operation (in a Design Variables or State Variables dialog box) writes this
command to a log file (Jobname.LOG or Jobname.LGW), you will observe that Name is blank, Type = DEL,
and MIN is an integer number. In this case, the GUI has assigned a value of MIN that corresponds to the location
of a chosen variable name in the dialog box's list. It is not intended that you type in such a location value for
MIN in an ANSYS session. However, a file that contains a GUI-generated OPVAR command of this form can
be used for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command.
MAX
Maximum value for this parameter. Required for Type = DV and ignored for Type = OBJ or DEL. For Type =
SV, there will be no upper limit if MAX is left blank, but if MAX = 0.0, the upper limit is zero.
TOLER
For Type = DV and OBJ, acceptable change between loops for convergence; defaults to 0.01*(current value)
for OBJ and 0.01*(MAX-MIN) for DV. For Type = SV, defines feasibility tolerance. For double-sided SV limits
(MAX and MIN specified), the default is 0.01*(MAX-MIN). For a single-sided SV limit (MAX or MIN specified), the
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3913
OUTOPT
default is 0.01*(specified limit) or, if the absolute value of the limit is < 1, the default is 0.01*(current SV value).
TOLER is ignored for Type = DEL.
Command Default
No optimization parameters defined.
Notes
Specifies the parameters to be treated as optimization variables. Variable constraints (MIN and MAX) and tolerances
(TOLER) are also specified on this command. If the specified parameter (Name) does not exist at the time OPVAR
is issued, the OPVAR command defines that parameter and assigns a value of zero to it. Up to 60 DV and 100 SV
parameters are allowed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Variables
Main Menu>Design Opt>Objective
Main Menu>Design Opt>State Variables
OUTOPT
Specifies "Output options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Output Options
OUTPR, Item, FREQ, Cname
Controls the solution printout.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Item for print control:
BASIC
Basic quantities (nodal DOF solution, nodal reaction loads, and element solution) (default).
3914
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OUTPR
NSOL
Nodal DOF solution.
RSOL
Nodal reaction loads.
ESOL
Element solution.
NLOAD
Element nodal loads.
VENG
Element energies.
V
Nodal velocity (applicable to structural transient analysis only (ANTYPE,TRANS)).
A
Nodal acceleration (applicable to structural transient analysis only (ANTYPE,TRANS)).
ALL
All of the above solution items except V and A.
FREQ
Print solution for this item every FREQth (and the last) substep of each load step. If -n, print up to n equally
spaced solutions (for automatic time stepping). If NONE, suppress all printout for this item for this load step.
If ALL, print solution for this item for every substep. If LAST, print solution for this item only for the last substep
of each load step. For a modal analysis, use NONE or ALL.
Cname
Name of the component, created with the CM command, defining the selected set of nodes or elements for
which this specification is active. If blank, the set is all entities.
Note The component named must be of the same type as the item, i.e. nodal or element. A component name is not allowed with the BASIC or ALL labels.
Command Default
No printout.
Notes
Controls the solution items to be printed, the frequency with which they are printed (in static, transient, or full
harmonic analyses), and the set of nodes or elements to which this specification applies. An item is associated
with either a node (NSOL, RFORCE, V, and A items) or an element (all of the remaining items). The specifications
are processed in the order that they are input. Up to 50 specifications (OUTPR and OUTRES commands combined)
may be defined. Use OUTPR,STAT to list the current specifications and use OUTPR,ERASE to erase all the current
specifications.
As described above, OUTPR writes some or all items (depending on analysis type) for all elements. To restrict
the solution printout, use OUTPR to selectively suppress (FREQ = NONE) the writing of solution data, or first
suppress the writing of all solution data (OUTPR,ALL,NONE) and then selectively turn on the writing of solution
data with subsequent OUTPR commands.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3915
/OUTPUT
If the generalized plane strain feature is active and OUTPR is issued, the change of fiber length at the ending
point during deformation and the rotation of the ending plane about X and Y during deformation will be printed
if any displacement at the nodes is printed. The reaction forces at the ending point will be printed if any reaction
force at the nodes is printed.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Solu Printout
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>Solu Printout
/OUTPUT, Fname, Ext, --, Loc
Redirects text output to a file or to the screen.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
Filename and directory path (248 character maximum, including directory) to which text output will be redirected (defaults to Jobname if Ext is specified). For interactive runs, Fname = TERM (or blank) redirects
output to the screen. For batch runs, Fname = blank (with all remaining command arguments blank) redirects
output to the default system output file.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Loc
Location within a file to which output will be written:
(blank)
Output is written starting at the top of the file (default).
APPEND
Output is appended to the existing file.
Command Default
Text output is written to the screen for interactive runs and to the system output file for batch runs (see the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide).
Notes
Text output includes responses to every command and GUI function, notes, warnings, errors, and other informational messages. Upon execution of /OUTPUT,Fname, Ext, ..., all subsequent text output is redirected to the
file Fname.Ext. To redirect output back to the default location, issue /OUTPUT (no arguments).
Note When using the GUI, output from list operations [NLIST, DLIST, etc.] is always sent to a list window
regardless of the /OUTPUT setting. The output can then be saved on a file or copied to the /OUTPUT
location using the File menu in the list window.
3916
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OUTRES
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Switch Output to>File
Utility Menu>File>Switch Output to>Output Window
OUTRES, Item, Freq, Cname
Controls the solution data written to the database.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Item
Results item for database and file write control:
ALL
All solution items except SVAR, LOCI, V, and A records. This value is the default.
ERASE
Resets OUTRES specifications to their default values.
STAT
Lists the current OUTRES specifications.
BASIC
Write only NSOL, RSOL, NLOAD, STRS, FGRAD, and FFLUX records to the results file and database.
NSOL
Nodal DOF solution.
RSOL
Nodal reaction loads.
V
Nodal velocity (applicable to structural transient analysis only (ANTYPE,TRANS)).
A
Nodal acceleration (applicable to structural transient analysis only (ANTYPE,TRANS)).
ESOL
Element solution (includes all items following):
NLOAD
Element nodal, input constraint, and force loads (also used with the /POST1 commands PRRFOR,
NFORCE, and FSUM to calculate reaction loads).
STRS
Element nodal stresses.
EPEL
Element elastic strains.
EPTH
Element thermal, initial, and swelling strains.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3917
OUTRES
EPPL
Element plastic strains.
EPCR
Element creep strains.
FGRAD
Element nodal gradients.
FFLUX
Element nodal fluxes.
LOCI
Integration point locations.
SVAR
State variables (used only by USERMAT).
MISC
Element miscellaneous data (SMISC and NMISC items of the ETABLE command).
Freq
Specifies how often (that is, at which substeps) to write the specified solution results item. The following
values are valid:
Value
Description
Writes the specified results item every nth (and the last) substep of each load step.
-n
Writes up to n equally spaced solutions (for automatic loading).
NONE
Suppresses writing of the specified results item for all substeps.
ALL
Writes the solution of the specified solution results item for every substep. This
value is the default for a harmonic analysis (ANTYPE,HARMIC) and for any expansion
pass (EXPASS,ON).
LAST
Writes the specified solution results item only for the last substep of each load step.
This value is the default for a static (ANTYPE,STATIC) or transient (ANTYPE,TRANS)
analysis.
%array% Where array is the name of an n x 1 x 1 dimensional array parameter defining n
key times, the data for the specified solution results item is written at those key
times.
Key times in the array parameter must appear in ascending order. Values must be
greater than or equal to the beginning values of the load step, and less than or
equal to the ending time values of the load step.
For multiple-load-step problems, either change the parameter values to fall between
the beginning and ending time values of the load step or erase the current settings
and reissue the command with a new array parameter.
For more information about defining array parameters, see the *DIM command
documentation.
Cname
The name of the component, created with the CM command, defining the selected set of elements or nodes
for which this specification is active. If blank, the set is all entities. A component name is not allowed with
the ALL, BASIC, or RSOL items.
3918
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OUTRES
Command Default
The OUTRES command writes the specified solution results item for every substep. The exceptions to the default
behavior are as follows:
For static (ANTYPE,STATIC) or transient (ANTYPE,TRANS) analyses, the default is to write the specified
solution results item for the last substep of each load step.
For a harmonic analysis (ANTYPE,HARMIC) and any expansion pass, the default is to write the specified
solution results item for every substep.
For reduced or mode superposition transients, the default is to write the reduced displacements file for
every 4th substep (as well as the last substep); however, if gap conditions exist, the default is to write the
specified solution results item of every substep.
Notes
The OUTRES command allows you to specify the following:
The solution item (Item) to write to the database (and to the reduced displacement and results files)
The frequency (Freq) at which the solution item is written (applicable to static, transient, or full harmonic
analyses)
The set of elements or nodes (Cname) to which your specification applies.
The command generates a specification for controlling data storage for each substep, activating storage of the
specified results item for the specified substeps of the solution and suppressing storage of that item for all other
substeps.
You can issue multiple OUTRES commands in an analysis. After the initial command creating the storage specification, subsequent OUTRES commands modify the specification set for each substep. The command processes
your specifications at each substep in the order in which you input them. If you specify a given solution item
twice, output is based upon the last specification. Therefore, issue multiple OUTRES commands carefully and
in the proper sequence.
Besides OUTRES, another output-control command named OUTPR exists which controls solution printout. You
can issue up to 50 output-control commands (either OUTRES or OUTPR, or some combination of both) in an
analysis.
Note Issuing OUTRES,ERASE erases the existing output specifications and resets the counted number
of OUTRES commands to zero. Issuing OUTPR,ERASE affects the OUTPR command in the same way.
A given OUTRES command has no effect on results items not specified. For example, an OUTRES,ESOL,LAST
command does not affect NSOL data; that is, it neither activates nor suppresses NSOL data storage in any substep.
Caution: In the results-item hierarchy, certain items are subsets of other items. For example, element
solution (ESOL) data is a subset of all (ALL) solution data. Therefore, an OUTRES,ALL command can affect
ESOL data. Likewise, an OUTRES command that controls ESOL data can affect a portion of ALL data. The
example OUTRES commands illustrate the interrelationships between results items and the necessity
for employing the OUTRES command thoughtfully.
To suppress ALL data at every substep, issue an OUTRES,ALL,NONE command. (An OUTRES,ERASE command
does not suppress ALL data at every substep.)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3919
OUTRES
The NSOL, RSOL, V, and A solution items are associated with nodes. All remaining solution items are associated
with elements.
The boundary conditions (constraints and force loads) are written to the results file only if either nodal or reaction
loads (NLOAD or RSOL items) are also written.
When specifying a Freq value, observe the following:
For a modal analysis, the only valid values are NONE or ALL.
If you issue multiple OUTRES commands during an analysis, you cannot specify a key time array parameter
(%array%) in a given OUTRES command and then specify a different Freq option in a subsequent
OUTRES command.
The OUTRES command is also valid in /PREP7.
Example
When issuing an OUTRES command, think of a matrix in which you set switches on and off. When a switch is on,
a results item is stored for the specified substep. When a switch is off, a results item is suppressed for a specified
substep.
Assuming a static (ANTYPE,STATIC) analysis, this example shows how the matrix looks after issuing each OUTRES
command in this six-substep solution.
NSUBST,6
OUTRES,ERASE
OUTRES,NSOL,2
OUTRES,ALL,3
OUTRES,ESOL,4
SOLVE
To simplify the example, only a subset of the available solution items appears in the matrix.
OUTRES,ERASE -- After issuing this command, the default output specifications are in effect, as shown:
Results Item Specification
ALL
Substep
BASIC
NSOL
RSOL
ESOL
NLOAD
STRS
FGRAD
EPEL
EPTH
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OUTRES,NSOL,2 -- This command modifies the initial specifications so that NSOL is turned on for substeps 2, 4
and 6, and turned off for substeps 1, 3 and 5, as shown:
Substep
3920
Results Item Specification
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
OUTRES
ALL
BASIC
NSOL
RSOL
ESOL
NLOAD
STRS
FGRAD
EPEL
EPTH
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OUTRES,ALL,3 -- This command further modifies the specifications so that ALL is turned on for substeps 3 and
6, and turned off for substeps 1, 2, 4 and 5, as shown:
Results Item Specification
ALL
Substep
BASIC
NSOL
RSOL
ESOL
NLOAD
STRS
FGRAD
EPEL
EPTH
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OUTRES,ESOL,4 -- This command once again modifies the specifications so that ESOL is turned on for the fourth
and last substeps, and turned off for substeps 1, 2, 3 and 5, as shown:
Results Item Specification
ALL
Substep
BASIC
NSOL
RSOL
ESOL
NLOAD
STRS
FGRAD
EPEL
EPTH
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SOLVE
When obtaining the solution, results data are stored as follows:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3921
OUTRES
Substep
Results Items Stored
No data
No data
NSOL and RSOL data
ESOL data
No data
ALL data
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>DB/Results File
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Output Ctrls>DB/Results File
3922
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
P Commands
PADELE, DELOPT
Deletes a defined path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
DELOPT
Path delete option (one of the following):
ALL
Delete all defined paths.
NAME
Delete a specific path from the list of path definitions. (Substitute the actual path name for NAME.)
Command Default
Deletes the currently active path.
Notes
Paths are identified by individual path names. To review the current list of path names, issue the command
PATH,STATUS.
This command is valid in the general postprocessor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Retrieve>Path from array
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Delete Path>All Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Delete Path>By Name
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Delete Path>All Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Delete Path>By Name
/PAGE, ILINE, ICHAR, BLINE, BCHAR
Defines the printout and screen page size.
POST1: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ILINE
Number of lines (11 minimum) per "page" or screen. Defaults to 24. Applies to interactive non-GUI to the
screen output only.
ICHAR
Number of characters (41 to 132) per line before wraparound. Defaults to 80. Applies to interactive non-GUI
to the screen output only.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PAGET
BLINE
Number of lines (11 minimum) per page. Defaults to 56. Applies to batch mode [/BATCH], diverted [/OUTPUT],
or interactive GUI [/MENU] output.
BCHAR
Number of characters (41 to 240 (system dependent)) per line before wraparound. Defaults to 132. Applies
to batch mode [/BATCH], diverted [/OUTPUT], or interactive GUI [/MENU] output.
Command Default
As defined by the items above.
Notes
Defines the printout page size for batch runs and the screen page size for interactive runs. Applies to the POST1
PRNSOL, PRESOL, PRETAB, PRRSOL, and PRPATH commands. See the /HEADER command for additional
controls (page ejects, headers, etc.) that affect the amount of printout. A blank (or out-of-range) value retains
the previous setting. Issue /PAGE,STAT to display the current settings. Issue /PAGE,DEFA to reset the default
specifications.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
PAGET, PARRAY, POPT
Writes current path information into an array variable.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
PARRAY
The name of the array parameter that the ANSYS program creates to store the path information. If the array
parameter already exists, it will be replaced with the current path information.
POPT
Determines how data will be stored in the parameter specified with PARRAY:
POINTS
Store the path points, the nodes (if any), and coordinate system. (For information on defining paths and
path points, see the descriptions of the PATH and PPATH commands.)
TABLE
Store the path data items. (See the PDEF command description for path data items.)
LABEL
Stores path data labels.
3924
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PARESU
Notes
Use the PAGET command together with the PAPUT command to store and retrieve path data in array variables
for archiving purposes. When retrieving path information, restore the path points (POINTS option) first, then the
path data (TABLE option), and then the path labels (LABEL option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Store>Path in array
PAPUT, PARRAY, POPT
Retrieves path information from an array variable.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
PARRAY
Name of the array variable containing the path information.
POPT
Specifies which path data to retrieve:
POINTS
Retrieve path point information (specified with the PPATH command and stored with the PAGET,POINTS
command). The path data name will be assigned to the path points.
TABLE
Retrieve path data items (defined via the PDEF command and stored with the PAGET,,TABLE command).
LABEL
Retrieve path labels stored with the PAGET,,LABEL command.
Notes
When retrieving path information, restore path points (POINTS option) first, then the path data (TABLE option),
and then the path labels (LABEL option).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Retrieve>Path from array
PARESU, Lab, Fname, Ext, -Restores previously saved paths from a file.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Read operation:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3925
PARTSEL
ALL
Read all paths from the selected file (default).
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to PATH if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
This command removes all paths from virtual memory and then reads path data from a file written with the
PASAVE command. All paths on the file will be restored. All paths currently in memory will be deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Retrieve>Paths from file
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Retrieve>Paths from file
PARTSEL, Type, PMIN, PMAX, PINC
Selects a subset of parts in an explicit dynamic analysis.
DATABASE: Selecting
<> <> <> DY <> <> <> <> <> <> <>
Type
Label identifying type of select. Because PARTSEL is a command macro, the label must be enclosed in single
quotes.
'S'
Select a new set (default).
'R'
Reselect a set from the current set.
'A'
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
'U'
Unselect a set from the current set.
'ALL'
Select all parts.
'NONE'
Unselect all parts.
3926
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PASAVE
'INVE'
Invert the current selected set.
The following fields are used only with Type = 'S', 'R', 'A', or 'U':
PMIN
Minimum part number in the range to be selected.
PMAX
Maximum part number in the range to be selected (defaults to PMIN).
PINC
Part number increment in the range to be selected (default =1).
Notes
PARTSEL invokes an ANSYS macro that selects parts in an explicit dynamic analysis. When PARTSEL is executed,
an element component is automatically created for each existing part. For example, the elements that make up
PART 1 are grouped into the element component _PART1. Each time the PARTSEL command is executed,
components for unselected parts will be unselected. To plot selected parts, choose Utility Menu> Plot> Parts
in the GUI or issue the command PARTSEL,'PLOT'.
After selecting parts, if you change the selected set of nodes or elements and then plot parts, the nodes and
elements associated with the previously selected parts (from the last PARTSEL command) will become the currently selected set.
Note A more efficient way to select and plot parts is to use the ESEL (with ITEM = PART) and EPLOT
commands. We recommend using ESEL instead of PARTSEL since PARTSEL will be phased out in a future
release. Note that the menu path mentioned above for plotting parts does not work with the ESEL
command; use Utility Menu> Plot> Elements instead.
In an explicit dynamic small restart analysis (EDSTART,2), PARTSEL can be used to unselect a part during the
solution even if it is referenced in some way (such as in a contact definition). (Note that ESEL cannot be used for
this purpose.) However, in a new analysis or a full restart analysis (EDSTART,3), all parts that are used in some
type of definition must be selected at the time of solution.
This command is valid in any processor.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Select Parts
PASAVE, Lab, Fname, Ext, -Saves selected paths to an external file.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Write operation:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3927
PATH
S
Saves only selected paths.
ALL
Saves all paths (default).
Pname
Saves the named path (from the PSEL command).
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to PATH if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Saves the paths selected with the PSEL command to an external file (Jobname.path by default). Previous paths
on this file, if any, will be overwritten. The path file may be read with the PARESU command.
This command is valid in /Post1.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Store>Paths in file
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Store>Paths in file
PATH, NAME, nPts, nSets, nDiv
Defines a path name and establishes parameters for the path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NAME
Name for this path (eight characters maximum. If nPts is blank, set the current path to the path with this
name. If nPts is greater than zero, create a path of this name. If a path with this name already exists, replace
it with a new path. If the NAME value is STATUS, display the status for path settings.
nPts
The number of points used to define this path. The minimum number is two, and the maximum is 1000.
Default is 2.
nSets
The number of sets of data which you can map to this path. You must specify at least four: X, Y, Z, and S.
Default is 30.
3928
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PBC
nDiv
The number of divisions between adjacent points. Default is 20. There is no maximum number of divisions.
Notes
The PATH command is used to define parameters for establishing a path. The path geometry is created by the
PPATH command. Multiple paths may be defined and named; however, only one path may be active for data
interpolation [PDEF] and data operations [PCALC, etc.]. Path geometry points and data are stored in memory
while in POST1. If you leave POST1, the path information is erased. Path geometry and data may be saved in a
file by archiving the data using the PASAVE command. Path information may be restored by retrieving the data
using the PARESU command.
For overlapping nodes, the lowest numbered node is assigned to the path.
The number of divisions defined using nDiv does NOT affect the number of divisions used by PLSECT and PRSECT.
For information on displaying paths you have defined, see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Path Items
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Retrieve>Path from array
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Retrieve>Paths from file
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>By Location
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>By Nodes
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>Path Status>Defined Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Delete Path>All Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Delete Path>By Name
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Recall Path
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>By Location
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>By Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>Path Status>Defined Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Delete Path>All Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Delete Path>By Name
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Recall Path
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Retrieve>Paths from file
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Path Operations
/PBC, Item, --, KEY, MIN, MAX, ABS
Shows boundary condition (BC) symbols and values on displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3929
/PBC
U
Applied translational constraints (UX, UY, UZ).
ROT
Applied rotational constraints (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ).
TEMP
Applied temperatures (TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP).
PRES
Applied fluid pressures.
V
Applied flow velocities (VX, VY, VZ).
SP0n
Mass fraction of species n, where n = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is given a user-defined name [MSSPEC],
use that name instead of SP0n.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (FLOTRAN).
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
VOLT
Applied voltages.
MAG
Applied scalar magnetic potentials.
A
Applied vector magnetic potentials.
CHRG
Applied electric charge.
F or FORC
Applied structural forces (FX, FY, FZ).
M or MOME
Applied structural moments (MX, MY, MZ).
HEAT
Applied heat flows (HEAT, HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP).
FLOW
Applied fluid flow.
AMPS
Applied current flow.
FLUX
Applied magnetic flux.
CSG
Applied magnetic current segments.
MAST
Master degrees of freedom.
CP
Coupled nodes.
3930
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PBC
CE
Nodes in constraint equations.
NFOR
POST1 nodal forces.
NMOM
POST1 nodal moments
RFOR
POST1 reaction forces.
RMOM
POST1 reaction moments (MX, MY, MZ).
PATH
Path geometry (undistorted) associated with the PATH command after a PDEF or PVECT command has
been issued.
ACEL
Global acceleration (ACELX, ACELY, ACELZ vector).
OMEG
Global angular velocity (OMEGX, OMEGY, OMEGZ vector) and acceleration (DOMEGX, DOMEGY, DOMEGZ
vector).
WELD
Applied spotwelds (ANSYS LS-DYNA).
ALL
Represents all appropriate labels.
--
Unused field.
KEY
Symbol key:
0
Do not show symbol.
1
Show symbol.
2
Plot value next to symbol.
MIN
Minimum value in a range of values plotted on screen.
MAX
Maximum value in a range of values plotted on screen.
ABS
Absolute number. If KEY = 2 and ABS = 0, a number falling between the MIN and MAX is displayed. If ABS is
not specified, it defaults to 0. If KEY = 2 and ABS = 1, an absolute value falling between the MIN and MAX is
displayed. ABS = 1 lets you eliminate the display of numbers whose absolute values are less than a desired
tolerance. For example, if ABS = 1, MIN = 10 and MAX = 1e8, values such as .83646 and -5.59737 are not displayed.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3931
/PBF
Command Default
No symbols displayed.
Notes
The /PBC command adds degree of freedom constraint, force load, and other symbols to displays.
Symbols are applied to the selected nodes only. All arrow and arrowhead symbols are oriented in the nodal coordinate system and lie in two perpendicular planes. Force arrows are scaled proportional to their magnitude.
(If KEY = 1, use /VSCALE to change arrow length.) For scalar quantities, the specific component direction (i.e., x,
y, or z) of the symbol has no meaning, but the positive or negative sense (e.g., positive or negative x) represents
a positive or negative scalar value, respectively.
The effects of the /PBC command are not cumulative (that is, the command does not modify an existing setting
from a previously issued /PBC command). If you issue multiple /PBC commands during an analysis, only the
setting specified by the most recent /PBC command applies.
Use /PSTATUS or /PBC,STAT to display settings. Use /PBC,DEFA to reset all specifications back to default. See
the /PSF and /PBF commands for other display symbols.
In a cyclic symmetry analysis, the /PBC command is deactivated when cyclic expansion is active (/CYCEXPAND,,ON). To view boundary conditions on the basic sector, deactivate cyclic expansion (/CYCEXPAND,,OFF)
and issue this command: /PBC,ALL,,1
Issuing the command /PBC,PATH, ,1 displays all defined paths.
The /PBC command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Plot Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Plot Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Symbols
/PBF, Item, --, KEY
Shows magnitude of body force loads on displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item:
TEMP
Applied temperatures.
FLUE
Applied fluences.
3932
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PBF
HGEN
Applied heat generation rates.
JS
Applied current density magnitude.
JSX
X-component of current density.
JSY
Y-component of current density.
JSZ
Z-component of current density.
PHASE
Phase angle of applied load.
MVDI
Applied magnetic virtual displacements flag.
CHRGD
Applied electric charge density.
VLTG
Applied voltage drop.
FORC
Applied force density (FLOTRAN only).
--
Unused field.
KEY
Symbol key:
0
Do not show body force load contours.
1
Show body force load contours.
2
Show current density as a vector (not a contour).
Command Default
No body force load contours displayed.
Notes
Shows body force loads as contours on displays for the selected elements.
The effects of the /PBF command are not cumulative (that is, the command does not modify an existing setting
from a previously issued /PBF command). If you issue multiple /PBF commands during an analysis, only the
setting specified by the most recent /PBF command applies.
Use /PSTATUS or /PBF,STAT to display settings. Use /PBF,DEFA to reset all specifications back to default. See
also the /PSF and /PBC command for other display contours.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3933
PCALC
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Symbols
PCALC, Oper, LabR, Lab1, Lab2, FACT1, FACT2, CONST
Forms additional labeled path items by operating on existing path items.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Oper
Type of operation to be performed. See Notes below for specific descriptions of each operation:
ADD
Adds two existing path items.
MULT
Multiplies two existing path items.
DIV
Divides two existing path items (a divide by zero results in a value of zero).
EXP
Exponentiates and adds existing path items.
DERI
Finds a derivative.
INTG
Finds an integral.
SIN
Sine.
COS
Cosine.
ASIN
Arcsine.
ACOS
Arccosine.
LOG
Natural log.
LabR
Label assigned to the resulting path item.
Lab1
First labeled path item in operation.
Lab2
Second labeled path item in operation. Lab2 must not be blank for the MULT, DIV, DERI, and INTG operations.
3934
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PCALC
FACT1
Factor applied to Lab1. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
FACT2
Factor applied to Lab2. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
CONST
Constant value (defaults to 0.0).
Notes
If Oper = ADD, the command format is:
PCALC,ADD,LabR,Lab1,Lab2,FACT1,FACT2,CONST
This operation adds two existing path items according to the operation:
LabR = (FACT1 x Lab1) + (FACT2 x Lab2) + CONST
It may be used to scale the results for a single path item.
If Oper = MULT, the command format is:
PCALC,MULT,LabR,Lab1,Lab2,FACT1
Lab2 must not be blank. This operation multiplies two existing path items according to the operation:
LabR = Lab1 x Lab2 x FACT1
If Oper = DIV, the command format is:
PCALC,DIV,LabR,Lab1,Lab2,FACT1
Lab2 must not be blank. This operation divides two existing path items according to the operation:
LabR = (Lab1/Lab2) x FACT1
If Oper = EXP, the command format is:
PCALC,EXP,LabR,Lab1,Lab2,FACT1,FACT2
This operation exponentiates and adds existing path items according to the operation:
LabR = (|Lab1|
FACT1
) + (|Lab2|FACT2|)
If Oper = DERI, the command format is:
PCALC,DERI,LabR,Lab1,Lab2,FACT1
Lab2 must not be blank. This operation finds a derivative according to the operation:
LabR = FACT1 x d(Lab1)/d(Lab2)
If Oper = INTG, the command format is:
PCALC,INTG,LabR,Lab1,Lab2,FACT1
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3935
PCIRC
Lab2 must not be blank. This operation finds an integral according to the operation:
LabR = FACT1 Lab1d(Lab2)
s
Use S for Lab2 to integrate Lab1 with respect to the path length. S, the distance along the path, is automatically
calculated by the program when a path item is created with the PDEF command.
If Oper = SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, or LOG, the command format is:
PCALC,Oper,LabR,Lab1,,FACT1,CONST
where the function (SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS or LOG) is substituted for Oper and Lab2 is blank.
The operation finds the resulting path item according to one of the following formulas:
LabR = FACT2 x sin(FACT1 x Lab1) + CONST
LabR = FACT2 x cos(FACT1 x Lab1) + CONST
LabR = FACT2 x sin-1(FACT1 x Lab1) + CONST
LabR = FACT2 x cos-1(FACT1 x Lab1) + CONST
LabR = FACT2 x log(FACT1 x Lab1) + CONST
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Add
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>ArcCosine
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>ArcSine
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Cosine
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Differentiate
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Divide
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Exponentiate
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Integrate
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Multiply
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Natural Log
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Sine
PCIRC, RAD1, RAD2, THETA1, THETA2
Creates a circular area centered about the working plane origin.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RAD1, RAD2
Inner and outer radii (either order) of the circle. A value of either zero or blank for either RAD1 or RAD2, or
the same value for both RAD1 and RAD2, defines a solid circle.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (either order) of the circular area. Used for creating a circular sector. The sector
begins at the algebraically smaller angle, extends in a positive angular direction, and ends at the larger angle.
3936
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PCIRCLE
The starting angle defaults to 0.0 and the ending angle defaults to 360.0. See the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for an illustration.
Notes
Defines a solid circular area or circular sector centered about the working plane origin. For a solid circle of 360,
the area will be defined with four keypoints and four lines. See the CYL4 and CYL5 commands for alternate ways
to create circles.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Circle>By Dimensions
/PCIRCLE, XCENTR, YCENTR, XLRAD
Creates an annotation circle (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
XCENTR
Circle X center location (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
YCENTR
Circle Y center location (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
XLRAD
Circle radius length.
Notes
Creates an annotation circle to be written directly onto the display at a specified location. This is a command
generated by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is
used. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in
an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
All circles are shown on subsequent displays unless the annotation is turned off or deleted. Use the /LSPEC and
the /PSPEC command to set the attributes of the circle.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3937
PCONV
PCONV, TOLER, Item, Comp, NODE, Surf
Sets convergence values for p-method solutions.
SOLUTION: p-Method
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TOLER
Tolerance (as a percentage) used for convergence checking. The analysis is considered to be converged if
the values of all specified items change by less than TOLER at the end of a p-loop. Defaults to 5. If TOLER =
STAT, list the currently specified p-convergence criteria. If TOLER = ERASE, erase all p-convergence specifications. If TOLER = DELE, delete only the tolerance for the specification denoted by the Item, Comp, NODE.
Item
Convergence based on (Valid component labels are described in PCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels
below):
SE
Strain energy or stored electrostatic energy (default). Does not require a component label.
S
Stress.
EPEL
Strain.
U
Translational displacement.
ROT
Structural rotation. (Valid only for SHELL150.)
VOLT
Electric potential.
EF
Electric field strength.
D
Electric flux density.
EFORC
Global electrostatic (Maxwell Stress Tensor) force.
Comp
Component of the Item. (Not required for Item = SE, VOLT, or EFORC). If Item = S or EPEL, Comp defaults to
EQV; if Item = U, ROT, EF, or D, Comp defaults to SUM. Valid component labels for each Item are described
in PCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
NODE
Node number where convergence checking is to be performed. Valid only for Item = S, EPEL, U, ROT, VOLT,
EF, or D. For valid Item labels, a node number must be entered in this field. If NODE = P, graphical picking is
enabled (valid only in the GUI). A component name may be substituted for NODE.
Surf
Surface of a p-element shell structure where the convergence checking for NODE will be performed. Valid
only for Item = S or EPEL.
3938
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PCONV
TOP
Top surface (default).
MID
Middle surface.
BOT
Bottom surface.
Command Default
Convergence is checked between successive p-loops by comparing the change in strain energy (SE) to TOLER.
Notes
When you use the menu paths to delete p-method convergence criteria, the ANSYS program writes the command
PCONV,DELE,n to its log file.
The p-level (polynomial level, i.e., the order or level n of a polynomial, where 2 n 8) is increased for each
loop until the values of the specified items (Item,Comp) change less than the specified tolerance (TOLER) between
loops, or until the maximum p-level has been reached [PPRANGE]. Convergence checking is performed only on
included elements [PINCLUDE]. Up to 10 separate specifications may be activated at one time. Valid Item and
Comp labels are shown next.
PCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
SE
Strain energy or stored electrostatic energy
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress
"
INT
Stress intensity
"
EQV
Equivalent stress
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural displacement or vector sum
ROT
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural rotation or vector sum (valid only for SHELL150)
EPEL
VOLT
Electric potential
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Electric field strength
X, Y, Z, SUM
Electric flux density
EFORC
X, Y, Z, SUM
Global electrostatic (Maxwell Stress Tensor) force
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3939
/PCOPY
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Convergence Crit
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Convergence Crit
/PCOPY, KEY
Automatically generates hard copies for HP UNIX work stations.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Copy key:
0
No specification setting for automatic hard copy of display.
1
Set specification for automatic hard copy after each display.
NOW
(Action) Produce hard copy of current display (KEY is not reset to 1).
Command Default
No automatic hard copy of display.
Notes
Sets automatic hard copy specification. This command is available only on HP work stations, and only during
interactive runs with the /SHOW specification active (for terminals with hard copy capability).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
PCORRO, CTK
Specifies the allowable exterior corrosion thickness for a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
CTK
Allowable corrosion thickness.
Notes
Specifies the allowable exterior corrosion thickness for a piping run. See the PREP7 RUN command.
3940
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDANL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Specifications
PCROSS, LabXR, LabYR, LabZR, LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1, LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2
Calculates the cross product of two path vectors along the current path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabXR
Label assigned to X-component of resultant vector.
LabYR
Label assigned to Y-component of resultant vector.
LabZR
Label assigned to Z-component of resultant vector.
LabX1
X-component of first vector label (labeled path item).
LabY1
Y-component of first vector label.
LabZ1
Z-component of first vector label.
LabX2
X-component of second vector label (labeled path item).
LabY2
Y-component of second vector label.
LabZ2
Z-component of second vector label.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Cross Product
PDANL, Fname, Ext, -Defines the analysis file to be used for probabilistic looping.
PROBABILISTIC: Deterministic Model
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3941
PDCDF
--
Unused field.
Command Default
If interactive, no default; if batch, use the batch input stream (File.BAT).
Notes
The analysis file containing the deterministic, parameterized model must be specified if the probabilistic analysis
is performed interactively. The file must exist at the time the PDANL command is issued. In this file, where /PREP7
and /PDS occur, they must be the first nonblank characters on the line (do not use the $ delimiter on any /PREP7
and /PDS command lines).
By default the analysis files specified with PDANL are executed from the top. All definitions of random input
variables (for example, APDL parameters defined as random input variables with the PDVAR command, using
*SET or Pname = ... ) are ignored in the analysis file. The PDS takes control of setting the values of random input
variable values for each loop.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Analysis File>Assign
PDCDF, Rlab, Name, Type, CONF, NMAX
Plots the cumulative distribution function.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command (if you are directly postprocessing Monte Carlo Simulation results),
or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command (for Response Surface Analyses).
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable or a random
output parameter with the PDVAR command.
Type
Type of cumulative distribution curve to be displayed.
EMP
Show an empirical cumulative distribution curve.
GAUS
Show a cumulative distribution curve in a normal distribution plot. A random variable based on a normal
or Gaussian distribution appears as a straight line in this type of plot.
LOGN
Show a cumulative distribution curve in a log-normal plot. A random variable based on a log-normal
distribution appears as a straight line in this type of plot.
3942
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDCFLD
WEIB
Show a cumulative distribution curve in a Weibull distribution plot. A random variable based on a Weibull
distribution appears as a straight line in this type of plot.
CONF
Confidence level. The confidence level is used to plot confidence bounds around the cumulative distribution
function. The value for the confidence level must be between 0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.95 (95%). Plotting
of the confidence bound is suppressed for CONF 0.5. This parameter is ignored for the postprocessing of
response surface methods results.
NMAX
Maximum number of points to be plotted for the distribution curve. This must be a positive number and it
defaults to 100. If the sample size is less than NMAX, all sample data is represented in the plot. If the sample
size is larger than NMAX, the probabilistic design system classifies the sample into NMAX classes of appropriate
size.
Command Default
Rlab as described above, Type = EMP, CONF = 0.95, NMAX = 100.
Notes
Plots the cumulative distribution function.
The PDCDF command cannot be used to postprocess the results in a solution set that is based on Response
Surface Methods, only Monte Carlo Simulations.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Statistics>CumulativeDF
PDCFLD, ParR, Entity, Ctype, CLENGTH
Calculates a correlation field and stores it into an ANSYS array.
PROBABILISTIC: Preprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ParR
Parameter name. ParR is a one-dimensional array with the dimension N * (N - 1)/2, where N is either the
number of the selected nodes or the number of the selected elements (depending on the Entity field). The
PDCFLD command automatically sets ParR as a one-dimensional array, (so you do not have to use the *DIM
command). If you use the PDCFLD command twice with the ANSYS parameter ParR, then the values stored
in the array are automatically overwritten. If the number of selected FE entities is different from the previous
PDCFLD command, then the array ParR is re-dimensioned automatically.
Entity
Specifies which FE entity the calculation of the correlation field is based on. This field must not be blank.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3943
PDCFLD
NODE
Calculate the correlation coefficients based on the distance between the selected nodes.
ELEM
Calculate the correlation coefficients based on the distance between the centroids of the selected elements.
Ctype
Specifies the equation used to calculate the correlation coefficients as a function of the nodal or element
centroid distances. This field must not be blank.
NONE
The random field is not correlated. This means the correlation coefficients are determined according to
ij = 1 for i = j
ij = 0 for i j
Here, ij is the correlation coefficient between the i-th and j-th selected FE entity (node or element
centroid).
LEXP
Calculate the correlation coefficient according to a linear-exponential decay function.
D({ xi }, { x j })
ij = exp
CL
Here, D({xi} , {xj}) is the domain distance between {xi}, {xj}, and {xi} and {xj} are the coordinate vectors of
the i-th and j-th selected FE entity (node or element centroid), and CL is the correlation length of the
random field as specified in the CLENGTH field.
QEXP
The correlation coefficient is calculated according to a quadratic- exponential decay function.
D({ x }, { x }) 2
i
j
ij = exp
CL
Here, D({xi} , {xj}) is the domain distance between {xi}, {xj}, and {xi} and {xj} are the coordinate vectors of
the i-th and j-th selected FE entity (node or element centroid), and CL is the correlation length of the
random field as specified in the CLENGTH field.
DIST
Calculate only D({xi} , {xj}). D({xi} , {xj}) is the domain distance between {xi}, {xj} , and {xi} and {xj} are the
coordinate vectors of the i-th and j-th selected FE entity (node or element centroid). The CLENGTH argument is ignored for this option.
CLENGTH
Correlation length of the correlation field. The correlation length is a characteristic length that influences
how strongly two elements of a random field are correlated with each other. The larger the value of CLENGTH,
the stronger the correlation between the random field elements. CLENGTH is required for Ctype = LEXP and
Ctype = QEXP; it must be a nonzero, positive number.
3944
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDCLR
Notes
Calculates a correlation field for a probabilistic analysis involving a random field. Random fields are random effects
with a spatial distribution; the value of a random field not only varies from simulation to simulation at any given
location, but also from location to location. The correlation field describes the correlation coefficient between
two different spatial locations. Random fields can be either based on element properties (typically material) or
nodal properties (typically surface shape defined by nodal coordinates). Hence, random fields are either associated
with the selected nodes or the selected elements. If a random field is associated with elements, then the correlation coefficients of the random field are calculated based on the distance of the element centroids.
For more information, see Probabilistic Design in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
Note that for correlation fields, the domain distance D({xi} , {xj}) is not the spatial distance |{xi} - {xj}|, but the
length of a path between {xi} and {xj} that always remains inside the finite element domain. However, exceptions
are possible in extreme meshing cases. For elements that share at least one node, the PDCFLD evaluates the
distance by directly connecting the element centroids with a straight line. If these neighboring elements form
a sharp inward corner then it is possible that the domain distance path lies partly outside the finite element
domain, as illustrated below.
After the correlation coefficients have been calculated and stored in the ANSYS parameter ParR, then use the
PDCORR command to define the correlations between the elements of the random field.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Definitns>Correl Field
PDCLR, Type
Clears the probabilistic design database.
PROBABILISTIC: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Specifies the part of the probabilistic database to be cleared.
ALL
Clear the entire probabilistic database. Both the preprocessing and postprocessing parts are cleared.
POST
Clear only the postprocessing part of the probabilistic database. This is necessary if you want to modify
the deterministic model (the analysis file) or probabilistic model (random variables, correlations between
random variables, or the random output parameter) after a probabilistic analysis has already been performed.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3945
PDCMAT
Notes
Clears the probabilistic design system (PDS) database. The settings are reset to their default values and the
memory is cleared. Remember that the result files containing the results of the probabilistic loops are never deleted
unless you intentionally delete them. We recommend that you use this command before switching to a new
probabilistic analysis using a different probabilistic model (a different analysis loop file or deterministic model),
or changing random input variables, their correlations, or random output parameters. Clearing the probabilistic
database is not necessary if the probabilistic model remains the same and will be analyzed with a different
probabilistic method or different method options. See the PDEXE command for restrictions. Before issuing the
PDCLR command, you should save the probabilistic database using the PDSAVE command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Database>Clear & Reset
PDCMAT, Rlab, Matrix, Name1, Name2, Corr, SLEVEL, Popt
Prints the correlation coefficient matrix.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command (if you are directly postprocessing Monte Carlo Simulation results),
or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command (for Response Surface Analyses).
Matrix
Keyword for the type of correlation coefficient matrix.
IO
Matrix of correlation coefficients between random input variables and output parameters.
II
Matrix of correlation coefficients between random input variables and other random input variables
OO
Matrix of correlation coefficients between random output parameters and other random output parameters.
S
Correlation coefficient between a single random parameter (input or output) and another random
parameter (input or output). The probabilistic design parameters must be specified in Name1 and Name2
for this option.
Name1, Name2
Parameter names. The parameters must have been previously defined as a random input variable or a random
output parameter with the PDVAR command. These parameters are used for Matrix = S only and are ignored
for the other Matrix keywords.
Corr
Keyword for the type of correlation coefficients to be used for the output.
3946
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDCMAT
RANK
Spearman rank-order correlation coefficient (default).
LIN
Pearson linear correlation coefficient.
SLEVEL
Significance level. The value for the significance level must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.025
(2.5%).
Popt
Specifies whether the probabilities should be printed with the correlation coefficients.
0
Print only the correlation coefficients.
1
Print both the correlation coefficients and the probabilities (default).
Command Default
Rlab as described above, Matrix = IO, Corr = RANK, SLEVEL = 0.025, Popt = 1
Notes
Prints the correlation coefficient matrix.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
For all correlation coefficients the probabilistic design tool evaluates the probability that the correlation coefficient
can be neglected. The evaluation of this probability is based on statistical test theory. The larger this probability
is the likelier it is that the correlation coefficient does not really reflect an observable statistical interdependence
between the parameters involved. If this probability exceeds the significance level as specified by the SLEVEL
parameter, the correlation coefficient should be regarded as negligible or insignificant. The higher the significance
level SLEVEL, the more correlation coefficients are considered significant. Using the Popt parameter you can
also get a list of the probabilities and review them as to how far they exceed the significance level or how far
they stay below it.
The PDCMAT command cannot be used to postprocess the results in a solution set that is based on Response
Surface Methods, only Monte Carlo Simulations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Trends>Correl Matrix
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3947
PDCORR
PDCORR, Name1, Name2, CORR
Specifies the correlation between two random input variables.
PROBABILISTIC: Preprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name1
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable with the
PDVAR command.
Name2
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable with the
PDVAR command. Must be different from Name1.
CORR
Specification of the correlation:
Value
Sets the correlation coefficient between Name1 and Name2 to the specified value. If this correlation
coefficient was already defined it will be changed to this new value. The correlation coefficient must be
between -1.0 and +1.0.
DEL
Delete the previously defined correlation between Name1 and Name2.
Command Default
No correlations defined between random input variables.
Notes
Specifies the correlations between two random input variables. The PDS tool generates correlated samples if
correlations exist. This applies to both probabilistic methods (Monte Carlo Simulation and Response Surface
Methods).
If there are correlated random input variables, the sampled locations of the random input variables reflect the
correlation as illustrated below for the case of two standard normal distributed variables X1 and X2. The illustrations
show no correlation (correlation coefficient 0.0), a relatively moderate negative correlation (correlation coefficient
-0.6), and a relative strong positive correlation (correlation coefficient 0.9).
3948
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDDMCS
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Definitns>Correlation
PDDMCS, NSIM, --, Astop, ACCMEAN, ACCSTDEV, CHECK, Seed
Specifies options for Monte Carlo Simulations using direct sampling.
PROBABILISTIC: Methods
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSIM
Number of simulation loops of the analysis.
--
Unused field.
Astop
Autostop option label.
AUTO
Enable Autostop. When Autostop is used, the PDS feature continues the simulation loops until the convergence criteria for the mean value and the standard deviation have been met or until the number of
simulations NSIM are complete, whichever comes first. The convergence criteria (mean value and
standard deviations of all random output parameters) are specified by the ACCMEAN and ACCSTDEV
parameters. The criteria are met if the mean value and the standard deviations converge within the accuracy specified in the ACCMEAN and ACCSTDEV options. The convergence check is done every i-th loop,
where i is specified in the CHECK parameter.
ALL
Disable Autostop option. All Monte Carlo Simulations as specified by NSIM are performed (default).
ACCMEAN
Accuracy of the mean values of all random output parameters that must be met for the Autostop option.
Default is 0.01 (1%). ACCMEAN is ignored for Astop = ALL. The convergence of the mean values is met if for
all random output parameters y the equation holds:
y(i) y(i CHECK )
ACCMEAN
with i = 2 CHECK, 3 CHECK,
y(i)
where the value of CHECK is specified in the CHECK option.
ACCSTDEV
Accuracy of the standard deviations of all random output parameters that must be met for the Autostop
option. The default is 0.02 (2%). ACCSTDEV is ignored for Astop = ALL. The convergence for the standard
deviations is met if for all random output parameters y the equation holds:
y (i) y (i CHECK )
y (i)
ACCSTDEV
with i = 2 CHECK, 3 CHECK,
where the value of CHECK is specified in the CHECK option.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3949
PDDMCS
CHECK
Sets how often conditions for convergence are checked for Autostop. The PDS checks if the convergence
criteria are met every i-th loop, where i is given by the CHECK parameter. The default value is 10. It is not
recommended to use CHECK = 1, because it could cause Autostop to terminate the simulations prematurely.
The mean values and standard deviation might not show large differences between consecutive simulation
loops but might still have a visible "global" trend if viewed over several simulations. This behavior indicates
that convergence has not really been achieved. If you set CHECK = 1 (or another small number), then Autostop
is not able to detect such a global trend. CHECK is ignored for Astop = ALL.
Seed
Seed value label. Random number generators require a seed value that is used to calculate the next random
number. After each random number generation finishes, the seed value is updated and is used again to
calculate the next random number. ANSYS initializes the seed value with the system time when the ANSYS
session started.
CONT
Continues updating using the derived seed value (default).
TIME
Initializes the seed value with the system time. You can use this if you want the seed value set to a specific value for one analysis and then you want to continue with a "random" seed in the next analysis. It
is not recommended to "randomize" the seed value with the Seed = TIME option for multiple analyses.
If the Monte Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing
simulations, then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
INIT
Initializes the seed value using 123457 (a typical recommendation). This option leads to identical random
numbers for all random input variables when the exact analysis will be repeated, making it useful for
benchmarking and validation purposes (where identical random numbers are desired). If the Monte
Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing simulations,
then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
Value
Uses the specified (positive) value for the initialization of the seed value. This option has the same effect
as Seed = INIT, except you can chose an arbitrary (positive) number for the initialization. If the Monte
Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing simulations,
then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
Command Default
NSIM = 30, Astop = AUTO, ACCMEAN = 0.01, ACCSTDEV = 0.02, CHECK = 10, Seed = CONT.
Notes
Defines the number of simulations, the specification of the Autostop option, how frequently the Autostop option
is checked and the seed value for random number generation. If the Autostop option is enabled, then the
number of simulations given for NSIM can be regarded as the maximum number of simulations to be performed.
The Autostop option may terminate the simulations before NSIM simulations are done if the convergence criteria
are met.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Method>Monte Carlo Sims
3950
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDDOEL
PDDOEL, Name, Method, Vtype, Lopt, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5
Defines design of experiment levels for an individual random input variable.
PROBABILISTIC: Preprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name. The parameter name must have been previously defined as a random input variable using
the PDVAR command.
Method
Specifies the response surface method for which the levels of the design of experiment are to be defined.
This field must not be left blank.
CCD
Use the Central Composite Design method. The design experiment levels of a central composite design
are defined in the fields VAL1 to VAL5.
BBM
Use the Box-Behnken Matrix method. The design experiment levels of a Box-Behnken Matrix design are
defined in the fields VAL1 to VAL3. The fields VAL4 and VAL5 are ignored
Vtype
Specifies the type of the values of the design of experiment levels.
PROB
The design of experiment levels are specified in terms of probabilities. This is the default.
PHYS
The design of experiment levels are specified in terms of physical values.
Lopt
Specifies the type of the design of experiment levels, indicating if they are defined by lower and upper bound
only (default) or all specified by the user.
BND
You specify the lower and upper bounds for the design of experiment levels. The values for intermediate
levels are calculated automatically at run time (default). The lower and upper levels of the design of experiment itself can be specified either in terms of probabilities or in terms of physical values, depending
on the Vtype field.
For Lopt = BND and Method = CCD only the entries VAL1 and VAL5 are processed and they represent
the lower and upper bound values of a central composite design. The intermediate levels VAL2 to VAL4
are evaluated automatically. For Lopt = BND and Method = BBM only the entries VAL1 and VAL3 are
processed and they represent the lower and upper bound values of a Box-Behnken Matrix design respectively. The intermediate level VAL2 is evaluated automatically.
NOTE: The intermediate levels between the lower and upper bounds are calculated so they are at equal
intervals along the curve (interpolated linearly in the physical space whether the curve is symmetrical
or not) regardless of whether the lower and upper bounds are specified as probabilities (Vtype = PROB)
or as physical values (Vtype = PHYS).
ALL
You explicitly specify all necessary design of experiment levels. The design of experiment levels can be
in terms of probabilities or in terms of physical values, depending on the Vtype field.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3951
PDDOEL
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5
Values for the levels of the design of experiment for the random input variable Name. Must be specified in
ascending order. All probabilities must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
For response surface methods based on a Central Composite Design (Method = CCD) VAL1 through VAL5
correspond to the five design of experiment levels of this method.
For response surface methods based on a Box-Behnken Matrix design (Method = BBM) VAL1 through VAL3
correspond to the three design of experiment levels of this method. The entries for VAL4 and VAL5 are ignored
for Method = BBM.
Command Default
For Meth = CCD, VAL1 = 0.005, VAL2 = 0.05, VAL3 = 0.5, VAL4 = 0.95, VAL5 = 0.995.
For Meth = BBM, VAL1 = 0.01, VAL2 = 0.5, VAL3 = 0.99.
Notes
If Vtype = PHYS, you must enter values for VAL1 through VAL3 or VAL5 (depending on the Method and Lopt
option you choose). If Vtype = PROB and you do not enter values, they default to the values shown below.
For Method = CCD:
Lopt = BND
Lopt = ALL
Vtype = PHYS
VAL1 and VAL5 must not be blank.
VAL1 through VAL5 must not be blank.
Vtype = PROB
VAL1 = 0.005, VAL5 = 0.995
VAL1 = 0.005, VAL2 = 0.05, VAL3 = 0.50,
VAL4 = 0.95, VAL5 = 0.995
Lopt = BND
Lopt = ALL
Vtype = Phys
VAL1 and VAL3 must not be blank.
VAL1 through VAL3 must not be blank.
Vtype = Prob
VAL1 = 0.01, VAL3 = 0.99
VAL1 = 0.01, VAL2 = 0.50, VAL3 = 0.99
For Method = BBM:
See Probabilistic Design in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for more information on the PDS
methods.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Method>Response Surface
3952
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDEF
PDEF, Lab, Item, Comp, Avglab
Interpolates an item onto a path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Label assigned to the resulting path item (8 characters maximum). This item may be used as input for other
path operations.
Item
Label identifying the item for interpolation. Valid item labels are shown in PDEF - Valid Item and Component
Labels below. Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in PDEF - Valid Item and Component
Labels below.
Avglab
Option to average across element boundaries:
AVG
Average element results across elements (default).
NOAV
Do not average element results across elements. If the parameter DISCON = MAT on the PMAP command,
this option is automatically invoked.
Notes
Defines and interpolates a labeled path item along a predefined path (PATH). Path item results are in the global
Cartesian coordinate directions unless transformed (RSYS). A path item must be defined before it can be used
with other path operations. Additional path items may be defined from the PVECT, PCALC, PDOT, and PCROSS
commands. Path items may be listed (PRPATH) or displayed (PLPATH, PLPAGM). A maximum number of path
items permitted is established by the nSets argument specified with the PATH command.
When you create the first path item (PDEF or PVECT), the program automatically interpolates four path items
which are used to describe the geometry of the path. These predefined items are the position of the interpolated
path points (labels XG, YG, and ZG) in global Cartesian coordinates, and the path length (label S). For alternate
methods of mapping the path geometry (to include, for example, material discontinuity) see the PMAP command.
These items may also be listed or displayed with the PRPATH, PLPATH, and PLPAGM commands.
If specifying that load case operations act on principal/equivalent stresses (SUMTYPE,PRIN), derived quantities
(principal and equivalent stresses/strains) will be zero for path plots. A typical use for such a case involves mode
combinations in a response spectrum analysis.
The number of interpolation points on the path is defined by the nDiv argument on the PATH command. See
the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Use PDEF,STAT to list the path item labels. Use PDEF,CLEAR to erase
all labeled path items, except the path geometry items (XG, YG, ZG, S).
PDEF - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for nodal degree of freedom results are:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3953
PDEF
Item
Comp
Description
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural displacement or vector sum.
ROT
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural rotation or vector sum.
TEMP[1]
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
VOLT
Electric potential.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential or vector sum.
CURR
Current.
EMF
Electromotive force drop.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (FLOTRAN).
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
Valid item and component labels for element results are:
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT, EQV
Stress intensity or Equivalent stress.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total strain.
"
INT, EQV
Total strain intensity or total equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT, EQV
Elastic strain intensity or elastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT, EQV
Plastic strain intensity or plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT, EQV
Creep strain intensity or creep equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT, EQV
Thermal strain intensity or thermal equivalent strain.
EPTO
EPEL
EPPL
EPCR
EPTH
EPSW
Swelling strain.
NL
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
For contact results PowerGraphics is applicable for 3-D models only.
3954
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDEF
Item
CONT
Comp
STAT2
Description
Contact status:
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
"
PENE
Contact penetration.
"
PRES
Contact pressure.
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress.
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction).
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance.
"
GAP
Contact gap distance.
"
FLUX
Total heat flux at contact surface.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic force or vector sum.
ETAB
Lab
Any user-defined element table label (see ETABLE command).
BFE
TEMP
Applied and calculated temperatures along a defined path.
Valid item labels for FLOTRAN nodal results are:
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
CMUV
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
SPHT
Specific heat.
RDFL
Radiation heat flux.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3955
PDEXE
1.
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use the labels TBOT, TE2, TE3, ..., TTOP
instead of TEMP.
2.
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Clear Path Items
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>Path Status>Current Path
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Map onto Path
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Map onto Path>FE Results
PDEXE, Slab, MRUN, NFAIL, FOPT, Fname
Executes the probabilistic analysis.
PROBABILISTIC: Run Probabilistic Analysis
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Slab
Solution label. This is the name given to the files containing the results of different probabilistic analyses
performed with a particular probabilistic model. Different solutions using different probabilistic methods or
method options are stored in separate solution sets identified with this solution label. If the solution label is
blank, ANSYS automatically assigns Slab = "SOLUnn", where nn is the current two-digit number of the
probabilistic analysis (PDS allows a maximum of 10 solution sets identified by 10 solution labels); for example,
the first analysis is SOLU01, the second is SOLU02, and so on up to SOLU10). This field cannot contain blanks.
Maximum length of this field is 32 characters; if the field contains more than 32 characters, it will be truncated
to 32 characters.
MRUN
Keyword for the processing of the simulation loops
SER
Executes the simulation loops of the probabilistic analysis using a single machine; serial processing (default).
PAR
Executes the simulation loops of the probabilistic analysis in parallel using the ANSYS parallel-processing
tool. See Probabilistic Design in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
NFAIL
This parameter sets the number of loops that are allowed to fail before the execution of the probabilistic
analysis is terminated. For example, if geometric parameters are used as random variables then for some
simulations (loops) the loop will fail because meshing was not successful. This might happen infrequently
which might be acceptable. However, if the probabilistic problem is incorrectly defined then loops could fail
frequently or even in every loop. You can define an upper limit for the number of failed loops that will be
tolerated before the probabilistic analysis will be terminated. If you use NFAIL = 0 (default) then failed loops
are not tolerated and the probabilistic analysis will terminate the first time a loop fails. NFAIL is used only if
MRUN = PAR.
FOPT
Keyword for the file option. This determines if a copy of the sample file should be saved or not.
3956
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDEXE
DEL
The sample file will be deleted (default).
COPY
A copy of the sample file will be saved as the file name specified with the Fname option.
Fname
Name of the copy of the sample file. The directory for storing the sample file is always the current working
directory. The file extension is always .csmp. This option is ignored for FOPT = DEL.
Command Default
Slab = SOLUnn (see above) , MRUN = SER, NFAIL = 0, FOPT = DEL.
Notes
Runs the probabilistic analysis. The results of the probabilistic analysis are identified with the solution label
specified here. This solution label is used for the postprocessing of the results. The maximum number of probabilistic analyses that can be executed, stored, and post-processed based on the same deterministic and probabilistic model in one session with the PDS is 10. However, it is not counted as a separate probabilistic analysis if the
same solution label is used multiple times in order to append to or overwrite previous results.
The probabilistic results are stored in result files in ASCII format.
If you specify a solution label that has already been used, the results will be appended at the end of the results
file.
After the PDEXE command has been issued, you can no longer change the probabilistic model using probabilistic preprocessing commands; doing so would invalidate the probabilistic analysis results and potentially corrupt
the probabilistic database. Also, you are not allowed to change the probabilistic analysis file using a PDANL
command after the first PDEXE has been executed.
If you need to change the probabilistic model (analysis file, random input variables, etc.) after the PDEXE command
has been issued, you should use the PDCLR, POST command to clear the probabilistic results. We recommend
that you first save the results using the PDSAVE command.
By default, ANSYS creates a sample file (called Jobname.samp) containing all values of all random input parameters; unless you specify otherwise, this file is deleted after the analysis is finished. With the FOPT and Fname
options you can determine if and where a copy of that file should be stored for later use in another analysis.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Run>Exec Serial >Run Serial
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3957
PDHIST
PDHIST, Rlab, Name, NCL, Type
Plots the frequency histogram.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command (if you are directly postprocessing Monte Carlo Simulation results),
or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command (for Response Surface Analyses).
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable or a random
output parameter with the PDVAR command.
NCL
Number of classes for the histogram plot. This is the number of bars shown in the histogram. NCL must be
a positive number. If this field is left blank, ANSYS calculates an appropriate number of classes based on the
sample size. ANSYS divides the range between the smallest and largest sample value into NCL classes of
equal width and determines the histogram frequencies by counting the number of hits that fall in the classes.
Type
Type of histogram.
ABS
Absolute frequency histogram. This is the actual number of hits in each class.
REL
Relative frequency histogram (default). This is the number of hits in the individual classes divided by the
total number of samples.
NORM
Normalized frequency histogram. This is the number of hits in the individual classes divided by the total
number of samples and divided by the width of the class. This normalization makes the histogram
comparable to the probability density function.
Command Default
Rlab as described above, NCL as described above, Type = REL.
Notes
Plots the frequency histogram.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
The PDHIST command cannot be used to postprocess the results in a solution set that is based on Response
Surface Methods, only Monte Carlo Simulations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Statistics>Histogram
3958
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDINQR
PDINQR, Rpar, Name, Type, VAL
Evaluates statistical characteristics of a random input variable.
PROBABILISTIC: Preprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rpar
Name of scalar ANSYS parameter into which the characteristic value is stored.
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable using the
PDVAR command.
Type
Keyword for the type of information you need to retrieve.
MEAN
Mean value of the random input variable specified in Name.
STDV
Standard deviation of the random input variable
Probability density function of the random input variable specified in Name at a given value specified by
VAL.
CDF
Cumulative distribution function of the random input variable specified in Name at a given value specified
by VAL.
INV
Inverse cumulative distribution function of the random input variable specified in Name at a given
probability specified by VAL.
VAL
Value needed for Type = PDF, CDF, or INV. For Type = PDF and Type = CDF, this is the value of the random
input variable at which the probabilistic density or cumulative distribution function should be evaluated.
For Type = INV, VAL indicates the probability at which you want the inverse cumulative distribution function
evaluated.
Notes
Evaluates statistical characteristics of a random input variable. The result is stored in the ANSYS parameter Rpar.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Definitns>Inquire
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3959
PDLHS
PDLHS, NSIM, NREP, ISopt, --, Astop, ACCMEAN, ACCSTDV, CHECK, Seed
Specifies options for Monte Carlo Simulations using Latin-Hypercube sampling.
PROBABILISTIC: Methods
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSIM
Number of simulation loops per repetition cycle.
NREP
Number of repetition cycles of the analysis.
ISopt
Latin-Hypercube sampling divides the domain of each random input variable into intervals of equal probability. The interval sampling option ISopt determines where the samples are located within each interval.
RAND
Picks a random location within the interval (default).
MEAN
Picks the mean value location within the interval.
MEDI
Picks the median value location within the interval.
--
Unused field.
Astop
Autostop option label.
AUTO
Enable Autostop. When Autostop is used, the PDS feature continues the simulation loops until the convergence criteria for the mean value and the standard deviation have been met or until the number of
simulations NSIM are complete, whichever comes first. The convergence criteria (mean value and
standard deviations of all random output parameters) are specified by the ACCMEAN and ACCSTDEV
parameters. The criteria are met if the mean value and the standard deviations converge within the accuracy specified in the ACCMEAN and ACCSTDEV options. The convergence check is done every i-th loop,
where i is specified in the CHECK parameter.
ALL
Disable Autostop option. All Monte Carlo Simulations as specified by NSIM and NREP are performed
(default).
ACCMEAN
Accuracy of the mean values of all random output parameters that must be met to activate Autostop. Default
is 0.01 (1%). ACCMEAN is ignored for Astop = ALL. The convergence for the mean values is met if for all random
output parameters y the following equation is true:
y(i) y(i CHECK )
ACCMEAN
with i = 2 CHECK, 3 CHECK,
y(i)
where the value of CHECK is given by the CHECK option.
3960
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDLHS
ACCSTDEV
Accuracy of the standard deviations of all random output parameters that must be met to activate Autostop.
The default is 0.02 (2%). ACCSTDEV is ignored for Astop = ALL. The convergence for the standard deviations
is met if for all random output parameters y the following equation is true:
y (i) y (i CHECK )
y (i)
ACCSTDEV
with i = 2 CHECK, 3 CHECK,
where the value of CHECK is given by the CHECK option.
CHECK
Sets how often conditions for convergence are checked for Autostop. The PDS feature checks if the convergence criteria are met every i-th loop, where i is given by the CHECK parameter. The default value is 10. It
not recommended to use CHECK = 1, because it could cause Autostop to terminate the simulations prematurely. The mean values and standard deviation might not show large differences between all simulation
loops but might still have a visible "global" trend if viewed over several simulations. This behavior indicates
that convergence has not really been achieved. If you set CHECK = 1, then Autostop is not able to detect such
a global trend. CHECK is ignored for Astop = ALL.
Seed
Seed value label. Random number generators require a seed value that is used to calculate the next random
number. After each random number generation finishes, the seed value is updated and is used again to
calculate the next random number. ANSYS initializes the seed value with the system time when the ANSYS
session started.
CONT
Continues updating using the derived seed value (default).
TIME
Initializes the seed value with the system time. You can use this if you want the seed value set to a specific value for one analysis and then you want to continue with a "random" seed in the next analysis. It
is not recommended to "randomize" the seed value with the Seed = TIME option for multiple analyses.
If the Monte Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing
simulations, then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
INIT
Initializes the seed value using 123457 (a typical recommendation). This option leads to identical random
numbers for all random input variables when the exact analysis will be repeated, making it useful for
benchmarking and validation purposes (where identical random numbers are desired). If the Monte
Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing simulations,
then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
Value
Uses the specified (positive) value for the initialization of the seed value. This option has the same effect
as Seed = INIT, except you can chose an arbitrary (positive) number for the initialization. If the Monte
Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing simulations,
then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
Command Default
NSIM = 30, NREP = 1, ISopt = RAND, Astop = ALL, ACCMEAN = 0.01, ACCSTDEV = 0.02, CHECK = 10, Seed = CONT.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3961
PDMETH
Notes
Defines the number of simulations per repetition cycle, number of repetition cycles, specification of the Autostop
option, checking frequency for the Autostop option, and the seed value for random number generation.
For Latin-Hypercube sampling, it is advantageous to divide the total number of requested simulations into a
few repetitions. This adds more randomness to the sampling process. If NTOT is the total number of simulations,
then as a rough rule of thumb NTOT should be NREP =
NTOT
repetitions. The number obtained with this rule
4
1000
of thumb must be adjusted such that NTOT = NREP*NSIM. For example if NTOT = 1000 then NREP =
=
10, so the 1000 simulations can be done in 100 simulations with 10 repetitions. If for example NTOT = 100 then
NREP =
lations.
100
= 3.16, which means that the 100 simulations could be broken up into either 2*50 or 4*25 simu-
If Autostop is enabled then the maximum number of simulations to be performed is given by NSIM*NREP. The
Autostop option will terminate the simulations before the NSIM*NREP simulations are done if the convergence
criteria are met.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Method>Monte Carlo Sims
PDMETH, Method, Samp
Specifies the probabilistic analysis method.
PROBABILISTIC: Methods
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Method
Label for the probabilistic analysis method.
MCS
Monte Carlo Simulation
RSM
Response Surface Method
Samp
Label for the sampling techniques. The sampling technique determines the values of the random input
variables during the simulation loops.
DIR
Direct or Crude Monte Carlo Sampling. This technique randomly samples the random input variables
according to their distribution functions without "memory" of previous simulations.
The parameters for a Monte Carlo Simulation using direct sampling are specified with the PDDMCS
command.
LHS
Latin Hypercube Sampling (default). Valid only for Method = MCS. For this sampling technique the random
input variables are sampled randomly according to their distribution functions, efficiently stratifying the
3962
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDMETH
samples into layers and avoiding the re-use of those layers. The sampling process has a "memory" of
previous simulations, which prevents accumulation of clusters of samples. In addition, this sampling
strategy forces the extreme ends of a distribution function to participate in the sampling. This generally
leads to smoother distribution functions of the sampled set.
The parameters for a Monte Carlo Simulation using Latin-Hypercube sampling are specified with the
PDLHS command.
USER
User specified sampling. Valid only for Method = MCS. In this case you provide a file containing the
sampling "points" (values) of all random input variables for all simulation loops. These samples are simply
executed and it is your responsibility to specify the samples correctly. The probabilistic design system
can perform only limited checks on the samples you provide. ANSYS allows Monte Carlo specific postprocessing operations on the results generated with user-specified samples. The parameters for the usersupplied sampling technique are specified with the PDUSER command.
CCD
Central Composite Design. Valid only for Method = RSM. A central composite design is composed of a
center point, axis points, and corner points, called factorial points. Using large numbers of random input
variables produces prohibitively large numbers of factorial points; therefore, ANSYS automatically reduces
the number of factorial points by switching to a fractional plan for the factorial part of the design. See
the PDDOEL command for more information.
Note This option is only valid for 2 to 20 random input variables. You will receive an error if
you have specified fewer than 2 or more than 20 random input variables.
BBM
Box-Behnken Matrix Design. Valid only for Method = RSM. A Box-Behnken Matrix design is composed of
a center point plus the points at the middle of the edges of the hypercube in the space of random input
variables. A Box-Behnken design might be advantageous if the corner points of the hypercube represent
very extreme conditions that are undesirable and therefore should not be used for the sampling. See
the PDDOEL command for more information.
Note This option is only valid for 3 to 12 random input variables. You will receive an error if
you have specified fewer than 3 or more than 12 random input variables.
USER
User specified sampling. In this case you provide a file containing the sampling "points" (values) of all
random input variables for all simulation loops. These samples are simply executed and it is your responsibility to specify the samples correctly. The PDS can perform only limited checks on the samples you
provide, if user-supplied sampling technique are specified with the PDUSER command.
Command Default
Method = MCS, Samp = LHS.
Notes
Specifies the probabilistic analysis method and the sampling technique used for the individual probabilistic
analysis method.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3963
PDOT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Method>Monte Carlo Sims
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Method>Response Surface
PDOT, LabR, LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1, LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2
Calculates the dot product of two path vectors along the current path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to dot product result.
LabX1
X-component of first vector label (labeled path item).
LabY1
Y-component of first vector label (labeled path item).
LabZ1
Z-component of first vector label (labeled path item).
LabX2
X-component of second vector label (labeled path item).
LabY2
Y-component of second vector label (labeled path item).
LabZ2
Z-component of second vector label (labeled path item).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Dot Product
PDPINV, Rlab, Name, PROB, --, CONF
Prints the result of the inversion of a probability.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command (if you are directly postprocessing Monte Carlo Simulation results),
or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command (for Response Surface Analyses).
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable or a random
output parameter with the PDVAR command.
PROB
Target probability for which the random parameter value should be determined.
3964
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDPLOT
--
Unused field.
CONF
Confidence level. The confidence level is used to print the confidence bounds on the random parameter
value. The value for the confidence level must be between 0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.95 (95%). Printing
of confidence bound is suppressed for CONF 0.5. This parameter is ignored for response surface methods
results postprocessing.
Command Default
Rlab as described above, CONF = 0.95.
Notes
Prints the value for the random parameter Name at which the probability that there are simulation values lower
than that value is equal to PROB. This corresponds to an inversion of the cumulative distribution function (see
PDCDF command) at a given probability. In this sense the PDPINV is doing the opposite of the PDPROB command.
The PDPROB command evaluates a probability for a given random parameter value and the PDPINV command
evaluates the random parameter value that corresponds to a given probability.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
The confidence level is a probability expressing the confidence that the value for the requested result is in fact
between the confidence bounds. The larger the confidence level, the wider the confidence bounds. Printing the
confidence bounds only makes sense for postprocessing Monte Carlo simulation results, where the confidence
bounds represent the accuracy of the results. With increasing sample sizes, the width of the confidence bounds
gets smaller for the same confidence level. For response surface analysis methods, the number of simulations
done on the response surface is usually very large; therefore, the accuracy of the results is determined by the
response surface fit and not by the confidence level.
The PDPINV command cannot be used to postprocess the results in a solution set that is based on Response
Surface Methods, only Monte Carlo Simulations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Statistics>Inverse Prob
PDPLOT, Name, PLOW, PUP
Plots the distribution curves of a defined random input variable.
PROBABILISTIC: Preprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name. The parameter name must have been previously defined as a random input variable using
the PDVAR command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3965
PDPLOT
PLOW
Lower probability level used to determine the lower boundary of the curve. This probability must be between
0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.0025. This parameter is used to determine the lower plotting range (boundary)
in case the random input variable does not have a minimum value (such as Gauss).
PUP
Upper probability level used to determine the upper boundary of the curve. This probability must be between
0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.9975.
Command Default
PLOW = 0.0025 (applied if distribution type has no minimum), PUP = 0.9975 (applied if distribution type has no
maximum).
Notes
Plots the distribution of a defined random input variable. The PDPLOT command generates a probability density
function plot as well as a cumulative distribution function plot of the random variable. The probabilities PLOW
and PUP are used to determine the plot range of the random input variable values. To do this, the probabilities
are converted into random input variable values using the inverse cumulative distribution function of the random
input variable as shown in the following illustration.
Using the probabilities ensures that the boundaries are always feasible and meaningful for the random input
variable regardless of its distribution type.
If PLOW is left blank, then a minimum value of the distribution is used for plotting, provided it exists (for example,
uniform distribution). If the distribution type has no minimum value (for example, a Gaussian distribution) then
the default value is used to determine the lower plotting range value. The same applies for the maximum value,
if PUP is left blank.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Definitns>Plot
3966
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDPROB
PDPROB, Rlab, Name, Relation, LIMIT, --, CONF
Prints a probability result.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command (if you are directly postprocessing Monte Carlo Simulation results),
or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command (for Response Surface Analyses).
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable or a random
output parameter using the PDVAR command.
Relation
Relation label for the relation between probabilistic design parameter Name and the limit value LIMIT:
LT
Less than (default).
GT
Greater than.
LIMIT
Limit value.
--
Unused field.
CONF
Confidence level. The confidence level is used to print the confidence bounds on the probability. The value
for the confidence level must be between 0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.95 (95%). Printing of confidence
bound is suppressed for CONF 0.5. This parameter is ignored for response surface methods results postprocessing.
Command Default
Rlab as described above, Relation = LT, CONF = 0.95.
Notes
Prints the probability that the probabilistic design input or output variable denoted with Name is smaller or larger
than a certain limit value.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
Use the relation label Relation to specify if you want to print a traditional probability value (LT) or the exceedence
probability (GT). The LIMIT directly specifies at which value of Name (the design parameter) the probability
should be evaluated. If LIMIT is between two sample values of Name the resulting probability is linearly interpolated between the sample values. If LIMIT is smaller than all sample values of Name the probability is 0.0 for Relation = LT and 1.0 for Relation = GT. If LIMIT is greater than all sample values for Name the probability is 1.0
for Relation = LT and 0.0 for Relation = GT.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3967
PDRAG
The confidence level is a probability expressing the confidence that the value for the requested probability is in
fact between the confidence bounds. The larger the confidence level, the wider the confidence bounds. Printing
the confidence bounds only makes sense for postprocessing Monte Carlo simulation results, where the confidence
bounds represent the accuracy of the results. With increasing sample sizes, the width of the confidence bounds
gets smaller for the same confidence level. For response surface analysis methods, the number of simulations
done on the response surface is usually very large; therefore, the accuracy of the results is determined by the
response surface fit and not by the confidence level.
The PDPROB command cannot be used to postprocess the results in a solution set that is based on Response
Surface Methods, only Monte Carlo Simulations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Statistics>Probabilities
PDRAG, PX1, PY1, PZ1, H1, PX2, PY2, PZ2, H2, Kcord
Defines the external fluid drag loading for a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
PX1, PY1, PZ1
External fluid drag pressure (global Cartesian components) at height H1.
H1
Height (along Kcord coordinate) for first drag pressure.
PX2, PY2, PZ2
External fluid drag pressure (global Cartesian components) at height H2.
H2
Height (along Kcord coordinate) for second drag pressure.
Kcord
Coordinate direction for height value (in the global Cartesian coordinate system):
X
X coordinate.
Y
Y coordinate (default).
Z
Z coordinate.
Notes
Defines the external fluid drag loading (pressure) as a function of height for a piping run. See the PREP7 RUN
command. The element drag pressure is determined from the centroid height and linear interpolation. Pressures
are assigned to the elements as they are generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Loads
3968
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDROPT
PDRESU, Fname, Ext, -Reads the probabilistic model data and loads it into the database.
PROBABILISTIC: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to pds if Fname is blank; otherwise, no default.
--
Unused field.
Command Default
Fname = jobname, Ext = pds, the default directory is the current working directory.
Notes
Reads the probabilistic model data from the specified file and loads it into the database. Probabilistic analyses
results are not stored in the database with the PDRESU command, rather they reside in separate results files.
Analyses results are loaded automatically (one-by-one and on demand) when a probabilistic postprocessing
command is issued.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Database>Resume
PDROPT, RVAR, CORR, STAT, SHIS, HIST, CDF, SENS, CMAT, CONF
Specifies the options for an HTML report.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RVAR
Specifies in which form to show the definitions of random variables in the report.
0
Using tables (including name and distribution parameter) and figures (including a probability density
function plot and a cumulative distribution plot) (default).
1
Using tables only.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3969
PDROPT
2
Using figures only.
3
None.
CORR
Specifies if a table describing the correlation between random variables should be included in the report.
0
Yes, include this table (default).
1
No, do not include this table.
STAT
Specifies which statistics to include in the report. In general, statistics are provided in a tabular form.
0
Statistics of the random output parameters only (default).
1
Statistics of the random input variables only.
2
Statistics of both the random input variables and the random output parameters.
3
None.
SHIS
Specifies which sample history plots to include in the report. This option applies to the random output
parameters only.
0
None (default).
1
Mean value and standard deviation as a sample plot.
2
Mean value, standard deviation and sample values as a sample plot.
3
All types of sample plots - mean value, standard deviation, minimum value, maximum values, and the
sample values.
HIST
Specifies which histogram plots to include in the report.
0
Histogram of the random output parameters only (default).
1
Histogram of the random input variables only.
2
Histogram of both the random input variables and the random output parameters.
3970
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDROPT
3
None.
CDF
Specifies which cumulative distribution function (CDF) plots to include in the report.
0
CDF of the random output parameters only (default).
1
CDF of the random input variables only.
2
CDF of both the random input variables and the random output parameters.
3
None.
SENS
Specifies which sensitivity plots to include in the report.
0
Plots the sensitivities for all random output parameters based on Spearman-rank-order correlation
coefficient (default).
1
Plots the sensitivities for all random output parameters based on linear (Pearson) correlation coefficient.
2
Plots the sensitivities according to option SENS=1 and SENS=2.
3
None.
CMAT
Specifies which correlation matrices to include in the report.
0
Correlation matrix between random output parameters and random output parameters only (default).
1
Correlation matrix between random input variables and random output parameters only.
2
Correlation matrix between random input variables and random input variables only.
3
Correlation matrices according to option CMAT=0 and CMAT=1.
4
Correlation matrices according to option CMAT=0 and CMAT=2.
5
Correlation matrices according to option CMAT=1 and CMAT=2.
6
Correlation matrices according to option CMAT=0, CMAT=1, and CMAT=2.
7
None.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3971
/PDS
CONF
Confidence level. The confidence level is used to plot confidence bounds for the history value. The value for
the confidence level must be between 0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.95 (95%). Confidence bound(s) plotting
is suppressed for CONF 0.5. This option is ignored if the report does not include plots for which confidence
bounds are applicable.
Command Default
RVAR = 0, CORR = 0, STAT = 0, SHIS = 0, HIST = 0, CDF = 0, SENS = 0, CMAT = 0, CONF = 0.95.
Notes
Specifies the options for an HTML report. An HTML report includes a description of the deterministic model, the
probabilistic model, the probabilistic methods used for the analyses, and the results obtained from the analyses.
The deterministic model is documented in the report by including a link to the analysis file (see PDANL command).
In addition, an element plot of the component is shown, if available, based on the current view settings. The
command ALLSEL is issued automatically prior to the respective plot command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Report>Report Options
/PDS
Enters the probabilistic design system.
PROBABILISTIC: Auxiliary
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the Probabilistic Design System (PDS). This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design
PDSAVE, Fname, Ext, -Writes the probabilistic model data to a file.
PROBABILISTIC: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
3972
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDSCAT
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to pds if Fname is blank; otherwise, no default.
--
Unused field.
Command Default
Fname = Jobname, Ext = pds, the default directory is the current working directory.
Notes
Writes the probabilistic model data to a file. Saved data include probabilistic data only; the results of the probabilistic analyses are not stored in the file (rather, these are stored in separate result files).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Database>Save
PDSCAT, Rlab, Name1, Name2, Type, ORDER, NMAX
Plots a scatter graph.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command, or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command.
Name1, Name2
Parameter names. The parameters must have been previously defined as a random input variable or a random
output parameter using the PDVAR command. The parameter data for Name1 is shown on the X-axis and
the parameter data for Name2 is shown on the Y-axis in the plot.
Type
Keyword for the type of trendline curve.
POLY
Polynomial trendline (default).
NONE
A trendline is not plotted.
ORDER
Order of the polynomial trendline. This parameter is used only for Type = POLY. ORDER must be a positive
number. There is no maximum for ORDER provided there are enough data points to evaluate a polynomial
of the requested order. Default is 1.
NMAX
Maximum number of points plotted in the scatter plot. If there are more sample data, then only the first NMAX
points are plotted. The default value is 10,000.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3973
PDSENS
Command Default
Rlab as described above, Type = POLY, ORDER = 1, NMAX = 10,000
Notes
Plots a scatter graph with or without a trendline. The scatter plot shows the simulated points for two random
parameters. Random input variables and random output parameters are valid for both X- and Y-axis. The mean
value of both parameters are marked with separate green lines. The point where the green lines cross marks the
statistical center of gravity of the cloud of all simulated data points of the two parameters.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
If the parameter data for Name1 includes negative values, fitting a logarithmic trendline is not possible and the
logarithmic trendline plot is suppressed if requested. The same applies for an exponential trendline if the data
for the Name2 includes negative values.
Because of the amount of data involved, the scatter plot is limited to NMAX points. If shown, the trendline is
evaluated only on the NMAX points shown. However, the statistical information shown in the plot, such as the
mean value lines for both parameters and the correlation coefficients listed in the legend are based on the full
set of samples. If required, you can increase NMAX to plot more points, but this will affect the time needed to
process the PDSCAT command. If NMAX is less than the total amount of simulated points, which is typically possible
for Response Surface Methods, you will see an appropriate warning in the plot legend.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Trends>Scatter Plot
PDSENS, Rlab, Name, Chart, Type, SLEVEL
Plots the probabilistic sensitivities.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command (if you are directly postprocessing Monte Carlo Simulation results),
or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command (for Response Surface Analyses). The PDSENS
command cannot be used to postprocess the results in a solution set that is based on Response Surface
Methods, only Monte Carlo Simulations.
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random output parameter using
the PDVAR command.
Chart
Keyword for the type of chart to be plotted.
BAR
Bar chart of the absolute sensitivities.
3974
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDSHIS
PIE
Pie chart of relative and normalized sensitivities.
BOTH
Both pie and bar charts plotted side by side (default).
Type
Keyword for the type of correlation coefficients used to evaluate the sensitivities.
RANK
Spearman rank-order correlation coefficient (default).
LIN
Pearson linear correlation coefficient.
SLEVEL
Significance level. The value for the significance level must be between 0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.025
(2.5%).
Command Default
Rlab as described above, Chart = BOTH, Corr = RANK, SLEVEL = 0.025
Notes
Plots the probabilistic sensitivities.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
Evaluation of the probabilistic sensitivities is based on the correlation coefficients between all random input
variables and the random output parameter specified by Name. You can chose which correlation coefficient
should be used for that evaluation using the Corr option. For all sensitivity values, the probabilistic design tool
evaluates the probability that the sensitivity can be neglected, based on statistical test theory. If this probability
exceeds the significance level as specified by the SLEVEL parameter, the sensitivity value should be regarded
as negligible or insignificant. The higher the significance level (SLEVEL) the more sensitivities are considered as
significant. The sensitivity plot includes the significant sensitivities only and lists the insignificant ones separately.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Trends>Sensitivities
PDSHIS, Rlab, Name, Type, CONF
Plots the sample history values.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Rlab
Result set label. Identifies the result set to be used for postprocessing. A result set label can be the solution
set label you defined in a PDEXE command, or the response surface set label defined in an RSFIT command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3975
PDSHIS
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable or a random
output parameter using the PDVAR command.
Type
Keyword to identify which type of data is to be plotted:
SAMP
Sampled values (default).
MEAN
Mean values for results based on Monte Carlo simulation methods only.
STDV
Standard deviations for results based on Monte Carlo simulation methods only.
MIN
Minimum values for results based on Monte Carlo simulation methods only.
MAX
Maximum values for results based on Monte Carlo simulation methods only.
MEAN, STDV, MIN, and MAX are only valid for Monte Carlo methods.
CONF
Confidence level. The confidence level is used to plot confidence bounds for the history value. The value for
the confidence level must be between 0.0 and 1.0 and it defaults to 0.95 (95%). Confidence bound(s) plotting
is suppressed for CONF 0.5. This option is ignored for Type = SAMP (no confidence bounds are plotted).
Command Default
Rlab as described above, Type = SAMP, CONF = 0.95
Notes
Plots the sample history values as a function of the number of simulation loops.
If Rlab is left blank, then the result set label is inherited from the last PDEXE command (Slab), RSFIT command
(RSlab), or the most recently used PDS postprocessing command where a result set label was explicitly specified.
The confidence level is a probability expressing the confidence that the value for the requested probability is in
fact between the confidence bounds. The larger the confidence level, the wider the confidence bounds. For
Type = MEAN and Type = STDV, lower and upper confidence curves are plotted. For Type = MEAN, the mean
value curve starts at the first simulation and the confidence bounds start with simulation number 2. For Type =
MIN only the upper confidence bound is shown (the interpretation is that by a certain probability the true minimum value is below this curve). This probability (or confidence) is set using CONF. Likewise, for Type = MAX,
only the lower confidence bound is shown. For all Type options, confidence curves are plotted starting with the
simulation at which enough data is available to calculate the bounds. However, for scaling reasons, no confidence
bounds are plotted for simulation numbers 1 to 5 even if they might be available.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Statistics>Sampl History
3976
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDVAR
PDUSER, Fname, Ext, -Specifies options for user-specified sampling methods.
PROBABILISTIC: Methods
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Notes
If user-specified sampling methods are requested with the PDMETH, MCS, USER command or the PDMETH,
RSM, USER command, then you need to specify which file contains the sample data. For more information on
the format of this file, see Probabilistic Design in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Method>Monte Carlo Sims
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Method>Response Surface
PDVAR, Name, Type, PAR1, PAR2, PAR3, PAR4
Specifies the parameters to be treated as probabilistic design variables.
PROBABILISTIC: Preprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Name
Parameter name (must be a scalar ANSYS parameter). The parameter must have been previously defined as
a random input variable or a random output parameter with the PDVAR command. See the *SET command
for restrictions about ANSYS parameters.
Type
Probabilistic design variable type. This is the statistical distribution type. For more information on each of
these types, see Probabilistic Design in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
BETA
Beta distributed random variable.
PAR1 = Shape parameter. Defaults to 2.0.
PAR2 = Shape parameter. Defaults to 2.0.
PAR3 = Lower minimum value. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR4 = Upper maximum value. Defaults to 1.0.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3977
PDVAR
EXPO
Exponential distributed random variable.
PAR1 = Decay parameter . Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR2 = Shift or minimum value. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR3, PAR4 are ignored.
GAMA
Gamma distributed random variable.
PAR1 = Decay parameter . Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR2 = Exponential parameter k. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR3, PAR4 are ignored. Exponential distributed random variable.
GAUS
Gaussian (Normal) distributed random variable.
PAR1 = Mean value. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR2 = Standard deviation. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR3, PAR4 are ignored.
LOG1
Lognormal distributed random variable specified directly with the statistical parameters mean value and
standard deviation.
PAR1 = Mean value. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR2 = Standard deviation. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR3, PAR4 are ignored.
LOG2
Lognormal distributed random variable specified with the statistical parameters mean value and standard
deviation of the logarithm of the random values.
PAR1 and PAR2 must also be defined. PAR1 = Mean value of the logarithm of the data. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR2 = Standard deviation of the logarithm of the data. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR3, PAR4 are ignored.
UNIF
Uniform distributed random variable. Note that PAR1 must be less than PAR2.
PAR1 = Minimum value. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR2 = Maximum value. Defaults to 1.0.
PAR3, PAR4 are ignored.
TGAU
Truncated Gaussian distributed random variable. Note that PAR3 must be less than PAR4.
3978
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PDVAR
PAR1 = Mean value of the untruncated Gaussian distribution. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR2 = Standard deviation of the untruncated Gaussian distribution. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults
to 1.0.
PAR3 = Minimum value and lower truncation boundary. Defaults to -3.0.
PAR4 = Maximum value and upper truncation boundary. Defaults to +3.0.
TRIA
Triangular distributed random variable. Note that PAR1 must be less than PAR2 which must be less than
PAR3.
PAR1 = Minimum value. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR2 = Most Likely Value (MLV). Defaults to 0.5.
PAR3 = Maximum value. Defaults to 1.0.
PAR4 is ignored.
WEIB
Weibull (Type III smallest) distributed random variable. Note that PAR2 must be greater than PAR3. If
PAR3 = 0.0, the random distribution is equivalent to a two-parameter Weibull distribution.
PAR1 = Weibull exponent. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR2 = Characteristic value. Must be larger then 0.0 and defaults to 1.0.
PAR3 = Shift or minimum value. Defaults to 0.0.
PAR4 is ignored.
RESP
Random output or response parameter.PAR1 to PAR4 are not used.
DEL
Deletes this probabilistic design variable (does not delete the ANSYS parameter). This option is only
valid if the parameter Name was previously defined as a probabilistic design variable (using Type = BETA,
..., WEIB or Type = RESP). The parameter retains the value assigned during the last probabilistic design
loop.PAR1 to PAR4 are not used.
PAR1, PAR2, PAR3, PAR4
Parameters of the distribution function. The parameters must be specified according to the requirements
of the individual distribution types described above.
Notes
Specifies the parameters to be treated as probabilistic design variables. A random input variable is specified by
the name of the ANSYS parameter, the type of the distribution function (Type) and its distribution parameters
(PAR1, ..., PAR4). A random output parameter is specified by the name of the ANSYS parameter and the type
identifying it as a random output parameter (Type = RESP).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3979
PDWRITE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Random Input
PDWRITE, File, Fnam, Lnam
Generates an HTML report for the probabilistic analyses.
PROBABILISTIC: Postprocessing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
File
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory) from which to read the report.
If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters
for the file name.
Fnam
First name of the author of the report (32 characters maximum). This first name must not include blanks.
Lnam
Last name of the author of the report (32 characters maximum). This last name must not include blanks.
Notes
Generates an HTML report for the probabilistic analysis. An HTML report includes a description of the deterministic model, the probabilistic model, the probabilistic methods used for the analyses and the results obtained
from the analyses.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Results>Report>Generate Report
PEMOPTS, TOLER, Method
Defines percentage tolerance and error estimation method for electrostatic p-Method solution.
SOLUTION: Controls
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
TOLER
Percentage tolerance used to determine which elements to fix at the current p-level. If an element's error
energy is less that this tolerance, it's p-level will be fixed at the current level. Defaults to 5%.
Method
Specifies the error estimation method.
ZZ
Zienkiewicz-Zhu error estimator. Applicable to problems with a single dielectric material (default).
DUAL
Dual field method. Applicable to problems with single or multiple dielectric materials.
3980
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PERBC2D
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Solution Options
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Solution Options
PERBC2D, LOC1, LOC2, LOCTOL, R1, R2, TOLR, OPT, PLNOPT
Generates periodic constraints for 2-D planar magnetic field analyses.
PREP7: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
LOC1
Constant coordinate location of the first plane of nodes. For PLNOPT = 1 or 2, the constant coordinate location
is the global Cartesian coordinate system [CSYS,0] location in the X or Y direction respectively. For PLNOPT
= 0, the location is the angle in the global cylindrical coordinate system [CSYS,1].
LOC2
Constant coordinate location of the second plane of nodes. For PLNOPT = 1 or 2, the constant coordinate
location is the global Cartesian coordinate system [CSYS,0] location in the X or Y direction respectively. For
PLNOPT = 0, the location is the angle (in degrees) in the global cylindrical coordinate system [CSYS,1].
LOCTOL
Tolerance on the constant coordinate location for node selection. Defaults to .00001 for PLNOPT = 1 or 2
and .001 degrees for PLNOPT = 0.
R1
Minimum coordinate location along the second plane of nodes. For PLNOPT = 1 or 2, the coordinate location
is the global Cartesian coordinate system location in the Y or X direction respectively. For PLNOPT = 0, the
coordinate location is the radial coordinate value in the global cylindrical coordinate system. Periodic conditions are not applied to nodes at this location.
R2
Maximum coordinate location along the second plane of nodes. For PLNOPT = 1 or 2, the coordinate location
is the global Cartesian coordinate system location in the Y or X direction respectively. For PLNOPT = 0, the
coordinate location is the radial coordinate value in the global cylindrical coordinate system. Periodic conditions are not applied to nodes at this location.
TOLR
Tolerance dimension on node selection along the plane of nodes. Defaults to .00001.
OPT
Periodic option:
0
Odd symmetry (default). Apply constraint equations such that AZ(i) = -AZ(j).
1
Even symmetry. Apply node coupling such that AZ(i) = AZ(j).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3981
PERI
PLNOPT
Symmetry plane option:
0
Planes of constant angle in the global cylindrical coordinate system [CSYS,1].
1
Planes parallel to the global Cartesian X axis [CSYS,0].
2
Planes parallel to the global Cartesian Y axis [CSYS,0].
Notes
PERBC2D invokes an ANSYS macro which generates periodic boundary condition constraints for 2-D planar
magnetic field analysis. The macro is restricted to node pairs sharing common coordinate values along symmetry
planes separated by a constant coordinate value. Planes (or lines) must lie at either constant angles (PLNOPT =
0), constant X values (PLNOPT = 1), or constant Y values (PLNOPT = 2). PERBC2D applies constraint equations
(OPT = 0, odd symmetry) or node coupling (OPT = 1, even symmetry) to each node pair sharing a common coordinate value along the symmetry planes. By default, periodic conditions are not applied at the first and last
node pairs on the symmetry planes unless the input location values, R1 and R2, are adjusted to be less than or
greater than the actual node coordinate values. Nodes are selected for application of the constraints using the
NSEL command with tolerances on the constant coordinate location (LOCTOL) and the coordinate location along
the plane (RTOL).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Periodic
BCs
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>VectorPot>Periodic BCs
PERI, DX, DY, DZ
Specifies periodic boundary conditions in an incompressible flow analysis.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
DX
Offset in the X direction of the second boundary from the first.
DY
Offset in the Y direction of the second boundary from the first.
DZ
Offset in the Z direction of the second boundary from the first.
Notes
Specified offsets must be consistent with the flow field coordinate system, as dictated by the FLUID141 and
FLUID142 KEYOPT(3) setting.
3982
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PFACT
The meshes at the two boundaries must be identical.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
PEXCLUDE, ELEM
Specifies elements to be excluded from p-level escalations.
SOLUTION: p-Method
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ELEM
Element number of element to be excluded. If ELEM = ALL, exclude all elements. If ELEM = STAT, give status
of excluded elements. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may be substituted for ELEM.
Command Default
No elements are excluded.
Notes
The elements chosen by this command will be excluded from convergence calculations. As a result, these elements
will not have their p-levels increased throughout the solution iterations.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Stored Energy>Exclude Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Strain Energy>Exclude Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Stored Energy>Exclude Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Strain Energy>Exclude Elems
PFACT, TBLNO, Excit, Parcor
Calculates participation factors for the PSD or multi-point response spectrum table.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO
Input PSD (Power Spectral Density) table number for which participation factors are to be calculated.
Excit
Label defining the location of excitation:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3983
PFLUID
BASE
Base excitation (default).
NODE
Nodal excitation.
Parcor
Label defining excitation type (applies only to SPOPT,PSD analysis). Used only when partially correlated excitation is due to wave propagation or spatial correlation. Defaults to partially correlated excitation as defined
by COVAL and QDVAL commands.
WAVE
Excitation defined by PSDWAV command.
SPAT
Excitation defined by PSDSPL command.
Notes
Calculates the participation factors for a particular PSD or multi-point response spectrum table defined with the
PSDVAL command. The Jobname.DB file must contain modal solution data in order for this command to calculate
the participation factor. There must be a PFACT command for each excitation spectrum.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Calculate PF
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Calculate PF
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Calculate PF
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Calculate PF
PFLUID, DENS
Defines the contained fluid density for a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DENS
Density of the contained fluid.
Notes
See the PREP7 RUN command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Specifications
3984
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PGRAPH
PGAP, NLOC, K, DX, DY, DZ, GAP, ELEM
Defines a spring-gap constraint in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Node where gap is to be placed. Defaults to current run starting point.
K
Spring constant value (must be positive).
DX, DY, DZ
Increment (in terms of the active coordinate system components) to determine gap ground point. Element
length must not be zero. Constraints are automatically generated at the ground point.
GAP
Gap size (defaults to the element length).
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to gap (defaults to MAXEL + 1).
Notes
Defines a spring-gap constraint (gap element, CONTAC52) at a given location in a piping run. Gives spring constraint resistance after a specified gap is closed. See the RUN command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Spring-Gap Supp
PGRAPH, Option, Fname, Fext, -Specifies the location from which graphics data will be retrieved for viewing.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Option
Switch that controls the PGR file write operations :
Off
Use the data currently in the data base for display (default).
On
Use the PowerGraphics data in the PGR file for display.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory) from which to read the PGR file.
If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters
for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname, or File if no jobname is specified.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3985
PGRSET
Fext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Notes
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Controls>PGR File
Main Menu>General Postproc>Write PGR File
PGRSET, Lstep, SBSTEP, --, KIMG, TIME, --, NSET
Defines the data set to be read from the PGR file.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lstep
Load step number of the data set to be read (defaults to 1):
N
Read load step N.
FIRST
Store the first data set on the PGR file (SBSTEP and TIME are ignored).
LAST
Store the last data set on the PGR file. (SBSTEP and TIME are ignored).
NEXT
Store the next data set on the PGR file (SBSTEP and TIME are ignored). If at the last data set, the first data
set will be read as the next.
LIST
Scan the PGR file and list a summary of each load step. (FACT, KIMG, TIME and ANGLE are ignored.)
SBSTEP
Substep number (within Lstep). If Lstep = LIST, SBSTEP = 0 or 1 lists the basic step information, whereas
SBSTEP = 2 also lists the load step title, and labels imaginary data sets if they exist. Default maximum is 1000.
When the number of substeps exceeds this limit, you need to issue SET,Lstep,LAST to bring in the 1000th
load step. Use /CONFIG to increase the limit.
--
Unused field.
KIMG
Used only with results from complex analyses.
0
Store real part of complex solution.
1
Store imaginary part.
3986
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PGSAVE
TIME
Time-point identifying the data set to be read. For the harmonic response analyses, time corresponds to the
frequency. If both Lstep and SBSTEP are zero (or blank), read data set at time = TIME. If TIME is beyond the
last time point on the file, the last time point will be used. If TIME doe not match a time value on the PGR
file, the nearest time point in the data set will be used.
--
Unused field.
NSET
Data set number of the data set to be read. If a positive value for NSET is entered, Lstep, SBSTEP, KIMG, and
TIME are ignored. Available set numbers can be determined by PGRSET,LIST.
Notes
Defines the data set to be read from the PGR file into the database. Various operations may also be performed
during the read operation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Ctrls>PGR File
Main Menu>General Postproc>Write PGR File
PGSAVE, Fname, Fext, --, DataType, InteriorKey, Append
Creates a PowerGraphics (PGR) file from results data.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname, or File if no jobname is specified.
Fext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
DataType
Data type to create. This specification applies to discontinuous results data such as stress, strain, and field
data. .
0
Save as nodal-averaged data (default). Used by the PLNSOL command.
1
Reserved.
2
Save both nodal averaged and unaveraged data. Used by the PLESOL and PLNSOL commands.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3987
PGSELE
InteriorKey
Key that controls whether or not internal model data is saved to the PGR file. Internal data is required in order
to use graphical slicing, capping, vector displays, or Isosurface displays for data display. Interior data is also
required for the AVRES,,FULL option, where surface results take into consideration the interior element
contributions.
0
Save exterior surface data only. (default)
1
Save exterior and interior data.
Append
Append or overwrite data to the specified.
0
Append the data to the existing file (default). Note that the geometry must not have been changed
between the write operations.
1
Overwrite the data file.
Notes
The user may elect to write results to the PGR file in a specified order. The specifications (including /ESHAPE
parameters) must be defined before saving the file. The GUI will allow the user to write the current set, or all sets
from the results file.
For contact analysis, only flex-flex analysis is supported.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Ctrls>PGR File
Main Menu>General Postproc>Write PGR File
PGSELE, Type, Item, --, VMIN, VMAX, VINC
Select a subset of elements for display with the PGR viewer.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying type of select
S
Select a new set (default)
R
Reselect a set from the current set
A
Additionally select a set, extending the current set.
3988
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PGSELE
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL
Restore the full set. Subsequent command arguments are ignored.
INVE
Invert the current set (change selected to unselected; change unselected to selected). Subsequent
command arguments are ignored.
STAT
Display the current select status. Subsequent command arguments are ignored.
Item
Label identifying the data. Valid labels are:
If Type = STAT and Item = (blank) or ELEM, the element selection information is provided.
Type - Element type number
Mat - Material number
Real - Real constant number
Sec - Section identification number
Comp or CM - Component name(s). (see notes, below)
Pick - Pick entities via a picking window. (see notes, below)
(Defaults to Type).
--
Unused field.
VMIN
Minimum value of Item range. Ranges are attribute numbers.
VMAX
Maximum value for Item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN for input values.
VINC
Value increment within Item range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for attribute numbers). Defaults
to 1. VINC cannot be negative.
Command Default
All elements are selected.
Notes
When Item = Pick, interactive picking is enabled. The displayed facets of the elements you pick will be flagged
according to how they are resolved in PowerGraphics. Exterior elements will be flagged on each facet surface,
while elements with no external (surface) component will be flagged at the centroid of that element.
When Item = Comp, the subsequent values for VMIN, VMAX, and VINC, are replaced by valid component names
(32 character max). You can name up to 16 components in this fashion. All named components must contain
elements.
This command is valid in POST1
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3989
PGWRITE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Results Viewer
PGWRITE, Label, Fname, Fext, --, DataType, InteriorKey, Append
Writes selected solution data to the PGR file for faster post processing access.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Switch that controls the PGR file write operations :
Off
Do not write the PGR file during the solution.
On
Write the PGR file during solution (default).
STAT
Display the current status of the PGR file settings.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname, or File if no jobname is specified.
Fext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
DataType
Data type to create. This specification applies to discontinuous results data such as stress, strain, and field
data. .
0
Save as nodal-averaged data (default). Used by the PLNSOL command.
1
Reserved.
2
Save both nodal averaged and unaveraged data. Used by the PLESOL and PLNSOL commands.
InteriorKey
Key that controls whether or not internal model data is saved to the PGR file. Internal data is required in order
to use graphical slicing, capping, vector displays, or Isosurface displays for data display. Interior data is also
required for the AVRES,,FULL option, where surface results take into consideration the interior element
contributions.
3990
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PHYSICS
0
Save exterior surface data only. (default)
1
Save exterior and interior data.
Append
Append or overwrite data to the specified file. .
0
Append the data to the existing file (default). Note that the geometry must not have been changed
between the write operations.
1
Overwrite the data file.
Notes
In interactive mode, you cannot read the PGR file while PGWRITE is active. If you solve your model and want to
plot the model while still in SOLUTION, you must first close the PGR file by issuing PGWRITE,Off. This occurs
automatically when you exit SOLUTION and enter POST1.
When you wish to view your stress results in another coordinate system, you must generate your PGR file from
the results file, in POST1, in that coordinate system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Output Ctrls>PGR File
Main Menu>General Postproc>Write PGR File
PHYSICS, Option, Title, Fname, Ext, -Writes, reads, or lists all element information
PREP7: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Option
Specifies what to do with element information:
WRITE
Write all appropriate element types, key options, real constants, material properties, solution analysis
options, load step options, constraint equations, coupled nodes, defined components, and GUI preference
settings to the file specified with the Fname and Ext arguments.
READ
Deletes all solution information (material properties, solution options, load step options, constraint
equations, coupled nodes, results, and GUI preference settings) then reads all the information listed
above into the ANSYS database from the location specified by the Fname and Ext arguments.
LIST
Lists currently defined physics files and their titles.
DELETE
Deletes a specified physics file and its title from the database.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3991
PHYSICS
CLEAR
Deletes all material properties, solution options, load step options, constraint equations, coupled nodes,
results, and GUI preference settings from the database. Does NOT clear the active physics file title from
the database.
STATUS
Displays information about all active elements and settings.
Title
A user-defined title that quickly identifies a set of physics settings. For example, you might use "Fluid,"
"Structural," or "Magnetic" as titles. A title can contain up to 64 characters. It can be entered in lower or upper
case. Lower case is internally converted to upper case within the program.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname. Previous data on this file, if any, are overwritten.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to PHn if Fname is blank, where n is a number between one and nine, depending on
how many times you have issued the PHYSICS command. (You can have up to nine separate physics files.)
If you issue the command more than nine times, the ANSYS program will require you to delete an existing
file.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Use the PHYSICS command when you are performing a multiphysics analysis that involves two different disciplines
(for example, CFD and structural analysis) and you cannot solve both analyses simultaneously. Once you have
set up physics environments for both analyses, you can use the PHYSICS,READ command to change between
the defined physics environments. For more information about doing multiphysics analyses, see Sequential
Coupled-Field Analysis in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
The PHYSICS command outputs all solution information, including analysis options, to the Jobname.PHn file
described above. Although it also outputs components, the ANSYS program does not list entities (nodes, elements,
lines, etc.).
PHYSICS,WRITE will overwrite existing physics files with the same title (even if the name is different). In other
words, if the directory has a physics file with the same title as the active physics file title, but a different name,
the PHYSICS,WRITE command will overwrite the existing physics file and use the existing filename, not the filename specified on the PHYSICS,WRITE command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Environment>Clear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Environment>Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Environment>List
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Environment>Read
3992
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PICE
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Environment>Status
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Physics>Environment>Write
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Environment>Clear
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Environment>Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Environment>List
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Environment>Read
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Environment>Status
Main Menu>Solution>Physics>Environment>Write
/PICE, Item, --, KEY
Shows initial conditions on elements as contours on displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item:
VFRC
Volume fraction.
--
Unused field.
KEY
Symbol key:
0
Do not show initial condition contours.
1
Show initial condition contours.
Command Default
No initial condition contours displayed.
Notes
Shows initial conditions as contours on displays for the selected elements. Use /PSTATUS or /PICE,STAT to display
settings. Use /PICE,DEFA to reset all specifications back to default.
/PICE is overridden if /PBF, /PSF, and /PBC are all on.
This command is valid in any processor.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Symbols
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3993
PINCLUDE
PINCLUDE, ELEM
Specifies elements to be included in p-level escalations.
SOLUTION: p-Method
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ELEM
Element number of element to be included. If ELEM = ALL, include all elements. If ELEM = STAT, give status
of included elements. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may be substituted for ELEM.
Command Default
All elements are included.
Notes
The elements chosen by this command may have their p-levels increased throughout the solution iterations.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Stored Energy>Include Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Strain Energy>Include Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Stored Energy>Include Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Strain Energy>Include Elems
PINSUL, DENS, ITK
Defines the external insulation constants in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DENS
Insulation density.
ITK
Insulation thickness.
Command Default
No insulation.
Notes
Defines the external insulation constants in a piping run. See the RUN command.
3994
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PIVCHECK
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Specifications
PIPE
Specifies "Pipe modeling" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Piping Module
PIVCHECK, KEY
Prevents a batch mode, linear static analysis from stopping when a negative or zero equation solver pivot
value is encountered.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KEY
Determines whether to stop or continue an analysis when a negative or zero equation solver pivot value is
encountered:
ON
Default value. ANSYS checks for negative or zero pivot values on linear static analyses performed with
the frontal, sparse and PCG solvers. When one is encountered, an error is issued, stopping the job. A
negative pivot value may be valid for some Multiphysics analyses (e.g. Emag or Thermal); this key has
no effect in these cases.
OFF
Pivots will not be checked. This key continues the analysis in spite of a zero or negative pivot value. The
program will proceed until other error checking routines are encountered.
Command Default
ON, stop the analysis and report an error status to the user.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3995
PLCONV
Notes
This command is valid only for linear static analyses. In a nonlinear analysis, a negative pivot may be valid. Normally,
rigid body motions in a nonlinear analysis will be trapped by error routines checking infinitely large displacements
(DOF limit exceeded) or nonconvergence status. An under-constrained model may avoid the pivot check, but
fail with a DOF limit exceeded error.
This command is applicable only to batch mode (not in the GUI). While in an ANSYS interactive session, it is
generally desirable to remain in the session, even though a pivot error has occurred. Warning messages will be
displayed on the screen, allowing the user to take corrective action.
Finally, machine precision will determine if a warning or an error is issued for the small pivot case. In all cases
there will be some notification that the model needs to be checked closely for an accurate solution.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
PLCONV, Item, Comp, NODE, Surf
Plots the convergence curve for specified items from a p-method solution.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Item
Label identifying the convergence criterion to be plotted. (Valid component labels are described in PLCONV
- Valid Item and Component Labels.)
ALL
Simultaneously plot the convergence curve for all specified Item criteria versus p-level (default). Does
not require a component label.
SE
Plot strain energy curve or stored electrostatic energy curve, versus p-level. Does not require a component
label.
S
Plot stress curve versus p-level. Valid component labels are described in PLCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
EPEL
Plot strain curve versus p-level. Valid component labels are described in PLCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
U
Plot translational displacement curve versus p-level. Valid component labels are described in PLCONV Valid Item and Component Labels below.
ROT
Plot structural rotation versus p-level (valid only for SHELL150).
3996
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLCONV
VOLT
Plot electric potential curve versus p-level. Does not require a component label.
EF
Plot electric field strength curve versus p-level. Valid component labels are described in PLCONV - Valid
Item and Component Labels below.
D
Plot electric flux density curve versus p-level. Valid component labels are described in PLCONV - Valid
Item and Component Labels below.
EFORC
Plot global electrostatic (Maxwell Stress Tensor) force curve versus p-level. Valid component labels are
described in PLCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
Comp
Component of the Item. Not required for Item = ALL, SE, VOLT, or EFORC. Valid Comp values (and associated
Item values) are in PLCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels below. (Defaults to ALL: plot the convergence
curve for all Item and Comp criteria simultaneously.)
NODE
Node number where convergence checking was performed. Valid only for Item = S, EPEL, U, ROT, VOLT, EF,
or D. Defaults to all nodes having Item and Comp previously specified as convergence criteria [PCONV].
Surf
Surface of a p-element shell structure where the convergence curve for NODE will be plotted. Valid only for
Item = S or EPEL. Defaults to all surfaces.
TOP
Top surface (default).
MID
Middle surface
BOT
Bottom surface.
Command Default
Display all specified criteria simultaneously.
Notes
The previously specified convergence criterion [PCONV] is graphed versus the characteristic p-level. The characteristic p-level is the polynomial level range from the minimum defined [PPRANGE] to the maximum p-level
reached by any element in the model. The Item value corresponds to the convergence criterion indicated by
PCONV. All Item values previously designated by the PCONV command will be plotted.
PLCONV - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
ALL
Comp
ALL
SE
Description
All convergence criteria (default)
Strain energy or stored electrostatic energy
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
"
Component stress
1, 2, 3
Principal stress
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3997
PLCPLX
Item
Comp
Description
"
INT
Stress intensity
"
EQV
Equivalent stress
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural displacement or vector sum
ALL
All applicable displacement items
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural rotation or vector sum (valid only for SHELL150)
EPEL
U
"
ROT
VOLT
Electric potential
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Electric field strength
X, Y, Z, SUM
Electric flux density
EFORC
X, Y, Z, SUM
Global electrostatic (Maxwell Stress Tensor) force
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>p-Method>p-Convergence
PLCPLX, KEY
Specifies the part of a complex variable to display.
POST26: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KEY
Complex variable part:
0
Amplitude.
1
Phase angle.
2
Real part.
3
Imaginary part.
Notes
Used only with harmonic analyses (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
All results data are stored in the form of real and imaginary components and converted to amplitude and/or
phase angle as specified via the PLCPLX command. The conversion is not valid for derived results (such as principal stress/strain, equivalent stress/strain and USUM).
3998
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLCRACK
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Graph
PLCRACK, LOC, NUM
Displays cracking and crushing locations in SOLID65 elements.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
LOC
Location at which symbols are to be displayed:
0
Plot symbols at integration points (default).
1
Plot symbol at element centroids (averaged).
NUM
Crack to be displayed:
0
Plot all cracks (default).
1
Plot only the first crack.
2
Plot only the second crack.
3
Plot only the third crack.
Notes
PLCRACK displays circles at locations of cracking or crushing in concrete elements. Cracking is shown with a
circle outline in the plane of the crack, and crushing is shown with an octahedron outline. If the crack has opened
and then closed, the circle outline will have an X through it. Each integration point can crack in up to three different planes. The first crack at an integration point is shown with a red circle outline, the second crack with a
green outline, and the third crack with a blue outline.
Symbols shown at the element centroid (LOC = 1) are based on the status of all of the element's integration
points. If any integration point in the element has crushed, the crushed (octahedron) symbol is shown at the
centroid. If any integration point has cracked or cracked and closed, the cracked symbol is shown at the element
centroid. If at least five integration points have cracked and closed, the cracked and closed symbol is shown at
the element centroid. Finally, if more than one integration point has cracked, the circle outline at the element
centroid shows the average orientation of all cracked planes for that element.
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3999
PLDISP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>ConcPlot>Crack/Crush
PLDISP, KUND
Displays the displaced structure.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
KUND
Undisplaced shape key:
0
Display only displaced structure.
1
Overlay displaced display with similar undisplaced display (appearance is system-dependent).
2
Same as 1 except overlay with undisplaced edge display (appearance is system-dependent).
Notes
Displays the displaced structure for the selected elements.
For information on true scale plots, refer to the description of the /DSCALE command [/DSCALE,,1.0].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Deformed Shape
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Deformed Shape
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Deformed Shape
PLESOL, Item, Comp, KUND, Fact
Displays the solution results as discontinuous element contours.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in PLESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in PLESOL - Valid Item and Component
Labels below.
KUND
Undisplaced shape key:
31000
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLESOL
0
Do not overlay undeformed structure display
1
Overlay displaced contour plot with undeformed display (appearance is system-dependent)
2
Overlay displaced contour plot with undeformed edge display (appearance is system-dependent)
Fact
Scale factor for 2-D display of contact items (defaults to 1). A negative scaling factor may be used to invert
the display.
Notes
Displays the solution results as element contours discontinuous across element boundaries for the selected
elements. For example, PLESOL,S,X displays the X component of stress S (i.e., the SX stress component). Various
element results depend on the calculation method and the selected results location (AVPRIN, RSYS, and ESEL).
Contours are determined by linear interpolation within each element, unaffected by the surrounding elements
(i.e., no nodal averaging is performed). The discontinuity between contours of adjacent elements is an indication
of the gradient across elements. Component results are displayed in the active results coordinate system [RSYS]
(default is the global Cartesian). See the ETABLE and PLETAB commands for displaying items not available
through this command (such as line element results).
For PowerGraphics displays [/GRAPHICS,POWER], results are plotted only for the model exterior surface. The
items marked with [1] in PLESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels are not supported by PowerGraphics.
PLESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for element results are:
S
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT
Stress intensity.
"
EQV
Equivalent stress.
"
MAXF
Maximum Stress Failure Criteria. (Only works if FC command information is provided.) [1].
"
TWSI
Tsai-Wu Strength Index Failure Criterion. (Only works if FC command
information is provided.) [1].
"
TWSR
Inverse of Tsai-Wu Strength Ratio Index Failure Criterion. (Only works
if FC command information is provided.) [1].
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain.
"
MAXF
Maximum Strain Failure Criteria. (Only works if FC command information is provided.) [1]
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain.
"
INT
Plastic strain intensity.
EPEL
EPPL
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31001
PLESOL
Item
"
Comp
Description
EQV
Plastic equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT
Creep strain intensity.
"
EQV
Creep equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT
Thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Thermal equivalent strain.
EPCR
EPTH
EPSW
EPTO
Swelling strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total mechanical strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total mechanical strain.
"
INT
Total mechanical strain intensity.
"
EQV
Total mechanical equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Total mechanical and thermal strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR + EPTH).
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total mechanical and thermal strain.
"
INT
Total mechanical and thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Total mechanical and thermal equivalent strain.
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
"
CREQ
Accumulated equivalent creep strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
ELASTIC
Elastic strain energy density.
"
PLASTIC
Plastic strain energy density.
"
CREEP
Creep strain energy density.
1, 2, 3, ... N
State variable.
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component stress.
GKD
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component total closure.
GKDI
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component total inelastic closure.
GKTH
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component thermal closure.
CONT
STAT2
Contact status:
EPTT
NL
SEND
SVAR
GKS
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
"
PENE
Contact penetration
"
PRES
Contact pressure
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction)
31002
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLESOL
Item
Comp
Description
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance
"
GAP
Contact gap distance
"
FLUX
Total heat flux at contact surface
CNOS
Total number of contact status changes during substep.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic force or vector sum [1].
X, Y, Z, SUM
Pointing vector component or sum [1].
SERR
Structural error energy [1].
SDSG
Absolute value of the maximum variation of any nodal stress component [1].
TERR
Thermal error energy [1].
TDSG
Absolute value of the maximum variation of any nodal thermal
gradient component [1].
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural force [1].
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z structural moment [1].
HEAT
Heat flow [1].
FLOW
Fluid flow [1].
AMPS
Current flow [1]. Use FORCE for type.
CHRG
Charge [1]. Use FORCE for type.
FLUX
Magnetic flux [1].
VF
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z fluid "force" component [1].
CSG
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z magnetic current segment component [1].
SENE
"Stiffness" energy or thermal heat dissipation. Same as TENE[1].
TENE
Thermal heat dissipation or "stiffness" energy. Same as SENE [1].
KENE
Kinetic energy [1].
JHEAT
Element Joule heat generation [1].
JS
X, Y, Z, SUM
Source current density for low-frequency magnetic analyses. Total
current density (sum of conduction and displacement current densities)
in low frequency electric analyses. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector
sum (SUM). [1].
JT
X, Y, Z, SUM
Total measureable current density in low-frequency electromagnetic
analyses. (Conduction current density in a low-frequency electric
analysis.) Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM). [1].
JC
X, Y, Z, SUM
Conduction current density for elements that support conduction
current calculation. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM). [1].
MRE
Magnetic Reynolds number [1].
VOLU
Volume of volume element [1].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31003
PLETAB
Item
Comp
Description
CENT
X, Y, Z
Centroid X, Y, or Z location (based on shape function) in the active
coordinate system [1].
BFE
TEMP
Body temperatures (calculated from applied temperatures) as used
in solution (area and volume elements only).
SMISC
snum
Element summable miscellaneous data value at sequence number
snum (shown in the Output Data section of each element description
found in the ANSYS Elements Reference).
NMISC
Element non-summable miscellaneous data value at sequence number
snum (shown in the Output Data section of each element description
found in the ANSYS Elements Reference).
snum
TOPO
Densities used for topological optimization. This applies to the following types of elements: PLANE2, PLANE82, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95.
1.
Not supported by PowerGraphics
2.
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Element Solu
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Contour Plot>Elem Solution
PLETAB, Itlab, Avglab
Displays element table items.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Itlab
User-defined label, as specified with the ETABLE command, of item to be displayed.
Avglab
Averaging operation:
NOAV
Do not average element items at common nodes (default).
AVG
Average the element items at common nodes.
Notes
Displays items stored in the table defined with the ETABLE command for the selected elements. For display
purposes, items are assumed to be constant over the element and assigned to each of its nodes. Contour display
lines (lines of constant value) are determined by linear interpolation within each element from the nodal values.
These nodal values have the option of being averaged (values are averaged at a node whenever two or more
elements connect to the same node) or not averaged (discontinuous). The discontinuity between contour lines
of adjacent elements is an indication of the gradient across elements.
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
31004
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLF2D
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Plot Elem Table
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Elem Table
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Contour Plot>Elem Table Data
PLF2D, NCONT, OLAY, ANUM, WIN
Generates a contour line plot of equipotentials.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
NCONT
Number of contour lines to display. Issue in multiples of 9 (i.e., 9, 18, 27, etc.). Default is 27 contour lines.
OLAY
Overlay:
0
Overlay edge outlines by material number.
1
Overlay edge outlines by real constant number.
ANUM
Highest material or real constant attribute number. Command will cycle through ANUM element display
overlays. Defaults to 10.
WIN
Window number to which command applies. Defaults to 1.
Notes
PLF2D invokes an ANSYS macro which plots equipotentials of the degree of freedom AZ. These equipotential
lines are parallel to flux lines and thus give a good representation of flux patterns. In the axisymmetric case, the
display is actually r*AZ where "r" is the node radius. The macro overlays (OLAY) edge outlines by material number
or real constant number (ANUM) and allows user control over the number of contour lines to display (NCONT).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>2D Flux Lines
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Flux Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31005
PLHFFAR
PLHFFAR, Opt, Lab, PHI1, PHI2, NPHI, THETA1, THETA2, NTHETA, RADZ, CS, Comp
Displays electromagnetic far fields and far field parameters.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Opt
Display option:
FIELD
Electromagnetic far field.
RCS
Radar cross section.
RCSN
Normalized radar cross section.
PATT
Antenna radiation pattern.
DGAIN
Antenna directive gain.
Lab
As shown below, data entered in the Lab field will vary, depending on the display option (Opt).
Valid Lab Data Labels
Opt
FIELD
Lab
EF -- Electric field (default)
H -- Magnetic field
RCS and RCSN
NONE -- Radar echo area (default)
PP -- Phi-Phi polarization
PT -- Phi-Theta polarization
TP -- Theta-Phi polarization
TT -- Theta-Theta polarization
TE2D -- 2-D TE incident plane wave
TM2D -- 2-D TM incident plane wave
PATT
RECT -- Cartesian coordinate system plot (default)
POLAR -- Polar coordinate system plot
DGAIN
RECT -- Cartesian coordinate system plot (default)
POLAR -- Polar coordinate system plot
PHI1, PHI2
Starting and ending angles (degrees) in the spherical coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
31006
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLHFFAR
NPHI
Number of divisions between the starting and ending angles for data computations. Defaults to 0.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (degrees) in the spherical coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
NTHETA
Number of divisions between the starting and ending angles for data computations. Defaults to 0.
RADZ
Used only with Opt = FIELD or Opt = RCS or RCSN and Lab = TE2D or TM2D. For Opt = FIELD, RADZ = radius
of the far field. For Opt = RCS or RCSN and Lab = TE2D or TM2D, RADZ = thickness of the 3-D model in the z
direction. Defaults to 1.
CS
Used only with Opt = FIELD.
Coordinate system type:
0
Cartesian (default).
2
Spherical.
Comp
Used only with Opt = FIELD.
Coordinate system component:
SUM
Magnitude of electromagnetic field (default).
X
X-component (CS = 0) or radial component (CS = 2).
Y
Z
Y-component (CS = 0) or component (CS = 2).
Z-component (CS = 0) or component (CS = 2).
See Spherical Coordinates in the ANSYS High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
Notes
PLHFFAR displays electromagnetic far field and far field parameters as determined by the equivalent source
principle. Use this command to display far electromagnetic field, radar cross section, antenna radiation pattern,
or antenna directive gain.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Far Field
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31007
PLLS
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>Pattern
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>RCS
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Field Extension>RCS Normalized
PLLS, LabI, LabJ, Fact, KUND
Displays element table items as contoured areas along elements.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
LabI
Label of element table item [ETABLE] for node I magnitude.
LabJ
Label of element table item for node J magnitude.
Fact
Scale factor for display (defaults to 1). A negative scaling factor may be used to invert the display.
KUND
Undisplaced shape key:
0
Do not overlay undeformed structure display
1
Overlay displaced contour plot with undeformed display (appearance is system-dependent)
2
Overlay displaced contour plot with undeformed edge display (appearance is system-dependent)
Notes
Displays selected items (e.g., shears and moments) as a contoured area (trapezoid) display along line elements
and 2-D axisymmetric shell elements (e.g., shear and moment diagrams). Three sides of the trapezoid are formed
by the element (one side) and lines at nodes I and J of length proportional to the item magnitude and displayed
normal to the element and the viewing direction (the two parallel sides).
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Line Elem Res
31008
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLNSOL
PLNSOL, Item, Comp, KUND, Fact, FileID
Displays results as continuous contours.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in PLNSOL/PRNSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
below. Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in PLNSOL/PRNSOL - Valid Item and
Component Labels below.
KUND
Undisplaced shape key:
0
Do not overlay undeformed structure display
1
Overlay displaced contour plot with undeformed display (appearance is system-dependent)
2
Overlay displaced contour plot with undeformed edge display (appearance is system-dependent)
Fact
Scale factor for 2-D display for contact items. Default value is 1. A negative scaling factor may be used to invert
the display.
FileID
The file index number (obtained via the NLDIAG,NRRE,ON command). Valid only for Item = NRRE.
Notes
Displays the solution results as continuous contours across element boundaries for the selected nodes and elements. For example, PLNSOL,S,X displays the X component of stress S (that is, the SX stress component). Various
element results depend upon the recalculation method and the selected results location [AVPRIN, RSYS, LAYER,
SHELL, and NSEL]. Contours are determined by linear interpolation within each element from the nodal values,
which are averaged at a node whenever two or more elements connect to the same node (except for FMAG,
which is summed at the node).
For PowerGraphics displays [/GRAPHICS,POWER], results are plotted only for the model exterior surface. The
items marked with [2] are not supported by PowerGraphics. To plot midside nodes, you must first issue /EFACET,2.
PLNSOL/PRNSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for nodal degree of freedom results are:
U
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural displacement or vector sum.
ROT
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z structural rotation or vector sum.
TEMP[1]
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31009
PLNSOL
Item
Comp
Description
VOLT
Electric potential.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity or vector sum in a fluid analysis, or
X, Y, or Z nodal velocity or vector sum in a structural transient dynamic
analysis (LS-DYNA analysis or ANSYS analysis with ANTYPE,TRANS
and OUTRES,V,1).
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential or vector sum in an electromagnetic analysis, or
X, Y, or Z acceleration or vector sum in a structural transient dynamic
analysis (LS-DYNA analysis or ANSYS analysis with ANTYPE,TRANS
and OUTRES,A,1).
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy (FLOTRAN).
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
SP0n
Mass fraction of species n, where n = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is
given a user-defined name [MSSPEC], use that name instead of n.
WARP
Warping.
NRRE
FX, FY, FZ, FNRM, MX, MY, Plot the Newton-Raphson residuals from the file you obtained via the
MZ, MNRM
NLDIAG,NRRE,ON command. The FNRM and MNRM labels are computed as the square root of the sum of the squares of the residual
component forces or moments (FX,FY,FZ, MX, MY, MZ). [6]
When KUND = 0, use the absolute value of the residual from the files
(default).
Valid item and component labels for element results are:
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT
Stress intensity.
"
EQV
Equivalent stress.
"
MAXF
Maximum Stress Failure Criteria. (Only works if FC command information is provided.) [2].
"
TWSI
Tsai-Wu Strength Index Failure Criterion. (Only works if FC command
information is provided.) [2].
"
TWSR
Inverse of Tsai-Wu Strength Ratio Index Failure Criterion. (Only works
if FC command information is provided.) [2].
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component elastic strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal elastic strain.
"
INT
Elastic strain intensity.
"
EQV
Elastic equivalent strain.
"
MAXF
Maximum Strain Failure Criteria. (Only works if FC command information is provided.) [2]
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component thermal strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal thermal strain.
"
INT
Thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Thermal equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component plastic strain. [3]
1, 2, 3
Principal plastic strain. [3]
EPEL
EPTH
EPPL
"
31010
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLNSOL
Item
Comp
Description
"
INT
Plastic strain intensity. [3]
"
EQV
Plastic equivalent strain. [3]
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component creep strain.
"
1, 2, 3
Principal creep strain.
"
INT
Creep strain intensity.
"
EQV
Creep equivalent strain.
EPCR
EPSW
EPTO
Swelling strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total mechanical strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total mechanical strain.
"
INT
Total mechanical strain intensity.
"
EQV
Total mechanical equivalent strain.
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component total mechanical and thermal strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR
+ EPTH).
"
1, 2, 3
Principal total mechanical and thermal strain.
"
INT
Total mechanical and thermal strain intensity.
"
EQV
Total mechanical and thermal equivalent strain.
SEPL
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
"
SRAT
Stress state ratio.
"
HPRES
Hydrostatic pressure.
"
EPEQ
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain. [3]
"
CREQ
Accumulated equivalent creep strain.
"
PSV
Plastic state variable.
"
PLWK
Plastic work/volume.
ELASTIC
Elastic strain energy density.
"
PLASTIC
Plastic strain energy density. [3]
"
CREEP
Creep strain energy density.
SVAR
1, 2, 3, ... N
State variable.
GKS
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component stress.
GKD
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component total closure.
GKDI
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component total inelastic closure.
GKTH
X, XY, XZ
Gasket component thermal closure.
EPTT
NL
SEND
For contact results PowerGraphics is applicable for 3-D models only.
CONT4
STAT5
Contact status:
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact
0-open and not near contact
"
PENE
Contact penetration.
"
PRES
Contact pressure.
"
SFRIC
Contact friction stress.
"
STOT
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction).
"
SLIDE
Contact sliding distance.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31011
PLNSOL
Item
Comp
Description
"
GAP
Contact gap distance.
"
FLUX
Total heat flux at contact surface.
CNOS
Total number of contact status changes during substep.
TG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
TF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
PG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
EF
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric field or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
FMAG
X, Y, Z, SUM
Component magnetic force or vector sum [2].
JC
X, Y, Z, SUM
Conduction current density for elements that support conduction
current calculation. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM). [2].
BFE
TEMP
Body temperatures (calculated from applied temperatures) as used
in solution (area and volume elements only).
TOPO
Densities used for topological optimization. This applies to nodes attached to the following types of elements: PLANE2, PLANE82, SOLID92,
SHELL93, SOLID95.
Valid item labels for FLOTRAN nodal results are:
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
SPHT
Specific heat [2].
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
CMUV
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
LMDn
Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
EMDn
Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
RDFL
Radiation heat flux [2].
1.
31012
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use the labels TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP
instead of TEMP to view the individual temperature degree of freedom. When other thermal elements
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PLOPTS
are included in the model, they should be unselected to avoid plotting undefined information. To view
all temperatures in the same plot, set /ESHAPE,1 and /GRAPHICS,POWER and issue PLNSOL,TEMP.
2.
Not supported by PowerGraphics
3.
For BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements, nodal plastic strain results are not available.
4.
For the CONT items for elements CONTA171 through CONTA175, the reported data is averaged across
the element.
5.
Status notation is for all contact elements except CONTAC12 and CONTAC52. If you are using these elements, check the output listing in the corresponding element documentation.
6.
When plotting Newton-Raphson residual items (Item = NRRE) from a file on the deformed geometry,
the displacements are based on the current set of results in the database. These displacements may not
correspond to the loadstep and substep in the .nrxxxxx file. For more information about .nrxxxxx files
and nonlinear diagnostics postprocessing, see the description of the NLDPOST command and Section 8.10.2.1: Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Drop Test>Animate Results
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Nodal Solu
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Contour Plot>Nodal Solution
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Results
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Time
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Deformed Results
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Dynamic Results
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Isosurfaces
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Mode Shape
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Q-Slice Contours
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Time-harmonic
/PLOPTS, Label, KEY
Controls graphics options on subsequent displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Apply display items as selected from the following labels:
INFO
Controls the display of the legend (ON or OFF) and allows the choice of preset or Multi-legend placement.
Control is provided by the KEY values. (Defaults to KEY=3 when the GUI is on. Defaults to KEY= 2 otherwise.)
LEG1
Header portion of legend column (defaults to ON).
LEG2
View portion of legend column (defaults to ON (except off with contour displays)).
LEG3
View the contour section of the legend column (defaults to ON).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31013
/PLOPTS
FRAME
Frame border lines around windows (defaults to ON).
TITLE
Title (bottom left text) (defaults to ON).
MINM
Min-Max symbols on contour displays (defaults to ON).
LOGO
ANSYS logo (defaults to OFF (displayed as text at top of legend column)). If KEY = ON, the text is removed
from legend column but the logo symbol is displayed in whichever active window is either in the uppermost right corner and on top, or if there is no window in that location, then in the window to the furthest
right of the screen. Version information remains in the legend column.
WINS
Controls whether graphics windows automatically stretch or shrink to adjust to screen size as the legend
column is turned off or on [/PLOPTS,INFO] (defaults to ON). If WINS is on and the legend column is
changed from off to on, all windows are shrunk regardless of what their correct size is.
WP
Working plane (defaults to OFF). The working plane is drawn as part of the display (not just an overlaid
image as in WPSTYL). This option is best used in combination with a hidden-line technique [/TYPE].
DATE
Controls the display of the date and time in your legend. Subsequent KEY values control the display as
follows:
Off or 0 - No date or time displays are included in your legend.
1 - Only the date is shown.
2 (default) - both the date and time are shown.
FILE
Controls the display of the ANSYS jobname in your legend. Subsequent KEY values control the display
as follows:
Off or 0 (default) - The ANSYS jobname is NOT included in your legend.
On or 1 - The ANSYS jobname is included in your legend.
KEY
Switch:
OFF or 0
Do not apply this display item. For Label = DATE, no time or date are displayed.
ON or 1
Apply this display item. For Label = DATE, show only the date.
AUTO or 2
For Label = INFO, initiate Auto-legend mode. If the display has contours, the legend is ON; if the display
has no contours, the legend is OFF. For Label = DATE, display both the date and time.
3
For Label = INFO , switch to Multi-legend mode. See the /UDOC command for the available legend
configurations.
31014
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLOT
Command Default
See individual label defaults.
The Multi-legend mode (/PLOPTS,INFO,3) is the default for contour legend displays.
Notes
Use /PLOPTS,STAT to display settings. Use /PLOPTS,DEFA to reset all specifications back to their defaults.
When you perform multiple results displays, contours on the legend column may be truncated. To avoid this,
specify /PLOPTS,LEG1,0.
The Multi-legend mode provides a number of legend data item priority and placement options. These options
are accessed via the GUI at Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls> Window Options. The /UDOC command
provides command line options for this capability.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Reset Window Options
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Window Options
PLOT, NSTRT, NEND, NINC
Forms a display.
DISPLAY: Action
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSTRT, NEND, NINC
Display plots sequentially from number NSTRT to NEND in steps of NINC. NSTRT defaults to the next plot.
NEND defaults to NSTRT. NINC defaults to 1. If NSTRT = ALL, display all plots from the beginning of the file. If
NEND = ALL, display to the end of the file.
Notes
Output will be to the terminal or to a file, depending on the driver [/SHOWDISP]. The INTERLEAF and DUMP
drivers produce an output file for each plot named INTLnn and DUMPnn, with nn sequentially ranging from 00
to 99. A blank line after the PLOT command causes the next plot to be formed.
Menu Paths
It is part of the DISPLAY command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31015
PLOTTING
PLOTTING
Specifies "Plotting settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST26: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>TimeHist Postproc>Plot
PLPAGM, Item, Gscale, Nopt
Displays path items along the path geometry.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
The path data item to be displayed on the currently active path (defined by the PATH command). Valid path
items are those defined with the PDEF or HFNEAR commands.
Gscale
Scale factor for the offset from the path for the path data item displays. Defaults to 1.0.
Nopt
Determines how data is displayed:
(blank)
Do not display nodes, and scale the display based on the currently selected node set (default).
NODE
Display path item data along with the currently selected set of nodes. The display geometry is scaled to
the selected node set.
Notes
You can use the Gscale argument to scale the contour display offset from the path for clarity. You need to type
all six characters to issue this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Plot Path Item>On Geometry
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Plot Path Item>On Geometry
31016
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLSCH
PLPATH, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Displays path items on a graph.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Labels identifying the path items to be displayed. Up to six items may be drawn per frame. Predefined path
geometry items XG, YG, ZG, and S [PDEF] may also be displayed.
Notes
The path must have been defined by the PATH and PPATH commands. Path items and their labels must have
been defined with the PDEF, HFNEAR, PVECT, PCALC, PDOT, and PCROSS commands. Path items may also be
printed with the PRPATH command. Graph scaling may be controlled with the /XRANGE, /YRANGE, and PRANGE
commands. You need to type all six characters to issue this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Plot Path Item>On Graph
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Plot Path Item>On Graph
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Path Plot
PLSCH, Fname, Ext, Lab, Port
Converts and plots scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters on a Smith chart.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path of a Touchstone file (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed
for the directory path). A Touchstone file may be created in ANSYS by performing a frequency sweep using
the SPSWP command macro, or may it be supplied from another source. An unspecified directory path defaults
to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
Lab
Output parameter:
S
Scattering parameter (default)
Y
Admittance parameter
Z
Impedance parameter
Port
Port number. Defaults to 1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31017
PLSECT
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Smith Chart
PLSECT, Item, Comp, RHO, KBR
Displays membrane and membrane-plus-bending linearized stresses.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item to be processed. Valid item labels are shown in PLSECT - Valid Item and Component
Labels below. Items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item. Valid component labels are shown in PLSECT - Valid Item and Component Labels
below.
RHO
In-plane (X-Y) average radius of curvature of the inside and outside surfaces of an axisymmetric section. If
zero (or blank), a plane or 3-D structure is assumed. If nonzero, an axisymmetric structure is assumed. Use a
very large number (or -1) for an axisymmetric straight section.
KBR
Through-thickness bending stresses key for an axisymmetric analysis (RHO 0):
0
Include the thickness-direction bending stresses.
1
Ignore the thickness-direction bending stresses.
Notes
Calculates and displays the membrane and membrane-plus-bending linearized stresses (as described for the
PRSECT command) along a path section [PATH] as a graph. The path section is defined by two points specified
with the PPATH command. For linearized stress calculations, the path must be defined with nodes. The path
must be entirely within the selected elements (that is, there must not be any element gaps along the path). The
total stress (equivalent to the PLPATH display) is also displayed. This command always uses 48 divisions along
the path, regardless of the number of divisions defined by PATH.
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
PLSECT - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for element results are:
S
31018
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
Component stress.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLSYZ
Item
Comp
Description
"
1, 2, 3
Principal stress.
"
INT, EQV
Stress intensity or equivalent stress.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Linearized Strs
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Plot Path Item>Lineariz Strs
PLSYZ, Fname, Ext, Lab, Opt, VAL_I1, VAL_J1, VAL_I2, VAL_J2, VAL_I3, VAL_J3, VAL_I4, VAL_J4
Converts and plots scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters as a function of frequency.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path of a Touchstone file (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed
for the directory path). A Touchstone file may be created in ANSYS by performing a frequency sweep using
the SPSWP command macro, or may it be supplied from another source. An unspecified directory path defaults
to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Extension of Touchstone file (.snp where n is the number of ports).
Lab
Output parameter:
S
Scattering parameter (default)
Y
Admittance parameter
Z
Impedance parameter
Opt
Format of Touchstone file:
MAG
Magnitude (default)
ANG
Angle
DB
Magnitude in dB units. Only available for scattering parameters (Lab = S).
REAL
Real part of the parameter
IMAG
Imaginary part of the parameter
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31019
PLTIME
VAL_I1
Index I of first parameter plotted. For example, SIJ. Defaults to 1.
VAL_J1
Index J of first parameter plotted. For example, SIJ. Defaults to 1.
VAL_I2, VAL_J2, VAL_I3, VAL_J3, VAL_I4, VAL_J4
Index I and J of second, third, and fourth parameters plotted. For example, SIJ. No default.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>S,Y,Z Parameters
PLTIME, TMIN, TMAX
Defines the time range for which data are to be displayed.
POST26: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TMIN
Minimum time (defaults to the first point stored).
TMAX
Maximum time (defaults to the last point stored).
Command Default
Use the previously defined range [TIMERANGE].
Notes
Defines the time (or frequency) range (within the range stored) for which data are to be displayed. Time is always
displayed in the Z-axis direction for 3-D graph displays. If XVAR = 1, time is also displayed in the X-axis direction
and this control also sets the abscissa scale range.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Graph
PLTRAC, Analopt, Item, Comp, TRPNum, Name, MXLOOP, TOLER, OPTION, ESCL, MSCL
Displays a particle flow or charged particle trace on an element display.
POST1: Trace Points
MP ME <> DY <> <> EM <> FL PP ED
Analopt
Analysis option
31020
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLTRAC
FLUID
Particle trace in fluid flow (default)
ELEC
Particle trace in electric field
MAGN
Particle trace in magnetic field
EMAG
Particle trace in presence of both electric and magnetic fields
Item
Label identifying the item to be contoured. Valid item labels are shown in PLTRAC - Valid Item and Component
Labels below. Some items also require a component label. If Item is blank, display only the path trajectory.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in PLTRAC - Valid Item and Component
Labels below.
TRPNum
Trace point number for storing trajectory data for use with PATH logic. Defaults to 0 (no trajectory path data
is stored for further processing with PATH logic).
Name
Name of prefix of array variable. Defaults to TRAC. NamePOIN stores trajectory path points for trace point
number TRPNum. If Analopt = ELEC, MAGN, or EMAG, two additional array parameters, NameDATA and
NameLABL, store trajectory path data and labels for the same TRPNum.
MXLOOP
Maximum number of loops traced by a particle. Defaults to 25 for Opt = FLUID; otherwise, defaults to 1000.
TOLER
Length tolerance used for particle trajectory geometry calculation. Valid only for Analopt = ELEC, MAGN,
or EMAG. If particle trace appears to terminate inside an element, adjusting the length tolerance may be
necessary. Defaults to 1.0 x 10-8.
OPTION
Flow trace option:
0
Use the undeformed mesh for computing the flow trace.
1
Use the deformed mesh for computing the flow trace.
ESCL
Electric field scale factor. Setting this scale factor affects only the tracing, not the field solution results. A
negative factor corresponds to the opposite vector direction. Valid only for Analopt = ELEC or EMAG. Defaults
to 1.
MSCL
Magnetic field scale factor. Setting this scale factor affects only the tracing, not the field solution results. A
negative factor corresponds to the opposite vector direction. Valid only for Analopt = MAGN or EMAG. Defaults to 1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31021
PLTRAC
Notes
For a specified item, the variation of the item is displayed along the particle trace as a color-contoured ribbon.
The TRPOIN command must be used to define a point on the trajectory path. Multiple traces may be displayed
simultaneously by defining multiple trace points. Issue the TRPLIS command to list the current tracing points.
Issue the TRPDEL command to delete tracing points defined earlier. Use the PAPUT command with the POIN
option to retrieve the particle trajectory points as path points.
Three array parameters are created at the time of the particle trace: TRACPOIN, TRACDATA and TRACLABL. These
array parameters can be used to put the particle velocity and the elapsed time into path form. The procedure to
put the arrays into a path named PATHNAME is as follows:
*get,npts,PARM,TRACPOIN,DIM,x
PATH,PATHNAME,npts,9,1
PAPUT,TRACPOIN,POINTS
PAPUT,TRACDATA,TABLES
PAPUT,TRACLABL,LABELS
PRPATH,S,T_TRACE,VX_TRACE,VY_TRACE,VZ_TRACE,VS_TRACE
Not used if Analopt = FLUID. If working in the GUI, use the "All information" option to retrieve information from
all three arrays at once.
If OPTION is set to 1, the deformed mesh is based on the displacement degrees of freedom UX, UY, and UZ, which
must be available in the load step.
PLTRAC - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for nodal degree of freedom results are:
TEMP
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity or vector sum.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation.
Valid item and component labels for FLOTRAN nodal results are:
TTOT
Total temperature.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
CMUV
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
Valid item labels for Analopt = ELEC nodal results are:
VOLT
31022
Electric potential.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLVAROPT
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item labels for Analopt = MAGN or EMAG nodal results are:
None
Color contour displayed.
See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on particle flow and charged particle traces. See Animation in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for information on particle trace animation.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Particle Trace
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Plot Flow Tra
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Flow Trace
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Particle Flow
PLVAR, NVAR1, NVAR2, NVAR3, NVAR4, NVAR5, NVAR6, NVAR7, NVAR8, NVAR9, NVAR10
Displays up to ten variables in the form of a graph.
POST26: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR1, NVAR2, NVAR3, NVAR4, NVAR5, NVAR6, NVAR7, NVAR8, NVAR9, NVAR10
Variables to be displayed, defined either by the reference number or a unique thirty-two character name. If
duplicate names are used the command will plot the data for the lowest-numbered variable with that name.
Notes
Variables are displayed vs. variable N on the XVAR command. The string value will be a predefined, unique name.
For complex variables, the amplitude is displayed by default [PLCPLX]. Each PLVAR command produces a new
frame. See the /GRTYP command for displaying multiple variables in a single frame with separate Y-axes.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Graph Variables
PLVAROPT, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10
Displays up to ten parameters in the form of a graph.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10
Names of the parameters to be displayed on this frame.
Command Default
No display.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31023
PLVECT
Notes
Displays up to ten parameters in the form of a graph. Parameters are displayed vs. Lab on the XVAROPT command
(defaults to set number) in the order corresponding to an ascending order of the XVAROPT parameter. See the
/GRTYP command for displaying multiple parameters in a single frame with separate Y-axes. Each PLVAROPT
command produces a new frame.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Graphs/Tables
PLVECT, Item, Lab2, Lab3, LabP, Mode, Loc, Edge
Displays results as vectors.
POST1: Results
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Predefined vector item (from PLVECT - Valid Item Labels below) or a label identifying the i-component of a
user-defined vector.
Lab2
Label identifying the j-component of a user-defined vector. In most cases, this value must be blank if Item
is selected from PLVECT - Valid Item Labels. Individual principal stresses (Item = S) or principal strains (Item
= EPxx) may be plotted by specifying the value as 1, 2, or 3.
Lab3
Label identifying the k-component of a user-defined vector. Must be blank if Item is selected from list below
or for 2-D user defined vector.
LabP
Label assigned to resultant vector for display labeling (defaults to Item).
Mode
Vector or raster mode override key:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEY on the /DEVICE command.
RAST
Use raster mode for PLVECT displays.
VECT
Use vector mode for PLVECT displays.
Loc
Vector location for display of field element results:
ELEM
Display at element centroid (default).
NODE
Display at element nodes.
31024
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLVECT
Edge
Edge display override key:
(blank)
Use the setting of Key on the /EDGE command.
OFF
Deactivate the edge display.
ON
Activate the edge display.
Notes
Displays various solution results as vectors (arrows) for the selected nodes and/or elements (elements must
contain at least three nodes that are not colinear). For example, PLVECT,U displays the displacement vector for
all selected nodes. For section displays [/TYPE], the vectors are shown only on the section face (i.e., cutting plane).
The PLVECT display of principal strains and stresses (Item = S, EPTO, EPEL, EPPL, EPCR, or EPTH) on a "cut" of the
model (/TYPE,,1 ,5,7,8, or 9) is not supported. The resulting plot displays the vectors on all selected elements,
not on just the sliced surface. See the /VSCALE command to scale vector lengths. Vector magnitudes may be
shown as a contour display with the PLNSOL command. Various results also depend upon the recalculation
method and the selected results location [LAYER, SHELL, and NSEL].
Items may be selected from a set of recognized vector labels (Item) or a vector may be defined from up to three
scalar labels (Item,Lab2,Lab3). Scalar labels may be user-defined with the ETABLE command. The vectors appear
on an element display as arrows showing the relative magnitude of the vector and its direction. The predefined
items will be shown either at the node or at the element centroid, depending on what item is being displayed
and depending on the Loc setting. User defined ETABLE items will be shown at the element centroid, regardless
of the Loc setting. Stress vectors appear as arrows at the element centroid, with the arrowheads pointing away
from each other for tension and toward each other for compression.
For PowerGraphics, vector arrow displays are generated in Global Cartesian (RSYS = 0). All subsequent displays
will revert to your original coordinate system.
When vector mode is active (Mode = VECT), use the Z-buffered display type [/TYPE,,6] to maximize speed of
PLVECT plots (other hidden display types may make plotting slow). For PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER],
the items marked with [1] are not supported by PowerGraphics.
It is possible to plot principal stresses (Item = S) or principal strains (Item = EPxx) individually. To do so, specify
a Lab2 value of 1, 2, or 3. For example, the following are valid commands:
PLVECT,S,1,,,VECT,ELEM,ON,0
PLVECT,EPEL,3,,,VECT,NODE,ON,0
PLVECT - Valid Item Labels
Item
Description
Valid item labels for nodal degree of freedom vector results are:
U
Structural displacement vector.
ROT
Structural rotation vector.
Velocity vector.
Magnetic vector potential vector.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31025
PLVFRC
Item
Description
Valid item labels for structural element results are:
Principal stresses[1].
EPTO
Principal total strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR)[1].
EPEL
Principal elastic strains[1].
EPPL
Principal plastic strains[1].
EPCR
Principal creep strains[1].
EPTH
Principal thermal strains[1].
Valid item labels for field element results are:
TG
Thermal gradient vector.
TF
Thermal flux vector.
PG
Pressure gradient vector.
EF
Electric field vector.
Electric flux density vector.
Magnetic field intensity vector. If Lab2 is blank, then Item is interpreted as one of the predefined labels. Otherwise, Item is interpreted
as a user-defined ET label and ANSYS will request a nonblank
Lab2/Lab3 according to the dimension of the problem.
Magnetic flux density vector.
FMAG
Magnetic force vector.
Poynting vector.
JS
Source current density vector for low-frequency magnetic analyses.
Total current density vector (sum of conduction and displacement
current densities) in low frequency electric analyses.
JT
Total measureable current density vector in low-frequency electromagnetic analyses. (Conduction current density vector in a low-frequency electric analysis.)
JC
Conduction current density vector for elements that support conduction current calculation.
1.
Not supported by PowerGraphics
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Vector Plot>Predefined
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Vector Plot>User-defined
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Vector Plot
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Q-Slice Vectors
PLVFRC, CONT
Displays volume fractions in a volume of fluid (VOF) analysis.
PREP7: FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
CONT
Contour setting:
31026
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PLWAVE
0
Smooth plot with contour levels at 0.5 and 1.0 (default).
1
Smooth plot with current settings of contour levels.
Notes
The PLVFRC command macro places the volume fraction results into an element table and then plots the element
table data (i.e., ETABLE,VFRC,NMISC,1 and then PLETAB,VFRC,1). If CONT = 0 (default), the command macro issues
the /CVAL,ALL,0.5,1.0 command before the ETABLE command. This means PLETAB uses contour levels of 0.5
and 1.0 to indicate the free surface and fluid regions. If CONT = 1, PLETAB uses the current contour settings.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Drop Test>Animate Results
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Contour Plot>Volume Fraction
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Results
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Animate Over Time
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Animate>Time-harmonic
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Multi-Plot Contrls
PLWAVE, Ex, Ey, Ez, AngX, AngZ
Specifies a free-space time-harmonic incident plane electromagnetic wave.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Ex
Electric field amplitude in x direction.
Ey
Electric field amplitude in y direction.
Ez
Electric field amplitude in z direction.
AngX
Angle between incident wave vector and X-axis (Phi).
AngZ
Angle between incident wave vector and Z-axis (Theta).
Notes
Defines an incident plane wave for the entire solution domain. See Spherical Coordinates in the ANSYS HighFrequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31027
PMAP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>Planewav0>Define Wave
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>Planewav0>Wave Status
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>Planewav0>Define Wave
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>Planewav0>Wave Status
PMAP, FORM, DISCON
Creates mapping of the path geometry by defining path interpolation division points.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
FORM
Defines the mapping method:
UNIFORM
Maps uniform divisions (specified on the nDiv argument of the PATH command) between specified
points. This is the default.
ACCURATE
Map geometry using a small division at the beginning and end of each segment. This gives you accurate
derivatives, integrals, tangents, and normals for curves which do not have continuous slopes at the
specified points. To create nonuniform divisions, the nDiv argument of the PATH command must be
greater than 2.
DISCON
Sets mapping for discontinuities in the field. The divisions are modified to put a point just before and just
after the discontinuity. The valid label is MAT, for a material discontinuity. No discontinuity is the default.
Discontinuity mapping involves the NOAV option on the PDEF command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>Path Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>Path Options
PMETH
Specifies "p-Method" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
31028
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PMETH
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>p-Method
/PMETH, Key, OPTION
Activates the p-method solution options in the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
SOLUTION: p-Method
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
ON
Activates the p-method solution options.
OFF
Deactivates the p-method solution options (default).
STAT
Lists the current setting of Key.
OPTION
Activates discipline option if Key = ON.
0
Activates the structural p-method solution options (default).
1
Activates the electrostatic p-method solution options.
Command Default
The p-method solution options are hidden (not shown) in the GUI.
Notes
When this option is activated, only the options applicable to a p-method solution will be displayed in the GUI.
This command is not required outside of the GUI.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preferences
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31029
PMGTRAN
PMGTRAN, Fname, FREQ, Fcnam1, Fcnam2, Pcnam1, Pcnam2, Ecnam1, Ccnam1
Summarizes electromagnetic results from a transient analysis.
POST26: Special Purpose
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Fname
File name (8 characters maximum) to which tabular data and plot files will be written. Must be enclosed in
single quotes when the command is manually typed in. Defaults to MG_TRNS. The data file extension is .OUT
and the plot file extension is .PLT.
FREQ
Frequency of solution output. Defaults to 1. Every FREQth solution on the results file is output.
Fcnam1, Fcnam2
Names of element components for force calculation. Must be enclosed in single quotes when the command
is manually typed in.
Pcnam1, Pcnam2
Names of element components for power loss calculation. Must be enclosed in single quotes when the
command is manually typed in.
Ecnam1, Ccnam1
Names of element components for energy and total current calculations, respectively. Must be enclosed in
single quotes when the command is manually typed in.
Notes
PMGTRAN invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates and summarizes electromagnetic results from a transient
analysis. The results are summarized by element components and listed on the screen as well as written to a file
(Fname.OUT). Also, graph plots of results as a function of time are created and written to a file (Fname.PLT) for
use in the DISPLAY program.
Two components may be selected for the summary of electromagnetic forces (see FMAGSUM), two for power
loss, and one each for stored energy (see SENERGY) and total current (see CURR2D). See the referenced commands
for other restrictions.
PMGTRAN is restricted to MKSA units.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Magnetics
31030
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PMLOPT
PMLOPT, ESYS, Lab, Xminus, Xplus, Yminus, Yplus, Zminus, Zplus
Defines perfectly matched layers (PMLs) for a high-frequency analysis.
PREP7: Perfectly Matched Layers
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
ESYS
Element coordinate system number. ESYS may be 0 (global Cartesian) or any previously defined local Cartesian
coordinate system number (>10). Defaults to 0.
Lab
Label defining the number of dimensions:
ONE
A one-dimensional PML region.
THREE
A 3-D PML region (default).
Xminus
For harmonic analysis, normal reflection coefficient in negative X direction of ESYS. Defaults to 1.E 2.5
(equivalent to -50 dB). For modal analysis, the attenuation factor in negative X direction of ESYS. Defaults to
4.0.
Xplus
For harmonic analysis, normal reflection coefficient in positive X direction of ESYS. Defaults to 1.E 2.5
(equivalent to -50 dB). For modal analysis, the attenuation factor in positive X direction of ESYS. Defaults to
4.0.
Yminus
For harmonic analysis, normal reflection coefficient in negative Y direction of ESYS. Defaults to 1.E 2.5
(equivalent to -50 dB). For modal analysis, the attenuation factor in negative Y direction of ESYS. Defaults to
4.0.
Yplus
For harmonic analysis, normal reflection coefficient in positive Y direction of ESYS. Defaults to 1.E 2.5
(equivalent to -50 dB). For modal analysis, the attenuation factor in positive Y direction of ESYS. Defaults to
4.0.
Zminus
For harmonic analysis, normal reflection coefficient in negative Z direction of ESYS. Defaults to 1.E 2.5
(equivalent to -50 dB). For modal analysis, the attenuation factor in negative Z direction of ESYS. Defaults to
4.0.
Zplus
For harmonic analysis, normal reflection coefficient in positive Z direction of ESYS. Defaults to 1.E 2.5
(equivalent to -50 dB). For modal analysis, the attenuation factor in positive Z direction of ESYS. Defaults to
4.0.
Notes
PMLOPT defines perfectly matched layers (PML) for a high-frequency analysis. Each PML region must have a
uniquely defined element coordinate system. Normal reflection coefficient values for a harmonic analysis must
be less than 1. Attenuation factor values for a modal analysis must be greater than 1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31031
PMLSIZE
Issue PMLOPT,STAT to list the current normal reflection coefficient or attenuation factor settings for a PML region.
Issue PMLOPT,CLEAR to clear all normal reflection coefficient or attenuation factor settings and restore them to
the defaults. Issue PMLOPT,ESYS,CLEAR to clear all normal reflection coefficient or attenuation factor settings
for this element coordinate system and restore them to the defaults.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>Clear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>Define
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>Status
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>All
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>On ESYS
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>Clear
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>Define
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>Status
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>All
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>PMLOpt>On ESYS
PMLSIZE, FREQB, FREQE, DMIN, DMAX, THICK, ANGLE
Determines number of PML layers.
PREP7: Perfectly Matched Layers
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
FREQB
Minimum operating frequency
FREQE
Maximum operating frequency
DMIN
Minimum distance from radiation source to PML interface.
DMAX
Maximum distance from radiation source to PML interface.
THICK
Thickness of PML region. Defaults to 0.
ANGLE
Incident angle of wave to the PML interface. Defaults to 0.
Notes
PMLSIZE determines the number of PML layers for acceptable numerical accuracy.
PMLSIZE must be issued before any meshing commands. If the thickness of the PML region is known, it determines
an element edge length (h) and issues ESIZE,h. If the thickness of the PML region is unknown, it determines the
number of layers (n) and issues ESIZE,,n.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>PML
31032
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PMORE
PMOPTS, TOLER
Defines percentage tolerance for a p-Method solution.
SOLUTION: p-Method
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TOLER
Percentage tolerance used to determine which elements to fix at the current p-level. If an element's strain
energy error is less than this tolerance its p-level will be fixed at the current level. Defaults to 5.
Command Default
Tolerance of 5% will be used.
Notes
Defines the p-level tolerance for p-method solutions (TOLER). The default value is satisfactory for most solutions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Solution Options
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Solution Options
/PMORE, --, X5, Y5, X6, Y6, X7, Y7, X8, Y8
Creates an annotation polygon (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
--
Unused field.
X5
X location for vertex 5 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y5
Y location for vertex 5 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
X6
X location for vertex 6 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y6
Y location for vertex 6 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
X7
X location for vertex 7 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y7
Y location for vertex 7 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31033
PNGR
X8
X location for vertex 8 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y8
Y location for vertex 8 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
Notes
Defines the 5th through 8th vertices of an annotation polygon [/POLYGON]. This is a command generated by
the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used. This
command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
PNGR, Kywrd, OPT, VAL
Provides PNG file export for ANSYS displays.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Kywrd
Specifies various PNG file export options.
COMP
If Kywrd = COMP, then OPT is either ON or OFF (blank is interpreted as OFF). This option allows you to
turn PNG file compression ON or OFF. If OPT = ON, then The VAL field is read to determine the degree
of compression. See the VALUE argument for acceptable compression values.
ORIENT
If Kywrd = ORIENT, then OPT will determine the orientation of the entire plot. OPT can be either Horizontal
(default) or Vertical.
COLOR
If Kywrd = COLOR, then OPT will determine the color depth of the saved file. OPT can be 0, 1, or 2, corresponding to Black and White, Grayscale, and Color (default), respectively.
TMOD
If Kywrd = TMOD, then OPT will determine the text method. OPT can be either 1 or 0, corresponding to
bitmap text (default) or line stroke text, respectively.
DEFAULT
If Kywrd = DEFAULT, then all of the default values, for all of the Kywrd parameters listed above, are active.
STAT
Shows the current status of PNG file export.
OPT
OPT can have the following names or values, depending on the value for Kywrd (see above).
31034
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PNUM
ON, OFF
If Kywrd = COMP, the values On and Off control the use of compression. The degree of compression is
determined by VAL
Horizontal, Vertical
If Kywrd = ORIENT, the terms Horizontal or Vertical determine the orientation of the plot.
0,1,2
If Kywrd = COLOR, the numbers 0, 1, and 2 correspond to Black and White, Grayscale and Color, respectively.
1,0
If Kywrd = TMOD, the values 1 and 0 determine whether bitmap (1) or stroke text (0) fonts will be used
VAL
VAL is active only when Kywrd = COMP, and determines the degree of compression applied to the exported
file (see above).
1
Apply the default, optimum value for compression. This value represents the best combination of speed
and compression. It varies according to the release level of the ZLIB compression package.
19
Use this value to specify a specific compression level. 1 is the lowest compression level (fastest) and 9 is
the highest compression level (slowest).
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Hard Copy
/PNUM, Label, KEY
Controls entity numbering/coloring on plots.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Type of numbering/coloring:
NODE
Node numbers on node and element plots.
ELEM
Element numbers and colors on element plots.
DOMAIN
Domains set via DECOMP.
SEC
Section numbers and colors on element plots.
MAT
Material set numbers and colors on element and solid model plots (see Notes).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31035
/PNUM
TYPE
Element type reference numbers and colors on element and solid model plots (see Notes).
REAL
Real constant set numbers and colors on element and solid model plots (see Notes).
ESYS
Element coordinate system numbers on element and solid model plots (see Notes).
PART
Element part numbers and colors on element plots (applicable to ANSYS LS-DYNA only).
LOC
Location numbers/colors of the element in the solution sequence (the "wavefront order," see WAVES
command) on element plots.
Note LOC and ELEM numbers will be the same unless the model has been reordered.
KP
Keypoint numbers on solid model plots.
LINE
Line numbers on solid model plots (both numbers and colors on line plots).
AREA
Area numbers on solid model plots (both numbers and colors on area plots).
VOLU
Volume numbers on solid model plots (both numbers and colors on volume plots).
SVAL
Stress (or any contour) values on postprocessing plots, and surface load values and colors on model plots
(when surface load symbols are on [/PSF]). For tabular boundary conditions, the table-evaluated values
will be displayed on node, element, or contour displays in POST1 when load symbols (/PBF, /PSF, /PBC)
are on and TABNAM is OFF.
TABNAM
Table names for tabular boundary conditions. If this label is turned on, the table name appears next to
the appropriate symbol, arrow, face outline, or contour as dictated by the /PSF, /PBC, and /PBF commands.
STAT
Shows current settings for /PNUM.
DEFA
Resets all /PNUM specifications back to default.
KEY
Switch:
0
Turns OFF numbers/colors for specified label.
1
Turns ON numbers/colors for specified label.
Notes
This command specifies the entity numbering and coloring to be applied to subsequent plots.
31036
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
POINT
The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS labels activate both the numbering and coloring of the corresponding attributes
for elements on EPLOTs, keypoints on KPLOTs, lines on LPLOTs, areas on APLOTs, and volumes on *VPLOTs.
The ELEM, MAT, TYPE, REAL, ESYS, PART (ANSYS LS-DYNA only), and LOC labels are mutually exclusive, i.e., only
one can be specified at a time. Also, turning on a LINE, AREA, or VOLU label will turn off the MAT, TYPE, REAL,
and PART labels.
Element and volume numbers are not visible for 3-D elements and volumes when Z-buffering is turned on
(/TYPE,,[6,7, or 8]).
Use /PSTATUS or /PNUM,STAT to show settings. Use /PNUM,DEFA to reset all specifications back to default. Use
the /NUMBER command to control whether numbers and colors are displayed together.
/PNUM,LOC and /PNUM,ESYS are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
/PNUM,DOMAIN,ON or OFF plots preconditioner domains or substructures following auto substructure generation.
These domains are used by the DDS, DPCG, or DJCG solvers for preconditioning the solution.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Numbering
POINT
Specifies "Point flow tracing settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Trace Points
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31037
POLY
POLY
Creates a polygonal area based on working plane coordinate pairs.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Defines a polygonal area on the working plane. The area will be defined with NPT keypoints and NPT lines, where
NPT (must be at least 3) is the number of coordinate pairs defined with the PTXY command. See the RPOLY and
RPR4 commands for other ways to create polygons.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
/POLYGON, NVERT, X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3, X4, Y4
Creates annotation polygons (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVERT
Number of vertices of polygon (3 NVERT 8). Use /PMORE for polygons with more than 4 vertices.
X1
X location for vertex 1 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y1
Y location for vertex 1 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
X2
X location for vertex 2 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y2
Y location for vertex 2 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
X3
X location for vertex 3 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y3
Y location for vertex 3 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
X4
X location for vertex 4 of polygon (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
Y4
Y location for vertex 4 of polygon (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
Notes
Creates annotation polygons to be written directly onto the display at a specified location. This is a command
generated by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is
used. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in
an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
31038
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/POST1
All polygons are shown on subsequent displays unless the annotation is turned off or deleted. Use the /LSPEC
and the /PSPEC command to set the attributes of the polygon. Use the /PMORE command to define the 5th
through 8th vertices of the polygon.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
POPT, Lop1
Selects the piping analysis standard for a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Lop1
Option label:
B31.1
for ANSI B31.1.
NC
for ASME Section III NC, Class 2.
Command Default
ANSI B31.1.
Notes
Selects the piping analysis standard for a piping run [RUN]. Affects only the flexibility and stress intensification
factors applied to the curved pipe elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Specifications
/POST1
Enters the database results postprocessor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the general database results postprocessor (POST1). All load symbols (/PBC, /PSF, or /PBF) are automatically turned off with this command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31039
/POST26
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc
/POST26
Enters the time-history results postprocessor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the time-history results postprocessor (POST26).
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro
POUTRES, Item1, Item2, Item3, Item4, Item5, Item6, Item7, Item8, Item9, Item10, Item11, Item12,
Item13, Item14, Item15, Item16, Item17, Item18, Item19
Controls the nodal DOF and computed element results graphics data that is written to the PGR file.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item1, Item2, Item3, Item4, Item5, Item6, Item7, Item8, Item9, Item10, Item11, Item12,
Item13, Item14, Item15, Item16, Item17, Item18, Item19
Data written to the PGR file. Acceptable values are as follows:
ALL
All solution items are written to the PGR file.
NONE
No solution results are written to the PGR file (default)
NSOL
Nodal DOF solution (always written)
S
Stress
NL
Structural nonlinear data
CONT
Contact data
31040
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
POUTRES
EPTO
Total strain
EPEL
Elastic Strain
EPTH
Thermal strain
EPPL
Plastic Strain
EPCR
Creep strain
TG
Thermal gradient
TF
Thermal flux
EF
Electric field
D
Electric flux density
HF
Magnetic field intensity
B
Magnetic flux density
FMAG
Magnetic forces
PG
Pressure gradient
BFE
Body temperatures
TOPO
Densities for topological optimization
Command Default
No solution results are written to the PGR file.
Notes
PowerGraphics data using the CONT option is not available for 2-D models.
This command is also valid in POST1.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Write PGR File
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31041
POWERH
POWERH
Calculates the rms power loss in a conductor or lossy dielectric.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
POWERH invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates the time-averaged (rms) power loss in a conductor or lossy
dielectric material from a harmonic analysis. The power loss is stored in the parameter PAVG. Conductor losses
include solid conductors and surface conductors approximated by impedance or shielding boundary conditions.
The power loss density for solid conductors or dielectrics is stored in the element table with the label PLOSSD
and may be listed [PRETAB] or displayed [PLETAB]. PLOSSD does not include surface losses. The elements of
the conducting region must be selected before this command is issued. POWERH is valid for 2-D and 3-D analyses.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Element Based>Power Loss
PPATH, POINT, NODE, X, Y, Z, CS
Defines a path by picking or defining nodes, or locations on the currently active working plane, or by
entering specific coordinate locations.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
POINT
The point number. It must be greater than zero and less than or equal to the nPts value specified on the
PATH command if graphical picking is not being used.
NODE
The node number defining this point. If blank, use the X, Y, Z coordinates to define the point. A valid node
number will override X, Y, Z coordinate arguments.
X, Y, Z
The location of the point in the global Cartesian coordinate system. Use these arguments only if you omit
the NODE argument.
CS
The coordinate system for interpolation of the path between the previous point and this point. Omit this
argument if you wish to use the currently active (CSYS) coordinate system. If the coordinate system of two
adjacent points is different, the CS value of the latter point will be used.
Notes
For linearized stress calculations, the path must be defined with nodes.
This command is designed and works best in interactive (GUI) mode, using the menu paths listed below. For
command line operations, issue PPATH,P to define your path by picking nodes.
31042
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PPRANGE
For information on displaying paths you have defined, see Defining Data to be Retrieved in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>By Location
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>By Nodes
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>Modify Path
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>By Location
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>By Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>Modify Path
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
PPLOT
Displays an element plot indicating each element's final p-level.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
The final polynomial level (an integer value ranging from 2 to 8) is displayed at the center of the element's facets
[/EFACET] in a p-method analysis.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>p-Method>p-Levels
PPRANGE, START, MAX
Specifies a range of p-level values for use in a p-method solution.
SOLUTION: p-Method
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
START
Starting p-level. Defaults to 2.
MAX
Maximum p-level. Defaults to 8.
Command Default
As described for each argument above.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31043
PPRES
Notes
The minimum possible p-level is 2, and the maximum possible p-level is 8. This command sets a global p-range
for the entire model, where KEYOPT settings [ET] control individual element p-levels. Element KEYOPT settings
override PPRANGE settings.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Set p range
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>p-Method>Set p range
PPRES, PRESS
Defines the internal pressure for a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
PRESS
Pipe internal pressure.
Notes
Defines the pipe internal pressure for a piping run [RUN]. These pressures are assigned to the elements as they
are generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Loads
PRANGE, LINC, VMIN, VMAX, XVAR
Determines the path range.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LINC, VMIN, VMAX
Set the range for listing or displaying the table locations between a minimum value (VMIN) and a maximum
value (VMAX) of the path distance with a location increment of LINC (defaults to 1). The first location begins
at VMIN.
XVAR
Path variable item to be used as the x-axis plot variable. Any valid path variable may be used (PDEF command).
Default variable is the path distance, S.
31044
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRCPLX
Command Default
Include every interpolation point and entire path distance.
Notes
Determines the path distance range for use with the PRPATH and PLPATH commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Plot Path Item>Path Range
PRCONV
Lists convergence values versus characteristic p-level.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
After a p-method solution, this command lists in tabular form all convergence values versus characteristic plevel.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>p-Convergence
PRCPLX, KEY
Defines the output form for complex variables.
POST26: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KEY
Output form key:
0
Real and imaginary parts.
1
Amplitude and phase angle. Stored real and imaginary data are converted to amplitude and phase angle
upon output. Data remain stored as real and imaginary parts.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31045
PRECISION
Notes
Defines the output form for complex variables. Used only with harmonic analyses (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
All results data are stored in the form of real and imaginary components and converted to amplitude and/or
phase angle as specified via the PRCPLX command. The conversion is not valid for derived results (such as
principal stress/strain, equivalent stress/strain and USUM).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>List
PRECISION, LABEL
Specifies machine precision for solvers (currently valid only for PCG solvers).
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LABEL
Machine precision to use for solvers:
0 or double
Specifies double precision (default).
1 or single
Specifies single precision.
Notes
When the PCG solver is specified by the EQSLV command, this command can be used to specify single precision
for the solver. By using single precision, about 30% less in-core memory is used by the PCG solver. However, using
single precision can lead to unconvergence for the PCG solver when the problem is ill-conditioned. Double
precision is the default and the recommended option for the PCG solvers
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
PRED, Sskey, --, Lskey
Activates a predictor in a nonlinear analysis.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Sskey
Substep predictor key:
OFF
No prediction occurs.
31046
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRED
ON
Use a predictor on all substeps after the first. This behavior is the default, with certain exceptions; see
Command Default for details.
--
Unused field.
Lskey
Load step predictor:
OFF
No prediction across load steps occurs. This is the default behavior.
ON
Use a predictor also on the first substep of the load step. (Sskey = ON is required.)
Command Default
The default command behavior is to use prediction (Sskey = ON). However, prediction does not occur (Sskey
= OFF) if one or more of these conditions exist:
Rotation DOFs are present.
You are using the SOLID65 element.
You are mapping (MAPSOLVE) variables to a new mesh during rezoning. (Prediction does not occur for
any MAPSOLVE substeps, nor for the first substep afterwards.)
Notes
Activates a predictor in a nonlinear analysis on the degree-of-freedom solution for the first equilibrium iteration
of each substep.
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description of the
SOLCONTROL command for a complete listing of the defaults set via SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
When using the arc-length method (ARCLEN, ARCTRM), you cannot issue the DOF solution predictor command
(PRED), the automatic time stepping command (AUTOTS), or the line search command (LNSRCH). If you activate
the arc-length method after you set PRED, AUTOTS, or LNSRCH, a warning message appears. If you elect to
proceed with the arc-length method activation, ANSYS disables your DOF predictor, automatic time stepping,
and line search settings.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Predictor
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Predictor
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31047
/PREP7
/PREP7
Enters the model creation preprocessor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
PREP7: Database
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the general input data preprocessor (PREP7).
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor
PRERR
Prints SEPC and TEPC.
POST1: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
Prints the percent error in structural energy norm (SEPC) and the thermal energy norm percent error (TEPC).
Approximations of mesh discretization error associated with a solution are calculated for analyses having structural or thermal degrees of freedom.
The structural approximation is based on the energy error (which is similar in concept to the strain energy) and
represents the error associated with the discrepancy between the calculated stress field and the globally continuous stress field (see POST1 - Error Approximation Technique in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference). This discrepancy is due to the assumption in the elements that only the displacements are continuous at the nodes. The
stress field is calculated from the displacements and should also be continuous, but generally is not. Structural
analyses should be linear elastic and may use solid elements having only structural degrees of freedom (excluding
SOLID46, SOLID65, HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER84, HYPER86, HYPER158 VISCO88, VISCO106, VISCO107,
and VISCO108) and 3-D shell elements (excluding SHELL28, SHELL41, SHELL91, and SHELL99).
Thermal analyses may use any solid and shell thermal element having only temperature degrees of freedom.
The thermal approximation is based on the total heat flow dissipation and represents the error associated with
the discrepancy between the calculated nodal thermal flux within an element and a continuous global thermal
flux. This continuous thermal flux is calculated with the normal nodal averaging procedure.
The volume (result label VOLU) is used to calculate the energy error per element (result label SERR for the structural energy error and TERR for the thermal energy error). These energy errors, along with the appropriate energy,
are then used to calculate the percent error in energy norm (SEPC for structural and TEPC for thermal). These
percentages can be listed by the PRERR command, retrieved by the *GET command (with labels SEPC and TEPC)
for further calculations, and shown on the displacement display [PLDISP], as applicable.
For structural analyses, the maximum absolute value of nodal stress variation of any stress component for any
node of an element (result item SDSG) is also calculated. Similarly, for thermal gradient components, TDSG is
31048
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRESOL
calculated. Minimum and maximum result bounds considering the possible effect of discretization error will be
shown on contour displays [PLNSOL]. For shell elements, the top surface location is used to produce a meaningful
percentage value. SERR, TERR, SEPC, TEPC, SDSG, and TDSG will be updated whenever the nodal stresses or fluxes
are recalculated.
If the energy error is a significant portion of the total energy, then the analysis should be repeated using a finer
mesh to obtain a more accurate solution. The energy error is relative from problem to problem but will converge
to a zero energy error as the mesh is refined. An automated adaptive meshing procedure using this energy error
is described with the ADAPT macro.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Percent Error
Utility Menu>List>Results>Percent Error
PRESOL, Item, Comp
Prints the solution results for elements.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in PRESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in PRESOL - Valid Item and Component
Labels below.
Notes
Prints the solution results for the selected elements in the sorted sequence. For example, PRESOL,S prints the
stress items SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, and SXZ for the node locations of the element. Component results are in the
global Cartesian coordinate directions unless transformed [RSYS]. Shell elements print values at the top, then
bottom of the element (or layer). If KEYOPT(8) = 2 (for SHELL93, SHELL181, SHELL208, or SHELL209) or KEYOPT(11)
= 2 (SHELL63), then the results are printed in the order TOP, BOT and then MID of each element, (or layer). The
MID value will be the actual value as written to the results file. Items are listed as columns of a table versus element
number. An exception occurs for item ELEM which uses an element format (all applicable line element results
are listed per element) instead of a tabular format. The FORCE command can be used to define which component
of the nodal load is to be used (static, damping, inertia, or total). See the ETABLE and PRETAB commands for
printing items not available through this command (such as line element results).
For PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER], results are listed only for the element surface. The items marked with
[1] are not supported by PowerGraphics.
PRESOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for element results are:
S
Component (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) stresses.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31049
PRESOL
Item
Comp
Description
EPEL
Component (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) elastic strains.
EPTH
Component (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) thermal strains.
EPPL
Component (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) plastic strains.
EPCR
Component (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) creep strains.
EPSW
Swelling strain.
EPTO
Component (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL
+ EPCR).
EPTT
Component (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) total mechanical and thermal strains
(EPEL + EPPL + EPCR + EPTH).
NL
Nonlinear items (SEPL, SRAT, HPRES, EPEQ, CREQ, PSV, PLWK).
SEND
ELASTIC
Elastic strain energy density.
"
PLASTIC
Plastic strain energy density.
"
CREEP
Creep strain energy density.
1,2,3, ... N
State variable.
SVAR
GKS
Gasket component (X, XY, XZ) stress.
GKD
Gasket component (X, XY, XZ) total closure.
GKDI
Gasket component (X, XY, XZ) total inelastic closure.
GKTH
Gasket component (X, XY, XZ) thermal closure.
CONT
Contact items (STAT, PENE, PRES, SFRIC, STOT, SLIDE, GAP, FLUX). See
component descriptions in PLNSOL.
TG
Component (X, Y, Z) thermal gradients and vector sum (SUM).
TF
Component (X, Y, Z) thermal fluxes and vector sum (SUM).
PG
Component (X, Y, Z) pressure gradients and vector sum (SUM).
EF
Component (X, Y, Z) electric fields and vector sum (SUM).
Component (X, Y, Z) electric flux densities and vector sum (SUM).
Component (X, Y, Z) magnetic field intensities and vector sum (SUM).
Component (X, Y, Z) magnetic flux densities and vector sum (SUM).
FMAG
Component (X, Y, Z) magnetic forces and vector sum (SUM) [1].
Poynting vector components (X, Y, Z) and sum (SUM) [1].
Component (X, Y, Z) structural forces. Use FORCE for type [1].
Component (X, Y, Z) structural moments. Use FORCE for type [1].
HEAT
Heat flow. Use FORCE for type [1].
FLOW
Fluid flow. Use FORCE for type.
AMPS
Current flow [1]. Use FORCE for type.
CHRG
Charge [1]. Use FORCE for type.
FLUX
Magnetic flux [1].
VF
Component (X, Y, Z) fluid "forces". Use FORCE for type [1].
CSG
Component (X, Y, Z) magnetic current segments. Use FORCE for type
[1].
FORC
All available force items (F to CSG above). (10 maximum) [1].
BFE
Body temperatures (calculated from applied temperatures) as used
in solution (area and volume elements only).
31050
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRESOL
Item
Comp
Description
ELEM
All applicable element results (available only for structural line elements) [1].
SERR
Structural error energy [1].
SDSG
Absolute value of the maximum variation of any nodal stress component [1].
TERR
Thermal error energy [1].
TDSG
Absolute value of the maximum variation of any nodal thermal
gradient component [1].
SENE
"Stiffness" energy or thermal heat dissipation. Same as TENE [1].
TENE
Thermal heat dissipation or "stiffness" energy. Same as SENE [1].
KENE
Kinetic energy [1].
JHEAT
Element Joule heat generation (coupled-field calculation) [1].
JS
Source current density for low-frequency magnetic analyses. Total
current density (sum of conduction and displacement current densities)
in low frequency electric analyses. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector
sum (SUM). [1].
JT
Total measureable current density in low-frequency electromagnetic
analyses. (Conduction current density in a low-frequency electric
analysis.) Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM). [1].
JC
Conduction current density for elements that support conduction
current calculation. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM). [1].
MRE
Magnetic Reynolds number [1].
VOLU
Volume of volume element [1].
CENT
Centroid X, Y, or Z location (based on shape function) in the active
coordinate system [1].
LOCI
Integration point location
SMISC
snum
Element summable miscellaneous data value at sequence number
snum (Shown in the Output Data section of each element description.
See Chapter 4 of the ANSYS Elements Reference) [1].
NMISC
snum
TOPO
1.
Element nonsummable miscellaneous data value at sequence number
snum (Shown in the Output Data section of each element description.
See Chapter 4 of the ANSYS Elements Reference) [1].
Densities used for topological optimization. This applies to the following types of elements: PLANE2, PLANE82, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95.
Not supported by PowerGraphics
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Element Solution
Utility Menu>List>Results>Element Solution
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31051
PRETAB
PRETAB, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9
Prints the element table items.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9
Print selected items. Valid labels are (blank) or any label as specified with the ETABLE command. Convenience
labels may be used for Lab1 to select groups of labels (10 labels maximum): GRP1 for first 10 stored items;
GRP2 for items 11 to 20; GRP3 for items 21 to 30; GRP4 for items 31 to 40; GRP5 for items 41 to 50. Enter
ETABLE,STAT command to list stored item order. If all labels are blank, print first 10 stored items (GRP1).
Notes
Prints the items stored in the table defined with the ETABLE command. Item values will be listed for the selected
elements in the sorted sequence [ESORT]. The FORCE command can be used to define which component of
the nodal load is to be used (static, damping, inertia, or total).
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>List Elem Table
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Elem Table Data
Utility Menu>List>Results>Element Table Data
PRHFFAR, Opt, Lab, PHI1, PHI2, NPHI, THETA1, THETA2, NTHETA, RADZ, CS, Comp
Prints electromagnetic far fields and far field parameters.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Opt
Print option:
FIELD
Electromagnetic far field.
RCS
Radar cross section.
RCSN
Normalized radar cross section.
PATT
Antenna pattern.
DGAIN
Antenna directive gain.
PRAD
Antenna radiation power.
31052
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRHFFAR
PGAIN
Antenna power gain.
EFF
Antenna radiation efficiency.
Lab
As shown below, data entered in the Lab field will vary, depending on the print option (Opt).
Valid Lab Data Labels
Opt
FIELD
Lab
EF -- Electric field (default)
H -- Magnetic field
RCS and RCSN
NONE -- Radar echo area (default)
PP -- Phi-Phi polarization
PT -- Phi-Theta polarization
TP -- Theta-Phi polarization
TT -- Theta-Theta polarization
TE2D -- 2-D TE incident plane wave
TM2D -- 2-D TM incident plane wave
PATT
RECT -- Radiation pattern (default)
DGAIN
MAX -- Directivity (default)
RECT -- Directive gain
PRAD
Ignore Lab.
PGAIN
VALUE -- Input power (watts)
EFF
VALUE -- Input power (watts)
The following PHI1, PHI2, NPHI, THETA1, THETA2, and NTHETA arguments are used only with Opt = FIELD, RCS,
RCSN, PATT, or Opt = FIELD, Lab = RECT.
PHI1, PHI2
Starting and ending angles (degrees) in the spherical coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
NPHI
Number of divisions between the starting and ending angles for data computations. Defaults to 0.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (degrees) in the spherical coordinate system. Defaults to 0.
NTHETA
Number of divisions between the starting and ending angles for data computations. Defaults to 0.
RADZ
Used only with Opt = FIELD or Opt = RCS or RCSN and Lab = TE2D or TM2D. For Opt = FIELD, RADZ = radius
of the far field. For Opt = RCS or RCSN and Lab = TE2D or TM2D, RADZ = thickness of the 3-D model in the z
direction. Defaults to 1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31053
PRHFFAR
CS
Used only with Opt = FIELD.
Coordinate system type:
0
Cartesian (default).
2
Spherical.
Comp
Used only with Opt = FIELD.
Coordinate system component:
SUM
Magnitude of electromagnetic field (default).
X
X-component (CS = 0) or radial component (CS = 2).
Y
Z
Y-component (CS = 0) or component (CS = 2).
Z-component (CS = 0) or component (CS = 2).
See Spherical Coordinates in the ANSYS High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
Notes
PLHFFAR prints electromagnetic far fields and far field parameters as determined by the equivalent source
principle. Use this command to print far electromagnetic field, radar cross section, antenna radiation pattern,
antenna directive gain, antenna directivity, antenna radiation power, antenna power gain, or antenna radiation
efficiency.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Direct Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Efficiency
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Far Field
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Pattern
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Power Gain
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>Rad Power
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>RCS
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>RCS Normalized
31054
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRIM
PRI2, P51X, Z1, Z2
Creates a polygonal area or a prism volume by vertices (GUI).
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Notes
Creates a polygonal area or a prism volume using the vertices as input. This is a command generated by the
Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if graphical picking is used. This
command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
For polygons, the PRI2 command will appear in the log file as PRI2,P51X,0.0,0.0 preceded by FITEM commands
that define the vertices (in global Cartesian coordinates). For prisms, the PRI2 command will appear in the log
file as PRI2,P51X preceded by FITEM commands that define the vertices and the Z-end of the prism.
See the RPOLY, POLY, RPRISM, PRISM, and RPR4 commands for other ways to create polygons and prisms.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>By Vertices
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>By Vertices
PRIM
Specifies "Solid model primitives" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Solid Model
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31055
PRINT
Specifies "Print settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
POST26: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>List Results
Utility Menu>List>Status>TimeHist Postproc>List
PRISM, Z1, Z2
Creates a prism volume based on working plane coordinate pairs.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Z1, Z2
Working plane Z coordinates of the top and bottom of the prism.
Notes
Defines a prism volume based on the working plane. The top and bottom areas will each be defined with NPT
keypoints and NPT lines, where NPT (must be at least 3) is the number of coordinate pairs defined with PTXY
command. Also, a line will be defined between each point pair on the top and bottom face. See the RPRISM and
RPR4 commands for other ways to create prisms.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
31056
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRJSOL
PRITER
Prints solution summary data.
POST1: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Prints solution summary data (such as time step size, number of equilibrium iterations, convergence values, etc.)
from a static or full transient analysis. All other analyses print zeros for the data.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Iteration Summry
Utility Menu>List>Results>Iteration Summry
PRJSOL, Label, Comp
Print joint element output.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Label
Label identifying the item. Valid in POST1 only. Some items also require a component label.
REAC -- reaction forces and moments.
DISP - displacements.
ROT - rotations.
SMISC -- summable miscellaneous quantities.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). For DISP and ROT, enter the direction, x, y, or z. For SMISC enter a valid
number.
Notes
Valid for MPC184.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31057
PRNLD
PRNLD, Lab, TOL, Item
Prints the summed element nodal loads.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Nodal reaction load type. If blank, use the first ten of all available labels. Valid labels are: Structural force labels:
FX, FY or FZ (forces); F (includes FX, FY and FZ); MX, MY or MZ (moments); M (includes MX, MY and MZ).
Thermal force labels: HEAT, HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP (heat flow). Fluid force labels: FLOW (fluid flow); VFX,
VFY and VFZ (fluid "forces"); VF (includes VFX, VFY and VFZ). Electric force labels: AMPS (current flow); CHRG
(charge); CURT (current); VLTG (voltage drop). Magnetic force labels: FLUX (magnetic flux); CSGX, CSGY, CSGZ
(magnetic current segments); CSG (includes CSGX, CSGY and CSGZ).
TOL
Tolerance value about zero within which loads are not printed. Defaults to 1.0E-9 times the absolute value
of the maximum load on the selected nodes. If zero, print all nodal loads.
ITEM
Selected set of nodes.
(blank)
Prints the summed element nodal loads for all selected nodes (default), excluding contact elements.
CONT
Prints the summed element nodal loads for contact nodes only.
BOTH
Prints the summed element nodal loads for all selected nodes, including contact nodes.
Notes
Prints the summed element nodal loads (forces, moments, heat flows, flux, etc.) for the selected nodes in the
sorted sequence. Results are in the global Cartesian coordinate directions unless transformed [RSYS]. Zero values
(within a tolerance range) are not printed. Loads applied to a constrained degree of freedom are not included.
The FORCE command can be used to define which component of the nodal load is to be used (static, damping,
inertia, or total).
By default, PRNLD excludes elements TARGE169 - CONTA175. PRNLD,,,CONT will only account for nodal forces
on selected contact elements (CONTA171 - CONTA175). PRNLD,,,BOTH will account for nodal forces on all selected
nodes, including contact nodes.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Nodal Loads
Utility Menu>List>Results>Nodal Loads
31058
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRNSOL
PRNSOL, Item, Comp
Prints the nodal solution results.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in PRNSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels below.
Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in PRNSOL - Valid Item and Component
Labels below. Defaults to COMP.
Notes
Prints the nodal solution results for the selected nodes in the sorted sequence. For example, PRNSOL,U,X prints
the X component of displacement vector U (i.e., the UX degree of freedom). Component results are in the global
Cartesian coordinate directions unless transformed [RSYS]. Various element results also depend upon the recalculation method and the selected results location [AVPRIN, RSYS, LAYER, SHELL, and NSEL]. If LAYER is specified,
then the resulting output will be listed in Full graphics mode. The FORCE command can be used to define which
component of the nodal load is to be used (static, damping, inertia, or total).
PowerGraphics can affect your nodal solution listings. If a node is common to more than one element, or if a
geometric discontinuity exists, several conflicting listings may result. For instance, a corner node incorporating
results from a brick element and three shell elements could yield as many as nine different results. ANSYS does
not average result listings when shell elements are present. It is important to analyze the listings at discontinuities
to ascertain the significance of each set of data.
For PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER], results are listed only for the model exterior surface. If NSORT, ESORT
or /ESHAPE are specified with PowerGraphics activated, then the PRNSOL listings will be the same as in Full
graphics mode. The items marked with [2] are not supported by PowerGraphics. To print midside nodes, you
must first issue /EFACET,2.
PRNSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for nodal degree of freedom results are:
U
X, Y, Z
ROT
"
COMP
X, Y, and Z structural displacements and vector sum.
X, Y, Z
"
X, Y, or Z structural displacement.
X, Y, or Z structural rotation.
COMP
X, Y, and Z structural rotations and vector sum.
TEMP [1]
Temperature.
PRES
Pressure.
VOLT
Electric potential.
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity in a fluid analysis, or
X, Y, or Z nodal velocity in a structural transient dynamic analysis[3] .
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31059
PRNSOL
Item
"
Comp
Description
"
X, Y, and Z fluid velocity and vector sum in a fluid analysis, or
X, Y, and Z nodal velocity and vector sum in a structural transient dynamic analysis[3].
X, Y, Z
COMP
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential in an electromagnetic analysis, or
X, Y, or Z acceleration in a structural transient dynamic analysis[3].
COMP
X, Y, and Z magnetic vector potential and vector sum in an electromagnetic analysis, or
X, Y, and Z acceleration and vector sum in a structural transient dynamic analysis[3].
CURR
Current.
EMF
Electromotive force drop.
ENKE
Turbulent kinetic energy.
ENDS
Turbulent energy dissipation.
SP0n
Mass fraction of species n, where n = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is
given a user-defined name [MSSPEC], use that name instead of SP0n
[2].
DOF
All available degree of freedom labels (10 maximum).
Valid item and component labels for element results are:
COMP
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, and XZ component stresses.
"
PRIN
S1, S2, S3 principal stresses, SINT stress intensity, and SEQV equivalent
stress.
"
FAIL
Maximum Stress, Tsai-Wu Strength Index, and inverse of Tsai-Wu
Strength Ratio Index Failure Criteria. (Only works if FC command information is provided.) [2]
COMP
Component elastic strains.
"
PRIN
Principal elastic strains, strain intensity, and equivalent strain.
"
FAIL
Maximum Strain Failure Criteria. (Only works if FC command information is provided.)
COMP
Component thermal strains.
PRIN
Principal thermal strains, strain intensity, and equivalent strain.
COMP
Component plastic strains.
PRIN
Principal plastic strains, strain intensity, and equivalent strain.
COMP
Component creep strains.
PRIN
Principal creep strains, strain intensity, and equivalent strain.
EPEL
EPTH
"
EPPL
"
EPCR
"
EPSW
EPTO
Swelling strain.
COMP
EPTT
"
PRIN
Principal total mechanical strains, strain intensity, and equivalent strain.
COMP
"
Component total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).
Component total mechanical and thermal strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR
+ EPTH).
PRIN
Principal total mechanical and thermal strains, strain intensity, and
equivalent strain.
NL
Nonlinear items (SEPL, SRAT, HPRES, EPEQ, CREQ, PSV, PLWK).
SEND
Elastic, plastic, and creep strain energy density.
SVAR
1, 2, 3, ... N
State variable.
GKS
COMP
X, XY, XZ component gasket stress.
31060
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRNSOL
Item
Comp
Description
GKD
COMP
X, XY, XZ component gasket total closure.
GKDI
COMP
X, XY, XZ component gasket total inelastic closure.
GKTH
COMP
X, XY, XZ component thermal closure.
CONT
Contact items (STAT[4], PENE, PRES, SFRIC, STOT, SLIDE, GAP, FLUX,
CNOS). See component descriptions in PLNSOL.
TG
COMP
Component thermal gradients and vector sum.
TF
COMP
Component thermal fluxes and vector sum.
PG
COMP
Component pressure gradients and vector sum.
EF
COMP
Component electric fields and vector sum.
COMP
Component electric flux densities and vector sum.
COMP
Component magnetic field intensities and vector sum.
COMP
Component magnetic flux densities and vector sum.
FMAG
COMP
Component magnetic forces and vector sum [2].
JC
COMP
Conduction current density for elements that support conduction
current calculation. Components (X, Y, Z) and vector sum (SUM). [2].
BFE
Body temperatures (calculated from applied temperatures) as used
in solution (area and volume elements only).
TOPO
Densities used for topological optimization. This applies to nodes attached to the following types of elements: PLANE2, PLANE82, SOLID92,
SHELL93, SOLID95.
Valid item and component labels for FLOTRAN nodal results are:
TTOT
Total temperature.
HFLU
Heat flux.
HFLM
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
COND
Fluid laminar conductivity.
PCOE
Pressure coefficient.
PTOT
Total (stagnation) pressure.
MACH
Mach number.
STRM
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
DENS
Fluid density.
VISC
Fluid laminar viscosity.
SPHT
Specific heat.
EVIS
Fluid effective viscosity.
CMUV
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
ECON
Fluid effective conductivity.
YPLU
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
TAUW
Shear stress at the wall.
SFTS
Surface tension coefficient.
LMDn
Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
EMDn
Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species n, where n = 1 to 6.
RDFL
Radiation heat flux.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31061
PROD
1.
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use the labels TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP
instead of TEMP.
2.
Not supported by PowerGraphics
3.
Nodal velocities and nodal accelerations are available in explicit dynamic analyses (LS-DYNA) and in
ANSYS structural analyses with ANTYPE,TRANS
4.
For the CONT items for elements CONTA171 through CONTA175, the reported data is averaged across
the element.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Nodal Solution
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Sorted Listing>Sort Nodes
Utility Menu>List>Results>Nodal Solution
PROD, IR, IA, IB, IC, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Multiplies variables.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA, IB, IC
Reference numbers of the three variables to be operated on. If only two leave IC blank. If only one, leave IB
blank also.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
--, --
Unused fields
FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Scaling factors (positive or negative) applied to the corresponding variables (default to 1.0).
Notes
Multiplies variables (up to three at once) according to the operation:
IR = (FACTA x IA) x (FACTB x IB) x (FACTC x IC)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Multiply
31062
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRRFOR
PRPATH, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Prints path items along a geometry path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6
Labels identifying the path items to be printed. Up to six items may be printed at a time. Predefined path
geometry items XG, YZ, ZG, and S [PDEF] may also be printed.
Notes
Prints path items with respect to a geometry path (as defined by the PATH and PPATH commands). Path items
and their labels must have been defined with the PDEF, PVECT, PCALC, PDOT, or PCROSS commands. Path
items may also be displayed with the PLPATH and PLPAGM commands. See the PRANGE command for range
control of the path.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Path Items
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Plot Path Item>List Path Items
Utility Menu>List>Results>Path Data
PRRFOR, Lab
Used with the FORCE command. Prints the constrained node reaction solution.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Nodal reaction load type. If blank, use the first ten of all available labels. Valid labels are: Structural force labels:
FX, FY or FZ (forces); F (FX, FY and FZ); MX, MY or MZ (moments); M (MX, MY and MZ). Thermal force labels:
HEAT, HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP (heat flow). Fluid force labels: FLOW (fluid flow); VFX, VFY and VFZ (fluid
"forces"); VF (VFX, VFY and VFZ). Electric force labels: AMPS (current flow); CHRG (charge); CURT (current);
VLTG (voltage drop). Magnetic force labels: FLUX (magnetic flux); CSGX, CSGY, CSGZ (magnetic current segments); CSG (CSGX, CSGY and CSGZ); CURT (current), VLTG (voltage drop).
Notes
PRRFOR has the same functionality as the PRRSOL command; use PRRFOR instead of PRRSOL when a FORCE
command has been issued.
PRRFOR cannot be used when a squaring operation has been carried out on a load case [such as in PSD and
spectrum analyses]. PRRSOL values are correct in this case, because they are squared after summing the nodal
forces.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31063
PRRSOL
PRRSOL, Lab
Prints the constrained node reaction solution.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Nodal reaction load type. If blank, use the first ten of all available labels. Valid labels are: Structural force labels:
FX, FY or FZ (forces); F (FX, FY and FZ); MX, MY or MZ (moments); M (MX, MY and MZ); BMOM (bimoments).
Thermal force labels: HEAT, HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP (heat flow). Fluid force labels: FLOW (fluid flow); VFX,
VFY and VFZ (fluid "forces"); VF (VFX, VFY and VFZ). Electric force labels: AMPS (current flow); CHRG (charge);
CURT (current); VLTG (voltage drop). Magnetic force labels: FLUX (magnetic flux); CSGX, CSGY, CSGZ (magnetic current segments); CSG (CSGX, CSGY and CSGZ); CURT (current), VLTG (voltage drop).
Notes
Prints the constrained node reaction solution for the selected nodes in the sorted sequence. For coupled nodes
and nodes in constraint equations, the sum of all reactions in the coupled or constraint equation set appears at
the primary node of the set. Results are in the global Cartesian coordinate directions unless transformed [RSYS].
PRRSOL is not valid if any load is applied to a constrained node in the direction of the constraint and any of the
following is true: a) LCOPER has been used, or b) LCASE has been used to read from a load case file or c) the
applied loads and constraints in the database are not the ones used to create the results data being processed.
Use PRRFOR instead of PRRSOL with the FORCE command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Reaction Solu
Utility Menu>List>Results>Reaction Solution
PRSECT, RHO, KBR
Calculates and prints linearized stresses along a section path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
RHO
In-plane (X-Y) average radius of curvature of the inside and outside surfaces of an axisymmetric section. If
zero (or blank), a plane or 3-D structure is assumed. If nonzero, an axisymmetric structure is assumed. Use
any large number (or -1) for an axisymmetric straight section.
KBR
Through-thickness bending stresses key for an axisymmetric analysis (RHO 0):
0
Include the thickness-direction bending stresses.
1
Ignore the thickness-direction bending stresses.
31064
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRSECT
Notes
Calculates and prints linearized stresses along a section path [PATH] as defined by the two points specified with
the PPATH command. Use only the NODE option on PPATH to define the path, which must be two nodes only.
The path must be entirely within the selected elements (that is, there must not be any element gaps along the
path). No data is retained on the path; the path is used only to retrieve the two path node numbers. Gives component and principal stresses at the beginning, mid-length, and end of the section. Stresses are also separated
into membrane, bending, membrane plus bending, peak, and total stress categories. The total stress can also
be printed for intermediate points with the PRPATH command. Stresses are output in section coordinates (SX
along the path, SY normal, and SZ hoop) for axisymmetric sections, and in the active coordinate system [RSYS]
for plane and 3-D structures. Principle stresses are recalculated from the component stresses and are invariant
with the coordinate system as long as SX is in the same direction at all points along the defined path. It is generally
recommended that section calculations be performed in a rectangular coordinate system (e.g. global Cartesian).
Use PLSECTcommand to display stresses.
Stresses through a section may be linearized and separated into categories for various code calculations. Linearized
stresses may be printed [PRSECT] and displayed [PLSECT]. The section is defined by a path consisting of two
end points (nodes) and 47 intermediate points (automatically determined by linear interpolation in the active
display coordinate system [DSYS]), regardless of the number of divisions set by PATH,,,,nDiv. The values of the
component stresses to be linearized are interpolated at the path points within each path element from the element's average corner nodal values. These values will be dependent on the active coordinate system. If RSYS,
SOLU or RSYS, -1 are active, the linearized stresses will be calculated and printed in the global Cartesian coordinate
system. The section path may be through any solid (2-D plane, 2-D axisymmetric, or 3-D) elements. Section paths,
which may be anywhere, are usually defined to be through the thickness of the structure and normal to the inner
and outer structure surfaces. Section paths (in-plane only) may also be defined for shell element structures. See
the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details.
Stress components through the section are linearized by a line integral method and separated into constant
membrane stresses, bending stresses varying linearly between end points, and peak stresses (defined as the
difference between the actual (total) stress and the membrane plus bending combination).
For nonaxisymmetric structures, the bending stresses are calculated such that the neutral axis is at the midpoint
of the path. Axisymmetric results include the effects of both the radius of revolution (automatically determined
from the node locations) and the in-plane average radius of curvature of the section surfaces (user input).
For axisymmetric cases, ANSYS calculates the linearized bending stress in the through-thickness direction as the
difference between the total outer fiber stress and the membrane stress. The calculation method may be conservative for locations with a highly nonlinear variation of stress in the through-thickness direction. For more information, see the discussion of axisymmetric cases (specifically Equation 1940) in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Linearized Strs
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>List Linearized
Utility Menu>List>Results>Linearized Stresses
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31065
PRSSOL
PRSSOL, Item, Comp
Prints BEAM188 and BEAM189 section results.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are listed below. Some items also require a component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are listed below.
Notes
PRSSOL prints the BEAM188 and BEAM189 section nodal and section integration point results. Stresses and
strains are printed at section nodes. Plastic strains, plastic work, and creep strains are printed at section integration
points. For example, PRSSOL,S,COMP prints the X, XZ, and XY components of stresses at section nodes.
To display a listing of the section nodal and integration point coordinates, use the SLIST command.
PRSSOL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels for section results are:
S
COMP
X, XZ, XY stress components.
"
PRIN
S1, S2, S3 principal stresses, SINT stress intensity, and SEQV equivalent
stress.
COMP
Total strains (EPEL+EPPL+EPTH).
PRIN
Total principal strains, strain intensity, and equivalent strain.
COMP
Plastic strain components.
PRIN
Principal plastic strains, plastic strain intensity, and equivalent plastic
strain.
COMP
Creep strain components.
PRIN
Principal creep strains, creep strain intensity, and equivalent creep
strain.
EPTO
"
EPPL
"
EPCR
EPTH
NL
BMOM
Thermal strains.
Nonlinear item plastic work.
Bimoments.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Section Solution
Utility Menu>List>Results>Section Solution
31066
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRSYZ
PRSYZ, Fname, Ext, Lab, Opt
Converts and lists scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path of a Touchstone file (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed
for the directory path). A Touchstone file may be created in ANSYS by performing a frequency sweep using
the SPSWP command macro, or may it be supplied from another source. An unspecified directory path defaults
to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
Ext
Extension of Touchstone file (.snp where n is the number of ports).
Lab
Output parameter:
S
Scattering parameter (default)
Y
Admittance parameter
Z
Impedance parameter
Opt
Format of Touchstone file:
MA
Magnitude and angle
DB
Magnitude and angle with magnitude in dB units. Only available for scattering parameters (Lab = S).
RI
Real and imaginary parts (default).
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Field Extension>S,Y,Z Parameters
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31067
PRTIME
PRTIME, TMIN, TMAX
Defines the time range for which data are to be listed.
POST26: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TMIN
Minimum time (defaults to the first point stored).
TMAX
Maximum time (defaults to the last point stored).
Command Default
Use the previously defined range [TIMERANGE].
Notes
Defines the time (or frequency) range (within the range stored) for which data are to be listed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>List
PRVAR, NVAR1, NVAR2, NVAR3, NVAR4, NVAR5, NVAR6
Lists variables vs. time (or frequency).
POST26: Listing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR1, NVAR2, NVAR3, NVAR4, NVAR5, NVAR6
Variables to be displayed, defined either by the reference number or a unique thirty-two character name. If
duplicate names are used the command will print the data for the lowest-numbered variable with that name.
Notes
Lists variables vs. time (or frequency). Up to six variables may be listed across the line. Time column output format
can be changed using the /FORMAT command arguments Ftype, NWIDTH, and DSIGNF.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>List Variables
31068
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PRVECT
PRVAROPT, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10
Lists up to ten optimization parameters.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, Lab4, Lab5, Lab6, Lab7, Lab8, Lab9, Lab10
Names of the parameters to be listed.
Notes
Lists up to ten optimization parameters at a time. Parameters are listed vs. the XVAROPT parameter (defaults
to set number) in the order corresponding to an ascending order of the XVAROPT parameter.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Graphs/Tables
PRVECT, Item, Lab2, Lab3, LabP
Prints results as vector magnitude and direction cosines.
POST1: Results
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item
Predefined vector item (from PRVECT - Valid Item and Component Labels below) or a label identifying the
i-component of a user-defined vector.
Lab2
Label identifying the j-component of a user-defined vector. In most cases, this value must be blank if Item
is selected from PRVECT - Valid Item and Component Labels. Individual principal stresses (Item = S) or principal strains (Item = EPxx) may be printed by specifying the value as 1, 2, or 3.
Lab3
Label identifying the k-component of a user-defined vector. Must be blank if Item is selected from list below
or for 2-D user defined vector.
LabP
Label assigned to resultant vector for printout labeling (defaults to Item).
Notes
Prints various solution results as vector magnitude and direction cosines for the selected nodes and/or elements.
For example, PRVECT,U prints the displacement magnitude and its direction cosines for all selected nodes. For
nodal degree of freedom vector results, direction cosines are with respect to the results coordinate system RSYS.
For element results, direction cosines are with respect to the global Cartesian system. Item components may be
printed with the PRNSOL command. Various results also depend upon the recalculation method and the selected
results location [LAYER, SHELL, NSEL, and ESEL]. Items may be selected from a set of recognized vector labels
(Item) or a vector may be defined from up to three scalar labels (Item,Lab2,Lab3). Scalar labels may be userdefined with the ETABLE command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31069
PRVECT
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
It is possible to print principal stresses (Item = S) or principal strains (Item = EPxx) individually. To do so, specify
a Lab2 value of 1, 2, or 3. For example, the following are valid commands:
PRVECT,S,1,,,VECT,ELEM,ON,0
PRVECT,EPEL,3,,,VECT,NODE,ON,0
PRVECT - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item labels for nodal degree of freedom vector results are:
U
ROT
Structural displacement vector magnitude and direction cosines.
Structural rotation vector magnitude and direction cosines.
Velocity vector magnitude and direction cosines.
Magnetic vector potential vector magnitude and direction cosines.
Valid item labels for element results are:
Principal stresses and direction cosines.
EPTO
Principal total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) and direction cosines.
EPEL
Principal elastic strains and direction cosines.
EPPL
Principal plastic strains and direction cosines.
EPCR
Principal creep strains and direction cosines.
EPTH
Principal thermal strains and direction cosines.
TG
Thermal gradient vector sum and direction cosines.
TF
Thermal flux vector sum and direction cosines.
PG
Pressure gradient vector sum and direction cosines.
EF
Electric field vector sum and direction cosines.
Electric flux density vector sum and direction cosines.
Magnetic field intensity vector sum and direction cosines. If Lab2 is
blank, then Item is interpreted as one of the predefined labels. Otherwise, Item is interpreted as a user-defined ET label and ANSYS will
request a non-blank Lab2/Lab3 according to the dimension of the
problem.
Magnetic flux density vector sum and direction cosines.
FMAG
Magnetic force vector sum and direction cosines.
Poynting vector sum and direction cosines.
JS
Source current density vector sum and direction cosines for lowfrequency magnetic analyses. Total current density vector sum and
direction cosines (sum of conduction and displacement current
densities) in low frequency electric analyses.
JT
Total measureable current density vector sum and direction cosines
in low-frequency electromagnetic analyses. (Conduction current
density vector sum and direction cosines in a low-frequency electric
analysis.)
JC
Conduction current density vector sum and direction cosines for
elements that support conduction current calculation.
31070
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PSCONTROL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Vector Data
Utility Menu>List>Results>Vector Data
PSCONTROL, Option, Key
Turn shared-memory parallel operations on or off during solution.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Option
Specify the operations for which you will enable/disable parallel behavior:
FORM
Turn parallel on/off during element matrix generation.
SOLV
Turn parallel on/off during equation solver.
RESU
Turn parallel on/off during element results calculation.
RESET
Reset control options to default values.
STAT
List parallel operations that are enabled/disabled.
Key
Option control key. Used only for Option = FORM, SOLV, or RESU.
ON
Turn parallel operation on.
OFF
Turn parallel operation off.
Command Default
Leave all parallel operations enabled (ON) if /CONFIG,NPROC is used.
Notes
Use this control on shared memory parallel operations when you encounter minor discrepancies in a nonlinear
solution when using different numbers of processors. A parallel operation applied to the element matrix generation can produce a different nonlinear solution with a different number of processors. Although the nonlinear
solution converges to the same nonlinear tolerance, the minor discrepancy created may not be desirable for
consistency.
The SOLV option supports only the sparse direct, PCG, frontal, and AMG solvers (EQSLV,SPARSE, PCG, FRONT,
AMG). No other solvers are supported by this option. The PCG and frontal solvers for the subspace modal eigenvalue extraction method are also not supported by this option.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31071
PSCR
The RESU option does not apply to p-elements.
This command applies only to shared-memory architecture. It does not apply to distributed memory architecture
(e.g., DDS, DPCG, DJCG solvers).
This command does not apply to FLOTRAN analyses.
This command does not apply to the Distributed ANSYS product.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
PSCR, Kywrd, KEY
Specifies various PostScript options.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
If Kywrd = CMAP, command format is PSCR,CMAP,INDEX,IRED,IGRN,IBLU.
INDEX
Color map index (0 to 15, 128 to 255).
IRED
Red intensity (0 to 100).
IGRN
Green intensity (0 to 100).
IBLU
Blue intensity (0 to 100).
If Kywrd = LWID, command format is PSCR,LWID,KYLWID.
KYLWID
Line width factor (1 to 99, initially 3).
If Kywrd = COLOR, command format is PSCR,COLOR,KEY.
KEY
Color key:
0
Monochrome.
1
16 colors.
2
256+ colors.
3
Shaded monochrome.
31072
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PSCR
If Kywrd = TRANX, command format is PSCR,TRANX,OFFSET.
OFFSET
X translational offset (initially 592).
If Kywrd = TRANY, command format is PSCR,TRANY,OFFSET.
OFFSET
Y translational offset (initially 25).
If Kywrd = ROTATE, command format is PSCR,ROTATE,ANGLE.
ANGLE
Rotation angle in degrees (initially 90.0).
If Kywrd = SCALE, command format is PSCR,SCALE,SCALE.
SCALE
Scale factor (initially 0.238).
If Kywrd = TIFF, command format is PSCR,TIFF,KEY. Used to add a Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) bitmap preview
image to the encapsulated PostScript file.
KEY
Preview image key:
0
Do not include TIFF bitmap preview image.
1
Include wireframe TIFF bitmap preview image.
2
Include shaded TIFF bitmap preview image.
If Kywrd = EPSI, command format is PSCR,EPSI,KEY. Used to add an Encapsulated PostScript Interchange (EPSI)
format bitmap preview image to the encapsulated PostScript file.
KEY
Preview image key:
0
Do not include EPSI bitmap preview image.
1
Include wireframe EPSI bitmap preview image.
2
Include shaded EPSI bitmap preview image.
If Kywrd = PAPER, command format is PSCR,PAPER,SIZE,ORIENT.
SIZE
Standard paper sizes, A, B, C, D, E, A4, A3, A1, A0.
ORIENT
Paper orientation, either Landscape or Portrait.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31073
PSDCOM
If Kywrd = HIRES, command format is PSCR,HIRES,KEY. Used to select the output resolution.
KEY
Output resolution key:
0
High resolution graphics off. The image is exported as a bitmap.
1
High resolution graphics on. The image will be exported in polygon mode (/TYPE, , 4 precise hidden) for
maximum printer resolution.
Notes
This command is available in both the ANSYS and DISPLAY programs. It is valid for postscript format files chosen
in ANSYS with the /SHOW,PSCR command, or in DISPLAY with /SHOWDISP,POSTSCRIPT.
An output file is generated for each plot. The ANSYS file is named JobnameNN.pscr. In the DISPLAY program,
this file is named PSCRnn. This file remains open for a subsequent /NOERASE plot, and will be incomplete until
the program is closed (/EXIT), or until the next file is opened by the next /ERASE plot request.
Issuing PSCR,STAT will list paper size, orientation and resolution modes.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To PSCR File
PSDCOM, SIGNIF, COMODE
Specifies the power spectral density mode combination method.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SIGNIF
Combine only those modes whose significance level exceeds theSIGNIF threshold. For PSD response (SPOPT,PSD), the significance level is defined as the modal covariance matrix term, divided by the maximum
modal covariance matrix term. Any term whose significance level is less than SIGNIF is considered insignificant and is not contributed to the mode combinations. The higher the SIGNIF threshold, the fewer the
number of terms used. SIGNIF defaults to 0.0001. If SIGNIF is specified as 0.0, it is taken as 0.0.
COMODE
First COMODE number of modes to be actually combined. COMODE must always be less than or equal to NMODE
(input quantity NMODE on the SPOPT command). COMODE defaults to NMODE. COMODE performs a second level
of control for the first sequential COMODE number of modes to be combined. It uses the significance level
threshold indicated by SIGNIF and operates only on the significant modes.
Notes
This command is also valid for PREP7. This command is valid only for SPOPT,PSD.
31074
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PSDFRQ
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Product Restrictions
PSDCOM is not allowed in ANSYS Professional.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Mode Combine
PSDFRQ, TBLNO1, TBLNO2, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5, FREQ6, FREQ7
Defines the frequency points for the input spectrum vs. FREQ tables of PSD and multi-point spectrum
analyses.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO1
Input table number. When used with the COVAL or the QDVAL command, TBLNO1 represents the row
number of this table. Up to 10 tables may be defined.
TBLNO2
Input table number. TBLNO2 is used only for the COVAL or the QDVAL commands and represents the column
number of this table.
FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5, FREQ6, FREQ7
Frequency points (cycles/time) for spectrum vs. frequency tables. FREQ1 should be greater than zero, and
values must be in ascending order. Log-log interpolation will be used between frequency points.
Notes
The spectrum values may be input with the PSDVAL (for SPOPT,PSD and SPOPT,MPRS), COVAL (for SPOPT,PSD
only), or QDVAL (for SPOPT,PSD only) commands. A separate PSDFRQ command must be used for each table
and cross table defined. Frequencies must be in ascending order.
Repeat PSDFRQ command for additional frequency points (50 maximum). Values are added after the last nonzero
frequency. If all fields after PSDFRQ are blank, all input vs. frequency tables are erased. If TBLNO1 is nonblank,
all corresponding PSDVAL tables are erased. If both TBLNO1 and TBLNO2 are nonblank, all corresponding COVAL
and QDVAL tables are erased.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Erase Tables
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Spect vs Freq
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Cospectral
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Erase Co & Quad
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31075
PSDGRAPH
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Quadspectral
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Erase Tables
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>PSD vs Freq
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Erase Tables
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Spect vs Freq
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Cospectral
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Erase Co & Quad
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Quadspectral
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Erase Tables
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>PSD vs Freq
PSDGRAPH, TBLNO1, TBLNO2
Displays input PSD curves
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO1
PSD table number to display.
TBLNO2
Second PSD table number to display. TBLNO2 is used only in conjunction with the COVAL or the QDVAL
commands.
Notes
The input PSD tables are displayed in log-log format as dotted lines. The best-fit curves, used to perform the
closed-form integration, are displayed as solid lines. If there is a significant discrepancy between the two, then
you should add one or more intermediate points to the table to obtain a better fit.
If TBLNO2 is zero, blank, or equal to TBLNO1, then the autospectra (PSDVAL) are displayed for TBLNO1. If TBLNO2
is also specified, then the autospectra for TBLNO1 and TBLNO2 are displayed, along with the corresponding cospectra (COVAL) and quadspectra (QDVAL), if they are defined.
This command is valid in any processor.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Spectrum>Graph PSD Tab
Main Menu>Solution>Spectrum>Graph PSD Tab
31076
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PSDRES
PSDRES, Lab, RelKey
Controls solution output written to the results file from a PSD analysis.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
Label identifying the solution output:
DISP
Displacement solution (default). One-sigma displacements, stresses, forces, etc. Written as load step 3
on File.RST.
VELO
Velocity solution. One-sigma velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc. Written as load step 4
of File.RST.
ACEL
Acceleration solution. One-sigma accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations, etc. Written
as load step 5 on File.RST.
RelKey
Key defining relative or absolute calculations:
REL
Calculations are relative to the base excitation (default).
ABS
Calculations are absolute.
OFF
No calculation of solution output identified by Lab.
Command Default
Relative displacement solution, no velocity or acceleration solution for 1 results.
Notes
Controls the amount and form of solution output written to the results file from a PSD analysis. One-sigma values
of the relative or absolute displacement solution, relative or absolute velocity solution, relative or absolute acceleration solution, or any combination may be included on the results file.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Calc Controls
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Calc Controls
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31077
PSDSPL
PSDSPL, TBLNO, RMIN, RMAX
Defines a partially correlated excitation in a PSD analysis.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO
Input PSD table number defined with PSDVAL command.
RMIN
Minimum distance between excitation points which are partially correlated. Excited nodes closer than RMIN
will be fully correlated.
RMAX
Maximum distance between excitation points which are partially correlated. Excited nodes farther apart than
RMAX will be uncorrelated.
Notes
Defines a partially correlated excitation in terms of a sphere of influence relating excitation point geometry (in
a PSD analysis). If the distance between any two excitation points is less than RMIN, then the excitation is fully
correlated. If the distance is greater than RMAX, then the excitation is uncorrelated. If the distance lies between
RMIN and RMAX, then the excitation is partially correlated with the degree of correlation dependent on the separation distance between the points. This command is not available for a pressure PSD analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Spatial Correlat
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Spatial Correlat
PSDUNIT, TBLNO, Type, GVALUE
Defines the type of PSD or multi-point response spectrum.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO
Input table number.
Type
Label identifying the type of spectrum:
DISP
Displacement spectrum (in terms of displacement2/Hz for PSD).
VELO
Velocity spectrum (in terms of velocity2/Hz for PSD).
31078
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PSDVAL
ACEL
Acceleration spectrum (in terms of acceleration2/Hz for PSD).
ACCG
Acceleration spectrum (in terms of g2/Hz for PSD).
FORC
Force spectrum (in terms of force2/Hz for PSD).
PRES
Pressure spectrum (in terms of pressure2/Hz for PSD).
GVALUE
Value of acceleration due to gravity in any arbitrary units for ACCG PSD table. Default is 386.4 in/sec2.
Command Default
Acceleration (ACEL) spectrum (acceleration2/Hz).
Notes
Defines the type of PSD or multi-point response spectrum defined by the PSDVAL, COVAL, and QDVAL commands.
Force (FORC) and pressure (PRES) type spectra can be used only as a nodal excitation.
GVALUE is valid only when type ACCG is specified. A zero or negative value cannot be used. A parameter substi-
tution can also be performed.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Settings
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Settings
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Settings
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Settings
PSDVAL, TBLNO, SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7
Defines PSD or multi-point response spectrum values.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO
Input table number being defined.
SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7
Spectral values corresponding to the frequency points [PSDFRQ]. Values are interpreted as defined with the
PSDUNIT command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31079
PSDWAV
Notes
Defines PSD or multi-point response spectrum values to be associated with the previously defined frequency
points. Repeat PSDVAL command for additional values, up to the number of frequency points [PSDFRQ]. Values
are added after the last nonzero frequency.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Spect vs Freq
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>PSD vs Freq
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Spect vs Freq
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>PSD vs Freq
PSDWAV, TBLNO, VX, VY, VZ
Defines a wave propagation excitation in a PSD analysis.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO
Input PSD table number defined with PSDVAL command.
VX
Global Cartesian X-velocity of traveling wave.
VY
Global Cartesian Y-velocity of traveling wave.
VZ
Global Cartesian Z-velocity of traveling wave.
Notes
Defines a traveling wave in a PSD analysis. This command is not available for a pressure PSD analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Traveling Wave
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Traveling Wave
31080
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PSF
PSEL, Type, Pname1, Pname2, Pname3, Pname4, Pname5, Pname6, Pname7, Pname8, Pname9, Pname10
Selects a path or paths.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new path.
R
Reselect a path from the current set of paths.
A
Additionally select a path and extend the current set of paths.
U
Unselect a path from the current set of paths.
ALL
Restore the full set of paths.
NONE
Unselect the full set of paths.
INV
Invert the current set of paths (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
Pname1, Pname2, Pname3, Pname4, Pname5, Pname6, Pname7, Pname8, Pname9, Pname10
Name of existing path(s).
Notes
Selects a path or multiple paths, up to ten. Data are flagged as selected and unselected; no data are actually
deleted from the database. There is no default for this command; you must specify a type and pathname.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Archive Path>Store>Paths in file
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Store>Paths in file
/PSF, Item, Comp, KEY, KSHELL, Color
Shows surface load symbols on model displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Item, Comp
Labels identifying the surface load to be shown; see /PSF - Valid Item and Component Labels.
KEY
Key to turn surface load symbols on or off:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31081
/PSF
0
Off (default).
1
On, shown as face outlines. Line surface loads [SFL] on solid model plots are shown as arrows.
2
On, shown as arrows.
3
On, shown as color filled surfaces. Line and area surface loads [SFL and SFA] on solid model plots are
shown as arrows.
KSHELL
Visibility key for shell elements.
0
Off (default), surface load symbols are displayed only on visible load faces.
1
On, surface load symbols are displayed even if load face is not visible.
Color
Visibility key for contour legend.
ON
The symbols (arrows or face outlines) will show up in color with the legend showing the corresponding
color labels (default).
OFF
The contour legend will not be displayed. The symbols (arrows or face outlines) will show up in grey. The
size of the arrows will be proportional to the applied load.
Command Default
No surface load symbols are displayed.
Notes
This command determines whether and how to show surface loads on subsequent model displays. If surface
loads are applied to solid model entities, only solid model plots will show the load symbols; node and element
plots will not show them unless the loads are transferred [SFTRAN or SBCTRAN]. Similarly, if surface loads are
applied to nodes and elements, solid model plots will not show the load symbols. For node and element plots
of shell element models, the surface load symbols will be shown only if the load face is visible from the current
viewing direction.
The effects of the /PSF command are not cumulative (that is, the command does not modify an existing setting
from a previously issued /PSF command). If you issue multiple /PSF commands during an analysis, only the setting
specified by the most recent /PSF command applies.
When you use the Radiosity method (Item = RDSF and Comp = ENCL) and you set Key = 2, the radiation arrows
point outward from any element face.
31082
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PSF
Issue /PSF,STAT to display current /PSF settings, and /PSF,DEFA to reset them back to default. Other useful
commands are /PNUM,SVAL,1 to show the values of the surface loads, /VSCALE to change arrow lengths, and
/PBC and /PBF to turn on other load symbols.
For BEAM elements, only the colors representing shear (GREEN) and normal (RED) pressures are displayed for
the arrows. The color of these arrows does not correspond to the magnitudes in the contour legend. The length
of these arrows does, however, correlate to the relative magnitude of the pressures.
This command is valid in any processor.
/PSF - Valid Item and Component Labels
Item
Comp
Description
Valid item and component labels are:
PRES
NORM
Applied structural pressure normal to the face (real component).
"
TANX
Applied structural pressure in the tangential-x direction (real
component).
"
TANY
Applied structural pressure in the tangential-y direction (real
component).
INRM
Applied structural pressure normal to the face (imaginary component).
ITNX
Applied structural pressure in the tangential-x direction (imaginary component).
ITNY
Applied structural pressure in the tangential-y direction (imaginary component).
CONV
HCOEF
Applied convection (film coefficient).
"
TBULK
Applied convection (bulk temperature).
RAD
EMIS
Applied radiation (emissivity).
"
TAMB
Applied radiation (ambient temperature).
RDSF
EMSS
Radiation emissivity.
ENCL
Enclosure number.
FSIN
Fluid-solid interface number.
VFRC
Volume fraction (VOF method).
HFLUX
Applied heat flux.
FSI
Acoustic fluid-structure interface flag.
IMPD
SHLD
"
Applied acoustic impedance.
COND
Applied conductivity.
MUR
Applied relative permeability.
MXWF
INF
CHRGS
MCI
Maxwell force flag.
Exterior surface flag.
Applied electric surface charge density.
Magnetic circuit interface.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Symbols
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31083
PSMESH
PSMESH, SECID, Name, P0, Egroup, NUM, KCN ,KDIR, VALUE, NDPLANE, PSTOL, PSTYPE, ECOMP, NCOMP
Create and mesh a pretension section
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SECID
Unique section number. This number must not already be assigned to a section.
Name
Unique eight character descriptive name, if desired.
P0
Pretension node number. The node will be defined if it doesn't exist and the number defaults to the highest
node number plus one.
Egroup, NUM
Element group on which PSMESH will operate. If Egroup = P, graphical picking is enabled and NUM is ignored
(valid only in the GUI).
L (or LINE)
PSMESH operates on all elements in the line specified by NUM. New pretension nodes are associated
with NUM or entities below it. Any subsequent LCLEAR operation of NUM deletes the pretension elements
and nodes created by PSMESH.
A (or AREA)
PSMESH operates on all elements in the area specified by NUM. New pretension nodes are associated
with NUM or entities below it. Any subsequent ACLEAR of NUM deletes the pretension elements and nodes
created by PSMESH.
V (or VOLU)
PSMESH operates on all elements in the volume specified by NUM. New pretension nodes are associated
with NUM or entities below it. Any subsequent VCLEAR of NUM deletes the pretension elements and nodes
created by PSMESH.
P
PSMESH operates on elements selected through the subsequent picking operations, and NUM is ignored
ALL
The command operates on all selected elements, and NUM is ignored.
KCN
Coordinate system number for the separation surface and normal direction.
KDIR
Direction (x, y, or z) normal to separation surface in the KCN coordinate system.
If KCN is cartesian, the pretension section normal will be parallel to the KDIR axis regardless of the position
of the pretension node.
If KCN is non-cartesian, the pretension section normal will be aligned with the KDR direction of system KCN
at the position of the pretension node.
VALUE
Point along the KDIR axis at which to locate the separation surface. Ignored if NDPLANE is supplied.
31084
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PSMESH
NDPLANE
Existing node that PSMESH will use to locate the separation surface. If NDPLANE is supplied, the location of
the separation surface is defined by the KDIR coordinate of NDPLANE.
PSTOL
Optional absolute tolerance about VALUE. Allows nodes occurring slightly above or below the separation to
be grouped properly. The following expression represents the default value:
X2 + Y 2 + Z2
1000
where X, Y, and Z are the dimensions of the model based on nodal locations (that is, X = Xmax - Xmin).
PSTYPE
If specified, this value is the type number for pretension elements. (If not specified, ANSYS defines this value.)
If already defined, it must be of type PRETS179.
ECOMP
If specified, the name of a component to be composed of new pretension elements and existing elements
modified by the PSMESH command.
NCOMP
Name of a component to be composed of nodes on new pretension elements.
Notes
The PSMESH command creates a pretension section normal to the pretension load direction by cutting the
mesh along existing element boundaries at the point defined by VALUE or NDPLANE and inserting PRETS179
elements. The PSMESH command verifies that PSTYPE is PRETS179; if it is not, the command finds the lowest
available ITYPE that is PRETS179, or if necessary will create a new one.
When it is necessary to define the pretension node, ANSYS uses node NDPLANE. If the NDPLANE value is not
specified, ANSYS defines the pretension node at:
The centroid of geometric entity NUM, if Egroup = LINE, AREA or VOLU
The centroid location of all selected elements, if Egroup = ALL or if graphical picking is used.
If the elements to which the pretension load is to be applied have already been meshed in two groups, PSMESH
cannot be used to insert the pretension elements. The EINTF command must be used to insert the PRETS179
elements between the two meshed groups.
The PSMESH operation copies any nodal temperatures you have defined on the split surface of the original
mesh from the original nodes to the newly created coincident duplicate nodes. However, displacements, forces,
and other boundary conditions are not copied.
By mathematical definition, the pretension surface must always be a flat plane. In a non-Cartesian coordinate
system, the PSMESH command creates that plane at the indicated position, oriented with respect to the specified
direction of the active system (in the same manner that the NROTAT command orients a nodal system with respect
to a curved system). For example, assuming a X = 1 and Y = 45 in a cylindrical coordinate system with Z as the
axis of rotation (KCN = 1), a pretension surface normal to X tilts 45 degrees away from the global X axis.
The PSMESH command is valid for structural analyses only.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31085
PSMESH
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Elements in Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Elements in Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Elements in Volu
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Picked Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Selected Element
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Elements in Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Elements in Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Elements in Volu
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Picked Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Selected Element
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Elements in Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Elements in Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Elements in Volu
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Picked Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Selected Element
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Elements in Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Elements in Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Elements in Volu
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Picked Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>Selected Element
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Elements in Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Elements in Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Elements in Volu
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Picked
Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Node>Selected Element
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Elements
in Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Elements
in Line
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Elements
in Volu
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Picked
Elements
31086
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PSOLVE
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Pretensn Mesh>With Options>Divide at Valu>Selected
Element
PSOLVE, Lab
Directs the program to perform a partial solution.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Lab
Valid labels defining the solution step. All characters are required:
CGSOL
Calculates the DOF solution using the Jacobi conjugate gradient solver. Requires File.FULL. Displacements
are updated.
EIGDAMP
Calculates the eigenvalues and eigenvectors using the damped eigensolver. Requires File.FULL from
MODOPT,UNSYM or MODOPT,DAMP options. Produces File.MODE.
EIGQRDA
Calculates eigenvalues and eigenvectors using the QR damped eigensolver. Requires File.FULL from
MODOPT,QRDAMP option. Produces File.MODE.
EIGEXP
Expands the eigenvector solution. Requires File.MODE. Produces File.RST.
EIGFULL
Calculates the eigenvalues and eigenvectors using full subspace. Requires File.FULL from MODOPT,SUBSP
option. Produces File.MODE.
EIGLANB
Calculates the eigenvalues and eigenvectors using Block Lanczos. Requires File.FULL from MODOPT,LANB
option. Produces File.MODE.
EIGREDUC
Calculates the eigenvalues and eigenvectors using Householder. Requires File.REDM. Produces
File.MODE.
EIGUNSYM
Calculates the eigenvalues and eigenvectors using the unsymmetric eigensolver. Requires File.FULL
from MODOPT,UNSYM or MODOPT,DAMP options. Produces File.MODE.
ELFORM
Creates the element matrices. Produces File.EMAT and File.ESAV.
Note If you want to include prestress effects (PSTRES,ON) from a previous prestress analysis,
the ELFORM option requires the File.EMAT and File.ESAV files generated by that analysis.
ELPREP
Modifies element matrices for solution and calculates inertia relief terms (IRLF). Requires File.EMAT.
Produces File.EROT.
REDWRITE
Writes the reduced matrix to a file. Requires File.REDM. Produces File.SUB.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31087
PSOLVE
TRIANG
Triangularizes the matrices completely (or to the master degrees of freedom, if appropriate) or assembles
the global matrices depending on the analysis type and options. Requires File.EMAT. Produces File.TRI
(and File.REDM) or File.FULL.
Notes
Directs the program to perform a partial solution (that is, one step of an analysis sequence). Predefined analysis
types (ANTYPE) perform a defined subset of these solution steps in a predefined sequence. You can use the
partial solution procedure to repeat a certain step of an analysis or to restart an analysis.
Not all steps are valid for all analysis types. The order of the steps may vary depending on the result you desire.
See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for a description of how to perform partial and predefined solutions.
Issue a PSOLVE series of commands in a single load step. The SOLVE command (which executes the PSOLVE
load step) should appear in a separate load step, as shown in this example:
/solu
psolve,elform
psolve,elprep
psolve,triang
fini
/solu
kuse,1
solve
fini
In a cyclic symmetry analysis, PSOLVE,EIGLANB performs the modal analysis at multiple load steps, one for each
nodal-diameter specified via the CYCOPT command. In addition, the eigenvector solution is expanded at each
nodal-diameter solution, eliminating the need for a separate expansion pass (PSOLVE,EIGEXP).
If issuing PSOLVE,ELFORM and PSOLVE,ELPREP using the Jacobi Conjugate Gradient solver, do so only after issuing PSOLVE,CGSOL; otherwise, unpredictable results may occur.
Although documented to work, using the PSOLVE commands with an iterative solver is not likely to decrease
solution-processing time.
If File.EMAT is required (ELFORM with PSTRES,ON; ELPREP; or TRIANG), run the prior analysis with EMATWRITE,YES
to ensure that a File.EMAT is generated.
In a prestressed modal analysis, issue a PSOLVE,TRIANG command immediately before a PSOLVE,EIGUNSY,
PSOLVE,EIGDAMP or PSOLVE,EIGREDUC command to ensure that ANSYS creates a proper .FULL file. (The
PSOLVE,EIGFULL, PSOLVE,EIGLANB and PSOLVE,EIGQRDA commands do not require a preceding
PSOLVE,TRIANG command but, if you issue it anyhow, the PSOLVE,EIGxxxx commands will still work correctly.)
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Partial Solu
31088
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PSPEC
PSPEC, MAT, DNOM, SCHED, OD, TK
Defines pipe material and dimensions.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
MAT
Material number referring to a material property [MP]. Material number must be between 1 and 40.
DNOM, SCHED
Nominal diameter of pipe and schedule rating. Only valid ratings accepted. If these are specified, the OD and
TK values are found from an internal table.
Valid values for DNOM are: 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, and 36.
Valid ratings for SCHED are: 5, 5S, 10, 10S, 20, 30, 40, 40S, 60, 80 80S, 100, 120, 140, 160, XS, XXS, and STD.
OD
Outer diameter of pipe (if DNOM not specified). If both DNOM and OD are not specified, OD and TK retain their
previous values.
TK
Wall thickness of pipe (if OD specified).
Notes
Defines pipe material and dimensions. See the PREP7 RUN command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Specifications
/PSPEC, PCOLOR, KFILL, KBORDR
Creates annotation polygon attributes (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
PCOLOR
Polygon color (0 PCOLOR 15):
0
Black.
1
Red-Magenta.
2
Magenta.
3
Blue-Magenta.
4
Blue.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31089
/PSPEC
5
Cyan-Blue.
6
Cyan.
7
Green-Cyan.
8
Green.
9
Yellow-Green.
10
Yellow.
11
Orange.
12
Red.
13
Dark Gray.
14
Light Gray.
15
White.
KFILL
Polygon fill key:
0
Hollow polygon.
1
Filled polygon.
KBORDR
Polygon border key:
0
No border.
1
Border.
Notes
Creates annotation polygon attributes to control certain characteristics of the polygons created via the /POLYGON,
/PMORE, /PCIRCLE and /PWEDGE commands. This is a command generated by the Graphical User Interface
(GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used. This command is not intended to be
typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input file for batch input or for use with
the /INPUT command).
31090
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PSTATUS
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
PSPRNG, NLOC, TYPE, K, DX, DY, DZ, ELEM
Defines a spring constraint in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Node where spring is to be placed. Defaults to current run starting point.
TYPE
Type of spring:
TRAN
Translational (default).
ROT
Rotational.
K
Spring constant value (must be positive).
DX, DY, DZ
Increment (in terms of the active coordinate system components) to determine spring ground point. Spring
length must not be zero. Constraints are automatically generated at the ground point.
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to spring (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL +
1)).
Notes
Defines a spring constraint (spring element COMBIN14) at a given location in a piping run. See the PREP7 RUN
command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Spring Support
/PSTATUS, WN
Displays the global or window display specifications.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number for status (defaults to global specifications).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31091
PSTRES
Notes
Displays the current global or window display specifications. Global display specifications are common to all
windows (e.g. /SHOW, etc.). Window display specifications are specific to one window (e.g. /VIEW, /TYPE, etc.).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Graphics>General
Utility Menu>List>Status>Graphics>Window 1
Utility Menu>List>Status>Graphics>Window 2
Utility Menu>List>Status>Graphics>Window 3
Utility Menu>List>Status>Graphics>Window 4
Utility Menu>List>Status>Graphics>Window 5
PSTRES, Key
Specifies whether prestress effects are calculated or included.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Prestress key:
OFF
Do not calculate (or include) prestress effects (default).
ON
Calculate (or include) prestress effects.
Notes
Specifies whether or not prestress effects are to be calculated or included. Prestress effects are calculated in a
static or transient analysis for inclusion in a buckling, modal, harmonic (Method = FULL or REDUC), transient
(Method = REDUC), or substructure generation analysis. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within
the first load step.
If the prestress effects are to be calculated in a nonlinear static or transient analysis (for a prestressed modal
analysis of a large-deflection solution), you can issue a SSTIF,ON command (rather than a PSTRES,ON command)
in the static analysis.
If thermal body forces are used during a static analysis for the calculation of prestress effects, these thermal body
forces should not be deleted during any subsequent full harmonic response analyses. If these body forces are
deleted, the thermal prestress effects will not be included in the harmonic response analysis. Temperature loads
used to define the thermal prestress will also be used in the full harmonic response analysis as sinusoidally timevarying temperature loads.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
31092
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PSYMB
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
/PSYMB, Label, KEY
Shows various symbols on displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Show symbols as selected from the following labels:
CS
Local coordinate systems.
NDIR
Nodal coordinate systems (on rotated nodes only).
ESYS
Element coordinate systems (element displays only).
LDIR
Line directions (line displays only).
LDIV
Controls the display of element divisions on lines.
ADIR
Area direction symbol (for keypoint, line, area and volume plots).
LAYR
Layer orientations (relative to the projected element x-axis). Used only with layered elements in an element
display. Use KEY for layer number.
PCON
Convergence criterion symbols on nodes (for a p-method analysis).
ECON
Element mesh symbols on keypoints and lines.
DOT
Larger symbols displayed for node and keypoint locations. When Label = DOT, KEY = 1 by default.
XNOD
Extra node of surface or circuit elements.
FBCS
Force boundary condition scaling. Subsequent KEY value determines whether or not to scale the applied
and derived forces/moments to the same maximum value.
DEFA
Resets the symbol keys so that ANSYS displays none of the symbols controlled by the /PSYMB command.
The value of the KEY field is ignored.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31093
/PSYMB
STAT
Prints the status of the settings of the symbol keys controlled by the /PSYMB command. The KEY field
is ignored.
KEY
Symbol key:
0
No symbol (default). If Label = LDIV, then KEY= 0 indicates that the displayed element divisions will
correspond to the existing mesh (the word MESHED or EXISTING can also be substituted). Also, for Label
= LDIV, if you execute any meshing command (such as AMESH or VMESH), KEY is set to 0 (MESHED)
automatically. If Label = FBCS, then KEY= 0 indicates that boundary condition scaling will not be common.
The applied and derived forces/moments will be scaled to their respective maximum values.
1
Include symbol. If Label = LDIV, then KEY = 1 indicates that the displayed line divisions will correspond
to the value assigned by LESIZE (the word LESIZE can also be substituted). Also, for Label = LDIV, if you
execute the LESIZE command, KEY is set to 1 (LESIZE) automatically. If Label = FBCS, then KEY= 1 indicates
that boundary condition scaling will be common. The applied and derived forces/moments will be scaled
to the same maximum value.
N
If Label = LAYR, then N is equal to the layer number. If Label = DOT, then N can be equal to 0,1,.....15,
indicating the dot size. If Label = LDIV, then KEY = -1, indicates that no element divisions will be displayed
(the word OFF can also be substituted).
Notes
Includes various symbols on the display. Triads are right-handed with x displayed as the longest leg. Where color
is displayed, x is white, y is green, and z is blue. For beams, x is always along the length of the element. For lines,
an arrow represents the direction of a line, from the beginning keypoint to the end keypoint. See /PLOPTS
command for additional display options. Use /PSTATUS or /PSYMB,STAT to display settings. Use /PSYMB,DEFA
to reset all specifications back to their defaults. The command /PSYMB,ECON,1 causes the symbol "M" to be
displayed on keypoints and lines associated with meshed entities. When you issue the command /PSYMB,DOT,1,
a larger symbol is displayed for each node and keypoint location.
PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER] does not support /PSYMB,ESYS and /PSYMB,LAYR.
If KEY = N and PowerGraphics is off, the centroid of the surface elements is connected to the extra node using a
gray line. However, if PowerGraphics is on, the color of the line connecting the centroid to the extra node is the
same as that for the elements themselves (as determined by /PNUM).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>RotateNode>To Surf Norm>with Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Symmetry
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Symbols
31094
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
PTXY
PTEMP, TOUT, TIN
Defines the pipe wall temperatures in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TOUT
Outer pipe wall temperature. If NONE, reset temperature specification to none (BFUNIF will be assigned).
TIN
Inner pipe wall temperature (defaults to TOUT).
Command Default
Assign uniform temperature BFUNIF to elements.
Notes
Defines the pipe wall temperatures in a piping run. These temperatures are assigned to the elements as they are
generated. See the PREP7 RUN command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Loads
PTXY, X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3, X4, Y4
Defines coordinate pairs for use in polygons and prisms.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3, X4, Y4
X and Y coordinate pairs on the working plane.
Notes
Defines coordinate pairs for use in polygons and prisms [POLY, RPRISM]. The coordinates must be in the Cartesian
coordinate system. The coordinate pairs must be input in a continuous order. PTXY may be repeated (up to 100
pairs) until the required pairs have been defined. The pairs will be saved until either the POLY or PRISM command
is entered. Use PTXY,STAT to list the saved coordinate pairs. Use PTXY,DELE to delete all the saved coordinate
pairs. See the RPOLY, RPRISM, and RPR4 commands for other ways to create polygons and prisms.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31095
PUNIT
PUNIT, KOPT
Selects the system of length units to be used in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
KOPT
Units key:
0
Input units are consistent (no conversions are done) (default).
FTIN or 1
English units (feet A, inch B, fraction of inch C/D). Use A+B+C/D format for PDRAG, BRANCH, RUN, BEND,
MITER, REDUCE, VALVE, BELLOW, FLANGE, PSPRNG, and PGAP commands. Precede by "-'' sign for
negative coordinates. (Example: 5+6+7/16 for 5 ft. 6-7/16 in., +3 for 3 in., -0+3 for -3 in., +0+9/16 for 9/16
in.).
The two signs should not be consecutive. A, B, C, and D must be integers. Use B+C/D format for PSPEC,
PINSUL, and PCORRO commands. (Example: 2 for 2 in., 3+1/2 for 3-1/2 in., +3/8 for 3/8 in.)
METRIC or 2
Metric units (meter A, centimeter B, fraction of cm C/D). Use as explained for English units. (Example:
5+6+7/10 for 5 m 6-7/10 cm with PDRAG command.)
Command Default
Input units are consistent (no conversions are done).
Notes
Selects the system of length units to be used for the piping commands. Mixed length units require a + sign to
delimit (or position) the units in the system and are converted to the smallest unit of the system (inches or centimeters) upon input.
Note This conversion is local only to pure length units of the piping commands listed. Other units and
units for other commands must be input to be consistent with the smallest length unit of the system
used.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Specifications
PVECT, Oper, LabXR, LabYR, LabZR
Interpolates a set of items onto a path.
POST1: Path Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Oper
Valid operations for geometry operations along a path are:
31096
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/PWEDGE
NORM
Defines a unit normal vector at each interpolation point in the direction of the cross product of the tangent
to the path and the active Z axis. Resulting vector components are in the active coordinate system (which
must be Cartesian).
TANG
Defines a unit vector tangent to the path at each interpolation point. Vector components are in the active
coordinate system (which must be Cartesian).
RADI
Defines the position vector of each interpolation point of the path from the center of the active coordinate
system (which must be Cartesian).
LabXR
Label (8 characters maximum) assigned to X-component of the resulting vector.
LabYR
Label (8 characters maximum) assigned to Y-component of the resulting vector.
LabZR
Label (8 characters maximum) assigned to Z-component of the resulting vector.
Notes
Defines and interpolates a set of labeled path items along predefined path [PATH] and performs various geometric operations on these path items. A path item must be defined before it can be used with other path operations. Additional path items may be defined with the PDEF, PCALC, PDOT, and PCROSS commands. Path items
may be listed or displayed with the PLPATH, PLPAGM and PRPATH commands. Path geometry items (XG, YG,
ZG, S) are automatically interpolated (in the active CSYS) if not done so previously with the PDEF command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Unit Vector
/PWEDGE, XCENTR, YCENTR, XLRAD, ANGLE1, ANGLE2
Creates an annotation wedge (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
XCENTR
Wedge X center location (-1.0 < X < 2.0).
YCENTR
Wedge Y center location (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
XLRAD
Wedge radius length.
ANGLE1
Starting angle of wedge.
ANGLE2
Ending angle of wedge. The wedge is drawn counterclockwise from the starting angle, ANGLE1, to the ending
angle, ANGLE2.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31097
/PWEDGE
Notes
Creates an annotation wedge to be written directly onto the display at a specified location. This is a command
generated by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is
used. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in
an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
All wedges are shown on subsequent displays unless the annotation is turned off or deleted. Use the /LSPEC
and the /PSPEC command to set the attributes of the wedge.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
31098
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Q Commands
QDVAL, TBLNO1, TBLNO2, SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7
Defines PSD quadspectral values.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
TBLNO1
First input PSD table number associated with this spectrum.
TBLNO2
Second input PSD table number associated with this spectrum.
SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7
PSD quadspectral values corresponding to the frequency points [PSDFRQ].
Notes
Defines PSD quadspectral values to be associated with the previously defined frequency points. Repeat QDVAL
command with the same table number for additional points (50 maximum per curve). Unlike autospectra
[PSDVAL], the quadspectra can be positive or negative. The quadspectral curve segment where there is a sign
change is interpolated linearly (the rest of the curve segments use log-log interpolation). For better accuracy,
choose as small a curve segment as possible wherever a sign change occurs.
Two table numbers are required since values are off-diagonal terms. This command is valid for SPOPT,PSD only.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Quadspectral
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>PSD>Correlation>Quadspectral
QFACT
Calculates the quality factor for high-frequency electromagnetic resonators.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
The QFACT command macro calculates the quality factor for high-frequency electromagnetic resonators. It returns
the quality factor as a scalar parameter, QFACT. To compute the quality factor, the macro uses the stored energy,
surface losses, and dielectric losses.
See magnetic macros for further details.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
QSOPT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Cavity>Q-factor
QSOPT, Opt
Specifies quasi static radiation options.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Opt
Quasi static option:
OFF
Do not run transient radiation problem to steady-state (default).
ON
Run transient radiation problem to steady-state.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Quasi-Static
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Quasi-Static
QUAD, NODE1, NINTR, NODE2, NFILL, NSTRT, NINC, PKFAC
Generates a quadratic line of nodes from three nodes.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE1
Begin fill-in from this node location. If NODE1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
NINTR
Intermediate or guiding node. Quadratic curve will pass through this location. NINTR may have any node
number and any location. If the quadratic line also generates a node with number NINTR, the generated
location overrides the previous NINTR location.
NODE2
End quadratic fill-in at this node location.
NFILL
Fill-in NFILL nodes between NODE1 and NODE2 (defaults to |NODE2-NODE1|-1). NFILL must be positive.
NSTRT
Node number assigned to first filled-in node (defaults to NODE1 + NINC).
31100
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/QUIT
NINC
Add this increment to each of the remaining filled-in node numbers (may be positive or negative). Defaults
to (NODE2-NODE1)/(NFILL + 1), i.e., linear interpolation.
PKFAC
Peak location factor. If PKFAC=0.5, the peak of the quadratic shape occurs at the NINTR location. If 0.0 <
PKFAC < 0.5, the peak occurs to the NODE2 side of the NINTR location. If 0.5 < PKFAC < 1.0, the peak occurs
to the NODE1 side of the NINTR location. Defaults to 0.5.
Notes
Generates a quadratic line of nodes (in the active coordinate system) from three nodes. The three nodes determine
the plane of the curve and may have been defined in any coordinate system. Any number of nodes may be filledin and any node number sequence may be assigned.
The quadratic line feature uses three nodes (NODE1,NINTR,NODE2) to determine the plane of the curve. The curve
passes through the three points, beginning from NODE1, through the intermediate (or guiding) point NINTR,
and toward NODE2.
Generated nodes are also quadratically spaced. If the guiding node number is within the set being generated,
it will be relocated according to the quadratic spacing.
The peak location factor is used to determine how the quadratic fits through the three points. Various nodal
progressions can be obtained by different combinations of PKFAC and the guiding node location. If the guiding
node is at mid-length between NODE1 and NODE2, 0.293 PKFAC< 0.707 will ensure that all generated nodes
fall within the NODE1,NODE2 bounds. In the limit, as PKFAC approaches 0.0, the peak approaches the line through
NODE1 and NINTR at an infinite distance from NODE1. The QUAD command generates quadratic lines of nodes,
which in turn may be used as a base line for generating irregular surfaces of nodes (by repeating [*REPEAT],
generating [NGEN, NSCALE], etc.). Irregular surfaces may also be generated with the meshing commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Nodes>Quadratic Fill
/QUIT
Exits a processor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is an alternative to the FINISH command. If any cleanup or file writing is normally done by the FINISH
command, it is bypassed if the /QUIT command is used instead. A new processor may be entered after this
command. See the /EXIT command to terminate the run.
This command is valid in any processor. This command is not valid at the Begin level.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31101
QUOT
QUOT, IR, IA, IB, --, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB
Divides two variables.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA, IB
Reference numbers of the two variables to be operated on.
--
Unused field.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA, FACTB
Scaling factors (positive or negative) applied to the corresponding variables (default to 1.0).
Notes
Divides two variables according to the operation:
IR = (FACTA x IA)/(FACTB x IB)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Divide
31102
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
R Commands
R, NSET, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6
Defines the element real constants.
PREP7: Real Constants
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET
Set identification number (arbitrary). If same as a previous set number, set is redefined. Set number relates
to that defined with the element [REAL]. Note that the GUI automatically sets this value.
R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6
Real constant values (interpreted as area, moment of inertia, thickness, etc., as required for the particular
element type using this set), or table names for tabular input of boundary conditions. Use RMORE command
if more than six real constants per set are to be input.
Notes
Defines the element real constants. The real constants required for an element are shown in Table 4.n.1 of each
element description in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Constants must be input in the same order as shown in
that table. If more than the required number of element real constants are specified in a set, only those required
are used. If fewer than the required number are specified, zero values are assumed for the unspecified constants.
If using table inputs (SURF151, SURF152, FLUID116, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, and CONTA175
only), enclose the table name in % signs (e.g., %tabname%).
When copying real constants to new sets, ANSYS recommends that you use the command input. If you do use
the GUI, restrict the real constant copy to only the first six real constants (real constants seven and greater will
be incorrect for both the master and copy set).
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>Add/Edit/Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Mass
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Nonlin Rotary
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Nonlin Trans
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Transducer>ElecMech
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Edit Real Cnst
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Real Constants>Add/Edit/Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>Add/Edit/Delete
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RACE
RACE, XC, YC, RAD, TCUR, DY, DZ, --, --, Cname
Defines a "racetrack" current source.
PREP7: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
XC
Location of the mid-thickness of the vertical leg along the working plane X-axis.
YC
Location of the mid-thickness of the horizontal leg along the working plane Y-axis.
RAD
Radius of curvature of the mid-thickness of the curves in the racetrack source. Defaults to .501 * DY
TCUR
Total current, amp-turns (MKS), flowing in the source.
DY
In-plane thickness of the racetrack source.
DZ
Out-of-plane thickness (depth) of the racetrack source.
--, --
Unused fields
Cname
An alphanumeric name assigned as a component name to the group of SOURC36 elements created by the
command macro. Cname must be enclosed in single quotes in the RACE command line. Cname may be up
to 8 characters, beginning with a letter and containing only letters, numbers, and underscores. Component
names beginning with an underscore (e.g., _LOOP) are reserved for use by ANSYS and should be avoided. If
blank, no component name is assigned.
Notes
RACE invokes an ANSYS macro which defines a "racetrack" current source in the working plane coordinate system.
The current source is generated from bar and arc source primitives using the SOURC36 element (which is assigned
the next available element type number). The macro is valid for use in 3-D magnetic field analysis using a scalar
potential formulation. Current flows in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the working plane.
The diagram below shows you a racetrack current source.
31104
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RADOPT
' %% #
)("&$!"
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>Racetrack Coil
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Racetrack Coil
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Excitation>Racetrack Coil
RADOPT, FLUXRELX, FLUXTOL, SOLVER, MAXITER, TOLER, OVERRLEX
Specifies Gauss-Seidel Radiosity Solver options.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
FLUXRELX
Relaxation factor applied to the heat flux. Defaults to 0.1.
FLUXTOL
Convergence tolerance for radiation flux. Defaults to 0.0001 for ANSYS Thermal radiation analysis and FLOTRAN
surface radiation analysis.
SOLVER
Choice of solver for radiosity calculation:
0
Iterative solver (default).
1
Direct solver.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31105
RALL
MAXITER
Maximum number of iterations for iterative solver (SOLVER = 0). Defaults to 1000.
TOLER
Convergence tolerance for the iterative solver (SOLVER = 0). Defaults to 0.1.
OVERRLEX
Over relaxation factor applied to the iterative solver (SOLVER = 0). Defaults to 0.1.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
RALL
Calculates solver statistics and run time estimates.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Calculates solver statistics and estimates. The RALL command is a convenience command for obtaining all of
the following: run time estimates [RTIMST], the wavefront statistics and memory requirements [RWFRNT], the
file sizes estimates [RFILSZ], the memory statistics [RMEMRY], and the finite element model statistics [RSTAT].
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>All Statistics
RAPPND, LSTEP, TIME
Appends results data from the database to the results file.
POST1: Load Case Calculations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LSTEP
Load step number to be assigned to the results data set. If it is the same as an existing load step number on
the results file, the appended load step will be inaccessible. Defaults to 1.
TIME
Time value to be assigned to the results data set. Defaults to 0.0. A time value greater than the last load step
should be used.
31106
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RATE
Notes
This command is typically used to append the results from a load case combination to the results file. See the
LCWRITE command to create a separate load case file. Only summable and constant data are written to the
results file by default; non-summable data are not written unless requested (LCSUM command). RAPPND should
not be used to append results from a harmonic analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Write Results
RATE, Option
Specifies whether the effect of creep strain rate will be used in the solution of a load step.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Turns implicit creep analysis on or off.
0
(or OFF) Bypass creep analysis (default).
1
(or ON) Perform creep analysis.
Command Default
ANSYS automatically turns implicit creep OFF.
Notes
You must set Option = ON to perform an implicit creep analysis (TB,CREEP with TBOPT 1). For viscoplasticity/creep analysis, specifies whether or not to include the creep calculation in the solution of a load step. If Option
= ON, ANSYS performs the creep calculation. Set an appropriate time for solving the load step using TIME,TIME.
Product Restrictions
This command works only when modeling implicit creep with either von Mises or Hill potentials.
When modeling implicit creep with von Mises potential, you can use the following elements: LINK180, SHELL181,
PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
When modeling anisotropic creep (TB,CREEP with TB,HILL), you can also use the following elements: PLANE42,
SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, SOLSH190, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31107
/RATIO
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Strn Rate Effect
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Strn Rate Effect
/RATIO, WN, RATOX, RATOY
Distorts the object geometry.
GRAPHICS: Scaling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
RATOX
Distort object in the window X direction by this factor (defaults to 1.0).
RATOY
Distort object in the window Y direction by this factor (defaults to 1.0).
Command Default
No distortion.
Notes
Distorts the object geometry in a particular direction. An example of this command's use would be to allow long
narrow sections to be distorted to a more square area for better display visualization.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Size and Shape
RBE3, Master, DOF, Slaves, Wtfact
Distributes the force/moment applied at the master node to a set of slave nodes, taking into account the
geometry of the slave nodes as well as weighting factors.
PREP7: Constraint Equations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Master
Node at which the force/moment to be distributed will be applied. This node must be associated with an
element for the master node to be included in the DOF solution.
DOF
Refers to the master node degrees of freedom to be used in constraint equations. Valid labels are: UX, UY,
UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, UXYZ, RXYZ, ALL
31108
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RCON
Slaves
The name of an array parameter that contains a list of slave nodes. Must specify the starting index number.
ALL can be used for currently selected set of nodes. The slave nodes may not be colinear, that is, not be all
located on the same straight line (see Notes below).
Wtfact
The name of an array parameter that contains a list of weighting factors corresponding to each slave node
above. Must have the starting index number. If not specified, the weighting factor for each slave node defaults
to 1.
Notes
The force is distributed to the slave nodes proportional to the weighting factors. The moment is distributed as
forces to the slaves; these forces are proportional to the distance from the center of gravity of the slave nodes
times the weighting factors. Only the translational degrees of freedom of the slave nodes are used for constructing
the constraint equations. Constraint equations are converted to distributed forces/moments on the slave nodes
during solution.
RBE3 creates constraint equations such that the motion of the master is the average of the slaves. For the rotations,
a least-squares approach is used to define the "average rotation" at the master from the translations of the slaves.
If the slave nodes are colinear, then one of the master rotations that is parallel to the colinear direction can not
be determined in terms of the translations of the slave nodes. Therefore, the associated moment component
on the master node in that direction can not be transmitted. When this case occurs, a warning message is issued
and the constraint equations created by RBE3 are ignored.
Applying this command to a large number of slave nodes may result in constraint equations with a large number
of coefficients. This may significantly increase the peak memory required during the process of element assembly.
If real memory or virtual memory is not available, consider reducing the number of slave nodes.
As an alternative to the RBE3 command, you can apply a similar type of constraint using contact elements and
the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) algorithm. See Surface-based Constraints for more information.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Dist F/M at Mstr
RCON
Specifies "Real constants" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31109
RDEC
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Real Constants
RDEC, Option REDUC , --, Nplace
Defines the decimation parameters.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Command options:
DEFINE
Defines the decimation parameters (default).
STAT
Shows the status/listing. Other command options are ignored.
REDUC
Approximate reduction in the number of surface elements. Valid range is from 0.0 (no decimation, the default)
to 1.0. This number is a factor applied to the initial number of element radiosity surfaces.
--
Unused field.
Nplace
Node placement algorithm
OPTI
Optimal placement. An edge is collapsed by moving both nodes (I and J in the figure below) to a new
location.
SUBS
Subset placement. An edge is collapsed by moving one node to another one. In the figure below, node
I is moved to node J.
(
)
)
!""$#
%
"!
DE!75!DC6 AQIG$F
% B 8 @ % P H
(
)
!'&$#
%
"!
% E 5 B 8 @ 8 6 3 1
D!7!DC6 A975 4% 20
Notes
Decimation is the process of simplifying a fine surface mesh into a coarse one. This process is accomplished by
a sequence of edge collapses.
The maximum degree of decimation (1.0) is unreachable. The real degree of decimation is always less than 1.0
because the decimated mesh must always consist of at least one element.
31110
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
REAL
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Decimation Options>Define
Specifiations
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Decimation Options>Define Specifiations
RDELE, NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Deletes real constant sets.
PREP7: Real Constants
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Delete real constant sets from NSET1 to NSET2 (defaults to NSET1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NSET1
= ALL, ignore NSET2 and NINC and all real constant sets are deleted.
Notes
Deletes real constant sets defined with the R command.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>Add/Edit/Delete
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Real Constants
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Real Constants>Add/Edit/Delete
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>Add/Edit/Delete
REAL, NSET
Sets the element real constant set attribute pointer.
PREP7: Meshing
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET
Assign this real constant set number to subsequently defined elements (defaults to 1).
Command Default
NSET = 1.
Notes
Identifies the real constant set number to be assigned to subsequently defined elements. This number refers to
the real constant set number (NSET) defined with the real constant sets [R]. Real constant set numbers may be
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31111
REALVAR
displayed [/PNUM]. If the element type requires no real constants, this entry is ignored. Elements of different
type should not refer to the same real constant set.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Default Attribs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Elem Attributes
REALVAR, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA
Forms a variable using only the real part of a complex variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
Forms a variable using only the real part of a variable. Used only with harmonic analyses (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
Complex variables are stored in two-column arrays with the real component stored in the first column and the
imaginary component stored in the second column. This command extracts the value stored in the first column
(i.e., real component). However with harmonic analyses, all variables are stored in two-column arrays as complex
variables. If the variable is not complex, then the same value is stored in both columns. This command will extract
the variable in the first column of the array, even if this variable is not the real component of a complex variable.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Real Part
31112
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
REDUCE
RECTNG, X1, X2, Y1, Y2
Creates a rectangular area anywhere on the working plane.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
X1, X2
Working plane X coordinates of the rectangle.
Y1, Y2
Working plane Y coordinates of the rectangle.
Notes
The area will be defined with four keypoints and four lines. See the BLC4 and BLC5 commands for alternate
ways to create rectangles.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Rectangle>By Dimensions
REDUCE, NLOC, LENG, ELEM
Defines a reducer in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Node where two straight pipes intersect at center of reducer. Defaults to previous run starting point.
LENG
Length of reducer (defaults to average pipe OD).
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to reducer (defaults to MAXEL + 1).
Notes
Defines a reducer (straight pipe element (PIPE16) with averaged specifications) in place of the intersection of
two previously defined straight pipe elements in a piping run. See the PREP7 RUN command. Two new nodes
are generated at the ends of the reducer. The two straight pipes are automatically "shortened" to meet the ends
of the reducer. The reducer specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding two straight pipes.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Reducer
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31113
REFLCOEF
REFLCOEF, Portin, Pvolt, Pang, Pdist, Vpathy
Calculates the voltage reflection coefficient (REFLC), standing wave ratio (VSWR), and return loss (RL) in
a COAX fed device; at postprocessing of an HF electromagnetic analysis.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Portin
Port number of the excited port with a COAX mode excitation. (See the HFPORT command description for
details.)
Pvolt
Port EMF (voltage) (magnitude) applied to the excited port.
Pang
Phase angle of the port EMF (voltage) (in degrees). Defaults to zero degrees.
Pdist
Propagation distance between the excited port and the evaluation point. Defaults to zero (evaluation at the
excited port).
Vpathy
Path name defining a path between conducting walls of the coax waveguide at the specified propagation
distance (Pdist) from the excited port. (See also the PATH command description.)
Notes
You must specify a path [PATH command] at the propagation distance location between conducting walls of
the COAX waveguide for calculating the EMF (voltage). REFLCOEF returns the parameters REFLC, VSWR, RL, and
REFANG (phase angle of the reflection coefficient).
To calculate the reflection coefficient, REFLCOEF uses total and incident EMF (voltage). It prints the resulting
parameters to an output device and to your screen.
See magnetic macros for further details.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Port>Refl Coeff
REMESH, Action
Specifies the starting and ending remeshing points for rezoning.
SOLUTION: Rezoning
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Action
START
Starts the remeshing operation.
31114
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/RENAME
FINISH
Ends the remeshing operation.
Notes
The REMESH command is valid only during the manual rezoning (REZONE,MANUAL) process.
In manual rezoning, a REMESH,START command temporarily exits the /SOLU solution processor and enters a
special mode of the /PREP7 preprocessor, after which a limited number of preprocessing commands are available
for mesh control, but no solution commands are valid.
A REMESH,FINISH command exits the remeshing process and reenters the solution processor, at which point
no preprocessing commands are available. If the new mesh exists, the command creates contact elements if
needed, and transfers all boundary conditions (BCs) and loads from the original mesh to the new mesh. You can
issue any list or plot command to verify the created contact elements, transferred BCs, and loads.
A REMESH,FINISH command is valid only after a previously issued REMESH,START command, and is the only
way to safely end the remeshing operation (and exit the special mode of the /PREP7 preprocessor).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Cancel
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Finish
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Start
/RENAME, Fname1, Ext1, --, Fname2, Ext2, -Renames a file.
SESSION: Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname1
Name of file to be renamed and its directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do
not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters for
the file name.
File name defaults to the current Jobname.
Ext1
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Fname2
Name of file to be renamed and its directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do
not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you can use all 248 characters for
the file name.
Fname2 defaults to Fname1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31115
REORDER
Ext2
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
Ext2 defaults to Ext1.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Renames a file. Ex: /RENAME,A,,,B renames file A to B in the same directory. /RENAME,A,DAT,,,INP renames file
A.DAT to A.INP. On all systems, this command will overwrite any existing file named B. See the ANSYS Operations
Guide for details. Only ANSYS binary files should be renamed. Use /SYS and system renaming commands for
other files.
Renaming across system partitions may be internally done by a copy and delete operation on some systems.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>File Operations>Rename
REORDER
Specifies "Model reordering" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>List Wave Lists
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Reorder Module
/REPLOT, Label
Automatically reissues the last display command for convenience.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Controls the type of replot.
31116
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/REPLOT
RESIZE
Issued internally when a graphics window resize occurs (Default).
FAST
Only applicable for 3-D devices that allow a fast redisplay for changes in the view characteristics only.
Notes
Reissues the last display command (NPLOT, EPLOT, KPLOT, PLNSOL, PLVAR, etc.), along with its parameters,
for convenience. The current display specifications are used.
When the last display command is invalid in a particular processor, the use of the /REPLOT command is also invalid in that processor. However, if you attempt a /REPLOT and the last display command is invalid in the current
processor, ANSYS produces an element display [EPLOT] instead, as long as the last display command was PLNSOL,
PLESOL, or PLDISP. ANSYS performs this substitution of /REPLOT with EPLOT for your convenience.
For example, the PLNSOL command, which is used to display solution results as continuous contours, is a valid
command in the general postprocessor [/POST1]. If you issue PLNSOL followed by /REPLOT while in the general
postprocessor, the /REPLOT command effectively reissues your earlier PLNSOL command, along with its parameters. But if you then exit the general postprocessor, enter the preprocessor [/PREP7], and issue the /REPLOT
command again, ANSYS internally issues EPLOT instead. This occurs because PLNSOL is not a valid command
in the preprocessor.
When you click on one of the buttons on the Pan, Zoom, Rotate dialog box to manipulate the view of a model,
the /REPLOT command is issued internally. Thus, the substitution of /REPLOT with EPLOT as described above
may occur not only for the PLNSOL, PLESOL, and PLDISP results display commands, but also for operations
that you perform with the Pan, Zoom, Rotate dialog box.
/REPLOT will not show boundary conditions if they are only applied to a solid model and the last display command
(for example, EPLOT) displays the finite element model. To show boundary conditions, the following options
are available:
Issue /REPLOT after you issue the SBCTRAN command to transfer solid model boundary conditions to
the finite element model.
Issue /REPLOT after you issue a solid model display command (for example, VPLOT).
This command is valid in any processor (except as noted above).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Delete Path>All Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Delete Path>By Name
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Plot Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Scale Icon
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Delete Path>All Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Delete Path>By Name
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Plot Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Replot
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Symmetry Expansion>Expansion by values
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31117
RESCONTROL
RESCONTROL, Action, Ldstep, Frequency, MAXFILES
Controls file writing for multiframe restarts.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Action
Specify the command action.
DEFINE
Issuing the command will specify how frequently the .Rnnn restart files are written for a load step (default).
FILE_SUMMARY
Issuing the command will print the substep and load step information for all .Rnnn files for the current
job name in the current directory. If this option is specified, all other arguments are ignored.
STATUS
Issuing the command will list the current status in the tables of restart control specified earlier by
RESCONTROL.
Ldstep
Specify how the .Rnnn files are written.
ALL
The .Rnnn files are written at the same frequency for all load steps.
LAST
Write the .Rnnn files for the last load step only (default).
N
Write the .Rnnn files at the frequency indicated only for load step N. Other load steps will be written at
the default frequency or at a frequency defined by a previous RESCONTROL,DEFINE,ALL,Frequency
command.
NONE
No multiframe restart files (.RDB [restart database file], .LDHI [load history file], .Rnnn) will be created.
If you specify this option, all other arguments will be ignored. This allows a restart to be done at the last
or abort point using the same procedure as in ANSYS 5.5 or earlier (using the .EMAT, .ESAV or .OSAV,
and .DB files).
Frequency
Frequency at which the .Rnnn files are written.
NONE
Don't write any .Rnnn files for this load step.
LAST
Write the .Rnnn files for the last substep of the load step only (default).
N
If N is positive, write the .Rnnn file every Nth substep of a load step. If N is negative, write N equally spaced
.Rnnn files within a load step. Negative N is valid only when AUTOTS,ON.
MAXFILES
Maximum number of .Rnnn files to save for Ldstep.
31118
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RESET
0
Do not overwrite any existing .Rnnn files (default). The total maximum number of .Rnnn files for one run
is 999. If this number is reached before the analysis is complete, the analysis will continue but will no
longer write any .Rnnn files.
N
The maximum number of .Rnnn files to keep for each load step. When N .Rnnn files have been written
for a load step, ANSYS will overwrite the first .Rnnn file of that load step for subsequent substeps.
Command Default
If the RESCONTROL command is not issued during a structural analysis, the .RDB and .LDHI files will be written
as described in Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. The .Rnnn file will be written at the last
substep of the last load step by default. A .Rnnn file will also be written at the iteration prior to the abort point
of the run if a Jobname.ABT file was used, or if the job terminates because of a failure to reach convergence or
some other solution error. No information at the aborted substep will be saved to the .Rnnn file.
Notes
This command sets up the restart parameters for a multiframe restart, which allows you to restart an analysis
from any load step and substep for which there is a .Rnnn file. You can do a multiframe restart only for nonlinear
static and full transient structural analyses. (For linear static analyses, you can use a single frame restart.) For information on how to do a single frame or multiframe restart, and descriptions of the contents of the files used
for each type of restart, see Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
If you have many substeps for each load step, and are writing .Rnnn files frequently, you may want to use MAXFILES
to limit the number of .Rnnn saved, since these files can fill up your disk quickly. You may specify MAXFILES and
Frequency for individual load steps. These arguments will take on the default value or the value defined by
RESCONTROL,,ALL,Frequency,MAXFILES if they are not explicitly defined for a specific load step.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Restart Control
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Restart Control
RESET
Resets all POST1 or POST26 specifications to initial defaults.
POST1: Set Up
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Has the same effect as entering the processor the first time within the run. In POST1, resets all specifications to
initial defaults, erases all element table items, path table data, fatigue table data, and load case pointers. In
POST26, resets all specifications to initial defaults, erases all variables defined, and zeroes the data storage space.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31119
/RESET
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Reset
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Reset Postproc
/RESET
Resets display specifications to their initial defaults.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Resets slash display specifications (/WINDOW, /TYPE, /VIEW, etc.) back to their initial default settings (for convenience). Also resets the focus location to the geometric center of the object.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Reset Plot Ctrls
RESP, IR, LFTAB, LDTAB, ITYPE, RATIO, DTIME, TMIN, TMAX
Generates a response spectrum.
POST26: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the response spectrum results (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number
is the same as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with these
results.
LFTAB
Reference number of variable containing frequency table (created with FILLDATA or DATA command). The
frequency table defines the number and frequency of oscillating systems used to determine the response
spectrum. The frequency interval need not be constant over the entire range. Frequencies must be input in
ascending order.
LDTAB
Reference number of variable containing the displacement time-history.
ITYPE
Defines the type of response spectrum to be calculated:
0 or 1
Displacement.
2
Velocity.
31120
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RESP
3
Acceleration response spectrum.
RATIO
Ratio of viscous damping to critical damping (input as a decimal number).
DTIME
Integration time step (ITS) size used in the numerical integration scheme. This value should be equal to or
greater than that actually used in the initial transient analysis. With ANTYPE,TRANS data, DTIME defaults to
a value of 1/((20)(FMAX)), where FMAX is the highest frequency in LFTAB. For reduced linear transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS) displacement pass data, the ITS read from the file (previously input for DTIME in the
first load step of the reduced linear transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis) is used for the default.
TMIN, TMAX
Specifies a subset of the displacement-time history to be used in the response spectrum calculation. Defaults
to the full time range.
Notes
Generates a response spectrum from displacement time-history and frequency data.
The ANSYS modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL) may be followed by a spectrum analysis (ANTYPE,SPECTR). This
analysis requires a response spectrum input of up to 20 points. This input may be determined from the response
spectrum printout or display of this command and input to the modal analysis (by hand). The response spectrum
generator uses the displacements from either a full or reduced transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis. If
a response spectrum is to be calculated from a given displacement time-history, the displacement time-history
may be input to a single one-element reduced linear transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis, so that the
calculated output (which should be the same as the input) will be properly located on the file.
The response spectrum is defined as the maximum response of single degree of freedom systems of varying
frequency (or period) to a given input support excitation. The equation describing the response of the system
in terms of the relative displacement (X) is:
2
X + 2nn X + n X = Xo
where:
k /m
n = natural frequency of the system,
n = ratio of viscous damping to critical damping, c/ccr
Xo = ground displacement
The solution of this equation for the maximum response, X max, at various frequencies results in the spectral response curve. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for calculation details.
Calculations are based on a numerical integration scheme with the displacement time-history data from the file
as the input ground-forcing function. The integration time step (argument DTIME on the RESP command) and
the damping coefficient (argument RATIO) are constant over the frequency range. The number of calculations
done per displacement spectral response curve is the product of the number of input solution points
(TMAX-TMIN)DTIME and the number of oscillating systems (frequencies located in variable LFTAB). Input solution
points requested (by DTIME and the frequency range) at a time not corresponding to an actual displacement
solution time on the file are read from the next available time. The user has the option of calculating either a
displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectral response.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31121
RESUME
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Generate Spectrm
RESUME, Fname, Ext, --, NOPAR, KNOPLOT
Resumes the database from the database file.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to DB if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
NOPAR
Parameter resume key:
0
All data in the database, including the scalar parameters, are replaced with the data saved on File.DB
(default).
1
All data in the database, except the scalar parameters, are replaced with the data saved on File.DB.
Note This option should not be used if array parameters are defined, since existing array
parameters might be redefined with arbitrary values. See PARSAV and PARRES for a more
general method of preventing the replacement of both scalar and array parameters.)
KNOPLOT
If equal to 1, will suppress automatic plot. Otherwise, if the GUI is on and this RESUME command was not
read from a file, the selected elements from Fname are plotted. (If there are no selected elements, selected
nodes are plotted. If no nodes, volumes; if no volumes, areas; if no areas, lines; if no lines, keypoints. If there
are no selected keypoints, the screen is erased.)
Notes
Using RESUME, you can resume a database file into the same version of ANSYS that the file was created in. As
long as you are resuming the file into the ANSYS version that the file was created in, you do not need to manipulate or modify the file in any way. Also, although not guaranteed, you can usually resume a database file created
in the previous version of ANSYS into the current version. For example, you can probably resume an ANSYS 5.2
database file into ANSYS 5.3 without encountering problems. However, ANSYS is not expected to resume an
ANSYS 5.2 database file into ANSYS 5.4 or later.
31122
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
REXPORT
RESUME causes the database file (File.DB) to be read, thereby resetting the database (including any geometry
settings) either a) as it was at the last SAVE command or b) as saved with the last /EXIT command, whichever
was last. For multiple load step analyses, since only the data for one load step at a time may reside in the database,
the load step data restored to the database will correspond to the load step data written when the save was
done.
If the database file was saved [SAVE] in another ANSYS product, it may contain element type and KEYOPT specifications which are invalid in the "resuming" product. Immediately after the database resume is completed,
you should redefine these invalid element types and KEYOPT settings to valid ones [ET, KEYOPT].
RESUME checks your database for mixed mode (both SMOOTH and FACETED) geometry. ANSYS will notify you
if both types of geometry are found in the database. You can continue if you get this message. However, you
may encounter problems during Boolean operations. If you do not want to continue the analysis with this database,
you must either recreate or reimport the geometry.
This command is valid in any processor. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load
step.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Resume from
Utility Menu>File>Resume Jobname.db
REXPORT, Target, --, --, LSTEP, SBSTEP, Fname, Ext, -Exports displacements from an implicit run to ANSYS LS-DYNA.
SOLUTION: Explicit Dynamics
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Target
The type of analysis run to which displacements are exported.
OFF
Ignore initial displacements.
DYNA
Get initial displacements from an earlier implicit (ANSYS) run and export to an explicit ANSYS LS-DYNA
run (Default).
--, --
Unused fields.
LSTEP
Load step number of data to be exported. Defaults to the last load step.
SBSTEP
Substep number of data to be exported. Defaults to the last substep.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31123
REZONE
The file name does not have a default; you must specify a name. It CANNOT be the current Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension must be an RST extension (default). Currently, only structural results are allowed.
--
Unused field.
Notes
This command exports the displacements, rotations, and temperatures calculated in an ANSYS implicit analysis
into the `drelax' file, which is subsequently read in by ANSYS LS-DYNA when a dynamic relaxation or stress initialization is conducted [EDDRELAX].
This command is not written to the Jobname.CDB file when the CDWRITE command is issued.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Constraints>Read Disp
Main Menu>Solution>Constraints>Read Disp
REZONE, Option, LDSTEP, SBSTEP
Initiates the rezoning process, sets rezoning options, and rebuilds the database.
SOLUTION: Rezoning
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Option
The rezoning method to employ:
MANUAL
Manual rezoning. This method is the default.
LDSTEP
The load step number at which rezoning should occur. The default value is the highest load step number
found in the Jobname.Rnnn files (for the current jobname and in the current directory).
SBSTEP
The substep number of the specified load step (LDSTEP) at which rezoning should occur. The default value
is the highest substep number found in the specified load step in the Jobname.Rnnn files (for the current
jobname and in the current directory).
Notes
The REZONE command rebuilds the database (.db file) based on the specified load step and substep information,
and updates nodes to their deformed position for remeshing.
Before issuing this command, clear the databse via the /CLEAR command.
Currently, ANSYS supports only manual rezoning (Option = MANUAL).
31124
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RFORCE
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Start
RFILSZ
Estimates file sizes.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Gives file size estimates for File.ESAV, File.EMAT, File.EROT, File.TRI, File.FULL, File.RST, File.RTH, and File.RMG.
File sizes are given in megabytes (MB). These file estimates are for the solution of the model that currently resides
in the database. This command will cause reordering [WAVES] if reordering was not already done on the model.
See File Management and Files in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for file descriptions.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>Individual Stats
RFORCE, NVAR, NODE, Item, Comp, Name
Specifies the total reaction force data to be stored.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). Overwrites any existing results
for this variable.
NODE
Node for which data are to be stored. If NODE = P, graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI).
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a component
label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the item on printouts and displays. Defaults to an eight character label
formed by concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31125
/RGB
Notes
Defines the total reaction force data (static, damping, and inertial components) to be stored from single pass
(ANTYPE,STATIC or TRANS) solutions or from an expansion pass of reduced two-pass (ANTYPE,HARMIC or TRANS)
solutions.
RFORCE - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid item and component labels for node results are:
Item
Comp
Description
X,Y,Z
X, Y, or Z structural force.
X,Y,Z
X, Y, or Z structural moment.
HEAT[1]
Heat flow.
FLOW
Fluid flow.
AMPS
Current flow.
FLUX
Magnetic flux.
VF
X,Y,Z
X, Y, or Z fluid force component.
CSG
X,Y,Z
X, Y, or Z magnetic current segment component.
VLTG
Voltage drop
CURT
Current
CHRG
Charge
1.
For SHELL131 and SHELL132 elements with KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1, use the labels HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP
instead of HEAT.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
/RGB, Kywrd, PRED, PGRN, PBLU, N1, N2, NINC, NCNTR
Specifies the RGB color values for indices and contours.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Kywrd
Determines how RGB modifications will be applied.
INDEX
Specifies that subsequent color values apply to ANSYS color indices (0-15).
CNTR
Specifies that subsequent color values apply to contours (1-128). Applies to C-option devices only (i.e.
X11C or Win32C).
PRED
Intensity of the color red, expressed as a percentage.
31126
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RIGID
PGRN
Intensity of the color green, expressed as a percentage.
PBLU
Intensity of the color blue, expressed as a percentage.
N1
First index (0-15), or contour (1-128) to which the designated RGB values apply.
N2
Final index (0-15), or contour (1-128) to which the designated RGB values apply.
NINC
The step increment between the values N1 and N2 determining which contours or indices will be controlled
by the specified RGB values.
NCNTR
The new maximum number of contours (1-128).
Notes
Issuing the /CMAP command (with no filename) will restore the default color settings.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To GRPH File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL2 File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To PSCR File
RIGID, Dof1, Dof2, Dof3, Dof4, Dof5, Dof6
Specifies known rigid body modes (if any) of the model.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Dof1, Dof2, Dof3, Dof4, Dof5, Dof6
Up to six global Cartesian directions of the rigid modes. For a completely free 2-D model, use ALL or UX, UY,
ROTZ. For a completely free 3-D model, use ALL or UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ. For a constrained model,
use UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, or ROTZ, as appropriate, to specify each and every unconstrained direction
which exists in the model (not specifying every direction may cause difficulties in extracting the modes). Use
NONE to force the subspace iteration calculation of all rigid body modes. If the structure has no constraints,
the label ALL is assumed (unless substructures are present).
Command Default
Any rigid body modes are calculated via subspace iteration.
Notes
Specifies known rigid body modes (if any) of the model. Applies only to modal analyses with subspace iteration
[MODOPT,SUBSP]. Rigid body modes specified to the program with this command are not calculated via subspace
iteration, resulting in a faster solution. Any rigid body modes specified must be permitted by the applied displace-
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31127
RIMPORT
ment constraints (i.e., do not specify a rigid body mode in a constrained direction). Reissue the command to redefine the specification. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
RIMPORT, Source, Type, Loc, LSTEP, SBSTEP, Fname, Ext, --, SPSCALE, MSCALE
Imports initial stresses from an explicit dynamics run into ANSYS.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Source
The type of analysis run from which stresses are imported.
OFF
Ignore initial stresses.
DYNA
Get initial stresses from an earlier explicit (ANSYS LS-DYNA) run (default).
Type
Type of data imported. Note that this is an ANSYS-defined field; the only valid value is STRESS.
Loc
Location where the data is imported. Note that this is an ANSYS-defined field; the only valid value is ELEM
(data imported at the element integration points).
LSTEP
Load step number of data to be imported. Defaults to the last load step.
SBSTEP
Substep number of data to be imported. Defaults to the last substep.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name does not have a default; you must specify a name. It CANNOT be the current Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension must be an RST extension (default).
--
Unused field.
31128
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RIMPORT
SPSCALE
Stabilization factor. This factor is used in a springback analysis to scale (up or down) the initial stiffness of
the applied spring. No default; input a value only if you want to activate stabilization. If SPSCALE is blank,
stabilization is not activated.
MSCALE
Acceptable stabilization stiffness (defaults to 1.0 X 10--4). In a springback analysis, iterations will stop when
the applied spring stiffness comes down to this value. MSCALE is not used if SPSCALE is blank.
Notes
This command imports initial stress information into ANSYS from an earlier explicit (ANSYS LS-DYNA) run. The
stress state from SHELL163 and SOLID164 elements in the explicit analysis is imported to the corresponding
SHELL181 and SOLID185 implicit elements. For the shell elements, the current shell element thickness is also
imported. This command is valid only before the first SOLVE command of the implicit analysis (which comes
after the explicit analysis) and is ignored if issued after subsequent SOLVE commands (that is, stresses will not
be re-imported).
RIMPORT is typically used to perform springback analysis of sheet metal forming. We recommend that you use
SHELL163 elements in the explicit analysis with 3 to 5 integration points through the thickness. This ensures that
the through-thickness stress distribution is transferred accurately to the SHELL181 elements. If more than 5 integration points are used, ANSYS imports resultants (forces and moments) to the SHELL181 elements. This implies
that linearization of the through-thickness stress distribution is assumed in SHELL181 elements. If SHELL163 uses
full integration in the shell plane, stress and thickness data are averaged and then transferred. For the solid elements, the stress at the SOLID164 element centroid is transferred to the SOLID185 element centroid. If SOLID164
has full integration, the stress is averaged and then transferred.
When the SPSCALE argument is specified, artificial springs with exponentially decaying stiffness (as a function
of iterations) are applied. This technique is recommended only for those cases in which there are severe convergence difficulties. In general, you should first attempt a springback analysis without using the stabilization factors
SPSCALE and MSCALE. (For more information on springback stabilization, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.)
This command is not written to the Jobname.CDB file when the CDWRITE command is issued. Further, the
RIMPORT information is not saved to the database; therefore, the RIMPORT command must be reissued if the
database is resumed.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Import Stress
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Other>Import Stress
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31129
RITER
RITER, NITER
Supplies an estimate of the number of iterations for time estimates.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NITER
Estimated number of iterations (or load steps in a linear, static analysis) for the analysis (defaults to 1).
Command Default
One iteration.
Notes
This estimate will be used by the program to calculate estimated run times [RTIMST].
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>Iter Setting
RLIST, NSET1, NSET2, NINC
Lists the real constant sets.
PREP7: Real Constants
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET1, NSET2, NINC
List real constant sets from NSET1 to NSET2 (defaults to NSET1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NSET1 =
ALL (default), ignore NSET2 and NINC and list all real constant sets [R].
Notes
The real constant sets listed contain only those values specifically set by the user. Default values for real constants
set automatically within the various elements are not listed.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Properties>All Real Constants
Utility Menu>List>Properties>Specified Real Constants
31130
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMANL
RMALIST
Lists all defined master nodes for a ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Master Nodes>List
RMANL, Fname, Ext, --, Dimn, Oper
Assigns model database, dimensionality, and operating direction for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
Database file name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including directory). The file name defaults
to Jobname.
Ext
File extension (8 character maximum). The extension defaults to db.
--
Unused field.
Dimn
Model dimensionality:
2
2-D models
3
3-D Models
Oper
Primary operating direction:
X
direction
Y
direction
Z
direction
Notes
Required Inputs:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31131
RMASTER
Model database containing a structural physics file, title STRU.
Model database containing an electrostatic physics file, title ELEC.
Model database containing an area or volume component of the electrostatic domain to be morphed, title
AIR.
Model database containing a node component of the neutral plane nodes, named NEUN.
Model database containing node components of conductors, named CONDi, where i is the conductor
number.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Model Features
RMASTER, Node, Lab
Defines master nodes for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Node
Node number at which master degree of freedom is defined If Node = P, graphical picking is enabled and all
remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Lab
Valid labels are ADD (default) and DEL.
Notes
Defines master nodes for the ROM. Master nodes are used to track the total displacement of a structure in the
operating direction [RMANL]. They may be used as attachment points for 1-D structural elements during a ROM
use pass via the UX degree of freedom.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Master Nodes>Define
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Master Nodes>Delete
RMCAP, RefName, C1, C2
Defines lumped capacitance pairs between conductors C1 and C2 for a ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
RefName
Reference name for capacitance pair definition.
31132
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMEMRY
C1
First conductor (between 1 and 5).
C2
Second conductor (between 1 and 5).
Notes
For a capacitance definition between conductor C1 and C2, node components COND%C1% and COND%C2%
(see CM command) must be present containing the conductor nodes. If C1 and C2 are blank, the capacitance
definition with RefName will be deleted. (For example, if C1 = 1, and C2 = 2, then node components COND1 and
COND2 must be defined).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Capacitances>Define>All Capacitances
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Capacitances>Define>Single Capacitance
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Capacitances>Delete
RMCLIST
Lists all lumped capacitance pairs defined.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Capacitances>Define>List
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Setup>Capacitances>List
RMEMRY
Prints memory statistics for the current model.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Memory statistics include work space usage, database size, binary input/output buffers, and available ANSYS
scratch space. Also the maximum available static wavefront that will fit in the available ANSYS scratch space is
displayed. The memory statistics are displayed in units of kilobytes (KB) or megabytes (MB).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31133
RMFLVEC
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>Individual Stats
RMFLVEC
Writes eigenvectors of fluid nodes to a file for use in damping parameter extraction.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
RMFLVEC extracts the modal information from the modal results file for all nodes specified in a node component
called 'FLUN'. This component should include all nodes which are located at the fluid-structural interface. Mode
shapes, element normal orientation, and a scaling factor are computed and stored in a file Jobname.EFL. For
damping parameter extraction, use the DMPEXT command macro. See Chapter 16, Thin Film Analysis for more
information on thin film analyses.
FLUID136 and FLUID138 are used to model the fluid interface. Both the structural and fluid element types must
be active. The fluid interface nodes must be grouped into a component 'FLUN'. A results file of the last modal
analysis must be available.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>ThinFilm>Extract Eigv
Main Menu>Solution>ThinFilm>DampExtract>Eigenfrequency
Main Menu>Solution>ThinFilm>DampExtract>Frequency Range
Main Menu>Solution>ThinFilm>RayleighDamp
RMLVSCALE, Nload, Fact1, Fact2, Fact3, Fact4, Fact5
Defines element load vector scaling for a ROM use pass.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Use Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Nload
Total number of load cases to be considered within a ROM use pass. If Nload = DELETE, all defined load
vectors are deleted.
Fact1, Fact2, Fact3, Fact4, Fact5
Scale factors applied to load vectors (maximum 5). Defaults to 0.
Notes
Specifies the element load scale factor applied to a ROM analysis use pass. Element load vectors are extracted
from a Static Analysis using the RMNDISP command. Up to 5 element load vectors may be scaled and applied
to a ROM use pass.
31134
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMMRANGE
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For ROM
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For ROM
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For ROM
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For ROM
RMMLIST
Lists all mode specifications for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Mode Selection>List
RMMRANGE, Mode, Key, Min, Max, Nstep, Damp, Scale
Defines and edits various modal parameters for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Mode
Mode number. Must be lower or equal to the number of modes extracted via the RMNEVEC command.
Key
Mode classification key. Valid keys are:
DOMINANT
Dominant mode
RELEVANT
Relevant mode
UNUSED
Unused mode. Do not consider mode in ROM.
Min
Lower bound for fit range of mode.
Max
Upper bound for fit range of mode.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31135
RMMSELECT
Nstep
Number of equidistant steps in fit range of mode.
Damp
Modal damping factor. Defaults to 0.0.
Scale
Modal scaling factor.
Notes
When selected manually (RMMSELECT), modes must be classified as dominant, relevant, or unused. Dominant
modes (Key = DOMINANT) are basis functions with large amplitudes. Relevant modes (Key = RELEVANT) are
influenced by the dominant modes but do not cause interactions among themselves due to the small amplitude.
This assumption leads to essential speed up of the sample point generator (see RMSMPLE).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Mode Selection>Edit
RMMSELECT, Nmode, Method, Dmin, Dmax
Selects modes for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Nmode
Total number of modes to be selected
Method
Method for mode selection. Valid methods are:
TMOD
Automated selection using a test load. TMOD must be enclosed in single quotes.
NMOD
First Nmode eigenmodes. NMOD must be enclosed in single quotes.
Dmin
Lower bound for total deflection range.
Dmax
Upper bound for total deflection range.
Notes
Select pertinent modes for use in a ROM. Pertinent mode selection may be enhanced by using the deflection
state of the structure representative of the operating nature of the device (Method = TMOD). A static analysis
with an applied Test Load may be used. The test load displacements must be extracted at the neutral plane of
the device (if the device is stress-stiffened), or at any plane of the device (non-stress-stiffened). A node component
NEUN must be defined for the plane of nodes, and the displacements extracted using the RMNDISP command
31136
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMNDISP
prior to issuing this command. If Method = NMOD, use the first Nmode eigenmodes to select the pertinent modes
for the ROM tool. Only those modes are selected that act in the operating direction of the structure [RMANL].
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Required Input Files
jobname.evx, jobname.evy, jobname.evz, jobname.evn, jobname.evl
Optional Input File
Test load and element load neutral plane displacement files: jobname.tld, jobname.eld
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Mode Selection>Select
RMNDISP, LoadT, Loc
Extracts neutral plane displacements from a test load or element load solution for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Preparation
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
LoadT
Load type. Load type must be an alphanumeric string enclosed in single quotes. Valid load types are 'TLOAD'
for the test load and 'ELOAD' for the element load.
Loc
Determines whether file will be overwritten or appended. Valid labels are 'WRITE' or 'APPEND'. Defaults to
'WRITE' for test load.
Notes
This command extracts the displacements at a neutral plane of a model. If LoadT = 'TLOAD', extract displacements
for a test load on a structure that represents the expected deflection state. A test load is used to assist in the
automatic mode selection for the ROM mode characterization. If LoadT = 'ELOAD', extract the neutral plane
displacements for an element load that will be used in the use pass of a ROM analysis. Typical element loads are
gravity, and pressure loading. The element loads may be scaled [RMLVSCALE] during the use pass.
The command requires a node component named NEUN to be defined. These nodes represent the nodes at
the neutral plane of a structure (in the case of a stress-stiffened structure), or at any plane in the structure (non
stress-stiffened case).
For LoadT = 'TLOAD', node displacements are written to the file jobname.tld. For LoadT = 'ELOAD', node displacements are written to the file jobname.eld. Up to 5 element load cases may be written to the file jobname.eld.
This command is only valid in POST1.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31137
RMNEVEC
Output Files
For a test load jobname.tld
For an element load jobname.eld
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>ROM Operations>Extract NP DISP
RMNEVEC
Extracts neutral plane eigenvectors from a modal analysis for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Preparation
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
This command extracts the eigenvectors at a neutral plane of a model from a modal analysis. The modal analysis
must have expanded modes [MXPAND] in order to process the data. Only the first 9 modes are considered. The
command requires a node component named NEUN to be defined. These nodes represent the nodes at the
neutral plane of a structure (in the case of a stress-stiffened structure), or at any plane in the structure (non stressstiffened case).
This command is only valid in POST1.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Output Files
jobname.evx, jobname.evy, jobname.evz, jobname.evn, jobname.evl
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>ROM Operations>Extract NP Eigv
RMODIF, NSET, STLOC, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Modifies real constant sets.
PREP7: Real Constants
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSET
Existing set to be modified.
STLOC
Starting location in table for modifying data. For example, if STLOC = 1, data input in the V1 field is the first
constant in the set. If STLOC = 7, data input in the V1 field is the seventh constant in the set, etc. Must be
greater than zero.
31138
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMORE
V1
New value assigned to constant in location STLOC. If zero (or blank), a zero value will be assigned.
V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
New values assigned to constants in the next five locations. If blank, the value remains unchanged.
Notes
Allows modifying (or adding) real constants to an existing set [R] at any location, excluding table inputs.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
RMORE, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12
Adds real constants to a set.
PREP7: Real Constants
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12
Add real constants 7 to 12 (numerical values or table names) to the most recently defined set.
Notes
Adds six more real constants to the most recently defined set. Repeat the RMORE command for constants 13 to
18, again for 19-24, etc.
If using table inputs (SURF151, SURF152, FLUID116, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, and CONTA175
only), enclose the table name in % signs (e.g., %tabname%).
When copying real constants to new sets, ANSYS recommends that you use the command input. If you do use
the GUI, restrict the real constant copy to only the first six real constants (real constants seven and greater will
be incorrect for both the master and copy set).
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Nonlin Rotary
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Mechanical>Spring>Nonlin Trans
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>Transducer>ElecMech
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Edit Real Cnst
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31139
RMPORDER
RMPORDER, Ord1, Ord2, Ord3, Ord4, Ord5, Ord6, Ord7, Ord8, Ord9
Defines polynomial orders for ROM functions.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Ord1, Ord2, Ord3, Ord4, Ord5, Ord6, Ord7, Ord8, Ord9
Polynomial orders for modes. Ordi specifies the polynomial order for modei. Modes are ordered as extracted
from a modal analysis using the RMNEVEC command. Defaults to 0 if mode i is unused; default to nstep(i) 1 for dominant or relevant modes, where nstep(i) is the number of equidistant steps in fit range of mode i.
nstep(i) is automatically set by RMMSELECT or modified by the RMMRANGE command.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Resp Surface>Poly Order
RMRESUME, Fname, Ext, -Resumes ROM data from a file.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Set Up
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
Name and directory path of the ROM database file (248 character maximum). Default to Jobname.
Ext
Extension of the ROM database file. Default to .rom.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>ExpansionPass
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>ROM>Database
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Rom Database>Resume
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>ExpansionPass
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>New Analysis
31140
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMROPTIONS
RMRGENERATE
Performs fitting procedure for all ROM functions to generate response surfaces.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
The fitting procedure uses modal analysis data and function data generated using the RMSMPLE command and
specifications set forth in the RMROPTIONS command. The files jobname_ijk.pcs (modes i, j, k) will be generated
containing the coefficients of the response surfaces. These files are needed for the ROM Use Pass along with a
ROM data base file [RMSAVE].
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Input Files
Strain energy and capacitance data file jobname_ijk.dec
Output Files
Response surface coefficients jobname_ijk.pcs (modes i, j, k)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Resp Surface>Fit Functions
RMROPTIONS, RefName, Type, Invert
Defines options for ROM response surface fitting.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
RefName
Reference name of ROM function to be fitted. Valid reference names are SENE for the strain energy of the
structural domain and any capacitance reference name previously defined by means of RMCAP command
for the electrostatic domain.
Type
Type of fitting function to be applied for regression analysis. Valid types are:
LAGRANGE
Lagrange type (default)
REDLAGRANGE
Reduced Lagrange type
PASCAL
Pascal type
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31141
RMRPLOT
REDPASCAL
Reduced Pascal type
Invert
Flag to specify whether data should be inverted prior to fitting.
0
Do not invert data (default for SENE)
1
Invert data input onRefname field (recommended for capacitance functions).
Notes
The objective of response surface fit is to compute an analytical expression for the strain energy and the capacitance as functions of modal amplitudes.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Resp Surface>Options
RMRPLOT, RefName, Type, Mode1, Mode2
Plots response surface of ROM function or its derivatives with respect to the dominant mode(s).
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
RefName
Reference name of ROM function. Valid reference names are SENE for the strain energy of the mechanical
domain and any capacitance definition, previously defined by means of the RMCAP command, for the
electrostatic domain.
Type
Type of data to be plotted. Valid types are:
FUNC
Response surface (default)
FIRST
First derivative of response surface with respect to Mode1.
SECOND
Second derivative of response surface with respect to Mode1 and Mode2.
Mode1
First mode number (used for Type = FIRST and Type = SECOND only).
Mode2
Second mode number (used for Type = SECOND only).
31142
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMSAVE
Notes
The objective of response surface fit is to compute an analytical expression for the strain energy and the capacitance as functions of modal amplitudes. This command assumes that the coefficient files jobnam_ijk.pcs are
available [RMRGENERATE]. Visualization of the response surface will help to evaluate the validity of the function
fit.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Resp Surface>Plot
RMRSTATUS, RefName
Prints status of response surface for ROM function.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
RefName
Reference name of ROM function. Valid reference names are SENE for the strain energy of the mechanical
domain and any capacitance reference names [RMCAP], for the electrostatic domain.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Resp Surface>Status
RMSAVE, Fname, Ext, -Saves ROM data to file.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Set Up
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
Name and directory path of the ROM database file. Default to Jobname.
Ext
Extension of the ROM database file. Default to .rom.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31143
RMSMPLE
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Rom Database>Save
RMSMPLE, Nlgeom, Cap, Seqslv, Eeqslv
Runs finite element solutions and obtains sample points for the ROM method.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Nlgeom
Specify whether a large or small deflection analysis is to be performed for the mechanical domain:
OFF (or 0)
Perform small deflection analysis (default).
ON (or 1)
Perform large deflection analysis.
Cap
Capacitance calculation method.
CHARGE
Compute capacitance based on the charge voltage relationship (default).
CMATRIX
Employ CMATRIX macro to calculate capacitance.
Seqslv
Solver for structural analysis:
SPARSE
Sparse direct equation solver (default).
PCG
Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver.
Eeqslv
Solver for electrostatic analysis:
SPARSE
Sparse direct equation solver (default).
JCG
Jacobi Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver.
ICCG
Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver.
31144
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RMUSE
Notes
This command prepares and runs multiple finite element solutions on the Structural domain and the Electrostatic
domain of a model to collect sample points of data for ROM response curve fitting. The command requires a
model database [RMANL] and two Physics Files (Structural domain, titled STRU and an Electrostatic domain,
titled ELEC; see PHYSICS command). Also required is a complete ROM database generated from the ROM Tools.
The Cap = CHARGE method is preferred when capacitance to infinity is not required. Capacitance conductor
pairs are defined by the RMCAP command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Required Input
Model Database filename.db
ROM Database jobname.rom, jobname.evx, jobname.evy, jobname.evz
Output Files
Strain energy and capacitance data files jobname_ijk.dec (mode i, j, k).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Sample Pt Gen>Compute Points
RMUSE, Option, Usefil
Activates ROM use pass for ROM elements.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Use Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Type of data to be plotted. Valid types are:
1 or ON
Activates ROM use pass.
0 or OFF
Deactivates ROM use pass.
Usefil
Name of the reduced displacement file (.rdsp) created by the ROM Use Pass (required field only for the Expansion Pass).
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31145
RMXPORT
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>ExpansionPass
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>ExpansionPass
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>New Analysis
RMXPORT
Exports ROM model to external VHDL-AMS simulator.
REDUCED ORDER MODELING: Generation Pass
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Notes
Use this command to generate all files necessary to run the ROM analysis in an external VHDL-AMS Simulator.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Output Files
VHDL files: Initial.vhd, S_ams_ijk.vhd, Cxxx_ams_ijk.vhd, transducer.vhd.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>ROM Tool>Export>VHDL-AMS
ROCK, CGX, CGY, CGZ, OMX, OMY, OMZ
Specifies a rocking response spectrum.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
CGX, CGY, CGZ
Global Cartesian X, Y, and Z location of center of rotation about which rocking occurs.
OMX, OMY, OMZ
Global Cartesian angular velocity components associated with the rocking.
Notes
Specifies a rocking response spectrum effect in the spectrum (ANTYPE,SPECTR) analysis.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
31146
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RPR4
RPOLY, NSIDES, LSIDE, MAJRAD, MINRAD
Creates a regular polygonal area centered about the working plane origin.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NSIDES
Number of sides in the regular polygon. Must be greater than 2.
LSIDE
Length of each side of the regular polygon.
MAJRAD
Radius of the major (or circumscribed) circle of the polygon. Not used if LSIDE is input.
MINRAD
Radius of the minor (or inscribed) circle of the polygon. Not used if LSIDE or MAJRAD is input.
Notes
Defines a regular polygonal area on the working plane. The polygon will be centered about the working plane
origin, with the first keypoint defined at = 0. The area will be defined with NSIDES keypoints and NSIDES
lines. See the RPR4 and POLY commands for other ways to create polygons.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>By Circumscr Rad
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>By Inscribed Rad
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>By Side Length
RPR4, NSIDES, XCENTER, YCENTER, RADIUS, THETA, DEPTH
Creates a regular polygonal area or prism volume anywhere on the working plane.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NSIDES
The number of sides in the polygon or prism face. Must be greater than 2.
XCENTER, YCENTER
Working plane X and Y coordinates of the center of the polygon or prism face.
RADIUS
Distance (major radius) from the center to a vertex of the polygon or prism face (where the first keypoint is
defined).
THETA
Angle (in degrees) from the working plane X-axis to the vertex of the polygon or prism face where the first
keypoint is defined. Used to orient the polygon or prism face. Defaults to zero.
DEPTH
The perpendicular distance (either positive or negative based on the working plane Z direction) from the
working plane representing the depth of the prism. If DEPTH = 0 (default), a polygonal area is created on the
working plane.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31147
RPRISM
Notes
Defines a regular polygonal area anywhere on the working plane or prism volume with one face anywhere on
the working plane. The top and bottom faces of the prism are polygonal areas. See the RPOLY, POLY, RPRISM,
and PRISM commands for other ways to create polygons and prisms.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>Hexagon
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>Octagon
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>Pentagon
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>Septagon
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>Square
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Areas>Polygon>Triangle
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>Hexagonal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>Octagonal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>Pentagonal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>Septagonal
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>Square
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>Triangular
RPRISM, Z1, Z2, NSIDES, LSIDE, MAJRAD, MINRAD
Creates a regular prism volume centered about the working plane origin.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Z1, Z2
Working plane Z coordinates of the prism.
NSIDES
Number of sides in the polygon defining the top and bottom faces of the prism. Must be greater than 2.
LSIDE
Length of each side of the polygon defining the top and bottom faces of the prism.
MAJRAD
Radius of the major (or circumscribed) circle of the polygon defining the top and bottom faces of the prism.
Not used if LSIDE is input.
MINRAD
Radius of the minor (or inscribed circle) of the polygon defining the top and bottom faces of the prism. Not
used if LSIDE or MAJRAD is input.
Notes
Defines a regular prism volume centered about the working plane origin. The prism must have a spatial volume
greater than zero. (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a degenerate volume as a means
of creating an area.) The top and bottom faces are polygonal areas that are parallel to the working plane but
neither face need be coplanar with (i.e., "on") the working plane. The first keypoint defined for each face is at
= 0. See the RPR4 and PRISM commands for other ways to create prisms.
31148
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RPSD
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>By Circumscr Rad
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>By Inscribed Rad
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Prism>By Side Length
RPSD, IR, IA, IB, ITYPE, DATUM, Name
Computes response power spectral density (PSD).
POST26: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previous variable, the previous variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA, IB
Reference numbers of the two variables to be operated on. If only one, leave IB blank.
ITYPE
Defines the type of response PSD to be calculated:
0,1
Displacement (default).
2
Velocity.
3
Acceleration.
DATUM
Defines the reference with respect to which response PSD is to be calculated:
1
Absolute value.
2
Relative to base (default).
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying variable on listings and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
Notes
This command computes response power spectral density (PSD) for the variables referenced by the reference
numbers IA and IB. The variable referred by IR will contain the response PSD. File.PSD must be available for
the calculations to occur. Requires the STORE,PSD command to be issued first.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31149
RSFIT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Calc Resp PSD
RSFIT, RSlab, Slab, Name, Rmod, Ytrans, Yval, Xfilt, CONF
Fit a response surface for an output parameter in a solution set.
PROBABILISTIC: Response Surfaces
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RSlab
Response surface set label. Identifies the response surface results for later postprocessing. This label can be
used as Rlab for postprocessing response surface results, and for evaluating the fit results with RSPLOT and
RSPRNT. You must have separate identification labels for the solution sets and for the response surface sets,
because you can perform a response surface fit based on Monte Carlo results. For this case, the original Monte
Carlo results are identified by the solution set label provided in the PDEXE command and the results generated
with the fitted response surfaces are identified by the response surface set label (RSlab) provided here.
RSlab must not contain blanks. Maximum length of this field is 16 characters; if this field contains more than
16 characters, it will be truncated to 16 characters.
Slab
Solution set label that identifies the probabilistic analysis containing the results to be fitted. This solution
set label is defined with the PDEXE command.
Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random output parameter with
the PDVAR command. The result values of this parameter (stored in the solution set identified by Slab) are
fitted as a function of all random input variables.
Rmod
Regression model to use for the evaluation of the response surface.
LIN
Regression model with linear terms only.
QUAD
Regression model with linear and pure quadratic terms (no cross-terms).
QUAX
Regression model with linear and all quadratic terms (including cross-terms). (Default.)
Ytrans
Option for the transformation type applied to the output parameter identified with Name.
NONE
The values of the output parameter Name are not transformed (default).
EXP
The values of the output parameter Name are transformed according to Y* = exp(Y). The transformed
values Y* are used for the fitting process.
LOGA
The values of the output parameter Name are transformed according to Y* = loga(Y), where the basis a
is specified by Yval. The transformed values Y* are used for the fitting process.
31150
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RSFIT
LOGN
The values of the output parameter Name are transformed according to Y* = In(Y). The transformed values
Y* are used for the fitting process.
LOG10
The values of the output parameter Name are transformed according to Y* = log10(Y). The transformed
values Y* are used for the fitting process.
SQRT
The values of the output parameter Name are transformed according to Y* =
Y* are used for the fitting process.
. The transformed values
POW
The values of the output parameter Name are transformed according to Y* = Ya, where the exponent a
is specified by Yval. The transformed values Y* are used for the fitting process.
BOX
The values of the output parameter Name are transformed according to the Box-Cox transformation.
Y i-1
Y* = i for i 0
Y* = ln(Y) for i = 0
The parameter i is automatically determined within the interval [-2, 2]. The step length for this interval
search is given in Yval. The transformed values Y* are used for the fitting process.
Yval
Value needed for Ytrans = LOGA, Ytrans = POW, and Ytrans = BOX. Ignored for all other options of Ytrans.
For Ytrans = LOGA and Ytrans = POW, the default value is Yval = 1.0. For Ytrans = BOX, the default value
is Yval = 0.01.
Xfilt
Option that specifies if irrelevant terms of the regression model should be filtered out.
NONE
Regression term filtering is not done. A full regression model as specified with the Rmod option is evaluated.
FSR
Use the "forward-stepwise-regression" to automatically filter out individual and irrelevant terms of the
regression model. If irrelevant terms are sorted out this leads to a smaller number of coefficients to be
determined in the regression analysis, which then leads to increased accuracy of the coefficients of the
remaining terms in the regression model (default).
CONF
Confidence level that is used to filter the terms of the regression model if the Xfilt = FSR option has been
selected. The value of CONF must be between 0.0 and 1.0 (default is 0.95). The higher this value, the more
terms will be filtered out. Consequently, higher CONF values lead to a fewer terms in the regression model.
Likewise, lower CONF values lead to more terms being included in the regression model.
Command Default
Rmod = QUAX, Ytrans = NONE, Xfilt = FSR, CONF = 0.95, Yval as explained above.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31151
RSPEED
Notes
Evaluates a response surface for a random output parameter Name. The result values for the parameter Name as
stored in the solution set Slab are fitted as a function of all random input parameters. There can be only one
response surface set for each solution set. A response surface set can include the fitted response surfaces of one
or more output parameters.
Note If the RSFIT command is used for an existing response surface set for which Monte Carlo simulations have already been generated using the RSSIMS command then these Monte Carlo samples are
deleted by the RSFIT command. In this case they need to be generated again using the RSSIMS command.
It is necessary to delete the Monte Carlo simulations in order to make sure that the samples, their statistics
and correlations are consistent with the response surfaces.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Response Surf>Fit Resp Surf
RSPEED, MIPS, SMFLOP, VMFLOP
Supplies system performance information for use in time estimates.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
MIPS
MIPS rating of computer (defaults to 4). This value is ignored if SMFLOP is specified.
SMFLOP
Scalar MFLOPS rating of computer (defaults to MIPS/4).
VMFLOP
Vector MFLOPS rating of computer (Defaults to MIPS/2).
Notes
Supplies system performance information to the program for its use in estimating run times [RTIMST]. Normally
this command is invoked through the SETSPEED macro as executed by the ANSYS installation process.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>System Settings
31152
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RSPLIT
RSPLIT, Option, Label, Name1, Name2, Name3, Name4, Name5, Name6, Name7, Name8, Name9, Name10, Name11,
Name12, Name13, Name14, Name15, Name16
Creates one or more results file(s) from the current results file based on subsets of elements.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Option
Specify which results to include for the subset of elements.
ALL
Write all nodal and element results based on the subset of elements (default).
EXT
Write only the nodal and element results that are on the exterior surface of the element subset. The
results data will be averaged as in PowerGraphics (see AVRES) when this results file is brought into
POST1. Only valid for solid elements.
Label
Define where the element subset is coming from.
ALL
Use all selected element components (CMSEL) (default).
ESEL
Use the currently selected (ESEL) set of elements. Name1 defines the results file name.
LIST
Use Name1 to Name16 to list the element component and/or assembly names (that contain element
components).
Name1, . . . , Name16
Up to 16 element component and/or assembly names (that contain element components).
Command Default
Write all data available for the element subset.
Notes
Results files will be named based on the element component or assembly name, e.g., Cname.rst, except for the
ESEL option, for which you must specify the results file name (no extension) using the Name1 field. Note that the
.rst filename will be written in all uppercase letters (CNAME.rst) (unless using the ESEL option); when you read
the file, you must specify the filename using all uppercase letters (i.e., file,CNAME). You may repeat the RSPLIT
command as often as needed. All results sets on the results file are processed. Use /AUX3 to produce a results
file with just a subset of the results sets.
Use INRES to limit the results data written to the results files.
The subset geometry is also written so that no database file is required to postprocess the subset results files.
You must not resume any database when postprocessing one of these results files. The input results file must
have geometry written to it (i.e., do not use /CONFIG,NORSTGM,1).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31153
RSPLOT
Applied forces and reaction forces are not apportioned if their nodes are shared by multiple element subsets.
Their full values are written to each results file.
Each results file renumbers its nodes and elements starting with 1.
This feature is useful when working with large models. For more information on the advantages and uses of the
RSPLIT command, see Section 5.5.6: Splitting Large Results Files in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
RSPLOT, RSlab, YName, X1Name, X2Name, Type, NPTS, PLOW, PUP
Plot a response surface.
PROBABILISTIC: Response Surfaces
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RSlab
Response Surface set label. Identifies the response surfaces generated by the RSFIT command.
YName
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random output parameter with
the PDVAR command.
X1Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable with the
PDVAR command.
X2Name
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random input variable with the
PDVAR command. X2Name must be different than X1Name.
Type
Type of the response surface visualization.
2D
2-D contour plot.
3D
3-D surface plot.
NPTS
Number of grid points for both the X1-axis and the X2-axis. The grid points are used for the evaluation of
the response surface. The number must be between 1 and 500. Defaults to 20. If NPTS = 0 or greater than
500, then a value of 20 is used.
PLOW
Lower probability level used to determine the lower boundary (plotting range) of the curve in case the random
input variable does not have a minimum value (such as Gauss). This probability must be between 0.0 and
1.0. Defaults to 0.0025.
31154
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RSPRNT
PUP
Upper probability level used to determine the upper boundary of the curve. This probability must be between
0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.9975.
Command Default
NPTS = 20, PLOW = 0.0025 (applied if distribution type has no minimum), PUP = 0.9975 (applied if distribution
type has no maximum)
Notes
Plots the response surface of an output parameter YName as a function of two input parameters X1Name and
X2Name.
If PLOW is left blank, then a minimum value of the distribution is used for plotting, provided it exists (for example,
uniform distribution). If the distribution type has no minimum value (for example, Gaussian distribution), then
the default value is used to determine the lower plotting range value. The same is true for the maximum value
if PUP is left blank.
In addition to the response surface, the sampling points that are fitted by the response surface are also plotted
by this command. However, sampling points falling outside of the plotting range defined by the PLOW and PUP
fields will not be shown in the plot.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Response Surf>Plt Resp Surf
RSPRNT, RSlab, YName, Xout
Print a response surface.
PROBABILISTIC: Response Surfaces
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RSlab
Response Surface set label. Identifies the response surfaces generated by the RSFIT command.
YName
Parameter name. The parameter must have been previously defined as a random output parameter with
the PDVAR command. Identifies the parameter for which a response surface has been generated by the
RSFIT command.
Xout
An option if an extended print-out of more feedback about goodness-of-fit and the details of the regression
analysis of the response surface is requested.
No
Use the standard print-out (default).
Yes
Use the extended print-out.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31155
RSSIMS
Notes
Prints the results and details of a response surface analysis generated by the RSFIT command. For the specified
output parameter Yname, the fitting details such as the individual terms of the response surface model and their
corresponding coefficients are listed. The command also produces a comparison of the original values of Yname
used for the fitting process and the approximate values derived from the fitting, and some goodness of fit
measures.
If Xout = Yes, then more information about the regression analysis of the response surface will be printed. For
example, the confidence intervals on the regression coefficients and the correlation between the regression
coefficients among others.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Response Surf>Prn Resp Surf
RSSIMS, RSlab, NSIM, Seed
Performs Monte Carlo simulations on response surface(s).
PROBABILISTIC: Response Surfaces
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RSlab
Response Surface set label. Identifies the response surfaces generated by the RSFIT command.
NSIM
Number of simulation loops on the response surfaces that will be generated for all random output parameters.
If the RSSIMS command is issued multiple times using the same response surface set label the NSIM Monte
Carlo simulations is appended to previous ones. The default value for NSIM is 10,000.
Seed
Seed value label. Random number generators require a seed value that is used to calculate the next random
number. After each random number generation finishes, the seed value is updated and is used again to
calculate the next random number. By default ANSYS initializes the seed value with the system time (one
time only) when the ANSYS session started.
CONT
Continues updating using the derived seed value (default).
TIME
Initializes the seed value with the system time. You can use this if you want the seed value set to a specific value for one analysis and then you want to continue with a "random" seed in the next analysis. It
is not recommended to "randomize" the seed value with the Seed = TIME option for multiple analyses.
If the Monte Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing
simulations, then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
INIT
Initializes the seed value using 123457. This value is a typical recommendation used very often in literature.
This option leads to identical random numbers for all random input variables when the exact analysis
will be repeated, making it useful for benchmarking and validation purposes (where identical random
numbers are desired). If the Monte Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended
to previously existing simulations, then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
31156
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RSTOFF
Value
Uses the specified (positive) value for the initialization of the seed value. This option has the same effect
as Seed = INIT, except you can chose an arbitrary (positive) number for the initialization. If the Monte
Carlo simulations requested with this command will be appended to previously existing simulations,
then the Seed option is ignored and Seed = CONT is used.
Command Default
NSIM = 10,000, Seed = CONT
Notes
Generate the Monte Carlo simulations on the response surfaces that are included in a response surface set.
Simulations are evaluated only for the output parameters that have been fitted in a response surface set using
the RSFIT command.
If the RSSIMS command is issued multiple times using the same response surface label the probabilistic design
system appends the samples generated here to the previous ones. This way you can start with a moderate NSIM
number and add more samples if the probabilistic results are not accurate enough.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Response Surf>RS Simulation
RSTAT
Prints the FE model statistics of the model.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Prints the finite element model statistics of the model currently in the database. The maximum node and element
number used are displayed, as well as the number of nodes and elements selected.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>Individual Stats
RSTOFF, Lab, OFFSET
Offsets node or element IDs in the FE geometry record.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Lab
The offset type:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31157
RSURF
NODE
Offset the node IDs.
ELEM
Offset the element IDs.
OFFSET
A positive integer value specifying the offset value to apply. The value must be greater than the number of
nodes or elements in the existing superelement results file.
Command Default
Issuing the RSTOFF command with no specified argument values applies no offsets.
Notes
The RSTOFF command offsets node or element IDs in the FE geometry record saved in the .rst results file. Use
the command when expanding superelements in a bottom-up substructuring analysis (where each superelement
is generated individually in a generation pass, and all superelements are assembled together in the use pass).
With appropriate offsets, you can write results files with unique node or element IDs and thus display the entire
model even if the original superelements have overlapping element or node ID sets. (Such results files are incompatible with the .db database file saved at the generation pass.)
The offset that you specify is based on the original superelement node or element numbering, rather than on
any offset specified via a SESYMM or SETRAN command. When issuing an RSTOFF command, avoid specifying
an offset that creates conflicting node or element numbers for a superelement generated via a SESYMM or
SETRAN command.
If you issue the command to set non-zero offsets for node or element IDs, you must bring the geometry into the
database via the SET command so that ANSYS can display the results. You must specify appropriate offsets to
avoid overlapping node or element IDs with other superelement results files.
The command is valid only in the first load step of a superelement expansion pass.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
RSURF, Options, Delopts, ETNUM
Generates the radiosity surface elements (SURF251/SURF252) and stores them in the database.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Options
Command options:
CLEAR
Deletes radiosity surface elements and nodes. The set of elements and nodes to be deleted is defined
by Delopts. ETNUM is ignored.
31158
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RSURF
DEFINE
Creates the radiosity surface elements and nodes (default).
STAT
Shows the status/listing. Other command options are ignored.
Delopts
Deletion options
ALL
Deletes all radiosity surface elements and nodes.
LAST
Deletes radiosity surface elements and nodes created by the last RSURF command.
ETNUM
Element type number. Leave blank to indicate the next available number.
Notes
This command generates the radiosity surface elements based on the RSYMM and RDEC parameters and stores
them in the database. It works only on selected underlying elements that have RDSF flags on them. You can issue
multiple RSURF commands to build the radiosity model.
If you do issue multiple RSURF commands for different regions, you must first mesh the different regions, and
then generate the radiosity surface elements on each meshed region individually. Use RSURF,,,ETNUM to assign
a separate element type number to each region. This procedure allow you to identify the individual regions later
in the multi-field analysis.
If the underlying solid elements are higher order, the radiosity surface elements are always lower order (4- or 3node in 3-D or 2-node in 2-D). Decimation will always occur before any symmetry operations.
For 2-D axisymmetric YR models, the newly-generated nodes can have only positive Y coordinates.
If you have already issued RSURF for a surface and you issue RSURF again, ANSYS creates a new set of radiosity
surface elements and nodes over the existing set, resulting in an erroneous solution.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Surface Mesh>Clear
Radiation Surface Mesh
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Surface
Mesh>Generate Radiation Surface Mesh
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Surface Mesh>Clear Radiation Surface Mesh
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Surface Mesh>Generate
Radiation Surface Mesh
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31159
RSYMM
RSYMM, Option, CS, Axis, NSECT, CONDVALUE
Defines the plane of symmetry or center of rotation for the radiosity method.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Option
Command options:
CLEAR
Deletes all symmetry definitions. Other command options are ignored.
DEFINE
Defines the symmetry (default).
STAT
Shows the status/listing. Other command options are ignored.
COND
Turns condensation on or off in the radiosity solver for all defined radiation symmetries. CS, AXIS, and
NSECT are ignored. Condensation is the process where equations for symmetrical elements are excluded
from the linear equation system. Default is off.
CS
Local coordinate system ( 11) as defined using the LOCAL or CS commands or a global coordinate system
(0). For planar reflection, the coordinate system origin must be on the plane of symmetry (POS) and one of
its axes must be normal to the POS. For cyclic reflection, the coordinate system origin must be coincident
with the center of rotation (COR). Only Cartesian systems are valid.
Axis
Axis label of the coordinate system (CS) that is normal to the POS for planar reflection. For 2-D model planar
reflections, valid labels are X or Y. For 3-D model planar reflections, valid labels are X, Y, or Z. Must be blank
for cyclic reflection. For cyclic reflection, it is assumed that the Z axis is aligned with the axis of rotation.
NSECT
Number of cyclic reflections to be done ( 1). This field must be blank or 0 for planar reflection. Default is
blank.
CONDVALUE
Condensation key. Used only with Option = COND.
ON
Turns condensation on in the radiosity solver for all defined radiation symmetries.
OFF
Turns condensation off in the radiosity solver for all defined radiation symmetries (default).
Notes
This command is used to define the POS for planar reflection or the COR for cyclic reflection. RSYMM may be
issued multiple times to have more than one planar/cyclic reflection; however, the RSURF command processes
them in the order they are issued.
For planar reflection, you must define a local coordinate system ( 11) with its origin on the POS. One of its axes
must be aligned so that it is normal to the plane. If possible, use the existing global coordinate system (0).
31160
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RSYS
For cyclic reflection, you must define a local coordinate system ( 11) with its origin coincident with the COR.
Reflections occur about the local Z-axis in the counterclockwise direction. You must align the Z-axis properly. If
possible, use the existing global coordinate system (0).
New surface elements generated inherit the properties of the original elements.
For 2-D axisymmetric models, RSYMM can be used only for symmetrization in the YR plane. It cannot be used
for the theta direction. Use V2DOPT in that case.
For 2-D axisymmetric YR models, the newly-generated nodes can have only positive X coordinates.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Clear Symmetry
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Condensation
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Cyclic Symmetry
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Planar Symmetry
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Clear
Symmetry
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Condensation
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Cyclic
Symmetry
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Advanced Solution Option>Radiation Symmetry Options>Planar
Symmetry
RSYS, KCN
Activates a coordinate system for printout or display of results.
POST1: Controls
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCN
Coordinate system reference number. KCN may be 0,1,2 or any existing local coordinate system number. If
KCN = SOLU, results are reported in whatever coordinate systems were associated with the results when
calculated in the solution phase (i.e., the nodal and element coordinate systems). The exception is for layered
shell and solid elements, for which data are transformed into the element coordinate system if LAYER = 0
or if no LAYER command is issued.
Command Default
Activate global Cartesian (KCN = 0) coordinate system.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31161
RSYS
Notes
Activates a coordinate system for the printout or display of results data. Results data will be rotated to this system
during printout, display, or element table operations [PRNSOL, PRESOL, PLNSOL, ETABLE, etc.]. Coordinate
systems can be defined with various commands [LOCAL, CS, CLOCAL, CSKP, ... ]. If RSYS is issued with KCN > 10
(i.e., a local coordinate system), and the specified system is subsequently redefined, you must reissue RSYS for
results to be rotated into the redefined system.
Rotated nodal data are any of the items shown for the PRNSOL command having the Comp label COMP, such as
U (displacements), S (stresses), etc. Nodal results can be properly rotated only if the resulting component set is
consistent with the degree-of-freedom set at the node (the degree-of-freedom set at a node is determined by
the elements attached to the node). For example, if a node does not have a UZ degree of freedom during solution,
then any Z component resulting from a rotation will not print or display in POST1. Therefore, results at nodes
with a single degree-of-freedom (UY only, for example) should not be rotated; that is, they should be viewed
only in the nodal coordinate system or a system parallel to the nodal system (Note that the command default is
the global Cartesian system, which may not be parallel to the nodal system). Results at nodes with a 2-D degreeof-freedom set (UX and UY, for example) should not be rotated out of the 2-D plane.
Element component results in the database from the solution phase (KCN = SOLU) are in the element coordinate
systems. For nearly all the solid elements, the default element coordinate systems are parallel to the global
Cartesian coordinate system. For the shell elements and the remaining solid elements, the default element coordinate system can differ from element to element. For layered shell and layered solid elements, the default
coordinate system can vary from layer to layer within the element. The element coordinate system is initially
defined with the ESYS command.
If large deflection is active, the element component result directions are rotated by the amount of rigid body
rotation. However, the hyperelastic elements always produce stresses and strains in the initial global coordinate
system; that is, no rigid body rotation is added for HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER84, HYPER86, and HYPER158. This is also true for continuum elements that contain hyperelastic material properties (TB,HYPER), such
as PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, and SOLID187.
For SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209, the
element component results are displayed in the initial global coordinate system. All other element result transformations are, therefore, also relative to the initial global system. Nodal degree-of-freedom results are based
on the initial (and not the updated) geometry. For all other element types, component results displayed in the
co-rotated coordinate system include the element rigid body rotation from the initial global coordinate system,
and all other element result transformations are relative to the rotated global system.
PowerGraphics does not support RSYS,SOLU.
When you generate a PGR file in SOLUTION, you can use the Results Viewer to display your stresses only in the
coordinate system in which you write your PGR file. If you wish to view stresses in other coordinate systems, you
can load your results file into the Results Viewer and regenerate the data. See Using the PGR File in POST1 for
more information on using the Results Viewer.
RSYS has no effect on beam stresses (BEAM3, BEAM4, PIPE16, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, BEAM54,
PIPE60, BEAM188, and BEAM189), which are always displayed (with /ESHAPE,1 and PowerGraphics) in the element
coordinate system.
For PowerGraphics, PLVECT arrow displays (temperature, velocity, force, etc.) will be plotted in RSYS = 0. Subsequent operations will revert to your original coordinate system.
31162
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RTHICK
RSYS can be used to rotate stress data for all explicit (ANSYS LS-DYNA) elements except BEAM161, COMBI165,
and composite SHELL163 (KEYOPT(3) = 1). In models that contain these element types combined with other
explicit elements, you must unselect the unsupported elements before issuing the RSYS command. RSYS does
not support strain data for any explicit element types. If you request strain results for explicit elements when
RSYS is not set to the global Cartesian coordinate system (KCN = 0), the printing or plotting command will be
ignored. (Displacements are always rotated into the results coordinate system, independent of the explicit element
type.)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
RTHICK, Par, ILOC, JLOC, KLOC, LLOC
Defines variable thickness at nodes for shell elements.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Par
Array parameter (indexed by node number) that expresses the function to be mapped. For example, func
(17) should be the desired shell thickness at node 17.
ILOC
Position in real constant set for thickness at node I of the element (default 1).
JLOC
Position in real constant set for thickness at node J of the element (default 2).
KLOC
Position in real constant set for thickness at node K of the element (default 3).
LLOC
Position in real constant set for thickness at node L of the element (default 4).
Notes
After RTHICK, each selected element will have its REAL number matching its ELEM number, for example, R (ILOC)
= func (I NODE), R (JLOC) = func (J NODE), etc. Any other real constants on a previously defined real constant set
will remain unchanged. This command cannot be used for beam elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>Thickness Func
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Real Constants>Thickness Func
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>Thickness Func
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31163
RTIMST
RTIMST
Prints runtime estimates.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Prints runtime estimates for the current model. A runtime estimate is given for the first iteration, for subsequent
iterations, and for total runtime. The runtime estimates are itemized for such ANSYS solution components as
element formulation, wavefront solution, back substitution, etc. The estimates will be for a computer system
using performance attributes as described by the RSPEED command and an estimated number of iterations as
specified on the RITER command. The RSPEED and RITER commands should be input before this command.
Note This command will cause reordering [WAVES] if reordering was not already done on the model.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>Individual Stats
RUN, DX, DY, DZ, NDIV, NEND, ESTRT, EINC
Defines a pipe run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DX, DY, DZ
Increment (in terms of the active coordinate system components) to determine run end point. Increment is
applied to branch starting point [BRANCH] or end point of previous run (whichever was later).
NDIV
Number of divisions (elements) along branch (defaults to 1). A node is generated at the end of each division.
NEND
Number to be assigned to end node of branch (defaults to MAXNP + NDIV).
ESTRT
Number to be assigned to first element of branch (defaults to the previous maximum element number
(MAXEL) + 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).
Notes
Defines a pipe run from a previous point to an incremental point. Nodes (and elements) are generated straight
(in the active coordinate system). Elements are of type PIPE16 straight pipes. Material properties, real constants,
and loads are derived from the previously defined piping specifications. Piping loads and specifications are
defined with the PCORRO, PDRAG, PFLUID, PINSUL, POPT, PPRES, PSPEC, PTEMP, and PUNIT commands.
Generated items may be listed (or displayed) with the standard commands (NLIST, ELIST, NPLOT, EPLOT, ETLIST,
31164
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
RWFRNT
RLIST, etc.). Items may also be modified (NMODIF, EMODIF, RMODIF, etc.) or redefined as desired. See the ANSYS
Modeling and Meshing Guide for details.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Pipe Run
/RUNST
Enters the run statistics processor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the run statistics processor for estimating various solution size and speed statistics. Statistics include run
time estimates, wavefront estimates, file size estimates, memory requirements and finite element model size
information.
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats
RWFRNT
Generates wavefront statistics and memory requirements.
RUNSTATS: Run Statistics Estimator
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Generates current solver statistics, such as maximum and RMS wavefront, and memory requirements based on
the chosen solver (EQSLV command). The RWFRNT command causes reordering if reordering was not already
done on the model.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Run-Time Stats>Individual Stats
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31165
31166
S Commands
SABS, KEY
Specifies absolute values for element table operations.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Absolute value key:
0
Use algebraic values in operations.
1
Use absolute values in operations.
Command Default
Use algebraic values.
Notes
Causes absolute values to be used in the SADD, SMULT, SMAX, SMIN, and SSUM operations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Abs Value Option
SADD, LabR, Lab1, Lab2, FACT1, FACT2, CONST
Forms an element table item by adding two existing items.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to results. If same as existing label, the existing values will be overwritten by these results.
Lab1
First labeled result item in operation.
Lab2
Second labeled result item in operation (may be blank).
FACT1
Scale factor applied to Lab1. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
FACT2
Scale factor applied to Lab2. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
CONST
Constant value.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SALLOW
Notes
Forms a labeled result (see ETABLE command) for the selected elements by adding two existing labeled result
items according to the operation:
LabR = (FACT1 x Lab1) + (FACT2 x Lab2) + CONST
May also be used to scale results for a single labeled result item. If absolute values are requested [SABS,1], absolute
values of Lab1 and Lab2 are used.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Add Items
SALLOW, STRS1, STRS2, STRS3, STRS4, STRS5, STRS6
Defines the allowable stress table for safety factor calculations.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
STRS1, STRS2, STRS3, STRS4, STRS5, STRS6
Input up to six allowable stresses corresponding to the temperature points [TALLOW].
Notes
Defines the allowable stress table for safety factor calculations [SFACT,SFCALC]. Use the STAT command to list
current allowable stress table. Repeat SALLOW to zero table and redefine points (6 maximum).
Safety factor calculations are not supported by PowerGraphics. Both the SALLOW and TALLOW commands
must be used with the Full Model Graphics display method active.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>Allowable Strs>Constant
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>Allowable Strs>Reset Stress
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>Allowable Strs>Temp-depend
SARPLOT, Prefer, VALUE
Displays areas smaller than a specified size (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Prefer
Preference for area display. If Prefer = FACTOR, the command displays all areas whose size is smaller than
the size of the average area within the model times VALUE. This is the default preference. If Prefer = AREA,
the command displays all areas that are smaller than that specified by VALUE. If Prefer = NARROW, the
command displays all areas that have an aspect ratio greater than VALUE (useful for finding "sliver" areas).
31168
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SAVE
VALUE
Numeric value used as argument for Prefer.
Notes
Use this command to locate and display disproportionately small areas when repairing the geometry of models
imported from CAD files. Areas matching the criteria specified in Prefer and VALUE both display in a different
color and include their IDs. This command is available only for models imported through the Default IGES option.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Detect/Display>Small Areas
SAVE, Fname, Ext, --, Slab
Saves all current database information.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to DB if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Slab
Mode for saving the database:
ALL
Save the model data, solution data and post data (element tables, etc.). This value is the default.
MODEL
Save the model data (solid model, finite element model, loadings, etc.) only.
SOLU
Save the model data and the solution data (nodal and element results).
Notes
Saves all current database information to a file (File.DB). In interactive mode, an existing File.DB is first written
to a backup file (File.DBB). In batch mode, an existing File.DB is replaced by the current database information
with no backup. The command should be issued periodically to ensure a current file backup in case of a system
"crash" or a "line drop." It may also be issued before a "doubtful" command so that if the result is not what was
intended the database may be easily restored to the previous state. A save may be time consuming for large
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31169
SBCLIST
models. Repeated use of this command overwrites the previous data on the file (but a backup file is first written
during an interactive run). When issued from within POST1, the nodal boundary conditions in the database
(which were read from the results file) will overwrite the nodal boundary conditions existing on the database
file.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Save as
Utility Menu>File>Save as Jobname.db
SBCLIST
Lists solid model boundary conditions.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Lists all solid model boundary conditions for the selected solid model entities. See also DKLIST, DLLIST, DALIST,
FKLIST, SFLLIST, SFALIST, BFLLIST, BFALIST, BFVLIST, and BFKLIST to list items separately.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Solid Model Loads
SBCTRAN
Transfers solid model loads and boundary conditions to the FE model.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Causes a manual transfer of solid model loads and boundary conditions to the finite element model. Loads and
boundary conditions on unselected keypoints, lines, areas, and volumes are not transferred. Boundary conditions
and loads will not be transferred to unselected nodes or elements. The SBCTRAN operation is also automatically
done upon initiation of the solution calculations [SOLVE].
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>All Solid Lds
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>All Solid Lds
31170
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SE
SDELETE, SFIRST, SLAST, SINC, KNOCLEAN
Deletes cross sections from the ANSYS database.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SFIRST
First section ID to be deleted; defaults to first available section in the database.
SLAST
Last section ID to be deleted; defaults to last available section in the database.
SINC
Increment of the section ID; defaults to 1.
KNOCLEAN
Pretension element cleanup key (pretension sections only).
0
Perform cleanup of pretension elements (delete pretension elements and reconnect elements split
during PSMESH).
1
Do not perform cleanup.
Notes
Deletes one or more specified sections and their associated data from the ANSYS database.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Delete Section
SE, File, --, --, TOLER
Defines a superelement.
PREP7: Superelements
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
File
Jobname (case-sensitive, eight-character maximum) of file containing superelement. Defaults to the current
Jobname.
--, --
Unused fields.
TOLER
Tolerance used to determine if use pass nodes are noncoincident with master nodes having the same node
numbers. Defaults to 0.0001. Use pass nodes will always be replaced by master nodes of the same node
number. However, if a use pass node is more than TOLER away from the corresponding master node, a
warning is generated.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31171
SECCONTROLS
Notes
Defines a superelement by reading in the superelement matrices and master nodes from the superelement
matrix file. The matrix file (File.SUB) must be available from the substructure generation pass. The proper element
type (MATRIX50) must be active [TYPE] for this command. A scratch file called File.SORD showing the superelement names and their corresponding element numbers is also written.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Superelem>From .SUB File
SECCONTROLS, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6, VAL7
Overrides program calculated properties.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6, VAL7
Values, such as the length of a side or the numbers of cells along the width, that describe the geometry of a
section. See the Notes section of this command description for details about these values for the various
section types.
Notes
The SECCONTROLS command is divided into two types: BEAMS and SHELLS. The beam type is listed first, followed
by the shell type. Values are associated with the most recently issued SECTYPE command. The data required is
determined by the section type, and is different for each type.
SECCONTROLS overrides the program calculated transverse shear stiffness.
The SECCONTROLS command does not apply to the thermal shell elements, SHELL131 and SHELL132.
BEAMS
Type: BEAM
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
TXZ, - , TXY, ADDMAS
TXZ = User transverse shear stiffness.
- = Unused field.
TXY = User transverse shear stiffness.
ADDMAS = Added mass per unit length.
SHELLS
Type: SHELL
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
31172
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECDATA
E11, E22, E12, ADDMAS, MEMSCF, BENSCF, DRLSTIF
E11 = User transverse shear stiffness.
E22 = User transverse shear stiffness.
E12 = User transverse shear stiffness.
ADDMAS = Added mass per unit area.
MEMSCF = Hourglass control membrane scale factor.
BENSCF = Hourglass control bending scale factor.
DRLSTIF = Drill stiffness scale factor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Sect Control
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Lay-up>Add / Edit
SECDATA, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6, VAL7, VAL8, VAL9, VAL10
Describes the geometry of a section.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4, VAL5, VAL6, VAL7, VAL8, VAL9, VAL10
Values, such as thickness or the length of a side or the numbers of cells along the width, that describe the
geometry of a section. The terms VAL1, VAL2, etc. are specialized for each type of cross-section. See the
Notes section of this command description for details about these values for the various section types.
Notes
The SECDATA command is divided into the types: BEAMS, TAPER, SHELLS, PRETENSION, and JOINTS. The beam
types are collectively listed first, followed by the remaining section types.
SECDATA defines the data describing the geometry of a section. The data input on the SECDATA command is
interpreted based on the most recently issued SECTYPE command. The data required is determined by the
section type and subtype, and is different for each one.
BEAMS
Beam sections are referenced by the BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 elements. A section made of multiple
materials cannot be modeled using BEAM44. Not all SECOFFSET location values are valid for each subtype.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31173
SECDATA
Type: BEAM, Subtype: RECT
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
B, H, Nb, Nh
B = Width
H = Height
Nb = Number of cells along width; default = 2
Nh = Number of cells along height; default = 2
Nb*Nh
Type: BEAM, Subtype: QUAD
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
yI, zI, yJ, zJ, yK, zK, yL, zL, Ng, Nh
yI, zI, yJ, zJ, yK, zK, yL, zL = Coordinate location of various points
Ng = Number of cells along g; default = 2
Nh = Number of cells along h; default = 2
Ng*Nh
Note Degeneration to triangle is permitted by specifying the same coordinates for cells along an edge.
31174
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECDATA
Type: BEAM, Subtype: CSOLID
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
R, N, T
R = Radius
N = Number of divisions around the circumference.
T = Number of divisions through the radius
Type: BEAM, Subtype: CTUBE
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
Ri, Ro, N
Ri = Inner radius of the tube
Ro = Outer radius of the tube
N = Number of cells along the circumference; default = 8
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31175
SECDATA
Type: BEAM, Subtype: CHAN
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
W1, W2, W3, t1, t2, t3
W1, W2 = Lengths of the flanges
W3 = Overall depth
t1, t2 = Flange thicknesses
t3 = Web thicknesses
Type: BEAM, Subtype: I
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
W1, W2, W3, t1, t2, t3
W1, W2 = Width of the top and bottom flanges
W3 = Overall depth
t1, t2 = Flange thicknesses
t3 = Web thicknesses
31176
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECDATA
Type: BEAM, Subtype: Z
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
W1, W2, W3, t1, t2, t3
W1, W2 = Flange lengths
W3 = Overall depth
t1, t2 = Flange thicknesses
t3 = Stem thicknesses
Type: BEAM, Subtype: L
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
W1, W2, t1, t2
W1, W2 = Leg lengths
t1, t2 = Leg thicknesses
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31177
SECDATA
Type: BEAM, Subtype: T
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
W1, W2, t1, t2
W1 = Flange width
W2 = Overall depth
t1 = Flange thicknesses
t2 = Stem thicknesses
Type: BEAM, Subtype: HATS
!
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
W1, W2, W3, W4, t1, t2, t3, t4, t5
W1, W2 = Width of the brim
W3 = Width of the top of the hat
W4 = Overall depth
t1, t2 = Thickness of the brim
t3 = Thickness of the top of the hat
31178
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECDATA
t4, t5 = Web thicknesses
Type: BEAM, Subtype: HREC
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
W1, W2, t1, t2, t3, t4
W1 = Outer width of the box
W2 = Outer height of the box
t1, t2, t3, t4 = Wall thickness
Type: BEAM, Subtype: ASEC
Arbitrary: User-supplied integrated section properties instead of basic geometry data.
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
A, Iyy, Iyz, Izz, Iw, J, CGy, CGz, SHy, SHz
A = Area of section
Iyy = Moment of inertia about the y axis
Iyz = Product of inertia
Izz = Moment of inertia about the z axis
Iw = Warping constant
J = Torsional constant
CGy = Y coordinate of centroid
CGz = Z coordinate of centroid
SHy = Y coordinate of shear center
SHz = Z coordinate of shear center
SECPLOT cannot display an ASEC plot.
Type: BEAM, Subtype: MESH
User-defined mesh.
Data required is created by the SECWRITE command and is read into ANSYS by the SECREAD command.
See the SECREAD command for more information about this data.
When user mesh is input using SECREAD, ANSYS calculates the area, second moments of inertia, centroid,
torsion constant, warping rigidity, and shear center.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31179
SECDATA
If you redefine a material for a composite cross-section after creating the section, you must reissue the
SECREAD command.
TAPER
Type: TAPER
Taper sections are referenced by BEAM188, and BEAM189 elements. Issue this command two times (once for
each end of the tapered beam) following the SECTYPE,,TAPER command.
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
Sec_IDn, XLOC, YLOC, ZLOC
Sec_IDn = Previously defined beam section at ends 1 (I) and 2 (J).
XLOC, YLOC, ZLOC = The location of Sec_IDn in global space.
SHELLS
Type: SHELL
Shell sections are referenced by the SHELL131, SHELL132, SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209 elements.
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
TK, MAT, THETA, NUMPT
TK = Thickness of shell layer. Thickness may be tapered using the SECFUNCTION command. Use zero for a
ply drop-off for SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Zero thickness is not allowed for SHELL131 and SHELL132.
The sum of all layer thicknesses must be greater than zero.
MAT = Material ID for layer (any 18x material model is available for SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209, including UserMat). MAT is required for a composite (multi-layered) laminate, (i.e., no default). For a homogeneous (single-layered) shell, the default is the MAT command setting. The TREF command is supported for
SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209, but not MP,REFT for each layer.
THETA = Angle (in degrees) of layer element coordinate system with respect to element coordinate system
(ESYS).
NUMPT = Number of integration points in layer. The GUI permits 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 points (default = 3). However
a higher odd number may be specified in the command. The integration rule used is Simpson's Rule. (NUMPT
is not used by SHELL131 and SHELL132.)
Use the SECDATA command for each layer in the section.
PRETENSION
Type: PRETENSION
Pretension sections are referenced by the PRETS179 element.
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
node, nx, ny, nz
node = Pretension node number.
31180
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECDATA
nx = Orientation in global Cartesian x direction.
ny = Orientation in global Cartesian y direction.
nz = Orientation in global Cartesian z direction.
The following usage is typical:
SECTYPE, 1,PRETENSION
SECDATA, 13184, 0.000, 0.000, 1.000
SECMODIF, 1,NAME,example
SLOAD, 1,9, TINY,F, 100.00 , 1, 2
The PRETENSION section options of SECTYPE and SECDATA are documented mainly to aid in the understanding
of data written by CDWRITE. We advise that you generate pretension sections using PSMESH.
JOINTS
Type: JOINT, Subtype: REVO
2 0$")(" & %$" !
1 & ' #
3
5
Data to be supplied in the value fields (VAL3 = angle1):
,,,angle1,,
angle1 refers to the component of rotation about the revolute axis.
Note If the reference angle is not specified, it is calculated from the default or starting configuration
of the revolute joint element. The reference angle is used in the constitutive calculations.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31181
SECFUNCTION
Type: JOINT, Subtype: UNIV
MPC184 Universal Joint Geometry
1
3
0 (#!'! % $#!
) % &
"
Data to be supplied in the value fields (VAL3 = angle1 and VAL5 = angle3):
,,,angle1,,angle3
angle1 and angle3 refer to the rotational components of relative motion in the joint.
Note Only two of the three vector components will show an angular displacement. The rotational
components can therefore be expressed with two angles. If the reference angles are not specified, they
are calculated from the default or starting configuration of the universal joint element. The reference
angles are used in the constitutive calculations. See MPC184 for more intormation on joint elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Common Sections
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Taper Sections>By Picked Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Taper Sections>By XYZ Location
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Joints>Add / Edit
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Lay-up>Add / Edit
SECFUNCTION, TABLE
Specifies shell section thickness as a tabular function.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TABLE
Table name reference for specifying tabular thickness as a function of global XYZ coordinates. To specify a
table, enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g. SECFUNCTION,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command
to define a table.
31182
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SECLIB
Notes
The table defined by the SECFUNCTION command is associated with the section most recently defined using
the SECTYPE command.
The table defines your total shell thickness at any point in space. In multi-layered sections, the total thickness
and each layer thickness are scaled accordingly.
The Function Builder is a convenient way to define your thickness tables. (Utility Menu> Parameters> Functions>
Define/Edit)
To learn more about the Function Builder see Using the Function Editor of the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Lay-up>Add / Edit
SECJOINT, --, ID1, ID2
Defines local coordinate systems at the nodes that form the MPC184 joint element.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
--
Currently unused.
ID1, ID2
Identifiers of the local coordinate systems.
Notes
Issue another SECJOINT command to overwrite current values.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Joints>Add / Edit
/SECLIB, Option, Path
Sets the default section library path for the SECREAD command.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Option
READ
Sets the read path (default).
STATUS
Reports the current section library path setting to the Jobname.LOG file.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31183
SECLOCK
Path
Defines the directory path from which to read section library files.
Notes
When the SECREAD command is issued without a directory path, the command searches for a section library in
the following order:
The user's home directory
The current working directory
The path specified by the /SECLIB command
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Section Library>Library Path
SECLOCK, dof, MINVALUE, MAXVALUE, dof, MINVALUE, MAXVALUE, dof, MINVALUE, MAXVALUE
Specifies locks on the components of relative motion in a joint element.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
dof
Local degree of freedom to be locked.
MINVALUE
Low end of the range of allowed movement for the specified DOF.
MAXVALUE
High end of the range of allowed movement for the specified DOF.
Notes
Specify up to three DOFs to be locked. Locks are activated when the limit values are reached, and further motion
in that DOF is frozen. If necessary, you may repeat the command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Joints>Add / Edit
SECMODIF, SECID, Kywrd
Modifies a pretension section
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
If Kywrd = NORM, command format is SECMODIF,SECID, NORM, NX, NY, NZ, KCN
SECID
Unique section number. This number must already be assigned to a section.
31184
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECNUM
NORM
Keyword specifying that the command will modify the pretension section normal direction.
NX, NY, NZ
Specifies the individual normal components to modify.
KCN
Coordinate system number. This can be either 0 (Global Cartesian), 1 (Global Cylindrical) 2 (Global Spherical),
4 (Working Plane), 5 (Global Y Axis Cylindrical) or an arbitrary reference number assigned to a coordinate
system.
If Kywrd = NAME, the command format is SECMODIF,SECID, NAME, Name
SECID
Unique section number. This number must already be assigned to a section.
NAME
Action key that instructs the command to change the name of the specified pretension section.
Name
The new name to be assigned to the pretension section.
Notes
The SECMODIF command either modifies the normal for a specified pretension section, or changes the name
of the specified pretension surface.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Modify Name
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Pretension>Modify Normal
SECNUM, SECID
Sets the element section attribute pointer.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SECID
Defines the section ID number to be assigned to the subsequently-defined elements by the LMESH, E, or
EN commands. Defaults to 1. See SECTYPE for more information about the section ID number.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Default Attribs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Elem Attributes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31185
SECOFFSET
SECOFFSET, Location, OFFSET1, OFFSET2, CG-Y, CG-Z, SH-Y, SH-Z
Defines the section offset for cross sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Location, OFFSET1, OFFSET2, CG-Y, CG-Z, SH-Y, SH-Z
The location of the nodes in the section. All are dependent on the type. See the Notes section of this command
description for details about these values for the various section types.
Notes
The SECOFFSET command is divided into two types: BEAMS and SHELLS. The beam types are collectively listed
first, followed by the shell types.
The offsets defined by the SECOFFSET command are associated with the section most recently defined using
the SECTYPE command. Not all SECOFFSET location values are valid for each subtype.
For the thermal shell elements, SHELL131 and SHELL132, the node offset specified by SECOFFSET is used in
thermal contact analyses. Otherwise, the SECOFFSET command has no effect on the solution for these elements
and is used only for visualization purposes.
BEAMS
Type: BEAM
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
Location, OFFSETY, OFFSETZ, CG-Y, CG-Z, SH-Y, SH-Z
Location
CENT -Beam node will be offset to centroid (default).
SHRC -Beam node will be offset to shear center.
ORIGIN -Beam node will be offset to origin of the cross section.
USER -Beam node will be offset to the location specified by the OFFSETY and OFFSETZ arguments.
OFFSETY, OFFSETZ
Values that locate the node with respect to the default origin of the cross section when the Location argument is set to USER. Valid only when USER is set.
The following figure illustrates the offsets for a channel cross section, and shows the relative locations of
SHRC and CENT.
31186
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECOFFSET
Offsets for a CHAN Section Subtype
0
"!
$ #
)(' %&
%
1
CG-Y, CG-Z, SH-Y, SH-Z
Override the program-calculated centroid and shear centroid locations.
Note This option should only be used by advanced users modeling composite cross sections.
SHELLS
Type: SHELL
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
Location, OFFSET
Location
TOP -Shell node will be offset to top of the section.
MID -Shell node will be offset to midplane of the section (default).
BOT -Shell node will be offset to bottom of the section.
USER -Shell node will be offset to the location specified by the OFFSET argument.
OFFSET
Value that locates the node with respect to the default origin (midplane) of the section when the Location
argument is set to USER. Valid only when USER is set.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Common Sections
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Custom Sections>Read Sect Mesh
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31187
SECPLOT
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Lay-up>Add / Edit
SECPLOT, SECID, VAL1, VAL2
Plots the geometry of a beam or shell section to scale.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SECID
The section ID number as defined by the SECTYPE command.
VAL1, VAL2
Values that control the information to be plotted. See the Notes section of this command description for
details about these values for the various section types. The names VAL1 and VAL2 are renamed for each
type of section.
Notes
The SECPLOT command is valid only for BEAMS and SHELLS.
SECPLOT cannot display the plot of an ASEC (arbitrary section) subtype.
BEAMS
Plots the geometry of the beam section to scale depicting the centroid, shear center, and origin. SECPLOT also
lists various section properties such as Iyy, Iyz, and Izz.
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
MESHKEY
Displays or suppresses display of beam section mesh.
0 -Does not display beam section mesh.
1 -Displays beam section mesh.
A sample section plot for the CHAN section subtype is shown below.
31188
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECPLOT
SECPLOT Beams Sample
SHELLS
Plots the layer arrangement of the shell section showing the layer material and orientation.
Data to be supplied in the value fields:
LAYR1, LAYR2
Range of layer numbers to be displayed. If LAYR1 is greater than LAYR2, a reversed order display is produced.
Up to 20 layers may be displayed at a time. LAYR1 defaults to 1. LAYR2 defaults to LAYR1 if LAYR1 is input
or to the number of layers (or to 19+LAYR1, if smaller) if LAYR1 is not input.
A sample section plot for the SHELL section type is shown below.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31189
SECREAD
SECPLOT Shells Sample
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Plot Section
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Lay-up>Plot Section
SECREAD, Fname, Ext, --, Option
Reads a customized beam section library or a user-defined beam section mesh into ANSYS.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
Section library file name and directory path containing the section library file (248 characters maximum, including directory). If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working directory and you
can use all 248 characters for the file name.
When the SECREAD command is given without a directory path, the command searches for a section library
in the following order:
The user's home directory
The current working directory
The path specified by the /SECLIB command
The file name defaults to Jobname if Fname is left blank.
31190
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECREAD
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to SECT if Ext is left blank.
--
Unused field.
Option
LIBRARY
Reads in a library of sections and their associated section data values; the default. A section library may
be created by editing the section-defining portions of the Jobname.LOG file and saving it with a .SECT
suffix.
MESH
Reads in a user mesh section file containing the cell connectivity, cell flags, and nodal coordinates for
the current beam section of subtype MESH as defined by SECTYPE. See the Notes section of this command
description for details about user mesh section files. SECWRITE builds mesh files based on 2-D models
you create.
Notes
Sample User Section Cell Mesh File
Here are excerpts from a sample user section mesh file for a section with 75 nodes, 13 cells, and 9 nodes per cell
for a two-hole box section. Illustrations of the two-hole box section and the cell mesh for it appear later in this
command description.
First Line:
75
Cells Section:
13
1
3
5
7
9
23
3
5
7
9
11
25
25
27
29
31
33
45
23
25
27
29
31
43
2
4
6
8
10
24
14
16
18
20
22
36
24
26
28
30
32
44
12
14
16
18
20
34
13
15
17
19
21
35
1
1
1
1
1
1
73
75
71
73
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
50
52
62
64
72
74
60
62
61
63
1
1
...
0
0
0
0
Nodes Section:
...
0
0
49 51
51 53
0.0
0.025
0.05
5.0175
19.98
20.00
10.00
10.00
The mesh file is divided into three sections: the First Line, the Cells Section, and the Nodes Section. Here are brief
descriptions of the contents of each.
First Line: The First Line defines the number of nodes and the number of cells for the mesh.
Cells Section: The Cells Section contains as many lines as there are cells. In this example, there are thirteen cells,
so there are thirteen lines in this section. In each line, the number 1 that follows the cell connectivity information
is the material number.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31191
SECREAD
Cell nodal connectivity must be given in a counterclockwise direction, with the center node being the ninth
node. For details, see Cell Mesh for the Two-hole Box Section.
Nodes Section: The Nodes Section contains as many lines as there are nodes. In this example, there are 75
nodes, so there are a total of 75 lines in this section. Each node line contains the node's boundary flag, the Y coordinate of the node, and the Z coordinate of the node. Currently, all node boundary flags appear as 0s in a cell
mesh file (as illustrated in Two-hole Box Section). Since all node boundary flags are 0, SECREAD ignores them
when it reads a cell mesh file into ANSYS.
There cannot be any gaps in the node numbering of a cell mesh. The nodes in a cell mesh must be numbered
consecutively, with the first node having a node number of 1, and the last node having a node number that is
equal to the maximum number of nodes in the cell mesh.
Two-hole Box Section
31192
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECSTOP
Cell Mesh for the Two-hole Box Section
!
9 874 32( ()'
9 1 6 1 5 ( 1 0
"
&%$
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Custom Sections>Read Sect Mesh
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Section Library>Import Library
SECSTOP, dof, MINVALUE, MAXVALUE, dof, MINVALUE, MAXVALUE, dof, MINVALUE, MAXVALUE
Specifies stops on the components of relative motion in a joint element.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
dof
Local degree of freedom to be stopped.
MINVALUE
Low end of the range of allowed movement for the specified DOF.
MAXVALUE
High end of the range of allowed movement for the specified DOF.
Notes
Stops restrict motion in a DOF; motion beyond the MINVALUE or MAXVALUE is prevented (motion away from a
limit is allowed). You can specify up to three stops. If necessary, you can repeat the command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Joints>Add / Edit
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31193
SECTYPE
SECTYPE, SECID, Type, Subtype, Name, REFINEKEY
Associates section type information with a section ID number.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SECID
Section identification number.
Type
BEAM
Defines a beam section. See Beam Cross Section Subtypes.
TAPER
Defines a tapered beam section. (The sections at the end points must be topologically identical.)
GENB
Defines a nonlinear general (temperature-dependent) beam section.
SHELL
Defines a shell section.
GENS
Defines a preintegrated (temperature-dependent) shell section.
PRETENSION
Defines a pretension section.
JOINT
Defines a joint section.
Subtype
When Type = BEAM, the possible beam sections that can be defined for Subtype are:
RECT
Rectangle
QUAD
Quadrilateral
CSOLID
Circular solid
CTUBE
Circular tube
CHAN
Channel
I-shaped section
Z-shaped section
L-shaped section
T-shaped section
HATS
Hat-shaped section
HREC
Hollow rectangle or box
ASEC
Arbitrary section -- integrated cross-section inertia properties supplied
by user
MESH
User-defined mesh -- see the SECREAD command for more information
about this data
When Type = JOINT, the possible joint sections that can be defined for Subtype are:
UNIV
31194
Universal joint
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SECTYPE
REVO
Revolute joint
The following figure shows the shape of each cross section subtype:
Beam Cross Section Subtypes
%&$
$
#"!
!$
'
Note The beam cross section subtypes listed above are generated by ANSYS from user-supplied
data. The arbitrary section (Subtype = ASEC cannot be displayed using /ESHAPE, and will be shown
as a straight line.
See the SECDATA command for detailed illustrations of the BEAM section subtypes and their associated
geometric data.
When Type = GENB, the possible nonlinear general beam sections that can be defined for Subtype are:
ELASTIC
The generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship is elastic (linear
or nonlinear).
PLASTIC
The generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship is elasto-plastic
(and allows for permanent deformation).
Name
An 8-character name for the section. Name can be a string such as "W36X210" or "HP13X73" for beam sections.
Name must follow ANSYS naming conventions. Section names may contain letters and numbers, but cannot
contain punctuation, special characters, or spaces.
REFINEKEY
Sets mesh refinement level for thin-walled beam sections. Values are 0 (the default - no mesh refinement)
to 5 (high level of mesh refinement).
Notes
SECTYPE sets the section ID number, section type, and subtype for a section. If the section ID number is not
specified, ANSYS increments the highest section ID number currently defined in the database by one. A previouslydefined section with the same identification number will be redefined. The geometry data describing this section
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31195
SECWRITE
type is defined by a subsequent SECDATA command. Define the offsets by a subsequent SECOFFSET command.
For a beam section, ANSYS builds a numeric model using a nine node cell for determining the properties (Ixx,
Iyy, etc.) of the section and for the solution to the Poisson's equation for torsional behavior. The SLIST command
lists the section properties, and the SECPLOT command displays the section to scale. The SECNUM command
assigns the section ID number to a subsequently-defined beam element. See Beam Analysis and Cross Sections
in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide for examples using the section commands.
For a tapered beam section (Type = TAPER), two subsequent SECDATA commands are required (one for each
end section). Section ends must be topologically identical (same Subtype, number of cells and material IDs).
For a nonlinear general beam section (Type = GENB), the Subtype and REFINEKEY options do not apply. Subsequent commands are necessary to define the section: BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, BSS2, BSMD, and
BSTE are available. ANSYS ignores all other section commands for this section type.
For a preintegrated general shell section (Type = GENS), the Subtype and REFINEKEY options do not apply.
Subsequent commands are necessary to define the section: SSPA, SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, SSMT, SSBT, and SSPM
are available. ANSYS ignores all other section commands for this section type.
The PRETENSION section options of SECTYPE and SECDATA are documented primarily to aid your understand
of the data written by the CDWRITE command. ANSYS recommends that you generate pretension sections via
PSMESH.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Common Sections
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Custom Sections>Read Sect Mesh
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>NL Generalized
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Taper Sections>By Picked Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Beam>Taper Sections>By XYZ Location
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Joints>Add / Edit
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Lay-up>Add / Edit
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
SECWRITE, Fname, Ext, --, ELEM_TYPE
Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh section information.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname if Fname is left blank.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to SECT if Ext is left blank.
31196
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SED
--
Unused field.
ELEM_TYPE
Element type attribute pointer (ET) for the elements that are part of the section. See SECREAD for a detailed
description.
Notes
Before creating a user mesh file, you must create a model using ANSYS 2-D meshing capabilities. Use PLANE82
or MESH200 with KEYOPT(1) = 7 (quadrilateral with 8 nodes option) to model the cells. SECWRITE creates an
ASCII file that contains information about the nodes and cells that describe a beam section. For detailed information on how to create a user mesh file, see Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries in the ANSYS
Structural Analysis Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Custom Sectns>Write From Areas
SED, SEDX, SEDY, SEDZ
Defines the excitation direction for a single-point response spectrum.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SEDX, SEDY, SEDZ
Global Cartesian coordinates of a point that defines a line (through the origin) corresponding to the excitation
direction. For example: 0.0, 1.0, 0.0 defines global Y as the spectrum direction. Spectrum values are not scaled
with this input.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>DDAM Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>DDAM Options
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31197
SEDLIST
SEDLIST, Sename, KOPT
Lists the DOF solution of a superelement after the use pass.
PREP7: Superelements
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Sename
Name of the superelement on File.DSUB to be listed. If a number, it is the element number of the superelement as used in the use pass. If ALL, list results for all superelements.
KOPT
List key:
0
List summary data only.
1
List full contents. Be aware that the listing may be extensive.
Notes
Lists the degree of freedom solution of a superelement after the substructure use pass. Results may be listed for
any superelement on File.DSUB.
This command is valid in any processor.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Superelem DOF
Utility Menu>List>Results>Superelem DOF Solu
SEEXP, Sename, Usefil, Imagky, Expopt
Specifies options for the substructure expansion pass.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Sename
The name (case-sensitive) of the superelement matrix file created by the substructure generation pass (Sename.SUB). Defaults to the initial jobname File. If a number, it is the element number of the superelement
as used in the use pass.
Usefil
The name of the file containing the superelement degree-of-freedom (DOF) solution created by the substructure use pass (Usefil.DSUB).
Imagky
Key to specify use of the imaginary component of the DOF solution. Applicable only if the use pass is a harmonic (ANTYPE,HARMIC) analysis:
31198
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SEG
OFF
Use real component of DOF solution (default).
ON
Use imaginary component of DOF solution.
Expopt
Key to specify whether the superelement (ANTYPE,SUBSTR) expansion pass (EXPASS,ON) should transform
the geometry:
OFF
Do not transform node or element locations (default).
ON
Transform node or element locations in the FE geometry record of the .rst results file.
Notes
Specifies options for the expansion pass of the substructure analysis (ANTYPE,SUBSTR). If used in SOLUTION,
this command is valid only within the first load step.
If you specify geometry transformation (Expopt = ON), you must retrieve the transformation matrix (if it exists)
from the specified .SUB file. The command updates the nodal X, Y, and Z coordinates to represent the transformed
node locations. The Expopt option is useful when you want to expand superelements created from other superelements (via SETRAN or SESYMM commands). For more information, see Section 10.2.3: Superelement Expansion
in Transformed Locations and Section 10.2.4: Plotting or Printing Mode Shapes.
This command is also valid in /PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Expand Superelem
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>ExpansionPass>Single Expand>Expand Superelem
/SEG, Label, Aviname, DELAY
Allows graphics data to be stored in the local terminal memory.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Storage key:
SINGL
Store subsequent display in a single segment (overwrites last storage).
MULTI
Store subsequent displays in unique segments [ANIM].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31199
SEGEN
DELET
Delete all currently stored segments.
OFF
Stop storing display data in segments.
STAT
Display segment status.
PC
This option only applies to PC versions of ANSYS and only when animating via the AVI movie player (i.e.,
/DEVICE,ANIM,2). This command appends frames to the File.AVI, so that the animation goes in both
directions (i.e., forward--backward--forward). You must have a current animation file to use this option.
Aviname
Name of the animation file that will be created when each frame is saved. The .AVI extension is applied
automatically. Defaults to Jobname.AVI if no filename is specified.
DELAY
Delay factor between each frame, in seconds. Defaults to 0.015 seconds if no value is specified.
Command Default
No segment storage.
Notes
Allows graphics data to be stored in the terminal local memory (device-dependent). Storage occurs concurrently
with the display.
Although the information from your graphics window is stored as an individual segment, you cannot plot directly
(GPLOT) from the segment memory.
For the DISPLAY program, the Aviname and DELAY fields are ignored.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>Delete Segments
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>Segment Status
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To Segment Memory
SEGEN, Mode, nSuper, mDof, stopStage
Automatically generate superelements.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Mode
Specify action to take (must be specified as one of the following):
31200
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SEGEN
AUTO
Turn on feature.
OFF
Turn off feature.
nSuper
Number of superelements to create. The minimum number of superelements is 2, and the maximum number
of superelements is 999. Note that the number of requested superelements may not be the same as the
number of defined superelements (see Notes for more details).
mDof
Specifies whether to use the master DOF defined by the user.
YES
Use master DOF defined by the user with the M command.
NO
Use the master DOF defined by the automatic generation process. Be aware that this option can generate
a large number of master DOFs (see Notes for more details).
stopStage
Specifies when to stop the automatic superelement generation process.
PREVIEW
Preview the superelements only; stop after creating the domains which will become the superelements,
and after creating master DOF on the interfaces between each domain.
GEN
Create (generate) the superelements.
Command Default
No command default. If the command is issued, a Mode must be specified. By default, if the AUTO mode is chosen,
the SEGEN command automatically creates 10 superelements and defines master DOFs at all DOFs on the interfaces between superelements.
Notes
This command can be used to quickly generate a set of superelements. Each superelement is created in a separate
file (jobnameXXX.sub, where XXX is a positive number from 1 to 999).
Due to the heuristics in the automatic domain decomposer, which is used to define the domains that will become
superelements, the number of defined superelements may exceed the number of requested superelements.
Use the mDof and stopStage options to determine exactly how many superelements will be created, the interfaces
between each superelement, and where master DOF will be defined. With the /PNUM,DOMAIN command, you
can graphically (visually) preview the elements in each superelement. Then, if required, you can add additional
master DOF to (or remove from) the boundaries of the superelements. Use the SEGEN command again with
stopStage = GEN to actually create the superelements.
ANSYS automatically defines master DOF at each of the following: all interface DOF between superelements, all
DOF attached to contact elements (TARGE169 to CONTA175), and all DOF associated with nodes having a point
load defined. Note that for regular superelements, all interface DOFs must be defined as master DOFs for the
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31201
SELIST
correct solution to be obtained. However, for CMS superelements, some of the interface DOFs can be removed
without a significant loss of accuracy.
For the case when mDof = YES, you should select the preview option first (stopStage = PREVIEW) to verify exactly
how many superelements will be created and where the superelement boundaries are located. If more superelements will be created than were requested, you should define master DOF on the interface(s) between all superelements.
This command is valid only for substructuring analyses (ANTYPE,SUBSTR). Either the frontal or sparse solver can
be selected. Use SEOPT to specify any options for all of the superelements (e.g., which matrices to reduce), and
possibly CMSOPT for any CMS substructuring analysis. Note that the created superelements will follow the current
/FILNAME instead of SENAME from SEOPT. Also, only one load vector will be written to each .SUB file. Multiple
load steps are not supported with the automatic superelement generation process.
During the actual creation of the superelements, the output is redirected to jobname.autoTemp.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
SELIST, Sename, KOPT
Lists the contents of a superelement matrix file.
PREP7: Superelements
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Sename
The name (case-sensitive) of the superelement matrix file created by the substructure generation pass (Sename.SUB). Defaults to the current Jobname. If a number, it is the element number of the superelement as
used in the use pass.
KOPT
List key:
0
List summary data only.
1
List contents, except load vectors and matrices.
2
List contents, except matrices.
3
List full contents. Be aware that the listing may be extensive.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
31202
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SENERGY
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Other>Superelem Data
SELM
Specifies "Superelements" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Superelements
SENERGY, OPT, ANTYPE
Determines the stored magnetic energy or co-energy.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
OPT
Item to be calculated:
0
Stored magnetic energy.
1
Stored magnetic co-energy.
ANTYPE
Analysis type:
0
Static or transient.
1
Harmonic.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31203
SEOPT
Notes
SENERGY invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates the stored magnetic energy or co-energy for all selected
elements. (For a harmonic analysis, the macro calculates a time-averaged (rms) stored energy.) A summary table
listing the energy by material number is produced. The energy density is also calculated and stored on a perelement basis in the element table [ETABLE] with the label MG_ENG (energy density) or MG_COENG (co-energy
density). The macro erases all other items in the element table [ETABLE] and only retains the energy density or
co-energy density. Use the PLETAB and PRETAB commands to plot and list the energy density. The macro is
valid for static and low-frequency magnetic field formulations. The macro will not calculate stored energy and
co-energy for the following cases:
Orthotropic nonlinear permanent magnets.
Orthotropic nonlinear permeable materials.
Temperature dependent materials.
SENERGY is restricted to MKSA units.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Element Based>Co-Energy
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Element Based>Energy
SEOPT, Sename, SEMATR, SEPR, SESST, EXPMTH
Specifies substructure analysis options.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Sename
The name (case-sensitive) assigned to the superelement matrix file. The matrix file will be named Sename.SUB.
This field defaults to Fname on the /FILNAME command.
SEMATR
Matrix generation key:
1
Generate stiffness (or conductivity) matrix (default).
2
Generate stiffness and mass (or conductivity and specific heat) matrices.
3
Generate stiffness, mass and damping matrices.
SEPR
Print key:
0
Do not print superelement matrices or load vectors.
31204
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SEOPT
1
Print both load vectors and superelement matrices.
2
Print load vectors but not matrices.
SESST
Stress stiffening key:
0
Do not save space for stress stiffening in a later run.
1
Save space for the stress stiffening matrix (calculated in a subsequent generation run after the expansion
pass).
EXPMTH
Expansion method for expansion pass:
BACKSUB
Save necessary triangularized matrix files for backsubstitution during subsequent expansion passes
(default). This normally results in a large usage of disk space
RESOLVE
Do not save triangularized matrix files. Global stiffness matrix will be reformed during expansion pass.
This option provides an effective way to save disk space usage.
Notes
Specifies substructure analysis options (ANTYPE,SUBSTR). If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only
within the first load step.
The sparse solver cannot be used to generate unsymmetric superelement matrices or to generate superelement
matrices with damping. If either case is encountered, the program will automatically switch to the frontal solver.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31205
SESYMM
SESYMM, Sename, Ncomp, INC, File, Ext, -Performs a symmetry operation on a superelement within the use pass.
PREP7: Superelements
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Sename
The name (case-sensitive) of the superelement matrix file created by the substructure generation pass (Sename.SUB). Defaults to the current Jobname. If a number, it is the element number of a previously defined
superelement in the current use pass.
Ncomp
Symmetry key:
X
X symmetry (default).
Y
Y symmetry.
Z
Z symmetry.
INC
Increment all nodes in the superelement by INC.
File
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
This field must be input.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to SUB.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Performs a symmetry operation on a superelement within the substructure use pass by reversing the sign of
component Ncomp in the global Cartesian coordinate system. The node numbers are incremented by INC. The
new superelement is written to File.SUB in the current directory (by default). All master node nodal coordinate
systems must be global Cartesian (no rotated nodes allowed).
The maximum number of transformations for a given superelement is five (including SETRAN, SESYMM, and
the large rotation transformation if NLGEOM is ON in the use pass).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Superelem>By Reflection
31206
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SET
SET, Lstep, Sbstep, Fact, KIMG, TIME, ANGLE, NSET, ORDER
Defines the data set to be read from the results file.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lstep
Load step number of the data set to be read (defaults to 1):
N
Read load step N.
FIRST
Read the first data set (Sbstep and TIME are ignored).
LAST
Read the last data set (Sbstep and TIME are ignored).
NEXT
Read the next data set (Sbstep and TIME are ignored). If at the last data set, the first data set will be read
as the next.
PREVIOUS
Read the previous data set (Sbstep and TIME are ignored). If at the first data set, the last data set will be
read as the previous.
NEAR
Read the data set nearest to TIME (Sbstep is ignored). If TIME is blank, read the first data set.
LIST
Scan the results file and list a summary of each load step. (KIMG, TIME, ANGLE, and NSET are ignored.)
Sbstep
Substep number (within Lstep). Defaults to the last substep of the load step (except in a buckling or modal
analysis). For a buckling (ANTYPE,BUCKLE) or modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) analysis, Sbstep corresponds to the
mode number. Specify Sbstep = LAST to store the last substep for the specified load step (that is, issue a
SET,Lstep,LAST command).
If Lstep = LIST, Sbstep = 0 or 1 lists the basic step information. Sbstep = 2 also lists the basic step information,
but includes the load step title, and labels imaginary data sets if they exist.
Fact
Scale factor applied to data read from the file. If zero (or blank), a value of 1.0 is used. A nonzero factor excludes
non-summable items. Harmonic velocities or accelerations may be calculated from the displacement results
from a Modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) or Harmonic Response (ANTYPE,HARMIC) analyses. If Fact = VELO, the
harmonic velocities (v) are calculated from the displacements (d) at a particular frequency (f) according to
the relationship v = 2 fd. Similarly, if Fact = ACEL, the harmonic accelerations (a) are calculated as a =
(2 f)2d.
If Lstep = LIST in an analysis employing rezoning, Fact can restrict the output to a file type such as .rst or
.rsnn. For example, to see only the portion of the data set associated with the .rs01 file, issue a SET,LIST,,RS01
command.
KIMG
Used only with results from complex analyses.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31207
SET
0
Store real part of complex solution.
1
Store imaginary part.
Note For damped modal solutions, the imaginary part of the eigenvalue represents the frequency of the system.
TIME
Time-point identifying the data set to be read. For the harmonic response analyses, time corresponds to the
frequency. For the buckling analysis, time corresponds to the load factor. Used only in the following cases:
If Lstep = NEAR, read the data set nearest to TIME. If both Lstep and Sbstep are zero (or blank), read data
set at time = TIME. Do not use TIME to identify the data set to be read if you used the arc-length method
(ARCLEN) in your solution. If TIME is between two solution time points on the results file, a linear interpolation
is done between the two data sets (except in rezoning). Solution items not written to the results file (OUTRES)
for either data set will result in a null item after data set interpolation. If TIME is beyond the last time point
on the file, the last time point will be used.
ANGLE
Circumferential location (0.0 to 360). Defines the circumferential location for the harmonic calculations used
when reading from the results file. The harmonic factor (based on the circumferential angle) is applied to
the harmonic elements (PLANE25, PLANE75, PLANE78, FLUID81, PLANE83, and SHELL61) of the load case.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details.
Note The factored values of applied constraints and loads will overwrite any values existing in the
database. If ANGLE = NONE, all harmonic factors are set to 1 and postprocessing will yield the solution
output. When using ANGLE = NONE with MODE > 0, the combined stresses and strains are not valid.
The default value of ANGLE is 0.0, but if the SET command is not used, the effective default is NONE.
NSET
Data set number of the data set to be read. If a positive value for NSET is entered, Lstep, Sbstep, KIMG, and
TIME are ignored. Available set numbers can be determined by SET,LIST.
ORDER
Sorts the harmonic index results in ascending order of eigenfrequencies or buckling load multipliers. This
value applies to cyclic symmetry buckling and modal analyses only, and is valid only when Lstep = FIRST,
LAST, NEXT, PREVIOUS, NEAR or LIST.
Notes
Defines the data set to be read from the results file into the database. Various operations may also be performed
during the read operation. The database must have the model geometry available (or use the RESUME command
before the SET command to restore the geometry from File.DB). Values for applied constraints [D] and loads
[F] in the database will be replaced by their corresponding values on the results file, if available. (See the description
of the OUTRES command.) In a single load step analysis, these values are usually the same, except for results
from harmonic elements. (See the description of the ANGLE value above.)
In an interactive run, the sorted list (ORDER option) is also available for results-set reading via a GUI pick option.
During rezoning, Lstep values NEXT, PREVIOUS, and NEAR are not available.
31208
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SETFGAP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Detailed Summary
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>Detailed Summary (Freq ordered)
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Load Step
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Pick
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Pick (Freq ordered)
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>First Set
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>Last Set
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>Next Set
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>Previous Set
Main Menu>General Postproc>Results Summary
Main Menu>General Postproc>Results Summary (Freq ordered)
Utility Menu>List>Results>Load Step Summary
SETFGAP, GAP, ROPT, --, PAMB, ACF1, ACF2, PREF, MFP
Updates or defines the real constant table for squeeze film elements.
PREP7: Real Constants
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
GAP
Gap separation.
ROPT
Real constant set option.
0
Creates separate real constant sets for each selected element with the specified real constant values
(default).
1
Updates existing real constant sets. The gap separation is updated from displacement results in the
database. Other real constants are updated as specified in the command input parameters.
--
Unused field
PAMB
Ambient pressure.
ACF1, ACF2
Accommodation factor 1 and 2.
PREF
Reference pressure for mean free path.
MFP
Mean free path.
Notes
This command is used for large signal cases to update the gap separation real constant on a per-element basis.
Issue this command prior to solution using the default ROPT value to initialize real constant sets for every fluid
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31209
SETRAN
element. After a solution, you can re-issue the command to update the real constant set for a subsequent analysis. See Chapter 16, Thin Film Analysis for more information on thin film analyses.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>ThinFilm
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Real Constants>ThinFilm
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Real Constants>ThinFilm
SETRAN, Sename, KCNTO, INC, File, Ext, --, DX, DY, DZ, NOROT
Creates a superelement from an existing superelement.
PREP7: Superelements
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
Sename
The name (case-sensitive) of the file containing the original superelement matrix created by the generation
pass (Sename.SUB). The default is the current Jobname. If Sename is a number, it is the element number of
a previously defined superelement in the current use pass.
KCNTO
The reference number of the coordinate system to where the superelement is to be transferred. The default
is the global Cartesian system. Transfer occurs from the active coordinate system.
INC
The node offset. The default is zero. All new element node numbers are offset from those on the original by
INC.
File
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
This field requires input.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to SUB.
--
Unused field.
DX, DY, DZ
Node location increments in the global Cartesian coordinate system. Defaults to zero.
NOROT
Node rotation key:
0
The nodal coordinate systems of the transferred superelement rotate into the KCNTO system. (That is,
the nodal coordinate systems rotate with the superelement.) The superelement matrices remain unchanged. This value is the default.
31210
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SEXP
1
The nodal coordinate systems do not rotate. (That is, they remain fixed in their original global orientation.)
The superelement matrices and load vectors are modified if any rotations occur.
Notes
The SETRAN command creates a superelement from an existing superelement and writes the new element to
a file. You can then issue an SE command to read the new element (during the use pass).
You can create a superelement from an original by:
Transferring the original's geometry from the active coordinate system into another coordinate system
(KCNTO)
Offsetting its geometry in the global Cartesian coordinate system (DX, DY, and DZ )
Offsetting its node numbers (INC).
A combination of methods is valid. If you specify both the geometry transfer and the geometry offset, the
transfer occurs first.
If you specify rotation of the transferred superelement's nodal coordinate systems into the KCNTO system (NOROT
= 0), the rotated nodes cannot be coupled via the CP command; in this case, issue the CE command instead. If
you specify no rotation of the nodal coordinate systems (NOROT = 1) for models with displacement degrees of
freedom, and KCNTO is not the active system, the superelement Sename must have six MDOF at each node that
has MDOF; therefore, only elements with all six structural DOFs are valid in such cases.
The maximum number of transformations for a given superelement is five (including SETRAN, SESYMM, and
the large rotation transformation if NLGEOM is ON in the use pass).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Superelem>By CS Transfer
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Superelem>By Geom Offset
SEXP, LabR, Lab1, Lab2, EXP1, EXP2
Forms an element table item by exponentiating and multiplying.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to results. If same as existing label, the existing values will be overwritten by these results.
Lab1
First labeled result item in operation.
Lab2
Second labeled result item in operation (may be blank).
EXP1
Exponent applied to Lab1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31211
SF
EXP2
Exponent applied to EXP2.
Notes
Forms a labeled result item (see ETABLE command) for the selected elements by exponentiating and multiplying
two existing labeled result items according to the operation:
LabR = (|Lab1|
EXP1
) x (|Lab2|EXP2)
Roots, reciprocals, and divides may also be done with this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Exponentiate
SF, Nlist, Lab, VALUE, VALUE2
Specifies surface loads on nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Nlist
Nodes defining the surface upon which the load is to be applied. Use the label ALL or P, or a component
name. If ALL, all selected nodes [NSEL] are used (default). If P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Lab
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each element type
in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: PRES (pressure). Thermal labels: CONV (convection); HFLUX
(heat flux); RAD (radiation); RDSF (surface-to-surface radiation). Acoustic Fluid labels: FSI (fluid-structure interaction flag); IMPD (impedance); PTOT (constant total pressure. Magnetic labels: MXWF (Maxwell force
flag); MCI (magnetic circuit interface). Electric labels: CHRGS (surface charge density); MXWF (Maxwell force
flag). Infinite element labels: INF (Exterior surface flag for INFIN110 and INFIN111). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: PORT (number 1 through 50 for a waveguide exterior port); SHLD (surface shielding properties); MXWF (Maxwell surface flag of equivalent source surface). Field-Surface Interface label: FSIN (field-surface
interface number).
Note Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis,
apply the field-surface interface flag (Label = FSIN) twice: once for the fluid side (FLUID141 or FLUID142
elements) and once for the solid side. For an acoustic analysis, apply the fluid-structure interaction
flag (Label = FSI) to only the FLUID129 or FLUID130 elements. For more information about these
analyses and labels, see the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide and the ANSYS Elements Reference.
VALUE
Surface load value or table name reference for specifying tabular boundary conditions.
If Lab = PRES, VALUE is the real component of the pressure.
If Lab = CONV, VALUE is typically the film coefficient and VALUE2 (below) is typically the bulk temperature.
If VALUE = -N, the film coefficient may be a function of temperature and is determined from the HF property
31212
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SF
table for material N [MP]. The temperature used to evaluate the film coefficient is usually the average between
the bulk and wall temperatures, but may be user-defined for some elements.
If Lab = MCI, VALUE indicates current direction (-1; current flow into the element face (IN), +1; current flow
out of the element face (OUT). If Lab = RAD, VALUE is surface emissivity.
If Lab = PORT, VALUE is a port number representing a waveguide exterior port. The port number must be
an integer between 1 and 50.
If Lab = SHLD, VALUE is surface conductivity.
If Lab = RDSF, VALUE is the emissivity value; the following conditions apply: If VALUE is between 0 and 1,
apply a single value to the surface. If VALUE= -N, the emissivity may be a function of the temperature, and is
determined from the EMISS property table for material N (MP). The material N does not need to correlate
with the underlying solid thermal elements.
If Lab = FSIN, VALUE is the interface number.
VALUE2
Second surface load value (if any).
If Lab = PRES, VALUE2 is the imaginary component of the pressure. Imaginary pressures can only be used
by SURF153 and SURF154 and can only be used for a full harmonic response analysis (HROPT,FULL), or by a
mode superposition harmonic response analysis (HROPT,MSUP) if the mode extraction method is Block
Lanczos (MODOPT,LANB).
If Lab = CONV, VALUE2 is typically the bulk temperature.
If Lab = RAD, VALUE2 is the ambient temperature.
If Lab = SHLD, VALUE2 is relative permeability and defaults to 1.0.
If Lab = RDSF, VALUE2 is the enclosure number. Radiation will occur between surfaces flagged with the same
enclosure numbers. If the enclosure is open, radiation will also occur to ambient. If VALUE2 is negative radiation
direction is reversed and will occur inside the element for the flagged radiation surfaces. Negative value of
enclosure number is applicable for FLUID141 and FLUID142 elements, to model radiation occurring between
surfaces inside the fluid domain.
VALUE2 is not used for PORT or FSIN.
Notes
Individual nodes may not be entered for this command. The node list is to identify a surface and the Nlist field
must contain a sufficient number of nodes to define an element surface. The loads are internally stored on element
faces defined by the specified nodes. All nodes on an element face must be specified for the face to be used,
and the element must be selected. If all nodes defining a face are shared by an adjacent face of another selected
element, the face is not free and will not have a load applied. If more than one element can share the same nodes
(for example, a surface element attached to a solid element), select the desired element type before issuing the
SF command. The SF command applies only to area and volume elements. For shell elements, if the specified
nodes include face one (which is usually the bottom face) along with other faces (such as edges), only face one
is used. Where faces cannot be uniquely determined from the nodes, or where the face does not fully describe
the load application, use the SFE command. A load key of 1 (which is typically the first loading condition on the
first face) is used if the face determination is not unique. A uniform load value is applied over the element face.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31213
SF
See the SFBEAM command for applying surface loads to beam elements. See the SFGRAD command for an alternate tapered load capability. See the SFFUN command for applying loads from a node vs. value function. Also
see the SFE command for applying tapered loads on individual element faces. Use the SFDELE command to
delete loads applied with this command. Use the SFCUM command to accumulate (add) surface loads applied
with SF.
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname% and/or VALUE2 = %tabname%) are available for the following
surface load labels (Lab) only: PRES (real and/or imaginary components), CONV (film coefficient and/or bulk
temperature) or HFLUX, and RAD (surface emissivity and ambient temperature). Use the *DIM command to
define a table.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Node Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Node Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Nodes
31214
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFA
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Nodes
SFA, AREA, LKEY, Lab, VALUE, VALUE2
Specifies surface loads on the selected areas.
SOLUTION: Solid Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area to which surface load applies. If ALL, apply load to all selected areas [ASEL]. If AREA = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component may be substituted for AREA.
LKEY
Load key associated with surface load (defaults to 1). Load keys (1,2,3, etc.) are listed under "Surface Loads"
in the input data table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. LKEY is ignored if the area is
the face of a volume region meshed with volume elements.
Lab
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each area type in
the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural label: PRES (pressure). Thermal labels: CONV (convection); HFLUX
(heat flux); RAD (radiation); RDSF (surface-to-surface radiation). Fluid labels: FSI (fluid-structure interaction
flag); IMPD (impedance). Magnetic label: MXWF (Maxwell force flag); MCI (magnetic circuit interface). Electric
labels: MXWF (Maxwell force flag), CHRGS (surface charge density). Infinite element label: INF (Exterior surface
flag for INFIN110 and INFIN111). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: PORT (number 1 through 50 for a
waveguide exterior port); SHLD (surface shielding properties). Field-Surface interface label: FSIN (field-surface
interface number).
Note Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis,
apply the field-surface interface flag (Label = FSIN) twice: once for the fluid side (FLUID141 or FLUID142
elements) and once for the solid side. For an acoustic analysis, apply the fluid-structure interaction
flag (Label = FSI) to only the FLUID129 or FLUID130 elements. For more information about these
analyses and labels, see the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide and the ANSYS Elements Reference.
VALUE
Surface load value or table name reference for specifying tabular boundary conditions. If Lab = CONV, VALUE
is typically the film coefficient and VALUE2 (below) is typically the bulk temperature. If Lab = CONV and
VALUE = -N, the film coefficient may be a function of temperature and is determined from the HF property
table for material N [MP]. The temperature used to evaluate the film coefficient is usually the average between
the bulk and wall temperatures, but may be user-defined for some elements. To specify a table, enclose the
table name in percent signs (%) (e.g., SF,NLIST,Lab,%tabname%). Use the *DIM command to define a table.
If Lab = MCI, VALUE indicates current direction (-1; current flow into the element face (IN), +1; current flow
out of the element face (OUT). If Lab = RAD, VALUE is the surface emissivity. If Lab = PORT, VALUE is a port
number representing a waveguide exterior port. The port number must be an integer between 1 and 50. If
Lab = SHLD, VALUE is surface conductivity. If Lab = RDSF, VALUE is the emissivity value; the following conditions apply: If VALUE is between 0 and 1, apply a single value to the surface. If VALUE= -N, the emissivity may
be a function of the temperature, and is determined from the EMISS property table for material N (MP). The
material N does not need to correlate with the underlying solid thermal elements. If Lab = FSIN, VALUE is the
interface number and LKEY is ignored.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31215
SFA
VALUE2
Second surface load value (if any). If Lab = CONV, VALUE2 is typically the bulk temperature. If Lab = RADVALUE2
is ambient temperature.VALUE2 is not used for other surface load labels. VALUE2 is not used for PORT. If Lab
= SHLD, VALUE2 is relative permeability (defaults to 1.0). If Lab = RDSF, VALUE2 is the enclosure number.
Radiation will occur between surfaces flagged with the same enclosure numbers. If the enclosure is open,
radiation will also occur to ambient. If VALUE2 is negative radiation direction is reversed and will occur inside
the element for the flagged radiation surfaces. Negative value of enclosure number is applicable for FLUID141
and FLUID142 elements, to model radiation occurring between surfaces inside the fluid domain. To specify
a table (Lab = CONV), enclose the table name in percent signs (%) (e.g., SFA,NLIST,Lab,VALUE,%tabname%).
Use the *DIM command to define a table.
Notes
Surface loads may be transferred from areas to elements with the SFTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. See the
SFGRAD command for an alternate tapered load capability.
Tabular boundary conditions (VALUE = %tabname% and/or VALUE2 = %tabname%) are available for the following
surface load labels (Lab) only: PRES (real and/or imaginary components), CONV (film coefficient and/or bulk
temperature) or HFLUX, and RAD (surface emissivity and ambient temperature). Use the *DIM command to
define a table.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On
Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Areas
31216
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFACT
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Areas
SFACT, TYPE
Allows safety factor or margin of safety calculations to be made.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TYPE
Type of calculation:
0
No nodal safety factor or margin of safety calculations.
1
Calculate and store safety factors in place of nodal stresses.
2
Calculate and store margins of safety in place of nodal stresses.
Command Default
No nodal safety factor or margin of safety calculations.
Notes
Allows safety factor (SF) or margin of safety (MS) calculations to be made for the average nodal stresses according
to:
SF = SALLOW/|Stress|
MS = (SALLOW/|Stress|) -- 1.0
Calculations are done during the display, select, or sort operation (in the active coordinate system [RSYS]) with
results stored in place of the nodal stresses. Use the PRNSOL or PLNSOL command to display the results.
Note The results are meaningful only for the stress (SIG1, SIGE, etc.) upon which SALLOW is based.
Nodal temperatures used are those automatically stored for the node. Related commands are SFCALC,
SALLOW, TALLOW.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>Restore NodeStrs
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31217
SFADELE
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>SF for Node Strs
SFADELE, AREA, LKEY, Lab
Deletes surface loads from areas.
SOLUTION: Solid Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area to which surface load deletion applies. If ALL, delete load from all selected areas [ASEL]. If AREA = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may be substituted for AREA.
LKEY
Load key associated with surface load (defaults to 1). See the SFA command for details.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. See the SFA command for labels.
Notes
Deletes surface loads (and all corresponding finite element loads) from selected areas.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Surface Ld>On All Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelExtPort>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Surface Ld>On All Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelExtPort>On Areas
31218
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFBEAM
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Areas
SFALIST, AREA, Lab
Lists the surface loads for the specified area.
SOLUTION: Solid Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
AREA
Area at which surface load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected areas [ASEL]. If AREA = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may be substituted for AREA.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL (or blank), use all appropriate labels. See the SFA command for labels.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On All Areas
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On Picked Areas
SFBEAM, ELEM, LKEY, Lab, VALI, VALJ, VAL2I, VAL2J, IOFFST, JOFFST
Specifies surface loads on beam elements.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ELEM
Element to which surface load is applied. If ALL, apply load to all selected beam elements [ESEL]. If ELEM =
P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may be substituted in ELEM.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31219
SFBEAM
LKEY
Load key associated with surface load (defaults to 1). Load keys (1, 2, 3, etc.) are listed under "Surface Loads"
in the input table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. For beam elements, the load key
defines the load orientation.
Lab
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each element type
in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: PRES (pressure).
VALI, VALJ
Surface load values at nodes I and J. If VALJ is blank, it defaults to VALI. If VALJ is zero, a zero is used.
VAL2I, VAL2J
Second surface load values at nodes I and J. Currently not used.
IOFFST
Offset distance from node I (toward node J) where VALI is applied.
JOFFST
Offset distance from node J (toward node I) where VALJ is applied. Offsets are available only for lateral surfaces
of line elements having a KEYOPT(10) which is set. If no offsets are specified, the load is applied over the full
element length. Values may also be input as length fractions, depending on the KEYOPT(10) setting. For example, for a line length of 5.0, an IOFFST distance of 2.0 or an IOFFST fraction of 0.4 represent the same
point. If JOFFST = -1, VALI is assumed to be a point load at the location specified with IOFFST and VALJ is
ignored.
Notes
Specifies surface loads on the selected beam elements. Use the SFELIST and SFEDELE commands to list and
delete surface loads applied with this command.
Use the SFCUM command to accumulate (add) surface loads applied with SFBEAM. When SFBEAM follows
SFCUM,ADD, the same IOFFST and JOFFST values must be used as on the previous SFBEAM command (for a
given element face). Otherwise, the loads will not be accumulated. Leaving IOFFST and JOFFST blank will cause
the previous offset values to be used (only when SFBEAM follows SFCUM).
For elements PIPE16, PIPE17, PIPE18, PIPE20, and PIPE60, tapered pressures are not recognized. Only constant
pressures are supported for these elements.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Beams
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Beams
31220
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFCUM
SFCALC, LabR, LabS, LabT, TYPE
Calculates the safety factor or margin of safety.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to results. If same as existing label, the existing values will be overwritten by these results.
LabS
Labeled result item corresponding to the element stress.
LabT
Labeled result item corresponding to the element temperature.
TYPE
Type of calculation:
0 or 1
Use safety factor (SF) calculation.
2
Use margin of safety (MS) calculation.
3
Use 1/SF calculation.
Notes
Calculates safety factor (SF) or margin of safety (MS) as described for the SFACT command for any labeled result
item (see ETABLE command) for the selected elements. Use the PRETAB or PLETAB command to display results.
Allowable element stress is determined from the SALLOW-TALLOW table [SALLOW, TALLOW].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>SF for ElemTable
SFCUM, Lab, Oper, FACT, FACT2
Specifies that surface loads are to be accumulated.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural label: PRES (pressure). Thermal labels:
CONV (convection); HFLUX (heat flux). Substructure label: SELV (Load vector number). Electric labels: CHRGS
(surface charge density), MXWF (Maxwell force flag). Magnetic label: MXWF (Maxwell force flag). Infinite
element: INF (Exterior surface flag for INFIN110 and INFIN111). Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually
exclusive.
Oper
Accumulation key:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31221
SFCUM
REPL
Subsequent values replace the previous values (default).
ADD
Subsequent values are added to the previous values.
IGNO
Subsequent values are ignored.
FACT
Scale factor for the first surface load value. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
FACT2
Scale factor for the second surface load value. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
Command Default
Replace previous values.
Notes
Allows repeated surface loads (pressure, convection, etc.) to be replaced, added, or ignored. Surface loads are
applied with the SF, SFE, and SFBEAM commands. Issue the SFELIST command to list the surface loads. The
operations occur when the next surface load specifications are defined. For example, issuing the SF command
with a pressure value of 25 after a previous SF command with a pressure value of 20 causes the current value of
that pressure to be 45 with the add operation, 25 with the replace operation, or 20 with the ignore operation.
All new pressures applied with SF after the ignore operation will be ignored, even if no current pressure exists
on that surface.
Scale factors are also available to multiply the next value before the add or replace operation. A scale factor of
2.0 with the previous "add" example results in a pressure of 70. Scale factors are applied even if no previous values
exist. Issue SFCUM,STAT to show the current label, operation, and scale factors. Solid model boundary conditions
are not affected by this command, but boundary conditions on the FE model are affected.
Note The FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by existing solid model boundary conditions
if a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
SFCUM does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Surface Loads
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Surface Loads
31222
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFDELE
SFDELE, Nlist, Lab
Deletes surface loads.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Nlist
Label defining where to find the list of nodes:
ALL
Use all selected nodes [NSEL]. If P, use graphical picking in GUI. A component label may be substituted
for Nlist.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. See the SF command for labels.
Notes
Deletes surface loads as applied with the SF command. Loads are deleted only for the specified nodes on external
faces of selected area and volume elements. For shell elements, if the specified nodes include face one (which
is usually the bottom face) along with other faces (such as edges), only the loads on face one will be deleted.
The element faces are determined from the list of selected nodes as described for the SF command. See the
SFEDELE command for deleting loads explicitly by element faces.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelExtPort>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Node Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>DelExtPort>On Nodes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31223
SFE
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Node Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Nodes
SFE, ELEM, LKEY, Lab, KVAL, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Specifies surface loads on elements.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element to which surface load applies. If ALL, apply load to all selected elements [ESEL]. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may be substituted for ELEM.
LKEY
Load key associated with surface load (defaults to 1). Load keys (1,2,3, etc.) are listed under "Surface Loads"
in the input data table for each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Lab
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each element type
in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: PRES (pressure). Thermal labels: CONV (convection); HFLUX
(heat flux); RAD (radiation); RDSF (surface-to-surface radiation). Fluid labels: FSI (fluid-structure interaction
flag); VFRC (volume fraction for VOF method); IMPD (impedance). Magnetic labels: MXWF (Maxwell force
flag). Infinite element labels: INF (Exterior surface flag for INFIN110 and INFIN111). Substructure label: SELV
(load vector number). Electric labels: CHRGS (Surface Charge density); MXWF (Maxwell force flag). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: PORT (waveguide port number); SHLD (surface shielding properties). FieldSurface interface label: FSIN (field-surface interface number).
Note Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis,
apply the field-surface interface flag (Label = FSIN) twice: once for the fluid side (FLUID141 or FLUID142
elements) and once for the solid side. For an acoustic analysis, apply the fluid-structure interaction
flag (Label = FSI) to only the FLUID129 or FLUID130 elements. For more information about these
analyses and labels, see the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide and the ANSYS Elements Reference.
KVAL
Value key. If Lab = PRES:
0 or 1
VAL1 through VAL4 are used as real components of pressures.
31224
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFE
2
VAL1 through VAL4 are used as imaginary components of pressures.
Value key. If Lab = CONV:
0 or 1
VAL1 through VAL4 are used as the film coefficients.
2
VAL1 through VAL4 are the bulk temperatures.
Value key. If Lab = SHLD:
0 or 1
VAL1 through VAL4 are used as the electrical conductivities.
2
VAL1 through VAL4 are used as the relative permeabilities.
Value key. If Lab = RAD:
0 or 1
VAL1 through VAL4 are used as the emissivities.
2
VAL1 through VAL4 are ambient temperatures.
Value key. If Lab = RDSF:
0 or 1
VAL1 is the emissivity value between 0 and 1.
2
VAL1 is the enclosure number.
Value key. If Lab = VFRC:
0 or 1
VAL1 is the boundary load value. VAL1 defaults to 1.
2
VAL1 is the wetting status. VAL1 defaults to 0 or non-wetting.
If only one set of data is supplied (either emissivities or temperatures when Lab = RAD; or either film coefficients or temperatures when Lab = CONV; or either conductivity or relative permeability when Lab = SHLD),
the other set of data defaults to previously specified values (or zero if not previously specified).
VAL1
First surface load value (typically at the first node of the face) or the name of a table for specifying tabular
boundary conditions. Face nodes are listed in the order given for "Surface Loads" in the input data table for
each element type in the ANSYS Elements Reference. For example, for SOLID45, the item 1-JILK associates
LKEY = 1 (face 1) with nodes J, I, L, and K. Surface load value VAL1 then applies to node J of face 1. To specify
a table, enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., %tabname%. Use the *DIM command to define a
table. VAL2 applies to node I, etc.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31225
SFE
If Lab = PRES and KVAL = 2, VAL1 is the imaginary pressure, which is used only by SURF153 or SURF154 in
full harmonic response analyses (HROPT,FULL), or by a mode superposition harmonic response analysis
(HROPT,MSUP) if the mode extraction method is Block Lanczos (MODOPT,LANB).
If Lab = CONV, KVAL = 0 or 1, and VAL1 = -N, the film coefficient is assumed to be a function of temperature
and is determined from the HF property table for material N [MP]. The temperature used to evaluate the film
coefficient is usually the average between the bulk and wall temperatures, but may be user defined for some
elements.
If Lab = PORT, VAL1 is a port number representing a waveguide port. The port number must be an integer
between 1 and 6.
If Lab = RDSF, KVAL = 0 or 1, and VAL1 = -N, the emissivity is assumed to be a function of the temperature,
and is determined from the EMISS property table for material N (MP). The material N does not need to correlate
with the underlying solid thermal elements. If Lab = RDSF, KVAL = 2, and VAL1 is negative, radiation direction
is reversed and will occur inside the element for the flagged radiation surfaces. Negative value of enclosure
number is applicable for FLUID141 and FLUID142 elements, to model radiation occurring between surfaces
inside the fluid domain.
If Lab = VFRC, VAL1 is the boundary value or the wetting status, as defined by KVAL above. If Lab = VFRC
and KVAL = 2, a VAL1 setting of 1 indicates a wetted boundary. At a wetted boundary, the fluid upstream
keeps the associated elements full.
If Lab = FSIN, VAL1 is the interface number. KVAL is not used.
VAL2, VAL3, VAL4
Surface load values at the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th nodes (if any) of the face. If all three values are blank, all three
default to VAL1, giving a constant load. Zero or other blank values are used as zero. To specify a table (Lab
= CONV), enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., %tabname%. Use the *DIM command to define
a table.
Notes
Specifies surface loads on selected elements.
Caution: You cannot use the SFE command with the INFIN110 or INFIN111 elements without prior
knowledge of element face orientation, i.e., you must know which face is the exterior in order to flag it.
Also, the surface effect elements, SURF153 and SURF154, use LKEY to allow the import of tangential and
other loads (see SURF153 and SURF154 of the ANSYS Elements Reference for more details).
Tapered loads may be applied over the faces of most elements. Exceptions include elements PIPE16, PIPE17,
PIPE18, PIPE20, PIPE59, and PIPE60, where tapered pressures are not recognized. Only constant pressures are
supported for these elements.
For beam elements allowing lateral surface loads that may be offset from the nodes, use the SFBEAM command
to specify the loads and offsets. See the SF command for an alternate surface load definition capability based
upon node numbers. See the SFGRAD command for an alternate tapered load capability. Use the SFCUM
command to accumulate (add) surface loads applied with SFE.
You can specify a table name only when using structural (PRES) and thermal (CONV (film coefficient and/or bulk
temperature), HFLUX), boundary value and wetting status (VFRC), and surface emissivity and ambient temperature
(RAD) surface load labels. The Volume of Fluid method (Lab = VFRC) is applicable only for FLUID141.
31226
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFEDELE
This command is also valid in PREP7.
When a tabular function load is applied to an element, the load will not vary according to the positioning of the
element in space.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For Superelement
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Element Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Elements>Tapered
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Elements>Uniform
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Load Vector>For Superelement
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Element Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Elements>Tapered
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Elements>Uniform
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Elements
SFEDELE, ELEM, LKEY, Lab
Deletes surface loads from elements.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element to which surface load deletion applies. If ALL, delete load from all selected elements [ESEL]. If ELEM
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may be substituted for ELEM.
LKEY
Load key associated with surface load (defaults to 1). If ALL, delete surface loads for all load keys.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. See the SFE command for labels.
Notes
Deletes surface loads from selected elements. See the SFDELE command for an alternate surface load deletion
capability based upon selected nodes.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31227
SFEDELE
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Surface Ld>On All Elems
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On
Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For Superelement
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Element Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Surface Ld>On All Elems
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Load Vector>For Superelement
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Element Components
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Elements
31228
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFFUN
SFELIST, ELEM, Lab
Lists the surface loads for elements.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Element at which surface load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list loads for all selected elements [ESEL]. If
ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may be substituted for ELEM.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL (or blank), use all appropriate labels. Structural label: PRES (pressure). Thermal
labels: CONV (convection); HFLUX (heat flux); RAD (radiation); RDSF (surface-to-surface radiation). Fluid labels:
FSI (fluid-structure interaction flag); VFRC (volume fraction for VOF method); IMPD (impedance). Magnetic
label: MXWF (Maxwell force flag). Substructure label: SELV (Load vector number). Electric labels: CHRGS
(surface charge density); MXWF (Maxwell force flag). Infinite element label: INF (Exterior surface flag for INFIN110 and INFIN111). High-frequency electromagnetic labels: PORT (waveguide port number); SHLD (surface
shielding properties). Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive. If Lab = SFI, only the fluid
elements must be selected for the flag to be applied.
Notes
The surface loads listed correspond to the current database values. The database is not updated for surface loads
in POST1. Surface loads specified in tabular form, however, do list their values corresponding to the current results
set in POST1.
For SURF151 or SURF152 elements with an extra node for radiation and/or convection calculations (KEYOPT(5)
= 1), the bulk temperature listed is the temperature of the extra node. If the thermal solution does not converge,
the extra node temperature is not available for listing.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On All Elements
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On Picked Elems
SFFUN, Lab, Par, Par2
Specifies a varying surface load.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each element type
in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural label: PRES (pressure). Thermal labels: CONV (convection); HFLUX
(heat flux). Electric labels: CHRGS (Surface Charge density). Issue SFFUN,STATUS to list current command
settings. Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31229
SFGRAD
Par
Parameter containing list of surface load values. If Lab = CONV, values are typically the film coefficients and
Par2 values (below) are typically the bulk temperatures.
Par2
Parameter containing list of second surface load values (if any). If Lab = CONV, the Par2 values are typically
the bulk temperatures. Par2 is not used for other surface load labels.
Notes
Specifies a surface load "function" to be used when the SF or SFE command is issued. The function is supplied
through an array parameter vector which contains nodal surface load values. Node numbers are implied from
the sequential location in the array parameter. For example, a value in location 11 applies to node 11. The element
faces are determined from the implied list of nodes when the SF or SFE command is issued. Zero values should
be supplied for nodes that have no load. A tapered load value may be applied over the element face. These loads
are in addition to any loads that are also specified with the SF or SFE commands. Issue SFFUN (with blank remaining fields) to remove this specification. Issue SFFUN,STATUS to list current settings.
Starting array element numbers must be defined for each array parameter vector. For example, SFFUN,CONV,A(1,1),A(1,2) reads the first and second columns of array A (starting with the first array element of
each column) and associates the values with the nodes. Operations continue on successive column array elements
until the end of the column.
SFFUN does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>For Surface Ld>Node Function
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>For Surface Ld>Node Function
SFGRAD, Lab, SLKCN, Sldir, SLZER, SLOPE
Specifies a gradient (slope) for surface loads.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each element type
in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural labels: PRES (pressure (real pressure only)). Thermal labels: CONV
(convection (bulk temperatures only)); HFLUX (heat flux). Electric labels: CHRGS (surface charge density).
Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive.
SLKCN
Reference number of slope coordinate system (used with Sldir and SLZER to determine COORD). Defaults
to 0 (the global Cartesian coordinate system).
Sldir
Slope direction in coordinate system SLKCN:
31230
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFGRAD
X
Slope is along X direction (default). Interpreted as R direction for non-Cartesian coordinate systems.
Y
Z
Slope is along Y direction. Interpreted as direction for non-Cartesian coordinate systems.
Slope is along Z direction. Interpreted as direction for spherical or toroidal coordinate systems.
SLZER
Coordinate location (degrees for angular input) where slope contribution is zero (CVALUE = VALUE). Allows
the slope contribution to be shifted along the slope direction. For angular input, SLZER should be between
180 if the singularity [CSCIR] is at 180 and should be between 0 and 360 if the singularity is at 0.
SLOPE
Slope value (load per unit length or per degree).
Notes
Specifies a gradient (slope) for surface loads. All surface loads issued with the SF, SFE, SFL, or SFA commands
while this specification is active will have this gradient applied (for complex pressures, only the real component
will be affected; for convections, only the bulk temperature will be affected). The load value, CVALUE, calculated
at each node is:
CVALUE = VALUE + (SLOPE X (COORD-SLZER))
where VALUE is the load value specified on the subsequent SF, SFE, SFL, or SFA commands and COORD is the
coordinate value (in the Sldir direction of coordinate system SLKCN) of the node. Only one SFGRAD specification
may be active at a time (repeated use of this command replaces the previous specification with the new specification). Issue SFGRAD (with blank fields) to remove the specification. Issue SFGRAD,STAT to show the current
command status. The SFGRAD specification (if active) is removed when the LSREAD (if any) command is issued.
For elements PIPE16, PIPE17, PIPE18, PIPE20, and PIPE60, tapered pressures are not recognized. Only constant
pressures are supported for these elements.
SFGRAD does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>For Surface Ld>Gradient
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>For Surface Ld>Gradient
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31231
SFL
SFL, LINE, Lab, VALI, VALJ, VAL2I, VAL2J
Specifies surface loads on lines of an area.
SOLUTION: Solid Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line to which surface load applies. If ALL, apply load to all selected lines [LSEL]. If LINE = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may
be substituted for LINE.
Lab
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each element type
in the ANSYS Elements Reference. Structural label: PRES (pressure). Thermal labels: CONV (convection); HFLUX
(heat flux); RAD (radiation); RDSF (surface-to-surface radiation). Fluid labels: FSI (fluid-structure interaction
flag); VFRC (volume fraction for VOF method); IMPD (impedance). Magnetic label: MXWF (Maxwell force flag).
Electric labels: MXWF (electrostatic force flag), CHRGS (surface charge density). Infinite element label: INF
(Exterior surface flag for INFIN110 and INFIN111). Field-Surface Interface label: FSIN (field-surface interface
number).
Note Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis,
apply the field-surface interface flag (Label = FSIN) twice: once for the fluid side (FLUID141 or FLUID142
elements) and once for the solid side. For an acoustic analysis, apply the fluid-structure interaction
flag (Label = FSI) to only the FLUID129 or FLUID130 elements. For more information about these
analyses and labels, see the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide and the ANSYS Elements Reference.
VALI, VALJ
Surface load values at the first keypoint (VALI) and at the second keypoint (VALJ) of the line, or table name
for specifying tabular boundary conditions. If VALJ is blank, it defaults to VALI. If VALJ is zero, a zero is used.
If Lab = CONV, VALI and VALJ are the film coefficients and VAL2I and VAL2J are the bulk temperatures.
To specify a table, enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., %tabname%. Use the *DIM command
to define a table. If Lab = CONV and VALI = -N, the film coefficient may be a function of temperature and is
determined from the HF property table for material N [MP]. If Lab = RAD, VALI and VALJ values are surface
emissivities and VAL2I and VAL2J are ambient temperatures. The temperature used to evaluate the film
coefficient is usually the average between the bulk and wall temperatures, but may be user defined for some
elements. If Lab = RDSF, VALI is the emissivity value; the following condition apply: If VALI = -N, the
emissivity may be a function of the temperature and is determined from the EMISS property table for material N [MP]. If Lab = VFRC, VALI is the boundary value (defaults to 1). If Lab = FSIN, VALI is the interface
number. VALJ, VAL2I, and VAL2J are not used.
VAL2I, VAL2J
Second surface load values (if any). If Lab = CONV, VAL2I and VAL2J are the bulk temperatures. If Lab =
RAD, VAL2I and VAL2J are the ambient temperatures. If Lab = RDSF, VAL2I is the enclosure number. Radiation
will occur between surfaces flagged with the same enclosure numbers. If the enclosure is open, radiation
will occur to the ambient. Negative value of enclosure number is applicable for FLUID141 and FLUID142
elements, to model radiation occurring between surfaces inside the fluid domain. VAL2I and VAL2J are not
used for other surface load labels. If VAL2J is blank, it defaults to VAL2I. If VAL2J is zero, a zero is used. To
specify a table (Lab = CONV), enclose the table name in percent signs (%), e.g., %tabname%. Use the *DIM
command to define a table. If Lab = VFRC, VAL2I is the wetting status value (defaults to 0 or non-wetting).
If Lab = VFRC, a VAL2I setting of 1 indicates a wetted boundary. At a wetted boundary, the fluid upstream
keeps the associated elements full.
31232
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFL
Notes
Specifies surface loads on the selected lines of area regions. The lines represent either the edges of area elements
or axisymmetric shell elements themselves. Surface loads may be transferred from lines to elements with the
SFTRAN or SBCTRAN commands. See the SFE command for a description of surface loads. Loads input on this
command may be tapered. See the SFGRAD command for an alternate tapered load capability.
You can specify a table name only when using structural (PRES) and thermal (CONV (film coefficient and/or bulk
temperature), HFLUX), boundary value and wetting status (VFRC), and surface emissivity and ambient temperature
(RAD) surface load labels. VALJ and VAL2J are ignored for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31233
SFLDELE
SFLDELE, LINE, Lab
Deletes surface loads from lines.
SOLUTION: Solid Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line to which surface load deletion applies. If ALL, delete load from all selected lines [LSEL]. If LINE = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may be substituted for LINE.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. See the SFL command for labels.
Notes
Deletes surface loads (and all corresponding finite element loads) from selected lines.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Surface Ld>On All Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On
Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Surface Ld>On All Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Field Surface Intr>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Pressure>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Convection>On Lines
31234
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SFLIST
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Radiation>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Lines
SFLIST, NODE, Lab
Lists surface loads.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NODE
Node at which surface load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may be substituted for NODE.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL (or blank), use all appropriate labels. Structural labels: PRES (pressure). Thermal
labels: CONV (convection); HFLUX (heat flux); RAD (radiation); RDSF (surface-to-surface radiation). Fluid labels:
FSI (fluid-structure interaction flag); IMPD (impedance). Magnetic labels: MXWF (Maxwell force flag); MCI
(magnetic circuit interface). Electric label: CHRGS (surface charge density); MXWF (Maxwell force flag). Highfrequency electromagnetic labels: PORT (waveguide port number); SHLD (surface shielding properties). Infinite element label: INF (exterior surface flag for INFIN110 and INFIN111). If Lab = FSI, only the fluid elements
must be selected for the flag to be applied.
Notes
Lists the surface loads as applied with the SF command. Loads are listed only for the specified nodes on external
faces of selected area and volume elements. Use SFELIST for line elements. The surface loads listed correspond
to the current database values. The database is not updated for surface loads in POST1. Surface loads specified
in tabular form, however, do list their values corresponding to the current results set in POST1.
For SURF151 or SURF152 elements with an extra node for radiation and/or convection calculations (KEYOPT(5)
= 1), the bulk temperature listed is the temperature of the extra node. If the thermal solution does not converge,
the extra node temperature is not available for listing.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On All Nodes
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On Picked Nodes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31235
SFLLIST
SFLLIST, LINE, Lab
Lists the surface loads for lines.
SOLUTION: Solid Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
LINE
Line at which surface load is to be listed. If ALL (or blank), list for all selected lines [LSEL]. If LINE = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may be substituted for LINE.
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL (or blank), use all appropriate labels. See the SFL command for labels.
Notes
Lists the surface loads for the specified line.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On All Lines
Utility Menu>List>Loads>Surface Loads>On Picked Lines
SFSCALE, Lab, FACT, FACT2
Scales surface loads on elements.
SOLUTION: FE Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid surface load label. If ALL, use all appropriate labels. Structural label: PRES (pressure). Thermal labels:
CONV (convection); HFLUX (heat flux). Substructure label: SELV (Load vector number). Electric labels: CHRGS
(surface charge density). Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive.
FACT
Scale factor for the first surface load value. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero scale
factor.
FACT2
Scale factor for the second surface load value. Zero (or blank) defaults to 1.0. Use a small number for a zero
scale factor.
Notes
Scales surface loads (pressure, convection, etc.) in the database on the selected elements. Surface loads are applied
with the SF, SFE, or SFBEAM commands. Issue the SFELIST command to list the surface loads. Solid model
boundary conditions are not scaled by this command, but boundary conditions on the FE model are scaled.
Note Such scaled FE boundary conditions may still be overwritten by unscaled solid model boundary
conditions if a subsequent boundary condition transfer occurs.
31236
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SHADE
SFSCALE does not work for tabular boundary conditions.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Surface Loads
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Scale FE Loads>Surface Loads
SFTRAN
Transfer the solid model surface loads to the finite element model.
SOLUTION: Solid Surface Loads
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Surface loads are transferred only from selected lines and areas to all selected elements. The SFTRAN operation
is also done if the SBCTRAN command is issued or automatically done upon initiation of the solution calculations
[SOLVE].
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Surface Loads
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Operate>Transfer to FE>Surface Loads
/SHADE, WN, Type
Defines the type of surface shading used with Z-buffering.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
Type
Shading type:
FACET or 0
Facet shading (one color per area face) (default).
GOURAUD or 1
Gouraud smooth shading (smooth variation of color based on interpolated vertex colors).
PHONG or 2
Phong smooth shading (smooth variation of color based on interpolated vertex normals).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31237
SHELL
Command Default
Facet shading.
Notes
Defines the type of surface shading used on area, volume, and PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER] displays
when software Z-buffering is enabled [/TYPE]. This command is only functional for 2-D display devices.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Hidden-Line Options
SHELL, Loc
Selects a shell element or shell layer location for results output.
POST1: Controls
POST26: Controls
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Loc
Location within shell element (or layer) to obtain stress results:
TOP
Top of shell element (or layer) (default).
MID
Middle of shell element (or layer). The default method averages the TOP and BOT values to obtain a mid
value. Setting KEYOPT(8) = 2 for SHELL93, SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209, or KEYOPT(11) = 2 for
SHELL63 uses MID results obtained directly from the results file.
BOT
Bottom of shell element (or layer).
Command Default
Shell element (or layer) top location.
Notes
Selects the location within a shell element (or a shell layer) for results output (nodal stresses, strains, etc.). Applies
to POST1 selects, sorts, and output [NSEL, NSORT, PRNSOL, PLNSOL, PRPATH, PLPATH, etc.], and is used for
storage with the POST26 ESOL command. For example, SHELL,TOP causes item S of the POST1 PRNSOL command
or the POST26 ESOL command to be the stresses at the top of the shell elements. For layered shell elements,
use the LAYER (POST1) or LAYERP26 (POST26) command to select the layer. The SHELL command does not
apply to the layered thermal shell elements, SHELL131 and SHELL132. For PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER],
the SHELL,MID command affects both the printed output and the displayed results, while the SHELL (TOP or
BOT) command prints and displays both the top and bottom layers simultaneously.
31238
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SHOW
In POST26, the ESOL data stored is based on the active SHELL specification at the time the data is stored. To
store data at various specifications (for example, stresses at the top and bottom locations), issue a STORE command
before each new specification.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Options for Outp
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
Utility Menu>List>Results>Options
/SHOW, Fname, Ext, VECT, NCPL
Specifies the device and other parameters for graphics displays.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
Device name, filename, or keyword, as listed below:
<device name>
Any valid graphics display device name (e.g., X11, 3-D etc.). Defaults to X11 for most systems. See Getting
Started with Graphics in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. A device name must be defined before
activating the Graphical User Interface (GUI). Once the GUI is activated, the device name cannot be
changed for that ANSYS session, except for switching between X11 and X11C.
<filename>
Name of graphics file to which graphics displays are to be diverted (248 characters maximum). Should
not be the same as a valid device name or any other Fname option. Plots are written to the file Filename.Ext (or just Filename.Ext if Ext is left blank) in the working directory. If this file already exists,
it will be overwritten unless the command is being reissued in the same ANSYS session.
TERM
Graphics displays are switched back to the last-specified device name.
CLOSE
This option purges the graphics file buffer. The CLOSE option should be issued any time you are changing
graphics devices or file output types during an ANSYS session. Graphics displays are switched back to
the last-specified device name, and any open graphics files are closed. The CLOSE option is similar to the
TERM option, however, with the CLOSE option, another process, such as the DISPLAY program, can access
the data in the graphics file. The CLOSE option causes graphics file buffers to be flushed to the graphics
file.
FILE
Graphics displays are switched back to the last-specified file name.
OFF
Graphics display requests are ignored.
(blank)
If blank in interactive mode, graphics will be displayed on screen as requested by display commands (no
file written); If blank in batch mode, graphics data will be written to Jobname.GRPH.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31239
/SHOW
PSCR
Creates PostScript graphic files that are named Jobnamennn.eps, where nnn is a numeric value that is
incremented by one as each additional file is created; that is, Jobname000.eps, Jobname001.eps,
Jobname002.eps, and so on . (See the PSCR command for options.) Ignores the Ext and NCPL fields.
HPGL
Creates Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language files that are named Jobnamennn.hpgl, where nnn is a
numeric value that is incremented by one as each additional file is created; that is, Jobname000.hpgl,
Jobname001.hpgl, Jobname002.hpgl, and so on. (See the HPGL command for options.) Ignores the
Ext and NCPL fields.
HPGL2
Creates Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language files that are named Jobnamennn.hpgl, where nn is a numeric value that is incremented by one as each additional file is created; that is, Jobname000.hpgl,
Jobname001.hpgl, Jobname02.hpgl, and so on. The HPGL2 files have enhanced color. (See the HPGL
command for options.) Ignores the Ext field.
JPEG
Creates JPEG files that are named Jobnamennn.jpg, where nnn is a numeric value that is incremented
by one as each additional file is created; that is, Jobname000.jpg, Jobname001.jpg, Jobname002.jpg,
and so on. Ignores the Ext field.
TIFF
Creates tagged image format files that are named Jobnamennn.tif, where nnn is a numeric value that
is incremented by one as each additional file is created; that is, Jobname000.tif, Jobname001.tif, Jobname002.tif, and so on. This value for the Fname argument ignores the Ext field. (See the TIFF command
for options.)
PNG
Creates PNG (Portable Network Graphics) files that are named Jobnamennn.png, where nnn is a numeric
value that is incremented by one as each additional file is created; that is, Jobname000.png, Jobname001.png, Jobname002.png, and so on. This value for the Fname argument ignores the Ext field.
(See the PNGR command for options.)
VRML
Creates Virtual Reality Meta Language files named Jobname000.wrl that can be displayed on 3-D Internet
web browsers. Ignores the Ext and NCPL fields.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
VECT
Specifies raster or vector display mode. This affects area, volume, and element displays, as well as geometric
results displays such as contour plots. See the /DEVICE command for an alternate way to toggle between
raster and vector mode. Changing VECT also resets the /TYPE command to its default.
0
Raster display (color filled entities; default)
1
Vector display (outlined entities; i.e., "wireframe")
NCPL
Sets the number of color planes (4 to 8). Default is device-dependent. NCPL is not supported by all graphics
devices.
31240
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SHOWDISP
Command Default
For interactive runs, display is shown on the screen; for batch runs, display commands are ignored (graphics file
not written).
Notes
Specifies the device to be used for graphics displays, and specifies other graphics display parameters. Display
may be shown at the time of generation (for interactive runs at a graphics display terminal) or diverted to a file
for later processing with the DISPLAY program. Issue /PSTATUS for display status.
Batch runs do not have access to the fonts available on your system. The Courier and Helvetica font files used
for JPEG, PNG and TIFF batch output are copyrighted by Adobe Systems Inc. and Digital Equipment Corp. Permission to use these trademarks is hereby granted only in association with the images described above. Batch
run JPEG output is produced at the default quality index value of 75, unless specified otherwise.
Interactive displays will default to eight color planes (NCPL = 8) for most monitors, while graph file output will
default to eight color planes for VRML output, and four color planes for PSCR, HPGL, HPGL2, JPEG, PNG, TIFF and
FILE33.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Device Options
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To GRPH File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To HPGL2 File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To PSCR File
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Redirect Plots>To Screen
/SHOWDISP, Dname, --, --, NCPL
Defines the display driver name.
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Dname
Valid driver name (see Getting Started with Graphics in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details):
<device name>
Any linked terminal driver (such as X11, TEKTRONIX, etc.)
HPGL
Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language
HPGL2
Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language with enhanced color. (See the HPGL command for options.) Ignores
the NCPL field.
INTERLEAF
Interleaf ASCII Format, OPS Version 5.0
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31241
SHPP
POSTSCRIPT
PostScript, Version 1.0 Minimally Conforming
DUMP
ASCII Text Dump
--, --
Unused fields.
NCPL
Number of color planes (4 to 8). Default is device-dependent.
Menu Paths
It is part of the DISPLAY command.
SHPP, Lab, VALUE1, VALUE2
Controls element shape checking.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Shape checking option. (When Lab = WARN, STATUS, SUMMARY, or DEFAULT, the remaining arguments are
ignored.)
ON
Activates element shape checking. New elements, regardless of how they are created, are tested against
existing warning and error limits. (The existing limits may be the default limits, or previously modified
limits.) Elements that violate error limits produce error messages and either (a) cause a meshing failure,
or (b) for element creation or storage other than AMESH or VMESH, are not stored. Elements that violate
warning limits produce warning messages. If shape checking was previously turned off [SHPP,OFF] and
you turn it on, existing elements are marked as untested; use the CHECK command to retest them. With
this option, you may also specify a value for VALUE1 to turn individual shape tests on. If you do not specify
a value for VALUE1, all shape tests are turned on.
WARN
Activates element shape checking; however, in contrast to SHPP,ON, elements that violate error limits
do not cause either a meshing or element storage failure. Instead, they produce warning messages to
notify you that error limits have been violated. This option does not alter current shape parameter limits.
Since the default shape parameter error limits are set to allow almost any usable element, the elements
this option allows, which would otherwise be forbidden, are likely to be very poorly shaped.
OFF
Deactivates element shape checking. This setting does not alter current shape parameter limits. Use of
this option is risky, since poorly shaped elements can lead to analysis results that are less accurate than
would otherwise be expected for a given mesh density. With this option, you may also specify a value
for VALUE1 to turn individual shape tests off. If you do not specify a value for VALUE1, all element shape
tests are turned off.
SILENT
Determines whether element shape checking runs in silent mode. In silent mode, ANSYS checks elements
without issuing warnings, with the exception of the generic warnings that it issues at solution. With this
31242
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SHPP
option, you must also specify a value for VALUE1 (During the execution of certain commands, ANSYS
automatically runs element shape checking in silent mode, then internally summarizes the shape test
results for all of the new or modified elements. ANSYS does this when it executes any of the following
commands: AGEN, AMESH, AREFINE, ARSYM, ATRAN, CDREAD, EGEN, ENGEN, ENSYM, EREAD, EREFINE, ESYM, ET, FVMESH, KREFINE, LREFINE, NREFINE, TIMP, VEXT, VGEN, VIMP, VMESH, VOFFST,
VROTAT, VSWEEP, VSYMM, and VTRAN.)
STATUS
Lists the shape parameter limits currently in effect, along with status information about element shape
checking (for example, whether any individual shape tests are off, whether any of the shape parameter
limits have been modified, and so on).
SUMMARY
Lists a summary of element shape test results for all selected elements.
DEFAULT
Resets element shape parameter limits to their default values. Also, if any individual tests were turned
off, turns them back on. (The SHPP,DEFAULT command may be useful if any parameter limits were previously altered by using the MODIFY option.)
OBJECT
Determines whether element shape test results data is stored in memory. When this option is turned on,
an "object" is created for storing test results in memory. When this option is turned off, no object is created
and no data is stored; thus, any operation that requires shape parameters for an existing element (such
as use of the CHECK command) causes the shape parameters to be recomputed. (Note the distinction
between storing the data in memory and storing it in the database; regardless of whether this option is
turned on or off, no element shape test results data will be stored in the database. The element shape
parameter object is deleted automatically before any solution.) This setting is independent of shape
checking status, with one exception--if shape checking is turned off [SHPP,OFF], the object is not created.
Keep in mind that recomputing shape parameters is more computationally expensive than retrieving
them from the object. With this option, you must also specify a value for the VALUE1 argument; the
VALUE2 argument is ignored.
LSTET
Determines, for Jacobian ratio tests, whether sampling is done at integration points (DesignSpace product
method), or at corner nodes. When this option is turned on, sampling is done at integration points, and
the default limits for h-element Jacobian ratios are a warning tolerance of 10 and an error tolerance of
40. When this option is turned off, sampling is done at corner nodes, and the corresponding default
limits are a warning tolerance of 30 and an error tolerance of 1000. Sampling at the integration points
(option on) results in a lower Jacobian ratio, but that ratio is also subjected to a more restrictive error
limit. Some elements that have passed the integration point sampling criterion, have failed the corner
mode sampling criterion. Because of this, use integration point sampling only for simple linear analyses.
For other types of analyses (e.g., nonlinear, electromagnetic), use sampling at corner nodes, which is the
more conservative approach. With this option, you must also specify a value for the VALUE1 argument;
the VALUE2 argument is ignored.
MODIFY
Indicates that you want to respecify a shape parameter limit. With this option, you must also specify
values for the VALUE1 and VALUE2 arguments.
FLAT
Determines the warning and error limits used to test elements that may exhibit nonzero/nonconstant
Z coordinates. With this option, you must also specify values for the VALUE1 and/or VALUE2 arguments.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31243
SHPP
VALUE1
Valid for the ON, OFF, SILENT, OBJECT, LSTET, MODIFY, and FLAT options only. When Lab = ON or OFF, use
VALUE1 to individually control (that is, turn off or turn on) specific element shape tests. Thus, VALUE1 can
be ANGD (SHELL28 corner angle deviation tests), ASPECT (aspect ratio tests), PARAL (deviation from parallelism
of opposite edges tests), MAXANG (maximum corner angle tests), JACRAT (Jacobian ratio tests), WARP
(warping factor tests), or ALL (all tests). When Lab = SILENT, VALUE1 can be ON (to turn silent mode on) or
OFF (to turn silent mode off). When Lab = OBJECT, VALUE1 can be either 1, YES, or ON to turn on storage of
element shape test data (the default); or it can be 0, NO, or OFF to turn off storage of element shape test data
(delete the data and recompute as necessary). When Lab = LSTET, VALUE1 can be either 1, YES, or ON to
choose Jacobian sampling at integration points; or it can be 0, NO, or OFF to choose Jacobian sampling at
nodes (the default). When Lab = MODIFY, VALUE1 is the numeric location (within the shape parameter limit
array) of the shape parameter limit to be modified. Locations are identified in the element shape checking
status listing [SHPP,STATUS]. For more information, see the examples in the Notes section. When Lab =
FLAT, VALUE1 is the warning limit for XY element constant Z sets performed at CHECK or SOLVE. The default
is 1.0e-8.
VALUE2
Valid for the MODIFY and FLAT options only. When Lab = MODIFY, specifies the new limit for the shape
parameter that is in the location indicated by the VALUE1 argument. See the examples in the Notes section.
When Lab = FLAT, VALUE2 is the error limit. The default is 1.0e-2.
Command Default
All shape checking tests are on [SHPP,ON,ALL] with default shape parameter limits. Silent mode is off. Memory
object storage of element shape parameters is on.
Notes
The following examples illustrate how to use the SHPP,MODIFY,VALUE1,VALUE2 command to respecify shape
parameter limits. Assume that you issued the SHPP,STATUS command, and you received the output below:
ASPECT RATIO (EXCEPT FLOTRAN OR EMAG)
QUAD OR TRIANGLE ELEMENT OR FACE
WARNING TOLERANCE ( 1) =
20.00000
ERROR TOLERANCE
( 2) = 1000000.
.
.
.
MAXIMUM CORNER ANGLE IN DEGREES (EXCEPT FLOTRAN OR EMAG)
TRIANGLE ELEMENT OR FACE
WARNING TOLERANCE (15) =
165.0000
ERROR TOLERANCE
(16) =
179.9000
Notice that in the sample output, the warning tolerance for aspect ratios is set to 20. Now assume that you want
to "loosen" this shape parameter limit so that it is less restrictive. To allow elements with aspect ratios of up to
500 without causing warning messages, you would issue this command:
SHPP,MODIFY,1,500
Also notice that each shape parameter's numeric location within the shape parameter limit array appears in the
sample output within parentheses. For example, the numeric location of the aspect ratio shape parameter (for
warning tolerance) is 1, which is why "1" is specified for the VALUE1 argument in the example command above.
31244
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SHRINK
Now notice that the sample output indicates that any triangle element with an internal angle that is greater than
179.9 degrees will produce an error message. Suppose that you want to "tighten" this shape parameter limit, so
that it is more restrictive. To cause any triangle or tetrahedron with an internal angle greater than 170 degrees
to produce an error message, you would issue this command:
SHPP,MODIFY,16,170
Warning: The existence of badly shaped elements in a model may lead to certain computational errors that can cause your system to abort during ANSYS solution. Therefore, you
run the risk of a system abort during solution any time that you turn element shape
checking off entirely, run shape checking in warning-only mode, turn off individual shape
checks, or loosen shape parameter limits.
Changing any shape parameter limit marks all existing elements as untested; use the CHECK command to retest
them.
Since the shape parameter limit array was completely reorganized at ANSYS 5.4, you should revise any input
files created prior to 5.4 that contain limit changes so that they reflect the reorganized data structure.
For more information about element shape checking, see Meshing Your Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Checking Ctrls>Shape Checking
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Checking Ctrls>Toggle Checks
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Element Shape
Checking>Shape Checking
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Mesh Controls>Element Shape
Checking>Toggle Checks
/SHRINK, RATIO
Shrinks elements, lines, areas, and volumes for display clarity.
GRAPHICS: Scaling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RATIO
Shrinkage ratio (input as a decimal (0.0 to 0.5)). Defaults to 0.0 (no shrinkage). Values greater than 0.5 default
to 0.1 (10% shrinkage).
Command Default
Full size entities.
Notes
Shrinks the elements, lines, areas, and volumes so that adjacent entities are separated for clarity. This command
is not valid with p-elements. Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31245
SHSD
If only the common lines of non-coplanar faces are drawn (as per the /EDGE command), then this command is
ignored.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Size and Shape
SHSD, RID, Action
Creates or deletes shell-solid interface to be used in shell-to-solid assemblies.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
RID
The real constant set ID that identifies the contact pair on which a shell-to-solid assembly is defined. If ALL,
all selected contact pairs will be considered for assembly.
Action
CREATE
(default) Builds new shell and contact elements to be used in shell-solid assemblies. New elements are
stored as internally-created components.
DELETE
Deletes the nodes and elements created during a previous execution of SHSD,RID,CREATE for the real
constant set identified by RID.
Notes
The SHSD command creates a shell-solid interface to be used in shell-to-solid assemblies, or deletes a previouslycreated shell-solid interface. Virtual shell elements and additional CONTA175 elements are created at the
contact pair identified by RID when Action = CREATE. Set Action = DELETE to remove the generated nodes
and elements at the contact pair identified by RID.
The SHSD command is active only when the following element KEYOPTs of associated CONTA175 and TARGE170
element types are predefined:
Element
KEYOPT
Detail
KEYOPT(2) = 2
TARGE170
KEYOPT(12) = 5, 6
bonded contact
KEYOPT(4) = 0
CONTA175
MPC algorithm
contact normal perpendicular to target surface
KEYOPT(5) = 1, 2
types of constraints: (1 = solid-solid, 2 = shell-shell)
The method used to build shell and contact elements depends on the KEYOPT(5) setting of the target element
type associated with the real constant set identified with the RID argument. If KEYOPT(5) = 1 (solid-solid constraint),
the virtual shell elements are built perpendicularly to the pre-existing shell elements attached to the contact
elements. They geometrically follow the contact interface edge and are built on both sides of this interface in
such a way that each new shell element (SHELL181) has two nodes that belong to the associated pre-existing
shell element in the shell edge (see Virtual Shell Elements Following the Contact Interface Edge). The width of
31246
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SHSD
the new shell elements is half the thickness of the pre-existing shell element. The CONTA175 elements are then
created at each node of the virtual shell elements where no CONTA175 element exists. The new contact elements
are identified by the same contact pair ID as the pre-existing contact elements.
Virtual Shell Elements Following the Contact Interface Edge
%$#!"
RP
"QI
a
` YW 5
XVUB STE B
& C
#
D )#HG6 FGDEC B
#2'1 )0'(&
4 2 '3
%#A #'@'00
09 "876) 5
If KEYOPT(5) = 2 (shell-shell constraint), the virtual shell elements (SHELL181: low order; SHELL93: high order)
overlap the existing high or low order target elements identified with the RID argument, and share their nodes.
Only those target elements close enough to the contact interface (identified using the PINB real constant) are
overlapped. ANSYS uses the FTOLN real constant (defaults to half the shell element thickness) to define an influence
distance. The associated virtual shell elements are created only for those target elements which lie partially inside
the influence distance region (see Virtual Shell Elements Overlapping Target Elements).
Virtual Shell Elements Overlapping Target Elements
yw#"iw"u sp0r
x qqd v t c
qd ege eb
pi d h f dc
qp d h d d c
0i9d ee e#q
"sp #sEd
e t
q d i p p
#1u0i(
q i d e d e
phd 4 t 3b
w"i0wq t
d u p
i" wi fr 89d
d u d eg t e
e i p
# #9r
q i d e d p d
0p9hd "8
For the bonded always option (KEYOPT(12) = 5), any contact node inside the pinball region (gap < PINB) is included
in the KEYOPT(5) = 2 process. A relatively small PINB value may be used to prevent false contact. PINB defaults
to 25% of the contact depth for small deformation analyses.
For the bonded initial option (KEYOPT(12) = 6), only those contact nodes which initially lie inside the adjustment
zone (gap < ICONT) are always included in the KEYOPT(5) = 2 process. ICONT defaults to 5% of the contact depth.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31247
SLIST
For both processes, the new nodes and elements are stored in internally-named components. The internal
naming convention is based on the real constant set ID specified by RID, as illustrated in the following table.
Nodes
SHSD_ND_RID
Contact Elements
SHSD_CN_RID
Shell Elements
SHSD_SH_RID
Issuing SHSD,RID,DELETE deletes components based on their generated names. Only components whose names
match the internal naming convention will be deleted.
Caution: Do not rename or manually delete generated components. Use the SHSD command to delete
generated components.
Renaming or manually deleting generated components will cause these components to be ignored
when SHSD,RID,DELETE is executed and when ANSYS searches for these components to verify if
SHSD,RID,CREATE can be safely executed. Manually renaming or deleting generated components and
reissuing SHSD,RID,CREATE may result in erroneous generation of virtual shell or contact elements.
See Section 7.2: Modeling a Shell-Solid Assembly in the ANSYS Contact Technology Guide for more information.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Coupling / Ceqn>Shell/Solid Interface
SLIST, SFIRST, SLAST, SINC, Details, Type
Summarizes the section properties for all defined sections in the current session of ANSYS.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SFIRST
First section ID to be summarized. Defaults to first available section in the database.
SLAST
Last section ID to be summarized. Defaults to last available section in the database.
SINC
Increment of the section ID; defaults to 1.
Details
Determines the content of the summarized information for beams and shells.
BRIEF
For beams, lists only the section integrated properties (such as Area, Iyy, and Iyz). This option is the default.
FULL
For beams, lists the section integrated properties, as well as the section nodal coordinates, section cell
connectivity information, and section cell integration point coordinates. For shells, the section stiffness
(membrane, bending, membrane-bending coupling and transverse shear) are printed.
The shell section stiffness listed considers elastic behavior of materials at reference temperature only.
The elements that use the section data may alter the transverse shear stiffness based on slenderness
considerations (in addition to the shear correction factors shown).
31248
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SLOAD
44
You can use section commands with BEAM44 elements instead of defining real constants to describe
the elements. Issuing SLIST,,,,44 lists the section integrated properties, as well as the real constant
commands that are equivalent to your section command specifications. A section made of multiple
materials cannot be modeled using BEAM44.
This option does not apply to shell sections.
Type
The section type. Valid arguments are ALL (the default), BEAM, SHELL, or PRETENSION.
Notes
For BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements, the PRSSOL command prints section nodal and section integration point
results. Stresses and strains are printed at section nodes, and plastic strains and plastic work are printed at section
integration points. PRSSOL does not support BEAM44 elements.
By default, the command lists information concerning all sections; however, you can limit the output to only
beam or pretension sections via the Type key.
Sample Output
Following is sample output from the SLIST,,,,BRIEF command for a rectangle beam section subtype:
LIST SECTION ID SETS
1 TO
1 BY
SECTION ID NUMBER:
1
BEAM SECTION TYPE:
Rectangle
BEAM SECTION NAME IS:
BEAM SECTION DATA SUMMARY:
Area
= 6.0000
Iyy
= 4.5000
Iyz
= 0.11281E-15
Izz
= 2.0000
Warping Constant
= 0.23299
Torsion Constant
= 4.7330
Center of Gravity Y =-0.30973E-16
Center of Gravity Z = 0.15376E-15
Shear Center Y
=-0.22957E-13
Shear Center Z
= 0.31281E-13
Beam Section is offset to CENTROID of cross section
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>List Sections
SLOAD, SECID, PLNLAB, KINIT, KFD, FDVALUE, LSLOAD, LSLOCK
Load a pretension section.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
SECID
Unique section number. The number must already be assigned to a pretension section.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31249
SLOAD
PLNLAB
Label representing the pretension load sequence number in the format "PLnn" where nn is an integer from
1 through 99 (for example, PL01 through PL99).
Specify a value of DELETE to delete all loads on the specified pretension section (SECID). In this case, the
command ignores any other argument values.
KINIT
Initial action key for pretension load PL01. (This field is omitted for PL02 and up.) Three scenarios are possible:
LOCK
Constrains (connects) the cutting plane on the pretension section. This value is the default.
SLID
Unconstrains (disconnects) the cutting plane on the pretension section.
TINY
Applies a very small pretension load (0.1% of FDVALUE) before the desired load is established. The small
load prevents convergence problems which can occur when the desired load is not established in the
first load step. This value is valid only if KFD = FORC.
KFD
Force/Displacement key. Specifies whether FDVALUE is a force or a displacement:
FORC
Apply a force on the specified pretension section. This value is the default.
DISP
Apply a displacement (adjustment) on the specified pretension section.
FDVALUE
Pretension load value. If KFD = FORC, this value is a pretension force. If KFD = DISP, this value is a pretension
displacement (adjustment).
LSLOAD
Load step in which to apply the FDVALUE.
LSLOCK
The load step in which the displacement value resulting from the pretension force is locked. This value is
valid only if KFD = FORC.
Command Default
The default pretension load value FDVALUE is zero (no load). A positive value puts the pretension elements in
tension.
No default exists for the LSLOAD applied load step value. You must specify the load step in which to apply the
FDVALUE.
No default exists for the LSLOCK locked load step value. You must specify the load step in which to lock the FDVALUE.
31250
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SLOAD
Notes
The SLOAD command applies pretension loads to specified pretension sections (created via the PSMESH command). A pretension load is ramp-applied (KBC = 0) if it is a force (KFD = FORC), and step-applied (KBC = 1) if it
is a displacement (KFD = DISP).
You can lock the load value at a specified load step. When locked, the load changes from a force to a displacement, and ANSYS applies the load as a constant displacement in all future load steps. Locking is useful when
applying additional loadings. The additional loadings alter the effect of the initial load value, but because locking
transforms the load into a displacement, it preserves the initial load's effect.
The following command shows how to establish loads on a pretension section:
SLOAD,1,PL01,TINY,FORC,5000,1,2
In this example, the load is applied to pretension section 1, and the sequence begins with the initial action key,
KINIT, set to TINY. The next four fields set the first load: the KFD value FORC specifies the type of load, FDVALUE
defines the pretension load value (5000), LSLOAD specifies the load step in which the force is applied (1), and
the LSLOCK field specifies the load step in which the force is locked (2). Additional sets of four fields can be used
to define additional loads.
You can use the SLOAD command to edit (overwrite) existing loads on a pretension section. This example
changes the load on pretension section 1 (set above) to 6000:
SLOAD,1,PL01,,,6000,1,2
Unspecified values (blank fields), as shown in this example, remain unchanged from prior settings. If no prior
specifications exist, then default values (KINIT = LOCK and KFD = FORC) apply.
The command can also delete all loads on a specified pretension section, as shown here:
SLOAD,1,DELETE
For a prestressed modal analysis, this command locks the pretension element:
SLOAD,1,PL01,LOCK,DISP,0,1,2
Multiple Loadings
The SLOAD command allows you to apply multiple loadings. You can add up to 15 loadings (PL01 through PL15),
or delete loadings, for any given pretension section(s).
The following SLOAD commands, issued in the order shown, establish a pretension load sequence in pretension
section 2 with a force of 25 in load step (LS) 2, locked in LS 3-6, a force of 50 in LS 7, locked in LS 8-11, a force of
75 in LS 12, locked in LS 13 and beyond:
SLOAD,2,PL01,LOCK,FORC,25,2,3
SLOAD,2,PL02,,FORC,50,7,8
SLOAD,2,PL03,,FORC,75,12,13
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31251
SLPPLOT
At the same time, you can issue SLOAD commands to apply loads on other pretension sections. For example, in
addition to the commands listed above, you could issue the following command to apply a load on pretension
section 3:
SLOAD,3,PL01,LOCK,FORC,25,3,4
Using the Pretension Section Loads GUI
Any addition or deletion of a loading applies to the selected sections only. ANSYS does not apply or delete a
load until you click on the Apply or OK button.
After you have successfully solved for a specified LSLOAD (GUI field Apply at LS) and eventually LSLOCK (GUI
field Lock at LS) value, you cannot modify that loading's settings during subsequent steps of the analysis. Similarly,
you cannot delete loadings that you have already partially or completely solved.
You can select more than one pretension section at a time in order to specify identical loadings on them. Before
you completely solve a given loading, any combination of pretension sections is valid. The following limitations
apply:
After you have completely solved one or more loadings, ANSYS allows multiple selection of only those
pretension sections having
-- the same number of defined loadings, and
-- the identical loading number from the most recent completely solved loading.
A multiple selection meeting the necessary criteria retains the settings that are identical for all selected
pretension sections and leaves all other fields blank.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pretnsn Sectn
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Section Lds
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pretnsn Sectn
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>All Load Data>All Section Lds
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
SLPPLOT, Prefer, VALUE
Displays line loops smaller than a specified size (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Prefer
Preference for line loop display. If Prefer = FACTOR, the command displays all line loops whose radius is
smaller than the radius of the model (taken between the two most distant keypoints) times VALUE. This is
the default preference. If Prefer = RADIUS, the command displays all line loops whose radius is smaller than
that specified by VALUE.
VALUE
Numeric argument for Prefer.
31252
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SMALL
Notes
Use this command to locate and display disproportionately small line loops when repairing the geometry of
models imported from CAD files. Line loops matching the criteria specified in Prefer and VALUE both display
in a different color and include their IDs. This command is available only for models imported through the Default
IGES option.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Detect/Display>Small Loops
SLSPLOT, Prefer, VALUE
Displays line segments smaller than a specified size (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Prefer
Preference for line segment display. If Prefer = FACTOR, the command displays all line segments whose
length is smaller than the average length of lines within the model times VALUE. This is the default preference.
If Prefer = LENGTH, the command displays all line lengths smaller than that specified by VALUE.
VALUE
Numeric argument for Prefer.
Notes
Use this command to locate and display disproportionately small line segments when repairing the geometry
of models imported from CAD files. Line lengths matching the criteria specified in Prefer and VALUE both display
in a different color and include their IDs. This command is available only for models imported through the Default
IGES option.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Detect/Display>Small Lines
SMALL, IR, IA, IB, IC, Name, --, --, FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Finds the smallest of three variables.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA, IB, IC
Reference numbers of the three variables to be operated on. If only two, leave IC blank. If only one, leave
IB blank also.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31253
SMAX
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA, FACTB, FACTC
Scaling factors (positive or negative) applied to the corresponding variables (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
Finds the smallest of three variables according to the operation:
IR = smallest of (FACTA x IA, FACTB x IB, FACTC x IC)
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Find Minimum
SMAX, LabR, Lab1, Lab2, FACT1, FACT2
Forms an element table item from the maximum of two other items.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to results. If same as existing label, the existing values will be overwritten by these results.
Lab1
First labeled result item in operation.
Lab2
Second labeled result item in operation (may be blank).
FACT1
Scale factor applied to Lab1. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
FACT2
Scale factor applied to Lab2. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
Notes
Forms a labeled result item (see ETABLE command) for the selected elements by comparing two existing labeled
result items according to the operation:
LabR = (FACT1 x Lab1) cmx (FACT2 x Lab2)
where "cmx" means "compare and save maximum." If absolute values are requested [SABS,1], the absolute values
of Lab1 and Lab2 are used.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Find Maximum
31254
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SMBODY
/SMBC, Mode
Controls the display of solid model boundary condition symbols and labels.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Mode
CENT
Solid model boundary condition symbols and labels appear at the centroid of the solid model entity
(default).
TESS
Solid model boundary condition symbols and labels appear inside each constituent element of the tesselation.
Notes
Mode = CENT is designed to reduce the clutter of boundary condition symbols in solid model plots. For example,
if you have assigned normal pressure loads to an area, you may choose to display the pressures as arrows with
the /PSF command using /PSF,PRES,NORM,2. When Mode = CENT, the pressure arrow is displayed at the centroid
of the area. When Mode = TESS, a pressure arrow is displayed at the centroid of each polygon of the area's tesselation.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
SMBODY
Specifies "Body loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Body Loads
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31255
SMCONS
SMCONS
Specifies "Constraints on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>DOF Constraints
SMFOR
Specifies "Forces on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Forces
SMIN, LabR, Lab1, Lab2, FACT1, FACT2
Forms an element table item from the minimum of two other items.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to results. If same as existing label, the existing values will be overwritten by these results.
Lab1
First labeled result item in operation.
Lab2
Second labeled result item in operation (may be blank).
31256
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SMOOTH
FACT1
Scale factor applied to Lab1. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
FACT2
Scale factor applied to Lab2. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
Notes
Forms a labeled result item (see ETABLE command) for the selected elements by comparing two existing labeled
result items according to the operation:
LabR = (FACT1 x Lab1) cmn (FACT2 x Lab2)
where "cmn" means "compare and save minimum." If absolute values are requested [SABS,1], the absolute values
of Lab1 and Lab2 are used.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Find Minimum
SMOOTH, Vect1, Vect2, DATAP, FITPT, Vect3, Vect4, DISP
Allows smoothing of noisy data and provides a graphical representation of the data.
POST26: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Vect1
Name of the first vector that contains the noisy data set (i.e., independent variable). You must create and fill
this vector before issuing SMOOTH.
Vect2
Name of the second vector that contains the dependent set of data. Must be the same length as the first
vector. You must create and fill this vector before issuing SMOOTH.
DATAP
Number of data points to be fitted, starting from the beginning of the vector. If left blank, the entire vector
will be fitted. The maximum number of data points is 100,000 (or greater, depending on the memory of the
computer).
FITPT
Order of the fitting curve that will be used as a smooth representation of the data. This number should be
less than or equal to the number of the data points. Default (blank) is one-half the number of data points.
Maximum number of smoothed data fitting order is the number of data points up to 50. Depending on this
number, the smoothed curve will be one of the following:
1
Curve is the absolute average of all of the data points.
2
Curve is the least square average of all of the data points.
3 or more
Curve is a polynomial of the order (n-1), where n is the number of data fitting order points.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31257
SMOOTH
Vect3
Name of the vector that contains the smoothed data of the independent variable. This vector should have
a length equal to or greater than the number of smoothed data points. In batch (command) mode, you must
create this vector before issuing the SMOOTH command. In interactive mode, the GUI automatically creates
this vector (if it does not exist). If you do not specify a vector name, the GUI will name the vector smth_ind.
Vect4
Name of the vector that contains the smoothed data of the dependent variable. This vector must be the
same length as Vect3. In batch (command) mode, you must create this vector before issuing the SMOOTH
command. In interactive mode, the GUI automatically creates this vector (if it does not exist). If you do not
specify a vector name, the GUI will name the vector smth_dep.
DISP
Specifies how you want to display data. No default; you must specify an option.
1
Unsmoothed data only
2
Smoothed data only
3
Both smoothed and unsmoothed data
Notes
You can control the attributes of the graph using standard ANSYS controls (/GRID, /GTHK, /COLOR, etc.). If
working interactively, these controls appear in this dialog box for convenience, as well as in their standard dialog
boxes. You must always create Vect1 and Vect2 (using *DIM) and fill these vectors before smoothing the data.
If you're working interactively, ANSYS automatically creates Vect3 and Vect4, but if you're working in batch
(command) mode, you must create Vect3 and Vect4 (using *DIM) before issuing SMOOTH. Vect3 and Vect4
are then filled automatically by ANSYS. In addition, ANSYS creates an additional TABLE type array that contains
the smoothed array and the unsmoothed data to allow for plotting later with *VPLOT. Column 1 in this table
corresponds to Vect1, column 2 to Vect2, and column 3 to Vect4. This array is named Vect3_SMOOTH, up to
a limit of 32 characters. For example, if the array name is X1, the table name is X1_SMOOTH.
This command is also valid in PREP7 and SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Replace vs Add>Smooth Data
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Smooth Data
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Smooth Data
31258
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SMRTSIZE
SMRTSIZE, SIZLVL, FAC, EXPND, TRANS, ANGL, ANGH, GRATIO, SMHLC, SMANC, MXITR, SPRX
Specifies meshing parameters for automatic (smart) element sizing.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SIZLVL
Overall element size level for meshing. The level value controls the fineness of the mesh. (Any input in this
field causes remaining arguments to be ignored.) Valid inputs are:
n
Activate SmartSizing and set the size level to n. Must be an integer value from 1 (fine mesh) to 10 (coarse
mesh). Remaining arguments are ignored, and argument values are set as shown in SMRTSIZE - Argument
Values for h-elements and p-elements.
STAT
List current SMRTSIZE settings.
DEFA
Set all SMRTSIZE settings to default values (as shown in SMRTSIZE - Argument Values for h-elements
and p-elements for size level 6).
OFF
Deactivate SmartSizing. Current settings of DESIZE will be used. To reactivate SmartSizing, issue SMRTSIZE,n.
FAC
Scaling factor applied to the computed default mesh sizing. Defaults to 1 for h-elements (size level 6), which
is medium. Values from 0.2 to 5.0 are allowed.
EXPND
Mesh expansion (or contraction) factor. (This factor is the same as MOPT,EXPND,Value.) EXPND is used to
size internal elements in an area based on the size of the elements on the area's boundaries. For example,
issuing SMRTSIZE,,,2 before meshing an area will allow a mesh with elements that are approximately twice
as large in the interior of an area as they are on the boundary. If EXPND is less than 1, a mesh with smaller
elements on the interior of the area will be allowed. EXPND should be greater than 0.5 but less than 4. EXPND
defaults to 1 for h-elements (size level 6), which does not allow expansion or contraction of internal element
sizes (except when using AESIZE element sizing). (If EXPND is set to zero, the default value of 1 will be used.)
The actual size of the internal elements will also depend on the TRANS option or upon AESIZE or ESIZE sizing,
if used.
TRANS
Mesh transition factor. (This factor is the same as MOPT,TRANS,Value.) TRANS is used to control how rapidly
elements are permitted to change in size from the boundary to the interior of an area. TRANS defaults to 2.0
for h-elements (size level 6), which permits elements to approximately double in size from one element to
the next as they approach the interior of the area. (If TRANS is set to zero, the default value will be used.)
TRANS must be greater than 1 and, for best results, should be less than 4. The actual size of the internal elements will also depend on the EXPND option or upon AESIZE or ESIZE sizing, if used.
ANGL
Maximum spanned angle per lower-order element for curved lines. Defaults to 22.5 degrees per element
(size level 6). This angle limit may be exceeded if the mesher encounters a small feature (hole, fillet, etc.).
(This value is NOT the same as that set by DESIZE,,,,ANGL.) This option does not apply to p-element meshes.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31259
SMRTSIZE
ANGH
Maximum spanned angle per higher-order element for curved lines. Defaults to 30 degrees per element (size
level 6). This angle limit may be exceeded if the mesher encounters a small feature (hole, fillet, etc.). (This
value is NOT the same as that set by DESIZE,,,,,ANGH.)
GRATIO
Allowable growth ratio used for proximity checking. Defaults to 1.5 for h-elements (size level 6). Values from
1.2 to 5.0 are allowed; however, values from 1.5 to 2.0 are recommended.
SMHLC
Small hole coarsening key, can be ON (default for size level 6) or OFF. If ON, this feature suppresses curvature
refinement that would result in very small element edges (i.e., refinement around small features).
SMANC
Small angle coarsening key, can be ON (default for all levels) or OFF. If ON, this feature restricts proximity
refinement in areas where it is ill-advised (that is, in tight corners on areas, especially those that approach 0
degrees).
MXITR
Maximum number of sizing iterations (defaults to 4 for all levels).
SPRX
Surface proximity refinement key, can be off (SPRX = 0, which is the default for all levels) or on via two different
values (SPRX = 1 or SPRX = 2). If SPRX = 1, surface proximity refinement is performed and any shell elements
that need to be modified are modified. If SPRX=2, surface proximity refinement is performed but no shell
elements are altered.
Command Default
SmartSizing is off and DESIZE is used for automatic element sizing.
Notes
If a valid level number (1 (fine) to 10 (coarse)) is input on SIZLVL, inputs for remaining arguments are ignored,
and the argument values are set as shown in SMRTSIZE - Argument Values for h-elements and p-elements.
Note The settings are different for h-elements and p-elements (indicated by the "h" and "p" headings
in the table). The first column contains SIZLV data, ranging from 10 (coarse) to 1 (fine); 6 is the default.
SMRTSIZE - Argument Values for h-elements and p-elements
FAC
EXPND
TRANS
ANGL
ANGH
10
5.0
5.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
1.75 2.35 2.0* 2.0 36.0 - 45.0* 30.0 1.9 1.9 on on on on 4* 4 off off
1.875
3.0
1.5
2.25 2.0* 2.0 30.0 - 45.0* 30.0 1.8 1.8 on on on on 4* 4 off off
1.5
2.5
1.0
1.7
2.0* 2.0 26.0 - 36.0* 30.0 1.7 1.7 on on on on 4* 4 off off
6*
1.0*
1.875 1.0*
1.5
2.0* 2.0 22.5 - 30.0* 30.0 1.5* 1.7 on on on on 4* 4 off off
0.65
1.5
1.0* 1.25 2.0* 2.0 18.0 -
27.0 30.0 1.5 1.6 on on on on 4* 4 off off
0.4
1.0
1.0*
1.0
2.0* 2.0 15.0 -
22.0 30.0 1.5 1.5 off on on on 4* 4 off off
0.3
0.8
1.0*
1.0
2.0* 2.0 12.0 -
18.0 22.0 1.5 1.5 off off on on 4* 4 off off
31260
GRATIO SMHLC SMANC MXITR SPRX
h
2.0* 2.0 45.0 - 45.0* 30.0 2.0 2.0 on on on on 4* 4 off off
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SMSURF
FAC
EXPND
TRANS
ANGL
ANGH
0.25
0.6
1.0*
1.0
2.0* 2.0 10.0 -
15.0 18.0 1.5 1.5 off off on on 4* 4 off off
1
*
0.2
0.4
1.0*
1.0
2.0* 2.0
15.0 15.0 1.4 1.4 off off on on 4* 4 off off
7.5
p
-
GRATIO SMHLC SMANC MXITR SPRX
h
Default
Where appropriate, SmartSizing will start with AESIZE settings. Elsewhere, it will start with any defined ESIZE,SIZE
setting. It will locally override AESIZE or ESIZE for proximity and curvature. SmartSizing ignores any ESIZE,,NDIV
setting.
LESIZE line division and spacing specifications will be honored by SmartSizing, unless you give permission for
SmartSizing to override them (for proximity or curvature) by setting KYNDIV to 1. Lines not having an LESIZE
specification are meshed as well as they can be.
This command is also valid for rezoning.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>SmartSize>Adv Opts
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>SmartSize>Basic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Size Cntrls>SmartSize>Status
SMSURF
Specifies "Surface loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Surface Loads
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31261
SMULT
SMULT, LabR, Lab1, Lab2, FACT1, FACT2
Forms an element table item by multiplying two other items.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to results. If same as existing label, the existing values will be overwritten by these results.
Lab1
First labeled result item in operation.
Lab2
Second labeled result item in operation (may be blank).
FACT1
Scale factor applied to Lab1. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
FACT2
Scale factor applied to Lab2. A (blank) or '0' entry defaults to 1.0.
Notes
Forms a labeled result item (see ETABLE command) for the selected elements by multiplying two existing labeled
result items according to the operation:
LabR = (FACT1 x Lab1) x (FACT2 x Lab2)
May also be used to scale results for a single labeled result item. If absolute values are requested [SABS,1], the
absolute values of Lab1 and Lab2 are used.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Multiply
SOLCONTROL, Key1, Key2, Key3, Vtol
Specifies whether to use optimized nonlinear solution defaults and some enhanced internal solution algorithms.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Key1
Optimized defaults activation key:
ON or 1
Activates optimized defaults for a set of commands applicable to nonlinear solutions. This is the default.
The majority of solution command defaults are listed under the Notes section below. See also the description of individual solution commands for default values.
OFF or 0
Restores defaults to pre-ANSYS 5.4 values (see the Default States table below). Internal solution algorithms
work as for pre-ANSYS 5.4.
31262
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SOLCONTROL
Key2
Check contact state key. This key is operable only when the optimized defaults are active (Key1 = ON) and
a contact or nonlinear status element is present in the model. When check contact state is active, ANSYS will
base the time step size on the specifications of KEYOPT(7) for all contact elements. KEYOPT(7) for contact
elements can be used to ensure that the time step interval accounts for changes in the contact status. Also,
when Key2 = ON, ANSYS ensures the time step is small enough to account for changes in nonlinear element
status (applies to LINK10, COMBIN7, COMBIN14, COMBIN39, and COMBIN40 elements). Valid arguments for
the key are:
ON or 1
Activate time step predictions based on specifications of element KEYOPT(7) or the nonlinear status of
the element (applies to LINK10, COMBIN7, COMBIN14, COMBIN39, and COMBIN40 elements).
OFF or 0
Time step predictions not based on contact status or nonlinear element status (default).
Key3
Pressure load stiffness key. In general, use the default setting. Use a non-default setting only if you encounter
convergence difficulties. Pressure load stiffness is automatically included when using eigenvalue buckling
analyses (ANTYPE,BUCKLE), equivalent to Key3 = INCP. For all other types of analyses, valid arguments for
Key3 are:
NOPL
Do not include pressure load stiffness for any elements.
no entry (default)
Include pressure load stiffness for elements SURF153, SURF154, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187 SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
Do not include pressure load stiffness for elements PLANE2, PLANE42, SOLID45, SOLID46, SOLID64,
SOLID65, PLANE82, VISCO88, VISCO89, SOLID92, SOLID95, and SOLID191.
INCP
Include pressure load stiffness for elements PLANE2, PLANE42, SOLID45, SOLID46, SOLID64, SOLID65,
PLANE82, VISCO88, VISCO89, SOLID92, SOLID95, SURF153, SURF154, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLID191, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
Vtol
Tolerance for volumetric compatibility check in the 18x plane and solid elements (PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, and SOLSH190) when mixed u-P formulation is employed. The default value
is 1.0 x 10-5. Vtol can range from 0.0 to 1.0, but values between 1.0 x 10-5 and 1.0 x 10-2 are recommended.
For more details, see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
Notes
The SOLCONTROL command is designed to provide reliable and efficient default solution settings for singlefield full structural nonlinear or full transient analysis, or single-field thermal analysis. (It is not applicable for reduced transient analysis.) The optimized default settings and advanced internal solution algorithms can be used
to solve the majority of structural/thermal, nonlinear/transient problems with the least amount of user intervention.
The SOLCONTROL command is ON by default. In most cases, to successfully solve a problem the user only needs
to:
Choose NLGEOM,ON for large displacement/strain analysis.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31263
SOLCONTROL
Choose NROPT,UNSYM to access unsymmetric pressure load stiffness, material stiffness, friction behavior,
etc.
Provide the initial step size through the NSUBST or DELTIM command.
To achieve this, the SOLCONTROL command chooses better default settings for a number of commands within
ANSYS and uses optimized internal solution algorithms.
THOPT settings take precedence over SOLCONTROL settings.
Commands that ANSYS issues are written to files (such as log and load step files) as COMMAND,-1 (for example,
KBC,-1).
Note The state of the SOLCONTROL command is not written by the CDWRITE or LSWRITE commands
(so that the CDWRITE file does not rigidly define an individual solution command). Also note that
switching SOLCONTROL ON and OFF between load steps is not recommended.
The SOLCONTROL command also serves as a "reset" command; when you issue SOLCONTROL, all the control
commands set earlier in the interactive or input session are reset to their original default values.
Text database files (.CDB files created by CDWRITE) and load step files (.S01, .S02, .Snn, etc. files created by
LSWRITE) should be handled with care when SOLCONTROL,ON (default). Files of these types sometimes contain
control commands that you did not issue intentionally. These extra commands can overwrite the default settings
specified by SOLCONTROL. To avoid overwriting the SOLCONTROL settings when you are using .CDB files, use
the following procedure:
1.
Read the .CDB files into ANSYS.
2.
Enter the solution processor [/SOLU].
3.
Issue SOLCONTROL,ON.
4.
Issue the desired control commands to overwrite the SOLCONTROL defaults as needed.
To use .Snn files properly, you should preview and edit them. Delete the unwanted solution commands before
you execute the LSSOLVE command.
The following table lists the nonlinear solution parameters and algorithm differences when the command is
active and inactive.
SOLCONTROL - Default States Table
Command
Argument
SOLCONTROL ON
SOLCONTROL OFF
General Options
NSUBST
1 load step if contact elements TARGE169, Previously specified value. If no
TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CON- specified value, defaults to 1.
TA173, CONTA174, CONTA175 are not
present; if these elements are present, 1 or
20 substeps, depending on the physics of
the program
NSBMX
Determined by ANSYS
Previously specified value. If no
specified value, defaults to NSBSTP.
NSBMN
31264
NSBSTP
Determined by ANSYS
Previously specified value. If no
specified value, defaults to 1.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SOLCONTROL
Carry
Command
DELTIM
Determined by ANSYS
Argument
OFF
SOLCONTROL ON
SOLCONTROL OFF
DTIME
1 time span of the load step if contact ele- Previously specified value, if any.
ments TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171,
CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175 are not present; if these elements are
present, 1 or 1/20 of the time span of the
load step, depending on the physics of the
program
DTMIN
Determined by ANSYS
Previously specified value. If no
specified value, defaults to DTIME
DTMAX
Determined by ANSYS
Previously specified value. If no
specified value, defaults to time
span of load step.
Carry
Determined by ANSYS
OFF
KBC
KEY
0 (ramped) for static nonlinear, structural 0 for all types of transient or nonlinand thermal (steady state) analyses, as well ear analysis
as for transient analyses when TIMINT,OFF.
1 (stepped) for transient structural and
thermal analyses when TIMINT,ON.
(TIMINT,ON is the default for transient analyses.)
AUTOTS
Key
Chosen by program
OFF
EQSLV
Uses sparse solver. If PCG solver is chosen, Uses sparse solver. If PCG solver is
sets multiplier to 2.0 for Newton-Raphson chosen, sets multiplier to 1.0 for
iteration.
Newton-Raphson iteration.
CDWRITE and
LSWRITE
Does not write default values for most of the Write all the default values for
relevant solution control commands or op- solution control commands.
tions listed in this table.
MONITOR
Active
Not available
Nonlinear Options
CNVTOL
Force or moment convergence tolerance = Force or moment convergence
0.5% Displacement tolerance = 5%
tolerance = 0.1% Displacement
tolerance not checked.
MINREF
NEQIT
TOLER
0.01 for force or moment; for heat flow and For force or moment, 1.0 for heat
flow, 1.0E-6 otherwise, 0
others the same as SOLCONTROL ,OFF
NEQIT
Between 15 and 26, depending on the
physics of the problem.
ARCLEN
25
A more aggressive scheme to open-up time Use ARCLEN as in Release 5.3.
step is used. A more stable ARCLEN algorithm is used.
PRED
Sskey
On, unless ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ are
present, or SOLID65 is present.
LNSRCH
Key
Automatically turned ON when contact ele- OFF
ments present.
CUTCONTROL
PLSLIMIT
15%
5%
NPOINT
13
20
TEMP
.01
Not Available
OPNCONTROL
OFF
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31265
SOLCONTROL
NUMSTEP
Command
Argument
Not Available
SOLCONTROL ON
SOLCONTROL OFF
SSTIF
Key
ON for geometrically nonlinear analysis
(NLGEOM, ON).
NROPT
ADPTKY
OFF, except: when frictional contact exists; Automatically toggled on and off
when elements CONTAC12 or CONTAC52 depending on whether plasticity
are present; or when plasticity exists and one or frictional contact exists or not.
of the elements PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24,
or PIPE60 is present.
TINTP
THETA
1.0
.5
TOL
0.0
.2
OFF
Element Options
CONTAC12, CONTAC52
Time prediction independent of KEYOPT(7) Time prediction depending on
(default) except when requested.
KEYOPT(7).
CONTAC12, CONTAC52
Adaptive descent ON when friction is
present.
Same
PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PIPE60 Adaptive descent ON when plasticity is
present.
Same
BEAM4, SHELL63, SHELL143
KEYOPT(2) = 0
Consistent tangent KEYOPT(2) = 1 when
NLGEOM,ON.
Algorithm Behavior
Deformed element shape (Jacobi) Active
check used as criteria for early bisection
Not available
Euler backward theta (for first or- 1.0 for thermal analysis.
der equations)
0.0
Log file
Does not write default values for any of the Write all the default values for
relevant commands or options listed in this solution controls commands.
table.
Moment reference values
Automatically corrected when values become too small by using a reaction force
times an element characteristic length.
When zero CONVTOL, MINREF
value is used.
Automatic time step scheme
Check on nonconvergent patterns. Time step
is opened up less aggressively; the increase
factor (used in calculating the degree in
which the time step is opened) = 1.5 (in most
cases). The calculation also takes into account the physics of the problem.
Check on nonconvergent patterns
not implemented. Time step is
opened up more aggressively; the
increase factor = 2.0 (in most
cases). No physics dependency involved.
Reset of all solution control defaults in one command.
SOLCONTROL,ON or OFF
Not available
Nonlinear convergence criterion When force norm is smaller than 1, the calcu- When force norm is smaller than
lated force value is still used as the REF value. 1, the MINREF value is used as the
If the calculated force value is approaching REF value.
machine zero, the MINREF value is used as
REF.
Warning message printed when Simplified message, not printed in some
negative diagonal in matrix is
cases.
discovered.
31266
Detailed message printed for each
iteration.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SOLU
Command
Argument
SOLCONTROL ON
SOLCONTROL OFF
Available in GUI. Jobname.ABT file can also Use Jobname.ABT file to control
be used.
normal abort.
Stop button
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Mixed U-P Toler
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Solution Ctrl
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Mixed U-P Toler
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Solution Ctrl
SOLU, NVAR, Item, Comp, Name
Specifies solution summary data per substep to be stored.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NVAR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]).
Item
Label identifying the item. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items may also require a
component label.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below. None are currently
required.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the item on printouts and displays. Defaults to an eight character label
formed by concatenating the first four characters of the Item and Comp labels.
Notes
See also the PRITER command of POST1 to display some of these items directly. Valid for a static or full transient
analysis. All other analyses have zeros for the data. Valid item and component labels for solution summary values
are:
Valid Item Labels
Item
Description
ALLF
Total arc-length load factor (ratio of the load at equilibrium to the total applied load)
ALDLF
Arc-length load factor increment (change in ALLF)
ARCL
Normalized arc-length radius
CNVG
Convergence indicator.
CRPRAT
Maximum creep ratio.
CSCV
Current segment convergence value.
CUCV
Current convergence value.
DICV
Displacement convergence value.
DSPRM
Descent parameter.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31267
/SOLU
Valid Item Labels
Item
Description
DTIME
Time step size.
EQIT
Number of equilibrium iterations.
FFCV
Fluid flow convergence value.
FOCV
Force convergence value.
HFCV
Heat flow convergence value.
NCMIT
Cumulative number of iterations.
NCMLS
Cumulative number of load steps
NCMSS
Cumulative number of substeps
MFCV
Magnetic flux convergence value.
MOCV
Moment convergence value.
MXDVL
Maximum degree of freedom value.
PRCV
Pressure convergence value.
PSINC
Maximum plastic strain increment.
RESFRQ
Response frequency for 2nd order systems.
RESEIG
Response eigenvalue for 1st order systems.
ROCV
Rotation convergence value.
SMCV
Scalar magnetic potential convergence value.
TECV
Temperature convergence value.
VECV
Velocity convergence value.
VOCV
Voltage convergence value.
VMCV
Vector magnetic potential convergence value.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
/SOLU
Enters the solution processor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution
31268
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SORT
SOLUOPT
Specifies "Solution options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>General
SOLVE
Starts a solution.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL <> ED
Notes
Starts the solution of one load step of a solution sequence based on the current analysis type and option settings.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Solve
Main Menu>Drop Test>Solve
Main Menu>Solution>Run FLOTRAN
Main Menu>Solution>Solve
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Current LS
SORT
Specifies "Sort settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL <> ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31269
SOURCE
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Sort Module
SOURCE, X, Y, Z
Defines a default location for undefined nodes or keypoints.
PREP7: Keypoints
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
X, Y, Z
Global Cartesian coordinates for source nodes or keypoints (defaults to the origin).
Command Default
Global Cartesian origin.
Notes
Defines a global Cartesian location for undefined nodes or keypoints moved during intersection calculations
[MOVE or KMOVE].
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
SPACE, NODE
Defines a space node for radiation using the Radiation Matrix method.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE
Node defined to be the space node.
Command Default
No space node (no radiation to space).
Notes
A space node is required in an open system to account for radiation losses.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Matrix Method>Other Settings
31270
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SPCNOD
SPARM, Porti, Portj
Calculates scattering (S) parameters between ports of a network system.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
Porti
Port number of the excited port with a excitation mode. (See the description of the HFPORT command.)
Portj
Port number of the output port. This could be used for a multiport system. All ports but Porti must be
matched.
Notes
SPARM calculates scattering (S) parameters for multiport or single port (Porti = Portj) systems.
The SPARM command macro returns the following complex S parameters: SII, dBSII, SIIPMR, SJI, dBSJI, and
SJIPMR, where "I" is the port number for the excited port, "J" is the output port number and PMR is the phase
angle.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Port>S-Parameters
SPCNOD, ENCL, NODE
Defines a space node for radiation using the Radiosity method.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ENCL
Radiating surface enclosure number. Defaults to 1. If ENCL = STAT, the command lists all enclosure space
nodes. If ENCL = DELE, the command deletes all enclosure space nodes.
NODE
Node defined to be the space node.
Notes
For open systems, an enclosure may radiate to a space node (NODE).
Open systems may be characterized by one or more enclosures (ENCL). Each enclosure may radiate to a different
space node (NODE).
For a space node that is not part of the finite element model, specify the temperature using the D command.
For the first load step, the space node temperature ramps from the uniform temperature specified by the TUNIF
command to the temperature specified by the D command. For subsequent load steps, it ramps from the previous
value of the space node temperature. For intermediate load steps, use the SPCNOD,DELETE command and
specify the space node temperature again to ramp from the uniform temperature.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31271
SPCTEMP
For a space node that is part of the finite element model, the temperature is that calculated during the finite
element solution.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
SPCTEMP, ENCL, TEMP
Defines a free-space ambient temperature for radiation using the Radiosity method.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
ENCL
Radiating surface enclosure number. Defaults to 1. If ENCL = STAT, the command lists all enclosure space
temperatures. If ENCL = DELE, the command deletes all enclosure space temperatures.
TEMP
Temperature of free-space in the reference temperature system. The temperature will be offset by the value
specified in the TOFFST command for internal calculations.
Notes
For open systems, an enclosure may radiate to the free-space ambient temperature (TEMP).
Open systems may be characterized by one or more enclosures (ENCL). Each enclosure may radiate to a different
free-space ambient temperature (TEMP).
For the first load step, the space temperature ramps from the uniform temperature specified by the TUNIF
command to the temperature specified by the SPCTEMP command. For subsequent load steps, it ramps from
the previous value of the space temperature. For intermediate load steps, use the SPCTEMP,DELETE command
and specify the space temperature again to ramp from the uniform temperature.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
31272
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SPH4
SPEC
Specifies "Miscellaneous specifications" as the subsequent status topic.
POST1: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>General Postproc>Output Options
SPH4, XCENTER, YCENTER, RAD1, RAD2
Creates a spherical volume anywhere on the working plane.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
XCENTER, YCENTER
Working plane X and Y coordinates of the center of the sphere.
RAD1, RAD2
Inner and outer radii (either order) of the sphere. A value of zero or blank for either RAD1 or RAD2 defines a
solid sphere.
Notes
Defines either a solid or hollow spherical volume anywhere on the working plane. The sphere must have a spatial
volume greater than zero. (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a degenerate volume
as a means of creating an area.) A sphere of 360 will be defined with two areas, each consisting of a hemisphere.
See the SPHERE and SPH5 commands for other ways to create spheres.
When working with a model imported from an IGES file (DEFAULT import option), you can create only solid
spheres. If you enter a value for both RAD1 and RAD2 the command is ignored.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Primitives>Solid Sphere
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Sphere>Hollow Sphere
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Sphere>Solid Sphere
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Sphere>Solid Sphere
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31273
SPH5
SPH5, XEDGE1, YEDGE1, XEDGE2, YEDGE2
Creates a spherical volume by diameter end points.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
XEDGE1, YEDGE1
Working plane X and Y coordinates of one edge of the sphere.
XEDGE2, YEDGE2
Working plane X and Y coordinates of the other edge of the sphere.
Notes
Defines a solid spherical volume anywhere on the working plane by specifying diameter end points. The sphere
must have a spatial volume greater than zero. (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a
degenerate volume as a means of creating an area.) A sphere of 360 will be defined with two areas, each consisting of a hemisphere. See the SPHERE and SPH4 commands for other ways to create spheres.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Sphere>By End Points
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Sphere>By End Points
SPHERE, RAD1, RAD2, THETA1, THETA2
Creates a spherical volume centered about the working plane origin.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
RAD1, RAD2
Inner and outer radii (either order) of the sphere. A value of zero or blank for either RAD1 or RAD2 defines a
solid sphere.
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (either order) of the sphere. Used for creating a spherical sector. The sector begins
at the algebraically smaller angle, extends in a positive angular direction, and ends at the larger angle. The
starting angle defaults to 0.0 and the ending angle defaults to 360.0. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing
Guide for an illustration.
Notes
Defines either a solid or hollow sphere or spherical sector centered about the working plane origin. The sphere
must have a spatial volume greater than zero. (i.e., this volume primitive command cannot be used to create a
degenerate volume as a means of creating an area.) Inaccuracies can develop when the size of the object you
create is much smaller than the relative coordinate system values (ratios near to or greater than 1000). If you require
an exceptionally small sphere, create a larger object, and scale it down to the appropriate size.
For a solid sphere of 360, you define it with two areas, each consisting of a hemisphere. See the SPH4 and SPH5
commands for the other ways to create spheres.
31274
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SPLOT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Sphere>By Dimensions
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Create>Volume>Sphere>By Dimensions
SPLINE, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, XV1, YV1, ZV1, XV6, YV6, ZV6
Generates a segmented spline through a series of keypoints.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
Keypoints through which the spline is fit. At least two must be defined. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
The following fields are used only if specified end slopes on the line are desired, otherwise zero curvature end
slopes will be automatically calculated to produce a line which is "straight" in the active coordinate system. To
specify end slopes, use the following fields to define a "slope vector" (one for each end of the line, if desired) that
has its tail at the origin and its head at the point XVn,YVn, ZVn in the active coordinate system [CSYS]. The corresponding end slope of the line will then be parallel to this "slope vector."
XV1, YV1, ZV1
Location (in the active coordinate system) of the head of the "slope vector" corresponding to the slope at
the P1 end of the spline. The tail of the vector is at the origin of the coordinate system.
XV6, YV6, ZV6
Location of the head of the "slope vector" corresponding to the slope at the P6 (or the last keypoint if fewer
than six specified) end of the spline.
Notes
The output from this command is a series of connected lines (one line between each pair of keypoints) that together form a spline. Note that solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Splines>Segmented Spline
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Lines>Splines>With Options>Segmented Spline
SPLOT, NA1, NA2, NINC, MESH
Displays the selected areas and a faceted view of their underlying surfaces
PREP7: Areas
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NA1
Starting area for display of areas and underlying surfaces. If NA1 = ALL (default), NA2 and NINC are ignored
and all selected areas are displayed (ASEL command).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31275
SPOINT
NA2
Last area to be displayed.
NINC
Numeric value setting steps between NA1 and NA2 for display. Default value is (1).
MESH
Specifies a rectangular mesh density used to display the underlying surface (default 4, i.e. 4 x 4).
Notes
This command is valid in any processor. The plot output displays the external and internal trim curves and underlying surface. You cannot obtain a faceted view of your surface areas when you are using the /EXPAND
command to create larger graphics displays.
Use APLOT for trimmed surface display.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
SPOINT, NODE, X, Y, Z
Defines a point for moment summations.
POST1: Special Purpose
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NODE
Node number of the desired point. If zero, use X,Y,Z to describe point.
X, Y, Z
Global Cartesian coordinates of the desired summation point. Used if NODE is 0. Defaults to (0,0,0).
Command Default
No point is defined by default; you must either specify a node or coordinates.
Notes
Defines a point (any point other than the origin) about which the tabular moment summations are computed
[NFORCE, FSUM]. If force summations are desired in other than the global Cartesian directions, a node number
must be specified on the NODE field, and the desired coordinate system must be activated with RSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Nodal Calcs>Summation Pt>At Node
Main Menu>General Postproc>Nodal Calcs>Summation Pt>At XYZ Loc
31276
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SPOPT
SPOPT, Sptype, NMODE, Elcalc
Selects the spectrum type and other spectrum options.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Sptype
Spectrum type:
SPRS
Single point excitation response spectrum (default). See also the SVTYP command.
MPRS
Multiple point excitation response spectrum.
DDAM
Dynamic design analysis method.
PSD
Power spectral density.
NMODE
Use the first NMODE modes from the modal analysis. Defaults to all extracted modes, as specified by the
MODOPT and BUCOPT commands. NMODE cannot be larger than 1000.
Elcalc
Element calculation key (for Sptype = PSD only):
NO
Do not include stress responses in the calculations (default).
YES
Include stress responses in the calculations.
Notes
Valid only for a spectrum analysis (ANTYPE,SPECTR). This operation must be preceded by a modal solution
(ANTYPE,MODAL) with the appropriate files available. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within
the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Product Restrictions
Only Sptype = SPRS is allowed in ANSYS Professional.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31277
SPREAD
SPREAD, VALUE
Turns on a dashed tolerance curve for the subsequent curve plots.
POST26: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
VALUE
Amount of tolerance. For example, 0.1 is 10%.
Command Default
No tolerance curve.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Graph
SPSCAN, FREQ, LOCAL, PHIB, PHIE, PHIINC, THETAB, THETAE, THETAINC, FILEOPT
Performs a harmonic analysis of a unit cell over a range of angles and extracts the S-parameter.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP ED
FREQ
Working frequency in Hz.
LOCAL
Local coordinate system number (defaults to 0).
PHIB
Beginning angle from x-axis towards y-axis, , in degrees (defaults to 0).
PHIE
Ending angle from x-axis towards y-axis, , in degrees (defaults to 0).
PHIINC
Increment of in degrees (defaults to 0).
THETAB
Beginning angle from +z-axis towards -z-axis, , in degrees (defaults to 0).
THETAE
Ending angle from +z-axis towards -z-axis, , in degrees (defaults to 0).
THETAINC
Increment of in degrees (defaults to 0).
FILEOPT
0
Output S-parameter magnitude and phase angle to Jobname.scan.
1
Output S-parameter magnitude in dB and phase angle to Jobname.scan.
31278
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SPSWP
Notes
See the figure Figure 4.24: Spherical Coordinates in the ANSYS High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide
for an illustration of the coordinate system.
Menu Paths
SPSWP, FREQB, FREQE, FREQINC, SwpOpt, EFAcc, OutPut, FileOpt
Computes S-parameters over a frequency range and writes them to a file.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP <> <> <> VT <> <> EH <> PP ED
FREQB
Frequency (Hz) at the beginning of the FREQB to FREQE range. If FREQE is blank, the solution is done only at
frequency FREQB.
FREQE
Frequency at end of this range.
FREQINC
Frequency increment. The number of solutions performed is [(FREQE - FREQB)/FREQINC] + 1. Solutions are
always performed at FREQB and FREQE.
SwpOpt
Solution Method (See HROPT command):
0
Variational Technology (default).
1
Full method.
2
Variational Technology using a perfect absorber.
Note To use any Variational Technology method, you must have the separately licensed ANSYS Frequency Sweep VT (FS Module). The Variational Technology Perfect Absorber method (Method = SXPA)
is about 20% faster but somewhat less accurate than the Variational Technology method (Method = SX).
EFAcc
Electric field accuracy for fast exploration method. Defaults to 0.01.
OutPut
0
Create minimal size results file required to compute S-parameters for the last port excitation case (see
Notes), for all frequencies. (default).
1
Create complete results file for the last port excitation case (see Notes), for all frequencies.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31279
SPTOPT
2
Create complete results file for the last port excitation case (see Notes), for the last frequency only, valid
only for full method.
FileOpt
0
Output S-parameter magnitude and phase angle in Touchstone file.
1
Output S-parameter magnitude in dB and phase angle in Touchstone file.
2
Output S-parameter real and imaginary parts in Touchstone file.
Notes
This command computes S-parameters by sequencing through a series of harmonic solutions with different port
excitations over the desired frequency range. To use this function, port flag boundary conditions must be previously set (see SF, SFA for exterior waveguide ports, or BFA, BFL or BF for interior waveguide or transmission line
ports). Ports should be numbered sequentially from 1 with no gaps in the numbering. Resulting S-parameters
are written to a file jobname.snp, where n is the number of ports. The file is written in Touchstone format.
S-parameters require a sequence of solutions whereby for each solution, one port is excited and the other ports
are matched. Each solution represents one column of a S-parameter matrix (i.e., if Port 1 is excited for a threeport system, the resulting column represents the S11, S21 and S31 S-parameters). A full S-parameter matrix for
an n port system at one frequency requires n solutions alternating excited and matched port boundary conditions at each port. The SPSWP command will solve a column of the S-parameter matrix for each port that has
a defined excitation. If all ports have a defined excitation, then the full S-parameter matrix will be computed.
To prepare the ports for SPSWP, each port must be defined (flagged) as a port and it must have a port excitation
defined. For waveguide ports, excitation is defined using the HFPORT command. For transmission line ports,
excitation is defined using the BFA, BFL, or BF commands using the JS, H, or EF load options. Transmission line
excitation must be defined on the port surface itself (nodes, lines, or areas).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>S-Par Sweep
SPTOPT
Specifies "Spectrum analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLUTION: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
31280
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SRSS
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Show Status
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Show Status
Utility Menu>List>Status>Solution>Spectrum Options
SQRT, IR, IA, --, --, Name, --, --, FACTA
Forms the square root of a variable.
POST26: Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to the resulting variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]). If this number is the same
as for a previously defined variable, the previously defined variable will be overwritten with this result.
IA
Reference number of the variable to be operated on.
--, --
Unused fields.
Name
Thirty-two character name identifying the variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
--, --
Unused fields.
FACTA
Scaling factor (positive or negative) applied to variable IA (defaults to 1.0).
Notes
Forms the square root of a variable according to the operation:
IR = FACTA IA
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Math Operations>Square Root
SRSS, SIGNIF, Label
Specifies the square root of sum of squares mode combination method.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SIGNIF
Combine only those modes whose significance level exceeds the SIGNIF threshold. For single point, multipoint, or DDAM response (SPOPT,SPRS, MPRS or DDAM), the significance level of a mode is defined as the
mode coefficient of the mode, divided by the maximum mode coefficient of all modes. Any mode whose
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31281
SSBT
significance level is less than SIGNIF is considered insignificant and is not contributed to the mode combinations. The higher the SIGNIF threshold, the fewer the number of modes combined. SIGNIF defaults to
0.001. If SIGNIF is specified as 0.0, it is taken as 0.0. (This mode combination method is not valid for SPOPT,PSD.)
Label
Label identifying the combined mode solution output.
DISP
Displacement solution (default). Displacements, stresses, forces, etc., are available.
VELO
Velocity solution. Velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc., are available.
ACEL
Acceleration solution. Accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc., are available.
Notes
This command is also valid for PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>MultiPt>Mode Combine
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Mode Combine
SSBT, BT11, BT22, BT12, T
Specifies preintegrated bending thermal effects for shell sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
BT11, BT22, BT12
Bending thermal effects component [BT].
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the form:
N A
= T
M B
T
B
I M
(T - T )
D
T
[S] = [E]{ }
{
31282
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SSCALE
The SSBT command, one of several preintegrated shell section commands, specifies the bending thermal effects
quantity (submatrix [BT] data) for a preintegrated shell section. The section data defined is associated with the
section most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
The [BT] quantity represents bending stress resultants caused by a unit raise in temperature on a fully constrained
model. For a layered composite shell, it is usually necessary to specify both the [BT] and [MT] quantities (by issuing
the SSBT and SSMT commands, respectively).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are SSPA, SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, SSMT, and SSPM.
If you are using the SHELL181 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not necessary to issue this
command.
For complete information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
/SSCALE, WN, SMULT
Sets the contour multiplier for topographic displays.
GRAPHICS: Scaling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
SMULT
Contour multiplier that factors in results based on the product of the multiplier and the result being plotted.
Defaults to 0.0 (no topographic effects).
Command Default
No topographic contour effects.
Notes
Use this command to scale values to the geometry when the contours are shown elevated. For section displays
[/TYPE], the elevation is performed perpendicular to the section face.
Nonzero contour multipliers factoring in large results (stresses or displacements) can produce very large distortion,
causing images to disappear. To bring a distorted image back into view, reduce the contour multiplier value.
Portions of this command are not supported by PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Contours>Contour Style
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31283
SSLN
SSLN, FACT, SIZE
Selects and displays small lines in the model.
PREP7: Lines
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
FACT
Factor used to determine small lines. FACT times the average line length in the model is used as the line
length limit below which lines will be selected.
SIZE
Line length limit for line selection. Lines that have a length less than or equal to SIZE will be selected. Used
only if FACT is blank.
Notes
SSLN invokes a predefined ANSYS macro for selecting small lines in a model. Lines that are smaller than or equal
to the specified limit (FACT or SIZE) are selected and line numbers are displayed. This command macro is useful
for detecting very small lines in a model that may cause problems (i.e., poorly shaped elements or a meshing
failure) during meshing. All lines that are not "small" will be unselected and can be reselected with the LSEL
command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Check Geom>Sel Small Lines
SSMT, MT11, MT22, MT12, T
Specifies preintegrated membrane thermal effects for shell sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
MT11, MT22, MT12
Membrane thermal effects component [MT].
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the form:
N A
= T
M B
T
B
I M
(T - T )
D
T
[S] = [E]{ }
{
The SSMT command, one of several preintegrated shell section commands, specifies the membrane thermal
effects quantity (submatrix [MT] data) for a preintegrated shell section. The section data defined is associated
with the section most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
31284
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SSPA
The [MT] quantity represents membrane stress resultants caused by a unit raise in temperature on a fully constrained
model. For a layered composite shell, it is usually necessary to specify both the [MT] and [BT] quantities (by issuing
the SSMT and SSBT commands, respectively).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are SSPA, SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, SSBT, and SSPM.
For complete information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
SSPA, A11, A21, A31, A22, A32, A33, T
Specifies a preintegrated membrane stiffness for shell sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
A11, A21, A31, A22, A32, A33
Membrane stiffness component (symmetric lower part of submatrix [A]).
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the form:
N A
= T
M B
MT
B
(T - TI )
D
BT
[S] = [E]{ }
{
The SSPA command, one of several preintegrated shell section commands, specifies the membrane stiffness
quantity (submatrix [A]) for a preintegrated shell section. The section data defined is associated with the section
most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, SSMT, SSBT, and SSPM.
For complete information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31285
SSPB
SSPB, B11, B21, B31, B22, B32, B33, T
Specifies a preintegrated coupling stiffness for shell sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
B11, B21, B31, B22, B32, B33
Coupling stiffness component (symmetric lower part of submatrix [B]).
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the form:
N A
= T
M B
T
B
I M
(T - T )
D
BT
[S] = [E]{ }
{
The SSPB command, one of several preintegrated shell section commands, specifies the coupling stiffness
quantity (submatrix [B] data) for a preintegrated shell section. The section data defined is associated with the
section most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
Related commands are SSPA, SSPD, SSPE, SSMT, SSBT, and SSPM.
If you are using the SHELL181 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not necessary to issue this
command.
For complete information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
SSPD, D11, D21, D31, D22, D32, D33, T
Specifies a preintegrated bending stiffness for shell sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
D11, D21, D31, D22, D32, D33
Bending stiffness component (symmetric lower part of submatrix [D]).
T
Temperature.
31286
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SSPE
Notes
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the form:
N A
= T
M B
MT
B
(T - TI )
BT
[S] = [E]{ }
{
The SSPD command, one of several preintegrated shell section commands, specifies the bending stiffness
quantity (submatrix [D] data) for a preintegrated shell section. The section data defined is associated with the
section most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified commands default to zero.
Related commands are SSPA, SSPB, SSPE, SSMT, SSBT, and SSPM.
If you are using the SHELL181 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not necessary to issue this
command.
For complete information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
SSPE, E11, E21, E22, T
Specifies a preintegrated transverse shear stiffness for shell sections.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
E11, E21, E22
Transverse shear stiffness component (symmetric lower part of submatrix [E]).
T
Temperature.
Notes
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the form:
N A
= T
M B
T
B
I M
(T - T )
D
T
[S] = [E]{ }
{
The SSPE command, one of several preintegrated shell section commands, specifies the transverse shear stiffness
quantity (submatrix [E] data) for a preintegrated shell section. The section data defined is associated with the
section most recently defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Unspecified values default to zero.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31287
SSPM
Related commands are SSPA, SSPB, SSPD, SSMT, SSBT, and SSPM.
If you are using the SHELL181 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not necessary to issue this
command.
For complete information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
SSPM, DENS, T
Specifies mass density for a preintegrated shell section.
PREP7: Cross Sections
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DENS
Mass density.
T
Temperature.
Notes
The SSPM command, one of several preintegrated shell section commands, specifies the mass density (assuming
a unit thickness) for a preintegrated shell section. The value specified is associated with the section most recently
defined (via the SECTYPE command).
Related commands are SSPA, SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, SSMT, and SSBT.
For complete information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Sections>Shell>Pre-integrated
SSTIF, Key
Activates stress stiffness effects in a nonlinear analysis.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Key
Stress stiffening key:
OFF
No stress stiffening is included (default unless NLGEOM,ON).
ON
Stress stiffening is included (default if NLGEOM,ON).
31288
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
STAOPT
Command Default
SSTIF will be turned on if NLGEOM,ON; otherwise it will be turned off.
Notes
Activates stress stiffness effects in a nonlinear analysis (ANTYPE,STATIC or TRANS). (The PSTRES command also
controls the generation of the stress stiffness matrix and therefore should not be used in conjunction with SSTIF.)
If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
When SOLCONTROL and NLGEOM are ON, SSTIF defaults to ON. This normally forms all of the consistent tangent
matrix. However, for some special nonlinear cases, this can lead to divergence caused by some elements which
do not provide a complete consistent tangent (notably, elements outside the 18x family). In such a case, ANSYS
recommends issuing an SSTIF,OFF command to achieve convergence. For the 18x family of elements, setting
SSTIF,OFF when NLGEOM is ON has no effect (because stress stiffness effects are always included).
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
SSUM
Calculates and prints the sum of element table items.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Calculates and prints the tabular sum of each existing labeled result item [ETABLE] for the selected elements. If
absolute values are requested [SABS,1], absolute values are used.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Sum of Each Item
STAOPT, Method
Specifies static analysis options.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> VT PR <> <> <> PP ED
Method
Solution method for the static analysis:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31289
STAT
DEFA
Regular ANSYS solve (default).
SX
Solve with Variational Technology.
Notes
Specifies the method of solution for a static analysis (ANTYPE,STATIC). If used in SOLUTION, this command is
valid only within the first load step.
After a solution based on Variational Technology with the SOLVE command, the Variational Technology model
is frozen, i.e., you cannot add or delete input variables.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Solve
STAT
Displays the status of database settings.
DATABASE: Set Up
DISPLAY: Action
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
In the DISPLAY program, STAT will show the current status of the program settings.
In the ANSYS program, STAT is a command generated by the GUI and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG)
if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. Generally, STAT will be preceded by one
of the commands listed below, which specifies the particular topic that status was requested for.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should be immediately preceded by the desired topic
command listed below. In processors other than those listed below (e.g., AUX12), no topic command should
proceed STAT.
This command is valid in any processor.
PREP7 topic commands (and their corresponding topics) are:
Topic Command
Topic
ETYPE
Element types
RCON
Real constants
MATER
Material properties
TBLE
Data table properties
PRIM
Solid model primitives
KEYPTS
Keypoints
31290
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
STAT
Topic Command
Topic
LINE
Lines
AREAS
Areas
VOLUMES
Volumes
GEOMETRY
Solid model information
MESHING
Meshing
BOOL
Booleans
NODES
Nodes
ELEM
Elements
SELM
Superelements
PIPE
Pipe modeling
DIGIT
Node digitizing
COUPLE
Node coupling
CEQN
Constraint equations
REORDER
Model reordering
SOLUTION topic commands (and their corresponding topics) are:
Topic Command
Topic
ATYPE
Analysis types
MASTER
Master DOF
GAP
Reduced transient gap conditions
DEACT
Element birth and death (deactivation)
LSOPER
Load step operations
FECONS
Constraints on nodes
FEFOR
Forces on nodes
FESURF
Surface loads on elements
FEBODY
Body loads on elements
SMCONS
Constraints on the solid model
SMFOR
Forces on the solid model
SMSURF
Surface loads on the solid model
SMBODY
Body loads on the solid model
INRTIA
Inertial loads
GENOPT
General options
DYNOPT
Dynamic analysis options
NLOPT
Nonlinear analysis options
OUTOPT
Output options
BIOOPT
Biot-Savart options
SPTOPT
Spectrum analysis options
SOLUOPT
Solution options
FLOTRAN
FLOTRAN data settings
POST1 topic commands (and their corresponding topics) are:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31291
/STATUS
Topic Command
Topic
DEFINE
Data definition settings
SORT
Sort settings
Print settings
DISPLAY
Display settings
CALC
Calculation settings
PATH
Path data settings
LCCALC
Load case settings
DATADEF
Directly defined data status
FATIGUE
Fatigue data status
POINT
Point flow tracing settings
SPEC
Miscellaneous specifications
POST26 topic commands (and their corresponding topics) are:
Topic Command
Topic
DEFINE
Data definition settings
OPERATE
Operation data
Print settings
PLOTTING
Plotting settings
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Prob Design>Prob Database>Status
Main Menu>Solution>Solve>Current LS
/STATUS, Lab
Lists the status of items for the run.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Items to list status for:
ALL
List all below (default).
TITLE
List only titles, Jobname, and revision number.
UNITS
List only units.
MEM
List only memory data statistics.
DB
List only database statistics
31292
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
STEF
CONFIG
List only configuration parameters.
GLOBAL
Provides a global status summary.
SOLU
Provides a solution status summary.
PROD
Provides a product summary.
Notes
Displays various items active for the run (such as the ANSYS revision number, Jobname, titles, units, configuration
parameters, database statistics, etc.).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Global Status
STEF, VALUE
Specifies Stefan-Boltzmann radiation constant.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
VALUE
Stefan-Boltzmann constant (defaults to 0.119E-10 Btu/hr/in2/ R4).
Command Default
0.119E-10 Btu/hr/in2/ R4.
Notes
You can use this command in the general preprocessor (PREP7) and in the Solution processor to specify the
Stefan-Boltzmann constant for a FLOTRAN analysis using radiation surface boundary conditions.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Forces>Body Forces>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31293
/STITLE
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On
Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On
Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Lines
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Matrix Method>Other Settings
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Displacement>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Forces>Body Forces>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Turbulence>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Keypoints
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Velocity>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/CFD>Volume Fract>Bound Loads>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Areas
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Elements
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Lines
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Ambient Rad>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
/STITLE, NLINE, Title
Defines subtitles.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NLINE
Subtitle line number (1 to 4). Defaults to 1.
Title
Input up to 70 alphanumeric characters. Parameter substitution may be forced within the title by enclosing
the parameter name or parametric expression within percent (%) signs. If Title is blank, this subtitle is deleted.
31294
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
STORE
Notes
Subtitles (4 maximum) are displayed in the output along with the main title [/TITLE]. Subtitles do not appear in
GUI windows or in ANSYS plot displays. The first subtitle is also written to various ANSYS files along with the
main title. Previous subtitles may be overwritten or deleted. Issue /STATUS to display titles.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
STORE, Lab, NPTS
Stores data in the database for the defined variables.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Valid labels:
MERGE
Merge data from results file for the time points in memory with the existing data using current specifications (default).
NEW
Store a new set of data, replacing any previously stored data with current result file specifications and
deleting any previously-calculated (OPER) variables. Variables defined using the ANSOL command are
also deleted.
APPEN
Append data from results file to the existing data.
ALLOC
Allocate (and zero) space for NPTS data points.
PSD
Create a new set of frequency points for PSD calculations (replacing any previously stored data and
erasing any previously calculated data).
NPTS
The number of time points (or frequency points) for storage (used only with Lab = ALLOC or PSD). The value
may be input when using POST26 with data supplied from other than a results file. This value is automatically
determined from the results file data with the NEW, APPEN, and MERGE options. For the PSD option, NPTS
determines the resolution of the frequency vector (valid numbers are between 1 and 10, defaults to 5).
Command Default
Merge newly-defined variables with previously stored variables for the time points stored in memory using the
current specifications. If STORE is preceded by TIMERANGE or NSTORE, the default is STORE,NEW.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31295
SUBOPT
Notes
This command stores data from the results file in the database for the defined variables [NSOL, ESOL, SOLU]
per specification [FORCE, LAYERP26, SHELL]. See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information.
The STORE,PSD command will create a new frequency vector (variable 1) for response PSD calculations [RPSD].
This command should first be issued before defining variables [NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE] for which response PSD's
are to be calculated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Store Data
SUBOPT, SUBSIZ, NPAD, NPERBK, NUMSSI, NSHIFT, Strmck, JCGITR
Specifies options for subspace iteration eigenvalue extraction.
SOLUTION: Nonlinear Options
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SUBSIZ
Subspace working size. Defaults to NMODE + 4 (where NMODE is input on the MODOPT or BUCOPT command).
Minimum is 8. Maximum is NMODE +NPAD. The larger the value, the smaller the number of iterations (but
more time per iteration).
NPAD
Number of extra vectors used in the iterations. Defaults to 4. The total number of vectors used is NMODE
+NPAD.
NPERBK
Number of modes per memory block. If 0 (or blank), perform data management in-memory for all modes
(no disk I/O). If greater than zero, use some disk I/O (slower for decreasing NPERBK values, but may be needed
for large problems). The minimum nonzero value is the number of degrees of freedom per node for the
model.
NUMSSI
Maximum number of subspace iterations (defaults to 100). Fewer iterations will be done if convergence occurs
before the 100th iteration. Convergence occurs whenever the normalized change in the eigenvalue calculations between successive iterations for the first NMODE eigenvalues is less than 1.0E-5.
NSHIFT
Minimum number of subspace iterations completed before a shift is performed. The default is 5 and the
minimum is 2. Use FREQB on the MODOPT command or SHIFT on the BUCOPT command to define the
initial shift point.
Strmck
Sturm sequence check key:
ALL
Perform check at all shift points as well as at the end point (default).
PART
Perform check only at all shift points.
31296
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SUBSET
NONE
Do not perform Sturm sequence check.
JCGITR
Number of Jacobi iterations used per subspace iteration (used only with the JCG and PCG options on the
EQSLV command). Defaults to the number of degrees of freedom divided by the maximum wave front for
the model. The minimum is 5.
Command Default
As described for the option defaults above.
Notes
Defines options for subspace iteration eigenvalue extraction (MODOPT,SUBSP or BUCOPT,SUBSP). Default values
should be satisfactory for most solutions. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for option details. If used in
SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
SUBSET, Lstep, SBSTEP, FACT, KIMG, TIME, ANGLE, NSET
Reads results for the selected portions of the model.
POST1: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lstep
Load step number of the data set to be read (defaults to 1):
N
Read load step N.
FIRST
Read the first data set (SBSTEP and TIME are ignored).
LAST
Read the last data set (SBSTEP and TIME are ignored).
NEXT
Read the next data set (SBSTEP and TIME are ignored). If at the last data set, the first data set will be
read as the next.
NEAR
Read the data set nearest to TIME (SBSTEP is ignored). If TIME is blank, read the first data set.
LIST
Scan the results file and list a summary of each load step. (FACT, KIMG, TIME and ANGLE are ignored.)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31297
SUBSET
SBSTEP
Substep number (within Lstep). For the buckling (ANTYPE,BUCKLE) analysis or the modal (ANTYPE,MODAL)
analysis, the substep corresponds to the mode number. Defaults to last substep of load step (except for
ANTYPE,BUCKLE or MODAL). If Lstep = LIST, SBSTEP = 0 or 1 lists the basic step information, whereas SBSTEP
= 2 also lists the load step title, and labels imaginary data sets if they exist.
FACT
Scale factor applied to data read from the file. If zero (or blank), a value of 1.0 is used. Harmonic velocities or
accelerations may be calculated from the displacement results from a modal (ANTYPE,MODAL) or harmonic
response (ANTYPE,HARMIC) analyses. If FACT = VELO, the harmonic velocities (v) are calculated from the
displacements (d) at a particular frequency (f) according to the relationship v = 2 fd. Similarly, if FACT =
ACEL, the harmonic accelerations (a) are calculated as a = (2 f)2d.
KIMG
Used only with results from complex analyses:
0
Store real part of complex solution
1
Store imaginary part.
TIME
Time-point identifying the data set to be read. For the harmonic responses analyses, time corresponds to
the frequency. For the buckling analysis, time corresponds to the load factor. Used only in the following
cases: If Lstep is NEAR, read the data set nearest to TIME. If both Lstep and SBSTEP are zero (or blank), read
data set at time = TIME. If TIME is between two solution time points on the results file, a linear interpolation
is done between the two data sets. Solution items not written to the results file [OUTRES] for either data set
will result in a null item after data set interpolation. If TIME is beyond the last time point on the file, use the
last time point.
ANGLE
Circumferential location (0.0 to 360). Defines the circumferential location for the harmonic calculations used
when reading from the results file. The harmonic factor (based on the circumferential angle) is applied to
the harmonic elements (PLANE25, PLANE75, PLANE78, FLUID81, PLANE83, and SHELL61) of the load case.
See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Note that factored values of applied constraints and loads
will overwrite any values existing in the database.
NSET
Data set number of the data set to be read. If a positive value for NSET is entered, Lstep, SBSTEP, KIMG, and
TIME are ignored. Available set numbers can be determined by *SET,LIST.
Notes
Reads a data set from the results file into the database for the selected portions of the model only. Data that has
not been specified for retrieval from the results file by the INRES command will be listed as having a zero value.
Each time that the SUBSET command is issued, the data currently in the database will be overwritten with a new
set of data. Various operations may also be performed during the read operation. The database must have the
model geometry available (or used the RESUME command before the SUBSET command to restore the geometry
from File.DB).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Load Step
31298
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SUCALC
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Set Number
Main Menu>General Postproc>Read Results>By Time/Freq
SUCALC, RSetName, lab1, Oper, lab2, fact1, fact2, const
Create new result data by operating on two existing result data sets on a given surface.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RSetName
Eight character name for new result data.
lab1
First result data upon which to operate.
Oper
Mathematical operation to perform.
ADD
(lab1 + lab2 + const)
SUB
(lab1 - lab2 + const)
MULT
(lab1 * lab2 + const)
DIV
(lab1 / lab2 + const)
EXP
(lab1 ^ fact1 + lab2 ^ fact2 + const)
COS
(cos (lab1) + const)
SIN
(sin (lab1) + const)
ACOS
(acos (lab1) + const)
ASIN
(asin (lab1) + const)
ATAN
(atan (lab1) + const)
ATA2
(atan2 (lab1 / lab2) + const)
LOG
(log (lab1) + const)
ABS
(abs (lab1) + const)
ZERO
(0 + const)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31299
SUCR
lab2
Second result data upon which to operate.
fact1
First scaling factor (for EXP option only).
fact2
Second scaling factor (for EXP option only).
const
Constant added to the values in the resulting data.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Absolute
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Add
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>ArcCosine
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>ArcSine
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>ArcTangent
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>ArcTangent2
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Cosine
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Divide
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Exponentiate
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Initialize
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Multiply
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Natural Log
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Sine
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Subtract
SUCR, SurfName, SurfType, nRefine, Radius
Create a surface.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SurfName
Eight character surface name.
SurfType
Surface type.
CPLANE
Surface is defined by the cutting plane in window one (controlled by the working plane (/CPLANE,1),
NOT the view settings (/CPLANE,0)).
SPHERE
Surface is defined by a spherical surface centered about the working plane origin.
INFC
Surface is defined by a cylindrical surface centered about the working plane origin and extending indefinitely in the postitive and negative Z directions.
nRefine
Refinement level.
31300
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SUDEL
For SurfType = CPLANE
The refinement level of the surface mesh. This will be an integer between 0 and 3 (default = 0). See
Notes below.
For SurfType = SPHERE
The number of divisions along a 90 arc (minimum = 9, maximum = 90). The default is 9.
For SurfType = INFC
The number of divisions along a 90 arc (minimum = 9, maximum = 90). The default is 9.
Radius
Appropriate radius value (for INFC or SPHERE).
Notes
This is an action command. This command will store the following quantities for the defined surface:
GCX, GCY, GCZ are global Cartesian coordinates at each point on the surface.
NORMX, NORMY, NORMZ are components of the unit normal at each point on the surface.
DA is the contributory area of each point.
For SurfType = CPLANE, nRefine refers to the number of points that define the surface.
If SurfType = CPLANE and nRefine = 0, the points reside at the section cuts where the element intersects the
cutting plane.
Increasing nRefine to 1 will subdivide each surface facet into 4 subfacets, thus increasing the number of points
at which results can be interpolated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>Inf. Cylinder
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>On Cuttng Plane
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>Sphere>At Node
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>Sphere>By Dimensions
SUDEL, SurfName
Delete geometry information as well as any mapped results for specified surface.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SurfName
Eight character surface name.
SurfName = ALL will delete all surface geometry and result infromation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Delete Surfaces
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31301
SUEVAL
SUEVAL, Parm, lab1, Oper
Perform operations on a mapped item and store result in a scalar parameter.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Parm
APDL parameter name.
lab1
Eight character set name for the first set used in calculation.
Oper
Operation to perform:
SUM
Sum of lab1 result values.
INTG
Integral of lab1 over surface.
AVG
Area-weighted average of a result item [(lab1*DA) / (DA)]
Notes
The result of this operation is a scalar APDL parameter value. If multiple surfaces are selected when this command
is issued, then the operation is carried out on each surface individually and the parameter reperesents the culmulative value of the operation on all selected surfaces.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Average Result
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Integrate Results
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Sum of Results
SUGET, SurfName, RSetName, Parm, Geom
Moves surface geometry and mapped results to an array parameter.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SurfName
Eight character surface name.
RSetName
Eight character result name.
Parm
APDL array parameter name (up to 32 characters).
Geom
Switch controlling how data is written.
31302
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SUMAP
ON/1/YES
Writes geometry data and interpolated results information to the parameter.
OFF/0/NO
Writes only interpolated results information to the parameter. (Default)
Notes
For Geom = OFF/0/NO, only results information is written to this parameter.
For Geom = ON/1/YES, both geometry data and results information are written to this parameter. Geometry data
includes 7 data items: (GCX, GCY, GCZ, NORMX, NORMY, NORMZ and DA). Results information is then written to
the 8th column of the parameter. SetNames of GCX, GCY, GCZ, NORMX, NORMY, NORMZ and DA are predefined
and computed when SUCR is issued.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Results to Array
SUMAP, RSetName, Item, Comp
Map results onto selected surface(s).
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RSetName
Eight character name for the result being mapped.
Item
Label identifying the item.
Valid item labels are defined in PLNSOL. Some items also require a component label.
If Item = CLEAR, the specified result set will be deleted from all selected surfaces
Comp
Component label of item (if required).
Notes
Results are mapped in current RSYS. This command interpolates and stores results data on to each of the selected
surfaces. SUMAP, ALL, CLEAR will delete all results sets from all selected surfaces.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Clear Results
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31303
SUMTYPE
SUMTYPE, Label
Sets the type of summation to be used in the following load case operations.
POST1: Results
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Summation type
COMP
Combine element component stresses only. Stresses such as average nodal stresses, principal stresses,
equivalent stresses, and stress intensities are derived from the combined element component stresses.
Default.
PRIN
Combine principal stress, equivalent stress, and stress intensity directly as stored on the results file.
Component stresses are not available with this option.
Notes
Issue SUMTYPE,PRIN when you want to have a load case operation (LCOPER) act on the principal / equivalent
stresses instead of the component stresses.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Load Case>Calc Options>Stress Options
SUPL, SurfName, RSetName, KWIRE
Plot result data on all selected surfaces or on a specified surface.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SurfName
Eight character surface name. ALL will plot all selected surfaces.
RSetName
Eight character result name.
KWIRE
Plot in context of model.
0
Plot results without the outline of selected elements.
1
Plot results with the outline of selected elements.
Notes
If RSetName is left blank, then the surface geometry will be plotted. If the Setname portion of the argument is a
vector prefix (i.e. if result sets of name SetNameX, SetNameY and SetNameZ exist), ANSYS will plot these vectors
31304
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SURESU
on the surface as arrows. For example, SUPL, ALL, NORM will plot the surface normals as vectors on all selected
surfaces, since NORMX NORMY and NORMZ are pre-defined geometry items.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Plot Results
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Plot Vectors
SUPR, SurfName, RSetName
Print global status, geometry information and/or result information.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SurfName
Eight character surface name. If SurfName = ALL, repeat printout for all selected surfaces.
RSetName
Eight character result set name.
Notes
When no arguments are specified, SUPR generates a global status summary of all defined surfaces. If only
SurfName is specified, the geometry information for that surface is printed. If both SurfName and RSetName
are specified, the value of the results set at each point, in addition to the geometry information, is printed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Print Results
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Status>Global
SURESU, --, Fname, Fext, Fdir
Read a set of surface definitions and result items from a file and make them the current set.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
--
Unused field.
Fname
Eight character name.
Fext
Extension name.
Fdir
Optional path specification.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31305
SUSAVE
Notes
Reading (and therefore resuming) surface and result definitions from a file overwritea any existing surface
definitions.
Reading surfaces back into the postprocessor (/POST1) does not insure that the surfaces (and their results) are
appropriate for the model currently residing in /POST1.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Resume Surfaces
SUSAVE, Lab, Fname, Fext, Fdir
Saves surface definitions to a file.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Eight-character surface name.
If Lab = ALL (default), then all surfaces are saved to the file.
If Lab = S, only currently selected surfaces are saved to the file.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 character maximum, including directory). If you do not specify a directory
path, the default is your working directory and you can use all 248 characters for the file name. The file name
defaults to the jobname.
Fext
File name extension (eight-character maximum). The extension defaults to surf.
Fdir
Optional path specification.
Notes
The SUSAVE command saves surface definitions (geometry information)--and any result items mapped onto
the surfaces--to a file.
Issuing the SUSAVE command has no effect on the database. The database remains unchanged.
Subsequent executions of the SUSAVE command overwrite previous data in the file.
To read the contents of the file created via the SUSAVE command, issue the SURESU command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Save Surfaces
31306
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SUVECT
SUSEL, Type, Name1, Name2, Name3, Name4, Name5, Name6, Name7, Name8
Selects a subset of surfaces
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Selects a new set (default).
R
Reselects a set from the current set.
A
Additionally selects a set and extends the current set.
U
Unselects a set from the current set.
ALL
Also selects all surfaces.
NONE
Unselects all surfaces.
Name1, Name2, Name3, Name4, Name5, Name6, Name7, Name8
Eight character surface names
Notes
The selected set of surfaces is used in the following operations: SUMAP, SUDEL, SUCALC, SUEVAL, and SUVECT.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Select Surfaces
SUVECT, RSetName, lab1, Oper, lab2, Offset
Create new result data by operating on two existing result vectors on a given surface.
POST1: Surface Operations
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
RSetName
Eight character name of the result data output. There will be one or three RSetName values depending on
the operation specified in Oper.
lab1
Eight character name of the mapped data that forms vector 1. Specified sets must exist on all selected surfaces
for this operation to take place. The names NORM and GC will be reserved for normals and for global (x, y,
z).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31307
SV
Oper
DOT
Computes dot product between lab1 and lab2 vectors. The result is a scalar parameter (RSetName)
and each value within the set can be modified (incremented) via Offset.
CROSS
Computes cross product between lab1 and lab2 vectors. Each X, Y, Z value in the result can be modified
(incremented) via Offset.
SMULT
Scales (lab1x, lab1y, lab1z) vector by scalar lab2. Each X,Y,Z value in the result can be modified (incremented) via Offset.
lab2
Eight character name of the mapped data that forms vector 2. Sets with names Lab2X, Lab2Y, and Lab2Z
must exist on all selected surfaces for operation to take place. For Oper = SMULT a scalar value or another
predefined scalar item (e.g., DA) can be supplied.
Offset
An offset value to be applied to the resultant RSetName. One value is specified for Oper = DOT, and three
values are specified for Oper = SMULT.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Cross Product
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Dot Product
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Math Operations>Scale Result
SV, DAMP, SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7, SV8, SV9
Defines spectrum values to be associated with frequency points.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
DAMP
Damping ratio for this response spectrum curve. If the same as a previously defined curve, the SV values are
added to the previous curve. Up to four different curves may be defined, each with a different damping ratio.
Damping values must be input in ascending order.
SV1, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV6, SV7, SV8, SV9
Spectrum values corresponding to the frequency points [FREQ]. Values are interpreted as defined with the
SVTYP command. Log-log interpolation is used between curves. SV values should not be zero. Values required
outside the frequency range use the extreme input values.
Notes
Defines the spectrum values to be associated with the previously defined frequency points [FREQ]. Applies only
to the single-point response spectrum. Damping has no effect on the frequency solution. Damping values are
used only to identify SV curves for the mode combinations calculation. Only the curve with the lowest damping
value is used in the initial mode coefficient calculation. Use STAT command to list current spectrum curve values.
31308
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SVTYP
Repeat SV command for additional SV points (20 maximum per DAMP curve). SV values are added to the DAMP
curve after the last nonzero SV value.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Spectr Values
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Spectr Values
SVTYP, KSV, FACT
Defines the type of single-point response spectrum.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
KSV
Response spectrum type:
0
Seismic velocity response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as velocities with units of length/time).
1
Force response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as force amplitude multipliers).
2
Seismic acceleration response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as accelerations with units of
length/time2).
3
Seismic displacement response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as displacements with units of
length).
4
PSD loading (SV values interpreted as acceleration2/(cycles/time), such as (in/sec2)2/Hz (not g2/Hz)). (Not
recommended)
FACT
Scale factor applied to spectrum values (defaults to 1.0). Values are scaled when the solution is initiated
[SOLVE]. Database values remain the same.
Command Default
Seismic velocity response spectrum.
Notes
Defines the type of single-point response spectrum [SPOPT]. The seismic excitation direction is defined with the
SED command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31309
SWADD
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
SWADD, Ecomp, SHRD, NCM1, NCM2, NCM3, NCM4, NCM5, NCM6, NCM7, NCM8, NCM9
Adds more surfaces to an existing spot weld set.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Ecomp
Name of an existing spot weld set that was previously defined using SWGEN.
SHRD
Search radius. Defaults to 4 times the spot weld radius defined for the spot weld set (SWRD on SWGEN).
NCM1, NCM2, NCM3, NCM4, NCM5, NCM6, NCM7, NCM8, NCM9
Surfaces to be added to the spot weld set. Each surface can be input as a predefined node component or a
meshed area number.
Notes
This command adds surfaces to an existing spot weld set defined by the SWGEN command. You can add additional surfaces by repeating the SWADD command. However, the maximum number of allowable surfaces (including the 2 surfaces used for the original set defined by SWGEN) for each spot weld set is 11. See Section 8.1.3:
Adding Surfaces to a Basic Set for more information.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>SpotWeld>Add More Surfaces>By Areas
SWDEL, Ecomp
Deletes spot weld sets.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Ecomp
Name of an existing spot weld set that was previously defined using SWGEN. If Ecomp = ALL (default) all
spot welds are deleted.
Notes
This command deletes spot weld sets previously defined by the SWGEN command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>SpotWeld>Delete
31310
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SWGEN
SWGEN, Ecomp, SWRD, NCM1, NCM2, SND1, SND2, SHRD, DIRX, DIRY, DIRZ, ITTY, ICTY
Creates a new spot weld set.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Ecomp
Name to identify the new spot weld. This name will be used for the element component containing the new
contact, target, and beam elements generated for the spot weld set.
SWRD
Spot weld radius.
NCM1
Name of a component containing nodes on the first spot weld surface, or a meshed area number for the
surface.
NCM2
Name of a component containing nodes on the second spot weld surface, or a meshed area number for the
surface.
SND1
Node number of the first spot weld node corresponding to the first surface (NCM1). This node can be on or
close to the first surface.
SND2
Node number of the second spot weld node corresponding to the second surface (NCM2). This node can be
on or close to the second surface. ANSYS will create the node if it is not specified.
SHRD
Search radius. Defaults to 4 times the spot weld radius SWRD.
DIRX, DIRY, DIRZ
Spot weld projection direction in terms of normal X, Y, and Z components.
ITTY
Target element type ID.
ICTY
Contact element type ID.
Notes
This command creates a new spot weld set. You can add more surfaces to the set using SWADD after the initial
SWGEN command. However, the maximum number of allowable surfaces (including the 2 surfaces used for the
original set) for each spot weld set is 11.
Ecomp, SWRD, NCM1, NCM2, and SND1 must be specified. SND2, SHRD, DIRX, DIRY, DIRZ, ITTY, ICTY are optional
inputs. If the second spot weld node (SND2) is specified, that node is used to determine the spot weld projection
direction, andDIRX, DIRY and DIRZ are ignored.
If ITTY is specified, the following corresponding target element key option must be set: KEYOPT(5) = 4. If ICTY
is specified, the following corresponding contact element key options must be set: KEYOPT(2) = 2, KEYOPT(12)
= 5.
Use the SWLIST and SWDEL commands to list or delete spot welds. See Section 8.1.1: Creating a Basic Spot Weld
Set with SWGEN for detailed information on defining spot welds.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31311
SWLIST
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>SpotWeld>Add More Surfaces>By Node
Component
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>SpotWeld>Create New Set>By Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>SpotWeld>Create New Set>By Node Component
SWLIST, Ecomp
Lists spot weld sets.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Ecomp
Name of an existing spot weld set that was previously defined using SWGEN. If Ecomp = ALL (default), all
spot weld sets are listed.
Notes
This command lists spot weld node, beam, and contact pair information for all defined spot weld sets, or for the
specified set.
When SWLIST is issued in POST1, the beam forces and moments are output. For the case of a deformable spot
weld, the stresses are also output in the beam local coordinate system.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>List Results>SpotWeld Solution
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>SpotWeld>List
Utility Menu>List>Results>SpotWeld Solution
/SX
Enters the Variational Technology preprocessor.
SESSION: Processor Entry
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
Enters the Variational Technology processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Solve
31312
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXDISC
SXCLR, Type
Clears the Variational Technology database.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Type
Specifies the part of the Variational Technology database to be cleared. Valid labels are:
ALL
Clears the entire Variational Technology database. Both the preprocessing part (settings for input variables,
result parameters, etc.) and results part (results for the derivatives) are cleared.
RSLT
Clear only the results part of the Variational Technology database. This is necessary if you want to
modify the Variational Technology model (for example, adding a new input variable and so on) after a
solution has already been performed.
Notes
Clear the database of the Variational Technology module. The settings are reset to their default values and the
memory is cleared. Remember that the result files containing the results of Variational Technology (see SXRFIL
command) are never deleted unless you intentionally delete them. We recommend that you use this command
before switching to a new solution, which, for example, includes different input variables or different element
or node components for input variables. See the various Variational Technology commands for changes that are
possible after the solution has been performed.
If the entire database is cleared with SXCLR,ALL then also all definitions for input variables, result parameters,
solution method, result file storage and so on are either deleted and/or reset to their default values.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Other>Clear Database
SXDISC, Name, ElComp
Defines an element component as a discrete input variable for the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name for the input variable. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes. Blanks
are allowed in the string.
ElComp
The name of either of an element component or the number of a single element.
Command Default
None
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31313
SXEVAL
Notes
Defines a component containing a group of elements as a discrete input variable of the DesignXplorer VT. In a
discrete optimization the DesignXplorer VT will evaluate the dependency of the result parameter(s) (see the
SXRSLT command) as a function of the discrete case of either including the group of elements in the finite-element
model or excluding the group of elements from the model.
The ElComp field defines a group of elements that are considered as either being included or excluded from the
finite-element model during a discrete optimization.
If a solution has already been performed with Variational Technology using STAOPT,SX and the SOLVE command,
then the Variational Technology database is locked. In this case no input variables can be added to the model.
You cannot change the specific definitions of an existing input variable. If you want to modify the Variational
Technology model by adding a discrete variable, you first have to unlock the model with the SXCLR command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Discrete Variable
SXEVAL, --, Mode
Triggers evaluation of generated results based on input variables specified via the SXVMOD command.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
--
Unused field.
Mode
The mode number for normal modes. By default, driven by the application.
Command Default
Defaults as outlined above.
Notes
Used in conjunction with the SXVMOD command, SXEVAL evaluates the designated variables and loads the
results into the ANSYS database. You can employ the ANSYS postprocessing tools to view the results, or perform
an optimization or PDS loop.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu> DesignXplorer VT> Postprocessing> Evaluate Results
31314
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXFREQ
SXFREQ, Name, MIN, MAX, INC, RedOpt
Defines the frequency as input variable for the FS Module or the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: FS Module
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name of the variable. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes. Blanks can
be included in the string.
MIN
Minimum value of the input variable.
MAX
Maximum value of the input variable.
INC
Number of increments within the range of the input variable as defined by the MIN and MAX fields.
RedOpt
Reduction option that specifies what to do if the DesignXplorer VT needs to reduce the variation range from
MIN to MAX. Valid labels are:
CONT
Continue with the calculation of the derivatives. This is the default.
STOP
Stop the calculation of the derivatives. This option is necessary if a reduction of the variation range is
not acceptable.
Command Default
There are no default values for the command fields.
Notes
Defines the frequency as an input variable. Variational Technology will evaluate a frequency sweep from the
specified minimum to the maximum frequency values given in the MIN and MAX fields. The frequency sweep will
include as many frequency increments as specified in the INC field.
If a solution has already been performed with Variational Technology using STAOPT,SX and the SOLVE command,
then the Variational Technology database is locked. In this case no input variables can be added to the model.
You cannot change the specific definitions of an existing input variable. If you want to modify the Variational
Technology model by adding a discrete variable, you first have to unlock the model with the SXCLR command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Frequency
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31315
SXGEOM
SXGEOM, Name, MIN, MAX, RedOpt, Order
Defines a geometry parameter created with ANSYS ParaMesh as a DesignXplorer VT input variable.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name of an input variable. This is a string of up to 256 characters used for post-processing purposes. It can
have blanks included in the string.
MIN
Minimum value of the input variable. By default, driven by the application.
MAX
Maximum value of the input variable. By default, driven by the application.
RedOpt
Reduction option that specifies what to do if the DesignXplorer VT needs to reduce the variation range from
MIN to MAX. Valid labels are;
CONT
Continue with the calculation of the derivatives. This is the default.
STOP
Stop the calculation of the derivatives. This option is necessary if a reduction of the variation range is
not acceptable.
Order
Deviation Order. By default, driven by the application.
Command Default
Defaults as outlined above.
Notes
If you do not use ANSYS ParaMesh, you can ignore the SXGEOM command.
The SXGEOM command allows you to define a geometry parameter created with ANSYS ParaMesh as an input
variable of the DesignXplorer VT.
The filename of the ANSYS ParaMesh database has to be defined using the SXRFIL command. DesignXplorer
VT uses the same RSX file to store its results. If the RSX file does not exist or does not contain the expected geometry
parameters and associated morphed mesh, then the SXGEOM command is ignored.
In the general case, the fields MIN and MAX should not be used because a range of variation is already defined in
ANSYS ParaMesh. Nethertheless, the MIN and MAX fields allow to define a smaller range of variation to compute
the VT results. Althought is it not recommended, it is also possible to define a larger range of variation. In this
case, a warning message is always generated.
The MIN and MAX field must always be specified or left blank together. If only one field is specified, then the
SXGEOM command is ignored.
31316
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXIN
If the Order is not specified, it will be increased until the accuracy requirements of the SXRSLT command are
satisfied. When you set a value for Order, no further adjustments for accuracy will be performed. Order should
only be used when an input parameter has an influence with a limited order.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
SXIN, Name, MIN, MAX, RedOpt, Lab, Comp, --, VarType, Order
Defines an inertial load as an input variable for DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name for the input variable. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes. Blanks
can be included in the string.
MIN
Minimum value of the input variable.
MAX
Maximum value of the input variable.
RedOpt
Reduction option that specifies what to do if DesignXplorer VT needs to reduce the variation range from
MIN to MAX. Valid labels are:
CONT
Continue with the calculation of the derivatives. This is the default.
STOP
Stop the calculation of the derivatives. This option is necessary if a reduction of the variation range is
not acceptable.
Lab
Valid inertial load label. This label must be defined for the inertial load using the ANSYS command of the
same name prior to issuing this command. Applicable labels are:
ACEL
Linear acceleration.
CGOMGA
Rotational velocity of the global origin.
DCGOMG
Rotational acceleration of the global origin.
DOMEGA
Rotational acceleration of the structure.
OMEGA
Rotational velocity.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31317
SXMETH
--
Unused field.
Comp
X, Y,Z or ALL
If Comp =ALL, the VarType must be FACT.
VarType
Label indicating how the variability of vectors should be handled, when COMP = ALL is used. Valid labels are:
FACT
The variability of vector is described by a scaling factor that is applied to all 3 vectors components. This
means that the MIN field is the value of the minimum factor to be applied and the MAX field is the maximum factor to be applied.
ADD
The variability of vector components is described by an add-on that is applied to vector components.
This means that the MIN field is the minimum value that is added to the vector components and the MAX
field contains the maximum value that is added to the vector components. As such the values specified
for MIN and MAX have the same unit as the vector itself.
VAL
The variability of the vectors is described by the variability of the vector components itself. This is only
applicable if ALL has not been used. This means that the MIN field is the minimum value that the vector
component itself can take and the MAX field contains the maximum value, which the vector component
can take. This is the default.
Order
Derivation order. By default, driven by the application.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
SXMETH, SoluType, ApprType, ModeTrack
Defines the solution options for the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
SoluType
Specifies the type of derivatives that need to be evaluated during the solution run of the DesignXplorer VT.
Valid labels are:
INDP
Evaluates the derivatives assuming that the input variables are independent. Therefore, mixed derivatives
will be neglected.
31318
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXMETH
FULL
Evaluates all required derivatives including mixed derivatives, addressing the interactions between the
input variables (if necessary). This option is the default.
ApprType
Specifies the type of approximation function that is used to build the DesignXplorer VT. Valid labels are:
PADE
Uses a series expansion based on Pade approximations using rational functions. This method is the more
accurate, however it is limited to a single input variable per element.
TAYL
Uses a Taylor series expansion as the approximation function. This must be used when there is more
than one input variable per element, i.e. Young's Modulus and thickness. When performing a normal
nodes analysis, use the TAYL method for faster solution times.
AUTO
Use the PADE method whenever possible, TAYL method otherwise. This option is the default.
ModeTrack
Specifies whether or not mode tracking should be in a modal solution of the DesignXplorer VT. Valid labels
are:
YES
Mode Tracking will be used in a modal solution. This option is the default.
NO
Mode Tracking will not be used in a modal solution.
Command Default
Defaults as outlined above.
Notes
Determines which derivatives of the result parameters with respect to the input variables shall be calculated
during the DesignXplorer VT solution run. Also determines in which type of approximation function the derivatives
are used.
If your Variational Technology analysis includes discrete variables defined with the SXDISC command, then ApprType=PADE will be used if you specify AUTO or PADE.
The default ApprType=AUTO is always the recommended and preferred approximation method. If using AUTO
generates error messages, you must switch to the PADE or TAYL method.
If Variational Technology is not used in connection with a modal analysis, then the ModeTrack option is ignored.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Solution Method
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31319
SXMP
SXMP, Name, MIN, MAX, RedOpt, Lab, MAT, ElComp, VarType, Order
Defines a material property as an input variable for DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name for the input variable. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes. Blanks
can be included in the string.
MIN
Minimum value of the input variable.
MAX
Maximum value of the input variable.
RedOpt
Reduction option that specifies what to do if DesignXplorer VT needs to reduce the variation range from
MIN to MAX. Valid labels are:
CONT
Continue with the calculation of the derivatives. This is the default.
STOP
Stop the calculation of the derivatives. This option is necessary if a reduction of the variation range is
not acceptable.
Lab
Valid material property label. This label must be defined for the material number MAT using the MP or MPDATA
command prior to issuing this command. Applicable labels are:
EX
Elastic moduli (also EY, EZ).
NUXY
Minor Poisson's ratios (also NUYZ, NUXZ).
GXY
Shear moduli (also GYZ, GXZ).
DENS
Material density
MAT
Material identification number
ElComp
Name of an element component or number of a single individual element. If ElComp = ALL, then all elements
are considered for the SXMP command.
VarType
Label indicating how the variability of temperature dependent material properties should be handled. This
is particularly useful to describe how temperature dependent material properties are handled. At this release,
only one label (the default) is valid:
FACT
The variability of the material property is described by a scale factor that is applied to the material
property values. In the case of temperature dependent material properties, a scale factor will be applied
31320
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXMP
to all defined material property values. This means that the MIN field is the value of the minimum factor
to be applied and the MAX field is the maximum factor to be applied. As such the values specified for MIN
and MAX are unitless quantities. VarType = FACT is the default for temperature dependent material
properties.
ADD
The variability of the material property is described by an add-on that is applied to the material property
values. In the case of a temperature dependent material property, the defined property values are shifted
all at the same time. This means that the MIN field is the minimum value that is added to the material
property values and the MAX field contains the maximum value that is added to the material property
values. Hence, the values specified for MIN and MAX have the same unit as the material property itself.
VAL
The variability of the material property is described by the variability of the material property value itself.
This is only applicable if the material property is not temperature dependent. This means that the MIN
field is the minimum value that the material property itself can take and the MAX field contains the maximum value which the material property values can take. This is the default if the material properties are
not temperature dependent.
Order
Derivation order. By default, driven by the application.
Command Default
As described above.
Notes
Defines a material property of a single element or a set of elements as an input variable of the DesignXplorer VT.
The DesignXplorer VT will evaluate the derivatives of the result parameter(s) (see SXRSLT command) with respect
to the material property defined here. The derivatives are used to determine an approximation function for the
result parameter(s) as a function of the material property in the range specified by the MIN and MAX fields.
The type of the material property is defined by the Lab field, which must not be left blank. The material property
must exist or be specified using the MP or MPDATA command prior to issuing the SXMP command.
Using either the MAT field or the ElComp field a set of element is selected for which the material property is varied.
The user must define one of them and leave the respective other one blank. All selected elements must be associated with the same material number. This is of course always given in the MAT field. If selected by the ElComp
field, an error will be issued if an element is found that is associated with a material number that is different from
the one associated with any other element in the element component.
If the material properties are temperature dependent, then the temperature dependency is defined by either
several data points at different temperatures (MP) or by coefficients defining the temperature dependent polynomial (MPDATA). To describe a variation of the material property with one single parameter is only possible
by using a scalar addition to the temperature dependency curve (VarType = ADD) or by using a scalar multiplication factor for the entire temperature dependency curve (VarType = FACT). Varying the material property value
itself using VarType = VAL is not possible, if the material property is temperature dependent.
An error message is generated and the SXMP command is ignored when the current value is outside the variation
range.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31321
SXPOST
If the Order is not specified, it will be increased until the accuracy requirements of the SXRSLT command are
satisfied. When you set a value for Order, no further adjustments for accuracy will be performed. Order should
only be used when an input parameter has an influence with a limited order.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Material Property
SXPOST
Launches the DesignXplorer VT postprocessing application.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Notes
The postprocessing application provides a viewer for Variational Technology results files. You can only launch
this application if the ANSYS GUI is active; that is, it cannot be launched from batch mode.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Postprocessing>SolutionViewer
SXREAL, Name, MIN, MAX, RedOpt, Lab, NSET, ElComp, VarType, Order
Defines a real constant property as an input variable for the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name of the input variable. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes. Blanks
are allowed in the string.
MIN
Minimum value of the input variable.
MAX
Maximum value of the input variable.
RedOpt
Reduction option that specifies what to do if the DesignXplorer VT needs to reduce the variation range from
MIN to MAX. Valid labels are:
CONT
Continue with the calculation of the derivatives. This is the default.
31322
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXREAL
STOP
Stop the calculation of the derivatives. This option is necessary if a reduction of the variation range is
not acceptable.
Lab
Valid real constant label. This label must refer to a valid property of the real constant set as defined in the R
command. Applicable labels are:
TK
Shell thickness. This applies only to shell elements of type SHELL181, where the element thickness has
been defined with the R command.
STIF
Spring stiffness. This applies only to combination elements of type COMBIN14, where the spring stiffness
has been defined with the R command.
MASS
Lumped mass. This applies only to structural mass elements of type MASS21 with KEYOPT(3) = 2, where
the lumped mass has been defined with the R command.
NSET
Real constant set identification number as defined by the R command.
ElComp
Name of an element component or number of a single individual element. If ElComp = ALL, then all elements
are considered for the SXREAL command.
VarType
Label indicating how the variability of a spatially dependent element thickness should be handled. This label
is ignored if the shell element thickness is constant for all elements selected by either the NSET or the ElComp
field. Valid labels are:
FACT
The variability of the section property is described by a scale factor that is applied to the section property
values. In case the section properties are different from element to element, a scale factor will be applied
to all section property values. This means that the MIN field is the value of the minimum factor to be
applied and the MAX field is the maximum factor to be applied. As such the values specified for MIN and
MAX are unitless quantities. VarType = FACT is the default if the section property is different from element
to element.
ADD
The variability of the section property is described by an add-on that is applied to the section property
values. In case the section properties are different from element to element, then the section property
values are shifted at the same time by this add-on. This means that the MIN field is the minimum value
that is added to the section property values and the MAX field contains the maximum value that is added
to the property values. Hence, the values specified for MIN and MAX have the physical unit of a length.
VAL
The variability of the section property is described by the modification of the section property value itself.
This is only applicable if the section property value is identical and constant for all selected elements.
This means that the MIN field is the minimum value that the section property value itself can take and
the MAX field contains the maximum value, which the section property value can take. This is the default
if the section property is identical and constant from element to element.
Order
Derivation order. By default, driven by the application.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31323
SXRFIL
Notes
Defines the real constant property of a single element or a set of elements as an input variable of the DesignXplorer
VT. The real constant property must be specified with the R command prior to the SXREAL command. The
DesignXplorer VT will evaluate the derivatives of the result parameter(s) (see SXRSLT command) with respect
to the section property defined here. The derivatives are used to determine an approximation function for the
result parameter(s) as a function of the section property in the range specified by the MIN and MAX fields.
Using either the NSET field or the ElComp field a set of elements is selected for which the real constant property
is varied. The user must define one of these two fields and leave the respective other one blank.
If the real constant property is different from element to element, then each element has different values for the
real constant properties at the individual nodes. To describe a variation of the real constant property with one
single parameter is only possible by using a scalar addition to all real constant property values (VarType = ADD)
or by using a scalar multiplication factor for all real constant property values (VarType = FACT). Varying the real
constant property by its value itself using VarType = VAL is only possible if the element thickness is constant
and identical for all elements.
An error message is generated and the SXREAL command is ignored when the current value is outside the
variation range.
If the Order is not specified, it will be increased until the accuracy requirements of the SXRSLT command are
satisfied. When you set a value for Order, no further adjustments for accuracy will be performed. Order should
only be used when an input parameter has an influence with a limited order.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Real Constant
SXRFIL, Fname, Ext, Dir
Specifies the file to which DesignXplorer VT results are written.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Fname
File name (32 characters maximum). Defaults to Jobname.
Ext
File name extension (8 characters maximum). Defaults to rsx if Fname is blank; otherwise, no default.
Dir
Directory name (64 characters maximum). Defaults to the current working directory.
Command Default
Fname = Jobname, Ext = rsx, the default directory is the current working directory.
31324
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXRSLT
Notes
Specifies which file is used to store the results of DesignXplorer VT. The file contains the description of the
higher order derivatives of the result parameters (selected by the SXRSLT command) with respect to the input
variables (selected by commands SXFREQ, SXMP, SXSEC, ).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Solution>Results File
SXRSLT, Name, Entity, Type, Comp, ACC, CompName
Defines a result quantity for the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name of the result parameter. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes.
Blanks can be included.
Entity
Entity keyword. Valid keywords are listed in the tables below.
Type
Type of result parameter. Valid labels are listed in the table below depending on the Entity field.
Comp
Component of the result parameter type. Valid labels are listed in the table below depending on the Type
field.
ACC
Required accuracy for the requested result parameter. Default values depend on the individual result parameter. The default value is 0.02 (2%).
CompName
Name of an element or node component, depending on the Entity field. If CompName = ALL then all entities
as specified in the Entity field are considered for the SXRSLT command. CompName = ALL is the default.
Command Default
ACC = 2%, CompName = ALL.
Notes
Defines the result quantity, for which an approximation function with respect to the input variables will be calculated.
The accuracy provided with the ACC field should not be confused with the error due to meshing of the finiteelement model. The accuracy is the maximum difference you can expect between an evaluation of the results
of DesignXplorer VT at any point of the input space of the defined input variables and a rerun of a full ANSYS
model at the same location of the input space.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31325
SXRSLT
The accuracy for all result parameters will be used to derive a global accuracy measure using the minimum value.
This means that if there are several result parameters defined with the SXRSLT command and some have a requested accuracy of ACC = 0.05 and one has a requested accuracy of ACC = 0.01, then an accuracy of 0.01 (1%)
will be adopted for all result parameters.
If the derivation order has been specified for one parameter, then the accuracy is not guaranteed for any variation
involving this parameter.
For a normal modes analysis the result type MASS cannot be selected.
Table of Valid Labels for the Type and Comp Fields for Entity=ELEM
Type
Comp
MASS
S
Description
Structural mass based on the elements.
ALL
Component nodal stress of the element(s) (not averaged at nodes).
Note For Entity = ELEM an existing component name including a set of elements must be specified
in the CompName field.
Table of valid labels for the Type and Comp fields for Entity = Node
Type
Comp
Description
RF
FX, FY, FZ, MX, Nodal reaction forces in the nodal coordinate system
MY, MZ, ALL
Note For Entity = NODE an existing component name including a set of nodes must be specified in
the CompName field.
Table of valid labels for the Type and Comp fields for Entity = Mode
Type
Comp
Description
MODE
All mode shapes and the corresponding eigenfrequencies that are evaluated as part of
the solution.
FREQ
All eigenfrequencies that are evaluated as part of the solution. Compared to the Type =
MODE option, the Type = FREQ option does not provide the solutions for the mode shapes.
The option will save memory compared to the Type = MODE option.
Note For Entity = MODE, all modes are always taken into consideration, that is, the only valid user
input is CompName = ALL.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Result Quantity
31326
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXSEC
SXSEC, Name, MIN, MAX, RedOpt, Lab, SECID, LAYERID, ElComp, VarType, Order
Defines a section property as an input variable for the FS Module or the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name for the input variable. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes. Blanks
can be included.
MIN
Minimum value of the input variable.
MAX
Maximum value of the input variable.
RedOpt
Reduction option that specifies what to do if DesignXplorer VT must reduce the variation range from MIN to
MAX. Valid labels are:
CONT
Continue with the calculation of the derivatives. This is the default.
STOP
Stop the calculation of the derivatives. This option is necessary if a reduction of the variation range is
not acceptable.
Lab
Valid section property label. This label must refer to a valid property of the section as defined by the SECTYPE
and SECDATA commands. The applicable label is:
TK
Shell thickness. This applies only if the section property has been defined with Type = SHELL of the
SECTYPE command.
A
Area of section.
Iyy
Moment of inertia about the y axis.
Iyz
Product of inertia.
Izz
Moment of interia about the z axis.
Iw
Wrapping constant.
J
Torsional constant.
SECID
Section identification number as defined by the SECTYPE command and further specified by the SECDATA
command.
LAYERID
Layer identification number as defined by the SECDATA command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31327
SXSEC
ElComp
Name of an element component or number of a single individual element. If ElComp = ALL, then all elements
are considered for the SXSEC command.
VarType
Label indicating how the variability of a spatially dependent element thickness should be handled. This label
is ignored if the shell element thickness is constant for all elements selected by either the SECID or the ElComp
field. Valid labels are:
FACT
The variability of the section property is described by a scale factor that is applied to the section property
values. In case the section properties are different from element to element, a scale factor will be applied
to all section property values. This means that the MIN field is the value of the minimum factor to be
applied and the MAX field is the maximum factor to be applied. As such the values specified for MIN and
MAX are unitless quantities. VarType = FACT is the default if the section property is different from element
to element.
ADD
The variability of the section property is described by an add-on that is applied to the section property
values. In case the section properties are different from element to element, then the section property
values are shifted at the same time by this add-on. This means that the MIN field is the minimum value
that is added to the section property values and the MAX field contains the maximum value that is added
to the section property values. Hence, the values specified for MIN and MAX have the physical unit of a
length.
VAL
The variability of the section property is described by the modification of the section property value itself.
This is only applicable if the section property value is identical and constant for all selected elements.
This means that the MIN field is the minimum value that the section property value itself can take and
the MAX field contains the maximum value, which the section property value can take. This is the default
if the section property is identical and constant from element to element.
Order
Derivation order. By default, driven by the application.
Notes
Defines the section property of a single element or a set of elements as an input variable of DesignXplorer VT.
The section property must be specified with the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands prior to the SXSEC command.
The DesignXplorer VT will evaluate the derivatives of the result parameter(s) (see SXRSLT command) with respect
to the section property defined here. The derivatives are used to determine an approximation function for the
result parameter(s) as a function of the section property in the range specified by the MIN and MAX fields.
Using either the SECID field or the ElComp field a set of elements is selected for which the section property is
varied. The user must define one of these two fields and leave the respective other one blank.
If the section property is different from element to element, then each element has different values for the section
property at the individual nodes. To describe a variation of the section property with one single parameter is
only possible by using a scalar addition to all section property values (VarType = ADD) or by using a scalar
multiplication factor for all section property values (VarType = FACT). Varying the section property by its value
itself using VarType = VAL is only possible, if the section property is constant and identical for all elements.
An error message is generated and the SXSEC command is ignored when the current value is outside the variation
range.
31328
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXSL
If the Order is not specified, it will be increased until the accuracy requirements of the SXRSLT command are
satisfied. When you set a value for Order, no further adjustments for accuracy will be performed.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Section Property
SXSL, Type, Varname
Selects a subset of elements associated with an SX input variable.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Type
Label identifying the type of select:
S
Select a new set. This is the default.
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Varname
Name of an SX input variable, defined with the SXMP, SXREAL, SXSEC or SXDISC commands.
Command Default
There are no default values for the command fields.
Notes
This command does not apply to output variables or SXGEOM input variables.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu> DesignXplorer VT> Setup> Frequency
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31329
SXSTAT
SXSTAT, EntyLis
Print the status of the DesignXplorer VT definitions and settings into a separate window.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
EntyLis
Option that specifies whether the nodes or element lists should be printed for those Variational Technology
commands where nodes or element lists have been specified. Valid labels are:
NO
Do not print out the list of nodes or elements (default).
YES
Print out the list of nodes or elements.
Notes
Prints the status the user definitions and settings of the DesignXplorer VT to a separate window.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Other>Status
SXTEMP,Name, MIN, MAX, RedOpt, --,
VarType, Order
Defines the temperature as input variable for the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name for the input variable. This is a string of up to 250 characters used for postprocessing purposes. Blanks
are allowed in the string.
MIN
Minimum value of the input variable.
MAX
Maximum value of the input variable.
RedOpt
Reduction option that specifies what to do if the DesignXplorer VT needs to reduce the variation range from
MIN to MAX. Valid labels are:
CONT
Continue with the calculation of the derivatives. This is the default.
STOP
Stop the calculation of the derivatives. This option is necessary if a reduction of the variation range is
not acceptable.
31330
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
SXVMOD
---
Unused field.
VarType
Label indicating how the variability of temperature should be handled. Valid labels are:
FACT
The variability of the material property is described by an scaling factor that is applied to the temperature.
This means that the MIN field is the value of the minimum factor to be applied and the MAX field is the
maximum factor to be applied. Hence, the values specified for MIN and MAX are unitless quantities. VarType = FACT is the default for temperature parameters.
ADD
The variability of the temperature is described by an add-on that is applied to the temperature values.
This means that the MIN field is the minimum value that is added to the temperature values and the MAX
field contains the maximum value that is added to the material property values. Hence, the values specified
for MIN and MAX have the same unit as the material property itself.
Order
Derivation Order. By default, driven by the application.
Command Default
Defaults as outlined above.
Notes
Defines the temperature as an input variable.
If the Order is not specified, it will be increased until the accuracy requirements of the SXRSLT command are
satisfied. When you set a value for Order, no further adjustments for accuracy will be performed.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Temperature Load
SXVMOD, Name, Oper, Value
Modifies the status or current value of an input variable for the DesignXplorer VT.
VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY: DesignXplorer VT
<> <> <> <> VT <> <> <> <> <> <>
Name
Name for an input or results variable of the DesignXplorer VT. This is a string of up to 250 characters used
for postprocessing purposes. Blanks can be used. An input variable with this name must be previously defined
using one of the following commands: SXFREQ, SXMP, SXRSLT,
Oper
Label for the type of operation that is performed on the input variable Name. Valid labels are:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31331
/SYP
ACT
Activates an input variable in the DesignXplorer VT. This operation is ignored, if the variable specified is
already activated.
DEACT
Deactivates an input variable of the DesignXplorer VT. This operation is ignored, if the variable specified
is not activated.
DEL
Deletes an input or results variable of the DesignXplorer VT.
SET
Sets the value of an input variable of the DesignXplorer VT.
Value
Is the value of the input variable for the SXEVAL command.
Notes
Modifies the status of an input variable for the DesignXplorer VT that have been previously defined, by activating,
deactivating or deleting it.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer VT>Setup>Modify
/SYP, String, ARG1, ARG2, ARG3, ARG4, ARG5, ARG6, ARG7, ARG8
Passes a command string and arguments to the operating system.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP <>
String
Command string (cannot include commas). See also the /SYS command.
ARG1, ARG2, ARG3, ARG4, ARG5, ARG6, ARG7, ARG8
Arguments to be appended to the command string, separated by blanks, commas, or other delimiter characters (see the ANSYS Operations Guide). The arguments may be numbers, parameters, or parametric expressions.
Notes
Passes a command string to the operating system for execution, along with arguments to be appended to the
command string. See the ANSYS Operations Guide for details. ANSYS may not be aware of your specific user environment. In particular, this command may not recognize UNIX aliases, depending on the hardware platform
and user environment.
This command is valid in any processor.
31332
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/SYS
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
/SYS, String
Passes a command string to the operating system.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP <>
String
Command string, up to 75 characters (including blanks, commas, etc.). The specified string is passed verbatim
to the operating system, i.e., no parameter substitution is performed.
Notes
Passes a command string to the operating system for execution (see the ANSYS Operations Guide). Typical strings
are system commands such as list, copy, rename, etc. Control returns to the ANSYS program after the system
procedure is completed. ANSYS may not be aware of your specific user environment. In particular, this command
may not recognize UNIX aliases, depending on the hardware platform and user environment.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31333
31334
T Commands
TALLOW, TEMP1, TEMP2, TEMP3, TEMP4, TEMP5, TEMP6
Defines the temperature table for safety factor calculations.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TEMP1, TEMP2, TEMP3, TEMP4, TEMP5, TEMP6
Input up to six temperatures covering the range of nodal temperatures. Temperatures must be input in ascending order.
Notes
Defines the temperature table for safety factor calculations [SFACT, SALLOW]. Use STAT command to list current
temperature table. Repeat TALLOW command to zero table and redefine points (6 maximum).
Safety factor calculations are not supported by PowerGraphics. Both the SALLOW and TALLOW commands
must be used with the Full Model Graphics display method active.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>Allowable Strs>Reset Temps
Main Menu>General Postproc>Safety Factor>Allowable Strs>Temp-depend
TB, Lab, MAT, NTEMP, NPTS, TBOPT, EOSOPT
Activates a data table for nonlinear material properties or special element input.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH <> PP ED
Lab
Type of data table:
ANAND
Anand plasticity (VISCO106, VISCO107, VISCO108). See ANAND Specifications for more information.
ANEL
Anisotropic elastic matrix (SOLID5, PLANE13, SOLID64, SOLID98, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, and explicit dynamic elements SOLID164
and SOLID168). Also PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227. See ANEL Specifications for more information.
ANISO
Anisotropic plasticity (LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45,
SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, and SHELL143).
See ANISO Specifications for more information.
BH
Magnetic field data (SOLID5, PLANE13, PLANE53, SOLID62, SOLID96, SOLID97, SOLID98, SOLID117). See
BH Specifications for more information.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
BISO
Bilinear isotropic hardening using von Mises or Hill plasticity (for von Mises plasticity: LINK1, PLANE2,
LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65,
PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, SHELL143, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, and explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168. For Hill plasticity: PLANE42, SOLID45,
PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See BISO Specifications for more information.
BKIN
Bilinear kinematic hardening using von Mises or Hill plasticity (For von Mises plasticity: LINK1, PLANE2,
LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65,
PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, SHELL143, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, and explicit dynamic elements LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168. For Hill plasticity:
PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See BKIN Specifications
for more information.
CAST
Cast iron material model (PLANE182 (not applicable for plane stress), PLANE183 (not applicable for plane
stress), SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See CAST Specifications
for more information.
CHABOCHE
Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening using von Mises or Hill plasticity (PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82,
SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See CHABOCHE Specifications for more information.
COMP
Composite material models (explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168).
See COMP Specifications for more information.
CONCR
Concrete element data (SOLID65) or concrete damage model (explicit dynamic elements SOLID164 and
SOLID168). See CONCR Specifications for more information.
CREEP
Viscoplasticity/creep. ANSYS can model pure creep, creep with isotropic hardening plasticity, or creep
with kinematic hardening plasticity using both von Mises or Hill potentials. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for further information on combining models (For explicit creep
with von Mises potential: LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45,
SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, and SHELL143. For implicit creep with
von Mises or Hill potential: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209).
See CREEP Specifications for more information.
DISCRETE
Explicit spring-damper (discrete) material models (COMBI165). See DISCRETE Specifications for more information.
DP
Drucker-Prager plasticity (LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45,
SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, and SHELL143).
See DP Specifications for more information.
31336
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
DPER
Anisotropic electric permittivity (PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227). See DPER Specifications for more information.
ELASTIC
Elastic material property (PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187). Elastic properties can
be defined as frequency-dependent for use in a full harmonic analysis (use TBFIELD). See ELASTIC Specifications for more information.
EOS
Equation of state (explicit dynamic elements only). See EOS Specifications for more information.
EVISC
Viscoelastic element data (VISCO88, VISCO89, and explicit dynamic elements BEAM161, PLANE162,
SOLID164, and SOLID168). See EVISC Specifications for more information.
FAIL
Composite material failure data (SOLID46, SHELL91, SOLID95, SHELL99, SOLID191). See FAIL Specifications
for more information. See also the FC command (Section 12.2.3: Specifying Failure Criteria of the ANSYS
Structural Analysis Guide) which applies to all structural shell and solid elements.
FCON
Fluid conductance data (FLUID116). See FCON Specifications for more information.
FOAM
Foam material models (explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SOLID164, and SOLID168). See FOAM
Specifications for more information.
GASKET
Gasket material model (INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, and INTER195). See GASKET Specifications for
more information.
GCAP
Geological Cap material model (explicit dynamic elements SOLID164 and SOLID168). See GCAP Specifications for more information.
HFLM
Film coefficient data (FLUID116). See HFLM Specifications for more information.
HILL
Hill anisotropy when combined with other material options simulates plasticity, viscoplasticity, and creep
-- all with the Hill potential. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for further
information on combining models (PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181,
PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM 188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and
SHELL209). See HILL Specifications for more information.
HONEY
Honeycomb material models (explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SOLID164, and SOLID168). See
HONEY Specifications for more information.
HYPER
Hyperelasticity models [Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Neo-Hookean, Polynomial form, Arruda-Boyce, Gent,
Yeoh, Blatz-Ko, Ogden foam, and user-defined] (SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See HYPER Specifications for more information.
JOIN
Linear and nonlinear elastic stiffness, linear and nonlinear damping, and hysteretic frictional behavior
(MPC184). See JOIN Specifications for more information.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31337
TB
KINH
Multilinear kinematic hardening using von Mises or Hill plasticity (for von Mises plasticity: LINK1, PLANE2,
LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, PLANE82, SOLID92,
SHELL93, SOLID95, SHELL143, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209. For Hill plasticity: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82,
SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). KINH is the same as MKIN with TBOPT = 2, but with less
restrictions on the number of points per curve and the number of temperatures. See KINH Specifications
for more information.
MELAS
Multilinear elasticity (LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45,
SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, and SHELL143).
See MELAS Specifications for more information.
MISO
Multilinear isotropic hardening using von Mises or Hill plasticity (for von Mises plasticity: LINK1, PLANE2,
LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65,
PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, SHELL143, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209. For Hill
plasticity: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See MISO
Specifications for more information.
MKIN
Multilinear kinematic hardening using von Mises or Hill plasticity (for von Mises plasticity: LINK1, PLANE2,
LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65,
PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, SHELL143, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209. For Hill
plasticity: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See MKIN
Specifications for more information.
MOONEY
Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic element data (HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER84, HYPER86, HYPER158,
and explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168). See MOONEY Specifications for more information.
NLISO
Voce isotropic hardening law for modeling nonlinear isotropic hardening using von Mises or Hill plasticity.
(LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM 188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See NLISO Specifications for more information.
PIEZ
Piezoelectric matrix (SOLID5, PLANE13, SOLID98). Also PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227. See PIEZ Specifications for more information.
PLASTIC
Nonlinear plasticity with stress -vs- plastic strain data (LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209). See PLASTIC Specifications
for more information.
PLAW
Plasticity laws (explicit dynamic elements LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and
SOLID168). See PLAW Specifications for more information.
31338
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
PRONY
Prony series constants for viscoelastic materials (LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See PRONY Specifications
for more information.
PZRS
Piezoresistive materials (PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227). See PZRS Specifications for more information.
RATE
Rate-dependent plasticity (viscoplasticity) when combined with the BISO, MISO, or NLISO material options,
or rate-dependent anisotropic plasticity (anisotropic viscoplasticity) when combined with the HILL and
BISO, MISO, or NLISO material options. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference
for further information on combining models (PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180,
SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190,
SHELL208, and SHELL209). See RATE Specifications for more information.
SDAMP
Material structural damping coefficient (PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187). Damping
can be used to define frequency-dependent properties for use in full harmonic analysis (use TBFIELD).
See SDAMP Specifications for more information.
SHIFT
Shift function for viscoelastic materials (LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). See SHIFT Specifications for more
information.
SMA
Shape memory alloy for simulation of hysteresis superelastic behavior with no performance deformation.
Plane stress is not supported. See Shape Memory Alloys in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 4.5:
Shape Memory Alloy Material Model in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for further information. The
TB,SMA option is valid for PLANE182 and PLANE183 (with plane strain or axisymmetric stress states),
and for SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, and SOLSH190. See SMA Specifications for more information.
STATE
User-defined state variables, used with TB,USER or TB,CREEP [when the USER CREEP option is chosen
(TBOPT = 100)]. When used with TB,USER, TB,STATE is only used with the USERMAT subroutine (not
USERPL). When used with TB,CREEP, TB,STATE is only used with the USERCREEP subroutine. See STATE
Specifications for more information.
SWELL
Swelling constants (LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45,
SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, and SHELL143). See SWELL Specifications
for more information.
UNIAXIAL
Uniaxial stress-strain relation associated with the Cast Iron material model (LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209).
See UNIAXIAL Specifications for more information.
USER
User-defined material model; general purpose except for incompressible material models (LINK180,
SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190,
SHELL208, and SHELL209). Also, user-defined plasticity or viscoplasticity (LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20,
BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SHELL91,
SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95, and SHELL143). See USER Specifications for more information.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31339
TB
WATER
Water motion table data (PIPE59). See WATER Specifications for more information.
MAT
Material reference number (defaults to 1; maximum equals 100,000).
NTEMP
The number of temperatures for which data will be provided (if applicable). Temperatures are specified on
the TBTEMP command.
NPTS
For most labels where NPTS is defined, it is the number of data points to be specified for a given temperature.
Data points are defined with the TBDATA or TBPT commands.
EOSOPT
Indicates which equation of state model will be used. Used only for explicit dynamics, and only when Lab =
EOS.
1
Linear polynomial equation of state
2
Gruneisen equation of state
3
Tabulated equation of state
Data Table Specifications
Presented below is a listing of all the labels for the TB command that include specific requirements for the NTEMP,
NPTS, and TBOPT options, along with links to references where more information can be found, such as required
constants, for the particular label.
BKIN Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 6, Maximum = 6
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Stress-strain options (not used in an explicit dynamics analysis).
0 -No stress relaxation with temperature increase (this is not recommended for nonisothermal problems).
1 -Rice's hardening rule, which takes into account stress relaxation with increasing temperature (default).
References:
Section 2.5.1.1: Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
Nonlinear Inelastic Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
31340
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
MKIN Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 5, Maximum = 5
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Stress-strain options.
0 -No stress relaxation with temperature increase (this is not recommended for nonisothermal problems);
also produces thermal ratcheting (default).
1 -Recalculate total plastic strain using new weight factors of the subvolume.
2 -Scale layer plastic strains to keep total plastic strain constant; agrees with Rice's model (TB, BKIN with
TBOPT = 1). Produces stable stress-strain cycles.
References:
Section 2.5.1.2: Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
KINH Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum = 40
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 20, Maximum = 20
TBOPT:
Use 0 or leave blank to define stress -vs- total strain curve.
Use 4 or enter PLASTIC to define stress -vs- plastic strain curve. This option supports only elements LINK180,
SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208,
and SHELL209.
References:
Section 2.5.1.2: Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
CHABOCHE Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum value of NTEMP is such that
NTEMP x (1 + 2NPTS) = 1000
NPTS:
Number of kinematic models to be superposed. Default = 1, Maximum value of NPTS is such that NTEMP x
(1 + 2NPTS) = 1000
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31341
TB
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.3: Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
MISO Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum = 20
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 20, Maximum = 100
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.5: Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
BISO Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 6, Maximum = 6
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.4: Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
Nonlinear Inelastic Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
NLISO Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum = 20
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 4, Maximum = 4
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.6: Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
31342
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
HILL Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum = 40
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.8: Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
ANISO Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.7: Anisotropic in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
DP Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.9: Drucker-Prager in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Plastic Material Options in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
MELAS Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum = 20
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 20, Maximum = 100
TBOPT:
Not used.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31343
TB
References:
Section 2.5.1.11: Multilinear Elastic in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Multilinear Elasticity in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
USER Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum value of NTEMP is such that
NTEMP x NPTS = 1000
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 48, Maximum value of NPTS is such
that NTEMP x NPTS = 1000
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.13: User in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
User Defined Material in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
ANAND Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.10: Anand's Model in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Viscoplasticity in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
RATE Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum value of NTEMP is such that
NTEMP x NPTS = 1000
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 2, Maximum value of NPTS is such
that NTEMP x NPTS = 1000
TBOPT:
Rate-dependent viscoplasticity options.
PERZYNA -Perzyna model (default).
PEIRCE -Peirce model.
31344
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
References:
Section 2.5.9: Rate-Dependent Plastic (Viscoplastic) Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Viscoplasticity in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
CREEP Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum value of NTEMP is such that
NTEMP x NPTS = 1000 for implicit creep and 250 for explicit creep.
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 12 for implicit creep and 72 for
explicit creep, Maximum value of NPTS is such that NTEMP x NPTS = 1000 for implicit creep and 250 for explicit
creep.
TBOPT:
Creep model options.
0 -(or Blank) Explicit creep option. Creep model is defined by constants C6, C12, and C66, through TBDATA.
See Section 2.5.11.2.1: Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 0 through Section 2.5.11.2.14: Irradiation
Induced Explicit Creep Equation for C66 = 5 in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the associated equations.
(Applicable to LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51,
PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95). C6 = 100 defines the USER CREEP option for
explicit creep. You must define the creep law using the subroutine USERCR.F. See the Guide to ANSYS
User Programmable Features for more information.
1 through 13 -Implicit creep option. See Table 2.4: Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a list
of available equations. Use TBTEMP and TBDATA to define temperature-dependent constants. (Applicable
to PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180 , SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186 , SOLID187 , SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209).
100 -USER CREEP option (Applicable ONLY to, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209). for implicit creep. Use in conjunction
with TB,STATE for defining the number of state variables. You must define the creep law using the subroutine USERCREEP.F. See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for more information. Use
TBTEMP and TBDATA to define temperature-dependent constants.
References:
Section 2.5.11: Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Creep in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
SMA Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, maximum = 40.
NPTS:
Not used.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31345
TB
TBOPT:
Not used
References:
Section 2.5.12: Shape Memory Alloys in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Shape Memory Alloys in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide, and Section 4.5: Shape Memory Alloy Material
Model in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
STATE Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Number of state variables. Maximum = 1000
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.1.13: User and Section 2.5.11.1: Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
User Defined Material and Implicit Creep Procedure in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
SWELL Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.13: Swelling Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Swelling in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
BH Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified. Default = 20, Maximum = 500
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.4: Magnetic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Additional Guidelines for Defining Regional Material Properties and Real Constants in the ANSYS Low-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
31346
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
PIEZ Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Piezoelectric matrix options.
0 -Piezoelectric stress matrix [e] (used as supplied)
1 -Piezoelectric strain matrix [d] (converted to [e] form before use)
References:
Section 2.5.6: Piezoelectric Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Piezoelectric Analysis in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
FAIL Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 6, Maximum = 6
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Failure Criteria in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Specifying Failure Criteria in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
HYPER Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum value of NTEMP is such that
NTEMP x NPTS = 1000
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature, except for TBOPT = MOONEY, where NPTS is
the number of parameters in the Mooney-Rivlin model (2 [default], 3, 5, or 9).
TBOPT:
Hyperelastic material options.
MOONEY -Mooney-Rivlin model (default). You can choose a 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin model with NPTS = 2 (default),
or a 3, 5, or 9 parameter model by setting NPTS equal to one of these values.
References:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31347
TB
Section 2.5.2.2: Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material Constants (TB,HYPER) in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
OGDEN -Ogden model. For NPTS, the default = 1 and the maximum is such that NTEMP x NPTS x 3 = 1000.
References:
Section 2.5.2.4: Ogden Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Ogden Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
NEO -Neo-Hookean model. For NPTS, the default = 2 and the maximum = 2.
References:
Section 2.5.2.1: Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
POLY -Polynomial form model. For NPTS, the default = 1 and the maximum is such that NTEMP x NPTS = 1000.
References:
Section 2.5.2.3: Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
BOYCE-Arruda-Boyce model. For NPTS, the default = 3 and the maximum = 3.
References:
Section 2.5.2.5: Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
GENT -Gent model. For NPTS, the default = 3 and the maximum = 3.
References:
Section 2.5.2.6: Gent Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Gent Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
YEOH -Yeoh model. For NPTS, the default = 1 and the maximum is such that NTEMP x NPTS x 2 = 1000.
References:
Section 2.5.2.7: Yeoh Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Yeoh Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
31348
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
BLATZ -Blatz-Ko model. For NPTS, the default = 1 and the maximum = 1.
References:
Section 2.5.2.8: Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Blatz-Ko Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
FOAM -Hyperfoam (Ogden) model. For NPTS, the default = 1 and the maximum is such that NTEMP x NPTS x 3 =
1000.
References:
Section 2.5.2.9: Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
USER -User-defined hyperelastic model. See the ANSYS Guide to User Programmable Features for details.
References:
Section 2.5.2.10: User-Defined Hyperelastic Material in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
User-Defined Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
MOONEY Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 6, Maximum = 6 (NTEMP is not used for
explicit dynamic elements)
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Mooney-Rivlin material option, applicable to elements HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER84, HYPER86,
and HYPER158, and explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168.
0 -Direct input of hyperelastic material constants (default).
1 -Material constants to be determined from experimental data (for use with the *MOONEY command).
This option is not valid for explicit dynamic elements.
2 -Material constants to be calculated by the LS-DYNA program from experimental data. This option is only
valid for explicit dynamic elements.
References:
Section 2.5.2.11: Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material Constants (TB,MOONEY) in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31349
TB
Nonlinear Elastic Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
WATER Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
PIPE59 in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
GASKET Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1.
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 5 for TBOPT = PARA. Default = 1
for all other values of TBOPT.
TBOPT:
Gasket material options.
PARA -Gasket material general parameters.
COMP -Gasket material compression data.
LUNL -Gasket linear unloading data.
NUNL -Gasket nonlinear unloading data.
TSS -Transverse shear data.
References:
Gasket Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Gasket Joints Simulation in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
ANEL Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 6, Maximum = 6. NTEMP is not used for
explicit dynamic elements.
NPTS:
Not used.
31350
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
TBOPT:
Anisotropic elastic matrix options.
0 -Elasticity matrix used as supplied (input in stiffness form).
1 -Elasticity matrix inverted before use (input in flexibility form). This option is not valid for explicit dynamic
elements.
References:
Section 2.5.5: Anisotropic Elastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Linear Elastic Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
CONCR Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided (used only if TBOPT = 0 or 1). Default = 6, Maximum
=6
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Concrete material options.
0 or 1 -General ANSYS concrete option for element SOLID65.
2 -Concrete damage model for explicit dynamic elements SOLID164 and SOLID168.
References:
SOLID65 in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Concrete Damage Model in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
GCAP Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Pressure Dependent Plasticity Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
HFLM Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum = 20
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31351
TB
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 1, Maximum = 100
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
FLUID116 in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
FCON Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1, Maximum = 20
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 1, Maximum = 100
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
FLUID116 in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
EVISC Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Section 2.5.3: Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Nonlinear Elastic Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
PLAW Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Plasticity options for explicit dynamics elements (no default - must specify).
1 -Isotropic/kinematic hardening model.
2 -Strain rate dependent plasticity model used for metal and plastic forming analyses.
3 -Anisotropic plasticity model (Barlat and Lian).
31352
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
4 -Strain rate dependent plasticity model used for superplastic forming analyses.
5 -Strain rate dependent isotropic plasticity model used for metal and plastic forming analyses.
6 -Anisotropic plasticity model (Barlat, Lege, and Brem) used for forming processes.
7 -Fully iterative anisotropic plasticity model for explicit shell elements only.
8 -Piecewise linear plasticity model for explicit elements only.
9 -Elastic-plastic hydrodynamic model for explicit elements only.
10 -Transversely anisotropic FLD (flow limit diagram) model for explicit elements only.
11 -Modified piecewise linear plasticity model for explicit shell elements only.
12 -Elastic viscoplastic thermal model for explicit solid and shell elements only.
References:
Nonlinear Inelastic Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
Pressure Dependent Plasticity Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
FOAM Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Foam material options for explicit dynamics elements (no default - must specify).
1 -Rigid, closed cell, low density polyurethane foam material model.
2 -Highly compressible urethane foam material model.
3 -Energy absorbing foam material model.
4 -Crushable foam material model.
References:
Foam Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31353
TB
HONEY Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Foam Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
COMP Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.
References:
Composite Damage Model in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
EOS Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Equation of state (explicit dynamics elements only - no default, must specify).
1 -Johnson-Cook material model - for strain, strain rate, and temperature dependent impact/forming analyses.
2 -Null material model - for allowing equation of state to be considered without computing deviatoric
stresses.
3 -Zerilli-Armstrong material model - for metal forming processes in which the stress depends on strain,
strain rate, and temperature.
4 -Bamman material model - for metal forming processes with strain rate and temperature dependent
plasticity. Does not require an additional equation of state (EOSOPT is not used).
5 -Steinberg material model - for modeling high strain rate effects in solid elements with failure.
31354
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
References:
Equation of State Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
DISCRETE Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Explicit spring-damper (discrete) material options.
0 -Linear elastic spring (translational or rotational elastic spring) (default)
1 -Linear viscous damper (linear translational or rotational damper)
2 -Elastoplastic spring (elastoplastic translational or rotational spring with isotropic hardening)
3 -Nonlinear elastic spring (nonlinear elastic translational or rotational spring with arbitrary force/displacement response moment/rotation dependency)
4 -Nonlinear viscous damper (nonlinear damping with arbitrary force/velocity response moment/rotational
velocity dependency)
5 -General nonlinear spring (general nonlinear translational or rotational spring with arbitrary loading and
unloading definitions)
6 -Maxwell viscoelastic spring (Maxwell viscoelastic translational or rotational spring)
7 -Inelastic tension or compression-only spring (inelastic tension or compression only, translational or rotational spring)
References:
Spring-Damper (Discrete) Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
CAST Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1; Max = 10.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Defines hardening type.
ISOTROPIC -Specifies cast iron plasticity with isotropic hardening.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31355
TB
References:
Section 2.5.1.12: Cast Iron Plasticity in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
UNIAXIAL Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1; Max = 10.
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. Default = 20; Max = 20.
TBOPT:
Defines stress-strain relationship for cast iron plasticity.
TENSION -Defines stress-strain relation in tension
COMPRESSION -Defines stress-strain relation in compression.
References:
Section 2.5.1.12: Cast Iron Plasticity in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
PRONY Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1; Max = 6.
NPTS:
Number of pairs of Prony series. Default = 1 pair; Max = 6 pairs.
TBOPT:
Defines the relaxation behavior for viscoelasticity.
1 -(or SHEAR) relaxation behavior of the shear response.
2 -(or BULK) relaxation behavior of the volumetric response.
References:
Section 2.5.3: Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
SHIFT Specifications
NTEMP:
Allows one temperature for which data will be provided.
NPTS:
Number of material constants to be entered as determined by the shift function specified by TBOPT.
3 -for TBOPT = WLF
2 -TBOPT = TN
31356
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
TBOPT:
Defines the shift function
1 -( or WLF) William-Landel-Ferry shift function.
2 -(or TN) Tool-Narayanaswamy shift function.
100 -(or USER) User-defined shift function.
References:
Section 2.5.3: Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
PZRS Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Piezoresistive matrix options
0 -Piezoresistive stress matrix (used as supplied).
1 -Piezoresistive strain matrix (used as supplied).
References:
Section 2.5.7: Piezoresistive Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Piezoresistive Analysis in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
DPER Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Permittivity matrix options
0 -Permittivity matrix at constant strain [S] (used as supplied).
1 -Permittivity matrix at constant stress [T] (converted to [S] form before use).
References:
Section 2.5.8: Anisotropic Electric Permittivity Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31357
TB
JOIN Specifications
NTEMP:
Number of temperatures for which data will be provided. Default = 1.
NPTS:
Number of data points to be specified for a given temperature. NPTS is ignored if TBOPT = STIF, DAMP, or
FRIC.
TBOPT:
Joint element material options.
Linear behavior:
STIF -Linear stiffness.
DAMP -Linear damping.
Nonlinear behavior:
JNSA -Nonlinear stiffness behavior in all available components of relative motion for the joint element.
JNS4 -Nonlinear stiffness behavior in local ROTX direction only.
JNS6 -Nonlinear stiffness behavior in local ROTZ direction only.
JNDA -Nonlinear damping behavior in all available components of relative motion for the joint element.
JND4 -Nonlinear damping behavior in local ROTX direction only.
JND6 -Nonlinear damping behavior in local ROTZ direction only.
Hysteretic friction:
FRIC -Stick stiffness for hysteretic frictional behavior.
JNFA -Hysteretic frictional behavior in all available components of relative motion for the joint element.
JNF4 -Hysteretic frictional behavior in local ROTX direction only.
JNF6 -Hysteretic frictional behavior in local ROTZ direction only.
References:
Section 2.5.14: MPC184 Joint Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
31358
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB
PLASTIC Specifications
NTEMP:
The number of temperature points (default = 1). You can specify up to 20.
NPTS:
The number of stress -vs- plastic strain data points (default = 20). You can specify up to 100.
TBOPT:
Type of plastic hardening:
MISO -Multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
KINH -Multilinear kinematic hardening plasticity.
References:
Plasticity in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
ELASTIC Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Number of properties to be defined for the material option.
2 -Isotropic property (EX, NUXY). This is the default.
9 -Orthotropic properties with minor Poisson's ratio (EX, EY, EZ, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ).
NOTE: All 9 constants must be defined for orthotropic material, even for the 2-D case.
21 -Anisotropic property with stiffness form of input (D11, D21, D31, D41, D51, D61, D22, D32, D42, D52,
D62, D33, D43, ..... D66).
TBOPT:
Not Used.
References:
Full Harmonic Response Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
TBFIELD
SDAMP Specifications
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Number of properties to be defined for the material option.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31359
TBCOPY
1 -Structural damping coefficient. This is the default.
TBOPT:
Not Used.
References:
Full Harmonic Response Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide.
TBFIELD
Notes
TB activates a data table to be used with subsequent TBDATA or TBPT commands. The table space is initialized
to zero values. Data from this table are used for certain nonlinear material descriptions as well as for special input
for some elements. See Section 2.5: Data Tables - Implicit Analysis in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description
of table types (Lab) or the elements that require the table for special data. See Material Models in the ANSYS LSDYNA User's Guide for a description of data table input required for explicit dynamic materials. See the MP command for linear material property input.
The type of data table specified remains active until the TB command is reissued. More than one type of data
table may be defined for each material (e.g., MISO and CREEP), except that only one type of plasticity/elasticity
may be used for each material.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Product Restrictions
Lab = BH is allowed in ANSYS only with the Emag. Only Lab = FAIL is allowed in ANSYS Professional. Only Lab
= BH is allowed in ANSYS Emag. Lab = COMP is not allowed in ANSYS ED.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
TBCOPY, Lab, MATF, MATT
Copies a data table from one material to another (see Notes).
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Data table label (see the TB command for valid labels, and see Notes for Lab = ALL).
MATF
Material reference number where data table is to be copied from.
MATT
Material reference number where data table is to be copied to.
31360
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBDATA
Notes
The TBCOPY command, with Lab = ALL, copies all of the nonlinear data defined by the TB command. If you
copy a model that includes both yield behavior constants and linear constants (for example, a BKIN model), TBCOPY,ALL and MPCOPY are used together to copy the entire model. All input data associated with the model
is copied, that is, all data defined through the TB and MP commands.
Also, if you copy a material model using the Material Model Interface (Edit> Copy), both the commands TBCOPY,ALL and MPCOPY are issued, regardless of whether the model includes linear constants only, or if it includes
a combination of linear and yield behavior constants.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
TBDATA, STLOC, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Defines data for the data table.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
STLOC
Starting location in table for entering data. For example, if STLOC = 1, data input in the C1 field applies to
the first table constant, C2 applies to the second table constant, etc. If STLOC=5, data input in the C1 field
applies to the fifth table constant, etc. Defaults to the last location filled + 1. The last location is reset to 1
with each TB or TBTEMP command.
C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Data values assigned to six locations starting with STLOC. If a value is already in this location, it is redefined.
A blank value leaves the existing value unchanged.
Notes
Defines data for the table specified on the last TB command at the temperature specified on the last TBTEMP
command (if applicable). The type of data table specified in the last TB command determines the number of
data values needed in TBDATA. See Section 2.5: Data Tables - Implicit Analysis of the ANSYS Elements Reference
for the number of data values required for different material behavior options.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31361
TBDELE
TBDELE, Lab, MAT1, MAT2, INC
Deletes previously defined data tables.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Data table label (see the TB command for valid labels). If ALL, delete all data tables.
MAT1, MAT2, INC
Delete tables for materials MAT1 to (MAT2 defaults to MAT1) in steps of INC (defaults to 1). If MAT1= ALL, ignore
MAT2 and INC and delete data tables for all materials.
Notes
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
TBFIELD, Type, Value
Defines values of field variables for the material data tables.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Type
Type of field variable:
Freq
A frequency will be specified in Value
Value
The frequency to be referenced (use this command multiple times to enter values of different field variables).
Notes
Use this command in conjunction with TB and TBDATA to define field values for frequency-dependent material
data tables. TB,ELASTIC and TB,SDAMP can be defined as frequency-dependent data tables via the TBFIELD
command. Data values must be defined in ascending order. There is no limit on the number of values you can
specify. The frequency remains active until the next TBFIELD command is input.
See Full Harmonic Response Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide for more information.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
31362
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBFT
TBFT, Oper, ID, Option1, Option2, Option3, Option4, Option5, Option6, Option7
Performs material curve fitting operations.
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Use material curve fitting to evaluate your experimental data and correlate it to the nonlinear material models
built into ANSYS. You apply coefficients to your curve data, determine a fit with existing model, and write the
data according to the table configurations outlined in the TB command. Curve fitting is available for nonlinear
models associated with the material behaviors listed below:
For hyperelastic material behavior, see TBFT Specifications for Hyperelastic Models, below.
For creep material behavior, see TBFT Specifications for Creep Models, below.
For viscoelastic material behavior, see TBFT Specifications for Viscoelastic Models, below.
TBFT Specifications for Hyperelastic Models
TBFT, Oper, ID, Option1, Option2, Option3, Option4, Option5, Option6, Option7
Oper
The specific curve fitting operation:
FADD
Define a constitutive model.
FDEL
Delete a constitutive model.
FSET
Write data related to a constitutive model to the database (same as TB command).
SET
Initialize coefficients of a constitutive model for nonlinear curve-fitting procedure.
CDEL
Deletes coefficients at current reference temperature. Applicable only for temperature dependent
coefficients.
SOLVE
Solve for coefficients.
FIX
Fix (hold constant) the coefficient you specify in Option4.
EADD
Add experimental data.
EDEL
Delete experimental data.
LIST
List all data associated with the material model represented by the material ID number.
PLOT
Plot curves.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31363
TBFT
ID
The material reference number (same as MAT argument used in the TB command). Valid entry is any number
greater than zero (default = 1) but less than 100,000.
Option1
For curve fit function operations (Oper = FADD, FDEL, FSET, SET, CDEL, SOLVE or FIX) this field specifies the
category (HYPER).
For adding, deleting, or plotting your experiment (Oper = EADD, EDEL, or PLOT), this field specifies the experimental data type. Valid entries are: UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, and VOLU (default = UNIA).
Option2
For curve fit function operations (Oper = FADD, FDEL, FSET, SET, CDEL, SOLVE, or FIX), this field specifies
constitutive model type. The valid entries are listed in Hyperelastic Options below.
When you need to specify a filename from which to get experimental data (Oper = EADD), place that string
here. Valid entry is any filename string. You can enter the entire path\filename.extension string and leave
the next two fields (Option3 and Option4) blank, or you can specify the name here, the extension in the
next field, and the path following.
For plotting (Oper = PLOT), enter HYPER.
Option3
For Oper = FADD, FDEL, FSET, CDEL, SET, SOLVE or FIX, some of the cases specified inOption2 will require
that the polynomial order be specified. The applicable values for the order specification are listed in Hyperelastic Options.
If a filename for experimental data is being specified in Option2 (Oper = EADD), this field will contain the
file extension.
For plotting operations (Oper = PLOT), use this field to specify the constitutive model name (see Hyperelastic
Options ).
Option4
When you are working on a specific coefficient (Oper = FIX), this field specifies the index of that coefficient.
Valid entries vary from 1 to n, where n is the total number of coefficients (default = 1).
For Oper = SET, see Set Operations, below.
If a filename for experimental data is being specified in Option2 (Oper = EADD), this field will contain the
directory/path specification.
For Oper = PLOT, this field specifies the order of the polynomial if applicable, as listed in Hyperelastic Options
.
If Oper = SOLVE, this value specifies the curve-fitting procedure. Valid entries are 0 for unnormalized least
squares curve-fitting procedure, and 1 for normalized least squares curve-fitting procedure.
Option5
When you are working on a specific coefficient (Oper = FIX), this field specifies the index of that coefficient.
Valid entries vary from 1 to N, where N is the total number of coefficients (default = 1)
For Oper = SET, see Set Operations, below.
31364
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBFT
Set Operations
Purpose
Option4
Option5
Set the value of the coefficient.
Index of coefficient
Value of that coefficient
Turn temperature dependency ON/OFF
tdep
1 for ON and 0 for OFF
Set reference temperature
tref
Temperature value
If Oper = SOLVE, use this field to specify the number of iterations to be used in the calculation of the coefficients. Valid entry is any positive integer (default = 1000)
Option6
If Oper = SOLVE, specifies the allowed tolerance in residual change to stop an iteration. Valid entry is 0.0 to
1.0 (default = 0.0).
Option7
If Oper = SOLVE, specifies the allowed tolerance in coefficient change to stop an iteration. Valid entry is 0 to
1 (default = 0).
Hyperelastic Options
Option1
Option2
Option3
HYPER
MOON
2, 3, 5, 9
HYPER
POLY
1 to N
HYPER
OGDEN
1 to N
HYPER
YEOH
1 to N
HYPER
BOYC
NA
HYPER
GENT
NA
HYPER
NEO
NA
HYPER
BLAT
NA
HYPER
FOAM
1 to N
Following table summarizes the format for hyperelastic operations via the TBFT command:
Hyperelastic Model Command Summary
Oper
ID
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
Option5
FADD
ID
HYPER
Option
Order
FDEL
ID
HYPER
Option
Order
FSET
ID
HYPER
Option
Order
SET
ID
HYPER
Option
Order
Index
SOLVE
ID
HYPER
Value
Option
Order
Norm Flag
Num Iter
FIX
ID
HYPER
Option
Order
Index
EADD
Fix / Unfix
Flag
ID
Exp Type
File
Extension
EDEL
Directory
ID
Option6
Option7
RTOL
CTOL
Exp Type /
Index
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31365
TBFT
Oper
ID
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
PLOT
ID
Exp Type /
Index
HYPER
Option
Option5
Option6
Option7
Order
TBFT Specifications for Creep Models
TBFT, Oper, ID, Option1, Option2, Option3, Option4, Option5, Option6, Option7
Oper
The specific curve fitting operation:
FADD
Define a constitutive model.
FDEL
Delete a constitutive model.
FSET
Write data related to a constitutive model to the database (same as TB command).
SET
Initialize coefficients of a constitutive model for nonlinear curve-fitting procedure.
CDEL
Deletes coefficients at current reference temperature. Applicable only for temperature dependent
coefficients.
SOLVE
Solve for coefficients.
FIX
Fix (hold constant) the coefficient you specify in Option4.
EADD
Add experimental data.
EDEL
Delete experimental data.
LIST
List all data associated with the material model represented by the material ID number.
PLOT
Plot curves.
ID
The material reference number (same as MAT argument used in the TB command). Valid entry is any number
greater than zero (default = 1) but less than 100,000.
Option1
For curve fit function operations (Oper = FADD, FDEL, FSET, SET, CDEL, SOLVE or FIX) this field specifies the
category (CREEP).
For adding, deleting, or plotting your experiment (Oper = EADD, EDEL, or PLOT), this field specifies the experimental data type (CREEP).
31366
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBFT
Option2
For curve fit function operations (Oper = FADD, FDEL, FSET, SET, CDEL, SOLVE, or FIX), this field specifies
constitutive model type. The valid entries are listed in Creep Options below.
When you need to specify a filename from which to get experimental data (Oper = EADD), place that string
here. Valid entry is any filename string. You can enter the entire path\filename.extension string and leave
the next two fields (Option3 and Option4) blank, or you can specify the name here, the extension in the
next field, and the path following.
For plotting (Oper = PLOT), enter HYPER.
Option3
If a filename for experimental data is being specified in Option2 (Oper = EADD), this field will contain the
file extension.
For plotting operations (Oper = PLOT), use this field to specify the constitutive model name (see Creep Options
).
Option4
When you are working on a specific coefficient (Oper = FIX), this field , specifies the index of that coefficient.
Valid entries vary from 1 to n, where n is the total number of coefficients (default = 1).
For Oper = SET, see Set Operations, below.
If a filename for experimental data is being specified in Option2 (Oper = EADD), this field will contain the
directory/path specification.
If Oper = SOLVE, this value specifies the curve-fitting procedure. Valid entries are 0 for unnormalized least
squares curve-fitting procedure, and 1 for normalized least squares curve-fitting procedure.
Option5
If Oper = SOLVE, use this field to specify the number of iterations to be used in the calculation of the coeffi-
cients. Valid entry is any positive integer (default = 1000)
If you specify a coefficient to be held constant (Oper = FIX), enter a 1 to FIX the coefficient, and a 0 to allow
it to vary (turn fixing OFF).
For Oper = SET, see Set Operations, below.
Set Operations
Purpose
Option4
Option5
Set the value of the coefficient
Index of coefficient
Value of coefficient
Turn temperature dependency ON/OFF
tdep
1 for ON and 0 for OFF
Set reference temperature
tref
Temperature value
Option6
If Oper = SOLVE, specifies the allowed tolerance in residual change to stop an iteration. Valid entry is 0.0 to
1.0 (default = 0.0).
Option7
If Oper = SOLVE, specifies the allowed tolerance in coefficient change to stop an iteration. Valid entry is 0 to
1 (default = 0).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31367
TBFT
Creep Options
Category
Name
Option
CREEP
SHAR
NA
CREEP
THAR
NA
CREEP
GEXP
NA
CREEP
GGRA
NA
CREEP
GBLA
NA
CREEP
MTHA
NA
CREEP
MSHA
NA
CREEP
GGAR
NA
CREEP
EXPO
NA
CREEP
NORT
NA
CREEP
PSTH
NA
CREEP
PSRP
NA
CREEP
GTHA
NA
Following table summarizes the format for creep operations via the TBFT command:
Creep Model Command Summary
Oper
ID
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
Option5
FADD
ID
CREEP
Option
NA
FDEL
ID
CREEP
Option
NA
FSET
ID
CREEP
Option
NA
SET
ID
CREEP
Option
NA
Index
SOLVE
ID
CREEP
Value
Option
NA
Norm Flag
Num Iter
FIX
ID
CREEP
Option
NA
Index
EADD
Fix / Unfix
Flag
ID
Exp Type
File
Extension
Directory
EDEL
ID
Exp Type /
Index
PLOT
ID
Exp Type /
Index
CREEP
Option6
Option7
RTOL
CTOL
Option
TBFT Specifications for Viscoelastic Models
TBFT, Oper, ID, Option1, Option2, Option3, Option4, Option5, Option6, Option7
Oper
The specific curve fitting operation:
FCASE
Define a case/constitutive model for viscoelasticity (prony).
FADD
Define a constitutive model.
31368
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBFT
FDEL
Delete a constitutive model.
FSET
Write data related to a constitutive model to the database (same as TB command).
SET
Initialize coefficients of a constitutive model for nonlinear curve-fitting procedure.
CDEL
Deletes coefficients at current reference temperature. Applicable only for temperature dependent
coefficients.
SOLVE
Solve for coefficients.
FIX
Fix (hold constant) the coefficient you specify in Option4.
EADD
Add experimental data.
EDEL
Delete experimental data.
LIST
List all data associated with the material model represented by the material ID number.
PLOT
Plot curves.
ID
The material reference number (same as MAT argument used in the TB command). Valid entry is any number
greater than zero (default = 1) but less than 100,000.
Option1
This option is set to VISCO for adding coefficients (Oper = FADD). The FADD operation is used to specify the
shear order, the bulk order or the shift option.
This option (Oper = CASE) is set to NEW or FINI. The FADD commands are always enclosed by TBFT,FCASE,
ID, NEW and TBFT,FCASE, ID, FINI. See Chapter 9, Material Curve Fitting in the ANSYS Structural Analysis
Guide for more information.
For other curve fit function operations (Oper = FDEL, FSET, SET, CDEL, SOLVE or FIX) this field is set to CASE.
For adding, deleting or plotting your experiment (Oper = EADD, EDEL, or PLOT), this field specifies the experiment type. Valid entries are: SDEC (Shear Modulus vs. Time) or BDEC (Bulk Modulus vs. Time).
Option2
For defining your viscoelastic case (Oper = FCASE), you specify PVHE.
For curve fit function operations (Oper = FDEL, FSET, SET, CDEL, SOLVE, or FIX), this field specifies the case
name.
To create a new case (Oper = FADD), the valid options are listed in Viscoelastic Options below.
When you need to specify a filename from which to get experimental data (Oper = EADD), place that string
here. Valid entry is any filename string. You can enter the entire path\filename.extension string and leave
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31369
TBFT
the next two fields (Option3 and Option4) blank, or you can specify the name here, the extension in the
next field, and the path following.
For plotting (Oper = PLOT), enter the CASE name.
Option3
For Oper = FCASE, this field specifies the CASE name.
For Oper = FADD, this field specifies the order
If a filename for experimental data is being specified in Option2 (Oper = EADD), this field will contain the
file extension.
For plotting operations (Oper = PLOT), use this field to specify the CASE name.
Option4
When you are working on a specific coefficient (Oper = FIX), this field specifies the index of that coefficient.
Valid entries vary from 1 to n, where n is the total number of coefficients (default = 1).
For Oper = SET, see Set Operations, below.
You can also specify TREF to indicate the reference temperature, or COMP for a partial/complete solution
(only for bulk, only for shear, or all coefficients).
If a filename for experimental data is being specified in Option2 (Oper = EADD), this field will contain the
directory/path specification.
If Oper = SOLVE, this value specifies the curve-fitting procedure. Valid entries are 0 for unnormalized least
squares curve-fitting procedure, and 1 for normalized least squares curve-fitting procedure.
Option5
For Oper = SET, see Set Operations, below.
Set Operations
Purpose
Option4
Option5
Set the value of the coefficient
Index of coefficient
Value of coefficient
Turn temperature dependency ON/OFF
tdep
1 for ON and 0 for OFF
Set reference temperature
tref
Temperature value
Set current component to solve for
comp
pshea, pbulk, or pvhe
If Oper = SOLVE, use this field to specify the number of iterations to be used in the calculation of the coefficients. Valid entry is any positive integer (default = 1000).
If you are specifying a coefficient to be held constant (Oper = FIX), a 1 FIXES the specified coefficient, and a
0 allows it to vary (turns fixing OFF).
Option6
If Oper = SOLVE, specifies the allowed tolerance in residual change to stop an iteration. Valid entry is 0.0 to
1.0 (default = 0.0).
Option7
If Oper = SOLVE, specifies the allowed tolerance in coefficient change to stop an iteration. Valid entry is 0 to
1 (default = 0).
31370
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBFT
Viscoelastic Options
Category
Name
Option
VISCO
PSHEAR
1 to N
VISCO
PBULK
1 to N
VISCO
SHIFT
TN, WLF, NONE
Following table summarizes the format for viscoelastic operations via the TBFT command:
Viscoelastic Models
Oper
ID
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
Option5
FCASE
ID
NEW
PVHE
Case Name
FCASE
ID
FINI
FADD
ID
VISCO
Option
Order
FDEL
ID
CASE
Case Name NA
FSET
ID
CASE
Case Name NA
SET
ID
CASE
Case Name NA
Index
SOLVE
ID
Value
CASE
Case Name NA
Norm Flag
Num Iter
FIX
ID
CASE
Case Name NA
Index
Fix / Unfix
Flag
EADD
ID
Exp Type
File
Extension
Directory
EDEL
ID
Exp Type /
Index
PLOT
ID
Exp Type /
Index
CASE
Option6
Option7
RTOL
CTOL
Case Name NA
Notes
This command provides tools for comparing experimental material data to the calculated data ANSYS supplies
for various non linear material options. Based on curve fitting plot comparisons and error norms, you choose the
model to use in solution according to the best fit. All of the capabilities of the TBFT-series of commands are accessible interactively via the standard material GUI. See Chapter 9, Material Curve Fitting in the ANSYS Structural
Analysis Guide for more information.
You can display material model data associated with both the TB command and the TBFT,FSET command by
issuing TBLIST,ALL,ALL.
Material model data associated with the latest TB or TBFT,FSET command overwrites previous data.
You can display material model data associated with both the TB command and the TBFT,FSET command by
issuing TBLIST,ALL,ALL.
The uniaxial, biaxial, and shear experimental data use engineering stress. The volumetric data uses true stress.
See the ANSYS Elements Reference for details on experimental data for creep and viscoelasticity.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31371
TBLE
Menu Paths
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models
TBLE
Specifies "Data table properties" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and will appear in the
log file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items under Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Status>Preprocessor>Data Tables
TBLIST, Lab, MAT
Lists the data tables.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Data table label (see the TB command for labels). Defaults to the active table. If ALL, list data for all labels.
MAT
Material number to be listed (defaults to the active material). If ALL, list data tables for all materials.
Notes
This command is a utility command, valid anywhere.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Properties>Data Tables
31372
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBPLOT
TBMODIF, ROW, COL, VALUE
Modifies data for the data table (GUI).
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
ROW, COL
The row and column numbers of the table entry to be modified.
VALUE
The new value to be used in the ROW, COL location.
Notes
Modifies data for the table specified on the last TB command. For temperature-dependent data, the temperature
specified on the last TBTEMP command is used. This is a command generated by the Graphical User Interface
(GUI). It will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if a TB data table is graphically edited in spreadsheet fashion.
This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
TBPLOT, Lab, MAT, TBOPT, TEMP, SEGN
Displays the data table.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Data table label. Valid labels are: MKIN, KINH, MELAS, MISO, BKIN, BISO, BH, GASKET, and JOIN. Defaults to
the active table label. For B-H data, also valid are: NB to display NU-B2, MH to display MU vs. H, and SBH, SNB,
SMH to display the slopes of the corresponding data.
MAT
Material number to be displayed (defaults to the active material).
TBOPT
Gasket material or joint element material option to be plotted.
The following gasket material options are valid only when Lab = GASKET:
ALL
Plots all gasket data.
COMP
Plots gasket compression data only.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31373
TBPLOT
LUNL
Plots gasket linear unloading data with compression curve.
NUNL
Plots gasket nonlinear unloading data only.
The following joint element material options are valid only when Lab = JOIN:
JNSA
Plots nonlinear stiffness data that is applicable to all relevant directions.
JNSn
Plots only the specified nonlinear stiffness data. The n can be 4 or 6. For example, JNS4 plots only the
nonlinear stiffness data specified in the local direction 4 (ROTX).
JNDA
Plots nonlinear damping data that is applicable to all relevant directions.
JNDn
Plots only the specified nonlinear damping data. The n can be 4 or 6. For example, JND4 plots only the
nonlinear damping data specified in the local direction 4 (ROTX).
JNFA
Plots nonlinear hysteretic friction data that is applicable to all relevant directions.
JNFn
Plots only the specified nonlinear hysteretic friction data. The n can be 4 or 6. For example, JNF4 plots
only the nonlinear hysteretic friction data specified in local direction 4 (ROTX).
TEMP
Specific temperature at which gasket data or joint element material data will be plotted (used only when
Lab = GASKET or JOIN). Use TEMP = ALL to plot gasket data or joint element material data at all temperatures.
SEGN
Segment number of plotted curve (valid only when Lab = GASKET):
NO
Segment number is not added to plotted curve (default).
YES
Segment number is added to plotted curve. This option is ignored if the number of data points in a curve
exceeds 20.
Notes
Only data for stress-strain, B-H, gasket curves, or joint element nonlinear material model curves may be displayed.
TBOPT and TEMP are used only when Lab = GASKET or JOIN. SEGN is used only when Lab = GASKET.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Plot>Data Tables
31374
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TBTEMP
TBPT, Oper, X, Y
Defines a point on a nonlinear data curve.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Oper
Operation to perform:
DEFI
Defines a new data point (default). The point is inserted into the table in ascending order of X. If a point
already exists with the same X value, it is replaced.
DELE
Deletes an existing point. The X value must match the X value of the point to be deleted (Y is ignored).
X
The X value of the point (for example, strain, H, etc.).
Y
The corresponding Y value of the point (for example, stress, B, etc.).
Notes
TBPT defines a point on a nonlinear data curve (such as a stress-strain curve, B-H curve, etc.) at the temperature
specified on the last TBTEMP command. The meaning of the X and Y values will depend on the type of data
table specified on the last TB command (MISO, BH, etc.).
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
TBTEMP, TEMP, KMOD
Defines a temperature for the data table.
PREP7: Data Tables
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TEMP
Temperature value (defaults to 0.0 if KMOD is blank).
KMOD
If blank, TEMP defines a new temperature. If an integer, 1 to NTEMP (from the TB command), modify that
previously defined temperature to the TEMP value, unless TEMP is blank, then that previously defined temperature is reactivated. Use TBLIST to list temperatures and data. The next TBDATA or TBPT commands
also add or change the data at this temperature. If KMOD = CRIT (and TEMP is blank), the next TBDATA values
are failure criteria keys as described for SOLID46, SHELL91, SHELL99, and SOLID191. If KMOD = STRAIN (and
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31375
TCHG
TEMP is blank), the next TBDATA values are strains as described for the MKIN property option (see Section 2.5:
Data Tables - Implicit Analysis of the ANSYS Elements Reference).
Notes
Defines a temperature to be associated with the data on the subsequent TBPT or TBDATA commands. The
temperature remains active until the next TBTEMP command is input. Data values must be defined with the
temperatures in ascending order. Temperatures previously associated with a data table may also be modified.
This command is also valid in SOLUTION.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
TCHG, ELEM1, ELEM2, ETYPE2
Converts 20-node degenerate tetrahedral elements to their 10-node non-degenerate counterparts.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM1
Name (or the number) of the 20-node tetrahedron element that you want to convert. This argument is required.
ELEM2
Name (or the number) of the 10-node tetrahedron element to which you want to convert the ELEM elements.
This argument is required.
ETYPE2
Element TYPE reference number for ELEM2. If ETYPE2 is 0 or is not specified, ANSYS chooses the element
TYPE reference number for ELEM2. See the Notes section for details. This argument is optional.
Notes
The TCHG command allows you to specify conversion of any 20-node brick to any 10-node tetrahedron. (However,
not all combinations make sense.)
The TCHG command is useful when used in with the MOPT,PYRA command. Twenty-node pyramid shaped
elements may be used in the same volume with 10-node tetrahedra.
Performing a conversion is likely to create circumstances in which more than one element type is defined for a
single volume.
If specified, ETYPE2 will usually be the same as the local element TYPE number (ET,ITYPE) that was assigned to
ELEM2 with the ET command. You can specify a unique number for ETYPE2 if you prefer. Although ETYPE2 is
optional, it may be useful when two or more ITYPEs have been assigned to the same element (for example, if
two SOLID92 elements have been established in the element attribute tables for the current model, use the
ETYPE2 argument to distinguish between them). If ETYPE2 is nonzero and it has not already been assigned to
an element via ET, ANSYS assigns the ETYPE2 value to ELEM2 as its element TYPE reference number.
31376
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TEE
If ETYPE2 is 0 or is not specified, ANSYS determines the element TYPE reference number for ELEM2 in one of
these ways:
If ETYPE2 is 0 or is not specified, and ELEM2 does not appear in the element attribute tables, ANSYS uses
the next available (unused) location in the element attribute tables to determine the element TYPE reference
number for ELEM2.
If ETYPE2 is 0 or is not specified, and ELEM2 appears in the element attribute tables, ANSYS uses ELEM2
's existing element TYPE reference number for ETYPE2 . (If there is more than one occurrence of ELEM2
in the element attribute tables (each with its own TYPE reference number), ANSYS uses the first ELEM2
reference number for ETYPE2 .)
See Meshing Your Solid Model of the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for detailed information about converting
degenerate tetrahedral elements.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Change Tets
TEE, NCENT, TYPE, ELEM, EINC, L1, L2, L3
Defines a tee in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NCENT
Node where three straight pipes intersect forming a tee (or "Y"). Defaults to last starting branch node
[BRANCH].
TYPE
Type of tee:
WT
Welding tee (default).
UFT
Unreinforced fabricated tee.
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to first tee leg (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL)
+ 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).
L1, L2, L3
Tee leg lengths (corresponding in order of increasing straight pipe element numbers). Must be less than the
straight pipe length. Defaults to 2 x OD of straight pipe (for each leg).
Notes
Defines a tee in place of the tee intersection of three previously defined straight pipe elements. See the PREP7
RUN command. The new tee is also composed of three PIPE16 straight pipe elements, but of the leg lengths
specified and with the appropriate tee factors calculated. Three new nodes are generated at the ends of the tee.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31377
TERM
The original three straight pipes are automatically "shortened" to meet the ends of the tee. The tee specifications
and loadings are taken from the corresponding three straight pipes.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Pipe Tee
TERM, Kywrd, Opt1, Opt2, Opt3
Specifies various terminal driver options.
DISPLAY: Driver Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
If Kywrd = COPY, command format is TERM,COPY,NCOPY
NCOPY
Activate hard copy device for NCOPY (0,1,2, etc.) copies.
If Kywrd = LOOP, command format is TERM,LOOP,NLOOP,PAUSE. Used only with PLOT,ALL
NLOOP
Loop NLOOP times back to beginning of file when end of file is reached.
PAUSE
Pause PAUSE seconds between plots.
If Kywrd = NOPROM, command format is TERM,NOPROM,KEY
KEY
Prompt key:
0
Display prompt line for prompt.
1
Use terminal bell for prompt.
Notes
Used only with terminal driver names on /SHOWDISP command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
31378
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
THOPT
THOPT, Refopt, REFORMTOL, NTABPOINTS, TEMPMIN, TEMPMAX
Nonlinear transient thermal solution option.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Refopt
Matrix reform option.
FULL
Use the full Newton-Raphson solution option (default).
QUASI
Use a selective reform solution option based on REFORMTOL.
LINEAR
Use a linear solution option with no matrix reform.
REFORMTOL
Property change tolerance for Matrix Reformation (.05 default). The thermal matrices are reformed if the
maximum material property change in an element (from the previous reform time) is greater than the reform
tolerance.
NTABPOINTS
Number of points in Fast Material Table (64 default).
TEMPMIN
Minimum temperature for Fast Material Table. Defaults to the minimum temperature defined by the MPTEMP
command for any material property defined.
TEMPMAX
Maximum temperature for Fast Material Table. Defaults to the maximum temperature defined by the MPTEMP
command for any material property defined.
Notes
This solution logic is only supported by the ICCG and the JCG solvers (EQSLV command). You must issue the
THOPT command before the EQSLV command to use the QUASI option.
THOPT settings take precedence over SOLCONTROL settings.
ANTYPE,,RESTART is not supported by THOPT,QUASI and THOPT, LINEAR options.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31379
TIFF
TIFF, Kywrd, OPT
Provides TIFF file Export for ANSYS Displays.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Kywrd
Specifies various TIFF file export options.
COMP
If Kywrd = COMP, then OPT controls data compression for the output file. If COMP = 0, then compression
is off. If COMP = 1 (default), then compression is on.
ORIENT
If Kywrd = ORIENT, then OPT will determine the orientation of the entire plot. OPT can be either Horizontal
(default) or Vertical.
COLOR
If Kywrd = COLOR, then OPT will determine the color attribute of the saved file. OPT can be 0, 1, or 2,
corresponding to Black and White, Grayscale, and Color (default), respectively.
TMOD
If Kywrd = TMOD, then OPT will determine the text method. OPT can be either 1 or 0, corresponding to
bitmap text (default) or line stroke text, respectively.
DEFAULT
If Kywrd = DEFAULT, then all of the default values, for all of the Kywrd parameters listed above, are active.
OPT
OPT can have the following names or values, depending on the value for Kywrd (see above).
1 or 0
If Kywrd = COMP, a value or 1 (on) or 0 (off) will control compression for the TIFF file.
Horizontal, Vertical
If Kywrd = ORIENT, the terms Horizontal or Vertical determine the orientation of the plot.
0, 1, 2
If Kywrd = COLOR, the numbers 0, 1, and 2 correspond to Black and White , Grayscale and Color, respectively.
1, 0
If Kywrd = TMOD, the values 1 and 0 determine whether bitmap (1) or stroke text (0) fonts will be used
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>HardCopy>ToFile
31380
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TIMERANGE
TIME, TIME
Sets the time for a load step.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
TIME
Time at the end of the load step.
Command Default
Previous TIME + 1.0 (at each load step), i.e., also corresponds to the load step number.
Notes
Associates the boundary conditions at the end of the load step with a particular TIME value. TIME must be a
positive, nonzero, monotonically increasing quantity that "tracks" the input history. Typically, for the first load
step TIME defaults to 1. However, for the first load step of a reduced transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS and
TRNOPT,REDUC) or mode superposition transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS and TRNOPT,MSUP), the TIME
command is ignored and a static solution is performed at TIME = 0. TIME is not used for the modal (ANTYPE,MODAL), harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARMIC), or substructure (ANTYPE,SUBSTR) analyses. Units of time should be
consistent with those used elsewhere (for properties, creep equations, etc.).
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Time Controls>Solution Time
TIMERANGE, TMIN, TMAX
Specifies the time range for which data are to be stored.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TMIN
Minimum time (defaults to first time (or frequency) point on the file).
TMAX
Maximum time (defaults to last time (or frequency) point on the file).
Command Default
Include all time (or frequency) points in the range.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31381
TIMINT
Notes
Defines the time (or frequency) range for which data are to be read from the file and stored in memory. Use the
NSTORE command to define the time increment.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Data
TIMINT, Key, Lab
Turns on transient effects.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Key
Transient effects key:
OFF
No transient effects (static or steady-state).
ON
Include transient (mass or inertia) effects.
Lab
Degree of freedom label:
ALL
Apply this key to all appropriate labels (default).
STRUC
Apply this key to structural DOFs.
THERM
Apply this key to thermal DOFs.
ELECT
Apply this key to electric DOFs.
MAG
Apply this key to magnetic DOFs.
FLUID
Apply this key to fluid DOFs.
Command Default
Include transient effects (ON) if ANTYPE,TRANS, exclude transient effects (OFF) if ANTYPE,STATIC.
Notes
Indicates whether this load step in a full transient analysis should use time integration, that is, whether it includes
transient effects (e.g. structural inertia, thermal capacitance) or whether it is a static (steady-state) load step for
the indicated DOFs. Transient initial conditions are introduced at the load step having Key = ON. Initial conditions
31382
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TIMP
are then determined from the previous two substeps. Zero initial velocity and acceleration are assumed if no
previous substeps exist. See the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide, the ANSYS Thermal Analysis Guide, and the ANSYS
Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for details.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Amplitude Decay
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Newmark
Parameters
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Amplitude Decay
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Newmark Parameters
TIMP, ELEM, CHGBND, IMPLEVEL
Improves the quality of tetrahedral elements that are not associated with a volume.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ELEM
Identifies the tetrahedral elements to be improved. Valid values are ALL and P. If ELEM = ALL (default), improve
all selected tetrahedral elements. If ELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields
are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
CHGBND
Specifies whether to allow boundary modification. Boundary modification includes such things as changes
in the connectivity of the element faces on the boundary and the addition of boundary nodes. (Also see the
Notes section below for important usage information for CHGBND.)
0
Do not allow boundary modification.
1
Allow boundary modification (default).
IMPLEVEL
Identifies the level of improvement to be performed on the elements. (Improvement occurs primarily through
the use of face swapping and node smoothing techniques.)
0
Perform the least amount of swapping/smoothing.
1
Perform an intermediate amount of swapping/smoothing.
2
Perform the greatest amount of swapping/smoothing.
3
Perform the greatest amount of swapping/smoothing, plus additional improvement techniques (default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31383
TINTP
Notes
The TIMP command enables you to improve a given tetrahedral mesh by reducing the number of poorly-shaped
tetrahedral elements (in particular, the number of sliver tetrahedral elements)--as well as the overall number of
elements--in the mesh. It also improves the overall quality of the mesh.
TIMP is particularly useful for an imported tetrahedral mesh for which no geometry information is attached.
Regardless of the value of the CHGBND argument, boundary mid-nodes can be moved as long as you are not using
p-method analysis. When CHGBND = 0 and you are using p-method analysis, boundary mid-nodes cannot be
moved. (ANSYS issues an error message if it would be necessary to move boundary mid-nodes in order to generate valid quadratic elements.)
When loads or constraints have been placed on boundary nodes or mid-nodes, and boundary mid-nodes are
later moved, ANSYS issues a warning message to let you know that it will not update the loads or constraints.
No boundary modification is performed if shell or beam elements are present in the mesh, even when CHGBND
= 1.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Improve Tets>Detached Elems
TINTP, GAMMA, ALPHA, DELTA, THETA, OSLM, TOL, --, --, AVSMOOTH, ALPHAF, ALPHAM
Defines transient integration parameters.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
GAMMA
Amplitude decay factor for 2nd order transient integration, e.g., structural dynamics (used only if ALPHA,
DELTA, ALPHAF, and ALPHAM are blank). Defaults to 0.005.
ALPHA
2nd order transient integration parameter (used only if GAMMA is blank). Defaults to 0.2525.
DELTA
2nd order transient integration parameter (used only if GAMMA is blank). Defaults to 0.5050.
THETA
1st order transient (e.g., thermal transient) integration parameter. Defaults to 1.0.
OSLM
Specifies the oscillation limit criterion for automatic time stepping of 1st order transients (e.g., thermal
transients). Defaults to 0.5 with a tolerance of TOL.
TOL
Tolerance applied to OSLM. Defaults to 0.0.
--, --
Unused fields.
AVSMOOTH
Smooth flag option:
31384
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TINTP
0
Include smoothing of initial velocity (1st order system) or initial acceleration (2nd order system) (default).
1
Do not include smoothing.
ALPHAF
Interpolation factor in HHT algorithm for force and damping terms (used only if GAMMA is blank). Defaults to
0.005.
ALPHAM
Interpolation factor in HHT algorithm for inertial term (used only if GAMMA is blank). Defaults to 0.0.
Notes
Used to define the transient integration parameters. For more information on transient integration parameters,
refer to the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
For structural transient analyses, you may choose between the Newmark and HHT time integration methods
(see the TRNOPT command). In this case, if GAMMA is input and the integration parameters ALPHA, DELTA, ALPHAF,
and ALPHAM are left blank, the program will calculate the integration parameters. Alternatively, you can input
these integration parameters directly on this command. However, for the unconditional stability and second
order accuracy of the time integration, these parameters should satisfy a specific relationship, as described in
Section 17.2.2: Description of Structural and Other Second Order Systems of the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
In a transient piezoelectric analysis, required input for this command is ALPHA = 0.25, DELTA = 0.5, and THETA =
0.5. For a coupled electromagnetic-circuit transient analysis, use THETA = 1.0, the default value, to specify the
backward Euler method.
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and SOLCONTROL,OFF.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Amplitude Decay
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Newmark
Parameters
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Amplitude Decay
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time Integration>Newmark Parameters
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31385
/TITLE
/TITLE, Title
Defines a main title.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Title
Input up to 72 alphanumeric characters. Parameter substitution may be forced within the title by enclosing
the parameter name or parametric expression within percent (%) signs.
Notes
The title is carried through the printout and written on various files. The title written to a file is the title defined
at that time. Special characters may be used within the title text. Subtitles may also be defined [/STITLE].
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Change Title
/TLABEL, XLOC, YLOC, Text
Creates annotation text (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
XLOC
Text X starting location (-1.0 < X < 1.6).
YLOC
Text Y starting location (-1.0 < Y < 1.0).
Text
Text string (60 characters maximum). Parameter substitution may be forced within the text by enclosing the
parameter name or parametric expression within percent (%) signs.
Notes
Defines annotation text to be written directly onto the display at a specified location. This is a command generated
by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if annotation is used. This
command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in an input
file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
All text is shown on subsequent displays unless the annotation is turned off or deleted. Use the /TSPEC command
to set the attributes of the text.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
31386
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TODEF
TOCOMP, Refname, Type, NUMLC, LCARR
Defines single or multiple compliance as the topological optimization function.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Refname
Reference name (8 character string). TOCOMP,Refname with the other fields blank deletes the defined
compliance function.
Type
Sets the type of compliance function. Valid types are:
SINGLE
Sets the topological optimization function for Refname to single compliance. NumLC is the load case
number.
MULTIPLE
Sets the topological optimization function to weighted summation of individual compliances. NumLC is
the number of load cases considered
NUMLC
For Type = Single, NumLC is the load case identifier. For Type = Multiple, NumLC is the total number of load
cases considered.
LCARR
Used when Type = Multiple. The array (of dimension NumLC) defining the load case weights. Array name
must be enclosed in % signs: %WEIGHT%.
Notes
The function defined using TOCOMP is used as an objective or constraint for the topological optimization, as
defined further in TOVAR. When used as the objective, the optimization distributes the material so that the
compliance measure is minimized (stiffness is maximized).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>Topo Function
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Basic Opt
TODEF, ACCUR
Defines parameters for and initializes topological optimization.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
ACCUR
Accuracy used for termination and convergence checking. Default = 0.0005.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31387
TOEXE
Notes
Initializes the topological optimization problem and defines the accuracy for the solution. Issue this command
before TOLOOP.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Run
TOEXE
Executes one topological optimization iteration.
OPTIMIZATION: Run
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Notes
Runs one topological optimization iteration, leading to the prediction of a new shape, defined by means of element
densities. Before issuing TOEXE, you must perform a static or modal analysis solution depending on the type of
objective and constraints you defined. TOEXE performs a convergence test based on relative objective and
element density change with an accuracy as specified by TODEF.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
TOFFST, VALUE
Specifies the temperature offset from absolute zero to zero.
SOLUTION: Analysis Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> FL PP ED
VALUE
Degrees between absolute zero and zero of temperature system used (should be positive).
Notes
Specifies the difference (in degrees) between absolute zero and the zero of the temperature system used. Absolute
temperature values are required in evaluating certain expressions, such as for creep, swelling, radiation heat
transfer, MASS71, etc. (The offset temperature is not used in evaluating emissivity.) Examples are 460 for the
Fahrenheit system and 273 for the Centigrade system. The offset temperature is internally included in the element
calculations and does not affect the temperature input or output. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid
only within the first load step.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
31388
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TOFREQ
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Temperature Units
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Temperature Units
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>Solution Opt
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Temperature Units
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>Solution Opt
TOFREQ, Refname, Type, Nfreq, Frqarr, Targval
Defines single or mean frequency formulation as the topological optimization function.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Refname
Reference name (8 character string). TOFREQ,Refname with other fields blank deletes the defined compliance
function.
Type
Defines type of frequency topological optimization function. Valid types are:
SINGLE
Defines single frequency as the topological optimization function.
WEIGHTED
Defines a weighted summation of individual frequencies as the topological optimization function.
RECIPROCAL
Uses a reciprocal formulation as the topological optimization function.
EUCLIDEAN
Uses a Euclidean Norm formulation as the topological optimization function.
Nfreq
For Type = Single, Nfreq is the frequency identifier. For Type = WEIGHTED, RECIPROCAL, or EUCLIDEAN,
Nfreq is the total number of frequencies considered.
Frqarr
For Type = WEIGHTED or RECIPROCAL, Frqarr is the array of dimension Nfreq that defines the weights for
mean frequency formulation. For Type = EUCLIDEAN, Frqarr is the array (of dimension Nfreq) defining the
target values for mean frequency formulation. The array name must be enclosed in % signs: %ARRAY%.
Targval
For Type = RECIPROCAL, Targval specifies the target value for mean frequency formulation.
Type
Nfreq
Frqarr
Targval
SINGLE
Frequency identifier
N/A
N/A
WEIGHTED
Total number of frequencies
Defines weights
N/A
RECIPROCAL
Total number of frequencies
Defines weights
Target value
EUCLIDEAN
Total number of frequencies
Defines target values
N/A
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31389
TOGRAPH
Notes
Single, when the frequency function is set as the objective (TOVAR), distributes material so that the single frequency specified is maximized.
Weighted (available only as an objective function) distributes material so that the specified mean frequency
formulation is maximized.
Reciprocal (available only as an objective function) is a mean frequency formulation that defines a smoother
function than Single. It is best used when two modes whose eigenfrequencies occur in the given mean formulation
exchange their orders during optimization. The eigenfrequency that is closest to the target frequency (set with
Targval) experiences the largest increase and is maximized.
Euclidean Norm Formulation (available only as an objective function) is used to shift single or multiple eigenfrequencies up. The mean eigenfrequency is utilized to smooth the optimization process. This must be used as the
objective where the optimization procedure distributes material so that the mean frequency is minimized.
If the optimization problem does not converge, try specifying a different type of frequency formulation. Each
formulation uses different methods to calculate the frequency optimization, so depending on your specific
problem, one might work better than another. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information on
these formulations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>Topo Function
TOGRAPH, Type, Refname
Plots iteration solution of topological optimization.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Type
OBJ
Plot objective history versus iteration number.
CON
Plot constraint history versus iteration number.
Refname
Used if multiple constraints were defined. Defaults to the first constraint name.
Notes
Plots all iterations of the topological optimization solution, using either objective or constraint history.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Graph History
31390
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TOLOOP
TOLIST
Lists all topological optimization functions currently defined.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Notes
Provides a list of all defined topological functions, in the order they were defined.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>List Functions
TOLOOP, NITER, PLOT
Execute several topological optimization iterations.
OPTIMIZATION: Run
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
NITER
Number of iterations to be performed (maximum of 100). Default is 1.
PLOT
Sets display of topological densities for each iteration:
0
Do not display the results of each iteration.
1
Display the results of each iteration.
Command Default
TOLOOP,1,0.
Notes
Invokes a macro to solve, postprocess, and plot each iteration. For compliance cases, you must write at least one
load step (using LSWRITE) before issuing this command. LSSOLVE is used for static analyses if there are multiple
load steps. The Block Lanczos eigensolver is used for modal analyses. PLNSOL,TOPO and TOEXE are used for
each iteration. The macro terminates when either the number of iterations or the convergence criteria is met,
as specified in TODEF,ACCUR.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Run
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31391
TOPLOT
TOPLOT, AVRG
Plot current topological density distribution.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
AVRG
Sets TOPLOT to show smoothed nodal solution or non-smoothed element solution.
0
Plot smoothed nodal solution. Default.
1
Plot non-smoothed element solution.
Notes
Invokes a macro to postprocess the current element pseudo densities for topological optimization. TOPLOT,0
uses PLNSOL,TOPO, and TOPLOT,1 uses PLESOL,TOPO to plot the current density distribution predicted by the
topological optimization.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Plot Dens Unavg
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Plot Densities
TOPRINT, Type, Refname
Print iteration solution history of topological optimization.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Type
OBJ
Print objective history versus iteration number.
CON
Print constraint history versus iteration number.
Refname
Used if multiple constraints were defined. Defaults to the first constraint name.
Notes
Prints one iteration of the topological optimization solution, using either objective or constraint history.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Print History
31392
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TORQC2D
TORQ2D
Calculates torque on a body in a magnetic field.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
TORQ2D invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates mechanical torque on a body in a magnetic field. The body
must be completely surrounded by air (symmetry permitted), and a closed path [PATH] passing through the air
elements surrounding the body must be available. A counterclockwise ordering of nodes on the PPATH command
will give the correct sign on the torque result. The macro is valid for 2-D planar analysis.
The calculated torque is stored in the parameter TORQUE. A node plot showing the path is produced in interactive
mode. The torque is calculated using a Maxwell stress tensor approach. Path operations are used for the calculation,
and all path items are cleared upon completion. See the TORQC2D command for torque calculation based on
a circular path.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Path Based>Torque
TORQC2D, RAD, NUMN, LCSYS
Calculates torque on a body in a magnetic field based on a circular path.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
RAD
Radius of the circular path. The nodes for the path are created at this radius.
NUMN
Number of nodes to be created for the circular path. The greater the number of nodes, the higher the accuracy
of the torque evaluation. Defaults to 18.
LCSYS
(Optional) Local coordinate system number to be used for defining the circular arc of nodes and the path.
Defaults to 99. (If a local system numbered 99 already exists, it will be overwritten by this default.)
Notes
TORQC2D invokes an ANSYS macro which calculates the mechanical torque on a body using a circular path. It
is used for a circular or cylindrical body such as a rotor in an electric machine. The body must be centered about
the global origin and must be surrounded by air elements. The air elements surrounding the path at radius RAD
must be selected, and elements with a high-permeability material should be unselected prior to using the macro.
The macro is valid for 2-D planar analyses only. For a harmonic analysis, the macro calculates the time-average
torque. Radial symmetry models are allowed, i.e., the model need not be a full 360 model.
The calculated torque is stored in the parameter TORQUE. If the model is not a full 360 model, TORQUE should
be multiplied by the appropriate factor (such as 4.0 for a 90 sector) to obtain the total torque. A node plot
showing the path is produced in interactive mode.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31393
TORQSUM
The torque is calculated via a circular path integral of the Maxwell stress tensor. The circular path and the nodes
for the path are created by the macro at the specified radius RAD. Path operations are used for the calculation,
and all path items are cleared upon completion. See the TORQ2D command for torque calculation based on an
arbitrary, non-circular path.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Path Based>Circular Torq
TORQSUM, Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8, Cnam9
Summarizes electromagnetic torque calculations on element components.
POST1: Magnetics Calculations
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Cnam1, Cnam2, Cnam3, Cnam4, Cnam5, Cnam6, Cnam7, Cnam8, Cnam9
Names of existing element components for which Maxwell or virtual work boundary conditions were applied
in the preprocessor. Must be enclosed in single quotes (e.g., 'CNAM1') when the command typed in the
command input box.
Notes
TORQSUM invokes an ANSYS macro that summarizes the Maxwell and virtual work torque values. The element
components must have had appropriate Maxwell or virtual work boundary conditions established in the preprocessor prior to solution in order to retrieve torques (see the FMAGBC command). The torque values are stored
on a per-element basis for the adjacent air layer elements surrounding the components and are retrieved and
summed by the macro. For a harmonic analysis, the calculated torque represents a time-average value.
TORQSUM is valid only for 2-D planar analysis.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Elec&Mag Calc>Component Based>Torque
TORUS, RAD1, RAD2, RAD3, THETA1, THETA2
Creates a toroidal volume.
PREP7: Primitives
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
RAD1, RAD2, RAD3
Three values that define the radii of the torus. You can specify the radii in any order. The smallest of the values
is the inner minor radius, the intermediate value is the outer minor radius, and the largest value is the major
radius. (There is one exception regarding the order of the radii values--if you want to create a solid torus,
specify zero or blank for the inner minor radius, in which case the zero or blank must occupy either the RAD1
or RAD2 position.) At least two of the values that you specify must be positive values; they will be used to
define the outer minor radius and the major radius. See the diagram in the Notes section for a view of a toroidal sector showing all radii.
31394
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TORUS
THETA1, THETA2
Starting and ending angles (either order) of the torus. Used for creating a toroidal sector. The sector begins
at the algebraically smaller angle, extends in a positive angular direction, and ends at the larger angle. The
starting angle defaults to 0 and the ending angle defaults to 360.
Notes
Defines a toroidal volume centered about the working plane origin. A solid torus of 360 will be defined with
four areas, each area spanning 180 around the major and minor circumference.
To create the toroidal sector shown below, the command TORUS,5,1,2,0,180 was issued. Since "1" was the
smallest radii value specified, it defined the inner minor radius; since "2" was the intermediate radii value specified,
it defined the outer minor radius; and since "5" was the largest radii value specified, it defined the major radius.
The values "0" and "180" defined the starting and ending angles of the torus.
#
$"!
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Torus
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31395
TOSTAT
TOSTAT
Displays topological optimization status and results information.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Notes
Displays information for defined functions from TOVAR, TODEF, and TOTYPE, and results information such as
final volume, number of iterations, and convergence status.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>Status
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Status
TOTAL, NTOT, NRMDF
Specifies automatic MDOF generation.
SOLUTION: Master DOF
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NTOT
Total number of master degrees of freedom to be used in the analysis, including specified (NS, see below)
master degrees of freedom. NTOT must be greater than NS if any automatic generation is to be done.
NRMDF
Rotational masters key:
0
Include all degrees of freedom in automatic master selection.
1
Exclude rotational degrees of freedom (and VOLT degrees of freedom in a piezoelectric analysis) from
automatic selection.
Command Default
Do not use any automatically generated MDOF.
Notes
Specifies automatic master degree of freedom (MDOF) generation. The limit on the number of MDOF is equal
to the maximum in-memory wavefront size (see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). If NS is defined as the number
of master degrees of freedom specified with the M or MGEN command, NTOT-NS additional master degrees of
freedom will be automatically generated during the solution phase if TOTAL is used. NS may be zero, i.e., all
master degrees or freedom can be automatically generated. After the solution phase, generated masters become
specified masters (NS = NTOT) so that they may be listed, displayed, modified, etc. The TOTAL command is ignored
in subsequent solutions unless masters are deleted, such that NS<NTOT. If used in SOLUTION, this command is
valid only within the first load step.
31396
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TOTYPE
During the matrix triangulation (wavefront) operation, the first NTOT degrees of freedom are temporarily identified
as masters and then are replaced as degrees of freedom with lower K/M ratios are found. Degrees of freedom
matching the user specified set (if any) are permanently identified. The wavefront builds to NTOT and will have
a minimum (and final) value of NTOT. The final set of automatic masters identified will be those corresponding
to the lowest modes of the structure.
Constrained degrees of freedom are excluded from the automatic master selection. Constraints may be defined
to prevent undesirable modes from being present (thus preventing the corresponding MDOF from being selected).
For example, if symmetry constraints are imposed, degrees of freedom producing only symmetric modes will
be selected. In-plane rotational degrees of freedom for shell elements lying in a global plane are automatically
excluded. All rotational degrees of freedom can be excluded during the automatic selection if desired.
If automatic master selection is used in the reduced linear transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS) analysis or the
reduced harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARMIC) analysis, be sure to force the selection [M] of any degrees of
freedom having nonzero displacement or force inputs. If automatic master selection is used in the superelement
generation pass (ANTYPE,SUBSTR), be sure to force the selection of connection points to nonsuperelements.
Automatically selected masters are shown in the solution listing (and not in preprocessing listings) as follows:
in the reduced eigenvector solution for modal (ANTYPE,MODAL).
in the reduced displacement solution for harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARMIC).
in the reduced displacement solution for linear transient dynamic (ANTYPE,TRANS).
in the matrix or load vector printout for substructures (ANTYPE,SUBSTR).
In the substructure generation pass (ANTYPE,SUBSTR), a mass matrix must be available if the TOTAL option is
to be used.
If you select the sparse solver as the equation solver, any TOTAL commands are ignored. The TOTAL command
is only valid for the frontal solver.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Master DOFs>Program Selected
Main Menu>Solution>Master DOFs>Program Selected
TOTYPE, Type
Specifies solution method for topological optimization.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Type
Choose the solution method to use:
OC
Use Optimality Criteria (OC) approach. (Default)
SCP
Use Sequential Convex Programming (SCP) approach.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31397
TOVAR
Notes
The OC approach is applicable to problems with only volume as the constraint (or volume as the only constraint).
The SCP approach is applicable to all valid combinations of objectives and constraints. See TOVAR for a description
of valid combinations.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Run
TOVAR, Refname, Type, LOWER, UPPER, Boundtype
Specifies the objective and constraints for the topological optimization problem.
OPTIMIZATION: Specifications
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> <> ED
Refname
Reference name (8 character string), previously defined with TOCOMP and TOFREQ, or VOLUME (reserved
name; default).
Type
Valid types for this command are:
OBJ
Specifies the objective for the topological optimization problem. The Refname(s) specified must already
be defined (TOCOMP,Refname, or TOFREQ) before defining your constraint(s). LOWER, UPPER, and
Boundtype are not used if the specified Refname is the objective. To specify total volume as the objective
function, use VOLUME as the Refname. For single or multiple compliance, see TOCOMP. For frequency
formulations (single, weighted mean, reciprocal mean, or Euclidean normal), see TOFREQ.
CON
Specifies the constraint for the topological optimization problem. Requires a previously defined objective
function (TOVAR,Refname,OBJ). LOWER, UPPER, and Boundtype must be specified as listed below.
DEL
Deletes the previously defined topological optimization objective or constraint named in Refname.
LOWER, UPPER, and Boundtype are not used.
LOWER
Lower bound for the constraint (Type = CON).
UPPER
Upper bound for the constraint (Type = CON). Default is no defined upper bound.
Boundtype
For Type = CON, specifies whether the specified bounds are actual values, or indicate percentages.
PERCENT
Indicates that the values specified in LOWER and UPPER should be treated as percentages of the original
value. The original value is 100%; only values less than 100 are valid. Depending on the type of constraint,
this value indicates a decrease or increase of the initial values. For example, specify 50 to reduce the
volume by 50%, or specify 30 to increase the compliance by 30%.
31398
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TRANS
ACTUAL
Indicates that the values specified in LOWER and UPPER should be treated as actual values.
Command Default
TOVAR,VOLUME,OBJ
Notes
You must set the objective first, then set the constraint(s).
If a single or multiple compliance function (see TOCOMP) is specified as objective function, only the VOLUME
function is allowed as a constraint.
If a single, weighted mean, reciprocal mean, or euclidean norm frequency (see TOFREQ) objective is selected,
only the VOLUME function is allowed as a constraint.
If the VOLUME function is selected as the objective function, then only a single or multiple compliance constraint
(see TOCOMP) is allowed as constraint function. In this case, a multiple single compliance constraint definition
is also possible. LOWER is not applicable if Type = OBJ or DEL, and is not used if Boundtype = PERCENT.
UPPER is not applicable if Type = OBJ or DEL. If Boundtype = PERCENT, and RefName = VOLUME, UPPER specifies
the percentage of volume reduction. If Boundtype = PERCENT, and RefName is a single or multiple compliance
function, UPPER specifies the percentage of compliance increase.
If Boundtype = PERCENT, the valid range for UPPER is [5%, 95%].
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>Topo Objective
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>TopoConstraint>By Percentage
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>TopoConstraint>By Value
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Advanced Opt>TopoConstraint>Delete
Main Menu>Topological Opt>Set Up>Basic Opt
TRANS, Fname, Ext, -Reformats File.GRPH for improved performance with plotters.
DISPLAY: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to TRAN33.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31399
TRANSFER
--
Unused field.
Notes
Reformats current Fname.GRPH data (based on color) for improved performance with pen plotters.
Menu Paths
It is part of the DISPLAY command.
TRANSFER, KCNTO, INC, NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Transfers a pattern of nodes to another coordinate system.
PREP7: Nodes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KCNTO
Reference number of coordinate system where the pattern is to be transferred. Transfer occurs from the
active coordinate system.
INC
Increment all nodes in the given pattern by INC to form the transferred node pattern.
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Transfer nodes from pattern beginning with NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC (defaults
to 1). If NODE1 = ALL, NODE2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected nodes [NSEL]. If NODE1 = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
may be substituted for NODE1 (NODE2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Transfers a pattern of nodes from one coordinate system to another. Coordinate systems may be translated and
rotated relative to each other. Initial pattern may be generated in any coordinate system. Coordinate values are
interpreted in the active coordinate system and are transferred directly.
A model generated in one coordinate system may be transferred to another coordinate system. The user may
define several coordinate systems (translated and rotated from each other), generate a model in one coordinate
system, and then repeatedly transfer the model to other coordinate systems. The model may be generated in
any type of coordinate system (Cartesian, cylindrical, etc.) and transferred to any other type of coordinate system.
Coordinate values (X, Y, Z, or R, , Z, or etc.) of the model being transferred are interpreted in the active coordinate
system type, regardless of how they were generated. Values are transferred directly and are interpreted according
to the type of coordinate system being transferred to. For example, transferring from a Cartesian coordinate
system to a cylindrical coordinate system (not recommended) would cause X = 2.0 and Y = 3.0 values to be directly
interpreted as R = 2.0 and = 3.0 values, respectively.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Transfer Coord>Nodes
31400
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/TRIAD
TREF, TREF
Defines the reference temperature for the thermal strain calculations.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TREF
Reference temperature for thermal expansion.
Note If the uniform temperature [TUNIF] is undefined, it is also set to this value.
Command Default
Reference temperature is 0.0 degrees.
Notes
Defines the reference temperature for the thermal strain calculations in structural analyses and explicit dynamic
analyses. Thermal strains are given by *(T-TREF), where is the coefficient of thermal expansion (for more on
this see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference). You input the strain using ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (the secant or mean
coefficient value), or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ (the instantaneous coefficient value), or the thermal strain value (THSX,
THSY, THSZ). T is the element temperature. If is temperature-dependent, TREF should be in the range of temperatures you define using the MPTEMP command.
Reference temperatures may also be input per material by using the label REFT on the material property [MP]
command, such as MP,REFT,MAT,C0. Only a constant (non-temperature-dependent) value is allowed. The value
input on the TREF command applies to all materials not having a specified material property definition.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Reference Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Reference Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Reference Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Reference Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Reference Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Reference Temp
/TRIAD, Lab
Shows the global XYZ coordinate triad on displays.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Display triad as follows:
ORIG
Display triad at global origin (default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31401
/TRLCY
OFF
Turn off triad display.
LBOT
Display triad in lower left screen corner.
RBOT
Display triad in lower right screen corner.
LTOP
Display triad in upper left screen corner.
RTOP
Display triad in upper right screen corner.
Notes
For efficiency, ANSYS 3-D graphics logic maintains a single data structure (segment), which includes the triad as
a 3-D data object. If a 3-D device is involved (/SHOW,3D), and the ANSYS graphics are not being displayed as
multi-plots, then the triad location is determined by the view settings for Window #1. A request for triad display
anywhere except for the origin could yield an improper display in windows 2 through 5. The program displays
the same segment in all windows. The view settings of each window constitute the only difference in the display
in the active windows.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Reset Window Options
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Window Options
/TRLCY, Lab, TLEVEL, N1, N2, NINC
Specifies the level of translucency.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Apply translucency level to the items specified by the following labels:
ELEM
Elements. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for element numbers.
AREA
Solid model areas. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for area numbers.
VOLU
Solid model volumes. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for volume numbers.
ISURF
Isosurfaces (surfaces of constant stress, etc., value). Translucency varies with result value, to a maximum
of the specified translucency level.
CM
Component group. Use N1 for component name, ignore N2 and NINC.
31402
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TRNOPT
CURVE
Filled areas under curves of line graphs. Use N1, N2, NINC fields for curve numbers.
ZCAP
If /TYPE,WN,ZCAP is the current display type, then /TRLCY,ZCAP,TLEVEL will display the model in window
WN with the portion of the model in front of the section plane displayed at the translucency level TLEVEL.
ON, OFF
Sets the specified translucency display on or off. All other fields are ignored.
TLEVEL
Translucency level: 0.0 (opaque) to 1.0 (transparent).
N1, N2, NINC
Used only with labels as noted above. Apply translucency level to Lab items numbered N1 to N2 (defaults
to N1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If N1 is blank or ALL, apply specified translucency level to entire selected
range. If Lab is CM, use component name for N1 and ignore N2 and NINC. A value of N1 = P allows you to
graphically pick elements, areas, and volumes. You can then assign translucency levels to the entities via the
picker. The Lab and TLEVEL fields are ignored when translucency is applied by picking.
Command Default
Zero translucency (opaque) level.
Notes
Specifies the level of translucency for various items. Issue /TRLCY,DEFA to reset the default (0) translucency
levels. This command is valid only on selected 2-D and 3-D graphics devices; see in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
for more information on applying translucency.
For 2-D devices, ANSYS displays only the visible faces of the items being displayed. The information behind the
facing planes is not displayed. Issuing the /SHRINK command will force the hardware to display information
behind the translucent items.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Translucency
TRNOPT, Method, MAXMODE, Dmpkey, MINMODE, MCout, TINTOPT
Specifies transient analysis options.
SOLUTION: Dynamic Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> EM EH <> PP ED
Method
Solution method for the transient analysis:
FULL
Full method (default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31403
TRNOPT
REDUC
Reduced method.
MSUP
Mode superposition method.
MAXMODE
Largest mode number to be used to calculate the response (for Method = MSUP). Defaults to the highest
mode calculated in the preceding modal analysis.
Dmpkey
Damping option (for Method = REDUC):
DAMP
Include the effects of damping if present (default).
NODAMP
Ignore the effects of damping, even if present.
MINMODE
Smallest mode number to be used (for Method = MSUP). Defaults to 1.
MCout
Modal coordinates output key (valid only for the mode superposition method MSUP):
NO
No output of modal coordinates (default).
YES
Output modal coordinates to the text file jobname.MCF.
TINTOPT
Time integration method for the transient analysis:
NMK or 0
Newmark algorithm (default).
HHT or 1
HHT algorithm (valid only for the full transient method).
Notes
Specifies transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS) options. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within
the first load step. Use the TINTP command to set transient integration parameters.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Product Restrictions
TRNOPT is not a valid command in ANSYS Professional. In ANSYS Professional, Method is automatically set to
FULL for pure thermal transients and is set to MSUP for all other transient analyses.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>New Analysis
31404
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TRPLIS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
TRPDEL, NTRP1, NTRP2, TRPINC
Deletes particle flow or charged particle trace points.
POST1: Trace Points
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
NTRP1, NTRP2, TRPINC
Delete points from NTRP1 to NTRP2 (defaults to NTRP1) in steps of TRPINC (defaults to 1). If NTRP1 = ALL,
NTRP2 and TRPINC are ignored and all trace points are deleted. If NTRP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Notes
Deletes particle flow or charged particle trace points defined with the TRPOIN command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Dele Trace Pt
TRPLIS, NTRP1, NTRP2, TRPINC, Opt
Lists the particle flow or charged particle trace points.
POST1: Trace Points
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
NTRP1, NTRP2, TRPINC
List points from NTRP1 to NTRP2 (defaults to NTRP1) in steps of TRPINC (defaults to 1). If NTRP1 = ALL, NTRP2
and TRPINC are ignored and all trace points are listed. If NTRP1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all re-
maining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Opt
Opt = LOC lists the trace point number location (X, Y, Z). Default.
Opt = PART lists the trace point number particle settings (velocity, charge, mass).
Notes
Lists the particle flow or charged particle trace points in the active display coordinate system [DSYS]. Trace points
are defined with the TRPOIN command.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31405
TRPOIN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>List Trace Pt
TRPOIN, X, Y, Z, VX, VY, VZ, CHRG, MASS
Defines a point through which a particle flow or charged particle trace will travel.
POST1: Trace Points
MP ME ST DY <> <> <> <> FL PP ED
X, Y, Z
Coordinate location of the trace point (in the active coordinate system). If X = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
VX, VY, VZ
Particle velocities in the X, Y and Z directions (in the active coordinate system).
CHRG
Particle charge.
MASS
Particle mass.
Notes
Defines a point through which a particle flow or charged particle trace [PLTRAC] will travel. Multiple points (50
maximum) may be defined which will result in multiple flow traces. Use TRPLIS to list the currently defined trace
points and TRPDEL to delete trace points.
The VX, VY, VZ, CHRG, and MASS arguments only apply to charged particles.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Defi Trace Pt
TRTIME, TIME, SPACING, OFFSET, SIZE, LENGTH
Defines the options used for the PLTRAC (particle flow or charged particle trace) command.
POST1: Animation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TIME
Total Trace Time (seconds) (defaults to 0, which is the full flow trace).
SPACING
Particle spacing in seconds (defaults to 0).
OFFSET
Particle offset in seconds (defaults to 0). It is used internally in the ANFLOW macro to produce an animation
of particle flow in a flowing fluid or charged particle motion in an electric or magnetic field.
31406
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TSHAP
SIZE
Particle size (defaults to 0, which is a line).
LENGTH
Particle length fraction (defaults to .1).
Command Default
Full particle flow or charged particle trace.
Notes
The TRTIME command varies the type of PLTRAC display produced. Particle flow or charged particle traces follow
a particle's path in the forward and backward direction of travel. The DOF selected determines the color of the
particle trace. SPACING defines the particle spacing in seconds from adjacent particles in the stream line. OFFSET
defines the offset in seconds from the spacing set by the SPACING argument.
LENGTH defines the particle length fraction. The default value (.1), means the particle occupies 10% of the flow
region, and the other 90% is a color-coded line.
SIZE sets the radius of the particle. Use SPACING, OFFSET and LENGTH only when SIZE is nonzero (i.e., the
particle is bigger than the line).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Time Interval
TSHAP, Shape
Defines simple 2-D and 3-D geometric surfaces for target segment elements.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Shape
Specifies the geometric shapes for target segment elements TARGE169 and TARGE170.
LINE
Straight line (2-D) (Default for 2-D)
PARA
Parabola (2-D)
ARC
Clockwise arc (2-D)
CARC
Counterclockwise arc (2-D)
CIRC
Complete circle (2-D)
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31407
/TSPEC
TRIA
Three-node triangle (3-D) (Default for 3-D)
TRI6
Six-node triangle (3-D)
QUAD
Four-node quadrilateral (3-D)
QUA8
Eight-node quadrilateral (3-D)
CYLI
Cylinder (3-D)
CONE
Cone (3-D)
SPHE
Sphere (3-D)
PILO
Pilot node (2-D, 3-D)
Notes
Use this command to generate the rigid target surface for surface-to-surface contact (TARGE169, CONTA171,
CONTA172 (2-D) and TARGE170, CONTA173, and CONTA174 (3-D)). Once you issue TSHAP, all subsequent elements
generated via this command will have the same shape, until you issue TSHAP again with a different Shape.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Elem Attributes
/TSPEC, TCOLOR, TSIZE, TXTHIC, PANGLE, IANGLE
Creates annotation text attributes (GUI).
GRAPHICS: Annotation
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
TCOLOR
Text color (0 TCOLOR 15):
0
Black.
1
Red-Magenta.
2
Magenta.
3
Blue-Magenta.
4
Blue.
31408
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/TSPEC
5
Cyan-Blue.
6
Cyan.
7
Green-Cyan.
8
Green.
9
Yellow-Green.
10
Yellow.
11
Orange.
12
Red.
13
Dark Gray.
14
Light Gray.
15
White.
TSIZE
Text size factor.
TXTHIC
Text thickness key:
1
normal.
2
twice as thick.
3
three times as thick.
4
four times as thick.
PANGLE
Text path angle (0.0 < angle < 360.0).
IANGLE
Text italic angle (0.0 < angle < 45.0).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31409
TSRES
Notes
Defines annotation text attributes to control certain characteristics of the text created via the /TLABEL command.
This is a command generated by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG)
if annotation is used. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can
be included in an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Annotation>Create Annotation
TSRES, Array
Defines an array of keytimes at which the time-stepping strategy changes.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Array
Identifies an Nx1x1 array parameter containing the keytimes at which the heat transfer time-stepping strategy
changes (the time step is reset to the initial time step based on DELTIM or NSUBST settings). The array name
must be enclosed by % signs (e.g., %array%). See *DIM for more information on array parameters.
Notes
Time values in the array parameter must be in ascending order and must not exceed the time at the end of the
load step as defined on the TIME command. The time increment between time points in the array list must be
larger than the initial time step defined on the DELTIM or NSUBST command. Time values must also fall between
the beginning and ending time values of the load step. For multiple load step problems, you must either change
the parameter values to fall between the beginning and ending time values of the load step or reissue the
command with a new array parameter. To clear the array parameter specification, issue TSRES,ERASE. Results
can be output at the requested time points if the array or time values in the array are also specified in the OUTRES
command using FREQ=%array%. Use this command to reset the time-stepping strategy within a load step. You
may need to reset the time-stepping strategy when using tabular time-varying boundary conditions.
See Steady-State Thermal Analysis of the ANSYS Thermal Analysis Guide for more information on applying
boundary conditions via tabular input. See Transient Thermal Analysis of the ANSYS Thermal Analysis Guide for
more information on defining keytimes.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time - Time Step
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps
31410
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TUNIF
TUNIF, TEMP
Assigns a uniform temperature to all nodes.
SOLUTION: FE Body Loads
MP ME ST DY <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
TEMP
Uniform temperature assigned to the nodes. If TEMP is blank, the uniform temperature is set to zero.
Command Default
Set uniform temperature to the reference temperature ([TREF] but not MP,REFT).
Notes
In a transient or nonlinear thermal analysis, the uniform temperature is used during the first iteration of a solution
as follows:
as the starting nodal temperature (except where temperatures are explicitly specified [D, DK]),
to evaluate temperature-dependent material properties.
In a structural analysis or explicit dynamic analysis, the uniform temperature is used as the default temperature
for thermal strain calculations and material property evaluation (except where body load temperatures are
specified [BF, BFE, BFK, LDREAD]). In other scalar field analyses, the uniform temperature is used for material
property evaluation.
When the TUNIF command is used in an explicit dynamic analysis, you cannot use the EDLOAD,,TEMP command
to apply temperature loading. Furthermore, temperature loading defined by TUNIF cannot be listed or deleted
by the EDLOAD command.
TUNIF is a convenient form of the more general BFUNIF command.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>Uniform
Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>Uniform
Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Temperature>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Settings>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Preprocessor>LS-DYNA Options>Loading Options>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>Temperature>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Boundary>Temperature>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Temperature>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Temperature>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Settings>Uniform Temp
Main Menu>Solution>Loading Options>Uniform Temp
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31411
TVAR
TVAR, KEY
Changes time to the cumulative iteration number.
POST26: Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
KEY
Time key:
0
Time is used for the variable TIME.
1
NCUMIT is used for the variable TIME.
Command Default
TIME is the variable TIME.
Notes
Changes the meaning of the time variable to the cumulative iteration number (NCUMIT) variable. Data can be
read from the file, printed, and displayed as a function of NCUMIT rather than time. All POST26 descriptions applying to TIME then apply to NCUMIT.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Data
/TXTRE, Lab, NUM, N1, N2, NINC
Controls application of texture to selected items.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
You can apply texture according to the following labels:
ELEM
Apply texture to elements N1 through N2 in steps of NINC.
AREA
Apply texture to areas N1 through N2 in steps of NINC.
VOLU
Apply texture to volumes N1 through N2 in steps of NINC.
CM
Apply texture to the component named in N1. N2 and NINC are ignored.
ON, OFF
Sets the specified texture display on or off. All other fields are ignored.
31412
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/TXTRE
File
If Lab = File, the command format is /TXTRE, File, Key_Index, Fname, Fext, --, Format (This variant of
the command is applicable to 2-D drivers).
Key_Index
The texture index associated with the file. If the number fifty-one (51) is used, the imported bitmap
will be used as the window's logo.
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the
directory path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can
use all 248 characters for the file name.
Fext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
--
Unused field.
Format
The file format. If Format = 0, the file is a pixmap (UNIX) or Bitmap (PC). The file cannot contain a
compressed image, and the PC file must be 8 or 24 bit BI_RGB format. If Format = 1 or JPEG, then
the file is in JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) format. If Format = 2 or PNG, then the file is in
PNG (Portable Network Graphics) format.
NUM
Select the texture index number from the following list:
0
No Texturing
1
Aluminum
2
Aluminum, Brushed
3
Steel With Bumps
4
Steel, Embossed
5
Iron
6
Steel, Pattern
7
Steel, Riveted
8
Steel, Scratched
9
Tin
10
Metal
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31413
/TXTRE
11
Steel, Etched
12
Metal, Hot
13
Iron, Grainy
14
Metal, Rusty
15
Brick
16
Block
17
Wood
18
Wood, Light
19
Wood, Walnut
20
Plastic, Hard Blue
21
Plastic, Light Blue
22
Plastic, Hard Red
31
Gold
32
Brass
33
Silver
34
Plastic, Black
35
Plastic, Ivory
36
Plastic, Blue
37
Plastic, Red
38
Plastic, Yellow
39
Plastic, Green
31414
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/TYPE
40
Plastic, Brown
N1, N2, NINC
Apply texture to Lab items numbered N1 through N2 in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If Lab = CM, then N1 is
used to for the component name and N2 and NINC are ignored. If Lab = ELEM, AREA, or VOLU and N1 = blank
or ALL, then the specified texture will be applied to all entities of type Lab. If N1 = P, then graphical picking
is enabled.
Command Default
No texture (/TXTRE,DEFA)
Notes
This command is available for 3-D Open GL devices. 2-D devices are supported only for the Lab = File variation
of the command, allowing imported bitmaps to be used for texturing and annotation. Textures can affect the
speed of many of your display operations. You can increase the speed by temporarily turning the textures off
(Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Texturing(3D)> Display Texturing). This menu selection toggles your textures
on and off. When textures are toggled off, all of the texture information is retained and reapplied when texturing
is toggled back on.
For some displays, the texture will appear distorted because of a technique used to enhance 3-D displays
(/DV3D,TRIS,1). Disabling this function (/DV3D,TRIS,0) will improve the quality of some texture displays. Disabling
the TRIS option of the /DV3D command will slow down 3-D displays significantly. Be sure to reapply the TRIS
option after you obtain a satisfactory output.
Specifying /TXTRE,DEFA removes all texturing.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Texturing(3D)
/TYPE, WN, Type
Defines the type of display.
GRAPHICS: Style
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
Type
Display type. Defaults to ZBUF for raster mode displays or BASIC for vector mode displays:
BASIC or 0
Basic display (no hidden or section operations).
SECT or 1
Section display (plane view). Use the /CPLANE command to define the cutting plane.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31415
/TYPE
HIDC or 2
Centroid hidden display (based on item centroid sort).
HIDD or 3
Face hidden display (based on face centroid sort).
HIDP or 4
Precise hidden display (like HIDD but with more precise checking). Because all facets are sorted, this
mode can be extremely slow, especially for large models.
CAP or 5
Capped hidden display (same as combined SECT and HIDD with model in front of section plane removed).
ZBUF or 6
Z-buffered display (like HIDD but using software Z-buffering).
ZCAP or 7
Capped Z-buffered display (same as combined SECT and ZBUF with model in front of section plane removed).
ZQSL or 8
QSLICE Z-buffered display (same as SECT but the edge lines of the remaining 3-D model are shown).
HQSL or 9
QSLICE precise hidden display (like ZQSL but using precise hidden).
Command Default
ZBUF for raster mode displays; BASIC for vector mode displays.
Notes
Defines the type of display, such as section display or hidden-line display. Use the /DEVICE command to specify
either raster or vector mode.
The SECT, CAP, ZCAP, ZQSL, and HQSL options produce section displays. The section or "cutting" plane is specified
on the /CPLANE command as either normal to the viewing vector at the focus point (default), or as the working
plane.
When you use PowerGraphics, the section display options (Section, Slice, and Capped) use different averaging
techniques for the interior and exterior results. Because of the different averaging schemes, anomalies may appear
at the transition areas. In many cases, the automatically computed MIN and MAX values will differ from the full
range of interior values. You can lessen the effect of these anomalies by issuing AVRES,,FULL (Main Menu>
General Post Proc> Options for Outp). This command sets your legend's automatic contour interval range according to the minimum and maximum results found throughout the entire model.
With PowerGraphics active (/GRAPHICS,POWER), the averaging scheme for surface data with interior element
data included (AVRES,,FULL) and multiple facets per edge (/EFACET,2 or /EFACET,4) will yield differing minimum
and maximum contour values depending on the Z-Buffering options (/TYPE,,6 or /TYPE,,7). When the Section
data is not included in the averaging schemes (/TYPE,,7), the resulting absolute value for the midside node is
significantly smaller.
The HIDC, HIDD, HIDP, ZBUF, ZQSL, and HQSL options produce displays with "hidden" lines removed. Hidden
lines are lines obscured from view by another element, area, etc. The choice of non-Z-buffered hidden-line procedure types is available only for raster mode [/DEVICE] displays. For vector mode displays, all non-Z-buffered
"hidden-line" options use the same procedure (which is slightly different from the raster procedures). Both
31416
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TYPE
geometry and postprocessing displays may be of the hidden-line type. Interior stress contour lines within solid
elements can also be removed as hidden lines, leaving only the stress contour lines and element outlines on the
visible surfaces. Midside nodes of elements are ignored on postprocessing displays. Overlapping elements will
not be displayed.
The ZBUF, ZCAP, and ZQSL options use a specific hidden-line technique called software Z-buffering. This technique
allows a more accurate display of overlapping surfaces (common when using Boolean operations or /ESHAPE
on element displays), and allows smooth shaded displays on all interactive graphics displays. Z-buffered displays
can be performed faster than HIDP and CAP type displays for large models. See also the /LIGHT, /SHADE, and
/GFILE commands for additional options when Z-buffering is used.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Hidden-Line Options
TYPE, ITYPE
Sets the element type attribute pointer.
PREP7: Meshing
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
ITYPE
Assign this type number to the elements (defaults to 1).
Command Default
ITYPE = 1.
Notes
Activates an element type number to be assigned to subsequently defined elements. This number refers to the
element type number (ITYPE) defined with the ET command. Type numbers may be displayed [/PNUM].
In some cases, ANSYS can proceed with a meshing operation even when no logical element type has been assigned
via TYPE or XATT,,,TYPE. For more information, see the discussion on setting element attributes in Meshing Your
Solid Model in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Default Attribs
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Elements>Elem Attributes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Elem Ext Opts
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31417
TZAMESH
TZAMESH, Tvolu, SIZE, NDIV
Meshes the areas of a volume to create Trefftz nodes.
PREP7: Trefftz Domain
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Tvolu
Component name for the Trefftz volume. The component name must be enclosed in single quotes in the
TZAMESH command line.
SIZE
Edge length between Trefftz nodes on surface boundaries (i.e. lines). The areas of the component volume
will be meshed with this specification to create the Trefftz nodes. If SIZE is zero (or blank), use NDIV.
NDIV
Number of element divisions along the surface boundary lines. Defaults to 2.
Notes
The command macro is used to create Trefftz nodes by meshing the surface areas of the selected volumes. The
nodes of the meshed surface areas are grouped into the node component TZ_NOD. There is no solid model associativity with the Trefftz volume and the Trefftz nodes. The Trefftz nodes (component TZ_NOD) are used to
create the Trefftz substructure (TZEGEN command).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>Mesh TZ Geometry
TZDELE
Deletes the Trefftz superelement, associated constraint equations and all supporting Trefftz files.
PREP7: Trefftz Domain
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
Deletes the Trefftz superelement, associated constraint equations and all supporting Trefftz files previously
generated with the TZEGEN command.
You should delete the Trefftz superelement if you are going to create new Trefftz nodes and generate a new
Trefftz superelement.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>Superelement>Delete TZ
31418
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TZEGEN
TZEGEN
Generates a Trefftz domain substructure and defines a Trefftz superelement for use in electrostatic analysis.
PREP7: Trefftz Domain
MP ME <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
The command generates a Trefftz domain substructure from the Trefftz node component (TZ_NOD) and the
flagged infinite surfaces of the exterior finite element domain [SF command with the INF surface load label].
The Trefftz nodes should be uniformly scattered between the modeled components and the exterior of the finite
element mesh. The nodes must not be attached to any underlying electrostatic finite elements. The nodes may
be created automatically from a solid model volume using the TZEGEN command macro.
The substructure named Jobname.sub is created and automatically brought into the problem as a superelement
(MATRIX50) using the next available element number. Also created is a set of constraint equations relating the
Trefftz nodes to the surface nodes of the flagged exterior finite element domain. The TZEGEN command creates
temporary files during the substructure generation. These include the following:
Jobname.TZN - Trefftz nodes
Jobname.TZE - Trefftz surface facets on the FE boundary
Jobname.TZX - Surface nodes of the FE boundary
Jobname.TZM - Trefftz material
The TZEGEN macro is only valid for 3-D electrostatics analysis. In addition, the bounding surface of the finite
element domain must contain no symmetry planes.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>Superelement>Generate TZ
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31419
31420
U Commands
/UDOC, WIND, Class, Key,
Determines position and content for the multi-legend options.
GRAPHICS: Labeling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WIND
The window number to which the command applies. (defaults to 1)
Class
The type (and relative importance) of legend item being displayed:
CNTR
Contour legend. This legend item is controlled separately from the other legend items (see note below).
DATE
The items in the DATE class include the date and time, or the ANSYS graphical logo (/PLOPTS,LOGO,1).
This item is shown by default in all plots.
GWIN
The items in the GWIN class include the entity acronyms that appear in the legend of a multiplot of entities (Nodes, Elements, Keypoints, Lines, Areas, Volumes). GWIN items are shown by default for all GPLOT
displays.
TYPE
Items in the TYPE class include the plot type (e.g. ELEMENTS, MATERIALS, NODAL SOLUTIONS, etc.). TYPE
items are shown by default in all plots.
TYP2
Items in the TYP2 class include supplementary type information, such as DMAX and SMAX for nodal
solutions. TYP2 items are shown by default in all plots.
INUM
Items in the INUM class include the number labels generated by the /PNUM command. This class is displayed by default in all plots that contain /PNUM information.
BCDC
The items in the BCDC class include labels created by the /PBC command. This class is shown by default
in all plots which contain /PBC information.
VECT
Items in the VECT class include labels created by the PLVECT command. This class is shown by default
for all PLVECT plots.
SURF
The items in the SURF class include labels from the /PSF legend. This class is shown by default on all plots
of surface boundary conditions.
BODY
Items from the BODY class include labels from the /PBF legend. This class is shown by default in all plots
of body forces.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/UDOC
PSTA
Items from the PSTA class include stress scaling statistics, such as the /SSCALE setting. This class is not
shown as the default for any type of plot, and must be specifically referenced to display the included
data.
VIEW
The items in the VIEW class include view statistics. This class is not shown as the default for any type of
plot, and must be specifically referenced to display the included data.
MISC
The items in the MISC class include supplementary labels like /EXPANDED and Stress Section Cross Section.
This class is not shown as the default for any type of plot, and must be specifically referenced to display
the included data.
KEY
Switch:
OFF or 0 --
Do not display the legend.
LEFT, RIGHT, TOP or BOTTOM --
If the value for Class is CNTR, these are the four acceptable
values for the contour legend position.
LEFT or RIGHT --
If any value other than CNTR is used for Class, these are the
two acceptable values for the text data.
Notes
The legend classes conform to the controls specified in the window options panel (PlotCtrls> Window Controls>
Window Options). In many instances, the legend controls specified with the /PLOPTS command will take precedence and override /UDOC specifications. For instance:
/PLOPTS,LEG1,OFF will disable the TYPE, TYP2, INUM, and MISC classes, regardless of the /UDOC settings.
/PLOPTS,LEG2,OFF will disable the VIEW class, regardless of the /UDOC settings.
/PLOPTS,LEG3,OFF will disable the PSTA class, regardless of the /UDOC settings.
All items in a class are listed with the same X coordinate (except for contours). The contents of the text classes
are dumped onto the display window from top to bottom, in order of class importance.
The font specification for text items that are included in the user-specified legends are controlled with the
/DEVICE command (PlotCtrls> Font Controls> Anno/Graph Font).
The floating point values for the data presented in the legend(s) are controlled by the /GFORMAT command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>MultiLegend Options>Contour Legend
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>MultiLegend Options>Text Legend
31422
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/UI
/UI, Func, Type, Format, Screen, Color, Krev, Orient, Compress, Quality
Activates specified GUI dialog boxes.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Func
Label identifying the dialog box to be activated:
HELP
Activates the online help system. Valid only in non-UI graphics mode (/MENU,GRPH).
VIEW
Activates the Pan, Zoom, Rotate dialog box
WPSE
Activates the Working Plane Settings dialog box.
WPVI
Activates the Offset Working Plane dialog box.
RESULT
Activates the Query Picking Menu for reviewing results.
QUERY
Activates the Query Picked Entities (preprocess) dialog box.
COPY
Activates the Hard Copy dialog box.
ANNO
Activates the 2D Annotation dialog box.
AN3D
Activates the 3D Annotation dialog box.
SELECT
Activates the Select Entities dialog box.
NSEL
Activates a picking menu to select nodes.
ESEL
Activates a picking menu to select elements.
KSEL
Activates a picking menu to select keypoints.
LSEL
Activates a picking menu to select lines.
ASEL
Activates a picking menu to select areas.
VSEL
Activates a picking menu to select volumes.
REFRESH
Refreshes the graphics window (non-UI mode only).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31423
/UI
COLL
Controls the collapse of the ANSYS Main Menu when a FINISH command is issued. See Type below for
a discussion of the arguments.
Type
Label identifying the type of select operation. Valid only for the following Func labels; NSEL, ESEL, KSEL, LSEL,
ASEL, and VSEL:
S
Select a new set.
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
Label identifying the type of results data to be queried. Valid only for Func = RESULT:
NODE
Nodal solution data (h-elements only).
ELEMENT
Element solution data.
GRID
Subgrid solution data (p-elements only).
Label specifying the behavior of the ANSYS Main Menu after a FINISH command is issued. Note that this
does not affect user interaction with the Main Menu. Valid only for Func = COLL:
YES, 1 or blank
Allows the Main Menu to collapse after FINISH command.
NO or 0
Prevents Main Menu collapse after FINISH command.
If Func = COPY, and Type = SAVE, command format is /UI,Func,Type,Format,Screen,Color,Krev,Orient,Compress,Quality. The remaining fields (after Type) identify the portion of the screen, the type of file, and the
method of display that the portion of the screen is to be saved as.
Format
PSCR
Encapsulated Postscript File Format.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format.
EPSI
Encapsulated Postscript with TIFF preview.
BMP
(PC only) Bitmap (Windows) file format.
31424
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/UI
WMF
(PC only) Windows Metafile format.
EMF
(PC only) Enhanced Metafile format.
JPEG
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) file format.
Screen
FULL
Saves the entire screen in the specified format.
GRAPH
Saves only the ANSYS Graphic window.
Color
MONO
A two color (black and white) file is saved.
GRAY
The specified file format is saved in gray scale.
COLOR
The file is saved at the specified color depth.
Krev
NORM
Saves file as shown on the screen.
REVERSE
Saves file with the background color reversed.
Orient
LANDSCAPE
Saves file in landscape mode.
PORTRAIT
Saves file in portrait mode.
Compress
YES
Compresses TIFF files and EPS files with TIFF preview (default).
NO
Saves files with no compression.
Quality
1 100
JPEG quality index, with 100 being the maximum quality level.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31425
UIMP
Notes
Allows you to activate specified GUI dialog boxes directly in either GUI or non-GUI mode.
The /UI command itself is valid in any processor, however certain dialog boxes are accessible only in a particular
processor (e.g., /UI,RESULT,... is valid only in the General Postprocessor).
ANSYS JPEG software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group, Copyright 1998, Thomas G.
Lane.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>Manual Rezoning>Create Remesh Zone(s)>Create Rezone Area
UIMP, MAT, Lab1, Lab2, Lab3, VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Defines constant material properties (GUI).
PREP7: Materials
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT
Material number.
Lab1, Lab2, Lab3
Material property labels (see the MP command for valid labels).
VAL1, VAL2, VAL3
Values corresponding to three labels.
Notes
Defines constant material properties. This is a command generated by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) and
will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if material properties are specified using the Material Properties dialog
box. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be included in
an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Material Props>Material Models
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Change Mat Props>Material Models
31426
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/UIS
/UIS, Label, VALUE
Controls the GUI behavior.
SESSION: Run Controls
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Behavior control key:
BORD
Controls the functionality of the mouse buttons for dynamic viewing mode only. When Label = BORD,
the three values that follow control the functionality of the LEFT, MIDDLE and RIGHT buttons, respectively
(see below).
MSGPOP
Controls which messages from the ANSYS error message subroutine are displayed in a message dialog
box.
REPLOT
Controls whether or not an automatic replot occurs after functions affecting the model are executed.
ABORT
Controls whether or not ANSYS displays dialog boxes to show the status of an operation in progress and
to cancel that operation.
DYNA
Controls whether the dynamic mode preview is a bounding box or the edge outline of the model. This
label only applies to 2-D display devices (i.e., /SHOW,XII or /SHOW,WIN32). This "model edge outline"
mode is only supported in PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER] and is intended for element, line, results,
area, or volume displays.
PICK
Controls how graphical entities are highlighted from within the ANSYS Select menu.
POWER
Controls whether or not PowerGraphics is active when the GUI is initiated. The ANSYS program default
status is PowerGraphics ON; this command is used (placed in the start.ans file) when full graphics is
desired on start up.
DPRO
Controls whether or not the ANSYS input window displays a dynamic prompt. The dynamic prompt
shows the correct command syntax for the command, as you are entering it.
UNDO
Controls whether or not the session editor includes nonessential commands or comments in the file it
creates. You can use this option to include comments and other materials in the session editor file.
LEGE
Controls whether or not the multi-legend is activated when you start the GUI. The multi-legend allows
you specify the location of your legend items in each of the five graphics windows. You can place this
option in your start.ans file and have the GUI start with the legend items in a pre-specified location.
PBAK
Controls whether or not the background shading is activated when you start the GUI. Background
shading. You can place this option in your start.ans file and control whether or not background shading
is activated.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31427
/UIS
ZPIC
Controls the sorting order for entities that are coincident (directly in front of or behind each other) to a
picked spot on your model. When you pick a spot on your model that could indicate two or more entities,
a message warns you of this condition, and a list of the coincident entities can be generated. The VALUE
term (below) will determine the sort order.
HPOP
Controls the prioritization of your GUI windows when the contents are ported to a plot or print file
(/UI,COPY,SAVE). OpenGL (3D) graphics devices require that the ANSYS Graphics Screen contents be set
in front of all overlying windows in order to port them to a printer or a file. This operation can sometimes
conflict with /NOERASE settings. See the VALUE term (below) to determine the available control options.
VALUE
Values controlling behavior if Label = BORD:
(These values control the operation according to syntax : /UIS,BORD,LEFT,MIDDLE,RIGHT)
1
PAN, controls dynamic translations.
2
ZOOM, controls zoom, and dynamic rotation about the view vector.
3
ROTATE, controls dynamic rotation about the screen X and Y axes.
Note You can designate any value for any button, or designate the same value for all three
buttons. If no value is specified, default is LEFT = PAN, MIDDLE = ZOOM and RIGHT = ROTATE.
Values controlling behavior if Label = MSGPOP:
0
All messages displayed.
1
Only notes, warnings, and errors displayed.
2
Only warnings and errors displayed (default).
3
Only errors displayed.
Values controlling behavior if Label = REPLOT:
0
No automatic replot.
1
Automatic replot (default).
Values controlling behavior if Label = ABORT:
ON
Display status and cancellation dialog boxes (default).
31428
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/UIS
OFF
Do not display status and cancellation dialog boxes.
1
Same as ON.
0
Same as OFF.
Values controlling behavior if Label = DYNA:
0
Use model edge outline when possible (default).
1
Use bounding box preview.
Values controlling behavior if Label = PICK:
0
Picked keypoints and nodes are enclosed by a square. Picked lines are overlaid by a thicker line. Picked
areas, volumes, and elements (non-point/non-line) are redrawn with highlighting colors. However, if the
pick is a box, circle, or polygon pick, the highlighting for all entitles consists only of a square placed
around the entity's centroid.
1
Picked entities are not highlighted.
2
5.1 highlighting (that is, no XOR).
3
Picked entities are highlighted as in VALUE = 0, except that, for a box, circle, or polygon pick, the picked
areas, volumes, and elements (non-point/non-line) are redrawn with highlighting colors. This technique
is slower than the VALUE = 0 technique.
Values controlling behavior if Label = POWER:
0
Start GUI in Full Graphics mode.
1
Start GUI in PowerGraphics mode (default).
Values controlling behavior if Label = DPRO:
0 or OFF
Do not display the dynamic prompt.
1 or ON
Display the dynamic prompt (default).
Values controlling behavior if Label = UNDO:
0 or None
Do not suppress any commands (default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31429
/UIS
1 or Comment
Write the nonessential commands to the session editor file as comments (with a ! at the beginning).
2 or Remove
Do not write nonessential commands or comments.
Values controlling behavior if Label = LEGE:
0 or OFF
Start GUI with the enhanced legend off (default).
1 or ON
Start GUI with the enhanced legend capability activated.
Values controlling behavior if Label = PBAK:
0 or OFF
Start the GUI with the no background shading (default).
1 or ON
Start the GUI with background shading activated.
Values controlling behavior if Label = HPOP:
0 or OFF
No rewrite operations are performed to compensate for items that obscure or overlay the graphics
window (default).
1 or ON
The Graphics screen contents are replotted to ensure that they are situated in front of all other windows.
If /NOERASE is detected, this operation is suppressed.
Notes
Controls certain features of the Graphical User Interface (GUI), including whether the ANSYS program displays
dialog boxes to show you the status of an operation (such as meshing or solution) in progress and to enable you
to cancel that operation. Issue /UIS,STAT for current status. Issue /UIS,DEFA to reset default values for all labels.
Issue /UIS,Label,STAT and /UIS,Label,DEFA for status and to reset a specific Label item.
A /UIS,HPOP,1 command employs a fast redraw method which does not allow entering the legend logic for a
/PLOPTS,INFO,1 or /PLOPTS,INFO,2 command. However, the legend is redrawn for /PLOPTS,INFO,3 because
that command also allows a fast redraw.
This command is valid in any processor.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>MenuCtrls>Message Controls
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Device Options
31430
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
UNDO
UNDELETE, Option, Nstart, Nend
Removes results sets from the group of sets selected for editing.
AUX3: Results Files
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Option
Specifies which sets are to be removed from the selected sets.
SET
Specifies one or more particular sets in the results file that are to be removed from the group of sets selected for deletion.
ALL
Removes all selected sets that are currently selected for deletion.
Nstart
The first set to be removed from the set selected for deletion.
Nend
The final set to be removed from the set selected for deletion. This field is used only if operating on more
than one sequential set.
Notes
Use this command if you have previously marked a set for deletion (with the DELETE command) and now wish
to keep that set instead of deleting it.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
UNDO, Kywrd
Allows the user to modify or save commands issued since the last RESUME or SAVE command.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Kywrd
NEW
Create an editable GUI window that allows the user to alter the commands issued since the most recent
SAVE or RESUME operations (GUI only).
Notes
The UNDO command brings up the session editor, a text window that displays all of the program operations
since the last SAVE or RESUME command. You can modify command parameters, delete whole sections of text
and even save a portion of the command string to a separate file. The file is named jobname000.cmds, with
each subsequent save operation incrementing the filename by one digit.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31431
/UNITS
Note The session editor file can be changed only by the session editor. If you rename your database
file outside of ANSYS and then resume that database, the session editor will display the old filename.
For more information on the session editor, see Using the Session Editor in the ANSYS Operations Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Session Editor
/UNITS, Label, LENFACT, MASSFACT, TIMEFACT, TEMPFACT, TOFFSET, CHARGEFACT, FORCEFACT, HEATFACT
Annotates the database with the system of units used.
DATABASE: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Label
Label to denote the system of units used in this job:
USER
User-defined system (default).
SI
International system (SI or MKS; m, kg, s, K).
CGS
CGS system (cm, g, s, C).
MPA
MPA system (mm, Mg, s, C).
BFT
British system using feet (ft, slug, s, F).
BIN
British system using inches (in, lbf*s2/in, s, F).
If Label = USER, the remaining fields on this command may be used to enter conversion factors that are appropriate for the user-defined system of units.
LENFACT
Conversion factor to meter (m). Default = 1.
MASSFACT
Conversion factor to kilogram (kg). Default = 1.
TIMEFACT
Conversion factor to second (s). Default = 1.
TEMPFACT
Conversion factor to Kelvin (K). Default = 1.
TOFFSET
Temperature offset from absolute zero in degrees Kelvin. Default = 0.
CHARGEFACT
Conversion factor to Coulomb. Default = 1.
31432
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
UPCOORD
FORCEFACT
Conversion factor to Newton (N). Default = 1.
HEATFACT
Conversion factor to Joule (J). Default = 1.
Command Default
User-defined units.
Notes
Allows the user to set a marker in the database indicating the system of units used. The setting may be reviewed
with the /STATUS command at the Begin level. The units label and conversion factors on this command are for
user convenience only and have no effect on the analysis or data. That is, /UNITS will not convert database items
from one system to another (e.g., from British to SI, etc.). The units setting will be written to the file of IGES data
[IGESOUT or CDWRITE], which can then be read by many programs that read IGES files. The user must still use
consistent units for the results to be valid.
If you choose the MKS system of units, the EPZRO option for the EMUNIT command is set to 8.85 e-12 F/m.
(EPZRO specifies alternate free-space permittivity.)
For micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS), where dimensions are on the order of microns, see the conversion
factors in System of Units in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
If you use the ANSYS ADAMS Interface to export model information to the ADAMS program, the /UNITS command
is required to ensure the correct transfer of data between ANSYS and ADAMS. You may choose a predefined unit
system label (Label = SI, CGS, etc.) or you can select the user-defined system option (Label = USER) and input
the appropriate conversion factors (LENFACT, MASSFACT, TIMEFACT, and FORCEFACT). The conversion factors
will be written to the ADAMS input file Jobname.MNF in order to correctly generate the load. For more information, see Export to ADAMS in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
UPCOORD, FACTOR, Key
Modifies the coordinates of the active set of nodes, based on the current displacements.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
FACTOR
Scale factor for displacements being added to nodal coordinates. If FACTOR = 1.0, the full displacement value
will be added to each node, 0.5, half the displacement value will be added, etc. If FACTOR = -1, the full displacement value will be subtracted from each node, etc.
Key
Key for zeroing displacements in the database:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31433
UPGEOM
OFF
Do not zero the displacements (default).
ON
Zero the displacements.
Notes
The UPCOORD command uses displacements stored in the ANSYS database, and not those contained within
the results file, Jobname.RST. Nodal coordinates are updated each time the command is issued. After updating,
both the nodal displacements and rotations are set to zero if Key = ON.
For structural solutions with an updated mesh, unless the coefficient matrix is otherwise reformed (e.g., a new
analysis or NLGEOM,ON) it should first be reformed by issuing a KUSE,-1 command.
For a multiphysics simulation where a CFD or electromagnetic field is being coupled to a structure undergoing
large displacements, all (or a portion) of the surrounding field mesh may take part in the structural solution to
"move" with the displacing structure. You can use the UPCOORD command with a suitable FACTOR to update
the coordinates of the nodes using the newly computed displacements. The mesh will now conform with the
displaced structure for subsequent field solutions. However, the mesh should always be restored to its original
location by using an UPCOORD,FACTOR command before performing any subsequent structural solutions. This
is true for both repeated linear solutions, and for nonlinear restarts. (All saved displacements are relative to the
original mesh location.)
This command is not intended to replace either the large displacement or birth and death logic.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>Updt Node Coord
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>Updt Node Coord
UPGEOM, FACTOR, LSTEP, SBSTEP, Fname, Ext, -Adds displacements from a previous analysis and updates the geometry of the finite element model to
the deformed configuration.
PREP7: Elements
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
FACTOR
Multiplier for displacements being added to coordinates. The value 1.0 will add the full value of the displacements to the geometry of the finite element model. Defaults to 1.0.
LSTEP
Load step number of data to be imported. Defaults to the last load step.
SBSTEP
Substep number of data to be imported. Defaults to the last substep.
31434
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/USER
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The field must be input (no default).
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension must be an RST extension.
--
Unused field.
Notes
This command updates the geometry of the finite element model according to the displacement results of the
previous analysis and creates a revised geometry at the deformed configuration. This command works on all
nodes (default) or on a selected set of nodes. If this command is issued repeatedly, it creates a revised geometry
of the finite element model in a cumulative fashion, i.e., it adds displacement results on the previously generated
deformed geometry. The solid model geometry is not updated by this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Update Geom
/USER, WN
Conveniently resets /FOCUS and /DIST to USER.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
Notes
Conveniently resets scale parameters to USER on the /FOCUS and /DIST commands. Scale parameters will be
internally respecified to those used for the last display. Convenient when the last scale parameters were automatically calculated. User specified parameters hold until changed or removed [/AUTO]. Parameters may be reset
on the individual commands after this command has been issued.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Automatic Fit Mode
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31435
USRCAL
USRCAL, Rnam1, Rnam2, Rnam3, Rnam4, Rnam5, Rnam6, Rnam7, Rnam8, Rnam9
Allows user-solution subroutines to be activated or deactivated.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <>
Rnam1, Rnam2, Rnam3, Rnam4, Rnam5, Rnam6, Rnam7, Rnam8, Rnam9
User-defined solution subroutine names to be activated. Up to nine may be defined on one command or
multiple commands may be used. If Rnam1 = ALL, activate all valid user subroutines. If Rnam1 = NONE, deactivate all valid user subroutines. All characters are required:
USREFL
Allows user defined scalar field (body force) loads.
USERCV
Allows user defined convection (surface) loads.
USERPR
Allows user defined pressure (surface) loads.
USERFX
Allows user-defined heat flux (surface) loads.
USERCH
Allows user-defined charge density (surface) loads.
USERFD
Computes the complex load vector for the frequency domain logic (PIPE59).
USEROU
Allows user supplied element output.
USERMC
Allows user control of the hygrothermal growth (SHELL91).
USOLBEG
Allows user access before each solution.
ULDBEG
Allows user access before each load step.
USSBEG
Allows user access before each substep.
UITBEG
Allows user access before each equilibrium iteration.
UITFIN
Allows user access after each equilibrium iteration.
USSFIN
Allows user access after each substep.
ULDFIN
Allows user access after each load step.
USOLFIN
Allows user access after each solution.
UANBEG
Allows user access at start of ANSYS run.
31436
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
USRCAL
UANFIN
Allows user access at end of ANSYS run.
UELMATX
Allows user access to element matrices and load vectors.
Command Default
No user-solution subroutines are active (even if linked into the program).
Notes
Allows certain user-solution subroutines to be activated or deactivated (system-dependent). This command only
affects the subroutines named. Other user subroutines (such as user elements, user creep, etc.) have their own
activation controls described with the feature.
The routines are commented and should be listed after performing a custom installation from the distribution
media for more details. See also the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for a general description of userprogrammable features.
Users must have system permission, system access, and knowledge to write, compile, and link the appropriate
subroutines into the ANSYS program at the site where it is to be run. All routines should be written in FORTRAN
90. Issue USRCAL,STAT to list the status of these user subroutines. Since a user-programmed subroutine is a
nonstandard use of the program, the verification of any ANSYS run incorporating these commands is entirely
up to the user. In any contact with ANSYS customer support regarding the performance of a custom version of
the ANSYS program, you should explicitly state that a user programmable feature has been used.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>User Routines
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>User Routines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31437
31438
V Commands
V, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8
Defines a volume through keypoints.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
P1
Keypoint defining starting corner of volume. If P1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
P2
Keypoint defining second corner of volume.
P3
Keypoint defining third corner of volume.
P4
Keypoint defining fourth corner of volume.
P5
Keypoint defining fifth corner of volume.
P6
Keypoint defining sixth corner of volume.
P7
Keypoint defining seventh corner of volume.
P8
Keypoint defining eighth corner of volume.
Notes
Defines a volume (and its corresponding lines and areas) through eight (or fewer) existing keypoints. Keypoints
must be input in a continuous order. The order of the keypoints should be around the bottom and then the top.
Missing lines are generated "straight" in the active coordinate system and assigned the lowest available numbers
[NUMSTR]. Missing areas are generated and assigned the lowest available numbers.
Note Solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Certain faces may be condensed to a line or point by repeating keypoints. For example, use
V,P1,P2,P3,P3,P5,P6,P7,P7 for a triangular prism or V,P1,P2,P3,P3,P5,P5,P5,P5 for a tetrahedron. See Figure 45.1: SOLID45 Geometry in the ANSYS Elements Reference for analogous element sketches of the valid condensed face patterns.)
Using keypoints to produce partial sections in CSYS = 2 can generate anomalies; check the resulting volumes
carefully.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Arbitrary>Through KPs
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
V2DOPT
V2DOPT, GEOM, NDIV, HIDOPT, NZONE
Specifies 2-D/axisymmetric view factor calculation options.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
GEOM
Choice of geometry:
0
Planar (default).
1
Axisymmetric
NDIV
Number of divisions for axisymmetric geometry. Defaults to 20.
HIDOPT
Viewing option:
0
Hidden (default).
1
Non-hidden
NZONE
Number of zones for view factor calculation. Defaults to 200.
Command Default
V2DOPT allows you to select options for 2-D view factor calculation. The geometry type can be set to either 2D plane or axisymmetric (defaults to plane). You can also define the number of divisions (defaults to 20) for an
axisymmetric geometry. This command also allows you to select either hidden or non-hidden viewing option
(defaults to hidden) and the number of zones for view factor calculation (defaults to 200).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>View Factor
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>View Factor
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>View Factor
VA, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, A10
Generates a volume bounded by existing areas.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, A10
List of areas defining volume. The minimum number of areas is 4. If A1 = ALL, use all selected [ASEL] areas
and ignore A2 to A10. If A1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for A1.
31440
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VALVE
Notes
This command conveniently allows generating volumes from regions having more than eight keypoints (which
is not allowed with the V command). Areas may be input in any order. The exterior surface of a VA volume must
be continuous, but holes may pass completely through it.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volume by Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Volumes>Arbitrary>By Areas
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Geom Repair>Create Volume
VADD, NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Adds separate volumes to create a single volume.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Numbers of volumes to be added. If NV1 = ALL, add all selected volumes and ignore NV2 to NV9. If NV1 = P,
graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NV1.
Notes
Adds separate volumes to create a single volume. The original volumes (and their corresponding areas, lines and
keypoints) will be deleted by default [BOPTN]. See the BOPTN command for the options available to Boolean
operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be
transferred to the new entities generated. Concatenated entities are not valid with this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Add>Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Add>Volumes
VALVE, NLOC, LENG, MASS, SIF, FLEX, ARINS, ELEM
Defines a valve in a piping run.
PREP7: Piping
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NLOC
Node where valve is to be placed (as described below). Defaults to current run starting point.
LENG
Length of valve (defaults to larger pipe OD).
MASS
Dry mass (weight/gravity) of valve without insulation (defaults to equivalent straight pipe mass). Note, acceleration [ACEL] must be nonzero for weight to be calculated.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31441
VARDEL
SIF
Stress intensification factor (defaults to 1.0).
FLEX
Bending flexibility factor (defaults to 0.5).
ARINS
Insulation surface area (defaults to equivalent straight pipe insulation area). Units (length2) must be consistent
with the smallest unit of the system used (not mixed) regardless of the PUNIT option.
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to valve (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL) + 1).
Notes
Defines a valve (straight pipe element (PIPE16) with adjusted specifications and loadings) at a given location in
a piping run. See the PREP7 RUN command. The location may be 1) between two adjacent colinear straight
pipes, 2) between an adjacent straight pipe and a different piping component, or 3) at the end of a straight pipe.
For Case 1, two new nodes are generated at the ends of the valve. The two straight pipes are automatically
"shortened" to meet the ends of the valve. The valve specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding
two straight pipes.
For Case 2, one new node is generated at one end of the valve. The straight pipe is automatically "shortened" to
meet this end of the valve. The other end of the valve meets the other piping component. The valve specifications
and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.
For Case 3, one new node is generated at the free end of the valve. The other end of the valve meets the straight
pipe. The valve specifications and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Piping Models>Define Pipes>Valve
VARDEL, NVAR
Deletes a variable (GUI).
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NVAR
The reference number of the variable to be deleted. NVAR is as defined by NSOL, ESOL, etc.
Notes
Deletes a POST26 solution results variable. This is a command generated by the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
It will appear in the log file (Jobname.LOG) if a POST26 variable is deleted from the "Defined Time-History Variables" dialog box. This command is not intended to be typed in directly in an ANSYS session (although it can be
included in an input file for batch input or for use with the /INPUT command).
31442
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VATT
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Define Variables
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Elec&Mag>Circuit>Define Variables
VARNAM, IR, Name
Names (or renames) a variable.
POST26: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
IR
Reference number of the variable (2 to NV [NUMVAR]).
Name
Thirty-two character name for identifying variable on printouts and displays. Embedded blanks are compressed
for output.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Graph
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>List
VATT, MAT, REAL, TYPE, ESYS
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed volumes.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
MAT, REAL, TYPE, ESYS
Material number, real constant set number, type number, and coordinate system number to be associated
with selected, unmeshed volumes.
Notes
These element attributes will be used when the volumes are meshed. If a volume does not have attributes associated with it (by this command) at the time it is meshed, the attributes are obtained from the then current MAT,
REAL, TYPE, and ESYS command settings. Reissue the VATT command (before volumes are meshed) to change
the attributes. A zero (or blank) argument removes the corresponding association.
If any of the arguments MAT, REAL, TYPE, or ESYS are defined as -1, then that value will be left unchanged in the
selected set.
In some cases, ANSYS can proceed with a volume meshing operation even when no logical element type has
been assigned via VATT,,,TYPE or TYPE. For more information, see the discussion on setting element attributes
in Meshing Your Solid Model of the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>All Volumes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31443
VCLEAR
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh Attributes>Picked Volumes
VCLEAR, NV1, NV2, NINC
Deletes nodes and volume elements associated with selected volumes.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NINC
Delete mesh for volumes NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NV1 = ALL, NV2 and
NINC are ignored and mesh for all selected volumes [VSEL] is deleted. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled
and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Deletes all nodes and volume elements associated with selected volumes (regardless of whether the nodes or
elements are selected). Nodes shared by adjacent meshed volumes and nodes associated with non-volume
elements will not be deleted. Attributes assigned as a result of VATT are maintained. In the program's response
to the command, if a volume, area, line, or keypoint is tallied as "cleared," it means either its node or element
reference was deleted.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Clear>Volumes
/VCONE, WN, PHI
Defines the view cone angle for perspective displays.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
PHI
View cone angle (0.0 to 85.) to define perspective. Use PHI = 45.0 for typical perspective. Increase angle
for more perspective, decrease angle for less. If the distance [/DIST] is not specified, it will be automatically
calculated to give full window magnification. If the distance is also specified, PHI controls both the perspective
and the magnification. The larger the angle, the more the perspective and the less the magnification. Defaults
to 0.0 (no perspective).
Command Default
0.0 degrees (no perspective (parallel projection)).
31444
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VCROSS
Notes
Perspective shows the true depth of the object in the display. A variable magnification results since the back
plane of the object is further from the observer than the front plane. The largest magnification occurs at the
front plane. With perspective, the magnification factor (MAGF) is not only a function of the distance from the
object, but also the window shape and the perspective (or view cone) angle as follows:
/2
MAGF =
(d) TAN
where , for square windows, is the largest in-plane vertical or horizontal dimension, d is the distance from the
observer to the plane of (usually the front plane of the object), and is the view cone angle (defined with
the/VCONE command). The bigger the cone angle, the more the perspective. The magnification factor proportionally decreases with increasing . The distance can be defined with the /DIST or the /FOCUS command. Note,
the distance input on the /DIST command is equal to d only if the focus point is located on the plane of . It is
recommended that if a general perspective is desired (i.e., not any specific cone angle), use = 45.0 (since
TAN(45.0) = 1.0) and let the d value be automatically calculated for full window magnification.
Note that any number of /DIST, /FOCUS, and /VCONE combinations can be used to produce the same magnification. Distances less than the object depth will produce views from within the object.
A magnification factor of 1.0 just fills the window. If the automatic scaling option is used [/AUTO], the magnification factor is fixed at 0.91 (to allow a 10% margin around the object) and d is automatically calculated for the
given /VCONE and /FOCUS values. Any value of between 0.0 and 85.0 (usually 45.0) may be used to activate
the perspective. Views from inside the object are not possible when d is automatically calculated (use manual
scaling [/USER] along with /DIST specification).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Perspective View
VCROSS, LabXR, LabYR, LabZR, LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1, LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2
Forms element table items from the cross product of two vectors.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabXR, LabYR, LabZR
Label assigned to X, Y, and Z-component of resultant vector.
LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1
X, Y, and Z-component of first vector label.
LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2
X, Y, and Z-component of second vector label.
Notes
Forms labeled result items for the selected element from the cross product of two vectors:
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31445
VCVFILL
{LabXR, LabYR, LabZR} = {LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1} X {LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2}
Data must be in a consistent coordinate system. Labels are those associated with the ETABLE command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Cross Product
VCVFILL, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A9, A9, A10
Fills cavities and bosses in volumes (for models imported from CAD files).
PREP7: CAD Repair
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A9, A9, A10
List of areas that define the volume. If A1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining arguments are
ignored (valid only in the GUI). If A1 = ALL, all selected areas will be used and all remaining arguments are
ignored.
Notes
Use this command to fill in holes and cavities or eliminate protrusions (bosses) in models imported from CAD
files. In essence, this command removes features projecting above or below a plane, such as bosses and cavities.
This command is available only for models imported through the Default IGES option.
You must select all areas related to the feature before it can be eliminated, and the order in which those areas
are selected can be important. If the boss or cavity is an isolated entity, the area selection order does not matter.
However, if the boss or cavity is attached to an area, that area must be the last area selected in the list. If the attached area is not the last area in the selection list the command may distort the geometry of the model.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Fill Cavity
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Simplify>Toolkit>Remove Boss
VDDAM, VF, VA, VB, VC
Specifies the velocity spectrum computation constants for the analysis of shock resistance of shipboard
structures.
SOLUTION: Spectrum Options
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> PP ED
VF
Direction-dependent velocity coefficient for elastic or elastic-plastic analysis option (Default = 0).
VA, VB, VC
Coefficients for the DDAM velocity spectrum equations. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. Default for
these coefficients is zero.
31446
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VDELE
Notes
This command specifies velocity coefficients to analyze shock resistance of shipboard equipment. These coefficients
are used to compute mode coefficients according to the equations given in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. The
form of these equations is based on the Naval NRL Dynamic Design Analysis Method. This command, along with
the ADDAM and SED commands, is used with the spectrum (ANTYPE,SPECTR) analysis as a special purpose alternative to the SV, FREQ, and SVTYP commands. The mass and length units of the model must be in pounds
and inches, respectively.
This command is also valid in PREP7.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>DDAM Options
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>DDAM Options
VDELE, NV1, NV2, NINC, KSWP
Deletes unmeshed volumes.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NINC
Delete volumes from NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NV1 = ALL, NV2 and NINC
are ignored and all selected volumes [VSEL] are deleted. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for
NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
KSWP
Specifies whether keypoints, lines, and areas are also deleted:
0
Delete volumes only (default).
1
Delete volumes, as well as keypoints, lines, and areas attached to the specified volumes but not shared
by other volumes.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Volume and Below
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Volumes Only
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Delete>Volume and Below
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>TZ Geometry>Delete>Volumes Only
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31447
VDGL
VDGL, NV1, NV2, NINC
Lists keypoints of a volume that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NINC
List keypoints that lie on a parametric degeneracy on volumes from NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of
NINC (defaults to 1). If NV1 = ALL (default), NV2 and NINC will be ignored and keypoints on all selected volumes
[VSEL] will be listed. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). You may also substitute a component name for NV1 (ignore NV2 and NINC).
Notes
See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for details about parametric degeneracies.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Check Geom>Show Degeneracy>List Degen Volus
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Show Degeneracy>List Degen Volus
VDOT, LabR, LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1, LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2
Forms an element table item from the dot product of two vectors.
POST1: Element Table
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LabR
Label assigned to dot product result.
LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1
X, Y, and Z-component of first vector label.
LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2
X, Y, and Z-component of second vector label.
Notes
Forms labeled result items for the selected element from the dot product of two vectors:
LabR = {LabX1, LabY1, LabZ1}
{LabX2, LabY2, LabZ2}
Data must be in a consistent coordinate system. Labels are those associated with the ETABLE command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Element Table>Dot Product
31448
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VDRAG
VDRAG, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, NLP1, NLP2, NLP3, NLP4, NLP5, NLP6
Generates volumes by dragging an area pattern along a path.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6
List of areas in the pattern to be dragged (6 maximum if using keyboard entry). If NA1 = P, graphical picking
is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If NA1 = ALL, all selected
areas will be swept along the path. A component name may also be substituted for NA1.
NLP1, NLP2, NLP3, NLP4, NLP5, NLP6
List of lines defining the path along which the pattern is to be dragged (6 maximum if using keyboard entry).
Must be a continuous set of lines. To be continuous, adjacent lines must share the connecting keypoint (the
end keypoint of one line must also be first keypoint of the next line).
Notes
Generates volumes (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, and areas) by sweeping a given area pattern along
a characteristic drag path. If the drag path consists of multiple lines, the drag direction is determined by the sequence in which the path lines are input (NLP1, NLP2, etc.). If the drag path is a single line (NLP1), the drag direction
is from the keypoint on the drag line that is closest to the first keypoint of the given area pattern to the other
end of the drag line.
The magnitude of the vector between the keypoints of the given pattern and the first path keypoint remains
constant for all generated keypoint patterns and the path keypoints. The direction of the vector relative to the
path slope also remains constant so that patterns may be swept around curves. Lines are generated with the
same shapes as the given pattern and the path lines.
Keypoint, line, area, and volume numbers are automatically assigned (beginning with the lowest available values
[NUMSTR]). Adjacent lines use a common keypoint, adjacent areas use a common line, and adjacent volumes
use a common area. For best results, the entities to be dragged should be orthogonal to the start of the drag
path. Drag operations that produce an error message may create some of the desired entities prior to terminating.
If element attributes have been associated with the input area via the AATT command, the opposite area generated by the VDRAG operation will also have those attributes (i.e., the element attributes from the input area
are copied to the opposite area). Note that only the area opposite the input area will have the same attributes
as the input area; the areas adjacent to the input area will not.
If the input areas are meshed or belong to a meshed volume, the area(s) can be extruded to a 3-D mesh. Note
that the NDIV argument of the ESIZE command should be set before extruding the meshed areas. Alternatively,
mesh divisions can be specified directly on the drag line(s) (LESIZE). See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide
for more information.
You can use the VDRAG command to generate 3-D interface element meshes for elements INTER194 and
INTER195. When generating interface element meshes using VDRAG, you must specify the line divisions to
generate one interface element directly on the drag line using the LESIZE command. The source area to be extruded becomes the bottom surface of the interface element. Interface elements must be extruded in what will
become the element's local x direction, that is, bottom to top.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Areas>Along Lines
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31449
VEORIENT
VEORIENT, VNUM, Option, VALUE1, VALUE2
Specifies brick element orientation for volume mapped (hexahedron) meshing.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
VNUM
Number identifying volume for which elements are to be oriented (no default).
Option
Option for defining element orientation:
KP
Orientation is determined by two keypoints on the volume. Input the keypoint numbers (KZ1 and KZ2)
in fields VALUE1 and VALUE2, respectively. The element z-axis points from KZ1 toward KZ2. Element x
and y directions point away from KZ1 along edges of the volume to make a right-hand triad. (The element
x- and y-axes are uniquely determined by this specification.)
LINE
Orientation is determined by one of the lines defining the volume. Input the line number in field VALUE1.
The element z direction follows the direction of the line. Input a negative value if the desired z direction
is opposite to the direction of the specified line. (The element x- and y-axes are uniquely determined by
this specification.) (VALUE2 is not used.)
AREA
Orientation is determined by one of the areas defining the volume. The area represents the desired element top surface. Input the area number as VALUE1. The shortest line in the volume connected to the
area will be used to specify the element z direction. (If more than one shortest line exists, the lowest
numbered of those is used.) Element x and y directions are not uniquely specified by this option. (VALUE2
is not used.)
THIN
Align the element z normal to the thinnest dimension of the volume. The shortest line in the volume is
used to specify the element z direction. (If more than one shortest line exists, the lowest numbered of
those is used.) Element x and y directions are not uniquely specified by this option. (VALUE1 and VALUE2
are not used.)
DELE
Delete the previously defined volume orientation for the specified volume (VNUM). (VALUE1 and VALUE2
are not used.)
VALUE1, VALUE2
Parameters required for the element z-axis direction specification. The meaning of VALUE1 and VALUE2 will
depend on the chosen Option. See the description of Option above for details.
Command Default
Elements are not oriented in any specific manner.
Notes
Use VEORIENT before the VMESH command to specify the desired orientation of brick elements in a mapped
mesh. VEORIENT has no effect on tetrahedron meshes, extruded meshes (VROTAT, VDRAG, VEXTR, etc.), or
swept meshes (VSWEEP).
31450
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VEXT
Proper brick orientation is essential for certain element types such as SOLID46 and SOLSH190. In such cases, use
VEORIENT or EORIENT to achieve the desired orientation. For other brick element types, you may need to specify
element orientation to control orthotropic material property directions without concern for the element connectivity. For those cases, the ESYS command is the preferred method of specifying the material property directions.
For Option = LINE, AREA, and THIN, the orientation will be internally converted to an equivalent Option = KP
specification (KP,KZ1,KZ2). Use the VLIST command to view the element orientations (in terms of KZ1 and KZ2)
associated with each volume.
Menu Paths
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Volume Brick Orient
VEXT, NA1, NA2, NINC, DX, DY, DZ, RX, RY, RZ
Generates additional volumes by extruding areas.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NINC
Set of areas (NA1 to NA2 in steps of NINC) that defines the pattern to be extruded. NA2 defaults to NA1, NINC
defaults to 1. If NA1 = ALL, NA2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is defined by all selected areas. If NA1
= P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A
component name may also be substituted for NA1 (NA2 and NINC are ignored).
DX, DY, DZ
Increments to be applied to the X, Y, and Z keypoint coordinates in the active coordinate system (DR, D, DZ
for cylindrical; DR, D, D for spherical).
RX, RY, RZ
Scale factors to be applied to the X, Y, and Z keypoint coordinates in the active coordinate system (RR, R,
RZ for cylindrical; RR, R, R for spherical). Note that the R and R scale factors are interpreted as angular
offsets. For example, if CSYS = 1, RX, RY, RZ input of (1.5,10,3) would scale the specified keypoints 1.5 times
in the radial and 3 times in the Z direction, while adding an offset of 10 degrees to the keypoints. Zero, blank,
or negative scale factor values are assumed to be 1.0. Zero or blank angular offsets have no effect.
Notes
Generates additional volumes (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, and areas) by extruding and scaling a
pattern of areas in the active coordinate system.
If element attributes have been associated with the input area via the AATT command, the opposite area generated by the VEXT operation will also have those attributes (i.e., the element attributes from the input area are
copied to the opposite area). Note that only the area opposite the input area will have the same attributes as
the input area; the areas adjacent to the input area will not.
If the areas are meshed or belong to meshed volumes, a 3-D mesh can be extruded with this command. Note
that the NDIV argument on the ESIZE command should be set before extruding the meshed areas.
Scaling of the input areas, if specified, is performed first, followed by the extrusion.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31451
VFCALC
In a non-Cartesian coordinate system, the VEXT command locates the end face of the volume based on the
active coordinate system. However, the extrusion is made along a straight line between the end faces. Note that
solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Caution: Use of the VEXT command can produce unexpected results when operating in a non-Cartesian
coordinate system. For a detailed description of the possible problems that may occur, see Solid Modeling
in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Areas>By XYZ Offset
VFCALC, Fname, Ext, -Computes and stores Hemicube view factors.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).
The extension defaults to VF.
--
Unused field.
Notes
When you leave ANSYS, the Hemicube view factors are removed from memory.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>Compute
VFOPT, Opt, Filename, Ext, Dir, Format
Specifies options for view factor file.
SOLUTION: Radiosity
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Opt
View factor option:
31452
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VFQUERY
NEW
Compute view factors and write them to a file.
OFF
Do not recompute view factors it they already exist in the database, otherwise compute them (default).
READ
Read view factors from a file. For subsequent SOLVE commands, switch to the default option (OFF).
NONE
Do not write view factors to a file.
Fname
File name for view factor matrix. Defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension for view factor matrix (default = vf).
Dir
Directory path for view factor matrix. If you do not specify a directory path, it will default to your working
directory.
Format
File format for view factor file. Defaults to a Binary format.
BINA
Binary file (default).
ASCI
ASCII file.
Notes
This command allows you to deactivate the view factor computation (Opt = OFF) if the view factors already exist
in the database. OFF is the default upon encountering the second and subsequent SOLVE commands in the
solution processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Radiation Opts>View Factor
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>View Factor
Main Menu>Solution>Radiation Opts>View Factor
VFQUERY, SRCELEM, TARELEM
Queries and prints element Hemicube view factors and average view factor.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
MP ME <> <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
SRCELEM
Elements representing the source radiating surfaces used to query the view factor at the target element(s).
If SRCELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI). If SRCELEM = ALL, all selected elements
will have their view factors queried. A component name may also be substituted for SRCELEM. Selected ele-
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31453
VGEN
ments must be flagged for surface to surface radiation in order to query view factors (SF, SFA, or SFE with
Lab = RDSF). The view factors must have been previously computed.
TARELEM
Element for view factor query. If TARELEM = P, graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI). If TARELEM
= ALL, all selected elements will have their view factors queried. A component name may also be substituted
for TARELEM. Selected elements must be flagged for surface to surface radiation in order to query view factors
(SF, SFA, or SFE with Lab = RDSF). The view factors must have been previously computed.
Notes
View factors for each target element will be printed.
An average view factor for all target elements will be computed. (Use *GET to retrieve the average value).
When resuming a database, issue the command VFOPT,READ before issuing the VFQUERY command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Radiosity Meth>Query
VGEN, ITIME, NV1, NV2, NINC, DX, DY, DZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates additional volumes from a pattern of volumes.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
ITIME
Do this generation operation a total of ITIMEs, incrementing all keypoints in the given pattern automatically
(or by KINC) each time after the first. ITIME must be > 1 for generation to occur.
NV1, NV2, NINC
Generate volumes from pattern beginning with NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to
1). If NV1 = ALL, NV2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected volumes [VSEL]. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component
name may also be substituted for NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
DX, DY, DZ
Keypoint location increments in the active coordinate system (--, D, DZ for cylindrical, --, D, -- for spherical).
KINC
Keypoint increment between generated sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned
[NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies if elements and nodes are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original volumes, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
31454
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VGET
IMOVE
Specifies whether to redefine the existing volumes:
0
Generate additional volumes as requested with the ITIME argument.
1
Move original volumes to new position retaining the same keypoint line, and area numbers (ITIME,
KINC, and NOELEM are ignored). Corresponding meshed items are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates additional volumes (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, areas and mesh) from a given volume
pattern. The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based upon the volumes in the pattern and not upon the
current settings of the pointers. End slopes of the generated lines remain the same (in the active coordinate
system) as those of the given pattern. For example, radial slopes remain radial, etc. Generations which produce
volumes of a size or shape different from the pattern (i.e., radial generations in cylindrical systems, radial and phi
generations in spherical systems, and theta generations in elliptical systems) are not allowed. Note that solid
modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Volume, area, and line numbers are automatically
assigned (beginning with the lowest available values [NUMSTR]).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Copy>Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Volumes
VGET, Par, IR, TSTRT, KCPLX
Moves a variable into an array parameter vector.
POST26: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Par
Array parameter vector in the operation.
IR
Reference number of the variable (1 to NV [NUMVAR]).
TSTRT
Time (or frequency) corresponding to start of IR data. If between values, the nearer value is used.
KCPLX
Complex number key:
0
Use the real part of the IR data.
1
Use the imaginary part of the IR data.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31455
VGLUE
Notes
Moves a variable into an array parameter vector. The starting array element number must be defined. For example,
VGET,A(1),2 moves variable 2 (starting at time 0.0) to array parameter A. Looping continues from array element
A(1) with the index number incremented by one until the variable is filled. The number of loops may be controlled
with the *VLEN command (except that loop skipping (NINC) is not allowed). For multi-dimensioned array parameters, only the first (row) subscript is incremented.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Table Operations>Variable to Par
VGLUE, NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Generates new volumes by "gluing" volumes.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Numbers of the volumes to be glued. If NV1 = ALL, all selected volumes will be glued (NV2 to NV9 will be ignored). If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NV1.
Notes
Use of the VGLUE command generates new volumes by gluing input volumes. The glue operation redefines
the input volumes so that they share areas along their common boundaries. The new volumes encompass the
same geometry as the original volumes. This operation is only valid if the intersections of the input volumes are
areas along the boundaries of those volumes. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See
the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and
solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities
generated.
The VGLUE command results in the merging of areas, lines, and keypoints at the common volume boundaries.
The areas, lines, and keypoints of the lower numbered volume will be kept. This means one must be aware of
volume numbering when multiple VGLUE commands are applied to avoid any ungluing of geometry.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Glue>Volumes
/VIEW, WN, XV, YV, ZV
Defines the viewing direction for the display.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
31456
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VIMP
XV, YV, ZV
The object is viewed along the line from point XV,YV,ZV (in the global coordinate system) to the global coordinate system origin. For section displays, the cutting plane is assumed to be perpendicular to this line. If
XV = WP, modify view to be normal to the currently defined working plane. Defaults to (0,0,1).
Command Default
0,0,1 view. The default reference orientation is X-axis horizontal to the right, Y-axis vertical upward, and Z-axis
out from the screen (normal). See /VUP command to change reference orientation.
Notes
The view line is always normal to the screen. The view is selected by defining a point (in the global Cartesian
coordinate system) representing a point along the viewing line. This point, and the global Cartesian coordinate
system origin, define the line along which the object is viewed while looking toward the origin. Any point along
the view line may be used, i.e., (1,1,1) and (2,2,2) give the same view. The display orientation may be changed
as desired [/ANGLE]. The display coordinate system type may be changed (from Cartesian to cylindrical, spherical, toroidal, etc.) with the DSYS command.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Pan, Zoom, Rotate
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Viewing Direction
VIMP, VOL, CHGBND, IMPLEVEL
Improves the quality of the tetrahedral elements in the selected volume(s).
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
VOL
Number of the volume containing the tetrahedral elements to be improved. If VOL = ALL (default), improve
the tetrahedral elements in all selected volumes. If VOL = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for VOL.
CHGBND
Specifies whether to allow boundary modification. Boundary modification includes such things as changes
in the connectivity of the element faces on the boundary and the addition of boundary nodes. (Also see
Notes below for important usage information for CHGBND.)
0
Do not allow boundary modification.
1
Allow boundary modification (default).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31457
VINP
IMPLEVEL
Identifies the level of improvement to be performed on the elements. (Improvement occurs primarily through
the use of face swapping and node smoothing techniques.)
0
Perform the least amount of swapping/smoothing.
1
Perform an intermediate amount of swapping/smoothing.
2
Perform the greatest amount of swapping/smoothing.
3
Perform the greatest amount of swapping/smoothing, plus additional improvement techniques (default).
Notes
VIMP is useful for further improving a volume mesh created in ANSYS [VMESH], especially quadratic tetrahedral
element meshes.
The VIMP command enables you to improve a given tetrahedral mesh by reducing the number of poorly-shaped
tetrahedral elements (in particular, the number of sliver tetrahedral elements)--as well as the overall number of
elements--in the mesh. It also improves the overall quality of the mesh.
Regardless of the value of the CHGBND argument, boundary mid-nodes can be moved as long as you are not using
p-method analysis. When CHGBND = 0 and you are using p-method analysis, boundary mid-nodes cannot be
moved. (ANSYS issues an error message if it would be necessary to move boundary mid-nodes in order to generate valid quadratic elements.)
When loads or constraints have been placed on boundary nodes or mid-nodes, and boundary mid-nodes are
later moved, ANSYS issues a warning message to let you know that it will not update the loads or constraints.
Even when CHGBND = 1, no boundary modification is performed on areas and lines that are not modifiable (for
example, areas that are adjacent to other volumes or that contain shell elements, or lines that are not incident
on modifiable areas, contain beam elements, or have line divisions specified for them [LESIZE]).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Modify Mesh>Improve Tets>Volumes
VINP, NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Finds the pairwise intersection of volumes.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Numbers of volumes to be intersected pairwise. If NV1 = ALL, NV2 to NV9 are ignored and the pairwise intersection of all selected volumes is found. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NV1.
31458
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VLIST
Notes
Finds the pairwise intersection of volumes. The pairwise intersection is defined as all regions shared by any two
or more volumes listed on this command. New volumes will be generated where the original volumes intersect
pairwise. If the regions of pairwise intersection are only areas, new areas will be generated. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available
to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities
will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Pairwise>Volumes
VINV, NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Finds the intersection of volumes.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Numbers of volumes to be intersected. If NV1 = ALL, NV2 to NV9 are ignored, and the intersection of all selected
volumes is found. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored
(valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NV1.
Notes
Finds the common (not pairwise) intersection of volumes. The common intersection is defined as the regions
shared (in common) by all volumes listed on this command. New volumes will be generated where the original
volumes intersect. If the regions of intersection are only areas, new areas will be generated instead. See the ANSYS
Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options
available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original
entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Intersect>Common>Volumes
VLIST, NV1, NV2, NINC
Lists the defined volumes.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NINC
List volumes from NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NV1 = ALL (default), NV2 and
NINC are ignored and all selected volumes [VSEL] are listed. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all
remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted
for NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31459
VLSCALE
Notes
An attribute (TYPE, MAT, REAL, or ESYS) listed as a zero is unassigned; one listed as a positive value indicates that
the attribute was assigned with the VATT command (and will not be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared); one
listed as a negative value indicates that the attribute was assigned using the attribute pointer [TYPE, MAT, REAL,
or ESYS] that was active during meshing (and will be reset to zero if the mesh is cleared). A "-1" in the "nodes"
column indicates that the volume has been meshed but there are no interior nodes. The volume size is listed
only if a VSUM command has been performed on the volume. Volume orientation attributes (KZ1 and KZ2) are
listed only if a VEORIENT command was previously used to define an orientation for the volume.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Volumes
VLSCALE, NV1, NV2, NINC, RX, RY, RZ, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates a scaled set of volumes from a pattern of volumes.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NINC
Set of volumes (NV1 to NV2 in steps of NINC) that defines the pattern to be scaled. NV2 defaults to NV1, NINC
defaults to 1. If NV1 = ALL, NV2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is defined by all selected volumes. If
NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
A component name may also be substituted for NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
RX, RY, RZ
Scale factors to be applied to the X, Y, and Z keypoint coordinates in active coordinate system (RR, R, RZ for
cylindrical; RR, R, R for spherical). Note that the R and R scale factors are interpreted as angular offsets.
For example, if CSYS = 1, RX, RY, RZ input of (1.5,10,3) would scale the specified keypoints 1.5 times in the
radial and 3 times in the Z direction, while adding an offset of 10 degrees to the keypoints. Zero, blank, or
negative scale factor values are assumed to be 1.0. Zero or blank angular offsets have no effect.
KINC
Increment to be applied to keypoint numbers for generated set. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers
will be assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Nodes and elements associated with the original volumes will be generated (scaled) if they exist.
1
Nodes and elements will not be generated.
IMOVE
Specifies whether volumes will be moved or newly defined:
0
Additional volumes will be generated.
31460
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VMESH
1
Original volumes will be moved to new position (KINC and NOELEM are ignored). Use only if the old
volumes are no longer needed at their original positions. Corresponding meshed items are also moved
if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates a scaled set of volumes (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, areas, and mesh) from a pattern of
volumes. The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes are based on the volumes in the pattern and not the current
settings. Scaling is done in the active coordinate system. Volumes in the pattern could have been generated in
any coordinate system. However, solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Scale>Volumes
VMESH, NV1, NV2, NINC
Generates nodes and volume elements within volumes.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NINC
Mesh volumes from NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NV1 = ALL, NV2 and NINC
are ignored and all selected volumes [VSEL] are meshed. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for
NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
Notes
Missing nodes required for the generated elements are created and assigned the lowest available numbers
[NUMSTR]. During a batch run and if elements already exist, a mesh abort will write an alternative database file
(File.DBE) for possible recovery.
Tetrahedral mesh expansion [MOPT,TETEXPND,Value] is supported for both the VMESH and FVMESH commands.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volumes>Free
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volumes>Mapped>4 to 6 sided
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31461
VOFFST
VOFFST, NAREA, DIST, KINC
Generates a volume, offset from a given area.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NAREA
Area from which generated volume is to be offset. If NAREA = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
DIST
Distance normal to given area at which keypoints for generated volume are to be located. Positive normal
is determined from the right-hand rule keypoint order.
KINC
Increment to be applied to the keypoint numbers between sets. If zero, keypoint numbers will be automatically assigned beginning with the lowest available value [NUMSTR].
Notes
Generates a volume (and its corresponding keypoints, lines, and areas) by offsetting from an area. The direction
of the offset varies with the given area normal. End slopes of the generated lines remain the same as those of
the given pattern.
If element attributes have been associated with the input area via the AATT command, the opposite area generated by the VOFFST operation will also have those attributes (i.e., the element attributes from the input area
are copied to the opposite area). Note that only the area opposite the input area will have the same attributes
as the input area; the areas adjacent to the input area will not.
If the areas are meshed or belong to meshed volumes, a 3-D mesh can be extruded with this command. Note
that the NDIV argument on the ESIZE command should be set before extruding the meshed areas.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Areas>Along Normal
VOLUMES
Specifies "Volumes" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7: Status
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Notes
This is a status [STAT] topic command. Status topic commands are generated by the GUI and appear in the log
file (Jobname.LOG) if status is requested for some items by choosing Utility Menu> List> Status. This command
will be immediately followed by a STAT command, which will report the status for the specified topic.
If entered directly into the program, the STAT command should immediately follow this command.
31462
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VPLOT
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
VOVLAP, NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Overlaps volumes.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Numbers of volumes to be operated on. If NV1 = ALL, NV2 to NV9 are ignored and all selected volumes are
used. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NV1.
Notes
Overlaps volumes. Generates new volumes which encompass the geometry of all the input volumes. The new
volumes are defined by the regions of intersection of the input volumes, and by the complementary (non-intersecting) regions. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. This operation is only valid when
the region of intersection is a volume. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to
Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities
will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Overlap>Volumes
VPLOT, NV1, NV2, NINC, DEGEN, SCALE
Displays the selected volumes.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NINC
Display volumes from NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1). If NV1 = ALL (default), NV2
and NINC are ignored and all selected volumes [VSEL] are displayed.
DEGEN
Degeneracy marker:
(blank)
No degeneracy marker is used (default).
DEGE
A red star is placed on keypoints at degeneracies (see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide). Not
available if /FACET,WIRE is set.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31463
VPTN
SCALE
Scale factor for the size of the degeneracy-marker star. The scale is the size in window space (-1 to 1 in both
directions) (defaults to .075).
Notes
Displays selected volumes. (Only volumes having areas within the selected area set [ASEL] will be plotted.) With
PowerGraphics on [/GRAPHICS,POWER], VPLOT will display only the currently selected areas. This command is
also a utility command, valid anywhere. The degree of tessellation used to plot the volumes is set through the
/FACET command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Check Geom>Show Degeneracy>Plot Degen Volus
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Show Degeneracy>Plot Degen Volus
Utility Menu>Plot>Specified Entities>Volumes
Utility Menu>Plot>Volumes
VPTN, NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Partitions volumes.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1, NV2, NV3, NV4, NV5, NV6, NV7, NV8, NV9
Numbers of volumes to be operated on. If NV1 = ALL, NV2 to NV9 are ignored and all selected volumes are
used. If NV1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). A component name may also be substituted for NV1.
Notes
Partitions volumes. Generates new volumes which encompass the geometry of all the input volumes. The new
volumes are defined by the regions of intersection of the input volumes, and by the complementary (non-intersecting) regions. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an
explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Partition>Volumes
VPUT, Par, IR, TSTRT, KCPLX
Moves an array parameter vector into a variable.
POST26: Special Purpose
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Par
Array parameter vector in the operation.
31464
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VROTAT
IR
Arbitrary reference number assigned to this variable (1 to NV [NUMVAR]). Overwrites any existing results
for this variable.
TSTRT
Time (or frequency) corresponding to start of IR data. If between values, the nearer value is used.
KCPLX
Complex number key:
0
Use the real part of the IR data.
1
Use the imaginary part of the IR data.
Notes
At least one variable should be defined (NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, etc.) before using this command. The starting
array element number must be defined. For example, VPUT,A(1),2 moves array parameter A to variable 2 starting
at time 0.0. Looping continues from array element A(1) with the index number incremented by one until the
variable is filled. Unfilled variable locations are assigned a zero value. The number of loops may be controlled
with the *VLEN command (except that loop skipping (NINC) is not allowed). For multi-dimensioned array parameters, only the first (row) subscript is incremented.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Table Operations>Parameter to Var
VROTAT, NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6, PAX1, PAX2, ARC, NSEG
Generates cylindrical volumes by rotating an area pattern about an axis.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NA1, NA2, NA3, NA4, NA5, NA6
List of areas in the pattern to be rotated (6 maximum if using keyboard entry). Areas must lie to one side of,
and in the plane of, the axis of rotation. If NA1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command
fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). If NA1 = ALL, all selected areas will define the pattern to be rotated.
A component name may also be substituted for NA1.
PAX1, PAX2
Keypoints defining the axis about which the area pattern is to be rotated.
ARC
Arc length (in degrees). Positive follows right-hand rule about PAX1-PAX2 vector. Defaults to 360.
NSEG
Number of volumes (8 maximum) around circumference. Defaults to minimum required for 90 (maximum)
arcs, i.e., 4 for 360, 3 for 270, etc.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31465
VSBA
Notes
Generates cylindrical volumes (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, and areas) by rotating an area pattern
(and its associated line and keypoint patterns) about an axis. Keypoint patterns are generated at regular angular
locations (based on a maximum spacing of 90). Line patterns are generated at the keypoint patterns. Arc lines
are also generated to connect the keypoints circumferentially. Keypoint, line, area, and volume numbers are
automatically assigned (beginning with the lowest available values). Adjacent lines use a common keypoint,
adjacent areas use a common line, and adjacent volumes use a common area.
To generate a single volume with an arc greater than 180, NSEG must be greater than or equal to 2.
If element attributes have been associated with the input area via the AATT command, the opposite area generated by the VROTAT operation will also have those attributes (i.e., the element attributes from the input area
are copied to the opposite area). Note that only the area opposite the input area will have the same attributes
as the input area; the areas adjacent to the input area will not.
If the given areas are meshed or belong to meshed volumes, the 2-D mesh can be rotated (extruded) to a 3-D
mesh. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information. Note that the NDIV argument on the
ESIZE command should be set before extruding the meshed areas.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Extrude>Areas>About Axis
VSBA, NV, NA, SEPO, KEEPV, KEEPA
Subtracts areas from volumes.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV
Volume (or volumes, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected volumes. If P, graphical
picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI) and remaining fields are ignored. A component name may also be
substituted for NV.
NA
Area (or areas, if picking is used) to subtract. If ALL, use all selected areas. A component name may also be
substituted for NA.
SEPO
Behavior of the touching boundary:
(blank)
The resulting volumes will share area(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting volumes will have separate, but coincident area(s) where they touch.
KEEPV
Specifies whether NV volumes are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
31466
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VSBV
DELETE
Delete NV volumes after VSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NV volumes after VSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEPA
Specifies whether NA areas are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NA areas after VSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NA areas after VSBA operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new volumes by subtracting the regions common to both the volumes and areas (the intersection)
from the NV volumes. The intersection will be an area(s). If SEPO is blank, the volume is divided at the area and
the resulting volumes will be connected, sharing a common area where they touch. If SEPO is set to SEPO, the
volume is divided into two unconnected volumes with separate areas where they touch. See the ANSYS Modeling
and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an explanation of the options available to
Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities
will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Volume by Area
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Volume by Area
VSBV, NV1, NV2, SEPO, KEEP1, KEEP2
Subtracts volumes from volumes.
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV1
Volume (or volumes, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If ALL, use all selected volumes. Volumes specified in set NV2 are removed from set NV1. If P, graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI) and remaining fields are ignored. A component name may also be substituted for NV1.
NV2
Volume (or volumes, if picking is used) to subtract. If ALL, use all selected volumes (except those included
in the NV1 argument). A component name may also be substituted for NV2.
SEPO
Behavior if the intersection of the NV1 volumes and the NV2 volumes is an area or areas:
(blank)
The resulting volumes will share area(s) where they touch.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31467
VSBW
SEPO
The resulting volumes will have separate, but coincident area(s) where they touch.
KEEP1
Specifies whether NV1 volumes are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NV1 volumes after VSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NV1 volumes after VSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP2
Specifies whether NV2 volumes are to be deleted:
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NV2 volumes after VSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NV2 volumes after VSBV operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new volumes by subtracting the regions common to both NV1 and NV2 volumes (the intersection)
from the NV1 volumes. The intersection can be an volume(s) or area(s). If the intersection is an area and SEPO is
blank, the NV1 volume is divided at the area and the resulting volumes will be connected, sharing a common
area where they touch. If SEPO is set to SEPO, NV1 is divided into two unconnected volumes with separate areas
where they touch. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for
an explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary
conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated. VSBV,ALL,ALL
will have no effect because all the volumes in set NV1will have been moved to set NV2.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Subtract>Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Subtract>With Options>Volumes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Subract>Volumes
VSBW, NV, SEPO, KEEP
Subtracts intersection of the working plane from volumes (divides volumes).
PREP7: Booleans
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
NV
Volume (or volumes, if picking is used) to be subtracted from. If NV = ALL, use all selected volumes. If NV = P,
graphical picking is enabled (valid only in the GUI). A component name may also be input for NV.
31468
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/VSCALE
SEPO
Behavior of the created boundary.
(blank)
The resulting volumes will share area(s) where they touch.
SEPO
The resulting volumes will have separate, but coincident area(s).
KEEP
Specifies whether NV volumes are to be deleted.
(blank)
Use the setting of KEEP on the BOPTN command.
DELETE
Delete NV volumes after VSBW operation (override BOPTN command settings).
KEEP
Keep NV volumes after VSBW operation (override BOPTN command settings).
Notes
Generates new volumes by subtracting the intersection of the working plane from the NV volumes. The intersection
will be an area(s). If SEPO is blank, the volume is divided at the area and the resulting volumes will be connected,
sharing a common area where they touch. If SEPO is set to SEPO, the volume is divided into two unconnected
volumes with separate areas. The SEPO option may cause unintended consequences if any keypoints exist along
the cut plane. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for an illustration. See the BOPTN command for an
explanation of the options available to Boolean operations. Element attributes and solid model boundary conditions assigned to the original entities will not be transferred to the new entities generated.
Issuing the VSBW command under certain conditions may generate a topological degeneracy error. Do not issue
the command if:
A sphere or cylinder has been scaled. (A cylinder must be scaled unevenly in the XY plane.)
A sphere or cylinder has not been scaled but the work plane has been rotated.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>Volu by WrkPlane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Booleans>Divide>With Options>Volu by WrkPlane
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Divide>Volu by WrkPlane
/VSCALE, WN, VRATIO, KEY
Scales the length of displayed vectors.
GRAPHICS: Scaling
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31469
VSEL
VRATIO
Ratio value applied to the automatically calculated scale factor (defaults to 1.0, i.e., use scale factor as automatically calculated).
KEY
Relative scaling key:
0
Use relative length scaling among vectors based on magnitudes.
1
Use uniform length scaling for all vector lengths.
Command Default
Automatic vector scaling.
Notes
Allows scaling of the vector length displayed with the PLVECT command of POST1 and the /PBC and /PSF
commands. Also allows the scaling of the element (i.e., /PSYMB,ESYS) and the nodal (i.e., /PSYMB,NDIR) coordinate
system symbols.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Plot Results>Vector Plot>Predefined
Utility Menu>Plot>Results>Vector Plot
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Multi-Plot Contrls
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Vector Arrow Scaling
VSEL, Type, Item, Comp, VMIN, VMAX, VINC, KSWP
Selects a subset of volumes.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of volume select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
31470
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VSEL
ALL
Restore the full set.
NONE
Unselect the full set.
INVE
Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT
Display the current select status.
The following fields are used only with Type = S, R, A, or U:
Item
Label identifying data. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a component
label. If Item = P, graphical picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in
the GUI). Defaults to VOLU.
Comp
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
VMIN
Minimum value of item range. Ranges are volume numbers, coordinate values, attribute numbers, etc., as
appropriate for the item. A component name (as specified on the CM command) may also be substituted
for VMIN (VMAX and VINC are ignored). If Item = MAT, TYPE, REAL, or ESYS and if VMIN is positive, the absolute
value of Item is compared against the range for selection; if VMIN is negative, the signed value of Item is
compared. See the VLIST command for a discussion of signed attributes.
VMAX
Maximum value of item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN. If VMAX = VMIN , a tolerance of 0.005x VMIN is used,
or 1.0E-6 if VMIN = 0.0. If VMAX VMIN, a tolerance of 1.0E-8x (VMAX-VMIN) is used.
VINC
Value increment within range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for volume numbers). Defaults to 1.
VINC cannot be negative.
KSWP
Specifies whether only volumes are to be selected:
0
Select volumes only.
1
Select volumes, as well as keypoints, lines, areas, nodes, and elements associated with selected volumes.
Valid only with Type = S.
Command Default
All volumes are selected.
Notes
Selects volumes based on values of a labeled item and component. For example, to select a new set of volumes
based on volume numbers 1 through 7, use VSEL,S,VOLU,,1,7. The subset is used when the ALL label is entered
(or implied) on other commands, such as VLIST,ALL. Only data identified by volume number are selected. Data
are flagged as selected and unselected; no data are actually deleted from the database.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31471
VSLA
This command is valid in any processor.
VSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels
VSELType, Item, Comp, VMIN, VMAX, VINC, KABS
Item
Comp
VOLU
Description
Volume number.
LOC
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z center (picking "hot spot" location in the active coordinate system).
MAT
Material number associated with the volume.
TYPE
Element type number associated with the volume.
REAL
Real constant set number associated with the volume.
ESYS
Element coordinate system associated with the volume.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
VSLA, Type, VLKEY
Selects those volumes containing the selected areas.
DATABASE: Selecting
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Type
Label identifying the type of volume select:
S
Select a new set (default).
R
Reselect a set from the current set.
A
Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U
Unselect a set from the current set.
VLKEY
Specifies whether all contained volume areas must be selected [ASEL]:
0
Select volume if any of its areas are in the selected area set.
1
Select volume only if all of its areas are in the selected area set.
Notes
This command is valid in any processor.
31472
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VSWEEP
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
VSUM, LAB
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected volumes.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LAB
Controls the degree of tessellation used in the calculation of area properties. If LAB = DEFAULT, area calculations will use the degree of tessellation set through the /FACET command. If LAB = FINE, area calculations
are based on a finer tessellation.
Notes
Calculates and prints geometry statistics (volume, centroid location, moments of inertia, etc.) associated with
the selected volumes. Geometry items are reported in the global Cartesian coordinate system. A unit density is
assumed unless the volumes have a material association via the VATT command. Items calculated by VSUM
and later retrieved by a *GET or *VGET command are valid only if the model is not modified after the VSUM
command is issued.
Setting a finer degree of tessellation will provide area calculations with greater accuracy, especially for thin,
hollow models. However, using a finer degree of tessellation requires longer processing.
For very thin volumes, such that the ratio of the minimum to the maximum dimension is less than 0.01, the VSUM
command can provide erroneous volume information. To ensure that such calculations are accurate, make certain
that you subdivide such volumes so that the ratio of the minimum to the maximum is at least 0.05.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Operate>Calc Geom Items>Of Volumes
VSWEEP, VNUM, SRCA, TRGA, LSMO
Fills an existing unmeshed volume with elements by sweeping the mesh from an adjacent area through
the volume.
PREP7: Meshing
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
VNUM
Number identifying the volume that is to be meshed by VSWEEP. If VNUM = P, graphical picking is enabled,
you will be prompted to choose the volume or volumes based on the setting of EXTOPT,VSWE,AUTO. This
argument is required.
ALL is a valid input value that when selected sends all the selected volumes to the sweeper. If VNUM = ALL,
each volume that can be swept will be and those not able to be swept will be unmeshed or meshed with
tets depending upon the setting of EXTOPT,VSWE,TETS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31473
VSWEEP
A component name is a valid input value. All volumes that are part of the specified component will be sent
to the sweeper.
SRCA
Number identifying the source area. This is the area whose mesh will provide the pattern for the volume
elements. (If you do not mesh the source area prior to volume sweeping, ANSYS meshes it internally when
you initiate volume sweeping.) ANSYS sweeps the pattern of the area elements through the volume to create
the mesh of volume elements. You cannot substitute a component name for SRCA.
This argument is optional. If VNUM = ALL or is a component containing more than one volume, SRCA is ignored.
If SRCA is not provided or if it is ignored, VSWEEP attempts to automatically determine which area should
be the target area.
TRGA
Number identifying the target area. This is the area that is opposite the source area specified by SRCA. You
cannot substitute a component name for TRGA.
This argument is optional. If VNUM = ALL or component containing more than one volume, TRGA is ignored.
If TRGA is not provided or if it is ignored, VSWEEP attempts to automatically determine which area should
be the target area.
LSMO
Value specifying whether ANSYS should perform line smoothing during volume sweeping. (The value of this
argument controls line smoothing for the VSWEEP command only; it has no effect on the setting of the
MOPT command's LSMO option.) This argument is optional.
0
Do not perform line smoothing. This is the default.
1
Always perform line smoothing. This setting is not recommended for large models due to speed considerations.
Notes
If the source mesh consists of quadrilateral elements, ANSYS fills the volume with hexahedral elements. If the
source mesh consists of triangles, ANSYS fills the volume with wedges. If the source mesh consists of a combination of quadrilaterals and triangles, ANSYS fills the volume with a combination of hexahedral and wedge elements.
In the past, you may have used the VROTAT, VEXT, VOFFST, and/or VDRAG commands to extrude a meshed
area into a meshed volume. However, those commands create the volume and the volume mesh simultaneously.
In contrast, the VSWEEP command is intended for use in an existing unmeshed volume. This makes VSWEEP
particularly useful when you have imported a solid model that was created in another program, and you want
to mesh it in ANSYS.
For related information, see the description of the EXTOPT command (although EXTOPT sets volume sweeping
options, it does not affect element spacing). Also see the detailed discussion of volume sweeping in Meshing
Your Solid Model of the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Meshing>Mesh>Volume Sweep>Sweep
31474
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
VSYMM
VSYMM, Ncomp, NV1, NV2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Generates volumes from a volume pattern by symmetry reflection.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
Ncomp
Symmetry key:
X
X symmetry (default).
Y
Y symmetry.
Z
Z symmetry.
NV1, NV2, NINC
Reflect volumes from pattern beginning with NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
If NV1 = ALL, NV2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected volumes [VSEL]. If NV1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether nodes and elements are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original volumes, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether volumes will be moved or newly defined:
0
Generate additional volumes.
1
Move original volumes to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELEM are ignored). Corresponding meshed items are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Generates a reflected set of volumes (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, areas and mesh) from a given
volume pattern by a symmetry reflection (see analogous node symmetry command, NSYM). The MAT, TYPE,
REAL, and ESYS attributes are based upon the volumes in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Reflection
is done in the active coordinate system by changing a particular coordinate sign. The active coordinate system
must be a Cartesian system. Volumes in the pattern may have been generated in any coordinate system. However,
solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Volumes are generated as described in the
VGEN command.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31475
VTRAN
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Reflect>Volumes
VTRAN, KCNTO, NV1, NV2, NINC, KINC, NOELEM, IMOVE
Transfers a pattern of volumes to another coordinate system.
PREP7: Volumes
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM EH FL PP ED
KCNTO
Reference number of coordinate system where the pattern is to be transferred. Transfer occurs from the
active coordinate system. The coordinate system type and parameters of KCNTO must be the same as the
active system.
NV1, NV2, NINC
Transfer volumes from pattern beginning with NV1 to NV2 (defaults to NV1) in steps of NINC (defaults to 1).
If NV1 = ALL, NV2 and NINC are ignored and the pattern is all selected volumes [VSEL]. If NV1 = P, graphical
picking is enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). A component name
may also be substituted for NV1 (NV2 and NINC are ignored).
KINC
Keypoint increment between sets. If zero, the lowest available keypoint numbers are assigned [NUMSTR].
NOELEM
Specifies whether elements and nodes are also to be generated:
0
Generate nodes and elements associated with the original volumes, if they exist.
1
Do not generate nodes and elements.
IMOVE
Specifies whether to redefine the existing volumes:
0
Generate additional volumes.
1
Move original volumes to new position retaining the same keypoint numbers (KINC and NOELEM are ignored). Corresponding meshed items are also moved if not needed at their original position.
Notes
Transfers a pattern of volumes (and their corresponding keypoints, lines, areas and mesh) from one coordinate
system to another (see analogous node transfer command, TRANSFER). The MAT, TYPE, REAL, and ESYS attributes
are based upon the volumes in the pattern and not upon the current settings. Coordinate systems may be
translated and rotated relative to each other. Initial pattern may be generated in any coordinate system. However,
solid modeling in a toroidal coordinate system is not recommended. Coordinate and slope values are interpreted
in the active coordinate system and are transferred directly. Volumes are generated as described in the VGEN
command.
31476
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/VUP
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Transfer Coord>Volumes
VTYPE, NOHID, NZONE
Specifies the viewing procedure used to determine the form factors for the Radiation Matrix method.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
NOHID
Type of viewing procedure:
0
Hidden procedure.
1
Non-hidden (faster, but less general) procedure.
NZONE
Number of sampling zones for the hidden procedure (100 maximum for 3-D, 1000 maximum for 2-D). Defaults
to 20 for 3-D, 200 for 2-D. Number of points is 2*NZONE for 2-D and 2*NZONE*(NZONE+1) for 3-D.
Command Default
Hidden procedure using 20 zones for 3-D, 200 zones for 2-D.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Matrix Method>Write Matrix
/VUP, WN, Label
Specifies the global Cartesian coordinate system reference orientation.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number (or ALL) to which command applies (defaults to 1).
Label
Orientation:
Y
Y vertical upward, X horizontal to the right, Z out from the screen (default).
Y
Y vertical downward, X horizontal to the left, Z out from the screen.
X
X vertical upward, Y horizontal to the left, Z out from the screen.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31477
/VUP
X
X vertical downward, Y horizontal to the right, Z out from the screen.
Z
Z vertical upward, Y horizontal to the right, X out from the screen. With this choice, you should use a
view other than the /VIEW default of (0,0,1).
Z
Z vertical downward, Y horizontal to the left, X out from the screen. With this choice, you should use a
view other than the /VIEW default of (0,0,1).
Command Default
Y vertical upward, X horizontal to the right, Z out from the screen.
Notes
Specifies the global Cartesian coordinate system reference orientation. The /VIEW and /ANGLE commands may
be used to reorient the view and are relative to this reference orientation. All coordinate systems are right-handed.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>View Settings>Viewing Direction
31478
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
W Commands
WAVES, Wopt, OLDMAX, OLDRMS
Initiates reordering.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Wopt
Option for comparison:
MAX
Use maximum wavefront value for comparison (default).
RMS
Use RMS wavefront value for comparison.
OLDMAX, OLDRMS
Maximum and RMS wavefront values of model to be used in place of the old values. OLDRMS defaults to
OLDMAX (and vice versa). If neither is specified, each defaults to its calculated old value.
Notes
Initiates the element reordering based upon the previously defined starting wave lists (if any). Reordering affects
only the element order for the solution phase and not the element numbers (input referring to element numbers,
such as element pressures, is unaffected by reordering).
Note The new order is retained only if new the new maximum or RMS wavefront values are lower than
the old values, as described below. See the WSORT command for another reordering procedure. The
resulting element ordering can be shown by listing the wavefront history [WFRONT,1] or by displaying
elements with their element location numbers [ /PNUM].
The WAVES reordering procedure is based upon a list of nodes defining where the element reordering is to start
(either input on the WSTART command, or automatically determined if not input). If a list is input, additional
starting wave lists may be defined to allow the user to block or guide the wave. An input starting list usually
consists of one node for a line element model, a line of nodes for an area element model, or a plane of nodes for
a volume element model. Elements are ordered from the first starting wave list in a direction that attempts to
minimize the wavefront. Nodes are deleted and added to the total wave list set as reordering progresses through
the model. Elements attached to nodes on succeeding starting lists, if any, are ignored at this time, thereby
temporarily blocking that path. Whenever no more elements can be reordered, the procedure is repeated
starting from the nodes defined on the second starting list (if any). The same node number should not appear
on more than one list. If no starting list is input, a starting node is automatically selected from an element
weighting procedure (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference).
Reordering may be made from the previously reordered model or from the initial model (by issuing the SAVE
command before reordering and then restoring that model back to PREP7 with the RESUME command after
reordering). The WFRONT command is useful for calculating and printing the current wavefront statistics at any
time without causing any reordering of the elements. If a model is to be used for both a thermal and a structural
analysis, the reordered statistics should be based upon the structural model (because of the higher number of
degrees of freedom per node).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
WERASE
The reordering procedure treats separate portions of the model (i.e., not connected by elements) as discontinuous.
Reordering automatically continues across a discontinuity as best as possible.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>Reorder by List
WERASE
Erases all reordering wave lists.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Notes
The REORDER then STAT commands will display the current wave lists.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>Erase Wave List
WFRONT, KPRNT, KCALC
Estimates wavefront statistics.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
KPRNT
Wavefront history print key:
0
Print current wavefront statistics.
1
Print current wavefront statistics but also print wavefront history (wavefront at each element). Elements
are listed in the reordered sequence.
KCALC
Calculation options:
0
Wavefront estimate assumes maximum model DOF set at each node and does not include the effects
of master degrees of freedom and specified displacement constraints.
31480
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/WINDOW
1
Wavefront estimate uses the actual DOF set at each node and does not include the effects of master
degrees of freedom and specified displacement constraints. More time consuming than estimated
wavefront. KPRNT = 1 is not available with this option.
Notes
Estimates wavefront statistics of the model as currently ordered.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>Est. Wavefront
/WINDOW, WN, XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, NCOPY
Defines the window size on the screen.
GRAPHICS: Set Up
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window reference number (1 to 5). Defaults to 1. This number, or ALL (for all active windows), may be used
on other commands.
XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX
Screen coordinates defining window size. Screen coordinates are measured as -1.0 to 1.67 with the origin at
the screen center. For example, (-1,1.67,-1,1) is full screen, (-1,0,-1,0) is the left bottom quadrant. If XMIN =
OFF, deactivate this previously defined window; if ON, reactivate this previously defined window. If FULL,
LEFT, RIGH, TOP, BOT, LTOP, LBOT, RTOP, RBOT, form full, half, or quarter window. If SQUA, form largest square
window within the current graphics area. If DELE, delete this window (cannot be reactivated with ON).
NCOPY
Copies the current specifications from window NCOPY (1 to 5) to this window. If NCOPY = 0 (or blank), no
specifications are copied.
Command Default
One window at full screen.
Notes
Defines the window size on the screen. Windows may occupy a separate section of the screen or they may
overlap. Requested displays are formed in all windows according to the selected window specifications.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Copy Window Specs
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Delete Window
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31481
WMID
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Window Layout
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Window Controls>Window On or Off
WMID, Key
Specifies reordering options for the WAVES command.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Key
Determines whether midside nodes are considered when reordering.
NO
Do not consider midside nodes when reordering (default).
YES
Consider midside nodes when reordering. This option is useful for models where line elements are only
attached to midside nodes of solid elements.
Notes
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.
WMORE, NODE1, NODE2, NINC, ITIME, INC
Adds more nodes to the starting wave list.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Add another node set to the previous starting wave list. Set is NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps
of NINC (defaults to 1). If NODE1 is negative, delete (instead of add) this node set from previous starting wave
list.
ITIME, INC
Add other node sets to the same starting wave list by repeating the previous node set with NODE1 and NODE2
incremented by INC (defaults to 1) each time after the first. ITIME is the total number of sets (defaults to 1)
defined with this command.
Notes
Adds more nodes to (or modifies) the previous starting wave list (if any) [WSTART]. Repeat WMORE command
to add more nodes to the previous starting wave list. Up to 10,000 nodes may be defined (total, for all starting
waves).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
31482
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
WPCSYS
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>Extend Wave List
WPAVE, X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, X3, Y3, Z3
Moves the working plane origin to the average of specified points.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
X1, Y1, Z1
Coordinates (in the active coordinate system) of the first point. If X1 = P, graphical picking is enabled and all
remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
X2, Y2, Z2
Coordinates (in the active coordinate system) of the second point.
X3, Y3, Z3
Coordinates (in the active coordinate system) of the third point.
Notes
Moves the origin of the working plane to the average of the specified points. A point is considered specified only
if at least one of its coordinates is non-blank, and at least one point (1, 2, or 3) must be specified. Blank coordinates
of a specified point are assumed to be zero. Averaging is based on the active coordinate system.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP to>Global Origin
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP to>Origin of Active CS
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP to>XYZ Locations
WPCSYS, WN, KCN
Defines the working plane location based on a coordinate system.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number whose viewing direction will be modified to be normal to the working plane (defaults to
1). If WN is a negative value, the viewing direction will not be modified.
KCN
Coordinate system number. KCN may be 0,1,2 or any previously defined local coordinate system number
(defaults to the active system).
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31483
WPLANE
Notes
Defines a working plane location and orientation based on an existing coordinate system. If a Cartesian system
is used as the basis (KCN) for the working plane, the working plane will also be Cartesian, in the X-Y plane of the
base system. If a cylindrical, spherical, or toroidal base system is used, the working plane will be a polar system
in the R- plane of the base system.
If working plane tracking has been activated (CSYS,WP or CSYS,4), the updated active coordinate system will
be of a similar type, except that a toroidal system will be updated to a cylindrical system. See the ANSYS Modeling
and Meshing Guide for more information on working plane tracking.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Surface Operations>Create Surface>Sphere>At Node
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Align WP with>Active Coord Sys
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Align WP with>Global Cartesian
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Align WP with>Specified Coord Sys
WPLANE, WN, XORIG, YORIG, ZORIG, XXAX, YXAX, ZXAX, XPLAN, YPLAN, ZPLAN
Defines a working plane to assist in picking operations.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number whose viewing direction will be modified to be normal to the working plane (defaults to
1). If WN is a negative value, the viewing direction will not be modified. If fewer than three points are used,
the viewing direction of window WN will be used instead to define the normal to the working plane.
XORIG, YORIG, ZORIG
Global Cartesian coordinates of the origin of the working plane coordinate system.
XXAX, YXAX, ZXAX
Global Cartesian coordinates of a point defining the x-axis orientation. The x-axis aligns with the projection
of the line from this orientation point to the origin.
XPLAN, YPLAN, ZPLAN
Global Cartesian coordinates of the third point defining the working plane. This point will also define the
location of the positive XY-sector of the working plane coordinate system.
Command Default
Working plane parallel to the global X-Y plane at Z = 0.0.
Notes
Defines a working plane to assist in picking operations using the coordinates of three noncolinear points. The
three points also define the working plane coordinate system. A minimum of one point (the working plane origin)
is required. Immediate mode may also be active. See WPSTYL command to set the style of working plane display.
31484
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
WPROTA
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Align WP with>XYZ Locations
WPOFFS, XOFF, YOFF, ZOFF
Offsets the working plane.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
XOFF, YOFF, ZOFF
Offset increments defined in the working plane coordinate system. If only ZOFF is used, the working plane
will be redefined parallel to the present plane and offset by ZOFF.
Notes
Changes the origin of the working plane by translating the working plane along its coordinate system axes.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP by Increments
WPROTA, THXY, THYZ, THZX
Rotates the working plane.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
THXY
First rotation about the working plane Z axis (positive X toward Y).
THYZ
Second rotation about working plane X axis (positive Y toward Z).
THZX
Third rotation about working plane Y axis (positive Z toward X).
Notes
The specified angles (in degrees) are relative to the orientation of the working plane.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP by Increments
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31485
WPSTYL
WPSTYL, SNAP, GRSPAC, GRMIN, GRMAX, WPTOL, WPCTYP, GRTYPE, WPVIS, SNAPANG
Controls the display and style of the working plane.
DATABASE: Working Plane
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
SNAP
Snap increment for a locational pick (1E-6 minimum). If -1, turn off snap capability. For example, a picked
location of 1.2456 with a snap of 0.1 gives 1.2, with 0.01 gives 1.25, with 0.001 gives 1.246, and with 0.025
gives 1.250 (defaults to 0.05).
GRSPAC
Graphical spacing between grid points. For graphical representation only and not related to snap points
(defaults to 0.1).
GRMIN, GRMAX
Defines the size of a square grid (if WPCTYP = 0) to be displayed over a portion of the working plane. The
opposite corners of the grid will be located at grid points nearest the working plane coordinates of
(GRMIN,GRMIN) and (GRMAX,GRMAX). If a polar system (WPCTYP = 1), GRMAX is the outside radius of grid and
GRMIN is ignored. If GRMIN = GRMAX, no grid will be displayed (defaults to -1.0 and 1.0 for GRMIN and GRMAX
respectively).
WPTOL
The tolerance that an entity's location can deviate from the specified working plane, while still being considered on the plane. Used only for locational picking of vertices for polygons and prisms (defaults to 0.003).
WPCTYP
Working plane coordinate system type:
0
Cartesian (default). If working plane tracking is on [CSYS,4], the updated active coordinate system will
also be Cartesian.
1
Polar. If working plane tracking is on, the updated active coordinate system will be cylindrical.
2
Polar. If working plane tracking is on, the updated active coordinate system will be spherical.
GRTYPE
Grid type:
0
Grid and WP triad.
1
Grid only.
2
WP triad only (default).
WPVIS
Grid visibility:
0
Do not show GRTYPE entities (grid and/or triad) (default).
31486
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
WRFULL
1
Show GRTYPE entities. Cartesian working planes will be displayed with a Cartesian grid, polar with a
polar grid.
SNAPANG
Snap angle (0--180) in degrees. Used only if WPCTYP = 1 or 2. Defaults to 5 degrees.
Command Default
Snap capability on with an increment of .05, spacing between grid points of 0.1, Cartesian coordinate system,
WP triad displayed, and a tolerance of .003.
Notes
Use WPSTYL,DEFA to reset the working plane to its default location and style. Use WPSTYL,STAT to list the status
of the working plane. Blank fields will keep present settings.
It is possible to specify SNAP and WPTOL values that will cause conflicts during picking operations. Check your
values carefully, and if problems are noted, revert to the default values.
WPSTYL with no arguments will toggle the grid on and off. The working plane can be displayed in the non-GUI
interactive mode only after issuing a /PLOPTS,WP,1 command. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for
more information on working plane tracking. See /PLOPTS command for control of hidden line working plane.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Builder>ROM>ElecStruc
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Set Grid
Utility Menu>List>Status>Working Plane
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Display Working Plane
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Offset WP by Increments
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>Show WP Status
Utility Menu>WorkPlane>WP settings
WRFULL, Ldstep
Stops solution after assembling global matrices.
SOLUTION: Load Step Options
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Ldstep
Specify action to take:
OFF or 0
Turn off feature (default)
N
Turn on feature and set it to stop after assembling the global matrices and writing the .FULL file for load
step N.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31487
WRITE
Command Default
By default the WRFULL command is turned OFF.
Notes
This command is used in conjunction with the SOLVE command to generate the assembled matrix file (.FULL
file) only. The element matrices are assembled into the relevant global matrices for the particular analysis being
performed and the .FULL file is written. Equation solution and the output of data to the results file are skipped.
To dump the matrices written on the .FULL file into Harwell-Boeing format, use the HBMAT command in /AUX2.
To use the LSSOLVE macro with this command, you may need to modify the LSSOLVE macro to properly stop
at the load step of interest.
This command only valid for linear static, full harmonic, and full transient analyses when the sparse direct solver
is selected. This command is also valid for bucking or modal analyses with any mode extraction method. This
command is not valid for nonlinear analyses or analyses containing p-elements.
In general, the assembled matrix file .FULL contains stiffness, mass, and damping matrices. However, the availability of the matrices depends on the analysis type chosen when the file is written.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Stop Solution
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Stop Solution
WRITE, Fname
Writes the radiation matrix file.
AUX12: Radiation Substructures
MP ME ST <> <> PR <> <> <> PP ED
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the directory
path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name Defaults to Jobname.
Notes
Writes radiation matrix file (File.SUB) for input to the substructure thermal "use" pass. Subsequent WRITE operations to the same file overwrite the file.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Radiation Opt>Matrix Method>Write Matrix
31488
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
WSORT
WSORT, Lab, KORD, --, Wopt, OLDMAX, OLDRMS
Initiates element reordering based upon a geometric sort.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
Lab
Coordinate (in the active system) along which element centroid locations are sorted. Valid labels are: X, Y, Z,
ALL. If ALL (default), all three directions will be used, and the order corresponding to the lowest MAX or RMS
wavefront value will be retained.
KORD
Sort order:
0
Sort according to ascending coordinate values.
1
Sort according to descending coordinate values.
--
Unused field.
Wopt
Option for comparison:
MAX
Use maximum wavefront value for comparison (default).
RMS
Use RMS wavefront value.
OLDMAX, OLDRMS
MAX and RMS wavefront values of model to be used in place of the old values. OLDRMS defaults to OLDMAX
(and vice versa). If neither is specified, each defaults to its calculated old value.
Notes
Initiates element reordering based upon a geometric sort of the element centroid locations. Wave lists, if any
[WSTART], are ignored. Reordering affects only the element order for the solution phase and not the element
numbers (input referring to element numbers, such as element pressures, is unaffected by reordering).
Note The new order is retained only if new the new maximum or RMS wavefront values are lower than
the old values, as described below. See the WAVES command for another reordering procedure and for
more details on reordering. The resulting element ordering can be shown by listing the wavefront history
[WFRONT,1] or by displaying elements with their element location numbers [/PNUM].
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>Reorder by XYZ
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31489
WSPRINGS
WSPRINGS
Creates weak springs on corner nodes of a bounding box of the currently selected elements.
SOLUTION: Misc Loads
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> ED
Notes
WSPRINGS invokes a predefined ANSYS macro that is used during the import of loads from the ADAMS program
into the ANSYS program. WSPRINGS creates weak springs on the corner nodes of the bounding box of the currently selected elements. The six nodes of the bounding box are attached to ground using COMBIN14 elements.
The stiffness is chosen as a small number and can be changed by changing the real constants of the COMBIN14
elements. This command works only for models that have a geometric extension in two or three dimensions.
One dimensional problems (pure beam in one axis) are not supported.
For more information on how WSPRINGS is used during the transfer of loads from the ADAMS program to ANSYS,
see Import Loads into ANSYS in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution>ADAMS Connection>Import fr ADAMS
WSTART, NODE1, NODE2, NINC, ITIME, INC
Defines a starting wave list.
PREP7: Element Reordering
MP ME ST <> <> PR EM <> <> PP ED
NODE1, NODE2, NINC
Define a set of nodes in the starting wave list from NODE1 to NODE2 (defaults to NODE1) in steps of NINC
(defaults to 1). If NODE1 = ALL, ignore remaining fields and use all selected nodes [NSEL].
ITIME, INC
Add more node sets to the same starting wave list by repeating the previous node set with NODE1 and NODE2
incremented by INC (defaults to 1) each time after the first. ITIME is the total number of sets (defaults to 1)
defined with this command.
Command Default
If no starting waves, a starting node will be automatically defined when the WAVES command is issued.
Notes
Defines a starting wave list (optional) for reordering with the WAVES command. Repeat WSTART command to
define other starting wave lists (20 maximum).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction
31490
This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
WSTART
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Element Reorder>Define Wave List
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31491
31492
X Commands
/XFRM, LAB, X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2
Controls the centroid or the axis of dynamic rotation.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
LAB
The location or entity (centroid) used to define the center or axis of rotation.
NODE
If NODE is chosen for the center of rotation, the node number will be X1. If the rotation is to be about an
axis, then X1 and Y1 define the two nodes between which a line is drawn to determine the axis. The remaining arguments are ignored.
ELEMENT
If ELEMENT is chosen for the center of rotation, the element number will be X1. If the rotation is to be
about an axis, then X1 and Y1 define the two elements between which a line is drawn to determine the
axis. The remaining arguments are ignored.
KP
If KP is chosen for the center of rotation, the keypoint number will be X1. If the rotation is to be about
an axis, then X1 and Y1 define the two keypoints between which a line is drawn to determine the axis.
The remaining arguments are ignored.
LINE
If LINE is chosen for the center of rotation, the line number will be X1. If the rotation is to be about an
axis, then X1 and Y1 define the two lines between which a line is drawn to determine the axis. The remaining arguments are ignored.
AREA
If AREA is chosen for the center of rotation, the area number will be X1. If the rotation is to be about an
axis, then X1 and Y1 define the two areas between which a line is drawn to determine the axis. The remaining arguments are ignored.
VOLUME
If VOLUME is chosen for the center of rotation, the volume number will be X1. If the rotation is to be
about an axis, then X1 and Y1 define the two volumes between which a line is drawn to determine the
axis. The remaining arguments are ignored.
XYZ
If XYZ is chosen for the center of rotation, the location of that center is determined by the coordinates
X1, Y1, Z1. If values are specified for X2, Y2, Z2, then the axis of rotation will be about the line between
those two points.
OFF
If LAB = OFF, DEFAULT, FOCUS or if no value is specified, then the center of rotation is set at the FOCUS
point, as defined by the /FOCUS command.
X1
The entity number or X coordinate for the center of rotation.
Y1
The entity number or Y coordinate for the center of rotation.
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/XRANGE
Z1
The Z coordinate for the center of rotation.
X2
The X coordinate for the axis of rotation.
Y2
The Y coordinate for the axis of rotation.
Z2
The Z coordinate for the axis of rotation.
Command Default
Issuing /XFRM, with no LAB defined sets the center of rotation at the focal point specified by the /FOCUS command.
Notes
The /XFRM command is active only when the cumulative rotation key is specified ON for the /ANGLE command
(KINCR = 1). This command affects dynamic manipulations only.
For center rotation, the middle mouse button will rotate the model about the screen Z axis and the right mouse
button will rotate the model about the screen X and Y axis.
For rotation about an axis, the middle mouse button will rotate the model about the defined axis of rotation and
the right mouse button will be deactivated.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>ViewSettings>Rotational Center>ByPick
/XRANGE, XMIN, XMAX
Specifies a linear abscissa (X) scale range.
GRAPHICS: Graphs
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
XMIN
Minimum abscissa scale value.
XMAX
Maximum abscissa scale value.
Command Default
Automatically select X-range scale to include all data being displayed.
31494
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
XVAR
Notes
Specifies a linear abscissa (X) scale range for the line graph display. Use /XRANGE,DEFAULT to return to automatic
scaling.
Automatic scaling will often yield inappropriate range values for logarithmic scales (/GROPT, LOGX).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Axes
XVAR, N
Specifies the X variable to be displayed.
POST26: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
N
X variable number:
0 or 1
Display PLVAR values vs. time (or frequency).
n
Display PLVAR values vs. variable n (2 to NV [NUMVAR]).
1
Interchange time and PLVAR variable numbers with time as the curve parameter. PLVAR variable
numbers are displayed uniformly spaced along X-axis from position 1 to 10.
Command Default
Use time or frequency.
Notes
Defines the X variable (displayed along the abscissa) against which the Y variable(s) [PLVAR] are to be displayed.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>TimeHist Postpro>Settings>Graph
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31495
XVAROPT
XVAROPT, Lab
Specifies the parameter to be used as the X-axis variable.
OPTIMIZATION: Display
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
Lab
Parameter to be used as the X variable. Defaults to set numbers.
Command Default
Use design set numbers as the X variable.
Notes
Specifies the parameter to be used as the X-axis variable for graphical displays produced by the PLVAROPT
command, and for the first column of the tabular listings produced by the PRVAROPT command. Design sets
are automatically sorted in a sequence corresponding to an ascending order of the specified parameter.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Design Opt>Design Sets>Graphs/Tables
31496
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Y Commands
/YRANGE, YMIN, YMAX, NUM
Specifies a linear ordinate (Y) scale range.
GRAPHICS: Graphs
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
YMIN
Minimum ordinate scale value.
YMAX
Maximum ordinate scale value.
NUM
Y-axis number to which range applies (defaults to 1). Valid numbers are 1 to 3 for /GRTYP,2 and 1 to 6 for
/GRTYP,3. If ALL, apply to all Y-axes.
Command Default
Automatically select Y-range scale to include all data being displayed.
Notes
Specifies a linear ordinate (Y) scale range for the line graph display. Use /YRANGE,DEFAULT to return to automatic
scaling. For multiple Y-axes graphs [/GRTYP], see /GROPT, ASCAL to automatically scale the additional Y-axes.
Automatic scaling will often yield inappropriate range values for logarithmic scales (/GROPT, LOGY).
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>Graphs>Modify Axes
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31498
Z Commands
/ZOOM, WN, Lab, X1, Y1, X2, Y2
Zooms a region of a display window.
GRAPHICS: Views
MP ME ST DY <> PR EM <> FL PP ED
WN
Window number to which command applies (defaults to 1).
Lab
Label to define the desired type of zoom:
OFF
Turns zoom off (refits image of entire model to the window).
BACK
Goes back to previous zoom setting (five successive back ups, maximum).
SCRN
Interprets X1,Y1 as the screen coordinates of the center of a square zoom region; X2,Y2 as the screen
coordinates of a point on one side of that square.
RECT
Interprets X1,Y1 and X2,Y2 as the screen coordinates of two opposite corners of a rectangular zoom region.
Notes
Zooms (centers and magnifies) the specified region of a display window. /ZOOM will operate on a display that
has been formed by an explicit graphics action command (APLOT, EPLOT, etc.). /ZOOM has no effect on an
"immediate" graphics display. When /ZOOM is executed, the display is automatically replotted such that the
specified zoom region is centered and sized to fill the window.
Auto resizing is disabled when you issue the /ZOOM command. To restore auto resizing, issue the /AUTO command, or select FIT from the Pan, Zoom, Rotate box.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Pan, Zoom, Rotate
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
31500
Index
Symbols
*EVAL command, 3427
*LIST command, 3716
*MOONEY command, 3785
/AN3D command, 334
/ANFILE command, 340
/ANGLE command, 342
/ANNOT command, 347
/ANUM command, 355
/ASSIGN command, 379
/AUTO command, 383
/AUX12 command, 385
/AUX15 command, 386
/AUX2 command, 385
/AUX3 command, 385
/AXLAB command, 388
/BATCH command, 391
/CFORMAT command, 3154
/CLABEL command, 3158
/CLEAR command, 3159
/CLOG command, 3161
/CMAP command, 3165
/COLOR command, 3183
/COM command, 3186
/CONFIG command, 3188
/CONTOUR command, 3190
/COPY command, 3191
/CPLANE command, 3197
/CTYPE command, 3208
/CVAL command, 3211
/CWD command, 3213
/CYCEXPAND command, 3214
/DELETE command, 3244
/DEVDISP command, 3250
/DEVICE command, 3252
/DIST command, 3256
/DSCALE command, 3276
/DV3D command, 3284
/EDGE command, 3323
/EFACET command, 3369
/EOF command, 3386
/ERASE command, 3393
/ESHAPE command, 3401
/EXIT command, 3429
/EXPAND command, 3432
/FACET command, 3440
/FDELE command, 3446
/FILNAME command, 3453
/FOCUS command, 3539
/FORMAT command, 3542
/FTYPE command, 3561
/GCMD command, 3570
/GCOLUMN command, 3570
/GFILE command, 3572
/GFORMAT command, 3573
/GLINE command, 3573
/GMARKER command, 3574
/GO command, 3577
/GOLIST command, 3577
/GOPR command, 3577
/GRAPHICS command, 3581
/GRESUME command, 3582
/GRID command, 3583
/GROPT command, 3583
/GRTYP command, 3587
/GSAVE command, 3587
/GST command, 3592
/GTHK command, 3593
/GTYPE command, 3594
/HBC command, 3597
/HEADER command, 3599
/ICLWID command, 3629
/ICSCALE command, 3629
/IMAGE command, 3633
/INPUT command, 3637
/LARC command, 3682
/LIGHT command, 3711
/LINE command, 3713
/LSPEC command, 3738
/LSYMBOL command, 3743
/MENU command, 3760
/MPLIB command, 3800
/MREP command, 3807
/MSTART command, 3823
/NERR command, 3833
/NOERASE command, 3849
/NOLIST command, 3849
/NOPR command, 3851
/NORMAL command, 3853
/NUMBER command, 3879
/OPT command, 3911
/OUTPUT command, 3916
/PAGE command, 3923
/PBC command, 3929
/PBF command, 3932
/PCIRCLE command, 3937
/PCOPY command, 3940
/PDS command, 3972
/PICE command, 3993
/PLOPTS command, 31013
/PMETH command, 31029
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
/PMORE command, 31033
/PNUM command, 31035
/POLYGON command, 31038
/POST1 command, 31039
/POST26 command, 31040
/PREP7 command, 31048
/PSF command, 31081
/PSPEC command, 31089
/PSTATUS command, 31091
/PSYMB command, 31093
/PWEDGE command, 31097
/QUIT command, 31101
/RATIO command, 31108
/RENAME command, 31115
/REPLOT command, 31116
/RESET command, 31120
/RGB command, 31126
/RUNST command, 31165
/SECLIB command, 31183
/SEG command, 31199
/SHADE command, 31237
/SHOW command, 31239
/SHOWDISP command, 31241
/SHRINK command, 31245
/SMBC command, 31255
/SOLU command, 31268
/SSCALE command, 31283
/STATUS command, 31292
/STITLE command, 31294
/SX command, 31312
/SYP command, 31332
/SYS command, 31333
/TITLE command, 31386
/TLABEL command, 31386
/TRIAD command, 31401
/TRLCY command, 31402
/TSPEC command, 31408
/TXTRE command, 31412
/TYPE command, 31415
/UDOC command, 31421
/UI command, 31423
/UIS command, 31427
/UNITS command, 31432
/USER command, 31435
/VCONE command, 31444
/VIEW command, 31456
/VSCALE command, 31469
/VUP command, 31477
/WINDOW command, 31481
/XFRM command, 31493
/XRANGE command, 31494
/YRANGE command, 31497
Index2
/ZOOM command, 31499
~CAT5IN command, 35
~CATIAIN command, 36
~CIFIN command, 37
~PARAIN command, 37
~PROEIN command, 39
~SATIN command, 39
~UGIN command, 311
A
A command, 313
AADD command, 313
AATT command, 314
ABEXTRACT command, 314
ABS command, 315
ACCAT command, 316
ACEL command, 317
ACLEAR command, 318
ADAMS command, 318
ADAPT command, 319
ADD command, 320
ADDAM command, 321
ADELE command, 322
ADGL command, 322
ADRAG command, 323
AESIZE command, 324
AFILLT command, 324
AFLIST command, 325
AFSURF command, 325
AGEN command, 326
AGLUE command, 327
AINA command, 328
AINP command, 328
AINV command, 329
AL command, 329
ALIST command, 330
ALLSEL command, 330
ALPFILL command, 332
ALPHAD command, 332
AMAP command, 333
AMESH command, 333
ANCNTR command, 336
ANCUT command, 336
ANCYC command, 337
ANDATA command, 338
ANDSCL command, 339
ANDYNA command, 340
ANFLOW command, 341
ANHARM command, 343
ANIM command, 343
ANISOS command, 344
ANMODE command, 345
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
ANMRES command, 345
ANORM command, 348
ANSOL command, 349
ANTIME command, 351
ANTYPE command, 352
AOFFST command, 356
AOVLAP command, 357
APLOT command, 357
APPEND command, 358
APTN command, 359
ARCLEN command, 360
ARCOLLAPSE command, 361
ARCTRM command, 361
ARDETACH command, 362
AREAS command, 363
AREFINE command, 363
AREMESH command, 364
AREVERSE command, 365
ARFILL command, 366
ARMERGE command, 366
AROTAT command, 367
ARSCALE command, 367
ARSPLIT command, 368
ARSYM command, 369
ASBA command, 370
ASBL command, 372
ASBV command, 373
ASBW command, 374
ASEL command, 375
ASKIN command, 377
ASLL command, 378
ASLV command, 378
ASUB command, 380
ASUM command, 380
ATAN command, 381
ATRAN command, 382
ATYPE command, 383
AUTOTS command, 384
AVPRIN command, 386
AVRES command, 387
B
BCSOPTION command, 391
BELLOW command, 393
BEND command, 394
BETAD command, 394
BF command, 395
BFA command, 398
BFADELE command, 3100
BFALIST command, 3101
BFCUM command, 3101
BFDELE command, 3102
BFE command, 3104
BFECUM command, 3105
BFEDELE command, 3107
BFELIST command, 3108
BFESCAL command, 3108
BFINT command, 3109
BFK command, 3110
BFKDELE command, 3112
BFKLIST command, 3113
BFL command, 3113
BFLDELE command, 3114
BFLIST command, 3115
BFLLIST command, 3116
BFSCALE command, 3117
BFTRAN command, 3117
BFUNIF command, 3118
BFV command, 3119
BFVDELE command, 3120
BFVLIST command, 3121
BIOOPT command, 3122
BIOT command, 3122
BLC4 command, 3123
BLC5 command, 3124
BLOCK command, 3124
BOOL command, 3125
BOPTN command, 3125
BRANCH command, 3127
BSAX command, 3127
BSM1 command, 3129
BSM2 command, 3130
BSMD command, 3128
BSPLIN command, 3131
BSS1 command, 3131
BSS2 command, 3132
BSTE command, 3133
BSTQ command, 3134
BTOL command, 3135
BUCOPT command, 3135
C
C*** command, 3137
CALC command, 3137
CBDOF command, 3138
CDOPT command, 3139
CDREAD command, 3140
CDWRITE command, 3141
CE command, 3144
CECHECK command, 3146
CECMOD command, 3146
CECYC command, 3147
CEDELE command, 3148
CEINTF command, 3148
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index3
Index
CELIST command, 3149
CENTER command, 3150
CEQN command, 3150
CERIG command, 3151
CESGEN command, 3152
CFACT command, 3153
CGLOC command, 3155
CGOMGA command, 3155
CHECK command, 3156
CHKMSH command, 3157
CIRCLE command, 3157
CLOCAL command, 3160
CLOG command, 3161
CLRMSHLN command, 3162
CM command, 3162
CMACEL command, 3164
CMATRIX command, 3166
CMDELE command, 3167
CMDOMEGA command, 3167
CMEDIT command, 3169
CMGRP command, 3170
CMLIST command, 3170
CMMOD command, 3171
CMOMEGA command, 3172
CMPLOT command, 3174
CMSEL command, 3175
CMSFILE command, 3176
CMSOPT command, 3178
CNCHECK command, 3179
CNVTOL command, 3181
COMPRESS command, 3186
CON4 command, 3186
CONE command, 3187
CONJUG command, 3190
COUPLE command, 3192
COVAL command, 3193
CP command, 3193
CPCYC command, 3195
CPDELE command, 3196
CPINTF command, 3196
CPLGEN command, 3198
CPLIST command, 3198
CPMERGE command, 3199
CPNGEN command, 3200
CPSGEN command, 3201
CQC command, 3201
CRPLIM command, 3202
CS command, 3203
CSCIR command, 3204
CSDELE command, 3205
CSKP command, 3205
CSLIST command, 3206
Index4
CSWPLA command, 3206
CSYS command, 3207
CURR2D command, 3210
CUTCONTROL command, 3210
CVAR command, 3212
CYCLIC command, 3216
CYCOPT command, 3218
CYCPHASE command, 3221
CYL4 command, 3224
CYL5 command, 3225
CYLIND command, 3225
D
D command, 3227
DA command, 3229
DADELE command, 3232
DALIST command, 3234
DAMORPH command, 3235
DATA command, 3236
DATADEF command, 3237
DCGOMG command, 3237
DCUM command, 3238
DCVSWP command, 3239
DDELE command, 3240
DEACT command, 3241
DECOMP command, 3242
DEFINE command, 3243
DELETE command, 3243
DELTIM command, 3244
DEMORPH command, 3245
DERIV command, 3246
DESIZE command, 3247
DESOL command, 3248
DETAB command, 3250
DIG command, 3255
DIGIT command, 3255
DISPLAY command, 3256
DJ command, 3257
DJDELE command, 3258
DJLIST command, 3258
DK command, 3259
DKDELE command, 3260
DKLIST command, 3261
DL command, 3262
DLDELE command, 3265
DLIST command, 3267
DLLIST command, 3267
DMOVE command, 3268
DMPEXT command, 3268
DMPRAT command, 3269
DNSOL command, 3270
DOF command, 3273
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
DOFSEL command, 3273
DOMEGA command, 3275
DSCALE command, 3275
DSET command, 3277
DSOPT command, 3277
DSPROC command, 3279
DSUM command, 3279
DSURF command, 3280
DSYM command, 3281
DSYS command, 3283
DTRAN command, 3283
DUMP command, 3284
DVMORPH command, 3286
DYNOPT command, 3287
E
E command, 3289
EALIVE command, 3289
EDADAPT command, 3290
EDALE command, 3291
EDASMP command, 3292
EDBOUND command, 3293
EDBVIS command, 3296
EDBX command, 3295
EDCADAPT command, 3296
EDCGEN command, 3298
EDCLIST command, 3303
EDCMORE command, 3303
EDCNSTR command, 3304
EDCONTACT command, 3307
EDCPU command, 3309
EDCRB command, 3309
EDCSC command, 3310
EDCTS command, 3311
EDCURVE command, 3312
EDDAMP command, 3314
EDDBL command, 3316
EDDC command, 3316
EDDRELAX command, 3317
EDDUMP command, 3319
EDELE command, 3320
EDENERGY command, 3320
EDFPLOT command, 3321
EDGCALE command, 3322
EDHGLS command, 3324
EDHIST command, 3324
EDHTIME command, 3325
EDINT command, 3326
EDIPART command, 3327
EDIS command, 3328
EDLCS command, 3329
EDLOAD command, 3331
EDMP command, 3335
EDNB command, 3338
EDNDTSD command, 3340
EDNROT command, 3341
EDOPT command, 3342
EDOUT command, 3343
EDPART command, 3345
EDPC command, 3346
EDPL command, 3347
EDPVEL command, 3347
EDRC command, 3350
EDRD command, 3351
EDREAD command, 3352
EDRI command, 3354
EDRST command, 3355
EDRUN command, 3356
EDSHELL command, 3357
EDSOLV command, 3358
EDSP command, 3358
EDSTART command, 3359
EDTERM command, 3361
EDTP command, 3363
EDVEL command, 3364
EDWELD command, 3366
EDWRITE command, 3368
EGEN command, 3370
EINTF command, 3371
EKILL command, 3372
ELEM command, 3373
ELIST command, 3373
EMAGERR command, 3374
EMATWRITE command, 3375
EMF command, 3375
EMFT command, 3376
EMID command, 3376
EMIS command, 3377
EMODIF command, 3378
EMORE command, 3378
EMSYM command, 3379
EMTGEN command, 3379
EMUNIT command, 3380
EN command, 3381
ENDRELEASE command, 3382
ENGEN command, 3383
ENORM command, 3384
ENSYM command, 3385
EORIENT command, 3386
EPLOT command, 3388
EQSLV command, 3388
ERASE command, 3393
EREAD command, 3394
EREFINE command, 3394
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index5
Index
ERESX command, 3396
ERNORM command, 3396
ERRANG command, 3397
ESCHECK command, 3397
ESEL command, 3398
ESIZE command, 3403
ESLA command, 3404
ESLL command, 3404
ESLN command, 3405
ESLV command, 3406
ESOL command, 3407
ESORT command, 3410
ESSOLV command, 3411
ESTIF command, 3413
ESURF command, 3414
ESYM command, 3415
ESYS command, 3416
ET command, 3417
ETABLE command, 3418
ETCHG command, 3423
ETCONTROL command, 3425
ETDELE command, 3426
ETLIST command, 3426
ETYPE command, 3427
EUSORT command, 3427
EWRITE command, 3428
EXP command, 3430
EXPAND command, 3431
EXPASS command, 3434
EXPSOL command, 3434
EXTOPT command, 3435
EXTREM command, 3437
F
F command, 3439
FATIGUE command, 3441
FC command, 3441
FCCHECK command, 3443
FCDELE command, 3443
FCLIST command, 3444
FCUM command, 3444
FDELE command, 3445
FE command, 3447
FEBODY command, 3448
FECONS command, 3448
FEFOR command, 3448
FELIST command, 3449
FESURF command, 3449
FILE command, 3449
FILEAUX2 command, 3450
FILEAUX3 command, 3451
FILEDISP command, 3451
Index6
FILL command, 3452
FILLDATA command, 3453
FINISH command, 3454
FITEM command, 3455
FJ command, 3455
FJDELE command, 3456
FJLIST command, 3457
FK command, 3457
FKDELE command, 3459
FKLIST command, 3460
FL command, 3460
FLANGE command, 3461
FLDATA command, 3462
FLDATA1 command, 3464
FLDATA10 command, 3484
FLDATA11 command, 3485
FLDATA12 command, 3486
FLDATA13 command, 3487
FLDATA14 command, 3488
FLDATA15 command, 3489
FLDATA16 command, 3489
FLDATA17 command, 3490
FLDATA18 command, 3491
FLDATA19 command, 3493
FLDATA2 command, 3466
FLDATA20 command, 3494
FLDATA20A command, 3496
FLDATA20B command, 3497
FLDATA21 command, 3498
FLDATA22 command, 3499
FLDATA23 command, 3501
FLDATA24 command, 3502
FLDATA24A command, 3505
FLDATA24B command, 3507
FLDATA24C command, 3508
FLDATA24D command, 3509
FLDATA24E command, 3510
FLDATA24F command, 3511
FLDATA24G command, 3511
FLDATA24H command, 3512
FLDATA25 command, 3513
FLDATA26 command, 3515
FLDATA27 command, 3516
FLDATA28 command, 3517
FLDATA29 command, 3519
FLDATA3 command, 3467
FLDATA30 command, 3520
FLDATA31 command, 3522
FLDATA32 command, 3523
FLDATA33 command, 3525
FLDATA34 command, 3526
FLDATA35 command, 3527
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
FLDATA36 command, 3528
FLDATA37 command, 3529
FLDATA38 command, 3530
FLDATA39 command, 3531
FLDATA4 command, 3468
FLDATA40 command, 3533
FLDATA4A command, 3472
FLDATA5 command, 3473
FLDATA6 command, 3476
FLDATA7 command, 3478
FLDATA8 command, 3482
FLDATA9 command, 3483
FLIST command, 3534
FLLIST command, 3534
FLOCHECK command, 3534
FLOTRAN command, 3535
FLREAD command, 3536
FLST command, 3536
FLUXV command, 3538
FMAGBC command, 3538
FMAGSUM command, 3539
FOR2D command, 3540
FORCE command, 3541
FORM command, 3542
FP command, 3543
FPLIST command, 3544
FREQ command, 3544
FS command, 3545
FSAN command, 3546
FSCALE command, 3547
FSCO command, 3547
FSDELE command, 3548
FSDT command, 3548
FSIN command, 3549
FSIT command, 3549
FSLIST command, 3550
FSNODE command, 3550
FSOR command, 3551
FSOU command, 3551
FSPLOT command, 3552
FSRE command, 3553
FSRS command, 3553
FSSECT command, 3554
FSSOLV command, 3554
FSSPARM command, 3556
FSSTAT command, 3557
FSTI command, 3557
FSTR command, 3557
FSUM command, 3558
FTCALC command, 3559
FTRAN command, 3560
FTSIZE command, 3560
FTWRITE command, 3561
FVMESH command, 3562
G
GAP command, 3565
GAPF command, 3565
GAPFINISH command, 3566
GAPLIST command, 3566
GAPMERGE command, 3567
GAPOPT command, 3567
GAPPLOT command, 3568
GAUGE command, 3569
GENOPT command, 3571
GEOM command, 3571
GEOMETRY command, 3572
GMATRIX command, 3575
GMFACE command, 3576
GP command, 3578
GPDELE command, 3579
GPLIST command, 3580
GPLOT command, 3580
GRP command, 3586
GSBDATA command, 3588
GSGDATA command, 3589
GSLIST command, 3590
GSSOL command, 3591
GSUM command, 3592
H
HARFRQ command, 3597
HBMAT command, 3598
HELP command, 3600
HELPDISP command, 3601
HEMIOPT command, 3601
HFANG command, 3602
HFARRAY command, 3602
HFEIGOPT command, 3603
HFEREFINE command, 3604
HFNEAR command, 3604
HFPA command, 3605
HFPCSWP command, 3606
HFPORT command, 3607
HFPOWER command, 3606
HFSCAT command, 3611
HFSWEEP command, 3612
HFSYM command, 3614
HMAGSOLV command, 3615
HPGL command, 3616
HPTCREATE command, 3617
HPTDELETE command, 3618
HRCPLX command, 3619
HREXP command, 3620
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index7
Index
HROPT command, 3620
HROUT command, 3622
I
IC command, 3625
ICDELE command, 3626
ICE command, 3626
ICEDELE command, 3627
ICELIST command, 3628
ICLIST command, 3628
ICVFRC command, 3630
IGESIN command, 3631
IGESOUT command, 3632
IMAGIN command, 3634
IMESH command, 3634
IMMED command, 3635
IMPD command, 3636
INRES command, 3638
INRTIA command, 3640
INT1 command, 3640
INTSRF command, 3641
IOPTN command, 3641
IRLF command, 3644
IRLIST command, 3645
ISFILE command, 3645
ISTRESS command, 3647
ISWRITE command, 3648
J
JPEG command, 3649
JSOL command, 3650
K
K command, 3651
KATT command, 3651
KBC command, 3652
KBETW command, 3653
KCALC command, 3654
KCENTER command, 3655
KCLEAR command, 3657
KDELE command, 3657
KDIST command, 3658
KEEP command, 3658
KESIZE command, 3659
KEYOPT command, 3660
KEYPTS command, 3660
KEYW command, 3661
KFILL command, 3661
KGEN command, 3662
KL command, 3663
KLIST command, 3663
KMESH command, 3664
Index8
KMODIF command, 3665
KMOVE command, 3665
KNODE command, 3666
KPLOT command, 3666
KPSCALE command, 3667
KREFINE command, 3668
KSCALE command, 3669
KSCON command, 3670
KSEL command, 3671
KSLL command, 3673
KSLN command, 3673
KSUM command, 3674
KSYMM command, 3674
KTRAN command, 3675
KUSE command, 3676
KWPAVE command, 3677
KWPLAN command, 3677
L
L command, 3679
L2ANG command, 3680
L2TAN command, 3680
LANG command, 3681
LARC command, 3682
LAREA command, 3683
LARGE command, 3684
LATT command, 3684
LAYER command, 3685
LAYERP26 command, 3686
LAYLIST command, 3687
LAYPLOT command, 3688
LCABS command, 3689
LCASE command, 3689
LCCALC command, 3690
LCCAT command, 3690
LCDEF command, 3691
LCFACT command, 3692
LCFILE command, 3692
LCLEAR command, 3693
LCOMB command, 3694
LCOPER command, 3694
LCSEL command, 3696
LCSL command, 3697
LCSUM command, 3697
LCWRITE command, 3698
LCZERO command, 3699
LDELE command, 3699
LDIV command, 3700
LDRAG command, 3701
LDREAD command, 3701
LESIZE command, 3705
LEXTND command, 3707
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
LFILLT command, 3707
LFSURF command, 3708
LGEN command, 3709
LGLUE command, 3710
LGWRITE command, 3710
LINA command, 3712
LINE command, 3713
LINES command, 3714
LINL command, 3714
LINP command, 3715
LINV command, 3715
LIST command, 3716
LLIST command, 3717
LMATRIX command, 3718
LMESH command, 3719
LNCOLLAPSE command, 3719
LNDETACH command, 3720
LNFILL command, 3720
LNMERGE command, 3721
LNSPLIT command, 3721
LNSRCH command, 3722
LOCAL command, 3723
LOVLAP command, 3724
LPLOT command, 3724
LPTN command, 3725
LREFINE command, 3725
LREVERSE command, 3726
LROTAT command, 3727
LSBA command, 3728
LSBL command, 3729
LSBV command, 3730
LSBW command, 3731
LSCLEAR command, 3732
LSDELE command, 3733
LSEL command, 3734
LSLA command, 3736
LSLK command, 3737
LSOPER command, 3738
LSREAD command, 3739
LSSCALE command, 3740
LSSOLVE command, 3741
LSTR command, 3742
LSUM command, 3742
LSWRITE command, 3742
LSYMM command, 3744
LTAN command, 3746
LTRAN command, 3746
LUMPM command, 3747
LVSCALE command, 3748
LWPLAN command, 3749
M
M command, 3751
MAGOPT command, 3752
MAGSOLV command, 3753
MAPSOLVE command, 3754
MASTER command, 3755
MAT command, 3755
MATER command, 3756
MCHECK command, 3756
MDAMP command, 3757
MDELE command, 3758
MDPLOT command, 3758
MEMM command, 3759
MESHING command, 3760
MFANALYSIS command, 3761
MFBUCKET command, 3761
MFCALC command, 3762
MFCLEAR command, 3763
MFCMMAND command, 3764
MFCONV command, 3764
MFDTIME command, 3765
MFELEM command, 3765
MFEM command, 3766
MFEXTER command, 3766
MFFNAME command, 3767
MFIMPORT command, 3768
MFINTER command, 3769
MFITER command, 3769
MFLIST command, 3770
MFMAP command, 3770
MFORDER command, 3772
MFOUTPUT command, 3772
MFRELAX command, 3773
MFRSTART command, 3773
MFSURFACE command, 3774
MFTIME command, 3774
MFTOL command, 3775
MFVOLUME command, 3775
MGEN command, 3776
MITER command, 3777
MLIST command, 3777
MMF command, 3778
MODE command, 3778
MODIFY command, 3779
MODMSH command, 3780
MODOPT command, 3781
MONITOR command, 3783
MOPT command, 3786
MORPH command, 3790
MOVE command, 3791
MP command, 3792
MPAMOD command, 3794
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index9
Index
MPCHG command, 3795
MPCOPY command, 3795
MPDATA command, 3796
MPDELE command, 3799
MPDRES command, 3799
MPLIST command, 3801
MPPLOT command, 3801
MPREAD command, 3802
MPRINT command, 3803
MPTEMP command, 3804
MPTGEN command, 3805
MPTRES command, 3805
MPWRITE command, 3806
MSADV command, 3808
MSAVE command, 3808
MSCAP command, 3810
MSDATA command, 3810
MSHAPE command, 3811
MSHCOPY command, 3812
MSHKEY command, 3813
MSHMID command, 3814
MSHPATTERN command, 3814
MSMASS command, 3815
MSMETH command, 3816
MSMIR command, 3817
MSNOMF command, 3818
MSPROP command, 3818
MSQUAD command, 3820
MSRELAX command, 3821
MSSOLU command, 3821
MSSPEC command, 3822
MSTERM command, 3824
MSVARY command, 3825
MXPAND command, 3826
N
N command, 3829
NANG command, 3829
NCNV command, 3830
NDELE command, 3831
NDIST command, 3831
NDSURF command, 3832
NEQIT command, 3833
NFORCE command, 3835
NGEN command, 3836
NKPT command, 3836
NLDIAG command, 3837
NLDPOST command, 3840
NLGEOM command, 3841
NLHIST command, 3842
NLIST command, 3845
NLOG command, 3846
Index10
NLOPT command, 3847
NMODIF command, 3847
NOCOLOR command, 3848
NODES command, 3848
NOOFFSET command, 3850
NOORDER command, 3851
NORA command, 3852
NORL command, 3853
NPLOT command, 3854
NPRINT command, 3855
NREAD command, 3855
NREFINE command, 3856
NRLSUM command, 3857
NROPT command, 3858
NROTAT command, 3859
NRRANG command, 3860
NSCALE command, 3860
NSEL command, 3861
NSLA command, 3866
NSLE command, 3867
NSLK command, 3868
NSLL command, 3869
NSLV command, 3870
NSMOOTH command, 3870
NSOL command, 3871
NSORT command, 3873
NSTORE command, 3876
NSUBST command, 3877
NSVR command, 3878
NSYM command, 3878
NUMCMP command, 3880
NUMEXP command, 3881
NUMMRG command, 3883
NUMOFF command, 3886
NUMSTR command, 3887
NUMVAR command, 3889
NUSORT command, 3889
NWPAVE command, 3889
NWPLAN command, 3890
NWRITE command, 3891
O
OMEGA command, 3893
OPADD command, 3894
OPANL command, 3894
OPCLR command, 3895
OPDATA command, 3895
OPDEL command, 3896
OPEQN command, 3896
OPERATE command, 3898
OPEXE command, 3898
OPFACT command, 3899
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
OPFRST command, 3900
OPGRAD command, 3900
OPKEEP command, 3901
OPLFA command, 3902
OPLGR command, 3902
OPLIST command, 3903
OPLOOP command, 3903
OPLSW command, 3904
OPMAKE command, 3905
OPNCONTROL command, 3905
OPPRNT command, 3906
OPRAND command, 3906
OPRESU command, 3907
OPRFA command, 3907
OPRGR command, 3908
OPRSW command, 3908
OPSAVE command, 3909
OPSEL command, 3909
OPSUBP command, 3910
OPSWEEP command, 3910
OPTYPE command, 3911
OPUSER command, 3912
OPVAR command, 3913
OUTOPT command, 3914
OUTPR command, 3914
OUTRES command, 3917
P
PADELE command, 3923
PAGET command, 3924
PAPUT command, 3925
PARESU command, 3925
PARTSEL command, 3926
PASAVE command, 3927
PATH command, 3928
PCALC command, 3934
PCIRC command, 3936
PCONV command, 3938
PCORRO command, 3940
PCROSS command, 3941
PDANL command, 3941
PDCDF command, 3942
PDCFLD command, 3943
PDCLR command, 3945
PDCMAT command, 3946
PDCORR command, 3948
PDDMCS command, 3949
PDDOEL command, 3951
PDEF command, 3953
PDEXE command, 3956
PDHIST command, 3958
PDINQR command, 3959
PDLHS command, 3960
PDMETH command, 3962
PDOT command, 3964
PDPINV command, 3964
PDPLOT command, 3965
PDPROB command, 3967
PDRAG command, 3968
PDRESU command, 3969
PDROPT command, 3969
PDSAVE command, 3972
PDSCAT command, 3973
PDSENS command, 3974
PDSHIS command, 3975
PDUSER command, 3977
PDVAR command, 3977
PDWRITE command, 3980
PEMOPTS command, 3980
PERBC2D command, 3981
PERI command, 3982
PEXCLUDE command, 3983
PFACT command, 3983
PFLUID command, 3984
PGAP command, 3985
PGRAPH command, 3985
PGRSET command, 3986
PGSAVE command, 3987
PGSELE command, 3988
PGWRITE command, 3990
PHYSICS command, 3991
PINCLUDE command, 3994
PINSUL command, 3994
PIPE command, 3995
PIVCHECK command, 3995
PLCONV command, 3996
PLCPLX command, 3998
PLCRACK command, 3999
PLDISP command, 31000
PLESOL command, 31000
PLETAB command, 31004
PLF2D command, 31005
PLHFFAR command, 31006
PLLS command, 31008
PLNSOL command, 31009
PLOT command, 31015
PLOTTING command, 31016
PLPAGM command, 31016
PLPATH command, 31017
PLSCH command, 31017
PLSECT command, 31018
PLSYZ command, 31019
PLTIME command, 31020
PLTRAC command, 31020
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index11
Index
PLVAR command, 31023
PLVAROPT command, 31023
PLVECT command, 31024
PLVFRC command, 31026
PLWAVE command, 31027
PMAP command, 31028
PMETH command, 31028
PMGTRAN command, 31030
PMLOPT command, 31031
PMLSIZE command, 31032
PMOPTS command, 31033
PNGR command, 31034
POINT command, 31037
POLY command, 31038
POPT command, 31039
POUTRES command, 31040
POWERH command, 31042
PPATH command, 31042
PPLOT command, 31043
PPRANGE command, 31043
PPRES command, 31044
PRANGE command, 31044
PRCONV command, 31045
PRCPLX command, 31045
PRECISION command, 31046
PRED command, 31046
PRERR command, 31048
PRESOL command, 31049
PRETAB command, 31052
PRHFFAR command, 31052
PRI2 command, 31055
PRIM command, 31055
PRINT command, 31056
PRISM command, 31056
PRITER command, 31057
PRJSOL command, 31057
PRNLD command, 31058
PRNSOL command, 31059
PROD command, 31062
PRPATH command, 31063
PRRFOR command, 31063
PRRSOL command, 31064
PRSECT command, 31064
PRSSOL command, 31066
PRSYZ command, 31067
PRTIME command, 31068
PRVAR command, 31068
PRVAROPT command, 31069
PRVECT command, 31069
PSCONTROL command, 31071
PSCR command, 31072
PSDCOM command, 31074
Index12
PSDFRQ command, 31075
PSDGRAPH command, 31076
PSDRES command, 31077
PSDSPL command, 31078
PSDUNIT command, 31078
PSDVAL command, 31079
PSDWAV command, 31080
PSEL command, 31081
PSMESH command, 31084
PSOLVE command, 31087
PSPEC command, 31089
PSPRNG command, 31091
PSTRES command, 31092
PTEMP command, 31095
PTXY command, 31095
PUNIT command, 31096
PVECT command, 31096
Q
QDVAL command, 31099
QFACT command, 31099
QSOPT command, 31100
QUAD command, 31100
QUOT command, 31102
R
R command, 31103
RACE command, 31104
RADOPT command, 31105
RALL command, 31106
RAPPND command, 31106
RATE command, 31107
RBE3 command, 31108
RCON command, 31109
RDEC command, 31110
RDELE command, 31111
REAL command, 31111
REALVAR command, 31112
RECTNG command, 31113
REDUCE command, 31113
REFLCOEF command, 31114
REMESH command, 31114
REORDER command, 31116
RESCONTROL command, 31118
RESET command, 31119
RESP command, 31120
RESUME command, 31122
REXPORT command, 31123
REZONE command, 31124
RFILSZ command, 31125
RFORCE command, 31125
RIGID command, 31127
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
RIMPORT command, 31128
RITER command, 31130
RLIST command, 31130
RMALIST command, 31131
RMANL command, 31131
RMASTER command, 31132
RMCAP command, 31132
RMCLIST command, 31133
RMEMRY command, 31133
RMFLVEC command, 31134
RMLVSCALE command, 31134
RMMLIST command, 31135
RMMRANGE command, 31135
RMMSELECT command, 31136
RMNDISP command, 31137
RMNEVEC command, 31138
RMODIF command, 31138
RMORE command, 31139
RMPORDER command, 31140
RMRESUME command, 31140
RMRGENERATE command, 31141
RMROPTIONS command, 31141
RMRPLOT command, 31142
RMRSTATUS command, 31143
RMSAVE command, 31143
RMSMPLE command, 31144
RMUSE command, 31145
RMXPORT command, 31146
ROCK command, 31146
RPOLY command, 31147
RPR4 command, 31147
RPRISM command, 31148
RPSD command, 31149
RSFIT command, 31150
RSPEED command, 31152
RSPLIT command, 31153
RSPLOT command, 31154
RSPRNT command, 31155
RSSIMS command, 31156
RSTAT command, 31157
RSTOFF command, 31157
RSURF command, 31158
RSYMM command, 31160
RSYS command, 31161
RTHICK command, 31163
RTIMST command, 31164
RUN command, 31164
RWFRNT command, 31165
S
SABS command, 31167
SADD command, 31167
SALLOW command, 31168
SARPLOT command, 31168
SAVE command, 31169
SBCLIST command, 31170
SBCTRAN command, 31170
SDELETE command, 31171
SE command, 31171
SECCONTROLS command, 31172
SECDATA command, 31173
SECFUNCTION command, 31182
SECJOINT command, 31183
SECLOCK command, 31184
SECMODIF command, 31184
SECNUM command, 31185
SECOFFSET command, 31186
SECPLOT command, 31188
SECREAD command, 31190
SECSTOP command, 31193
SECTYPE command, 31194
SECWRITE command, 31196
SED command, 31197
SEDLIST command, 31198
SEEXP command, 31198
SEGEN command, 31200
SELIST command, 31202
SELM command, 31203
SENERGY command, 31203
SEOPT command, 31204
SESYMM command, 31206
SET command, 31207
SETFGAP command, 31209
SETRAN command, 31210
SEXP command, 31211
SF command, 31212
SFA command, 31215
SFACT command, 31217
SFADELE command, 31218
SFALIST command, 31219
SFBEAM command, 31219
SFCALC command, 31221
SFCUM command, 31221
SFDELE command, 31223
SFE command, 31224
SFEDELE command, 31227
SFELIST command, 31229
SFFUN command, 31229
SFGRAD command, 31230
SFL command, 31232
SFLDELE command, 31234
SFLIST command, 31235
SFLLIST command, 31236
SFSCALE command, 31236
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index13
Index
SFTRAN command, 31237
SHELL command, 31238
SHPP command, 31242
SHSD command, 31246
SLIST command, 31248
SLOAD command, 31249
SLPPLOT command, 31252
SLSPLOT command, 31253
SMALL command, 31253
SMAX command, 31254
SMBODY command, 31255
SMCONS command, 31256
SMFOR command, 31256
SMIN command, 31256
SMOOTH command, 31257
SMRTSIZE command, 31259
SMSURF command, 31261
SMULT command, 31262
SOLCONTROL command, 31262
SOLU command, 31267
SOLUOPT command, 31269
SOLVE command, 31269
SORT command, 31269
SOURCE command, 31270
SPACE command, 31270
SPARM command, 31271
SPCNOD command, 31271
SPCTEMP command, 31272
SPEC command, 31273
SPH4 command, 31273
SPH5 command, 31274
SPHERE command, 31274
SPLINE command, 31275
SPLOT command, 31275
SPOINT command, 31276
SPOPT command, 31277
SPREAD command, 31278
SPSCAN command, 31278
SPSWP command, 31279
SPTOPT command, 31280
SQRT command, 31281
SRSS command, 31281
SSBT command, 31282
SSLN command, 31284
SSMT command, 31284
SSPA command, 31285
SSPB command, 31286
SSPD command, 31286
SSPE command, 31287
SSPM command, 31288
SSTIF command, 31288
SSUM command, 31289
Index14
STAOPT command, 31289
STAT command, 31290
STEF command, 31293
STORE command, 31295
SUBOPT command, 31296
SUBSET command, 31297
SUCALC command, 31299
SUCR command, 31300
SUDEL command, 31301
SUEVAL command, 31302
SUGET command, 31302
SUMAP command, 31303
SUMTYPE command, 31304
SUPL command, 31304
SUPR command, 31305
SURESU command, 31305
SUSAVE command, 31306
SUSEL command, 31307
SUVECT command, 31307
SV command, 31308
SVTYP command, 31309
SWADD command, 31310
SWDEL command, 31310
SWGEN command, 31311
SWLIST command, 31312
SXCLR command, 31313
SXDISC command, 31313
SXEVAL, 31314
SXFREQ command, 31315
SXGEOM, 31316
SXIN command, 31317
SXMETH command, 31318
SXMP command, 31320
SXPOST command, 31322
SXREAL command, 31322
SXRFIL command, 31324
SXRSLT command, 31325
SXSEC, 31327
SXSL command, 31329
SXSTAT command, 31330
SXTEMP, 31330
SXVMOD command, 31331
T
TALLOW command, 31335
TB command, 31335
TBCOPY command, 31360
TBDATA command, 31361
TBDELE command, 31362
TBFIELD command, 31362
TBFT command, 31363
TBLE command, 31372
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index
TBLIST command, 31372
TBMODIF command, 31373
TBPLOT command, 31373
TBPT command, 31375
TBTEMP command, 31375
TCHG command, 31376
TEE command, 31377
TERM command, 31378
THOPT command, 31379
TIFF command, 31380
TIME command, 31381
TIMERANGE command, 31381
TIMINT command, 31382
TIMP command, 31383
TINTP command, 31384
TOCOMP command, 31387
TODEF command, 31387
TOEXE command, 31388
TOFFST command, 31388
TOFREQ command, 31389
TOGRAPH command, 31390
TOLIST command, 31391
TOLOOP command, 31391
TOPLOT command, 31392
TOPRINT command, 31392
TORQ2D command, 31393
TORQC2D command, 31393
TORQSUM command, 31394
TORUS command, 31394
TOSTAT command, 31396
TOTAL command, 31396
TOTYPE command, 31397
TOVAR command, 31398
TRANS command, 31399
TRANSFER command, 31400
TREF command, 31401
TRNOPT command, 31403
TRPDEL command, 31405
TRPLIS command, 31405
TRPOIN command, 31406
TRTIME command, 31406
TSHAP command, 31407
TSRES command, 31410
TUNIF command, 31411
TVAR command, 31412
TYPE command, 31417
TZAMESH command, 31418
TZDELE command, 31418
TZEGEN command, 31419
U
UIMP command, 31426
UNDELETE command, 31431
UNDO command, 31431
UPCOORD command, 31433
UPGEOM command, 31434
USRCAL command, 31436
V
V command, 31439
V2DOPT command, 31440
VA command, 31440
VADD command, 31441
VALVE command, 31441
VARDEL command, 31442
VARNAM command, 31443
VATT command, 31443
VCLEAR command, 31444
VCROSS command, 31445
VCVFILL command, 31446
VDDAM command, 31446
VDELE command, 31447
VDGL command, 31448
VDOT command, 31448
VDRAG command, 31449
VEORIENT command, 31450
VEXT command, 31451
VFCALC command, 31452
VFOPT command, 31452
VFQUERY command, 31453
VGEN command, 31454
VGET command, 31455
VGLUE command, 31456
VIMP command, 31457
VINP command, 31458
VINV command, 31459
VLIST command, 31459
VLSCALE command, 31460
VMESH command, 31461
VOFFST command, 31462
VOLUMES command, 31462
VOVLAP command, 31463
VPLOT command, 31463
VPTN command, 31464
VPUT command, 31464
VROTAT command, 31465
VSBA command, 31466
VSBV command, 31467
VSBW command, 31468
VSEL command, 31470
VSLA command, 31472
VSUM command, 31473
VSWEEP command, 31473
VSYMM command, 31475
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index15
Index
VTRAN command, 31476
VTYPE command, 31477
W
WAVES command, 31479
WERASE command, 31480
WFRONT command, 31480
WMID command, 31482
WMORE command, 31482
WPAVE command, 31483
WPCSYS command, 31483
WPLANE command, 31484
WPOFFS command, 31485
WPROTA command, 31485
WPSTYL command, 31486
WRFULL command, 31487
WRITE command, 31488
WSORT command, 31489
WSPRINGS command, 31490
WSTART command, 31490
X
XVAR command, 31495
XVAROPT command, 31496
Index16
ANSYS Commands Reference . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
You might also like
- The Complete Licensing Kit: Everything You Need to Turn Your Bright Ideas into Money-Making Licensing AgreementsFrom EverandThe Complete Licensing Kit: Everything You Need to Turn Your Bright Ideas into Money-Making Licensing AgreementsNo ratings yet
- Ansys Advanced Analysis Techniques GuideNo ratings yetAnsys Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide346 pages
- ANSYS Mechanical APDL Modeling and Meshing Guide PDF100% (1)ANSYS Mechanical APDL Modeling and Meshing Guide PDF242 pages
- ANSYS Inc. Known Issues and LimitationsNo ratings yetANSYS Inc. Known Issues and Limitations36 pages
- ANSYS Mechanical APDL Parallel Processing GuideNo ratings yetANSYS Mechanical APDL Parallel Processing Guide56 pages
- Reference - ANSYS MAPDL Command ReferenceNo ratings yetReference - ANSYS MAPDL Command Reference2,128 pages
- Programming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development BoardFrom EverandProgramming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development Board5/5 (1)
- FE Mechanical Exam Prep Complete Study Guide for the Fundamentals of Engineering with Practice Questions and Proven Strategies to Conquer the ExamFrom EverandFE Mechanical Exam Prep Complete Study Guide for the Fundamentals of Engineering with Practice Questions and Proven Strategies to Conquer the ExamNo ratings yet
- Electronics from the Ground Up: Learn by Hacking, Designing, and InventingFrom EverandElectronics from the Ground Up: Learn by Hacking, Designing, and Inventing3.5/5 (2)
- Programming Arduino Next Steps: Going Further with Sketches, Second EditionFrom EverandProgramming Arduino Next Steps: Going Further with Sketches, Second Edition3/5 (3)
- (Computational Fluid and Solid Mechanics) Miguel Luiz Bucalem, Klaus-Jürgen Bathe (auth.)-The Mechanics of Solids and Structures - Hierarchical Modeling and the Finite Element Solution-Springer-Verlag.pdf100% (2)(Computational Fluid and Solid Mechanics) Miguel Luiz Bucalem, Klaus-Jürgen Bathe (auth.)-The Mechanics of Solids and Structures - Hierarchical Modeling and the Finite Element Solution-Springer-Verlag.pdf612 pages
- (V. Rajaram) Computer Programming in Fortran 90 An (B-Ok - Xyz) PDF100% (1)(V. Rajaram) Computer Programming in Fortran 90 An (B-Ok - Xyz) PDF363 pages
